CFR 2019 Title49 Vol3

Title 49
Transportation
Parts 178 to 199
Revised as of October 1, 2019
Containing a codification of documents

of general applicability and future effect
As of October 1, 2019
Published by the Office of the Federal Register

National Archives and Records Administration
as a Special Edition of the Federal Register
rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR
VerDate Sep<11>2014 11:19 Feb 03, 2020 Jkt 247228 PO 00000 Frm 00001 Fmt 8091 Sfmt 8091 Y:\SGML\247228.XXX 247228
U.S. GOVERNMENT OFFICIAL EDITION NOTICE
Legal Status and Use of Seals and Logos

The seal of the National Archives and Records Administration
(NARA) authenticates the Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) as
the official codification of Federal regulations established under
the Federal Register Act. Under the provisions of 44 U.S.C. 1507, the
contents of the CFR, a special edition of the Federal Register, shall
be judicially noticed. The CFR is prima facie evidence of the origi-
nal documents published in the Federal Register (44 U.S.C. 1510).
It is prohibited to use NARA’s official seal and the stylized Code
of Federal Regulations logo on any republication of this material
without the express, written permission of the Archivist of the
United States or the Archivist’s designee. Any person using
NARA’s official seals and logos in a manner inconsistent with the
provisions of 36 CFR part 1200 is subject to the penalties specified
in 18 U.S.C. 506, 701, and 1017.
Use of ISBN Prefix

This is the Official U.S. Government edition of this publication
and is herein identified to certify its authenticity. Use of the 0–16
ISBN prefix is for U.S. Government Publishing Office Official Edi-
tions only. The Superintendent of Documents of the U.S. Govern-
ment Publishing Office requests that any reprinted edition clearly
be labeled as a copy of the authentic work with a new ISBN.
U.S. GOVERNMENT PUBLISHING OFFICE

e:\seals\archives.ai</GPH> e:\seals\gpologo2.eps</GPH>
U.S. Superintendent of Documents • Washington, DC 20402–0001

http://bookstore.gpo.gov
Phone: toll-free (866) 512-1800; DC area (202) 512-1800
Table of Contents
Page
Explanation ................................................................................................ v
Title 49:
SUBTITLE B—OTHER REGULATIONS RELATING TO TRANSPORTATION

(CONTINUED)
Chapter I—Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administra-

tion, Department of Transportation (Continued) ........................ 5
Finding Aids:
Table of CFR Titles and Chapters ....................................................... 703
Alphabetical List of Agencies Appearing in the CFR ......................... 723
List of CFR Sections Affected ............................................................. 733

iii
Cite this Code: CFR
To cite the regulations in

this volume use title,
part and section num-
ber. Thus, 49 CFR 178.1
refers to title 49, part
178, section 1.
iv
Explanation
The Code of Federal Regulations is a codification of the general and permanent
rules published in the Federal Register by the Executive departments and agen-
cies of the Federal Government. The Code is divided into 50 titles which represent
broad areas subject to Federal regulation. Each title is divided into chapters
which usually bear the name of the issuing agency. Each chapter is further sub-
divided into parts covering specific regulatory areas.
Each volume of the Code is revised at least once each calendar year and issued
on a quarterly basis approximately as follows:
Title 1 through Title 16..............................................................as of January 1
Title 17 through Title 27 .................................................................as of April 1
Title 28 through Title 41 ..................................................................as of July 1
Title 42 through Title 50 .............................................................as of October 1
The appropriate revision date is printed on the cover of each volume.
LEGAL STATUS
The contents of the Federal Register are required to be judicially noticed (44
U.S.C. 1507). The Code of Federal Regulations is prima facie evidence of the text
of the original documents (44 U.S.C. 1510).
HOW TO USE THE CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS
The Code of Federal Regulations is kept up to date by the individual issues
of the Federal Register. These two publications must be used together to deter-
mine the latest version of any given rule.
To determine whether a Code volume has been amended since its revision date
(in this case, October 1, 2019), consult the ‘‘List of CFR Sections Affected (LSA),’’
which is issued monthly, and the ‘‘Cumulative List of Parts Affected,’’ which
appears in the Reader Aids section of the daily Federal Register. These two lists
will identify the Federal Register page number of the latest amendment of any
given rule.
EFFECTIVE AND EXPIRATION DATES
Each volume of the Code contains amendments published in the Federal Reg-
ister since the last revision of that volume of the Code. Source citations for
the regulations are referred to by volume number and page number of the Federal
Register and date of publication. Publication dates and effective dates are usu-
ally not the same and care must be exercised by the user in determining the
actual effective date. In instances where the effective date is beyond the cut-
off date for the Code a note has been inserted to reflect the future effective
date. In those instances where a regulation published in the Federal Register
states a date certain for expiration, an appropriate note will be inserted following
the text.
OMB CONTROL NUMBERS
The Paperwork Reduction Act of 1980 (Pub. L. 96–511) requires Federal agencies
to display an OMB control number with their information collection request.
Many agencies have begun publishing numerous OMB control numbers as amend-
ments to existing regulations in the CFR. These OMB numbers are placed as
close as possible to the applicable recordkeeping or reporting requirements.
PAST PROVISIONS OF THE CODE
Provisions of the Code that are no longer in force and effect as of the revision
date stated on the cover of each volume are not carried. Code users may find
the text of provisions in effect on any given date in the past by using the appro-
priate List of CFR Sections Affected (LSA). For the convenience of the reader,
a ‘‘List of CFR Sections Affected’’ is published at the end of each CFR volume.
For changes to the Code prior to the LSA listings at the end of the volume,
consult previous annual editions of the LSA. For changes to the Code prior to
2001, consult the List of CFR Sections Affected compilations, published for 1949-
1963, 1964-1972, 1973-1985, and 1986-2000.
‘‘[RESERVED]’’ TERMINOLOGY
The term ‘‘[Reserved]’’ is used as a place holder within the Code of Federal
Regulations. An agency may add regulatory information at a ‘‘[Reserved]’’ loca-
tion at any time. Occasionally ‘‘[Reserved]’’ is used editorially to indicate that
a portion of the CFR was left vacant and not dropped in error.
INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE
What is incorporation by reference? Incorporation by reference was established
by statute and allows Federal agencies to meet the requirement to publish regu-
lations in the Federal Register by referring to materials already published else-
where. For an incorporation to be valid, the Director of the Federal Register
must approve it. The legal effect of incorporation by reference is that the mate-
rial is treated as if it were published in full in the Federal Register (5 U.S.C.
552(a)). This material, like any other properly issued regulation, has the force
of law.
What is a proper incorporation by reference? The Director of the Federal Register
will approve an incorporation by reference only when the requirements of 1 CFR
part 51 are met. Some of the elements on which approval is based are:
(a) The incorporation will substantially reduce the volume of material pub-
lished in the Federal Register.
(b) The matter incorporated is in fact available to the extent necessary to
afford fairness and uniformity in the administrative process.
(c) The incorporating document is drafted and submitted for publication in
accordance with 1 CFR part 51.
What if the material incorporated by reference cannot be found? If you have any
problem locating or obtaining a copy of material listed as an approved incorpora-
tion by reference, please contact the agency that issued the regulation containing
that incorporation. If, after contacting the agency, you find the material is not
available, please notify the Director of the Federal Register, National Archives
and Records Administration, 8601 Adelphi Road, College Park, MD 20740-6001, or
call 202-741-6010.
CFR INDEXES AND TABULAR GUIDES
A subject index to the Code of Federal Regulations is contained in a separate
volume, revised annually as of January 1, entitled CFR INDEX AND FINDING AIDS.
This volume contains the Parallel Table of Authorities and Rules. A list of CFR
titles, chapters, subchapters, and parts and an alphabetical list of agencies pub-
lishing in the CFR are also included in this volume.
An index to the text of ‘‘Title 3—The President’’ is carried within that volume.
vi
The Federal Register Index is issued monthly in cumulative form. This index
is based on a consolidation of the ‘‘Contents’’ entries in the daily Federal Reg-
ister.
A List of CFR Sections Affected (LSA) is published monthly, keyed to the
revision dates of the 50 CFR titles.
REPUBLICATION OF MATERIAL
There are no restrictions on the republication of material appearing in the
Code of Federal Regulations.
INQUIRIES
For a legal interpretation or explanation of any regulation in this volume,
contact the issuing agency. The issuing agency’s name appears at the top of
odd-numbered pages.
For inquiries concerning CFR reference assistance, call 202–741–6000 or write
to the Director, Office of the Federal Register, National Archives and Records
Administration, 8601 Adelphi Road, College Park, MD 20740-6001 or e-mail
fedreg.info@nara.gov.
SALES
The Government Publishing Office (GPO) processes all sales and distribution
of the CFR. For payment by credit card, call toll-free, 866-512-1800, or DC area,
202-512-1800, M-F 8 a.m. to 4 p.m. e.s.t. or fax your order to 202-512-2104, 24 hours
a day. For payment by check, write to: US Government Publishing Office – New
Orders, P.O. Box 979050, St. Louis, MO 63197-9000.
ELECTRONIC SERVICES
The full text of the Code of Federal Regulations, the LSA (List of CFR Sections
Affected), The United States Government Manual, the Federal Register, Public
Laws, Public Papers of the Presidents of the United States, Compilation of Presi-
dential Documents and the Privacy Act Compilation are available in electronic
format via www.govinfo.gov. For more information, contact the GPO Customer
Contact Center, U.S. Government Publishing Office. Phone 202-512-1800, or 866-
512-1800 (toll-free). E-mail, ContactCenter@gpo.gov.
The Office of the Federal Register also offers a free service on the National
Archives and Records Administration’s (NARA) website for public law numbers,
Federal Register finding aids, and related information. Connect to NARA’s
website at www.archives.gov/federal-register.
The e-CFR is a regularly updated, unofficial editorial compilation of CFR ma-
terial and Federal Register amendments, produced by the Office of the Federal
Register and the Government Publishing Office. It is available at www.ecfr.gov.
OLIVER A. POTTS,
Director,
Office of the Federal Register
October 1, 2019
vii
THIS TITLE
Title 49—TRANSPORTATION is composed of nine volumes. The parts in these vol-

umes are arranged in the following order: Parts 1–99, parts 100–177, parts 178–
199, parts 200–299, parts 300–399, parts 400–571, parts 572–999, parts 1000–1199, and
part 1200 to end. The first volume (parts 1–99) contains current regulations issued
under subtitle A—Office of the Secretary of Transportation; the second volume
(parts 100–177) and the third volume (parts 178–199) contain the current regula-
tions issued under chapter I—Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Adminis-
tration (DOT); the fourth volume (parts 200–299) contains the current regulations
issued under chapter II—Federal Railroad Administration (DOT); the fifth volume
(parts 300–399) contains the current regulations issued under chapter III—Federal
Motor Carrier Safety Administration (DOT); the sixth volume (parts 400–571) con-
tains the current regulations issued under chapter IV—Coast Guard (DHS), and
some of chapter V—National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (DOT); the
seventh volume (parts 572–999) contains the rest of the regulations issued under
chapter V—National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (DOT), and the cur-
rent regulations issued under chapter VI—Federal Transit Administration (DOT),
chapter VII—National Railroad Passenger Corporation (AMTRAK), and chapter
VIII—National Transportation Safety Board; the eighth volume (parts 1000–1199)
contains some of the current regulations issued under chapter X—Surface Trans-
portation Board and the ninth volume (part 1200 to end) contains the rest of
the current regulations issued under chapter X—Surface Transportation Board,
chapter XI—Research and Innovative Technology Administration (DOT), and
chapter XII—Transportation Security Administration (DHS). The contents of
these volumes represent all current regulations codified under this title of the
CFR as of October 1, 2019.
In the volume containing parts 100–177, see § 172.101 for the Hazardous Materials
Table. The Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards appear in part 571.
For this volume, Cheryl E. Sirofchuck was Chief Editor. The Code of Federal
Regulations publication program is under the direction of John Hyrum Martinez,
assisted by Stephen J. Frattini.
ix
Title 49—Transportation
(This book contains parts 178 to 199)
EDITORIAL NOTE: Other regulations issued by the Department of Transportation appear in

14 CFR chapters I and II, 23 CFR, 33 CFR chapters I and IV, 44 CFR chapter IV, 46 CFR chap-
ters I through III, 48 CFR chapter 12, and 49 CFR chapters I through VI.
SUBTITLE B—OTHER REGULATIONS RELATING TO TRANSPORTATION

(CONTINUED)
Part
CHAPTER I—Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Ad-

ministration, Department of Transportation, DOT ........... 178
Subtitle B—Other Regulations
Relating to Transportation
(Continued)
CHAPTER I—PIPELINE AND HAZARDOUS
MATERIALS SAFETY ADMINISTRATION,
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
(CONTINUED)
SUBCHAPTER C—HAZARDOUS MATERIALS REGULATIONS (CONTINUED)
Part Page
178 Specifications for packagings ................................. 7
179 Specifications for tank cars .................................... 258
180 Continuing qualification and maintenance of pack-
agings ................................................................... 320
181–185 [Reserved]
SUBCHAPTER D—PIPELINE SAFETY
186–189 [Reserved]
190 Pipeline safety enforcement and regulatory proce-
dures ..................................................................... 383
191 Transportation of natural and other gas by pipe-
line; annual reports, incident reports, and safety-
related condition reports ..................................... 415
192 Transportation of natural and other gas by pipe-
line: Minimum Federal safety standards ............. 423
193 Liquefied natural gas facilities: Federal safety
standards .............................................................. 567
194 Response plans for onshore oil pipelines ................. 587
195 Transportation of hazardous liquids by pipeline ..... 597
196 Protection of underground pipelines from exca-
vation activity ..................................................... 677
197 [Reserved]
198 Regulations for grants to aid State pipeline safety
programs .............................................................. 679
199 Drug and alcohol testing ......................................... 684
SUBCHAPTER C—HAZARDOUS MATERIALS REGULATIONS
(CONTINUED)
PART 178—SPECIFICATIONS FOR 178.36 Specification 3A and 3AX seamless

steel cylinders.
PACKAGINGS 178.37 Specification 3AA and 3AAX seamless
steel cylinders.
Sec. 178.38 Specification 3B seamless steel cyl-
178.1 Purpose and scope. inders.
178.2 Applicability and responsibility. 178.39 Specification 3BN seamless nickel
178.3 Marking of packagings. cylinders.
178.42 Specification 3E seamless steel cyl-
Subpart A [Reserved] inders.
178.44 Specification 3HT seamless steel cyl-
Subpart B—Specifications for Inside inders for aircraft use.
Containers, and Linings 178.45 Specification 3T seamless steel cyl-
inders.
178.33 Specification 2P; inner nonrefillable 178.46 Specification 3AL seamless alu-
metal receptacles. minum cylinders.
178.33–1 Compliance. 178.47 Specification 4DS welded stainless
178.33–2 Type and size. steel cylinders for aircraft use.
178.33–3 Inspection. 178.50 Specification 4B welded or brazed
178.33–4 Duties of inspector. steel cylinders.
178.33–5 Material. 178.51 Specification 4BA welded or brazed
178.33–6 Manufacture. steel cylinders.
178.33–7 Wall thickness. 178.53 Specification 4D welded steel cyl-
178.33–8 Tests. inders for aircraft use.
178.55 Specification 4B240ET welded or
178.33–9 Marking.
brazed cylinders.
178.33a Specification 2Q; inner nonrefillable
178.56 Specification 4AA480 welded steel cyl-
metal receptacles.
inders.
178.33a–1 Compliance.
178.57 Specification 4L welded insulated cyl-
178.33a–2 Type and size. inders.
178.33a–3 Inspection. 178.58 Specification 4DA welded steel cyl-
178.33a–4 Duties of inspector. inders for aircraft use.
178.33a–5 Material. 178.59 Specification 8 steel cylinders with
178.33a–6 Manufacture. porous fillings for acetylene.
178.33a–7 Wall thickness. 178.60 Specification 8AL steel cylinders
178.33a–8 Tests. with porous fillings for acetylene.
178.33a–9 Marking. 178.61 Specification 4BW welded steel cyl-
178.33b Specification 2S; inner nonrefillable inders with electric-arc welded longitu-
plastic receptacles dinal seam.
178.33b–1 Compliance. 178.65 Specification 39 non-reusable (non-re-
178.33b–2 Type and size. fillable) cylinders.
178.33b–3 Inspection. 178.68 Specification 4E welded aluminum
178.33b–4 Duties of inspector. cylinders.
178.33b–5 Material. 178.69 Responsibilities and requirements for
178.33b–6 Manufacture. manufacturers of UN pressure recep-
178.33b–7 Design qualification test. tacles.
178.33b–8 Production tests. 178.70 Approval of UN pressure receptacles.
178.33b–9 Marking. 178.71 Specifications for UN pressure recep-
178.33c Specification 2P; inner nonrefillable tacles.
metal receptacle variation. 178.74 Approval of MEGCs.
178.33c–1 Compliance. 178.75 Specifications for MEGCs.
178.33c–2 Variation. APPENDIX A TO SUBPART C OF PART 178—IL-
178.33d Specification 2Q; inner nonrefillable LUSTRATIONS: CYLINDER TENSILE SAMPLE
metal receptacle variations.
178.33d–1 Compliance. Subparts D–G [Reserved]
178.33d–2 Variation 1.
178.33d–3 Variation 2. Subpart H—Specifications for Portable
Tanks
Subpart C—Specifications for Cylinders

178.251—178.253–5 [Reserved]
178.35 General requirements for specifica- 178.255 Specification 60; steel portable
tion cylinders. tanks.
Pt. 178 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
178.255–1 General requirements. 178.337–17 Marking.
178.255–2 Material. 178.337–18 Certification.
178.255–3 Expansion domes. 178.338 Specification MC–338; insulated
178.255–4 Closures for manholes and domes. cargo tank motor vehicle.
178.255–5 Bottom discharge outlets. 178.338–1 General requirements.
178.255–6 Loading and unloading accessories. 178.338–2 Material.
178.255–7 Protection of valves and acces- 178.338–3 Structural integrity.
sories. 178.338–4 Joints.
178.255–8 Safety devices. 178.338–5 Stiffening rings.
178.255–9 Compartments. 178.338–6 Manholes.
178.255–10 Lining. 178.338–7 Openings.
178.255–11 Tank mountings. 178.338–8 Pressure relief devices, piping,
178.255–12 Pressure test. valves, and fittings.
178.255–13 Repair of tanks. 178.338–9 Holding time.
178.255–14 Marking. 178.338–10 Accident damage protection.
178.255–15 Report. 178.338–11 Discharge control devices.
178.273 Approval of Specification UN port- 178.338–12 Shear section.
able tanks. 178.338–13 Supporting and anchoring.
178.274 Specification for UN portable tanks. 178.338–14 Gauging devices.
178.275 Specification for UN Portable Tanks 178.338–15 Cleanliness.
intended for the transportation of liquid 178.338–16 Inspection and testing.
and solid hazardous materials. 178.338–17 Pumps and compressors.
178.276 Requirements for the design, con- 178.338–18 Marking.
struction, inspection and testing of port- 178.338–19 Certification.
able tanks intended for the transpor- 178.340–178.343 [Reserved]
tation of non-refrigerated liquefied com- 178.345 General design and construction re-
pressed gases. quirements applicable to Specification
178.277 Requirements for the design, con- DOT 406 (§ 178.346), DOT 407 (§ 178.347), and
struction, inspection and testing of port- DOT 412 (§ 178.348) cargo tank motor vehi-
able tanks intended for the transpor- cles.
tation of refrigerated liquefied gases. 178.345–1 General requirements.
178.345–2 Material and material thickness.
Subpart I [Reserved] 178.345–3 Structural integrity.
178.345–4 Joints.
Subpart J—Specifications for Containers for 178.345–5 Manhole assemblies.
Motor Vehicle Transportation 178.345–6 Supports and anchoring.
178.345–7 Circumferential reinforcements.
178.318 Specification MC 201; container for 178.345–8 Accident damage protection.
detonators and percussion caps. 178.345–9 Pumps, piping, hoses and connec-
178.318–1 Scope. tions.
178.318–2 Container. 178.345–10 Pressure relief.
178.318–3 Marking. 178.345–11 Tank outlets.
178.320 General requirements applicable to 178.345–12 Gauging devices.
all DOT specification cargo tank motor 178.345–13 Pressure and leakage tests.
vehicles. 178.345–14 Marking.
178.337 Specification MC 331; cargo tank 178.345–15 Certification.
motor vehicle primarily for transpor- 178.346 Specification DOT 406; cargo tank
tation of compressed gases as defined in motor vehicle.
subpart G of part 173 of this subchapter. 178.346–1 General requirements.
178.337–1 General requirements. 178.346–2 Material and thickness of mate-
178.337–2 Material. rial.
178.337–3 Structural integrity. 178.346–3 Pressure relief.
178.337–4 Joints. 178.346–4 Outlets.
178.337–5 Bulkheads, baffles and ring stiff- 178.346–5 Pressure and leakage tests.
eners. 178.347 Specification DOT 407; cargo tank
178.337–6 Closure for manhole. motor vehicle.
178.337–7 Overturn protection. 178.347–1 General requirements.
178.337–8 Openings, inlets and outlets. 178.347–2 Material and thickness of mate-
178.337–9 Pressure relief devices, piping, rial.
valves, hoses, and fittings. 178.347–3 Manhole assemblies.
178.337–10 Accident damage protection. 178.347–4 Pressure relief.
178.337–11 Emergency discharge control. 178.347–5 Pressure and leakage test.
178.337–12 [Reserved] 178.348 Specification DOT 412; cargo tank
178.337–13 Supporting and anchoring. motor vehicle.
178.337–14 Gauging devices. 178.348–1 General requirements.

178.337–15 Pumps and compressors. 178.348–2 Material and thickness of mate-
178.337–16 Testing. rial.
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT Pt. 178
178.348–3 Pumps, piping, hoses and connec- 178.702 IBC codes.
tions. 178.703 Marking of IBCs.
178.348–4 Pressure relief. 178.704 General IBC standards.
178.348–5 Pressure and leakage test. 178.705 Standards for metal IBCs.
178.706 Standards for rigid plastic IBCs.
Subpart K—Specifications for Packagings 178.707 Standards for composite IBCs.
for Class 7 (Radioactive) Materials 178.708 Standards for fiberboard IBCs.
178.709 Standards for wooden IBCs.
178.350 Specification 7A; general packaging, 178.710 Standards for flexible intermediate
Type A. bulk containers.
Subpart L—Non-bulk Performance- Subpart O—Testing of IBCs
Oriented Packaging Standards
178.800 Purpose and scope.
178.500 Purpose, scope and definitions. 178.801 General requirements.
178.502 Identification codes for packagings. 178.802 Preparation of fiberboard IBCs for
178.503 Marking of packagings. testing.
178.504 Standards for steel drums. 178.803 Testing and certification of IBCs.
178.505 Standards for aluminum drums. 178.810 Drop test.
178.506 Standards for metal drums other 178.811 Bottom lift test.
than steel or aluminum. 178.812 Top lift test.
178.507 Standards for plywood drums. 178.813 Leakproofness test.
178.508 Standards for fiber drums. 178.814 Hydrostatic pressure test.
178.509 Standards for plastic drums and 178.815 Stacking test.
jerricans. 178.816 Topple test.
178.510 Standards for wooden barrels. 178.817 Righting test.
178.511 Standards for aluminum and steel 178.818 Tear test.
jerricans. 178.819 Vibration test.
178.512 Standards for steel, aluminum or
other metal boxes. Subpart P—Large Packagings Standards
178.513 Standards for boxes of natural wood.
178.514 Standards for plywood boxes. 178.900 Purpose and scope.
178.515 Standards for reconstituted wood 178.905 Large Packaging identification
boxes. codes.
178.516 Standards for fiberboard boxes. 178.910 Marking of Large Packagings.
178.517 Standards for plastic boxes. 178.915 General Large Packaging standards.
178.518 Standards for woven plastic bags. 178.920 Standards for metal Large Pack-
178.519 Standards for plastic film bags. agings.
178.520 Standards for textile bags. 178.925 Standards for rigid plastic Large
178.521 Standards for paper bags. Packagings.
178.522 Standards for composite packagings 178.930 Standards for fiberboard Large
with inner plastic receptacles. Packagings.
178.523 Standards for composite packagings 178.935 Standards for wooden Large Pack-
with inner glass, porcelain, or stoneware agings.
receptacles. 178.940 Standards for flexible Large Pack-
agings.
Subpart M—Testing of Non-bulk
Packagings and Packages Subpart Q—Testing of Large Packagings
178.600 Purpose and scope. 178.950 Purpose and scope.
178.601 General requirements. 178.955 General requirements.
178.602 Preparation of packagings and pack- 178.960 Preparation of Large Packagings for
ages for testing. testing.
178.603 Drop test. 178.965 Drop test.
178.604 Leakproofness test. 178.970 Bottom lift test.
178.605 Hydrostatic pressure test. 178.975 Top lift test.
178.606 Stacking test. 178.980 Stacking test.
178.607 Cooperage test for bung-type wooden 178.985 Vibration test.
barrels.
178.608 Vibration standard. Subpart R—Flexible Bulk Container
178.609 Test requirements for packagings for Standards
infectious substances.
Subpart N—IBC Performance-Oriented 178.1005 Flexible Bulk Container identifica-
Standards tion code.

178.1010 Marking of Flexible Bulk Con-
178.700 Purpose, scope and definitions. tainers.
§ 178.1 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
178.1015 General Flexible Bulk Container However, any person who performs a
standards. function prescribed in this part shall
178.1020 Period of use for transportation of
perform that function in accordance
hazardous materials in Flexible Bulk
Containers. with this part.
(b) Specification markings. When this
Subpart S—Testing of Flexible Bulk part requires that a packaging be
Containers marked with a DOT specification or UN
standard marking, marking of the
178.1035 General requirements. packaging with the appropriate DOT or
178.1040 Preparation of Flexible Bulk Con- UN markings is the certification that—
tainers for testing. (1) Except as otherwise provided in
178.1045 Drop test. this section, all requirements of the
178.1050 Top lift test.
DOT specification or UN standard, in-
178.1055 Stacking test.
178.1060 Topple test. cluding performance tests, are met;
178.1065 Righting test. and
178.1070 Tear test. (2) All functions performed by, or on
APPENDIX A TO PART 178—SPECIFICATIONS FOR behalf of, the person whose name or
STEEL symbol appears as part of the marking
APPENDIX B TO PART 178—ALTERNATIVE conform to requirements specified in
LEAKPROOFNESS TEST METHODS
APPENDIX C TO PART 178—NOMINAL AND MIN-
this part.
IMUM THICKNESSES OF STEEL DRUMS AND (c) Notification. (1) Except as specifi-
JERRICANS cally provided in §§ 178.337–18, 178.338–19,
APPENDIX D TO PART 178—THERMAL RESIST- and 178.345–15 of this part, the manufac-
ANCE TEST turer or other person certifying com-
APPENDIX E TO PART 178—FLAME PENETRA- pliance with the requirements of this
TION RESISTANCE TEST
part, and each subsequent distributor
AUTHORITY: 49 U.S.C. 5101–5128; 49 CFR 1.81 of that packaging must:
and 1.97.
(i) Notify each person to whom that
§ 178.1 Purpose and scope. packaging is transferred—
(A) Of all requirements in this part
This part prescribes the manufac-
not met at the time of transfer, and
turing and testing specifications for
packaging and containers used for the (B) With information specifying the
transportation of hazardous materials type(s) and dimensions of the closures,
in commerce. including gaskets and any other com-
ponents needed to ensure that the
[Amdt. 178–40, 42 FR 2689, Jan. 13, 1977. Redes- packaging is capable of successfully
ignated by Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52715, Dec. 21, passing the applicable performance
1990]
tests. This information must include
§ 178.2 Applicability and responsi- any procedures to be followed, includ-
bility. ing closure instructions for inner pack-
(a) Applicability. (1) The requirements agings and receptacles, to effectively
of this part apply to packagings manu- assemble and close the packaging for
factured— the purpose of preventing leakage in
(i) To a DOT specification, regardless transportation. Closure instructions
of country of manufacture; or must provide for a consistent and re-
(ii) To a UN standard, for packagings peatable means of closure that is suffi-
manufactured within the United cient to ensure the packaging is closed
States. For UN standard packagings in the same manner as it was tested.
manufactured outside the United For packagings sold or represented as
States, see § 173.24(d)(2) of this sub- being in conformance with the require-
chapter. For UN standard packagings ments of this subchapter applicable to
for which standards are not prescribed transportation by aircraft, this infor-
in this part, see § 178.3(b). mation must include relevant guidance
(2) A manufacturer of a packaging to ensure that the packaging, as pre-
subject to the requirements of this part pared for transportation, will with-
is primarily responsible for compliance stand the pressure differential require-
with the requirements of this part. ments in § 173.27 of this subchapter.
10
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.3
(ii) Retain copies of each written no- or a UN standard must be marked on a

tification for at least one year from non-removable component of the pack-
date of issuance; and aging with specification markings con-
(iii) Make copies of all written notifi- forming to the applicable specification,
cations available for inspection by a and with the following:
representative of the Department. (1) In an unobstructed area, with let-
(2) The notification required in acters, and numerals identifying the
cordance with this paragraph (c) may standards or specification (e.g. UN 1A1,
be in writing or by electronic means, DOT 4B240ET, etc.).
including e-mailed transmission or (2) Unless otherwise specified in this
transmission on a CD or similar device. part, the name and address or symbol
If a manufacturer or subsequent dis- of the packaging manufacturer or the
tributor of the packaging utilizes elec- person certifying compliance with a
tronic means to make the required no- UN standard. Symbols, if used, must be
tifications, the notification must be registered with the Associate Adminis-
specific to the packaging in question trator. Unless authorized in writing by
and must be in a form that can be the holder of the symbol, symbols must
printed in hard copy by the person re- represent either the packaging manu-
ceiving the notification. facturer or the approval agency respon-
(d) Except as provided in paragraph sible for providing the most recent cer-
(c) of this section, a packaging not con- tification for the packaging through
forming to the applicable specifica- design certification testing or periodic
tions or standards in this part may not retesting, as applicable. Duplicative
be marked to indicate such conform- symbols are not authorized.
ance.
(3) The markings must be stamped,
(e) Definitions. For the purpose of this
embossed, burned, printed or otherwise
part—
marked on the packaging to provide
Manufacturer means the person whose
adequate accessibility, permanency,
name and address or symbol appears as
contrast, and legibility so as to be
part of the specification markings re-
readily apparent and understood.
quired by this part or, for a packaging
marked with the symbol of an approval (4) Unless otherwise specified, letters
agency, the person on whose behalf the and numerals must be at least 12.0 mm
approval agency certifies the pack- (0.47 inches) in height except that for
aging. packagings of less than or equal to 30 L
Specification markings mean the pack- (7.9 gallons) capacity for liquids or 30
aging identification markings required kg (66 pounds) capacity for solids the
by this part including, where applica- height must be at least 6.0 mm (0.2
ble, the name and address or symbol of inches). For packagings having a ca-
the packaging manufacturer or ap- pacity of 5 L (1 gallon) or 5 kg (11
proval agency. pounds) or less, letters and numerals
(f) No packaging may be manufac- must be of an appropriate size.
tured or marked to a packaging speci- (5) For packages with a gross mass of
fication that was in effect on Sep- more than 30 kg (66 pounds), the mark-
tember 30, 1991, and that was removed ings or a duplicate thereof must appear
from this part 178 by a rule published on the top or on a side of the pack-
in the FEDERAL REGISTER on December aging.
21, 1990 and effective October 1, 1991. (b) A UN standard packaging for
which the UN standard is set forth in
[Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52715, Dec. 21, 1990; 56 FR
66284, Dec. 20, 1991, as amended by Amdt. 178–
this part may be marked with the
106, 59 FR 67519, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 178–117, United Nations symbol and other speci-
62 FR 14338, Mar. 26, 1997; 68 FR 45041, July fication markings only if it fully con-
31, 2003; 69 FR 34612, June 22, 2004; 75 FR 5395, forms to the requirements of this part.
Feb. 2, 2010; 75 FR 60339, Sept. 30, 2010; 78 FR A UN standard packaging for which the
1118, Jan. 7, 2013; 78 FR 15328, Mar. 11, 2013] UN standard is not set forth in this
part may be marked with the United
§ 178.3 Marking of packagings. Nations symbol and other specification

(a) Each packaging represented as markings for that standard as provided
manufactured to a DOT specification in the ICAO Technical Instructions or
11
§ 178.33 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
the IMDG Code subject to the following § 178.33 Specification 2P; inner non-
conditions: refillable metal receptacles.
(1) The U.S. manufacturer must es-
tablish that the packaging conforms to § 178.33–1 Compliance.
the applicable provisions of the ICAO (a) Required in all details.
Technical Instructions (IBR, see § 171.7 (b) [Reserved]
of this subchapter) or the IMDG Code
(IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter), re- § 178.33–2 Type and size.
spectively. (a) Single-trip inside containers.
(2) If an indication of the name of the Must be seamless, or with seams, weld-
manufacturer or other identification of ed, soldered, brazed, double seamed, or
the packaging as specified by the com- swedged.
petent authority is required, the name (b) The maximum capacity of con-
and address or symbol of the manufac- tainers in this class shall not exceed
turer or the approval agency certifying one liter (61.0 cubic inches). The max-
compliance with the UN standard must imum inside diameter shall not exceed
be entered. Symbols, if used, must be 3 inches.
registered with the Associate Adminis- [29 FR 18813, Dec. 29, 1964, as amended by
trator. Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesig-
(3) The letters ‘‘USA’’ must be used nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended
to indicate the State authorizing the by Amdt. 178–101, 58 FR 50237, Sept. 24, 1993;
allocation of the specification marks if 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001]
the packaging is manufactured in the
§ 178.33–3 Inspection.
United States.
(c) Where a packaging conforms to (a) By competent inspector.
more than one UN standard or DOT (b) [Reserved]
specification, the packaging may bear § 178.33–4 Duties of inspector.
more than one marking, provided the
packaging meets all the requirements (a) To inspect material and com-
of each standard or specification. pleted containers and witness tests,
Where more than one marking appears and to reject defective materials or
on a packaging, each marking must ap- containers.
pear in its entirety. (b) [Reserved]
(d) No person may mark or otherwise § 178.33–5 Material.
certify a packaging or container as
meeting the requirements of a manu- (a) Uniform quality steel plate such
facturing special permit unless that as black plate, electro-tin plate, hot
person is the holder of or a party to dipped tin plate, tern plate or other
that special permit, an agent of the commercially accepted can making
holder or party for the purpose of plate; or nonferrous metal of uniform
marking or certification, or a third drawing quality.
party tester. (b) Material with seams, cracks, lam-
inations or other injurious defects not
[Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52716, Dec. 21, 1990; 56 FR authorized.
66284, Dec. 20, 1991, as amended by Amdt. 178–
106, 59 FR 67519, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 178–113, § 178.33–6 Manufacture.
61 FR 21102, May 9, 1996; 65 FR 50462, Aug. 18,
2000; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 61015,
(a) By appliances and methods that
Sept. 27, 2002; 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, 2003; 70 FR will assure uniformity of completed
73166, Dec. 9, 2005; 78 FR 14714, Mar. 7, 2013] containers; dirt and scale to be re-
moved as necessary; no defect accept-
able that is likely to weaken the fin-
Subpart A [Reserved] ished container appreciably; reason-
ably smooth and uniform surface finish
Subpart B—Specifications for required.
Inside Containers, and Linings (b) Seams when used must be as fol-
lows:
SOURCE: 29 FR 18823, Dec. 29, 1964, unless (1) Circumferential seams: By weld-
otherwise noted. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, ing, swedging, brazing, soldering, or
Apr. 5, 1967. double seaming.
12
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.33a–6
(2) Side seams: By welding, brazing, § 178.33a Specification 2Q; inner non-
or soldering. refillable metal receptacles.
(c) Ends: The ends shall be of pres-
sure design. § 178.33a–1 Compliance.
[29 FR 18823, Dec. 29, 1964, as amended by (a) Required in all details.
Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesig- (b) [Reserved]
nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]
[Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesig-
nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]
§ 178.33–7 Wall thickness.
(a) The minimum wall thickness for § 178.33a–2 Type and size.
any container shall be 0.007 inch. (a) Single-trip inside containers.
(b) [Reserved] Must be seamless, or with seams weld-
[Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesig- ed, soldered, brazed, double seamed, or
nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967] swedged.
(b) The maximum capacity of con-
§ 178.33–8 Tests. tainers in this class shall not exceed 1
(a) One out of each lot of 25,000 con- L (61.0 cubic inches). The maximum in-
tainers or less, successively produced side diameter shall not exceed 3 inches.
per day shall be pressure tested to de- [Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesig-
struction and must not burst below 240 nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended
psig gauge pressure. The container by Amdt. 178–43, 42 FR 42208, Aug. 22, 1977;
tested shall be complete with end as- Amdt. 178–101, 58 FR 50237, Sept. 24, 1993; 66
sembled. FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001]
(b) Each such 25,000 containers or
§ 178.33a–3 Inspection.
less, successively produced per day,
shall constitute a lot and if the test (a) By competent inspector.
container shall fail, the lot shall be re- (b) [Reserved]
jected or ten additional containers may
be selected at random and subjected to nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]
the test under which failure occurred.
These containers shall be complete § 178.33a–4 Duties of inspector.
with ends assembled. Should any of the
ten containers thus tested fail, the en- (a) To inspect material and com-
tire lot must be rejected. All con- pleted containers and witness tests,
tainers constituting a lot shall be of and to reject defective materials or
like material, size, design construc- containers.
tion, finish, and quality. (b) [Reserved]
[Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesig- [Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesig-
nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, as amended nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]
by 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001]
§ 178.33a–5 Material.
§ 178.33–9 Marking. (a) Uniform quality steel plate such
(a) By means of printing, as black plate, electrotin plate, hot
lithographing, embossing, or stamping, dipped tinplate, ternplate or other
each container must be marked to commercially accepted can making
show: plate; or nonferrous metal of uniform
(1) DOT-2P. drawing quality.
(2) Name or symbol of person making (b) Material with seams, cracks, lam-
the mark specified in paragraph (a)(1) inations or other injurious defects not
of this section. Symbol, if used, must authorized.
be registered with the Associate Ad- [Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesig-
ministrator. nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]
(b) [Reserved]
§ 178.33a–6 Manufacture.
[Amdt. 178–40, 41 FR 38181, Sept. 9, 1976, as
amended by Amdt. 178–97, 56 FR 66287, Dec. (a) By appliances and methods that
20, 1991; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001] will assure uniformity of completed
13
§ 178.33a–7 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
containers; dirt and scale to be re- (2) Name or symbol of person making
moved as necessary; no defect accept- the mark specified in paragraph (a)(1)
able that is likely to weaken the fin- of this section. Symbol, if used, must
ished container appreciably; reason- be registered with the Associate Ad-
ably smooth and uniform surface finish ministrator.
required. (b) [Reserved]
(b) Seams when used must be as fol- [Amdt. 178–40, 41 FR 38181, Sept. 9, 1976, as
lows: amended by Amdt. 178–97, 56 FR 66287, Dec.
(1) Circumferential seams. By weld- 20, 1991; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001]
ing, swedging, brazing, soldering, or
double seaming. § 178.33b Specification 2S; inner non-
(2) Side seams. By welding, brazing or refillable plastic receptacles.
soldering. § 178.33b–1 Compliance.
(c) Ends. The ends shall be of pres-
sure design. (a) Required in all details.
(b) [Reserved]
[74 FR 2268, Jan. 14, 2009]
nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]
§ 178.33b–2 Type and size.
§ 178.33a–7 Wall thickness.
(a) Single-trip inside containers.
(a) The minimum wall thickness for (b) The maximum capacity of con-
any container shall be 0.008 inch. tainers in this class shall not exceed
(b) [Reserved] one liter (61.0 cubic inches). The max-
[Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesig- imum inside diameter shall not exceed
nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967] 3 inches.
[74 FR 2268, Jan. 14, 2009]
§ 178.33a–8 Tests.
(a) One out of each lot of 25,000 con- § 178.33b–3 Inspection.
tainers or less, successively produced (a) By competent inspector.
per day, shall be pressure tested to de- (b) [Reserved]
struction and must not burst below 270
psig gauge pressure. The container [74 FR 2268, Jan. 14, 2009]
tested shall be complete with end as- § 178.33b–4 Duties of inspector.
sembled.
(b) Each such 25,000 containers or (a) To inspect material and com-
less, successively produced per day, pleted containers and witness tests,
shall constitute a lot and if the test and to reject defective materials or
container shall fail, the lot shall be re- containers.
jected or ten additional containers may (b) [Reserved]
be selected at random and subjected to [74 FR 2268, Jan. 14, 2009]
the test under which failure occurred.
These containers shall be complete § 178.33b–5 Material.
with ends assembled. Should any of the (a) The receptacles must be con-
ten containers thus tested fail, the en- structed of polyethylene terephthalate
tire lot must be rejected. All con- (PET), polyethylene napthalate (PEN),
tainers constituting a lot shall be of polyamide (Nylon) or a blend of PET,
like material, size, design, construc- PEN, ethyl vinyl alcohol (EVOH) and/
tion, finish and quality. or Nylon.
(b) Material with seams, cracks, lam-
nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, as amended inations or other injurious defects are
by 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001] forbidden.
[74 FR 2268, Jan. 14, 2009]
§ 178.33a–9 Marking.
(a) By means of printing, § 178.33b–6 Manufacture.
lithographing, embossing, or stamping, (a) Each container must be manufac-
each container must be marked to tured by thermoplastic processes that

show: will assure uniformity of the com-
(1) DOT-2Q. pleted container. No used material
14
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.33c–2
other than production residues or containers constituting a lot shall be

regrind from the same manufacturing of like material, size, design construc-
process may be used. The packaging tion, finish, and quality.
must be adequately resistant to aging (b) [Reserved]
and to degradation caused either by
[74 FR 2268, Jan. 14, 2009, as amended at 75
the substance contained or by ultra-
FR 74, Jan. 4, 2010]
violet radiation.
(b) [Reserved] § 178.33b–9 Marking.
[74 FR 2268, Jan. 14, 2009] (a) Each container must be clearly
and permanently marked to show:
§ 178.33b–7 Design qualification test.
(1) DOT–2S.
(a) Drop testing. (1) To ensure that (2) Name or symbol of person making
creep does not affect the ability of the the mark specified in paragraph (a)(1)
container to retain the contents, each of this section. Symbol, if used, must
new design must be drop tested as fol- be registered with the Associate Ad-
lows: Three groups of twenty-five filled ministrator.
containers must be dropped from 1.8 m (b) [Reserved]
(5.9 ft) on to a rigid, non-resilient, flat
and horizontal surface. One group must [74 FR 2268, Jan. 14, 2009]
be conditioned at 38 °C (100 °F) for 26
weeks, the second group for 100 hours § 178.33c Specification 2P; inner non-
refillable metal receptacle vari-
at 50 °C (122 °F) and the third group for ation.
18 hours at 55 °C (131 °F), prior to per-
forming the drop test. The closure, or § 178.33c–1 Compliance.
sealing component of the container,
must not be protected during the test. Required in all details.
The orientation of the test container [81 FR 3685, Jan. 21, 2016]
at drop must be statistically random,
but direct impact on the valve or valve § 178.33c–2 Variation.
closure must be avoided. Notwithstanding the variation pro-
(2) Criteria for passing the drop test: vided in this section, each container
The containers must not break or leak. must otherwise conform to a DOT 2P
(b) Design qualification testing must container in accordance with § 178.33.
be completed if the design is manufac- The following conditions also apply
tured with a new mold or if there is under Variation 1—
any change in the properties of the ma-
(a) Manufacture. Side seams: not per-
terial of construction.
mitted. Ends: The ends shall be de-
[75 FR 73, Jan. 4, 2010] signed to withstand pressure and be
equipped with a pressure relief system
§ 178.33b–8 Production tests. (e.g., rim-venting release or a dome ex-
(a) Burst Testing. (1) One out of each pansion device) designed to function
lot of 5,000 containers or less, succes- prior to bursting of the container.
sively produced per day must be pres- (b) Tests. (1) One out of each lot of
sure tested to destruction and must not 25,000 containers or less, successively
burst below 240 psig. The container produced per day complete with ends
tested must be complete as intended assembled (and without a pressure re-
for transportation. lief system assembled) shall be pres-
(2) Each such 5,000 containers or less, sure tested to destruction at gauge
successively produced per day, shall pressure and must not burst below 240
constitute a lot and if the test con- psig. For containers with a pressure re-
tainer shall fail, the lot shall be relief system as described in paragraph
jected or ten additional containers may (a) of this section and assembled, fail-
be selected at random and subjected to ure at a location other than the pres-
the test under which failure occurred. sure relief system will reject the lot.
These containers shall be complete as For containers with an end expansion
intended for transportation. Should device, the lot must be rejected if the
any of the ten containers thus tested container bursts prior to buckling of
fail, the entire lot must be rejected. All the device.
15
§ 178.33d 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(2) Each such 25,000 containers or shall be pressure tested to destruction

less, successively produced per day, at gauge pressure. The container with-
shall constitute a lot and if the test out a pressure relief system must not
container(s) shall fail, the lot shall be burst below 320 psig. The container as-
rejected. Otherwise, ten (10) additional sembled with a pressure relief system
containers of each container design as described in paragraph (b) of this
produced may be selected at random section must be tested to destruction.
and subjected to the test. These con- The bottom of the container must
tainers shall be complete with ends as- buckle at a pressure greater than the
sembled. Should any of the containers pressure at which the top buckles and
thus tested fail, the entire lot must be vents.
rejected. All containers constituting a (2) Each such 25,000 containers or
lot shall be of like material, size, de- less, successively produced per day,
sign construction, finish, and quality. shall constitute a lot and if the test
(c) Marking. By means of printing, container(s) shall fail, the lot shall be
lithographing, embossing, or stamping, rejected. Otherwise, ten (10) additional
each container must be marked: pairs of containers may be selected at
(1) DOT–2P1. random and subjected to the test under
(2) With the name or symbol of the which failure occurred. Should any of
person making the mark. A symbol, if the containers thus tested fail, the en-
used, must be registered with the Asso- tire lot must be rejected. All con-
ciate Administrator. tainers constituting a lot shall be of
[81 FR 3685, Jan. 21, 2016] like material, size, design construc-
tion, finish, and quality.
§ 178.33d Specification 2Q; inner non- (e) Marking. By means of printing,
refillable metal receptacle vari- lithographing, embossing, or stamping,
ations.
each container must be marked:
§ 178.33d–1 Compliance. (1) DOT–2Q1.
(2) With the name or symbol of the
Required in all details.
person making the mark. A symbol, if
[81 FR 3685, Jan. 21, 2016] used, must be registered with the Asso-
ciate Administrator.
§ 178.33d–2 Variation 1.
[81 FR 3685, Jan. 21, 2016]
Notwithstanding the variation pro-
vided in this paragraph, each container § 178.33d–3 Variation 2.
must otherwise conform to a DOT 2Q
container in accordance with § 178.33a. Notwithstanding the variation pro-
The following conditions also apply vided in this paragraph, each container
under Variation 1— must otherwise conform to a DOT 2Q
(a) Type and size. The maximum ca- container in accordance with § 178.33a.
pacity of containers in this class may The following conditions also apply
not exceed 0.40 L (24.4 cubic inches). under Variation 2—
The maximum inside diameter shall (a) Manufacture. Ends: The ends shall
not exceed 2.1 inches. be designed to withstand pressure and
(b) Manufacture. Ends: The top of the the container equipped with a pressure
container must be designed with a relief system (e.g., rim-venting release
pressure relief system consisting of ra- or a dome expansion device) designed
dial scores on the top seam(s). The bot- to buckle prior to the burst of the con-
tom of the container must be designed tainer.
to buckle at a pressure greater than (b) Tests. (1) One out of each lot of
the pressure at which the top buckles 25,000 containers or less, successively
and vents. produced per day shall be pressure test-
(c) Wall thickness. The minimum wall ed to destruction at gauge pressure and
thickness for any container shall be must not burst below 270 psig. For con-
0.0085 inches. tainers with a pressure relief system as
(d) Tests. (1) Two containers (one described in paragraph (a) of this sec-
without a pressure relief system and tion and assembled, failure at a loca-
one with) out of each lot of 25,000 or tion other than the pressure relief sys-
less, successively produced per day tem will reject the lot.
16
(2) Each such 25,000 containers or fication, the inspector shall perform
less, successively produced per day, the following:
shall constitute a lot and if the test (1) Inspect all material and reject
container(s) shall fail, the lot shall be any not meeting applicable require-
rejected. Otherwise, ten (10) additional ments. For cylinders made by the bil-
containers of each container design let-piercing process, billets must be in-
produced may be selected at random spected and shown to be free from pipe,
and subjected to the test. These con- cracks, excessive segregation and other
tainers shall be complete with ends as- injurious defects after parting or, when
sembled. Should any of the containers applicable, after nick and cold break.
thus tested fail, the entire lot must be (2) Verify the material of construc-
rejected. All containers constituting a tion meets the requirements of the ap-
lot shall be of like material, size, de- plicable specification by—
sign construction, finish, and quality. (i) Making a chemical analysis of
(c) Marking. By means of printing, each heat of material;
lithographing, embossing, or stamping, (ii) Obtaining a certified chemical
each container must be marked: analysis from the material manufac-
(1) DOT–2Q2. turer for each heat of material (a ladle
(2) With the name or symbol of the analysis is acceptable); or
person making the mark. A symbol, if (iii) If an analysis is not provided for
used, must be registered with the Asso- each heat of material by the material
ciate Administrator. manufacturer, by making a check anal-
ysis of a sample from each coil, sheet,
[81 FR 3685, Jan. 21, 2016]
or tube.
(3) Verify compliance of cylinders
Subpart C—Specifications for with the applicable specification by—
Cylinders (i) Verifying identification of mate-
rial is proper;
§ 178.35 General requirements for (ii) Inspecting the inside of the cyl-
specification cylinders. inder before closing in ends;
(a) Compliance. Compliance with the (iii) Verifying that the heat treat-
requirements of this subpart is re- ment is proper;
quired in all details. (iv) Obtaining samples for all tests
(b) Inspections and analyses. Chemical and check chemical analyses (NOTE:
analyses and tests required by this sub- Recommended locations for test speci-
chapter must be made within the mens taken from welded cylinders are
United States, unless otherwise ap- depicted in Figures 1 through 5 in Ap-
proved in writing by the Associate Ad- pendix C to this subpart for the specific
ministrator, in accordance with sub- construction design.);
part I of part 107 of this chapter. In- (v) Witnessing all tests;
spections and verification must be per- (vi) Verify threads by gauge;
formed by— (vii) Reporting volumetric capacity
(1) An independent inspection agency and tare weight (see report form) and
approved in writing by the Associate minimum thickness of wall noted; and
Administrator, in accordance with sub- (viii) Verifying that each cylinder is
part I of part 107 of this chapter; or marked in accordance with the applica-
(2) For DOT Specifications 3B, 3BN, ble specification.
3E, 4B, 4BA, 4D (water capacity less (4) Inspector’s report. Prepare a report
than 1,100 cubic inches), 4B240ET, containing, at a minimum, the applica-
4AA480, 4L, 8, 8AL, 4BW, 39 (marked ble information listed in CGA C–11
service pressure 900 p.s.i.g. or lower) (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter).
and 4E manufactured in the United Any additional information or mark-
States, a competent inspector of the ings that are required by the applicable
manufacturer. specification must be shown on the test
(c) Duties of inspector. The inspector report. The signature of the inspector
shall determine that each cylinder on the reports certifies that the proc-
made is in conformance with the appli- esses of manufacture and heat treat-
cable specification. Except as other- ment of cylinders were observed and
wise specified in the applicable speci- found satisfactory. The inspector must
17
§ 178.35 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
furnish the completed test reports re- 1234

quired by this subpart to the maker of XY
the cylinder and, upon request, to the AB 5–95
purchaser. The test report must be re- Or;
tained by the inspector for fifteen
DOT-3A1800–1234–XY
years from the original test date of the
AB 5–95
cylinder.
(d) Defects and attachments. Cylinders Where:
must conform to the following: DOT-3A = specification number
(1) A cylinder may not be constructed 1800 = service pressure
of material with seams, cracks or lam- 1234 = serial number
inations, or other injurious defects. XY = symbol of manufacturer
(2) Metal attachments to cylinders AB = inspector’s mark
must have rounded or chamfered cor- 5–95 = date of test
ners or must be protected in such a
(2) Additional required marking must
manner as to prevent the likelihood of
be applied to the cylinder as follows:
causing puncture or damage to other
hazardous materials packages. This re- (i) The word ‘‘spun’’ or ‘‘plug’’ must
quirement applies to anything tempo- be placed near the DOT specification
rarily or permanently attached to the marking when an end closure in the
cylinder, such as metal skids. finished cylinder has been welded by
(e) Safety devices. Pressure relief de- the spinning process, or effected by
vices and protection for valves, safety plugging.
devices, and other connections, if ap- (ii) As prescribed in specification 3HT
plied, must be as required or author- (§ 178.44) or 3T (§ 178.45), if applicable.
ized by the appropriate specification, (3) Marking exceptions. A DOT 3E cyl-
and as required in § 173.301 of this sub- inder is not required to be marked with
chapter. an inspector’s mark or a serial number.
(f) Markings. Markings on a DOT (4) Unless otherwise specified in the
Specification cylinder must conform to applicable specification, the markings
applicable requirements. on each cylinder must be stamped
(1) Each cylinder must be marked plainly and permanently on the shoul-
with the following information: der, top head, or neck.
(i) The DOT specification marking (5) The size of each marking must be
must appear first, followed imme- at least 0.25 inch or as space permits.
diately by the service pressure. For ex- (6) Other markings are authorized
ample, DOT-3A1800. provided they are made in low stress
(ii) The serial number must be placed areas other than the side wall and are
just below or immediately following not of a size and depth that will create
the DOT specification marking. harmful stress concentrations. Such
(iii) A symbol (letters) must be marks may not conflict with any DOT
placed just below, immediately before required markings.
or following the serial number. Other (7) Marking exceptions. A DOT 8 or
variations in sequence of markings are 8AL cylinder is not required to be
authorized only when necessitated by a marked with the service pressure.
lack of space. The symbol and numbers (g) Manufacturer’s reports. At or be-
must be those of the manufacturer. fore the time of delivery to the pur-
The symbol must be registered with chaser, the cylinder manufacturer
the Associate Administrator; duplica- must have all completed certification
tions are not authorized. documents listed in CGA C–11. The
(iv) The inspector’s official mark and manufacturer of the cylinders must re-
date of test (such as 5–95 for May 1995) tain the reports required by this sub-
must be placed near the serial number. part for 15 years from the original test
This information must be placed so date of the cylinder.
that dates of subsequent tests can be
easily added. An example of the mark- [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
amended at 66 FR 45185, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR
ings prescribed in this paragraph (f)(1)

is as follows: 51652, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, 2003;
76 FR 43531, July 20, 2011; 83 FR 55810, Nov. 7,
DOT-3A1800 2018]
18
§ 178.36 Specification 3A and 3AX tent percent may not exceed the fol-
seamless steel cylinders. lowing: Carbon, 0.55; phosphorous, 0.045;
(a) Type size and service pressure. In sulphur, 0.050.
addition to the requirements of § 178.35, (c) Identification of material. Material
cylinders must conform to the fol- must be identified by any suitable
lowing: method, except that plates and billets
(1) A DOT-3A cylinder is a seamless for hot-drawn cylinders must be
steel cylinder with a water capacity marked with the heat number.
(nominal) not over 1,000 pounds and a (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be
service pressure of at least 150 psig. manufactured using equipment and
(2) A DOT–3AX is a seamless steel processes adequate to ensure that each
cylinder with a water capacity not less cylinder produced conforms to the re-
quirements of this subpart. No fissure
than 1,000 pounds and a service pres-
or other defect is permitted that is
sure of at least 500 psig, conforming to
likely to weaken the finished cylinder
the following requirements:
appreciably. A reasonably smooth and
(i) Assuming the cylinder is to be
uniform surface finish is required. If
supported horizontally at its two ends
not originally free from such defects,
only and to be uniformly loaded over
the surface may be machined or other-
its entire length consisting of the
wise treated to eliminate these defects.
weight per unit of length of the
The thickness of the bottoms of cyl-
straight cylindrical portion filled with
inders welded or formed by spinning is,
water and compressed to the specified
under no condition, to be less than two
test pressure; the sum of two times the times the minimum wall thickness of
maximum tensile stress in the bottom the cylindrical shell; such bottom
fibers due to bending, plus that in the thicknesses must be measured within
same fibers (longitudinal stress), due to an area bounded by a line representing
hydrostatic test may not exceed 80 per- the points of contact between the cyl-
cent of the minimum yield strength of inder and floor when the cylinder is in
the steel at such maximum stress. Wall a vertical position.
thickness must be increased when nec- (e) Welding or brazing. Welding or
essary to meet the requirement. brazing for any purpose whatsoever is
(ii) To calculate the maximum longi- prohibited except as follows:
tudinal tensile stress due to bending, (1) Welding or brazing is authorized
the following formula must be used: for the attachment of neckrings and
S = Mc/I footrings which are non-pressure parts
and only to the tops and bottoms of
(iii) To calculate the maximum lon-
cylinders having a service pressure of
gitudinal tensile stress due to hydro-
500 psig or less. Cylinders, neckrings,
static test pressure, the following for-
and footrings must be made of weldable
mula must be used:
steel, the carbon content of which may
S = A1 P/A2 not exceed 0.25 percent except in the
where: case of 4130X steel which may be used
with proper welding procedures.
S = tensile stress—p.s.i.;
M = bending moment-inch pounds—(wl2)/8; (2) As permitted in paragraph (d) of
w = weight per inch of cylinder filled with this section.
water; (3) Cylinders used solely in anhy-
l = length of cylinder-inches; drous ammonia service may have a 1⁄2
c = radius (D)/(2) of cylinder-inches; inch diameter bar welded within their
I = moment of inertia—0.04909 (D4¥d4) inches concave bottoms.
fourth; (f) Wall thickness. For cylinders with
D = outside diameter-inches; service pressure less than 900 psig, the
d = inside diameter-inches;
A1 = internal area in cross section of cyl-
wall stress may not exceed 24,000 psig.
inder-square inches; A minimum wall thickness of 0.100 inch
A2 = area of metal in cross section of cyl- is required for any cylinder over 5
inder-square inches; inches outside diameter. Wall stress
P = hydrostatic test pressure-psig. calculation must be made by using the

(b) Steel. Open-hearth or electric steel following formula:
of uniform quality must be used. Con- S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)]/(D2¥d2)
19
§ 178.36 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
Where: included angle, rounded to 1⁄2-inch ra-
S = wall stress in psi; dius. The longitudinal axis of the cyl-
P = minimum test pressure prescribed for inder must be at a 90-degree angle to
water jacket test or 450 psig whichever is knife edges during the test. For lots of
the greater; 30 or less, flattening tests are author-
D = outside diameter in inches;
ized to be made on a ring at least 8
d = inside diameter in inches.
inches long cut from each cylinder and
(g) Heat treatment. The completed cyl- subjected to same heat treatment as
inder must be uniformly and properly the finished cylinder.
heat-treated prior to tests. (k) Physical test. A physical test must
(h) Openings in cylinders and connec- be conducted to determine yield
tions (valves, fuse plugs, etc.) for those strength, tensile strength, elongation,
openings. Threads are required on open- and reduction of area of material as
ings. follows:
(1) Threads must be clean cut, even, (1) The test is required on 2 speci-
without checks, and to gauge. mens cut from 1 cylinder taken at ran-
(2) Taper threads, when used, must be dom out of each lot of 200 or less. For
of length not less than as specified for lots of 30 or less, physical tests are au-
American Standard taper pipe threads. thorized to be made on a ring at least
(3) Straight threads having at least 6 8 inches long cut from each cylinder
engaged threads are authorized. and subjected to same heat treatment
Straight threads must have a tight fit as the finished cylinder.
and calculated shear strength of at (2) Specimens must conform to the
least 10 times the test pressure of the following:
cylinder. Gaskets, adequate to prevent (i) Gauge length of 8 inches with a
leakage, are required. width of not over 11⁄2 inches, a gauge
(i) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder length of 2 inches with a width of not
must successfully withstand a hydro- over 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge length of at
static test, as follows: least 24 times thickness with width not
(1) The test must be by water-jacket, over 6 times thickness is authorized
or other suitable methods, operated so when cylinder wall is not over 3⁄16 inch
as to obtain accurate data. The pres- thick.
sure gauge must permit reading to an (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip
accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends
gauge must permit reading of total ex- may be flattened to within 1 inch of
pansion to an accuracy of either 1 per- each end of the reduced section.
cent or 0.1 cubic centimeter. (iii) When size of cylinder does not
(2) Pressure must be maintained for permit securing straight specimens,
at least 30 seconds and sufficiently the specimens may be taken in any lo-
longer to ensure complete expansion. cation or direction and may be
Any internal pressure applied after straightened or flattened cold, by pres-
heat-treatment and previous to the of- sure only, not by blows. When speci-
ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of mens are so taken and prepared, the in-
the test pressure. If, due to failure of spector’s report must show in connec-
the test apparatus the test pressure tion with record of physical tests de-
cannot be maintained the test may be tailed information in regard to such
repeated at a pressure increased by 10 specimens.
percent or 100 psig, whichever is the (iv) Heating of a specimen for any
lower. purpose is not authorized.
(3) Permanent, volumetric expansion (3) The yield strength in tension
may not exceed 10 percent of the total must be the stress corresponding to a
volumetric expansion at test pressure. permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the
(4) Each cylinder must be tested to at gauge length. The following conditions
least 5⁄3 times service pressure. apply:
(j) Flattening test. A flattening test (i) The yield strength must be deter-
must be performed on one cylinder mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or
taken at random out of each lot of 200 the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as
or less, by placing the cylinder between prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7
wedge shaped knife edges having a 60° of this subchapter).
20
(ii) In using the ‘‘extension under Except as provided in paragraph (n) of

load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex- this section, a cylinder that is leaking
tension under load’’) corresponding to must be rejected.
the stress at which the 0.2-percent per- (2) A spun cylinder is one in which an
manent strain occurs may be deter- end closure in the finished cylinder has
mined with sufficient accuracy by cal- been welded by the spinning process.
culating the elastic extension of the (3) A plugged cylinder is one in which
gauge length under appropriate load a permanent closure in the bottom of a
and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the finished cylinder has been effected by a
gauge length. Elastic extension cal- plug.
culations must be based on an elastic (4) As a safety precaution, if the
modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of manufacturer elects to make this test
controversy the entire stress-strain before the hydrostatic test, the manu-
diagram must be plotted and the yield facturer should design the test appa-
strength determined from the 0.2 per- ratus so that the pressure is applied to
cent offset. the smallest area practicable, around
(iii) For the purpose of strain meas- the point of closure, and so as to use
urement, the initial strain must be set the smallest possible volume of air or
while the specimen is under a stress of gas.
12,000 psig and the strain indicator (n) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat-
reading must be set at the calculated ment is authorized for rejected cyl-
corresponding strain. inders. Subsequent thereto, cylinders
(iv) Cross-head speed of the testing must pass all prescribed tests to be ac-
machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per ceptable. Repair by welding or spinning
minute during yield strength deter- is not authorized. Spun cylinders re-
mination. jected under the provisions of para-
(l) Acceptable results for physical and graph (m) of this section may be re-
flattening tests. Either of the following moved from the spun cylinder category
is an acceptable result: by drilling to remove defective mate-
(1) An elongation at least 40 percent rial, tapping and plugging.
for a 2-inch gauge length or at least 20 [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
percent in other cases and yield amended at 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997; 66 FR
strength not over 73 percent of tensile 45185, 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51652, Aug. 8,
strength. In this instance, the flat- 2002; 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, 2003; 73 FR 57006,
tening test is not required. Oct. 1, 2008]
(2) An elongation at least 20 percent
for a 2-inch gauge length or 10 percent § 178.37 Specification 3AA and 3AAX
in other cases and a yield strength not seamless steel cylinders.
over 73 percent of tensile strength. In (a) Type, size and service pressure. In
this instance, the flattening test is re- addition to the requirements of § 178.35,
quired, without cracking, to 6 times cylinders must conform to the fol-
the wall thickness. lowing:
(m) Leakage test. All spun cylinders (1) A DOT-3AA cylinder is a seamless
and plugged cylinders must be tested steel cylinder with a water capacity
for leakage by gas or air pressure after (nominal) of not over 1,000 pounds and
the bottom has been cleaned and is free a service pressure of at least 150 psig.
from all moisture subject to the fol- (2) A DOT-3AAX cylinder is a seam-
lowing conditions and limitations: less steel cylinder with a water capac-
(1) Pressure, approximately the same ity of not less than 1,000 pounds and a
as but no less than service pressure, service pressure of at least 500 psig,
must be applied to one side of the fin- conforming to the following require-
ished bottom over an area of at least ments:
1⁄16 of the total area of the bottom but (i) Assuming the cylinder is to be
not less than 3⁄4 inch in diameter, in- supported horizontally at its two ends
cluding the closure, for at least 1 only and to be uniformly loaded over
minute, during which time the other its entire length consisting of the
side of the bottom exposed to pressure weight per unit of length of the
must be covered with water and closely straight cylindrical portion filled with
examined for indications of leakage. water and compressed to the specified
21
§ 178.37 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
test pressure; the sum of two times the d = inside diameter-inches;

maximum tensile stress in the bottom A1 = internal area in cross section of cyl-
fibers due to bending, plus that in the inder-square inches;
same fibers (longitudinal stress), due to A2 = area of metal in cross section of cyl-
hydrostatic test pressure may not ex- inder-square inches;
ceed 80 percent of the minimum yield P = hydrostatic test pressure-psig.
strength of the steel at such maximum (b) Authorized steel. Open-hearth,
stress. Wall thickness must be in- basic oxygen, or electric steel of uni-
creased when necessary to meet the re- form quality must be used. A heat of
quirement. steel made under the specifications in
(ii) To calculate the maximum ten- table 1 of this paragraph (b), check
sile stress due to bending, the following chemical analysis of which is slightly
formula must be used:
out of the specified range, is accept-
S = Mc/I able, if satisfactory in all other re-
(iii) To calculate the maximum lon- spects, provided the tolerances shown
gitudinal tensile stress due to hydro- in table 2 of this paragraph (b) are not
static test pressure, the following for- exceeded. When a carbon-boron steel is
mula must be used: used, a hardenability test must be per-
formed on the first and last ingot of
S = A1P/A2 each heat of steel. The results of this
Where: test must be recorded on the Record of
S = tensile stress-p.s.i.; Chemical Analysis of Material for Cyl-
M = bending moment-inch pounds (wl2)/8; inders required by § 178.35. This hard-
w = weight per inch of cylinder filled with ness test must be made 5⁄16-inch from
water; the quenched end of the Jominy quench
l = length of cylinder-inches;
c = radius (D)/(2) of cylinder-inches;
bar and the hardness must be at least
I = moment of inertia-0.04909 (D4¥d4) inches Rc 33 and no more than Rc 53. The fol-
fourth; lowing chemical analyses are author-
D = outside diameter-inches; ized:
TABLE 1—AUTHORIZED MATERIALS
4130X (per- NE–8630 (per- Inter- mediate
9115 (percent) 9125 (percent) Carbon-boron
Designation cent) (see Note cent) (see Note manganese
(see Note 1) (see Note 1) (percent)
1) 1) (percent)
Carbon ................... 0.25/0.35 ......... 0.28/0.33 ......... 0.10/0.20 ......... 0.20/0.30 ......... 0.27–0.37 ........ 0.40 max.
Manganese ............ 0.40/0.90 ......... 0.70/0.90 ......... 0.50/0.75 ......... 0.50/0.75 ......... 0.80–1.40 ........ 1.35/1.65.
Phosphorus ........... 0.04 max ......... 0.04 max ......... 0.04 max ......... 0.04 max ......... 0.035 max ....... 0.04 max.
Sulfur ..................... 0.05 max ......... 0.04 max ......... 0.04 max ......... 0.04 max ......... 0.045 max ....... 0.05 max.
Silicon .................... 0.15/0.35 ......... 0.20/0.35 ......... 0.60/0.90 ......... 0.60/0.90 ......... 0.3 max. .......... 0.10/0.30.
Chromium .............. 0.80/1.10 ......... 0.40/0.60 ......... 0.50/0.65 ......... 0.50/0.65.
Molybdenum .......... 0.15/0.25 ......... 0.15/0.25
Zirconium ............... ......................... ......................... 0.05/0.15 ......... 0.05/0.15
Nickel ..................... ......................... 0.40/0.70.
Boron ..................... ......................... ......................... ......................... ......................... 0.0005/0.003.
Note 1: This designation may not be restrictive and the commercial steel is limited in analysis as shown in this table.
TABLE 2—CHECK ANALYSIS TOLERANCES

Tolerance (percent) over
the maximum limit or
Limit or maximum specified under the minimum limit
Element (percent)
Under min- Over max-
imum limit imum limit
Carbon ...................................................... To 0.15 incl .................................................................... 0.02 0.03

Over 0.15 to 0.40 incl .................................................... .03 .04
Manganese ............................................... To 0.60 incl .................................................................... .03 .03
Over 0.60 to 1.15 incl .................................................... 0.04 0.04
Over 1.15 to 2.50 incl .................................................... 0.05 0.05
Phosphorus1 ............................................. All ranges ....................................................................... .................... .01
Sulphur ..................................................... All ranges ....................................................................... .................... .01

Silicon ....................................................... To 0.30 incl .................................................................... .02 .03
Over 0.30 to 1.00 incl .................................................... .05 .05
Nickel ........................................................ To 1.00 incl .................................................................... .03 .03
22
TABLE 2—CHECK ANALYSIS TOLERANCES—Continued

Element (percent)
Chromium ................................................. To 0.90 incl .................................................................... .03 .03

0.90 to 2.90 incl ............................................................. .05 .05
Molybdenum ............................................. To 0.20 incl .................................................................... .01 .01
Over 0.20 to 0.40 ........................................................... .02 .02
Zirconium .................................................. All ranges ....................................................................... .01 .05
1 Rephosphorized steels not subject to check analysis for phosphorus.
(c) Identification of material. Material (f) Wall thickness. The thickness of

must be identified by any suitable each cylinder must conform to the fol-
method except that plates and billets lowing:
for hot-drawn cylinders must be (1) For cylinders with a service pres-
marked with the heat number. sure of less than 900 psig, the wall
(d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be stress may not exceed 24,000 psi. A min-
manufactured using equipment and imum wall thickness of 0.100 inch is re-
processes adequate to ensure that each quired for any cylinder with an outside
cylinder produced conforms to the re- diameter of over 5 inches.
quirements of this subpart. No fissure (2) For cylinders with service pres-
or other defects is permitted that is sure of 900 psig or more the minimum
wall must be such that the wall stress
likely to weaken the finished cylinder
at the minimum specified test pressure
appreciably. A reasonably smooth and
may not exceed 67 percent of the min-
uniform surface finish is required. If
imum tensile strength of the steel as
not originally free from such defects, determined from the physical tests re-
the surface may be machined or other- quired in paragraphs (k) and (l) of this
wise treated to eliminate these defects. section and must be not over 70,000 psi.
The thickness of the bottoms of cyl- (3) Calculation must be made by the
inders welded or formed by spinning is, formula:
under no condition, to be less than two
times the minimum wall thickness of S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)]/(D2¥d2)
the cylindrical shell; such bottom Where:
thicknesses must be measured within S = wall stress in psi;
an area bounded by a line representing P = minimum test pressure prescribed for
the points of contact between the cyl- water jacket test or 450 psig whichever is
inder and floor when the cylinder is in the greater;
a vertical position. D = outside diameter in inches;
(e) Welding or brazing. Welding or
brazing for any purpose whatsoever is (g) Heat treatment. The completed cyl-
prohibited except as follows: inders must be uniformly and properly
(1) Welding or brazing is authorized heat treated prior to tests. Heat treat-
for the attachment of neckrings and ment of cylinders of the authorized
footrings which are non-pressure parts, analyses must be as follows:
and only to the tops and bottoms of (1) All cylinders must be quenched by
cylinders having a service pressure of oil, or other suitable medium except as
500 psig or less. Cylinders, neckrings, provided in paragraph (g)(5) of this sec-
tion.
and footrings must be made of weldable
(2) The steel temperature on quench-
ing must be that recommended for the
not exceed 0.25 percent except in the
steel analysis, but may not exceed 1750
case of 4130X steel which may be used
°F.
with proper welding procedure.

(3) All steels must be tempered at a
(2) As permitted in paragraph (d) of temperature most suitable for that
this section. steel.
23
§ 178.37 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(4) The minimum tempering tempera- as to obtain accurate data. The pres-
ture may not be less than 1000 °F ex- sure gauge must permit reading to an
cept as noted in paragraph (g)(6) of this accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion
section. gauge must permit reading of total ex-
(5) Steel 4130X may be normalized at pansion to an accuracy of either 1 per-
a temperature of 1650 °F instead of cent or 0.1 cubic centimeter.
being quenched and cylinders so nor- (2) Pressure must be maintained for
malized need not be tempered. at least 30 seconds and sufficiently
(6) Intermediate manganese steels longer to ensure complete expansion.
may be tempered at temperatures not Any internal pressure applied after
less than 1150 °F., and after heat treat- heat-treatment and previous to the of-
ing each cylinder must be submitted to ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of
a magnetic test to detect the presence the test pressure. If, due to failure of
of quenching cracks. Cracked cylinders the test apparatus, the test pressure
must be rejected and destroyed. cannot be maintained, the test may be
(7) Except as otherwise provided in repeated at a pressure increased by 10
paragraph (g)(6) of this section, all cyl- percent or 100 psig, whichever is the
inders, if water quenched or quenched lower.
with a liquid producing a cooling rate (3) Permanent volumetric expansion
in excess of 80 percent of the cooling may not exceed 10 percent of total vol-
rate of water, must be inspected by the umetric expansion at test pressure.
magnetic particle, dye penetrant or ul- (4) Each cylinder must be tested to at
trasonic method to detect the presence least 5⁄3 times the service pressure.
of quenching cracks. Any cylinder de- (j) Flattening test. A flattening test
signed to the requirements for speci- must be performed on one cylinder
fication 3AA and found to have a taken at random out of each lot of 200
quenching crack must be rejected and or less, by placing the cylinder between
may not be requalified. Cylinders de- wedge shaped knife edges having a 60°
signed to the requirements for speci- included angle, rounded to 1⁄2-inch ra-
fication 3AAX and found to have dius. The longitudinal axis of the cyl-
cracks must have cracks removed to inder must be at a 90-degree angle to
sound metal by mechanical means. knife edges during the test. For lots of
Such specification 3AAX cylinders will 30 or less, flattening tests are author-
be acceptable if the repaired area is ized to be made on a ring at least 8
subsequently examined to assure no de- inches long cut from each cylinder and
fect, and it is determined that design subjected to the same heat treatment
thickness requirements are met. as the finished cylinder. Cylinders may
(h) Openings in cylinders and connec- be subjected to a bend test in lieu of
tions (valves, fuse plugs, etc.) for those the flattening test. Two bend test
openings. Threads are required on open- specimens must be taken in accordance
ings. with ISO 9809–1 or ASTM E 290 (IBR, see
(1) Threads must be clean cut, even, § 171.7 of this subchapter), and must be
without checks, and to gauge. subjected to the bend test specified
(2) Taper threads, when used, must be therein.
of a length not less than as specified (k) Physical test. A physical test must
for American Standard taper pipe be conducted to determine yield
threads. strength, tensile strength, elongation,
(3) Straight threads having at least 6 and reduction of area of material as
engaged threads are authorized. follows:
Straight threads must have a tight fit (1) The test is required on 2 speci-
and a calculated shear strength of at mens cut from 1 cylinder taken at ran-
least 10 times the test pressure of the dom out of each lot of 200 or less. For
cylinder. Gaskets, adequate to prevent lots of 30 or less, physical tests are au-
leakage, are required. thorized to be made on a ring at least
(i) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder 8 inches long cut from each cylinder
must successfully withstand a hydro- and subjected to the same heat treat-
static test as follows: ment as the finished cylinder.

(1) The test must be by water-jacket, (2) Specimens must conform to the
or other suitable method, operated so following:
24
(i) Gauge length of 8 inches with a minute during yield strength deter-
width of not over 11⁄2 inches, a gauge mination.
length of 2 inches with a width of not (l) Acceptable results for physical, flat-
over 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge length of at tening and bend tests. An acceptable re-
least 24 times the thickness with width sult for physical and flattening tests is
not over 6 times thickness when the elongation of at least 20 percent for 2
thickness of the cylinder wall is not inches of gauge length or at least 10
over 3⁄16 inch. percent in other cases. Flattening is re-
(ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip quired, without cracking, to 6 times
ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends the wall thickness of the cylinder. An
may be flattened to within 1 inch of acceptable result for the alternative
each end of the reduced section. bend test is no crack when the cylinder
(iii) When size of cylinder does not is bent inward around the mandrel
permit securing straight specimens, until the interior edges are not further
the specimens may be taken in any lo- apart than the diameter of the man-
cation or direction and may be drel.
straightened or flattened cold, by pres- (m) Leakage test. All spun cylinders
sure only, not by blows. When speci- and plugged cylinders must be tested
mens are so taken and prepared, the infor leakage by gas or air pressure after
spector’s report must show in connec- the bottom has been cleaned and is free
tion with record of physical tests de- from all moisture. Pressure, approxi-
tailed information in regard to such mately the same as but no less than
specimens. the service pressure, must be applied to
(iv) Heating of a specimen for any one side of the finished bottom over an
purpose is not authorized. area of at least 1⁄16 of the total area of
(3) The yield strength in tension the bottom but not less than 3⁄4 inch in
must be the stress corresponding to a diameter, including the closure, for at
permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the least one minute, during which time
gauge length. The following conditions the other side of the bottom exposed to
apply: pressure must be covered with water
(i) The yield strength must be deter- and closely examined for indications of
mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or leakage. Except as provided in para-
the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as graph (n) of this section, a cylinder
prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7 must be rejected if there is any leak-
of this subchapter). ing.
(ii) In using the ‘‘extension under (1) A spun cylinder is one in which an
load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex- end closure in the finished cylinder has
tension under load’’) corresponding to been welded by the spinning process.
the stress at which the 0.2 percent per- (2) A plugged cylinder is one in which
manent strain occurs may be deter- a permanent closure in the bottom of a
mined with sufficient accuracy by cal- finished cylinder has been effected by a
culating the elastic extension of the plug.
gauge length under appropriate load (3) As a safety precaution, if the
and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the manufacturer elects to make this test
gauge length. Elastic extension cal- before the hydrostatic test, the manu-
culations must be based on an elastic facturer should design the test appa-
modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of ratus so that the pressure is applied to
controversy, the entire stress-strain the smallest area practicable, around
diagram must be plotted and the yield the point of closure, and so as to use
strength determined from the 0.2 per- the smallest possible volume of air or
cent offset. gas.
(iii) For the purpose of strain meas- (n) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat-
urement, the initial strain must be set ment is authorized for rejected cyl-
while the specimen is under a stress of inders. Subsequent thereto, cylinders
12,000 psi, the strain indicator reading must pass all prescribed tests to be ac-
being set at the calculated cor- ceptable. Repair by welding or spinning
responding strain. is not authorized. Spun cylinders re-

(iv) Cross-head speed of the testing jected under the provision of paragraph
machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per (m) of this section may be removed
25
§ 178.38 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
from the spun cylinder category by steel, carbon content of which may not
drilling to remove defective material, exceed 0.25 percent except in the case
tapping and plugging. of 4130X steel which may be used with
proper welding procedure.
[Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
amended at 65 FR 58631, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR (2) As permitted in paragraph (d) of
45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51652, Aug. 8, 2002; this section.
68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, 2003; 76 FR 43531, July 20, (f) Wall thickness. The wall stress may
2011] not exceed 24,000 psi. The minimum
wall thickness is 0.090 inch for any cyl-
§ 178.38 Specification 3B seamless inder with an outside diameter of 6
steel cylinders. inches. Calculation must be made by
(a) Type, size, and service pressure. A the following formula:
DOT 3B cylinder is seamless steel cyl- S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)]/(D2¥d2)
inder with a water capacity (nominal)
of not over 1,000 pounds and a service Where:
pressure of at least 150 to not over 500 S = wall stress in psi;
psig. P = at least two times service pressure or 450
(b) Steel. Open-hearth or electric steel psig, whichever is the greater;
of uniform quality must be used. Con- D = outside diameter in inches;
tent percent may not exceed the fol-
lowing: carbon, 0.55; phosphorus, 0.045; (g) Heat treatment. The completed cyl-
sulphur, 0.050. inders must be uniformly and properly
(c) Identification of material. Material heat-treated prior to tests.
must be identified by any suitable (h) Openings in cylinders and connec-
method except that plates and billets tions (valves, fuse plugs, etc.) for those
for hot-drawn cylinders must be openings. Threads, conforming to the
marked with the heat number. following, are required on all openings:
(d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be (1) Threads must be clean cut, even,
manufactured using equipment and without checks, and to gauge.
processes adequate to ensure that each (2) Taper threads when used, must be
cylinder produced conforms to the re- of a length not less than as specified
quirements of this subpart. No fissure for American Standard taper pipe
or other defect is permitted that is threads.
likely to weaken the finished cylinder (3) Straight threads having at least 4
appreciably. A reasonably smooth and engaged threads are authorized.
uniform surface finish is required. If Straight threads must have a tight fit,
not originally free from such defects, and calculated shear strength at least
the surface may be machined or other- 10 times the test pressure of the cyl-
wise treated to eliminate these defects. inder. Gaskets, adequate to prevent
The thickness of the bottoms of cyl- leakage, are required.
inders welded or formed by spinning is, (i) Hydrostatic test. Cylinders must
under no condition, to be less than two successfully withstand a hydrostatic
times the minimum wall thickness of test, as follows:
the cylindrical shell; such bottom (1) The test must be by water-jacket,
thicknesses to be measured within an or other suitable method, operated so
area bounded by a line representing the as to obtain accurate data. The pres-
points of contact between the cylinder sure gauge must permit reading to an
and floor when the cylinder is in a accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion
vertical position. gauge must permit reading of total ex-
(e) Welding or brazing. Welding or pansion to an accuracy either of 1 per-
brazing for any purpose whatsoever is cent or 0.1 cubic centimeter.
prohibited except as follows: (2) Pressure must be maintained for
(1) Welding or brazing is authorized at least 30 seconds and sufficiently
for the attachment of neckrings and longer to insure complete expansion.
footrings which are non-pressure parts, Any internal pressure applied after
and only to the tops and bottoms of heat-treatment and previous to the of-
cylinders having a service pressure of ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of
500 psig or less. Cylinders, neckrings, the test pressure. If, due to failure of
and footrings must be made of weldable the test apparatus, the test pressure
26
cannot be maintained, the test may be the specimens may be taken in any lo-
repeated at a pressure increased by 10 cation or direction and may be
percent or 100 psig, whichever is the straightened or flattened cold, by pres-
lower. sure only, not by blows. When speci-
(3) Permanent volumetric expansion mens are so taken and prepared, the in-
may not exceed 10 percent of total vol- spector’s report must show in connec-
umetric expansion at test pressure. tion with record of physical tests de-
(4) Cylinders must be tested as fol- tailed information in regard to such
lows: specimens.
(i) Each cylinder; to at least 2 times (iv) Heating of a specimen for any
service pressure; or purpose is not authorized.
(ii) 1 cylinder out of each lot of 200 or (3) The yield strength in tension
less; to at least 3 times service pres- must be the stress corresponding to a
sure. Others must be examined under permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the
pressure of 2 times service pressure and gauge length. The following conditions
show no defect. apply:
(j) Flattening test. A flattening test (i) The yield strength must be deter-
must be performed on one cylinder mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or
taken at random out of each lot of 200 the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as
or less, by placing the cylinder between prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7
wedge shaped knife edges having a 60° of this subchapter).
included angle, rounded to 1⁄2-inch ra- (ii) In using the ‘‘extension under
dius. The longitudinal axis of the cyl- load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex-
inder must be at a 90-degree angle to tension under load’’) corresponding to
knife edges during the test. For lots of the stress at which the 0.2 percent per-
30 or less, flattening tests are author- manent strain occurs may be deter-
ized to be made on a ring at least 8 mined with sufficient accuracy by cal-
inches long cut from each cylinder and culating the elastic extension of the
subjected to same heat treatment as gauge length under appropriate load
the finished cylinder. and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the
(k) Physical test. A physical test must gauge length. Elastic extension cal-
be conducted to determine yield culations must be based on an elastic
strength, tensile strength, elongation, modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of
and reduction of area of material, as controversy, the entire stress-strain
follows: diagram must be plotted and the yield
(1) The test is required on 2 speci- strength determined from the 0.2 per-
mens cut from 1 cylinder taken at ran- cent offset.
dom out of each lot of 200 or less. For (iii) For the purpose of strain meas-
lots of 30 or less, physical tests are au- urement, the initial strain must be set
thorized to be made on a ring at least while the specimen is under a stress of
8 inches long cut from each cylinder 12,000 psi, and the strain indicator
and subjected to same heat treatment reading being set at the calculated cor-
as the finished cylinder. responding strain.
(2) Specimens must conform to the (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing
following: machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per
(i) Gauge length of 8 inches with a minute during yield strength deter-
width of not over 11⁄2 inches; or a gauge mination.
length of 2 inches with a width of not (l) Acceptable results for physical and
over 11⁄2 inches; or a gauge length at flattening tests. Either of the following
least 24 times the thickness with a is an acceptable result:
width not over 6 times thickness is au- (1) An elongation of at least 40 per-
thorized when a cylinder wall is not cent for a 2-inch gauge length or at
over 3⁄16 inch thick. least 20 percent in other cases and
(ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip yield strength not over 73 percent of
ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends tensile strength. In this instance, the
may be flattened to within one inch of flattening test is not required.
each end of the reduced section. (2) An elongation of at least 20 per-

(iii) When size of cylinder does not cent for a 2-inch gauge length or 10 per-
permit securing straight specimens, cent in other cases and yield strength
27
§ 178.39 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
not over 73 percent of tensile strength. imum wall thickness, but may not ex-
Flattening is required, without crack- ceed 0.015 inch.
ing, to 6 times the wall thickness. (4) Maximum outside diameter of cyl-
(m) Leakage test. All spun cylinders inder may not exceed 5 inches.
and plugged cylinders must be tested (5) Carbon content of cylinder may
for leakage by gas or air pressure after not exceed 0.25 percent. If the carbon
the bottom has been cleaned and is free content exceeds 0.25 percent, the com-
from all moisture, subject to the fol- plete cylinder must be normalized after
lowing conditions and limitations: stamping.
(1) Pressure, approximately the same (6) Stamping must be adjacent to the
as but no less than service pressure, top head.
must be applied to one side of the fin-
ished bottom over an area of at least [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
1⁄16 of the total area of the bottom but amended by 66 FR 45185, 45386, Aug. 28, 2001;
67 FR 51652, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31,
not less than 3⁄4 inch in diameter, in-
2003]
cluding the closure, for at least one
minute, during which time the other § 178.39 Specification 3BN seamless
side of the bottom exposed to pressure nickel cylinders.
must be covered with water and closely
examined for indications of leakage. (a) Type, size and service pressure. A
Except as provided in paragraph (n) of DOT 3BN cylinder is a seamless nickel
this section, a cylinder must be re- cylinder with a water capacity (nomi-
jected if there is any leaking. nal) not over 125 pounds water capacity
(2) A spun cylinder is one in which an (nominal) and a service pressure at
end closure in the finished cylinder has least 150 to not over 500 psig.
been welded by the spinning process. (b) Nickel. The percentage of nickel
(3) A plugged cylinder is one in which plus cobalt must be at least 99.0 per-
a permanent closure in the bottom of a cent.
finished cylinder has been effected by a (c) Identification of material. The ma-
plug. terial must be identified by any suit-
(4) As a safety precaution, if the able method except that plates and bil-
manufacturer elects to make this test lets for hot-drawn cylinders must be
before the hydrostatic test, he should marked with the heat number.
design his apparatus so that the pres- (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be
sure is applied to the smallest area manufactured using equipment and
practicable, around the point of clo- processes adequate to ensure that each
sure, and so as to use the smallest pos- cylinder produced conforms to the re-
sible volume of air or gas. quirements of this subpart. No defect is
(n) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat- permitted that is likely to weaken the
ment of rejected cylinders is author- finished cylinder appreciably. A rea-
ized. Subsequent thereto, cylinders sonably smooth and uniform surface
must pass all prescribed tests to be ac- finish is required. Cylinders closed in
ceptable. Repair by welding or spinning by spinning process are not authorized.
is not authorized. Spun cylinders re- (e) Welding or brazing. Welding or
jected under the provisions of para- brazing for any purpose whatsoever is
graph (m) of this section may be re- prohibited except that welding is au-
moved from the spun cylinder category thorized for the attachment of
by drilling to remove defective mate- neckrings and footrings which are non-
rial, tapping and plugging. pressure parts, and only to the tops and
(o) Marking. Markings may be bottoms of cylinders. Neckrings and
stamped into the sidewalls of cylinders footrings must be of weldable material,
having a service pressure of 150 psig if the carbon content of which may not
all of the following conditions are met: exceed 0.25 percent. Nickel welding rod
(1) Wall stress at test pressure may must be used.
not exceed 24,000 psi. (f) Wall thickness. The wall stress may
(2) Minimum wall thickness must be not exceed 15,000 psi. A minimum wall
not less than 0.090 inch. thickness of 0.100 inch is required for
(3) Depth of stamping must be no any cylinder over 5 inches in outside
greater than 15 percent of the min- diameter. Wall stress calculation must
28
be made by using the following for- (j) Flattening test. A flattening test
mula: must be performed on one cylinder
taken at random out of each lot of 200
S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ d2)
or less, by placing the cylinder between
Where: wedge shaped knife edges having a 60°
S = wall stress in psi; included angle, rounded to 1⁄2-inch ra-
P = minimum test pressure prescribed for dius. The longitudinal axis of the cyl-
water jacket test or 450 psig whichever is inder must be at a 90-degree angle to
the greater; knife edges during the test. For lots of
D = outside diameter in inches; 30 or less, flattening tests are author-
d = inside diameter in inches. ized to be made on a ring at least 8
(g) Heat treatment. The completed cyl- inches long cut from each cylinder and
inders must be uniformly and properly subjected to same heat treatment as
heat-treated prior to tests. the finished cylinder.
(k) Physical test. A physical test must
(h) Openings in cylinders and connec-
be conducted to determine yield
tions (valves, fuse plugs, etc.) for those
strength, tensile strength, elongation,
openings. Threads conforming to the
and reduction of area of material, as
following are required on openings:
follows:
(1) Threads must be clean cut, even,
(1) The test is required on 2 speci-
without checks, and to gauge.
mens cut from 1 cylinder taken at ran-
(2) Taper threads, when used, to be of dom out of each lot of 200 or less. For
length not less than as specified for lots of 30 or less, physical tests are au-
American Standard taper pipe threads. thorized to be made on a ring at least
(3) Straight threads having at least 6 8 inches long cut from each cylinder
engaged threads are authorized. and subjected to same heat treatment
Straight threads must have a tight fit as the finished cylinder.
and a calculated shear strength of at (2) Specimens must conform to the
least 10 times the test pressure of the following:
cylinder. Gaskets, adequate to prevent (i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a
leakage, are required. width of not over 11⁄2 inches, a gauge
(i) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder length of 2 inches with a width of not
must successfully withstand a hydro- over 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge length of at
static test, as follows: least 24 times the thickness with a
(1) The test must be by water-jacket, width not over 6 times thickness is au-
or other suitable method, operated so thorized when a cylinder wall is not
as to obtain accurate data. The pres- over 3⁄16 inch thick.
sure gauge must permit reading to an (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip
accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends
gauge must permit reading of total ex- may be flattened to within one inch of
pansion to an accuracy either of 1 per- each end of the reduced section.
cent or 0.1 cubic centimeter. (iii) When size of cylinder does not
(2) Pressure must be maintained for permit securing straight specimens,
at least 30 seconds and sufficiently the specimens may be taken in any lo-
longer to ensure complete expansion. cation or direction and may be
Any internal pressure applied after straightened or flattened cold, by pres-
heat-treatment and previous to the of- sure only, not by blows. When speci-
ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of mens are so taken and prepared, the in-
the test pressure. If, due to failure of spector’s report must show in connec-
the test apparatus, the test pressure tion with record of physical tests de-
cannot be maintained, the test may be tailed information in regard to such
repeated at a pressure increased by 10 specimens.
percent or 100 psig, whichever is the (iv) Heating of a specimen for any
lower. purpose is not authorized.
(3) Permanent volumetric expansion (3) The yield strength in tension
may not exceed 10 percent of total vol- must be the stress corresponding to a
umetric expansion at test pressure. permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the

(4) Each cylinder must be tested to at gauge length. The following conditions
least 2 times service pressure. apply:
29
§ 178.42 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(i) The yield strength must be deter- § 178.42 Specification 3E seamless steel
mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or cylinders.
the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as (a) Type, size, and service pressure. A
prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7 DOT 3E cylinder is a seamless steel
of this subchapter). cylinder with an outside diameter not
(ii) In using the ‘‘extension under greater than 2 inches nominal, a length
load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex- less than 2 feet and a service pressure
tension under load’’) corresponding to of 1,800 psig.
the stress at which the 0.2 percent per- (b) Steel. Open-hearth or electric steel
manent strain occurs may be deter- of uniform quality must be used. Con-
mined with sufficient accuracy by cal- tent percent may not exceed the fol-
culating the elastic extension of the lowing: Carbon, 0.55; phosphorus, 0.045;
gauge length under appropriate load sulphur, 0.050.
(c) Identification of steel. Materials
and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the
must be identified by any suitable
gauge length. Elastic extension cal-
method.
culations must be based on an elastic (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be
modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of manufactured by best appliances and
controversy, the entire stress-strain methods. No defect is permitted that is
diagram must be plotted and the yield likely to weaken the finished cylinder
strength determined from the 0.2 per- appreciably. A reasonably smooth and
cent offset. uniform surface finish is required. The
(iii) For the purpose of strain meas- thickness of the spun bottom is, under
urement, the initial strain must be set no condition, to be less than two times
while the specimen is under a stress of the minimum wall thickness of the cy-
12,000 psi, and the strain indicator lindrical shell; such bottom thickness
reading must be set at the calculated must be measured within an area
corresponding strain. bounded by a line representing the
(iv) Cross-head speed of the testing points of contact between the cylinder
machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per and floor when the cylinder is in a
minute during yield strength deter- vertical position.
mination. (e) Openings in cylinders and connec-
(l) Acceptable results for physical and tions (valves, fuse plugs, etc.) for those
openings. Threads conforming to the
flattening tests. Either of the following
following are required on openings.
is an acceptable result:
(1) Threads must be clean cut, even,
(1) An elongation of at least 40 per- without checks, and to gauge.
cent for a 2 inch gauge length or at (2) Taper threads, when used, must be
least 20 percent in other cases and of length not less than as specified for
yield point not over 50 percent of ten- American Standard taper pipe threads.
sile strength. In this instance, the flat- (3) Straight threads having at least 4
tening test is not required. engaged threads are authorized.
(2) An elongation of at least 20 per- Straight threads must have a tight fit
cent for a 2 inch gauge length or 10 per- and a calculated shear strength of at
cent in other cases and a yield point least 10 times the test pressure of the
not over 50 percent of tensile strength. cylinder. Gaskets, adequate to prevent
Flattening is required, without crack- leakage, are required.
ing, to 6 times the wall thickness. (f) Hydrostatic test. Cylinders must be
(m) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat- tested as follows:
ment is authorized for rejected cyl- (1) One cylinder out of each lot of 500
inders. Subsequent thereto, cylinders or less must be subjected to a hydro-
static pressure of 6,000 psig or higher.
must pass all prescribed tests to be ac-
(2) The cylinder referred to in para-
ceptable. Repair by welding is not au-
graph (f)(1) of this section must burst
thorized. at a pressure higher than 6,000 psig
[Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as without fragmenting or otherwise
amended by 66 FR 45185, 45386, 45388, Aug. 28, showing lack of ductility, or must hold
2001; 67 FR 51652, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75748, a pressure of 12,000 psig for 30 seconds
Dec. 31, 2003] without bursting. In which case, it
30
must be subjected to a flattening test is not authorized. Spun cylinders re-

without cracking to six times wall jected under the provisions of para-
thickness between knife edges, wedge graph (g) of this section may be re-
shaped 60 degree angle, rounded out to moved from the spun cylinder category
a 1⁄2 inch radius. The inspector’s report by drilling to remove defective mate-
must be suitably changed to show re- rial, tapping and plugging.
sults of latter alternate and flattening (i) Marking. Markings required by
test. § 178.35 must be stamped plainly and
(3) Other cylinders must be examined permanently on the shoulder, top head,
under pressure of at least 3,000 psig and neck or sidewall of each cylinder.
not to exceed 4,500 psig and show no de- [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
fect. Cylinders tested at a pressure in amended by 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001]
excess of 3,600 psig must burst at a
pressure higher than 7,500 psig when § 178.44 Specification 3HT seamless
tested as specified in paragraph (f)(2) of steel cylinders for aircraft use.
this section. The pressure must be (a) Type, size and service pressure. A
maintained for at least 30 seconds and DOT 3HT cylinder is a seamless steel
sufficiently longer to ensure complete cylinder with a water capacity (nomi-
examination. nal) of not over 150 pounds and a serv-
(g) Leakage test. All spun cylinders ice pressure of at least 900 psig.
and plugged cylinders must be tested (b) Authorized steel. Open hearth or
for leakage by gas or air pressure after electric furnace steel of uniform qual-
the bottom has been cleaned and is free ity must be used. A heat of steel made
from all moisture subject to the fol- under the specifications listed in Table
lowing conditions and limitations: 1 in this paragraph (b), a check chem-
(1) A pressure, approximately the ical analysis that is slightly out of the
same as but not less than the service specified range is acceptable, if satis-
pressure, must be applied to one side of factory in all other respects, provided
the finished bottom over an area of at the tolerances shown in Table 2 in this
least 1⁄16 of the total area of the bottom paragraph (b) are not exceeded. The
but not less than 3⁄4 inch in diameter, maximum grain size shall be 6 or finer.
including the closure, for at least one The grain size must be determined in
minute, during which time the other accordance with ASTM E 112–88 (IBR,
side of the bottom exposed to pressure see § 171.7 of this subchapter). Steel of
must be covered with water and closely the following chemical analysis is au-
examined for indications of leakage. thorized:
Accept as provided in paragraph (h) of
this section, a cylinder must be re- TABLE 1—AUTHORIZED MATERIALS
jected if there is any leakage.
AISI 4130
(2) A spun cylinder is one in which an Designation (percent)
end closure in the finished cylinder has
Carbon ............................................... 0.28/0.33
been welded by the spinning process. Manganese ........................................ 0.40/0.60
(3) A plugged cylinder is one in which Phosphorus ........................................ 0.040 maximum
a permanent closure in the bottom of a Sulfur ................................................. 0.040 maximum
Silicon ................................................ 0.15/0.35
finished cylinder has been effected by a Chromium .......................................... 0.80/1.10
plug. Molybdenum ...................................... 0.15/0.25
(4) As a safety precaution, if the
manufacturer elects to make this test TABLE 2—CHECK ANALYSIS TOLERANCES
before the hydrostatic test, the manu-
facturer shall design the test apparatus Tolerance
(percent) over the
so that the pressure is applied to the maximum limit or
smallest area practicable, around the under the
Limit or maximum minimum limit
point of closure, and so as to use the Element specified (percent)
smallest possible volume of air or gas. Under Over
min- max-
(h) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat- imum imum
ment is authorized for rejected cyl- limit limit
inders. Subsequent thereto, cylinders Carbon ........... Over 0.15 to 0.40 incl .03 .04
must pass all prescribed tests to be ac- Manganese .... To 0.60 incl ................ .03 .03
ceptable. Repair by welding or spinning Phosphorus1 .. All ranges .................. .............. .01
31
§ 178.44 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
TABLE 2—CHECK ANALYSIS TOLERANCES— grinding to produce proper surface fin-

Continued ish at point of closure is required.
(f) Wall thickness. (1) Minimum wall
Tolerance
(percent) over the thickness for any cylinder must be
maximum limit or 0.050 inch. The minimum wall thick-
under the
Limit or maximum minimum limit ness must be such that the wall stress
Element specified (percent) at the minimum specified test pressure
Under Over
min- max- may not exceed 75 percent of the min-
imum imum imum tensile strength of the steel as
limit limit
determined from the physical tests re-
Sulphur .......... All ranges .................. .............. .01 quired in paragraph (m) of this section
Silicon ............ To 0.30 incl ................ .02 .03 and may not be over 105,000 psi.
Over 0.30 to 1.00 incl .05 .05
Chromium ...... To 0.90 incl ................ .03 .03 (2) Calculations must be made by the
Over 0.90 to 2.10 incl .05 .05 formula:
Molybdenum .. To 0.20 incl ................ .01 .01
Over 0.20 to 0.40 incl .02 .02 S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ d2)
1 Rephosphorized steels not subject to check analysis for
phosphorus.
Where:
S = Wall stress in psi;
(c) Identification of material. Material P = Minimum test pressure prescribed for
must be identified by any suitable water jacket test;
method. Steel stamping of heat identi- D = Outside diameter in inches;
fications may not be made in any area d = Inside diameter in inches.
which will eventually become the side
wall of the cylinder. Depth of stamping (3) Wall thickness of hemispherical
may not encroach upon the minimum bottoms only permitted to 90 percent
prescribed wall thickness of the cyl- of minimum wall thickness of cylinder
inder. sidewall but may not be less than 0.050
(d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be inch. In all other cases, thickness to be
manufactured using equipment and no less than prescribed minimum wall.
processes adequate to ensure that each (g) Heat treatment. The completed cyl-
cylinder produced conforms to the re- inders must be uniformly and properly
quirements of this subpart. No fissure heated prior to tests. Heat treatment
or other defect is permitted that is of the cylinders of the authorized anal-
likely to weaken the finished container ysis must be as follows:
appreciably. The general surface finish (1) All cylinders must be quenched by
may not exceed a roughness of 250 oil, or other suitable medium.
RMS. Individual irregularities such as (2) The steel temperature on quench-
draw marks, scratches, pits, etc., ing must be that recommended for the
should be held to a minimum con- steel analysis, but may not exceed 1750
sistent with good high stress pressure °F.
vessel manufacturing practices. If the (3) The steel must be tempered at a
cylinder is not originally free of such temperature most suitable for the par-
defects or does not meet the finish re- ticular steel analysis but not less than
quirements, the surface may be ma- 850 °F.
chined or otherwise treated to elimi- (4) All cylinders must be inspected by
nate these defects. The point of closure the magnetic particle or dye penetrant
of cylinders closed by spinning may not method to detect the presence of
be less than two times the prescribed quenching cracks. Any cylinder found
wall thickness of the cylindrical shell. to have a quenching crack must be re-
The cylinder end contour must be hem- jected and may not be requalified.
ispherical or ellipsoidal with a ratio of (h) Openings in cylinders and connec-
major-to-minor axis not exceeding two tions (valves, fuse plugs, etc.) for those
to one and with the concave side to openings. Threads conforming to the
pressure. following are required on openings:
(e) Welding or brazing. Welding or (1) Threads must be clean cut, even,
brazing for any purpose whatsoever is without cracks, and to gauge.
prohibited, except that welding by (2) Taper threads, when used, must be
spinning is permitted to close the bot- of length not less than as specified for
tom of spun cylinders. Machining or National Gas Tapered Thread (NGT) as
32
required by American Standard Com- steel, manufactured by the same proc-

pressed Gas Cylinder Valve Outlet and ess and heat treated in the same equip-
Inlet Connections. ment under the same conditions of
(3) Straight threads having at least 6 time, temperature, and atmosphere,
engaged threads are authorized. and may not exceed a quantity of 200
Straight threads must have a tight fit cylinders.
and a calculated shear stress of at least (4) All cylinders used in cycling tests
10 times the test pressure of the cyl- must be destroyed.
inder. Gaskets, adequate to prevent (k) Burst test. One cylinder taken at
leakage, are required. random out of each lot of cylinders
(i) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder must be hydrostatically tested to de-
must withstand a hydrostatic test, as struction.
follows: (l) Flattening test. A flattening test
(1) The test must be by water-jacket, must be performed on one cylinder
or other suitable method, operated so taken at random out of each lot of 200
as to obtain accurate data. Pressure or less, by placing the cylinder between
gauge must permit reading to an accu- wedge shaped knife edges having a 60°
racy of 1 percent. The expansion gauge included angle, rounded to 1⁄2-inch ra-
must permit reading of total expansion dius. The longitudinal axis of the cyl-
to an accuracy either of 1 percent of 0.1 inder must be at a 90-degree angle to
cubic centimeter. knife edges during the test. For lots of
(2) Pressure must be maintained for 30 or less, flattening tests are author-
at least 30 seconds and sufficiently ized to be made on a ring at least 8
longer to ensure complete expansion. inches long cut from each cylinder and
Any internal pressure applied after subjected to same heat treatment as
heat treatment and previous to the of- the finished cylinder.
ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of (m) Physical tests. A physical test
the test pressure. If, due to failure of must be conducted to determine yield
the test apparatus, the test pressure strength, tensile strength, elongation,
cannot be maintained, the test may be and reduction of area of material, as
repeated at a pressure increased by 10 follows:
percent or 100 psig, which ever is the (1) Test is required on 2 specimens
lower. cut from 1 cylinder taken at random
(3) Permanent volumetric expansion out of each lot of cylinders.
may not exceed 10 percent of total vol- (2) Specimens must conform to the
umetric expansion at test pressure. following:
(4) Each cylinder must be tested to at (i) A gauge length of at least 24 times
least 5⁄3 times service pressure. the thickness with a width not over six
(j) Cycling tests. Prior to the initial times the thickness. The specimen, ex-
shipment of any specific cylinder de- clusive of grip ends, may not be flat-
sign, cyclic pressurization tests must tened. Grip ends may be flattened to
have been performed on at least three within one inch of each end of the re-
representative samples without failure duced section. When size of cylinder
as follows: does not permit securing straight
(1) Pressurization must be performed specimens, the specimens may be
hydrostatically between approximately taken in any location or direction and
zero psig and the service pressure at a may be straightened or flattened cold
rate not in excess of 10 cycles per by pressure only, not by blows. When
minute. Adequate recording instrumen- specimens are so taken and prepared,
tation must be provided if equipment is the inspector’s report must show in
to be left unattended for periods of connection with the record of physical
time. tests detailed information in regard to
(2) Tests prescribed in paragraph such specimens.
(j)(1) of this section must be repeated (ii) Heating of a specimen for any
on one random sample out of each lot purpose is not authorized.
of cylinders. The cylinder may then be (3) The yield strength in tension
subjected to a burst test. must be the stress corresponding to a

(3) A lot is defined as a group of cyl- permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the
inders fabricated from the same heat of gauge length.
33
§ 178.44 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(i) The yield strength must be deter- Except as provided in paragraph (q) of
mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or this section, a cylinder must be re-
the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as jected if there is leakage.
prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7 (2) A spun cylinder is one in which an
of this subchapter). end closure in the finished cylinder has
(ii) In using the ‘‘extension under been welded by the spinning process.
load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex- (3) A plugged cylinder is one in which
tension under load’’) corresponding to a permanent closure in the bottom of a
the stress at which the 0.2 percent per- finished cylinder has been effected by a
manent strain occurs may be deter- plug.
mined with sufficient accuracy by cal- (4) As a safety precaution, if the
culating the elastic extension of the manufacturer elects to make this test
gauge length under appropriate load before the hydrostatic test, the manu-
and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the facturer should design the test appa-
gauge length. Elastic extension cal- ratus so that the pressure is applied to
culations must be based on an elastic the smallest area practicable, around
modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of the point of closure, and so as to use
controversy, the entire stress-strain the smallest possible volume of air or
diagram must be plotted and the yield gas.
strength determined from the 0.2 per- (p) Acceptable results of tests. Results
cent offset. of the flattening test, physical tests,
(iii) For the purpose of strain meas- burst test, and cycling test must con-
urement, the initial strain must be set form to the following:
while the specimen is under a stress of
(1) Flattening required without
12,000 psi, the strain indicator reading
cracking to ten times the wall thick-
being set at the calculated cor-
ness of the cylinder.
responding strain.
(2) Physical tests:
(iv) Cross-head speed of the testing
machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per (i) An elongation of at least 6 percent
minute during yield strength deter- for a gauge length of 24 times the wall
mination. thickness.
(n) Magnetic particle inspection. In- (ii) The tensile strength may not ex-
spection must be performed on the in- ceed 165,000 p.s.i.
side of each container before closing (3) The burst pressure must be at
and externally on each finished con- least 4⁄3 times the test pressure.
tainer after heat treatment. Evidence (4) Cycling-at least 10,000 pressuriza-
of discontinuities, which in the opinion tions.
of a qualified inspector may appre- (q) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat-
ciably weaken or decrease the dura- ment is authorized for rejected cyl-
bility of the cylinder, must be cause for inders. Subsequent thereto, cylinders
rejection. must pass all prescribed tests to be ac-
(o) Leakage test. All spun cylinders ceptable. Repair by welding or spinning
and plugged cylinders must be tested is not authorized. For each cylinder
for leakage by dry gas or dry air pres- subjected to reheat treatment during
sure after the bottom has been cleaned original manufacture, sidewall meas-
and is free from all moisture, subject urements must be made to verify that
to the following conditions and limita- the minimum sidewall thickness meets
tions: specification requirements after the
(1) Pressure, approximately the same final heat treatment.
as but not less than service pressure, (r) Marking. (1) Cylinders must be
must be applied to one side of the fin- marked by low stress type steel stamp-
ished bottom over an area of at least ing in an area and to a depth which
1⁄16 of the total area of the bottom but will insure that the wall thickness
not less than 3⁄4 inch in diameter, in- measured from the root of the stamp-
cluding the closure, for at least one ing to the interior surface is equal to
minute, during which time the other or greater than the minimum pre-
side of the bottom exposed to pressure scribed wall thickness. Stamping must
must be covered with water and closely be permanent and legible. Stamping on
examined for indications of leakage. side wall not authorized.
34
(2) The rejection elastic expansion aspects. However, the check analysis
(REE), in cubic cm (cc), must be tolerances shown in the table in this
marked on the cylinder near the date paragraph (b) may not be exceeded ex-
of test. The REE for a cylinder is 1.05 cept as approved by the Department.
times its original elastic expansion. (2) Material with seams, cracks, lam-
(3) Name plates are authorized, pro- inations, or other injurious defects is
vided that they can be permanently not permitted.
and securely attached to the cylinder. (3) Material used must be identified
Attachment by either brazing or weld- by any suitable method.
ing is not permitted. Attachment by
(c) Manufacture. General manufac-
soldering is permitted provided steel
turing requirements are as follows:
temperature does not exceed 500 °F.
(s) Inspector’s report. In addition to (1) Surface finish must be uniform
the requirements of § 178.35, the inspec- and reasonably smooth.
tor’s report must indicate the rejection (2) Inside surfaces must be clean, dry,
elastic expansion (REE), in cubic cm and free of loose particles.
(cc). (3) No defect of any kind is permitted
if it is likely to weaken a finished cyl-
[Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
amended at 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997; 65 FR inder.
58631, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45385, Aug. 28, 2001; (4) If the cylinder surface is not origi-
67 FR 51652, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75748, 75749, nally free from the defects, the surface
Dec. 31, 2003] may be machined or otherwise treated
to eliminate these defects provided the
§ 178.45 Specification 3T seamless steel minimum wall thickness is main-
cylinder.
tained.
(a) Type, size, and service pressure. A (5) Welding or brazing on a cylinder
DOT 3T cylinder is a seamless steel is not permitted.
cylinder with a minimum water capac- (d) Wall thickness. The minimum wall
ity of 1,000 pounds and a minimum thickness must be such that the wall
service pressure of 1,800 psig. Each cyl-
stress at the minimum specified test
inder must have integrally formed
pressure does not exceed 67 percent of
heads concave to pressure at both ends.
the minimum tensile strength of the
The inside head shape must be hemi-
steel as determined by the physical
spherical, ellipsoidal in which the
tests required in paragraphs (j) and (k)
major axis is two times the minor axis,
or a dished shape falling within these of this section. A wall stress of more
two limits. Permanent closures formed than 90,500 p.s.i. is not permitted. The
by spinning are prohibited. minimum wall thickness for any cyl-
(b) Material, steel. Only open hearth, inder may not be less than 0.225 inch.
basic oxygen, or electric furnace proc- (1) Calculation of the stress for cyl-
ess steel of uniform quality is author- inders must be made by the following
ized. The steel analysis must conform formula:
to the following: S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ d2)
ANALYSIS TOLERANCES Where:
Check Analysis S = Wall stress in psi;
Element Ladle analysis P = Minimum test pressure, at least 5⁄3 serv-
Under Over ice pressure;
Carbon ........................ 0.35 to 0.50 ...... 0.03 0.04 D = Outside diameter in inches;
Manganese ................. 0.75 to 1.05 ...... 0.04 0.04 d = Inside diameter in inches.
Phosphorus (max) ...... 0.035 ................. ............ 0.01
Sulphur (max) ............. 0.04 ................... ............ 0.01 (2) Each cylinder must meet the fol-
Silicon ......................... 0.15 to 0.35 ...... 0.02 0.03
Chromium ................... 0.80 to 1.15 ...... 0.05 0.05
lowing additional requirement which
Molybdenum ............... 0.15 to 0.25 ...... 0.02 0.02 assumes a cylinder horizontally sup-
ported at its two ends and uniformly
(1) A heat of steel made under the loaded over its entire length. This load
specifications in the table in this para- consists of the weight per inch of
graph (b), the ladle analysis of which is length of the straight cylindrical por-
slightly out of the specified range, is tion filled with water compressed to
acceptable if satisfactory in all other the specified test pressure. The wall
35
§ 178.45 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
thickness must be increased when nec- not less than 1050 °F., and must be held
essary to meet this additional require- at this temperature for at least one
ment: hour per inch of thickness based on the
(i) The sum of two times the max- maximum thickness of the cylinder.
imum tensile stress in the bottom fi- Each cylinder must then be cooled
bers due to bending (see paragraph under conditions recommended for the
(d)(2)(ii) of this section), plus the max- steel.
imum tensile stress in the same fibers (f) Openings. Openings in cylinders
due to hydrostatic testing (see para- must comply with the following:
graph (d)(2)(iii) of this section) may (1) Openings are permitted on heads
not exceed 80 percent of the minimum only.
yield strength of the steel at this max-
(2) The size of any centered opening
imum stress.
(ii) The following formula must be in a head may not exceed one half the
used to calculate the maximum tensile outside diameter of the cylinder.
stress due to bending: (3) Openings in a head must have lig-
aments between openings of at least
S = Mc / I three times the average of their hole
Where: diameter. No off-center opening may
S = Tensile stress in psi; exceed 2.625 inches in diameter.
M = Bending moment in inch-pounds (wl2/8); (4) All openings must be circular.
I = Moment of inertia—0.04909 (D4¥d4) in (5) All openings must be threaded.
inches fourth;
Threads must be in compliance with
c = Radius (D/2) of cylinder in inches;
w = Weight per inch of cylinder filled with the following:
water; (i) Each thread must be clean cut,
l = Length of cylinder in inches; even, without any checks, and to
D = Outside diameter in inches; gauge.
d = Inside diameter in inches.
(ii) Taper threads, when used, must
(iii) The following formula must be be the American Standard Pipe thread
used to calculate the maximum longi- (NPT) type and must be in compliance
tudinal tensile stress due to hydro- with the requirements of NBS Hand-
static test pressure: book H–28 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
S = A1 P / A2 chapter).
(iii) Taper threads conforming to Na-
Where:
tional Gas Taper thread (NGT) stand-
S = Tensile stress in psi; ards must be in compliance with the
A1 = Internal area in cross section of cyl- requirements of NBS Handbook H–28.
inder in square inches;
P = Hydrostatic test pressure-psig;
(iv) Straight threads conforming
A2 = Area of metal in cross section of cyl- with National Gas Straight thread
inder in square inches. (NGS) standards are authorized. These
threads must be in compliance with the
(e) Heat treatment. Each completed
requirements of NBS Handbook H–28.
cylinder must be uniformly and prop-
erly heat treated prior to testing, as (g) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder
follows: must be tested at an internal pressure
(1) Each cylinder must be heated and by the water jacket method or other
held at the proper temperature for at suitable method, conforming to the fol-
least one hour per inch of thickness lowing requirements:
based on the maximum thickness of (1) The testing apparatus must be op-
the cylinder and then quenched in a erated in a manner that will obtain ac-
suitable liquid medium having a cool- curate data. Any pressure gauge used
ing rate not in excess of 80 percent of must permit reading to an accuracy of
water. The steel temperature on one percent. Any expansion gauge used
quenching must be that recommended must permit reading of the total ex-
for the steel analysis, but it must pansion to an accuracy of one percent.
never exceed 1750 °F. (2) Any internal pressure applied to
(2) After quenching, each cylinder the cylinder after heat treatment and
must be reheated to a temperature before the official test may not exceed
below the transformation range but 90 percent of the test pressure.
36
(3) The pressure must be maintained allel to the axis of the cylinder. Each
sufficiently long to assure complete ex- cylinder or ring specimen for test must
pansion of the cylinder. In no case may be of the same diameter, thickness, and
the pressure be held less than 30 sec- metal as the finished cylinders they
onds. represent. A test ring must be at least
(4) If, due to failure of the test appa- 24 inches long with ends covered during
ratus, the required test pressure can- the heat treatment process so as to
not be maintained, the test must be re- simulate the heat treatment process of
peated at a pressure increased by 10 the finished cylinders it represents.
percent or 100 psig, whichever is lower (4) A test cylinder or test ring need
or, the cylinder must be reheat treated. represent only one of the heats in a
(5) Permanent volumetric expansion furnace batch provided the other heats
of the cylinder may not exceed 10 per- in the batch have previously been test-
cent of its total volumetric expansion ed and have passed the tests and that
at the required test pressure. such tests do not represent more than
(6) Each cylinder must be tested to at 200 cylinders from any one heat.
least 5⁄3 times its service pressure. (5) The test results must conform to
(h) Ultrasonic examination. After the the requirements specified in para-
hydrostatic test, the cylindrical sec- graphs (j) and (k) of this section.
tion of each vessel must be examined in (6) When the test results do not con-
accordance with ASTM E 213 for shear form to the requirements specified, the
wave and E 114 for straight beam (IBR, cylinders represented by the tests may
Standard see § 171.7 of this subchapter). be reheat treated and the tests re-
The equipment used must be calibrated peated. Paragraph (i)(5) of this section
to detect a notch equal to five percent applies to any retesting.
of the design minimum wall thickness. (j) Basic conditions for acceptable phys-
Any discontinuity indication greater ical testing. The following criteria must
than that produced by the five percent be followed to obtain acceptable phys-
notch must be cause for rejection of ical test results:
the cylinder, unless the discontinuity (1) Each tension specimen must have
is repaired within the requirements of a gauge length of two inches with a
this specification. width not exceeding one and one-half
(i) Basic requirements for tension and inches. Except for the grip ends, the
Charpy impact tests. Cylinders must be specimen may not be flattened. The
subjected to a tension and Charpy im- grip ends may be flattened to within
pact as follows: one inch of each end of the reduced sec-
(1) When the cylinders are heat treat- tion.
ed in a batch furnace, two tension (2) A specimen may not be heated
specimens and three Charpy impact after heat treatment specified in para-
specimens must be tested from one of graph (d) of this section.
the cylinders or a test ring from each (3) The yield strength in tension
batch. The lot size represented by these must be the stress corresponding to a
tests may not exceed 200 cylinders. permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the
(2) When the cylinders are heat treat- gage length.
ed in a continuous furnace, two tension (i) This yield strength must be deter-
specimens and three Charpy impact mined by the ‘‘offset’’ method or the
specimens must be tested from one of ‘‘extension under load’’ method de-
the cylinders or a test ring from each scribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7 of
four hours or less of production. How- this subchapter).
ever, in no case may a test lot based on (ii) For the ‘‘extension under load’’
this production period exceed 200 cyl- method, the total strain (or extension
inders. under load) corresponding to the stress
(3) Each specimen for the tension and at which the 0.2 percent permanent
Charpy impact tests must be taken strain occurs may be determined with
from the side wall of a cylinder or from sufficient accuracy by calculating the
a ring which has been heat treated elastic extension of the gage length
with the finished cylinders of which under appropriate load and adding
the specimens must be representative. thereto 0.2 percent of the gage length.
The axis of the specimens must be par- Elastic extension calculations must be
37
§ 178.46 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
based on an elastic modulus of obtained in each retest may not exceed

30,000,000. However, when the degree of the maximum permitted.
accuracy of this method is question- (l) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat-
able the entire stress-strain diagram ment is authorized for rejected cyl-
must be plotted and the yield strength inders. However, each reheat treated
determined from the 0.2 percent offset. cylinder must subsequently pass all the
(iii) For the purpose of strain meas- prescribed tests. Repair by welding is
urement, the initial strain must be set not authorized.
with the specimen under a stress of (m) Markings. Marking must be done
12,000 p.s.i. and the strain indicator by stamping into the metal of the cyl-
reading set at the calculated cor- inder. All markings must be legible and
responding strain. located on a shoulder.
(iv) The cross-head speed of the test- (n) Inspector’s report. In addition to
ing machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per the requirements of § 178.35, the inspec-
minute during the determination of tor’s report for the physical test re-
yield strength. port, must indicate the average value
(4) Each impact specimen must be for three specimens and the minimum
Charpy V-notch type size 10 mm × 10 value for one specimen for each lot
mm taken in accordance with para- number.
graph 11 of ASTM A 333 (IBR, see § 171.7
of this subchapter). When a reduced [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
size specimen is used, it must be the amended at 66 FR 45385, 43588, Aug. 28, 2001;
67 FR 51652, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 48571, Aug. 14,
largest size obtainable.
2003; 68 FR 75748, 75749, Dec. 31, 2003]
(k) Acceptable physical test results. Re-
sults of physical tests must conform to § 178.46 Specification 3AL seamless
the following: aluminum cylinders.
(1) The tensile strength may not ex-
ceed 155,000 p.s.i. (a) Size and service pressure. A DOT
(2) The elongation must be at least 16 3AL cylinder is a seamless aluminum
percent for a two-inch gage length. cylinder with a maximum water capac-
(3) The Charpy V-notch impact prop- ity of 1000 pounds and minimum service
erties for the three impact specimens pressure of 150 psig.
which must be tested at 0 °F may not (b) Authorized material and identifica-
be less than the values shown as fol- tion of material. The material of con-
lows: struction must meet the following con-
ditions:
Size of specimen Average value Minimum value (1) Starting stock must be cast stock
for acceptance (1 specimen only
(mm) (3 specimens) of the 3) or traceable to cast stock.
(2) Material with seams, cracks, lam-
10.0 × 10.0 ............ 25.0 ft. lbs. ........... 20.0 ft. lbs.
10.0 × 7.5 .............. 21.0 ft. lbs. ........... 17.0 ft. lbs.
inations, or other defects likely to
10.0 × 5.0 .............. 17.0 ft. lbs. ........... 14.0 ft. lbs. weaken the finished cylinder may not
be used.
(4) After the final heat treatment, (3) Material must be identified by a
each vessel must be hardness tested on suitable method that will identify the
the cylindrical section. The tensile alloy, the aluminum producer’s cast
strength equivalent of the hardness number, the solution heat treat batch
number obtained may not be more than number and the lot number.
165,000 p.s.i. (Rc 36). When the result of (4) The material must be of uniform
a hardness test exceeds the maximum quality. Only the following heat treat-
permitted, two or more retests may be able aluminum alloys in table 1 and 2
made; however, the hardness number are permitted as follows:
38
TABLE 1—HEAT OR CAST ANALYSIS FOR ALUMINUM; SIMILAR TO ‘‘ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION’’1 ALLOY
6061
[CHEMICAL ANALYSIS IN WEIGHT PERCENT2]
Other
Si Mg
Fe Cu Mn Cr Zn Ti Pb Bi
min/ min/ A1
max min/max max min/max max max max max each total
max max max max
0.4/0.8 0.7 0.15/0.4 0.15 0.8/1.2 0.04/0.35 0.25 0.15 0.005 0.005 0.05 0.15 Bal.
1 The‘‘Aluminum Association’’ refers to ‘‘Aluminum Standards and Data 1993’’, published by the Aluminum Association Inc.
2 Except for ‘‘Pb’’ and ‘‘Bi’’, the chemical composition corresponds with that of Table 1 of ASTM B 221 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this
subchapter) for Aluminum Association alloy 6061.
TABLE 2—MECHANICAL PROPERTY LIMITS

Tensile strength—PSI Elongation—percent
Alloy and temper minimum for 2″ or
Ultimate—minimum Yield—minimum 4D 1 size specimen
6061–T6 .................................................................................. 38,000 35,000 214
1 ‘‘D’’
represents specimen diameters. When the cylinder wall is greater than 3⁄16 inch thick, a retest without reheat treatment
using the 4D size specimen is authorized if the test using the 2 inch size specimen fails to meet elongation requirements.
2 When cylinder wall is not over 3⁄16-inch thick, 10 percent elongation is authorized when using a 24t × 6t size test specimen.
(5) All starting stock must be 100 per- have a basic torispherical, hemi-
cent ultrasonically inspected, along spherical, or ellipsoidal interior base
the length at right angles to the cen- configuration where the dish radius is
tral axis from two positions at 90° to no greater than 1.2 times the inside di-
one another. The equipment and con- ameter of the shell. The knuckle radius
tinuous scanning procedure must be ca- may not be less than 12 percent of the
pable of detecting and rejecting inter- inside diameter of the shell. The inte-
nal defects such as cracks which have rior base contour may deviate from the
an ultrasonic response greater than true torispherical, hemispherical or el-
that of a calibration block with a 5⁄64- lipsoidal configuration provided that—
inch diameter flat bottomed hole. (i) Any areas of deviation are accom-
(6) Cast stock must have uniform panied by an increase in base thick-
equiaxed grain structure not to exceed ness;
500 microns maximum. (ii) All radii of merging surfaces are
(7) Any starting stock not complying equal to or greater than the knuckle
with the provisions of paragraphs (b)(1) radius;
through (b)(6) of this section must be (iii) Each design has been qualified
rejected. by successfully passing the cycling
(c) Manufacture. Cylinders must be tests in this paragraph (c); and
manufactured in accordance with the (iv) Detailed specifications of the
following requirements: base design are available to the inspec-
(1) Cylinder shells must be manufac- tor.
tured by the backward extrusion meth- (3) For free standing cylinders, the
od and have a cleanliness level ade- base thickness must be at least two
quate to ensure proper inspection. No times the minimum wall thickness
fissure or other defect is acceptable along the line of contact between the
that is likely to weaken the finished cylinder base and the floor when the
cylinder below the design strength re- cylinders are in the vertical position.
quirements. A reasonably smooth and (4) Welding or brazing is prohibited.
uniform surface finish is required. If (5) Each new design and any signifi-
not originally free from such defects, cant change to any acceptable design
the surface may be machined or other- must be qualified for production by
wise conditioned to eliminate these de- testing prototype samples as follows:
fects. (i) Three samples must be subjected
(2) Thickness of the cylinder base to 100,000 pressure reversal cycles be-
may not be less than the prescribed tween zero and service pressure or
minimum wall thickness of the cylin- 10,000 pressure reversal cycles between
drical shell. The cylinder base must zero and test pressure, at a rate not in
39
§ 178.46 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
excess of 10 cycles per minute without times the average of the diameters of
failure. the two openings.
(ii) Three samples must be pressur- (4) All openings must be circular.
ized to destruction and failure may not (5) All openings must be threaded.
occur at less than 2.5 times the marked Threads must comply with the fol-
cylinder service pressure. Each cyl- lowing:
inder must remain in one piece. Fail- (i) Each thread must be clean cut,
ure must initiate in the cylinder side- even, without checks, and to gauge.
wall in a longitudinal direction. Rate (ii) Taper threads, when used, must
of pressurization may not exceed 200 conform to one of the following:
psig per second. (A) American Standard Pipe Thread
(6) In this specification ‘‘significant (NPT) type, conforming to the require-
change’’ means a 10 percent or greater ments of NBS Handbook H–28 (IBR, see
change in cylinder wall thickness, serv- § 171.7 of this subchapter);
ice pressure, or diameter; a 30 percent (B) National Gas Taper Thread (NGT)
or greater change in water capacity or type, conforming to the requirements
base thickness; any change in material; of NBS Handbook H–28; or
over 100 percent increase in size of (C) Other taper threads conforming
openings; or any change in the number to other standards may be used pro-
of openings. vided the length is not less than that
(d) Wall thickness. The minimum wall specified for NPT threads.
thickness must be such that the wall (iii) Straight threads, when used,
stress at the minimum specified test must conform to one of the following:
pressure will not exceed 80 percent of (A) National Gas Straight Thread
the minimum yield strength nor exceed (NGS) type, conforming to the require-
67 percent of the minimum ultimate ments of NBS Handbook H–28;
tensile strength as verified by physical (B) Unified Thread (UN) type, con-
tests in paragraph (i) of this section. forming to the requirements of NBS
The minimum wall thickness for any Handbook H–28;
cylinder with an outside diameter (C) Controlled Radius Root Thread
greater than 5 inches must be 0.125 (UN) type, conforming to the require-
inch. Calculations must be made by the ments of NBS Handbook H–28; or
following formula: (D) Other straight threads con-
forming to other recognized standards
S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ d2) may be used provided that the require-
Where: ments in paragraph (e)(5)(iv) of this
S = Wall stress in psi;
section are met.
P = Prescribed minimum test pressure in (iv) All straight threads must have at
psig (see paragraph (g) of this section); least 6 engaged threads, a tight fit, and
D = Outside diameter in inches; and a factor of safety in shear of at least 10
d = Inside diameter in inches. at the test pressure of the cylinder.
Shear stress must be calculated by
(e) Openings. Openings must comply using the appropriate thread shear area
with the following requirements: in accordance with NBS Handbook H–
(1) Openings are permitted in heads 28.
only. (f) Heat treatment. Prior to any test,
(2) The size of any centered opening all cylinders must be subjected to a so-
in a head may not exceed one-half the lution heat treatment and aging treat-
outside diameter of the cylinder. ment appropriate for the aluminum
(3) Other openings are permitted in alloy used.
the head of a cylinder if: (g) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder
(i) Each opening does not exceed 2.625 must be subjected to an internal test
inches in diameter, or one-half the out- pressure using the water jacket equip-
side diameter of the cylinder; which- ment and method or other suitable
ever is less; equipment and method and comply
(ii) Each opening is separated from with the following requirements:
each other by a ligament; and (1) The testing apparatus must be op-
(iii) Each ligament which separates erated in a manner so as to obtain ac-
two openings must be at least three curate data. The pressure gauge used
40
must permit reading to an accuracy of wall thickness is authorized to qualify

one percent. The expansion gauge must lots that fail the flattening test of this
permit reading the total expansion to section without reheat treatment. If
an accuracy of either one percent or 0.1 used, this test must be performed on
cubic centimeter. two samples from one cylinder taken
(2) The test pressure must be main- at random out of each lot of 200 cyl-
tained for a sufficient period of time to inders or less.
assure complete expansion of the cyl- (3) Each test cylinder must withstand
inder. In no case may the pressure be flattening to nine times the wall thick-
held less than 30 seconds. If, due to fail- ness without cracking. When the alter-
ure of the test apparatus, the required nate bend test is used, the test speci-
test pressure cannot be maintained, mens must remain uncracked when
the test may be repeated at a pressure bent inward around a mandrel in the
increased by 10 percent or 100 psig, direction of curvature of the cylinder
whichever is lower. If the test appa- wall until the interior edges are at a
ratus again fails to maintain the test distance apart not greater than the di-
pressure, the cylinder being tested
ameter of the mandrel.
must be rejected. Any internal pressure
applied to the cylinder before any offi- (i) Mechanical properties test. Two test
cial test may not exceed 90 percent of specimens cut from one cylinder rep-
the test pressure. resenting each lot of 200 cylinders or
(3) The minimum test pressure is the less must be subjected to the mechan-
greatest of the following: ical properties test, as follows:
(i) 450 psig regardless of service pres- (1) The results of the test must con-
sure; form to at least the minimum accept-
(ii) Two times the service pressure able mechanical property limits for
for cylinders having service pressure aluminum alloys as specified in para-
less than 500 psig; or graph (b) of this section.
(iii) Five-thirds times the service (2) Specimens must be 4D bar or
pressure for cylinders having a service gauge length 2 inches with width not
pressure of at least 500 psig. over 11⁄2 inch taken in the direction of
(4) Permanent volumetric expansion extrusion approximately 180° from each
may not exceed 10 percent of total vol- other; provided that gauge length at
umetric expansion at test pressure. least 24 times thickness with width not
(h) Flattening test. One cylinder taken over 6 times thickness is authorized,
at random out of each lot must be sub- when cylinder wall is not over 3⁄16 inch
jected to a flattening test as follows: thick. The specimen, exclusive of grip
(1) The test must be between knife ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends
edges, wedge shaped, having a 60° in- may be flattened to within one inch of
cluded angle, and rounded in accord- each end of the reduced section. When
ance with the following table. The lon- the size of the cylinder does not permit
gitudinal axis of the cylinder must be securing straight specimens, the speci-
at an angle 90° to the knife edges dur- mens may be taken in any location or
ing the test. The flattening test table direction and may be straightened or
is as follows: flattened cold by pressure only, not by
TABLE 3—FLATTENING TEST TABLE blows. When such specimens are used,
the inspector’s report must show that
Radius the specimens were so taken and pre-
Cylinder wall thickness in inches in
inches pared. Heating of specimens for any
purpose is forbidden.
Under .150 ............................................................... .500
.150 to .249 ............................................................. .875
(3) The yield strength in tension
.250 to .349 ............................................................. 1.500 must be the stress corresponding to a
.350 to .449 ............................................................. 2.125 permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the
.450 to .549 ............................................................. 2.750
.550 to .649 ............................................................. 3.500
gauge length.
.650 to .749 ............................................................. 4.125 (i) The yield strength must be deter-
mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or
(2) An alternate bend test in accord- the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as
ance with ASTM E 290 using a mandrel prescribed in ASTM B 557 (IBR, see
diameter not more than 6 times the § 171.7 of this subchapter).
41
§ 178.47 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(ii) In using the ‘‘extension under (3) The inspector must also deter-
load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex- mine that each cylinder complies with
tension under load’’) corresponding to this specification by:
the stress at which the 0.2 percent per- (i) Selecting the samples for check
manent strain occurs may be deter- analyses performed by other than the
mined with sufficient accuracy by cal- material producer;
culating the elastic extension of the (ii) Verifying that the prescribed
gauge length under appropriate load minimum thickness was met by meas-
and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the uring or witnessing the measurement
gauge length. Elastic extension cal- of the wall thickness; and
culations must be based on an elastic (iii) Verifying that the identification
modulus of 10,000,000 psi. In the event of material is proper.
of controversy, the entire stress-strain (4) Prior to initial production of any
diagram must be plotted and the yield design or design change, verify that the
strength determined from the 0.2 per- design qualification tests prescribed in
cent offset. paragraph (c)(6) of this section have
(iii) For the purpose of strain meas- been performed with acceptable re-
urement, the initial strain must be set sults.
while the specimen is under a stress of (l) Definitions. (1) In this specifica-
6,000 psi, the strain indicator reading tion, a ‘‘lot’’ means a group of cyl-
being set at the calculated cor- inders successively produced having
responding strain. the same:
(iv) Cross-head speed of the testing (i) Size and configuration;
machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per
(ii) Specified material of construc-
minute during yield strength deter-
tion;
mination.
(iii) Process of manufacture and heat
(j) Rejected cylinder. Reheat treat-
treatment;
ment of rejected cylinders is author-
ized one time. Subsequent thereto, cyl- (iv) Equipment of manufacture and
inders must pass all prescribed tests to heat treatment; and
be acceptable. (v) Conditions of time, temperature
(k) Duties of inspector. In addition to and atmosphere during heat treatment.
the requirements of § 178.35, the inspec- (2) In no case may the lot size exceed
tor shall: 200 cylinders, but any cylinder proc-
(1) Verify compliance with the provi- essed for use in the required destruc-
sions of paragraph (b) of this section tive physical testing need not be count-
by: ed as being one of the 200.
(i) Performing or witnessing the per- (m) Inspector’s report. In addition to
formance of the chemical analyses on the information required by § 178.35, the
each melt or cast lot or other unit of record of chemical analyses must also
starting material; or include the alloy designation, and ap-
(ii) Obtaining a certified chemical plicable information on iron, titanium,
analysis from the material or cylinder zinc, magnesium and any other appli-
manufacturer for each melt, or cast of cable element used in the construction
material; or of the cylinder.
(iii) Obtaining a certified check anal- [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
ysis on one cylinder out of each lot of amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR
200 cylinders or less, if a certificate 51652, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75749, Dec. 31, 2003;
containing data to indicate compliance 77 FR 60943, Oct. 5, 2012]
with the material specification is ob-
tained. § 178.47 Specification 4DS welded
(2) The inspector must verify ultra- stainless steel cylinders for aircraft
sonic inspection of all material by in- use.
spection or by obtaining the material (a) Type, size, and service pressure. A
producer’s certificate of ultrasonic in- DOT 4DS cylinder is either a welded
spection. Ultrasonic inspection must be stainless steel sphere (two seamless
performed or verified as having been hemispheres) or circumferentially

performed in accordance with para- welded cylinder both with a water ca-
graph (b)(5) of this section. pacity of not over 100 pounds and a
42
service pressure of at least 500 but not specified range, is acceptable, if satis-
over 900 psig. factory in all other respects, provided
(b) Steel. Types 304, 321 and 347 stain- the tolerances shown in table 2 in this
less steel are authorized with proper paragraph (b) are not exceeded, except
welding procedure. A heat of steel as approved by Associate Adminis-
made under the specifications in table trator. The following chemical anal-
1 in this paragraph (b), check chemical yses are authorized:
analysis of which is slightly out of the
Stainless steels
304 (percent) 321 (percent) 347 (percent)
Carbon (max) ....................................................... 0.08 0.08 0.08

Manganese (max) ................................................ 2.00 2.00 2.00
Phosphorus (max) ............................................... .030 .030 .030
Sulphur (max) ...................................................... .030 .030 .030
Silicon (max) ........................................................ .75 .75 .75
Nickel ................................................................... 8.0/11.0 9.0/13.0 9.0/13.0
Chromium ............................................................ 18.0/20.0 17.0/20.0 17.0/20.0
Molybdenum
Titanium ............................................................... (1)
Columbium ........................................................... (2)
1 Titaniummay not be more than 5C and not more than 0.60%.
2 Columbium may not be less than 10C and not more than 1.0%.

under the minimum limit
Element Limit or maximum specified (percent)
Carbon ..................................................... To 0.15 incl ...................................................................... 0.01 0.01

Manganese .............................................. Over 1.15 to 2.50 incl ..................................................... 0.05 0.05
Phosphorus1 ............................................ All ranges ........................................................................ .................... .01
Sulphur .................................................... All ranges ........................................................................ .................... .01
Silicon ...................................................... Over 0.30 to 1.00 incl ..................................................... .05 .05
Nickel ....................................................... Over 5.30 to 10.00 incl .................................................... .10 .10
Over 10.00 to 14.00 incl .................................................. .15 .15
Chromium ................................................ Over 15.00 to 20.00 incl .................................................. .20 .20
Titanium ................................................... All ranges ........................................................................ .05 .05
Columbium .............................................. All ranges ........................................................................ .05 .05
1Rephosphorized steels not subject to check analysis for phosphorus.
(c) Identification of material. Materials butt type and means must be provided
must be identified by any suitable for accomplishing complete penetra-
method. tion of the joint.
(d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be (e) Attachments. Attachments to the
manufactured using equipment and container are authorized by fusion
processes adequate to ensure that each welding provided that such attach-
cylinder produced conforms to the re- ments are made of weldable stainless
quirements of this subpart. No defect is
steel in accordance with paragraph (b)
permitted that is likely to weaken the
of this section.
finished cylinder appreciably, a reason-
ably smooth and uniform surface finish (f) Wall thickness. The minimum wall
is required. No abrupt change in wall thickness must be such that the wall
thickness is permitted. Welding proce- stress at the minimum specified test
dures and operators must be qualified pressure may not be over 60,000 psig. A
in accordance with CGA Pamphlet C–3 minimum wall thickness of 0.040 inch is
(IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). All required for any diameter container.
seams of the sphere or cylinder must be Calculations must be made by the fol-
fusion welded. Seams must be of the lowing formulas:
43
§ 178.47 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(1) Calculation for sphere must be but not more than 110 percent, of the
made by the formula: test pressure and maintained at this
pressure for a minimum of 3 minutes.
S = PD / 4tE Total and permanent expansion must
Where: be recorded and included in the inspec-
S = Wall stress in psi; tor’s report.
P = Test pressure prescribed for water jacket (j) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder
test, i.e., at least two times service pres- must successfully withstand a hydro-
sure, in psig; static test as follows:
D = Outside diameter in inches; (1) The test must be by water-jacket,
t = Minimum wall thickness in inches;
E = 0.85 (provides 85 percent weld efficiency operated so as to obtain accurate data.
factor which must be applied in the girth The pressure gauge must permit read-
weld area and heat zones which zone ing to an accuracy of 1 percent. The ex-
must extend a distance of 6 times wall pansion gauge must permit reading of
thickness from center of weld); total expansion to an accuracy either
E = 1.0 (for all other areas). of 1 percent or 0.1 cubic centimeter.
(2) Calculation for a cylinder must be (2) Pressure must be maintained for
made by the formula: at least 30 seconds and sufficiently
longer to ensure complete expansion.
S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ d2) If, due to failure of the test apparatus,
Where: the test pressure cannot be main-
S = Wall stress in psi; tained, the test may be repeated at a
P = Test pressure prescribed for water jacket pressure increased by 10 percent or 100
test, i.e., at least two times service pres- psig, whichever is the lower.
sure, in psig; (3) Permanent volumetric expansion
D = Outside diameter in inches; may not exceed 10 percent of total vol-
d = Inside diameter in inches. umetric expansion at test pressure.
(g) Heat treatment. The seamless (4) Each container must be tested to
hemispheres and cylinders may be at least 2 times service pressure.
stress relieved or annealed for forming. (5) Container must then be inspected.
Welded container must be stress re- Any wall thickness lower than that re-
lieved at a temperature of 775 °F ±25° quired by paragraph (f) of this section
after process treatment and before hy- must be cause for rejection. Bulges and
drostatic test. cracks must be cause for rejection.
(h) Openings in container. Openings Welded joint defects exceeding require-
must comply with the following: ments of paragraph (k) of this section
(1) Each opening in the container must be cause for rejection.
must be provided with a fitting, boss or (k) Radiographic inspection. Radio-
pad of weldable stainless steel securely graphic inspection is required on all
attached to the container by fusion welded joints which are subjected to in-
welding. ternal pressure, except that at the dis-
(2) Attachments to a fitting, boss, or cretion of the disinterested inspector,
pad must be adequate to prevent leak- openings less than 25 percent of the
age. Threads must comply with the fol- container diameter need not be sub-
lowing: jected to radiographic inspection. Evi-
(i) Threads must be clean cut, even, dence of any defects likely to seriously
without checks, and tapped to gauge. weaken the container is cause for re-
(ii) Taper threads to be of length not jection. Radiographic inspection must
less than as specified for American be performed subsequent to the hydro-
Standard taper pipe threads. static test.
(iii) Straight threads having at least (l) Burst test. One container taken at
4 engaged threads, to have tight fit and random out of 200 or less must be
calculated shear strength at least 10 hydrostatically tested to destruction.
times the test pressure of the con- Rupture pressure must be included as
tainer; gaskets required, adequate to part of the inspector’s report.
prevent leakage. (m) Flattening test. A flattening test
(i) Process treatment. Each container must be performed as follows:

must be hydraulically pressurized in a (1) For spheres the test must be at
water jacket to at least 100 percent, the weld between parallel steel plates
44
on a press with welded seam at right (c) Identification of material. Material

angles to the plates. Test one sphere must be identified by any suitable
taken at random out of each lot of 200 method except that plates and billets
or less after the hydrostatic test. Any for hotdrawn cylinders must be marked
projecting appurtenances may be cut with the heat number.
off (by mechanical means only) prior to (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be
crushing. manufactured using equipment and
(2) For cylinders the test must be be- processes adequate to ensure that each
tween knife edges, wedge shaped, 60° cylinder produced conforms to the re-
angle, rounded to 1⁄2-inch radius. Test quirements of this subpart. No defect is
one cylinder taken at random out of permitted that is likely to weaken the
each lot of 200 or less, after the hydro- finished cylinder appreciably. A rea-
static test. sonably smooth and uniform surface
(n) Acceptable results for flattening and finish is required. Exposed bottom
burst tests. Acceptable results for flat- welds on cylinders over 18 inches long
tening and burst tests are as follows: must be protected by footrings. Weld-
(1) Flattening required to 50 percent ing procedures and operators must be
of the original outside diameter with- qualified in accordance with CGA Pam-
out cracking. phlet C–3 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
(2) Burst pressure must be at least 3 chapter). Seams must be made as fol-
times the service pressure. lows:
(o) Rejected containers. Repair of weld- (1) Welded or brazed circumferential
ed seams by welding prior to process seams. Heads attached by brazing must
treatment is authorized. Subsequent have a driving fit with the shell, unless
thereto, containers must be heat treat- the shell is crimped, swedged, or curled
ed and pass all prescribed tests. over the skirt or flange of the head,
(p) Duties of inspector. In addition to and be thoroughly brazed until com-
the requirements of § 178.35, the inspec- plete penetration by the brazing mate-
tor must verify that all tests are con- rial of the brazed joint is secured.
ducted at temperatures between 60 °F Depth of brazing from end of shell must
and 90 °F. be at least four times the thickness of
(q) Marking. Markings must be shell metal.
stamped plainly and permanently on a (2) Longitudinal seams in shells. Longi-
permanent attachment or on a metal tudinal seams must be forged lap weld-
nameplate permanently secured to the ed, by copper brazing, by copper alloy
container by means other than soft sol- brazing, or by silver alloy brazing. Cop-
der. per alloy composition must be: Copper,
[Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
95 percent minimum; Silicon, 1.5 per-
amended at 66 FR 45386, 45388, Aug. 28, 2001; cent to 3.85 percent; Manganese, 0.25
67 FR 51653, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, percent to 1.10 percent. The melting
2003] point of the silver alloy brazing mate-
rial must be in excess of 1000 °F. When
§ 178.50 Specification 4B welded or brazed, the plate edge must be lapped
brazed steel cylinders. at least eight times the thickness of
(a) Type, size, and service pressure. A plate, laps being held in position, sub-
DOT 4B is a welded or brazed steel cyl- stantially metal to metal, by riveting
inder with longitudinal seams that are or electric spot-welding; brazing must
forged lap-welded or brazed and with be done by using a suitable flux and by
water capacity (nominal) not over 1,000 placing brazing material on one side of
pounds and a service pressure of at seam and applying heat until this ma-
least 150 but not over 500 psig. Cyl- terial shows uniformly along the seam
inders closed in by spinning process are of the other side.
not authorized. (e) Welding or brazing. Only the at-
(b) Steel. Open-hearth, electric or tachment of neckrings, footrings, han-
basic oxygen process steel of uniform dles, bosses, pads, and valve protection
quality must be used. Content percent rings to the tops and bottoms of cyl-
may not exceed the following: Carbon, inders by welding or brazing is author-
0.25; phosphorus, 0.045; sulphur, 0.050. ized. Such attachments and the portion
45
§ 178.50 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
of the container to which they are at- (ii) Taper threads to be of length not
tached must be made of weldable steel, less than as specified for American
the carbon content of which may not Standard taper pipe threads.
exceed 0.25 percent except in the case (iii) Straight threads, having at least
of 4130X steel which may be used with 4 engaged threads, to have tight fit and
proper welding procedure. calculated shear strength at least 10
(f) Wall thickness. The wall thickness times the test pressure of the cylinder;
of the cylinder must comply with the gaskets required, adequate to prevent
following requirements: leakage.
(1) For cylinders with outside diame- (iv) A brass fitting may be brazed to
ters over 6 inches the minimum wall the steel boss or flange on cylinders
thickness must be 0.090 inch. In any used as component parts of hand fire
case, the minimum wall thickness extinguishers.
must be such that calculated wall (2) The closure of a fitting, boss, or
stress at minimum test pressure (para- pad must be adequate to prevent leak-
graph (i)(4) of this section) may not ex- age.
ceed the following values: (i) Hydrostatic test. Cylinders must
(i) 24,000 psi for cylinders without withstand a hydrostatic test as follows:
longitudinal seam. (1) The test must be by water-jacket,
(ii) 22,800 psig for cylinders having or other suitable method, operated so
copper brazed or silver alloy brazed as to obtain accurate data. The pres-
longitudinal seam. sure gauge must permit reading to an
(iii) 18,000 psi for cylinders having accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion
forged lapped welded longitudinal gauge must permit reading of total ex-
seam. pansion to an accuracy either of 1 per-
cent or 0.1 cubic centimeter.
(2) Calculation must be made by the
(2) Pressure must be maintained for
formula:
at least 30 seconds and sufficiently
S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ d2) longer to ensure complete expansion.
Any internal pressure applied after
Where:
heat-treatment and previous to the of-
S = wall stress in psi; ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of
P = minimum test pressure prescribed for
the test pressure. If, due to failure of
water jacket test or 450 psig whichever is
the greater; the test apparatus, the test pressure
D = outside diameter in inches; cannot be maintained, the test may be
d = inside diameter in inches. repeated at a pressure increased by 10
percent or 100 psig, whichever is the
(g) Heat treatment. Cylinder body and lower.
heads, formed by drawing or pressing, (3) Permanent volumetric expansion
must be uniformly and properly heat may not exceed 10 percent of total vol-
treated prior to tests. umetric expansion at test pressure.
(h) Opening in cylinders. Openings in (4) Cylinders must be tested as fol-
cylinders must conform to the follows:
lowing: (i) At least one cylinder selected at
(1) Each opening in cylinders, except random out of each lot of 200 or less
those for safety devices, must be pro- must be tested as outlined in para-
vided with a fitting, boss, or pad, se- graphs (i)(1), (i)(2), and (i)(3) of this sec-
curely attached to cylinder by brazing tion to at least two times service pres-
or by welding or by threads. Fitting, sure.
boss, or pad must be of steel suitable (ii) All cylinders not tested as out-
for the method of attachment em- lined in paragraph (i)(4)(i) of this sec-
ployed, and which need not be identi- tion must be examined under pressure
fied or verified as to analysis except of at least two times service pressure
that if attachment is by welding, car- and show no defect.
bon content may not exceed 0.25 per- (j) Flattening test. After the hydro-
cent. If threads are used, they must static test, a flattening test must be
comply with the following: performed on one cylinder taken at

(i) Threads must be clean cut, even random out or each lot of 200 or less, by
without checks, and tapped to gauge. placing the cylinder between wedge
46
shaped knife edges having a 60° in- prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7
cluded angle, rounded to 1⁄2-inch radius. of this subchapter).
The longitudinal axis of the cylinder (ii) In using the ‘‘extension under
must be at a 90-degree angle to knife load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex-
edges during the test. For lots of 30 or tension under load’’) corresponding to
less, flattening tests are authorized to the stress at which the 0.2 percent per-
be made on a ring at least 8 inches long manent strain occurs may be deter-
cut from each cylinder and subjected to mined with sufficient accuracy by cal-
same heat treatment as the finished culating the elastic extension of the
cylinder. gauge length under appropriate load
(k) Physical test. A physical test must and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the
be conducted to determine yield gauge length. Elastic extension cal-
strength, tensile strength, elongation, culations must be based on an elastic
and reduction of area of material as modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of
follows: controversy, the entire stress-strain
(1) The test is required on 2 speci- diagram must be plotted and the yield
mens cut from 1 cylinder, or part strength determined from the 0.2 per-
thereof heat-treated as required, taken cent offset.
at random out of each lot of 200 or less. (iii) For the purpose of strain meas-
For lots of 30 or less, physical tests are urement, the initial strain must be set
authorized to be made on a ring at while the specimen is under a stress of
least 8 inches long cut from each cyl- 12,000 psi, and strain indicator reading
inder and subjected to same heat treat- must be set at the calculated cor-
ment as the finished cylinder. responding strain.
(2) Specimens must conform to the (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing
following: machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per
(i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a minute during yield strength deter-
width of not over 11⁄2 inches, a gauge mination.
length of 2 inches with a width of not (l) Acceptable results for physical and
over 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge length at flattening tests. Either of the following
least 24 times the thickness with a is an acceptable result:
width not over 6 times the thickness is (1) An elongation of at least 40 per-
authorized when a cylinder wall is not cent for a 2-inch gauge length or at
over 3⁄16 inch thick. least 20 percent in other cases and
(ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip yield strength not over 73 percent of
ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends tensile strength. In this instance, a
may be flattened to within one inch of flattening test is not required.
each end of the reduced section. (2) When cylinders are constructed of
(iii) When size of cylinder does not lap welded pipe, flattening test is re-
permit securing straight specimens, quired, without cracking, to 6 times
the specimens may be taken in any lo- the wall thickness. In such case, the
cation or direction and may be rings (crop ends) cut from each end of
straightened or flattened cold, by pres- pipe, must be tested with the weld 45°
sure only, not by blows. When speci- or less from the point of greatest
mens are so taken and prepared, the in- stress. If a ring fails, another from the
spector’s report must show in connec- same end of pipe may be tested.
tion with record of physical tests de- (m) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat-
tailed information in regard to such ment is authorized for rejected cyl-
specimens. inder. Subsequent thereto, cylinders
(iv) Heating of a specimen for any must pass all prescribed tests to be ac-
purpose is not authorized. ceptable. Repair of brazed seams by
(3) The yield strength in tension brazing and welded seams by welding is
must be the stress corresponding to a authorized.
permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the (n) Markings. Markings must be
gauge length. The following conditions stamped plainly and permanently in
apply: any of the following locations on the
(i) The yield strength must be deter- cylinder:

mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or (1) On shoulders and top heads when
the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as they are not less than 0.087-inch thick.
47
§ 178.51 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(2) On side wall adjacent to top head (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be
for side walls which are not less than manufactured using equipment and
0.090 inch thick. processes adequate to ensure that each
(3) On a cylindrical portion of the cylinder produced conforms to the re-
shell which extends beyond the requirements of this subpart. No defect is
cessed bottom of the cylinder, consti- permitted that is likely to weaken the
tuting an integral and non-pressure finished cylinder appreciably. A rea-
part of the cylinder. sonably smooth and uniform surface
(4) On a metal plate attached to the finish is required. Exposed bottom
top of the cylinder or permanent part welds on cylinders over 18 inches long
thereof; sufficient space must be left on must be protected by footrings.
the plate to provide for stamping at (1) Seams must be made as follows:
least six retest dates; the plate must be (i) Minimum thickness of heads and
at least 1⁄16-inch thick and must be at- bottoms must be not less than 90 per-
tached by welding, or by brazing. The cent of the required thickness of the
brazing rod must melt at a tempera- side wall.
ture of 1100 °F. Welding or brazing (ii) Circumferential seams must be
must be along all the edges of the made by welding or by brazing. Heads
plate. must be attached by brazing and must
(5) On the neck, neckring, valve boss, have a driving fit with the shell, unless
valve protection sleeve, or similar part the shell is crimped, swedged or curled
permanently attached to the top of the over the skirt or flange of the head and
cylinder. must be thoroughly brazed until com-
(6) On the footring permanently at- plete penetration by the brazing mate-
tached to the cylinder, provided the rial of the brazed joint is secured.
water capacity of the cylinder does not Depth of brazing from end of the shell
exceed 25 pounds. must be at least four times the thick-
ness of shell metal.
[Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as (iii) Longitudinal seams in shells
amended at 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997; 66 FR must be made by copper brazing, cop-
45385, 45388, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51653, Aug. 8, per alloy brazing, or by silver alloy
2002; 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, 2003]
brazing. Copper alloy composition
§ 178.51 Specification 4BA welded or must be: Copper 95 percent minimum,
brazed steel cylinders. Silicon 1.5 percent to 3.85 percent, Man-
ganese 0.25 percent to 1.10 percent. The
(a) Type, size, and service pressure. A melting point of the silver alloy braz-
DOT 4BA cylinder is a cylinder, either ing material must be in excess of 1,000
spherical or cylindrical in shape, with °F. The plate edge must be lapped at
a water capacity of 1,000 pounds or less least eight times the thickness of
and a service pressure of at least 225 plate, laps being held in position, sub-
and not over 500 psig. Closures made by stantially metal to metal, by riveting
the spinning process are not author- or by electric spot-welding. Brazing
ized. must be done by using a suitable flux
(1) Spherical type cylinders must be and by placing brazing material on one
made from two seamless hemispheres side of seam and applying heat until
joined by the welding of one circum- this material shows uniformly along
ferential seam. the seam of the other side. Strength of
(2) Cylindrical type cylinders must be longitudinal seam: Copper brazed lon-
of circumferentially welded or brazed gitudinal seam must have strength at
construction. least 3⁄2 times the strength of the steel
(b) Steel. The steel used in the con- wall.
struction of the cylinder must be as (2) Welding procedures and operators
specified in table 1 of appendix A to must be qualified in accordance with
this part. CGA Pamphlet C–3 (IBR, see § 171.7 of
(c) Identification of material. Material this subchapter).
must be identified by any suitable (e) Welding and brazing. Only the
method except that plates and billets welding or brazing of neckrings,

for hotdrawn cylinders must be marked footrings, handles, bosses, pads, and
with the heat number. valve protection rings to the tops and
48
bottoms of cylinders is authorized. zone must extend a distance of 6 times

Provided that such attachments and wall thickness from center line of weld);
the portion of the container to which E = 1.0 (for all other areas).
they are attached are made of weldable (4) For a cylinder with a wall thick-
steel, the carbon content of which may ness less than 0.100 inch, the ratio of
not exceed 0.25 percent except in the tangential length to outside diameter
case of 4130 × steel which may be used may not exceed 4.1.
with proper welding procedure. (g) Heat treatment. Cylinders must be
(f) Wall thickness. The minimum wall heat treated in accordance with the
thickness of the cylinder must meet following requirements:
the following conditions: (1) Each cylinder must be uniformly
(1) For any cylinder with an outside and properly heat treated prior to test
diameter of greater than 6 inches, the by the applicable method shown in
minimum wall thickness is 0.078 inch. table 1 of appendix A to this part. Heat
In any case the minimum wall thick- treatment must be accomplished after
ness must be such that the calculated all forming and welding operations, ex-
wall stress at the minimum test pres- cept that when brazed joints are used,
sure may not exceed the lesser value of heat treatment must follow any form-
any of the following: ing and welding operations, but may be
(i) The value shown in table 1 of ap- done before, during or after the brazing
pendix A to this part, for the particular operations.
material under consideration; (2) Heat treatment is not required
(ii) One-half of the minimum tensile after the welding or brazing of weldable
strength of the material determined as low carbon parts to attachments of
required in paragraph (j) of this sec- similar material which have been pre-
tion; viously welded or brazed to the top or
(iii) 35,000 psi; or bottom of cylinders and properly heat
(iv) Further provided that wall stress treated, provided such subsequent
for cylinders having copper brazed lon- welding or brazing does not produce a
gitudinal seams may not exceed 95 per- temperature in excess of 400 °F in any
cent of any of the above values. Meas- part of the top or bottom material.
ured wall thickness may not include (h) Openings in cylinders. Openings in
galvanizing or other protective coat- cylinders must comply with the fol-
ing. lowing requirements:
(2) Cylinders that are cylindrical in (1) Any opening must be placed on
shape must have the wall stress cal- other than a cylindrical surface.
culated by the formula: (2) Each opening in a spherical type
S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ d2) cylinder must be provided with a fit-
ting, boss, or pad of weldable steel se-
Where:
curely attached to the container by fu-
S = wall stress in psi; sion welding.
(3) Each opening in a cylindrical type
water jacket test;
D = outside diameter in inches;
cylinder must be provided with a fit-
d = inside diameter in inches. ting, boss, or pad, securely attached to
container by brazing or by welding.
(3) Cylinders that are spherical in (4) If threads are used, they must
shape must have the wall stress cal- comply with the following:
culated by the formula: (i) Threads must be clean-cut, even,
S = PD / 4tE without checks and tapped to gauge.
(ii) Taper threads must be of a length
Where:
not less than that specified for Amer-
S = wall stress in psi; ican Standard taper pipe threads.
(iii) Straight threads, having at least
water jacket test;
D = outside diameter in inches; 4 engaged threads, must have a tight
t = minimum wall thickness in inches; fit and a calculated shear strength of
E = 0.85 (provides 85 percent weld efficiency at least 10 times the test pressure of
factor which must be applied in the girth the cylinder. Gaskets, adequate to pre-
weld area and heat affected zones which vent leakage, are required.
49
§ 178.51 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(i) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder over 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge length at
must successfully withstand a hydro- least 24 times the thickness with a
static test, as follows: width not over 6 times the thickness is
(1) The test must be by water jacket, authorized when a cylinder wall is not
or other suitable method, operated so over 3⁄16 inch thick.
as to obtain accurate data. A pressure (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip
gauge must permit reading to an accu- ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends
racy of 1 percent. An expansion gauge may be flattened to within one inch of
must permit reading of total expansion each end of the reduced section.
to an accuracy of either 1 percent or 0.1 (iii) When size of the cylinder does
cubic centimeter. not permit securing straight speci-
(2) Pressure must be maintained for mens, the specimens may be taken in
at least 30 seconds and sufficiently any location or direction and may be
longer to ensure complete expansion. straightened or flattened cold, by pres-
Any internal pressure applied after sure only, not by blows. When speci-
heat treatment and previous to the of- mens are so taken and prepared, the in-
ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of spector’s report must show in connec-
the test pressure. tion with record of physical tests de-
(3) Permanent volumetric expansion tailed information in regard to such
may not exceed 10 percent of the total specimens.
volumetric expansion at test pressure.
(iv) Heating of a specimen for any
(4) Cylinders must be tested as fol-
purpose is not authorized.
lows:
(i) At least one cylinder selected at
random out of each lot of 200 or less must be the stress corresponding to a
must be tested as outlined in para- permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the
graphs (i)(1), (i)(2), and (i)(3) of this sec- gauge length. The following conditions
tion to at least two times service pres- apply:
sure. (i) The yield strength must be deter-
(ii) All cylinders not tested as out- mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or
lined in paragraph (i)(4)(i) of this sec- the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as
tion must be examined under pressure prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7
of at least two times service pressure of this subchapter).
and show no defect. (ii) In using the ‘‘extension under
(j) Physical test. A physical test must load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex-
be conducted to determine yield tension under load’’), corresponding to
strength, tensile strength, elongation, the stress at which the 0.2 percent per-
and reduction of area of material, as manent strain occurs may be deter-
follows: mined with sufficient accuracy by cal-
(1) The test is required on 2 speci- culating the elastic extension of the
mens cut from one cylinder or part gauge length under appropriate load
thereof having passed the hydrostatic and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the
test and heat-treated as required, gauge length. Elastic extension cal-
taken at random out of each lot of 200 culations must be based on an elastic
or less. Physical tests for spheres are modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of
required on 2 specimens cut from flat controversy, the entire stress-strain
representative sample plates of the diagram must be plotted and the yield
same heat taken at random from the strength determined from the 0.2 per-
steel used to produce the spheres. This cent offset.
flat steel from which 2 specimens are (iii) For the purpose of strain meas-
to be cut must receive the same heat urement, the initial strain reference
treatment as the spheres themselves. must be set while the specimen is
Sample plates must be taken from each under a stress of 12,000 psi, and the
lot of 200 or less spheres. strain indicator reading must be set at
(2) Specimens must conform to the the calculated corresponding strain.
following: (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing
(i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per
width not over 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge minute during yield strength deter-
length of 2 inches with a width not mination.
50
(k) Elongation. Physical test speci- psig, as provided in paragraph (k) of

mens must show at least a 40 percent this section.
elongation for a 2-inch gauge length or (m) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat-
at least 20 percent in other cases. Ex- ment is authorized for rejected cyl-
cept that these elongation percentages inders. Subsequent thereto, cylinders
may be reduced numerically by 2 for 2- must pass all prescribed tests to be ac-
inch specimens, and by 1 in other cases, ceptable. Repair of brazed seams by
for each 7,500 psi increment of tensile brazing and welded seams by welding is
strength above 50,000 psi to a maximum authorized.
of four such increments. (n) Markings. Markings must be
(l) Tests of welds. Except for brazed stamped plainly and permanently in
seams, welds must be tested as follows: one of the following locations on the
(1) Tensile test. A specimen must be cylinder:
cut from one cylinder of each lot of 200 (1) On shoulders and top heads not
or less, or welded test plate. The weld- less than 0.087 inch thick.
ed test plate must be of one of the (2) On side wall adjacent to top head
heats in the lot of 200 or less which it for side walls not less than 0.090 inch
represents, in the same condition and thick.
(3) On a cylindrical portion of the
approximately the same thickness as
shell which extends beyond the re-
the cylinder wall except that in no case
cessed bottom of the cylinder consti-
must it be of a lesser thickness than
tuting an integral and non-pressure
that required for a quarter size Charpy
part of the cylinder.
impact specimen. The weld must be
(4) On a plate attached to the top of
made by the same procedures and sub-
the cylinder or permanent part thereof;
jected to the same heat treatment as
sufficient space must be left on the
the major weld on the cylinder. The
plate to provide for stamping at least
specimen must be taken from across six retest dates; the plate must be at
the major seam and must be prepared least 1⁄16 inch thick and must be at-
and tested in accordance with and tached by welding, or by brazing at a
must meet the requirements of CGA temperature of at least 1100 °F.,
Pamphlet C–3 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this throughout all edges of the plate.
subchapter). Should this specimen fail (5) On the neck, neckring, valve boss,
to meet the requirements, specimens valve protection sleeve, or similar part
may be taken from two additional cyl- permanently attached to the top of the
inders or welded test plates from the cylinder.
same lot and tested. If either of the lat- (6) On the footring permanently at-
ter specimens fail to meet the require- tached to the cylinder, provided the
ments, the entire lot represented must water capacity of the cylinder does not
be rejected. exceed 25 pounds.
(2) Guided bend test. A root bend test
[Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
specimen must be cut from the cyl-
inder or welded test plate, used for the 16015, Sept. 27, 2002; 67 FR 51653, Aug. 8, 2002;
tensile test specified in paragraph (l)(1) 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, 2003]
of this section. Specimens must be
taken from across the major seam and § 178.53 Specification 4D welded steel
must be prepared and tested in accord- cylinders for aircraft use.
ance with and must meet the require- (a) Type, size, and service pressure. A
ments of CGA Pamphlet C–3. DOT 4D cylinder is a welded steel
(3) Alternate guided-bend test. This sphere (two seamless hemispheres) or
test may be used and must be as re- circumferentially welded cylinder (two
quired by CGA Pamphlet C–3. The spec- seamless drawn shells) with a water ca-
imen must be bent until the elongation pacity not over 100 pounds and a serv-
at the outer surface, adjacent to the ice pressure of at least 300 but not over
root of the weld, between the lightly 500 psig. Cylinders closed in by spin-
scribed gage lines a to b, must be at ning process are not authorized.
least 20 percent, except that this per- (b) Steel. Open-hearth or electric steel
centage may be reduced for steels hav- of uniform and weldable quality must
ing a tensile strength in excess of 50,000 be used. Content may not exceed the
51
§ 178.53 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
following: Carbon, 0.25; phosphorus, sociate Administrator. The following

0.045; sulphur, 0.050, except that the fol- chemical analyses are authorized:
lowing steels commercially known as
4130X and Type 304, 316, 321, and 347 TABLE 1—4130X STEEL
stainless steels may be used with prop- 4130X Percent
er welding procedure. A heat of steel
Carbon ........................................................... 0.25/0.35.
made under table 1 in this paragraph Manganese .................................................... 0.40/0.60.
(b), check chemical analysis of which is Phosphorus .................................................... 0.04 max.
slightly out of the specified range, is Sulphur .......................................................... 0.05 max
Silicon ............................................................ 0.15/0.35.
acceptable, if satisfactory in all other Chromium ...................................................... 0.80/1.10.
respects, provided the tolerances shown Molybdenum .................................................. 0.15/0.25.
in table 2 in this paragraph (b) are not Zirconium ....................................................... None.
Nickel ............................................................. None.
exceeded, except as approved by the As-
TABLE 2—AUTHORIZED STAINLESS STEELS
Stainless steels
304 316 321 347

(percent) (percent) (percent) (percent)
Carbon (max) ........................................................................ 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08

Manganese (max) ................................................................. 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00
Phosphorus (max) ................................................................. .030 .045 .030 .030
Sulphur (max) ........................................................................ .030 .030 .030 .030
Silicon (max) ......................................................................... .75 1.00 .75 .75
Nickel ..................................................................................... 8.0/11.0 10.0/14.0 9.0/13.0 9.0/13.0
Chromium .............................................................................. 18.0/20.0 16.0/18.0 17.0/20.0 17.0/20.0
Molybdenum .......................................................................... ........................ 2.0/3.0 ........................ ........................
Titanium ................................................................................. ........................ ........................ (1) ........................
Columbium ............................................................................ ........................ ........................ ........................ (2)
1 Titanium may not be less than 5C and not more than 0.60%.
2 Columbium may not be less than 10C and not more than 1.0%.

Element (percent)
Carbon ..................................................... To 0.15 incl ...................................................................... 0.01 0.01

Over 0.15 to 0.40 incl ...................................................... .03 .04
Manganese .............................................. To 0.60 incl ...................................................................... .03 .03
Over 1.15 to 2.50 incl ...................................................... .05 .05
Phosphorus 1 ........................................... All ranges ........................................................................ .................... .01
Sulphur .................................................... All ranges ........................................................................ .................... .01
Silicon ...................................................... To 0.30 incl ...................................................................... .02 .03
Over 0.30 to 1.00 incl ...................................................... .05 .05
Nickel ....................................................... Over 5.30 to 10.00 incl .................................................... .10 .10
Over 10.00 to 14.00 incl .................................................. .15 .15
Chromium ................................................ To 0.90 incl ...................................................................... .03 .03
Over 0.90 to 2.10 incl ...................................................... .05 .05
Over 15.00 to 20.00 incl .................................................. .20 .20
Molybdenum ............................................ To 0.20 incl ...................................................................... .01 .01
Over 0.20 to 0.40 incl ...................................................... .02 .02
Over 1.75 to 3.0 incl ........................................................ .10 .10
Titanium ................................................... All ranges ........................................................................ .05 .05
Columbium .............................................. All ranges ........................................................................ .05 .05
(c) Identification of material. Material (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be

must be identified by any suitable manufactured using equipment and
method except that plates and billets processes adequate to ensure that each
for hotdrawn cylinders must be marked cylinder produced conforms to the re-
with the heat number. quirements of this subpart. No defect is
52
permitted that is likely to weaken the threads are used, they must comply
finished container appreciably. A rea- with the following:
sonably smooth and uniform surface (i) Threads must be clean cut, even,
finish is required. Welding procedures without checks, and tapped to gauge.
and operators must be qualified in ac- (ii) Taper threads must be of a length
cordance with CGA Pamphlet C–3 (IBR, not less than that specified for Amer-
see § 171.7 of this subchapter). ican Standard taper pipe threads.
(e) Wall thickness. The wall stress at (iii) Straight threads, having at least
the minimum test pressure may not ex- 4 engaged threads, must have a tight
ceed 24,000 psi, except where steels fit and calculated shear strength of at
commercially known as 4130X, types least 10 times the test pressure of the
304, 316, 321, and 347 stainless steels are container. Gaskets, adequate to pre-
used, stress at the test pressures may vent leakage, are required.
not exceed 37,000 psi. The minimum (2) Closure of a fitting, boss, or pad
wall thickness for any container hav- must be adequate to prevent leakage.
ing a capacity of 1,100 cubic inches or (h) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder
less is 0.04 inch. The minimum wall must successfully withstand a hydro-
thickness for any container having a static test, as follows:
capacity in excess of 1,100 cubic inches (1) The test must be by water-jacket,
is 0.095 inch. Calculations must be done or other suitable method, operated so
by the following: as to obtain accurate data. A pressure
(1) Calculation for a ‘‘sphere’’ must gauge must permit a reading to an ac-
be made by the formula: curacy of 1 percent. An expansion
gauge must permit reading of total ex-
S = PD / 4tE
pansion to an accuracy of either 1 per-
Where: cent or 0.1 cubic centimeter.
S = wall stress in psi; (2) Pressure must be maintained for
P = test pressure prescribed for water jacket at least 30 seconds and sufficiently
test, i.e., at least two times service pres- longer to ensure complete expansion.
sure, in psig; Any internal pressure applied after
D = outside diameter in inches; heat-treatment and previous to the of-
t = minimum wall thickness in inches;
E = 0.85 (provides 85 percent weld efficiency
ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of
factor which must be applied in the girth the test pressure. If, due to failure of
weld area and heat affected zones which the test apparatus, the test pressure
zone must extend a distance of 6 times cannot be maintained, the test may be
wall thickness from center line of weld); repeated at a pressure increased by 10
E = 1.0 (for all other areas). percent or 100 psig, whichever is the
(2) Calculation for a cylinder must be lower.
made by the formula: (3) Permanent volumetric expansion
may not exceed 10 percent of the total
S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ dT12) volumetric expansion at test pressure.
Where: (4) Containers must be tested as fol-
S = wall stress in psi; lows:
P = test pressure prescribed for water jacket (i) Each container to at least 2 times
test, i.e., at least two times service pres- service pressure; or
sure, in psig; (ii) One container out of each lot of
D = outside diameter in inches; 200 or less to at least 3 times service
d = inside diameter in inches. pressure. Others must be examined
(f) Heat treatment. The completed cyl- under pressure of 2 times service pres-
inders must be uniformly and properly sure and show no defects.
heat-treated prior to tests. (i) Flattening test for spheres and cyl-
(g) Openings in container. Openings in inders. Spheres and cylinders must be
cylinders must comply with the fol- subjected to a flattening test as fol-
lowing: lows:
(1) Each opening in the container, ex- (1) One sphere taken at random out
cept those for safety devices, must be of each lot of 200 or less must be sub-
provided with a fitting, boss, or pad, se- jected to a flattening test as follows:
curely attached to the container by (i) The test must be performed after
brazing or by welding or by threads. If the hydrostatic test.
53
§ 178.53 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(ii) The test must be between parallel (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip
steel plates on a press with a welded ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends
seam at right angles to the plates. Any may be flattened to within 1 inch of
projecting appurtenances may be cut each end of the reduced section. Heat-
off (by mechanical means only) prior to ing of the specimen for any purpose is
crushing. not authorized.
(2) One cylinder taken at random out (5) The yield strength in tension
of each lot of 200 or less must be sub- must be the stress corresponding to a
jected to a flattening test, as follows: permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the
(i) The test must be performed after gauge length. The following conditions
the hydrostatic test. apply:
(ii) The test must be between knife (i) The yield strength must be deter-
edges, wedge shaped, 60° angle, rounded mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or
to 1⁄2 inch radius. For lots of 30 or less, the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as
physical tests are authorized to be prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7
made on a ring at least 8 inches long of this subchapter).
cut from each cylinder and subjected to (ii) In using the ‘‘extension under
the same heat treatment as the fin- load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex-
ished cylinder. tension under load’’) corresponding to
(j) Physical test and specimens for the stress at which the 0.2 percent per-
spheres and cylinders. Spheres and cyl- manent strain occurs may be deter-
inders must be subjected to a physical mined with sufficient accuracy by cal-
test as follows: culating the elastic extension of the
(1) Physical test for spheres are re- gauge length under appropriate load
quired on 2 specimens cut from a flat and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the
representative sample plate of the gauge length. Elastic extension cal-
same heat taken at random from the culations must be based on an elastic
steel used to produce the sphere. This modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of
flat steel from which the 2 specimens controversy, the entire stress-strain
are to be cut must receive the same diagram must be plotted and the yield
heat-treatment as the spheres them- strength determined from the 0.2 per-
selves. Sample plates must be taken for cent offset.
each lot of 200 or less spheres. (iii) For the purpose of strain meas-
(2) Specimens for spheres must have urement, the initial strain must be set
a gauge length 2 inches with a width while the specimen is under a stress of
not over 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge length 12,000 psi and the strain indicator read-
at least 24 times the thickness with a ing being set at the calculated cor-
width not over 6 times the thickness is responding strain.
authorized when a wall is not over 3⁄16 (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing
inch thick. machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per
(3) Physical test for cylinders is re- minute during yield strength deter-
quired on 2 specimens cut from 1 cyl- mination.
inder taken at random out of each lot (k) Acceptable results for physical and
of 200 or less. For lots of 30 or less, flattening tests. Either of the following
physical tests are authorized to be is an acceptable result:
made on a ring at least 8 inches long (1) An elongation of at least 40 per-
cut from each cylinder and subjected to cent for a 2 inch gauge length or at
the same heat treatment as the fin- least 20 percent in other cases and
ished cylinder. yield strength not over 73 percent of
(4) Specimens for cylinders must con- tensile strength. In this instance, the
form to the following: flattening test is not required.
(i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a (2) An elongation of at least 20 per-
width not over 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge cent for a 2 inch gauge length or 10 per-
length of 2 inches with a width not cent in other cases. Flattening is re-
over 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge length at quired to 50 percent of the original out-
least 24 times the thickness with a side diameter without cracking.
width not over 6 times the thickness is (l) Rejected cylinders. Reheat-treat-
authorized when a cylinder wall is not ment is authorized for rejected cyl-
over 3⁄16 inch thick. inders. Subsequent thereto, containers
54
must pass all prescribed tests to be ac- between the cylinder and the floor
ceptable. Repair of welded seams by when the cylinder is in a vertical posi-
welding prior to reheat-treatment is tion. Seams must conform to the fol-
authorized. lowing:
(m) Marking. Marking on each con- (1) Circumferential seams must be by
tainer by stamping plainly and perma- brazing only. Heads must be attached
nently are only authorized where the to shells by the lap brazing method and
metal is at least 0.09 inch thick, or on must overlap not less than four times
a metal nameplate permanently se- the wall thickness. Brazing material
cured to the container by means other must have a melting point of not less
than soft solder, or by means that than 1000 °F. Heads must have a driving
would not reduce the wall thickness. fit with the shell unless the shell is
[Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as crimped, swedged, or curled over the
amended at 66 FR 45386, 45388, Aug. 28, 2001; skirt or flange of the head and be thor-
67 FR 51653, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, oughly brazed until complete penetra-
2003] tion of the joint by the brazing mate-
rial is secured. Brazed joints may be re-
§ 178.55 Specification 4B240ET welded paired by brazing.
or brazed cylinders. (2) Longitudinal seams in shell must
(a) Type, spinning process, size and be by electric resistance welded joints
service pressure. A DOT 4B240ET cyl- only. No repairs to longitudinal joints
inder is a brazed type cylinder made is permitted.
from electric resistance welded tubing. (3) Welding procedures and operators
The maximum water capacity of this must be qualified in accordance with
cylinder is 12 pounds or 333 cubic CGA C–3 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
inches and the service must be 240 psig. chapter).
The maximum outside diameter of the (e) Welding or brazing. Only the at-
shell must be five inches and maximum tachment, by welding or brazing, to the
length of the shell is 21 inches. Cyl- tops and bottoms of cylinders of
inders closed in by a spinning process neckrings, footrings, handles, bosses,
are authorized. pads, and valve protection rings is au-
(b) Steel. Open-hearth, basic oxygen, thorized. Provided that such attach-
or electric steel of uniform quality ments and the portion of the container
must be used. Plain carbon steel con- to which they are attached are made of
tent may not exceed the following: Car- weldable steel, the carbon content of
bon, 0.25; phosphorus, 0.045; sulfur, which may not exceed 0.25 percent.
0.050. The addition of other elements (f) Wall thickness. The wall stress
for alloying effect is prohibited. must be at least two times the service
(c) Identification of material. Material pressure and may not exceed 18,000 psi.
must be identified by any suitable The minimum wall thickness is 0.044
method. inch. Calculation must be made by the
(d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be following formula:
manufactured using equipment and
S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ d2)
processes adequate to ensure that each
cylinder produced conforms to the re- Where:
quirements of this subpart. No defect is S = wall stress in psig;
permitted that is likely to weaken the P = 2 times service pressure;
finished cylinder appreciably. A rea- D = outside diameter in inches;
sonably smooth and uniform surface d = inside diameter in inches.
finish is required. Heads may be at- (g) Heat treatment. Heads formed by
tached to shells by lap brazing or may drawing or pressing must be uniformly
be formed integrally. The thickness of and properly heat treated prior to
the bottom of cylinders welded or tests. Cylinders with integral formed
formed by spinning is, under no condi- heads or bases must be subjected to a
tion, to be less than two times the min- normalizing operation. Normalizing
imum wall thickness of the cylindrical and brazing operations may be com-
shell. Such bottom thicknesses must be bined, provided the operation is carried
measured within an area bounded by a out at a temperature in excess of the
line representing the points of contact upper critical temperature of the steel.
55
§ 178.55 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(h) Openings in cylinders. Openings in must be tested as outlined in para-

cylinders must comply with the fol- graphs (i)(1), (i)(2), and (i)(3) of this sec-
lowing: tion to at least two times service pres-
(1) Each opening in cylinders, except sure.
those for safety devices, must be pro- (ii) All cylinders not tested as out-
vided with a fitting, boss, or pad, se- lined in paragraph (i)(4)(i) of this sec-
curely attached to the cylinder by tion must be examined under pressure
brazing or by welding or by threads. A of at least two times service pressure
fitting, boss, or pad must be of steel and show no defect.
suitable for the method of attachment (5) Each 1000 cylinders or less succes-
employed, and which need not be iden- sively produced each day must con-
tified or verified as to analysis, except stitute a lot. One cylinder must be se-
that if attachment is by welding, car- lected from each lot and
bon content may not exceed 0.25 per- hydrostatically tested to destruction.
cent. If threads are used, they must If this cylinder bursts below five times
comply with the following: the service pressure, then two addi-
(i) Threads must be clean cut, even tional cylinders must be selected and
without checks, and tapped to gauge. subjected to this test. If either of these
(ii) Taper threads to be of length not cylinders fails by bursting below five
less than as specified for American times the service pressure then the en-
Standard taper pipe threads. tire lot must be rejected. All cylinders
(iii) Straight threads, having at least constituting a lot must be of identical
4 engaged threads, to have tight fit and size, construction heat-treatment, fin-
calculated shear strength at least 10 ish, and quality.
times the test pressure of the cylinder; (j) Flattening test. Following the hy-
gaskets required, adequate to prevent drostatic test, one cylinder taken at
leakage. random out of each lot of 200 or less,
(2) Closure of a fitting, boss, or pad must be subjected to a flattening test
must be adequate to prevent leakage. that is between knife edges, wedge
(i) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder shaped, 60° angle, rounded to 1⁄2 inch ra-
must successfully withstand a hydro- dius.
static test as follows: (k) Physical test. A physical test must
(1) The test must be by water-jacket, be conducted to determine yield
or other suitable method, operated so strength, tensile strength, elongation,
as to obtain accurate data. The pres- and reduction of area of material, as
sure gauge must permit reading to an follows:
accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion (1) The test is required on 2 speci-
gauge must permit reading of total ex- mens cut from 1 cylinder, or part
pansion to an accuracy of either 1 per- thereof heat-treated as required, taken
cent or 0.1 cubic centimeter. at random out of each lot of 200 or less
(2) Pressure must be maintained for in the case of cylinders of capacity
at least 30 seconds and sufficiently greater than 86 cubic inches and out of
longer to ensure complete expansion. each lot of 500 or less for cylinders hav-
Any internal pressure applied after ing a capacity of 86 cubic inches or
heat-treatment and previous to the of- less.
ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of (2) Specimens must conform to the
the test pressure. If, due to failure of following:
the test apparatus, the test pressure (i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a
cannot be maintained, the test may be width not over 11⁄2 inches, a gauge
repeated at a pressure increased by 10 length of 2 inches with a width not
percent or 100 psig, whichever is the over 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge length at
lower. least 24 times the thickness with a
(3) Permanent volumetric expansion width not over 6 times the thickness is
may not exceed 10 percent of total vol- authorized when a cylinder wall is not
umetric expansion at test pressure. over 3⁄16 inch thick.
(4) Cylinders must be tested as fol- (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip
lows: ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends

(i) At least one cylinder selected at may be flattened to within one inch of
random out of each lot of 200 or less each end of the reduced section.
56
(iii) When size of cylinder does not the direction of the applied load. Two
permit securing straight specimens, rings cut from the ends of length of
the specimens may be taken in any lo- pipe used in production of a lot may be
cation or direction and may be used for the flattening test provided
straightened or flattened cold by pres- the rings accompany the lot which
sure only, not by blows. When speci- they represent in all thermal proc-
mens are so taken and prepared, the in- essing operations. At least one of the
spector’s report must show in connec- rings must pass the flattening test.
tion with record of physical tests de- (m) Leakage test. All spun cylinders
tailed information in regard to such and plugged cylinders must be tested
specimens. for leakage by gas or air pressure after
(iv) Heating of a specimen for any the bottom has been cleaned and is free
purpose is not authorized. from all moisture, subject to the fol-
(3) The yield strength in tension lowing conditions:
must be the stress corresponding to a (1) Pressure, approximately the same
permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the as but no less than service pressure,
gauge length. The following conditions must be applied to one side of the fin-
apply: ished bottom over an area of at least
(i) The yield strength must be deter- 1⁄16 of the total area of the bottom but
mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or not less than 3⁄4 inch in diameter, in-
the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as cluding the closure, for at least 1
prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7 minute, during which time the other
of this subchapter). side of the bottom exposed to pressure
(ii) In using the ‘‘extension under must be covered with water and closely
load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex- examined for indications of leakage.
tension under load’’) corresponding to Except as provided in paragraph (n) of
the stress at which the 0.2 percent per- this section, cylinders which are leak-
manent strain occurs may be deter- ing must be rejected.
mined with sufficient accuracy by cal-
(2) A spun cylinder is one in which an
culating the elastic extension of the
end closure in the finished cylinder has
gauge length under appropriate load
been welded by the spinning process.
and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the
(3) A plugged cylinder is one in which
gauge length. Elastic extension cal-
a permanent closure in the bottom of a
culations must be based on an elastic
finished cylinder has been effected by a
modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of
plug.
controversy, the entire stress-strain
diagram must be plotted and the yield (4) As a safety precaution, if the
strength determined from the 0.2 per- manufacturer elects to make this test
cent offset. before the hydrostatic test, he should
(iii) For the purpose of strain meas- design his apparatus so that the pres-
urement, the initial strain must be set sure is applied to the smallest area
while the specimen is under a stress of practicable, around the point of clo-
12,000 psi and the strain indicator read- sure, and so as to use the smallest pos-
ing being set at the calculated cor- sible volume of air or gas.
responding strain. (n) Rejected cylinders. Repairs of re-
(iv) Cross-head speed of the testing jected cylinders is authorized. Cyl-
machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per inders that are leaking must be re-
minute during yield strength deter- jected, except that:
mination. (1) Spun cylinders rejected under the
(l) Acceptable results for physical and provisions of paragraph (m) of this sec-
flattening tests. Acceptable results for tion may be removed from the spun
the physical and flattening tests are an cylinder category by drilling to remove
elongation of at least 40 percent for a 2 defective material, tapping, and plug-
inch gauge length or at least 20 percent ging.
in other cases and a yield strength not (2) Brazed joints may be rebrazed.
over 73 percent of tensile strength. In (3) Subsequent to the operations
this instance the flattening test is re- noted in paragraphs (n)(1) and (n)(2) of
quired, without cracking, to six times this section, acceptable cylinders must
the wall thickness with a weld 90° from pass all prescribed tests.
57
§ 178.56 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(o) Marking. Markings on each cyl- bottoms of cylinders is authorized.

inder must be by stamping plainly and Provided that such attachments are
permanently on shoulder, top head, made of weldable steel, the carbon con-
neck or valve protection collar which tent of which does not exceed 0.25 per-
is permanently attached to the cyl- cent.
inders and forming an integral part (f) Wall thickness. The wall thickness
thereof, provided that cylinders not of the cylinder must conform to the
less than 0.090 inch thick may be following:
stamped on the side wall adjacent to (1) For cylinders with an outside di-
top head. ameter over 5 inches, the minimum
[Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as wall thickness is 0.078 inch. In any
amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR case, the minimum wall thickness
51653, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75748, 75749, Dec. 31, must be such that the calculated wall
2003] stress at the minimum test pressure (in
paragraph (i) of this section) may not
§ 178.56 Specification 4AA480 welded exceed the lesser value of either of the
steel cylinders. following:
(a) Type, size, and service pressure. A (i) One-half of the minimum tensile
DOT 4AA480 cylinder is a welded steel strength of the material determined as
cylinder having a water capacity required in paragraph (j) of this sec-
(nominal) not over 1,000 pounds water tion; or
capacity and a service pressure of 480 (ii) 35,000 psi.
psig. Closures welded by spinning proc- (2) Calculation must be made by the
ess not permitted. formula:
(b) Steel. The limiting chemical com-
position of steel authorized by this S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ d2)
specification must be as shown in table Where:
I of appendix A to this part.
S = wall stress in psi;
(c) Identification of material. Material P = minimum test pressure prescribed for
must be identified by any suitable water jacket test;
method except that plates and billets D = outside diameter in inches;
for hotdrawn cylinders must be marked d = inside diameter in inches.
with the heat number.
(d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be (3) The ratio of tangential length to
manufactured using equipment and outside diameter may not exceed 4.0 for
processes adequate to ensure that each cylinders with a wall thickness less
cylinder produced conforms to the re- than 0.100 inch.
quirements of this subpart. No defect is (g) Heat treatment. Each cylinder
permitted that is likely to weaken the must be uniformly and properly heat
finished cylinder appreciably. A rea- treated prior to tests. Any suitable
sonably smooth and uniform surface heat treatment in excess of 1100 °F is
finish is required. Exposed bottom authorized except that liquid quench-
welds on cylinders over 18 inches long ing is not permitted. Heat treatment
must be protected by footrings. Min- must be accomplished after all forming
imum thickness of heads and bottoms and welding operations. Heat treat-
may not be less than 90 percent of the ment is not required after welding
required thickness of the side wall. weldable low carbon parts to attach-
Seams must be made as follows: ments of similar material which have
(1) Circumferential seams must be been previously welded to the top or
welded. Brazing is not authorized. bottom of cylinders and properly heat
(2) Longitudinal seams are not per- treated, provided such subsequent
mitted. welding does not produce a tempera-
(3) Welding procedures and operators ture in excess of 400 °F., in any part of
must be qualified in accordance with the top or bottom material.
CGA C–3 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- (h) Openings in cylinders. Openings in
chapter). cylinders must conform to the fol-
(e) Welding. Only the welding of lowing:

neckrings, footrings, bosses, pads, and (1) All openings must be in the heads
valve protection rings to the tops and or bases.
58
(2) Each opening in the cylinder, ex- (ii) Each cylinder not tested as pre-
cept those for safety devices, must be scribed in paragraph (i)(4)(i) of this sec-
provided with a fitting boss, or pad, se- tion must be examined under pressure
curely attached to the cylinder by of at least two times service pressure
welding or by threads. If threads are and must show no defect. A cylinder
used they must comply with the fol- showing a defect must be rejected un-
lowing: less it may be requalified under para-
(i) Threads must be clean-cut, even graph (m) of this section.
without checks and cut to gauge. (j) Physical test. A physical test must
(ii) Taper threads to be of length not be conducted to determine yield
less than as specified for American strength, tensile strength, elongation,
Standard taper pipe threads. and reduction of area of material, as
(iii) Straight threads having at least follows:
6 engaged threads, must have a tight (1) The test is required on 2 speci-
fit and a calculated shear strength at mens cut from one cylinder having
least 10 times the test pressure of the passed the hydrostatic test, or part
cylinder. Gaskets, adequate to prevent thereof heat-treated as required, taken
leakage, are required. at random out of each lot of 200 or less.
(3) Closure of a fitting, boss or pad (2) Specimens must conform to the
must be adequate to prevent leakage. following:
(i) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder
(i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a
must successfully withstand a hydro-
width not over 11⁄2 inches, a gauge
static test as follows:
length of 2 inches with a width not
(1) The test must be by water jacket,
over 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge length at
or other suitable method, operated so
least 24 times the thickness with a
as to obtain accurate data. The pres-
width not over 6 times thickness is au-
sure gauge must permit reading to an
thorized when the cylinder wall is not
accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion
over 3⁄16 inch thick.
gauge must permit reading of total ex-
(ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip
pansion to an accuracy of either 1 per-
ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends
cent or 0.1 cubic centimeter.
may be flattened to within one inch of
(2) Pressure must be maintained for
each end of the reduced section.
at least 30 seconds or sufficiently
longer to assure complete expansion. (iii) When size of cylinder does not
Any internal pressure applied after permit securing straight specimens,
heat-treatment and before the official the specimens may be taken in any lo-
test may not exceed 90 percent of the cation or direction and may be
test pressure. If, due to failure of test straightened or flattened cold, by pres-
apparatus, the test pressure cannot be sure only, not by blows. When speci-
maintained, the test may be repeated mens are so taken and prepared, the in-
at a pressure increased by 10 percent or spector’s report must show in connec-
100 psig, whichever is lower. tion with record of physical tests de-
(3) Permanent volumetric expansion tailed information in regard to such
may not exceed 10 percent of the total specimens.
volumetric expansion at test pressure. (iv) Heating of a specimen for any
(4) Cylinders must be tested as fol- purpose is not authorized.
lows: (3) The yield strength in tension
(i) At least one cylinder selected at must be the stress corresponding to a
random out of each lot of 200 or less permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the
must be tested as described in para- gauge length. The following conditions
graphs (i)(1), (i)(2), and (i)(3) of this sec- apply:
tion, to at least two times service pres- (i) The yield strength must be deter-
sure. If a selected cylinder fails, then mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or
two additional specimens must be se- the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as
lected at random from the same lot and prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7
subjected to the prescribed test. If ei- of this subchapter).
ther of these fails the test, then each (ii) In using the ‘‘extension under
cylinder in that lot must be so tested; load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex-
and tension under load’’), corresponding to
59
§ 178.56 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
the stress at which the 0.2 percent per- fail to meet the requirements, the en-
manent strain occurs may be deter- tire lot represented must be rejected.
mined with sufficient accuracy by cal- (2) Guided bend test. A root bend test
culating the elastic extension of the specimen must be cut from the cyl-
gauge length under appropriate load inder or a welded test plate, used for
and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the the tensile test specified in paragraph
gauge length. Elastic extension cal- (l)(1) of this section. Specimens must
culations must be based on an elastic be taken from across the major seam
modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of and must be prepared and tested in ac-
controversy, the entire stress-strain cordance with and must meet the re-
diagram must be plotted and the yield
quirements of CGA Pamphlet C–3.
strength determined from the 0.2 per-
cent offset. (3) Alternate guided-bend test. This
(iii) For the purpose of strain meas- test may be used and must be as re-
urement, the initial strain reference quired by CGA Pamphlet C–3. The spec-
must be set while the specimen is imen must be bent until the elongation
under a stress of 12,000 psi and the at the outer surface, adjacent to the
strain indicator reading being set at root of the weld, between the lightly
the calculated corresponding strain. scribed gage lines-a to b, is at least 20
(iv) Cross-head speed of the testing percent, except that this percentage
machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per may be reduced for steels having a ten-
minute during yield strength deter- sile strength in excess of 50,000 psi, as
mination. provided in paragraph (k) of this sec-
(k) Elongation. Physical test speci- tion.
mens must show at least a 40 percent (m) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat-
elongation for 2-inch gauge lengths or ment of rejected cylinders is author-
at least a 20 percent elongation in ized. Subsequent thereto, cylinders
other cases. Except that these elon- must pass all prescribed tests to be ac-
gation percentages may be reduced nu- ceptable. Repair of welded seams by
merically by 2 for 2-inch specimens and welding is authorized.
by 1 in other cases for each 7,500 psi in-
(n) Markings. Markings must be
crement of tensile strength above 50,000
stamped plainly and permanently in
psi to a maximum of four such incre-
ments. one of the following locations on the
(l) Tests of welds. Welds must be test- cylinder:
ed as follows: (1) On shoulders and top heads not
(1) Tensile test. A specimen must be less than 0.087 inch thick.
cut from one cylinder of each lot of 200 (2) On neck, valve boss, valve protec-
or less, or a welded test plate. The tion sleeve, or similar part perma-
welded test plate must be of one of the nently attached to top end of cylinder.
heats in the lot of 200 or less which it (3) On a plate attached to the top of
represents, in the same condition and the cylinder or permanent part thereof:
approximately the same thickness as sufficient space must be left on the
the cylinder wall except that it may plate to provide for stamping at least
not be of a lesser thickness than that six retest dates: the plate must be at
required for a quarter size Charpy im- least 1⁄16 inch thick and must be at-
pact specimen. The weld must be made tached by welding or by brazing at a
by the same procedures and subjected temperature of at least 1100 °F,
to the same heat treatment as the throughout all edges of the plate.
major weld on the cylinder. The speci- (4) Variations in location of mark-
mens must be taken across the major
ings authorized only when necessitated
seam and must be prepared and tested
by lack of space.
in accordance with and must meet the
requirements of CGA Pamphlet C–3. [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
Should this specimen fail to meet the amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR
requirements, specimens may be taken 51653, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75748, 75749, Dec. 31,
from two additional cylinders or weld- 2003]

ed test plates from the same lot and
tested. If either of the latter specimens
60
§ 178.57 Specification 4L welded insu- thickness of heads may not be less

lated cylinders. than 90 percent of the required thick-
(a) Type, size, service pressure, and de- ness of the sidewall. The heads must be
sign service temperature. A DOT 4L cyl- reasonably true to shape, have no ab-
inder is a fusion welded insulated cyl- rupt shape changes, and the skirts
inder with a water capacity (nominal) must be reasonably true to round.
not over 1,000 pounds water capacity (3) The surface of the cylinder must
and a service pressure of at least 40 but be insulated. The insulating material
not greater than 500 psig conforming to must be fire resistant. The insulation
the following requirements: on non-evacuated jackets must be cov-
(1) For liquefied hydrogen service, ered with a steel jacket not less than
the cylinders must be designed to stand 0.060-inch thick or an aluminum jacket
on end, with the axis of the cylindrical not less than 0.070 inch thick, so con-
portion vertical. structed that moisture cannot come in
(2) The design service temperature is contact with the insulating material. If
the coldest temperature for which a a vacuum is maintained in the insula-
cylinder is suitable. The required de- tion space, the evacuated jacket must
sign service temperatures for each be designed for a minimum collapsing
cryogenic liquid is as follows: pressure of 30 psig differential whether
made of steel or aluminum. The con-
Cryogenic liquid Design service temperature struction must be such that the total
Argon ...................... Minus 320 °F or colder. heat transfer, from the atmosphere at
Helium .................... Minus 452 °F or colder. ambient temperature to the contents
Hydrogen ................ Minus 42 3 °F or colder. of the cylinder, will not exceed 0.0005
Neon ....................... Minus 411 °F or colder.
Nitrogen .................. Minus 320 °F or colder.
Btu per hour, per Fahrenheit degree
Oxygen ................... Minus 320 °F or colder. differential in temperature, per pound
of water capacity of the cylinder. For
(b) Material. Material use in the con- hydrogen, cryogenic liquid service, the
struction of this specification must total heat transfer, with a temperature
conform to the following: differential of 520 Fahrenheit degrees,
(1) Inner containment vessel (cylinder). may not exceed that required to vent
Designations and limiting chemical 30 SCF of hydrogen gas per hour.
compositions of steel authorized by (4) For a cylinder having a design
this specification must be as shown in service temperature colder than minus
table 1 in paragraph (o) of this section. 320 °F, a calculation of the maximum
(2) Outer jacket. Steel or aluminum weight of contents must be made and
may be used subject to the require- that weight must be marked on the
ments of paragraph (o)(2) of this sec- cylinder as prescribed in § 178.35.
tion. (5) Welding procedures and oper-
(c) Identification of material. Material ations must be qualified in accordance
must be identified by any suitable with CGA Pamphlet C–3 (IBR, see
method. § 171.7 of this subchapter). In addition,
(d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be an impact test of the weld must be per-
manufactured using equipment and formed in accordance with paragraph
processes adequate to ensure that each (l) of this section as part of the quali-
cylinder produced conforms to the re- fication of each welding procedure and
quirements of this subpart and to the operator.
following requirements: (e) Welding. Welding of the cylinder
(1) No defect is permitted that is must be as follows:
likely to weaken the finished cylinder (1) All seams of the cylinder must be
appreciably. A reasonably smooth and fusion welded. A means must be pro-
uniform surface finish is required. The vided for accomplishing complete pene-
shell portion must be a reasonably true tration of the joint. Only butt or joggle
cylinder. butt joints for the cylinder seams are
(2) The heads must be seamless, con- authorized. All joints in the cylinder
cave side to the pressure, hemi- must have reasonably true alignment.
spherical or ellipsoidal in shape with (2) All attachments to the sidewalls

the major diameter not more than and heads of the cylinder must be by
twice the minor diameter. Minimum fusion welding and must be of a
61
§ 178.57 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
weldable material complying with the curely attached to, the cylinder body
impact requirements of paragraph (l) of by fusion welding. Attachments to a
this section. fitting, boss or pad may be made by
(3) For welding the cylinder, each welding, brazing, mechanical attach-
procedure and operator must be quali- ment, or threading.
fied in accordance with the sections of (2) Threads must comply with the fol-
CGA Pamphlet C–3 that apply. In addi- lowing:
tion, impact tests of the weld must be (i) Threads must be clean-cut, even,
performed in accordance with para- without checks and cut to gauge.
graph (l) of this section as part of the (ii) Taper threads to be of a length
qualification of each welding procedure not less than that specified for NPT.
and operator.
(iii) Straight threads must have at
(4) Brazing, soldering and threading
least 4 engaged threads, tight fit and
are permitted only for joints not made
calculated shear strength at least 10
directly to the cylinder body. Threads
must comply with the requirements of times the test pressure of the cylinder.
paragraph (h) of this section. Gaskets, which prevent leakage and
(f) Wall thickness. The minimum wall are inert to the hazardous material,
thickness of the cylinder must be such are required.
that the calculated wall stress at the (i) Pressure test. Each cylinder, before
minimum required test pressure may insulating and jacketing, must be ex-
not exceed the least value of the fol- amined under a pressure of at least 2
lowing: times the service pressure maintained
(1) 45,000 psi. for at least 30 seconds without evidence
(2) One-half of the minimum tensile of leakage, visible distortion or other
strength across the welded seam deter- defect. The pressure gauge must permit
mined in paragraph (l) of this section. reading to an accuracy of 1 percent.
(3) One-half of the minimum tensile (j) Physical test. A physical test must
strength of the base metal determined be conducted to determine yield
as required in paragraph (j) of this sec- strength, tensile strength, and elon-
tion. gation as follows:
(4) The yield strength of the base (1) The test is required on 2 speci-
metal determined as required in para- mens selected from material of each
graph (l) of this section. heat and in the same condition as that
(5) Further provided that wall stress in the completed cylinder.
for cylinders having longitudinal (2) Specimens must conform to the
seams may not exceed 85 percent of the following:
above value, whichever applies. (i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a
(6) Calculation must be made by the width not over 11⁄2 inches, a gauge
following formula: length of 2 inches with width not over
S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ d2) 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge length at least 24
times thickness with a width not over
where:
6 times thickness (authorized when cyl-
S = wall stress in pounds psi;
inder wall is not over 1⁄16 inch thick).
pressure test in psig; (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip
D = outside diameter in inches; ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends
d = inside diameter in inches. may be flattened to within one inch of
(g) Heat treatment. Heat treatment is each end of the reduced section.
not permitted. (iii) When size of the cylinder does
(h) Openings in cylinder. Openings in not permit securing straight speci-
cylinders must conform to the fol- mens, the specimens may be taken in
lowing: any location or direction and may be
(1) Openings are permitted in heads straightened or flattened cold by pres-
only. They must be circular and may sure only, not by blows. When speci-
not exceed 3 inches in diameter or one mens are so taken and prepared, the in-
third of the cylinder diameter, which- spector’s report must show in connec-
ever is less. Each opening in the cyl- tion with record of physical tests de-
inder must be provided with a fitting, tailed information in regard to such
boss or pad, either integral with, or se- specimens.
62
(iv) Heating of a specimen for any heats in the lot of 200 or less which it
purpose is not authorized. represents, in the same condition and
(3) The yield strength in tension approximately the same thickness as
must be the stress corresponding to a the cylinder wall except that it may
permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the not be of a lesser thickness than that
gauge length. The following conditions required for a quarter size Charpy im-
apply: pact specimen. The weld must be made
(i) The yield strength must be deter- by the same procedures and subjected
mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or to the same heat treatment as the
the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as major weld on the cylinder. The speci-
prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7 men must be taken across the major
of this subchapter). seam and must be prepared in accord-
(ii) In using the ‘‘extension under ance with and must meet the require-
load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex- ments of CGA Pamphlet C–3. Should
tension under load’’), corresponding to
this specimen fail to meet the require-
the stress at which the 0.2 percent per-
ments, specimens may be taken from
manent strain occurs may be deter-
two additional cylinders or welded test
mined with sufficient accuracy by cal-
culating the elastic expansion of the plates from the same lot and tested. If
gauge length under appropriate load either of the latter specimens fails to
and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the meet the requirements, the entire lot
gauge length. Elastic extension cal- represented must be rejected.
culations must be based on the elastic (2) Guided bend test. A ‘‘root’’ bend
modulus of the material used. In the test specimen must be cut from the
event of controversy, the entire stress- cylinder or welded test plate, used for
strain diagram must be plotted and the the tensile test specified in paragraph
yield strength determined from the 0.2 (l)(1) of this section and from any other
percent offset. seam or equivalent welded test plate if
(iii) For the purpose of strain meas- the seam is welded by a procedure dif-
urement, the initial strain reference ferent from that used for the major
must be set while the specimen is seam. Specimens must be taken across
under a stress of 12,000 psi and the the particular seam being tested and
strain indicator reading being set at must be prepared and tested in accord-
the calculated corresponding strain. ance with and must meet the require-
(iv) Cross-head speed of the testing ments of CGA Pamphlet C–3.
machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per (3) Alternate guided-bend test. This
minute during yield strength deter- test may be used and must be as speci-
mination. fied in CGA Pamphlet C–3. The speci-
(k) Acceptable results for physical tests. men must be bent until the elongation
Physical properties must meet the lim- at the outer surface, adjacent to the
its specified in paragraph (o)(1), table 1, root of the weld, between the lightly
of this section, for the particular steel scribed gage lines a to b, is at least 20
in the annealed condition. The speci- percent, except that this percentage
mens must show at least a 20 percent may be reduced for steels having a ten-
elongation for a 2-inch gage length. Ex-
sile strength in excess of 100,000 psig, as
cept that the percentage may be re-
provided in paragraph (c) of this sec-
duced numerically by 2 for each 7,500
tion.
psi increment of tensile strength above
100,000 psi to a maximum of 5 such in- (4) Impact tests. One set of three im-
crements. Yield strength and tensile pact test specimens (for each test)
strength must meet the requirements must be prepared and tested for deter-
of paragraph (o)(1), table 1, of this sec- mining the impact properties of the de-
tion. posited weld metal—
(l) Tests of welds. Welds must be test- (i) As part of the qualification of the
ed as follows: welding procedure.
(1) Tensile test. A specimen must be (ii) As part of the qualification of the
cut from one cylinder of each lot of 200 operators.

or less, or welded test plate. The weld- (iii) For each ‘‘heat’’ of welding rodor
ed test plate must be of one of the wire used.
63
§ 178.57 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(iv) For each 1,000 feet of weld made Minimum Minimum

impact value
with the same heat of welding rod or required for impact value
permitted on
wire. Size of specimen avg. of each one only of a
set of three
(v) All impact test specimens must be set of three
specimens (ft.-lb.)
of the charpy type, keyhole or milled (ft.-lb.)
U-notch, and must conform in all re- 10 mm × 10 mm .................... 15 10
spects to ASTM E 23 (IBR, see § 171.7 of 10 mm × 7.5 mm ................... 12.5 8.5
this subchapter). Each set of impact 10 mm × 5 mm ...................... 10 7.0
10 mm × 2.5 mm ................... 5 3.5
specimens must be taken across the
weld and have the notch located in the (viii) When the average value of the
weld metal. When the cylinder mate- three specimens equals or exceeds the
rial thickness is 2.5 mm or thicker, im- minimum value permitted for a single
pact specimens must be cut from a cyl- specimen and the value for more than
inder or welded test plate used for the one specimen is below the required av-
tensile or bend test specimens. The di- erage value, or when the value for one
mension along the axis of the notch specimen is below the minimum value
must be reduced to the largest possible permitted for a single specimen, a
of 10 mm, 7.5 mm, 5 mm or 2.5 mm, de- retest of three additional specimens
pending upon cylinder thickness. When must be made. The value of each of
the material in the cylinder or welded these retest specimens must equal or
test plate is not of sufficient thickness exceed the required average value.
to prepare 2.5 mm impact test speci- When an erratic result is caused by a
mens, 2.5 mm specimens must be pre- defective specimen, or there is uncer-
pared from a welded test plate made tainty in test procedure, a retest is au-
from 1⁄8 inch thick material meeting thorized.
the requirements specified in para- (m) Radiographic examination. Cyl-
graph (o)(1), table 1, of this section and inders must be subject to a radio-
having a carbon analysis of .05 min- graphic examination as follows:
imum, but not necessarily from one of (1) The techniques and acceptability
the heats used in the lot of cylinders. of radiographic inspection must con-
form to the standards set forth in CGA
The test piece must be welded by the
Pamphlet C–3.
same welding procedure as used on the
(2) One finished longitudinal seam
particular cylinder seam being quali-
must be selected at random from each
fied and must be subjected to the same lot of 100 or less successively produced
heat treatment. and be radiographed throughout its en-
(vi) Impact test specimens must be tire length. Should the radiographic
cooled to the design service tempera- examination fail to meet the require-
ture. The apparatus for testing the ments of paragraph (m)(1) of this sec-
specimens must conform to require- tion, two additional seams of the same
ments of ASTM Standard E 23. The test lot must be examined, and if either of
piece, as well as the handling tongs, these fail to meet the requirements of
must be cooled for a length of time suf- (m)(1) of this section, only those pass-
ficient to reach the service tempera- ing are acceptable.
ture. The temperature of the cooling (n) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat-
device must be maintained within a ment of rejected cylinders is author-
range of plus or minus 3 °F. The speci- ized. Subsequent thereto, cylinders
men must be quickly transferred from must pass all prescribed tests to be ac-
the cooling device to the anvil of the ceptable. Welds may be repaired by
testing machine and broken within a suitable methods of fusion welding.
time lapse of not more than six sec- (o) Authorized materials of construc-
onds. tion. Authorized materials of construc-
(vii) The impact properties of each tion are as follows:
(1) Inner containment vessel (cylinder).
set of impact specimens may not be
Electric furnace steel of uniform qual-
less than the values in the following

ity must be used. Chemical analysis
table: must conform to ASTM A 240/A 240M
(IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter),
64
Type 304 stainless steel. Chemical anal- an outer jacket made of steel or alu-
ysis must conform to ASTM A240, Type minum.
304 Stainless Steel. A heat of steel (ii) Flammable cryogenic liquids.
made under table 1 and table 2 in this Cylinders intended for use in the trans-
paragraph (o)(1) is acceptable, even portation of flammable cryogenic liq-
though its check chemical analysis is uid must have an outer jacket made of
slightly out of the specified range, if it steel.
is satisfactory in all other respects, (p) Markings. (1) Markings must be
provided the tolerances shown in table stamped plainly and permanently on
3 in this paragraph (o)(1) are not ex- shoulder or top head of jacket or on a
ceeded. The following chemical anal- permanently attached plate or head
yses and physical properties are au- protective ring.
thorized: (2) The letters ‘‘ST’’, followed by the
design service temperature (for exam-
TABLE 1—AUTHORIZED MATERIALS ple, ST–423F), must be marked on cyl-
inders having a design service tempera-
Chemical analysis,
Designation limits in percent ture of colder than minus 320 °F only.
Location to be just below the DOT
Carbon 1 ............................................. 0.08 max.
Manganese ........................................ 2.00 max.
mark.
Phosphorus ........................................ 0.045 max. (3) The maximum weight of contents,
Sulphur .............................................. 0.030 max. in pounds (for example, ‘‘Max. Content
Silicon ................................................ 1.00 max.
Nickel ................................................. 8.00–10.50.
51 #’’), must be marked on cylinders
Chromium .......................................... 18.00–20.00. having a design service temperature
Molybdenum ...................................... None. colder than minus 320 °F only. Loca-
Titanium ............................................. None. tion to be near symbol.
Columbium ......................................... None.
(4) Special orientation instructions
1 The carbon analysis must be reported to the nearest hun-
dredth of one percent.
must be marked on the cylinder (for
example, THIS END UP), if the cyl-
TABLE 2—PHYSICAL PROPERTIES inder is used in an orientation other
than vertical with openings at the top
Physical
properties of the cylinder.
(annealed) (5) If the jacket of the cylinder is
constructed of aluminum, the letters
Tensile strength, p.s.i. (minimum) ....................... 75,000
Yield strength, p.s.i. (minimum) ........................... 30,000 ‘‘AL’’ must be marked after the service
Elongation in 2 inches (minimum) percent .......... 30.0 pressure marking. Example: DOT-4L150
Elongation other permissible gauge lengths AL.
(minimum) percent ........................................... 15.0
(6) Except for serial number and jack-
et material designation, each marking
TABLE 3—CHECK ANALYSIS TOLERANCES prescribed in this paragraph (p) must
Tolerance
be duplicated on each cylinder by any
over the suitable means.
Limit or specified range maximum (q) Inspector’s report. In addition to
Elements (percent) limit or under
the minimum the information required by § 178.35, the
limit inspector’s reports must contain infor-
Carbon ............... To 0.030, incl ................... 0.005 mation on:
Over 0.30 to 0.20, incl ..... 0.01 (1) The jacket material and insula-
Manganese ........ To 1.00 incl ...................... .03 tion type;
Over 1.00 to 3.00, incl ..... 0.04
Phosphorus 1 ..... To 0.040, incl ................... 0.005 (2) The design service temperature
Over 0.040 to 0.020 incl .. 0.010 (°F); and
Sulphur .............. To .40 incl ........................ 0.005 (3) The impact test results, on a lot
Silicon ................ To 1.00, incl ..................... 0.05
Nickel ................. Over 5.00 to 10.00, incl ... 0.10 basis.
Over 10.00 to 20.00, incl 0.15
Chromium .......... Over 15.00 to 20.00, incl 0.20 [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
1 Rephosphorized steels not subject to check analysis for 51653, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, 2003]
phosphorus.
(2) Outer jacket. (i) Nonflammable § 178.58 Specification 4DA welded steel
cryogenic liquids. Cylinders intended cylinders for aircraft use.

for use in the transportation of non- (a) Type, size, and service pressure. A
flammable cryogenic liquid must have DOT 4DA is a welded steel sphere (two
65
§ 178.58 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
seamless hemispheres) or a circum- ciably. A reasonably smooth and uni-

ferentially welded cylinder (two seam- form surface finish is required. No ab-
less drawn shells) with a water capac- rupt change in wall thickness is per-
ity not over 100 pounds and a service mitted. Welding procedures and opera-
pressure of at least 500 but not over 900 tors must be qualified in accordance
psig. with CGA Pamphlet C–3 (IBR, see
(b) Steel. Open-hearth or electric steel § 171.7 of this subchapter).
of uniform quality must be used. A (2) All seams of the sphere or cyl-
heat of steel made under table 1 in this inders must be fusion welded. Seams
paragraph (b), check chemical analysis must be of the butt or joggle butt type
of which is slightly out of the specified and means must be provided for accom-
range, is acceptable, if satisfactory in plishing complete penetration of the
all other respects, provided the toler- joint.
ances shown in table 2 in this para- (e) Welding. Attachments to the con-
graph (b) are not exceeded except as ap- tainer are authorized by fusion welding
proved by the Associate Administrator. provided that such attachments are
The following chemical analyses are made of weldable steel, the carbon con-
authorized: tent of which may not exceed 0.25 per-
cent except in the case of 4130 steel.
(f) Wall thickness. The minimum wall
4130 Percent thickness must be such that the wall
stress at the minimum specified test
Carbon ........................................................ 0.28/0.33.
Manganese ................................................. 0.40/0.60. pressure may not exceed 67 percent of
Phosphorus ................................................ 0.040 max. the minimum tensile strength of the
Sulfur .......................................................... 0.040 max. steel as determined from the physical
Silicon ......................................................... 0.15/0.35.
Chromium ................................................... 0.80/1.10.
and burst tests required and may not
Molybdenum ............................................... 0.15/0.25. be over 70,000 p.s.i. For any diameter
container, the minimum wall thickness
TABLE 2—CHECK ANALYSIS TOLERANCES is 0.040 inch. Calculations must be
made by the formulas in (f)(1) or (f)(2)
Tolerance (per- of this section:
cent) over the
maximum limit or (1) Calculation for a sphere must be
under the min- made by the following formula:
Limit or maximum imum limit
Element specified (percent) S = PD / 4tE
Under Over
min- max-
imum imum Where:
limit limit
S = wall stress in pounds psi;
Carbon ............ Over 0.15 to 0.40 incl .03 ....... .04 P = test pressure prescribed for water jacket
Manganese ..... To 0.60 incl ................. .03 ....... .03 test, i.e., at least 2 times service pres-
Phosphorus1 ... All ranges .................... .............. .01 sure, in psig;
Sulphur ........... All ranges .................... .............. .01 D = outside diameter in inches;
Silicon ............. To 0.30 incl ................. .02 ....... .03
Over 0.30 to 1.00 incl .05 ....... .05 t = minimum wall thickness in inches;
Chromium ....... To 0.90 incl ................. .03 ....... .03 E = 0.85 (provides 85 percent weld efficiency
Over 0.90 to 2.10 incl .05 ....... .05 factor which must be applied in the girth
Molybdenum ... To 0.20 incl ................. .01 ....... .01 weld area and heat affected zones which
Over 0.20 to 0.40, incl .02 ....... .02 zone must extend a distance of 6 times
1 Rephosphorized steels not subject to check analysis for wall thickness from center line of weld);
phosphorus. E = 1.0 (for all other areas).
(c) Identification of material. Materials (2) Calculation for a cylinder must be
must be identified by any suitable made by the following formula:
method except that plates and billets
for hot-drawn containers must be S = [P(1.3D 2 + 0.4d 2)] / (D 2 ¥ d 2)
marked with the heat number. Where:
(d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be S = wall stress in pounds psi;
manufactured in accordance with the P = test pressure prescribed for water jacket
following requirements: test, i.e., at least 2 times service pres-
(1) By best appliances and methods. sure, in psig;

No defect is acceptable that is likely to D = outside diameter in inches;
weaken the finished container appre- d = inside diameter in inches.
66
(g) Heat treatment. The completed as to obtain accurate data. The pres-
containers must be uniformly and sure gauge must permit reading to an
properly heat-treated prior to tests. accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion
Heat-treatment of containers of the au- gauge must permit reading of total ex-
thorized analysis must be as follows: pansion to accuracy either of 1 percent
(1) All containers must be quenched or 0.1 cubic centimeter.
by oil, or other suitable medium except (2) Pressure must be maintained for
as provided in paragraph (g)(4) of this at least 30 seconds and sufficiently
section. longer to ensure complete expansion.
(2) The steel temperature on quench- Any internal pressure applied after
ing must be that recommended for the heat-treatment and previous to the of-
steel analysis, but may not exceed 1,750 ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of
°F. the test pressure. If, due to failure of
(3) The steel must be tempered at the the test apparatus, the test pressure
temperature most suitable for the cannot be maintained, the test may be
analysis except that in no case shall repeated at a pressure increased by 10
the tempering temperature be less than percent or 100 psig, whichever is the
1,000 °F. lower.
(4) The steel may be normalized at a (3) Permanent volumetric expansion
temperature of 1,650 °F instead of being may not exceed 10 percent of total vol-
quenched, and containers so normal- umetric expansion at test pressure.
ized need not be tempered. (4) Each container must be tested to
(5) All cylinders, if water quenched or at least 2 times service pressure.
quenched with a liquid producing a (j) Burst test. One container taken at
cooling rate in excess of 80 percent of random out of 200 or less must be
the cooling rate of water, must be in- hydrostatically tested to destruction.
spected by the magnetic particle or dye The rupture pressure must be included
penetrant method to detect the pres- as part of the inspector’s report.
ence of quenching cracks. Any cylinder (k) Flattening test. Spheres and cyl-
found to have a quench crack must be inders must be subjected to a flat-
rejected and may not be requalified. tening test as follows:
(h) Openings in container. Openings in (1) Flattening test for spheres. One
the container must comply with the sphere taken at random out of each lot
following requirements: of 200 or less must be subjected to a
(1) Each opening in the container flattening test as follows:
must be provided with a fitting, boss, (i) The test must be performed after
or pad of weldable steel securely at- the hydrostatic test.
tached to the container by fusion weld- (ii) The test must be at the weld be-
ing. tween the parallel steel plates on a
(2) Attachments to a fitting, boss, or press with a welded seam, at right an-
pad must be adequate to prevent leak- gles to the plates. Any projecting ap-
age. Threads must comply with the fol- purtenances may be cut off (by me-
lowing: chanical means only) prior to crushing.
(i) Threads must be clean cut, even, (2) Flattening test for cylinders. One
without checks, and tapped to gauge. cylinder taken at random out of each
(ii) Taper threads to be of length not lot of 200 or less, must be subjected to
less than as specified for American a flattening test as follows:
Standard taper pipe threads. (i) The test must be performed after
(iii) Straight threads, having at least the hydrostatic test.
4 engaged threads, to have tight fit and (ii) The test cylinder must be placed
calculated shear strength at least 10 between wedge-shaped knife edges hav-
times the test pressure of the con- ing a 60° angle, rounded to a 1⁄2-inch ra-
tainer; gaskets required, adequate to dius.
prevent leakage. (l) Radiographic inspection. Radio-
(i) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder graphic examinations is required on all
must successfully withstand a hydro- welded joints which are subjected to in-
static test as follows: ternal pressure, except that at the dis-

(1) The test must be by water-jacket, cretion of the disinterested inspector,
or other suitable method, operated so openings less than 25 percent of the
67
§ 178.59 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
sphere diameter need not be subjected the stress at which the 0.2 percent per-
to radiographic inspection. Evidence of manent strain occurs may be deter-
any defects likely to seriously weaken mined with sufficient accuracy by cal-
the container must be cause for rejec- culating the elastic extension of the
tion. gauge length under appropriate load
(m) Physical test and specimens for and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the
spheres and cylinders. Spheres and cyl- gauge length. Elastic extension cal-
inders must be subjected to a physical culations must be based on an elastic
test as follows: modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of
(1) A physical test for a sphere is re- controversy, the entire stress-strain
quired on 2 specimens cut from a flat diagram must be plotted and the yield
representative sample plate of the strength determined from the 0.2 per-
same heat taken at random from the cent offset.
steel used to produce the sphere. This (iii) For the purpose of strain meas-
flat steel from which the 2 specimens urement, the initial strain must be set
are to be cut must receive the same while the specimen is under a stress of
heat-treatment as the spheres them- 12,000 psi and the strain indicator read-
selves. Sample plates to be taken for ing being set at the calculated cor-
each lot of 200 or less spheres. responding strain.
(2) Specimens for spheres have a (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing
gauge length of 2 inches with a width machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per
not over 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge length minute during yield strength deter-
at least 24 times thickness with a mination.
width not over 6 times thickness is au- (n) Acceptable results for physical, flat-
thorized when wall of sphere is not tening, and burst tests. The following are
over 3⁄16 inch thick. acceptable results of the physical, flat-
(3) A physical test for cylinders is re- tening and burst test:
quired on 2 specimens cut from 1 cyl- (1) Elongation must be at least 20
inder taken at random out of each lot percent for a 2-inch gauge length or 10
of 200 or less. percent in other cases.
(4) Specimens for cylinder must con- (2) Flattening is required to 50 per-
form to the following: cent of the original outside diameter
(i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a without cracking.
width not over 11⁄2 inches, a gauge (3) Burst pressure must be at least 3
length of 2 inches with a width not times service pressure.
over 11⁄2 inches, a gauge length at least (o) Rejected containers. Reheat-treat-
24 times thickness with a width not ment of rejected cylinders is author-
over 6 times thickness is authorized ized. Subsequent thereto, containers
when a cylinder wall is not over 3⁄16 must pass all prescribed tests to be ac-
inch thick. ceptable. Repair of welded seams by
(ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip welding prior to reheat-treatment is
ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends authorized.
may be flattened to within 1 inch of (p) Marking. Markings on each con-
each end of the reduced section. tainer must be stamped plainly and
(iii) Heating of a specimen for any permanently on a permanent attach-
purpose is not authorized. ment or on a metal nameplate perma-
(5) The yield strength in tension nently secured to the container by
must be the stress corresponding to a means other than soft solder.
permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
gauge length. The following conditions amended at 66 FR 45386, 45388, Aug. 28, 2001;
apply: 67 FR 51654, Aug. 8, 2002; 67 FR 61015, Sept. 27,
(i) The yield strength must be deter- 2002; 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, 2003]
the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as § 178.59 Specification 8 steel cylinders
prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7 with porous fillings for acetylene.
of this subchapter). (a) Type and service pressure. A DOT 8
(ii) In using the ‘‘extension under cylinder is a seamless cylinder with a

load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex- service pressure of 250 psig. The fol-
tension under load’’) corresponding to lowing steel is authorized:
68
(1) A longitudinal seam if forge lap heat-treatment and previous to the of-
welded; ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of
(2) Attachment of heads by welding the test pressure.
or by brazing by dipping process; or (3) Permanent volumetric expansion
(3) A welded circumferential body may not exceed 10 percent of total vol-
seam if the cylinder has no longitu- umetric expansion at test pressure.
dinal seam. (4) One cylinder out of each lot of 200
(b) Steel. Open-hearth, electric or or less must be hydrostatically tested
basic oxygen process steel of uniform to at least 750 psig. Cylinders not so
quality must be used. Content percent tested must be examined under pres-
may not exceed the following: Carbon, sure of between 500 and 600 psig and
0.25; phosphorus, 0.045; sulphur, 0.050. show no defect. If hydrostatically test-
(c) Identification of steel. Materials ed cylinder fails, each cylinder in the
must be identified by any suitable lot may be hydrostatically tested and
method except that plates and billets those passing are acceptable.
for hot-drawn cylinders must be (i) Leakage test. Cylinders with bot-
marked with the heat number. toms closed in by spinning must be
(d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be subjected to a leakage test by setting
manufactured using equipment and the interior air or gas pressure to not
processes adequate to ensure that each less than the service pressure. Cyl-
cylinder produced conforms to the re- inders which leak must be rejected.
quirements of this subpart. No defect is (j) Physical test. A physical test must
acceptable that is likely to weaken the be conducted as follows:
finished cylinder appreciably. A rea- (1) The test is required on 2 speci-
sonably smooth and uniform surface mens cut longitudinally from 1 cyl-
finish is required. Welding procedures inder or part thereof taken at random
and operators must be qualified in ac- out of each lot of 200 or less, after heat
cordance with CGA Pamphlet C–3 (IBR, treatment.
see § 171.7 of this subchapter). (2) Specimens must conform to a
(e) Exposed bottom welds. Exposed bot- gauge length of 8 inches with a width
tom welds on cylinders over 18 inches not over 11⁄2 inches, a gauge length of 2
long must be protected by footrings. inches with width not over 11⁄2, or a
(f) Heat treatment. Body and heads gauge length at least 24 times thick-
formed by drawing or pressing must be ness with a width not over 6 times
uniformly and properly heat treated thickness is authorized when a cylinder
prior to tests. wall is not over 3⁄16 inch thick.
(g) Openings. Openings in the cyl- (3) The yield strength in tension
inders must comply with the following: must be the stress corresponding to a
(1) Standard taper pipe threads are permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the
required; gauge length. The following conditions
(2) Length may not be less than as apply:
specified for American Standard pipe (i) The yield strength must be deter-
threads; tapped to gauge; clean cut, mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or
even, and without checks. the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as
(h) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7
must successfully withstand a hydro- of this subchapter).
static test as follows: (ii) In using the ‘‘extension under
(1) The test must be by water-jacket, load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex-
or other suitable method, operated so tension under load’’) corresponding to
as to obtain accurate data. The pres- the stress at which the 0.2 percent per-
sure gauge must permit reading to an manent strain occurs may be deter-
accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion mined with sufficient accuracy by cal-
gauge must permit reading of total ex- culating the elastic extension of the
pansion to an accuracy of either 1 per- gauge length under appropriate load
cent or 0.1 cubic centimeter. and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the
(2) Pressure must be maintained for gauge length. Elastic extension cal-
at least 30 seconds and sufficiently culations must be based on an elastic

longer to ensure complete expansion. modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of
Any internal pressure applied after controversy, the entire stress-strain
69
§ 178.59 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
diagram must be plotted and the yield be tested for porosity. If the test cyl-
strength determined from the 0.2 off- inder fails, each cylinder in the lot
set. may be tested individually and those
(iii) For the purpose of strain meas- cylinders that pass the test are accept-
urement, the initial strain must be set able.
while the specimen is under a stress of (3) For filling that is molded and
12,000 psi and the strain indicator read- dried before insertion in cylinders, po-
ing being set at the calculated cor- rosity test may be made on a sample
responding strain. block taken at random from material
(iv) Cross-head speed of the testing to be used.
machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per (4) The porosity of the filling mate-
minute during yield strength deter- rial must be determined. The amount
mination. of solvent at 70 °F for a cylinder:
(4) Yield strength may not exceed 73 (i) Having shell volumetric capacity
percent of tensile strength. Elongation above 20 pounds water capacity (nomi-
must be at least 40 percent in 2 inch or nal) may not exceed the following:
20 percent in other cases.
Maximum
(k) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat- acetone sol-
ment of rejected cylinder is authorized. Percent porosity of filler vent percent
shell capac-
Subsequent thereto, cylinders must ity by vol-
pass all prescribed tests to be accept- ume
able. Repair by welding is authorized. 90 to 92 ............................................................. 43.4
(l) Porous filling. (1) Cylinders must 87 to 90 ............................................................. 42.0
be filled with a porous material in ac- 83 to 87 ............................................................. 40.0
80 to 83 ............................................................. 38.6
cordance with the following: 75 to 80 ............................................................. 36.2
(i) The porous material may not dis- 70 to 75 ............................................................. 33.8
integrate or sag when wet with solvent 65 to 70 ............................................................. 31.4
or when subjected to normal service;
(ii) The porous filling material must (ii) Having volumetric capacity of 20
be uniform in quality and free of voids, pounds or less water capacity (nomi-
except that a well drilled into the fill- nal), may not exceed the following:
ing material beneath the valve is au- Maximum
thorized if the well is filled with a ma- acetone sol-
terial of such type that the functions vent percent
Percent porosity of filler shell capac-
of the filling material are not imity by vol-
paired; ume
(iii) Overall shrinkage of the filling 90 to 92 ............................................................. 41.8
material is authorized if the total 83 to 90 ............................................................. 38.5
clearance between the cylinder shell 80 to 83 ............................................................. 37.1
75 to 80 ............................................................. 34.8
and filling material, after solvent has 70 to 75 ............................................................. 32.5
been added, does not exceed 1⁄2 of 1 per- 65 to 70 ............................................................. 30.2
cent of the respective diameter or
length, but not to exceed 1⁄8 inch, meas- (m) Tare weight. The tare weight is
ured diametrically and longitudinally; the combined weight of the cylinder
(iv) The clearance may not impair proper, porous filling, valve, and sol-
the functions of the filling material; vent, without removable cap.
(v) The installed filling material (n) Duties of inspector. In addition to
must meet the requirements of CGA C– the requirements of § 178.35, the inspec-
12 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter); tor is required to—
and (1) Certify chemical analyses of steel
(vi) Porosity of filling material may used, signed by manufacturer thereof;
not exceed 80 percent except that fill- also verify by, check analyses of sam-
ing material with a porosity of up to 92 ples taken from each heat or from 1 out
percent may be used when tested with of each lot of 200 or less, plates, shells,
satisfactory results in accordance with or tubes used.
CGA Pamphlet C–12. (2) Verify compliance of cylinder
(2) When the porosity of each cyl- shells with all shell requirements; in-
inder is not known, a cylinder taken at spect inside before closing in both ends;
random from a lot of 200 or less must verify heat treatment as proper; obtain
70
all samples for all tests and for check (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be
analyses; witness all tests; verify manufactured using equipment and
threads by gauge; report volumetric ca- processes adequate to ensure that each
pacity and minimum thickness of wall cylinder produced conforms to the re-
noted. quirements of this subpart. No defect is
(3) Prepare report on manufacture of permitted that is likely to weaken the
steel shells in form prescribed in finished cylinder appreciably. A rea-
§ 178.35. Furnish one copy to manufac- sonably smooth and uniform surface
turer and three copies to the company finish is required. Welding procedures
that is to complete the cylinders. and operators must be qualified in ac-
(4) Determine porosity of filling and cordance with CGA Pamphlet C–3 (IBR,
tare weights; verify compliance of see § 171.7 of this subchapter).
marking with prescribed requirements; (e) Footrings. Exposed bottom welds
obtain necessary copies of steel shell on cylinders over 18 inches long must
reports; and furnish complete reports be protected by footrings.
required by this specification to the (f) Welding or brazing. Welding or
person who has completed the manu- brazing for any purpose whatsoever is
facture of the cylinders and, upon re- prohibited except as follows:
quest, to the purchaser. The test re- (1) The attachment to the tops or
ports must be retained by the inspector
bottoms of cylinders of neckrings,
for fifteen years from the original test
footrings, handlers, bosses, pads, and
date of the cylinder.
valve protecting rings is authorized
(o) Marking. (1) Marking on each cyl-
provided that such attachments and
inder must be stamped plainly and per-
the portion of the container to which
manently on or near the shoulder, top
they are attached are made of weldable
head, neck or valve protection collar
which is permanently attached to the
not exceed 0.25 percent.
cylinder and forming integral part
(2) Heat treatment is not required
thereof.
after welding or brazing weldable low
(2) Tare weight of cylinder, in pounds
carbon parts to attachments, specified
and ounces, must be marked on the
in paragraph (f)(1) of this section, of
cylinder.
similar material which have been pre-
(3) Cylinders, not completed, when
viously welded or brazed to the top or
delivered must each be marked for
bottom of cylinders and properly heat
identification of each lot of 200 or less.
treated, provided such subsequent
[Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as welding or brazing does not produce a
amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR temperature in excess of 400 °F in any
61016, Sept. 27, 2002; 67 FR 51654, Aug. 8, 2002; part of the top or bottom material.
68 FR 75748, 75749, Dec. 31, 2003]
(g) Wall thickness; wall stress. The wall
§ 178.60 Specification 8AL steel cyl- thickness/wall stress of the cylinder
inders with porous fillings for acet- must conform to the following:
ylene. (1) The calculated wall stress at 750
(a) Type and service pressure. A DOT psi may not exceed 35,000 psi, or one-
8AL cylinder is a seamless steel cyl- half of the minimum ultimate strength
inder with a service pressure of 250 of the steel as determined in paragraph
psig. However, the attachment of heads (l) of this section, whichever value is
by welding or by brazing by dipping the smaller. The measured wall thick-
process and a welded circumferential ness may not include galvanizing or
body seam is authorized. Longitudinal other protective coating.
seams are not authorized. (i) Calculation of wall stress must be
(b) Authorized steel. The authorized made by the formula:
steel is as specified in table I of appen- S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ d2)
dix A to this part.
(c) Identification of steel. Material Where:
must be identified by any suitable S = wall stress in pounds psi;
method except that plates and billets P = 750 psig (minimum test pressure);
for hot-drawn cylinders must be D = outside diameter in inches;
marked with heat number. d = inside diameter in inches.
71
§ 178.60 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(ii) Either D or d must be calculated (k) Leakage test. Cylinders with bot-
from the relation D = d + 2t, where t = toms closed in by spinning must be
minimum wall thickness. leakage tested by setting the interior
(2) Cylinders with a wall thickness air or gas pressure at not less than the
less than 0.100 inch, the ratio of service pressure. Any cylinder that
straight side wall length to outside di- leaks must be rejected.
ameter may not exceed 3.5. (l) Physical test. A physical test must
(3) For cylinders having outside di- be conducted as follows;
ameter over 5 inches, the minimum (1) The test is required on 2 speci-
wall thickness must be 0.087 inch. mens cut longitudinally from 1 cyl-
(h) Heat treatment. Each cylinder inder or part thereof taken at random
must be uniformly and properly heat out of each lot of 200 or less, after heat
treated, prior to tests, by any suitable treatment.
method in excess of 1100 °F. Heat treat- (2) Specimens must conform to a
ment must be accomplished after all gauge length of 8 inches with a width
forming and welding operations, except not over 11⁄2 inches, a gauge length 2
that when brazed joints are used, heat inches with a width not over 11⁄2 inches,
treatment must follow any forming or a gauge length at least 24 times
and welding operations but may be thickness with a width not over 6 times
done before, during, or after the braz- thickness is authorized when a cylinder
wall is not over 3⁄16 inch thick.
ing operations. Liquid quenching is not
authorized.
must be the stress corresponding to a
(i) Openings. Standard taper pipe
permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the
threads required in all openings. The
gauge length. The following conditions
length of the opening may not be less
apply:
than as specified for American Stand-
(i) The yield strength must be deter-
ard pipe threads; tapped to gauge;
clean cut, even, and without checks.
the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as
(j) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7
must successfully withstand a hydro- of this subchapter).
static test as follows: (ii) In using the ‘‘extension under
(1) The test must be by water-jacket, load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex-
or other suitable method, operated so tension under load’’) corresponding to
as to obtain accurate data. The pres- the stress at which the 0.2 percent per-
sure gauge must permit reading to an manent strain occurs may be deter-
accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion mined with sufficient accuracy by cal-
gauge must permit reading of total ex- culating the elastic extension of the
pansion to an accuracy of either 1 per- gauge length under appropriate load
cent or 0.1 cubic centimeter. and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the
(2) Pressure must be maintained for gauge length. Elastic extension cal-
at least 30 seconds and sufficiently culations must be based on an elastic
longer to ensure complete expansion. modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of
Any internal pressure applied after controversy, the entire stress-strain
heat-treatment and previous to the of- diagram must be plotted and the yield
ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of strength determined from the 0.2 off-
the test pressure. set.
(3) Permanent volumetric expansion (iii) For the purpose of strain meas-
may not exceed 10 percent of total vol- urement, the initial strain must be set
umetric expansion at test pressure. while the specimen is under a stress of
(4) One cylinder out of each lot of 200 12,000 psi, the strain indicator reading
or less must be hydrostatically tested being set at the calculated cor-
to at least 750 psig. Cylinders not so responding strain.
tested must be examined under pres- (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing
sure of between 500 and 600 psig and machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per
show no defect. If a hydrostatically minute during yield strength deter-
tested cylinder fails, each cylinder in mination.

the lot may be hydrostatically tested (m) Elongation. Physical test speci-
and those passing are acceptable. mens must show at least a 40 percent
72
elongation for a 2 inch gauge length or (p) Porous filling. (1) Cylinders must
at least a 20 percent elongation in be filled with a porous material in ac-
other cases. Except that these elon- cordance with the following:
gation percentages may be reduced nu- (i) The porous material may not dis-
merically by 2 for 2 inch specimens and integrate or sag when wet with solvent
1 in other cases for each 7,500 psi incre- or when subjected to normal service;
ment of tensile strength above 50,000 (ii) The filling material must be uni-
psi to a maximum of four such incre- form in quality and free of voids, ex-
ments. cept that a well drilled into the filling
material beneath the valve is author-
(n) Weld tests. Specimens taken
ized if the well is filled with a material
across the circumferentially welded
of such type that the functions of the
seam must be cut from one cylinder filling material are not impaired;
taken at random from each lot of 200 or (iii) Overall shrinkage of the filling
less cylinders after heat treatment and material is authorized if the total
must pass satisfactorily the following clearance between the cylinder shell
tests: and filling material, after solvent has
(1) Tensile test. A specimen must be been added, does not exceed 1⁄2 of 1 per-
cut from one cylinder of each lot of 200 cent of the respective diameter or
or less, or welded test plate. The speci- length but not to exceed 1⁄8 inch, meas-
men must be taken from across the ured diametrically and longitudinally;
major seam and must be prepared and (iv) The clearance may not impair
tested in accordance with and must the functions of the filling material;
meet the requirements of CGA Pam- (v) The installed filling material
phlet C–3. Should this specimen fail to must meet the requirements of CGA C–
meet the requirements, specimens may 12 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter);
be taken from two additional cylinders and
or welded test plates from the same lot (vi) Porosity of filling material may
and tested. If either of the latter speci- not exceed 80 percent except that fill-
mens fail to meet the requirements, ing material with a porosity of up to 92
the entire lot represented must be re- percent may be used when tested with
jected. satisfactory results in accordance with
CGA Pamphlet C–12.
(2) Guided bend test. A root bend test
(2) When the porosity of each cyl-
specimen must be cut from the cylinder is not known, a cylinder taken at
inder or welded test plate, used for the random from a lot of 200 or less must
tensile test specified in paragraph be tested for porosity. If the test cyl-
(n)(1) of this section. Specimens must inder fails, each cylinder in the lot
be prepared and tested in accordance may be tested individually and those
with and must meet the requirements cylinders that pass the test are accept-
of CGA Pamphlet C–3. able.
(3) Alternate guided-bend test. This (3) For filling that is molded and
test may be used and must be as re- dried before insertion in cylinders, po-
quired by CGA Pamphlet C–3. The spec- rosity test may be made on sample
imen must be bent until the elongation block taken at random from material
at the outer surface, adjacent to the to be used.
root of the weld, between the lightly (4) The porosity of the filling mate-
scribed gage lines-a to b, must be at rial must be determined; the amount of
least 20 percent, except that this per- solvent at 70 °F for a cylinder:
centage may be reduced for steels hav- (i) Having shell volumetric capacity
ing a tensile strength in excess of 50,000 above 20 pounds water capacity (nomi-
psi, as provided in paragraph (m) of nal) may not exceed the following:
this section. Maximum acetone
(o) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat- Percent porosity of filler solvent percent shell
capacity by volume
ment of rejected cylinders is author-
ized. Subsequent thereto, cylinders 90 to 92 ......................................... 43.4
must pass all prescribed tests to be ac- 87 to 90 ......................................... 42.0

83 to 87 ......................................... 40.0
ceptable. Repair by welding is author- 80 to 83 ......................................... 38.6
ized. 75 to 80 ......................................... 36.2
73
§ 178.61 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
Maximum acetone spector for fifteen years from the origi-

Percent porosity of filler solvent percent shell nal test date of the cylinder.
capacity by volume
(s) Marking. (1) Tare weight of cyl-
70 to 75 ......................................... 33.8 inder, in pounds and ounces, must be
65 to 70 ......................................... 31.4 marked on the cylinder.
(2) Cylinders, not completed, when
(ii) Having volumetric capacity of 20 delivered must each be marked for
pounds or less water capacity (nomi- identification of each lot of 200 or less.
nal), may not exceed the following: (3) Markings must be stamped plainly
Maximum acetone
and permanently in locations in ac-
Percent porosity of filler solvent percent shell cordance with the following:
capacity by volume (i) On shoulders and top heads not
90 to 92 ......................................... 41.8 less than 0.087 inch thick; or
83 to 90 ......................................... 38.5 (ii) On neck, valve boss, valve protec-
80 to 83 ......................................... 37.1 tion sleeve, or similar part perma-
75 to 80 ......................................... 34.8 nently attached to the top end of cyl-
70 to 75 ......................................... 32.5 inder; or
65 to 70 ......................................... 30.2
(iii) On a plate of ferrous material at-
tached to the top of the cylinder or
(q) Tare weight. The tare weight is
permanent part thereof; the plate must
the combined weight of the cylinder
be at least 1⁄16 inch thick, and must be
proper, porous filling, valve, and sol-
attached by welding, or by brazing at a
vent, but without removable cap.
temperature of at least 1,100 °F
(r) Duties of inspector. In addition to throughout all edges of the plate. Suffi-
the requirements of § 178.35, the inspec- cient space must be left on the plate to
tor shall— provide for stamping at least four (4)
(1) Certify chemical analyses of steel retest dates.
used, signed by manufacturer thereof;
also verify by check analyses, of sam- [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
ples taken from each heat or from 1 out amended at 66 FR 45386, 45388, Aug. 28, 2001;
67 FR 51654, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75748, 75749,
of each lot of 200 or less plates, shells, Dec. 31, 2003]
or tubes used.
(2) Verify compliance of cylinder § 178.61 Specification 4BW welded
shells with all shell requirements, in- steel cylinders with electric-arc
spect inside before closing in both ends, welded longitudinal seam.
verify heat treatment as proper; obtain (a) Type, size and service pressure. A
all samples for all tests and for check DOT 4BW cylinder is a welded type
analyses, witness all tests; verify steel cylinder with a longitudinal elec-
threads by gauge, report volumetric ca- tric-arc welded seam, a water capacity
pacity and minimum thickness of wall (nominal) not over 1,000 pounds and a
noted. service pressure at least 225 and not
(3) Report percentage of each speci- over 500 psig gauge. Cylinders closed in
fied alloying element in the steel. Pre- by spinning process are not authorized.
pare report on manufacture of steel (b) Authorized steel. Steel used in the
shells in form prescribed in § 178.35. construction of the cylinder must con-
Furnish one copy to manufacturer and form to the following:
three copies to the company that is to (1) The body of the cylinder must be
complete the cylinders. constructed of steel conforming to the
(4) Determine porosity of filling and limits specified in table 1 of appendix A
tare weights; verify compliance of to this part.
marking with prescribed requirements; (2) Material for heads must meet the
obtain necessary copies of steel shell requirements of paragraph (b)(1) of this
reports prescribed in paragraph (b) of section or be open hearth, electric or
this section; and furnish complete test basic oxygen carbon steel of uniform
reports required by this specification quality. Content percent may not ex-
to the person who has completed the ceed the following: Carbon 0.25, Man-
manufacturer of the cylinders and, ganese 0.60, Phosphorus 0.045, Sulfur

upon request, to the purchaser. The 0.050. Heads must be hemispherical or
test reports must be retained by the in- ellipsoidal in shape with a maximum
74
ratio of 2.1. If low carbon steel is used, each lot of 50 consecutively welded cyl-
the thickness of such heads must be de- inders is spot radiographed. In addi-
termined by using a maximum wall tion, one out of the first five cylinders
stress of 24,000 p.s.i. in the formula de- welded following a shut down of weld-
scribed in paragraph (f)(4) of this sec- ing operations exceeding four hours
tion. must be spot radiographed. Spot
(c) Identification of material. Material radiographs, when required, must be
must be identified by any suitable made of a finished welded cylinder and
method. must include the girth weld for 2
(d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be inches in both directions from the
manufactured using equipment and intersection of the longitudinal and
processes adequate to ensure that each girth welds and include at least 6
cylinder produced conforms to the re- inches of the longitudinal weld. Max-
quirements of this subpart and the fol- imum joint efficacy of 0.75 must be per-
lowing: missible without radiography.
(1) No defect is permitted that is (4) Welding procedures and operators
likely to weaken the finished cylinder must be qualified in accordance with
appreciably. A reasonably smooth and CGA Pamphlet C–3 (IBR, see § 171.7 of
uniform surface is required. Exposed this subchapter).
bottom welds on cylinders over 18 (e) Welding of attachments. The at-
inches long must be protected by tachment to the tops and bottoms only
footrings. Minimum thickness of heads of cylinders by welding of neckrings,
may not be less than 90 percent of the footrings, handles, bosses, pads and
required thickness of the sidewall. valve protection rings is authorized
Heads must be concave to pressure. provided that such attachments and
(2) Circumferential seams must be by the portion of the container to which
electric-arc welding. Joints must be they are attached are made of weldable
butt with one member offset (joggle steel, the carbon content of which may
butt) or lap with minimum overlap of not exceed 0.25 percent.
at least four times nominal sheet (f) Wall thickness. For outside diame-
thickness. ters over 6 inches the minimum wall
(3) Longitudinal seams in shells must thickness must be 0.078 inch. For a cyl-
conform to the following: inder with a wall thickness less than
(i) Longitudinal electric-arc welded 0.100 inch, the ratio of tangential
seams must be of the butt welded type. length to outside diameter may not ex-
Welds must be made by a machine ceed 4 to1 (4:1). In any case the min-
process including automatic feed and imum wall thickness must be such that
welding guidance mechanisms. Longi- the wall stress calculated by the for-
tudinal seams must have complete mula listed in paragraph (f)(4) of this
joint penetration, and must be free section may not exceed the lesser value
from undercuts, overlaps or abrupt of any of the following:
ridges or valleys. Misalignment of mat- (1) The value referenced in paragraph
ing butt edges may not exceed 1⁄6 of (b) of this section for the particular
nominal sheet thickness or 1⁄32 inch material under consideration.
whichever is less. All joints with nomi- (2) One-half of the minimum tensile
nal sheet thickness up to and including strength of the material determined as
1⁄8 inch must be tightly butted. When required in paragraph (j) of this sec-
nominal sheet thickness is greater tion.
than 1⁄8 inch, the joint must be gapped (3) 35,000 psi.
with maximum distance equal to one- (4) Stress must be calculated by the
half the nominal sheet thickness or 1⁄32 following formula:
inch whichever is less. Joint design, S = [2P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / [E(D2 ¥ d2)]
preparation and fit-up must be such
where:
that requirements of this paragraph (d)
are satisfied. S = wall stress, psi;
P = service pressure, psig;
(ii) Maximum joint efficiency must
D = outside diameter, inches;

be 1.0 when each seam is radiographed d = inside diameter, inches;
completely. Maximum joint efficiency E = joint efficiency of the longitudinal seam
must be 0.90 when one cylinder from (from paragraph (d) of this section).
75
§ 178.61 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(g) Heat treatment. Each cylinder (3) Permanent volumetric expansion

must be uniformly and properly heat may not exceed 10 percent of the total
treated prior to test by the applicable volumetric expansion at test pressure.
method referenced in Table 1 of appen- (4) Cylinders must be tested as fol-
dix A to this part. Heat treatment lows:
must be accomplished after all forming (i) At least 1 cylinder selected at ran-
and welding operations. Heat treat- dom out of each lot of 200 or less must
ment is not required after welding or be tested as outlined in paragraphs
brazing of weldable low carbon parts to (i)(1), (i)(2), and (i)(3) of this section to
attachments of similar material which at least two times service pressure.
have been previously welded to the top (ii) All cylinders not tested as out-
or bottom of cylinders and properly lined in paragraph (i)(4)(i) of this sec-
heat treated, provided such subsequent
tion must be examined under pressure
welding or brazing does not produce a
of at least two times service pressure
temperature in excess of 400 °F in any
and show no defect.
part of the top or bottom material.
(h) Openings in cylinders. Openings in (5) One finished cylinder selected at
the cylinder must conform to the fol- random out of each lot of 500 or less
lowing: successively produced must be
(1) All openings must be in the heads hydrostatically tested to 4 times serv-
or bases. ice pressure without bursting.
(2) Openings in cylinders must be pro- (j) Physical tests. Cylinders must be
vided with adequate fittings, bosses, or subjected to a physical test as follows:
pads, integral with or securely at- (1) Specimens must be taken from
tached to the cylinder by welding. one cylinder after heat treatment and
(3) Threads must comply with the fol- chosen at random from each lot of 200
lowing: or less, as follows:
(i) Threads must be clean cut and to (i) Body specimen. One specimen
gauge. must be taken longitudinally from the
(ii) Taper threads must be of length body section at least 90 degrees away
not less than as specified for American from the weld.
Standard Taper Pipe threads. (ii) Head specimen. One specimen
(iii) Straight threads, having at least must be taken from either head on a
4 engaged threads, to have tight fit and cylinder when both heads are made of
calculated shear strength at least 10 the same material. However, if the two
times the test pressure of the cylinder; heads are made of differing materials,
gaskets required, adequate to prevent a specimen must be taken from each
leakage. head.
(4) Closure of fittings, boss or pads (iii) If due to welded attachments on
must be adequate to prevent leakage. the top head there is insufficient sur-
(i) Hydrostatic test. Cylinders must
face from which to take a specimen, it
withstand a hydrostatic test, as fol-
may be taken from a representative
lows:
head of the same heat treatment as the
(1) The test must be by water-jacket,
test cylinder.
or other suitable method, operated so
as to obtain accurate data. The pres- (2) Specimens must conform to the
sure gauge must permit readings to an following:
accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion (i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a
gauge must permit readings of total width not over 11⁄2 inches, a gauge
volumetric expansion to an accuracy length of 2 inches with a width not
either of 1 percent or 0.1 cubic centi- over 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge length at
meter. least 24 times thickness with a width
(2) Pressure must be maintained for not over 6 times thickness is author-
at least 30 seconds and sufficiently ized when a cylinder wall is not over 3⁄16
longer to ensure complete expansion. inch thick.
Any internal pressure applied after (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip
heat treatment and previous to the of- ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends
ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of may be flattened to within 1 inch of
the test pressure. each end of the reduced section.
76
(iii) When size of the cylinder does (l) Tests of welds. Welds must be sub-
not permit securing straight speci- jected to the following tests:
mens, the specimens may be taken in (1) Tensile test. A specimen must be
any location or direction and may be cut from one cylinder of each lot of 200
straightened or flattened cold, by pres- or less. The specimen must be taken
sure only, not by blows when speci- from across the longitudinal seam and
mens are so taken and prepared, the in- must be prepared and tested in accord-
spector’s report must show in connec- ance with and must meet the require-
tion with record of physical tests de- ments of CGA Pamphlet C–3.
tailed information in regard to such (2) Guided bend test. A root test speci-
specimens.
men must be cut from the cylinder
(iv) Heating of a specimen for any
used for the tensile test specified in
purpose is not authorized.
paragraph (l)(1) of this section. Speci-
mens must be taken from across the
must be the stress corresponding to a
permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the longitudinal seam and must be pre-
gauge length. The following conditions pared and tested in accordance with
apply: and must meet the requirements of
(i) The yield strength must be deter- CGA Pamphlet C–3.
mined by either the ‘‘off-set’’ method (3) Alternate guided bend test. This
or the ‘‘extension under load’’ method test may be used and must be as re-
as prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see quired by CGA Pamphlet C–3. The spec-
§ 171.7 of this subchapter). imen must be bent until the elongation
(ii) In using the ‘‘extension under at the outer surface, adjacent to the
load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex- root of the weld, between the lightly
tension under load’’), corresponding to scribed gauge lines a to b, must be at
the stress at which the 0.2-percent per- least 20 percent, except that this per-
manent strain occurs may be deter- centage may be reduced for steels hav-
mined with sufficient accuracy by cal- ing a tensile strength in excess of 50,000
culating the elastic extension of the psi, as provided in paragraph (k) of this
gauge length under appropriate load section.
and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the (m) Radiographic examination. Welds
gauge length. Elastic extension cal- of the cylinders must be subjected to a
culations must be based on an elastic radiographic examination as follows:
modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of (1) Radiographic inspection must
controversy, the entire stress-strain conform to the techniques and accept-
diagram must be plotted and the yield ability criteria set forth in CGA Pam-
strength determined from the 0.2-per- phlet C–3. When fluoroscopic inspection
cent offset.
is used, permanent film records need
(iii) For the purpose of strain meas-
not be retained.
urement, the initial strain reference
must be set while the specimen is (2) Should spot radiographic exam-
under a stress of 12,000 psi and the ination fail to meet the requirements
strain indicator reading being set at of paragraph (m)(1) of this section, two
the calculated corresponding strain. additional welds from the same lot of
(iv) Cross-head speed of the testing 50 cylinders or less must be examined,
machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per and if either of these fail to meet the
minute during yield strength deter- requirements, each cylinder must be
mination. examined as previously outlined; only
(k) Elongation. Physical test speci- those passing are acceptable.
mens must show at least a 40 percent (n) Rejected cylinders. (1) Unless oth-
elongation for a 2-inch gauge length or erwise stated, if a sample cylinder or
at least a 20 percent elongation in specimen taken from a lot of cylinders
other cases. Except that these elon- fails the prescribed test, then two addi-
gation percentages may be reduced nu- tional specimens must be selected from
merically by 2 for 2-inch specimens and the same lot and subjected to the pre-
by 1 in other cases for each 7,500 psi in- scribed test. If either of these fails the
crement of tensile strength above 50,000 test, then the entire lot must be re-
psi to a maximum of four increments. jected.
77
§ 178.65 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(2) Reheat treatment of rejected cyl- (2) Test pressure. The minimum test
inders is authorized. Subsequent there- pressure is the maximum pressure of
to, cylinders must pass all prescribed contents at 130 °F or 180 p.s.i.g. which-
tests to be acceptable. Repair of welded ever is greater.
seams by welding is authorized pro- (3) Pressure of contents. The term
vided that all defective metal is cut ‘‘pressure of contents’’ as used in this
away and the joint is rewelded as pre- specification means the total pressure
scribed for original welded joints. of all the materials to be shipped in the
(o) Markings. Markings must be cylinder.
stamped plainly and permanently in (b) Material; steel or aluminum. The
any of the following locations on the cylinder must be constructed of either
cylinder: steel or aluminum conforming to the
(1) On shoulders and top heads when following requirements:
they are not less than 0.087-inch thick. (1) Steel. (i) The steel analysis must
(2) On a metal plate attached to the conform to the following:
top of the cylinder or permanent part
thereof; sufficient space must be left on Ladle Check
analysis analysis
the plate to provide for stamping at
least six retest dates; the plate must be Carbon, maximum percent .................... 0.12 0.15
at least 1⁄16-inch thick and must be at- Phosphorus, maximum percent ............. .04 .05
Sulfur, maximum percent ...................... .05 .06
tached by welding, or by brazing. The
brazing rod is to melt at a temperature
(ii) For a cylinder made of seamless
of 1100 °F Welding or brazing must be
steel tubing with integrally formed
along all the edges of the plate.
ends, hot drawn, and finished, content
(3) On the neck, valve boss, valve pro-
percent for the following may not ex-
tection sleeve, or similar part perma-
ceed: Carbon, 0.55; phosphorous, 0.045;
nently attached to the top of the cyl-
sulfur, 0.050.
inder.
(iii) For non-heat treated welded
(4) On the footring permanently at-
steel cylinders, adequately killed deep
tached to the cylinder, provided the
drawing quality steel is required.
water capacity of the cylinder does not
exceed 25 pounds. (iv) Longitudinal or helical welded
(p) Inspector’s report. In addition to cylinders are not authorized for service
the information required by § 178.35, the pressures in excess of 500 p.s.i.g.
inspector’s report must indicate the (2) Aluminum. Aluminum is not au-
type and amount of radiography. thorized for service pressures in excess
of 500 psig. The analysis of the alu-
[Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as minum must conform to the Aluminum
amended at 64 FR 51919, Sept. 27, 1999; 66 FR Association standard for alloys 1060,
45386, 45388, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51654, Aug. 6, 1100, 1170, 3003, 5052, 5086, 5154, 6061, and
2002; 67 FR 61016, Sept. 27, 2002; 68 FR 57633,
Oct. 6, 2003; 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, 2003; 78 FR
6063, as specified in its publication en-
60754, Oct. 2, 2013] titled ‘‘Aluminum Standards and
Data’’ (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
§ 178.65 Specification 39 non-reusable chapter).
(non-refillable) cylinders. (3) Material with seams, cracks, lam-
(a) Type, size, service pressure, and test inations, or other injurious defects not
pressure. A DOT 39 cylinder is a seam- permitted.
less, welded, or brazed cylinder with a (4) Material used must be identified
service pressure not to exceed 80 per- by any suitable method.
cent of the test pressure. Spherical (c) Manufacture. (1) General manufac-
pressure vessels are authorized and turing requirements are as follows:
covered by references to cylinders in (i) The surface finish must be uni-
this specification. form and reasonably smooth.
(1) Size limitation. Maximum water ca- (ii) Inside surfaces must be clean,
pacity may not exceed: (i) 55 pounds dry, and free of loose particles.
(1,526 cubic inches) for a service pres- (iii) No defect of any kind is per-
sure of 500 p.s.i.g. or less, and (ii) 10 mitted if it is likely to weaken a fin-
pounds (277 cubic inches) for a service ished cylinder.
pressure in excess of 500 p.s.i.g. (2) Requirements for seams:
78
(i) Brazing is not authorized on alu- D = Outside diameter, in inches;

minum cylinders. t = Minimum wall thickness, in inches.
(ii) Brazing material must have a (e) Openings and attachments. Open-
melting point of not lower than 1,000 ings and attachments must conform to
°F. the following:
(iii) Brazed seams must be assembled (1) Openings and attachments are
with proper fit to ensure complete pen- permitted on heads only.
etration of the brazing material (2) All openings and their reinforce-
throughout the brazed joint. ments must be within an imaginary
(iv) Minimum width of brazed joints circle, concentric to the axis of the cyl-
must be at least four times the thick- inder. The diameter of the circle may
ness of the shell wall. not exceed 80 percent of the outside di-
(v) Brazed seams must have design ameter of the cylinder. The plane of
strength equal to or greater than 1.5 the circle must be parallel to the plane
times the minimum strength of the of a circumferential weld and normal
shell wall. to the long axis of the cylinder.
(vi) Welded seams must be properly
(3) Unless a head has adequate thick-
aligned and welded by a method that
ness, each opening must be reinforced
provides clean, uniform joints with
by a securely attached fitting, boss,
adequate penetration.
pad, collar, or other suitable means.
(vii) Welded joints must have a
(4) Material used for welded openings
strength equal to or greater than the
and attachments must be of weldable
minimum strength of the shell mate-
quality and compatible with the mate-
rial in the finished cylinder.
rial of the cylinder.
(3) Attachments to the cylinder are
permitted by any means which will not (f) Pressure tests. (1) Each cylinder
be detrimental to the integrity of the must be tested at an internal pressure
cylinder. Welding or brazing of attach- of at least the test pressure and must
ments to the cylinder must be com- be held at that pressure for at least 30
pleted prior to all pressure tests. seconds.
(4) Welding procedures and operators (i) The leakage test must be con-
must be qualified in accordance with ducted by submersion under water or
CGA Pamphlet C–3 (IBR, see § 171.7 of by some other method that will be
this subchapter). equally sensitive.
(d) Wall thickness. The minimum wall (ii) If the cylinder leaks, evidences
thickness must be such that the wall visible distortion, or any other defect,
stress at test pressure does not exceed while under test, it must be rejected
the yield strength of the material of (see paragraph (h) of this section).
the finished cylinder wall. Calculations (2) One cylinder taken from the be-
must be made by the following for- ginning of each lot, and one from each
mulas: 1,000 or less successively produced
(1) Calculation of the stress for cyl- within the lot thereafter, must be
inders must be made by the following hydrostatically tested to destruction.
formula: The entire lot must be rejected (see
paragraph (h) of this section) if:
S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ d2) (i) A failure occurs at a gage pressure
Where: less than 2.0 times the test pressure;
S = Wall stress, in psi; (ii) A failure initiates in a braze or a
P = Test pressure in psig; weld or the heat affected zone thereof;
D = Outside diameter, in inches; (iii) A failure is other than in the
d = Inside diameter, in inches. sidewall of a cylinder longitudinal with
(2) Calculation of the stress for its long axis; or
spheres must be made by the following (iv) In a sphere, a failure occurs in
formula: any opening, reinforcement, or at a
point of attachment.
S = PD / 4t (3) A ‘‘lot’’ is defined as the quantity
Where: of cylinders successively produced per

S = Wall stress, in psi; production shift (not exceeding 10
P = Test pressure i psig; hours) having identical size, design,
79
§ 178.68 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
construction, material, heat treat- (2) Required markings are as follows:

ment, finish, and quality. (i) DOT-39.
(g) Flattening test. One cylinder must (ii) NRC.
be taken from the beginning of produc- (iii) The service pressure.
tion of each lot (as defined in para- (iv) The test pressure.
graph (f)(3) of this section) and sub- (v) The registration number (M****)
jected to a flattening test as follows: of the manufacturer.
(1) The flattening test must be made (vi) The lot number.
on a cylinder that has been tested at (vii) The date of manufacture if the
test pressure. lot number does not establish the date
(2) A ring taken from a cylinder may of manufacture.
be flattened as an alternative to a test (viii) With one of the following state-
on a complete cylinder. The test ring ments:
may not include the heat affected zone (A) For cylinders manufactured prior
or any weld. However, for a sphere, the to October 1, 1996: ‘‘Federal law forbids
test ring may include the circumferen- transportation if refilled-penalty up to
tial weld if it is located at a 45 degree $25,000 fine and 5 years imprisonment
angle to the ring, ±5 degrees. (49 U.S.C. 1809)’’ or ‘‘Federal law for-
(3) The flattening must be between 60 bids transportation if refilled-penalty
degrees included-angle, wedge shaped up to $500,000 fine and 5 years imprison-
knife edges, rounded to a 0.5 inch ra- ment (49 U.S.C. 5124).’’
dius. (B) For cylinders manufactured on or
(4) Cylinders and test rings may not after October 1, 1996: ‘‘Federal law for-
crack when flattened so that their bids transportation if refilled-penalty
outer surfaces are not more than six up to $500,000 fine and 5 years imprison-
times wall thickness apart when made ment (49 U.S.C. 5124).’’
of steel or not more than ten times (3) The markings required by para-
wall thickness apart when made of alu- graphs (i)(2)(i) through (i)(2)(v) of this
minum. section must be in numbers and letters
(5) If any cylinder or ring cracks at least 1⁄8 inch high and displayed se-
when subjected to the specified flat- quentially. For example:
tening test, the lot of cylinders rep- DOT-39 NRC 250/500 M1001.
resented by the test must be rejected
(see paragraph (h) of this section). (4) No person may mark any cylinder
(h) Rejected cylinders. Rejected cyl- with the specification identification
inders must conform to the following ‘‘DOT-39’’ unless it was manufactured
requirements: in compliance with the requirements of
(1) If the cause for rejection of a lot this section and its manufacturer has a
is determinable, and if by test or in- registration number (M****) from the
spection defective cylinders are elimi- Associate Administrator.
nated from the lot, the remaining cyl- [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
inders must be qualified as a new lot amended at 65 FR 58631, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR
under paragraphs (f) and (g) of this sec- 45389, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51654, Aug. 8, 2002;
tion. 68 FR 75748, 75749, Dec. 31, 2003]
(2) Repairs to welds are permitted.
Following repair, a cylinder must pass § 178.68 Specification 4E welded alu-
the pressure test specified in paragraph minum cylinders.
(f) of this section. (a) Type, size and service pressure. A
(3) If a cylinder made from seamless DOT 4E cylinder is a welded aluminum
steel tubing fails the flattening test de- cylinder with a water capacity (nomi-
scribed in paragraph (g) of this section, nal) of not over 1,000 pounds and a serv-
suitable uniform heat treatment must ice pressure of at least 225 to not over
be used on each cylinder in the lot. All 500 psig. The cylinder must be con-
prescribed tests must be performed structed of not more than two seamless
subsequent to this heat treatment. drawn shells with no more than one
(i) Markings. (1) The markings re- circumferential weld. The circumferen-
quired by this section must be durable tial weld may not be closer to the point
and waterproof. The requirements of of tangency of the cylindrical portion
§ 178.35(h) do not apply to this section. with the shoulder than 20 times the
80
cylinder wall thickness. Cylinders or (ii) One-half of the minimum tensile

shells closed in by spinning process and strength of the material as required in
cylinders with longitudinal seams are paragraph (j) of this section.
not authorized. (2) Calculation must be made by the
(b) Authorized material. The cylinder following formula:
must be constructed of aluminum of S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ d2)
uniform quality. The following chem-
ical analyses are authorized: Where:
S = wall stress in psi;
TABLE 1—AUTHORIZED MATERIALS P = minimum test pressure prescribed for
water jacket test;
Chemical analysis—limits in D = outside diameter in inches;
Designation percent 5154 1
Iron plus silicon .................... 0.45 maximum.
Copper .................................. 0.10 maximum. (3) Minimum thickness of heads and
Manganese ........................... 0.10 maximum. bottoms may not be less than the min-
Magnesium ........................... 3.10/3.90. imum required thickness of the side
Chromium ............................. 0.15/0.35. wall.
Zinc ....................................... 0.20 maximum.
Titanium ................................ 0.20 maximum. (g) Opening in cylinder. Openings in
Others, each ......................... 0.05 maximum. cylinders must conform to the fol-
Others, total .......................... 0.15 maximum. lowing:
Aluminum .............................. remainder.
(1) All openings must be in the heads
1 Analysis must regularly be made only for the elements
or bases.
specifically mentioned in this table. If, however, the presence
of other elements is indicated in the course of routine anal- (2) Each opening in cylinders, except
ysis, further analysis should be made to determine conform- those for safety devices, must be pro-
ance with the limits specified for other elements.
vided with a fitting, boss, or pad, se-
(c) Identification. Material must be curely attached to cylinder by welding
identified by any suitable method that by inert gas shielded arc process or by
will identify the alloy and manufactur- threads. If threads are used, they must
er’s lot number. comply with the following:
(d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be (i) Threads must be clean-cut, even,
manufactured using equipment and without checks and cut to gauge.
processes adequate to ensure that each (ii) Taper threads to be of length not
cylinder produced conforms to the re- less than as specified for American
quirements of this subpart. No defect is Standard taper pipe threads.
permitted that is likely to weaken the (iii) Straight threads, having at least
finished cylinder appreciably. A rea- 4 engaged threads, to have tight fit and
sonably smooth and uniform surface calculated shear strength at least 10
finish is required. All welding must be times the test pressure of the cylinder;
by the gas shielded arc process. gaskets required, adequate to prevent
(e) Welding. The attachment to the leakage.
tops and bottoms only of cylinders by (3) Closure of a fitting, boss, or pad
welding of neckrings or flanges, must be adequate to prevent leakage.
footrings, handles, bosses and pads and (h) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder
valve protection rings is authorized. must successfully withstand a hydro-
However, such attachments and the static test, as follows:
portion of the cylinder to which it is (1) The test must be by water jacket,
attached must be made of weldable alu- or other suitable method, operated so
minum alloys. as to obtain accurate data. The pres-
(f) Wall thickness. The wall thickness sure gauge must permit reading to an
of the cylinder must conform to the accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion
following: gauge must permit a reading of the
(1) The minimum wall thickness of total expansion to an accuracy either
the cylinder must be 0.140 inch. In any of 1 percent or 0.1 cubic centimeter.
case, the minimum wall thickness (2) Pressure of 2 times service pres-
must be such that calculated wall sure must be maintained for at least 30
stress at twice service pressure may seconds and sufficiently longer to in-
not exceed the lesser value of either of sure complete expansion. Any internal
the following: pressure applied previous to the official
(i) 20,000 psi. test may not exceed 90 percent of the
81
§ 178.68 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
test pressure. If, due to failure of the and reduction of area of material as
test apparatus, the test pressure can- follows:
not be maintained, the test may be re- (1) The test is required on 2 speci-
peated at a pressure increased by 10 mens cut from one cylinder or part
percent over the pressure otherwise thereof taken at random out of each
specified. lot of 200 or less.
(3) Permanent volumetric expansion (2) Specimens must conform to the
may not exceed 12 percent of total vol- following:
umetric expansion at test pressure. (i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a
(4) Cylinders having a calculated wall width not over 11⁄2 inches, a gauge
stress of 18,000 psi or less at test pres- length of 2 inches with a width not
sure may be tested as follows: over 11⁄2 inches.
(i) At least one cylinder selected at (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip
random out of each lot of 200 or less ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends
must be tested in accordance with may be flattened to within 1 inch of
paragraphs (h)(1), (h)(2), and (h)(3) of each end of the reduced section.
this section. (iii) When size of cylinder does not
(ii) All cylinders not tested as pro- permit securing straight specimens,
vided in paragraph (h)(4)(i) of this sec- the specimens may be taken in any lo-
tion must be examined under pressure cation or direction and may be
of at least 2 times service pressure and straightened or flattened cold, by pres-
show no defect. sure only, not by blows; when speci-
(5) One finished cylinder selected at mens are so taken and prepared, the in-
random out of each lot of 1,000 or less spector’s report must show in connec-
must be hydrostatically tested to 4 tion with record of physical test de-
times the service pressure without tailed information in regard to such
bursting. Inability to meet this re- specimens.
quirement must result in rejection of (iv) Heating of a specimen for any
the lot. purpose is not authorized.
(i) Flattening test. After hydrostatic (3) The yield strength in tension
testing, a flattening test is required on must be the stress corresponding to a
one section of a cylinder, taken at ran- permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the
dom out of each lot of 200 or less as fol- gauge length. The following conditions
lows: apply:
(1) If the weld is not at midlength of (i) The yield strength must be deter-
the cylinder, the test section must be mined by the ‘‘offset’’ method as pre-
no less in width than 30 times the cyl- scribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7 of
inder wall thickness. The weld must be this subchapter).
in the center of the section. Weld rein- (ii) Cross-head speed of the testing
forcement must be removed by machin- machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per
ing or grinding so that the weld is flush minute during yield strength deter-
with the exterior of the parent metal. mination.
There must be no evidence of cracking (k) Acceptable results for physical tests.
in the sample when it is flattened be- An acceptable result of the physical
tween flat plates to no more than 6 test requires an elongation to at least
times the wall thickness. 7 percent and yield strength not over 80
(2) If the weld is at midlength of the percent of tensile strength.
cylinder, the test may be made as spec- (l) Weld tests. Welds of the cylinder
ified in paragraph (i)(1) of this section are required to successfully pass the
or must be made between wedge shaped following tests:
knife edges (60° angle) rounded to a 1⁄2 (1) Reduced section tensile test. A speci-
inch radius. There must be no evidence men must be cut from the cylinder
of cracking in the sample when it is used for the physical tests specified in
flattened to no more than 6 times the paragraph (j) of this section. The speci-
wall thickness. men must be taken from across the
(j) Physical test. A physical test must seam, edges must be parallel for a dis-
be conducted to determine yield tance of approximately 2 inches on ei-
strength, tensile strength, elongation, ther side of the weld. The specimen
82
must be fractured in tension. The ap- (m) Rejected cylinders. Repair of weld-
parent breaking stress calculated on ed seams is authorized. Acceptable cyl-
the minimum wall thickness must be inders must pass all prescribed tests.
at least equal to 2 times the stress cal- (n) Inspector’s report. In addition to
culated under paragraph (f)(2) of this the information required by § 178.35, the
section, and in addition must have an record of chemical analyses must also
actual breaking stress of at least 30,000 include applicable information on iron,
psi. Should this specimen fail to meet titanium, zinc, and magnesium used in
the requirements, specimens may be the construction of the cylinder.
taken from 2 additional cylinders from
[Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as
the same lot and tested. If either of the amended at 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997; 66 FR
latter specimens fails to meet require- 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51654, Aug. 8, 2002;
ments, the entire lot represented must 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, 2003; 69 FR 54046, Sept.
be rejected. 7, 2004; 74 FR 16143, Apr. 9, 2009]
(2) Guided bend test. A bend test speci-
men must be cut from the cylinder § 178.69 Responsibilities and require-
used for the physical test specified in ments for manufacturers of UN
paragraph (j) of this section. Specimen pressure receptacles.
must be taken across the seam, must (a) Each manufacturer of a UN pres-
be a minimum of 11⁄2 inches wide, edges sure receptacle marked with ‘‘USA’’ as
must be parallel and rounded with a a country of approval must comply
file, and back-up strip, if used, must be with the requirements in this section.
removed by machining. The specimen The manufacturer must maintain a
shall be tested as follows: quality system, obtain an approval for
(i) The specimen must be bent to re- each initial pressure receptacle design
fusal in the guided bend test jig as il- type, and ensure that all production of
lustrated in paragraph 6.10 of CGA C–3 UN pressure receptacles meets the ap-
(IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). The plicable requirements.
root of the weld (inside surface of the (1) Quality system. The manufacturer
cylinder) must be located away from of a UN pressure receptacle must have
the ram of the jig. The specimen must its quality system approved by the As-
not show a crack or other open defect sociate Administrator. The quality sys-
exceeding 1⁄8 inch in any direction upon tem will initially be assessed through
completion of the test. Should this an audit by the Associate Adminis-
specimen fail to meet the require- trator or his or her representative to
ments, specimens may be taken from determine whether it meets the re-
each of 2 additional cylinders from the quirements of this section. The Asso-
same lot and tested. If either of the lat- ciate Administrator will notify the
ter specimens fails to meet require- manufacturer in writing of the results
ments, the entire lot represented must of the audit. The notification will con-
be rejected. tain the conclusions of the audit and
(ii) Alternatively, the specimen may any corrective action required. The As-
be tested in a guided bend test jig as il- sociate Administrator may perform
lustrated in Figure 12.1 of The Alu- periodic audits to ensure that the man-
minum Association’s 2002 publication, ufacturer operates in accordance with
‘‘Welding Aluminum: Theory and Prac- the quality system. Reports of periodic
tice.’’ The root of the weld (inside sur- audits will be provided to the manufac-
face of the cylinder) must be located turer. The manufacturer must bear the
away from the mandrel of the jig. No cost of audits.
specimen must show a crack or other (2) Quality system documentation. The
open defect exceeding 1⁄8 inch in any di- manufacturer must be able to dem-
rection upon completion of the test. onstrate a documented quality system.
Should this specimen fail to meet the Management must review the adequacy
requirements, specimens may be taken of the quality system to assure that it
from each of 2 additional cylinders is effective and conforms to the re-
from the same lot and tested. If either quirements in § 178.70. The quality sys-
of the latter specimens fails to meet tem records must be in English and
requirements, the entire lot rep- must include detailed descriptions of
resented must be rejected. the following:
83
§ 178.70 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(i) The organizational structure and § 178.70 Approval of UN pressure re-

responsibilities of personnel with receptacles.
gard to design and product quality;
(a) Initial design-type approval. The
(ii) The design control and design manufacturer of a UN pressure recep-
verification techniques, processes, and
tacle must obtain an initial design
procedures used when designing the
type approval from the Associate Ad-
pressure receptacles;
ministrator. The initial design type ap-
(iii) The relevant procedures for pres-
proval must be of the pressure recep-
sure receptacle manufacturing, quality
tacle design as it is intended to be pro-
control, quality assurance, and process
operation instructions; duced. The manufacturer must arrange
(iv) Inspection and testing meth- for an IIA, approved by the Associate
odologies, measuring and testing equip- Administrator in accordance with sub-
ment, and calibration data; part I of part 107 of this chapter, to
(v) The process for meeting customer perform a pre-audit of its pressure re-
requirements; ceptacle manufacturing operation prior
(vi) The process for document control to having an audit conducted by the
and document revision; Associate Administrator or his des-
(vii) The system for controlling non- ignee.
conforming material and records, in- (b) IIA pre-audit. The manufacturer
cluding procedures for identification, must submit an application for initial
segregation, and disposition; design type approval to the IIA for re-
(viii) Production, processing and fab- view. The IIA will examine the manu-
rication, including purchased compo- facturer’s application for initial design
nents, in-process and final materials; type approval for completeness. An in-
and complete application will be returned
(ix) Training programs for relevant to the manufacturer with an expla-
personnel. nation. If an application is complete,
(3) Maintenance of quality system. The the IIA will review all technical docu-
manufacturer must maintain the qual- mentation, including drawings and cal-
ity system as approved by the Asso- culations, to verify that the design
ciate Administrator. The manufacturer meets all requirements of the applica-
shall notify the Associate Adminis- ble UN pressure receptacle standard
trator of any intended changes to the and specification requirements. If the
approved quality system prior to mak- technical documentation shows that
ing the change. The Associate Adminis- the pressure receptacle prototype de-
trator will evaluate the proposed sign conforms to the applicable stand-
change to determine whether the ards and requirements in § 178.70, the
amended quality system will satisfy manufacturer will fabricate a proto-
the requirements. The Associate Ad- type lot of pressure receptacles in con-
ministrator will notify the manufac- formance with the technical docu-
turer of the findings. mentation representative of the design.
(b) Design type approvals. The manu- The IIA will verify that the prototype
facturer must have each pressure re- lot conforms to the applicable require-
ceptacle design type reviewed by an IIA ments by selecting pressure receptacles
and approved by the Associate Admin- and witnessing their testing. After pro-
istrator in accordance with § 178.70. A totype testing has been satisfactorily
cylinder is considered to be of a new completed, showing the pressure recep-
design, compared with an existing ap- tacles fully conform to all applicable
proved design, as stated in the applica- specification requirements, the certi-
ble ISO design, construction and test- fying IIA must prepare a letter of rec-
ing standard. ommendation and a design type ap-
(c) Production inspection and certifi- proval certificate. The design type ap-
cation. The manufacturer must ensure proval certificate must contain the
that each UN pressure receptacle is in- name and address of the manufacturer
spected and certified in accordance and the IIA certifying the design type,
with § 178.71.
the test results, chemical analyses, lot
[71 FR 33885, June 12, 2006] identification, and all other supporting
84
data specified in the applicable ISO de- plications or compatibility with hydro-
sign, construction and testing stand- gen embrittlement gases.
ard. The IIA must provide the certifi- (d) Modification of approved pressure
cate and documentation to the manu- receptacle design type. Modification of
facturer. an approved UN pressure receptacle de-
(c) Application for initial design type sign type is not authorized without the
approval. If the pre-audit is found satis- approval of the Associate Adminis-
factory by the IIA, the manufacturer trator. A manufacturer seeking modi-
will submit the letter of recommenda- fication of an approved UN pressure re-
tion from the IIA and an application ceptacle design type may be required
for design type approval to the Asso- to submit design qualification test
ciate Administrator. An application for data to the Associate Administrator
initial design type approval must be before production. An audit may be re-
submitted for each manufacturing fa- quired as part of the process to modify
cility. The application must be in an approval.
English and, at a minimum, contain (e) Responsibilities of the production
the following information: IIA. The production IIA is responsible
(1) The name and address of the man- for ensuring that each pressure recep-
ufacturing facility. If the application is tacle conforms to the design type ap-
submitted by an authorized representa- proval. The production IIA must per-
tive on behalf of the manufacturer, the form the following functions:
application must include the represent- (1) Witness all inspections and tests
ative’s name and address. specified in the UN pressure receptacle
(2) The name and title of the indi- standard to ensure compliance with the
vidual responsible for the manufactur- standard and that the procedures
er’s quality system, as required by adopted by the manufacturer meet the
§ 178.69. requirements of the standard;
(3) The designation of the pressure (2) Verify that the production inspec-
receptacle and the relevant pressure re- tions were performed in accordance
ceptacle standard. with this section;
(4) Details of any refusal of approval (3) Select UN pressure receptacles
of a similar application by a designated from a prototype production lot and
approval agency of another country. witness testing as required for the de-
(5) The name and address of the pro- sign type approval;
duction IIA that will perform the func- (4) Ensure that the various design
tions prescribed in paragraph (e) of this type approval examinations and tests
section. The IIA must be approved in are performed accurately;
writing by the Associate Administrator (5) Verify that each pressure recep-
in accordance with subpart I of part 107 tacle is marked in accordance with the
of this chapter. applicable requirements in § 178.71; and
(6) Documentation on the manufac- (6) Furnish complete test reports to
turing facility as specified in § 178.69. the manufacturer and upon request to
(7) Design specifications and manu- the purchaser. The test reports and
facturing drawings, showing compo- certificate of compliance must be re-
nents and subassemblies if relevant, de- tained by the IIA for at least 20 years
sign calculations, and material speci- from the original test date of the pres-
fications necessary to verify compli- sure receptacles.
ance with the applicable pressure re- (f) Production inspection audit and cer-
ceptacle design standard. tification. (1) If the application, design
(8) Manufacturing procedures and drawing and quality control documents
any applicable standards that describe are found satisfactory, PHMSA will
in detail the manufacturing processes schedule an on-site audit of the pres-
and control. sure receptacle manufacturer’s quality
(9) Design type approval test reports system, manufacturing processes, in-
detailing the results of examinations spections, and test procedures.
and tests conducted in accordance with (2) During the audit, the manufac-
the relevant pressure receptacle stand- turer will be required to produce pres-
ard, to include any additional data, sure receptacles to the technical stand-
such as suitability for underwater ap- ards for which approval is sought.
85
§ 178.71 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(3) The production IIA must witness ciate Administrator’s decision on re-
the required inspections and consideration;
verifications on the pressure recep- (ii) State in detail any alleged errors
tacles during the production run. The of fact and law;
IIA selected by the manufacturer for (iii) Enclose any additional informa-
production inspection and testing may tion needed to support the appeal; and
be different from the IIA who per- (iv) State in detail the modification
formed the design type approval of the final decision sought.
verifications. (2) The PHMSA Administrator will
(4) If the procedures and controls are grant or deny the relief and inform the
deemed acceptable, test sample pres- appellant in writing of the decision.
sure receptacles will be selected at ran- PHMSA Administrator’s decision is the
dom from the production lot and sent final administrative action.
to a laboratory designated by the Asso- (j) Termination of a design type ap-
ciate Administrator for verification proval certificate. (1) The Associate Ad-
testing. ministrator may terminate an approval
(5) If the pressure receptacle test certificate issue under this section if it
samples are found to conform to all the is determined that, because of a change
applicable requirements, the Associate in circumstances, the approval no
Administrator will issue approvals to longer is needed or no longer would be
the manufacturer and the production granted if applied for; information
IIA to authorize the manufacture of upon which the approval was based is
the pressure receptacles. The approved fraudulent or substantially erroneous;
design type approval certificate will be or termination of the approval is nec-
returned to the manufacturer. essary to adequately protect against
risks to life and property.
(6) Upon the receipt of the approved
(2) Before an approval is terminated,
design type approval certificate from
the Associate Administrator will pro-
the Associate Administrator, the pres-
vide the manufacturer and the ap-
sure receptacle manufacturer must
proval agency—
sign the certificate.
(i) Written notice of the facts or con-
(g) Recordkeeping. The production IIA duct believed to warrant the with-
and the manufacturer must retain a drawal;
copy of the design type approval cer- (ii) Opportunity to submit oral and
tificate and certificate of compliance written evidence, and
records for at least 20 years. (iii) Opportunity to demonstrate or
(h) Denial of design type application. If achieve compliance with the applica-
the design type application is denied, tion requirement.
the Associate Administrator will no- (3) If the Associate Administrator de-
tify the applicant in writing and pro- termines that a certificate of approval
vide the reason for the denial. The must be withdrawn to preclude a sig-
manufacturer may request that the As- nificant and imminent adverse affect
sociate Administrator reconsider the on public safety, the procedures in
decision. The application request paragraph (j)(2)(ii) and (iii) of this sec-
must— tion need not be provided prior to with-
(1) Be written in English and filed drawal of the approval, but shall be
within 60 days of receipt of the deci- provided as soon as practicable there-
sion; after.
(2) State in detail any alleged errors
[71 FR 33886, June 12, 2006, as amended at 71
of fact and law; and FR 54397, Sept. 14, 2006; 77 FR 60943, Oct. 5,
(3) Enclose any additional informa- 2012]
tion needed to support the request to
reconsider. § 178.71 Specifications for UN pressure
(i) Appeal. (1) A manufacturer whose receptacles.
reconsideration request is denied may (a) General. Each UN pressure recep-
appeal to the PHMSA Administrator. tacle must meet the requirements of
The appeal must— this section. UN pressure receptacles

(i) Be written in English and filed and service equipment constructed ac-
within 60 days of receipt of the Asso- cording to the standards applicable at
86
the date of manufacture may continue chapter) for non-refillable pressure re-
in use subject to the continuing quali- ceptacles, and be protected as specified
fication and maintenance provisions of in § 173.301b(f) of this subchapter. Until
part 180 of this subchapter. Require- December 31, 2020, the manufacture of a
ments for approval, qualification, valve conforming to the requirements
maintenance, and testing are contained in ISO 10297:2006(E) (IBR, see § 171.7 of
in § 178.70, and subpart C of part 180 of this subchapter) is authorized. Until
this subchapter. December 31, 2008, the manufacture of a
(b) Definitions. The following defini- valve conforming to the requirements
tions apply for the purposes of design in ISO 10297:1999(E) (IBR, see § 171.7 of
and construction of UN pressure recep- this subchapter) is authorized.
tacles under this subpart: (3) UN pressure receptacles that can-
Alternative arrangement means an ap- not be handled manually or rolled,
proval granted by the Associate Ad- must be equipped with devices (e.g.,
ministrator for a MEGC that has been skids, rings, straps) ensuring that they
designed, constructed or tested to the can be safely handled by mechanical
technical requirements or testing means and so arranged as not to impair
methods other than those specified for the strength of, nor cause undue
UN pressure receptacles in part 178 or stresses, in the pressure receptacle.
part 180 of this subchapter. (4) Pressure receptacles filled by vol-
Bundle of cylinders. See § 171.8 of this ume must be equipped with a level in-
subchapter. dicator.
Design type means a pressure recep-
(e) Bundles of cylinders. UN pressure
tacle design as specified by a particular
receptacles assembled in bundles must
pressure receptacle standard.
be structurally supported and held to-
Design type approval means an overall
gether as a unit and secured in a man-
approval of the manufacturer’s quality
ner that prevents movement in rela-
system and design type of each pres-
tion to the structural assembly and
sure receptacle to be produced within
movement that would result in the
the manufacturer’s facility.
concentration of harmful local
UN tube. See § 171.8 of this subchapter.
(c) Following the final heat treat- stresses. The frame design must ensure
ment, all cylinders, except those se- stability under normal operating con-
lected for batch testing must be sub- ditions.
jected to a proof pressure or a hydrau- (1) The frame must securely retain
lic volumetric expansion test. all the components of the bundle and
(d) Service equipment. (1) Except for must protect them from damage during
pressure relief devices, UN pressure re- conditions normally incident to trans-
ceptacle equipment, including valves, portation. The method of cylinder re-
piping, fittings, and other equipment straint must prevent any vertical or
subjected to pressure must be designed horizontal movement or rotation of the
and constructed to withstand at least cylinder that could cause undue strain
1.5 times the test pressure of the pres- on the manifold. The total assembly
sure receptacle. must be able to withstand rough han-
(2) Service equipment must be config- dling, including being dropped or over-
ured or designed to prevent damage turned.
that could result in the release of the (2) The frame must include features
pressure receptacle contents during designed for the handling and transpor-
normal conditions of handling and tation of the bundle. The lifting rings
transport. Manifold piping leading to must be designed to withstand a design
shut-off valves must be sufficiently load of 2 times the maximum gross
flexible to protect the valves and the weight. Bundles with more than one
piping from shearing or releasing the lifting ring must be designed such that
pressure receptacle contents. The fill- a minimum sling angle of 45 degrees to
ing and discharge valves and any pro- the horizontal can be achieved during
tective caps must be secured against lifting using the lifting rings. If four
unintended opening. The valves must lifting rings are used, their design
conform to ISO 10297:2014(E) or ISO must be strong enough to allow the
13340:2001(E) (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- bundle to be lifted by two rings. Where
87
§ 178.71 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
two or four lifting rings are used, dia- inders—Design, construction and test-
metrically opposite lifting rings must ing (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter).
be aligned with each other to allow for (g) Design and construction require-
correct lifting using shackle pins. If ments for UN refillable seamless steel cyl-
the bundle is filled with forklift pock- inders. In addition to the general re-
ets, it must contain two forklift pock- quirements of this section, UN refill-
ets on each side from which it is to be able seamless steel cylinders must con-
lifted. The forklift pockets must be po- form to the following ISO standards, as
sitioned symmetrically consistent with applicable:
the bundle center of gravity. (1) ISO 9809–1:2010 Gas cylinders—Re-
(3) The frame structural members fillable seamless steel gas cylinders—
must be designed for a vertical load of Design, construction and testing—Part
2 times the maximum gross weight of 1: Quenched and tempered steel cyl-
the bundle. Design stress levels may
inders with tensile strength less than
not exceed 0.9 times the yield strength
1100 MPa. (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
of the material.
chapter). Until December 31, 2018, the
(4) The frame must not contain any
manufacture of a cylinder conforming
protrusions from the exterior frame
structure that could cause a hazardous to the requirements in ISO 9809–1:1999
condition. (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter) is
(5) The frame design must prevent authorized.
collection of water or other debris that (2) ISO 9809–2: Gas cylinders—Refill-
would increase the tare weight of bun- able seamless steel gas cylinders—De-
dles filled by weight. sign, construction and testing—Part 2:
(6) The floor of the bundle frame Quenched and tempered steel cylinders
must not buckle during normal oper- with tensile strength greater than or
ating conditions and must allow for the equal to 1100 MPa. (IBR, see § 171.7 of
drainage of water and debris from this subchapter). Until December 31,
around the base of the cylinders. 2018, the manufacture of a cylinder
(7) If the frame design includes mov- conforming to the requirements in ISO
able doors or covers, they must be ca- 9809–2:2000 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
pable of being secured with latches or chapter) is authorized.
other means that will not become dis- (3) ISO 9809–3: Gas cylinders—Refill-
lodged by operational impact loads. able seamless steel gas cylinders—De-
Valves that need to be operated in nor- sign, construction and testing—Part 3:
mal service or in an emergency must Normalized steel cylinders. (IBR, see
be accessible. § 171.7 of this subchapter). Until Decem-
(8) For bundles of cylinders, pressure ber 31, 2018, the manufacture of a cyl-
receptacle marking requirements only inder conforming to the requirements
apply to the individual cylinders of a in ISO 9809–3:2000 (IBR, see § 171.7 of
bundle and not to any assembly struc- this subchapter) is authorized.
ture. (4) ISO 9809–4:2014(E) (IBR, see § 171.7
(f) Design and construction require- of this subchapter).
ments for UN refillable welded cylinders. (h) Design and construction require-
In addition to the general requirements ments for UN refillable seamless aluminum
of this section, UN refillable welded
alloy cylinders. In addition to the gen-
cylinders must conform to the fol-
eral requirements of this section, UN
lowing ISO standards, as applicable:
refillable seamless aluminum cylinders
(1) ISO 4706: Gas cylinders—Refillable
must conform to ISO 7866:2012(E) as
welded steel cylinders—Test pressure
60 bar and below (IBR, see § 171.7 of this modified by ISO 7866:2012/Cor.1:2014(E)
subchapter). (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter).
(2) ISO 18172–1: Gas cylinders—Refill- Until December 31, 2020, the manufac-
able welded stainless steel cylinders— ture of a cylinder conforming to the re-
Part 1: Test pressure 6 MPa and below quirements in ISO 7866(E) (IBR, see
(IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). § 171.7 of this subchapter) is authorized.

(3) ISO 20703: Gas cylinders—Refill- The use of Aluminum alloy 6351–T6 or
able welded aluminum-alloy cyl- equivalent is prohibited.
88
(i) Design and construction require- with a design life longer than 15 years
ments for UN non-refillable metal cyl- must not be filled after 15 years from
inders. In addition to the general re- the date of manufacture, unless the de-
quirements of this section, UN non-re- sign has successfully passed a service
fillable metal cylinders must conform life test program. The service life test
to ISO 11118: Gas cylinders—Non-refill- program must be part of the initial de-
able metallic gas cylinders—Specifica- sign type approval and must specify in-
tion and test methods. (IBR, see § 171.7 spections and tests to demonstrate
of this subchapter.) that cylinders manufactured accord-
(j) Design and construction require- ingly remain safe to the end of their
ments for UN refillable seamless steel design life. The service life test pro-
tubes. In addition to the general re- gram and the results must be approved
quirements of this section, UN refill- by the competent authority of the
able seamless steel tubes must conform country of approval that is responsible
to ISO 11120: Gas cylinders—Refillable for the initial approval of the cylinder
seamless steel tubes of water capacity design. The service life of a composite
between 150 L and 3000 L—Design, con- cylinder or tube must not be extended
struction and testing. (IBR, see § 171.7 beyond its initial approved design life.
of this subchapter). Additionally, composite cylinders and
(k) Design and construction require- tubes must conform to the following
ments for UN acetylene cylinders. In ad- ISO standards, as applicable:
dition to the general requirements of (i) ISO 11119–1:2012(E) (IBR, see § 171.7
this section, UN acetylene cylinders of this subchapter). Until December 31,
must conform to the following ISO 2020, cylinders conforming to the re-
standards, as applicable: quirements in ISO 11119–1(E), (IBR, see
(1) For the cylinder shell: § 171.7 of this subchapter) are author-
(i) ISO 9809–1:2010 Gas cylinders—Re- ized.
fillable seamless steel gas cylinders—
(ii) ISO 11119–2:2012(E) (ISO 11119–
Design, construction and testing—Part
2:2012/Amd.1:2014(E)) (IBR, see § 171.7 of
1: Quenched and tempered steel cyl-
this subchapter). Until December 31,
inders with tensile strength less than
2020, cylinders conforming to the re-
1100 MPa. Until December 31, 2018, the
quirements in ISO 11119–2(E) (IBR, see
manufacture of a cylinder conforming
§ 171.7 of this subchapter) are author-
to the requirements in ISO 9809–1:1999
ized.
(IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter) is
authorized. (iii) ISO 11119–3:2013(E) (IBR, see
(ii) ISO 9809–3: Gas cylinders—Refill- § 171.7 of this subchapter). Until Decem-
able seamless steel gas cylinders—De- ber 31, 2020, cylinders conforming to
sign, construction and testing—Part 3: the requirements in ISO 11119–3(E)
Normalized steel cylinders. Until De- (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter) are
cember 31, 2018, the manufacture of a authorized.
cylinder conforming to the require- (2) ISO 11119–2 and ISO 11119–3 gas
ments in ISO 9809–3:2000 (IBR, see § 171.7 cylinders of composite construction
of this subchapter) is authorized. manufactured in accordance with the
(2) The porous mass in an acetylene requirements for underwater use must
cylinder must conform to ISO bear the ‘‘UW’’ mark.
3807:2013(E) (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- (m) Design and construction require-
chapter). Until December 31, 2020, the ments for UN metal hydride storage sys-
manufacture of a cylinder conforming tems. In addition to the general require-
to the requirements in ISO 3807–2(E) ments of this section, metal hydride
(IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter) is storage systems must conform to the
authorized. following ISO standards, as applicable:
(l) Design and construction require- ISO 16111: Transportable gas storage
ments for UN composite cylinders and devices—Hydrogen absorbed in revers-
tubes. (1) In addition to the general re- ible metal hydride (IBR, see § 171.7 of
quirements of this section, UN com- this subchapter).
posite cylinders and tubes must be de- (n) Design and construction require-
signed for a design life of not less than ments for UN cylinders for the transpor-
15 years. Composite cylinders and tubes tation of adsorbed gases. In addition to
89
§ 178.71 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
the general requirements of this sec- (p) Protection of closures. Closures and
tion, UN cylinders for the transpor- their protection must conform to the
tation of adsorbed gases must conform requirements in § 173.301(f) of this sub-
to the following ISO standards, as ap- chapter.
plicable: ISO 11513:2011, Gas cylinders— (q) Marking of UN refillable pressure re-
Refillable welded steel cylinders con- ceptacles. UN refillable pressure recep-
taining materials for sub-atmospheric tacles must be marked clearly and leg-
gas packaging (excluding acetylene)— ibly. The required markings must be
Design, construction, testing, use and permanently affixed by stamping, en-
periodic inspection, or ISO 9809–1:2010: graving, or other equivalent method,
Gas cylinders—Refillable seamless on the shoulder, top end or neck of the
steel gas cylinders—Design, construc- pressure receptacle or on a perma-
tion and testing—Part 1: Quenched and
nently affixed component of the pres-
tempered steel cylinders with tensile
sure receptacle, such as a welded col-
strength less than 1100 MPa. (IBR, see
lar. Except for the ‘‘UN’’ mark, the
§ 171.7 of this subchapter.)
(o) Material compatibility. In addition minimum size of the marks must be 5
to the material requirements specified mm for pressure receptacles with a di-
in the UN pressure receptacle design ameter greater than or equal to 140
and construction ISO standards, and mm, and 2.5 mm for pressure recep-
any restrictions specified in part 173 tacles with a diameter less than 140
for the gases to be transported, the re- mm. The minimum size of the ‘‘UN’’
quirements of the following standards mark must be 5 mm for pressure recep-
must be applied with respect to mate- tacles with a diameter less than 140
rial compatibility: mm, and 10 mm for pressure recep-
(1) ISO 11114–1:2012: Gas cylinders— tacles with a diameter of greater than
Compatibility of cylinder and valve or equal to 140 mm. The depth of the
materials with gas contents—Part 1: markings must not create harmful
Metallic materials. (IBR, see § 171.7 of stress concentrations. A refillable pres-
this subchapter). sure receptacle conforming to the UN
(2) ISO 11114–2:2013(E) (IBR, see § 171.7 standard must be marked as follows:
of this subchapter). (1) The UN packaging symbol.
(2) The ISO standard, for example Administrator. The manufacturer ap-
ISO 9809–1, used for design, construc- proval number must follow the country
tion and testing. Acetylene cylinders of approval mark, separated by a slash
must be marked to indicate the porous (for example, USA/MXXXX). Pressure
mass and the steel shell, for example: receptacles approved by more than one
‘‘ISO 3807–2/ISO 9809–1.’’ national authority may contain the
(3) The mark of the country where mark of each country of approval, sep-
the approval is granted. The letters arated by a comma.
‘‘USA’’ must be marked on UN pressure (4) The identity mark or stamp of the
receptacles approved by the United IIA.

States. The manufacturer must obtain (5) The date of the initial inspection,
an approval number from the Associate the year (four digits) followed by the
90
ER19JA11.035</GPH>
month (two digits) separated by a (12) Identification of the cylinder

slash, for example ‘‘2006/04’’. thread type (e.g., 25E).
(6) The test pressure in bar, preceded (13) The country of manufacture. The
by the letters ‘‘PH’’ and followed by letters ‘‘USA’’ must be marked on cyl-
the letters ‘‘BAR’’. inders manufactured in the United
(7) The rated charging pressure of the States.
metal hydride storage system in bar, (14) The serial number assigned by
preceded by the letters ‘‘RCP’’ and fol- the manufacturer.
lowed by the letters ‘‘BAR.’’ (15) For steel pressure receptacles,
(8) The empty or tare weight. Except the letter ‘‘H’’ showing compatibility
for acetylene cylinders, empty weight of the steel, as specified in ISO 11114–1.
is the mass of the pressure receptacle (16) Identification of aluminum alloy,
in kilograms, including all integral if applicable.
parts (e.g., collar, neck ring, foot ring, (17) Stamp for nondestructive test-
etc.), followed by the letters ‘‘KG’’. The ing, if applicable.
empty weight does not include the (18) Stamp for underwater use of
mass of the valve, valve cap or valve composite cylinders, if applicable.
guard or any coating. The empty (19) For metal hydride storage sys-
weight must be expressed to three sig- tems having a limited life, the date of
nificant figures rounded up to the last expiration indicated by the word
digit. For cylinders of less than 1 kg, ‘‘FINAL,’’ followed by the year (four
the empty weight must be expressed to digits), the month (two digits) and sep-
two significant figures rounded down arated by a slash.
to the last digit. For acetylene cyl- (20) For composite cylinders and
inders, the tare weight must be marked tubes having a limited design life, the
on the cylinders in kilograms. The tare letters ‘‘FINAL’’ followed by the design
weight is the sum of the empty weight, life shown as the year (four digits) fol-
mass of the valve, any coating and all lowed by the month (two digits) sepa-
permanently attached parts (e.g., fit- rated by a slash (i.e. ‘‘/’’).
tings and accessories) that are not re- (21) For composite cylinders and
moved during filling. The tare weight tubes having a limited design life
must be expressed to two significant greater than 15 years and for composite
figures rounded down to the last digit. cylinders and tubes having non-limited
The tare weight does not include the design life, the letters ‘‘SERVICE’’ fol-
cylinder cap or any outlet cap or plug lowed by the date 15 years from the
not permanently attached to the cyl- date of manufacture (initial inspec-
inder. tion) shown as the year (four digits)
(9) The minimum wall thickness of followed by the month (two digits) sep-
the pressure receptacle in millimeters arated by a slash (i.e. ‘‘/’’).
followed by the letters ‘‘MM’’. This (r) Marking sequence. The marking re-
mark is not required for pressure required by paragraph (q) of this section
ceptacles with a water capacity less must be placed in three groups as
than or equal to 1.0 L or for composite shown in the example below:
cylinders. (1) The top grouping contains manu-
(10) For pressure receptacles intended facturing marks and must appear con-
for the transport of compressed gases secutively in the sequence given in
and UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved, the paragraphs (q)(13) through (19) of this
working pressure in bar, proceeded by section.
the letters ‘‘PW’’. (2) The middle grouping contains
(11) For liquefied gases, the water ca- operational marks described in para-
pacity in liters expressed to three sig- graphs (q)(6) through (11) of this sec-
nificant digits rounded down to the tion.
last digit, followed by the letter ‘‘L’’. If (3) The bottom grouping contains
the value of the minimum or nominal certification marks and must appear
water capacity is an integer, the digits consecutively in the sequence given in
after the decimal point may be omit- paragraphs (q)(1) through (5) of this
ted. section.
91
§ 178.71 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(s) Other markings. Other markings (3) A non-refillable pressure recep-

are allowed in areas other than the side tacle, because of its size, may sub-
wall, provided they are made in low stitute the marking required by this
stress areas and are not of a size and paragraph with a label. Reduction in
depth that will create harmful stress marking size is authorized only as pre-
concentrations. Such marks must not scribed in ISO 7225, Gas cylinders—Pre-
conflict with required marks. cautionary labels. (IBR, see § 171.7 of
(t) Marking of UN non-refillable pres- this subchapter).
sure receptacles. Unless otherwise speci- (4) Each non-refillable pressure re-
fied in this paragraph, each UN non-receptacle must also be legibly marked
fillable pressure receptacle must be by stenciling the following statement:
clearly and legibly marked as pre- ‘‘Federal law forbids transportation if
scribed in paragraph (q) of this section. refilled-penalty up to $500,000 fine and 5
In addition, permanent stenciling is years in imprisonment (49 U.S.C.
authorized. Except when stenciled, the 5124).’’
marks must be on the shoulder, top end (u) Marking of bundles of cylinders. (1)
or neck of the pressure receptacle or on Individual cylinders in a bundle of cyl-
a permanently affixed component of inders must be marked in accordance
the pressure receptacle (e.g., a welded with paragraphs (q), (r), (s) and (t) of
collar). this section as appropriate.
(1) The marking requirements and se- (2) Refillable UN bundles of cylinders
quence listed in paragraphs (q)(1) must be marked clearly and legibly
through (19) of this section are re- with certification, operational, and
quired, except the markings in para- manufacturing marks. These marks
graphs (q)(8), (9), (12) and (18) are not must be permanently affixed (e.g.,
applicable. The required serial number stamped, engraved, or etched) on a
marking in paragraph (q)(14) may be plate permanently attached to the
replaced by the batch number. frame of the bundle of cylinders. Ex-
(2) Each receptacle must be marked cept for the ‘‘UN’’ mark, the minimum
with the words ‘‘DO NOT REFILL’’ in size of the marks must be 5 mm. The
letters of at least 5 mm in height. minimum size of the ‘‘UN’’ mark must
92
ER30MR17.035</GPH>
be 10 mm. A refillable UN bundle of (i) The UN packaging symbol;

cylinders must be marked with the fol-
lowing:
(ii) The ISO standard, for example tached parts (cylinders, manifolds, fit-
ISO 9809–1, used for design, construc- tings and valves). Bundles intended for
tion and testing. Acetylene cylinders the carriage of UN 1001 acetylene, dis-
must be marked to indicate the porous solved must bear the tare mass as spec-
mass and the steel shell, for example: ified in clause N.4.2 of ISO 10961:2010;
‘‘ISO 3807–2/ISO 9809–1’’; (x) The country of manufacture. The
(iii) The mark of the country where letters ‘‘USA’’ must be marked on cyl-
the approval is granted. The letters
inders manufactured in the United
‘‘USA’’ must be marked on UN pressure
States;
receptacles approved by the United
States. The manufacturer must obtain (xi) The serial number assigned by
an approval number from the Associate the manufacturer; and
Administrator. The manufacturer ap- (xii) For steel pressure receptacles,
proval number must follow the country the letter ‘‘H’’ showing compatibility
of approval mark, separated by a slash of the steel, as specified in 1SO 11114–1.
(for example, USA/MXXXX). Pressure (v) Marking sequence. The marking re-
receptacles approved by more than one quired by paragraph (u) of this section
national authority may contain the must be placed in three groups as fol-
mark of each country of approval, sep- lows:
arated by a comma; (1) The top grouping contains manu-
(iv) The identity mark or stamp of facturing marks and must appear con-
the IIA; secutively in the sequence given in
(v) The date of the initial inspection, paragraphs (u)(2)(x) through (u)(2)(xii)
the year in four digits followed by the
of this section as applicable.
two digit month separated by a slash,
(2) The middle grouping contains
for example ‘‘2006/04’’;
(vi) The test pressure in bar, preceded operational marks described in para-
by the letters ‘‘PH’’ and followed by graphs (u)(2)(vi) through (u)(2)(ix) of
the letters ‘‘BAR’’; this section as applicable. When the
(vii) For pressure receptacles in- operational mark specified in para-
tended for the transport of compressed graph (u)(2)(vii) is required, it must im-
gases and UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved, mediately precede the operational
the working pressure in bar, proceeded mark specified in paragraph (u)(2)(vi).
by the letters ‘‘PW’’; (3) The bottom grouping contains
(viii) For liquefied gases, the water certification marks and must appear
capacity in liters expressed to three consecutively in the sequence given in
significant digits rounded down to the paragraphs (u)(2)(i) through (u)(2)(v) of
last digit, followed by the letter ‘‘L’’. If this section as applicable.
the value of the minimum or nominal
water capacity is an integer, the digits [76 FR 3385, Jan. 19, 2011, as amended at 76
after the decimal point may be omit- FR 43532, July 20, 2011; 77 FR 60943, Oct. 5,
2012; 78 FR 1096, Jan. 7, 2013; 80 FR 1166, Jan.

ted;
8, 2015; 80 FR 72929, Nov. 23, 2015; 82 FR 15895,
(ix) The total mass of the frame of
Mar. 30, 2017]
the bundle and all permanently at-
93
ER08JA15.002</GPH>
§ 178.74 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
§ 178.74 Approval of MEGCs. plete application will be returned to

(a) Application for design type ap- the applicant with the reasons why the
proval. (1) Each new MEGC design type application was returned. If the appli-
must have a design approval certification is complete and all applicable
cate. An owner or manufacturer must requirements of this section are met,
apply to an approval agency that is ap- the approval agency must prepare a
proved by the Associate Administrator MEGC design approval certificate con-
in accordance with subpart E of part taining the manufacturer’s name and
107 of this chapter + to obtain approval address, results and conclusions of the
of a new design. When a series of examination and necessary data for
MEGCs is manufactured without identification of the design type. If the
change in the design, the certificate is Associate Administrator approves the
valid for the entire series. The design Design Type Approval Certificate ap-
approval certificate must refer to the plication, the approval agency and the
prototype test report, the materials of manufacturer must each maintain a
construction of the manifold, the copy of the approved drawings, calcula-
standards to which the pressure recep- tions, and test data for at least 20
tacles are made and an approval num- years.
ber. The compliance requirements or (c) Approval agency’s responsibilities.
test methods applicable to MEGCs as The approval agency is responsible for
specified in this subpart may be varied ensuring that the MEGC conforms to
when the level of safety is determined the design type approval. The approval
to be equivalent to or exceed the re- agency must:
quirements of this subchapter and is (1) Witness all tests required for the
approved in writing by the Associate approval of the MEGC specified in this
Administrator. A design approval may section and § 178.75.
serve for the approval of smaller (2) Ensure, through appropriate in-
MEGCs made of materials of the same spection, that each MEGC is fabricated
type and thickness, by the same fab- in all respects in conformance with the
rication techniques and with identical
approved drawings, calculations, and
supports, equivalent closures and other
test data.
appurtenances.
(2) Each application for design ap- (3) Determine and ensure that the
proval must be in English and contain MEGC is suitable for its intended use
the following information: and that it conforms to the require-
(i) Two complete copies of all engi- ments of this subchapter.
neering drawings, calculations, and (4) Apply its name, identifying mark
test data necessary to ensure that the or identifying number, and the date the
design meets the relevant specifica- approval was issued, to the metal iden-
tion. tification marking plate attached to
(ii) The manufacturer’s serial number the MEGC upon successful completion
that will be assigned to each MEGC. of all requirements of this subpart.
(iii) A statement as to whether the Any approvals by the Associate Admin-
design type has been examined by any istrator authorizing design or con-
approval agency previously and judged struction alternatives (Alternate Ar-
unacceptable. Affirmative statements rangements) of the MEGC (see para-
must be documented with the name of graph (a) of this section) must be indi-
the approval agency, reason for non-ac- cated on the metal identification plate
ceptance, and the nature of modifica- as specified in § 178.75(j).
tions made to the design type. (5) Prepare an approval certificate
(b) Actions by the approval agency. The for each MEGC or, in the case of a se-
approval agency must review the appli- ries of identical MEGCs manufactured
cation for design type approval, includ- to a single design type, for each series
ing all drawings and calculations, to of MEGCs. The approval certificate
ensure that the design of the MEGC must include all of the following infor-
meets all requirements of the relevant mation:
specification and to determine whether (i) The information displayed on the

it is complete and conforms to the re- metal identification plate required by
quirements of this section. An incom- § 178.75(j);
94
(ii) The results of the applicable ing and provide the reason for the de-
framework test specified in ISO 1496–3 nial. The manufacturer may request
(IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter); that the Associate Administrator re-
(iii) The results of the initial inspec- consider the decision. The application
tion and test specified in paragraph (h) request must—
of this section; (1) Be written in English and filed
(iv) The results of the impact test within 90 days of receipt of the deci-
specified in § 178.75(i)(4); sion;
(v) Certification documents verifying (2) State in detail any alleged errors
that the cylinders and tubes conform of fact and law; and
to the applicable standards; and (3) Enclose any additional informa-
(vi) A statement that the approval tion needed to support the request to
agency certifies the MEGC in accord- reconsider.
ance with the procedures in this sec-
(f) Appeal. (1) A manufacturer whose
tion and that the MEGC is suitable for
reconsideration request is denied may
its intended purpose and meets the re-
appeal to the PHMSA Administrator.
quirements of this subchapter. When a
The appeal must—
series of MEGCs is manufactured with-
(i) Be in writing and filed within 90
out change in the design type, the cer-
days of receipt of the Associate Admin-
tificate may be valid for the entire se-
istrator s decision on reconsideration;
ries of MEGCs representing a single de-
sign type. The approval number must (ii) State in detail any alleged errors
consist of the distinguishing sign or of fact and law;
mark of the country (‘‘USA’’ for the (iii) Enclose any additional informa-
United States of America) where the tion needed to support the appeal; and
approval was granted and a registra- (iv) State in detail the modification
tion number. of the final decision sought.
(6) Retain on file a copy of each ap- (2) The Administrator will grant or
proval certificate for at least 20 years. deny the relief and inform the appel-
(d) Manufacturers’ responsibilities. The lant in writing of the decision. The Ad-
manufacturer is responsible for compli- ministrator’s decision is the final ad-
ance with the applicable specifications ministrative action.
for the design and construction of (g) Modifications to approved MEGCs.
MEGCs. The manufacturer of a MEGC (1) Prior to modification of any ap-
must: proved MEGC that may affect conform-
(1) Comply with all the requirements ance and safe use, and that may in-
of the applicable ISO standard specified volve a change to the design type or af-
in § 178.71; fect its ability to retain the hazardous
(2) Obtain and use an approval agen- material in transportation, the
cy to review the design, construction MEGC’s owner must inform the ap-
and certification of the MEGC; proval agency that prepared the initial
(3) Provide a statement in the manu- approval certificate for the MEGC or, if
facturers’ data report certifying that the initial approval agency is unavail-
each MEGC manufactured complies able, another approval agency, of the
with the relevant specification and all nature of the modification and request
the applicable requirements of this certification of the modification. The
subchapter; and owner must supply the approval agency
(4) Retain records for the MEGCs for with all revised drawings, calculations,
at least 20 years. When required by the and test data relative to the intended
specification, the manufacturer must modification. The MEGC’s owner must
provide copies of the records to the ap- also provide a statement as to whether
proval agency, the owner or lessee of the intended modification has been ex-
the MEGC, and to a representative of amined and determined to be unaccept-
DOT, upon request. able by any approval agency. The writ-
(e) Denial of application for approval. ten statement must include the name
If the Associate Administrator finds of the approval agency, the reason for
that the MEGC will not be approved for non-acceptance, and the nature of
any reason, the Associate Adminis- changes made to the modification since
trator will notify the applicant in writ- its original rejection.
95
§ 178.75 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(2) The approval agency must review (2) Before an approval is terminated,
the request for modification. If the ap- the Associate Administrator will pro-
proval agency determines that the provide the person—
posed modification does not conform to (i) Written notice of the facts or con-
the relevant specification, the approval duct believed to warrant the termi-
agency must reject the request in ac- nation;
cordance with paragraph (d) of this sec- (ii) An opportunity to submit oral
tion. If the approval agency determines and written evidence; and
that the proposed modification con- (3) An opportunity to demonstrate or
forms fully with the relevant specifica- achieve compliance with the applicable
tion, the request is accepted. If modi- requirements.
fication to an approved MEGC alters (i) Imminent Danger. If the Associate
any information on the approval cer- Administrator determines that a cer-
tificate, the approval agency must pre- tificate of approval must be terminated
pare a new approval certificate for the to preclude a significant and imminent
modified MEGC and submit the certifi- adverse effect on public safety, the As-
cate to the Associate Administrator for sociate Administrator may terminate
approval. After receiving approval the certificate immediately. In such
from the Associate Administrator, the circumstances, the opportunities of
approval agency must ensure that any paragraphs (h)(2) and (3) of this section
necessary changes are made to the need not be provided prior to termi-
metal identification plate. A copy of nation of the approval, but must be
each newly issued approval certificate provided as soon as practicable there-
must be retained by the approval agen- after.
cy and the MEGC’s owner for at least [71 FR 33890, June 12, 2006]
20 years. The approval agency must
perform the following activities: § 178.75 Specifications for MEGCs.
(i) Retain a set of the approved re-
(a) General. Each MEGC must meet
vised drawings, calculations, and data
the requirements of this section. In a
as specified in § 178.69(b)(4) for at least
MEGC that meets the definition of a
20 years;
‘‘container’’ within the terms of the
(ii) Ensure through appropriate in- International Convention for Safe Con-
spection that all modifications containers (CSC) must meet the require-
form to the revised drawings, calcula- ments of the CSC as amended and 49
tions, and test data; and CFR parts 450 through 453, and must
(iii) Determine the extent to which have a CSC approval plate.
retesting of the modified MEGC is nec- (b) Alternate Arrangements. The tech-
essary based on the nature of the pro- nical requirements applicable to
posed modification, and ensure that all MEGCs may be varied when the level of
required retests are satisfactorily per- safety is determined to be equivalent
formed. to or exceed the requirements of this
(h) Termination of Approval Certificate. subchapter. Such an alternate arrange-
(1) The Associate Administrator may ment must be approved in writing by
terminate an approval issued under the Associate Administrator. MEGCs
this section if he or she determines approved to an Alternate Arrangement
that— must be marked as required by para-
(i) Because of a change in cir- graph (j) of this section.
cumstances, the approval no longer is (c) Definitions. The following defini-
needed or no longer would be granted if tions apply:
applied for; Leakproofness test means a test using
(ii) Information upon which the ap- gas subjecting the pressure receptacles
proval was based is fraudulent or sub- and the service equipment of the MEGC
stantially erroneous; to an effective internal pressure of not
(iii) Termination of the approval is less than 20% of the test pressure.
necessary to adequately protect Manifold means an assembly of piping
against risks to life and property; or and valves connecting the filling and/or
(iv) The MEGC does not meet the discharge openings of the pressure re-
specification. ceptacles.
96
Maximum permissible gross mass or Quenched and tempered steel cylinders

MPGM means the heaviest load author- with tensile strength greater than or
ized for transport (sum of the tare equal to 1100 MPa. (IBR, see § 171.7 of
mass of the MEGC, service equipment this subchapter). Until December 31,
and pressure receptacle). 2018, the manufacture of a cylinder
Service equipment means manifold sys- conforming to the requirements in ISO
tem (measuring instruments, piping 9809–2:2000 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
and safety devices). chapter) is authorized;
Shut-off valve means a valve that (iii) ISO 9809–3: Gas cylinders—Refill-
stops the flow of gas. able seamless steel gas cylinders—De-
Structural equipment means the rein- sign, construction and testing—Part 3:
forcing, fastening, protective and stabi- Normalized steel cylinders. (IBR, see
lizing members external to the pres- § 171.7 of this subchapter). Until Decem-
sure receptacles. ber 31, 2018, the manufacture of a cyl-
(d) General design and construction re- inder conforming to the requirements
quirements. (1) The MEGC must be capa- in ISO 9809–3:2000 (IBR, see § 171.7 of
ble of being loaded and discharged this subchapter) is authorized; or
without the removal of its structural (iv) ISO 9809–4:2014(E) Gas cylinders—
equipment. It must possess stabilizing Refillable seamless steel gas cyl-
members external to the pressure re- inders—Design, construction and test-
ceptacles to provide structural integ- ing—Part 4: Stainless steel cylinders
rity for handling and transport. MEGCs with an Rm value of less than 1 100
must be designed and constructed with MPa (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
supports to provide a secure base dur- chapter).
ing transport and with lifting and tie-
(v) ISO 11120: Gas cylinders—Refill-
down attachments that are adequate
able seamless steel tubes of water ca-
for lifting the MEGC including when
pacity between 150 L and 3000 L—De-
loaded to its maximum permissible
sign, construction and testing. (IBR,
gross mass. The MEGC must be de-
see § 171.7 of this subchapter).
signed to be loaded onto a transport ve-
hicle or vessel and equipped with skids, (4) Pressure receptacles of MEGCs,
mountings or accessories to facilitate fittings, and pipework must be con-
mechanical handling. structed of a material that is compat-
(2) MEGCs must be designed, manu- ible with the hazardous materials in-
factured and equipped to withstand, tended to be transported, as specified
without loss of contents, all normal in this subchapter.
handling and transportation condi- (5) Contact between dissimilar met-
tions. The design must take into ac- als that could result in damage by gal-
count the effects of dynamic loading vanic action must be prevented by ap-
and fatigue. propriate means.
(3) Each pressure receptacle of a (6) The materials of the MEGC, in-
MEGC must be of the same design type, cluding any devices, gaskets, and ac-
seamless steel, and constructed and cessories, must have no adverse effect
tested according to one of the following on the gases intended for transport in
ISO standards: the MEGC.
(i) ISO 9809–1: Gas cylinders—Refill- (7) MEGCs must be designed to with-
able seamless steel gas cylinders—De- stand, without loss of contents, at
sign, construction and testing—Part 1: least the internal pressure due to the
Quenched and tempered steel cylinders contents, and the static, dynamic and
with tensile strength less than 1100 thermal loads during normal condi-
MPa. (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- tions of handling and transport. The
chapter). Until December 31, 2018, the design must take into account the ef-
manufacture of a cylinder conforming fects of fatigue, caused by repeated ap-
to the requirements in ISO 9809–1:1999 plication of these loads through the ex-
(IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter) is pected life of the MEGC.
authorized; (8) MEGCs and their fastenings must,
(ii) ISO 9809–2: Gas cylinders—Refill- under the maximum permissible load,
able seamless steel gas cylinders—De- be capable of withstanding the fol-
sign, construction and testing—Part 2: lowing separately applied static forces
97
§ 178.75 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(for calculation purposes, acceleration tings (pipe sockets, shut-off devices),

due to gravity (g) = 9.81 m/s2): and shut-off valves must be protected
(i) In the direction of travel: 2g from damage by external forces. Mani-
(twice the MPGM multiplied by the ac- fold piping leading to shut-off valves
celeration due to gravity); must be sufficiently flexible to protect
(ii) Horizontally at right angles to the valves and the piping from shear-
the direction of travel: 1g (the MPGM ing, or releasing the pressure recep-
multiplied by the acceleration due to tacle contents. The filling and dis-
gravity. When the direction of travel is charge devices, including flanges or
not clearly determined, the forces must threaded plugs, and any protective caps
be equal to twice the MPGM); must be capable of being secured
(iii) Vertically upwards: 1g (the against unintended opening.
MPGM multiplied by the acceleration
(2) Each pressure receptacle intended
due to gravity); and
for the transport of Division 2.3 gases
(iv) Vertically downwards: 2g (twice
must be equipped with an individual
the MPGM (total loading including the
shut-off valve. The manifold for Divi-
effect of gravity) multiplied by the ac-
celeration due to gravity. sion 2.3 liquefied gases must be de-
(9) Under each of the forces specified signed so that each pressure receptacle
in paragraph (d)(8) of this section, the can be filled separately and be kept
stress at the most severely stressed isolated by a valve capable of being
point of the pressure receptacles must closed during transit. For Division 2.1
not exceed the values given in the ap- gases, the pressure receptacles must be
plicable design specifications (e.g., ISO isolated by an individual shut-off valve
11120). into assemblies of not more than 3,000
(10) Under each of the forces specified L.
in paragraph (d)(8) of this section, the (3) For MEGC filling and discharge
safety factor for the framework and openings:
fastenings must be as follows: (i) Two valves in series must be
(i) For steels having a clearly defined placed in an accessible position on each
yield point, a safety factor of 1.5 in re- discharge and filling pipe. One of the
lation to the guaranteed yield valves may be a backflow prevention
strength; or valve. (ii) The filling and discharge de-
(ii) For steels with no clearly defined vices may be equipped to a manifold.
yield point, a safety factor of 1.5 in re- (iii) For sections of piping which can
lation to the guaranteed 0.2 percent be closed at both ends and where a liq-
proof strength and, for austenitic uid product can be trapped, a pressure-
steels, the 1 percent proof strength. relief valve must be provided to pre-
(11) MEGCs must be capable of being vent excessive pressure build-up.
electrically grounded to prevent elec- (iv) The main isolation valves on a
trostatic discharge when intended for MEGC must be clearly marked to indi-
flammable gases. cate their directions of closure. All
(12) The pressure receptacles of a
shutoff valves must close by a clock-
MEGC must be secured in a manner to
wise motion of the handwheel.
prevent movement that could result in
damage to the structure and con- (v) Each shut-off valve or other
centration of harmful localized means of closure must be designed and
stresses. constructed to withstand a pressure
(e) Service equipment. (1) Service equal to or greater than 1.5 times the
equipment must be arranged so that it test pressure of the MEGC.
is protected from mechanical damage (vi) All shut-off valves with screwed
by external forces during handling and spindles must close by a clockwise mo-
transportation. When the connections tion of the handwheel. For other shut-
between the frame and the pressure re- off valves, the open and closed posi-
ceptacles allow relative movement be- tions and the direction of closure must
tween the subassemblies, the equip- be clearly shown.
ment must be fastened to allow move- (vii) All shut-off valves must be de-
ment to prevent damage to any work- signed and positioned to prevent unin-
ing part. The manifolds, discharge fit- tentional opening.
98
(viii) Ductile metals must be used in the same flow area as the inlet of the
the construction of valves or acces- pressure relief device to which it is
sories. connected. The nominal size of the dis-
(4) The piping must be designed, con- charge piping must be at least as large
structed and installed to avoid damage as that of the pressure relief device.
due to expansion and contraction, me- (3) Location of pressure-relief de-
chanical shock and vibration. Joints in vices: For liquefied gases, each pres-
tubing must be brazed or have an sure relief device must, under max-
equally strong metal union. The melt- imum filling conditions, be in commu-
ing point of brazing materials must be nication with the vapor space of the
no lower than 525 °C (977 °F). The rated pressure receptacles. The devices, when
pressure of the service equipment and installed, must be arranged to ensure
of the manifold must be not less than the escaping vapor is discharged up-
two-thirds of the test pressure of the wards and unrestrictedly to prevent
pressure receptacles. impingement of escaping gas or liquid
(f) Pressure relief devices. Each pres- upon the MEGC, its pressure recep-
sure receptacle must be equipped with tacles or personnel. For flammable,
one or more pressure relief devices as pyrophoric and oxidizing gases, the es-
specified in § 173.301(f) of this sub- caping gas must be directed away from
chapter. When pressure relief devices the pressure receptacle in such a man-
are installed, each pressure receptacle ner that it cannot impinge upon the
or group of pressure receptacles of a other pressure receptacles. Heat resist-
MEGC that can be isolated must be ant protective devices that deflect the
equipped with one or more pressure re- flow of gas are permissible provided the
lief devices. Pressure relief devices required pressure relief device capacity
must be of a type that will resist dy- is not reduced. Arrangements must be
namic forces including liquid surge and made to prevent access to the pressure
must be designed to prevent the entry relief devices by unauthorized persons
of foreign matter, the leakage of gas and to protect the devices from damage
and the development of any dangerous caused by rollover.
excess pressure. (g) Gauging devices. When a MEGC is
(1) The size of the pressure relief de- intended to be filled by mass, it must
vices: CGA S–1.1 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this be equipped with one or more gauging
subchapter) must be used to determine devices. Glass level-gauges and gauges
the relief capacity of individual pres- made of other fragile material are pro-
sure receptacles. hibited.
(2) Connections to pressure-relief de- (h) MEGC supports, frameworks, lifting
vices: Connections to pressure relief and tie-down attachments. (1) MEGCs
devices must be of sufficient size to en- must be designed and constructed with
able the required discharge to pass un- a support structure to provide a secure
restricted to the pressure relief device. base during transport. MEGCs must be
A shut-off valve installed between the protected against damage to the pres-
pressure receptacle and the pressure re- sure receptacles and service equipment
lief device is prohibited, except where resulting from lateral and longitudinal
duplicate devices are provided for impact and overturning. The forces
maintenance or other reasons, and the specified in paragraph (d)(8) of this sec-
shut-off valves serving the devices action, and the safety factor specified in
tually in use are locked open, or the paragraph (d)(10) of this section must
shut-off valves are interlocked so that be considered in this aspect of the de-
at least one of the duplicate devices is sign. Skids, frameworks, cradles or
always operable and capable of meeting other similar structures are accept-
the requirements of paragraph (f)(1) of able. If the pressure receptacles and
this section. No obstruction is per- service equipment are so constructed
mitted in an opening leading to or as to withstand impact and over-
leaving from a vent or pressure-relief turning, additional protective support
device that might restrict or cut-off structure is not required (see para-
the flow from the pressure receptacle graph (h)(4) of this section).
to that device. The opening through all (2) The combined stresses caused by
piping and fittings must have at least pressure receptacle mountings (e.g.
99
§ 178.75 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
cradles, frameworks, etc.) and MEGC satisfactory operation of all service

lifting and tie-down attachments must equipment must also be performed be-
not cause excessive stress in any pres- fore the MEGC is placed into service.
sure receptacle. Permanent lifting and When the pressure receptacles and
tie-down attachments must be their fittings have been pressure-tested
equipped to all MEGCs. Any welding of separately, they must be subjected to a
mountings or attachments onto the leakproof test after assembly.
pressure receptacles is prohibited. (4) An MEGC that meets the defini-
(3) The effects of environmental cor- tion of ‘‘container’’ in the CSC (see 49
rosion must be taken into account in CFR 450.3(a)(2)) must be subjected to an
the design of supports and frameworks. impact test using a prototype rep-
(4) When MEGCs are not protected resenting each design type. The proto-
during transport as specified in para- type MEGC must be shown to be capa-
graph (h)(1) of this section, the pres- ble of absorbing the forces resulting
sure receptacles and service equipment from an impact not less than 4 times (4
must be protected against damage re- g) the MPGM of the fully loaded
sulting from lateral or longitudinal im- MEGC, at a duration typical of the me-
pact or overturning. External fittings chanical shocks experienced in rail
must be protected against release of
transport. A listing of acceptable
the pressure receptacles’ contents upon
methods for performing the impact test
impact or overturning of the MEGC on
is provided in the UN Recommenda-
its fittings. Particular attention must
tions (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
be paid to the protection of the mani-
chapter).
fold. Examples of protection include:
(i) Protection against lateral impact, (j) Marking. (1) Each MEGC must be
which may consist of longitudinal bars; equipped with a corrosion resistant
(ii) Protection against overturning, metal plate permanently attached to
which may consist of reinforcement the MEGC in a conspicuous place read-
rings or bars fixed across the frame; ily accessible for inspection. The pres-
(iii) Protection against rear impact, sure receptacles must be marked ac-
which may consist of a bumper or cording to this section. Affixing the
frame; metal plate to a pressure receptacle is
(iv) Protection of the pressure recep- prohibited. At a minimum, the fol-
tacles and service equipment against lowing information must be marked on
damage from impact or overturning by the plate by stamping or by any other
use of an ISO frame according to the equivalent method:
relevant provisions of ISO 1496–3. (IBR, Country of manufacture
(i) Initial inspection and test. The pres- UN
sure receptacles and items of equip-
ment of each MEGC must be inspected
and tested before being put into service
for the first time (initial inspection
and test). This initial inspection and
test of an MEGC must include the fol-
lowing:
(1) A check of the design characteris-
tics.
(2) An external examination of the
MEGC and its fittings, taking into ac-
count the hazardous materials to be
transported.
(3) A pressure test performed at the
test pressures specified in Approval Country
§ 173.304b(b)(1) and (2) of this sub- Approval Number
chapter. The pressure test of the mani- Alternate Arrangements (see § 178.75(b))
fold may be performed as a hydraulic

test or by using another liquid or gas. MEGC Manufacturer’s name or mark
A leakproofness test and a test of the MEGC’s serial number
100
ER12JN06.002</GPH>
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT Pt. 178, Subpt. C, App. A
Approval agency (Authorized body for Stamp of the approval agency who
the design approval) performed or witnessed the most recent
Year of manufacture test
(2) The following information must
Test pressure: lll bar gauge be marked on a metal plate firmly se-
Design temperature range lll °C to cured to the MEGC:
lll °C Name of the operator
Number of pressure receptacles lll Maximum permissible load mass lll
Total water capacity lll liters kg
Initial pressure test date and identi- Working pressure at 15 °C: lll bar
fication of the Approval Agency gauge
Date and type of most recent periodic Maximum permissible gross mass
tests (MPGM) lll kg
Year lll Monthlll Type lll Unladen (tare) mass lll kg
(e.g. 2004–05, AE/UE, where ‘‘AE’’ rep- [71 FR 33892, June 12, 2006, as amended at 73
FR 4719, Jan. 28, 2008; 77 FR 60943, Oct. 5, 2012;
resents acoustic emission and ‘‘UE’’ 80 FR 1168, Jan. 8, 2015; 82 FR 15896, Mar. 30,
represents ultrasonic examination) 2017]
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART C OF PART 178—ILLUSTRATIONS: CYLINDER TENSILE

SAMPLE
The following figures illustrate the recommended locations for test specimens taken from
welded cylinders:
101
Pt. 178, Subpt. C, App. A 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
102
ER08AU02.013</GPH>
103
ER08AU02.014</GPH>
104
ER08AU02.015</GPH>
105
ER08AU02.016</GPH>
[67 FR 51654, Aug. 8, 2002]

106
ER08AU02.017</GPH>
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.255–6
Subparts D–G [Reserved] § 178.255–3 Expansion domes.

(a) Expansion domes, if applied, must
Subpart H—Specifications for have a minimum capacity of one per-
Portable Tanks cent of the combined capacity of the
tank and dome.
SOURCE: 29 FR 18972, Dec. 29, 1964, unless (b) [Reserved]
otherwise noted. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606,
Apr. 5, 1967. § 178.255–4 Closures for manholes and
domes.
§§ 178.251—178.253–5 [Reserved] (a) The manhole cover shall be de-
§ 178.255 Specification 60; steel port- signed to provide a secure closure of
able tanks. the manhole. All covers, not hinged to
the tanks, shall be attached to the out-
§ 178.255–1 General requirements. side of the dome by at least 1⁄8 inch
chain or its equivalent. Closures shall
(a) Tanks must be of fusion welded
be made tight against leakage of vapor
construction, cylindrical in shape with
and liquid by use of gaskets of suitable
seamless heads concave to the pres-
material.
sure. Tank shells may be of seamless
construction. (b) [Reserved]
(b) Tanks must be designed, con-
§ 178.255–5 Bottom discharge outlets.
structed, certified, and stamped in ac-
cordance with Section VIII of the (a) Bottom discharge outlets prohib-
ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- ited, except on tanks used for ship-
chapter). ments of sludge acid and alkaline cor-
(c) Tanks including all permanent at- rosive liquids.
tachments must be postweld heat (b) If installed, bottom outlets or
treated as a unit. bottom washout chambers shall be of
(d) Requirements concerning types of metal not subject to rapid deteriora-
valves, retesting, and qualification of tion by the lading, and each shall be
portable tanks contained in §§ 173.32 provided with a valve or plug at its
and 173.315 of this chapter must be ob- upper end and liquid-tight closure at it
served. lower end. Each valve or plug shall be
designed to insure against unseating
[29 FR 18972, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32
due to stresses or shocks incident to
FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt.
178–7, 34 FR 18250, Nov. 14, 1969; 68 FR 75750, transportation. Bottom outlets shall be
Dec. 31, 2003] adequately protected against handling
damage and outlet equipment must not
§ 178.255–2 Material. extend to within less than one inch of
the bottom bearing surface of the skids
(a) Material used in the tank must be
or tank mounting.
steel of good weldable quality and con-
form with the requirements in Sections [29 FR 18972, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32
V, VIII, and IX of the ASME Code (IBR, FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, as amended by Amdt.
see § 171.7 of this subchapter). 178–104, 59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994]
(b) The minimum thickness of metal,
exclusive of lining material, for shell § 178.255–6 Loading and unloading ac-
and heads of tanks shall be as follows: cessories.
(a) When installed, gauging, loading
Minimum
Tank capacity thickness and air inlet devices, including their
(inch) valves, shall be provided with adequate
means for their secure closure; and
Not more than 1,200 gallons ............................... 14 ⁄
Over 1,200 to 1,800 gallons ................................ ⁄
5 16 means shall also be provided for the
Over 1,800 gallons .............................................. 38 ⁄ closing of pipe connections of valves.
(b) Interior heater coils, if installed,
[29 FR 18972, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 must be of extra heavy pipe and so con-
FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt. structed that breaking off of exterior
178–7, 34 FR 18250, Nov. 14, 1969; 68 FR 75750, connections will not cause leakage of
Dec. 31, 2003] tanks.
107
§ 178.255–7 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
§ 178.255–7 Protection of valves and devices shall be deemed to comply with

accessories. this requirement.
(a) All valves, fittings, accessories, (b) All tank mountings such as skids,
safety devices, gauging devices, and the fastenings, brackets, cradles, lifting
like shall be adequately protected lugs, etc., intended to carry loadings
against mechanical damage by a hous- shall be permanently secured to tanks
ing closed with a cover plate. in accordance with the requirements
(b) Protective housing shall comply under which the tanks are fabricated,
with the requirements under which the and shall be designed with a factor of
tanks are fabricated with respect to de- safety of four, and built to withstand
sign and construction, and shall be de- loadings in any direction equal to two
signed with a minimum factor of safety times the weight of the tanks and at-
of four to withstand loadings in any di- tachments when filled to the maximum
rection equal to two times the weight permissible loaded weight.
of the tank and attachments when (c) Lifting lugs or side hold-down
filled with water. lugs shall be provided on the tank
mountings in a manner suitable for at-
§ 178.255–8 Safety devices. taching lifting gear and hold-down de-
(a) See § 173.315(i) of this subchapter. vices. Lifting lugs and hold-down lugs
(b) [Reserved] welded directly to the tank shall be of
the pad-eye type. Doubling plates weld-
[Amdt. 178–83, 50 FR 11066, Mar. 19, 1985] ed to the tank and located at the
§ 178.255–9 Compartments. points of support shall be deemed to
comply with this requirement.
(a) When the interior of the tank is (d) All tank mountings shall be so de-
divided into compartments, each com- signed as to prevent the concentration
partment shall be designed, con- of excessive loads on the tank shell.
structed and tested as a separate tank.
Thickness of shell and compartment § 178.255–12 Pressure test.
heads shall be determined on the basis
(a) Each completed portable tank
of total tank capacity.
prior to application of lining shall be
(b) [Reserved]
tested before being put into transpor-
§ 178.255–10 Lining. tation service by completely filling the
tank with water or other liquid having
(a) If a lining is required, the mate-
a similar viscosity, the temperature of
rial used for lining the tank shall be
which shall not exceed 100 °F during
homogeneous, nonporous, imperforate
the test, and applying a pressure of 60
when applied, not less elastic than the
psig. The tank shall be capable of hold-
metal of the tank proper. It shall be of
ing the prescribed pressure for at least
substantially uniform thickness, not
10 minutes without leakage, evidence
less than 1⁄32 inch thick if metallic, and
of impending failure, or failure. All clo-
not less than 1⁄16 inch thick if non-
sures shall be in place while the test is
metallic, and shall be directly bonded
made and the pressure shall be gauged
or attached by other equally satisfac-
at the top of the tank. Safety devices
tory means. Rubber lining shall be not
and/or vents shall be plugged during
less than 3⁄16 inch thick. Joints and
this test.
seams in the lining shall be made by
(b) [Reserved]
fusing the material together or by
other equally satisfactory means. The [29 FR 18972, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32
interior of the tank shall be free from FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, as amended by Amdt.
scale, oxidation, moisture and all for- 178–104, 59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994]
eign matter during the lining oper-
ation. § 178.255–13 Repair of tanks.
(b) [Reserved] (a) Tanks failing to meet the test
may be repaired and retested, provided
§ 178.255–11 Tank mountings. that repairs are made in complete com-
(a) Tanks shall be designed and fab- pliance with the requirements of this
ricated with mountings to provide a se- specification.
cure base in transit. ‘‘Skids’’ or similar (b) [Reserved]
108
§ 178.255–14 Marking. § 178.273 Approval of Specification UN

portable tanks.
(a) In addition to markings required
by Section VIII of the ASME Code (a) Application for approval. (1) An
(IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter), owner or manufacturer of a portable
every tank shall bear permanent marks tank shall apply for approval to a des-
at least 1/8-inch high stamped into the ignated approval agency authorized to
metal near the center of one of the approve the portable tank in accord-
tank heads or stamped into a plate per- ance with the procedures in subpart E,
manently attached to the tank by part 107 of this subchapter.
means of brazing or welding or other (2) Each application for approval
suitable means as follows: must contain the following informa-
tion:
Manufacturer’s name lllllll Serial (i) Two complete copies of all engi-
No. llllllllllllllllllll
neering drawings, calculations, and
DOT specification llllllllllllll
Nominal capacity lllllll (gallons) test data necessary to ensure that the
Tare weight lllllll (pounds) design meets the relevant specifica-
Date of manufacture llllllllllll tion.
(ii) The manufacturer’s serial number
(b) [Reserved] that will be assigned to each portable
[29 FR 18972, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 tank.
FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt. (iii) A statement as to whether the
178–67, 46 FR 49906, Oct. 8, 1981; 68 FR 75750, design type has been examined by any
Dec. 31, 2003] approval agency previously and judged
unacceptable. Affirmative statements
§ 178.255–15 Report.
must be documented with the name of
(a) A copy of the manufacturer’s data the approval agency, reason for non-
report required by Section VIII of the acceptance, and the nature of modifica-
ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- tions made to the design type.
chapter) under which the tank is fab- (b) Action by approval agency. The ap-
ricated must be furnished to the owner proval agency must perform the fol-
for each new tank. lowing activities:
Place ——————————————— (1) Review the application for ap-
Date ———————————————— proval to determine whether it is com-
Portable tank plete and conforms with the require-
Manufactured for lllllll Company ments of paragraph (a) of this section.
Location llllllllllllllllll If an application is incomplete, it will
Manufactured by lllllll Company be returned to the applicant with an
Location llllllllllllllllll
Consigned to lllllllll Company
explanation as to why the application
Location llllllllllllllllll is incomplete.
Size lll feet outside diameter by lll (2) Review all drawings and calcula-
long. tions to ensure that the design is in
Marks on tank as prescribed by § 178.255–14 of compliance with all requirements of
this specification are as follows: the relevant specification. If the appli-
Manufacturer’s name llllllllllll cation is approved, one set of the ap-
Serial number llllllllllllllll proved drawings, calculations, and test
Owner’s serial number lllllllllll
DOT specification llllllllllllll data shall be returned to the applicant.
ASME Code Symbol (par U–201) lllllll The second (inspector’s copy) set of ap-
Date of manufacture llllllllllll proved drawings, calculations, and test
Nominal capacity lllllll gallons. data shall be retained by the approval
It is hereby certified that this tank is in agency. Maintain drawings and ap-
complete compliance with the requirements proval records for as long as the port-
of DOT specification No. 60. able tank remains in service. The draw-
(Signed) ———————————————
Manufacturer or owner
ings and records must be provided to
the Department of Transportation
(b) [Reserved] (DOT) upon request.
[29 FR 18972, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 (3) Witness all tests required for the
FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt. approval of the portable tank specified
178–83, 50 FR 11066, Mar. 19, 1985; 68 FR 75750, in this section and part 180, subpart G
Dec. 31, 2003] of this subchapter.
109
§ 178.273 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(4) Ensure, through appropriate in- series of identical portable tanks man-
spection that each portable tank is fab- ufactured to a single design type, for
ricated in all respects in conformance each series of portable tanks. The ap-
with the approved drawings, calcula- proval certificate must include all the
tions, and test data. information required to be displayed on
(5) Determine and ensure that the the metal identification plate required
portable tank is suitable for its in- by § 178.274(i). The approval certificate
tended use and that it conforms to the must certify that the approval agency
requirements of this subchapter. designated to approve the portable
(6) For UN portable tanks intended tank has approved the portable tank in
for non-refrigerated and refrigerated accordance with the procedures in sub-
liquefied gases and Division 6.1 liquids part E of part 107 of this subchapter
which meet the inhalation toxicity cri- and that the portable tank is suitable
teria (Zone A or B) as defined in for its intended purpose and meets the
§ 173.132 of this subchapter, or that are requirements of this subchapter. When
designated as toxic by inhalation mate- a series of portable tanks is manufac-
rials in the § 172.101 Table of this sub- tured without change in the design
chapter, the approval agency must en- type, the certificate may be valid for
sure that: the entire series of portable tanks rep-
(i) The portable tank has been de- resenting a single design type. For UN
signed, constructed, certified, and portable tanks, the certificate must
stamped in accordance with the re- refer to the prototype test report, the
quirements in Division 1 of Section hazardous material or group of haz-
VIII of the ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 ardous materials allowed to be trans-
of this subchapter). Other design codes ported, the materials of construction of
may be used if approved by the Asso- the shell and lining (when applicable)
ciate Administrator (see § 178.274(b)(1)); and an approval number. The approval
(ii) All applicable provisions of the number must consist of the distin-
design and construction have been met guishing sign or mark of the country
to the satisfaction of the designated (‘‘USA’’ for the United States of Amer-
approval agency in accordance with the ica) where the approval was granted
rules established in the ASME Code and a registration number.
and that the portable tank meets the (iii) Retain a copy of each approval
requirements of the ASME Code and all certificate.
the applicable requirements specified (8) For UN portable tanks, the ap-
in this subchapter; proval certificate must also include the
(iii) The inspector has carried out all following:
the inspections specified by the rules (i) The results of the applicable
established in the ASME Code; and framework and rail impact test speci-
(iv) The portable tank is marked fied in part 180, subpart G, of this sub-
with a U stamp code symbol under the chapter; and
authority of the authorized inde- (ii) The results of the initial inspec-
pendent inspector. tion and test in § 178.274(j).
(7) Upon successful completion of all (9) The approval agency shall be inde-
requirements of this subpart, the ap- pendent from the manufacturer. The
proval agency must: approval agency and the authorized in-
(i) Apply its name, identifying mark spector may be the same entity.
or identifying number, and the date (c) Manufacturers’ responsibilities. The
upon which the approval was issued, to manufacturer is responsible for compli-
the metal identification marking plate ance with the applicable specifications
attached to the portable tank. Any ap- for the design and construction of port-
provals for UN portable tanks author- able tanks. In addition to responsi-
izing design or construction alter- bility for compliance, manufacturers
natives (Alternate Arrangements) ap- are responsible for ensuring that the
proved by the Associate Administrator contracted approval agency and au-
(see § 178.274(a)(2)) must be indicated on thorized inspector, if applicable, are
the plate as specified in § 178.274(i). qualified, reputable and competent.

(ii) Issue an approval certificate for The manufacturer of a portable tank
each portable tank or, in the case of a shall—
110
(1) Comply with all the applicable re- (2) A statement as to whether the in-
quirements of the ASME Code and of tended modification has been examined
this subpart including, but not limited and determined to be unacceptable by
to, ensuring that the quality control, any approval agency. The written
design calculations and required tests statement must include the name of
are performed and that all aspects of the approving agency, the reason for
the portable tank meet the applicable nonacceptance, and the nature of
requirements. changes made to the modification since
(2) Obtain and use a designated ap- its original rejection.
proval agency, if applicable, and obtain (3) The approval agency shall review
and use a DOT-designated approval the request for modification, and if it
agency to approve the design, construc- is determined that the proposed modi-
tion and certification of the portable fication is in full compliance with the
tank. relevant DOT specification, including a
(3) Provide a statement in the manu- UN portable tank, the request shall be
facturers’ data report certifying that approved and the approval agency shall
each portable tank that is manufac- perform the following activities:
tured complies with the relevant speci- (i) Return one set of the approved re-
fication and all the applicable require- vised drawings, calculations, and test
ments of this subchapter. data to the applicant. The second and
(4) Maintain records of the qualifica- third sets of the approved revised draw-
tion of portable tanks for at least 5 ings, calculations, and data shall be re-
years and provide copies to the ap- tained by the approval agency as re-
proval agency, the owner or lessee of quired in § 107.404(a)(3) of this sub-
the tank. Upon request, provide these chapter.
records to a representative of DOT.
(ii) Ensure through appropriate in-
(d) Denial of application for approval.
spection that all modifications con-
If an approval agency finds that a port-
form to the revised drawings, calcula-
able tank cannot be approved for any
tions, and test data.
reason, it shall notify the applicant in
writing and shall provide the applicant (iii) Determine the extent to which
with the reasons for which the ap- retesting of the modified tank is nec-
proval is denied. A copy of the notifica- essary based on the nature of the pro-
tion letter shall be provided to the As- posed modification, and ensure that all
sociate Administrator. An applicant required retests are satisfactorily per-
aggrieved by a decision of an approval formed.
agency may appeal the decision in (iv) If modification to an approved
writing, within 90 days of receipt, to tank alters any information on the ap-
the Associate Administrator. proval certificate, issue a new approval
(e) Modifications to approved portable certificate for the modified tank and
tanks. (1) Prior to modification of any ensure that any necessary changes are
UN portable tank which may affect made to the metal identification plate.
conformance and the safe use of the A copy of each newly issued approval
portable tank, which may involve a certificate shall be retained by the ap-
change to the design type or which proval agency and by the owner of each
may affect its ability to retain haz- portable tank.
ardous material in transportation, the (4) If the approval agency determines
person desiring to make such modifica- that the proposed modification is not
tion shall inform the approval agency in compliance with the relevant DOT
that issued the initial approval of the specification, the approval agency
portable tank (or if unavailable, an- shall deny the request in accordance
other approval agency) of the nature of with paragraph (d) of this section.
the modification and request approval (f) Termination of Approval Certificate.
of the modification. The person desir- (1) The Associate Administrator may
ing to modify the tank must supply the terminate an approval issued under
approval agency with three sets of all this section if he determines that—
revised drawings, calculations, and test (i) Information upon which the ap-
data relative to the intended modifica- proval was based is fraudulent or sub-
tion. stantially erroneous; or
111
§ 178.274 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(ii) Termination of the approval is tanks may be varied if approved by the

necessary to adequately protect Associate Administrator and the port-
against risks to life and property; or able tank is shown to provide a level of
(iii) The approval was not issued by safety equal to or exceeding the re-
the approval agency in good faith; or quirements of this subchapter. Port-
(iv) The portable tank does not meet able tanks approved to alternative
the specification. technical requirements must be
(2) Before an approval is terminated, marked ‘‘Alternative Arrangement’’ as
the Associate Administrator gives the specified in paragraph (i) of this sec-
interested party(ies): tion.
(i) Written notice of the facts or con- (3) Definitions. The following defini-
duct believed to warrant the termi- tions apply for the purposes of design
nation; and construction of UN portable tanks
(ii) Opportunity to submit oral and under this subpart:
written evidence; and Alternate Arrangement portable tank
(iii) Opportunity to demonstrate or
means a UN portable tank that has
achieve compliance with the applicable
been approved to alternative technical
requirements.
requirements or testing methods other
(3) If the Associate Administrator de-
than those specified for UN portable
termines that a certificate of approval
tanks in part 178 or part 180 of this sub-
must be terminated to preclude a sig-
chapter.
nificant and imminent adverse affect
on public safety, he may terminate the Approval agency means the des-
certificate immediately. In such cir- ignated approval agency authorized to
cumstances, the opportunities of para- approve the portable tank in accord-
graphs (f)(2) (ii) and (iii) of this section ance with the procedures in subpart E
need not be provided prior to termi- of part 107 of this subchapter.
nation of the approval, but shall be Design pressure is defined according
provided as soon as practicable there- to the hazardous materials intended to
after. be transported in the portable tank.
See §§ 178.275, 178.276 and 178.277, as ap-
[66 FR 33439, June 21, 2001, as amended at 67 plicable.
FR 61016, Sept. 27, 2002; 68 FR 75748, 75751,
Dec. 31, 2003; 72 FR 55695, Oct. 1, 2007]
Design type means a portable tank or
series of portable tanks made of mate-
§ 178.274 Specifications for UN port- rials of the same material specifica-
able tanks. tions and thicknesses, manufactured
(a) General. (1) Each UN portable by a single manufacturer, using the
tank must meet the requirements of same fabrication techniques (for exam-
this section. In addition to the require- ple, welding procedures) and made with
ments of this section, requirements equivalent structural equipment, clo-
specific to UN portable tanks used for sures, and service equipment.
liquid and solid hazardous materials, Fine grain steel means steel that has a
non-refrigerated liquefied gases and re- ferritic grain size of 6 or finer when de-
frigerated liquefied gases are provided termined in accordance with ASTM E
in §§ 178.275, 178.276 and 178.277, respec- 112–96 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
tively. Requirements for approval, chapter).
maintenance, inspection, testing and Fusible element means a non-reclosing
use are provided in § 178.273 and part pressure relief device that is thermally
180, subpart G, of this subchapter. Any activated and that provides protection
portable tank which meets the defini- against excessive pressure buildup in
tion of a ‘‘container’’ within the terms the portable tank developed by expo-
of the International Convention for sure to heat, such as from a fire (see
Safe Containers (CSC) must meet the § 178.275(g)).
requirements of the CSC as amended Jacket means the outer insulation
and 49 CFR parts 450 through 453 and cover or cladding which may be part of
must have a CSC safety approval plate. the insulation system.
(2) In recognition of scientific and Leakage test means a test using gas to
technological advances, the technical subject the shell and its service equip-
requirements applicable to UN portable ment to an internal pressure.
112
Maximum allowable working pressure (b) General design and construction re-
(MAWP) is defined according to the quirements. (1) The design temperature
hazardous materials intended to be range for the shell must be ¥40 °C to 50
transported in the portable tank. See °C (¥40 °F to 122 °F) for hazardous ma-
§§ 178.275, 178.276 and 178.277, as applica- terials transported under normal con-
ble. ditions of transportation, except for
Maximum permissible gross mass portable tanks used for refrigerated
(MPGM) means the sum of the tare liquefied gases where the minimum de-
mass of the portable tank and the sign temperature must not be higher
heaviest hazardous material authorized than the lowest (coldest) temperature
for transportation. (for example, service temperature) of
Mild steel means a steel with a guar- the contents during filling, discharge
anteed minimum tensile strength of 360 or transportation. For hazardous mate-
N/mm2 to 440 N/mm2 and a guaranteed rials handled under elevated tempera-
minimum elongation at fracture as ture conditions, the design tempera-
specified in paragraph (c)(10) of this ture must not be less than the max-
section. imum temperature of the hazardous
Offshore portable tank means a port- material during filling, discharge or
able tank specially designed for re- transportation. More severe design
peated use in the transportation of haz- temperatures must be considered for
ardous materials to, from and between portable tanks subjected to severe cli-
offshore facilities. An offshore portable matic conditions (for example, portable
tank is designed and constructed in ac- tanks transported in arctic regions).
cordance with the Guidelines for the Shells must be designed and con-
Approval of Containers Handled in structed in accordance with the re-
Open Seas specified in the IMDG Code quirements in Section VIII of the
(IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
Reference steel means a steel with a chapter), except as limited or modified
tensile strength of 370 N/mm2 and an in this subchapter. For portable tanks
elongation at fracture of 27%. used for liquid or solid hazardous mate-
Service equipment means measuring rials, a design code other than the
instruments and filling, discharge, ASME Code may be used if approved by
venting, safety, heating, cooling and the Associate Administrator. Portable
insulating devices. tanks must have an ASME certifi-
Shell means the part of the portable cation and U stamp when used for Haz-
tank which retains the hazardous ma- ard Zone A or B toxic by inhalation liq-
terials intended for transportation, in- uids, or when used for non-refrigerated
cluding openings and closures, but does or refrigerated liquefied compressed
not include service equipment or exter- gases. Shells must be made of metallic
nal structural equipment. materials suitable for forming. Non-
Structural equipment means the rein- metallic materials may be used for the
forcing, fastening, protective and stabi- attachments and supports between the
lizing members external to the shell. shell and jacket, provided their mate-
Test pressure means the maximum rial properties at the minimum and
gauge pressure at the top of the shell maximum design temperatures are
during the hydraulic pressure test proven to be sufficient. For welded
equal to not less than 1.5 times the de- shells, only a material whose
sign pressure for liquids and 1.3 for liq- weldability has been fully dem-
uefied compressed gases and refrig- onstrated may be used. Welds must be
erated liquefied gases. In some in- of high quality and conform to a level
stances a pneumatic test is authorized of integrity at least equivalent to the
as an alternative to the hydraulic test. welding requirements specified in Sec-
The minimum test pressures for port- tion VIII of the ASME Code for the
able tanks intended for specific liquid welding of pressure vessels. When the
and solid hazardous materials are spec- manufacturing process or the materials
ified in the applicable portable tank T make it necessary, the shells must be
codes (such as T1–T23) assigned to suitably heat-treated to guarantee ade-

these hazardous materials in the quate toughness in the weld and in the
§ 172.101 Table of this subchapter. heat-affected zones. In choosing the
113
§ 178.274 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
material, the design temperature range perforations, sufficiently elastic and

must be taken into account with re- compatible with the thermal expansion
spect to risk of brittle fracture, stress characteristics of the shell. The lining
corrosion cracking, resistance to im- of every shell, shell fittings and piping
pact, and suitability for the hazardous must be continuous and must extend
materials intended for transportation around the face of any flange. Where
in the portable tank. When fine grain external fittings are welded to the
steel is used, the guaranteed value of tank, the lining must be continuous
the yield strength must be not more through the fitting and around the face
than 460 N/mm2 and the guaranteed of external flanges. Joints and seams in
value of the upper limit of the tensile the lining must be made by fusing the
strength must be not more than 725 N/ material together or by other equally
mm2 according to the material speci- effective means.
fication. Aluminum may not be used as (5) Contact between dissimilar met-
a construction material for the shells als which could result in damage by
of portable tanks intended for the galvanic action must be prevented by
transport of non-refrigerated liquefied appropriate measures.
gases. For portable tanks intended for (6) The construction materials of the
the transport of liquid or solid haz- portable tank, including any devices,
ardous materials, aluminum may only gaskets, linings and accessories, must
be used as a construction material for not adversely affect or react with the
portable tank shells if approved by the hazardous materials intended to be
Associate Administrator. Portable transported in the portable tank.
tank materials must be suitable for the (7) Portable tanks must be designed
external environment where they will and constructed with supports that
be transported, taking into account the provide a secure base during transpor-
determined design temperature range. tation and with suitable lifting and tie-
Portable tanks shall be designed to down attachments.
withstand, without loss of contents, at (c) Design criteria. (1) Portable tanks
least the internal pressure due to the and their fastenings must, under the
contents and the static, dynamic and maximum permissible loads and max-
thermal loads during normal condi- imum permissible working pressures,
tions of handling and transportation. be capable of absorbing the following
The design must take into account the separately applied static forces (for
effects of fatigue, caused by repeated calculation purposes, acceleration due
application of these loads through the to gravity (g) = 9.81m/s2):
expected life of the portable tank. (i) In the direction of travel: 2g
(2) Portable tank shells, fittings, and (twice the MPGM multiplied by the ac-
pipework shall be constructed from celeration due to gravity);
materials that are: (ii) Horizontally at right angles to
(i) Compatible with the hazardous the direction of travel: 1g (the MPGM
materials intended to be transported; multiplied by the acceleration due to
or gravity);
(ii) Properly passivated or neutral- (iii) Vertically upwards: 1g (the
ized by chemical reaction, if applica- MPGM multiplied by the acceleration
ble; or due to gravity); and
(iii) For portable tanks used for liq- (iv) Vertically downwards: 2g (twice
uid and solid materials, lined with cor- the MPGM multiplied by the accelera-
rosion-resistant material directly tion due to gravity).
bonded to the shell or attached by (2) Under each of the forces specified
equivalent means. in paragraph (c)(1) of this section, the
(3) Gaskets and seals shall be made of safety factor must be as follows:
materials that are compatible with the (i) For metals having a clearly de-
hazardous materials intended to be fined yield point, a design margin of 1.5
transported. in relation to the guaranteed yield
(4) When shells are lined, the lining strength; or
must be compatible with the hazardous (ii) For metals with no clearly de-
materials intended to be transported, fined yield point, a design margin of 1.5
homogeneous, non-porous, free from in relation to the guaranteed 0.2%
114
proof strength and, for austenitic Re = yield strength in N/mm2, or 0.2%

steels, the 1% proof strength. proof strength or, for austenitic
(3) The values of yield strength or steels, 1% proof strength;
proof strength must be the values ac- Rm = minimum tensile strength in N/
cording to recognized material stand- mm2.
ards. When austenitic steels are used, (8) The values of Re and Rm to be
the specified minimum values of yield used must be the specified minimum
strength or proof strength according to values according to recognized mate-
the material standards may be in- rial standards. When austenitic steels
creased by up to 15% for portable tanks are used, the specified minimum values
used for liquid and solid hazardous ma- for Re and Rm according to the mate-
terials, other than toxic by inhalation rial standards may be increased by up
liquids meeting the criteria of Hazard to 15% when greater values are at-
Zone A or Hazard Zone B (see § 173.133 tested in the material inspection cer-
of this subchapter), when these greater tificate.
values are attested in the material in- (9) Steels which have a Re/Rm ratio
spection certificate. of more than 0.85 are not allowed for
(4) Portable tanks must be capable of the construction of welded shells. The
being electrically grounded to prevent values of Re and Rm to be used in de-
dangerous electrostatic discharge when termining this ratio must be the values
they are used for Class 2 flammable specified in the material inspection
gases or Class 3 flammable liquids, in- certificate.
cluding elevated temperature mate- (10) Steels used in the construction of
rials transported at or above their shells must have an elongation at frac-
flash point. ture, in percentage, of not less than
(5) For shells of portable tanks used 10,000/Rm with an absolute minimum of
for liquefied compressed gases, the 16% for fine grain steels and 20% for
shell must consist of a circular cross other steels.
section. Shells must be of a design ca- (11) For the purpose of determining
pable of being stress-analyzed mathe- actual values for materials for sheet
metal, the axis of the tensile test speci-
matically or experimentally by resist-
men must be at right angles (trans-
ance strain gauges as specified in UG–
versely) to the direction of rolling. The
101 of Section VIII of the ASME Code,
permanent elongation at fracture must
or other methods approved by the As-
be measured on test specimens of rec-
sociate Administrator.
tangular cross sections in accordance
(6) Shells must be designed and con- with ISO 6892 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this
structed to withstand a hydraulic test subchapter), using a 50 mm gauge
pressure of not less than 1.5 times the length.
design pressure for portable tanks used (d) Minimum shell thickness. (1) The
for liquids and 1.3 times the design minimum shell thickness must be the
pressure for portable tanks used for liq- greatest thickness of the following:
uefied compressed gases. Specific re- (i) the minimum thickness deter-
quirements are provided for each haz- mined in accordance with the require-
ardous material in the applicable T ments of paragraphs (d)(2) through
Code or portable tank special provision (d)(7) of this section;
specified in the § 172.101 Table of this (ii) the minimum thickness deter-
subchapter. The minimum shell thick- mined in accordance with Section VIII
ness requirements must also be taken of the ASME Code or other approved
into account. pressure vessel code; or
(7) For metals exhibiting a clearly (iii) the minimum thickness specified
defined yield point or characterized by in the applicable T code or portable
a guaranteed proof strength (0.2% proof tank special provision indicated for
strength, generally, or 1% proof each hazardous material in the § 172.101
strength for austenitic steels), the pri- Table of this subchapter.
mary membrane stress s (sigma) in the (2) Shells (cylindrical portions, heads
shell must not exceed 0.75 Re or 0.50 and manhole covers) not more than 1.80
Rm, whichever is lower, at the test m in diameter may not be less than 5
pressure, where: mm thick in the reference steel or of
115
§ 178.274 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
equivalent thickness in the metal to be d1 = 1.8m, unless the formula is used to de-
used. Shells more than 1.80 m in diame- termine the equivalent minimum thick-
ter may not be less than 6 mm (0.2 ness for a portable tank shell that is re-
quired to have a minimum thickness of
inches) thick in the reference steel or 8mm or 10mm according to the applica-
of equivalent thickness in the metal to ble T code indicated in the § 172.101 Table
be used. For portable tanks used only of this subchapter. When reference steel
for the transportation of powdered or thicknesses of 8mm or 10mm are speci-
granular solid hazardous materials of fied, d1 is equal to the actual diameter of
Packing Group II or III, the minimum the shell but not less than 1.8m;
thickness requirement may be reduced Rm1 = guaranteed minimum tensile strength
to 5 mm in the reference steel or of (in N/mm 2) of the metal to be used;
A1 = guaranteed minimum elongation at
equivalent thickness in the metal to be fracture (in %) of the metal to be used
used regardless of the shell diameter. according to recognized material stand-
For vacuum-insulated tanks, the ag- ards.
gregate thickness of the jacket and the
shell must correspond to the minimum (6) The wall and all parts of the shell
thickness prescribed in this paragraph, may not have a thickness less than
with the thickness of the shell itself that prescribed in paragraphs (d)(2),
not less than the minimum thickness (d)(3) and (d)(4) of this section. This
prescribed in paragraph (d)(3) of this thickness must be exclusive of any cor-
section. rosion allowance.
(3) When additional protection (7) There must be no sudden change
against shell damage is provided in the of plate thickness at the attachment of
case of portable tanks used for liquid the heads to the cylindrical portion of
and solid hazardous materials requir- the shell.
ing test pressures less than 2.65 bar (e) Service equipment. (1) Service
(265.0 kPa), subject to certain limita- equipment must be arranged so that it
tions specified in the UN Recommenda- is protected against the risk of me-
tions (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- chanical damage by external forces
chapter), the Associate Administrator during handling and transportation.
may approve a reduced minimum shell When the connections between the
thickness. frame and the shell allow relative
(4) The cylindrical portions, heads movement between the sub-assemblies,
and manhole covers of all shells must the equipment must be fastened to
not be less than 3 mm (0.1 inch) thick allow such movement without risk of
regardless of the material of construc- damage to any working part. The ex-
ternal discharge fittings (pipe sockets,
tion, except for portable tanks used for
shut-off devices) and the internal stop-
liquefied compressed gases where the
valve and its seating must be protected
cylindrical portions, ends (heads) and
against mechanical damage by exter-
manhole covers of all shells must not
nal forces (for example, by using shear
be less than 4 mm (0.2 inch) thick re-
sections). Each internal self-closing
gardless of the material of construc-
stop-valve must be protected by a
tion.
shear section or sacrificial device lo-
(5) When steel is used, that has char-
cated outboard of the valve. The shear
acteristics other than that of reference
section or sacrificial device must break
steel, the equivalent thickness of the
at no more than 70% of the load that
shell and heads must be determined ac-
would cause failure of the internal self-
cording to the following formula: closing stop valve. The filling and dis-
charge devices (including flanges or
21.4e 0 d1
e1 = threaded plugs) and any protective
1.8m 3 Rm1 × A1 caps must be capable of being secured
against unintended opening.
Where:
(2) Each filling or discharge opening
e1 = required equivalent thickness (in mm) of of a portable tank must be clearly
the metal to be used;
e0 = minimum thickness (in mm) of the ref-
marked to indicate its function.
erence steel specified in the applicable T (3) Each stop-valve or other means of
code or portable tank special provision closure must be designed and con-
indicated for each material in the structed to a rated pressure not less
§ 172.101 Table of this subchapter; than the MAWP of the shell taking
116
EN21JN01.005</MATH>
into account the temperatures ex- and ISO 4126–7 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this
pected during transport. All stop- subchapter); and
valves with screwed spindles must (vi) The cross sectional flow areas of
close by a clockwise motion of the the spring loaded pressure relief de-
handwheel. For other stop-valves, the vices, frangible discs, and fusible ele-
position (open and closed) and direc- ments in mm2; and
tion of closure must be clearly indi- (vii) When practicable, the device
cated. All stop-valves must be designed must show the manufacturer’s name
to prevent unintentional opening. and product number.
(4) Piping must be designed, con- (2) Connections to pressure relief de-
structed and installed to avoid the risk vices. Connections to pressure relief de-
of damage due to thermal expansion vices must be of sufficient size to en-
and contraction, mechanical shock and able the required discharge to pass un-
vibration. All piping must be of a suit- restricted to the safety device. No stop-
able metallic material. Welded pipe valve may be installed between the
joints must be used wherever possible. shell and the pressure relief devices ex-
(5) Joints in copper tubing must be cept where duplicate devices are pro-
brazed or have an equally strong metal vided for maintenance or other reasons
union. The melting point of brazing and the stop-valves serving the devices
materials must be no lower than 525 °C actually in use are locked open or the
(977 °F). The joints must not decrease stop-valves are interlocked so that at
the strength of the tubing, such as may least one of the devices is always in
happen when cutting threads. Brazed use. There must be no obstruction in
joints are not authorized for portable an opening leading to a vent or pres-
tanks intended for refrigerated lique- sure relief device which might restrict
fied gases. or cut-off the flow from the shell to
(6) The burst pressure of all piping that device. Vents or pipes from the
and pipe fittings must be greater than pressure relief device outlets, when
the highest of four times the MAWP of used, must deliver the relieved vapor or
the shell or four times the pressure to liquid to the atmosphere in conditions
which it may be subjected in service by of minimum back-pressure on the re-
the action of a pump or other device lieving devices.
(except pressure relief devices). (3) Location of pressure relief devices.
(7) Ductile metals must be used in (i) Each pressure relief device inlet
the construction of valves and acces- must be situated on top of the shell in
sories. a position as near the longitudinal and
(f) Pressure relief devices—(1) Marking transverse center of the shell as rea-
of pressure relief devices. Every pressure sonably practicable. All pressure relief
relief device must be clearly and per- device inlets must, under maximum
manently marked with the following: filling conditions, be situated in the
(i) the pressure (in bar or kPa) or vapor space of the shell and the devices
temperature for fusible elements (in must be so arranged as to ensure that
°C) at which it is set to discharge; any escaping vapor is not restricted in
(ii) the allowable tolerance at the any manner. For flammable hazardous
discharge pressure for reclosing de- materials, the escaping vapor must be
vices; directed away from the shell in such a
(iii) the reference temperature cor- manner that it cannot impinge upon
responding to the rated pressure for the shell. For refrigerated liquefied
frangible discs; gases, the escaping vapor must be di-
(iv) the allowable temperature toler- rected away from the tank and in such
ance for fusible elements; a manner that it cannot impinge upon
(v) The rated flow capacity of the the tank. Protective devices which de-
spring loaded pressure relief devices, flect the flow of vapor are permissible
frangible disc or fusible elements in provided the required relief-device ca-
standard cubic meters of air per second pacity is not reduced.
(m3/s). For spring loaded pressure relief (ii) Provisions must be implemented
devices, the rated flow capacity must to prevent unauthorized persons from
be determined according to ISO 4126–1 access to the pressure relief devices
(including Technical Corrigendum 1) and to protect the devices from damage
117
§ 178.274 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
caused by the portable tank over- (ii) The distance between forklift
turning. pockets (measured from the center of
(g) Gauging devices. Unless a portable each pocket) is at least half of the
tank is intended to be filled by weight, maximum length of the portable tank.
it must be equipped with one or more (5) During transport, portable tanks
gauging devices. Glass level-gauges and must be adequately protected against
gauges made of other fragile material, damage to the shell, and service equip-
which are in direct communication ment resulting from lateral and longi-
with the contents of the tank are pro- tudinal impact and overturning, or the
hibited. A connection for a vacuum shell and service equipment must be
gauge must be provided in the jacket of constructed to withstand the forces re-
a vacuum-insulated portable tank. sulting from impact or overturning.
(h) Portable tank supports, frameworks, External fittings must be protected so
lifting and tie-down attachments. (1) as to preclude the release of the shell
Portable tanks must be designed and contents upon impact or overturning of
the portable tank on its fittings. Ex-
constructed with a support structure to
amples of protection include:
provide a secure base during transport.
(i) Protection against lateral impact
The forces and safety factors specified
which may consist of longitudinal bars
in paragraphs (c)(1) and (c)(2) of this
protecting the shell on both sides at
section, respectively, must be taken
the level of the median line;
into account in this aspect of the de-
(ii) Protection of the portable tank
sign. Skids, frameworks, cradles or against overturning which may consist
other similar structures are accept- of reinforcement rings or bars fixed
able. across the frame;
(2) The combined stresses caused by (iii) Protection against rear impact
portable tank mountings (for example, which may consist of a bumper or
cradles, framework, etc.) and portable frame;
tank lifting and tie-down attachments (iv) Protection of the shell against
must not cause stress that would dam- damage from impact or overturning by
age the shell in a manner that would use of an ISO frame in accordance with
compromise its lading retention capa- ISO 1496–3 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
bility. Permanent lifting and tie-down chapter); and
attachments must be fitted to all port- (v) Protection of the portable tank
able tanks. Preferably they should be from impact or damage that may re-
fitted to the portable tank supports sult from overturning by an insulation
but may be secured to reinforcing jacket.
plates located on the shell at the (i) Marking. (1) Every portable tank
points of support. Each portable tank must be fitted with a corrosion resist-
must be designed so that the center of ant metal plate permanently attached
gravity of the filled tank is approxi- to the portable tank in a conspicuous
mately centered within the points of place and readily accessible for inspec-
attachment for lifting devices. tion. When the plate cannot be perma-
(3) In the design of supports and nently attached to the shell, the shell
frameworks, the effects of environ- must be marked with at least the infor-
mental corrosion must be taken into mation required by Section VIII of the
account. ASME Code. At a minimum, the fol-
(4) Forklift pockets must be capable lowing information must be marked on
of being closed off. The means of clos- the plate by stamping or by any other
ing forklift pockets must be a perma- equivalent method:
nent part of the framework or perma- Country of manufacture
nently attached to the framework. Sin- UN
gle compartment portable tanks with a Approval Country
length less than 3.65 m (12 ft.) need not Approval Number
have forklift pockets that are capable Alternative Arrangements (see § 178.274(a)(2))
‘‘AA’’
of being closed off provided that:
Manufacturer’s name or mark

(i) The shell, including all the fit- Manufacturer’s serial number
tings, are well protected from being hit Approval Agency (Authorized body for the
by the forklift blades; and design approval)
118
Owner’s registration number ‘‘OFFSHORE PORTABLE TANK’’ must
Year of manufacture be marked on the identification plate.
Pressure vessel code to which the shell is de-
signed
(j) Initial inspection and test. The ini-
Test pressurellllbar gauge. tial inspection and test of a portable
MAWPllllbar gauge. tank must include the following:
External design pressure (not required for (1) A check of the design characteris-
portable tanks used for refrigerated lique- tics.
fied gases)llllbar gauge. (2) An internal and external examina-
Design temperature rangellll °C
tollll °C. (For portable tanks used for
tion of the portable tank and its fit-
refrigerated liquefied gases, the minimum tings, taking into account the haz-
design temperature must be marked.) ardous materials to be transported. For
Water capacity at 20 °C/llllliters. UN portable tanks used for refrigerated
Water capacity of each compartment at 20 liquefied gases, a pressure test using an
°Cllllliters. inert gas may be conducted instead of
Initial pressure test date and witness identi- a hydrostatic test. An internal inspec-
fication.
MAWP for heating/cooling systemllllbar tion is not required for a portable tank
gauge. used for the dedicated transportation
Shell material(s) and material standard ref- of refrigerated liquefied gases that are
erence(s). not filled with an inspection opening.
Equivalent thickness in reference (3) A pressure test as specified in
steelllllmm. paragraph (i) of this section.
Lining material (when applicable).
Date and type of most recent periodic test(s). (4) A leakage test.
MonthllllYearllll Test (5) A test of the satisfactory oper-
pressurellllbar gauge. ation of all service equipment includ-
Stamp of approval agency that performed or ing pressure relief devices must also be
witnessed the most recent test. performed. When the shell and its fit-
For portable tanks used for refrigerated tings have been pressure-tested sepa-
liquefied gases: rately, they must be subjected to a
Either ‘‘thermally insulated’’ or ‘‘vacuum in- leakage test after reassembly. All
sulated’’llll. welds, subject to full stress level in the
Effectiveness of the insulation system (heat
influx)llllWatts (W).
shell, must be inspected during the ini-
Reference holding timelllldays or hours tial test by radiographic, ultrasonic, or
and initial pressurellllbar/kPa gauge another suitable non-destructive test
and degree of fillingllllin kg for each method. This does not apply to the
refrigerated liquefied gas permitted for jacket.
transportation. (6) Effective January 1, 2008, each
(2) The following information must new UN portable tank design type
be marked either on the portable tank meeting the definition of ‘‘container’’
itself or on a metal plate firmly se- in the Convention for Safe Containers
cured to the portable tank: (CSC) (see 49 CFR 450.3(a)(2)) must be
subjected to the dynamic longitudinal
Name of the operator.
impact test prescribed in Part IV, Sec-
Name of hazardous materials being trans-
ported and maximum mean bulk tempera- tion 40 of the UN Manual of Tests and
ture (except for refrigerated liquefied Criteria (see IBR, § 171.7 of this sub-
gases, the name and temperature are only chapter). A UN portable tank design
required when the maximum mean bulk type impact-tested prior to January 1,
temperature is higher than 50 °C). 2008, in accordance with the require-
Maximum permissible gross mass ments of this section in effect on Octo-
(MPGM)llllkg. ber 1, 2005, need not be retested. UN
Unladen (tare) massllllkg.
portable tanks used for the dedicated
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (i)(2): For the identi- transportation of ‘‘Helium, refrigerated
fication of the hazardous materials being liquid,’’ UN1963, and ‘‘Hydrogen, refrig-
transported refer to part 172 of this sub- erated liquid,’’ UN1966, that are
chapter.
marked ‘‘NOT FOR RAIL TRANS-
(3) If a portable tank is designed and PORT’’ in letters of a minimum height
approved for open seas operations, such of 10 cm (4 inches) on at least two sides
as offshore oil exploration, in accord- of the portable tank are excepted from
ance with the IMDG Code, the words the dynamic longitudinal impact test.
119
§ 178.275 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(7) The following tests must be com- (ii) The sum of—
pleted on a portable tank or a series of (A) The absolute vapor pressure (in
portable tanks designed and con- bar) of the hazardous material at 65 °C,
structed to a single design type that is minus 1 bar (149 °F, minus 100 kPa);
also a CSC container without leakage (B) The partial pressure (in bar) of
or deformation that would render the air or other gases in the ullage space,
portable tank unsafe for transportation resulting from their compression dur-
and use: ing filling without pressure relief by a
(i) Longitudinal inertia. The portable maximum ullage temperature of 65 °C
tank loaded to its maximum gross (149 °F) and a liquid expansion due to
weight must be positioned with its lon- an increase in mean bulk temperature
gitudinal axis vertical. It shall be held of 35 °C (95 °F); and
in this position for five minutes by sup- (C) A head pressure determined on
port at the lower end of the base struc- the basis of the forces specified in
ture providing vertical and lateral re- § 178.274(c) of this subchapter, but not
straint and by support at the upper end less than 0.35 bar (35 kPa).
of the base structure providing lateral (2) Maximum allowable working pres-
restraint only. sure (MAWP) means a pressure that
(ii) Lateral inertia. The portable tank must not be less than the highest of
loaded to its maximum gross weight the following pressures measured at
must be positioned for five minutes the top of the shell while in operating
with its transverse axis vertical. It position:
shall be held in this position for five (i) The maximum effective gauge
minutes by support at the lower side of pressure allowed in the shell during
the base structure providing vertical filling or discharge; or
and lateral restraint and by support at (ii) The maximum effective gauge
the upper side of the base structure pressure to which the shell is designed
providing lateral restraint only. which must be not less than the design
[66 FR 33440, June 21, 2001, as amended at 67 pressure.
FR 15744, Apr. 3, 2002; 68 FR 45041, July 31, (c) Service equipment. (1) In addition
2003; 68 FR 57633, Oct. 6, 2003; 68 FR 75751, to the requirements specified in
Dec. 31, 2003; 69 FR 76185, Dec. 20, 2004; 70 FR § 178.274, for service equipment, all
34399, June 14, 2005; 71 FR 78634, Dec. 29, 2006; openings in the shell, intended for fill-
72 FR 55696, Oct. 1, 2007; 73 FR 4719, Jan. 28,
ing or discharging the portable tank
2008; 78 FR 1096, Jan. 7, 2013]
must be fitted with a manually oper-
EDITORIAL NOTE: At 68 FR 57633, Oct. 6, ated stop-valve located as close to the
2003, § 178.274 was amended in paragraph shell as reasonably practicable. Other
(b)(1); however, the amendment could not be
incorporated due to inaccurate amendatory
openings, except for openings leading
instruction. to venting or pressure relief devices,
must be equipped with either a stop-
§ 178.275 Specification for UN Portable valve or another suitable means of clo-
Tanks intended for the transpor- sure located as close to the shell as
tation of liquid and solid hazardous reasonably practicable.
materials. (2) All portable tanks must be fitted
(a) In addition to the requirements of with a manhole or other inspection
§ 178.274, this section sets forth defini- openings of a suitable size to allow for
tions and requirements that apply to internal inspection and adequate ac-
UN portable tanks intended for the cess for maintenance and repair of the
transportation of liquid and solid haz- interior. Compartmented portable
ardous materials. tanks must have a manhole or other
(b) Definitions and requirements—(1) inspection openings for each compart-
Design pressure means the pressure to ment.
be used in calculations required by the (3) For insulated portable tanks, top
recognized pressure vessel code. The fittings must be surrounded by a spill
design pressure must not be less than collection reservoir with suitable
the highest of the following pressures: drains.
(i) The maximum effective gauge (4) Piping must be designed, con-
pressure allowed in the shell during structed and installed to avoid the risk
filling or discharge; or of damage due to thermal expansion
120
and contraction, mechanical shock and (D) Except for portable tanks having
vibration. All piping must be of a suit- a capacity less than 1,000 liters (264.2
able metallic material. Welded pipe gallons), it must be possible to close
joints must be used wherever possible. the valve from an accessible position
(d) Bottom openings. (1) Certain haz- on the portable tank that is remote
ardous materials may not be trans- from the valve itself within 30 seconds
ported in portable tanks with bottom of actuation; and
openings. When the applicable T code (E) The valve must continue to be ef-
or portable tank special provision, as fective in the event of damage to the
referenced for materials in the § 172.101 external device for controlling the op-
Table of this subchapter, specifies that eration of the valve;
bottom openings are prohibited, there (ii) An external stop-valve fitted as
must be no openings below the liquid close to the shell as reasonably prac-
level of the shell when it is filled to its ticable;
maximum permissible filling limit. (iii) A liquid tight closure at the end
When an existing opening is closed, it of the discharge pipe, which may be a
must be accomplished by internally bolted blank flange or a screw cap; and
and externally welding one plate to the (iv) For UN portable tanks, with bot-
shell. tom outlets, used for the transpor-
(2) Bottom discharge outlets for port- tation of liquid hazardous materials
able tanks carrying certain solid, crys- that are Class 3, PG I or II, or PG III
tallizable or highly viscous hazardous with a flash point of less than 100 °F (38
materials must be equipped with at °C); Division 5.1, PG I or II; or Division
least two serially fitted and mutually 6.1, PG I or II, the remote means of clo-
independent shut-off devices. Use of sure must be capable of thermal acti-
only two shut-off devices is only au- vation. The thermal means of activa-
thorized when this paragraph is ref- tion must activate at a temperature of
erenced in the applicable T Code indi- not more than 250 °F (121 °C).
cated for each hazardous material in (e) Pressure relief devices. All portable
the § 172.101 Table of this subchapter. tanks must be fitted with at least one
The design of the equipment must be to pressure relief device. All relief devices
the satisfaction of the approval agency must be designed, constructed and
and must include: marked in accordance with the require-
(i) An external stop-valve fitted as ments of this subchapter.
close to the shell as reasonably prac- (f) Vacuum-relief devices. (1) A shell
ticable; and which is to be equipped with a vacuum-
(ii) A liquid tight closure at the end relief device must be designed to with-
of the discharge pipe, which may be a stand, without permanent deformation,
bolted blank flange or a screw cap. an external pressure of not less than
(3) Except as provided in paragraph 0.21 bar (21.0 kPa). The vacuum-relief
(d)(2) of this section, every bottom dis- device must be set to relieve at a vacu-
charge outlet must be equipped with um setting not greater than ¥0.21 bar
three serially fitted and mutually inde- (¥21.0 kPa) unless the shell is designed
pendent shut-off devices. The design of for a higher external over pressure, in
the equipment must include: which case the vacuum-relief pressure
(i) A self-closing internal stop-valve, of the device to be fitted must not be
which is a stop-valve within the shell greater than the tank design vacuum
or within a welded flange or its com- pressure. A shell that is not fitted with
panion flange, such that: a vacuum-relief device must be de-
(A) The control devices for the oper- signed to withstand, without perma-
ation of the valve are designed to pre- nent deformation, an external pressure
vent any unintended opening through of not less than 0.4 bar (40.0 kPa).
impact or other inadvertent act; (2) Vacuum-relief devices used on
(B) The valve is operable from above portable tanks intended for the trans-
or below; portation of hazardous materials meet-
(C) If possible, the setting of the ing the criteria of Class 3, including
valve (open or closed) must be capable elevated temperature hazardous mate-
of being verified from the ground; rials transported at or above their
121
§ 178.275 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
flash point, must prevent the imme- pressure 10% above the start-to-dis-
diate passage of flame into the shell or charge pressure of the reclosable pres-
the portable tank must have a shell ca- sure relief device.
pable of withstanding, without leak- (4) Every portable tank with a capac-
age, an internal explosion resulting ity less than 1,900 liters (501.9 gallons)
from the passage of flame into the must be fitted with a pressure relief de-
shell. vice which, except as provided in para-
(g) Pressure relief devices. (1) Each graph (g)(3) of this section, may be a
portable tank with a capacity not less frangible disc when this disc is set to
than 1,900 liters (501.9 gallons) and rupture at a nominal pressure equal to
every independent compartment of a the test pressure at any temperature
portable tank with a similar capacity, within the design temperature range.
must be provided with one or more
(5) When the shell is fitted for pres-
pressure relief devices of the reclosing
sure discharge, a suitable pressure re-
type. Such portable tanks may, in ad-
dition, have a frangible disc or fusible lief device must provide the inlet line
element in parallel with the reclosing to the portable tank and set to operate
devices, except when the applicable T at a pressure not higher than the
code assigned to a hazardous material MAWP of the shell, and a stop-valve
requires that the frangible disc precede must be fitted as close to the shell as
the pressure relief device, according to practicable to minimize the potential
paragraph (g)(3) of this section, or for damage.
when no bottom openings are allowed. (6) Setting of pressure relief devices. (i)
The pressure relief devices must have Pressure relief devices must operate
sufficient capacity to prevent rupture only in conditions of excessive rise in
of the shell due to over pressurization temperature. The shell must not be
or vacuum resulting from filling, dis- subject to undue fluctuations of pres-
charging, heating of the contents or sure during normal conditions of trans-
fire. portation.
(2) Pressure relief devices must be de- (ii) The required pressure relief de-
signed to prevent the entry of foreign vice must be set to start to discharge
matter, the leakage of liquid and the at a nominal pressure of five-sixths of
development of any dangerous excess the test pressure for shells having a
pressure. test pressure of not more than 4.5 bar
(3) When required for certain haz- (450 kPa) and 110% of two-thirds of the
ardous materials by the applicable T test pressure for shells having a test
code or portable tank special provision pressure of more than 4.5 bar (450 kPa).
specified for a hazardous material in A self-closing relief device must close
the § 172.101 Table of this subchapter,
at a pressure not more than 10% below
portable tanks must have a pressure
the pressure at which the discharge
relief device consistent with the re-
starts. The device must remain closed
quirements of this subchapter. Except
for a portable tank in dedicated service at all lower pressures. This require-
that is fitted with an approved relief ment does not prevent the use of vacu-
device constructed of materials com- um-relief or combination pressure re-
patible with the hazardous material, lief and vacuum-relief devices.
the relief device system must include a (h) Fusible elements. Fusible elements
frangible disc preceding (such as, be- must operate at a temperature between
tween the lading and the reclosing 110 °C (230 °F) and 149 °C (300.2 °F), pro-
pressure relief device) a reclosing pres- vided that the pressure in the shell at
sure relief device. A pressure gauge or the fusing temperature will not exceed
suitable tell-tale indicator for the de- the test pressure. They must be placed
tection of disc rupture, pin-holing or at the top of the shell with their inlets
leakage must be provided in the space in the vapor space and in no case may
between the frangible disc and the they be shielded from external heat.
pressure relief device to allow the port- Fusible elements must not be utilized
able tank operator to check to deter- on portable tanks with a test pressure
mine if the disc is leak free. The fran- which exceeds 2.65 bar (265.0 kPa); how-
gible disc must rupture at a nominal ever, fusible elements are authorized
122
on portable tanks for the transpor- U = thermal conductance of the insulation,

tation of certain organometallic mate- in kW m¥2K¥1, at 38 °C (100 °F); and t =
rials in accordance with § 172.102, spe- actual temperature of the hazardous ma-
terial during filling (in °C) or when this
cial provision TP36 of this subchapter. temperature is unknown, let t = 15 °C (59
Fusible elements used on portable °F). The value of F given in this para-
tanks intended for the transport of ele- graph (i)(2)(i)(A) for insulated shells may
vated temperature hazardous materials only be used if the insulation is in con-
must be designed to operate at a tem- formance with paragraph (i)(2)(iv) of this
perature higher than the maximum section;
temperature that will be experienced A = total external surface area of shell in
square meters;
during transport and must be designed Z = the gas compressibility factor in the ac-
to the satisfaction of the approval cumulating condition (when this factor
agency. is unknown, let Z equal 1.0);
(i) Capacity of pressure relief devices. T = absolute temperature in Kelvin (°C + 273)
(1) The reclosing pressure relief device above the pressure relief devices in the
required by paragraph (g)(1) of this sec- accumulating condition;
L = the latent heat of vaporization of the liq-
tion must have a minimum cross sec-
uid, in kJ/kg, in the accumulating condi-
tional flow area equivalent to an ori- tion;
fice of 31.75 mm (1.3 inches) diameter. M = molecular weight of the hazardous mate-
Vacuum-relief devices, when used, rial.
must have a cross sectional flow area
(B) The constant C, as shown in the
not less than 284 mm 2 (11.2 inches 2).
formula in paragraph (i)(2)(i)(A) of this
(2) The combined delivery capacity of
section, is derived from one of the fol-
the pressure relief system (taking into
lowing formulas as a function of the
account the reduction of the flow when
ratio k of specific heats:
the portable tank is fitted with fran-
gible-discs preceding spring-loaded
pressure-relief devices or when the cp
spring-loaded pressure-relief devices
k=
cv
are provided with a device to prevent
the passage of the flame), in condition Where:
of complete fire engulfment of the cp is the specific heat at constant pressure;
portable tank must be sufficient to and
limit the pressure in the shell to 20% cv is the specific heat at constant volume.
above the start to discharge pressure (C) When k >1:
limiting device (pressure relief device).
The total required capacity of the re- k +1
lief devices may be determined using ⎛ 2 ⎞ k −1
the formula in paragraph (i)(2)(i)(A) of C = k⎜ ⎟
this section or the table in paragraph ⎝ k +1⎠
(i)(2)(iii) of this section. (D) When k = 1 or k is unknown, a
(i)(A) To determine the total re- value of 0.607 may be used for the con-
quired capacity of the relief devices, stant C. C may also be taken from the
which must be regarded as being the following table:
sum of the individual capacities of all
the contributing devices, the following C CONSTANT VALUE TABLE
formula must be used:
k C
0.82
FA ZT 1.00 0.607
Q = 12.4 1.02 0.611
LC M 1.04 0.615
ER01OC08.002</MATH>
1.06 0.620
Where: 1.08 0.624
1.10 0.628
Q = minimum required rate of discharge in 1.12 0.633
cubic meters of air per second (m3/s) at 1.14 0.637
conditions: 1 bar and 0 °C (273 °K); 1.16 0.641
1.18 0.645
F = for uninsulated shells: 1; for insulated
ER01OC08.001</MATH>
1.20 0.649
shells: U(649¥t)/13.6 but in no case is less 1.22 0.652
than 0.25 1.24 0.656
Where: 1.26 0.660
123
ER01OC08.000</MATH>
§ 178.276 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
C CONSTANT VALUE TABLE—Continued MINIMUM EMERGENCY VENT CAPACITY—

Continued
k C
[Q Values]
1.28 0.664
1.30 0.667 A Q A Q
1.32 0.671 Exposed area (Cubic me- Exposed area (Cubic me-
(square meters of air (square meters of air
1.34 0.674 ters) per second) ters) per second)
1.36 0.678
1.38 0.681 22.5 1.670 75 4.483
1.40 0.685 25 1.821 80 4.726
1.42 0.688
27.5 1.969 85 4.967
1.44 0.691
30 2.115 90 5.206
1.46 0.695
1.48 0.698 32.5 2.258 95 5.442
1.50 0.701 35 2.400 100 5.676
1.52 0.704
1.54 0.707 (iv) Insulation systems, used for the
1.56 0.710
1.58 0.713
purpose of reducing venting capacity,
1.60 0.716 must be specifically approved by the
1.62 0.719 approval agency. In all cases, insula-
1.64 0.722
1.66 0.725
tion systems approved for this purpose
1.68 0.728 must—
1.70 0.731 (A) Remain effective at all tempera-
2.00 0.770 tures up to 649 °C (1200 °F); and
2.20 0.793
(B) Be jacketed with a material hav-
ing a melting point of 700 °C (1292 °F) or
(ii) As an alternative to the formula greater.
in paragraph (i)(2)(i)(A) of this section, (j) Approval, inspection and testing.
relief devices for shells used for trans- Approval procedures for UN portable
porting liquids may be sized in accord- tanks are specified in § 178.273. Inspec-
ance with the table in paragraph tion and testing requirements are spec-
(i)(2)(iii) of this section. The table in ified in § 180.605 of this subchapter.
paragraph (i)(2)(iii) of this section as- [66 FR 33445, June 21, 2001, as amended at 68
sumes an insulation value of F = 1 and FR 32414, May 30, 2003; 69 FR 76185, Dec. 20,
must be adjusted accordingly when the 2004; 73 FR 57006, Oct. 1, 2008; 76 FR 3388, Jan.
shell is insulated. Other values used in 19, 2011]
determining the table in paragraph
(i)(2)(iii) of this section are: L = 334.94 § 178.276 Requirements for the design,
kJ/kg; M = 86.7; T = 394 °K; Z = 1; and construction, inspection and testing
C = 0.607. of portable tanks intended for the
transportation of non-refrigerated
(iii) Minimum emergency vent capac- liquefied compressed gases.
ity, Q, in cubic meters of air per second
at 1 bar and 0 °C (273 °K) shown in the (a) In addition to the requirements of
following table: § 178.274 applicable to UN portable
tanks, the following requirements
MINIMUM EMERGENCY VENT CAPACITY apply to UN portable tanks used for
[Q Values] non-refrigerated liquefied compressed
gases. In addition to the definitions in
A Q A Q
Exposed area (Cubic me- Exposed area (Cubic me- § 178.274, the following definitions
(square meters of air (square meters of air apply:
ters) per second) ters) per second)
(1) Design pressure means the pressure
2 0.230 37.5 2.539 to be used in calculations required by
3 0.320 40 2.677 the ASME Code, Section VIII (IBR, see
4 0.405 42.5 2.814
5 0.487 45 2.949 § 171.7 of this subchapter). The design
6 0.565 47.5 3.082 pressure must be not less than the
7 0.641 50 3.215 highest of the following pressures:
8 0.715 52.5 3.346
9 0.788 55 3.476
(i) The maximum effective gauge
10 0.859 57.5 3.605 pressure allowed in the shell during
12 0.998 60 3.733 filling or discharge; or
14 1.132 62.5 3.860 (ii) The sum of:

16 1.263 65 3.987
18 1.391 67.5 4.112 (A) The maximum effective gauge
20 1.517 70 4.236 pressure to which the shell is designed
124
as defined in this paragraph under capacity greater than 450 liters (118.9
‘‘MAWP’’; and gallons). Shells must be designed, con-
(B) A head pressure determined on structed, certified and stamped in ac-
the basis of the dynamic forces speci- cordance with the ASME Code, Section
fied in paragraph (h) of this section, VIII.
but not less than 0.35 bar (35 kPa). (2) Portable tanks must be postweld
(2) Design reference temperature means heat-treated and radiographed as pre-
the temperature at which the vapor scribed in Section VIII of the ASME
pressure of the contents is determined Code, except that each portable tank
for the purpose of calculating the constructed in accordance with part
MAWP. The value for each portable UHT of the ASME Code must be
tank type is as follows: postweld heat-treated. Where postweld
(i) Shell with a diameter of 1.5 meters heat treatment is required, the port-
(4.9 ft.) or less: 65 °C (149 °F); or able tank must be treated as a unit
(ii) Shell with a diameter of more after completion of all the welds in
than 1.5 meters (4.9 ft.): and/or to the shell and heads. The
(A) Without insulation or sun shield: method must be as prescribed in the
60 °C (140 °F); ASME Code. Welded attachments to
(B) With sun shield: 55 °C (131 °F); and pads may be made after postweld heat
(C) With insulation: 50 °C (122 °F). treatment is made. A portable tank
(3) Filling density means the average used for anhydrous ammonia must be
mass of liquefied compressed gas per
postweld heat-treated. The postweld
liter of shell capacity (kg/l).
heat treatment must be as prescribed
(4) Maximum allowable working pres-
in the ASME Code, but in no event at
sure (MAWP) means a pressure that
less than 1050 °F tank metal tempera-
must be not less than the highest of
ture. Additionally, portable tanks con-
the following pressures measured at
structed in accordance with part UHT
the top of the shell while in operating
of the ASME Code must conform to the
position, but in no case less than 7 bar
following requirements:
(700 kPa):
(i) The maximum effective gauge (i) Welding procedure and welder per-
pressure allowed in the shell during formance tests must be made annually
filling or discharge; or in accordance with Section IX of the
(ii) The maximum effective gauge ASME Code. In addition to the essen-
pressure to which the shell is designed, tial variables named therein, the fol-
which must be: lowing must be considered to be essen-
(A) Not less than the pressure speci- tial variables: number of passes, thick-
fied for each liquefied compressed gas ness of plate, heat input per pass, and
listed in the UN Portable Tank Table manufacturer’s identification of rod
for Liquefied Compressed Gases in and flux. The number of passes, thick-
§ 173.313; and ness of plate and heat input per pass
(B) Not less than the sum of: may not vary more than 25 percent
(1) The absolute vapor pressure (in from the qualified procedure. Records
bar) of the liquefied compressed gas at of the qualification must be retained
the design reference temperature for at least 5 years by the portable
minus 1 bar; and tank manufacturer or his designated
(2) The partial pressure (in bar) of air agent and, upon request, made avail-
or other gases in the ullage space able to a representative of the Depart-
which is determined by the design ref- ment of Transportation or the owner of
erence temperature and the liquid the tank.
phase expansion due to the increase of (ii) Impact tests must be made on a
the mean bulk temperature of tr¥tf (tf lot basis. A lot is defined as 100 tons or
= filling temperature, usually 15 °C, tr = less of the same heat and having a
50 °C maximum mean bulk tempera- thickness variation no greater than
ture). plus or minus 25 percent. The minimum
(b) General design and construction re- impact required for full-sized speci-
quirements. (1) Shells must be of seam- mens shall be 20 foot-pounds (or 10

less or welded steel construction, or foot-pounds for half-sized specimens) at
combination of both, and have a water 0 °F (¥17.8 °F) Charpy V-Notch in both
125
§ 178.276 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
the longitudinal and transverse direc- flow, specified by the manufacturer, is

tion. If the lot test does not pass this reached. Connections and accessories
requirement, individual plates may be leading to or from such a valve must
accepted if they individually meet this have a capacity for a flow more than
impact requirement. the excess flow valve’s rated flow.
(3) When the shells intended for the (3) For filling and discharge openings
transportation of non-refrigerated liq- that are located below the liquid level,
uefied compressed gases are equipped the first shut-off device must be an in-
with thermal insulation, a device must ternal stop-valve and the second must
be provided to prevent any dangerous be a stop-valve placed in an accessible
pressure from developing in the insu- position on each discharge and filling
lating layer in the event of a leak, pipe.
when the protective covering is closed (4) For filling and discharge openings
it must be gas tight. The thermal insu- located below the liquid level of port-
lation must not inhibit access to the able tanks intended for the transpor-
fittings and discharge devices. In addi- tation of flammable and/or toxic lique-
tion, the thermal insulation systems fied compressed gases, the internal
must satisfy the following require- stop-valve must be a self-closing safety
ments: device that fully closes automatically
(i) consist of a shield covering not during filling or discharge in the event
less than the upper third, but not more of fire engulfment. The device shall
than the upper half of the surface of fully close within 30 seconds of actu-
the shell, and separated from the shell ation and the thermal means of closure
by an air space of approximately 40 mm must actuate at a temperature of not
(1.7 inches) across; or more than 121 °C (250 °F). Except for
(ii) consist of a complete cladding of portable tanks having a capacity less
insulating materials. The insulation than 1,000 liters (264.2 gallons), this de-
must be of adequate thickness and con-
vice must be operable by remote con-
structed to prevent the ingress of mois-
trol.
ture and damage to the insulation. The
(5) In addition to filling, discharge
insulation and cladding must have a
thermal conductance of not more than and gas pressure equalizing orifices,
0.67 (W·m¥2·K¥1) under normal condi- shells may have openings in which
tions of transportation. gauges, thermometers and manometers
(c) Service equipment. (1) Each opening can be fitted. Connections for such in-
with a diameter of more than 1.5 mm struments must be made by suitable
(0.1 inch) in the shell of a portable welded nozzles or pockets and may not
tank, except openings for pressure-re- be connected by screwed connections
lief devices, inspection openings and through the shell.
closed bleed holes, must be fitted with (6) All portable tanks must be fitted
at least three mutually independent with manholes or other inspection
shut-off devices in series: the first openings of suitable size to allow for
being an internal stop-valve, excess internal inspection and adequate ac-
flow valve, integral excess flow valve, cess for maintenance and repair of the
or excess flow feature (see § 178.337– interior.
1(g)), the second being an external (7) Inlets and discharge outlets on chlo-
stop-valve and the third being a blank rine portable tanks. The inlet and dis-
flange, thread cap, plug or equivalent charge outlets on portable tanks used
tight liquid closure device. to transport chlorine must meet the re-
(2) When a portable tank is fitted quirements of § 178.337–1(c)(2) and must
with an excess flow valve, the excess be fitted with an internal excess flow
flow valve must be so fitted that its valve. In addition to the internal ex-
seating is inside the shell or inside a cess flow valve, the inlet and discharge
welded flange or, when fitted exter- outlets must be equipped with an ex-
nally, its mountings must be designed ternal stop valve (angle valve). Excess
so that in the event of impact it main- flow valves must conform to the stand-
tains its effectiveness. The excess flow ards of The Chlorine Institute, Inc.
valves must be selected and fitted so as (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter) as
to close automatically when the rated follows:
126
(i) A valve conforming to Drawing than the MAWP and be fully open at a
101–7, dated July 1993, must be installed pressure equal to 110% of the MAWP.
under each liquid angle valve. These devices must, after discharge,
(ii) A valve conforming to Drawing close at a pressure not less than 10%
106–6, dated July 1993, must be installed below the pressure at which discharge
under each gas angle valve. For port- starts and must remain closed at all
able tanks used to transport non-re- lower pressures. The pressure relief de-
frigerated liquefied gases. vices must be of a type that will resist
(8) External fittings must be grouped dynamic forces including liquid surge.
together as close as reasonably prac- A frangible disc may only be used in se-
ticable. The following openings may be ries with a reclosing pressure relief de-
installed at locations other than on the vice.
top or end of the tank: (2) Pressure relief devices must be de-
(i) The openings for liquid level gaug- signed to prevent the entry of foreign
ing devices, pressure gauges, or for matter, the leakage of gas and the de-
safety devices, may be installed sepa- velopment of any dangerous excess
rately at the other location or in the pressure.
side of the shell; (3) A portable tank intended for the
(ii) One plugged opening of 2-inch Na- transportation of certain liquefied
tional Pipe Thread or less provided for compressed gases identified in the UN
maintenance purposes may be located Portable Tank Table for Liquefied
elsewhere; Compressed Gases in § 173.313 of this
(iii) An opening of 3-inch National subchapter must have a pressure relief
Pipe Size or less may be provided at device which conforms to the require-
another location, when necessary, to ments of this subchapter. Unless a
facilitate installation of condensing portable tank, in dedicated service, is
coils. fitted with a relief device constructed
(9) Filling and discharge connections of materials compatible with the haz-
are not required to be grouped and may ardous material, the relief device must
be installed below the normal liquid be comprised of a frangible disc pre-
level of the tank if: ceded by a reclosing device. The space
(i) The portable tank is permanently between the frangible disc and the de-
mounted in a full framework for con- vice must be provided with a pressure
tainerized transport; gauge or a suitable tell-tale indicator.
(ii) For each portable tank design, a This arrangement must facilitate the
prototype portable tank, meets the re- detection of disc rupture, pinholing or
quirements of parts 450 through 453 of leakage which could cause a malfunc-
this title for compliance with the re- tion of the pressure relief device. The
quirements of Annex II of the Inter- frangible disc must rupture at a nomi-
national Convention for Safe Con- nal pressure 10% above the start-to-dis-
tainers; and charge pressure of the relief device.
(iii) Each filling and discharge outlet (4) In the case of portable tanks used
meets the requirements of paragraph for more than one gas, the pressure re-
(c)(4) of this section. lief devices must open at a pressure in-
(d) Bottom openings. Bottom openings dicated in paragraph (e)(1) of this sec-
are prohibited on portable tanks when tion for the gas having the highest
the UN Portable Tank Table for Lique- maximum allowable pressure of the
fied Compressed Gases in § 173.313 of gases allowed to be transported in the
this subchapter indicates that bottom portable tank.
openings are not allowed. In this case, (f) Capacity of relief devices. The com-
there may be no openings located bined delivery capacity of the relief de-
below the liquid level of the shell when vices must be sufficient so that, in the
it is filled to its maximum permissible event of total fire engulfment, the
filling limit. pressure inside the shell cannot exceed
(e) Pressure relief devices. (1) Portable 120% of the MAWP. Reclosing relief de-
tanks must be provided with one or vices must be used to achieve the full
more reclosing pressure relief devices. relief capacity prescribed. In the case
The pressure relief devices must open of portable tanks used for more than
automatically at a pressure not less gas, the combined delivery capacity of
127
§ 178.277 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
the pressure relief devices must be design and construction of the shell
taken for the liquefied compressed gas not higher than the lowest (coldest)
which requires the highest delivery ca- service temperature of the contents
pacity of the liquefied compressed during normal conditions of filling, dis-
gases allowed to be transported in the charge and transportation.
portable tank. The total required ca- Shell means the part of the portable
pacity of the relief devices must be de- tank which retains the refrigerated liq-
termined according to the require- uefied gas intended for transport, in-
ments in § 178.275(i). These require- cluding openings and their closures,
ments apply only to liquefied com- but does not include service equipment
pressed gases which have critical tem- or external structural equipment.
peratures well above the temperature Tank means a construction which
at the accumulating condition. For normally consists of either:
gases that have critical temperatures (1) A jacket and one or more inner
near or below the temperature at the shells where the space between the
accumulating condition, the calcula- shell(s) and the jacket is exhausted of
tion of the pressure relief device deliv- air (vacuum insulation) and may incor-
ery capacity must consider the addi- porate a thermal insulation system; or
tional thermodynamic properties of the (2) A jacket and an inner shell with
gas, for example see CGA S–1.2 (IBR, an intermediate layer of solid ther-
see § 171.7 of this subchapter). mally insulating material (for exam-
ple, solid foam).
FR 75748, 75752, Dec. 31, 2003; 69 FR 54046, (b) General design and construction re-
Sept. 7, 2004; 69 FR 76185, Dec. 20, 2004] quirements. (1) Portable tanks must be
of seamless or welded steel construc-
§ 178.277 Requirements for the design, tion and have a water capacity of more
construction, inspection and testing than 450 liters (118.9 gallons). Portable
of portable tanks intended for the tanks must be designed, constructed,
transportation of refrigerated lique- certified and stamped in accordance
fied gases. with Section VIII of the ASME Code.
(a) In addition to the requirements of (2) Portable tanks must be postweld
§ 178.274 applicable to UN portable heat treated and radiographed as pre-
tanks, the following requirements and scribed in Sections V and VIII of the
definitions apply to UN portable tanks ASME Code except that each tank con-
used for refrigerated liquefied gases: structed in accordance with part UHT
Design pressure For the purpose of in Section VIII of the ASME Code must
this section the term ‘‘design pressure’’ be postweld heat treated. Where
is consistent with the definition for de- postweld heat treatment is required,
sign pressure in the ASME Code, Sec- the tank must be treated as a unit
tion VIII (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- after completion of all the welds to the
chapter). shell and heads. The method must be as
Holding time is the time, as deter- prescribed in the ASME Code. Welded
mined by testing, that will elapse from attachments to pads may be made after
loading until the pressure of the con- postweld heat treatment is made. The
tents, under equilibrium conditions, postweld heat treatment must be as
reaches the lowest set pressure of the prescribed in Section VIII of the ASME
pressure limiting device(s) (for exam- Code, but in no event at less than 1,050
ple, pressure control valve or pressure °F tank metal temperature.
relief device). Holding time must be de- (3) Welding procedure and welder per-
termined as specified in § 178.338–9. formance tests must be made annually
Maximum allowable working pressure in accordance with Section IX of the
(MAWP) means the maximum effective ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
gauge pressure permissible at the top chapter). In addition to the essential
of the shell of a loaded portable tank in variables named in the ASME Code, the
its operating position including the following must be considered as essen-
highest effective pressure during filling tial variables: number of passes, thick-
and discharge; ness of plate, heat input per pass, and

Minimum design temperature means the specified rod and flux. The number
the temperature which is used for the of passes, thickness of plate and heat
128
input per pass may not vary more than (10) A reference holding time must be
25% from the procedure qualification. determined for each refrigerated lique-
Records of the qualification must be fied gas intended for transport in a
retained for at least 5 years by the portable tank. The reference holding
portable tank manufacturer and made time must be determined by testing in
available to the approval agency and accordance with the requirements of
the owner of the portable tank as spec- § 178.338–9, considering the following
ified in § 178.273. factors:
(4) Shells and jackets must be made (i) The effectiveness of the insulation
of metallic materials suitable for form- system, determined in accordance with
ing. Jackets must be made of steel. paragraph (b)(11) of this section;
Non-metallic materials may be used (ii) The lowest set pressure of the
for the attachments and supports be- pressure limiting device;
tween the shell and jacket, provided (iii) The initial filling conditions;
their material properties at the min- (iv) An assumed ambient tempera-
imum design temperature are proven ture of 30 °C (86 °F);
to be sufficient. In choosing the mate- (v) The physical properties of the in-
rial, the minimum design temperature dividual refrigerated liquefied gas in-
must be taken into account with re- tended to be transported.
spect to risk of brittle fracture, to hy- (11) The effectiveness of the insula-
drogen embrittlement, to stress corro- tion system (heat influx in watts) may
sion cracking and to resistance to im- be determined by type testing the port-
pact. able tank in accordance with a proce-
(5) Any part of a portable tank, in- dure specified in § 178.338–9(c) or by
cluding fittings, gaskets and pipe- using the holding time test in § 178.338–
work, which can be expected normally 9(b). This test must consist of either:
to come into contact with the refrig- (i) A constant pressure test (for ex-
erated liquefied gas transported must ample, at atmospheric pressure) when
be compatible with that refrigerated the loss of refrigerated liquefied gas is
liquefied gas. measured over a period of time; or
(6) The thermal insulation system (ii) A closed system test when the
must include a complete covering of rise in pressure in the shell is measured
the shell with effective insulating ma- over a period of time.
terials. External insulation must be (12) When performing the constant
protected by a jacket so as to prevent pressure test, variations in atmos-
the ingress of moisture and other dam- pheric pressure must be taken into ac-
age under normal transport conditions. count. When performing either test,
(7) When a jacket is so closed as to be corrections must be made for any vari-
gas-tight, a device must be provided to ation of the ambient temperature from
prevent any dangerous pressure from the assumed ambient temperature ref-
developing in the insulation space. erence value of 30 °C (86 °F).
(8) Materials which may react with (13) The jacket of a vacuum-insulated
oxygen or oxygen enriched double-wall tank must have either an
atmospheres in a dangerous manner external design pressure not less than
may not be used in portable tanks in- 100 kPa (1 bar) gauge pressure cal-
tended for the transport of refrigerated culated in accordance with Section
liquefied gases having a boiling point VIII of the ASME Code or a calculated
below minus 182 °C at atmospheric critical collapsing pressure of not less
pressure in locations with the thermal than 200 kPa (2 bar) gauge pressure. In-
insulation where there is a risk of con- ternal and external reinforcements
tact with oxygen or with oxygen en- may be included in calculating the
riched fluid. ability of the jacket to resist the exter-
(9) Insulating materials must not de- nal pressure.
teriorate to an extent that the effec- NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b): For the deter-
tiveness of the insulation system, as mination of the actual holding time, as indi-
determined in accordance with para- cated by paragraphs (b)(10), (11), (12), and
graph (b)(11) of this section, would be (13), before each journey, refer to § 178.338–
reduced in service. 9(b).
129
§ 178.277 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(c) Design criteria. For shells with (7) Vacuum insulated portable tanks
vacuum insulation, the test pressure are not required to have an inspection
must not be less than 1.3 times the sum opening.
of the MAWP and 100 kPa (1 bar). In no (e) Pressure relief devices. (1) Every
case may the test pressure be less than shell must be provided with not less
300 kPa (3 bar) gauge pressure. than two independent reclosing pres-
(d) Service equipment. (1) Each filling sure relief devices. The pressure relief
and discharge opening in portable devices must open automatically at a
tanks used for the transport of flam- pressure not less than the MAWP and
mable refrigerated liquefied gases must be fully open at a pressure equal to
be fitted with at least three mutually 110% of the MAWP. These devices
independent shut-off devices in series: must, after discharge, close at a pres-
the first being a stop-valve situated as
sure not lower than 10% below the pres-
close as reasonably practicable to the
sure at which discharge starts and
jacket, the second being a stop-valve
must remain closed at all lower pres-
and the third being a blank flange or
sures. The pressure relief devices must
equivalent device. The shut-off device
closest to the jacket must be a self- be of the type that will resist dynamic
closing device, which is capable of forces including surge.
being closed from an accessible posi- (2) Except for portable tanks used for
tion on the portable tank that is re- oxygen, portable tanks for non-flam-
mote from the valve within 30 seconds mable refrigerated liquefied gases (ex-
of actuation. This device must actuate cept oxygen) and hydrogen may in ad-
at a temperature of not more than 121 dition have frangible discs in parallel
°C (250 °F). with the reclosing devices as specified
(2) Each filling and discharge opening in paragraphs (e)(4)(ii) and (e)(4)(iii) of
in portable tanks used for the trans- this section.
port of non-flammable refrigerated liq- (3) Pressure relief devices must be de-
uefied gases must be fitted with at signed to prevent the entry of foreign
least two mutually independent shut- matter, the leakage of gas and the de-
off devices in series: the first being a velopment of any dangerous excess
stop-valve situated as close as reason- pressure.
ably practicable to the jacket and the (4) Capacity and setting of pressure re-
second a blank flange or equivalent de- lief devices. (i) In the case of the loss of
vice. vacuum in a vacuum-insulated tank or
(3) For sections of piping which can of loss of 20% of the insulation of a
be closed at both ends and where liquid portable tank insulated with solid ma-
product can be trapped, a method of terials, the combined capacity of all
automatic pressure relief must be pro-
pressure relief devices installed must
vided to prevent excess pressure build-
be sufficient so that the pressure (in-
up within the piping.
cluding accumulation) inside the shell
(4) Each filling and discharge opening
does not exceed 120% of the MAWP.
on a portable tank must be clearly
marked to indicate its function. (ii) For non-flammable refrigerated
(5) When pressure-building units are liquefied gases (except oxygen) and hy-
used, the liquid and vapor connections drogen, this capacity may be achieved
to that unit must be provided with a by the use of frangible discs in parallel
valve as close to the jacket as reason- with the required safety-relief devices.
ably practicable to prevent the loss of Frangible discs must rupture at nomi-
contents in case of damage to the pres- nal pressure equal to the test pressure
sure-building unit. A check valve may of the shell.
be used for this purpose if it is located (iii) Under the circumstances de-
on the vapor side of the pressure build- scribed in paragraphs (e)(4)(i) and
up coil. (e)(4)(ii) of this section, together with
(6) The materials of construction of complete fire engulfment, the com-
valves and accessories must have satis- bined capacity of all pressure relief de-
factory properties at the lowest oper- vices installed must be sufficient to

ating temperature of the portable limit the pressure in the shell to the
tank. test pressure.
130
(iv) The required capacity of the re- event to come in contact with any of
lief devices must be calculated in ac- the caps. Space shall be provided so
cordance with CGA Pamphlet S–1.2 that each detonator of whatever nature
(IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). may be inserted in an individual cell in
[66 FR 33450, June 21, 2001, as amended at 68 the body of the container, into which
FR 75748, 75752, Dec. 31, 2003] each such cap shall snugly fit. There
shall be provided no more than twenty
Subpart I [Reserved] (20) such cellular spaces. Space may be
provided into which a plurality of per-
cussion caps may be carried, provided
Subpart J—Specifications for Con- that such space may be closed with a
tainers for Motor Vehicle screw cap, and further provided that
Transportation each or any such space is entirely sepa-
rate from any space provided for any
SOURCE: 29 FR 18975, Dec. 29, 1964, unless detonator. Each cellular space into
otherwise noted. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, which a detonator is to be inserted and
Apr. 5, 1967. carried shall be capable of being cov-
§ 178.318 Specification MC 201; con- ered by a rotary cover so arranged as
tainer for detonators and percus- to expose not more than one cell at any
sion caps. time, and capable of rotation to such a
place that all cells will be covered at
§ 178.318–1 Scope. the same time, at which place means
(a) This specification pertains to a shall be provided to lock the cover in
container to be used for the transpor- place. Means shall be provided to lock
tation of detonators and percussion in place the cover for the cells provided
caps in connection with the transpor- for the carrying of detonators. The re-
tation of liquid nitroglycerin, desen- quirement that not more than one cell
sitized liquid nitroglycerin or be exposed at one time need not apply
diethylene glycol dinitrate, where any in the case of detonators, although
or all of such types of caps may be used spaces for such caps and detonators
for the detonation of liquid nitroglyc- shall be separate. Sufficient annular
erin, desentitized liquid nitroglycerin space shall be provided inside the cover
or diethylene glycol dinitrate in blast- for such detonators that, when the
ing operations. This specification is cover is closed, there will be sufficient
not intended to take the place of any space to accommodate the wires cus-
shipping or packing requirements of tomarily attached to such caps. If the
this Department where the caps in material is of such a nature as to re-
question are themselves articles of quire treatment to prevent the absorp-
commerce. tion of moisture, such treatment shall
(b) [Reserved] be applied as shall be necessary in
[29 FR 18975, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 order to provide against the penetra-
FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt. tion of water by permeation. A suitable
178–60, 44 FR 70733, Dec. 10, 1979] carrying handle shall be provided, ex-
cept for which handle no part of the
§ 178.318–2 Container. container may project beyond the exte-
(a) Every container for detonators rior of the body.
and percussion caps coming within the (b) Exhibited in plates I and II are
scope of this specification shall be con- line drawings of a container for deto-
structed entirely of hard rubber, nators and percussion caps, illustrative
phenolresinous or other resinous mate- of the requirements set forth in
rial, or other nonmetallic, nonsparking § 178.318–2(a). These plates shall not be
material, except that metal parts may construed as a part of this specifica-
be used in such locations as not in any tion.
131
§ 178.318–3 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
§ 178.318–3 Marking. tention or containment function and

provides no structural support to the
Each container must be marked as
cargo tank.
prescribed in § 178.2(b).
Baffle means a non-liquid-tight trans-
[Amdt. 178–40, 41 FR 38181, Sept. 9, 1976, as verse partition device that deflects,
amended at 66 FR 45185, Aug. 28, 2001] checks or regulates fluid motion in a
tank.
§ 178.320 General requirements appli- Bulkhead means a liquid-tight trans-
cable to all DOT specification cargo verse closure at the ends of or between
tank motor vehicles.
cargo tanks.
(a) Definitions. For the purpose of this Cargo tank means a bulk packaging
subchapter: that:
Appurtenance means any attachment (1) Is a tank intended primarily for
to a cargo tank that has no lading re- the carriage of liquids, gases, solids, or
132
EC02MR91.076</GPH>
semi-solids and includes appur- (3) To the same engineering drawings

tenances, reinforcements, fittings, and and calculations, except for minor
closures (for tank, see §§ 178.337–1, variations in piping that do not affect
178.338–1, or 178.345–1, as applicable); the lading retention capability of the
(2) Is permanently attached to or cargo tank;
forms a part of a motor vehicle, or is (4) Of the same materials of construc-
not permanently attached to a motor tion;
vehicle but that, by reason of its size, (5) To the same cross-sectional di-
construction, or attachment to a mensions;
motor vehicle, is loaded or unloaded (6) To a length varying by no more
without being removed from the motor than 5 percent;
vehicle; and (7) With the volume varying by no
(3) Is not fabricated under a speci- more than 5 percent (due to a change in
fication for cylinders, intermediate length only); and
bulk containers, multi-unit tank car (8) For the purposes of § 178.338 only,
tanks, portable tanks, or tank cars. with the same insulation system.
Cargo tank motor vehicle means a External self-closing stop valve means a
motor vehicle with one or more cargo self-closing stop valve designed so that
tanks permanently attached to or the self-stored energy source is located
forming an integral part of the motor outside the cargo tank and the welded
vehicle. flange.
Cargo tank wall means those parts of Extreme dynamic loading means the
the cargo tank that make up the pri- maximum loading a cargo tank motor
mary lading retention structure, in- vehicle may experience during its ex-
cluding shell, bulkheads, and fittings pected life, excluding accident loadings
and, when closed, yield the minimum resulting from an accident, such as
volume of a completed cargo tank overturn or collision.
motor vehicle. Flange means the structural ring for
Charging line means a hose, tube, guiding or attachment of a pipe or fit-
pipe, or a similar device used to pres- ting with another flange (companion
surize a tank with material other than flange), pipe, fitting or other attach-
the lading. ment.
Companion flange means one of two Inspection pressure means the pres-
mating flanges where the flange faces sure used to determine leak tightness
are in contact or separated only by a of the cargo tank when testing with
thin leak-sealing gasket and are se- pneumatic pressure.
cured to one another by bolts or Internal self-closing stop valve means a
clamps. self-closing stop valve designed so that
Connecting structure means the struc- the self-stored energy source is located
ture joining two cargo tanks. inside the cargo tank or cargo tank
Constructed and certified in accordance sump, or within the welded flange, and
with the ASME Code means a cargo the valve seat is located within the
tank is constructed and stamped in ac- cargo tank or within one inch of the
cordance with Section VIII of the external face of the welded flange or
ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- sump of the cargo tank.
chapter), and is inspected and certified Lading means the hazardous material
by an Authorized Inspector. contained in a cargo tank.
Constructed in accordance with the Loading/unloading connection means
ASME Code means a cargo tank is con- the fitting in the loading/unloading
structed in accordance with Section line farthest from the loading/unload-
VIII of the ASME Code with authorized ing outlet to which the loading/unload-
exceptions (see §§ 178.346 through ing hose, pipe, or device is attached.
178.348) and is inspected and certified Loading/unloading outlet means a
by a Registered Inspector. cargo tank outlet used for normal load-
Design type means one or more cargo ing/unloading operations.
tanks that are made— Loading/unloading stop valve means

(1) To the same specification; the stop valve farthest from the cargo
(2) By the same manufacturer; tank loading/unloading outlet to which
133
§ 178.320 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
the loading/unloading connection is at- Multi-specification cargo tank motor ve-

tached. hicle means a cargo tank motor vehicle
Manufacturer means any person en- equipped with two or more cargo tanks
gaged in the manufacture of a DOT fabricated to more than one cargo tank
specification cargo tank, cargo tank specification.
motor vehicle, or cargo tank equip- Normal operating loading means the
ment that forms part of the cargo tank loading a cargo tank motor vehicle
wall. This term includes attaching a may be expected to experience rou-
cargo tank to a motor vehicle or to a tinely in operation.
motor vehicle suspension component Nozzle means a subassembly con-
that involves welding on the cargo sisting of a pipe or tubular section with
tank wall. A manufacturer must reg- or without a welded or forged flange on
ister with the Department in accord- one end.
ance with subpart F of part 107 in sub- Outlet means any opening in the shell
part A of this chapter. or head of a cargo tank, (including the
Maximum allowable working pressure means for attaching a closure), except
or MAWP means the maximum pres- that the following are not outlets: a
sure allowed at the top of the tank in threaded opening securely closed dur-
its normal operating position. The ing transportation with a threaded
MAWP must be calculated as pre- plug or a threaded cap, a flanged open-
scribed in Section VIII of the ASME ing securely closed during transpor-
Code. In use, the MAWP must be great- tation with a bolted or welded blank
er than or equal to the maximum lad- flange, a manhole, a gauging device, a
ing pressure conditions prescribed in thermometer well, or a pressure relief
§ 173.33 of this subchapter for each ma- device.
terial transported. Outlet stop valve means the stop valve
at a cargo tank loading or unloading
Maximum lading pressure. See
outlet.
§ 173.33(c).
Pipe coupling means a fitting with in-
Minimum thickness means the min- ternal threads on both ends.
imum required shell and head (and baf- Rear bumper means the structure de-
fle and bulkhead when used as tank re- signed to prevent a vehicle or object
inforcement) thickness needed to meet from under-riding the rear of another
the specification. The minimum thick- motor vehicle. See § 393.86 of this title.
ness is the greatest of the following val- Rear-end tank protection device means
ues: (1)(i) For MC 330, MC 331, and MC the structure designed to protect a
338 cargo tanks, the specified minimum cargo tank and any lading retention
thickness found the applicable speci- piping or devices in case of a rear end
fication(s); or collision.
(ii) For DOT 406, DOT 407 and DOT Self-closing stop valve means a stop
412 cargo tanks, the specified minimum valve held in the closed position by
thickness found in Tables I and II of means of self-stored energy, that opens
the applicable specification(s); or only by application of an external force
(iii) For MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC and that closes when the external force
303, MC 304, MC 305, MC 306, MC 307, MC is removed.
310, MC 311, and MC 312 cargo tanks, Shell means the circumferential por-
the in-service minimum thickness pre- tion of a cargo tank defined by the
scribed in Tables I and II of basic design radius or radii excluding
§ 180.407(i)(5) of this subchapter, for the the bulkheads.
minimum thickness specified by Tables Stop valve means a valve that stops
I and II of the applicable specifica- the flow of lading.
tion(s); or Sump means a protrusion from the
(2) The thickness necessary to meet bottom of a cargo tank shell designed
with the structural integrity and acci- to facilitate complete loading and un-
dent damage requirements of the appli- loading of lading.
cable specification(s); or Tank means a container, consisting
(3) The thickness as computed per of a shell and heads, that forms a pres-
the ASME Code requirements (if appli- sure tight vessel having openings de-
cable). signed to accept pressure tight fittings
134
or closures, but excludes any appur- (c) Exceptions to the ASME Code. Un-
tenances, reinforcements, fittings, or less otherwise specified, when excep-
closures. tions are provided in this subpart from
Test pressure means the pressure to compliance with certain paragraphs of
which a tank is subjected to determine the ASME Code, compliance with those
structural integrity. paragraphs is not prohibited.
Toughness of material means the capa- [Amdt. 178–89, 55 FR 37055, Sept. 7, 1990, as
bility of a material to absorb energy amended by Amdt. 178–98, 58 FR 33306, June
represented by the area under a stress 16, 1993; Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR 51339, Oct. 1,
strain curve (indicating the energy ab- 1996; 68 FR 19277, Apr. 18, 2003; 68 FR 52370,
sorbed per unit volume of the material) Sept. 3, 2003; 68 FR 75752, Dec. 31, 2003; 76 FR
up to the point of rupture. 43532, July 20, 2011]
Vacuum cargo tank means a cargo
tank that is loaded by reducing the § 178.337 Specification MC 331; cargo
tank motor vehicle primarily for
pressure in the cargo tank to below at- transportation of compressed gases
mospheric pressure. as defined in subpart G of part 173
Variable specification cargo tank of this subchapter.
means a cargo tank that is constructed
in accordance with one specification, § 178.337–1 General requirements.
but that may be altered to meet an- (a) ASME Code construction. Tanks
other specification by changing relief must be—
device, closures, lading discharge de- (1) Seamless or welded construction,
vices, and other lading retention de- or a combination of both;
vices. (2) Designed, constructed, certified,
Void means the space between tank and stamped in accordance with Sec-
heads or bulkheads and a connecting tion VIII of the ASME Code (IBR, see
structure. § 171.7 of this subchapter);
Welded flange means a flange at- (3) Made of steel or aluminum; how-
tached to the tank by a weld joining ever, if aluminum is used, the cargo
the tank shell to the cylindrical outer tank must be insulated and the haz-
surface of the flange, or by a fillet weld ardous material to be transported must
joining the tank shell to a flange be compatible with the aluminum (see
shaped to fit the shell contour. §§ 178.337–1(e)(2), 173.315(a) table, and
(b) Design certification. (1) Each cargo 178.337–2(a)(1) of this subchapter); and
tank or cargo tank motor vehicle de- (4) Covered with a steel jacket if the
sign type, including its required acci- cargo tank is insulated and used to
dent damage protection device, must transport a flammable gas (see
be certified to conform to the specifica- § 173.315(a) table Note 11 of this sub-
tion requirements by a Design Certi- chapter).
fying Engineer who is registered in ac- (b) Design pressure. The design pres-
cordance with subpart F of part 107 of sure of a cargo tank authorized under
this title. An accident damage protec- this specification shall be not less than
tion device is a rear-end protection, the vapor pressure of the commodity
overturn protection, or piping protec- contained therein at 115 °F. or as pre-
tion device. scribed for a particular commodity in
(2) The Design Certifying Engineer § 173.315(a) of this subchapter, except
shall furnish to the manufacturer a that in no case shall the design pres-
certificate to indicate compliance with sure of any cargo tank be less than 100
the specification requirements. The p.s.i.g. nor more than 500 p.s.i.g.
certificate must include the sketches,
drawings, and calculations used for cer- NOTE 1: The term design pressure as used in
tification. Each certificate, including this specification, is identical to the term
MAWP as used in the ASME Code.
sketches, drawings, and calculations,
shall be signed by the Design Certi- (c) Openings. (1) Excess pressure relief
fying Engineer. valves shall be located in the top of the
(3) The manufacturer shall retain the cargo tank or heads.
design certificate at his principal place (2) A chlorine cargo tank shall have
of business for as long as he manufac- only one opening. That opening shall
tures DOT specification cargo tanks. be in the top of the cargo tank and
135
§ 178.337–1 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
shall be fitted with a nozzle that meets provisions in Section VIII of the ASME
the following requirements: Code under which it is constructed.
(i) On a cargo tank manufactured on Where postweld heat treatment is re-
or before December 31, 1974, the nozzle quired, the cargo tank must be treated
shall be protected by a dome cover as a unit after completion of all the
plate which conforms to either the welds in and/or to the shells and heads.
standard of The Chlorine Institute, The method must be as prescribed in
Inc., Dwg. 103–3, dated January 23, 1958, Section VIII of the ASME Code. Welded
or to the standard specified in para- attachments to pads may be made after
graph (c) (2) (ii) of this section. postweld heat treatment. A cargo tank
(ii) On a cargo tank manufactured on used for anhydrous ammonia must be
or after January 1, 1975, the nozzle postweld heat treated. The postweld
shall be protected by a manway cover heat treatment must be as prescribed
which conforms to the standard of The in Section VIII of the ASME Code, but
Chlorine Institute, Inc., Dwg. 103–4, in no event at less than 1,050 § F cargo
dated September 1, 1971. tank metal temperature.
(d) Reflective design. Every (g) Definitions. The following defini-
uninsulated cargo tank permanently tions apply to §§ 178.337–1 through
attached to a cargo tank motor vehicle 178.337–18:
shall, unless covered with a jacket Emergency discharge control means the
made of aluminum, stainless steel, or ability to stop a cargo tank unloading
other bright nontarnishing metal, be operation in the event of an uninten-
painted a white, aluminum or similar tional release. Emergency discharge
reflecting color on the upper two-thirds control can utilize passive or off-truck
of area of the cargo tank. remote means to stop the unloading
(e) Insulation. (1) Each cargo tank re- operation. A passive means of emer-
quired to be insulated must conform gency discharge control automatically
with the use and performance require- shuts off the flow of product without
ments contained in §§ 173.315(a) table the need for human intervention with-
and 178.337–1 (a)(3) and (e)(2) of this in 20 seconds of an unintentional re-
subchapter. lease caused by a complete separation
(2) Each cargo tank intended for of the liquid delivery hose. An off-
chlorine; carbon dioxide, refrigerated truck remote means of emergency dis-
liquid; or nitrous oxide, refrigerated charge control permits a qualified per-
liquid service must have suitable insu- son attending the unloading operation
lation of such thickness that the over- to close the cargo tank’s internal self-
all thermal conductance is not more closing stop valve and shut off all mo-
than 0.08 Btu per square foot per °F dif- tive and auxiliary power equipment at
ferential per hour. The conductance a distance from the cargo tank motor
must be determined at 60 °F. Insulation vehicle.
material used on cargo tanks for ni- Excess flow valve, integral excess flow
trous oxide, refrigerated liquid must be valve, or excess flow feature means a
noncombustible. Insulating material component that will close automati-
used on cargo tanks for chlorine must cally if the flow rate of a gas or liquid
be corkboard or polyurethane foam, through the component reaches or ex-
with a minimum thickness of 4 inches, ceeds the rated flow of gas or liquid
or 2 inches minimum thickness of ce- specified by the original valve manu-
ramic fiber/fiberglass of 4 pounds per facturer when piping mounted directly
cubic foot minimum density covered by on the valve is sheared off before the
2 inches minimum thickness of fiber. first valve, pump, or fitting down-
(f) Postweld heat treatment. Postweld stream from the valve.
heat treatment must be as prescribed Internal self-closing stop valve means a
in the ASME Code except that each primary shut off valve installed in a
cargo tank constructed in accordance product discharge outlet of a cargo
with Part UHT of Section VIII of the tank and designed to be kept closed by
ASME Code must be postweld heat self-stored energy.
treated. Each chlorine cargo tank must Primary discharge control system
be fully radiographed and postweld means a primary shut-off installed at a
heat treated in accordance with the product discharge outlet of a cargo
136
tank consisting of an internal self-clos- identified representatives of the De-

ing stop valve that may include an in- partment of Transportation.
tegral excess flow valve or an excess (4) The direction of final rolling of
flow feature, together with linkages the shell material shall be the circum-
that must be installed between the ferential orientation of the cargo tank
valve and remote actuator to provide shell.
manual and thermal on-truck remote (b) For a chlorine cargo tank. Plates,
means of closure. the manway nozzle, and anchorage
[Order 59–B, 30 FR 579, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesig- shall be made of carbon steel which
nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967] meets the following requirements:
(1) For a cargo tank manufactured on
EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER ci-
or before December 31, 1974—
tations affecting § 178.337–1, see the List of
CFR Sections Affected, which appears in the (i) Material shall conform to ASTM A
Finding Aids section of the printed volume 300, ‘‘Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels
and at www.govinfo.gov. for Service at Low Temperatures’’
(IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter);
§ 178.337–2 Material. (ii) Material shall be Class 1, Grade
(a) General. (1) All material used for A, flange or firebox quality;
construction of the cargo tank and ap- (iii) Plate impact test specimens, as
purtenances must be suitable for use required under paragraph (a) of this
with the commodities to be trans- section, shall be of the Charpy keyhole
ported therein and must conform to notch type; and
the requirements in Section II of the (iv) Plate impact test specimens
ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- shall meet the impact test require-
chapter) and/or requirements of the ments in paragraph (a) of this section
American Society for Testing and Ma- in both the longitudinal and transverse
terials in all respects. directions of rolling at a temperature
(2) Impact tests are required on steel of minus 45.5 C. (¥50 °F.).
used in the fabrication of each cargo (2) For a cargo tank manufactured on
tank constructed in accordance with or after January 1, 1975—
part UHT in Section VIII of the ASME (i) Material shall conform to ASTM A
Code. The tests must be made on a lot 612 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter),
basis. A lot is defined as 100 tons or less Grade B or A 516/A 516M (IBR, see § 171.7
of the same heat treatment processing of this subchapter), Grade 65 or 70;
lot having a thickness variation no (ii) Material shall meet the Charpy
greater than plus or minus 25 percent. V-notch test requirements of ASTM A
The minimum impact required for full 20/A 20M (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
size specimens must be 20 foot-pounds chapter); and
in the longitudinal direction at ¥30 (iii) Plate impact test specimens
°F., Charpy V-Notch and 15 foot-pounds shall meet the impact test require-
in the transverse direction at ¥30 °F., ments in paragraph (a) of this section
Charpy V-Notch. The required values in both the longitudinal and transverse
for subsize specimens must be reduced directions of rolling at a temperature
in direct proportion to the cross-sec- of minus 40 °C. (¥40 °F.).
tional area of the specimen beneath the (c) A cargo tank in anhydrous ammo-
notch. If a lot does not meet this re- nia service must be constructed of
quirement, individual plates may be steel. The use of copper, silver, zinc or
accepted if they individually meet this their alloys is prohibited. Baffles made
requirement. from aluminum may be used only if
(3) The fabricator shall record the joined to the cargo tank by a process
heat, and slab numbers, and the cer- not requiring postweld heat treatment
tified Charpy impact values, where re- of the cargo tank.
quired, of each plate used in each cargo [Order 59–B, 30 FR 579, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesig-
tank on a sketch showing the location nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]
of each plate in the shell and heads of
the cargo tank. Copies of each sketch tations affecting § 178.337–2, see the List of
shall be provided to the owner and re- CFR Sections Affected, which appears in the
tained for at least five years by the Finding Aids section of the printed volume
fabricator and made available to duly and at www.govinfo.gov.
137
§ 178.337–3 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
§ 178.337–3 Structural integrity. (c) Shell design. Shell stresses result-

(a) General requirements and accept- ing from static or dynamic loadings, or
ance criteria. (1) Except as provided in combinations thereof, are not uniform
paragraph (d) of this section, the max- throughout the cargo tank motor vehi-
imum calculated design stress at any cle. The vertical, longitudinal, and lat-
point in the cargo tank may not exceed eral normal operating loadings can
the maximum allowable stress value occur simultaneously and must be
prescribed in Section VIII of the ASME combined. The vertical, longitudinal
Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- and lateral extreme dynamic loadings
chapter), or 25 percent of the tensile occur separately and need not be com-
strength of the material used. bined.
(2) The relevant physical properties (1) Normal operating loadings. The fol-
of the materials used in each cargo lowing procedure addresses stress in
tank may be established either by a the tank shell resulting from normal
certified test report from the material operating loadings. The effective stress
manufacturer or by testing in conform- (the maximum principal stress at any
ance with a recognized national stand- point) must be determined by the fol-
ard. In either case, the ultimate tensile lowing formula:
strength of the material used in the de- S = 0.5(Sy + Sx) ±[0.25(Sy ¥ Sx)2 + Ss2]0.5
sign may not exceed 120 percent of the
ultimate tensile strength specified in Where:
either the ASME Code or the ASTM (i) S = effective stress at any given
standard to which the material is man- point under the combination of static
ufactured. and normal operating loadings that can
(3) The maximum design stress at occur at the same time, in psi.
any point in the cargo tank must be (ii) Sy = circumferential stress gen-
calculated separately for the loading erated by the MAWP and external pres-
conditions described in paragraphs (b), sure, when applicable, plus static head,
(c), and (d) of this section. Alternate in psi.
test or analytical methods, or a com- (iii) Sx = The following net longitu-
bination thereof, may be used in place dinal stress generated by the following
of the procedures described in para- static and normal operating loading
graphs (b), (c), and (d) of this section, if conditions, in psi:
the methods are accurate and (A) The longitudinal stresses result-
verifiable. ing from the MAWP and external pres-
(4) Corrosion allowance material may sure, when applicable, plus static head,
not be included to satisfy any of the in combination with the bending stress
design calculation requirements of this generated by the static weight of the
section. fully loaded cargo tank motor vehicle,
(b) Static design and construction. (1) all structural elements, equipment and
The static design and construction of appurtenances supported by the cargo
each cargo tank must be in accordance tank wall;
with Section VIII of the ASME Code. (B) The tensile or compressive stress
The cargo tank design must include resulting from normal operating longi-
calculation of stresses generated by de- tudinal acceleration or deceleration. In
sign pressure, the weight of lading, the each case, the forces applied must be
weight of structure supported by the 0.35 times the vertical reaction at the
cargo tank wall, and the effect of tem- suspension assembly, applied at the
perature gradients resulting from lad- road surface, and as transmitted to the
ing and ambient temperature extremes. cargo tank wall through the suspension
When dissimilar materials are used, assembly of a trailer during decelera-
their thermal coefficients must be used tion; or the horizontal pivot of the
in calculation of thermal stresses. truck tractor or converter dolly fifth
(2) Stress concentrations in tension, wheel, or the drawbar hinge on the
bending and torsion which occur at fixed dolly during acceleration; or an-
pads, cradles, or other supports must choring and support members of a
be considered in accordance with ap- truck during acceleration and decelera-

pendix G in Section VIII of the ASME tion, as applicable. The vertical reac-
Code. tion must be calculated based on the
138
static weight of the fully loaded cargo (C) The lateral shear stress generated
tank motor vehicle, all structural ele- by a normal operating lateral accelera-
ments, equipment and appurtenances tive force equal to 0.2 times the
supported by the cargo tank wall. The vertical reaction at each suspension as-
following loadings must be included: sembly of a trailer, applied at the road
(1) The axial load generated by a surface, and as transmitted to the
decelerative force; cargo tank wall through the suspension
(2) The bending moment generated by assembly of a trailer, and the hori-
a decelerative force; zontal pivot of the upper coupler (fifth
(3) The axial load generated by an ac- wheel) or turntable; or anchoring and
support members of a truck, as applica-
celerative force; and
ble. The vertical reaction must be cal-
(4) The bending moment generated by culated based on the static weight of
an accelerative force; and the fully loaded cargo tank motor vehi-
(C) The tensile or compressive stress cle, all structural elements, equipment
generated by the bending moment re- and appurtenances supported by the
sulting from normal operating vertical cargo tank wall; and
accelerative force equal to 0.35 times (D) The torsional shear stress gen-
the vertical reaction at the suspension erated by the same lateral forces as de-
assembly of a trailer; or the horizontal scribed in paragraph (c)(1)(iv)(C) of this
pivot of the upper coupler (fifth wheel) section.
or turntable; or anchoring and support (2) Extreme dynamic loadings. The fol-
members of a truck, as applicable. The lowing procedure addresses stress in
vertical reaction must be calculated the tank shell resulting from extreme
based on the static weight of the fully dynamic loadings. The effective stress
loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all (the maximum principal stress at any
structural elements, equipment and ap- point) must be determined by the fol-
purtenances supported by the cargo lowing formula:
tank wall.
S = 0.5(Sy + Sx) ±[0.25(Sy ¥ Sx)2 + Ss2]0.5
(iv) Ss = The following shear stresses
generated by the following static and Where:
normal operating loading conditions, (i) S = effective stress at any given
in psi: point under a combination of static
(A) The static shear stress resulting and extreme dynamic loadings that can
from the vertical reaction at the sus- occur at the same time, in psi.
pension assembly of a trailer, and the (ii) Sy = circumferential stress gen-
horizontal pivot of the upper coupler erated by MAWP and external pressure,
(fifth wheel) or turntable; or anchoring when applicable, plus static head, in
and support members of a truck, as ap- psi.
plicable. The vertical reaction must be (iii) Sx = the following net longitu-
calculated based on the static weight dinal stress generated by the following
of the fully loaded cargo tank motor static and extreme dynamic loading
vehicle, all structural elements, equip- conditions, in psi:
ment and appurtenances supported by (A) The longitudinal stresses result-
the cargo tank wall; ing from the MAWP and external pres-
(B) The vertical shear stress gen- sure, when applicable, plus static head,
erated by a normal operating accelera- in combination with the bending stress
tive force equal to 0.35 times the generated by the static weight of the
vertical reaction at the suspension as- fully loaded cargo tank motor vehicle,
sembly of a trailer; or the horizontal all structural elements, equipment and
pivot of the upper coupler (fifth wheel) appurtenances supported by the tank
or turntable; or anchoring and support wall;
members of a truck, as applicable. The (B) The tensile or compressive stress
vertical reaction must be calculated resulting from extreme longitudinal
based on the static weight of the fully acceleration or deceleration. In each
loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all case the forces applied must be 0.7
structural elements, equipment and ap- times the vertical reaction at the sus-
purtenances supported by the cargo pension assembly, applied at the road
tank wall; surface, and as transmitted to the
139
§ 178.337–3 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
cargo tank wall through the suspension or turntable; or anchoring and support
assembly of a trailer during decelera- members of a truck, as applicable. The
tion; or the horizontal pivot of the vertical reaction must be calculated
truck tractor or converter dolly fifth based on the static weight of the fully
wheel, or the drawbar hinge on the loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all
fixed dolly during acceleration; or the structural elements, equipment and ap-
anchoring and support members of a purtenances supported by the cargo
truck during acceleration and decelera- tank wall;
tion, as applicable. The vertical reac- (C) The lateral shear stress generated
tion must be calculated based on the by an extreme lateral accelerative
static weight of the fully loaded cargo force equal to 0.4 times the vertical re-
tank motor vehicle, all structural ele- action at the suspension assembly of a
ments, equipment and appurtenances trailer, applied at the road surface, and
supported by the cargo tank wall. The as transmitted to the cargo tank wall
following loadings must be included: through the suspension assembly of a
(1) The axial load generated by a trailer, and the horizontal pivot of the
decelerative force; upper coupler (fifth wheel) or turn-
(2) The bending moment generated by table; or anchoring and support mem-
a decelerative force; bers of a truck, as applicable. The
(3) The axial load generated by an ac- vertical reaction must be calculated
celerative force; and based on the static weight of the fully
(4) The bending moment generated by loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all
an accelerative force; and structural elements, equipment and ap-
(C) The tensile or compressive stress purtenances supported by the cargo
generated by the bending moment re- tank wall; and
sulting from an extreme vertical accel-
(D) The torsional shear stress gen-
erative force equal to 0.7 times the
erated by the same lateral forces as de-
vertical reaction at the suspension as-
scribed in paragraph (c)(2)(iv)(C) of this
sembly of a trailer, and the horizontal
section.
pivot of the upper coupler (fifth wheel)
or turntable; or the anchoring and sup- (d) In order to account for stresses
port members of a truck, as applicable. due to impact in an accident, the de-
The vertical reaction must be cal- sign calculations for the cargo tank
culated based on the static weight of shell and heads must include the load
the fully loaded cargo tank motor vehi- resulting from the design pressure in
cle, all structural elements, equipment combination with the dynamic pres-
and appurtenances supported by the sure resulting from a longitudinal de-
cargo tank wall. celeration of ‘‘2g’’. For this loading
(iv) Ss = The following shear stresses condition the stress value used may
generated by static and extreme dy- not exceed the lesser of the yield
namic loading conditions, in psi: strength or 75 percent of the ultimate
(A) The static shear stress resulting tensile strength of the material of con-
from the vertical reaction at the sus- struction. For cargo tanks constructed
pension assembly of a trailer, and the of stainless steel the maximum design
horizontal pivot of the upper coupler stress may not exceed 75 percent of the
(fifth wheel) or turntable; or anchoring ultimate tensile strength of the type
and support members of a truck, as ap- steel used.
plicable. The vertical reaction must be (e) The minimum metal thickness for
calculated based on the static weight the shell and heads on tanks with a de-
of the fully loaded cargo tank motor sign pressure of 100 psig or more must
vehicle, all structural elements, equip- be 4.75 mm (0.187 inch) for steel and 6.86
ment and appurtenances supported by mm (0.270 inch) for aluminum, except
the cargo tank wall; for chlorine and sulfur dioxide tanks.
(B) The vertical shear stress gen- In all cases, the minimum thickness of
erated by an extreme vertical accelera- the tank shell and head shall be deter-
tive force equal to 0.7 times the mined using structural design require-
vertical reaction at the suspension as- ments in Section VIII of the ASME
sembly of a trailer, and the horizontal Code or 25% of the tensile strength of
pivot of the upper coupler (fifth wheel) the material used. For a cargo tank
140
used in chlorine or sulfur dioxide serv- there will be no adverse effect upon the
ice, the cargo tank must be made of lading retention integrity of the cargo
steel. A corrosion allowance of 20 per- tank if any force less than that pre-
cent or 2.54 mm (0.10 inch), whichever scribed in paragraph (b)(1) of this sec-
is less, must be added to the thickness tion is applied from any direction. The
otherwise required for sulfur dioxide thickness of the mounting pad may not
and chlorine tank material. In chlorine be less than that of the shell wall or
cargo tanks, the wall thickness must head wall to which it is attached, and
be at least 1.59 cm (0.625 inch), includ- not more than 1.5 times the shell or
ing corrosion allowance. head thickness. However, a pad with a
(f) Where a cargo tank support is at- minimum thickness of 0.25 inch may be
tached to any part of the cargo tank
used when the shell or head thickness
wall, the stresses imposed on the cargo
is over 0.25 inch. If weep holes or tell-
tank wall must meet the requirements
in paragraph (a) of this section. tale holes are used, the pad must be
(g) The design, construction, and in- drilled or punched at the lowest point
stallation of an attachment, appur- before it is welded to the tank. Each
tenance to the cargo tank, structural pad must—
support member between the cargo (i) Be fabricated from material deter-
tank and the vehicle or suspension mined to be suitable for welding to
component, or accident protection de- both the cargo tank material and the
vice must conform to the following re- material of the appurtenance or struc-
quirements: tural support member; a Design Certi-
(1) Structural members, the suspen- fying Engineer must make this deter-
sion sub-frame, accident protection mination considering chemical and
structures, and external circumferen- physical properties of the materials
tial reinforcement devices must be and must specify filler material con-
used as sites for attachment of appur- forming to the requirements in Section
tenances and other accessories to the VIII of the ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7
cargo tank, when practicable. of this subchapter).
(2) A lightweight attachment to the (ii) Be preformed to an inside radius
cargo tank wall such as a conduit clip, no greater than the outside radius of
brake line clip, skirting structure,
the cargo tank at the attachment loca-
lamp mounting bracket, or placard
tion.
holder must be of a construction hav-
ing lesser strength than the cargo tank (iii) Extend at least 2 inches in each
wall materials and may not be more direction from any point of attachment
than 72 percent of the thickness of the of an appurtenance or structural sup-
material to which it is attached. The port member. This dimension may be
lightweight attachment may be se- measured from the center of the at-
cured directly to the cargo tank wall if tached structural member.
the device is designed and installed in (iv) Have rounded corners, or other-
such a manner that, if damaged, it will wise be shaped in a manner to mini-
not affect the lading retention integ- mize stress concentrations on the shell
rity of the tank. A lightweight attach- or head.
ment must be secured to the cargo (v) Be attached by continuous fillet
tank shell or head by a continuous welding. Any fillet weld discontinuity
weld or in such a manner as to preclude may only be for the purpose of pre-
formation of pockets which may be- venting an intersection between the fil-
come sites for corrosion. Attachments let weld and a tank or jacket seam
meeting the requirements of this para- weld.
graph are not authorized for cargo
tanks constructed under part UHT in [Amdt. 178–89, 55 FR 37056, Sept. 7, 1990, as
Section VIII of the ASME Code. amended by Amdt. 178–104, 59 FR 49135, Sept.
(3) Except as prescribed in para- 26, 1994; Amdt. 178–105, 60 FR 17401, Apr. 5,
graphs (g)(1) and (g)(2) of this section, 1995; Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR 51340, Oct. 1, 1996;
the welding of any appurtenance to the 65 FR 58631, Sept. 29, 2000; 68 FR 19279, Apr.
18, 2003; 68 FR 52370, Sept. 3, 2003; 68 FR 75753,
cargo tank wall must be made by at-
Dec. 31, 2003]
tachment of a mounting pad so that
141
§ 178.337–4 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
§ 178.337–4 Joints. § 178.337–5 Bulkheads, baffles and ring

stiffeners.
(a) Joints shall be as required in Sec-
tion VIII of the ASME Code (IBR, see (a) Not a specification requirement.
§ 171.7 of this subchapter), with all un- (b) [Reserved]
dercutting in shell and head material [Order 59–B, 30 FR 580, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesig-
repaired as specified therein. nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]
(b) Welding procedure and welder per-
formance must be in accordance with § 178.337–6 Closure for manhole.
Section IX of the ASME Code. In addi- (a) Each cargo tank marked or cer-
tion to the essential variables named tified after April 21, 1994, must be pro-
therein, the following must be consid- vided with a manhole conforming to
ered as essential variables: Number of paragraph UG–46(g)(1) and other appli-
passes; thickness of plate; heat input cable requirements in Section VIII of
per pass; and manufacturer’s identi- the ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this
fication of rod and flux. When fabrica- subchapter), except that a cargo tank
tion is done in accordance with part constructed of NQT steel having a ca-
UHT in Section VIII of the ASME Code, pacity of 3,500 water gallons or less
filler material containing more than may be provided with an inspection
0.08 percent vanadium must not be opening conforming to paragraph UG–
used. The number of passes, thickness 46 and other applicable requirements of
of plate, and heat input per pass may the ASME Code instead of a manhole.
not vary more than 25 percent from the (b) The manhole assembly of cargo
procedure or welder qualifications. tanks constructed after June 30, 1979,
Records of the qualifications must be may not be located on the front head of
retained for at least 5 years by the the cargo tank.
cargo tank manufacturer and must be
made available to duly identified rep- [Amdt. 178–7, 34 FR 18250, Nov. 14, 1969, as
amended by Amdt. 178–52, 43 FR 58820, Dec.
resentatives of the Department and the
18, 1978; Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25017, June 12,
owner of the cargo tank. 1989; 55 FR 21038, May 22, 1990; 56 FR 27876,
(c) All longitudinal shell welds shall June 17, 1991; 58 FR 12905, Mar. 8, 1993; Amdt.
be located in the upper half of the 178–118, 61 FR 51340, Oct. 1, 1996; 68 FR 75753,
cargo tank. Dec. 31, 2003]
(d) Edge preparation of shell and
head components may be by machine § 178.337–7 Overturn protection.
heat processes, provided such surfaces (a) See § 178.337–10.
are remelted in the subsequent welding (b) [Reserved]
process. Where there will be no subse-
[Order 59–B, 30 FR 580, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesig-
quent remelting of the prepared surface
nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]
as in a tapered section, the final 0.050
inch of material shall be removed by § 178.337–8 Openings, inlets, and out-
mechanical means. lets.
(e) The maximum tolerance for mis-
(a) General. The requirements in this
alignment and butting up shall be in
paragraph (a) apply to MC 331 cargo
accordance with the requirement in
tanks except for those used to trans-
Section VIII of the ASME Code.
port chlorine. The requirements for in-
(f) Substructures shall be properly lets and outlets on chlorine cargo
fitted before attachment, and the weld- tanks are in paragraph (b) of this sec-
ing sequence shall be such as to mini- tion.
mize stresses due to shrinkage of (1) An opening must be provided on
welds. each cargo tank used for the transpor-
[Order 59–B, 30 FR 580, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesig- tation of liquefied materials to permit
nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967] complete drainage.
(2) Except for gauging devices, ther-
tations affecting § 178.337–4, see the List of mometer wells, pressure relief valves,
CFR Sections Affected, which appears in the manhole openings, product inlet open-
Finding Aids section of the printed volume ings, and product discharge openings,
and at www.govinfo.gov. each opening in a cargo tank must be
142
closed with a plug, cap, or bolted ing connection area. The loading/un-
flange. loading connection area is where hoses
(3) Except as provided in paragraph or hose reels are connected to the per-
(b) of this section, each product inlet manent metal piping. Linkages be-
opening, including vapor return lines, tween closures and remote operators
must be fitted with a back flow check must be corrosion resistant and effec-
valve or an internal self-closing stop tive in all types of environmental con-
valve located inside the cargo tank or ditions incident to discharge of prod-
inside a welded nozzle that is an inte- uct.
gral part of the cargo tank. The valve (iii) All parts of a valve inside a
seat must be located inside the cargo cargo tank or within a welded flange
tank or within 2.54 cm (one inch) of the must be made of material that will not
external face of the welded flange.
corrode or deteriorate in the presence
Damage to parts exterior to the cargo
of the lading.
tank or mating flange must not pre-
vent effective seating of the valve. All (iv) An excess flow valve, integral ex-
parts of a valve inside a cargo tank or cess flow valve, or excess flow feature
welded flange must be made of mate- must close if the flow reaches the rated
rial that will not corrode or deteriorate flow of a gas or liquid specified by the
in the presence of the lading. original valve manufacturer when pip-
(4) Except as provided in paragraphs ing mounted directly on the valve is
(a)(5), (b), and (c) of this section, each sheared off before the first valve,
liquid or vapor discharge outlet must pump, or fitting downstream from the
be fitted with a primary discharge con- excess flow valve, integral excess flow
trol system as defined in § 178.337–1(g). valve, or excess flow feature.
Thermal remote operators must acti- (v) An integral excess flow valve or
vate at a temperature of 121.11 °C (250 the excess flow feature of an internal
°F) or less. Linkages between closures self-closing stop valve may be designed
and remote operators must be corro- with a bypass, not to exceed 0.1016 cm
sion resistant and effective in all types (0.040 inch) diameter opening, to allow
of environmental conditions incident equalization of pressure.
to discharging of product. (vi) The internal self-closing stop
(i) On a cargo tank over 13,247.5 L valve must be designed so that the self-
(3,500 gallons) water capacity, thermal stored energy source and the valve seat
and mechanical means of remote clo- are located inside the cargo tank or
sure must be installed at the ends of within 2.54 cm (one inch) of the exter-
the cargo tank in at least two diagonal face of the welded flange. Damage
nally opposite locations. If the loading/ to parts exterior to the cargo tank or
unloading connection at the cargo tank mating flange must not prevent effec-
is not in the general vicinity of one of tive seating of the valve.
the two locations specified in the first (5) A primary discharge control sys-
sentence of this paragraph (a)(4)(i), ad- tem is not required on the following:
ditional means of thermal remote clo-
(i) A vapor or liquid discharge open-
sure must be installed so that heat
ing of less than 11⁄4 NPT equipped with
from a fire in the loading/unloading
connection area or the discharge pump an excess flow valve together with a
will activate the primary discharge manually operated external stop valve
control system. The loading/unloading in place of an internal self-closing stop
connection area is where hoses or hose valve.
reels are connected to the permanent (ii) An engine fuel line on a truck-
metal piping. mounted cargo tank of not more than
3⁄4 NPT equipped with a valve having an
(ii) On a cargo tank of 13,247.5 L (3,500
gallons) water capacity or less, a ther- integral excess flow valve or excess
mal means of remote closure must be flow feature.
installed at or near the internal self- (iii) A cargo tank motor vehicle used
closing stop valve. A mechanical to transport refrigerated liquids such
means of remote closure must be in- as argon, carbon dioxide, helium, kryp-
stalled on the end of the cargo tank ton, neon, nitrogen, and xenon, or mix-
furthest away from the loading/unload- tures thereof.
143
§ 178.337–9 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(6) In addition to the internal self- lief devices, must be at least 4 times
closing stop valve, each filling and dis- the design pressure of the cargo tank.
charge line must be fitted with a stop Additionally, the burst pressure may
valve located in the line between the not be less than 4 times any higher
internal self-closing stop valve and the pressure to which each pipe, pipe fit-
hose connection. A back flow check ting, hose or other pressure part may
valve or excess flow valve may not be be subjected to in service. For chlorine
used to satisfy this requirement. service, see paragraph (b)(7) of this sec-
(7) An excess flow valve may be de- tion.
signed with a bypass, not to exceed a (2) Pipe joints must be threaded,
0.1016 centimeter (0.040 inch) diameter welded, or flanged. If threaded pipe is
opening, to allow equalization of pres-
used, the pipe and fittings must be
sure.
Schedule 80 weight or heavier, except
(b) Inlets and discharge outlets on chlo-
for sacrificial devices. Malleable metal,
rine tanks. The inlet and discharge out-
lets on a cargo tank used to transport stainless steel, or ductile iron must be
chlorine must meet the requirements used in the construction of primary
of § 178.337–1(c)(2) and must be fitted valve body parts and fittings used in
with an internal excess flow valve. In liquid filling or vapor equalization.
addition to the internal excess flow Stainless steel may be used for internal
valve, the inlet and discharge outlets components such as shutoff discs and
must be equipped with an external stop springs except where incompatible with
valve (angle valve). Excess flow valves the lading to be transported. Where
must conform to the standards of The copper tubing is permitted, joints must
Chlorine Institute, Inc., as follows: be brazed or be of equally strong metal
(1) A valve conforming to The Chlo- union type. The melting point of the
rine Institute, Inc., Dwg. 101–7 (IBR, brazing material may not be lower
see § 171.7 of this subchapter), must be than 538 °C (1,000 °F). The method of
installed under each liquid angle valve. joining tubing may not reduce the
(2) A valve conforming to The Chlo- strength of the tubing.
rine Institute, Inc., Dwg. 106–6 (IBR, (3) Each hose coupling must be de-
see § 171.7 of this subchapter), must be signed for a pressure of at least 120 per-
installed under each gas angle valve. cent of the hose design pressure and so
(c) Discharge outlets on carbon dioxide, that there will be no leakage when con-
refrigerated liquid, cargo tanks. A dis- nected.
charge outlet on a cargo tank used to (4) Piping must be protected from
transport carbon dioxide, refrigerated damage due to thermal expansion and
liquid is not required to be fitted with contraction, jarring, and vibration.
an internal self-closing stop valve. Slip joints are not authorized for this
[64 FR 28049, May 24, 1999, as amended at 66 purpose.
FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 19279, Apr. 18, (5) [Reserved]
2003; 68 FR 75753, Dec. 31, 2003] (6) Cargo tank manufacturers and
§ 178.337–9 Pressure relief devices, fabricators must demonstrate that all
piping, valves, hoses, and fittings. piping, valves, and fittings on a cargo
tank are free from leaks. To meet this
(a) Pressure relief devices. (1) See
requirement, the piping, valves, and
§ 173.315(i) of this subchapter.
fittings must be tested after installa-
(2) On cargo tanks for carbon dioxide
or nitrous oxide see § 173.315 (i) (9) and tion at not less than 80 percent of the
(10) of this subchapter. design pressure marked on the cargo
(3) Each valve must be designed, con- tank.
structed, and marked for a rated pres- (7) A hose assembler must:
sure not less than the cargo tank de- (i) Permanently mark each hose as-
sign pressure at the temperature ex- sembly with a unique identification
pected to be encountered. number.
(b) Piping, valves, hose, and fittings. (1) (ii) Demonstrate that each hose as-
The burst pressure of all piping, pipe sembly is free from leaks by per-
fittings, hose and other pressure parts, forming the tests and inspections in
except for pump seals and pressure re- § 180.416(f) of this subchapter.
144
(iii) Mark each hose assembly with Finding Aids section of the printed volume
the month and year of its original pres- and at www.govinfo.gov.
sure test.
§ 178.337–10 Accident damage protec-
(8) Chlorine cargo tanks. Angle valves tion.
on cargo tanks intended for chlorine
service must conform to the standards (a) All valves, fittings, pressure relief
of the Chlorine Institute, Inc., Draw- devices, and other accessories to the
ing; Dwg. 104–8; or ‘‘Section 3, Pam- tank proper shall be protected in ac-
phlet 166, Angle Valve Guidelines for cordance with paragraph (b) of this sec-
Chlorine Bulk Transportation;’’ or tion against such damage as could be
‘‘Sections 4 through 6, Pamphlet 168, caused by collision with other vehicles
Guidelines for Dual Valve Systems for or objects, jack-knifing and over-
Bulk Chlorine Transport’’ (IBR, see turning. In addition, pressure relief
§ 171.7 of this subchapter). Before in- valves shall be so protected that in the
stallation, each angle valve must be event of overturn of the vehicle onto a
tested for leakage at not less than 225 hard surface, their opening will not be
psig using dry air or inert gas. prevented and their discharge will not
(c) Marking inlets and outlets. Except be restricted.
for gauging devices, thermometer (b) The protective devices or housing
wells, and pressure relief valves, each must be designed to withstand static
cargo tank inlet and outlet must be loading in any direction equal to twice
marked ‘‘liquid’’ or ‘‘vapor’’ to des- the weight of the tank and attach-
ignate whether it communicates with ments when filled with the lading,
liquid or vapor when the cargo tank is using a safety factor of not less than
filled to the maximum permitted fill- four, based on the ultimate strength of
ing density. A filling line that commu- the material to be used, without dam-
nicates with vapor may be marked age to the fittings protected, and must
‘‘spray-fill’’ instead of ‘‘vapor.’’ be made of metal at least 3⁄16-inch
(d) Refrigeration and heating coils. (1) thick.
Refrigeration and heating coils must (c) Rear-end tank protection. Rear-end
be securely anchored with provisions tank protection devices must:
for thermal expansion. The coils must (1) Consist of at least one rear bump-
be pressure tested externally to at er designed to protect the cargo tank
least the cargo tank test pressure, and and all valves, piping and fittings lo-
internally to either the tank test pres- cated at the rear of the cargo tank
sure or twice the working pressure of from damage that could result in loss
the heating/refrigeration system, of lading in the event of a rear end col-
whichever is higher. A cargo tank may lision. The bumper design must trans-
not be placed in service if any leakage mit the force of the collision directly
occurs or other evidence of damage is to the chassis of the vehicle. The rear
found. The refrigerant or heating me- bumper and its attachments to the
dium to be circulated through the coils chassis must be designed to withstand
must not be capable of causing any ad- a load equal to twice the weight of the
verse chemical reaction with the cargo loaded cargo tank motor vehicle and
tank lading in the event of leakage. attachments, using a safety factor of
The unit furnishing refrigeration may four based on the tensile strength of
be mounted on the motor vehicle. the materials used, with such load
(2) Where any liquid susceptible to being applied horizontally and parallel
freezing, or the vapor of any such liq- to the major axis of the cargo tank.
uid, is used for heating or refrigera- The rear bumper dimensions must also
tion, the heating or refrigeration sys- meet the requirements of § 393.86 of this
tem shall be arranged to permit com- title; or
plete drainage. (2) Conform to the requirements of
§ 178.345–8(d).
[Order 59–B, 30 FR 580, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesig- (d) Chlorine tanks. A chlorine tank
nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967] must be equipped with a protective
EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER ci- housing and a manway cover to permit
tations affecting § 178.337–9, see the List of the use of standard emergency kits for
CFR Sections Affected, which appears in the controlling leaks in fittings on the
145
§ 178.337–11 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
dome cover plate. For tanks manufac- valve having an integral excess flow
tured on or after October 1, 2009, the valve or excess flow feature.
housing and manway cover must con-
[64 FR 28050, May 24, 1999]
form to the Chlorine Institute, Inc.,
Dwg. 137–5 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- § 178.337–12 [Reserved]
chapter).
(e) Piping and fittings. Piping and fit- § 178.337–13 Supporting and anchor-
tings must be grouped in the smallest ing.
practicable space and protected from
damage as required in this section. (a) A cargo tank that is not perma-
nently attached to or integral with a
(f) Shear section. A shear section or
sacrificial device is required for the vehicle chassis must be secured by the
valves specified in the following loca- use of restraining devices designed to
tions: prevent relative motion between the
(1) A section that will break under cargo tank and the vehicle chassis
strain must be provided adjacent to or when the vehicle is in operation. Such
outboard of each valve specified in restraining devices must be readily ac-
§ 178.337–8(a)(3) and (4). cessible for inspection and mainte-
(2) Each internal self-closing stop nance.
valve, excess flow valve, and check (b) On a cargo tank motor vehicle de-
valve must be protected by a shear sec- signed and constructed so that the
tion or other sacrificial device. The cargo tank constitutes in whole or in
sacrificial device must be located in part the structural member used in
the piping system outboard of the stop place of a motor vehicle frame, the
valve and within the accident damage cargo tank must be supported by exter-
protection to prevent any accidental nal cradles. A cargo tank mounted on a
loss of lading. The failure of the sac- motor vehicle frame must be supported
rificial device must leave the protected by external cradles or longitudinal
lading protection device and its attach- members. Where used, the cradles must
ment to the cargo tank wall intact and subtend at least 120 degrees of the shell
capable of retaining product. circumference.
[Order 59–B, 30 FR 581, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesig- (c) The design calculations of the
nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967] support elements must satisfy the re-
EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER ci- quirements of § 178.337–3, (a), (b), (c),
tations affecting § 178.337–10, see the List of and (d).
CFR Sections Affected, which appears in the (d) Where any cargo tank support is
Finding Aids section of the printed volume attached to any part of a cargo tank
and at www.govinfo.gov. head, the stresses imposed upon the
head must be provided for as required
§ 178.337–11 Emergency discharge con-
trol. in paragraph (c) of this section.
(a) Emergency discharge control equip- [68 FR 19280, Apr. 18, 2003]
ment. Emergency discharge control
equipment must be installed in a liquid § 178.337–14 Gauging devices.
discharge line as specified by product (a) Liquid level gauging devices. See
and service in § 173.315(n) of this sub- § 173.315(h) of this subchapter.
chapter. The performance and certifi- (b) Pressure gauges. (1) See § 173.315(h)
cation requirements for emergency dis- of this subchapter.
charge control equipment are specified (2) Each cargo tank used in carbon
in § 173.315(n) of this subchapter and are dioxide, refrigerated liquid or nitrous
not a part of the cargo tank motor ve- oxide, refrigerated liquid service must
hicle certification made under this be provided with a suitable pressure
specification.
gauge. A shut-off valve must be in-
(b) Engine fuel lines. On a truck- stalled between the pressure gauge and
mounted cargo tank, emergency dis-
the cargo tank.

charge control equipment is not re-
quired on an engine fuel line of not
more than 3⁄4 NPT equipped with a
146
(c) Orifices. See § 173.315(h) (3) and (4) test must be made of all welds in or on
of this subchapter. the shell and heads both inside and
[Amdt. 178–29, 38 FR 27599, Oct. 5, 1973, as
outside by either the wet fluorescent
amended by Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25018, June magnetic particle method conforming
12, 1989; Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR 51340, Oct. 1, to appendix U in Section VIII of the
1996] ASME Code, liquid dye penetrant
method, or ultrasonic testing in ac-
§ 178.337–15 Pumps and compressors. cordance with appendix 12 in Section
(a) Liquid pumps or gas compressors, VIII of the ASME Code. Permanent
if used, must be of suitable design, ade- magnets must not be used to perform
quately protected against breakage by the magnetic particle inspection.
collision, and kept in good condition. (c) All defects found shall be re-
They may be driven by motor vehicle paired, the cargo tanks shall then
power take-off or other mechanical, again be postweld heat treated, if such
electrical, or hydraulic means. Unless heat treatment was previously per-
they are of the centrifugal type, they formed, and the repaired areas shall
shall be equipped with suitable pres- again be tested.
sure actuated by-pass valves permit-
ting flow from discharge to suction or [Order 59–B, 30 FR 582, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesig-
to the cargo tank. nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended
(b) A liquid chlorine pump may not by Amdt. 178–7, 34 FR 18250, Nov. 14, 1969;
Amdt. 178–99, 58 FR 51534, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt.
be installed on a cargo tank intended 178–118, 61 FR 51340, Oct. 1, 1996; 68 FR 75753,
for the transportation of chlorine. Dec. 31, 2003]
[Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25018, June 12, 1989, as
amended by Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR 51340, Oct. § 178.337–17 Marking.
1, 1996]
(a) General. Each cargo tank certified
§ 178.337–16 Testing. after October 1, 2004 must have a corro-
sion-resistant metal name plate
(a) Inspection and tests. Inspection of (ASME Plate); and each cargo tank
materials of construction of the cargo
motor vehicle certified after October 1,
tank and its appurtenances and origi-
2004 must have a specification plate,
nal test and inspection of the finished
permanently attached to the cargo
cargo tank and its appurtenances must
tank by brazing, welding, or other suit-
be as required by Section VIII of the
able means on the left side near the
ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
chapter) and as further required by this front, in a place accessible for inspec-
specification, except that for cargo tion. If the specification plate is at-
tanks constructed in accordance with tached directly to the cargo tank wall
part UHT in Section VIII of the ASME by welding, it must be welded to the
Code the original test pressure must be tank before the cargo tank is postweld
at least twice the cargo tank design heat treated.
pressure. (1) The plates must be legibly marked
(b) Weld testing and inspection. (1) by stamping, embossing, or other
Each cargo tank constructed in accord- means of forming letters into the
ance with part UHT in Section VIII of metal of the plate, with the informa-
the ASME Code must be subjected, tion required in paragraphs (b) and (c)
after postweld heat treatment and hy- of this section, in addition to that re-
drostatic tests, to a wet fluorescent quired by the ASME Code, in char-
magnetic particle inspection to be acters at least 3⁄16 inch high (parenthet-
made on all welds in or on the cargo ical abbreviations may be used). All
tank shell and heads both inside and plates must be maintained in a legible
out. The method of inspection must condition.
conform to appendix 6 in Section VIII (2) Each insulated cargo tank must
of the ASME Code except that perma- have additional plates, as described, at-
nent magnets shall not be used. tached to the jacket in the location
(2) On cargo tanks of over 3,500 gal- specified unless the specification plate
lons water capacity other than those is attached to the chassis and has the
described in paragraph (b)(1) of this information required in paragraphs (b)
section unless fully radiographed, a and (c) of this section.
147
§ 178.337–18 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(3) The information required for both (13) Exposed surface area, in square
the name and specification plate may feet.
be displayed on a single plate. If the in- NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b): When the shell and
formation required by this section is head materials are the same thickness, they
displayed on a plate required by the may be combined, (Shell&head matl,
ASME, the information need not be re- yyy***).
peated on the name and specification
(c) Specification plate. The following
plates.
information must be marked on the
(4) The specification plate may be at- specification plate in accordance with
tached to the cargo tank motor vehicle this section:
chassis rail by brazing, welding, or (1) Cargo tank motor vehicle manu-
other suitable means on the left side facturer (CTMV mfr.).
near the front head, in a place acces- (2) Cargo tank motor vehicle certifi-
sible for inspection. If the specification cation date (CTMV cert. date).
plate is attached to the chassis rail, (3) Cargo tank manufacturer (CT
then the cargo tank serial number as- mfr.).
signed by the cargo tank manufacturer (4) Cargo tank date of manufacture
must be included on the plate. (CT date of mfr.), month and year.
(b) Name plate. The following infor- (5) Maximum weight of lading (Max.
mation must be marked on the name Payload), in pounds
plate in accordance with this section: (6) Lining materials (Lining), if ap-
(1) DOT-specification number MC 331 plicable.
(DOT MC 331). (7) Heating system design pressure
(2) Original test date (Orig. Test (Heating sys. press.), in psig, if applica-
Date). ble.
(3) MAWP in psig. (8) Heating system design tempera-
(4) Cargo tank design temperature ture (Heating sys. temp.), in °F, if ap-
(Design Temp. Range) lll °F to plicable.
lll °F. (9) Cargo tank serial number, as-
(5) Nominal capacity (Water Cap.), in signed by cargo tank manufacturer (CT
pounds. serial), if applicable.
(6) Maximum design density of lading NOTE 1 TO PARAGRAPH (c): See § 173.315(a) of
(Max. Lading density), in pounds per this chapter regarding water capacity.
gallon. NOTE 2 TO PARAGRAPH (c): When the shell
(7) Material specification number— and head materials are the same thickness,
shell (Shell matl, yyy***), where ‘‘yyy’’ they may be combined (Shell & head matl,
yyy***).
is replaced by the alloy designation
and ‘‘***’’ is replaced by the alloy type. (d) The design weight of lading used
(8) Material specification number— in determining the loading in §§ 178.337–
heads (Head matl. yyy***), where 3(b), 178.337–10(b) and (c), and 178.337–
‘‘yyy’’ is replaced by the alloy designa- 13(a) and (b), must be shown as the
tion and ‘‘***’’ by the alloy type. maximum weight of lading marking re-
(9) Minimum Thickness—shell (Min. quired by paragraph (c) of this section.
Shell-thick), in inches. When minimum [68 FR 19280, Apr. 18, 2003; 68 FR 52370, Sept.
shell thicknesses are not the same for 3, 2003, as amended at 68 FR 57633, Oct. 6,
different areas, show (topll, sidell, 2003; 81 FR 35544, June 2, 2016]
bottomll, in inches).
(10) Minimum thickness—heads (Min. § 178.337–18 Certification.
heads thick.), in inches. (a) At or before the time of delivery,
(11) Manufactured thickness—shell the cargo tank motor vehicle manufac-
(Mfd. Shell thick.), topll, sidell, turer must supply and the owner must
bottomll, in inches. (Required when obtain, a cargo tank motor vehicle
additional thickness is provided for manufacturer’s data report as required
corrosion allowance.) by Section VIII of the ASME Code
(12) Manufactured thickness—heads (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter), and
(Mfd. Heads thick.), in inches. (Re- a certificate stating that the com-
quired when additional thickness is pleted cargo tank motor vehicle con-
provided for corrosion allowance.) forms in all respects to Specification
148
MC 331 and the ASME Code. The reg- vices conform to the requirements of
istration numbers of the manufacturer, the specification. If it does not so cer-
the Design Certifying Engineer, and tify, the installer of any such valve,
the Registered Inspector, as appro- piping, or device shall supply and the
priate, must appear on the certificates owner shall obtain a certificate assert-
(see subpart F, part 107 in subchapter A ing complete compliance with these
of this chapter). specifications for such devices. The
(1) For each design type, the certifi- certificate, or certificates, will include
cate must be signed by a responsible of- sufficient sketches, drawings, and
ficial of the manufacturer and a Design other information to indicate the loca-
Certifying Engineer; and tion, make, model, and size of each
(2) For each cargo tank motor vehi- valve and the arrangement of all piping
cle, the certificate must be signed by a associated with the cargo tank.
responsible official of the manufac- (6) The certificate must contain a
turer and a Registered Inspector. statement indicating whether or not
(3) When a cargo tank motor vehicle the cargo tank was postweld heat
is manufactured in two or more stages, treated for anhydrous ammonia as
each manufacturer who performs a specified in § 178.337–1(f).
manufacturing function or portion (b) The owner shall retain the copy of
thereof on the incomplete cargo tank the data report and certificates and re-
motor vehicle must provide to the suc- lated papers in his files throughout his
ceeding manufacturer, at or before the ownership of the cargo tank motor ve-
time of delivery, a certificate that hicle and for at least one year there-
states the function performed by the after; and in the event of change in
manufacturer, including any certifi- ownership, retention by the prior
cates received from previous manufac- owner of nonfading photographically
turers, Registered Inspectors, and De- reproduced copies will be deemed to
sign Certifying Engineers. satisfy this requirement. Each motor
(4) Specification shortages. When a carrier using the cargo tank motor ve-
cargo tank motor vehicle is manufac- hicle, if not the owner thereof, shall
tured in two or more stages, the manu- obtain a copy of the data report and
facturer of the cargo tank must attach certificate and retain them in his files
the name plate and specification plate during the time he uses the cargo tank
as required by § 178.337–17(a) and (b) motor vehicle and for at least one year
without the original date of certifi- thereafter.
cation stamped on the specification [Order 59–B, 30 FR 583, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesig-
plate. Prior manufacturers must list nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]
the specification requirements that are
not completed on the Certificate of EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER ci-
tations affecting § 178.337–18, see the List of
Compliance. When the cargo tank
CFR Sections Affected, which appears in the
motor vehicle is brought into full com- Finding Aids section of the printed volume
pliance with the applicable specifica- and at www.govinfo.gov.
tion, the cargo tank motor vehicle
manufacturer must have a Registered § 178.338 Specification MC–338; insu-
Inspector stamp the date of certifi- lated cargo tank motor vehicle.
cation on the specification plate and
issue a Certificate of Compliance to the § 178.338–1 General requirements.
owner of the cargo tank motor vehicle. (a) For the purposes of this section—
The Certificate of Compliance must (1) Design pressure means the
list the actions taken to bring the ‘‘MAWP’’ as used in Section VIII of the
cargo tank motor vehicle into full ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
compliance. In addition, the certificate chapter), and is the gauge pressure at
must include the date of certification the top of the tank.
and the person (manufacturer, carrier (2) Design service temperature means
or repair organization) accomplishing the coldest temperature for which the
compliance. tank is suitable (see §§ 173.318 (a)(1) and
(5) The certificate must state wheth- (f) of this subchapter).

er or not it includes certification that (b) Each cargo tank must consist of a
all valves, piping, and protective de- suitably supported welded inner vessel
149
§ 178.338–2 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
enclosed within an outer shell or jack- (1) The jacket must be designed to
et, with insulation between the inner sustain a minimum critical collapsing
vessel and outer shell or jacket, and pressure of 30 psig.
having piping, valves, supports and (2) If the jacket also supports addi-
other appurtenances as specified in this tional loads, such as the weight of the
subchapter. For the purpose of this tank and lading, the combined stress,
specification, tank means inner vessel computed according to the formula in
and jacket means either the outer shell § 178.338–3(b), may not exceed 25 percent
or insulation cover. of the minimum specified tensile
(c) Each tank must be designed, con- strength.
structed, certified, and stamped in ac-
[Amdt. 178–77, 48 FR 27703, June 16, 1983, as
cordance with Section VIII of the amended at 49 FR 24316, June 12, 1984; Amdt.
ASME Code. 178–104, 59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994; 66 FR
(d) The exterior surface of the tank 45387, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 75754, Dec. 31, 2003]
must be insulated with a material com-
patible with the lading. § 178.338–2 Material.
(1) Each cargo tank must have an in- (a) All material used in the construc-
sulation system that will prevent the tion of a tank and its appurtenances
tank pressure from exceeding the pres- that may come in contact with the lad-
sure relief valve set pressure within the ing must be compatible with the lading
specified holding time when the tank is to be transported. All material used for
loaded with the specific cryogenic liq- tank pressure parts must conform to
uid at the design conditions of— the requirements in Section II of the
(i) The specified temperature and ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
pressure of the cryogenic liquid, and chapter). All material used for evacu-
(ii) The exposure of the filled cargo ated jacket pressure parts must con-
tank to an average ambient tempera- form to the chemistry and steelmaking
ture of 85 °F. practices of one of the material speci-
(2) For a cargo tank used to transport
fications of Section II of the ASME
oxygen, the insulation may not sustain
Code or the following ASTM Specifica-
combustion in a 99.5 percent oxygen at-
tions (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
mosphere at atmospheric pressure
chapter): A 242, A 441, A 514, A 572, A
when contacted with a continuously
588, A 606, A 633, A 715, A 1008/A 1008M,
heated glowing platinum wire. The
A 1011/A 1011M.
cargo tank must be marked in accord-
(b) All tie-rods, mountings, and other
ance with § 178.338–18(b)(7).
appurtenances within the jacket and
(3) Each vacuum-insulated cargo
all piping, fittings and valves must be
tank must be provided with a connec-
of material suitable for use at the low-
tion for a vacuum gauge to indicate the
est temperature to be encountered.
absolute pressure within the insulation
(c) Impact tests are required on all
space.
tank materials, except materials that
(e) The insulation must be com-
are excepted from impact testing by
pletely covered by a metal jacket. The
the ASME Code, and must be per-
jacket or the insulation must be so
formed using the procedure prescribed
constructed and sealed as to prevent
in Section VIII of the ASME Code.
moisture from coming into contact
(d) The direction of final rolling of
with the insulation (see § 173.318(a)(3) of
the shell material must be the circum-
this subchapter). Minimum metal
ferential orientation of the tank shell.
thicknesses are as follows: (e) Each tank constructed in accord-
Jacket evacu- Jacket not ance with part UHT in Section VIII of
ated evacuated the ASME Code must be postweld heat
Type metal
Gauge Inches Gauge Inches treated as a unit after completion of
all welds to the shell and heads. Other
Stainless steel .............. 18 0.0428 22 0.0269
Low carbon mild steel .. 12 0.0946 14 0.0677 tanks must be postweld heat treated as
Aluminum ..................... ........... 0.125 ........... 0.1000 required in Section VIII of the ASME
Code. For all tanks the method must
(f) An evacuated jacket must be in be as prescribed in the ASME Code.

compliance with the following require- Welded attachments to pads may be
ments: made after postweld heat treatment.
150
(f) The fabricator shall record the each tank must be in accordance with
heat and slab numbers and the certified appendix G in Section VIII of the
Charpy impact values of each plate ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
used in the tank on a sketch showing chapter). The tank design must include
the location of each plate in the shell calculation of stress due to the design
and heads of the tank. A copy of the pressure, the weight of lading, the
sketch must be provided to the owner weight of structures supported by the
of the cargo tank and a copy must be tank wall, and the effect of tempera-
retained by the fabricator for at least ture gradients resulting from lading
five years and made available, upon re- and ambient temperature extremes.
quest, to any duly identified represent- When dissimilar materials are used,
ative of the Department. their thermal coefficients must be used
(Approved by the Office of Management and
in calculation of the thermal stresses.
Budget under control number 2137–0017) (2) Stress concentrations in tension,
bending, and torsion which occur at
[Amdt. 178–77, 48 FR 27703, 27713, June 16, pads, cradles, or other supports must
1983, as amended at 49 FR 24316, June 12, 1984;
68 FR 19281, Apr. 18, 2003; 68 FR 75754, Dec. 31, be considered in accordance with ap-
2003; 70 FR 34076, June 13, 2005] pendix G in Section VIII of the ASME
Code.
§ 178.338–3 Structural integrity. (c) Stresses resulting from static and
(a) General requirements and accept- dynamic loadings, or a combination
ance criteria. (1) Except as permitted in thereof, are not uniform throughout
paragraph (d) of this section, the max- the cargo tank motor vehicle. The fol-
imum calculated design stress at any lowing is a simplified procedure for cal-
point in the tank may not exceed the culating the effective stress in the
lesser of the maximum allowable stress tank resulting from static and dynamic
value prescribed in Section VIII of the loadings. The effective stress (the max-
ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- imum principal stress at any point)
chapter), or 25 percent of the tensile must be determined by the following
strength of the material used. formula:
(2) The relevant physical properties S = 0.5 (Sy + Sx) ±(0.25(Sy ¥ Sx)2 + Ss2) 0.5
of the materials used in each tank may
be established either by a certified test Where:
report from the material manufacturer (1) S = effective stress at any given
or by testing in conformance with a point under the most severe combina-
recognized national standard. In either tion of static and dynamic loadings
case, the ultimate tensile strength of that can occur at the same time, in psi.
the material used in the design may (2) Sy = circumferential stress gen-
not exceed 120 percent of the minimum erated by internal and external pres-
ultimate tensile strength specified in sure when applicable, in psi.
either the ASME Code or the ASTM (3) Sx = the net longitudinal stress, in
standard to which the material is man- psi, generated by the following loading
ufactured. conditions:
(3) The maximum design stress at (i) The longitudinal tensile stress
any point in the tank must be cal- generated by internal pressure;
culated separately for the loading con- (ii) The tensile or compressive stress
ditions described in paragraphs (b), (c), generated by the axial load resulting
and (d) of this section. Alternate test from a decelerative force applied inde-
or analytical methods, or a combina- pendently to each suspension assembly
tion thereof, may be used in lieu of the at the road surface using applicable
procedures described in paragraphs (b), static loadings specified in § 178.338–13
(c), and (d) of this section, if the meth- (b);
ods are accurate and verifiable. (iii) The tensile or compressive stress
(4) Corrosion allowance material may generated by the bending moment re-
not be included to satisfy any of the sulting from a decelerative force ap-
design calculation requirements of this plied independently to each suspension
section. assembly at the road surface using ap-

(b) Static design and construction. (1) plicable static loadings specified in
The static design and construction of § 178.338–13 (b);
151
§ 178.338–3 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(iv) The tensile or compressive stress meet the requirements in paragraph (a)
generated by the axial load resulting of this section.
from an accelerative force applied to (g) The design, construction and in-
the horizontal pivot of the fifth wheel stallation of an attachment, appur-
supporting the vehicle using applicable tenance to the cargo tank or structural
static loadings specified in § 178.338–13 support member between the cargo
(b); tank and the vehicle or suspension
(v) The tensile or compressive stress component or accident protection de-
generated by the bending moment re- vice must conform to the following re-
sulting from an accelerative force ap- quirements:
plied to the horizontal pivot of the (1) Structural members, the suspen-
fifth wheel supporting the vehicle sion subframe, accident protection
using applicable static loadings speci- structures and external circumferen-
fied in § 178.338–13 (b); and tial reinforcement devices must be
(vi) The tensile or compressive stress used as sites for attachment of appur-
generated by a bending moment pro- tenances and other accessories to the
duced by a vertical force using applica- cargo tank, when practicable.
ble static loadings specified in § 178.338– (2) A lightweight attachment to the
13 (b). cargo tank wall such as a conduit clip,
(4) Ss = The following shear stresses brakeline clip, skirting structure, lamp
that apply, in psi,: The vectorial sum mounting bracket, or placard holder
of the applicable shear stresses in the must be of a construction having lesser
plane under consideration, including strength than the cargo tank wall ma-
direct shear generated by the static terials and may not be more than 72
vertical loading; direct lateral and tor- percent of the thickness of the mate-
sional shear generated by a lateral ac- rial to which it is attached. The light-
celerative force applied at the road sur- weight attachment may be secured di-
face, using applicable static loads spec- rectly to the cargo tank wall if the de-
ified in § 178.338–13 (b) vice is designed and installed in such a
(d) In order to account for stresses manner that, if damaged, it will not af-
due to impact in an accident, the defect the lading retention integrity of
sign calculations for the tank shell and the tank. A lightweight attachment
heads must include the load resulting must be secured to the cargo tank shell
from the design pressure in combina- or head by a continuous weld or in such
tion with the dynamic pressure result- a manner as to preclude formation of
ing from a longitudinal deceleration of pockets that may become sites for cor-
‘‘2g’’. For this loading condition the rosion. Attachments meeting the re-
stress value used may not exceed the quirements of this paragraph are not
lesser of the yield strength or 75 per- authorized for cargo tanks constructed
cent of the ultimate tensile strength of under part UHT in Section VIII of the
the material of construction. For a ASME Code.
cargo tank constructed of stainless (3) Except as prescribed in para-
steel, the maximum design stress may graphs (g)(1) and (g)(2) of this section,
not exceed 75 percent of the ultimate the welding of any appurtenance the
tensile strength of the type steel used. cargo tank wall must be made by at-
(e) The minimum thickness of the tachment of a mounting pad so that
shell or heads of the tank must be 0.187 there will be no adverse effect upon the
inch for steel and 0.270 inch for alu- lading retention integrity of the cargo
minum. However, the minimum thick- tank if any force less than that pre-
ness for steel may be 0.110 inches pro- scribed in paragraph (b)(1) of this sec-
vided the cargo tank is: tion is applied from any direction. The
(1) Vacuum insulated, or thickness of the mounting pad may not
(2) Double walled with a load bearing be less than that of the shell or head to
jacket designed to carry a propor- which it is attached, and not more
tionate amount of structural loads pre- than 1.5 times the shell or head thick-
scribed in this section. ness. However, a pad with a minimum
(f) Where a tank support is attached thickness of 0.187 inch may be used
to any part of the tank wall, the when the shell or head thickness is
stresses imposed on the tank wall must over 0.187 inch. If weep holes or tell-
152
tale holes are used, the pad must be Department, or the owner of the cargo
drilled or punched at the lowest point tank.
before it is welded to the tank. Each (c) All longitudinal welds in tanks
pad must: and load bearing jackets must be lo-
(i) Be fabricated from material deter- cated so as not to intersect nozzles or
mined to be suitable for welding to supports other than load rings and
both the cargo tank material and the stiffening rings.
material of the appurtenance or struc- (d) Substructures must be properly
tural support member; a Design Certi- fitted before attachment and the weld-
fying Engineer must make this deter- ing sequence must minimize stresses
mination considering chemical and due to shrinkage of welds.
physical properties of the materials (e) Filler material containing more
and must specify filler material con-
than 0.05 percent vanadium may not be
forming to the requirements in Section
used with quenched and tempered steel.
IX of the ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of
(f) All tank nozzle-to-shell and noz-
this subchapter).
zle-to-head welds must be full penetra-
(ii) Be preformed to an inside radius
tion welds.
no greater than the outside radius of
the cargo tank at the attachment loca- (Approved by the Office of Management and
tion. Budget under control number 2137–0017)
(iii) Extend at least 2 inches in each [Amdt. 178–77, 48 FR 27704, 27713, June 16,
direction from any point of attachment 1983, as amended at 49 FR 24316, June 12, 1984;
of an appurtenance or structural sup- 68 FR 75754, Dec. 31, 2003]
port member. This dimension may be
measured from the center of the at- § 178.338–5 Stiffening rings.
tached structural member.
(a) A tank is not required to be pro-
(iv) Have rounded corners, or other- vided with stiffening rings, except as
wise be shaped in a manner to mini-
prescribed in Section VIII of the ASME
mize stress concentrations on the shell
Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
or head.
chapter).
(v) Be attached by continuous fillet
(b) If a jacket is evacuated, it must
welding. Any fillet weld discontinuity
may only be for the purpose of pre- be constructed in compliance with
venting an intersection between the fil- § 178.338–1(f). Stiffening rings may be
let weld and a tank or jacket seam used to meet these requirements.
weld. [Amdt. 178–77, 48 FR 27704, June 16, 1983, as
[Amdt. 178–89, 55 FR 37057, Sept. 7, 1990, as amended at 68 FR 75754, Dec. 31, 2003]
amended by Amdt. 178–89, 56 FR 27876, June
17, 1991; 56 FR 46354, Sept. 11, 1991; 68 FR § 178.338–6 Manholes.
19281, Apr. 18, 2003; 68 FR 57633, Oct. 6, 2003; 68 (a) Each tank in oxygen service must
FR 75754, Dec. 31, 2003; 81 FR 25618, Apr. 29,
be provided with a manhole as pre-
2016]
scribed in Section VIII of the ASME
§ 178.338–4 Joints. Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
chapter).
(a) All joints in the tank, and in the (b) Each tank having a manhole must
jacket if evacuated, must be as pre-
be provided with a means of entrance
scribed in Section VIII of the ASME
and exit through the jacket, or the
chapter), except that a butt weld with jacket must be marked to indicate the
one plate edge offset is not authorized. manway location on the tank.
(b) Welding procedure and welder per- (c) A manhole with a bolted closure
formance tests must be made in ac- may not be located on the front head of
cordance with Section IX of the ASME the tank.
Code. Records of the qualification must [Amdt. 178–77, 48 FR 27704, June 16, 1983, as
be retained by the tank manufacturer amended at 49 FR 24316, June 12, 1984; 68 FR
for at least five years and must be 75754, Dec. 31, 2003]
made available, upon request, to any
duly identified representative of the
153
§ 178.338–7 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
§ 178.338–7 Openings. leaks. This requirement is met when

such piping, valves, and fittings have
(a) The inlet to the liquid product
been tested after installation with gas
discharge opening of each tank in-
or air and proved leak tight at not less
tended for flammable ladings must be
than the design pressure marked on the
at the bottom centerline of the tank.
cargo tank. This requirement is appli-
(b) If the leakage of a single valve,
cable to all hoses used in a cargo tank,
except a pressure relief valve, pressure
except that hose may be tested before
control valve, full trycock or gas phase
or after installation on the tank.
manual vent valve, would permit loss
of flammable material, an additional (6) Each valve must be suitable for
closure that is leak tight at the tank the tank design pressure at the tank
design pressure must be provided out- design service temperature.
board of such valve. (7) All fittings must be rated for the
maximum tank pressure and suitable
[Amdt. 178–77, 48 FR 27704, June 16, 1983] for the coldest temperature to which
they will be subjected in actual serv-
§ 178.338–8 Pressure relief devices,
piping, valves, and fittings. ice.
(8) All piping, valves, and fittings
(a) Pressure relief devices. Each tank must be grouped in the smallest prac-
pressure relief device must be designed, ticable space and protected from dam-
constructed, and marked in accordance age as required by § 178.338–10.
with § 173.318(b) of this subchapter. (9) When a pressure-building coil is
(b) Piping, valves, and fittings. (1) The used on a tank designed to handle oxy-
burst pressure of all piping, pipe fit- gen or flammable ladings, the vapor
tings, hoses and other pressure parts, connection to that coil must be pro-
except for pump seals and pressure re- vided with a valve or check valve as
lief devices, must be at least 4 times close to the tank shell as practicable to
the design pressure of the tank. Addi- prevent the loss of vapor from the tank
tionally, the burst pressure may not be in case of damage to the coil. The liq-
less than 4 times any higher pressure uid connection to that coil must also
to which each pipe, pipe fitting, hose or be provided with a valve.
other pressure part may be subjected
to in service. [Amdt. 178–77, 48 FR 27704, June 16, 1983, as
(2) Pipe joints must be threaded, amended by Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25019, June
welded or flanged. If threaded pipe is 12, 1989]
used, the pipe and fittings must be
§ 178.338–9 Holding time.
Schedule 80 weight or heavier. Malle-
able metals must be used in the con- (a) ‘‘Holding time’’ is the time, as de-
struction of valves and fittings. Where termined by testing, that will elapse
copper tubing is permitted, joints shall from loading until the pressure of the
be brazed or be of equally strong metal contents, under equilibrium conditions,
union type. The melting point of the reaches the level of the lowest pressure
brazing materials may not be lower control valve or pressure relief valve
than 1000 °F. The method of joining setting.
tubing may not reduce the strength of (b) Holding time test. (1) The test to
the tubing, such as by the cutting of determine holding time must be per-
threads. formed by charging the tank with a
(3) Each hose coupling must be de- cryogenic liquid having a boiling point,
signed for a pressure of at least 120 per- at a pressure of one atmosphere, abso-
cent of the hose design pressure and so lute, no lower than the design service
that there will be no leakage when con- temperature of the tank. The tank
nected. must be charged to its maximum per-
(4) Piping must be protected from mitted filling density with that liquid
damage due to thermal expansion and and stabilized to the lowest practical
contraction, jarring, and vibration. pressure, which must be equal to or
Slip joints are not authorized for this less than the pressure to be used for
purpose. loading. The cargo tank together with

(5) All piping, valves and fittings on a its contents must then be exposed to
cargo tank must be proved free from ambient temperature.
154
(2) The tank pressure and ambient q = calculated heat transfer rate to cargo
temperature must be recorded at 3- tank with lading, Btu/hr.
hour intervals until the pressure level n = normal evaporation rate (NER), which is
the rate of evaporation, determined by
of the contents reaches the set-to-dis-
the test of a test cryogenic liquid in a
charge pressure of the pressure control cargo tank maintained at a pressure of
valve or pressure relief valve with the approximately one atmosphere, absolute,
lowest setting. This total time lapse in lb/hr.
hours represents the measured holding D h = latent heat of vaporization of test fluid
time at the actual average ambient at test pressure, Btu/lb.
temperature. This measured holding ts = average temperature of outer shell dur-
time for the test cryogenic liquid must ing test, °F.
t1 = equilibrium temperature of lading at
be adjusted to an equivalent holding
maximum loading pressure, °F.
time for each cryogenic liquid that is tf = equilibrium temperature of test fluid at
to be identified on or adjacent to the one atmosphere, °F.
specification plate, at an average ambi-
ent temperature of 85 °F. This is the (ii) The rated holding time (RHT)
rated holding time (RHT). The marked must be calculated as follows:
rated holding time (MRHT) displayed RHT = [(U2 ¥ U1) W] / q
on or adjacent to the specification
plate (see § 178.338–18(c)(10)) may not ex- Where:
ceed this RHT. RHT = rated holding time, in hours
(c) Optional test regimen. (1) If more U1 and U2 = internal energy for the combined
liquid and vapor lading at the pressure
than one cargo tank is made to the offered for transportation, and the set
same design, only one cargo tank must pressure of the applicable pressure con-
be subjected to the full holding time trol valve or pressure relief valve, respec-
test at the time of manufacture. How- tively, Btu/lb.
ever, each subsequent cargo tank made W = total weight of the combined liquid and
to the same design must be perform- vapor lading in the cargo tank, pounds.
ance tested during its first trip. The q = calculated heat transfer rate to cargo
holding time determined in this test tank with lading, Btu/hr.
may not be less than 90 percent of the (iii) The MRHT (see § 178.338–18(b)(9)
marked rated holding time. This test of this subchapter) may not exceed the
must be performed in accordance with RHT.
§§ 173.318(g)(3) and 177.840(h) of this sub-
[Amdt. 178–77, 48 FR 27704, June 16, 1983; 48
chapter, regardless of the classification FR 50442, Nov. 1, 1983, as amended at 49 FR
of the cryogenic liquid. 24316, June 12, 1984; 49 FR 43965, Nov. 1, 1984;
(2) Same design. The term ‘‘same de- 59 FR 55173, Nov. 3, 1994; Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR
sign’’ as used in this section means 51340, Oct. 1, 1996; 68 FR 57634, Oct. 6, 2003; 71
cargo tanks made to the same design FR 54397, Sept. 14, 2006]
type. See § 178.320(a) for definition of
‘‘design type’’. § 178.338–10 Accident damage protec-
(3) For a cargo tank used in nonflam- tion.
mable cryogenic liquid service, in place (a) All valves, fittings, pressure relief
of the holding time tests prescribed in devices and other accessories to the
paragraph (b) of this section, the tank proper, which are not isolated
marked rated holding time (MRHT) from the tank by closed intervening
may be determined as follows: shut-off valves or check valves, must
(i) While the cargo tank is sta- be installed within the motor vehicle
tionary, the heat transfer rate must be framework or within a suitable colli-
determined by measuring the normal sion resistant guard or housing, and
evaporation rate (NER) of the test appropriate ventilation must be pro-
cryogenic liquid (preferably the lading, vided. Each pressure relief device must
where feasible) maintained at approxi- be protected so that in the event of the
mately one atmosphere. The calculated upset of the vehicle onto a hard sur-
heat transfer rate must be determined face, the device’s opening will not be
from: prevented and its discharge will not be
restricted.
q = [n(D h)(85¥t1)] / [ts ¥ tf]
(b) Each protective device or housing,
Where: and its attachment to the vehicle
155
§ 178.338–11 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
structure, must be designed to with- line must also have a manual shut-off
stand static loading in any direction valve.
that it may be loaded as a result of (c) Except for a cargo tank that is
front, rear, side, or sideswipe collision, used to transport argon, carbon diox-
or the overturn of the vehicle. The ide, helium, krypton, neon, nitrogen,
static loading shall equal twice the xenon, or mixtures thereof, each liquid
loaded weight of the tank and attach- filling and liquid discharge line must
ments. A safety factor of four, based on be provided with an on-vehicle re-
the tensile strength of the material, motely controlled self-closing shutoff
shall be used. The protective device or valve.
the housing must be made of steel at (1) If pressure from a reservoir or
least 3⁄16-inch thick, or other material from an engine-driven pump or com-
of equivalent strength. pressor is used to open this valve, the
(c) Rear-end tank protection. Rear-end control must be of fail-safe design and
tank protections devices must: spring-biased to stop the admission of
(1) Consist of at least one rear bump- such pressure into the cargo tank. If
er designed to protect the cargo tank the jacket is not evacuated, the seat of
and piping in the event of a rear-end the valve must be inside the tank, in
collision. The rear-end tank protection the opening nozzle or flange, or in a
device design must transmit the force companion flange bolted to the nozzle.
of the collision directly to the chassis If the jacket is evacuated, the re-
of the vehicle. The rear-end tank pro- motely controlled valve must be lo-
tection device and its attachments to cated as close to the tank as prac-
the chassis must be designed to with- ticable.
stand a load equal to twice the weight (2) Each remotely controlled shut off
of the loaded cargo tank and attach- valve must be provided with on-vehicle
ments, using a safety factor of four remote means of automatic closure,
based on the tensile strength of the both mechanical and thermal. One
materials used, with such load being means may be used to close more than
applied horizontally and parallel to the one remotely controlled valve. Cable
major axis of the cargo tank. The rear- linkage between closures and remote
end tank protection device dimensions operators must be corrosion resistant
must meet the requirements of § 393.86 and effective in all types of environ-
of this title and extend vertically to a ment and weather. The thermal means
height adequate to protect all valves must consist of fusible elements actu-
and fittings located at the rear of the ated at a temperature not exceeding
cargo tank from damage that could re- 121 °C (250 °F), or equivalent devices.
sult in loss of lading; or The loading/unloading connection area
(2) Conform to the requirements of is where hoses are connected to the
§ 178.345–8(b). permanent metal piping. The number
(d) Every part of the loaded cargo and location of remote operators and
tank, and any associated valve, pipe, thermal devices shall be as follows:
enclosure, or protective device or (i) On a cargo tank motor vehicle
structure (exclusive of wheel assem- over 3,500 gallons water capacity, re-
blies), must be at least 14 inches above mote means of automatic closure must
level ground. be installed at the ends of the cargo
[Amdt. 178–77, 48 FR 27705, June 16, 1983, as tank in at least two diagonally oppo-
amended at 49 FR 24316, June 12, 1984; Amdt. site locations. If the loading/unloading
178–99, 58 FR 51534, Oct. 1, 1993; 68 FR 19282, connection at the cargo tank is not in
Apr. 18, 2003; 68 FR 52371, Sept. 3, 2003] the general vicinity of one of these lo-
cations, at least one additional ther-
§ 178.338–11 Discharge control devices. mal device must be installed so that
(a) Excess-flow valves are not reheat from a fire in the loading/unload-
quired. ing connection area will activate the
(b) Each liquid filling and liquid dis- emergency control system.
charge line must be provided with a (ii) On a cargo tank motor vehicle of
shut-off valve located as close to the 3,500 gallons water capacity or less, at
tank as practicable. Unless this valve least one remote means of automatic
is manually operable at the valve, the closure must be installed on the end of
156
the cargo tank farthest away from the lowing factors. The effects of fatigue
loading/unloading connection area. At must also be considered in the calcula-
least one thermal device must be in- tions. Minimum static loadings must
stalled so that heat from a fire in the be as follows:
loading/unloading connection area will (1) For a vacuum-insulated cargo
activate the emergency control sys- tank—
tem. (i) Vertically downward of 2;
(ii) Vertically upward of 2;
[Amdt. 178–77, 48 FR 27705, June 16, 1983, as
amended by Amdt. 178–105, 59 FR 55173, Nov. (iii) Longitudinally of 2; and
3, 1994; 60 FR 17402, Apr. 5, 1995; 68 FR 19282, (iv) Laterally of 2.
Apr. 18, 2003] (2) For any other insulated cargo
tank—
§ 178.338–12 Shear section. (i) Vertically downward of 3;
Unless the valve is located in a rear (ii) Vertically upward of 2;
cabinet forward of and protected by the (iii) Longitudinally of 2; and
bumper (see § 178.338–10(c)), the design (iv) Laterally of 2.
and installation of each valve, damage (b) When a loaded tank is supported
to which could result in loss of liquid within the vacuum jacket by struc-
or vapor, must incorporate a shear sec- tural members, the design calculations
tion or breakage groove adjacent to, for the tank and its structural mem-
and outboard of, the valve. The shear bers must be based on a safety factor of
section or breakage groove must yield four and the tensile strength of the ma-
or break under strain without damage terial at ambient temperature. The en-
to the valve that would allow the loss hanced tensile strength of the material
of liquid or vapor. The protection spec- at actual operating temperature may
ified in § 178.338–10 is not a substitute be substituted for the tensile strength
for a shear section or breakage groove. at ambient temperature to the extent
recognized in the ASME Code for static
[Amdt. 178–77, 49 FR 24316, June 12, 1984] loadings. Static loadings must take
§ 178.338–13 Supporting and anchor- into consideration the weight of the
ing. tank and the structural members when
the tank is filled to the design weight
(a) On a cargo tank motor vehicle de- of lading (see Appendix G of Section
signed and constructed so that the VIII, Division 1 of the ASME Code),
cargo tank constitutes in whole or in multiplied by the following factors.
part the structural member used in
Static loadings must take into consid-
place of a motor vehicle frame, the
eration the weight of the tank and the
cargo tank or the jacket must be sup-
structural members when the tank is
ported by external cradles or by load
filled to the design weight of lading
rings. For a cargo tank mounted on a
(see appendix G in Section VIII of the
motor vehicle frame, the tank or jack-
ASME Code), multiplied by the fol-
et must be supported by external cra-
lowing factors. When load rings in the
dles, load rings, or longitudinal mem-
jacket are used for supporting the
bers. If cradles are used, they must
tank, they must be designed to carry
subtend at least 120 degrees of the
cargo tank circumference. The design the fully loaded tank at the specified
calculations for the supports and load- static loadings, plus external pressure.
bearing tank or jacket, and the support Minimum static loadings must be as
attachments must include beam stress, follows:
shear stress, torsion stress, bending (1) Vertically downward of 2;
moment, and acceleration stress for (2) Vertically upward of 11⁄2;
the loaded vehicle as a unit, using a (3) Longitudinally of 11⁄2; and, (4) Lat-
safety factor of four, based on the ten- erally of 11⁄2.
sile strength of the material, and static [68 FR 19282, Apr. 18, 2003, as amended at 68
loading that uses the weight of the FR 75754, Dec. 31, 2003]
cargo tank and its attachments when
filled to the design weight of the lading § 178.338–14 Gauging devices.
(see appendix G in Section VIII of the (a) Liquid level gauging devices. (1) Un-
ASME Code) (IBR, see § 171.7 of this less a cargo tank is intended to be
subchapter), multiplied by the fol- filled by weight, it must be equipped
157
§ 178.338–15 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
with one or more gauging devices, remove all foreign material in accord-
which accurately indicate the max- ance with CGA G–4.1 (IBR, see § 171.7 of
imum permitted liquid level at the this subchapter). All loose particles
loading pressure, in order to provide a from fabrication, such as weld beads,
minimum of two percent outage below dirt, grinding wheel debris, and other
the inlet of the pressure control valve loose materials, must be removed prior
or pressure relief valve at the condition to the final closure of the manhole of
of incipient opening of that valve. A the tank. Chemical or solvent cleaning
fixed-length dip tube, a fixed trycock with a material compatible with the
line, or a differential pressure liquid intending lading must be performed to
level gauge must be used as the pri- remove any contaminants likely to
mary control for filling. Other gauging react with the lading.
devices, except gauge glasses, may be [68 FR 75755, Dec. 31, 2003]
used, but not as the primary control
for filling. § 178.338–16 Inspection and testing.
(2) The design pressure of each liquid
(a) General. The material of construc-
level gauging device must be at least
tion of a tank and its appurtenances
that of the tank.
(3) If a fixed length dip tube or must be inspected for conformance to
trycock line gauging device is used, it Section VIII of the ASME Code (IBR,
must consist of a pipe or tube of small see § 171.7 of this subchapter). The tank
diameter equipped with a valve at or must be subjected to either a hydro-
near the jacket and extending into the static or pneumatic test. The test pres-
cargo tank to a specified filling height. sure must be one and one-half times
The fixed height at which the tube ends the sum of the design pressure, plus
in the cargo tank must be such that static head of lading, plus 101.3 kPa
the device will function when the liq- (14.7 psi) if subjected to external vacu-
um, except that for tanks constructed
uid reaches the maximum level per-
in accordance with Part UHT in Sec-
mitted in loading.
tion VIII of the ASME Code the test
(4) The liquid level gauging device
pressure must be twice the design pres-
used as a primary control for filling
sure.
must be designed and installed to accu-
(b) Additional requirements for pneu-
rately indicate the maximum filling
matic test. A pneumatic test may be
level at the point midway of the tank
used in place of the hydrostatic test.
both longitudinally and laterally.
Due regard for protection of all per-
(b) Pressure gauges. Each cargo tank
sonnel should be taken because of the
must be provided with a suitable pres-
potential hazard involved in a pneu-
sure gauge indicating the lading pres-
matic test. The pneumatic test pres-
sure and located on the front of the
sure in the tank must be reached by
jacket so it can be read by the driver in gradually increasing the pressure to
the rear view mirror. Each gauge must one-half of the test pressure. There-
have a reference mark at the cargo after, the test pressure must be in-
tank design pressure or the set pres- creased in steps of approximately one-
sure of the pressure relief valve or pres- tenth of the test pressure until the re-
sure control valve, whichever is lowest. quired test pressure has been reached.
(c) Orifices. All openings for dip tube Then the pressure must be reduced to a
gauging devices and pressure gauges in value equal to four-fifths of the test
flammable cryogenic liquid service pressure and held for a sufficient time
must be restricted at or inside the to permit inspection of the cargo tank
jacket by orifices no larger than 0.060- for leaks.
inch diameter. Trycock lines, if pro- (c) Weld inspection. All tank shell or
vided, may not be greater than 1⁄2-inch head welds subject to pressure shall be
nominal pipe size. radiographed in accordance with Sec-
[Amdt. 178–77, 48 FR 27706, June 16, 1983, as tion VIII of the ASME Code. A tank
amended at 49 FR 24317, June 12, 1984] which has been subjected to inspection
by the magnetic particle method, the
§ 178.338–15 Cleanliness. liquid penetrant method, or any meth-

A cargo tank constructed for oxygen od involving a material deposit on the
service must be thoroughly cleaned to interior tank surface, must be cleaned
158
to remove any such residue by scrub- tank by brazing, welding, or other suit-
bing or equally effective means, and all able means on the left side near the
such residue and cleaning solution front, in a place accessible for inspec-
must be removed from the tank prior tion. If the specification plate is at-
to final closure of the tank. tached directly to the cargo tank wall
(d) Defect repair. All cracks and other by welding, it must be welded to the
defects must be repaired as prescribed tank before the cargo tank is postweld
in Section VIII of the ASME Code. The heat treated.
welder and the welding procedure must (1) The plates must be legibly marked
be qualified in accordance with Section by stamping, embossing, or other
IX of the ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of means of forming letters into the
this subchapter). After repair, the tank metal of the plate, with the informa-
must again be postweld heat-treated, if tion required in paragraphs (b) and (c)
such heat treatment was previously of this section, in addition to that re-
performed, and the repaired areas must quired by Section VIII of the ASME
be retested. Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
(e) Verification must be made of the chapter), in characters at least 3⁄16 inch
interior cleanliness of a tank con- high (parenthetical abbreviations may
structed for oxygen service by means be used). All plates must be maintained
that assure that all contaminants that in a legible condition.
are likely to react with the lading have
(2) Each insulated cargo tank must
been removed as required by § 178.338–
have additional plates, as described, at-
15.
tached to the jacket in the location
[Amdt. 178–77, 48 FR 27706, June 16, 1983, as specified unless the specification plate
amended at 49 FR 24317, June 12, 1984; 49 FR is attached to the chassis and has the
42736, Oct. 24, 1984; 68 FR 75755, Dec. 31, 2003] information required in paragraphs (b)
§ 178.338–17 Pumps and compressors. and (c) of this section.
(3) The information required for both
(a) Liquid pumps and gas compressors, the name and specification plate may
if used, must be of suitable design, ade- be displayed on a single plate. If the in-
quately protected against breakage by formation required by this section is
collision, and kept in good condition. displayed on a plate required by Sec-
They may be driven by motor vehicle
tion VIII of the ASME Code, the infor-
power take-off or other mechanical,
mation need not be repeated on the
electrical, or hydraulic means. Unless
name and specification plates.
they are of the centrifugal type, they
shall be equipped with suitable pres- (4) The specification plate may be at-
sure actuated by-pass valves permit- tached to the cargo tank motor vehicle
ting flow from discharge to suction to chassis rail by brazing, welding, or
the tank. other suitable means on the left side
(b) A valve or fitting made of alu- near the front head, in a place acces-
minum with internal rubbing or abrad- sible for inspection. If the specification
ing aluminum parts that may come in plate is attached to the chassis rail,
contact with oxygen (cryogenic liquid) then the cargo tank serial number as-
may not be installed on any cargo tank signed by the cargo tank manufacturer
used to transport oxygen (cryogenic must be included on the plate.
liquid) unless the parts are anodized in (b) Name plate. The following infor-
accordance with ASTM B 580 (IBR, see mation must be marked on the name
§ 171.7 of this subchapter). plate in accordance with this section:
(1) DOT-specification number MC 338
[Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25020, June 12, 1989, as
amended at 55 FR 37058, Sept. 7, 1990; 67 FR
(DOT MC 338).
61016, Sept. 27, 2002; 68 FR 75755, Dec. 31, 2003] (2) Original test date (Orig, Test
Date).
§ 178.338–18 Marking. (3) MAWP in psig.
(a) General. Each cargo tank certified (4) Cargo tank test pressure (Test P),
after October 1, 2004 must have a corro- in psig.
sion-resistant metal name plate (5) Cargo tank design temperature

(ASME Plate) and specification plate (Design Temp. Range) ll °F to ll
permanently attached to the cargo °F.
159
§ 178.338–19 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(6) Nominal capacity (Water Cap.), in (10) Marked rated holding time for at
pounds. least one cryogenic liquid, in hours,
(7) Maximum design density of lading and the name of that cryogenic liquid
(Max. Lading density), in pounds per (MRHT ll hrs, name of cryogenic liq-
gallon. uid). Marked rated holding marking for
(8) Material specification number— additional cryogenic liquids may be
shell (Shell matl, yyy * * *), where displayed on or adjacent to the speci-
‘‘yyy’’ is replaced by the alloy designa- fication plate.
tion and ‘‘* * *’’ is replaced by the (11) Cargo tank serial number (CT se-
alloy type. rial), as assigned by cargo tank manu-
(9) Material specification number— facturer, if applicable.
heads (Head matl. yyy * * *), where
‘‘yyy’’ is replaced by the alloy designa- NOTE 1 TO PARAGRAPH (c): See § 173.315(a) of
this chapter regarding water capacity.
tion and ‘‘* * *’’ by the alloy type.
NOTE 2 TO PARAGRAPH (c): When the shell
NOTE: When the shell and heads materials and head materials are the same thickness,
are the same thickness, they may be com- they may be combined (Shell & head matl,
bined, (Shell & head matl, yyy * * *). yyy***).
(10) Weld material (Weld matl.). (d) The design weight of lading used
(11) Minimum Thickness-shell (Min. in determining the loading in §§ 178.338–
Shell-thick), in inches. When minimum 3 (b), 178.338–10 (b) and (c), and 178.338–
shell thicknesses are not the same for 13 (b), must be shown as the maximum
different areas, show (top ll, side weight of lading marking required by
ll, bottom ll, in inches). paragraph (c) of this section.
(12) Minimum thickness-heads (Min
heads thick.), in inches. [68 FR 19283, Apr. 18, 2003, as amended at 68
FR 57634, Oct. 6, 2003; 68 FR 75755, Dec. 31,
(13) Manufactured thickness-shell 2003]
(Mfd. Shell thick.), top ll, side ll,
bottom ll, in inches. (Required when § 178.338–19 Certification.
additional thickness is provided for
corrosion allowance.) (a) At or before the time of delivery,
(14) Manufactured thickness-heads the manufacturer of a cargo tank
(Mfd. Heads thick.), in inches. (Re- motor vehicle shall furnish to the
quired when additional thickness is owner of the completed vehicle the fol-
provided for corrosion allowance.) lowing:
(15) Exposed surface area, in square (1) The tank manufacturer’s data re-
feet. port as required by the ASME Code
(c) Specification plate. The following (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter), and
information must be marked on the a certificate bearing the manufactur-
specification plate in accordance with er’s vehicle serial number stating that
this section: the completed cargo tank motor vehi-
(1) Cargo tank motor vehicle manu- cle conforms to all applicable require-
facturer (CTMV mfr.). ments of Specification MC 338, includ-
(2) Cargo tank motor vehicle certifi- ing Section VIII of the ASME Code
cation date (CTMV cert. date). (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter) in
(3) Cargo tank manufacturer (CT effect on the date (month, year) of cer-
mfr.). tification. The registration numbers of
(4) Cargo tank date of manufacture the manufacturer, the Design Certi-
(CT date of mfr.), month and year. fying Engineer, and the Registered In-
(5) Maximum weight of lading (Max. spector, as appropriate, must appear on
Payload), in pounds. the certificates (see subpart F, part 107
(6) Maximum loading rate in gallons in subchapter B of this chapter).
per minute (Max. Load rate, GPM). (2) A photograph, pencil rub, or other
(7) Maximum unloading rate in gal- facsimile of the plates required by
lons per minute (Max Unload rate). paragraphs (a) and (b) of § 178.338-18.
(8) Lining materials (Lining), if ap- (b) In the case of a cargo tank vehicle
plicable. manufactured in two or more stages,
(9) ‘‘Insulated for oxygen service’’ or each manufacturer who performs a

‘‘Not insulated for oxygen service’’ as manufacturing operation on the incom-
appropriate. plete vehicle or portion thereof shall
160
furnish to the succeeding manufac- ments of the applicable specification

turer, at or before the time of delivery, contained in §§ 178.346, 178.347 or 178.348.
a certificate covering the particular (b) All specification requirements are
operation performed by that manufac- minimum requirements.
turer, and any certificates received (c) Definitions. See § 178.320(a) for the
from previous manufacturers, Reg- definition of certain terms used in
istered Inspectors, and Design Certi- §§ 178.345, 178.346, 178.347, and 178.348. In
fying Engineers. The certificates must addition, the following definitions
include sufficient sketches, drawings, apply to §§ 178.345, 178.346, 178.347, and
and other information to indicate the 178.348:
location, make, model and size of each Appurtenance means any cargo tank
valve and the arrangement of all piping accessory attachment that has no lad-
associated with the tank. Each certifi- ing retention or containment function
cate must be signed by an official of and provides no structural support to
the manufacturing firm responsible for
the cargo tank.
the portion of the complete cargo tank
Baffle means a non-liquid-tight trans-
vehicle represented thereby, such as
basic tank fabrication, insulation, verse partition device that deflects,
jacket, or piping. The final manufac- checks or regulates fluid motion in a
turer shall furnish the owner with all tank.
certificates, as well as the documents Bulkhead means a liquid-tight trans-
required by paragraph (a) of this sec- verse closure at the ends of or between
tion. cargo tanks.
(c) The owner shall retain the data Charging line means a hose, tube,
report, certificates, and related papers pipe, or similar device used to pres-
throughout his ownership of the cargo surize a tank with material other than
tank. In the event of change of owner- the lading.
ship, the prior owner shall retain non- Companion flange means one of two
fading photographically reproduced mating flanges where the flange faces
copies of these documents for at least are in contact or separated only by a
one year. Each operator using the thin leak sealing gasket and are se-
cargo tank vehicle, if not the owner cured to one another by bolts or
thereof, shall obtain a copy of the data clamps.
report and the certificate or certifi- Connecting structure means the struc-
cates and retain them during the time ture joining two cargo tanks.
he uses the cargo tank and for at least Constructed and certified in conform-
one year thereafter. ance with the ASME Code means the
(Approved by the Office of Management and cargo tank is constructed and stamped
Budget under control number 2137–0017) in accordance with the ASME Code,
and is inspected and certified by an Au-
[Amdt. 178–77, 48 FR 27707, 27713, June 16,
1983, as amended by Amdt. 178–89, 55 FR
thorized Inspector.
37058, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. 178–99, 58 FR 51534, Constructed in accordance with the
Oct. 1, 1993; 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997; 68 FR ASME Code means the cargo tank is
75755, Dec. 31, 2003] constructed in accordance with the
ASME Code with the authorized excep-
§§ 178.340–178.343 [Reserved] tions (see §§ 178.346, 178.347, and 178.348)
and is inspected and certified by a Reg-
§ 178.345 General design and construc- istered Inspector.
tion requirements applicable to
Specification DOT 406 (§ 178.346), External self-closing stop-valve means
DOT 407 (§ 178.347), and DOT 412 a self-closing stop-valve designed so
(§ 178.348) cargo tank motor vehi- that the self-stored energy source is lo-
cles. cated outside the cargo tank and the
welded flange.
§ 178.345–1 General requirements. Extreme dynamic loading means the
(a) Specification DOT 406, DOT 407 maximum single-acting loading a cargo
and DOT 412 cargo tank motor vehicles tank motor vehicle may experience
must conform to the requirements of during its expected life, excluding acci-
this section in addition to the require- dent loadings.
161
§ 178.345–1 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
Flange means the structural ring for Outlet stop-valve means the stop-valve
guiding or attachment of a pipe or fit- at the cargo tank loading/unloading
ting with another flange (companion outlet.
flange), pipe, fitting or other attach- Pipe coupling means a fitting with in-
ment. ternal threads on both ends.
Inspection pressure means the pres- Rear bumper means the structure de-
sure used to determine leak tightness signed to prevent a vehicle or object
of the cargo tank when testing with from under-riding the rear of a motor
pneumatic pressure. vehicle. See § 393.86 of this title.
Internal self-closing stop-valve means a Rear-end tank protection device means
self-closing stop-valve designed so that the structure designed to protect a
the self-stored energy source is located cargo tank and any lading retention
inside the cargo tank or cargo tank piping or devices in case of a rear end
sump, or within the welded flange, and collision.
the valve seat is located within the Sacrificial device means an element,
cargo tank or within one inch of the such as a shear section, designed to fail
external face of the welded flange or under a load in order to prevent dam-
sump of the cargo tank. age to any lading retention part or de-
Lading means the hazardous material vice. The device must break under
contained in a cargo tank. strain at no more than 70 percent of
Loading/unloading connection means the strength of the weakest piping ele-
the fitting in the loading/unloading ment between the cargo tank and the
line farthest from the loading/unload- sacrificial device. Operation of the sac-
ing outlet to which the loading/unload- rificial device must leave the remaining
ing hose or device is attached. piping and its attachment to the cargo
Loading/unloading outlet means the tank intact and capable of retaining
cargo tank outlet used for normal load- lading.
ing/unloading operations.
Self-closing stop-valve means a stop-
Loading/unloading stop-valve means
valve held in the closed position by
the stop valve farthest from the cargo
means of self-stored energy, which
tank loading/unloading outlet to which
opens only by application of an exter-
the loading/unloading connection is at-
nal force and which closes when the ex-
tached.
ternal force is removed.
MAWP. See § 178.320(a).
Multi-specification cargo tank motor ve- Shear section means a sacrificial de-
hicle means a cargo tank motor vehicle vice fabricated in such a manner as to
equipped with two or more cargo tanks abruptly reduce the wall thickness of
the adjacent piping or valve material
fabricated to more than one cargo tank
by at least 30 percent.
specification.
Normal operating loading means the Shell means the circumferential por-
loading a cargo tank motor vehicle tion of a cargo tank defined by the
may be expected to experience rou- basic design radius or radii excluding
tinely in operation. the closing heads.
Nozzle means the subassembly con- Stop-valve means a valve that stops
sisting of a pipe or tubular section with the flow of lading.
or without a welded or forged flange on Sump means a protrusion from the
one end. bottom of a cargo tank shell designed
Outlet means any opening in the shell to facilitate complete loading and un-
or head of a cargo tank, (including the loading of lading.
means for attaching a closure), except Tank means a container, consisting
that the following are not outlets: A of a shell and heads, that forms a pres-
threaded opening securely closed dur- sure tight vessel having openings de-
ing transportation with a threaded signed to accept pressure tight fittings
plug or a threaded cap, a flanged open- or closures, but excludes any appur-
ing securely closed during transpor- tenances, reinforcements, fittings, or
tation with a bolted or welded blank closures.
flange, a manhole, or gauging devices, Test pressure means the pressure to

thermometer wells, and safety relief which a tank is subjected to determine
devices. pressure integrity.
162
Toughness of material means the capa- tions of this title, are incorporated
bility of a material to absorb the en- into these specifications.
ergy represented by the area under the (h) Any additional requirements pre-
stress strain curve (indicating the en- scribed in part 173 of this subchapter
ergy absorbed per unit volume of the that pertain to the transportation of a
material) up to the point of rupture. specific lading are incorporated into
Vacuum cargo tank means a cargo these specifications.
tank that is loaded by reducing the (i) Cargo tank motor vehicle composed
pressure in the cargo tank to below at- of multiple cargo tanks. (1) A cargo tank
mospheric pressure. motor vehicle composed of more than
Variable specification cargo tank one cargo tank may be constructed
means a cargo tank that is constructed with the cargo tanks made to the same
in accordance with one specification, specification or to different specifica-
tions. Each cargo tank must conform
but which may be altered to meet an-
in all respects with the specification
other specification by changing relief
for which it is certified.
device, closures, lading discharge de-
(2) The strength of the connecting
vices, and other lading retention de-
structure joining multiple cargo tanks
vices. in a cargo tank motor vehicle must
Void means the space between tank meet the structural design require-
heads or bulkheads and a connecting ments in § 178.345–3. Any void within
structure. the connecting structure must be
Welded flange means a flange at- equipped with a drain located on the
tached to the tank by a weld joining bottom centerline that is accessible
the tank shell to the cylindrical outer and kept open at all times. For carbon
surface of the flange, or by a fillet weld steel, self-supporting cargo tanks, the
joining the tank shell to a flange drain configuration may consist of a
shaped to fit the shell contour. single drain of at least 1.0 inch diame-
(d) A manufacturer of a cargo tank ter, or two or more drains of at least
must hold a current ASME certificate 0.5 inch diameter, 6.0 inches apart, one
of authorization and must be registered of which is located as close to the bot-
with the Department in accordance tom centerline as practicable. Vapors
with part 107, subpart F of this chapter. trapped in a void within the connecting
(e) All construction must be certified structure must be allowed to escape to
by an Authorized Inspector or by a the atmosphere either through the
Registered Inspector as applicable to drain or a separate vent.
the cargo tank. (j) Variable specification cargo tank. A
(f) Each cargo tank must be designed cargo tank that may be physically al-
and constructed in conformance with tered to conform to another cargo tank
the requirements of the applicable specification must have the required
cargo tank specification. Each DOT 412 physical alterations to convert from
cargo tank with a ‘‘MAWP’’ greater one specification to another clearly in-
than 15 psig, and each DOT 407 cargo dicated on the variable specification
tank with a maximum allowable work- plate.
ing pressure greater than 35 psig must [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25020, June 12, 1989, as
be ‘‘constructed and certified in con- amended at 55 FR 37058, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt.
formance with Section VIII of the 178–105, 59 FR 55173, Nov. 3, 1994; Amdt. 178–
ASME Code’’ (IBR, see § 171.7 of this 118, 61 FR 51340, Oct. 1, 1996; 66 FR 45387,
45389, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 19283, Apr. 18, 2003;
subchapter) except as limited or modi- 68 FR 52371, Sept. 3, 2003; 68 FR 75755, Dec. 31,
fied by the applicable cargo tank speci- 2003; 70 FR 56099, Sept. 23, 2005; 76 FR 43532,
fication. Other cargo tanks must be July 20, 2011]
‘‘constructed in accordance with Sec-
tion VIII of the ASME Code,’’ except as § 178.345–2 Material and material
limited or modified by the applicable thickness.
cargo tank specification. (a) All material for shell, heads,
(g) Requirements relating to parts bulkheads, and baffles must conform to
and accessories on motor vehicles, Section II of the ASME Code (IBR, see
which are contained in part 393 of the § 171.7 of this subchapter) except as fol-
Federal Motor Carrier Safety Regula- lows:
163
§ 178.345–3 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(1) The following steels are also au- tack by the lading. The lining material
thorized for cargo tanks ‘‘constructed must be bonded or attached by other
in accordance with the ASME Code’’, appropriate means to the cargo tank
Section VIII. wall and must be imperforate when ap-
ASTM A 569 plied. Any joint or seam in the lining
ASTM A 570 must be made by fusing the materials
ASTM A 572 together, or by other satisfactory
ASTM A 622 means.
ASTM A 656
ASTM A 715 [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25021, June 12, 1989, as
ASTM A 1008/ A 1008M, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M amended at 55 FR 37059, Sept. 7, 1990; 56 FR
27876, June 17, 1991; Amdt. 178–97, 57 FR 45465,
(2) Aluminum alloys suitable for fu-
Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR 51341, Oct.
sion welding and conforming with the
1, 1996; 68 FR 19283, Apr. 18, 2003; 68 FR 75755,
0, H32 or H34 tempers of one of the fol- Dec. 31, 2003; 70 FR 34076, June 13, 2005]
lowing ASTM specifications may be
used for cargo tanks ‘‘constructed in § 178.345–3 Structural integrity.
accordance with the ASME Code’’:
(a) General requirements and accept-
ASTM B–209 Alloy 5052 ance criteria. (1) The maximum cal-
ASTM B–209 Alloy 5086
ASTM B–209 Alloy 5154 culated design stress at any point in
ASTM B–209 Alloy 5254 the cargo tank wall may not exceed the
ASTM B–209 Alloy 5454 maximum allowable stress value pre-
ASTM B–209 Alloy 5652 scribed in Section VIII of the ASME
All heads, bulkheads and baffles must
chapter), or 25 percent of the tensile
be of 0 temper (annealed) or stronger
tempers. All shell materials shall be of strength of the material used at design
H 32 or H 34 tempers except that the conditions.
lower ultimate strength tempers may (2) The relevant physical properties
be used if the minimum shell of the materials used in each cargo
thicknesses in the tables are increased tank may be established either by a
in inverse proportion to the lesser ulti- certified test report from the material
mate strength. manufacturer or by testing in conform-
(b) Minimum thickness. The minimum ance with a recognized national stand-
thickness for the shell and heads (or ard. In either case, the ultimate tensile
baffles and bulkheads when used as strength of the material used in the de-
tank reinforcement) must be no less sign may not exceed 120 percent of the
than that determined under criteria for minimum ultimate tensile strength
minimum thickness specified in specified in either the ASME Code or
§ 178.320(a). the ASTM standard to which the mate-
(c) Corrosion or abrasion protection. rial is manufactured.
When required by 49 CFR part 173 for a (3) The maximum design stress at
particular lading, a cargo tank or a any point in the cargo tank must be
part thereof, subject to thinning by
calculated separately for the loading
corrosion or mechanical abrasion due
conditions described in paragraphs (b)
to the lading, must be protected by
and (c) of this section. Alternate test
providing the tank or part of the tank
with a suitable increase in thickness of or analytical methods, or a combina-
material, a lining or some other suit- tion thereof, may be used in place of
able method of protection. the procedures described in paragraphs
(1) Corrosion allowance. Material (b) and (c) of this section, if the meth-
added for corrosion allowance need not ods are accurate and verifiable. TTMA
be of uniform thickness if different RP 96–01, Structural Integrity of DOT
rates of attack can reasonably be ex- 406, DOT 407, and DOT 412 Cylindrical
pected for various areas of the cargo Cargo Tanks, may be used as guidance
tank. in performing the calculations.
(2) Lining. Lining material must con- (4) Corrosion allowance material may
sist of a nonporous, homogeneous ma- not be included to satisfy any of the

terial not less elastic than the parent design calculation requirements of this
metal and substantially immune to at- section.
164
(b) ASME Code design and construc- stress at any point) must be deter-
tion. The static design and construc- mined by the following formula:
tion of each cargo tank must be in ac- S = 0.5(Sy + SX) ± [0.25(Sy ¥ SX)2 + SS2]0.5
cordance with Section VIII of the
ASME Code. The cargo tank design Where:
must include calculation of stresses (i) S = effective stress at any given
generated by the MAWP, the weight of point under the combination of static
the lading, the weight of structures and normal operating loadings that can
supported by the cargo tank wall and occur at the same time, in psi.
the effect of temperature gradients re- (ii) Sy = circumferential stress gen-
sulting from lading and ambient tem- erated by the MAWP and external pres-
perature extremes. When dissimilar sure, when applicable, plus static head,
materials are used, their thermal coef- in psi.
ficients must be used in the calculation (iii) Sx = The following net longitu-
of thermal stresses. dinal stress generated by the following
(1) Stress concentrations in tension, static and normal operating loading
bending and torsion which occur at conditions, in psi:
pads, cradles, or other supports must (A) The longitudinal stresses result-
be considered in accordance with ap- ing from the MAWP and external pres-
pendix G in Section VIII of the ASME sure, when applicable, plus static head,
Code. in combination with the bending stress
(2) Longitudinal compressive buck- generated by the static weight of the
ling stress for ASME certified vessels fully loaded cargo tank motor vehicle,
must be calculated using paragraph all structural elements, equipment and
UG–23(b) in Section VIII of the ASME appurtenances supported by the cargo
Code. For cargo tanks not required to tank wall;
be certified in accordance with the (B) The tensile or compressive stress
ASME Code, compressive buckling resulting from normal operating longi-
stress may be calculated using alter- tudinal acceleration or deceleration. In
native analysis methods which are ac- each case, the forces applied must be
curate and verifiable. When alternative 0.35 times the vertical reaction at the
methods are used, calculations must suspension assembly, applied at the
include both the static loads described road surface, and as transmitted to the
in this paragraph and the dynamic cargo tank wall through the suspension
loads described in paragraph (c) of this assembly of a trailer during decelera-
section. tion; or the horizontal pivot of the
(3) Cargo tank designers and manu- truck tractor or converter dolly fifth
facturers must consider all of the con- wheel, or the drawbar hinge on the
ditions specified in § 173.33(c) of this fixed dolly during acceleration; or an-
subchapter when matching a cargo choring and support members of a
tank’s performance characteristic to truck during acceleration and decelera-
the characteristic of each lading trans- tion, as applicable. The vertical reac-
ported. tion must be calculated based on the
(c) Shell design. Shell stresses result- static weight of the fully loaded cargo
ing from static or dynamic loadings, or tank motor vehicle, all structural ele-
combinations thereof, are not uniform ments, equipment and appurtenances
throughout the cargo tank motor vehi- supported by the cargo tank wall. The
cle. The vertical, longitudinal, and lat- following loadings must be included:
eral normal operating loadings can (1) The axial load generated by a
occur simultaneously and must be decelerative force;
combined. The vertical, longitudinal (2) The bending moment generated by
and lateral extreme dynamic loadings a decelerative force;
occur separately and need not be com- (3) The axial load generated by an ac-
bined. celerative force; and
(1) Normal operating loadings. The fol- (4) The bending moment generated by
lowing procedure addresses stress in an accelerative force; and
the cargo tank shell resulting from (C) The tensile or compressive stress
normal operating loadings. The effec- generated by the bending moment re-
tive stress (the maximum principal sulting from normal operating vertical
165
§ 178.345–3 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
accelerative force equal to 0.35 times (D) The torsional shear stress gen-
the vertical reaction at the suspension erated by the same lateral forces as de-
assembly of a trailer; or the horizontal scribed in paragraph (c)(1)(iv)(C) of this
pivot of the upper coupler (fifth wheel) section.
or turntable; or anchoring and support (2) Extreme dynamic loadings. The fol-
members of a truck, as applicable. The lowing procedure addresses stress in
vertical reaction must be calculated the cargo tank shell resulting from ex-
based on the static weight of the fully treme dynamic loadings. The effective
loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all stress (the maximum principal stress
structural elements, equipment and ap- at any point) must be determined by
purtenances supported by the cargo the following formula:
tank wall. S = 0.5(Sy + Sx) ±[0.25(Sy ¥ Sx)2 + SS2]0.5
(iv) SS = The following shear stresses
generated by the following static and Where:
normal operating loading conditions, (i) S = effective stress at any given
in psi: point under a combination of static
(A) The static shear stress resulting and extreme dynamic loadings that can
from the vertical reaction at the sus- occur at the same time, in psi.
pension assembly of a trailer, and the (ii) Sy = circumferential stress gen-
horizontal pivot of the upper coupler erated by MAWP and external pressure,
(fifth wheel) or turntable; or anchoring when applicable, plus static head, in
and support members of a truck, as ap- psi.
plicable. The vertical reaction must be (iii) Sx = the following net longitu-
calculated based on the static weight dinal stress generated by the following
of the fully loaded cargo tank motor static and extreme dynamic loading
vehicle, all structural elements, equip- conditions, in psi:
ment and appurtenances supported by (A) The longitudinal stresses result-
the cargo tank wall; ing from the MAWP and external pres-
(B) The vertical shear stress gen- sure, when applicable, plus static head,
erated by a normal operating accelera- in combination with the bending stress
tive force equal to 0.35 times the generated by the static weight of the
vertical reaction at the suspension as- fully loaded cargo tank motor vehicle,
sembly of a trailer; or the horizontal all structural elements, equipment and
pivot of the upper coupler (fifth wheel) appurtenances supported by the tank
or turntable; or anchoring and support wall;
members of a truck, as applicable. The (B) The tensile or compressive stress
vertical reaction must be calculated resulting from extreme longitudinal
based on the static weight of the fully acceleration or deceleration. In each
loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all case the forces applied must be 0.7
structural elements, equipment and ap- times the vertical reaction at the sus-
purtenances supported by the cargo pension assembly, applied at the road
tank wall; surface, and as transmitted to the
(C) The lateral shear stress generated cargo tank wall through the suspension
by a normal operating lateral accelera- assembly of a trailer during decelera-
tive force equal to 0.2 times the tion; or the horizontal pivot of the
vertical reaction at each suspension as- truck tractor or converter dolly fifth
sembly of a trailer, applied at the road wheel, or the drawbar hinge on the
surface, and as transmitted to the fixed dolly during acceleration; or the
cargo tank wall through the suspension anchoring and support members of a
assembly of a trailer, and the hori- truck during acceleration and decelera-
zontal pivot of the upper coupler (fifth tion, as applicable. The vertical reac-
wheel) or turntable; or anchoring and tion must be calculated based on the
support members of a truck, as applica- static weight of the fully loaded cargo
ble. The vertical reaction must be cal- tank motor vehicle, all structural ele-
culated based on the static weight of ments, equipment and appurtenances
the fully loaded cargo tank motor vehi- supported by the cargo tank wall. The
cle, all structural elements, equipment following loadings must be included:

and appurtenances supported by the (1) The axial load generated by a
cargo tank wall; and decelerative force;
166
(2) The bending moment generated by table; or anchoring and support mem-
a decelerative force; bers of a truck, as applicable. The
(3) The axial load generated by an ac- vertical reaction must be calculated
celerative force; and based on the static weight of the fully
(4) The bending moment generated by loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all
an accelerative force; and structural elements, equipment and ap-
(C) The tensile or compressive stress purtenances supported by the cargo
generated by the bending moment re- tank wall; and
sulting from an extreme vertical accel- (D) The torsional shear stress gen-
erative force equal to 0.7 times the erated by the same lateral forces as de-
vertical reaction at the suspension as- scribed in paragraph (c)(2)(iv)(C) of this
sembly of a trailer, and the horizontal section.
pivot of the upper coupler (fifth wheel) (d) In no case may the minimum
or turntable; or the anchoring and sup- thickness of the cargo tank shells and
port members of a truck, as applicable. heads be less than that prescribed in
The vertical reaction must be cal- § 178.346–2, § 178.347–2, or § 178.348–2, as
culated based on the static weight of applicable.
the fully loaded cargo tank motor vehi- (e) For a cargo tank mounted on a
cle, all structural elements, equipment frame or built with integral structural
and appurtenances supported by the supports, the calculation of effective
cargo tank wall. stresses for the loading conditions in
(iv) SS = The following shear stresses paragraph (c) of this section may in-
generated by static and extreme dy- clude the structural contribution of
namic loading conditions, in psi: the frame or the integral structural
(A) The static shear stress resulting supports.
from the vertical reaction at the sus- (f) The design, construction, and in-
pension assembly of a trailer, and the stallation of an attachment, appur-
horizontal pivot of the upper coupler tenance to a cargo tank, structural
(fifth wheel) or turntable; or anchoring support member between the cargo
and support members of a truck, as ap- tank and the vehicle or suspension
plicable. The vertical reaction must be component must conform to the fol-
calculated based on the static weight lowing requirements:
of the fully loaded cargo tank motor (1) Structural members, the suspen-
vehicle, all structural elements, equip- sion sub-frame, accident protection
ment and appurtenances supported by structures and external circumferen-
the cargo tank wall; tial reinforcement devices must be
(B) The vertical shear stress gen- used as sites for attachment of appur-
erated by an extreme vertical accelera- tenances and other accessories to the
tive force equal to 0.7 times the cargo tank, when practicable.
vertical reaction at the suspension as- (2) A lightweight attachment to a
sembly of a trailer, and the horizontal cargo tank wall such as a conduit clip,
pivot of the upper coupler (fifth wheel) brake line clip, skirting structure,
or turntable; or anchoring and support lamp mounting bracket, or placard
members of a truck, as applicable. The holder must be of a construction hav-
vertical reaction must be calculated ing lesser strength than the cargo tank
based on the static weight of the fully wall materials and may not be more
loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all than 72 percent of the thickness of the
structural elements, equipment and ap- material to which it is attached. The
purtenances supported by the cargo lightweight attachment may be se-
tank wall; cured directly to the cargo tank wall if
(C) The lateral shear stress generated the device is designed and installed in
by an extreme lateral accelerative such a manner that, if damaged, it will
force equal to 0.4 times the vertical re- not affect the lading retention integ-
action at the suspension assembly of a rity of the tank. A lightweight attach-
trailer, applied at the road surface, and ment must be secured to the cargo
as transmitted to the cargo tank wall tank shell or head by continuous weld
through the suspension assembly of a or in such a manner as to preclude for-

trailer, and the horizontal pivot of the mation of pockets which may become
upper coupler (fifth wheel) or turn- sites for corrosion.
167
§ 178.345–4 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(3) Except as prescribed in para- let weld and the tank or jacket seam
graphs (f)(1) and (f)(2) of this section, weld.
the welding of any appurtenance to the
[Amdt. 178–89, 55 FR 37059, Sept. 7, 1990, as
cargo tank wall must be made by at- amended by Amdt. 178–89, 56 FR 27876, June
tachment of a mounting pad so that 17, 1991; Amdt. 178–104, 59 FR 49135, Sept. 26,
there will be no adverse effect upon the 1994; Amdt. 178–105, 59 FR 55173, 55174, 55175,
lading retention integrity of the cargo Nov. 3, 1994; 60 FR 17402, Apr. 5, 1995; Amdt.
tank if any force less than that pre- 178–118, 61 FR 51341, Oct. 1, 1996; 65 FR 58631,
Sept. 29, 2000; 68 FR 19283, Apr. 18, 2003; 68 FR
scribed in paragraph (b)(1) of this sec-
75755, Dec. 31, 2003; 74 FR 16143, Apr. 9, 2009;
tion is applied from any direction. The 78 FR 60755, Oct. 2, 2013; 81 FR 35545, June 2,
thickness of the mounting pad may not 2016]
be less than that of the shell or head to
which it is attached, and not more § 178.345–4 Joints.
than 1.5 times the shell or head thick- (a) All joints between the cargo tank
ness. However, a pad with a minimum shell, heads, baffles, baffle attaching
thickness of 0.187 inch may be used rings, and bulkheads must be welded in
when the shell or head thickness is conformance with Section VIII of the
over 0.187 inch. If weep holes or tell- ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
tale holes are used, the pad must be chapter).
drilled or punched at the lowest point (b) Where practical all welds must be
before it is welded to the tank. Each easily accessible for inspection.
pad must:
[Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25022, June 12, 1989, as
(i) Be fabricated from material deter-
amended by Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR 51341, Oct.
mined to be suitable for welding to 1, 1996; 68 FR 75756, Dec. 31, 2003]
both the cargo tank material and the
material of the appurtenance or struc- § 178.345–5 Manhole assemblies.
tural support member; a Design Certi-
(a) Each cargo tank with capacity
fying Engineer must make this deter-
greater than 400 gallons must be acces-
mination considering chemical and sible through a manhole at least 15
physical properties of the materials inches in diameter.
and must specify filler material con- (b) Each manhole, fill opening and
forming to the requirements of the washout assembly must be structurally
ASME Code (incorporated by reference; capable of withstanding, without leak-
see § 171.7 of this subchapter). age or permanent deformation that
(ii) Be preformed to an inside radius would affect its structural integrity, a
no greater than the outside radius of static internal fluid pressure of at least
the cargo tank at the attachment loca- 36 psig, or cargo tank test pressure,
tion. whichever is greater. The manhole as-
(iii) Extend at least 2 inches in each sembly manufacturer shall verify com-
direction from any point of attachment pliance with this requirement by
of an appurtenance or structural sup- hydrostatically testing at least one
port member. This dimension may be percent (or one manhole closure,
measured from the center of the struc- whichever is greater) of all manhole
tural member attached. closures of each type produced each 3
(iv) Have rounded corners, or other- months, as follows:
wise be shaped in a manner to mini- (1) The manhole, fill opening, or
mize stress concentrations on the shell washout assembly must be tested with
or head. the venting devices blocked. Any leak-
(v) Be attached by continuous fillet age or deformation that would affect
the product retention capability of the
welding. Any fillet weld discontinuity
assembly shall constitute a failure.
may only be for the purpose of pre-
(2) If the manhole, fill opening, or
venting an intersection between the fil-
washout assembly tested fails, then
five more covers from the same lot
must be tested. If one of these five cov-

ers fails, then all covers in the lot from
which the tested covers were selected
168
are to be 100% tested or rejected for (b) A cargo tank designed and con-
service. structed so that it constitutes, in
(c) Each manhole, filler and washout whole or in part, the structural mem-
cover must be fitted with a safety de- ber used in lieu of a frame must be sup-
vice that prevents the cover from open- ported in such a manner that the re-
ing fully when internal pressure is sulting stress levels in the cargo tank
present. do not exceed those specified in
(d) Each manhole and fill cover must § 178.345–3(a). The design calculations of
be secured with fastenings that will the support elements must include the
prevent opening of the covers as a re- stresses indicated in § 178.345–3(b) and
sult of vibration under normal trans- as generated by the loads described in
portation conditions or shock impact § 178.345–3(c).
due to a rollover accident on the road-
[Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25023, June 12, 1989, as
way or shoulder where the fill cover is amended by Amdt. 178–105, 59 FR 55175, Nov.
not struck by a substantial obstacle. 3, 1994; Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR 51341, Oct. 1,
(e) On cargo tank motor vehicles 1996]
manufactured after October 1, 2004,
each manhole assembly must be per- § 178.345–7 Circumferential reinforce-
manently marked on the outside by ments.
stamping or other means in a location (a) A cargo tank with a shell thick-
visible without opening the manhole ness of less than 3⁄8 inch must be cir-
assembly or fill opening, with: cumferentially reinforced with bulk-
(1) Manufacturer’s name; heads, baffles, ring stiffeners, or any
(2) Test pressure ll psig; combination thereof, in addition to the
(3) A statement certifying that the cargo tank heads.
manhole cover meets the requirements (1) Circumferential reinforcement
in § 178.345–5. must be located so that the thickness
(f) All components mounted on a and tensile strength of the shell mate-
manhole cover that form part of the rial in combination with the frame and
lading retention structure of the cargo reinforcement produces structural in-
tank wall must withstand the same tegrity at least equal to that pre-
static internal fluid pressure as that scribed in § 178.345–3 and in such a man-
required for the manhole cover. The ner that the maximum unreinforced
component manufacturer shall verify portion of the shell does not exceed 60
compliance using the same test proce- inches. For cargo tanks designed to be
dure and frequency of testing as speci- loaded by vacuum, spacing of circum-
fied in § 178.345–5(b). ferential reinforcement may exceed 60
[Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25022, June 12, 1989, as inches provided the maximum
amended by Amdt. 178–105, 59 FR 55175, Nov. unreinforced portion of the shell con-
3, 1994; 68 FR 19284, Apr. 18, 2003; 74 FR 16144, forms with the requirements in Section
Apr. 9, 2009] VIII of the ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7
of this subchapter).
§ 178.345–6 Supports and anchoring. (2) Where circumferential joints are
(a) A cargo tank with a frame not in- made between conical shell sections, or
tegral to the cargo tank must have the between conical and cylindrical shell
tank secured by restraining devices to sections, and the angle between adja-
eliminate any motion between the cent sections is less than 160 degrees,
tank and frame that may abrade the circumferential reinforcement must be
tank shell due to the stopping, start- located within one inch of the shell
ing, or turning of the cargo tank motor joint, unless otherwise reinforced with
vehicle. The design calculations of the structural members capable of main-
support elements must include the taining shell stress levels authorized in
stresses indicated in § 178.345–3(b) and § 178.345–3. When the joint is formed by
as generated by the loads described in the large ends of adjacent conical shell
§ 178.345–3(c). Such restraining devices sections, or by the large end of a con-
must be readily accessible for inspec- ical shell and a cylindrical shell sec-
tion and maintenance, except that in- tion, this angle is measured inside the
sulation and jacketing are permitted to shell; when the joint is formed by the
cover the restraining devices. small end of a conical shell section and
169
§ 178.345–8 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
a cylindrical shell section, it is meas- Number of circum- Shell sec-

ferential ring stiffener- J1
ured outside the shell. to-shell welds tion
(b) Except for doubler plates and
1 .................................. ..................................... 20t
knuckle pads, no reinforcement may 2 .................................. Less than 20t ............. 20t + J
cover any circumferential joint. 2 .................................. 20t or more ................. 40t
(c) When a baffle or baffle attach- 1 where:
ment ring is used as a circumferential t = Shell thickness, inches;

J = Longitudinal distance between parallel circumferential
reinforcement member, it must ring stiffener-to-shell welds.
produce structural integrity at least
equal to that prescribed in § 178.345–3 (3) When used to meet the vacuum re-
quirements of this section, ring stiff-
and must be circumferentially welded
eners must be as prescribed in Section
to the cargo tank shell. The welded
VIII of the ASME Code.
portion may not be less than 50 percent
(4) If configuration of internal or ex-
of the total circumference of the cargo ternal ring stiffener encloses an air
tank and the length of any unwelded space, this air space must be arranged
space on the joint may not exceed 40 for venting and be equipped with drain-
times the shell thickness unless rein- age facilities which must be kept oper-
forced external to the cargo tank. ative at all times.
(d) When a ring stiffener is used as a (5) Hat shaped or open channel ring
circumferential reinforcement mem- stiffeners which prevent visual inspec-
ber, whether internal or external, rein- tion of the cargo tank shell are prohib-
forcement must be continuous around ited on cargo tank motor vehicles con-
the circumference of the cargo tank structed of carbon steel.
shell and must be in accordance with [Amdt. 178–89, 55 FR 37060, Sept. 7, 1990, as
the following: amended by Amdt. 178–89, 56 FR 27876, June
(1) The section modulus about the 17, 1991; 56 FR 46354, Sept. 11, 1991; Amdt. 178–
neutral axis of the ring section parallel 104, 59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 178–118,
to the shell must be at least equal to 61 FR 51341, Oct. 1, 1996; 68 FR 75756, Dec. 31,
2003]
that derived from the applicable for-
mula: § 178.345–8 Accident damage protec-
I/C = 0.00027WL, for MS, HSLA and SS; tion.
or (a) General. Each cargo tank motor
I/C = 0.000467WL, for aluminum alloys; vehicle must be designed and con-
structed in accordance with the re-
Where: quirements of this section and the ap-
I/C = Section modulus in inches 3 plicable individual specification to
W = Tank width, or diameter, inches minimize the potential for the loss of
L = Spacing of ring stiffener, inches; i.e., the lading due to an accident.
maximum longitudinal distance from the (1) Any dome, sump, or washout
midpoint of the unsupported shell on one cover plate projecting from the cargo
side of the ring stiffener to the midpoint tank wall that retains lading in any
of the unsupported shell on the opposite
tank orientation, must be as strong
side of the ring stiffener.
and tough as the cargo tank wall and
(2) If a ring stiffener is welded to the have a thickness at least equal to that
cargo tank shell, a portion of the shell specified by the appropriate cargo tank
may be considered as part of the ring specification. Any such projection lo-
section for purposes of computing the cated in the lower 1⁄3 of the tank cir-
ring section modulus. This portion of cumference (or cross section perimeter
the shell may be used provided at least for non-circular cargo tanks) that ex-
50 percent of the total circumference of tends more than half its diameter at
the cargo tank is welded and the length the point of attachment to the tank or
of any unwelded space on the joint does more than 4 inches from the cargo tank
wall, or located in the upper 2⁄3 of the
not exceed 40 times the shell thickness.
tank circumference (or cross section
The maximum portion of the shell to

perimeter for non-circular cargo tanks)
be used in these calculations is as fol-
that extends more than 1⁄4 its diameter
lows: or more than 2 inches from the point of
170
attachment to the tank must have ac- (5) Minimum road clearance. The min-
cident damage protection devices that imum road clearance of any cargo tank
are: motor vehicle component or protection
(i) As specified in this section; device located between any two adja-
(ii) 125 percent as strong as the other- cent axles on a vehicle or vehicle com-
wise required accident damage protec- bination must be at least one-half inch
tion device; or for each foot separating the component
(iii) Attached to the cargo tank in or device from the nearest axle of the
accordance with the requirements of adjacent pair, but in no case less than
paragraph (a)(3) of this section. twelve (12) inches, except that the min-
(2) Outlets, valves, closures, piping, imum road clearance for landing gear
or any devices that if damaged in an or other attachments within ten (10)
accident could result in a loss of lading feet of an axle must be no less than ten
(10) inches. These measurements must
from the cargo tank must be protected
be calculated at the gross vehicle
by accident damage protection devices
weight rating of the cargo tank motor
as specified in this section.
vehicle.
(3) Accident damage protection de- (b) Each outlet, projection or piping
vices attached to the wall of a cargo located in the lower 1⁄3 of the cargo
tank must be able to withstand or de- tank circumference (or cross section
flect away from the cargo tank the perimeter for non-circular cargo tanks)
loads specified in this section. They that could be damaged in an accident
must be designed, constructed and in- that may result in the loss of lading
stalled so as to maximize the distribu- must be protected by a bottom damage
tion of loads to the cargo tank wall and protection device, except as provided
to minimize the possibility of ad- by paragraph (a)(1) of this section and
versely affecting the lading retention § 173.33(e) of this subchapter. Outlets,
integrity of the cargo tank. Accident projections and piping may be grouped
induced stresses resulting from the ap- or clustered together and protected by
propriate accident damage protection a single protection device.
device requirements in combination (1) Any bottom damage protection
with the stresses from the cargo tank device must be able to withstand a
operating at the MAWP may not result force of 155,000 pounds (based on the ul-
in a cargo tank wall stress greater timate strength of the material) from
than the ultimate strength of the ma- the front, side, or rear, uniformly dis-
terial of construction using a safety tributed over each surface of the de-
factor of 1.3. Deformation of the pro- vice, over an area not to exceed 6
tection device is acceptable provided square feet, and a width not to exceed
the devices being protected are not 6 feet. Suspension components and
damaged when loads specified in this structural mounting members may be
section are applied. used to provide all, or part, of this pro-
(4) Any piping that extends beyond tection. The device must extend no less
an accident damage protection device than 6 inches beyond any component
must be equipped with a stop-valve and that may contain lading in transit.
a sacrificial device such as a shear sec- (2) A lading discharge opening
tion. The sacrificial device must be lo- equipped with an internal self-closing
cated in the piping system outboard of stop-valve need not conform to para-
the stop-valve and within the accident graph (b)(1) of this section provided it
damage protection device to prevent is protected so as to reasonably assure
any accidental loss of lading. The de- against the accidental loss of lading.
vice must break at no more than 70 This protection must be provided by a
percent of the load that would be re- sacrificial device located outboard of
quired to cause the failure of the pro- each internal self-closing stop-valve
tected lading retention device, part or and within 4 inches of the major radius
cargo tank wall. The failure of the sac- of the cargo tank shell or within 4
rificial device must leave the protected inches of a sump, but in no case more
lading retention device and its attach- than 8 inches from the major radius of
ment to the cargo tank wall intact and the tank shell. The device must break
capable of retaining product. at no more than 70 percent of the load
171
§ 178.345–8 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
that would be required to cause the age that could result in the loss of lad-
failure of the protected lading reten- ing. Nothing in this paragraph relieves
tion device, part or cargo tank wall. the manufacturer of responsibility for
The failure of the sacrificial device complying with the requirements of
must leave the protected lading reten- § 393.86 of this title and, if applicable,
tion device or part and its attachment paragraph (b) of this section. The rear-
to the cargo tank wall intact and capa- end tank protection device must con-
ble of retaining product. form to the following requirements:
(c) Each closure for openings, includ- (1) The rear-end cargo tank protec-
ing but not limited to the manhole, tion device must be designed so that it
filling or inspection openings, and each can deflect at least 6 inches hori-
valve, fitting, pressure relief device, zontally forward with no contact be-
vapor recovery stop valve or lading re- tween any part of the cargo tank
taining fitting located in the upper 2⁄3 motor vehicle which contains lading
of a cargo tank circumference (or cross during transit and with any part of the
section perimeter for non-circular rear-end protection device, or with a
tanks) must be protected by being lo- vertical plane passing through the out-
cated within or between adjacent roll- board surface of the protection device.
over damage protection devices, or by (2) The dimensions of the rear-end
being 125 percent of the strength that cargo tank protection device shall con-
would be provided by the otherwise re- form to the following:
quired damage protection device. (i) The bottom surface of the rear-end
(1) A rollover damage protection de- protection device must be at least 4
vice on a cargo tank motor vehicle inches below the lower surface of any
must be designed and installed to with- part at the rear of the cargo tank
stand loads equal to twice the weight motor vehicle which contains lading
of the loaded cargo tank motor vehicle during transit and not more than 60
applied as follows: normal to the cargo inches from the ground when the vehi-
tank shell (perpendicular to the cargo cle is empty.
tank surface); and tangential (perpen- (ii) The maximum width of a notch,
dicular to the normal load) from any indentation, or separation between sec-
direction. The stresses shall not exceed tions of a rear-end cargo tank protec-
the ultimate strength of the material tion device may not exceed 24 inches. A
of construction. These design loads notched, indented, or separated rear-
may be considered to be uniformly dis- end protection device may be used only
tributed and independently applied. If when the piping at the rear of the
more than one rollover protection de- cargo tank is equipped with a sacrifi-
vice is used, each device must be capa- cial device outboard of a shut-off valve.
ble of carrying its proportionate share (iii) The widest part of the motor ve-
of the required loads and in each case hicle at the rear may not extend more
at least one-fourth the total tangential than 18 inches beyond the outermost
load. The design must be proven capa- ends of the device or (if separated) de-
ble of carrying the required loads by vices on either side of the vehicle.
calculations, tests or a combination of (3) The structure of the rear-end pro-
tests and calculations. tection device and its attachment to
(2) A rollover damage protection de- the vehicle must be designed to satisfy
vice that would otherwise allow the ac- the conditions specified in paragraph
cumulation of liquid on the top of the (d)(1) of this section when subjected to
cargo tank, must be provided with a an impact of the cargo tank motor ve-
drain that directs the liquid to a safe hicle at rated payload, at a decelera-
point of discharge away from any tion of 2 ‘‘g’’. Such impact must be
structural component of the cargo considered as being uniformly applied
tank motor vehicle. in the horizontal plane at an angle of
(d) Rear-end tank protection. Each 10 degrees or less to the longitudinal
cargo tank motor vehicle must be pro- axis of the vehicle.
vided with a rear-end tank protection (e) Longitudinal deceleration protec-
device to protect the cargo tank and tion. In order to account for stresses
piping in the event of a rear-end colli- due to longitudinal impact in an acci-
sion and reduce the likelihood of dam- dent, the cargo tank shell and heads
172
must be able to withstand the load re- line must be of sufficient strength, or
sulting from the design pressure in be protected by a sacrificial device,
combination with the dynamic pres- such that any load applied by loading/
sure resulting from a longitudinal de- unloading or charging lines connected
celeration of 2 ‘‘g’’. For this loading to the cargo tank cannot cause damage
condition, the allowable stress value resulting in loss of lading from the
used may not exceed the ultimate cargo tank.
strength of the material of construc- (h) Use of a nonmetallic pipe, valve
tion using a safety factor of 1.3. Per- or connection that is not as strong and
formance testing, analytical methods, heat resistant as the cargo tank mate-
or a combination thereof, may be used rial is authorized only if such attach-
to prove this capability provided the ment is located outboard of the lading
methods are accurate and verifiable. retention system.
For cargo tanks with internal baffles, [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25025, June 12, 1989, as
the decelerative force may be reduced amended at 55 FR 37061, Sept. 7, 1990, Amdt.
by 0.25 ‘‘g’’ for each baffle assembly, 178–89, 56 FR 27877, June 17, 1991; Amdt. 178–
but in no case may the total reduction 118, 61 FR 51341, Oct. 1, 1996]
in decelerative force exceed 1.0 ‘‘g’’.
§ 178.345–10 Pressure relief.
[Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25023, June 12, 1989, as
amended at 55 FR 37061, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. (a) Each cargo tank must be equipped
178–105, 59 FR 55175, Nov. 3, 1994; Amdt. 178– to relieve pressure and vacuum condi-
118, 61 FR 51341, Oct. 1, 1996; 68 FR 19284, Apr. tions in conformance with this section
18, 2003] and the applicable individual specifica-
tion. The pressure and vacuum relief
§ 178.345–9 Pumps, piping, hoses and system must be designed to operate
connections. and have sufficient capacity to prevent
(a) Suitable means must be provided cargo tank rupture or collapse due to
during loading or unloading operations over-pressurization or vacuum result-
to ensure that pressure within a cargo ing from loading, unloading, or from
tank does not exceed test pressure. heating and cooling of lading. Pressure
(b) Each hose, piping, stop-valve, lad- relief systems are not required to con-
ing retention fitting and closure must form to the ASME Code.
be designed for a bursting pressure of (b) Type and construction of relief sys-
the greater of 100 psig or four times the tems and devices. (1) Each cargo tank
MAWP. must be provided with a primary pres-
(c) Each hose coupling must be de- sure relief system consisting of one or
signed for a bursting pressure of the more reclosing pressure relief valves. A
greater of 120 psig or 4.8 times the secondary pressure relief system con-
MAWP of the cargo tank, and must be sisting of another pressure relief valve
designed so that there will be no leak- in parallel with the primary pressure
age when connected. relief system may be used to augment
(d) Suitable provision must be made the total venting capacity of the cargo
to allow for and prevent damage due to tank. Non-reclosing pressure relief de-
expansion, contraction, jarring, and vi- vices are not authorized in any cargo
bration. Slip joints may not be used for tank except when in series with a re-
this purpose in the lading retention closing pressure relief device. Gravity
system. actuated reclosing valves are not au-
(e) Any heating device, when in- thorized on any cargo tank.
stalled, must be so constructed that (2) When provided by § 173.33(c)(1)(iii)
the breaking of its external connec- of this subchapter, cargo tanks may be
tions will not cause leakage of the equipped with a normal vent. Such
cargo tank lading. vents must be set to open at not less
(f) Any gauging, loading or charging than 1 psig and must be designed to
device, including associated valves, prevent loss of lading through the de-
must be provided with an adequate vice in case of vehicle overturn.
means of secure closure to prevent (3) Each pressure relief system must
leakage. be designed to withstand dynamic pres-

(g) The attachment and construction sure surges in excess of the design set
of each loading/unloading or charging pressure as specified in paragraphs
173
§ 178.345–10 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(b)(3) (i) and (ii) of this section. Set positioned at the horizontal and trans-
pressure is a function of MAWP as set verse center of the cargo tank; on
forth in paragraph (d) of this section. cargo tanks sloped to the rear, the de-
(i) Each pressure relief device must vice should be located in the forward
be able to withstand dynamic pressure half of the cargo tank. The discharge
surge reaching 30 psig above the design from any device must be unrestricted.
set pressure and sustained above the Protective devices which deflect the
set pressure for at least 60 milliseconds flow of vapor are permissible provided
with a total volume of liquid released the required vent capacity is main-
not exceeding one gallon before the retained.
lief device recloses to a leak-tight con- (d) Settings of pressure relief system.
dition. This requirement must be met The set pressure of the pressure relief
regardless of vehicle orientation. This system is the pressure at which it
capability must be demonstrated by starts to open, allowing discharge.
testing. An acceptable method is out- (1) Primary pressure relief system. The
lined in TTMA RP No. 81–97 ‘‘Perform- set pressure of each primary relief
ance of Spring Loaded Pressure Relief valve must be no less than 120 percent
Valves on MC 306, MC 307, MC 312, DOT of the MAWP, and no more than 132
406, DOT 407, and DOT 412 Tanks’’ (in- percent of the MAWP. The valve must
corporated by reference; see § 171.7 of reclose at not less than 108 percent of
this subchapter). the MAWP and remain closed at lower
(ii) After August 31, 1995, each pres- pressures.
sure relief device must be able to with- (2) Secondary pressure relief system.
stand a dynamic pressure surge reach- The set pressure of each pressure relief
ing 30 psig above the design set pres- valve used as a secondary relief device
sure and sustained above the design set must be not less than 120 percent of the
pressure for at least 60 milliseconds MAWP.
with a total volume of liquid released (e) Venting capacity of pressure relief
not exceeding 1 L before the relief systems. The pressure relief system (pri-
valve recloses to a leak-tight condi- mary and secondary, including piping)
tion. This requirement must be met re- must have sufficient venting capacity
gardless of vehicle orientation. This to limit the cargo tank internal pres-
capability must be demonstrated by sure to not more than the cargo tank
testing. TTMA RP No. 81, cited in para- test pressure. The total venting capac-
graph (b)(3)(i) of this section, is an ac- ity, rated at not more than the cargo
ceptable test procedure. tank test pressure, must be at least
(4) Each reclosing pressure relief that specified in table I, except as pro-
valve must be constructed and in- vided in § 178.348–4.
stalled in such a manner as to prevent
unauthorized adjustment of the relief TABLE I—MINIMUM EMERGENCY VENT CAPACITY
valve setting. [In cubic feet free air/hour at 60 °F and 1 atm.]
(5) No shut-off valve or other device Cubic feet
that could prevent venting through the Exposed area in square feet free air per
hour
pressure relief system may be installed
in a pressure relief system. 20 ....................................................................... 15,800
(6) The pressure relief system must 30 ....................................................................... 23,700
40 ....................................................................... 31,600
be mounted, shielded and drainable so 50 ....................................................................... 39,500
as to minimize the accumulation of 60 ....................................................................... 47,400
material that could impair the oper- 70 ....................................................................... 55,300
ation or discharge capability of the 80 ....................................................................... 63,300
90 ....................................................................... 71,200
system by freezing, corrosion or block- 100 ..................................................................... 79,100
age. 120 ..................................................................... 94,900
(c) Location of relief devices. Each 140 ..................................................................... 110,700
160 ..................................................................... 126,500
pressure relief device must commu- 180 ..................................................................... 142,300
nicate with the vapor space above the 200 ..................................................................... 158,100
lading as near as practicable to the 225 ..................................................................... 191,300
250 ..................................................................... 203,100

center of the vapor space. For example, 275 ..................................................................... 214,300
on a cargo tank designed to operate in 300 ..................................................................... 225,100
a level attitude, the device should be 350 ..................................................................... 245,700
174
TABLE I—MINIMUM EMERGENCY VENT vice model to be certified, the capac-

CAPACITY—Continued ities of the devices tested must fall
[In cubic feet free air/hour at 60 °F and 1 atm.] within a range of plus or minus 5 per-
cent of the average for the devices test-
Cubic feet
Exposed area in square feet free air per ed.
hour (2) The rated flow capacity of a de-
400 ..................................................................... 265,000
vice model may not be greater than 90
450 ..................................................................... 283,200 percent of the average value for the de-
500 ..................................................................... 300,600 vices tested.
550 ..................................................................... 317,300
600 ..................................................................... 333,300
(3) The rated flow capacity derived
650 ..................................................................... 348,800 for each device model must be certified
700 ..................................................................... 363,700 by a responsible official of the device
750 ..................................................................... 378,200
800 ..................................................................... 392,200
manufacturer.
850 ..................................................................... 405,900 (h) Marking of pressure relief devices.
900 ..................................................................... 419,300 Each pressure relief device must be
950 ..................................................................... 432,300
1,000 .................................................................. 445,000
permanently marked with the fol-
Note 1:
lowing:
Interpolate for intermediate sizes.
(1) Manufacturer’s name;
(1) Primary pressure relief system. Un- (2) Model number;
less otherwise specified in the applica- (3) Set pressure, in psig; and
ble individual specification, the pri- (4) Rated flow capacity, in SCFH at
mary relief system must have a min- the rating pressure, in psig.
imum venting capacity of 12,000 SCFH
[Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25025, June 12, 1989, as
per 350 square feet of exposed cargo amended at 55 FR 21038, May 22, 1990; 55 FR
tank area, but in any case at least one 37062, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. 178–89, 56 FR 27877,
fourth the required total venting ca- June 17, 1991; Amdt. 178–105, 59 FR 55175, Nov.
pacity for the cargo tank. 3, 1994; Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR 51341, Oct. 1,
(2) Secondary pressure relief system. If 1996; 65 FR 58631, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45389,
the primary pressure relief system does Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 19284, Apr. 18, 2003]
not provide the required total venting
capacity, additional capacity must be § 178.345–11 Tank outlets.
provided by a secondary pressure relief (a) General. As used in this section,
system. ‘‘loading/unloading outlet’’ means any
(f) Certification of pressure relief de- opening in the cargo tank wall used for
vices. The manufacturer of any pressure loading or unloading of lading, as dis-
relief device, including valves, fran- tinguished from outlets such as man-
gible (rupture) disks, vacuum vents and hole covers, vents, vapor recovery de-
combination devices must certify that vices, and similar closures. Cargo tank
the device model was designed and outlets, closures and associated piping
tested in accordance with this section must be protected in accordance with
and the appropriate cargo tank speci- § 178.345–8.
fication. The certificate must contain (b) Each cargo tank loading/unload-
sufficient information to describe the ing outlet must be equipped with an in-
device and its performance. The certifi- ternal self-closing stop-valve, or alter-
cate must be signed by a responsible of- natively, with an external stop-valve
ficial of the manufacturer who ap- located as close as practicable to the
proved the flow capacity certification. cargo tank wall. Each cargo tank load-
(g) Rated flow capacity certification ing/unloading outlet must be in accord-
test. Each pressure relief device model ance with the following provisions:
must be successfully flow capacity cer- (1) Each loading/unloading outlet
tification tested prior to first use. De- must be fitted with a self-closing sys-
vices having one design, size and set tem capable of closing all such outlets
pressure are considered to be one in an emergency within 30 seconds of
model. The testing requirements are as actuation. During normal operations
follows: the outlets may be closed manually.
(1) At least 3 devices of each specific The self-closing system must be de-
model must be tested for flow capacity signed according to the following:
at a pressure not greater than the test (i) Each self-closing system must in-
pressure of the cargo tank. For a de- clude a remotely actuated means of
175
§ 178.345–12 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
closure located more than 10 feet from level to within 0.5 percent of the nomi-
the loading/unloading outlet where ve- nal capacity as measured by volume or
hicle length allows, or on the end of liquid level. Gauge glasses are not per-
the cargo tank farthest away from the mitted.
loading/unloading outlet. The actu-
ating mechanism must be corrosion-re- [Amdt. 178–89, 55 FR 37062, Sept. 7, 1990, as
amended by Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR 51342, Oct.
sistant and effective in all types of en- 1, 1996]
vironment and weather.
(ii) If the actuating system is acci- § 178.345–13 Pressure and leakage
dentally damaged or sheared off during tests.
transportation, each loading/unloading
outlet must remain securely closed and (a) Each cargo tank must be pressure
capable of retaining lading. and leakage tested in accordance with
(iii) When required by part 173 of this this section and §§ 178.346–5, 178.347–5, or
subchapter for materials which are 178.348–5.
flammable, pyrophoric, oxidizing, or (b) Pressure test. Each cargo tank or
Division 6.1 (poisonous liquid) mate- cargo tank compartment must be test-
rials, the remote means of closure ed hydrostatically or pneumatically.
must be capable of thermal activation. Each cargo tank of a multi-cargo tank
The means by which the self-closing motor vehicle must be tested with the
system is thermally activated must be adjacent cargo tanks empty and at at-
located as close as practicable to the mospheric pressure. Each closure, ex-
primary loading/unloading connection cept pressure relief devices and load-
and must actuate the system at a tem- ing/unloading venting devices rated at
perature not over 250 °F. In addition, less than the prescribed test pressure,
outlets on these cargo tanks must be must be in place during the test. If the
capable of being remotely closed manu- venting device is not removed during
ally or mechanically. the test, such device must be rendered
(2) Bottom loading outlets which dis- inoperative by a clamp, plug or other
charge lading into the cargo tank equally effective restraining device,
through fixed internal piping above the which may not prevent the detection of
maximum liquid level of the cargo leaks, or damage the device. Restrain-
tank need not be equipped with a self- ing devices must be removed imme-
closing system. diately after the test is completed.
(c) Any loading/unloading outlet ex- (1) Hydrostatic method. Each cargo
tending beyond an internal self-closing tank, including its domes, must be
stop-valve, or beyond the innermost ex- filled with water or other liquid having
ternal stop-valve which is part of a similar viscosity, the temperature of
self-closing system, must be fitted with which may not exceed 100 °F. The cargo
another stop-valve or other leak-tight tank must then be pressurized as pre-
closure at the end of such connection. scribed in the applicable specification.
(d) Each cargo tank outlet that is not The pressure must be gauged at the top
a loading/unloading outlet must be of the cargo tank. The prescribed test
equipped with a stop-valve or other pressure must be maintained for at
leak-tight closure located as close as least 10 minutes during which time the
practicable to the cargo tank outlet. cargo tank must be inspected for leak-
Any connection extending beyond this age, bulging, or other defect.
closure must be fitted with another (2) Pneumatic method. A pneumatic
stop-valve or other leak-tight closure test may be used in place of the hydro-
at the end of such connection. static test. However, pneumatic pres-
[Amdt. 178–89, 56 FR 27877, June 17, 1991, as sure testing may involve higher risk
amended by Amdt. 178–97, 57 FR 45465, Oct. 1, than hydrostatic testing. Therefore,
1992; Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR 51341, Oct. 1, 1996] suitable safeguards must be provided to
protect personnel and facilities should
§ 178.345–12 Gauging devices. failure occur during the test. The cargo
Each cargo tank, except a cargo tank tank must be pressurized with air or an
intended to be filled by weight, must be inert gas. Test pressure must be

equipped with a gauging device that in- reached gradually by increasing the
dicates the maximum permitted liquid pressure to one half of test pressure.
176
Thereafter, the pressure must be in- place readily accessible for inspection.
creased in steps of approximately one The plates must be permanently and
tenth of the test pressure until test plainly marked in English by stamp-
pressure is reached. Test pressure must ing, embossing or other means in char-
be held for at least 5 minutes. The pres- acters at least 3⁄16 inch high. The infor-
sure must then be reduced to the in- mation required by paragraphs (b) and
spection pressure which must be main- (c) of this section may be combined on
tained while the entire cargo tank sur- one specification plate.
face is inspected for leakage and other (b) Nameplate. Each cargo tank must
sign of defects. The inspection method have a corrosion resistant nameplate
must consist of coating all joints and permanently attached to it. The fol-
fittings with a solution of soap and lowing information, in addition to any
water or other equally sensitive meth-
applicable information required by the
od.
ASME Code, must be marked on the
(c) Leakage test. The cargo tank with
tank nameplate (parenthetical abbre-
all its accessories in place and operable
must be leak tested at not less than 80 viations may be used):
percent of tank’s MAWP with the pres- (1) DOT-specification number DOT
sure maintained for at least 5 minutes. XXX (DOT XXX) where ‘‘XXX’’ is re-
(d) Any cargo tank that leaks, bulges placed with the applicable specification
or shows any other sign of defect must number. For cargo tanks having a vari-
be rejected. Rejected cargo tanks must able specification plate, the DOT-speci-
be suitably repaired and retested suc- fication number is replaced with the
cessfully prior to being returned to words ‘‘See variable specification
service. The retest after any repair plate.’’
must use the same method of test (2) Original test date, month and
under which the cargo tank was origi- year (Orig. Test Date).
nally rejected. (3) Tank MAWP in psig.
[Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25026, June 12, 1989, as (4) Cargo tank test pressure (Test P),
amended at 55 FR 37063, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. in psig.
178–105, 59 FR 55176, Nov. 3, 1994; Amdt. 178– (5) Cargo tank design temperature
118, 61 FR 51342, Oct. 1, 1996; 65 FR 58631, range (Design temp. range),l °F to l
Sept. 29, 2000; 68 FR 19284, Apr. 18, 2003] °F.
§ 178.345–14 Marking. (6) Nominal capacity (Water cap.), in
gallons.
(a) General. The manufacturer shall
(7) Maximum design density of lading
certify that each cargo tank motor ve-
(Max. lading density), in pounds per
hicle has been designed, constructed
gallon.
and tested in accordance with the ap-
plicable Specification DOT 406, DOT 407 (8) Material specification number—
or DOT 412 (§§ 178.345, 178.346, 178.347, shell (Shell matl, yyy***), where ‘‘yyy’’
178.348) cargo tank requirements and, is replaced by the alloy designation
when applicable, with Section VIII of and ‘‘***’’ by the alloy type.
the ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this (9) Material specification number—
subchapter). The certification shall be heads (Head matl, yyy***), where
accomplished by marking the cargo ‘‘yyy’’ is replaced by the alloy designa-
tank as prescribed in paragraphs (b) tion and ‘‘***’’ by the alloy type.
and (c) of this section, and by pre- NOTE: When the shell and heads materials
paring the certificate prescribed in are the same thickness, they may be com-
§ 178.345–15. Metal plates prescribed by bined, (Shell&head matl, yyy***).
paragraphs (b), (c), (d) and (e) of this
section, must be permanently attached (10) Weld material (Weld matl.).
to the cargo tank or its integral sup- (11) Minimum thickness—shell (Min.
porting structure, by brazing, welding shell-thick), in inches. When minimum
or other suitable means. These plates shell thicknesses are not the same for
must be affixed on the left side of the different areas, show (top l, side l,
vehicle near the front of the cargo tank bottom l, in inches).

(or the frontmost cargo tank of a (12) Minimum thickness—heads (Min.
multi-cargo tank motor vehicle), in a heads thick.), in inches.
177
§ 178.345–14 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(13) Manufactured thickness—shell must be visible and not covered by in-

(Mfd. shell thick.), top l, side l, bot- sulation. The required information
tom l, in inches. (Required when addi- must be listed on the plate from front
tional thickness is provided for corro- to rear in the order of the cor-
sion allowance.) responding cargo tank location.
(14) Manufactured thickness—heads (e) Variable specification cargo tank.
(Mfd. heads thick.), in inches. (Re- Each variable specification cargo tank
quired when additional thickness is must have a corrosion resistant metal
provided for corrosion allowance.) variable specification plate attached to
(15) Exposed surface area, in square it. The mounting of this variable speci-
feet.
fication plate must be such that only
(c) Specification plate. Each cargo
the plate identifying the applicable
tank motor vehicle must have an addi-
tional corrosion resistant metal speci- specification under which the tank is
fication plate attached to it. The speci- being operated is legible.
fication plate must contain the fol- (1) The following information must
lowing information (parenthetical ab- be included (parenthetical abbrevia-
breviations may be used): tions are authorized):
(1) Cargo tank motor vehicle manu- Specification DOT XXX (DOT XXX), where
facturer (CTMV mfr.). ‘‘XXX’’ is replaced with the applicable speci-
(2) Cargo tank motor vehicle certifi- fication number.
cation date (CTMV cert. date), if dif-
ferent from the cargo tank certifi- Required
Equipment required
cation date. rating 1
(3) Cargo tank manufacturer (CT
mfr.). Pressure relief devices:
Pressure actuated llllll
(4) Cargo tank date of manufacture
type.
(CT date of mfr.), month and year.
Frangible type ........... llllll
(5) Maximum weight of lading (Max. Lading discharge de- llllll
Payload), in pounds. vices.
(6) Maximum loading rate in gallons Top ............................. llllll
per minute (Max. Load rate, GPM). Bottom ....................... llllll
(7) Maximum unloading rate in gal- Pressure unloading llllll
lons per minute (Max. Unload rate). fitting.
(8) Lining material (Lining), if appli- Closures:
cable. Manhole ..................... llllll
(9) Heating system design pressure Fill openings .............. llllll
(Heating sys. press.), in psig, if applica- Discharge openings .... llllll
ble. 1 Required rating—to meet the applicable
(10) Heating system design tempera- specification.

ture (Heating sys. temp.), in °F, if ap-
(2) If no change of information in the
plicable.
specification plate is required, the let-
(d) Multi-cargo tank motor vehicle. For
ters ‘‘NC’’ must follow the rating re-
a multi-cargo tank motor vehicle hav-
ing all its cargo tanks not separated by quired. If the cargo tank is not so
any void, the information required by equipped, the word ‘‘None’’ must be in-
paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section serted.
may be combined on one specification (3) Those parts to be changed or
plate. When separated by a void, each added must be stamped with the appro-
cargo tank must have an individual priate MC or DOT Specification mark-
nameplate as required in paragraph (b) ings.
of this section, unless all cargo tanks (4) The alterations that must be
are made by the same manufacturer made in order for the tank to be modi-
with the same materials, manufactured fied from one specification to another
thickness, minimum thickness and to
the same specification. The cargo tank
motor vehicle may have a combined

nameplate and specification plate.
When only one plate is used, the plate
178
must be clearly indicated on the manu- motor vehicle is constructed, tested

facturer’s certificate and on the vari- and completed in conformance with the
able specification plate. applicable specifications. The certifi-
[Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25027, June 12, 1989, as cate must include all the information
amended at 55 FR 37063, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. required and marked on the variable
178–99, 58 FR 51534, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 178–104, specification plate.
59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 178–105, 59 (d) In the case of a cargo tank motor
FR 55176, Nov. 3, 1994; 60 FR 17402, Apr. 5, vehicle manufactured in two or more
1995; Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR 51342, Oct. 1, 1996;
66 FR 45389, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 19284, Apr. 18,
stages, each manufacturer who per-
2003; 68 FR 52371, Sept. 3, 2003; 68 FR 75756, forms a manufacturing operation on
Dec. 31, 2003] the incomplete vehicle or portion
thereof shall provide to the succeeding
§ 178.345–15 Certification. manufacturer, at or before the time of
(a) At or before the time of delivery, delivery, a certificate covering the par-
the manufacturer of a cargo tank ticular operation performed by that
motor vehicle must provide certifi- manufacturer, including any certifi-
cation documents to the owner of the cates received from previous manufac-
cargo tank motor vehicle. The registra- turers, Registered Inspectors, and De-
tion numbers of the manufacturer, the sign Certifying Engineers. Each certifi-
Design Certifying Engineer, and the cate must indicate the portion of the
Registered Inspector, as appropriate, complete cargo tank motor vehicle rep-
must appear on the certificates (see resented thereby, such as basic cargo
subpart F, part 107 in subchapter A of tank fabrication, insulation, jacket,
this chapter). lining, or piping. The final manufac-
(b) The manufacturer of a cargo tank turer shall provide all applicable cer-
motor vehicle made to any of these tificates to the owner.
specifications must provide: (e) Specification shortages. If a cargo
(1) For each design type, a certificate tank is manufactured which does not
signed by a responsible official of the meet all applicable specification re-
manufacturer and a Design Certifying quirements, thereby requiring subse-
Engineer certifying that the cargo quent manufacturing involving the in-
tank motor vehicle design meets the stallation of additional components,
applicable specification; and parts, appurtenances or accessories,
(2) For each ASME cargo tank, a the cargo tank manufacturer may affix
cargo tank manufacturer’s data report the name plate and specification plate,
as required by Section VIII of the
as required by § 178.345–14 (b) and (c),
ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
without the original date of certifi-
chapter). For each cargo tank motor
cation stamped on the specification
vehicle, a certificate signed by a re-
plate. The manufacturer shall state the
sponsible official of the manufacturer
and a Registered Inspector certifying specification requirements not com-
that the cargo tank motor vehicle is plied with on the manufacturer’s Cer-
constructed, tested and completed in tificate of Compliance. When the cargo
conformance with the applicable speci- tank is brought into full compliance
fication. with the applicable specification, the
(c) The manufacturer of a variable Registered Inspector shall stamp the
specification cargo tank motor vehicle date of compliance on the specification
must provide: plate. The Registered Inspector shall
(1) For each design type, a certificate issue a Certificate of Compliance stat-
signed by a responsible official of the ing details of the particular operations
manufacturer and a Design Certifying performed on the cargo tank, and the
Engineer certifying that the cargo date and person (manufacturer, carrier,
tank motor vehicle design meets the or repair organization) accomplishing
applicable specifications; and the compliance.
(2) For each variable specification [Amdt. 178–89, 55 FR 37063, Sept. 7, 1990, as
cargo tank motor vehicle, a certificate amended by Amdt. 178–98, 58 FR 33306, June
signed by a responsible official of the 16, 1993; Amdt. 178–105, 59 FR 55176, Nov. 3,
manufacturer and a Registered Inspec- 1994; Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR 51342, Oct. 1, 1996;
tor certifying that the cargo tank 68 FR 75756, Dec. 31, 2003]
179
§ 178.346 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
§ 178.346 Specification DOT 406; cargo (9) Single full fillet lap joints with-
tank motor vehicle. out plug welds may be used for arc or
gas welded longitudinal seams without
§ 178.346–1 General requirements. radiographic examination under the
(a) Each Specification DOT 406 cargo following conditions:
tank motor vehicle must meet the gen- (i) For a truck-mounted cargo tank,
eral design and construction require- no more than two such joints may be
ments in § 178.345, in addition to the used on the top half of the tank and no
specific requirements contained in this more than two joints may be used on
section. the bottom half. They may not be lo-
(b) MAWP: The MAWP of each cargo cated farther from the top and bottom
tank must be no lower than 2.65 psig centerline than 16 percent of the shell’s
and no higher than 4 psig. circumference.
(c) Vacuum loaded cargo tanks must (ii) For a self-supporting cargo tank,
not be constructed to this specifica- no more than two such joints may be
tion. used on the top of the tank. They may
(d) Each cargo tank must be ‘‘con- not be located farther from the top
structed in accordance with Section centerline than 12.5 percent of the
VIII of the ASME Code’’ (IBR, see shell’s circumference.
§ 171.7 of this subchapter) except as (iii) Compliance test. Two test speci-
modified herein: mens of the material to be used in the
(1) The record-keeping requirements manufacture of a cargo tank must be
contained in the ASME Code Section tested to failure in tension. The test
VIII do not apply. Parts UG–90 through
specimens must be of the same
94 in Section VIII do not apply. Inspec-
thicknesses and joint configuration as
tion and certification must be made by
the cargo tank, and joined by the same
an inspector registered in accordance
welding procedures. The test specimens
with subpart F of part 107.
may represent all the tanks that are
(2) Loadings must be as prescribed in
made of the same materials and weld-
§ 178.345–3.
ing procedures, have the same joint
(3) The knuckle radius of flanged
configuration, and are made in the
heads must be at least three times the
material thickness, and in no case less same facility within 6 months after the
than 0.5 inch. Stuffed (inserted) heads tests are completed. Before welding,
may be attached to the shell by a fillet the fit-up of the joints on the test
weld. The knuckle radius and dish ra- specimens must represent production
dius versus diameter limitations of conditions that would result in the
UG–32 do not apply. Shell sections of least joint strength. Evidence of joint
cargo tanks designed with a non-cir- fit-up and test results must be retained
cular cross section need not be given a at the manufacturers’ facility.
preliminary curvature, as prescribed in (iv) Weld joint efficiency. The lower
UG–79(b). value of stress at failure attained in
(4) Marking, certification, data re- the two tensile test specimens shall be
ports, and nameplates must be as pre- used to compute the efficiency of the
scribed in §§ 178.345–14 and 178.345–15. joint as follows: Determine the failure
(5) Manhole closure assemblies must ratio by dividing the stress at failure
conform to §§ 178.345–5 and 178.346–5. by the mechanical properties of the ad-
(6) Pressure relief devices must be as jacent metal; this value, when multi-
prescribed in § 178.346–3. plied by 0.75, is the design weld joint ef-
(7) The hydrostatic or pneumatic test ficiency.
must be as prescribed in § 178.346–5. (10) The requirements of paragraph
(8) The following paragraphs in parts UW–9(d) in Section VIII of the ASME
UG and UW in Section VIII of the Code do not apply.
ASME Code do not apply: UG–11, UG–
[Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25028, June 12, 1989, as
12, UG–22(g), UG–32(e), UG–34, UG–35, amended at 55 FR 37063, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt.
UG–44, UG–76, UG–77, UG–80, UG–81, 178–89, 56 FR 27877, June 17, 1991; Amdt. 178–
UG–96, UG–97, UW–13(b)(2), UW–13.1(f) 105, 59 FR 55176, Nov. 3, 1994; 65 FR 58631,

and the dimensional requirements Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR
found in Figure UW–13.1. 19285, Apr. 18, 2003; 68 FR 75756, Dec. 31, 2003]
180
§ 178.346–2 Material and thickness of that determined by the minimum

material. thickness requirements in § 178.320(a).
The type and thickness of material The following Tables I and II identify
for DOT 406 specification cargo tanks the specified minimum thickness val-
must conform to § 178.345–2, but in no ues to be employed in that determina-
case may the thickness be less than tion.
TABLE I—SPECIFIED MINIMUM THICKNESS OF HEADS (OR BULKHEADS AND BAFFLES WHEN USED AS
TANK REINFORCEMENT) USING MILD STEEL (MS), HIGH STRENGTH LOW ALLOY STEEL (HSLA),
AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL (SS), OR ALUMINUM (AL)—EXPRESSED IN DECIMALS OF AN INCH
AFTER FORMING
Volume capacity in gallons per inch of length
14 or less Over 14 to 23 Over 23

Material
HSLA HSLA HSLA
MS AL MS AL MS AL
SS SS SS
Thickness .............................................. .100 .100 .160 .115 .115 .173 .129 .129 .187
TABLE II—SPECIFIED MINIMUM THICKNESS OF SHELL USING MILD STEEL (MS), HIGH STRENGTH LOW
ALLOY STEEL (HSLA), AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL (SS), OR ALUMINUM (AL)—EXPRESSED IN
DECIMALS OF AN INCH AFTER FORMING 1
Cargo tank motor vehicle rated capacity (gallons) MS SS/HSLA AL
More than 0 to at least 4,500 ........................................................................................................ 0.100 0.100 0.151

More than 4,500 to at least 8,000 ................................................................................................. 0.115 0.100 0.160
More than 8,000 to at least 14,000 ............................................................................................... 0.129 0.129 0.173
More than 14,000 .......................................................................................................................... 0.143 0.143 0.187
1 Maximum distance between bulkheads, baffles, or ring stiffeners shall not exceed 60 inches.
[Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25028, June 12, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 37064, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. 178–
105, 59 FR 55176, Nov. 3, 1994; 68 FR 19285, Apr. 18, 2003]
§ 178.346–3 Pressure relief. with a total volume of liquid released

(a) Each cargo tank must be equipped not exceeding 1 L before the relief
with a pressure relief system in accord- valve recloses to a leak-tight condi-
ance with § 178.345–10 and this section. tion. This requirement must be met re-
(b) Type and construction. In addition gardless of vehicle orientation. This
to the pressure relief devices required capability must be demonstrated by
in § 178.345–10: testing. TTMA RP No. 81 (IBR, see
(1) Each cargo tank must be equipped § 171.7 of this subchapter), cited at
with one or more vacuum relief de- § 178.345–10(b)(3)(i), is an acceptable test
vices; procedure.
(2) When intended for use only for (c) Pressure settings of relief valves. (1)
lading meeting the requirements of Notwithstanding the requirements in
§ 173.33(c)(1)(iii) of this subchapter, the § 178.345–10(d), the set pressure of each
cargo tank may be equipped with a primary relief valve must be not less
normal vent. Such vents must be set to than 110 percent of the MAWP or 3.3
open at not less than 1 psig and must psig, whichever is greater, and not
be designed to prevent loss of lading
more than 138 percent of the MAWP.
through the device in case of vehicle
The valve must close at not less than
upset; and
(3) Notwithstanding the requirements the MAWP and remain closed at lower
in § 178.345–10(b), after August 31, 1996, pressures.
each pressure relief valve must be able (2) Each vacuum relief device must
to withstand a dynamic pressure surge be set to open at no more than 6 ounces
reaching 30 psig above the design set vacuum.

pressure and sustained above the set (d) Venting capacities. (1) Notwith-
pressure for at least 60 milliseconds standing the requirements in § 178.345–
181
§ 178.346–4 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
10 (e) and (g), the primary pressure re- of this paragraph, the test specified in
lief valve must have a venting capacity 40 CFR 63.425(e)(1) must be conducted
of at least 6,000 SCFH, rated at not using air. The hydrostatic test alter-
greater than 125 percent of the tank native permitted under Appendix A to
test pressure and not greater than 3 40 CFR Part 60 (‘‘Method 27—Deter-
psig above the MAWP. The venting ca- mination of Vapor Tightness of Gaso-
pacity required in § 178.345–10(e) may be line Delivery Tank Using Pressure-
rated at these same pressures. Vacuum Test’’) may not be used to sat-
(2) Each vacuum relief system must isfy the leakage test requirements of
have sufficient capacity to limit the this paragraph. A cargo tank tested in
vacuum to 1 psig. accordance with 40 CFR 63.425(e) may
(3) If pressure loading or unloading be marked as specified in § 180.415 of
devices are provided, the relief system this subchapter.
must have adequate vapor and liquid
capacity to limit the tank pressure to [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25029, June 12, 1989, as
the cargo tank test pressure at max- amended at 55 FR 37064, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt.
178–105, 59 FR 55176, Nov. 3, 1994. Redesig-
imum loading or unloading rate. The
nated by Amdt. 178–112, 61 FR 18934, Apr. 29,
maximum loading and unloading rates 1996; 68 FR 19285, Apr. 18, 2003]
must be included on the metal speci-
fication plate. § 178.347 Specification DOT 407; cargo
[Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25029, June 12, 1989, as tank motor vehicle.
amended at 55 FR 37064, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt.
178–105, 59 FR 55176, Nov. 3, 1994. Redesig- § 178.347–1 General requirements.
nated by Amdt. 178–112, 61 FR 18934, Apr. 29, (a) Each specification DOT 407 cargo
1996; 66 FR 45389, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 75756,
tank motor vehicle must conform to
Dec. 31, 2003]
the general design and construction re-
§ 178.346–4 Outlets. quirements in § 178.345 in addition to
the specific requirements contained in
(a) All outlets on each tank must
this section.
conform to § 178.345–11 and this section.
(b) External self-closing stop-valves (b) Each tank must be of a circular
are not authorized as an alternative to cross-section and have an MAWP of at
internal self-closing stop-valves on least 25 psig.
loading/unloading outlets. (c) Any cargo tank motor vehicle
built to this specification with a
[Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25029, June 12, 1989. Re- MAWP greater than 35 psig or any
designated by Amdt. 178–112, 61 FR 18934,
Apr. 29, 1996]
cargo tank motor vehicle built to this
specification designed to be loaded by
§ 178.346–5 Pressure and leakage tests. vacuum must be constructed and cer-
(a) Each cargo tank must be tested in tified in accordance with Section VIII
accordance with § 178.345–13 and this of the ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of
section. this subchapter). The external design
(b) Pressure test. Test pressure must pressure for a cargo tank loaded by
be as follows: vacuum must be at least 15 psi.
(1) Using the hydrostatic test meth- (d) Any cargo tank motor vehicle
od, the test pressure must be the great- built to this specification with a
er of 5.0 psig or 1.5 times the cargo MAWP of 35 psig or less or any cargo
tank MAWP. tank motor vehicle built to this speci-
(2) Using the pneumatic test method, fication designed to withstand full vac-
the test pressure must be the greater of uum but not equipped to be loaded by
5.0 psig or 1.5 times the cargo tank vacuum must be constructed in accord-
MAWP, and the inspection pressure ance with Section VIII of the ASME
must be the cargo tank MAWP. Code.
(c) Leakage test. A cargo tank used to (1) The record-keeping requirements
transport a petroleum distillate fuel contained in Section VIII of the ASME
that is equipped with vapor recovery Code do not apply. The inspection re-
equipment may be leakage tested in quirements of parts UG–90 through 94

accordance with 40 CFR 63.425(e). To do not apply. Inspection and certifi-
satisfy the leakage test requirements cation must be made by an inspector
182
registered in accordance with subpart (iv) The welded seam must be com-
F of part 107. pleted before forming the dish radius
(2) Loadings must be as prescribed in and knuckle radius.
§ 178.345–3. (v) Compliance test: Two test speci-
(3) The knuckle radius of flanged mens of materials representative of
heads must be at least three times the those to be used in the manufacture of
material thickness, and in no case less a cargo tank bulkhead must be tested
than 0.5 inch. Stuffed (inserted) heads to failure in tension. The test specimen
may be attached to the shell by a fillet must be of the same thickness and
weld. The knuckle radius and dish ra- joined by the same welding procedure.
The test specimens may represent all
dius versus diameter limitations of
the tanks that are made in the same
UG–32 do not apply for cargo tank
facility within 6 months after the tests
motor vehicles with a MAWP of 35 psig
are completed. Before welding, the fit-
or less.
up of the joints on the test specimens
(4) Marking, certification, data re- must represent production conditions
ports and nameplates must be as pre- that would result in the least joint
scribed in §§ 178.345–14 and 178.345–15. strength. Evidence of joint fit-up and
(5) Manhole closure assemblies must test results must be retained at the
conform to § 178.347–3. manufacturer’s facility for at least 5
(6) Pressure relief devices must be as years.
prescribed in § 178.347–4. (vi) Acceptance criteria: The ratio of
(7) The hydrostatic or pneumatic test the actual tensile stress at failure to
must be as prescribed in § 178.347–5. the actual tensile strength of the adja-
(8) The following paragraphs in parts cent material of all samples of a test
UG and UW in Section VIII the ASME lot must be greater than 0.85.
Code do not apply: UG–11, UG–12, UG– [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25029, June 12, 1989, as
22(g), UG–32(e), UG–34, UG–35, UG–44, amended at 55 FR 37064, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt.
UG–76, UG–77, UG–80, UG–81, UG–96, 178–89, 56 FR 27877, June 17, 1991; 65 FR 58632,
UG–97, UW–12, UW–13(b)(2), UW–13.1(f), Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR
and the dimensional requirements 19285, Apr. 18, 2003; 68 FR 75756, Dec. 31, 2003;
found in Figure UW–13.1. 76 FR 3388, Jan. 19, 2011; 76 FR 43532, July 20,
2011]
(9) UW–12 in Section VIII of the
ASME Code does not apply to a weld § 178.347–2 Material and thickness of
seam in a bulkhead that has not been material.
radiographically examined, under the (a) The type and thickness of mate-
following conditions: rial for DOT 407 specification cargo
(i) The strength of the weld seam is tanks must conform to § 178.345–2, but
assumed to be 0.85 of the strength of in no case may the thickness be less
the bulkhead. than that determined by the minimum
(ii) The welded seam must be a full thickness requirements in § 178.320(a).
penetration butt weld. Tables I and II identify the specified
(iii) No more than one seam may be minimum thickness values to be em-
used per bulkhead. ployed in that the determination:
TABLE I—SPECIFIED MINIMUM THICKNESS OF HEADS (OR BULKHEADS AND BAFFLES WHEN USED AS
TANK REINFORCEMENT) USING MILD STEEL (MS), HIGH STRENGTH LOW ALLOY STEEL (HSLA),
AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL (SS), OR ALUMINUM (AL)—EXPRESSED IN DECIMALS OF AN INCH
AFTER FORMING
10 or Over 10 Over 14 Over 18 Over 22 Over 26
Volume capacity in gallons per inch Over 30
less to 14 to 18 to 22 to 26 to 30
Thickness (MS) ....................................................... 0.100 0.100 0.115 0.129 0.129 0.143 0.156
Thickness (HSLA) ................................................... 0.100 0.100 0.115 0.129 0.129 0.143 0.156
Thickness (SS) ........................................................ 0.100 0.100 0.115 0.129 0.129 0.143 0.156
Thickness (AL) ........................................................ 0.160 0.160 0.173 0.187 0.194 0.216 0.237
183
§ 178.347–3 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
TABLE II—SPECIFIED MINIMUM THICKNESS OF SHELL USING MILD STEEL (MS), HIGH STRENGTH LOW
ALLOY STEEL (HSLA), AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL (SS), OR ALUMINUM (AL)—EXPRESSED IN
DECIMALS OF AN INCH AFTER FORMING
10 or Over 10 Over 14 Over 18 Over 22 Over 26
Volume capacity in gallons per inch Over 30
less to 14 to 18 to 22 to 26 to 30
Thickness (MS) ....................................................... 0.100 0.100 0.115 0.129 0.129 0.143 0.156
Thickness (HSLA) ................................................... 0.100 0.100 0.115 0.129 0.129 0.143 0.156
Thickness (SS) ........................................................ 0.100 0.100 0.115 0.129 0.129 0.143 0.156
Thickness (AL) ........................................................ 0.151 0.151 0.160 0.173 0.194 0.216 0.237
(b) [Reserved]
[Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25030, June 12, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 37064, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. 178–
104, 59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994; 68 FR 19285, Apr. 18, 2003]
§ 178.347–3 Manhole assemblies. must be included on the metal speci-

fication plate.
Each manhole assembly must con-
form to § 178.345–5, except that each [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25030, June 12, 1989, as
manhole assembly must be capable of amended at 55 FR 37064, Sept. 7, 1990. Redes-
withstanding internal fluid pressures of ignated by Amdt. 178–112, 61 FR 18934, Apr.
29, 1996; 76 FR 43532, July 20, 2011]
40 psig or test pressure of the tank,
whichever is greater. § 178.347–5 Pressure and leakage test.
[Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25030, June 12, 1989. Re- (a) Each cargo tank must be tested in
designated by Amdt. 178–112, 61 FR 18934, accordance with § 178.345–13 and this
Apr. 29, 1996] section.
(b) Pressure test. Test pressure must
§ 178.347–4 Pressure relief.
be as follows:
(a) Each cargo tank must be equipped (1) Using the hydrostatic test meth-
with a pressure and vacuum relief sys- od, the test pressure must be at least 40
tem in accordance with § 178.345–10 and psig or 1.5 times tank MAWP, which-
this section. ever is greater.
(b) Type and construction. Vacuum re- (2) Using the pneumatic test method,
lief devices are not required for cargo the test pressure must be 40 psig or 1.5
tank motor vehicles that are designed times tank MAWP, whichever is great-
to be loaded by vacuum in accordance er, and the inspection pressure is tank
with § 178.347–1(c) or built to withstand MAWP.
full vacuum in accordance with [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25030, June 12, 1989. Re-
§ 178.347–1(d). designated by Amdt. 178–112, 61 FR 18934,
(c) Pressure settings of relief valves. Apr. 29, 1996]
The setting of pressure relief valves
must be in accordance with § 178.345– § 178.348 Specification DOT 412; cargo
tank motor vehicle.
10(d).
(d) Venting capacities. (1) The vacuum § 178.348–1 General requirements.
relief system must limit the vacuum to
(a) Each specification DOT 412 cargo
less than 80 percent of the design vacu-
tank motor vehicle must conform to
um capability of the cargo tank.
the general design and construction re-
(2) If pressure loading or unloading quirements in § 178.345 in addition to
devices are provided, the relief system the specific requirements of this sec-
must have adequate vapor and liquid tion.
capacity to limit the tank pressure to (b) The MAWP of each cargo tank
the cargo tank test pressure at max- must be at least 5 psig.

imum loading or unloading rate. The (c) The MAWP for each cargo tank
maximum loading or unloading rate designed to be loaded by vacuum must
184
be at least 25 psig internal and 15 psig tion need not be given a preliminary
external. curvature, as prescribed in UG–79(b).
(d) Each cargo tank having a MAWP (iv) Marking, certification, data re-
greater than 15 psig must be of circular ports, and nameplates must be as pre-
cross-section. scribed in §§ 178.345–14 and 178.345–15.
(e) Each cargo tank having a— (v) Manhole closure assemblies must
(1) MAWP greater than 15 psig must conform to §§ 178.345–5.
be ‘‘constructed and certified in con- (vi) Pressure relief devices must be as
formance with Section VIII of the prescribed in § 178.348–4.
ASME Code’’ (IBR, see § 171.7 of this (vii) The hydrostatic or pneumatic
subchapter); or test must be as prescribed in § 178.348–5.
(viii) The following paragraphs in
(2) MAWP of 15 psig or less must be
parts UG and UW in Section VIII of the
‘‘constructed in accordance with Sec-
ASME Code do not apply: UG–11, UG–
tion VIII of the ASME Code,’’ except as
12, UG–22(g), UG–32(e), UG–34, UG–35,
modified herein:
UG–44, UG–76, UG–77, UG–80, UG–81,
(i) The recordkeeping requirements UG–96, UG–97, UW–13(b)(2), UW–13.1(f),
contained in Section VIII of the ASME and the dimensional requirements
Code do not apply. Parts UG–90 found in Figure UW–13.1.
through 94 in Section VIII do not
apply. Inspection and certification [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25031, June 12, 1989, as
must be made by an inspector reg- amended at 55 FR 37065, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt.
178–89, 56 FR 27877, June 17, 1991; 65 FR 58632,
istered in accordance with subpart F of Sept. 29, 2000; 68 FR 19285, Apr. 18, 2003; 68 fR
part 107. 75756, Dec. 31, 2003]
(ii) Loadings must be as prescribed in
§ 178.345–3. § 178.348–2 Material and thickness of
(iii) The knuckle radius of flanged material.
heads must be at least three times the (a) The type and thickness of mate-
material thickness, and in no case less rial for DOT 412 specification cargo
than 0.5 inch. Stuffed (inserted) heads tanks must conform to § 178.345–2, but
may be attached to the shell by a fillet in no case may the thickness be less
weld. The knuckle radius and dish ra- than that determined by the minimum
dius versus diameter limitations of thickness requirements in § 178.320(a).
UG–32 do not apply for cargo tank The following Tables I and II identify
motor vehicles with a MAWP of 15 psig the ‘‘Specified Minimum Thickness’’
or less. Shell sections of cargo tanks values to be employed in that deter-
designed with a non-circular cross sec- mination.
185
VerDate Sep<11>2014
TABLE I—SPECIFIED MINIMUM THICKNESS OF HEADS (OR BULKHEADS AND BAFFLES WHEN USED AS TANK REINFORCEMENT) USING MILD STEEL
(MS), HIGH STRENGTH LOW ALLOY STEEL (HSLA), AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL (SS), OR ALUMINUM (AL)—EXPRESSED IN DECIMALS OF AN
11:19 Feb 03, 2020

INCH AFTER FORMING
Volume capacity (gallons per inch) 10 or less Over 10 to 14 Over 14 to 18 18 and over
§ 178.348–2
Jkt 247228
Lading density at 60 °F in pounds per gallon ..................................... 10 lbs Over Over Over 10 lbs Over Over Over 10 lbs Over Over 10 lbs Over Over
and 10 to 13 to 16 lbs and 10 to 13 to 16 lbs and 10 to 13 to and 10 to 13 to
less 13 lbs 16 lbs less 13 lbs 16 lbs less 13 lbs 16 lbs less 13 lbs 16 lbs
Thickness (inch), steel ......................................................................... .100 .129 .157 .187 .129 .157 .187 .250 .157 .250 .250 .157 .250 .312
Thickness (inch), aluminum ................................................................. .144 .187 .227 .270 .187 .227 .270 .360 .227 .360 .360 .227 .360 .450
PO 00000
TABLE II—SPECIFIED MINIMUM THICKNESS OF SHELL USING MILD STEEL (MS), HIGH STRENGTH LOW ALLOY STEEL (HSLA), AUSTENITIC STAINLESS
STEEL (SS), OR ALUMINUM (AL)—EXPRESSED IN DECIMALS OF AN INCH AFTER FORMING
Frm 00196
Volume capacity in gallons per inch 10 or less Over 10 to 14 Over 14 to 18 18 and over
Lading density at 60 °F in pounds per gallon ..................................... 10 lbs Over Over Over 10 lbs Over Over Over 10 lbs Over Over 10 lbs Over Over
Fmt 8010
and 10 to 13 to 16 lbs and 10 to 13 to 16 lbs and 10 to 13 to and 10 to 13 to
186
less 13 lbs 16 lbs less 13 lbs 16 lbs less 13 lbs 16 lbs less 13 lbs 16 lbs
Thickness (steel):
Distances between heads (and bulkheads baffles and ring
stiffeners when used as tank reinforcement):
Sfmt 8010
36 in. or less ............................................................ .100 .129 .157 .187 .100 .129 .157 .187 .100 .129 .157 .129 .157 .187
Over 36 in. to 54 inches .......................................... .100 .129 .157 .187 .100 .129 .157 .187 .129 .157 .187 .157 .250 .250
Over 54 in. to 60 inches .......................................... .100 .129 .157 .187 .129 .157 .187 .250 .157 .250 .250 .187 .250 .312
Thickness (aluminum):
Distances between heads (and bulkheads baffles and ring
stiffeners when used as tank reinforcement):
36 in. or less ............................................................ .144 .187 .227 .270 .144 .187 .227 .270 .144 .187 .227 .187 .227 .270
Over 36 in. to 54 inches .......................................... .144 .187 .227 .270 .144 .187 .227 .270 .187 .227 .270 .157 .360 .360
Over 54 in. to 60 inches .......................................... .144 .187 .227 .270 .187 .227 .270 .360 .227 .360 .360 .270 .360 .450
Y:\SGML\247228.XXX
247228
49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(b) [Reserved]
[Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25031, June 12, 1989; 54 FR 28750, July 7, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 37065,
Sept. 7, 1990; 68 FR 19285, Apr. 18, 2003]
§ 178.348–3 Pumps, piping, hoses and Formula in Nonmetric Units

connections.
Q = 37,980,000 A0.82 (ZT)0.5 / (LC)(M0.5)
Each pump and all piping, hoses and
Where:
connections on each cargo tank motor
Q = The total required venting capacity, in
vehicle must conform to § 178.345–9, ex- cubic meters of air per hour at standard
cept that the use of nonmetallic pipes, conditions of 15.6 °C and 1 atm (cubic feet
valves, or connections are authorized of air per hour at standard conditions of
on DOT 412 cargo tanks. 60 °F and 14.7 psia);
T = The absolute temperature of the vapor at
[Amdt. 178–89, 55 FR 37065, Sept. 7, 1990. Re- the venting conditions—degrees Kelvin
designated by Amdt. 178–112, 61 FR 18934, (°C + 273) [degrees Rankine (°F + 460)];
Apr. 29, 1996] A = The exposed surface area of tank shell—
square meters (square feet);
§ 178.348–4 Pressure relief. L = The latent heat of vaporization of the
lading—calories per gram (BTU/lb);
(a) Each cargo tank must be equipped Z = The compressibility factor for the vapor
with a pressure and vacuum relief sys- (if this factor is unknown, let Z equal
tem in accordance with § 178.345–10 and 1.0);
this section. M = The molecular weight of vapor;
(b) Type and construction. Vacuum re- C = A constant derived from (K), the ratio of
specific heats of the vapor. If (K) is un-
lief devices are not required for cargo known, let C = 315.
tanks designed to be loaded by vacuum
C = 520[K(2/(K ++ 1))[(K ∂ 1)/(K¥1)]]0.5
or built to withstand full vacuum.
Where:
(c) Pressure settings of relief valves.
K = Cp / Cv
The setting of the pressure relief de- Cp = The specific heat at constant pressure,
vices must be in accordance with in -calories per gram degree centigrade
§ 178.345–10(d), except as provided in (BTU/lb °F.); and
paragraph (d)(3) of this section. Cv = The specific heat at constant volume, in
(d) Venting capacities. (1) The vacuum -calories per gram degree centigrade
relief system must limit the vacuum to (BTU/lb °F.).
less than 80 percent of the design vacu- [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25032, June 12, 1989, as
um capability of the cargo tank. amended at 55 FR 37065, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt.
178–104, 59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994. Redesig-
(2) If pressure loading or unloading
nated by Amdt. 178–112, 61 FR 18934, Apr. 29,
devices are provided, the pressure relief 1996; 72 FR 55696, Oct. 1, 2007; 72 FR 59146,
system must have adequate vapor and Oct. 18, 2007]
liquid capacity to limit tank pressure
to the cargo tank test pressure at the § 178.348–5 Pressure and leakage test.
maximum loading or unloading rate. (a) Each cargo tank must be tested in
The maximum loading and unloading accordance with § 178.345–13 and this
rates must be included on the metal section.
specification plate. (b) Pressure test. Test pressure must
(3) Cargo tanks used in dedicated be as follows:
service for materials classed as corro- (1) Using the hydrostatic test meth-
sive material, with no secondary haz- od, the test pressure must be at least
ard, may have a total venting capacity 1.5 times MAWP.
which is less than required by § 178.345– (2) Using the pneumatic test method,
10(e). The minimum total venting ca- the test pressure must be at least 1.5
pacity for these cargo tanks must be times tank MAWP, and the inspection
determined in accordance with the fol- pressure is tank MAWP.
lowing formula (use of approximate [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25032, June 12, 1989. Re-
values given for the formula is accept- designated by Amdt. 178–112, 61 FR 18934,
able): Apr. 29, 1996]
187
§ 178.350 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
Subpart K—Specifications for (vii) ‘‘7’’ means a pressure receptacle.

Packagings for Class 7 (Ra- (2) A capital letter indicating the
material of construction, as follows:
dioactive) Materials (i) ‘‘A’’ means steel (all types and
§ 178.350 Specification 7A; general surface treatments).
packaging, Type A. (ii) ‘‘B’’ means aluminum.
(iii) ‘‘C’’ means natural wood.
(a) Each packaging must meet all ap-
(iv) ‘‘D’’ means plywood.
plicable requirements of subpart B of
(v) ‘‘F’’ means reconstituted wood.
part 173 of this subchapter and be de- (vi) ‘‘G’’ means fiberboard.
signed and constructed so that it meets (vii) ‘‘H’’ means plastic.
the requirements of §§ 173.403, 173.410, (viii) ‘‘L’’ means textile.
173.412, 173.415 and 173.465 of this sub- (ix) ‘‘M’’ means paper, multi-wall.
chapter for Type A packaging. (x) ‘‘N’’ means metal (other than
(b) Each Specification 7A packaging steel or aluminum).
must be marked on the outside ‘‘USA (xi) ‘‘P’’ means glass, porcelain or
DOT 7A Type A.’’ stoneware.
(c) Each Specification 7A packaging (3) A numeral indicating the category
must comply with the requirements of of packaging within the kind to which
§§ 178.2 and 178.3. In § 178.3(a)(2) the term the packaging belongs. For example,
‘‘packaging manufacturer’’ means the for steel drums (‘‘1A’’), ‘‘1’’ indicates a
person certifying that the package non-removable head drum ( i.e., ‘‘1A1’’)
meets all requirements of this section. and ‘‘2’’ indicates a removable head
[Amdt. 178–109, 60 FR 50336, Sept. 28, 1995; 60 drum (i.e., ‘‘1A2’’).
FR 54409, Oct. 23, 1995, as amended at 69 FR (b) For composite packagings, two
3696, Jan. 26, 2004; 70 FR 56099, Sept. 23, 2005; capital letters are used in sequence in
79 FR 40618, July 11, 2014] the second position of the code, the
first indicating the material of the
Subpart L—Non-bulk Perform- inner receptacle and the second, that of
ance-Oriented Packaging the outer packaging. For example, a
Standards plastic receptacle in a steel drum is
designated ‘‘6HA1’’.
(c) For combination packagings, only
SOURCE: Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21,
1990, unless otherwise noted. the code number for the outer pack-
aging is used.
§ 178.500 Purpose, scope and defini- (d) Identification codes are set forth
tions. in the standards for packagings in
(a) This subpart prescribes certain re- §§ 178.504 through 178.523 of this sub-
quirements for non-bulk packagings for part.
hazardous materials. Standards for NOTE TO § 178.502: Plastics materials in-
these packagings are based on the UN clude other polymeric materials such as rub-
Recommendations. ber.
(b) Terms used in this subpart are de- [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as
fined in § 171.8 of this subchapter. amended by Amdt. 178–106, 59 FR 67519, Dec.
29, 1994; 74 FR 2269, Jan. 14, 2009]
§ 178.502 Identification codes for pack-
agings. § 178.503 Marking of packagings.
(a) Identification codes for desig- (a) A manufacturer must mark every
nating kinds of packagings consist of packaging that is represented as manu-
the following: factured to meet a UN standard with
(1) A numeral indicating the kind of the marks specified in this section. The
packaging, as follows: markings must be durable, legible and
(i) ‘‘1’’ means a drum. placed in a location and of such a size
(ii) ‘‘2’’ means a wooden barrel. relative to the packaging as to be read-
(iii) ‘‘3’’ means a jerrican. ily visible, as specified in § 178.3(a). Ex-
(iv) ‘‘4’’ means a box. cept as otherwise provided in this sec-
(v) ‘‘5’’ means a bag. tion, every reusable packaging liable

(vi) ‘‘6’’ means a composite pack- to undergo a reconditioning process
aging. which might obliterate the packaging
188
marks must bear the marks specified designation shall be the maximum
in paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(6) and gross mass in kilograms;
(a)(9) of this section in a permanent (5)(i) For single and composite pack-
form (e.g. embossed) able to withstand agings intended to contain liquids, the
the reconditioning process. A marking test pressure in kilopascals rounded
may be applied in a single line or in down to the nearest 10 kPa of the hy-
multiple lines provided the correct se- drostatic pressure test that the pack-
quence is used. As illustrated by the aging design type has successfully
examples in paragraph (e) of this sec- passed;
tion, the following information must (ii) For packagings intended to con-
be presented in the correct sequence. tain solids or inner packagings, the let-
Slash marks should be used to separate ter ‘‘S’’;
this information. A packaging con- (6) The last two digits of the year of
forming to a UN standard must be manufacture. Packagings of types 1H
marked as follows: and 3H shall also be marked with the
(1) Except as provided in paragraph month of manufacture in any appro-
(e)(1)(ii) of this section, the United Na- priate manner; this may be marked on
tions symbol as illustrated in para- the packaging in a different place from
graph (e)(1)(i) of this section (for em- the remainder of the markings;
bossed metal receptacles, the letters (7) The state authorizing allocation
‘‘UN’’ may be applied in place of the of the mark. The letters ‘USA’ indicate
symbol); that the packaging is manufactured
(2) A packaging identification code and marked in the United States in
designating the type of packaging, the compliance with the provisions of this
material of construction and, when ap- subchapter;
propriate, the category of packaging (8) The name and address or symbol
under §§ 178.504 through 178.523 of this of the manufacturer or the approval
subpart within the type to which the agency certifying compliance with sub-
packaging belongs. The letter ‘‘V’’ part L and subpart M of this part.
must follow the packaging identifica- Symbols, if used, must be registered
tion code on packagings tested in ac- with the Associate Administrator;
cordance with § 178.601(g)(2); for exam- (9) For metal or plastic drums or
ple, ‘‘4GV’’. The letter ‘‘W’’ must fol- jerricans intended for reuse or recondi-
low the packaging identification code tioning as single packagings or the
on packagings when required by an ap- outer packagings of a composite pack-
proval under the provisions of aging, the thickness of the packaging
§ 178.601(h) of this part; material, expressed in mm (rounded to
the nearest 0.1 mm), as follows:
(3) A letter identifying the perform-
(i) Metal drums or jerricans must be
ance standard under which the pack-
marked with the nominal thickness of
aging design type has been successfully
the metal used in the body. The
tested, as follows:
marked nominal thickness must not
(i) X—for packagings meeting Pack- exceed the minimum thickness of the
ing Group I, II and III tests; steel used by more than the thickness
(ii) Y—for packagings meeting Pack- tolerance stated in ISO 3574 (IBR, see
ing Group II and III tests; or § 171.7 of this subchapter). (See appen-
(iii) Z—for packagings only meeting dix C of this part.) The unit of measure
Packing Group III tests; is not required to be marked. When the
(4) A designation of the specific grav- nominal thickness of either head of a
ity or mass for which the packaging de- metal drum is thinner than that of the
sign type has been tested, as follows: body, the nominal thickness of the top
(i) For packagings without inner head, body, and bottom head must be
packagings intended to contain liquids, marked (e.g., ‘‘1.0–1.2–1.0’’ or ‘‘0.9–1.0–
the designation shall be the specific 1.0’’).
gravity rounded down to the first dec- (ii) Plastic drums or jerricans must
imal but may be omitted when the spe- be marked with the minimum thick-
cific gravity does not exceed 1.2; and ness of the packaging material. Min-
(ii) For packagings intended to con- imum thicknesses of plastic must be as
tain solids or inner packagings, the determined in accordance with
189
§ 178.503 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
§ 173.28(b)(4). The unit of measure is not (iii) The last two digits of the year of
required to be marked; reconditioning;
(10) In addition to the markings pre- (iv) The letter ‘‘R’’; and
scribed in paragraphs (a)(1) through (v) For every packaging successfully
(a)(9) of this section, every new metal passing a leakproofness test, the addi-
drum having a capacity greater than tional letter ‘‘L’’.
100 L must bear the marks described in (2) When, after reconditioning, the
paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(6), and markings required by paragraph (a)(1)
(a)(9)(i) of this section, in a permanent through (a)(5) of this section no longer
form, on the bottom. The markings on appear on the top head or the side of
the top head or side of these pack- the metal drum, the reconditioner
agings need not be permanent, and must apply them in a durable form fol-
need not include the thickness mark lowed by the markings in paragraph
described in paragraph (a)(9) of this (c)(1) of this section. These markings
section. This marking indicates a may identify a different performance
drum’s characteristics at the time it capability than that for which the
was manufactured, and the information original design type had been tested
in paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(6) of and marked, but may not identify a
this section that is marked on the top greater performance capability. The
head or side must be the same as the markings applied in accordance with
information in paragraphs (a)(1) this paragraph may be different from
through (a)(6) of this section perma- those which are permanently marked
nently marked by the original manu- on the bottom of a drum in accordance
facturer on the bottom of the drum; with paragraph (a)(10) of this section.
and (d) Marking of remanufactured pack-
(11) Rated capacity of the packaging agings. For remanufactured metal
expressed in liters may be marked. drums, if there is no change to the
(b) For a packaging with a removable packaging type and no replacement or
head, the markings may not be applied removal of integral structural compo-
only to the removable head. nents, the required markings need not
(c) Marking of reconditioned pack- be permanent (e.g., embossed). Every
agings. (1) If a packaging is recondi- other remanufactured drum must bear
tioned, it shall be marked by the re- the marks required in paragraphs (a)(1)
conditioner near the marks required in through (a)(6) of this section in a per-
paragraphs (a)(1) through (6) of this manent form (e.g., embossed) on the
section with the following additional top head or side. If the metal thickness
information: marking required in paragraph (a)(9)(i)
(i) The name of the country in which of this section does not appear on the
the reconditioning was performed (in bottom of the drum, or if it is no
the United States, use the letters longer valid, the remanufacturer also
‘‘USA’’); must mark this information in perma-
(ii) The name and address or symbol nent form.
of the reconditioner. Symbols, if used, (e) The following are examples of sym-
must be registered with the Associate bols and required markings.
Administrator; (1)(i) The United Nations symbol is:
190
ER05OC12.059</GPH>
(ii) The circle that surrounds the let- circumference of the circle (72 degrees);
ters ‘‘u’’ and ‘‘n’’ may have small and
breaks provided the following provi- D) The letters ‘‘u’’ and ‘‘n’’ appear
sions are met: exactly as depicted in § 178.503(e)(1)(i)
(A) The total gap space does not ex- with no gaps.
ceed 15 percent of the circumference of (2) Examples of markings for a new
the circle; packaging are as follows:
(B) There are no more than four gaps
(i) For a fiberboard box designed to
in the circle;
contain an inner packaging:
C) The spacing between gaps is sepa-
rated by no less than 20 percent of the
(as in § 178.503 (a)(1) through (9) of this (ii) For a steel drum designed to con-
subpart). tain liquids:
(as in § 178.503 (a)(1) through (10) of this (iii) For a steel drum to transport
subpart). solids or inner packagings:
ER05OC12.061</GPH> ER05OC12.062</GPH>
191
ER05OC12.060</GPH>
§ 178.504 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(as in § 178.503 (a)(1) through (8) of this (3) Examples of markings for recondi-
subpart). tioned packagings are as follows:
(as in § 178.503(c)(1)). quired in paragraph (f)(2) of this sec-

(f) A manufacturer must mark every tion.
UN specification package represented [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as
as manufactured to meet the require- amended at 56 FR 66284, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt.
ments of § 178.609 for packaging of in- 178–102, 59 FR 28493, June 2, 1994; Amdt. 178–
fectious substances with the marks 106, 59 FR 67520, 67521, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt.
specified in this section. The markings 178–107, 60 FR 26806, May 18, 1995; 62 FR 51561,
must be durable, legible, and must be Oct. 1, 1997; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR
61016, Sept. 27, 2002; 67 FR 53143, Aug. 14, 2002;
readily visible, as specified in § 178.3(a). 68 FR 75757, Dec. 31, 2003; 75 FR 5395, Feb. 2,
An infectious substance packaging that 2010; 75 FR 60339, Sept. 30, 2010; 77 FR 60943,
successfully passes the tests con- Oct. 5, 2012; 78 FR 60755, Oct. 2, 2013]
forming to the UN standard must be
marked as follows: § 178.504 Standards for steel drums.
(1) The United Nations symbol as il- (a) The following are identification
lustrated in paragraph (e) of this sec- codes for steel drums:
tion. (1) 1A1 for a non-removable head
(2) The code designating the type of steel drum; and
packaging and material of construc- (2) 1A2 for a removable head steel
tion according to the identification drum.
codes for packagings specified in (b) Construction requirements for
§ 178.502. steel drums are as follows:
(3) The text ‘‘CLASS 6.2’’. (1) Body and heads must be con-
(4) The last two digits of the year of structed of steel sheet of suitable type
manufacture of the packaging. and adequate thickness in relation to
(5) The country authorizing the allo- the capacity and intended use of the
cation of the mark. The letters ‘‘USA’’ drum. Minimum thickness and mark-
indicate the packaging is manufac- ing requirements in §§ 173.28(b)(4) and
tured and marked in the United States 178.503(a)(9) of this subchapter apply to
in compliance with the provisions of drums intended for reuse.
this subchapter. (2) Body seams must be welded on
(6) The name and address or symbol drums designed to contain more than
of the manufacturer or the approval 40 L (11 gallons) of liquids. Body seams
must be mechanically seamed or weld-
agency certifying compliance with sub-
ed on drums intended to contain only
parts L and M of this part. Symbols, if
solids or 40 L (11 gallons) or less of liq-
used, must be registered with the Asso- uids.
ciate Administrator for Hazardous Ma-
(3) Chimes must be mechanically
terials Safety. seamed or welded. Separate reinforcing
(7) For packagings meeting the re- rings may be applied.
quirements of § 178.609(i)(3), the letter (4) The body of a drum of a capacity
‘‘U’’ must be inserted immediately fol- greater than 60 L (16 gallons) may have
lowing the marking designating the at least two expanded rolling hoops or
type of packaging and material re- two separate rolling hoops. If there are
separate rolling hoops, they must be
192
ER05OC12.063</GPH>
fitted tightly on the body and so se- ing requirements in §§ 173.28(b)(4) and
cured that they cannot shift. Rolling 178.503(a)(9) of this subchapter apply to
hoops may not be spot-welded. drums intended for reuse.
(5) Openings for filling, emptying and (2) All seams must be welded. Chime
venting in the bodies or heads of non- seams, if any, must be reinforced by
removable head (1A1) drums may not the application of separate reinforcing
exceed 7.0 cm (3 inches) in diameter. rings.
Drums with larger openings are consid- (3) The body of a drum of a capacity
ered to be of the removable head type greater than 60 L (16 gallons) may have
(1A2). Closures for openings in the bod- at least two expanded rolling hoops or
ies and heads of drums must be so de- two separate rolling hoops. If there are
signed and applied that they will re- separate rolling hoops, the hoops must
main secure and leakproof under nor- be fitted tightly on the body and so se-
mal conditions of transport. Closure cured that they cannot shift. Rolling
flanges may be mechanically seamed or hoops may not be spot-welded.
welded in place. Gaskets or other seal- (4) Openings for filling, emptying, or
ing elements must be used with clo- venting in the bodies or heads of non-
sures unless the closure is inherently removable head (1B1) drums may not
leakproof. exceed 7.0 cm (3 inches) in diameter.
(6) Closure devices for removable Drums with larger openings are consid-
head drums must be so designed and ered to be of the removable head type
applied that they will remain secure (1B2). Closures for openings in the bod-
and drums will remain leakproof under ies and heads of drums must be so de-
normal conditions of transport. Gas- signed and applied that they will re-
kets or other sealing elements must be main secure and leakproof under nor-
used with all removable heads. mal conditions of transport. Closure
(7) If materials used for body, heads, flanges may be welded in place so that
closures, and fittings are not in them- the weld provides a leakproof seam.
selves compatible with the contents to Gaskets or other sealing elements
be transported, suitable internal pro- must be used with closures unless the
tective coatings or treatments must be closure is inherently leakproof.
applied. These coatings or treatments (5) Closure devices for removable
must retain their protective properties head drums must be so designed and
under normal conditions of transport. applied that they remain secure and
(8) Maximum capacity of drum: 450 L drums remain leakproof under normal
(119 gallons). conditions of transport. Gaskets or
(9) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882 other sealing elements must be used
pounds). with all removable heads.
[Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as (6) Maximum capacity of drum: 450 L
amended at 56 FR 66284, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. (119 gallons).
178–110, 60 FR 49111, Sept. 21, 1995] (7) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882
pounds).
§ 178.505 Standards for aluminum
drums. [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as
(a) The following are the identifica- amended at 56 FR 66284, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt.
tion codes for aluminum drums: 178–102, 59 FR 28494, June 2, 1994]
(1) 1B1 for a non-removable head alu-
§ 178.506 Standards for metal drums
minum drum; and other than steel or aluminum.
(2) 1B2 for a removable head alu-
minum drum. (a) The following are the identifica-
(b) Construction requirements for tion codes for metal drums other than
aluminum drums are as follows: steel or aluminum:
(1) Body and heads must be con- (1) 1N1 for a non-removable head
structed of aluminum at least 99 per- metal drum; and
cent pure or an aluminum base alloy. (2) 1N2 for a removable head metal
Material must be of suitable type and drum.
adequate thickness in relation to the (b) Construction requirements for

capacity and the intended use of the metal drums other than steel or alu-
drum. Minimum thickness and mark- minum are as follows:
193
§ 178.507 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(1) Body and heads must be con- (1) The wood used must be well-sea-
structed of metal (other than steel or soned, commercially dry and free from
aluminum) of suitable type and ade- any defect likely to lessen the effec-
quate thickness in relation to the ca- tiveness of the drum for the purpose in-
pacity and the intended use of the tended. A material other than plywood,
drum. Minimum thickness and mark- of at least equivalent strength and du-
ing requirements in §§ 173.28(b)(4) and rability, may be used for the manufac-
178.503(a)(9) of this subchapter apply to ture of the heads.
drums intended for reuse. (2) At least two-ply plywood must be
(2) All seams must be welded. Chime used for the body and at least three-ply
seams, if any, must be reinforced by plywood for the heads; the plies must
the application of separate reinforcing be firmly glued together, with their
rings. grains crosswise.
(3) The body of a drum of a capacity (3) The body and heads of the drum
greater than 60 L (16 gallons) may have and their joints must be of a design ap-
at least two expanded rolling hoops or propriate to the capacity of the drum
two separate rolling hoops. If there are and its intended use.
separate rolling hoops, the hoops must (4) In order to prevent sifting of the
be fitted tightly on the body and so se- contents, lids must be lined with kraft
cured that they cannot shift. Rolling paper or some other equivalent mate-
hoops may not be spot-welded. rial which must be securely fastened to
(4) Openings for filling, emptying, or the lid and extend to the outside along
venting in the bodies or heads of non- its full circumference.
(5) Maximum capacity of drum: 250 L
removable head (1N1) drums may not
(66 gallons).
exceed 7.0 cm (3 inches) in diameter.
(6) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882
Drums with larger openings are consid-
pounds).
ered to be of the removable head type
(1N2). Closures for openings in the bod- [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as
ies and heads of drums must be so de- amended at 57 FR 45465, Oct. 1, 1992]
signed and applied that they will re-
main secure and leakproof under nor- § 178.508 Standards for fiber drums.
mal conditions of transport. Closure (a) The identification code for a fiber
flanges may be welded in place so that drum is 1G.
the weld provides a leakproof seam. (b) Construction requirements for
Gaskets or other sealing elements fiber drums are as follows:
must be used with closures unless the (1) The body of the drum must be
closure is inherently leakproof. constructed of multiple plies of heavy
(5) Closure devices for removable paper or fiberboard (without corruga-
head drums must be so designed and tions) firmly glued or laminated to-
applied that they remain secure and gether and may include one or more
drums remain leakproof under normal protective layers of bitumen, waxed
conditions of transport. Gaskets or kraft paper, metal foil, plastic mate-
other sealing elements must be used rial, or similar materials.
with all removable heads. (2) Heads must be of natural wood, fi-
(6) Maximum capacity of drum: 450 L berboard, metal, plywood, plastics, or
(119 gallons). other suitable material and may in-
(7) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882 clude one or more protective layers of
pounds). bitumen, waxed kraft paper, metal foil,
plastic material, or similar material.
[Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as (3) The body and heads of the drum
amended at 56 FR 66285, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. and their joints must be of a design ap-
178–102, 59 FR 28494, June 2, 1994] propriate to the capacity and intended
use of the drum.
§ 178.507 Standards for plywood (4) The assembled packaging must be
drums.
sufficiently water-resistant so as not
(a) The identification code for a ply- to delaminate under normal conditions
wood drum is 1D. of transport.

(b) Construction requirements for (5) Maximum capacity of drum: 450 L
plywood drums are as follows: (119 gallons).
194
(6) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882 (4) The wall thickness at every point
pounds). of the packaging must be appropriate
[Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as
to its capacity and its intended use,
amended by Amdt. 178–106, 59 FR 67521, Dec. taking into account the stresses to
29, 1994] which each point is liable to be ex-
posed. Minimum thickness and mark-
§ 178.509 Standards for plastic drums ing requirements in §§ 173.28(b)(4) and
and jerricans. 178.503(a)(9) of this subchapter apply to
(a) The following are identification drums intended for reuse.
codes for plastic drums and jerricans: (5) Openings for filling, emptying and
(1) 1H1 for a non-removable head venting in the bodies or heads of non-
plastic drum; removable head (1H1) drums and
(2) 1H2 for a removable head plastic jerricans (3H1) may not exceed 7.0 cm (3
drum; inches) in diameter. Drums and
(3) 3H1 for a non-removable head jerricans with larger openings are con-
jerrican; and sidered to be of the removable head
(4) 3H2 for a removable head jerrican. type (1H2 and 3H2). Closures for open-
(b) Construction requirements for ings in the bodies or heads of drums
plastic drums and jerricans are as fol- and jerricans must be so designed and
lows: applied that they remain secure and
(1) The packaging must be manufac- leakproof under normal conditions of
tured from suitable plastic material transport. Gaskets or other sealing ele-
and be of adequate strength in relation ments must be used with closures un-
to its capacity and intended use. No less the closure is inherently leakproof.
used material other than production (6) Closure devices for removable
residues or regrind from the same man- head drums and jerricans must be so
ufacturing process may be used unless designed and applied that they remain
approved by the Associate Adminis- secure and leakproof under normal con-
trator. The packaging must be ade- ditions of transport. Gaskets must be
quately resistant to aging and to deg- used with all removable heads unless
radation caused either by the sub- the drum or jerrican design is such
stance contained or by ultra-violet ra- that when the removable head is prop-
diation. Any permeation of the sub- erly secured, the drum or jerrican is in-
stance contained may not constitute a herently leakproof.
danger under normal conditions of (7) Maximum capacity of drums and
transport. jerricans: 1H1, 1H2: 450 L (119 gallons);
(2) If protection against ultra-violet 3H1, 3H2: 60 L (16 gallons).
radiation is required, it must be pro- (8) Maximum net mass: 1H1, 1H2: 400
vided by the addition of carbon black kg (882 pounds); 3H1, 3H2: 120 kg (265
or other suitable pigments or inhibi- pounds).
tors. These additives must be compat- [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as
ible with the contents and remain ef- amended by Amdt. 178–102, 59 FR 28494, June
fective throughout the life of the pack- 2, 1994; 64 FR 10782, Mar. 5, 1999; 66 FR 45386,
aging. Where use is made of carbon Aug. 28, 2001]
black, pigments or inhibitors other
than those used in the manufacture of § 178.510 Standards for wooden bar-
the design type, retesting may be omit- rels.
ted if the carbon black content does (a) The following are identification
not exceed 2 percent by mass or if the codes for wooden barrels:
pigment content does not exceed 3 per- (1) 2C1 for a bung type wooden barrel;
cent by mass; the content of inhibitors and
of ultra-violet radiation is not limited. (2) 2C2 for a slack type (removable
(3) Additives serving purposes other head) wooden barrel.
than protection against ultra-violet ra- (b) Construction requirements for
diation may be included in the com- wooden barrels are as follows:
position of the plastic material pro- (1) The wood used must be of good
vided they do not adversely affect the quality, straight-grained, well-sea-

chemical and physical properties of the soned and free from knots, bark, rotten
packaging material. wood, sapwood or other defects likely
195
§ 178.511 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
to lessen the effectiveness of the barrel jerricans intended to carry 40 L (11 gal-
for the purpose intended. lons) or less must be mechanically
(2) The body and heads must be of a seamed or welded.
design appropriate to the capacity and (4) Openings in jerricans (3A1) may
intended use of the barrel. not exceed 7.0 cm (3 inches) in diame-
(3) Staves and heads must be sawn or ter. Jerricans with larger openings are
cleft with the grain so that no annual considered to be of the removable head
ring extends over more than half the type. Closures must be so designed that
thickness of a stave or head. they remain secure and leakproof
(4) Barrel hoops must be of steel or under normal conditions of transport.
iron of good quality. The hoops of 2C2 Gaskets or other sealing elements
barrels may be of a suitable hardwood. must be used with closures, unless the
(5) For wooden barrels 2C1, the di- closure is inherently leakproof.
ameter of the bung-hole may not ex- (5) If materials used for body, heads,
ceed half the width of the stave in closures and fittings are not in them-
which it is placed.
selves compatible with the contents to
(6) For wooden barrels 2C2, heads
be transported, suitable internal pro-
must fit tightly into crozes.
tective coatings or treatments must be
(7) Maximum capacity of barrel: 250 L
applied. These coatings or treatments
(66 gallons).
must retain their protective properties
pounds). under normal conditions of transport.
(6) Maximum capacity of jerrican: 60
§ 178.511 Standards for aluminum and L (16 gallons).
steel jerricans. (7) Maximum net mass: 120 kg (265
(a) The following are identification pounds).
codes for aluminum and steel jerricans: [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as
(1) 3A1 for a non-removable head amended by Amdt. 178–102, 59 FR 28494, June
steel jerrican; 2, 1994; Amdt. 178–119, 62 FR 24742, May 6,
(2) 3A2 for a removable head steel 1997]
jerrican;
(3) 3B1 for a non-removable head alu- § 178.512 Standards for steel, alu-
minum jerrican; and minum or other metal boxes.
(4) 3B2 for a removable head alu- (a) The following are identification
minum jerrican. codes for steel, aluminum, or other
(b) Construction requirements for metal boxes:
aluminum and steel jerricans are as (1) 4A for a steel box;
follows: (2) 4B for an aluminum box; and
(1) For steel jerricans the body and
(3) 4N for an other metal box.
heads must be constructed of steel
sheet of suitable type and adequate (b) Construction requirements for
thickness in relation to the capacity of steel, aluminum or other metal boxes
the jerrican and its intended use. Min- are as follows:
imum thickness and marking require- (1) The strength of the metal and the
ments in §§ 173.28(b)(4) and 178.503(a)(9) construction of the box must be appro-
of this subchapter apply to jerricans priate to the capacity and intended use
intended for reuse. of the box.
(2) For aluminum jerricans the body (2) Boxes must be lined with fiber-
and heads must be constructed of alu- board or felt packing pieces or must
minum at least 99% pure or of an alu- have an inner liner or coating of suit-
minum base alloy. Material must be of able material in accordance with sub-
a type and of adequate thickness in re- part C of part 173 of this subchapter. If
lation to the capacity of the jerrican a double seamed metal liner is used,
and to its intended use. steps must be taken to prevent the in-
(3) Chimes of all jerricans must be gress of materials, particularly explo-
mechanically seamed or welded. Body sives, into the recesses of the seams.
seams of jerricans intended to carry (3) Closures may be of any suitable

more than 40 L (11 gallons) of liquid type, and must remain secure under
must be welded. Body seams of normal conditions of transport.
196
(4) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882 material used and the method of con-
pounds). struction must be appropriate to the
[Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as
capacity and intended use of the box.
amended by Amdt. 178–106, 59 FR 67521, Dec. All adjacent plies must be glued with
29, 1994; 78 FR 1096, Jan. 7, 2013] water-resistant adhesive. Other suit-
able materials may be used together
§ 178.513 Standards for boxes of nat- with plywood in the construction of
ural wood. boxes. Boxes must be nailed or secured
(a) The following are the identifica- to corner posts or ends or assembled
tion codes for boxes of natural wood: with other equally suitable devices.
(1) 4C1 for an ordinary box; and (2) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882
(2) 4C2 for a box with sift-proof walls. pounds).
(b) Construction requirements for
boxes of natural wood are as follows: § 178.515 Standards for reconstituted
(1) The wood used must be well-sea- wood boxes.
soned, commercially dry and free from (a) The identification code for a re-
defects that would materially lessen constituted wood box is 4F.
the strength of any part of the box. The (b) Construction requirements for re-
strength of the material used and the constituted wood boxes are as follows:
method of construction must be appro-
(1) The walls of boxes must be made
priate to the capacity and intended use
of water-resistant, reconstituted wood
of the box. The tops and bottoms may
such as hardboard, particle board, or
be made of water-resistant reconsti-
other suitable type. The strength of
tuted wood such as hard board, particle
the material used and the method of
board or other suitable type.
(2) Fastenings must be resistant to construction must be appropriate to
vibration experienced under normal the capacity of the boxes and their in-
conditions of transportation. End grain tended use.
nailing must be avoided whenever prac- (2) Other parts of the box may be
ticable. Joints which are likely to be made of other suitable materials.
highly stressed must be made using (3) Boxes must be securely assembled
clenched or annular ring nails or equiv- by means of suitable devices.
alent fastenings. (4) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882
(3) Each part of the 4C2 box must be pounds).
one piece or equivalent. Parts are con-
sidered equivalent to one piece when § 178.516 Standards for fiberboard
one of the following methods of glued boxes.
assembly is used: Linderman joint, (a) The identification code for a fi-
tongue and groove joint, ship lap or berboard box is 4G.
rabbet joint, or butt joint with at least (b) Construction requirements for fi-
two corrugated metal fasteners at each berboard boxes are as follows:
joint. (1) Strong, solid or double-faced cor-
(4) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882 rugated fiberboard (single or multi-
pounds). wall) must be used, appropriate to the
[Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as capacity and intended use of the box.
amended by Amdt. 178–106, 59 FR 67521, Dec. The water resistance of the outer sur-
29, 1994] face must be such that the increase in
mass, as determined in a test carried
§ 178.514 Standards for plywood boxes. out over a period of 30 minutes by the
(a) The identification code for a ply- Cobb method of determining water ab-
wood box is 4D. sorption, is not greater than 155 g per
(b) Construction requirements for square meter (0.0316 pounds per square
plywood boxes are as follows: foot)—see ISO 535 (IBR, see § 171.7 of
(1) Plywood used must be at least 3 this subchapter). Fiberboard must have
ply. It shall be made from well-sea- proper bending qualities. Fiberboard
soned rotary cut, sliced or sawn veneer, must be cut, creased without cutting
commercially dry and free from defects through any thickness of fiberboard,
that would materially lessen the and slotted so as to permit assembly
strength of the box. The strength of the without cracking, surface breaks, or
197
§ 178.517 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
undue bending. The fluting of cor- tion containing cavities for the inner
rugated fiberboard must be firmly receptacles, and a top section covering
glued to the facings. and interlocking with the bottom sec-
(2) The ends of boxes may have a tion. The top and bottom sections must
wooden frame or be entirely of wood or be so designed that the inner recep-
other suitable material. Reinforce- tacles fit snugly. The closure cap for
ments of wooden battens or other suit- any inner receptacle may not be in
able material may be used. contact with the inside of the top sec-
(3) Manufacturing joints. (i) Manu- tion of the box.
facturing joints in the bodies of boxes (3) For transportation, an expanded
must be— plastic box must be closed with a self-
(A) Taped; adhesive tape having sufficient tensile
(B) Lapped and glued; or strength to prevent the box from open-
(C) Lapped and stitched with metal ing. The adhesive tape must be weath-
staples. er-resistant and its adhesive compat-
(ii) Lapped joints must have an ap- ible with the expanded plastic material
propriate overlap. of the box. Other closing devices at
(4) Where closing is effected by glu- least equally effective may be used.
ing or taping, a water resistant adhe- (4) For solid plastic boxes, protection
sive must be used. against ultra-violet radiation, if re-
(5) Boxes must be designed so as to
quired, must be provided by the addi-
provide a snug fit to the contents.
tion of carbon black or other suitable
pigments or inhibitors. These additives
pounds).
must be compatible with the contents
(7) Authorization to manufacture,
and remain effective throughout the
mark, and sell UN4G combination
life of the box. Where use is made of
packagings with outer fiberboard boxes
carbon black pigment or inhibitors
and with inner fiberboard components
other than those used in the manufac-
that have individual containerboard or
ture of the tested design type, re-
paper wall basis weights that vary by
testing may be waived if the carbon
not more than plus or minus 10% from
black content does not exceed 2 percent
the nominal basis weight reported in
by mass or if the pigment content does
the initial design qualification test re-
not exceed 3 percent by mass; the con-
port.
tent of inhibitors of ultra-violet radi-
[Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as ation is not limited.
amended by Amdt. 178–99, 58 FR 51534, Oct. 1, (5) Additives serving purposes other
1993; Amdt. 178–106, 59 FR 67521, Dec. 29, 1994; than protection against ultra-violet ra-
68 FR 75758, Dec. 31, 2003; 79 FR 15046, Mar. 18,
2014; 83 FR 55810, Nov. 7, 2018]
diation may be included in the com-
position of the plastic material if they
§ 178.517 Standards for plastic boxes. do not adversely affect the material of
the box. Addition of these additives
(a) The following are identification
does not change the design type.
codes for plastic boxes:
(1) 4H1 for an expanded plastic box; (6) Solid plastic boxes must have clo-
and sure devices made of a suitable mate-
(2) 4H2 for a solid plastic box. rial of adequate strength and so de-
(b) Construction requirements for signed as to prevent the box from unin-
plastic boxes are as follows: tentionally opening.
(1) The box must be manufactured (7) Maximum net mass 4H1: 60 kg (132
from suitable plastic material and be pounds); 4H2: 400 kg (882 pounds).
of adequate strength in relation to its
§ 178.518 Standards for woven plastic
capacity and intended use. The box bags.
must be adequately resistant to aging
and to degradation caused either by (a) The following are identification
the substance contained or by ultra- codes for woven plastic bags:
violet radiation. (1) 5H1 for an unlined or non-coated
(2) An expanded plastic box must con- woven plastic bag;

sist of two parts made of a molded ex- (2) 5H2 for a sift-proof woven plastic
panded plastic material: a bottom sec- bag; and
198
(3) 5H3 for a water-resistant woven § 178.520 Standards for textile bags.
plastic bag.
(a) The following are identification
(b) Construction requirements for codes for textile bags:
woven plastic fabric bags are as fol-
(1) 5L1 for an unlined or non-coated
lows: textile bag;
(1) Bags must be made from stretched (2) 5L2 for a sift-proof textile bag;
tapes or monofilaments of a suitable and
plastic material. The strength of the
(3) 5L3 for a water-resistant textile
material used and the construction of bag.
the bag must be appropriate to the ca-
(b) Construction requirements for
pacity and intended use of the bag.
textile bags are as follows:
(2) If the fabric is woven flat, the (1) The textiles used must be of good
bags must be made by sewing or some quality. The strength of the fabric and
other method ensuring closure of the the construction of the bag must be ap-
bottom and one side. If the fabric is tu- propriate to the capacity and intended
bular, the bag must be closed by sew- use of the bag.
ing, weaving, or some other equally (2) Bags, sift-proof, 5L2: The bag
strong method of closure. must be made sift-proof, by appropriate
(3) Bags, sift-proof, 5H2 must be made means, such as by the use of paper
sift-proof by appropriate means such as bonded to the inner surface of the bag
use of paper or a plastic film bonded to by a water-resistant adhesive such as
the inner surface of the bag or one or bitumen, plastic film bonded to the
more separate inner liners made of inner surface of the bag, or one or more
paper or plastic material. inner liners made of paper or plastic
(4) Bags, water-resistant, 5H3: To pre- material.
vent the entry of moisture, the bag (3) Bags, water-resistant, 5L3: To pre-
must be made waterproof by appro- vent entry of moisture, the bag must
priate means, such as separate inner be made waterproof by appropriate
liners of water-resistant paper (e.g., means, such as by the use of separate
waxed kraft paper, double-tarred kraft inner liners of water-resistant paper
paper or plastic-coated kraft paper), or (e.g., waxed kraft paper, tarred paper,
plastic film bonded to the inner or or plastic-coated kraft paper), or plas-
outer surface of the bag, or one or more tic film bonded to the inner surface of
inner plastic liners. the bag, or one or more inner liners
(5) Maximum net mass: 50 kg (110 made of plastic material or metalized
pounds). film or foil.
[Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as
amended by Amdt. 178–99, 58 FR 51534, Oct. 1,
pounds).
1993] [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as
amended at 56 FR 66285, Dec. 20, 1991]
§ 178.519 Standards for plastic film
bags. § 178.521 Standards for paper bags.
(a) The identification code for a plas- (a) The following are identification
tic film bag is 5H4. codes for paper bags:
(b) Construction requirements for (1) 5M1 for a multi-wall paper bag;
plastic film bags are as follows: and
(1) Bags must be made of a suitable (2) 5M2 for a multi-wall water-resist-
plastic material. The strength of the ant paper bag.
material used and the construction of (b) Construction requirements for
the bag must be appropriate to the ca- paper bags are as follows:
pacity and the intended use of the bag. (1) Bags must be made of a suitable
Joints and closures must be capable of kraft paper, or of an equivalent paper
withstanding pressures and impacts with at least three plies. The strength
liable to occur under normal conditions of the paper and the construction of
of transportation. the bag must be appropriate to the ca-

(2) Maximum net mass: 50 kg (110 pacity and intended use of the bag.
pounds). Seams and closures must be sift-proof.
199
§ 178.522 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(2) Paper bags 5M2: To prevent the (11) 6HH2 for a plastic receptacle
entry of moisture, a bag of four plies or within a protective plastic box.
more must be made waterproof by the (b) Construction requirements for
use of either a water-resistant ply as composite packagings with inner re-
one of the two outermost plies or a ceptacles of plastic are as follows:
water-resistant barrier made of a suit- (1) Inner receptacles must be con-
able protective material between the structed under the applicable construc-
two outermost plies. A 5M2 bag of tion requirements prescribed in
three plies must be made waterproof by § 178.509(b) (1) through (7) of this sub-
the use of a water-resistant ply as the part.
outermost ply. When there is danger of (2) The inner plastic receptacle must
the lading reacting with moisture, or fit snugly inside the outer packaging,
when it is packed damp, a waterproof
which must be free of any projections
ply or barrier, such as double-tarred
which may abrade the plastic material.
kraft paper, plastics-coated kraft
paper, plastics film bonded to the inner (3) Outer packagings must be con-
surface of the bag, or one or more inner structed as follows:
plastics liners, must also be placed (i) 6HA1 or 6HB1: Protective pack-
next to the substance. Seams and clo- aging must conform to the require-
sures must be waterproof. ments for steel drums in § 178.504(b) of
(3) Maximum net mass: 50 kg (110 this subpart, or aluminum drums in
pounds). § 178.505(b) of this subpart.
(4) UN5M1 and UN5M2 multi wall (ii) 6HA2 or 6HB2: Protective pack-
paper bags that have paper wall basis agings with steel or aluminum crate
weights that vary by not more than must conform to the requirements for
plus or minus 5% from the nominal steel or aluminum boxes found in
basis weight reported in the initial de- § 178.512(b) of this subpart.
sign qualification test report. (iii) 6HC protective packaging must
[Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as
conform to the requirements for wood-
amended at 56 FR 66285, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. en boxes in § 178.513(b) of this subpart.
178–106, 59 FR 67521, Dec. 29, 1994; 79 FR 15046, (iv) 6HD1: Protective packaging must
Mar. 18, 2014] conform to the requirements for ply-
wood drums, in § 178.507(b) of this sub-
§ 178.522 Standards for composite part.
packagings with inner plastic re-
ceptacles. (v) 6HD2: Protective packaging must
conform to the requirements of ply-
(a) The following are the identifica- wood boxes, in § 178.514(b) of this sub-
tion codes for composite packagings part.
with inner plastic receptacles: (vi) 6HG1: Protective packaging must
(1) 6HA1 for a plastic receptacle with- conform to the requirements for fiber
in a protective steel drum; drums, in § 178.508(b) of this subpart.
(2) 6HA2 for a plastic receptacle with-
(vii) 6HG2: protective packaging
in a protective steel crate or box;
must conform to the requirements for
(3) 6HB1 for a plastic receptacle with-
fiberboard boxes, in § 178.516(b) of this
in a protective aluminum drum.
subpart.
(4) 6HB2 for a plastic receptacle with-
in a protective aluminum crate or box. (viii) 6HH1: Protective packaging
(5) 6HC for a plastic receptacle within must conform to the requirements for
a protective wooden box. plastic drums, in § 178.509(b).
(6) 6HD1 for a plastic receptacle with- (ix) 6HH2: Protective packaging must
in a protective plywood drum; conform to the requirements for plastic
(7) 6HD2 for a plastic receptacle with- boxes, in § 178.517(b).
in a protective plywood box; (4) Maximum capacity of inner recep-
(8) 6HG1 for a plastic receptacle with- tacles is as follows: 6HA1, 6HB1, 6HD1,
in a protective fiber drum; 6HG1, 6HH1—250 L (66 gallons); 6HA2,
(9) 6HG2 for a plastic receptacle with- 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2, 6HH2—60 L (16
in a protective fiberboard box; gallons).

(10) 6HH1 for a plastic receptacle (5) Maximum net mass is as follows:
within a protective plastic drum; and 6HA1, 6HB1, 6HD1, 6HG1, 6HH1—400kg
200
(882 pounds); 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2, (ii) Any part of a closure likely to
6HH2—75 kg (165 pounds). come into contact with the contents of
the receptacle must be resistant to
[Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as
amended by Amdt. 178–106, 59 FR 67521, Dec.
those contents. Closures must be fitted
29, 1994] so as to be leakproof and secured to
prevent any loosening during transpor-
§ 178.523 Standards for composite tation. Vented closures must conform
packagings with inner glass, por- to § 173.24(f) of this subchapter.
celain, or stoneware receptacles. (2) Protective packagings must con-
(a) The following are identification form to the following requirements:
codes for composite packagings with (i) For receptacles with protective
inner receptacles of glass, porcelain, or steel drum 6PAl, the drum must com-
stoneware: ply with § 178.504(b) of this subpart.
(1) 6PA1 for glass, porcelain, or stone- However, the removable lid required
ware receptacles within a protective for this type of packaging may be in
steel drum; the form of a cap.
(2) 6PA2 for glass, porcelain, or stone- (ii) For receptacles with protective
ware receptacles within a protective packaging of steel crate or steel box
steel crate or box; 6PA2, the protective packaging must
conform to the following:
(3) 6PB1 for glass, porcelain, or stone-
(A) Section 178.512(b) of this subpart.
ware receptacles within a protective
(B) In the case of cylindrical recep-
aluminum drum;
tacles, the protective packaging must,
(4) 6PB2 for glass, porcelain, or stone-
when upright, rise above the receptacle
ware receptacles within a protective
and its closure; and
aluminum crate or box;
(C) If the protective crate surrounds
(5) 6PC for glass, porcelain, or stone- a pear-shaped receptacle and is of
ware receptacles within a protective matching shape, the protective pack-
wooden box; aging must be fitted with a protective
(6) 6PD1 for glass, porcelain, or stone- cover (cap).
ware receptacles within a protective (iii) For receptacles with protective
plywood drum; aluminum drum 6PB1, the require-
(7) 6PD2 for glass, porcelain, or stone- ments of § 178.505(b) of this subpart
ware receptacles within a protective apply to the protective packaging.
wickerwork hamper; (iv) For receptacles with protective
(8) 6PG1 for glass, porcelain, or stone- aluminum box or crate 6PB2, the re-
ware receptacles within a protective quirements of § 178.512(b) of this sub-
fiber drum; part apply to the protective packaging.
(9) 6PG2 for glass, porcelain, or stone- (v) For receptacles with protective
ware receptacles within a protective fi- wooden box 6PC, the requirements of
berboard box; § 178.513(b) of this subpart apply to the
(10) 6PH1 for glass, porcelain, or protective packaging.
stoneware receptacles within a protec- (vi) For receptacles with protective
tive expanded plastic packaging; and plywood drum 6PD1, the requirements
(11) 6PH2 for glass, porcelain, or of § 178.507(b) of this subpart apply to
stoneware receptacles within a protec- the protective packaging.
tive solid plastic packaging. (vii) For receptacles with protective
(b) Construction requirements for wickerwork hamper 6PD2, the
composite packagings with inner re- wickerwork hamper must be properly
ceptacles of glass, porcelain, or stone- made with material of good quality.
ware are as follows: The hamper must be fitted with a pro-
(1) Inner receptacles must conform to tective cover (cap) so as to prevent
the following requirements: damage to the receptacle.
(i) Receptacles must be of suitable (viii) For receptacles with protective
form (cylindrical or pear-shaped), be fiber drum 6PG1, the drum must con-
made of good quality materials free form to the requirements of § 178.508(b)
from any defect that could impair their of this subpart.

strength, and be firmly secured in the (ix) For receptacles with protective
outer packaging. fiberboard box 6PG2, the requirements
201
§ 178.600 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
of § 178.516(b) of this subpart apply to with §§ 173.22 and 178.2 of this sub-
the protective packaging. chapter.
(x) For receptacles with protective (c) Definitions. For the purpose of this
solid plastic or expanded plastic pack- subpart:
aging 6PH1 or 6PH2, the requirements (1) Design qualification testing is the
of § 178.517(b) of this subpart apply to performance of the tests prescribed in
the protective packaging. Solid protec- § 178.603, § 178.604, § 178.605, § 178.606,
tive plastic packaging must be manu- § 178.607, § 178.608, or § 178.609, as applica-
factured from high-density poly- ble, for each new or different pack-
ethylene from some other comparable aging, at the start of production of
plastic material. The removable lid re- that packaging.
quired for this type of packaging may (2) Periodic retesting is the perform-
be a cap. ance of the drop, leakproofness, hydro-
(3) Quantity limitations are as fol- static pressure, and stacking tests, as
lows: applicable, as prescribed in § 178.603,
(i) Maximum net capacity for pack- § 178.604, § 178.605, or § 178.606, respec-
aging for liquids: 60 L (16 gallons). tively, at the frequency specified in
(ii) Maximum net mass for pack- paragraph (e) of this section. For infec-
agings for solids: 75 kg (165 pounds). tious substances packagings required
to meet the requirements of § 178.609,
Subpart M—Testing of Non-bulk periodic retesting is the performance of
Packagings and Packages the tests specified in § 178.609 at the fre-
quency specified in paragraph (e) of
SOURCE: Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, this section.
1990, unless otherwise noted. (3) Production testing is the perform-
ance of the leakproofness test pre-
§ 178.600 Purpose and scope. scribed in § 178.604 of this subpart on
This subpart prescribes certain test- each single or composite packaging in-
ing requirements for performance-ori- tended to contain a liquid.
ented packagings identified in subpart (4) A different packaging is one that
L of this part. differs (i.e., is not identical) from a pre-
viously produced packaging in struc-
[Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as tural design, size, material of construc-
amended by Amdt. 178–99, 58 FR 51534, Oct. 1,
1993]
tion, wall thickness or manner of con-
struction but does not include:
§ 178.601 General requirements. (i) A packaging which differs only in
surface treatment;
(a) General. The test procedures pre-
scribed in this subpart are intended to (ii) A combination packaging which
ensure that packages containing haz- differs only in that the outer pack-
ardous materials can withstand normal aging has been successfully tested with
conditions of transportation and are different inner packagings. A variety of
considered minimum requirements. such inner packagings may be assem-
Each packaging must be manufactured bled in this outer packaging without
and assembled so as to be capable of further testing;
successfully passing the prescribed (iii) A plastic packaging which differs
tests and of conforming to the require- only with regard to additives which
ments of § 173.24 of this subchapter at conform to § 178.509(b)(3) or § 178.517(b)
all times while in transportation. (4) or (5) of this part;
(b) Responsibility. It is the responsi- (iv) A combination packaging with
bility of the packaging manufacturer inner packagings conforming to the
to assure that each package is capable provisions of paragraph (g) of this sec-
of passing the prescribed tests. To the tion;
extent that a package assembly func- (v) Packagings which differ from the
tion, including final closure, is per- design type only in their lesser design
formed by the person who offers a haz- height; or
ardous material for transportation, (vi) For a steel drum, variations in

that person is responsible for per- design elements which do not con-
forming the function in accordance stitute a different design type under
202
the provisions of paragraph (g)(8) of mented in writing by the person certi-

this section. fying compliance with this paragraph
(d) Design qualification testing. The and retained in accordance with para-
packaging manufacturer shall achieve graph (l) of this section. Permitted
successful test results for the design variations are as follows:
qualification testing at the start of (i) Inner packagings of equivalent or
production of each new or different smaller size may be used provided—
packaging. (A) The inner packagings are of simi-
(e) Periodic retesting. The packaging lar design to the tested inner pack-
manufacturer must achieve successful
agings (i.e., shape—round, rectangular,
test results for the periodic retesting
etc.);
at intervals established by the manu-
facturer of sufficient frequency to en- (B) The material of construction of
sure that each packaging produced by the inner packagings (glass, plastic,
the manufacturer is capable of passing metal, etc.) offers resistance to impact
the design qualification tests. Changes and stacking forces equal to or greater
in retest frequency are subject to the than that of the originally tested inner
approval of the Associate Adminis- packaging;
trator for Hazardous Materials Safety. (C) The inner packagings have the
For single or composite packagings, same or smaller openings and the clo-
the periodic retests must be conducted sure is of similar design (e.g., screw
at least once every 12 months. For cap, friction lid, etc.);
combination packagings, the periodic (D) Sufficient additional cushioning
retests must be conducted at least once material is used to take up void spaces
every 24 months. For infectious sub- and to prevent significant moving of
stances packagings, the periodic the inner packagings;
retests must be conducted at least once (E) Inner packagings are oriented
every 24 months. within the outer packaging in the same
(f) Test samples. The manufacturer
manner as in the tested package; and,
shall conduct the design qualification
and periodic tests prescribed in this (F) The gross mass of the package
subpart using random samples of pack- does not exceed that originally tested.
agings, in the numbers specified in the (ii) A lesser number of the tested
appropriate test section. In addition, inner packagings, or of the alternative
the leakproofness test, when required, types of inner packagings identified in
shall be performed on each packaging paragraph (g)(1)(i) of this section, may
produced by the manufacturer, and be used provided sufficient cushioning
each packaging prior to reuse under is added to fill void space(s) and to pre-
§ 173.28 of this subchapter, by the re- vent significant moving of the inner
conditioner. packagings.
(g) Selective testing. The selective (2) Selective testing of combination
testing of packagings that differ only packagings. Variation 2. Articles or
in minor respects from a tested type is inner packagings of any type, for solids
permitted as described in this section. or liquids, may be assembled and trans-
For air transport, packagings must ported without testing in an outer
comply with § 173.27(c)(1) and (c)(2) of packaging under the following condi-
this subchapter. tions:
(1) Selective testing of combination (i) The outer packaging must have
packagings. Variation 1. Variations are
been successfully tested in accordance
permitted in inner packagings of a
with § 178.603 with fragile (e.g. glass)
tested combination package, without
further testing of the package, pro- inner packagings containing liquids at
vided an equivalent level of perform- the Packing Group I drop height;
ance is maintained and, when a pack- (ii) The total combined gross mass of
age is altered under Variation 1 after inner packagings may not exceed one-
October 1, 2010, the methodology used half the gross mass of inner packagings
to determine that the inner packaging, used for the drop test;
including closure, maintains an equiva- (iii) The thickness of cushioning ma-
lent level of performance is docu- terial between inner packagings and
203
§ 178.601 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
between inner packagings and the out- duced with reductions in external di-
side of the packaging may not be re- mensions (i.e., length, width or diame-
duced below the corresponding thick- ter) of up to 25 percent of the dimen-
ness in the originally tested packaging; sions of a tested packaging may be
and when a single inner packaging was used without further testing provided
used in the original test, the thickness an equivalent level of performance is
of cushioning between inner pack- maintained. The packagings must, in
agings may not be less than the thick- all other respects (including wall
ness of cushioning between the outside thicknesses), be identical to the tested
of the packaging and the inner pack- design-type. The marked gross mass
aging in the original test. When either (when required) must be reduced in
fewer or smaller inner packagings are proportion to the reduction in volume.
used (as compared to the inner pack- (4) Variation 4. Variations are per-
agings used in the drop test), sufficient mitted in outer packagings of a tested
additional cushioning material must be design-type combination packaging,
used to take up void spaces. without further testing, provided an
(iv) The outer packaging must have equivalent level of performance is
successfully passed the stacking test maintained, as follows:
set forth in § 178.606 of this subpart (i) Each external dimension (length,
when empty, i.e., without either inner width and height) is less than or equal
packagings or cushioning materials. to the corresponding dimension of the
The total mass of identical packages tested design-type;
must be based on the combined mass of (ii) The structural design of the test-
inner packagings used for the drop ed outer packaging (i.e., methods of
test; construction, materials of construc-
(v) Inner packagings containing liq- tion, strength characteristics of mate-
uids must be completely surrounded rials of construction, method of closure
with a sufficient quantity of absorbent and material thicknesses) is main-
material to absorb the entire liquid tained;
contents of the inner packagings; (iii) The inner packagings are iden-
(vi) When the outer packaging is in- tical to the inner packagings used in
tended to contain inner packagings for the tested design type except that their
liquids and is not leakproof, or is in- size and mass may be less; and they are
tended to contain inner packagings for oriented within the outer packaging in
solids and is not siftproof, a means of the same manner as in the tested pack-
containing any liquid or solid contents aging;
in the event of leakage must be pro- (iv) The same type or design of ab-
vided in the form of a leakproof liner, sorbent materials, cushioning mate-
plastic bag, or other equally efficient rials and any other components nec-
means of containment. For packagings essary to contain and protect inner
containing liquids, the absorbent mate- packagings, as used in the tested de-
rial required in paragraph (g)(2)(v) of sign type, are maintained. The thick-
this section must be placed inside the ness of cushioning material between
means of containing liquid contents; inner packagings and between inner
and packagings and the outside of the
(vii) Packagings must be marked in packaging may not be less than the
accordance with § 178.503 of this part as thicknesses in the tested design type
having been tested to Packing Group I packaging; and
performance for combination pack- (v) Sufficient additional cushioning
agings. The marked maximum gross material is used to take up void spaces
mass may not exceed the sum of the and to prevent significant moving of
mass of the outer packaging plus one the inner packagings.
half the mass of the filled inner pack- An outer packaging qualifying for use
agings of the tested combination pack- in transport in accordance with all of
aging. In addition, the marking re- the above conditions may also be used
quired by § 178.503(a)(2) of this part without testing to transport inner
must include the letter ‘‘V’’. packagings substituted for the origi-
(3) Variation 3. Packagings other than nally tested inner packagings in ac-
combination packagings which are pro- cordance with the conditions set out in
204
Variation 1 in paragraph (g)(1) of this the specific gravity of the liquid used
section. in the design type tests of the pack-
(5) Variation 5. Single packagings aging with replacement closure devices
(i.e., non-bulk packagings other than or gasketing.)
combination packagings), that differ (6) The provisions in Variations 1, 2,
from a tested design type only to the and 4 in paragraphs (g)(1), (2) and (4) of
extent that the closure device or this section for combination pack-
gasketing differs from that used in the agings may be applied to packagings
originally tested design type, may be containing articles, where the provi-
used without further testing, provided sions for inner packagings are applied
an equivalent level of performance is analogously to the articles. In this
maintained, subject to the following case, inner packagings need not comply
conditions (the qualifying tests): with § 173.27(c)(1) and (c)(2) of this sub-
(i) A packaging with the replacement chapter.
closure devices or gasketing must suc-
(7) Approval of selective testing. In ad-
cessfully pass the drop test specified in
dition to the provisions of § 178.601(g)(1)
§ 178.603 in the orientation which most
through (g)(6) of this subpart, the Asso-
severely tests the integrity of the clo-
ciate Administrator may approve the
sure or gasket;
selective testing of packagings that
(ii) When intended to contain liquids,
a packaging with the replacement clo- differ only in minor respects from a
sure devices or gasketing must success- tested type.
fully pass the leakproofness test speci- (8) For a steel drum with a capacity
fied in § 178.604, the hydrostatic pres- greater than 12 L (3 gallons) manufac-
sure test specified in § 178.605, and the tured from low carbon, cold-rolled
stacking test specified in § 178.606. sheet steel meeting ASTM designations
A 366/A 366M or A 568/A 568M, vari-
Replacement closures and gasketings
ations in elements other than the fol-
qualified under the above test require-
lowing design elements are considered
ments are authorized without addi-
minor and do not constitute a different
tional testing for packagings described
drum design type, or ‘‘different pack-
in paragraph (g)(3) of this section. Re-
aging’’ as defined in paragraph (c) of
placement closures and gasketings
this section for which design qualifica-
qualified under the above test require-
tion testing and periodic retesting are
ments also are authorized without ad-
required. Minor variations authorized
ditional testing for different tested de-
without further testing include
sign types packagings of the same type
changes in the identity of the supplier
as the originally tested packaging, pro-
of component material made to the
vided the original design type tests are
same specifications, or the original
more severe or comparable to tests
manufacturer of a DOT specification or
which would otherwise be conducted on
UN standard drum to be remanufac-
the packaging with the replacement
tured. A change in any one or more of
closures or gasketings. (For example:
the following design elements con-
The packaging used in the qualifying
stitutes a different drum design type:
tests has a lesser packaging wall thick-
ness than the packaging with replace- (i) The packaging type and category
ment closure devices or gasketing; the of the original drum and the remanu-
gross mass of the packaging used in the factured drum, i.e., 1A1 or 1A2;
qualifying drop test equals or exceeds (ii) The style, (i.e., straight-sided or
the mass for which the packaging with tapered);
replacement closure devices or (iii) Except as provided in paragraph
gasketing was tested; the packaging (g)(3) of this section, the rated
used in the qualifying drop test was (marked) capacity and outside dimen-
dropped from the same or greater sions;
height than the height from which the (iv) The physical state for which the
packaging with replacement closure packaging was originally approved
devices or gasketing was dropped in de- (e.g., tested for solids or liquids);
sign type tests; and the specific gravity (v) An increase in the marked level of
of the substance used in the qualifying performance of the original drum (i.e.,
drop test was the same or greater than to a higher packing group, hydrostatic
205
§ 178.601 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
test pressure, or specific gravity to pendent testing facility, in accordance

which the packaging has been tested); with this subpart; or
(vi) Type of side seam welding; (2) Supply packagings, in quantities
(vii) Type of steel; sufficient to conduct tests in accord-
(viii) An increase greater than 10% or ance with this subpart, to the Asso-
any decrease in the steel thickness of ciate Administrator or a designated
the head, body, or bottom; representative of the Associate Admin-
(ix) End seam type, (e.g., triple or istrator.
double seam); (j) Coatings. If an inner treatment or
(x) A reduction in the number of roll- coating of a packaging is required for
ing hoops (beads) which equal or exceed safety reasons, the manufacturer shall
the diameter over the chimes; design the packaging so that the treat-
(xi) The location, type or size, and ment or coating retains its protective
material of closures (other than the properties even after withstanding the
cover of UN 1A2 drums); tests prescribed by this subpart.
(xii) The location (e.g., from the head (k) Number of test samples. Except as
to the body), type (e.g., mechanically provided in this section, one test sam-
seamed or welded flange), and mate- ple must be used for each test per-
rials of closure (other than the cover of formed under this subpart.
UN 1A2 drums); and (1) Stainless steel drums. Provided the
(xiii) For UN 1A2 drums: validity of the test results is not af-
(A) Gasket material (e.g., plastic), or fected, a person may perform the de-
properties affecting the performance of sign qualification testing of stainless
the gasket; steel drums using three (3) samples
(B) Configuration or dimensions of rather than the specified eighteen (18)
the gasket; samples under the following provisions:
(C) Closure ring style including bolt (i) The packaging must be tested in
size (e.g., square or round back, 0.625 accordance with this subpart by sub-
inches bolt); and jecting each of the three containers to
(D) Closure ring thickness, the following sequence of tests:
(E) Width of lugs or extensions in (A) The stacking test in § 178.606,
crimp/lug cover. (B) The leakproofness test in § 178.604,
(h) Approval of equivalent packagings. (C) The hydrostatic pressure test in
A packaging having specifications dif- § 178.608, and
ferent from those in §§ 178.504–178.523 of (D) Diagonal top chime and flat on
this part, or which is tested using the side drop tests in § 178.603. Both
methods or test intervals, other than drop tests may be conducted on the
those specified in subpart M of this same sample.
part, may be used if approved by the (ii) For periodic retesting of stainless
Associate Administrator. Such pack- steel drums, a reduced sample size of
agings must be shown to be equally ef- one container is authorized.
fective, and testing methods used must (2) Packagings other than stainless steel
be equivalent. drums. Provided the validity of the test
(i) Proof of compliance. Notwith- results is not affected, several tests
standing the periodic retest intervals may be performed on one sample with
specified in paragraph (e) of this sec- the approval of the Associate Adminis-
tion, the Associate Administrator may trator.
at any time require demonstration of (l) Record retention. Following each
compliance by a manufacturer, design qualification test and each peri-
through testing in accordance with odic retest on a packaging, a test re-
this subpart, that packagings meet the port must be prepared.
requirements of this subpart. As re- (1) The test report must be main-
quired by the Associate Administrator, tained at each location where the pack-
the manufacturer shall either— aging is manufactured, certified, and a
(1) Conduct performance tests, or design qualification test or periodic
have tests conducted by an inde- retest is conducted as follows:
206
Responsible party Duration
Person manufacturing the packaging .......................................... As long as manufactured and two years thereafter.
Person performing design testing ............................................... Design test maintained for a single or composite packaging for
six years after the test is successfully performed and for a
combination packaging or packaging intended for infectious
substances for seven years after the test is successfully per-
formed.
Person performing periodic retesting .......................................... Performance test maintained for a single or composite pack-
aging for one year after the test is successfully performed
and for a combination packaging or packaging intended for
infectious substances for two years after the test is success-
fully performed.
(2) The test report must be made packagings in the case of combination
available to a user of a packaging or a packagings.
representative of the Department upon (b) For the drop and stacking test,
request. The test report, at a min- inner and single-unit receptacles other
imum, must contain the following in- than bags must be filled to not less
formation: than 95% of maximum capacity (see
(i) Name and address of test facility; § 171.8 of this subchapter) in the case of
(ii) Name and address of applicant solids and not less than 98% of max-
(where appropriate); imum in the case of liquids. Bags con-
(iii) A unique test report identifica- taining solids shall be filled to the
tion; maximum mass at which they may be
(iv) Date of the test report; used. The material to be transported in
(v) Manufacturer of the packaging; the packagings may be replaced by a
(vi) Description of the packaging de- non-hazardous material, except for
sign type (e.g., dimensions, materials, chemical compatibility testing or
closures, thickness, etc.), including where this would invalidate the results
methods of manufacture (e.g., blow of the tests.
molding) and which may include draw- (c) If the material to be transported
ing(s) and/or photograph(s); is replaced for test purposes by a non-
(vii) Maximum capacity; hazardous material, the material used
must be of the same or higher specific
(viii) Characteristics of test contents,
gravity as the material to be carried,
e.g., viscosity and relative density for
and its other physical properties
liquids and particle size for solids;
(grain, size, viscosity) which might in-
(ix) Test descriptions and results; and
fluence the results of the required tests
(x) Signed with the name and title of must correspond as closely as possible
signatory. to those of the hazardous material to
[Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, 1990, as be transported. Water may also be used
amended at 56 FR 66285, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR for the liquid drop test under the con-
45465, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 178–102, 59 FR 28494, ditions specified in § 178.603(e) of this
June 2, 1994; Amdt. 178–106, 59 FR 67521, 67522, subpart. It is permissible to use addi-
Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 178–117, 61 FR 50628, Sept. tives, such as bags of lead shot, to
26, 1996; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 53143,
achieve the requisite total package
Aug. 14, 2002; 68 FR 75758, Dec. 31, 2003; 68 FR
61942, Oct. 30, 2003; 75 FR 5396, Feb. 2, 2010; 75 mass, so long as they are placed so that
FR 60339, Sept. 30, 2010; 77 FR 60944, Oct. 5, the test results are not affected.
2012; 78 FR 1118, Jan. 7, 2013; 78 FR 14715, Mar. (d) Paper or fiberboard packagings
7, 2013; 78 FR 65487, Oct. 31, 2013] must be conditioned for at least 24
hours immediately prior to testing in
§ 178.602 Preparation of packagings an atmosphere maintained—
and packages for testing. (1) At 50 percent ±2 percent relative
(a) Except as otherwise provided in humidity, and at a temperature of 23
this subchapter, each packaging and °C±2 °C (73 °F±4 °F). Average values
package must be closed in preparation should fall within these limits. Short-
for testing and tests must be carried term fluctuations and measurement
out in the same manner as if prepared limitations may cause individual meas-
for transportation, including inner urements to vary by up to ±5 percent
207
§ 178.603 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
relative humidity without significant (f) Bung-type barrels made of natural

impairment of test reproducibility; wood must be left filled with water for
(2) At 65 percent ±2 percent relative at least 24 hours before the tests.
humidity, and at a temperature of 20 [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, 1990, as
°C±2 °C (68 °F±4 °F), or 27 °C±2 °C (81 amended at 56 FR 66286, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt.
°F±4 °F). Average values should fall 178–106, 59 FR 67522, Dec. 29, 1994; 69 FR 76186,
within these limits. Short-term fluc- Dec. 20, 2004; 71 FR 78635, Dec. 29, 2006]
tuations and measurement limitations
may cause individual measurements to § 178.603 Drop test.
vary by up to ±5 percent relative hu- (a) General. The drop test must be
midity without significant impairment conducted for the qualification of all
of test reproducibility; or packaging design types and performed
(3) For testing at periodic intervals periodically as specified in § 178.601(e).
only (i.e., other than initial design For other than flat drops, the center of
qualification testing), at ambient con- gravity of the test packaging must be
ditions. vertically over the point of impact.
(e) Except as otherwise provided, Where more than one orientation is
each packaging must be closed in prep- possible for a given drop test, the ori-
aration for testing in the same manner entation most likely to result in fail-
as if prepared for actual shipment. All ure of the packaging must be used. The
closures must be installed using proper number of drops required and the pack-
techniques and torques. ages’ orientations are as follows:
Packaging No. of tests (samples) Drop orientation of samples
Steel drums, Aluminum drums, Metal Six—(three for each First drop (using three samples): The package must strike the
drums (other than steel or alu- drop). target diagonally on the chime or, if the packaging has no
minum), Steel Jerricans, Plywood chime, on a circumferential seam or an edge. Second drop
drums, Wooden barrels, Fiber (using the other three samples): The package must strike
drums, Plastic drums and Jerricans, the target on the weakest part not tested by the first drop,
Composite packagings which are in for example a closure or, for some 7 cylindrical drums, the
the shape of a drum. welded longitudinal seam of the drum body.
Boxes of natural wood, Plywood Five—(one for each First drop: Flat on the bottom (using the first sample). Second
boxes, Reconstituted wood boxes, drop). drop: Flat on the top (using the second sample). Third drop:
Fiberboard boxes, Plastic boxes, Flat on the long side (using the third sample). Fourth drop:
Steel, aluminum or other metal Flat on the short side (using the fourth sample). Fifth drop:
boxes, Composite packagings that On a corner (using the fifth sample).
are in the shape of a box.
Bags—single-ply with a side seam ..... Three—(three drops First drop: Flat on a wide face (using all three samples). Sec-
per bag). ond drop: Flat on a narrow face (using all three samples).
Third drop: On an end of the bag (using all three samples).
Bags—single-ply without a side seam, Three—(two drops per First drop: Flat on a wide face (using all three samples). Sec-
or multi-ply. bag). ond drop: On an end of the bag (using all three samples).
(b) Exceptions. For testing of single or other than expanded polystyrene boxes,
composite packagings constructed of composite packagings (plastic mate-
stainless steel, nickel, or monel at rial), and combination packagings with
periodic intervals only (i.e., other than plastic inner packagings other than
design qualification testing), the drop plastic bags intended to contain solids
test may be conducted with two sam- or articles must be carried out when
ples, one sample each for the two drop the temperature of the test sample and
orientations. These samples may have its contents has been reduced to ¥18 °C
been previously used for the hydro- (0 °F) or lower. Test liquids must be
static pressure or stacking test. Excep- kept in the liquid state, if necessary,
tions for the number of steel, alu- by the addition of anti-freeze. Water/
minum and other metal packaging anti-freeze solutions with a minimum
samples used for conducting the drop specific gravity of 0.95 for testing at
test are subject to the approval of the ¥18 °C (0 °F) or lower are considered
Associate Administrator. acceptable test liquids. Test samples
(c) Special preparation of test samples prepared in this way are not required
for the drop test. (1) Testing of plastic to be conditioned in accordance with
drums, plastic jerricans, plastic boxes § 178.602(d).
208
(d) Target. The target must be a rigid, (3) For a bag, neither the outermost
non-resilient, flat and horizontal sur- ply nor an outer packaging exhibits
face. any damage likely to adversely affect
(e) Drop height. Drop heights, meas- safety during transport;
ured as the vertical distance from the (4) The packaging or outer packaging
target to the lowest point on the pack- of a composite or combination pack-
age, must be equal to or greater than aging must not exhibit any damage
the drop height determined as follows: likely to affect safety during transport.
(1) For solids and liquids, if the test Inner receptacles, inner packagings, or
is performed with the solid or liquid to articles must remain completely with-
be transported or with a non-hazardous in the outer packaging and there must
material having essentially the same be no leakage of the filling substance
physical characteristic, the drop height from the inner receptacles or inner
must be determined according to pack- packagings;
ing group, as follows: (5) Any discharge from a closure is
(i) Packing Group I: 1.8 m (5.9 feet). slight and ceases immediately after
(ii) Packing Group II: 1.2 m (3.9 feet). impact with no further leakage; and
(iii) Packing Group III: 0.8 m (2.6 (6) No rupture is permitted in pack-
feet). agings for materials in Class 1 which
(2) For liquids in single packagings would permit spillage of loose explo-
and for inner packagings of combina- sive substances or articles from the
tion packagings, if the test is per- outer packaging.
formed with water: [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, 1990, as
(i) Where the materials to be carried amended at 56 FR 66286, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR
have a specific gravity not exceeding 45465, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 178–99, 58 FR 51534,
1.2, drop height must be determined ac- Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 178–106, 59 FR 67522, Dec.
cording to packing group, as follows: 29, 1994; 65 FR 50462, Aug. 18, 2000; 66 FR 45386,
Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 61016, Sept. 27, 2002; 69 FR
(A) Packing Group I: 1.8 m (5.9 feet). 76186, Dec. 20, 2004; 76 FR 3389, Jan. 19, 2011;
(B) Packing Group II: 1.2 m (3.9 feet). 78 FR 1097, Jan. 7, 2013]
(C) Packing Group III: 0.8 m (2.6 feet).
(ii) Where the materials to be trans- § 178.604 Leakproofness test.
ported have a specific gravity exceed- (a) General. The leakproofness test
ing 1.2, the drop height must be cal- must be performed with compressed air
culated on the basis of the specific or other suitable gases on all pack-
gravity (SG) of the material to be car- agings intended to contain liquids, ex-
ried, rounded up to the first decimal, as cept that:
follows: (1) The inner receptacle of a com-
(A) Packing Group I: SG × 1.5 m (4.9 posite packaging may be tested with-
feet). out the outer packaging provided the
(B) Packing Group II: SG × 1.0 m (3.3 test results are not affected; and
feet). (2) This test is not required for inner
(C) Packing Group III: SG × 0.67 m packagings of combination packagings.
(2.2 feet). (b) Number of packagings to be tested—
(f) Criteria for passing the test. A pack- (1) Production testing. All packagings
age is considered to successfully pass subject to the provisions of this section
the drop tests if for each sample test- must be tested and must pass the
ed— leakproofness test:
(1) For packagings containing liquid, (i) Before they are first used in trans-
each packaging does not leak when portation; and
equilibrium has been reached between (ii) Prior to reuse, when authorized
the internal and external pressures, ex- for reuse by § 173.28 of this subchapter.
cept for inner packagings of combina- (2) Design qualification and periodic
tion packagings when it is not nec- testing. Three samples of each different
essary that the pressures be equalized; packaging must be tested and must
(2) For removable head drums for sol- pass the leakproofness test. Exceptions
ids, the entire contents are retained by for the number of samples used in con-
an inner packaging (e.g., a plastic bag) ducting the leakproofness test are sub-
even if the closure on the top head of ject to the approval of the Associate
the drum is no longer sift-proof; Administrator.
209
§ 178.605 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(c) Special preparation—(1) For design retesting of packagings. Exceptions for

qualification and periodic testing, the number of aluminum and steel
packagings must be tested with clo- sample packagings used in conducting
sures in place. For production testing, the hydrostatic pressure test are sub-
packagings need not have their clo- ject to the approval of the Associate
sures in place. Removable heads need Administrator.
not be installed during production test- (c) Special preparation of receptacles
ing. for testings. Vented closures must ei-
(2) For testing with closures in place, ther be replaced by similar non-vented
vented closures must either be replaced closures or the vent must be sealed.
by similar non-vented closures or the (d) Test method and pressure to be ap-
vent must be sealed. plied. Metal packagings and composite
(d) Test method. The packaging must packagings other than plastic (e.g.,
be restrained under water while an in- glass, porcelain or stoneware), includ-
ternal air pressure is applied; the ing their closures, must be subjected to
method of restraint must not affect the the test pressure for 5 minutes. Plastic
results of the test. The test must be packagings and composite packagings
conducted, for other than production (plastic material), including their clo-
testing, for a minimum time of five sures, must be subjected to the test
minutes. Other methods, at least pressure for 30 minutes. This pressure
equally effective, may be used in ac- is the one to be marked as required in
cordance with appendix B of this part. § 178.503(a)(5). The receptacles must be
(e) Pressure applied. An internal air supported in a manner that does not
pressure (gauge) must be applied to the invalidate the test. The test pressure
packaging as indicated for the fol- must be applied continuously and even-
lowing packing groups: ly, and it must be kept constant
(1) Packing Group I: Not less than 30 throughout the test period. In addition,
kPa (4 psi). packagings intended to contain haz-
(2) Packing Group II: Not less than 20 ardous materials of Packing Group I
kPa (3 psi). must be tested to a minimum test pres-
(3) Packing Group III: Not less than sure of 250 kPa (36 psig). The hydraulic
20 kPa (3 psi). pressure (gauge) applied, taken at the
(f) Criteria for passing the test. A pack- top of the receptacle, and determined
aging passes the test if there is no by any one of the following methods
leakage of air from the packaging. must be:
[Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, 1990, as
(1) Not less than the total gauge pres-
amended at 56 FR 66286, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. sure measured in the packaging (i.e.,
178–106, 59 FR 67522, Dec. 29, 1994; 66 FR 45386, the vapor pressure of the filling mate-
Aug. 28, 2001] rial and the partial pressure of the air
or other inert gas minus 100 kPa (15
§ 178.605 Hydrostatic pressure test. psi)) at 55 °C (131 °F), multiplied by a
(a) General. The hydrostatic pressure safety factor of 1.5. This total gauge
test must be conducted for the quali- pressure must be determined on the
fication of all metal, plastic, and com- basis of a maximum degree of filling in
posite packaging design types intended accordance with § 173.24a(d) of this sub-
to contain liquids and be performed pe- chapter and a filling temperature of 15
riodically as specified in § 178.601(e). °C (59 °F);
This test is not required for inner (2) Not less than 1.75 times the vapor
packagings of combination packagings. pressure at 50 °C (122 °F) of the mate-
For internal pressure requirements for rial to be transported minus 100 kPa (15
inner packagings of combination pack- psi), but with a minimum test pressure
agings intended for transportation by of 100 kPa (15 psig); or
aircraft, see § 173.27(c) of this sub- (3) Not less than 1.5 times the vapor
chapter. pressure at 55 °C (131 °F) of the mate-
(b) Number of test samples. Three test rial to be transported minus 100 kPa (15
samples are required for each different psi), but with a minimum test pressure
packaging. For packagings constructed of 100 kPa (15 psig).

of stainless steel, monel, or nickel, Packagings intended to contain haz-
only one sample is required for periodic ardous materials of Packing Group I
210
must be tested to a minimum test pres- the test by placing two filled pack-
sure of 250 kPa (36 psig). agings of the same type on the test
(e) Criteria for passing the test. A pack- sample. The stacked packages must
age passes the hydrostatic test if, for maintain their position for one hour.
each test sample, there is no leakage of Plastic packagings must be cooled to
liquid from the package. ambient temperature before this stack-
ing stability assessment.
[Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, 1990, as
amended at 56 FR 66286, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. (2) Periodic retesting. The test sample
178–99, 58 FR 51534, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 178–102, must be tested in accordance with:
59 FR 28494, June 2, 1994; 65 FR 50462, Aug. 18, (i) Section 178.606(c)(1) of this sub-
2000; 66 FR 45386, 45390, Aug. 28, 2001; 73 FR part; or
57007, Oct. 1, 2008; 78 FR 60755, Oct. 2, 2013] (ii) The packaging may be tested
using a dynamic compression testing
§ 178.606 Stacking test. machine. The test must be conducted
(a) General. All packaging design at room temperature on an empty, un-
types other than bags must be sub- sealed packaging. The test sample
jected to a stacking test. must be centered on the bottom platen
(b) Number of test samples. Three test of the testing machine. The top platen
samples are required for each different must be lowered until it comes in con-
packaging. For periodic retesting of tact with the test sample. Compression
packagings constructed of stainless must be applied end to end. The speed
steel, monel, or nickel, only one test of the compression tester must be one-
sample is required. Exceptions for the half inch plus or minus one-fourth inch
number of aluminum and steel sample per minute. An initial preload of 50
packagings used in conducting the pounds must be applied to ensure a
stacking test are subject to the ap- definite contact between the test sam-
proval of the Associate Administrator. ple and the platens. The distance be-
Notwithstanding the provisions of tween the platens at this time must be
§ 178.602(a) of this subpart, combination recorded as zero deformation. The force
packagings may be subjected to the A to then be applied must be calculated
stacking test without their inner pack- using the formula:
agings, except where this would invali- Liquids: A = (n¥1) [w + (s × v × 8.3 ×
date the results of the test. .98)] × 1.5;
(c) Test method—(1) Design qualifica- Solids: A = (n¥1) (m × 2.2 × 1.5)
tion testing. The test sample must be
subjected to a force applied to the top Where:
surface of the test sample equivalent to A = applied load in pounds
the total weight of identical packages m = the certified maximum gross mass for
which might be stacked on it during the container in kilograms.
n = minimum number of containers that,
transport; where the contents of the
when stacked, reach a height of 3 meters.
test sample are non-hazardous liquids s = specific gravity of lading.
with specific gravities different from w = maximum weight of one empty container
that of the liquid to be transported, the in pounds.
force must be calculated based on the v = actual capacity of container (rated ca-
specific gravity that will be marked on pacity + outage) in gallons.
the packaging. The minimum height of And:
the stack, including the test sample, 8.3 corresponds to the weight in pounds of 1.0
must be 3.0 m (10 feet). The duration of gallon of water.
the test must be 24 hours, except that .98 corresponds to the minimum filling per-
plastic drums, jerricans, and composite centage of the maximum capacity for liq-
packagings 6HH intended for liquids uids.
1.5 is a compensation factor that converts
shall be subjected to the stacking test
the static load of the stacking test into
for a period of 28 days at a temperature a load suitable for dynamic compression
of not less than 40 °C (104 °F). Alter- testing.
native test methods which yield equiv- 2.2 is the conversion factor for kilograms to
alent results may be used if approved pounds.
by the Associate Administrator. In (d) Criteria for passing the test. No test
guided load tests, stacking stability sample may leak. In composite pack-
must be assessed after completion of agings or combination packagings,
211
§ 178.607 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
there must be no leakage of the filling (0.063 inch) thickness (such as steel
substance from the inner receptacle, or strapping or paperboard) can be passed
inner packaging. No test sample may between the bottom of any package
show any deterioration which could ad- and the platform.
versely affect transportation safety or (4) Immediately following the period
any distortion likely to reduce its of vibration, each package must be re-
strength, cause instability in stacks of moved from the platform, turned on its
packages, or cause damage to inner side and observed for any evidence of
packagings likely to reduce safety in leakage.
transportation. For the dynamic com- (5) Other methods, at least equally
pression test, a container passes the effective, may be used, if approved by
test if, after application of the required the Associate Administrator.
load, there is no buckling of the side- (c) Criteria for passing the test. A pack-
walls sufficient to cause damage to its aging passes the vibration test if there
expected contents; in no case may the is no rupture or leakage from any of
maximum deflection exceed one inch. the packages. No test sample should
show any deterioration which could ad-
[Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, 1990, as
versely affect transportation safety or
amended at 56 FR 66286, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR
45465, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 178–102, 59 FR 28494, any distortion liable to reduce pack-
June 2, 1994; Amdt. 178–106, 59 FR 67522, Dec. aging strength.
29, 1994; 65 FR 58632, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, 1990, as
45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 70 FR 34076, June 13, 2005; amended at 56 FR 66286, Dec. 20, 1991; 66 FR
72 FR 55696, Oct. 1, 2007] 45386, Aug. 28, 2001]
§ 178.607 Cooperage test for bung-type § 178.609 Test requirements for pack-
wooden barrels. agings for infectious substances.
(a) Number of samples. One barrel is (a) Samples of each packaging must
required for each different packaging. be prepared for testing as described in
(b) Method of testing. Remove all paragraph (b) of this section and then
hoops above the bilge of an empty bar- subjected to the tests in paragraphs (d)
rel at least two days old. through (i) of this section.
(c) Criteria for passing the test. A pack- (b) Samples of each packaging must
aging passes the cooperage test only if be prepared as for transport except
the diameter of the cross-section of the that a liquid or solid infectious sub-
upper part of the barrel does not instance should be replaced by water or,
crease by more than 10 percent. where conditioning at ¥18 °C (0 °F) is
specified, by water/antifreeze. Each pri-
§ 178.608 Vibration standard. mary receptacle must be filled to 98
(a) Each packaging must be capable percent capacity. Packagings for live
of withstanding, without rupture or animals should be tested with the live
leakage, the vibration test procedure animal being replaced by an appro-
outlined in this section. priate dummy of similar mass.
(b) Test method. (1) Three sample (c) Packagings prepared as for trans-
packagings, selected at random, must port must be subjected to the tests in
be filled and closed as for shipment. Table I of this paragraph (c), which, for
(2) The three samples must be placed test purposes, categorizes packagings
on a vibrating platform that has a according to their material character-
vertical or rotary double-amplitude istics. For outer packagings, the head-
(peak-to-peak displacement) of one ings in Table I relate to fiberboard or
inch. The packages should be con- similar materials whose performance
strained horizontally to prevent them may be rapidly affected by moisture;
from falling off the platform, but must plastics that may embrittle at low
be left free to move vertically, bounce temperature; and other materials, such
and rotate. as metal, for which performance is not
(3) The test must be performed for significantly affected by moisture or
one hour at a frequency that causes the temperature. Where a primary recep-
package to be raised from the vibrating tacle and a secondary packaging of an

platform to such a degree that a piece inner packaging are made of different
of material of approximately 1.6 mm materials, the material of the primary
212
receptacle determines the appropriate terial, the material most likely to be

test. In instances where a primary re- damaged determines the appropriate
ceptacle is made of more than one ma- test.
TABLE I—TESTS REQUIRED
Material of Tests required
Outer packaging Inner packaging Refer to para. (d) Refer to

para. (h)
Fiberboard Plastics Other Plastics Other (d) (e) (f) (g)
X X X X When dry ice X

is used
X X X X
X X X X
X X X X
X X X X
X X X X
(d) Samples must be subjected to (f) The sample must be conditioned in

free-fall drops onto a rigid, nonresil- an atmosphere of ¥18 °C (0 °F) or less
ient, flat, horizontal surface from a for a period of at least 24 hours and
height of 9 m (30 feet). within 15 minutes of removal from that
The drops must be performed as fol- atmosphere be subjected to the test de-
lows: scribed in paragraph (d) of this section.
(1) Where the samples are in the Where the sample contains dry ice, the
shape of a box, five samples must be conditioning period may be reduced to
dropped, one in each of the following 4 hours.
orientation:
(g) Where packaging is intended to
(i) Flat on the base;
(ii) Flat on the top; contain dry ice, a test additional to
(iii) Flat on the longest side; that specified in paragraph (d) or (e) or
(iv) Flat on the shortest side; and (f) of this section must be carried out.
(v) On a corner. One sample must be stored so that all
(2) Where the samples are in the the dry ice dissipates and then be sub-
shape of a drum, three samples must be jected to the test described in para-
dropped, one in each of the following graph (d) of this section.
orientations: (h) Packagings with a gross mass of 7
(i) Diagonally on the top chime, with kg (15 pounds) or less should be sub-
the center of gravity directly above the jected to the tests described in para-
point of impact; graph (h)(1) of this section and pack-
(ii) Diagonally on the base chime; agings with a gross mass exceeding 7
and kg (15 pounds) to the tests in paragraph
(iii) Flat on the side. (h)(2) of this section.
(3) While the sample should be re-
(1) Samples must be placed on a
leased in the required orientation, it is
level, hard surface. A cylindrical steel
accepted that for aerodynamic reasons
rod with a mass of at least 7 kg (15
the impact may not take place in that
orientation. pounds), a diameter not exceeding 38
(4) Following the appropriate drop se- mm (1.5 inches), and, at the impact end
quence, there must be no leakage from edges, a radius not exceeding 6 mm (0.2
the primary receptacle(s) which should inches), must be dropped in a vertical
remain protected by absorbent mate- free fall from a height of 1 m (3 feet),
rial in the secondary packaging. measured from the impact end of the
(e) The samples must be subjected to sample’s impact surface. One sample
a water spray to simulate exposure to must be placed on its base. A second
rainfall of approximately 50 mm (2 sample must be placed in an orienta-
inches) per hour for at least one hour. tion perpendicular to that used for the
They must then be subjected to the first. In each instance, the steel rod
test described in paragraph (d) of this must be aimed to impact the primary
section. receptacle(s). For a successful test,
213
§ 178.609 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
there must be no leakage from the pri- the same manner as in the tested pack-
mary receptacle(s) following each im- age.
pact. (2) Variation 2. A lesser number of the
(2) Samples must be dropped onto the tested primary receptacles, or of the
end of a cylindrical steel rod. The rod alternative types of primary recep-
must be set vertically in a level, hard tacles identified in paragraph (i)(1) of
surface. It must have a diameter of 38 this section, may be used provided suf-
mm (1.5 inches) and a radius not ex- ficient cushioning is added to fill the
ceeding 6 mm (0.2 inches) at the edges void space(s) and to prevent significant
of the upper end. The rod must pro- movement of the primary receptacles.
trude from the surface a distance at (3) Variation 3. Primary receptacles of
least equal to that between the pri- any type may be placed within a sec-
mary receptacle(s) and the outer sur- ondary packaging and shipped without
face of the outer packaging with a min- testing in the outer packaging provided
imum of 200 mm (7.9 inches). One sam- all of the following conditions are met:
ple must be dropped in a vertical free (i) The secondary and outer pack-
fall from a height of 1 m (3 feet), meas- aging combination must be success-
ured from the top of the steel rod. A fully tested in accordance with para-
second sample must be dropped from graphs (a) through (h) of this section
the same height in an orientation per- with fragile (e.g., glass) inner recep-
pendicular to that used for the first. In tacles.
each instance, the packaging must be (ii) The total combined gross weight
oriented so the steel rod will impact of inner receptacles may not exceed
the primary receptacle(s). For a suc- one-half the gross weight of inner re-
cessful test, there must be no leakage ceptacles used for the drop test in para-
from the primary receptacle(s) fol- graph (d) of this section.
lowing each impact. (iii) The thickness of cushioning ma-
(i) Variations. The following vari- terial between inner receptacles and
ations in the primary receptacles between inner receptacles and the out-
placed within the secondary packaging side of the secondary packaging may
are allowed without additional testing not be reduced below the corresponding
of the completed package. An equiva- thicknesses in the originally tested
lent level of performance must be packaging. If a single inner receptacle
maintained. was used in the original test, the thick-
(1) Variation 1. Primary receptacles of ness of cushioning between the inner
equivalent or smaller size as compared receptacles must be no less than the
to the tested primary receptacles may thickness of cushioning between the
be used provided they meet all of the outside of the secondary packaging and
following conditions: the inner receptacle in the original
(i) The primary receptacles are of test. When either fewer or smaller
similar design to the tested primary re- inner receptacles are used (as com-
ceptacle (e.g., shape: round, rectan- pared to the inner receptacles used in
gular, etc.). the drop test), sufficient additional
(ii) The material of construction of cushioning material must be used to
the primary receptacle (glass, plastics, fill the void.
metal, etc.) offers resistance to impact (iv) The outer packaging must pass
and a stacking force equal to or greater the stacking test in § 178.606 while
than that of the originally tested pri- empty. The total weight of identical
mary receptacle. packages must be based on the com-
(iii) The primary receptacles have bined mass of inner receptacles used in
the same or smaller openings and the the drop test in paragraph (d) of this
closure is of similar design (e.g., screw section.
cap, friction lid, etc.). (v) For inner receptacles containing
(iv) Sufficient additional cushioning liquids, an adequate quantity of ab-
material is used to fill void spaces and sorbent material must be present to
to prevent significant movement of the absorb the entire liquid contents of the
primary receptacles. inner receptacles.

(v) Primary receptacles are oriented (vi) If the outer packaging is in-
within the intermediate packaging in tended to contain inner receptacles for
214
liquids and is not leakproof, or is in- specified in paragraph (a)(1) of this sec-
tended to contain inner receptacles for tion; followed by the capital letter(s)
solids and is not sift proof, a means of specified in paragraph (a)(2) of this sec-
containing any liquid or solid contents tion; followed, when specified in an in-
in the event of leakage must be pro- dividual section, by a numeral indi-
vided. This can be a leakproof liner, cating the category of intermediate
plastic bag, or other equally effective bulk container.
means of containment. (1) IBC code number designations are
(vii) In addition, the marking re- as follows:
quired in § 178.503(f) of this subchapter
must be followed by the letter ‘‘U’’. For solids, discharged
[Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, 1990, as Under pres-

Type sure of For liquids
amended by Amdt. 178–111, 60 FR 48787, Sept. by gravity more than
20, 1995; 67 FR 53143, Aug. 14, 2002; 69 FR 54046, 10 kPa
Sept. 7, 2004] (1.45 psig)
Rigid .................. 11 21 31
Subpart N—IBC Performance- Flexible .............. 13
Oriented Standards
(2) Intermediate bulk container code
§ 178.700 Purpose, scope and defini- letter designations are as follows:
tions.
‘‘A’’ means steel (all types and surface treat-
(a) This subpart prescribes requirements).
ments applying to IBCs intended for ‘‘B’’ means aluminum.
the transportation of hazardous mate- ‘‘C’’ means natural wood.
rials. Standards for these packagings ‘‘D’’ means plywood.
are based on the UN Recommendations. ‘‘F’’ means reconstituted wood.
(b) Terms used in this subpart are de- ‘‘G’’ means fiberboard.
fined in § 171.8 of this subchapter and in ‘‘H’’ means plastic.
paragraph (c) of this section. ‘‘L’’ means textile.
(c) The following definitions pertain ‘‘M’’ means paper, multiwall.
to the IBC standards in this subpart. ‘‘N’’ means metal (other than steel or alu-
(1) Body means the receptacle proper minum).
(including openings and their closures, (b) For composite IBCs, two capital
but not including service equipment) letters are used in sequence following
that has a volumetric capacity of not the numeral indicating IBC design
more than 3 cubic meters (3,000 L, 793 type. The first letter indicates the ma-
gallons, or 106 cubic feet). terial of the IBC inner receptacle. The
(2) Service equipment means filling and second letter indicates the material of
discharge, pressure relief, safety, heat- the outer IBC. For example, 31HA1 is a
ing and heat-insulating devices and composite IBC with a plastic inner re-
measuring instruments. ceptacle and a steel outer packaging.
(3) Structural equipment means the re-
inforcing, fastening, handling, protec- [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as
tive or stabilizing members of the body amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001]
or stacking load bearing structural
members (such as metal cages). § 178.703 Marking of IBCs.
(4) Maximum permissible gross mass (a) The manufacturer shall:
means the mass of the body, its service (1) Mark every IBC in a durable and
equipment, structural equipment and clearly visible manner. The marking
the maximum net mass (see § 171.8 of may be applied in a single line or in
this subchapter). multiple lines provided the correct se-
[Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as quence is followed with the informa-
amended by Amdt. 178–108, 60 FR 40038, Aug. tion required by this section in letters,
4, 1995; 66 FR 45386, 45387, Aug. 28, 2001; 73 FR numerals and symbols of at least 12
57008, Oct. 1, 2008; 75 FR 5396, Feb. 2, 2010] mm in height. This minimum marking
size applies only to IBCs manufactured
§ 178.702 IBC codes. after October 1, 2001). The following in-

(a) Intermediate bulk container code formation is required in the sequence
designations consist of: two numerals presented:
215
§ 178.703 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(i) Except as provided in (C) Z—for IBCs meeting only Packing

§ 178.503(e)(1)(ii), the United Nations Group III tests.
symbol as illustrated in (iv) The month (designated numeri-
§ 178.503(e)(1)(i). For metal IBCs on cally) and year (last two digits) of
which the marking is stamped or em- manufacture.
bossed, the capital letters ‘‘UN’’ may (v) The country authorizing the allo-
be applied instead of the symbol. cation of the mark. The letters ‘USA’
(ii) The code number designating IBC indicate that the IBC is manufactured
design type according to § 178.702(a). and marked in the United States in
The letter ‘‘W’’ must follow the IBC de- compliance with the provisions of this
sign type identification code on an IBC subchapter.
when the IBC differs from the require- (vi) The name and address or symbol
of the manufacturer or the approval
ments in subpart N of this part, or is
tested using methods other than those
parts N and O of this part. Symbols, if
specified in this subpart, and is ap-
used, must be registered with the Asso-
proved by the Associate Administrator ciate Administrator.
in accordance with the provisions in (vii) The stacking test load in kilo-
§ 178.801(i). grams (kg). For IBCs not designed for
(iii) A capital letter identifying the stacking, the figure ‘‘0’’ must be
performance standard under which the shown.
design type has been successfully test- (viii) The maximum permissible
ed, as follows: gross mass in kg.
(A) X—for IBCs meeting Packing (2) The following are examples of
Group I, II and III tests; symbols and required markings:
(B) Y—for IBCs meeting Packing (i) For a metal IBC containing solids
Group II and III tests; and discharged by gravity made from steel:
(ii) For a flexible IBC containing sol-

ids discharged by gravity and made
from woven plastic with a liner:
(iii) For a rigid plastic IBC con- stack load and with a manufacturer’s
taining liquids, made from plastic with symbol in place of the manufacturer’s
structural equipment withstanding the name and address:
ER26JY94.001</GPH>
216
ER26JY94.000</GPH>
(iv) For a composite IBC containing with the symbol of a DOT approved
liquids, with a rigid plastic inner re- third-party test laboratory:
ceptacle and an outer steel body and
(b) Additional marking. In addition to (3) Markings required by paragraph

markings required in paragraph (a) of (b)(1) or (b)(2) of this section may be
this section, each IBC must be marked preceded by the narrative description
as follows in a place near the markings of the marking, e.g. ‘‘Tare Mass: * * *’’
required in paragraph (a) of this sec- where the ‘‘* * *’’ are replaced with the
tion that is readily accessible for in- tare mass in kilograms of the IBC.
spection. Where units of measure are (4) For each fiberboard and wooden
used, the metric unit indicated (e.g., IBC, the tare mass in kg must be
450 L) must also appear. shown.
(1) For each rigid plastic and com- (5) Each flexible IBC may be marked
posite IBC, the following markings with a pictogram displaying rec-
must be included: ommended lifting methods.
(i) Rated capacity in L of water at 20 (6) For each composite IBC, the inner
°C (68 °F); receptacle must be marked with at
(ii) Tare mass in kilograms; least the following information:
(iii) Gauge test pressure in kPa; (i) The code number designating the
(iv) Date of last leakproofness test, if IBC design type, the name and address
applicable (month and year); and or symbol of the manufacturer, the
(v) Date of last inspection (month date of manufacture and the country
and year). authorizing the allocation of the mark
(2) For each metal IBC, the following as specified in paragraph (a) of this sec-
markings must be included on a metal tion. The date of manufacture of the
corrosion-resistant plate: inner receptacle may be different from
(i) Rated capacity in L of water at 20 the marked date of manufacture re-
°C (68 °F); quired by § 178.703(a)(1)(iv) or by
(ii) Tare mass in kilograms; § 180.352(d)(1)(iv) of this subchapter; and
(iii) Date of last leakproofness test, if (ii) When a composite IBC is designed
applicable (month and year); in such a manner that the outer casing
(iv) Date of last inspection (month is intended to be dismantled for trans-
and year); port when empty (such as, for the re-
(v) Maximum loading/discharge pres- turn of the IBC for reuse to the origi-
sure, in kPa, if applicable; nal consignor), each of the parts in-
(vi) Body material and its minimum tended to be detached when so disman-
thickness in mm; and tled must be marked with the month

ER26JY94.003</GPH>
(vii) Serial number assigned by the and year of manufacture and the name
manufacturer. or symbol of the manufacturer.
217
ER26JY94.002</GPH>
§ 178.704 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(7) The symbol applicable to an IBC paired or remanufactured after Janu-

designed for stacking or not designed ary 1, 2011 as follows:
for stacking, as appropriate, must be (i)
marked on all IBCs manufactured, re-
(ii) Display the symbol in a durable mass must be at least 12 mm (0.48

and visible manner. inches).
(iii) The symbol must be a square [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as
with each side being not less than 100 amended by Amdt. 178–119, 62 FR 24743, May
mm (3.9 inches) by 100 mm (3.9 inches) 6, 1997; 64 FR 10782, Mar. 5, 1999; 65 FR 50462,
as measured from the corner printer Aug. 18, 2000; 65 FR 58632, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR
marks shown on the figures in para- 33451, June 21, 2001; 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001;
graph (b)(7)(i) of this section. Where di- 74 FR 2269, Jan. 14, 2009; 75 FR 74, Jan. 4, 2010;
75 FR 5396, Feb. 2, 2010; 76 FR 3389, Jan. 19,
mensions are not specified, all features 2011; 80 FR 1168, Jan. 8, 2015; 83 FR 55810, Nov.
must be in approximate proportion to 7, 2018]
those shown.
(A) Transitional exception. A marking § 178.704 General IBC standards.
in conformance with the requirements (a) Each IBC must be resistant to, or
of this paragraph in effect on December protected from, deterioration due to
31, 2014, may continue to be applied to exposure to the external environment.
all IBCs manufactured, repaired or re- IBCs intended for solid hazardous ma-
manufactured between January 1, 2011 terials must be sift-proof and water-re-
and December 31, 2016. sistant.
(B) For domestic transportation, an (b) All service equipment must be so
IBC marked prior to January 1, 2017 positioned or protected as to minimize
and in conformance with the require- potential loss of contents resulting
ments of this paragraph in effect on from damage during IBC handling and
December 31, 2014, may continue in transportation.
service until the end of its useful life. (c) Each IBC, including attachments,
(iv) For IBCs designed for stacking, and service and structural equipment,
the maximum permitted stacking load must be designed to withstand, without
applicable when the IBC is in use must loss of hazardous materials, the inter-
be displayed with the symbol. The nal pressure of the contents and the
mass in kilograms (kg) marked above stresses of normal handling and trans-
the symbol must not exceed the load port. An IBC intended for stacking
imposed during the design test, as indi- must be designed for stacking. Any
cated by the marking in paragraph lifting or securing features of an IBC
(a)(1)(vii) of this section, divided by 1.8. must be of sufficient strength to with-
The letters and numbers indicating the stand the normal conditions of han-
dling and transportation without gross
distortion or failure and must be posi-
tioned so as to cause no undue stress in
any part of the IBC.
(d) An IBC consisting of a packaging

within a framework must be so con-
structed that:
218
ER04JA10.097</GPH>
(1) The body is not damaged by the tegrity of the receptacle under condi-
framework; tions normally incident to transpor-
(2) The body is retained within the tation.
framework at all times; and (i) The use of dissimilar metals must
(3) The service and structural equip- not result in deterioration that could
ment are fixed in such a way that they affect the integrity of the body.
cannot be damaged if the connections (ii) Aluminum IBCs intended to con-
between body and frame allow relative tain flammable liquids must have no
expansion or motion. movable parts, such as covers and clo-
(e) Bottom discharge valves must be sures, made of unprotected steel liable
secured in the closed position and the to rust, which might cause a dangerous
discharge system suitably protected reaction from friction or percussive
from damage. Valves having lever clo- contact with the aluminum.
sures must be secured against acci- (iii) Metals used in fabricating the
dental opening. The open or closed po- body of a metal IBC must meet the fol-
sition of each valve must be readily ap- lowing requirements:
parent. For each IBC containing a liq- (A) For steel, the percentage elon-
uid, a secondary means of sealing the gation at fracture must not be less
discharge aperture must also be pro- than 10,000/Rm with a minimum of 20
vided, e.g., by a blank flange or equiva- percent; where Rm = minimum tensile
lent device. strength of the steel to be used, in N/
(f) IBC design types must be con- mm2; if U.S. Standard units of psi are
structed in such a way as to be bottom- used for tensile strength then the ratio
lifted or top-lifted as specified in becomes 10,000 × (145/Rm).
§§ 178.811 and 178.812. (B) For aluminum, the percentage
[Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as elongation at fracture must not be less
amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR than 10,000/(6Rm) with an absolute min-
61942, Oct. 30, 2003] imum of eight percent; if U.S. Standard
units of psi are used for tensile
§ 178.705 Standards for metal IBCs. strength then the ratio becomes 10,000
(a) The provisions in this section × 145 / (6Rm).
apply to metal IBCs intended to con- (C) Specimens used to determine the
tain liquids and solids. Metal IBC types elongation at fracture must be taken
are designated: transversely to the direction of rolling
(1) 11A, 11B, 11N for solids that are and be so secured that:
loaded or discharged by gravity. Lo = 5d
(2) 21A, 21B, 21N for solids that are
loaded or discharged at a gauge pres- or
sure greater than 10 kPa (1.45 psig). Lo = 5.65 √A
(3) 31A, 31B, 31N for liquids.
(b) Definitions for metal IBCs: where:
(1) Metal IBC means an IBC with a Lo = gauge length of the specimen before the
metal body, together with appropriate test
service and structural equipment. d = diameter
A = cross-sectional area of test specimen.
(2) Protected means providing the IBC
body with additional external protec- (iv) Minimum wall thickness:
tion against impact and abrasion. For (A) For a reference steel having a
example, a multi-layer (sandwich) or product of Rm × Ao = 10,000, where Ao
double wall construction or a frame is the minimum elongation (as a per-
with a metal lattice-work casing. centage) of the reference steel to be
(c) Construction requirements for used on fracture under tensile stress
metal IBCs are as follows: (Rm × Ao = 10,000 × 145; if tensile
(1) Body. The body must be made of strength is in U.S. Standard units of
ductile metal materials. Welds must be pounds per square inch), the wall
made so as to maintain design type in- thickness must not be less than:
219
§ 178.706 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
Wall thickness (T) in mm
Capacity (C) in liters 1 Types 11A, 11B, 11N Types 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B, 31N
Unprotected Protected Unprotected Protected
C≤1000 .......................................................... 2.0 ........................ 1.5 ........................ 2.5 ........................ 2.0

1000<C≤2000 ................................................ T = C/2000 + 1.5 T = C/2000 + 1.0 T = C/2000 + 2.0 T = C/2000 + 1.5
2000<C≤3000 ................................................ T = C/2000 + 1.5 T = C/2000 + 1.0 T = C/1000 + 1.0 T = C/2000 + 1.5
(B) For metals other than the ref- be the minimum value indicated in the
erence steel described in paragraph material inspection certificate.
(c)(1)(iii)(A) of this section, the min- (2) Pressure relief. The following pres-
imum wall thickness is the greater of sure relief requirements apply to IBCs
1.5 mm (0.059 inches) or as determined intended for liquids:
by use of the following equivalence for- (i) IBCs must be capable of releasing
mula: a sufficient amount of vapor in the
event of fire engulfment to ensure that
FORMULA FOR METRIC UNITS no rupture of the body will occur due
to pressure build-up. This can be
21.4 × e 0 achieved by spring-loaded or non-re-
e1 = 3
closing pressure relief devices or by
Rm1 × A1 other means of construction.
(ii) The start-to-discharge pressure
FORMULA FOR U.S. STANDARD may not be higher than 65 kPa (9 psig)
UNITS and no lower than the vapor pressure of
the hazardous material plus the partial
21.4 × e 0 pressure of the air or other inert gases,
e1 = measured in the IBC at 55 °C (131 °F),
3
( Rm1 × A1 )/145 determined on the basis of a maximum
degree of filling as specified in
where:
§ 173.35(d) of this subchapter. This does
e1 = required equivalent wall thickness of the
not apply to fusible devices unless such
metal to be used (in mm or if eo is in
inches, use formula for U.S. Standard devices are the only source of pressure
units). relief for the IBC. Pressure relief de-
eo = required minimum wall thickness for vices must be fitted in the vapor space.
the reference steel (in mm or if eo is in (d) Metal IBCs may not have a volu-
inches, use formula for U.S. Standard metric capacity greater than 3,000 L
units). (793 gallons) or less than 450 L (119 gal-
Rm1 = guaranteed minimum tensile strength
of the metal to be used (in N/mm2 or for
lons).
U.S. Standard units, use psi). [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as
A1 = minimum elongation (as a percentage) amended by Amdt. 178–108, 60 FR 40038, Aug.
of the metal to be used on fracture under 4, 1995; Amdt. 178–117, 61 FR 50629, Sept. 26,
tensile stress (see paragraph (c)(1) of this 1996; 66 FR 33452, June 21, 2001; 66 FR 45386,
section). 45387, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 45041, July 31, 2003;
(C) For purposes of the calculation 75 FR 5396, Feb. 2, 2010; 78 FR 1097, Jan. 7,
described in paragraph (c)(1)(iv)(B) of 2013]
this section, the guaranteed minimum
§ 178.706 Standards for rigid plastic
tensile strength of the metal to be used IBCs.
(Rm1) must be the minimum value ac-
cording to material standards. How- (a) The provisions in this section
ever, for austenitic (stainless) steels, apply to rigid plastic IBCs intended to
the specified minimum value for Rm, contain solids or liquids. Rigid plastic
according to the material standards, IBC types are designated:
may be increased by up to 15% when a (1) 11H1 fitted with structural equip-
greater value is provided in the mate- ment designed to withstand the whole
EP26JN96.001</MATH>
rial inspection certificate. When no load when IBCs are stacked, for solids
material standard exists for the mate- which are loaded or discharged by grav-
rial in question, the value of Rm must ity.
220
EP26JN96.000</MATH>
(2) 11H2 freestanding, for solids which internal pressure in excess of that for
are loaded or discharged by gravity. which it was hydraulically tested. This
(3) 21H1 fitted with structural equip- may be achieved by spring-loaded or
ment designed to withstand the whole non-reclosing pressure relief devices or
load when IBCs are stacked, for solids by other means of construction.
which are loaded or discharged under (d) Rigid plastic IBCs may not have a
pressure. volumetric capacity greater than 3,000
(4) 21H2 freestanding, for solids which L (793 gallons) or less than 450 L (119
are loaded or discharged under pres- gallons).
sure.
(5) 31H1 fitted with structural equip- [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as
ment designed to withstand the whole amended at 66 FR 45386, 45387, Aug. 28, 2001;
75 FR 5396, Feb. 2, 2010]
load when IBCs are stacked, for liquids.
(6) 31H2 freestanding, for liquids.
§ 178.707 Standards for composite
(b) Rigid plastic IBCs consist of a IBCs.
rigid plastic body, which may have
structural equipment, together with (a) The provisions in this section
appropriate service equipment. apply to composite IBCs intended to
(c) Rigid plastic IBCs must be manu- contain solids and liquids. To complete
factured from plastic material of the marking codes listed below, the
known specifications and be of a letter ‘‘Z’’ must be replaced by a cap-
strength relative to its capacity and to ital letter in accordance with
the service it is required to perform. In § 178.702(a)(2) to indicate the material
addition to conformance to § 173.24 of used for the outer packaging. Com-
this subchapter, plastic materials must posite IBC types are designated:
be resistant to aging and to degrada- (1) 11HZ1 Composite IBCs with a rigid
tion caused by ultraviolet radiation. plastic inner receptacle for solids load-
(1) If protection against ultraviolet ed or discharged by gravity.
radiation is necessary, it must be pro- (2) 11HZ2 Composite IBCs with a
vided by the addition of a pigment or flexible plastic inner receptacle for sol-
inhibiter such as carbon black. These ids loaded or discharged by gravity.
additives must be compatible with the (3) 21HZ1 Composite IBCs with a rigid
contents and remain effective through- plastic inner receptacle for solids load-
out the life of the IBC body. Where use ed or discharged under pressure.
is made of carbon black, pigments or (4) 21HZ2 Composite IBCs with a
inhibitors, other than those used in the flexible plastic inner receptacle for sol-
manufacture of the tested design type, ids loaded or discharged under pres-
retesting may be omitted if changes in sure.
the carbon black content, the pigment
(5) 31HZ1 Composite IBCs with a rigid
content or the inhibitor content do not
plastic inner receptacle for liquids.
adversely affect the physical properties
of the material of construction. (6) 31HZ2 Composite IBCs with a
(2) Additives may be included in the flexible plastic inner receptacle for liq-
composition of the plastic material to uids.
improve the resistance to aging or to (b) Definitions for composite IBC
serve other purposes, provided they do types:
not adversely affect the physical or (1) A composite IBC is an IBC which
chemical properties of the material of consists of a rigid outer packaging en-
construction. closing a plastic inner receptacle to-
(3) No used material other than pro- gether with any service or other struc-
duction residues or regrind from the tural equipment. The outer packaging
same manufacturing process may be of a composite IBC is designed to bear
used in the manufacture of rigid plastic the entire stacking load. The inner re-
IBCs. ceptacle and outer packaging form an
(4) Rigid plastic IBCs intended for the integral packaging and are filled,
transportation of liquids must be capa- stored, transported, and emptied as a
ble of releasing a sufficient amount of unit.

vapor to prevent the body of the IBC (2) The term plastic means polymeric
from rupturing if it is subjected to an materials (i.e., plastic or rubber).
221
§ 178.707 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(3) A ‘‘rigid’’ inner receptacle is an versely affect the physical or chemical

inner receptacle which retains its gen- properties of the material.
eral shape when empty without clo- (iii) No used material other than pro-
sures in place and without benefit of duction residues or regrind from the
the outer casing. Any inner receptacle same manufacturing process may be
that is not ‘‘rigid’’ is considered to be used in the manufacture of inner recep-
‘‘flexible.’’ tacles.
(c) Construction requirements for (iv) Composite IBCs intended for the
composite IBCs with plastic inner re- transportation of liquids must be capa-
ceptacles are as follows: ble of releasing a sufficient amount of
(1) The outer packaging must consist vapor to prevent the body of the IBC
of rigid material formed so as to pro- from rupturing if it is subjected to an
tect the inner receptacle from physical internal pressure in excess of that for
damage during handling and transpor- which it was hydraulically tested. This
tation, but is not required to perform may be achieved by spring-loaded or
the secondary containment function. It non-reclosing pressure relief devices or
includes the base pallet where appro- by other means of construction.
priate. The inner receptacle is not in- (4) The strength of the construction
tended to perform a containment func- material comprising the outer pack-
tion without the outer packaging. aging and the manner of construction
(2) A composite IBC with a fully en- must be appropriate to the capacity of
closing outer packaging must be de- the composite IBC and its intended use.
signed to permit assessment of the in- The outer packaging must be free of
tegrity of the inner container following any projection that might damage the
the leakproofness and hydraulic tests. inner receptacle.
The outer packaging of 31HZ2 com- (i) Outer packagings of natural wood
posite IBCs must enclose the inner re- must be constructed of well seasoned
ceptacles on all sides. wood that is commercially dry and free
(3) The inner receptacle must be from defects that would materially
manufactured from plastic material of lessen the strength of any part of the
known specifications and be of a outer packaging. The tops and bottoms
strength relative to its capacity and to may be made of water-resistant recon-
the service it is required to perform. In stituted wood such as hardboard or
addition to conformance with the re- particle board. Materials other than
quirements of § 173.24 of this sub- natural wood may be used for construc-
chapter, the material must be resistant tion of structural equipment of the
to aging and to degradation caused by outer packaging.
ultraviolet radiation. The inner recep- (ii) Outer packagings of plywood
tacle of 31HZ2 composite IBCs must must be made of well-seasoned, rotary
consist of at least three plies of film. cut, sliced, or sawn veneer, commer-
(i) If necessary, protection against cially dry and free from defects that
ultraviolet radiation must be provided would materially lessen the strength of
by the addition of pigments or inhibi- the casing. All adjacent plies must be
tors such as carbon black. These addi- glued with water-resistant adhesive.
tives must be compatible with the con- Materials other than plywood may be
tents and remain effective throughout used for construction of structural
the life of the inner receptacle. Where equipment of the outer packaging.
use is made of carbon black, pigments, Outer packagings must be firmly
or inhibitors, other than those used in nailed or secured to corner posts or
the manufacture of the tested design ends or be assembled by equally suit-
type, retesting may be omitted if the able devices.
carbon black content, the pigment con- (iii) Outer packagings of reconsti-
tent, or the inhibitor content do not tuted wood must be constructed of
adversely affect the physical properties water-resistant reconstituted wood
of the material of construction. such as hardboard or particle board.
(ii) Additives may be included in the Materials other than reconstituted
composition of the plastic material of wood may be used for the construction
the inner receptacle to improve resist- of structural equipment of reconsti-
ance to aging, provided they do not ad- tuted wood outer packaging.
222
(iv) Fiberboard outer packagings performance, may be used but must be

must be constructed of strong, solid, or external to the inner receptacle.
double-faced corrugated fiberboard (iv) The load-bearing surfaces of IBCs
(single or multiwall). intended for stacking must be designed
(A) Water resistance of the outer sur- to distribute loads in a stable manner.
face must be such that the increase in An IBC intended for stacking must be
mass, as determined in a test carried designed so that loads are not sup-
out over a period of 30 minutes by the ported by the inner receptacle.
Cobb method of determining water ab- (6) Intermediate IBCs of type 31HZ2
sorption, is not greater than 155 grams must be limited to a capacity of not
per square meter (0.0316 pounds per more than 1,250 L.
square foot)—see ISO 535 (E) (IBR, see (d) Composite IBCs may not have a
§ 171.7 of this subchapter). Fiberboard volumetric capacity greater than 3,000
must have proper bending qualities. Fi- L (793 gallons) or less than 450 L (119
berboard must be cut, creased without gallons).
cutting through any thickness of fiber- [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as
board, and slotted so as to permit as- amended by Amdt. 178–119, 62 FR 24743, May
sembly without cracking, surface 6, 1997; 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 61016,
breaks, or undue bending. The fluting Sept. 27, 2002; 68 FR 75758, Dec. 31, 2003; 69 FR
of corrugated fiberboard must be firm- 54046, Sept. 7, 2004; 75 FR 5396, Feb. 2, 2010]
ly glued to the facings.
(B) The ends of fiberboard outer § 178.708 Standards for fiberboard
IBCs.
packagings may have a wooden frame
or be constructed entirely of wood. (a) The provisions of this section
Wooden battens may be used for rein- apply to fiberboard IBCs intended to
forcements. contain solids that are loaded or dis-
(C) Manufacturers’ joints in the bod- charged by gravity. Fiberboard IBCs
ies of outer packagings must be taped, are designated: 11G.
lapped and glued, or lapped and (b) Definitions for fiberboard IBC
stitched with metal staples. types:
(D) Lapped joints must have an ap- (1) Fiberboard IBCs consist of a fiber-
propriate overlap. board body with or without separate
top and bottom caps, appropriate serv-
(E) Where closing is effected by glu-
ice and structural equipment, and if
ing or taping, a water-resistant adhe-
necessary an inner liner (but no inner
sive must be used.
packaging).
(F) All closures must be sift-proof. (2) Liner means a separate tube or
(v) Outer packagings of plastic mate- bag, including the closures of its open-
rials must be constructed in accord- ings, inserted in the body but not form-
ance with the relevant provisions of ing an integral part of it.
paragraph (c)(3) of this section. (c) Construction requirements for fi-
(5) Any integral pallet base forming berboard IBCs are as follows:
part of an IBC, or any detachable pal- (1) Top lifting devices are prohibited
let, must be suitable for the mechan- in fiberboard IBCs.
ical handling of an IBC filled to its (2) Fiberboard IBCs must be con-
maximum permissible gross mass. structed of strong, solid or double-
(i) The pallet or integral base must faced corrugated fiberboard (single or
be designed to avoid protrusions that multiwall) that is appropriate to the
may cause damage to the IBC in han- capacity of the outer packaging and its
dling. intended use. Water resistance of the
(ii) The outer packaging must be se- outer surface must be such that the in-
cured to any detachable pallet to en- crease in mass, as determined in a test
sure stability in handling and transpor- carried out over a period of 30 minutes
tation. Where a detachable pallet is by the Cobb method of determining
used, its top surface must be free from water absorption, is not greater than
sharp protrusions that might damage 155 grams per square meter (0.0316
the IBC. pounds per square foot)—see ISO 535 (E)

(iii) Strengthening devices, such as (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). Fi-
timber supports to increase stacking berboard must have proper bending
223
§ 178.709 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
qualities. Fiberboard must be cut, L (793 gallons) or less than 450 L (119
creased without cutting through any gallons).
thickness of fiberboard, and slotted so [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as
as to permit assembly without crack- amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR
ing, surface breaks, or undue bending. 75758, Dec. 31, 2003; 75 FR 5396, Feb. 2, 2010]
The fluting of corrugated fiberboard
must be firmly glued to the facings. § 178.709 Standards for wooden IBCs.
(i) The walls, including top and bot- (a) The provisions in this section
tom, must have a minimum puncture apply to wooden IBCs intended to con-
resistance of 15 Joules (11 foot-pounds tain solids that are loaded or dis-
of energy) measured according to ISO charged by gravity. Wooden IBC types
3036 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). are designated:
(ii) Manufacturers’ joints in the bod- (1) 11C Natural wood with inner liner.
ies of IBCs must be made with an ap- (2) 11D Plywood with inner liner.
propriate overlap and be taped, glued, (3) 11F Reconstituted wood with
stitched with metal staples or fastened inner liner.
(b) Definitions for wooden IBCs:
by other means at least equally effec-
(1) Wooden IBCs consist of a rigid or
tive. Where joints are made by gluing
collapsible wooden body together with
or taping, a water-resistant adhesive an inner liner (but no inner packaging)
must be used. Metal staples must pass and appropriate service and structural
completely through all pieces to be fas- equipment.
tened and be formed or protected so (2) Liner means a separate tube or
that any inner liner cannot be abraded bag, including the closures of its open-
or punctured by them. ings, inserted in the body but not form-
(3) The strength of the material used ing an integral part of it.
and the construction of the liner must (c) Construction requirements for
be appropriate to the capacity of the wooden IBCs are as follows:
IBC and the intended use. Joints and (1) Top lifting devices are prohibited
closures must be sift-proof and capable in wooden IBCs.
of withstanding pressures and impacts (2) The strength of the materials used
liable to occur under normal conditions and the method of construction must
of handling and transport. be appropriate to the capacity and in-
(4) Any integral pallet base forming tended use of the IBC.
part of an IBC, or any detachable pal- (i) Natural wood used in the con-
let, must be suitable for the mechan- struction of an IBC must be well-sea-
ical handling of an IBC filled to its soned, commercially dry, and free from
maximum permissible gross mass. defects that would materially lessen
(i) The pallet or integral base must the strength of any part of the IBC.
be designed to avoid protrusions that Each IBC part must consist of uncut
may cause damage to the IBC in han- wood or a piece equivalent in strength
dling. and integrity. IBC parts are equivalent
(ii) The outer packaging must be se- to one piece when a suitable method of
glued assembly is used (i.e., a
cured to any detachable pallet to en-
Lindermann joint, tongue and groove
sure stability in handling and trans-
joint, ship lap or rabbet joint, or butt
port. Where a detachable pallet is used,
joint with at least two corrugated
its top surface must be free from sharp
metal fasteners at each joint, or when
protrusions that might damage the
other methods at least equally effec-
IBC. tive are used). Materials other than
(iii) Strengthening devices, such as natural wood may be used for the con-
timber supports to increase stacking struction of structural equipment of
performance, may be used but must be the outer packaging.
external to the inner liner. (ii) Plywood used in construction of
(iv) The load-bearing surfaces of IBCs bodies must be at least 3-ply. Plywood
intended for stacking must be designed must be made of well-seasoned, rotary-
to distribute loads in a stable manner. cut, sliced or sawn veneer, commer-

(d) Fiberboard IBCs may not have a cially dry, and free from defects that
volumetric capacity greater than 3,000 would materially lessen the strength of
224
the body. All adjacent plies must be tain solid hazardous materials. Flexi-
glued with water-resistant adhesive. ble IBC types are designated:
Materials other than plywood may be (1) 13H1 woven plastic without coat-
used for the construction of structural ing or liner.
equipment of the outer packaging. (2) 13H2 woven plastic, coated.
(iii) Reconstituted wood used in con- (3) 13H3 woven plastic with liner.
struction of bodies must be water re- (4) 13H4 woven plastic, coated and
sistant reconstituted wood such as with liner.
hardboard or particle board. Materials (5) 13H5 plastic film.
other than reconstituted wood may be (6) 13L1 textile without coating or
used for the construction of structural liner.
equipment of the outer packaging. (7) 13L2 textile, coated.
(iv) Wooden IBCs must be firmly (8) 13L3 textile with liner.
nailed or secured to corner posts or (9) 13L4 textile, coated and with
ends or be assembled by similar de- liner.
vices. (10) 13M1 paper, multiwall.
(3) The strength of the material used (11) 13M2 paper, multiwall, water re-
and the construction of the liner must sistant.
be appropriate to the capacity of the (b) Definitions for flexible IBCs:
IBC and its intended use. Joints and (1) Flexible IBCs consist of a body con-
closures must be sift-proof and capable structed of film, woven plastic, woven
of withstanding pressures and impacts fabric, paper, or combination thereof,
liable to occur under normal conditions together with any appropriate service
of handling and transportation. equipment and handling devices, and if
(4) Any integral pallet base forming necessary, an inner coating or liner.
part of an IBC, or any detachable pal- (2) Woven plastic means a material
let, must be suitable for the mechan- made from stretched tapes or
ical handling of an IBC filled to its monofilaments.
maximum permissible gross mass. (3) Handling device means any sling,
(i) The pallet or integral base must loop, eye, or frame attached to the
be designed to avoid protrusions that body of the IBC or formed from a con-
may cause damage to the IBC in han- tinuation of the IBC body material.
dling. (c) Construction requirements for
(ii) The outer packaging must be se- flexible IBCs are as follows:
cured to any detachable pallet to en- (1) The strength of the material and
sure stability in handling and transpor- the construction of the flexible IBC
tation. Where a detachable pallet is must be appropriate to its capacity and
used, its top surface must be free from its intended use.
sharp protrusions that might damage (2) All materials used in the con-
the IBC. struction of flexible IBCs of types 13M1
(iii) Strengthening devices, such as and 13M2 must, after complete immer-
timber supports to increase stacking sion in water for not less than 24 hours,
performance, may be used but must be retain at least 85 percent of the tensile
external to the inner liner. strength as measured originally on the
material conditioned to equilibrium at
(iv) The load-bearing surfaces of IBCs
67 percent relative humidity or less.
intended for stacking must be designed
(3) Seams must be stitched or formed
to distribute loads in a stable manner.
by heat sealing, gluing or any equiva-
(d) Wooden IBCs may not have a vol-
lent method. All stitched seam-ends
umetric capacity greater than 3,000 L
must be secured.
(793 gallons) or less than 450 L (119 gal-
(4) In addition to conformance with
lons).
the requirements of § 173.24 of this sub-
[Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as chapter, flexible IBCs must be resistant
amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 75 FR to aging and degradation caused by ul-
5397, Feb. 2, 2010] traviolet radiation.
(5) For plastic flexible IBCs, if nec-
§ 178.710 Standards for flexible IBCs. essary, protection against ultraviolet

(a) The provisions of this section radiation must be provided by the addi-
apply to flexible IBCs intended to con- tion of pigments or inhibitors such as
225
§ 178.800 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
carbon black. These additives must be assembled so as to be capable of suc-

compatible with the contents and re- cessfully passing the prescribed tests
main effective throughout the life of and of conforming to the requirements
the container. Where use is made of of § 173.24 of this subchapter at all
carbon black, pigments, or inhibitors, times while in transportation.
other than those used in the manufac- (b) Responsibility. It is the responsi-
ture of the tested design type, re- bility of the IBC manufacturer to as-
testing may be omitted if the carbon sure that each IBC is capable of passing
black content, the pigment content or the prescribed tests. To the extent that
the inhibitor content does not ad- an IBC assembly function, including
versely affect the physical properties final closure, is performed by the per-
of the material of construction. Addi- son who offers a hazardous material for
tives may be included in the composi- transportation, that person is respon-
tion of the plastic material to improve sible for performing the function in ac-
resistance to aging, provided they do cordance with §§ 173.22 and 178.2 of this
not adversely affect the physical or subchapter.
chemical properties of the material. (c) Definitions. For the purpose of this
(6) No used material other than pro- subpart:
duction residues or regrind from the (1) IBC design type refers to an IBC
same manufacturing process may be that does not differ in structural de-
used in the manufacture of plastic sign, size, material of construction,
flexible IBCs. This does not preclude wall thickness, manner of construction
the re-use of component parts such as and representative service equipment.
fittings and pallet bases, provided such (2) Design qualification testing is the
components have not in any way been performance of the drop, leakproofness,
damaged in previous use. hydrostatic pressure, stacking, bot-
(7) When flexible IBCs are filled, the tom-lift or top-lift, tear, topple, right-
ratio of height to width may not be ing and vibration tests, as applicable,
more than 2:1. prescribed in this subpart, for each dif-
(d) Flexible IBCs: (1) May not have a ferent IBC design type, at the start of
volumetric capacity greater than 3,000 production of that packaging.
L (793 gallons) or less than 56 L (15 gal- (3) Periodic design requalification test is
lons); and the performance of the applicable tests
(2) Must be designed and tested to a specified in paragraph (c)(2) of this sec-
capacity of no less than 50 kg (110 tion on an IBC design type, in order to
pounds). requalify the design for continued pro-
duction at the frequency specified in
[Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as
amended by Amdt. 178–108, 60 FR 40038, Aug.
paragraph (e) of this section.
4, 1995; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 75 FR 5397, (4) Production inspection is the inspec-
Feb. 2, 2010] tion that must initially be conducted
on each newly manufactured IBC.
Subpart O—Testing of IBCs (5) Production testing is the perform-
ance of the leakproofness test in ac-
§ 178.800 Purpose and scope. cordance with paragraph (f) of this sec-
tion on each IBC intended to contain
This subpart prescribes certain test-
solids discharged by pressure or in-
ing requirements for IBCs identified in
tended to contain liquids.
subpart N of this part.
(6) Periodic retest and inspection is per-
[Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as formance of the applicable test and in-
amended by 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001] spections on each IBC at the frequency
specified in § 180.352 of this subchapter.
§ 178.801 General requirements. (7) Different IBC design type is one
(a) General. The test procedures pre- that differs from a previously qualified
scribed in this subpart are intended to IBC design type in structural design,
ensure that IBCs containing hazardous size, material of construction, wall
materials can withstand normal condi- thickness, or manner of construction,
tions of transportation and are consid- but does not include:

ered minimum requirements. Each (i) A packaging which differs in sur-
packaging must be manufactured and face treatment;
226
(ii) A rigid plastic IBC or composite leakproofness test prescribed in

IBC which differs with regard to addi- § 178.813 of this subpart and must be
tives used to comply with §§ 178.706(c), performed on each IBC intended to con-
178.707(c) or 178.710(c); tain solids discharged by pressure or
(iii) A packaging which differs only intended to contain liquids. For this
in its lesser external dimensions (i.e., test:
height, width, length) provided mate- (i) The IBC need not have its closures
rials of construction and material fitted, except that the IBC must be
thicknesses or fabric weight remain fitted with its primary bottom closure.
the same; (ii) The inner receptacle of a com-
(iv) A packaging which differs in posite IBC may be tested without the
service equipment. outer IBC body, provided the test re-
(d) Design qualification testing. The sults are not affected.
packaging manufacturer shall achieve (2) Applicable inspection require-
successful test results for the design ments in § 180.352 of this subchapter
qualification testing at the start of must be performed on each IBC ini-
production of each new or different IBC tially after production.
design type. The service equipment se-
(g) Test samples. The IBC manufac-
lected for this design qualification
turer shall conduct the design quali-
testing shall be representative of the
fication and periodic design requali-
type of service equipment that will be
fication tests prescribed in this subpart
fitted to any finished IBC body under
using random samples of IBCs, accord-
the design. Application of the certifi-
ing to the appropriate test section.
cation mark by the manufacturer shall
constitute certification that the IBC (h) Selective testing of IBCs. Variation
design type passed the prescribed tests of a tested IBC design type is permitted
in this subpart. without further testing, provided selec-
(e) Periodic design requalification test- tive testing demonstrates an equiva-
ing. (1) Periodic design requalification lent or greater level of safety than the
must be conducted on each qualified design type tested and which has been
IBC design type if the manufacturer is approved by the Associate Adminis-
to maintain authorization for contin- trator.
ued production. The IBC manufacturer (i) Approval of equivalent packagings.
shall achieve successful test results for An IBC differing from the standards in
the periodic design requalification at subpart N of this part, or tested using
sufficient frequency to ensure each methods other than those specified in
packaging produced by the manufac- this subpart, may be used if approved
turer is capable of passing the design by the Associate Administrator. Such
qualification tests. Design requalifica- IBCs must be shown to be equally effec-
tion tests must be conducted at least tive, and testing methods used must be
once every 12 months. equivalent.
(2) Changes in the frequency of design (j) Proof of compliance. Notwith-
requalification testing specified in standing the periodic design requali-
paragraph (e)(1) of this section are au- fication testing intervals specified in
thorized if approved by the Associate paragraph (e) of this section, the Asso-
Administrator. These requests must be ciate Administrator, or a designated
based on: representative, may at any time re-
(i) Detailed quality assurance pro- quire demonstration of compliance by
grams that assure that proposed de- a manufacturer, through testing in ac-
creases in test frequency maintain the cordance with this subpart, that pack-
integrity of originally tested IBC de- agings meet the requirements of this
sign types; and subpart. As required by the Associate
(ii) Demonstrations that each IBC Administrator, or a designated rep-
produced is capable of withstanding resentative, the manufacturer shall ei-
higher standards (e.g., increased drop ther:
height, hydrostatic pressure, wall (1) Conduct performance tests or
thickness, fabric weight). have tests conducted by an inde-

(f) Production testing and inspection. pendent testing facility, in accordance
(1) Production testing consists of the with this subpart; or
227
§ 178.802 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(2) Make a sample IBC available to (l) Record retention. Following each
the Associate Administrator, or a des- design qualification test and each peri-
ignated representative, for testing in odic retest on an IBC, a test report
accordance with this subpart. must be prepared.
(k) Coatings. If an inner treatment or (1) The test report must be main-
coating of an IBC is required for safety tained at each location where the pack-
reasons, the manufacturer shall design aging is manufactured, certified, and a
the IBC so that the treatment or coat- design qualification test or periodic
ing retains its protective properties
retest is conducted as follows:
even after withstanding the tests pre-
scribed by this subpart.
formed.
fully performed.
(2) The test report must be made § 178.802 Preparation of fiberboard

available to a user of a packaging or a IBCs for testing.
representative of the Department upon (a) Fiberboard IBCs and composite
request. The test report, at a min- IBCs with fiberboard outer packagings
imum, must contain the following in- must be conditioned for at least 24
formation: hours in an atmosphere maintained:
(i) Name and address of test facility; (1) At 50 percent ±2 percent relative
(ii) Name and address of the person humidity, and at a temperature of 23°
certifying the IBC; ±2 °C (73 °F ±4 °F); or
(iii) A unique test report identifica- (2) At 65 percent ±2 percent relative
tion; humidity, and at a temperature of 20°
(iv) Date of test report; ±2 °C (68 °F ±4 °F), or 27 °C ±2 °C (81 °F
(v) Manufacturer of the IBC; ±4 °F).
(vi) Description of the IBC design (b) Average values for temperature
type (e.g., dimensions, materials, clo- and humidity must fall within the lim-
sures, thickness, representative service its in paragraph (a) of this section.
equipment, etc.); Short-term fluctuations and measure-
(vii) Maximum IBC capacity; ment limitations may cause individual
(viii) Characteristics of test contents; measurements to vary by up to ±5 per-
cent relative humidity without signifi-
(ix) Test descriptions and results (in-
cant impairment of test reproduc-
cluding drop heights, hydrostatic pres-
ibility.
sures, tear propagation length, etc.);
(c) For purposes of periodic design re-
and
qualification only, fiberboard IBCs or
(x) The signature of the person con- composite IBCs with fiberboard outer
ducting the test, and name of the per- packagings may be at ambient condi-
son responsible for testing. tions.
[Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as
amended by Amdt. 178–108, 60 FR 40038, Aug. amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001]
4, 1995; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 66 FR 33452,
June 21, 2001; 68 FR 75758, Dec. 31, 2003; 73 FR § 178.803 Testing and certification of
57008, Oct. 1, 2008; 74 FR 2269, Jan. 14, 2009; 75
IBCs.
FR 5397, Feb. 2, 2010; 78 FR 14715, Mar. 7, 2013;
78 FR 65487, Oct. 31, 2013; 80 FR 72929, Nov. 23, Tests required for the certification of
2015] each IBC design type are specified in
228
the following table. The letter X indi- jected to the tests in the order pre-
cates that one IBC (except where sented:
noted) of each design type must be sub-
IBC type
Performance test Rigid plastic Composite Fiber-board
Metal IBCs Wooden IBCs Flexible IBCs
IBCs IBCs IBCs
Vibration ........................ 6 X 6 X 6 X 6X 6X 1.5 X

Bottom lift ...................... 2 X X X X X
Top lift ........................... 2 X 2 X 2 X 25 X
Stacking ......................... 7 X 7 X 7 X 7 X 7 X 5 X
Leakproofness ............... 3 X 3 X 3 X
Hydrostatic .................... 3 X 3 X 3 X
Drop ............................... 4 X 4 X 4 X 4 X 4 X 5 X
Topple ........................... 5 X
Righting ......................... 25 X
Tear ............................... 5 X
1 Flexible IBCs must be capable of withstanding the vibration test.
2 This test must be performed only if IBCs are designed to be handled this way. For metal IBCs, at least one of the bottom lift
or top lift tests must be performed.
3 The leakproofness and hydrostatic pressure tests are required only for IBCs intended to contain liquids or intended to contain
solids loaded or discharged under pressure.
4 Another IBC of the same design type may be used for the drop test set forth in § 178.810 of this subchapter.
5 Another different flexible IBC of the same design type may be used for each test.
6 The vibration test may be performed in another order for IBCs manufactured and tested under provisions of an exemption be-
fore October 1, 1994 and for non-DOT specification portable tanks tested before October 1, 1994, intended for export.
7 This test must be performed only if the IBC is designed to be stacked.
[Amdt. 178–108, 60 FR 40039, Aug. 4, 1995, as amended at 64 FR 51919, Sept. 27, 1999; 66 FR 45386,
45390, Aug. 28, 2001]
§ 178.810 Drop test. freeze solutions with a minimum spe-

(a) General. The drop test must be cific gravity of 0.95 for testing at ¥18
conducted for the qualification of all °C (0 °F) or lower are considered ac-
IBC design types and performed peri- ceptable test liquids, and may be con-
odically as specified in § 178.801(e) of sidered equivalent to water for test
this subpart. purposes. IBCs conditioned in this way
(b) Special preparation for the drop test. are not required to be conditioned in
(1) Metal, rigid plastic, and composite accordance with § 178.802.
IBCs intended to contain solids must (c) Test method. (1) Samples of all IBC
be filled to not less than 95 percent of design types must be dropped onto a
their maximum capacity, or if intended rigid, non-resilient, smooth, flat and
to contain liquids, to not less than 98 horizontal surface. The point of impact
percent of their maximum capacity. must be the most vulnerable part of
Pressure relief devices must be re- the base of the IBC being tested. Fol-
moved and their apertures plugged or lowing the drop, the IBC must be re-
rendered inoperative. stored to the upright position for ob-
(2) Fiberboard and wooden IBCs must servation.
be filled with a solid material to not (2) IBC design types with a capacity
less than 95 percent of their maximum of 0.45 cubic meters (15.9 cubic feet) or
capacity; the contents must be evenly less must be subject to an additional
distributed. drop test.
(3) Flexible IBCs must be filled to the (d) Drop height. (1) For all IBCs, drop
maximum permissible gross mass; the heights are specified as follows:
contents must be evenly distributed. (i) Packing Group I: 1.8 m (5.9 feet).
(4) Rigid plastic IBCs and composite (ii) Packing Group II: 1.2 m (3.9 feet).
IBCs with plastic inner receptacles (iii) Packing Group III: 0.8 m (2.6
must be conditioned for testing by re- feet).
ducing the temperature of the pack- (2) Drop tests are to be performed
aging and its contents to ¥18 °C (0 °F) with the solid or liquid to be trans-
or lower. Test liquids must be kept in ported or with a non-hazardous mate-

the liquid state, if necessary, by the rial having essentially the same phys-
addition of anti-freeze. Water/anti- ical characteristics.
229
§ 178.811 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(3) The specific gravity and viscosity the dimension of the side of entry (un-
of a substituted non-hazardous mate- less the points of entry are fixed). The
rial used in the drop test for liquids forks must penetrate to three quarters
must be similar to the hazardous mate- of the direction of entry. The test must
rial intended for transportation. Water be repeated from each possible direc-
also may be used for the liquid drop tion of entry.
test under the following conditions: (d) Criteria for passing the test. For all
(i) Where the substances to be carried IBC design types designed to be lifted
have a specific gravity not exceeding from the base, there may be no perma-
1.2, the drop heights must be those nent deformation which renders the
specified in paragraph (d)(1) of this sec- IBC unsafe for transportation and no
tion for each IBC design type; and loss of contents.
(ii) Where the substances to be car- [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as
ried have a specific gravity exceeding amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001]
1.2, the drop heights must be as fol-
lows: § 178.812 Top lift test.
(A) Packing Group I: SG × 1.5 m (4.9 (a) General. The top lift test must be
feet). conducted for the qualification of all
(B) Packing Group II: SG × 1.0 m (3.3 IBC design types designed to be lifted
feet). from the top or, for flexible IBCs, from
(C) Packing Group III: SG × 0.67 m the side.
(2.2 feet). (b) Special preparation for the top lift
(e) Criteria for passing the test. For all test. (1) Metal, rigid plastic, and com-
IBC design types, there may be no dam- posite IBC design types must be loaded
age which renders the IBC unsafe to be to twice the maximum permissible
transported for salvage or for dispos- gross mass with the load being evenly
able, and no loss of contents. The IBC distributed.
shall be capable of being lifted by an (2) Flexible IBC design types must be
appropriate means until clear of the filled to six times the maximum net
floor for five minutes. A slight dis- mass, the load being evenly distrib-
charge from a closure upon impact is uted.
not considered to be a failure of the (c) Test method. (1) A metal or flexible
IBC provided that no further leakage IBC must be lifted in the manner for
occurs. A slight discharge (e.g., from which it is designed until clear of the
closures or stitch holes) upon impact is floor and maintained in that position
not considered a failure of the flexible for a period of five minutes.
IBC provided that no further leakage (2) Rigid plastic and composite IBC
occurs after the IBC has been raised design types must be:
clear of the ground. (i) Lifted by each pair of diagonally
[Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as opposite lifting devices, so that the
amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 69 FR hoisting forces are applied vertically,
76186, Dec. 20, 2004; 71 FR 78635, Dec. 29, 2006; for a period of five minutes; and
74 FR 2269, Jan. 14, 2009; 75 FR 5397, Feb. 2, (ii) Lifted by each pair of diagonally
2010] opposite lifting devices, so that the
hoisting forces are applied towards the
§ 178.811 Bottom lift test. center at 45° to the vertical, for a pe-
(a) General. The bottom lift test must riod of five minutes.
be conducted for the qualification of (3) If not tested as indicated in para-
all IBC design types designed to be lift- graph (c)(1) of this section, a flexible
ed from the base. IBC design type must be tested as fol-
(b) Special preparation for the bottom lows:
lift test. The IBC must be loaded to 1.25 (i) Fill the flexible IBC to 95% full
times its maximum permissible gross with a material representative of the
mass, the load being evenly distrib- product to be shipped.
uted. (ii) Suspend the flexible IBC by its
(c) Test method. All IBC design types lifting devices.
must be raised and lowered twice by a (iii) Apply a constant downward force
lift truck with the forks centrally posi- through a specially designed platen.
tioned and spaced at three quarters of The platen will be a minimum of 60%
230
and a maximum of 80% of the cross sec- tain solids that are loaded or dis-
tional surface area of the flexible IBC. charged under pressure or intended to
(iv) The combination of the mass of contain liquids, there may be no leak-
the filled flexible IBC and the force ap- age of air from the IBC.
plied through the platen must be a [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as
minimum of six times the maximum amended at 64 FR 10782, Mar. 5, 1999; 66 FR
net mass of the flexible IBC. The test 45185, 45386, Aug. 28, 2001]
must be conducted for a period of five
minutes. § 178.814 Hydrostatic pressure test.
(v) Other equally effective methods (a) General. The hydrostatic pressure
of top lift testing and preparation may test must be conducted for the quali-
be used with approval of the Associate fication of all metal, rigid plastic, and
Administrator. composite IBC design types intended to
(d) Criteria for passing the test. For all contain solids that are loaded or dis-
IBC design types designed to be lifted charged under pressure or intended to
from the top, there may be no perma- contain liquids.
nent deformation which renders the (b) Special preparation for the hydro-
IBC, including the base pallets when static pressure test. For metal IBCs, the
applicable, unsafe for transportation, test must be carried out before the fit-
and no loss of contents. ting of any thermal insulation equip-
[Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as ment. For all IBCs, pressure relief de-
amended at 66 FR 33452, June 21, 2001; 66 FR vices and vented closures must be re-
45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 45042, July 31, 2003] moved and their apertures plugged or
rendered inoperative.
§ 178.813 Leakproofness test. (c) Test method. Hydrostatic gauge
(a) General. The leakproofness test pressure must be measured at the top
must be conducted for the qualification of the IBC. The test must be carried
of all IBC design types and on all pro- out for a period of at least 10 minutes
duction units intended to contain sol- applying a hydrostatic gauge pressure
ids that are loaded or discharged under not less than that indicated in para-
pressure or intended to contain liquids. graph (d) of this section. The IBCs may
(b) Special preparation for the not be mechanically restrained during
leakproofness test. Vented closures must the test.
either be replaced by similar non-vent- (d) Hydrostatic gauge pressure applied.
ed closures or the vent must be sealed. (1) For metal IBC design types, 31A,
For metal IBC design types, the initial 31B, 31N: 65 kPa gauge pressure (9.4
test must be carried out before the fit- psig).
ting of any thermal insulation equip- (2) For metal IBC design types 21A,
ment. The inner receptacle of a com- 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B, 31N: 200 kPa (29
posite IBC may be tested without the psig). For metal IBC design types 31A,
outer packaging provided the test re- 31B and 31N, the tests in paragraphs
sults are not affected. (d)(1) and (d)(2) of this section must be
(c) Test method and pressure applied. conducted consecutively.
The leakproofness test must be carried (3) For metal IBCs design types 21A,
out for a suitable length of time using 21B, and 21N, for Packing Group I sol-
air at a gauge pressure of not less than ids: 250 kPa (36 psig) gauge pressure.
20 kPa (2.9 psig). Leakproofness of IBC (4) For rigid plastic IBC design types
design types must be determined by 21H1 and 21H2 and composite IBC de-
coating the seams and joints with a sign types 21HZ1 and 21HZ2: 75 kPa (11
heavy oil, a soap solution and water, or psig).
other methods suitable for the purpose (5) For rigid plastic IBC design types
of detecting leaks. Other methods, if at 31H1 and 31H2 and composite IBC de-
least equally effective, may be used in sign types 31HZ1 and 31HZ2: whichever
accordance with appendix B of this is the greater of:
part, or if approved by the Associate (i) The pressure determined by any
Administrator, as provided in one of the following methods:
§ 178.801(i)). (A) The gauge pressure (pressure in

(d) Criterion for passing the test. For the IBC above ambient atmospheric
all IBC design types intended to con- pressure) measured in the IBC at 55 °C
231
§ 178.815 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(131 °F) multiplied by a safety factor of sign types must be loaded to their max-
1.5. This pressure must be determined imum permissible gross mass.
on the basis of the IBC being filled and (2) The flexible IBC must be filled to
closed to no more than 98 percent ca- not less than 95 percent of its capacity
pacity at 15 °C (60 °F); and to its maximum net mass, with the
(B) If absolute pressure (vapor pres- load being evenly distributed.
sure of the hazardous material plus at- (c) Test method. (1) Design Qualifica-
mospheric pressure) is used, 1.5 multi- tion Testing. All IBCs must be placed on
plied by the vapor pressure of the haz- their base on level, hard ground and
ardous material at 55 °C (131 °F) minus subjected to a uniformly distributed
100 kPa (14.5 psi). If this method is cho- superimposed test load for a period of
sen, the hydrostatic test pressure ap- at least five minutes (see paragraph
plied must be at least 100 kPa gauge (c)(5) of this section).
pressure (14.5 psig); or (2) Fiberboard, wooden and composite
(C) If absolute pressure (vapor pres- IBCs with outer packagings con-
sure of the hazardous material plus at- structed of other than plastic mate-
mospheric pressure) is used, 1.75 multi- rials must be subject to the test for 24
plied by the vapor pressure of the haz- hours.
ardous material at 50 °C (122 °F) minus (3) Rigid plastic IBC types and com-
100 kPa (14.5 psi). If this method is cho- posite IBC types with plastic outer
sen, the hydrostatic test pressure ap- packagings (11HH1, 11HH2, 21HH1,
plied must be at least 100 kPa gauge 21HH2, 31HH1 and 31HH2) which bear
pressure (14.5 psig); or the stacking load must be subjected to
(ii) Twice the greater of: (A) The the test for 28 days at 40 °C (104 °F).
static pressure of the hazardous mate- (4) For all IBCs, the load must be ap-
rial on the bottom of the IBC filled to plied by one of the following methods:
98 percent capacity; or (i) One or more IBCs of the same type
(B) The static pressure of water on loaded to their maximum permissible
the bottom of the IBC filled to 98 per- gross mass and stacked on the test
cent capacity. IBC;
(e) Criteria for passing the test(s). (1) (ii) The calculated superimposed test
For metal IBCs, subjected to the 65 load weight loaded on either a flat
kPa (9.4 psig) test pressure specified in plate or a reproduction of the base of
paragraph (d)(1) of this section, there the IBC, which is stacked on the test
may be no leakage or permanent defor- IBC.
mation that would make the IBC un- (5) Calculation of superimposed test
safe for transportation. load. For all IBCs, the load to be placed
(2) For metal IBCs intended to con- on the IBC must be 1.8 times the com-
tain liquids, when subjected to the 200 bined maximum permissible gross mass
kPa (29 psig) and the 250 kPa (36 psig) of the number of similar IBCs that may
test pressures specified in paragraphs be stacked on top of the IBC during
(d)(2) and (d)(3) of this section, respec- transportation.
tively, there may be no leakage. (d) Periodic Retest. (1) The package
(3) For rigid plastic IBC types 21H1, must be tested in accordance with
21H2, 31H1, and 31H2, and composite paragraph (c) of this section; or
IBC types 21HZ1, 21HZ2, 31HZ1, and (2) The packaging may be tested
31HZ2, there may be no leakage and no using a dynamic compression testing
permanent deformation which renders machine. The test must be conducted
the IBC unsafe for transportation. at room temperature on an empty, un-
[Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as sealed packaging. The test sample
amended at 66 FR 45185, 45386, Aug. 28, 2001] must be centered on the bottom platen
of the testing machine. The top platen
§ 178.815 Stacking test. must be lowered until it comes in con-
(a) General. The stacking test must tact with the test sample. Compression
be conducted for the qualification of must be applied end to end. The speed
all IBC design types intended to be of the compression tester must be one-
stacked. half inch plus or minus one-fourth inch

(b) Special preparation for the stacking per minute. An initial preload of 50
test. (1) All IBCs except flexible IBC de- pounds must be applied to ensure a
232
definite contact between the test sam- not less than 95 percent of its capacity
ple and the platens. The distance be- and to its maximum net mass, with the
tween the platens at this time must be load being evenly distributed.
recorded as zero deformation. The force (c) Test method. A flexible IBC must
‘‘A’’ then to be applied must be cal- be toppled onto any part of its top
culated using the applicable formula: upon a rigid, non-resilient, smooth,
Liquids: A = (1.8)(n ¥ 1) [w + (s × v × 8.3 flat, and horizontal surface.
× .98)] × 1.5; (d) Topple height. For all flexible
IBCs, the topple height is specified as
or follows:
Solids: A = (1.8)(n ¥ 1) [w + (s × v × 8.3 (1) Packing Group I: 1.8 m (5.9 feet).
× .95)] × 1.5 (2) Packing Group II: 1.2 m (3.9 feet).
(3) Packing Group III: 0.8 m (2.6 feet).
Where:
(e) Criteria for passing the test. For all
A = applied load in pounds.
n = maximum number of IBCs being stacked
flexible IBCs, there may be no loss of
during transportation. contents. A slight discharge (e.g., from
w = maximum weight of one empty container closures or stitch holes) upon impact is
in pounds. not considered to be a failure, provided
s = specific gravity (liquids) or density (sol- no further leakage occurs.
ids) of the lading.
v = actual capacity of container (rated ca- [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as
pacity + outage) in gallons. amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001]
and:
8.3 corresponds to the weight in pounds of 1.0 § 178.817 Righting test.
gallon of water. (a) General. The righting test must be
1.5 is a compensation factor converting the conducted for the qualification of all
static load of the stacking test into a load
flexible IBCs designed to be lifted from
suitable for dynamic compression testing.
the top or side.
(e) Criteria for passing the test. (1) For (b) Special preparation for the righting
metal, rigid plastic, and composite test. The flexible IBC must be filled to
IBCs, there may be no permanent de- not less than 95 percent of its capacity
formation, which renders the IBC un- and to its maximum net mass, with the
safe for transportation, and no loss of load being evenly distributed.
contents. (c) Test method. The flexible IBC,
(2) For fiberboard and wooden IBCs, lying on its side, must be lifted at a
there may be no loss of contents and no speed of at least 0.1 m/second (0.33 ft/s)
permanent deformation, which renders to an upright position, clear of the
the whole IBC, including the base pal- floor, by one lifting device, or by two
let, unsafe for transportation. lifting devices when four are provided.
(3) For flexible IBCs, there may be no (d) Criterion for passing the test. For
deterioration, which renders the IBC all flexible IBCs, there may be no dam-
unsafe for transportation, and no loss age to the IBC or its lifting devices
of contents. which renders the IBC unsafe for trans-
(4) For the dynamic compression portation or handling.
test, a container passes the test if,
[Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as
after application of the required load,
amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001]
there is no permanent deformation to
the IBC, which renders the whole IBC, § 178.818 Tear test.
including the base pallet, unsafe for
(a) General. The tear test must be
transportation; in no case may the
conducted for the qualification of all
maximum deflection exceed one inch.
flexible IBC design types.
[75 FR 5397, Feb. 2, 2010] (b) Special preparation for the tear test.
The flexible IBC must be filled to not
§ 178.816 Topple test. less than 95 percent of its capacity and
(a) General. The topple test must be to its maximum net mass, the load
conducted for the qualification of all being evenly distributed.
flexible IBC design types. (c) Test method. Once the IBC is
(b) Special preparation for the topple placed on the ground, a 100-mm (4-inch)
test. The flexible IBC must be filled to knife score, completely penetrating the
233
§ 178.819 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
wall of a wide face, is made at a 45° (c) Criteria for passing the test. An IBC
angle to the principal axis of the IBC, passes the vibration test if there is no
halfway between the bottom surface rupture or leakage.
and the top level of the contents. The [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as
IBC must then be subjected to a uni- amended by Amdt. 178–108, 60 FR 40038, Aug.
formly distributed superimposed load 4, 1995; Amdt. 178–110, 60 FR 49111, Sept. 21,
equivalent to twice the maximum net 1995; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 75 FR 5397,
Feb. 2, 2010]
mass. The load must be applied for at
least five minutes. An IBC which is de-
signed to be lifted from the top or the Subpart P—Large Packagings
side must, after removal of the super- Standards
imposed load, be lifted clear of the
floor and maintained in that position SOURCE: 75 FR 5397, Feb. 2, 2010, unless oth-
for a period of five minutes. erwise noted.
(d) Criterion for passing the test. The § 178.900 Purpose and scope.
IBC passes the tear test if the cut does
not propagate more than 25 percent of (a) This subpart prescribes require-
its original length. ments for Large Packaging intended
for the transportation of hazardous
[Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as materials. Standards for these pack-
amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001] agings are based on the UN Rec-
ommendations.
§ 178.819 Vibration test. (b) Terms used in this subpart are de-
(a) General. The vibration test must fined in § 171.8 of this subchapter.
be conducted for the qualification of
§ 178.905 Large Packaging identifica-
all rigid IBC design types. Flexible IBC tion codes.
design types must be capable of with-
standing the vibration test. Large packaging code designations
consist of: two numerals specified in
(b) Test method. (1) A sample IBC, se-
paragraph (a) of this section; followed
lected at random, must be filled and
by the capital letter(s) specified in
closed as for shipment. IBCs intended paragraph (b) of this section.
for liquids may be tested using water (a) Large packaging code number
as the filling material for the vibration designations are as follows: 50 for rigid
test. Large Packagings; or 51 for flexible
(2) The sample IBC must be placed on Large Packagings.
a vibrating platform with a vertical or (b) Large Packagings code letter des-
rotary double-amplitude (peak-to-peak ignations are as follows:
displacement) of one inch. The IBC (1) ‘‘A’’ means steel (all types and
must be constrained horizontally to surface treatments).
prevent it from falling off the plat- (2) ‘‘B’’ means aluminum.
form, but must be left free to move (3) ‘‘C’’ means natural wood.
vertically and bounce. (4) ‘‘D’’ means plywood.
(3) The test must be performed for (5) ‘‘F’’ means reconstituted wood.
(6) ‘‘G’’ means fiberboard.
one hour at a frequency that causes the
(7) ‘‘H’’ means plastic.
package to be raised from the vibrating
(8) ‘‘M’’ means paper, multiwall.
platform to such a degree that a piece (9) ‘‘N’’ means metal (other than
of material of approximately 1.6-mm steel or aluminum).
(0.063-inch) thickness (such as steel
strapping or paperboard) can be passed § 178.910 Marking of Large Pack-
between the bottom of the IBC and the agings.
platform. Other methods at least (a) The manufacturer must:
equally effective may be used (see (1) Mark every Large Packaging in a
§ 178.801(i)). durable and clearly visible manner.
The marking may be applied in a single
line or in multiple lines provided the

correct sequence is followed with the
information required by this section, in
234
letters, numerals, and symbols of at design type has been successfully test-
least 12 mm in height. This minimum ed, as follows:
marking size requirement applies only (A) X—for Large Packagings meeting
to large packages manufactured after Packing Groups I, II and III tests;
January 1, 2014. The following informa- (B) Y—for Large Packagings meeting
tion is required in the sequence pre- Packing Groups II and III tests; and
sented: (C) Z—for Large Packagings meeting
(i) Except as provided in Packing Group III test.
§ 178.503(e)(1)(ii), the United Nations (iv) The month (designated numeri-
packaging symbol as illustrated in cally) and year (last two digits) of
§ 178.503(e)(1)(i). For metal Large Pack- manufacture;
agings on which the marking is (v) The country authorizing the allo-
stamped or embossed, the capital let- cation of the mark. The letters ‘‘USA’’
ters ‘‘UN’’ may be applied instead of indicate that the Large Packaging is
manufactured and marked in the
the symbol;
United States in compliance with the
(ii) The code number designating the
provisions of this subchapter.
Large Packaging design type according to (vi) The name and address or symbol
§ 178.905. The letters ‘‘T’’ or ‘‘W’’ may of the manufacturer or the approval
follow the Large Packaging design type agency certifying compliance with sub-
identification code on a Large Pack- part P and subpart Q of this part. Sym-
aging. Large Salvage Packagings con- bols, if used, must be registered with
forming to the requirements of subpart the Associate Administrator.
P of this part must be marked with the (vii) The stacking test load in kilo-
letter ‘‘T’’. Large Packagings must be grams (kg). For Large Packagings not
marked with the letter ‘‘W’’ when the designed for stacking the figure ‘‘0’’
Large Packaging differs from the re- must be shown.
quirements in subpart P of this part, or (viii) The maximum permissible
is tested using methods other than gross mass or for flexible Large Pack-
those specified in this subpart, and is agings, the maximum net mass, in kg.
approved by the Associate Adminis- (2) The following are examples of
trator in accordance with the provi- symbols and required markings:
sions in § 178.955; (i) For a steel Large Packaging suit-
(iii) A capital letter identifying the able for stacking; stacking load: 2,500
performance standard under which the kg; maximum gross mass: 1,000 kg.
(ii) For a plastic Large Packaging

not suitable for stacking; maximum
gross mass: 800 kg.
ER02FE10.003</GPH> ER02FE10.004</GPH>
235
§ 178.910 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(iii) For a Flexible Large Packaging

not suitable for stacking; maximum
gross mass: 500 kg.
(iv) For a steel Large Salvage Pack- load: 2,500 kg; maximum gross mass:
aging suitable for stacking; stacking 1,000 kg.
(b) All Large Packagings manufac- side being not less than 100 mm (3.9
tured, repaired or remanufactured after inches) by 100 mm (3.9 inches) as meas-
January 1, 2015 must be marked with ured from the corner printer marks
the symbol applicable to a Large Pack- shown on the following figures. Where
aging designed for stacking or not de- dimensions are not specified, all fea-
signed for stacking, as appropriate. tures must be in approximate propor-
The symbol must be a square with each tion to those shown.
(1) Transitional exception—A marking effect on December 31, 2014, may con-
in conformance with the requirements tinue in service until the end of its use-
of this paragraph in effect on December ful life.
31, 2014, may continue to be applied to
[75 FR 5397, Feb. 2, 2010, as amended at 75 FR
ER07JA13.001</GPH>
all Large Packagings manufactured, 60339, Sept. 30, 2010; 78 FR 1097, Jan. 7, 2013;
repaired or remanufactured between 80 FR 1168, Jan. 8, 2015]
January 1, 2015 and December 31, 2016.
(2) For domestic transportation, a
Large Packaging marked prior to Jan-

ER02FE10.005</GPH> ER08JA15.003</GPH>
uary 1, 2017 and in conformance with

the requirements of this paragraph in
236
§ 178.915 General Large Packaging perature performance must be taken

standards. into account when appropriate.
(a) Each Large Packaging must be re- (c) The use of dissimilar metals must
sistant to, or protected from, deterio- not result in deterioration that could
ration due to exposure to the external affect the integrity of the Large Pack-
environment. Large Packagings in- aging.
tended for solid hazardous materials (d) Metal Large Packagings may not
must be sift-proof and water-resistant. have a volumetric capacity greater
(b) All service equipment must be po- than 3,000 L (793 gallons) and not less
sitioned or protected to minimize po- than 450 L (119 gallons).
tential loss of contents resulting from
damage during Large Packaging han- § 178.925 Standards for rigid plastic
Large Packagings.
dling and transportation.
(c) Each Large Packaging, including (a) The provisions in this section
attachments and service and structural apply to rigid plastic Large Packagings
equipment, must be designed to with- intended to contain liquids and solids.
stand, without loss of hazardous mate- Rigid plastic Large Packaging types
rials, the internal pressure of the con- are designated:
tents and the stresses of normal han- (1) 50H rigid plastics.
dling and transport. A Large Pack- (2) [Reserved]
aging intended for stacking must be de- (b) A rigid plastic Large Packaging
signed for stacking. Any lifting or se- must be manufactured from plastic
curing features of a Large Packaging material of known specifications and
must be sufficient strength to with- be of a strength relative to its capacity
stand the normal conditions of han- and to the service it is required to per-
dling and transportation without gross form. In addition to conformance to
distortion or failure and must be posi- § 173.24 of this subchapter, plastic mate-
tioned so as to cause no undue stress in rials must be resistant to aging and to
any part of the Large Packaging. degradation caused by ultraviolet radi-
(d) A Large Packaging consisting of ation.
packagings within a framework must (1) If protection against ultraviolet
be so constructed that the packaging is radiation is necessary, it must be pro-
not damaged by the framework and is vided by the addition of a pigment or
retained within the framework at all inhibiter such as carbon black to plas-
times. tic materials. These additives must be
(e) Large Packaging design types compatible with the contents and re-
must be constructed in such a way as main effective throughout the life of
to be bottom-lifted or top-lifted as the plastic Large Packaging body.
specified in §§ 178.970 and 178.975. Where use is made of carbon black, pig-
[75 FR 5397, Feb. 2, 2010, as amended at 75 FR ments or inhibitors, other than those
60339, Sept. 30, 2010] used in the manufacture of the tested
design type, retesting may be omitted
§ 178.920 Standards for metal Large if changes in the carbon black content,
Packagings. the pigment content or the inhibitor
(a) The provisions in this section content do not adversely affect the
apply to metal Large Packagings in- physical properties of the material of
tended to contain liquids and solids. construction.
Metal Large Packaging types are des- (2) Additives may be included in the
ignated: composition of the plastic material to
(1) 50A steel improve the resistance to aging or to
(2) 50B aluminum serve other purposes, provided they do
(3) 50N metal (other than steel or alu- not adversely affect the physical or
minum) chemical properties of the material of
(b) Each Large Packaging must be construction.
made of suitable ductile metal mate- (3) No used material other than pro-
rials. Welds must be made so as to duction residues or regrind from the
maintain design type integrity of the same manufacturing process may be

receptacle under conditions normally used in the manufacture of rigid plastic
incident to transportation. Low-tem- Large Packagings.
237
§ 178.930 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(c) Rigid plastic Large Packagings: (2) Integral and detachable pallets. (i)
(1) May not have a volumetric capac- Any integral pallet base forming part
ity greater than 3,000 L (793 gallons); of a Large Packaging or any detach-
and able pallet must be suitable for me-
(2) May not have a volumetric capac- chanical handling with the Large
ity less than 450 L (119 gallons). Packaging filled to its maximum per-
missible gross mass.
§ 178.930 Standards for fiberboard (ii) The pallet or integral base must
Large Packagings. be designed to avoid protrusions caus-
ing damage to the fiberboard Large
(a) The provisions in this section
Packagings in handling.
apply to fiberboard Large Packagings
(iii) The body must be secured to any
intended to contain solids. Rigid fiber-
detached pallet to ensure stability in
board Large Packaging types are des-
handling and transport. Where a de-
ignated:
tachable pallet is used, its top surface
(1) 50G fiberboard must be free from protrusions that
(2) [Reserved] might damage the Large Packaging.
(b) Construction requirements for fiber- (3) Strengthening devices, such as
board Large Packagings. (1) Fiberboard timber supports to increase stacking
Large Packagings must be constructed performance may be used but must be
of strong, solid or double-faced cor- external to the liner.
rugated fiberboard (single or (4) The load-bearing surfaces of Large
multiwall) that is appropriate to the Packagings intended for stacking must
capacity of the Large Packagings and be designed to distribute the load in a
to their intended use. Water resistance stable manner.
of the outer surface must be such that (c) Fiberboard Large Packagings may
the increase in mass, as determined in not have a volumetric capacity greater
a test carried out over a period of 30 than 3,000 L (793 gallons) and not less
minutes by the Cobb method of deter- than 450 L (119 gallons).
mining water absorption, is not greater
[75 FR 5397, Feb. 2, 2010, as amended at 75 FR
than 155 grams per square meter (0.0316 60339, Sept. 30, 2010]
pounds per square foot)—see ISO 535 (E)
(IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). Fi- § 178.935 Standards for wooden Large
berboard must have proper bending Packagings.
qualities. Fiberboard must be cut, (a) The provisions in this section
creased without cutting through any apply to wooden Large Packagings in-
thickness of fiberboard, and slotted so tended to contain solids. Wooden Large
as to permit assembly without crack- Packaging types are designated:
ing, surface breaks or undue bending. (1) 50C natural wood.
The fluting or corrugated fiberboard (2) 50D plywood.
must be firmly glued to the facings. (3) 50F reconstituted wood.
(i) The walls, including top and bot- (b) Construction requirements for
tom, must have a minimum puncture wooden Large Packagings are as fol-
resistance of 15 Joules (11 foot-pounds lows:
of energy) measured according to ISO (1) The strength of the materials used
3036 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). and the method of construction must
(ii) Manufacturers’ joints in the be appropriate to the capacity and in-
outer packaging of Large Packagings tended use of the Large Packagings.
must be made with an appropriate (i) Natural wood used in the con-
overlap and be taped, glued, stitched struction of Large Packagings must be
with metal staples or fastened by other well-seasoned, commercially dry and
means at least equally effective. Where free from defects that would materially
joints are made by gluing or taping, a lessen the strength of any part of the
water resistant adhesive must be used. Large Packagings. Each Large Pack-
Metal staples must pass completely aging part must consist of uncut wood
through all pieces to be fastened and be or a piece equivalent in strength and
formed or protected so that any inner integrity. Large Packagings parts are
liner cannot be abraded or punctured equivalent to one piece when a suitable
by them. method of glued assembly is used (i.e.,
238
a Lindermann joint, tongue and groove § 178.940 Standards for flexible Large
joint, ship, lap or babbet joint; or butt Packagings.
joint with at least two corrugated (a) The provisions in this section
metal fasteners at each joint, or when apply to flexible Large Packagings in-
other methods at least equally effec- tended to contain liquids and solids.
tive are used). Flexible Large Packagings types are
(ii) Plywood used in construction designated:
must be at least 3-ply. Plywood must (1) 51H flexible plastics.
be made of well-seasoned rotary cut, (2) 51M flexible paper.
sliced or sawn veneer, commercially (b) Construction requirements for
dry and free from defects that would flexible Large Packagings are as fol-
materially lessen the strength of the lows:
Large Packagings. All adjacent piles (1) The strength of the material and
must be glued with water resistant ad- the construction of the flexible Large
hesive. Materials other than plywood Packagings must be appropriate to its
may be used for the construction of the capacity and its intended use.
Large Packaging. (2) All materials used in the con-
(iii) Reconstituted wood used in the struction of flexible Large Packagings
construction of Large Packagings must of types 51M must, after complete im-
be water resistant reconstituted wood mersion in water for not less than 24
such as hardboard, particle board or hours, retain at least 85 percent of the
other suitable type. tensile strength as measured originally
(iv) Wooden Large Packagings must on the material conditioned to equi-
be firmly nailed or secured to corner librium at 67 percent relative humidity
or less.
posts or ends or be assembled by simi-
(3) Seams must be stitched or formed
lar devices.
by heat sealing, gluing or any equiva-
(2) Integral and detachable pallets. (i) lent method. All stitched seam-ends
Any integral pallet base forming part must be secured.
of a Large Packaging, or any detach- (4) In addition to conformance with
able pallet must be suitable for me- the requirements of § 173.24 of this sub-
chanical handling of a Large Pack- chapter, flexible Large Packaging must
aging filled to its maximum permis- be resistant to aging and degradation
sible gross mass. caused by ultraviolet radiation.
(ii) The pallet or integral base must (5) For plastic flexible Large Pack-
be designed to avoid protrusion that agings, if necessary, protection against
may cause damage to the Large Pack- ultraviolet radiation must be provided
aging in handling. by the addition of pigments or inhibi-
(iii) The body must be secured to any tors such as carbon black. These addi-
detachable pallet to ensure stability in tives must be compatible with the con-
handling and transportation. Where a tents and remain effective throughout
detachable pallet is used, its top sur- the life of the Large Packaging. Where
face must be free from protrusions that use is made of carbon black, pigments
might damage the Large Packaging. or inhibitors other than those used in
(3) Strengthening devices, such as the manufacture of the tested design
timber supports to increase stacking type, retesting may be omitted if the
performance, may be used but must be carbon black content, the pigment con-
tent or the inhibitor content do not ad-
external to the liner.
versely affect the physical properties
(4) The load bearing surfaces of the of the material of construction.
Large Packaging must be designed to
(6) Additives may be included in the
distribute loads in a stable manner. composition of the material of the
(c) Wooden Large Packagings: Large Packaging to improve the resist-
(1) May not have a volumetric capac- ance to aging, provided they do not ad-
ity greater than 3,000 L (793 gallons); versely affect the physical or chemical
and properties of the material.

(2) May not have a volumetric capac- (7) When flexible material Large
ity less than 450 L (119 gallons). Packagings are filled, the ratio of
239
§ 178.950 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
height to width must be no more than at the start of production of that pack-
2:1. aging.
(c) Flexible Large Packagings: (3) Periodic design requalification test is
(1) May not have a volumetric capac- the performance of the applicable tests
ity greater than 3,000 L (793 gallons); specified in paragraph (c)(2) of this sec-
(2) May not have a volumetric capac- tion on a Large Packaging design type,
ity less than 56 L (15 gallons); and to requalify the design for continued
(3) Must be designed and tested to a production at the frequency specified
capacity of not less than 50 kg (110 in paragraph (e) of this section.
pounds). (4) Production inspection is the inspec-
tion, which must initially be conducted
Subpart Q—Testing of Large on each newly manufactured Large
Packagings Packaging.
(5) Different Large Packaging design
SOURCE: 75 FR 5400, Feb. 2, 2010, unless oth- type is one which differs from a pre-
erwise noted. viously qualified Large Packaging de-
sign type in structural design, size, ma-
§ 178.950 Purpose and scope. terial of construction, wall thickness,
This subpart prescribes certain test- or manner of construction, but does
ing requirements for Large Packagings not include:
identified in subpart P of this part. (i) A packaging which differs in sur-
face treatment;
§ 178.955 General requirements.
(ii) A rigid plastic Large Packaging,
(a) General. The test procedures pre- which differs with regard to additives
scribed in this subpart are intended to used to comply with § 178.925(b) or
ensure that Large Packagings con- § 178.940(b);
taining hazardous materials can with- (iii) A packaging which differs only
stand normal conditions of transpor- in its lesser external dimensions (i.e.,
tation. These test procedures are con-
height, width, length) provided mate-
sidered minimum requirements. Each
rials of construction and material
packaging must be manufactured and
thickness or fabric weight remain the
assembled so as to be capable of suc-
same;
cessfully passing the prescribed tests
and to conform to the requirements of (6) Remanufactured Large Packaging is
§ 173.24 of this subchapter while in a metal or rigid Large Packaging that
transportation. is produced as a UN type from a non-
(b) Responsibility. The Large Pack- UN type or is converted from one UN
aging manufacturer is responsible for design type to another UN design type.
ensuring each Large Packaging is capa- Remanufactured Large Packagings are
ble of passing the prescribed tests. To subject to the same requirements of
the extent a Large Packaging’s assem- this subchapter that apply to new
bly function, including final closure, is Large Packagings of the same type.
performed by the person who offers a (7) Reused Large Packaging is a Large
hazardous material for transportation, Packaging intended to be refilled and
that person is responsible for per- has been examined and found free of de-
forming the function in accordance fects affecting its ability to withstand
with §§ 173.22 and 178.2 of this sub- the performance tests. See also
chapter. § 173.36(c) of this subchapter.
(c) Definitions. For the purpose of this (d) Design qualification testing. The
subpart: packaging manufacturer must achieve
(1) Large packaging design type refers successful test results for the design
to a Large Packaging which does not qualification testing at the start of
differ in structural design, size, mate- production of each new or different
rial of construction and packing. Large Packaging design type. Applica-
(2) Design qualification testing is the tion of the certification mark by the
performance of the drop, stacking, and manufacturer constitutes certification
bottom-lift or top-lift tests, as applica- that the Large Packaging design type
ble, prescribed in this subpart, for each passed the prescribed tests in this sub-
different Large Packaging design type, part.
240
(e) Periodic design requalification test- (iii) The inner packagings have the
ing. (1) Periodic design requalification same or smaller openings and the clo-
must be conducted on each qualified sure is of similar design (e.g., screw
Large Packaging design type if the cap, friction lid, etc.);
manufacturer is to maintain authoriza- (iv) Sufficient additional cushioning
tion for continued production. The material is used to take up void spaces
Large Packaging manufacturer must and to prevent significant movement of
achieve successful test results for the the inner packagings;
periodic design requalification at suffi- (v) Inner packagings are oriented
cient frequency to ensure each pack- within the outer packaging in the same
aging produced by the manufacturer is manner as in the tested package; and
capable of passing the design qualifica- (vi) The gross mass of the package
tion tests. Design requalification tests does not exceed that originally tested.
must be conducted at least once every (2) A lesser number of the tested
24 months. inner packagings, or of the alternative
(2) Changes in the frequency of design types of inner packagings identified in
requalification testing specified in paragraph (g)(1) of this section, may be
paragraph (e)(1) of this section are au- used provided sufficient cushioning is
thorized if approved by the Associate added to fill void space(s) and to pre-
Administrator. vent significant movement of the inner
(f) Test samples. The manufacturer packagings.
must conduct the design qualification (h) Approval of equivalent packagings.
and periodic tests prescribed in this A Large Packaging differing from
subpart using random samples of pack- standards in subpart P of this part, or
agings, in the numbers specified in the tested using methods other than those
appropriate test section. specified in this subpart, may be used if
(g) Selective testing. The selective approved by the Associate Adminis-
testing of Large Packagings, which dif- trator. The Large Packagings and test-
fer only in minor respects from a testing methods must be shown to have an
ed type is permitted as described in equivalent level of safety.
this section. For air transport, Large (i) Proof of compliance. In addition to
Packagings must comply with the periodic design requalification
§ 173.27(c)(1) and (c)(2) of this sub- testing intervals specified in paragraph
chapter. Variations are permitted in (e) of this section, the Associate Ad-
inner packagings of a tested Large ministrator, or a designated represent-
Packaging, without further testing of ative, may at any time require dem-
the package, provided an equivalent onstration of compliance by a manu-
level of performance is maintained and facturer, through testing in accordance
the methodology used to determine with this subpart, to ensure packagings
that the inner packaging, including meet the requirements of this subpart.
closure, maintains an equivalent level As required by the Associate Adminis-
of performance is documented in writ- trator, or a designated representative,
ing by the person certifying compli- the manufacturer must either:
ance with this paragraph and retained (1) Conduct performance tests or
in accordance with paragraph (l) of this have tests conducted by an inde-
section. Permitted variations are as pendent testing facility, in accordance
follows: with this subpart; or
(1) Inner packagings of equivalent or (2) Make a sample Large Packaging
smaller size may be used provided— available to the Associate Adminis-
(i) The inner packagings are of simi- trator, or a designated representative,
lar design to the tested inner pack- for testing in accordance with this sub-
agings (i.e., shape—round, rectangular, part.
etc.); (j) Record retention. Following each
(ii) The material of construction of design qualification test and each peri-
the inner packagings (glass, plastic, odic retest on a Large Packaging, a
metal, etc.) offers resistance to impact test report must be prepared.
and stacking forces equal to or greater (1) The test report must be main-
than that of the originally tested inner tained at each location where the pack-
packaging; aging is manufactured, certified, and a
241
§ 178.960 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
design qualification test or periodic

retest is conducted as follows:
formed.
fully performed.
(2) The test report must be made inner packagings. All closures must be
available to a user of a Large Pack- installed using proper techniques and
aging or a representative of the De- torques.
partment of Transportation upon re- (b) For the drop and stacking test,
quest. The test report, at a minimum, inner receptacles must be filled to not
must contain the following informa- less than 95 percent of maximum ca-
tion: pacity (see § 171.8 of this subchapter) in
(i) Name and address of test facility; the case of solids and not less than 98
(ii) Name and address of applicant percent of maximum in the case of liq-
(where appropriate); uids. Bags must be filled to the max-
(iii) A unique test report identifica- imum mass at which they may be used.
tion; For Large Packagings where the inner
(iv) Date of the test report; packagings are designed to carry liq-
(v) Manufacturer of the packaging; uids and solids, separate testing is re-
(vi) Description of the packaging de- quired for both liquid and solid con-
sign type (e.g., dimensions, materials, tents. The material to be transported
closures, thickness, etc.), including in the packagings may be replaced by a
methods of manufacture (e.g., blow non-hazardous material, except for
molding) and which may include draw- chemical compatibility testing or
ing(s) and/or photograph(s); where this would invalidate the results
(vii) Maximum capacity; of the tests.
(viii) Characteristics of test contents, (c) If the material to be transported
e.g., viscosity and relative density for is replaced for test purposes by a non-
liquids and particle size for solids; hazardous material, the material used
(ix) Mathematical calculations per- must be of the same or higher specific
formed to conduct and document test- gravity as the material to be carried,
ing (for example, drop height, test ca- and its other physical properties
pacity, outage requirements, etc.); (grain, size, viscosity) which might in-
(x) Test descriptions and results; and fluence the results of the required tests
(xi) Signature with the name and must correspond as closely as possible
title of signatory. to those of the hazardous material to
[75 FR 5400, Feb. 2, 2010, as amended at 75 FR be transported. It is permissible to use
60339, Sept. 30, 2010; 76 FR 3389, Jan. 19, 2011; additives, such as bags of lead shot, to
78 FR 14715, Mar. 7, 2013; 78 FR 65487, Oct. 31, achieve the requisite total package
2013; 81 FR 35545, June 2, 2016] mass, so long as they do not affect the
test results.
§ 178.960 Preparation of Large Pack- (d) Paper or fiberboard Large Pack-
agings for testing. agings must be conditioned for at least
(a) Except as otherwise provided in 24 hours immediately prior to testing
this subchapter, each Large Packaging in an atmosphere maintained—
and package must be closed in prepara- (1) At 50 percent ±2 percent relative
tion for testing and tests must be car- humidity, and at a temperature of 23 °C
ried out in the same manner as if pre- ±2 °C (73 °F ±4 °F). Average values
pared for transportation, including should fall within these limits. Short-
242
term fluctuations and measurement (15.9 cubic feet) or less must be subject
limitations may cause individual meas- to an additional drop test.
urements to vary by up to ±5 percent (e) Drop height. (1) For all Large
relative humidity without significant Packagings, drop heights are specified
impairment of test reproducibility; as follows:
(2) At 65 percent ±2 percent relative (i) Packing group I: 1.8 m (5.9 feet)
humidity, and at a temperature of 20 °C (ii) Packing group II: 1.2 m (3.9 feet)
±2 °C (68 °F ±4 °F), or 27 °C ±2 °C (81 °F (iii) Packing group III: 0.8 m (2.6 feet)
±4 °F). Average values should fall with- (2) Drop tests are to be performed
in these limits. Short-term fluctua- with the solid or liquid to be trans-
tions and measurement limitations ported or with a non-hazardous mate-
may cause individual measurements to rial having essentially the same phys-
vary by up to ±5 percent relative hu- ical characteristics.
midity without significant impairment (3) The specific gravity and viscosity
of a substituted non-hazardous mate-
of test reproducibility; or
rial used in the drop test for liquids
(3) For testing at periodic intervals
must be similar to the hazardous mate-
only (i.e., other than initial design rial intended for transportation. Water
qualification testing), at ambient con- also may be used for the liquid drop
ditions. test under the following conditions:
(i) Where the substances to be carried
§ 178.965 Drop test.
have a specific gravity not exceeding
(a) General. The drop test must be 1.2, the drop heights must be those
conducted for the qualification of all specified in paragraph (e)(1) of this sec-
Large Packaging design types and per- tion for each Large Packaging design
formed periodically as specified in type; and
§ 178.955(e) of this subpart. (ii) Where the substances to be car-
(b) Special preparation for the drop test. ried have a specific gravity exceeding
Large Packagings must be filled in ac- 1.2, the drop heights must be as fol-
cordance with § 178.960. lows:
(c) Conditioning. Rigid plastic Large (A) Packing Group I: SG × 1.5 m (4.9
Packagings and Large Packagings with feet).
plastic inner receptacles must be con- (B) Packing Group II: SG × 1.0 m (3.3
ditioned for testing by reducing the feet).
temperature of the packaging and its (C) Packing Group III: SG × 0.67 m
contents to ¥18 °C (0 °F) or lower. Test (2.2 feet).
liquids must be kept in the liquid (f) Criteria for passing the test. For all
state, if necessary, by the addition of Large Packaging design types there
anti-freeze. Water/anti-freeze solutions may be no loss of the filling substance
with a minimum specific gravity of 0.95 from inner packaging(s) or article(s).
for testing at ¥18 °C (0 °F) or lower are Ruptures are not permitted in Large
considered acceptable test liquids, and Packaging for articles of Class 1 which
may be considered equivalent to water permit the spillage of loose explosive
for test purposes. Large Packagings substances or articles from the Large
conditioned in this way are not re- Packaging. Where a Large Packaging
quired to be conditioned in accordance undergoes a drop test, the sample
with § 178.960(d). passes the test if the entire contents
(d) Test method. (1) Samples of all are retained even if the closure is no
Large Packaging design types must be longer sift-proof.
dropped onto a rigid, non-resilient, [75 FR 5400, Feb. 2, 2010, as amended at 75 FR
smooth, flat and horizontal surface. 60339, Sept. 30, 2010]
The point of impact must be the most
vulnerable part of the base of the Large § 178.970 Bottom lift test.
Packaging being tested. Following the (a) General. The bottom lift test must
drop, the Large Packaging must be re- be conducted for the qualification of
stored to the upright position for ob- all Large Packagings design types de-
servation. signed to be lifted from the base.

(2) Large Packaging design types (b) Special preparation for the bottom
with a capacity of 0.45 cubic meters lift test. The Large Packaging must be
243
§ 178.975 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
loaded to 1.25 times its maximum per- (ii) Suspend the flexible Large Pack-
missible gross mass, the load being aging by its lifting devices.
evenly distributed. (iii) Apply a constant downward force
(c) Test method. All Large Packaging through a specially designed platen.
design types must be raised and low- The platen will be a minimum of 60
ered twice by a lift truck with the percent and a maximum of 80 percent
forks centrally positioned and spaced of the cross sectional surface area of
at three quarters of the dimension of the flexible Large Packaging.
the side of entry (unless the points of (iv) The combination of the mass of
entry are fixed). The forks must pene- the filled flexible Large Packaging and
trate to three quarters of the direction the force applied through the platen
of entry. must be a minimum of six times the
(d) Criteria for passing the test. For all maximum net mass of the flexible
Large Packagings design types de- Large Packaging. The test must be
signed to be lifted from the base, there conducted for a period of five minutes.
may be no permanent deformation (v) Other equally effective methods
which renders the Large Packaging un- of top lift testing and preparation may
safe for transport and there must be no be used with approval of the Associate
loss of contents. Administrator.
(d) Criterion for passing the test. For
§ 178.975 Top lift test. all Large Packagings design types de-
signed to be lifted from the top, there
(a) General. The top lift test must be
may be no permanent deformation
conducted for the qualification of all of
which renders the Large Packagings
Large Packagings design types to be
unsafe for transport and no loss of con-
lifted from the top or, for flexible
tents.
Large Packagings, from the side.
(b) Special preparation for the top lift § 178.980 Stacking test.
test. (1) Metal and rigid plastic Large
(a) General. The stacking test must
Packagings design types must be load-
be conducted for the qualification of
ed to twice its maximum permissible
all Large Packagings design types in-
gross mass.
tended to be stacked.
(2) Flexible Large Packaging design
(b) Special preparation for the stacking
types must be filled to six times the
test. (1) All Large Packagings except
maximum permissible gross mass, the
flexible Large Packaging design types
load being evenly distributed.
must be loaded to their maximum per-
(c) Test method. (1) A Large Pack- missible gross mass.
aging must be lifted in the manner for (2) Flexible Large Packagings must
which it is designed until clear of the be filled to not less than 95 percent of
floor and maintained in that position their capacity and to their maximum
for a period of five minutes. net mass, with the load being evenly
(2) Rigid plastic Large Packaging de- distributed.
sign types must be: (c) Test method. (1) All Large Pack-
(i) Lifted by each pair of diagonally agings must be placed on their base on
opposite lifting devices, so that the level, hard ground and subjected to a
hoisting forces are applied vertically uniformly distributed superimposed
for a period of five minutes; and test load for a period of at least five
(ii) Lifted by each pair of diagonally minutes (see paragraph (c)(5) of this
opposite lifting devices so that the section).
hoisting forces are applied towards the (2) Fiberboard and wooden Large
center at 45° to the vertical, for a pe- Packagings must be subjected to the
riod of five minutes. test for 24 hours.
(3) If not tested as indicated in para- (3) Rigid plastic Large Packagings
graph (c)(1) of this section, a flexible which bear the stacking load must be
Large Packaging design type must be subjected to the test for 28 days at 40
tested as follows: °C (104 °F).
(i) Fill the flexible Large Packaging (4) For all Large Packagings, the
to 95% full with a material representa- load must be applied by one of the fol-
tive of the product to be shipped. lowing methods:
244
(i) One or more Large Packagings of 8.3 corresponds to the weight in pounds of 1.0
the same type loaded to their max- gallon of water.
imum permissible gross mass and 1.5 is a compensation factor that converts
the static load of the stacking test into
stacked on the test Large Packaging; a load suitable for dynamic compression
(ii) The calculated superimposed test testing.
load weight loaded on either a flat
plate or a reproduction of the base of (e) Criterion for passing the test. (1) For
the Large Packaging, which is stacked metal or rigid plastic Large Pack-
on the test Large Packaging; or agings, there may be no permanent de-
(5) Calculation of superimposed test formation which renders the Large
load. For all Large Packagings, the Packaging unsafe for transportation
load to be placed on the Large Pack- and no loss of contents.
aging must be 1.8 times the combined (2) For fiberboard or wooden Large
maximum permissible gross mass of Packagings, there may be no loss of
the number of similar Large Packaging contents and no permanent deforma-
that may be stacked on top of the tion that renders the whole Large
Large Packaging during transpor- Packaging, including the base pallet,
tation. unsafe for transportation.
(d) Periodic Retest. (1) The package (3) For flexible Large Packagings,
must be tested in accordance with there may be no deterioration which
§ 178.980(c) of this subpart; or renders the Large Packaging unsafe for
(2) The packaging may be tested transportation and no loss of contents.
using a dynamic compression testing (4) For the dynamic compression
machine. The test must be conducted test, a container passes the test if,
at room temperature on an empty, un- after application of the required load,
sealed packaging. The test sample there is no permanent deformation to
must be centered on the bottom platen the Large Packaging which renders the
of the testing machine. The top platen whole Large Packaging; including the
must be lowered until it comes in con- base pallet, unsafe for transportation;
tact with the test sample. Compression in no case may the maximum deflec-
must be applied end to end. The speed tion exceed one inch.
of the compression tester must be one- [75 FR 5400, Feb. 2, 2010, as amended at 75 FR
half inch plus or minus one-fourth inch 60339, Sept. 30, 2010; 78 FR 1097, Jan. 7, 2013]
per minute. An initial preload of 50
pounds must be applied to ensure a § 178.985 Vibration test.
definite contact between the test sam- (a) General. All rigid Large Pack-
ple and the platens. The distance be- aging and flexible Large Packaging de-
tween the platens at this time must be sign types must be capable of with-
recorded as zero deformation. The force standing the vibration test.
‘‘A’’ to then be applied must be cal- (b) Test method. (1) A sample Large
culated using the applicable formula: Packaging, selected at random, must
Liquids: A = (1.8)(n¥1) [w + (s × v × 8.3 be filled and closed as for shipment.
× .98)] × 1.5; Large Packagings intended for liquids
may be tested using water as the filling
or material for the vibration test.
(2) The sample Large Packaging must
Solids: A = (1.8)(n¥1) [w + (s × v × 8.3 ×
be placed on a vibrating platform that
.95)] × 1.5
has a vertical or rotary double-ampli-
Where: tude (peak-to-peak displacement) of
A = applied load in pounds. one inch. The Large Packaging must be
n = maximum number of Large Packagings constrained horizontally to prevent it
that may be stacked during transpor- from falling off the platform, but must
tation. be left free to move vertically and
w = maximum weight of one empty container bounce.
in pounds.
(3) The sample Large Packaging must
s = specific gravity (liquids) or density (sol-
ids) of the lading. be placed on a vibrating platform that
v = actual capacity of container (rated ca- has a vertical double-amplitude (peak-

pacity + outage) in gallons. to-peak displacement) of one inch. The
and: Large Packaging must be constrained
245
§ 178.1000 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
horizontally to prevent it from falling section. The following information is

off the platform, but must be left free required in the sequence presented:
to move vertically and bounce. (i) Except as provided in
(4) The test must be performed for § 178.503(e)(1)(ii), the United Nations
one hour at a frequency that causes the packaging symbol as illustrated in
package to be raised from the vibrating § 178.503(e)(1)(i).
platform to such a degree that a piece (ii) The code number designating the
of material of approximately 1.6-mm Flexible Bulk Container design type
(0.063-inch) in thickness (such as steel according to § 178.1005. The letter ‘‘W’’
strapping or paperboard) can be passed must follow the Flexible Bulk Con-
between the bottom of the Large Pack- tainer design type identification code
aging and the platform. Other methods on a Flexible Bulk Container when the
at least equally effective may be used Flexible Bulk Container differs from
(see § 178.801(i)). the requirements in subpart R of this
(c) Criterion for passing the test. A part, or is tested using methods other
Large Packaging passes the vibration than those specified in this subpart,
test if there is no rupture or leakage. and is approved by the Associate Ad-
[75 FR 5400, Feb. 2, 2010, as amended at 75 FR ministrator in accordance with
60339, Sept. 30, 2010] § 178.1035;
(iii) The capital letter Z identifying
Subpart R—Flexible Bulk Container that the Flexible Bulk Container meets
Standards Packing Group III performance stand-
ard under which the design type has
been successfully tested.
SOURCE: 78 FR 1097, Jan. 7, 2013, unless oth-
erwise noted. (iv) The month (designated numeri-
cally) and year (last two digits) of
§ 178.1000 Purpose and scope. manufacture;
(a) This subpart prescribes require- (v) The country authorizing the allo-
ments for Flexible Bulk Containers cation of the mark. The letters ‘‘USA’’
(FBCs) intended for the transportation indicate that the Flexible Bulk Con-
of hazardous materials. FBC standards tainer is manufactured and marked in
in this subpart are based on the UN the United States in compliance with
Model Regulations. the provisions of this subchapter.
(b) Terms used in this subpart are de- (vi) The name and address or symbol
fined in § 171.8 of this subchapter. of the manufacturer or the approval
§ 178.1005 Flexible Bulk Container part R and subpart S of this part. Sym-
identification code. bols, if used, must be registered with
The Flexible Bulk Container code the Associate Administrator.
designation is BK3. (vii) The stacking test load in kilo-
grams (kg). For Flexible Bulk Con-
§ 178.1010 Marking of Flexible Bulk tainers not designed for stacking the
Containers. figure ‘‘0’’ must be shown.
(a) The manufacturer must: (viii) The maximum permissible
(1) Mark every Flexible Bulk Con- gross mass in kg.
tainer in a durable and clearly visible (2) The following is an example of
manner. The marking may be applied symbols and required markings for a
in a single line or in multiple lines pro- Flexible Bulk container suitable for
vided the correct sequence is followed stacking; stacking load: 1,000 kg; max-
with the information required by this imum gross mass: 2,500 kg.
246
ER07JA13.002</GPH>
(b) [Reserved] of manufacture of the Flexible Bulk

Container.
§ 178.1015 General Flexible Bulk Con-
tainer standards.
Subpart S—Testing of Flexible Bulk
(a) Each Flexible Bulk Containers Containers
must be sift-proof and completely
closed during transport to prevent the
release of contents and waterproof. SOURCE: 78 FR 1098, Jan. 7, 2013, unless oth-
erwise noted.
(b) Parts of the Flexible Bulk Con-
tainer that are in direct contact with § 178.1030 Purpose and scope.
hazardous materials:
(1) Must not be affected or signifi- This subpart prescribes certain test-
cantly weakened by those hazardous ing requirements for Flexible Bulk
materials. Containers identified in subpart R of
(2) Must not cause a dangerous effect this part.
with the dangerous goods (e.g., cata-
§ 178.1035 General requirements.
lyzing a reaction or reacting with the
hazardous materials). (a) General. The test procedures pre-
(3) Must not allow permeation of the scribed in this subpart are intended to
hazardous materials that could con- ensure that Flexible Bulk Containers
stitute a danger under conditions nor- containing hazardous materials can
mally incident to transportation. withstand normal conditions of trans-
(c) Filling and discharge devices portation. These test procedures are
must be so constructed as to be pro- considered minimum requirements.
tected against damage during trans- Each packaging must be manufactured
port and handling. The filling and dis- and assembled so as to be capable of
charge devices must be capable of successfully passing the prescribed
being secured against unintended open- tests and to conform to the require-
ing. ments of § 173.24 of this subchapter
(d) Slings of the Flexible Bulk Con- while in transportation.
tainer, if fitted with such, must with- (b) Responsibility. The Flexible Bulk
stand pressure and dynamic forces Container manufacturer is responsible
which can be expected under conditions for ensuring each Flexible Bulk Con-
normally incident to transportation. tainers is capable of passing the pre-
(e) Handling devices must be strong scribed tests. To the extent a Flexible
enough to withstand repeated use. Bulk Container’s assembly function,
(f) A venting device must be fitted to including final closure, is performed by
Flexible Bulk Containers intended to the person who offers a hazardous ma-
transport hazardous materials that terial for transportation, that person is
may develop dangerous accumulation responsible for performing the function
of gases within the Flexible Bulk Con- in accordance with §§ 173.22 and 178.2 of
tainer. Any venting device must be de- this subchapter.
signed so that external foreign sub- (c) Definitions. For the purpose of this
stances or the ingress of water are pre- subpart:
vented from entering the Flexible Bulk (1) Flexible Bulk Container design type
Container through the venting device refers to a Flexible Bulk Container
under conditions normally incident to that does not differ in structural de-
transportation. sign, size, material of construction and
[78 FR 1097, Jan. 7, 2013, as amended at 82 FR packing.
15896, Mar. 30, 2017] (2) Design qualification testing is the
performance of the drop, topple, right-
§ 178.1020 Period of use for transpor- ing, tear, stacking, and top-lift tests
tation of hazardous materials in prescribed in this subpart, for each dif-
Flexible Bulk Containers. ferent Flexible Bulk Container design
The use of Flexible Bulk Containers type, at the start of production of that
for the transport of hazardous mate- packaging.

rials is permitted for a period of time (3) Periodic design requalification test is
not to exceed two years from the date the performance of the applicable tests
247
§ 178.1035 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
specified in paragraph (c)(2) of this sec- subpart using random samples of pack-
tion on a Flexible Bulk Container de- agings, in the numbers specified in the
sign type, to requalify the design for appropriate test section.
continued production at the frequency (g) Proof of compliance. In addition to
specified in paragraph (e) of this sec- the periodic design requalification
tion. testing intervals specified in paragraph
(4) Production inspection is the inspec- (e) of this section, the Associate Ad-
tion that must initially be conducted ministrator, or a designated represent-
on each newly manufactured Flexible ative, may at any time require dem-
Bulk Container. onstration of compliance by a manu-
(5) Different Flexible Bulk Container facturer, through testing in accordance
design type is one that differs from a with this subpart, to ensure packagings
previously qualified Flexible Bulk Con- meet the requirements of this subpart.
tainer design type in structural design, As required by the Associate Adminis-
size, material of construction, wall trator, or a designated representative,
thickness, or manner of construction, the manufacturer must either:
but does not include: (1) Conduct performance tests or
(i) A packaging that differs in surface have tests conducted by an inde-
treatment; pendent testing facility, in accordance
(ii) A packaging that differs only in with this subpart; or
its lesser external dimensions (i.e., (2) Make a sample Flexible Bulk Con-
height, width, length) provided mate- tainer available to the Associate Ad-
rials of construction and material ministrator, or a designated represent-
thickness or fabric weight remain the ative, for testing in accordance with
same; this subpart.
(d) Design qualification testing. The (h) Record retention. Following each
packaging manufacturer must achieve design qualification test and each peri-
successful test results for the design odic retest on a Flexible Bulk Con-
qualification testing at the start of tainer, a test report must be prepared.
production of each new or different The test report must be maintained at
Flexible Bulk Container design type. each location where the Flexible Bulk
Application of the certification mark Container is manufactured and each lo-
by the manufacturer constitutes cer- cation where the design qualification
tification that the Flexible Bulk Con- tests are conducted, for as long as the
tainer design type passed the pre- Flexible Bulk Container is produced
scribed tests in this subpart. and for at least two years thereafter,
(e) Periodic design requalification test- and at each location where the periodic
ing. (1) Periodic design requalification retests are conducted until such tests
must be conducted on each qualified are successfully performed again and a
Flexible Bulk Container design type if new test report produced. In addition, a
the manufacturer is to maintain au- copy of the test report must be main-
thorization for continued production. tained by a person certifying compli-
The Flexible Bulk Container manufac- ance with this part. The test report
turer must achieve successful test re- must be made available to a user of a
sults for the periodic design requali- Flexible Bulk Container or a represent-
fication at sufficient frequency to en- ative of the Department upon request.
sure each packaging produced by the The test report, at a minimum, must
manufacturer is capable of passing the contain the following information:
design qualification tests. Design re- (1) Name and address of test facility;
qualification tests must be conducted (2) Name and address of applicant
at least once every 24 months. (where appropriate);
(2) Changes in the frequency of design (3) A unique test report identifica-
requalification testing specified in tion;
paragraph (e)(1) of this section are au- (4) Date of the test report;
thorized if approved by the Associate (5) Manufacturer of the packaging;
Administrator. (6) Description of the flexible bulk
(f) Test samples. The manufacturer container design type (e.g., dimensions
must conduct the design qualification materials, closures, thickness, etc.), in-
and periodic tests prescribed in this cluding methods of manufacture (e.g.,
248
blow molding) and which may include (2) Following the drop, the Flexible
drawing(s) and/or photograph(s); Bulk Container must be restored to the
(7) Maximum capacity; upright position for observation.
(8) Characteristics of test contents (d) Drop height. (1) For all Flexible
(e.g., particle size for solids); Bulk Containers, drop heights are spec-
(9) Mathematical calculations per- ified as follows: Packing group III: 0.8
formed to conduct and document test- m (2.6 feet)
ing (e.g., drop height, test capacity, (2) Drop tests are to be performed
outage requirements, etc.); with the solid to be transported or with
(10) Test descriptions and results; and a non-hazardous material having essen-
(11) Signature with the name and tially the same physical characteris-
title of signatory. tics.
(e) Criteria for passing the test. For all
§ 178.1040 Preparation of Flexible Bulk
Containers for testing. Flexible Bulk Container design types
there may be no loss of the filling sub-
(a) Except as otherwise provided in stance. However a slight discharge
this subchapter, each Flexible Bulk (e.g., from closures or stitch holes)
Container must be closed in prepara- upon impact is not considered a failure
tion for testing and tests must be car- of the Flexible Bulk Container pro-
ried out in the same manner as if pre- vided that no further leakage occurs
pared for transportation. All closures after the container has been restored
must be installed using proper tech- to the upright position.
niques and torques.
(b) If the material to be transported § 178.1050 Top lift test.
is replaced for test purposes by a non-
hazardous material, the physical prop- (a) General. The top lift test must be
erties (grain, size, viscosity) of the re- conducted for the qualification of all of
placement material used that might Flexible Bulk Containers design types
influence the results of the required to be lifted from the top.
tests must correspond as closely as (b) Special preparation for the top lift
possible to those of the hazardous ma- test. Flexible Bulk Container design
terial to be transported. It is permis- types must be filled to six times the
sible to use additives, such as bags of maximum permissible gross mass, the
lead shot, to achieve the requisite total load being evenly distributed.
package mass, so long as they do not (c) Test method. (1) A Flexible Bulk
affect the test results. Container must be lifted in the manner
for which it is designed until clear of
§ 178.1045 Drop test. the floor and maintained in that posi-
(a) General. The drop test must be tion for a period of five minutes.
conducted for the qualification of all (2) If not tested as indicated in para-
Flexible Bulk Container design types graph (c)(1) of this section, a Flexible
and performed periodically as specified Bulk Container design type must be
in § 178.1035(e) of this subpart. tested as follows:
(b) Special preparation for the drop test. (i) Fill the Flexible Bulk Container
Flexible Bulk Containers must be filled to 95% full with a material representa-
to their maximum permissible gross tive of the product to be shipped.
mass. (ii) Suspend the Flexible Bulk Con-
(c) Test method. (1) A sample of all tainer by its lifting devices.
Flexible Bulk Container design types (iii) Apply a constant downward force
must be dropped onto a rigid, non-resil- through a specially designed platen.
ient, smooth, flat and horizontal sur- The platen will be a minimum of 60
face. This test surface must be large percent and a maximum of 80 percent
enough to be immovable during testing of the cross sectional surface area of
and sufficiently large enough to ensure the Flexible Bulk Container.
that the test Flexible Bulk Container (iv) The combination of the mass of
falls entirely upon the surface. The the filled Flexible Bulk Container and
test surface must be kept free from the force applied through the platen
local defects capable of influencing the must be a minimum of six times the
test results. maximum net mass of the Flexible
249
§ 178.1055 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
Bulk Container. The test must be con- permissible gross mass, the load being
ducted for a period of five minutes. evenly distributed.
(v) Other equally effective methods (c) Test method. Samples of all Flexi-
of top lift testing and preparation may ble Bulk Container design types must
be used with approval of the Associate be toppled onto any part of its top by
Administrator. lifting the side furthest from the drop
(d) Criteria for passing the test. For all edge upon a rigid, non-resilient,
Flexible Bulk Containers design types smooth, flat and horizontal surface.
designed to be lifted from the top, This test surface must be large enough
there may be no damage to the Flexi- to be immovable during testing and
ble Bulk Container or its lifting de- sufficiently large enough to ensure
vices that renders the Flexible Bulk that the test Flexible Bulk Container
Container unsafe for transport, and no falls entirely upon the surface. The
loss of contents. test surface must be kept free from
local defects capable of influencing the
§ 178.1055 Stacking test. test results.
(a) General. The stacking test must (d) Topple height. (1) For all Flexible
be conducted for the qualification of Bulk Containers, topple heights are
all Flexible Bulk Containers design specified as follows: Packing group III:
types. 0.8 m (2.6 feet).
(b) Special preparation for the stacking (e) Criterion for passing the test. For
test. All Flexible Bulk Containers de- all Flexible Bulk Container design
sign types must be loaded to their max- types there may be no loss of the fill-
imum permissible gross mass. ing substance. However a slight dis-
(c) Test method. (1) All Flexible Bulk charge (e.g., from closures or stitch
Containers must be placed on their holes) upon impact is not considered a
base on level, hard ground and sub- failure of the Flexible Bulk Container.
jected to a uniformly distributed super-
imposed test load that is four times the § 178.1065 Righting test.
design type maximum gross weight for
(a) General. The righting test must be
a period of at least twenty-four hours.
(2) For all Flexible Bulk Containers,
Flexible Bulk Containers design types
the load must be applied by one of the
designed to be lifted from the top or
following methods:
side.
(i) Four Flexible Bulk Containers of
the same type loaded to their max- (b) Special preparation for the righting
imum permissible gross mass and test. Flexible Bulk Container design
stacked on the test Flexible Bulk Con- types must be filled to not less than
tainer; 95% of their capacity and to their max-
(ii) The calculated superimposed test imum permissible gross mass, the load
load weight loaded on either a flat being evenly distributed.
plate or a reproduction of the base of (c) Test method. A sample Flexible
the Flexible Bulk Container, which is Bulk Container design type must be
stacked on the test Flexible Bulk Con- tested; the Flexible Bulk Container
tainer. should start lying on its side and then
(d) Criteria for passing the test. There must be lifted at a speed of at least
may be no deterioration that renders 0.1m/s (0.328 ft/s) to an upright position
the Flexible Bulk Container unsafe for clear of the floor, by no more than half
transportation and no loss of contents of the lifting devices.
during the test or after removal of the (d) Criterion for passing the test. For
test load. all Flexible Bulk Container design
types there must be no damage that
§ 178.1060 Topple test. renders the Flexible Bulk Container
(a) General. The topple test must be unsafe for transport or handling.
Flexible Bulk Containers design types. § 178.1070 Tear test.
(b) Special preparation for the topple (a) General. The tear test must be
test. Flexible Bulk Container design conducted for the qualification of all of
types must be filled to their maximum Flexible Bulk Containers design types.
250
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT Pt. 178, App. A
(b) Special preparation for the tear test. § 178.1070(c)(1), must be subjected to a
Flexible Bulk Container design types uniformly distributed superimposed
must be filled its maximum permis- load equivalent to twice the maximum
sible gross mass, the load being evenly gross mass of the package. This load
distributed. must be applied for at least fifteen
(c) Test method. (1) A Flexible Bulk minutes. Flexible Bulk Containers that
Container design type must be placed are designed to be lifted from the top
on the ground and a 300 mm (11.9 in) or the side must, after removal of the
cut shall be made. This 300 mm (11.9 in)
superimposed load, be lifted clear of
cut must:
the floor and maintained in that posi-
(i) Completely penetrate all layers of
the Flexible Bulk Container on a wall tion for a period of fifteen minutes.
with a wide face. (d) Criterion for passing the test. For
(ii) Be made at a 45° angle to the all Flexible Bulk Container design
principal axis of the Flexible Bulk Con- types, the cut must not spread more
tainer, halfway between the bottom than an additional 25% of its original
surface and the top level of the con- length.
tents.
(2) The Flexible Bulk Container after
being cut according to the provisions of
APPENDIX A TO PART 178—SPECIFICATIONS FOR STEEL

TABLE 1
[Open-hearth, basic oxygen, or electric steel of uniform quality. The following chemical composition limits are based on ladle
analysis:]
Chemical composition, percent-ladle analysis

Designation
Grade 1 1 Grade 2 1 2 Grade 3 2 4 5
Carbon .......................................... 0.10/0.20 ............................... 0.24 maximum ...................... 0.22 maximum.

Manganese ................................... 1.10/1.60 ............................... 0.50/1.00 ............................... 1.25 maximum.
Phosphorus, maximum ................. 0.04 ....................................... 0.04 ....................................... 0.045.6
Sulfur, maximum .......................... 0.05 ....................................... 0.05 ....................................... 0.05.
Silicon ........................................... 0.15/0.30 ............................... 0.30 maximum ......................
Copper, maximum ........................ 0.40 ....................................... ...............................................
Columbium ................................... ............................................... 0.01/0.04 ...............................
Heat treatment authorized ............ (3) .......................................... (3) .......................................... (3).
Maximum stress (p.s.i.) ................ 35,000 ................................... 35,000 ................................... 35,000.
1 Addition of other elements to obtain alloying effect is not authorized.
2 Ferritic grain size 6 or finer according to ASTM E 112–96 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter).
3 Any suitable heat treatment in excess of 1,100 °F., except that liquid quenching is not permitted.
4 Other alloying elements may be added and shall be reported.
5 For compositions with a maximum carbon content of 0.15 percent of ladle analysis, the maximum limit for manganese on
ladle analysis may be 1.40 percent.
6 Rephosphorized Grade 3 steels containing no more than 0.15 percent phosphorus are permitted if carbon content does not
exceed 0.15 percent and manganese does not exceed 1 percent.
CHECK ANALYSIS TOLERANCES

[A heat of steel made under any of the above grades, the ladle analysis of which is slightly out of the specified range is
acceptable if the check analysis is within the following variations:]

Carbon ...................................................................... To 0.15 inclusive .............................................. 0.02 0.03

Over 0.15 to 0.40 inclusive .............................. 0.03 0.04
Manganese ............................................................... To 0.60 inclusive .............................................. 0.03 0.03
Phosphorus 7 ............................................................. All ranges ......................................................... .................... 0.01
Sulfur ......................................................................... All ranges ......................................................... .................... 0.01

Silicon ........................................................................ To 0.30 inclusive .............................................. 0.02 0.03
Copper ...................................................................... To 1.00 inclusive .............................................. 0.03 0.03
251
Pt. 178, App. B 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
CHECK ANALYSIS TOLERANCES—Continued

[A heat of steel made under any of the above grades, the ladle analysis of which is slightly out of the specified range is
acceptable if the check analysis is within the following variations:]


Nickel ........................................................................ To 1.00 inclusive .............................................. 0.03 0.03
Chromium .................................................................. To 0.90 inclusive .............................................. 0.03 0.03
Molybdenum .............................................................. To 0.20 inclusive .............................................. 0.01 0.01
Zirconium .................................................................. All ranges ......................................................... 0.01 0.05
Columbium ................................................................ To 0.04 inclusive .............................................. 0.005 0.01
Aluminum .................................................................. Over 0.10 to 0.20 inclusive .............................. 0.04 0.04
[Amdt. 178–3, 34 FR 12283, July 25, 1969; 34 FR 12593, Aug. 1, 1969, as amended by Amdt. 178–
64, 45 FR 81573, Dec. 11, 1980; Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52728, Dec. 21, 1990; 68 FR 75758, Dec. 31, 2003]
APPENDIX B TO PART 178—ALTERNATIVE is applied; the method of restraint may not

LEAKPROOFNESS TEST METHODS affect the results of the test. The exterior
surface of all seams and welds must be coat-
In addition to the method prescribed in ed with a solution of soap suds or a water
§ 178.604 of this subchapter, the following and oil mixture. The test must be conducted
leakproofness test methods are authorized: for a period of time sufficient to pressurize
(1) Helium test. The packaging must be the interior of the packaging to the specified
filled with at least 1 L inert helium gas, air air pressure and to determine if there is
tight closed, and placed in a testing cham- leakage of air from the packaging. A pack-
ber. The testing chamber must be evacuated aging passes the test if there is no leakage of
down to a pressure of 5 kPa which equals an air from the packaging.
over-pressure inside the packaging of 95 kPa.
(4) Solution over partial seams test. For other
The air in the testing chamber must be ana-
lyzed for traces of helium gas by means of a than design qualification testing, the fol-
mass spectrograph. The test must be con- lowing test may be used for metal drums:
ducted for a period of time sufficient to evac- The packaging must be restrained while an
uate the chamber and to determine if there internal air pressure of 48 kPa (7.0 psig) is
is leakage into or out of the packaging. If he- applied; the method of restraint may not af-
lium gas is detected, the leaking packaging fect the results of the test. The packaging
must be automatically separated from non- must be coated with a soap solution over the
leaking drums and the leaking area deter- entire side seam and a distance of not less
mined according to the method prescribed in than eight inches on each side of the side
§ 178.604(d) of this subchapter. A packaging seam along the chime seam(s). The test must
passes the test if there is no leakage of he- be conducted for a period of time sufficient
lium. to pressurize the interior of the packaging to
(2) Pressure differential test. The packaging the specified air pressure and to determine if
shall be restrained while either pressure or a there is leakage of air from the packaging. A
vacuum is applied internally. The packaging packaging passes the test if there is no leak-
must be pressurized to the pressure required age of air from the packaging. Chime cuts
by § 178.604(e) of this subchapter for the ap- must be made on the initial drum at the be-
propriate packing group. The method of re- ginning of each production run and on the
straint must not affect the results of the initial drum after any adjustment to the
test. The test must be conducted for a period chime seamer. Chime cuts must be main-
of time sufficient to appropriately pressurize tained on file in date order for not less than
or evacuate the interior of the packaging six months and be made available to a rep-
and to determine if there is leakage into or resentative of the Department of Transpor-
out of the packaging. A packaging passes the tation on request.
pressure differential test if there is no
change in measured internal pressure. [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52728, Dec. 21, 1990, as
(3) Solution over seams. The packaging must amended at 56 FR 66287, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR
be restrained while an internal air pressure 45466, Oct. 1, 1992]
252
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT Pt. 178, App. D
APPENDIX C TO PART 178—NOMINAL AND with other devices such as a remote tempera-
MINIMUM THICKNESSES OF STEEL ture sensor, metal fuse on the valve, or coat-
DRUMS AND JERRICANS ed wax, provided the device is tested and the
test report is retained for verification. Under
For each listed packaging capacity, the this alternative, it is permissible to record
following table compares the ISO 3574 (IBR, the highest temperature to which the cyl-
see § 171.7 of this subchapter) nominal thick- inder is subjected instead of temperature
ness with the corresponding ISO 3574 min- measurements in intervals of not more than
imum thickness. five (5) minutes.
2.3 Instrumentation. A calibrated recording
Cor- device or a computerized data acquisition
responding
ISO nomi- system with an appropriate range should be
Maximum capacity (L) ISO min-
nal (mm) imum provided to measure and record the outputs
(mm) of the thermocouples.
20 ................................................... 0.7 0.63 3. Test Specimen.
30 ................................................... 0.8 0.73 3.1 Specimen Configuration. Each outer
40 ................................................... 0.8 0.73 package material type and design must be
60 ................................................... 1.0 0.92 tested, including any features such as han-
120 ................................................. 1.0 0.92 dles, latches, fastening systems, etc., that
220 ................................................. 1.0 0.92
450 ................................................. 1.9 1.77
may compromise the ability of the outer
package to provide thermal protection.
3.2 Test Specimen Mounting. The tested
[Amdt. 178–106, 59 FR 67522, Dec. 29, 1994, as outer package must be supported at the four
amended at 68 FR 75758, Dec. 31, 2003] corners using fire brick or other suitable
means. The bottom surface of the outer
APPENDIX D TO PART 178—THERMAL package must be exposed to allow exposure
RESISTANCE TEST to heat.
4. Preparation for Testing.
1. Scope. This test method evaluates the 4.1 It is recommended that the cylinder be
thermal resistance capabilities of a com- closed at ambient temperature and config-
pressed oxygen generator and the outer ured as when filled with a valve and pressure
packaging for a cylinder of compressed oxy- relief device. The oxygen generator must be
gen or other oxidizing gas and an oxygen filled with an oxidizing agent and may be
generator. When exposed to a temperature of tested with or without packaging.
205 °C (400 °F) for a period of not less than
4.2 Place the package or generator onto
three hours, the outer surface of the cylinder
supporting bricks or a stand inside the test
may not exceed a temperature of 93 °C (199
oven in such a manner to ensure even tem-
°F) and the oxygen generator must not actu-
perature flow.
ate.
5. Test Procedure.
2. Apparatus.
2.1 Test Oven. The oven must be large 5.1 Close oven door and check for proper
enough in size to fully house the test outer reading on thermocouples.
package without clearance problems. The 5.2 Raise the temperature of the oven to a
test oven must be capable of maintaining a minimum temperature of 205 °C ±2 °C (400 °F
minimum steady state temperature of 205 °C ±5 °F). Maintain a minimum oven tempera-
(400 °F). ture of 205 °C ±2 °C (400 °F ±5 °F) for at least
2.2 Thermocouples. At least three three hours. Exposure time begins when the
thermocouples must be used to monitor the oven steady state temperature reaches a
temperature inside the oven and an addi- minimum of 205 °C ±2 °C (400 °F ±5 °F).
tional three thermocouples must be used to 5.3 At the conclusion of the three-hour pe-
monitor the temperature of the cylinder. riod, the outer package may be removed
The thermocouples must be 1⁄16 inch, ceramic from the oven and allowed to cool naturally.
packed, metal sheathed, type K (Chromel- 6. Recordkeeping.
Alumel), grounded junction with a nominal 6.1 Record a complete description of the
30 American wire gauge (AWG) size con- material being tested, including the manu-
ductor. The thermocouples measuring the facturer, size of cylinder, etc.
temperature inside the oven must be placed 6.2 Record any observations regarding the
at varying heights to ensure even tempera- behavior of the test specimen during expo-
ture and proper heat-soak conditions. For sure, such as smoke production,
the thermocouples measuring the tempera- delamination, resin ignition, and time of oc-
ture of the cylinder: (1) Two of them must be currence of each event.
placed on the outer cylinder side wall at ap- 6.3 Record the temperature and time his-
proximately 2 inches (5 cm) from the top and tory of the cylinder temperature during the
bottom shoulders of the cylinder; and (2) one entire test for each thermocouple location.
must be placed on the cylinder valve body Temperature measurements must be re-
near the pressure relief device. Alter- corded at intervals of not more than five (5)
natively, the thermocouples may be replaced minutes. Record the maximum temperatures
253
Pt. 178, App. E 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
achieved at all three thermocouple locations ample: An 80 degree nozzle nominally rated
and the corresponding time. at 2.25 GPH and operated at 85 pounds per
7. Requirements. square inch (PSI) gauge to deliver 2.03 GPH.
7.1 For a cylinder, the outer package (iii) Have a 12 inch (305 mm) burner exten-
must provide adequate protection such that sion installed at the end of the draft tube
the outer surface of the cylinder and valve with an opening 6 inches (152 mm) high and
does not exceed a temperature of 93 °C (199 11 inches (280 mm) wide.
°F) at any of the three points where the (iv) Have a burner fuel pressure regulator
thermocouples are located. that is adjusted to deliver a nominal 2.0 GPH
7.2 For an oxygen generator, the gener- of #2 Grade kerosene or equivalent.
ator must not actuate. Burner models which have been used suc-
cessfully in testing are the Lenox Model OB–
[72 FR 4457, Jan. 31, 2008, as amended at 72 32, Carlin Model 200 CRD and Park Model
FR 55099, Sept. 28, 2007] DPL.
(3) Calorimeter. (i) The calorimeter to be
APPENDIX E TO PART 178—FLAME used in testing must be a total heat flux Foil
PENETRATION RESISTANCE TEST Type Gardon Gage of an appropriate range
(approximately 0 to 15.0 British thermal unit
(a) Criteria for Acceptance. (1) At least three (BTU) per ft.2 sec., 0–17.0 watts/cm2). The cal-
specimens of the outer packaging materials orimeter must be mounted in a 6 inch by 12
must be tested; inch (152 by 305 mm) by 3⁄4 inch (19 mm) thick
(2) Each test must be conducted on a flat 16 insulating block which is attached to a steel
inch × 24 inch test specimen mounted in the angle bracket for placement in the test stand
horizontal ceiling position of the test appa- during burner calibration as shown in Figure
ratus to represent the outer packaging de- 2 of this part of this appendix.
sign; (ii) The insulating block must be mon-
(3) Testing must be conducted on all design itored for deterioration and the mounting
features (latches, seams, hinges, etc.) affect- shimmed as necessary to ensure that the cal-
ing the ability of the outer packaging to orimeter face is parallel to the exit plane of
safely prevent the passage of fire in the hori- the test burner cone.
zontal ceiling position; and (4) Thermocouples. The seven thermocouples
(4) There must be no flame penetration of to be used for testing must be 1⁄16 inch ce-
any specimen within 5 minutes after applica- ramic sheathed, type K, grounded
tion of the flame source and the maximum thermocouples with a nominal 30 American
allowable temperature at a point 4 inches wire gage (AWG) size conductor. The seven
above the test specimen, centered over the thermocouples must be attached to a steel
burner cone, must not exceed 205 °C (400 °F). angle bracket to form a thermocouple rake
(b) Summary of Method. This method pro- for placement in the test stand during burn-
vides a laboratory test procedure for meas- er calibration.
uring the capability of cargo compartment (5) Apparatus Arrangement. The test burner
lining materials to resist flame penetration must be mounted on a suitable stand to posi-
with a 2 gallon per hour (GPH) #2 Grade ker- tion the exit of the burner cone a distance of
osene or equivalent burner fire source. Ceil- 8 inches from the ceiling liner panel and 2
ing and sidewall liner panels may be tested inches from the sidewall liner panel. The
individually provided a baffle is used to sim- burner stand should have the capability of
ulate the missing panel. Any specimen that allowing the burner to be swung away from
passes the test as a ceiling liner panel may the test specimen during warm-up periods.
be used as a sidewall liner panel. (6) Instrumentation. A recording potentiom-
(c) Test Specimens. (1) The specimen to be eter or other suitable instrument with an ap-
tested must measure 16 ±1⁄8 inches (406 ±3 propriate range must be used to measure and
mm) by 24 + 1⁄8 inches (610 ±3 mm). record the outputs of the calorimeter and
(2) The specimens must be conditioned at the thermocouples.
70 °F. ±5 °F. (21 °C. ±2 °C.) and 55% ±5% hu- (7) Timing Device. A stopwatch or other de-
midity for at least 24 hours before testing. vice must be used to measure the time of
(d) Test Apparatus. The arrangement of the flame application and the time of flame pen-
test apparatus must include the components etration, if it occurs.
described in this section. Minor details of the (e) Preparation of Apparatus. Before calibra-
apparatus may vary, depending on the model tion, all equipment must be turned on and
of the burner used. allowed to stabilize, and the burner fuel flow
(1) Specimen Mounting Stand. The mounting must be adjusted as specified in paragraph
stand for the test specimens consists of steel (d)(2).
angles. (f) Calibration. To ensure the proper ther-
(2) Test Burner. The burner to be used in mal output of the burner the following test
tesing must— must be made:
(i) Be a modified gun type. (1) Remove the burner extension from the
(ii) Use a suitable nozzle and maintain fuel end of the draft tube. Turn on the blower
pressure to yield a 2 GPH fuel flow. For ex- portion of the burner without turning the
254
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT Pt. 178, App. E
fuel or igniters on. Measure the air velocity above the horizontal (ceiling) test specimen.
using a hot wire anemometer in the center of The thermocouple should be centered over
the draft tube across the face of the opening. the burner cone.
Adjust the damper such that the air velocity (2) Mount the test specimen on the test
is in the range of 1550 to 1800 ft./min. If tabs stand shown in Figure 1 in either the hori-
are being used at the exit of the draft tube, zontal or vertical position. Mount the insu-
they must be removed prior to this measure- lating material in the other position.
ment. Reinstall the draft tube extension (3) Position the burner so that flames will
cone. not impinge on the specimen, turn the burn-
(2) Place the calorimeter on the test stand er on, and allow it to run for 2 minutes. Ro-
as shown in Figure 2 at a distance of 8 inches tate the burner to apply the flame to the
(203 mm) from the exit of the burner cone to specimen and simultaneously start the tim-
simulate the position of the horizontal test ing device.
specimen. (4) Expose the test specimen to the flame
(3) Turn on the burner, allow it to run for for 5 minutes and then turn off the burner.
2 minutes for warm-up, and adjust the damp- The test may be terminated earlier if flame
er to produce a calorimeter reading of 8.0 ±0.5 penetration is observed.
BTU per ft.2 sec. (9.1 ±0.6 Watts/cm2). (5) When testing ceiling liner panels,
(4) Replace the calorimeter with the ther- record the peak temperature measured 4
mocouple rake. inches above the sample.
(5) Turn on the burner and ensure that (6) Record the time at which flame pene-
each of the seven thermocouples reads 1700 tration occurs if applicable.
°F. ±100 °F. (927 °C. ±38 °C.) to ensure steady (h) Test Report. The test report must in-
state conditions have been achieved. If the clude the following:
temperature is out of this range, repeat steps (1) A complete description of the materials
2 through 5 until proper readings are ob- tested including type, manufacturer, thick-
tained. ness, and other appropriate data.
(6) Turn off the burner and remove the (2) Observations of the behavior of the test
thermocouple rake. specimens during flame exposure such as
(7) Repeat (1) to ensure that the burner is delamination, resin ignition, smoke, etc., in-
in the correct range. cluding the time of such occurrence.
(g) Test Procedure. (1) Mount a thermo- (3) The time at which flame penetration
couple of the same type as that used for cali- occurs, if applicable, for each of the three
bration at a distance of 4 inches (102 mm) specimens tested.
255
Pt. 178, App. E 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
256
ER11MR13.013</GPH>
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT Pt. 178, App. E
257
ER11MR13.014</GPH>
[72 FR 55099, Sept. 28, 2007, as amended at 78 179.101 Individual specification require-
FR 15328, Mar. 11, 2013] ments applicable to pressure tank car
tanks.
179.101–1 Individual specification require-
PART 179—SPECIFICATIONS FOR ments.
TANK CARS 179.102 Special commodity requirements for
pressure tank car tanks.
Subpart A—Introduction, Approvals and 179.102–1 Carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid.
Reports 179.102–2 Chlorine.
179.102–3 Materials poisonous by inhalation.
Sec. 179.102–4 Vinyl fluoride, stabilized.
179.1 General. 179.102–17 Hydrogen chloride, refrigerated
179.2 Definitions and abbreviations. liquid.
179.3 Procedure for securing approval. 179.103 Special requirements for class 114A
179.4 Changes in specifications for tank * * * tank car tanks.
cars. 179.103–1 Type.
179.5 Certificate of construction. 179.103–2 Manway cover.
179.6 Repairs and alterations. 179.103–3 Venting, loading and unloading
179.7 Quality assurance program. valves, measuring and sampling devices.
179.8 Limitation on actions by states, local 179.103–4 Safety relief devices and pressure
governments, and Indian tribes. regulators.
179.103–5 Bottom outlets.
Subpart B—General Design Requirements
Subpart D—Specifications for Non-Pressure
179.10 Tank mounting. Tank Car Tanks (Classes DOT-111AW,
179.11 Welding certification. 115AW, and 117AW)
179.12 Interior heater systems.
179.13 Tank car capacity and gross weight 179.200 General specifications applicable to
limitation. non-pressure tank car tanks (Class DOT–
179.14 Coupler vertical restraint system. 111, DOT–117).
179.15 Pressure relief devices. 179.200–1 Tank built under these specifica-
179.16 Tank-head puncture-resistance sys- tions must meet the applicable require-
tems. ments in this part.
179.200–3 Type.
179.18 Thermal protection systems.
179.200–4 Insulation.
179.20 Service equipment; protection sys-
179.200–6 Thickness of plates.
tems.
179.200–7 Materials.
179.22 Marking.
179.200–8 Tank heads.
179.24 Stamping.
179.200–9 Compartment tanks.
179.200–10 Welding.
Subpart C—Specifications for Pressure 179.200–11 Postweld heat treatment.
Tank Car Tanks (Classes DOT-105, 109, 179.200–13 Manway ring or flange, pressure
112, 114, and 120) relief device flange, bottom outlet nozzle
flange, bottom washout nozzle flange and
179.100 General specifications applicable to other attachments and openings.
pressure tank car tanks. 179.200–14 Expansion capacity.
179.100–1 Tanks built under these specifica- 179.200–15 Closures for manways.
tions shall comply with the requirements 179.200–16 Gauging devices, top loading and
of §§ 179.100, 179.101 and when applicable, unloading devices, venting and air inlet
§§ 179.102 and 179.103. devices.
179.100–3 Type. 179.200–17 Bottom outlets.
179.100–4 Insulation. 179.200–19 Reinforcements, when used, and
179.100–6 Thickness of plates. appurtenances not otherwise specified.
179.100–7 Materials. 179.200–21 Closures for openings.
179.100–8 Tank heads. 179.200–22 Test of tanks.
179.100–9 Welding. 179.200–23 Tests of pressure relief valves.
179.100–10 Postweld heat treatment. 179.200–24 Stamping.
179.100–12 Manway nozzle, cover and protec- 179.201 Individual specification require-
tive housing. ments applicable to non-pressure tank
179.100–13 Venting, loading and unloading car tanks.
valves, measuring and sampling devices. 179.201–1 Individual specification require-
179.100–14 Bottom outlets. ments.
179.100–16 Attachments. 179.201–2 [Reserved]
179.100–17 Closures for openings. 179.201–3 Lined tanks.
179.100–18 Tests of tanks. 179.201–4 Material.

179.100–19 Tests of safety relief valves. 179.201–5 Postweld heat treatment and cor-
179.100–20 Stamping. rosion resistance.
258
179.201–6 Manways and manway closures. 179.221–1 Individual specification require-
179.201–8 Sampling device and thermometer ments.
well.
179.201–9 Gauging device. Subpart E—Specifications for Multi-Unit
179.201–10 Water capacity marking. Tank Car Tanks (Classes DOT-106A
179.201–11 Insulation. and 110AW)
179.202 Individual specification require-
179.300 General specifications applicable to
ments applicable to DOT–117 tank car
multi-unit tank car tanks designed to be
tanks.
removed from car structure for filling
179.202–1 Applicability. and emptying (Classes DOT-106A and
179.202–2 [Reserved] 110AW).
179.202–3 Approval to operate at 286,000 179.300–1 Tanks built under these specifica-
gross rail load (GRL). tions shall meet the requirements of
179.202–4 Thickness of plates. §§ 179.300 and 179.301.
179.202–5 Tank head puncture resistance 179.300–3 Type and general requirements.
system. 179.300–4 Insulation.
179.202–6 Thermal protection system. 179.300–6 Thickness of plates.
179.202–7 Jackets. 179.300–7 Materials.
179.202–8 Bottom outlets. 179.300–8 Tank heads.
179.202–9 Top fittings protection. 179.300–9 Welding.
179.300–10 Postweld heat treatment.
179.300–12 Protection of fittings.
ments.
179.300–13 Venting, loading and unloading
179.202–12 Performance standard require- valves.
ments (DOT–117P). 179.300–14 Attachments not otherwise speci-
179.202–13 Retrofit standard requirements fied.
(DOT–117R). 179.300–15 Pressure relief devices.
179.203—179.202–22 [Reserved] 179.300–16 Tests of tanks.
179.220 General specifications applicable to 179.300–17 Tests of pressure relief devices.
nonpressure tank car tanks consisting of 179.300–18 Stamping.
an inner container supported within an 179.300–19 Inspection.
outer shell (class DOT-115). 179.300–20 Reports.
179.220–1 Tanks built under these specifica- 179.301 Individual specification require-
tions must meet the requirements of ments for multi-unit tank car tanks.
§§ 179.220 and 179.221. 179.302 [Reserved]
179.220–3 Type.
179.220–4 Insulation. Subpart F—Specification for Cryogenic Liq-
179.220–6 Thickness of plates. uid Tank Car Tanks and Seamless Steel
179.220–7 Materials. Tanks (Classes DOT-113 and 107A)
179.220–8 Tank heads.
179.400 General specification applicable to
179.220–9 Compartment tanks. cryogenic liquid tank car tanks.
179.220–10 Welding. 179.400–1 General.
179.220–11 Postweld heat treatment. 179.400–3 Type.
179.220–13 Inner container manway nozzle 179.400–4 Insulation system and perform-
and cover. ance standard.
179.220–14 Openings in the tanks. 179.400–5 Materials.
179.220–15 Support system for inner con- 179.400–6 Bursting and buckling pressure.
tainer. 179.400–7 Tank heads.
179.220–16 Expansion capacity. 179.400–8 Thickness of plates.
179.220–17 Gauging devices, top loading and 179.400–9 Stiffening rings.
unloading devices, venting and air inlet 179.400–10 Sump or siphon bowl.
devices. 179.400–11 Welding.
179.220–18 Bottom outlets. 179.400–12 Postweld heat treatment.
179.220–20 Reinforcements, when used, and 179.400–13 Support system for inner tank.
appurtenances not otherwise specified. 179.400–14 Cleaning of inner tank.
179.400–15 Radioscopy.
179.220–22 Closure for openings.
179.400–16 Access to inner tank.
179.220–23 Test of tanks. 179.400–17 Inner tank piping.
179.220–24 Tests of pressure relief valves. 179.400–18 Test of inner tank.
179.220–25 Stamping. 179.400–19 Valves and gages.
179.220–26 Stenciling. 179.400–20 Pressure relief devices.
179.221 Individual specification require- 179.400–21 Test of pressure relief valves.
ments applicable to tank car tanks con- 179.400–22 Protective housings.

sisting of an inner container supported 179.400–23 Operating instructions.
within an outer shell. 179.400–24 Stamping.
259
§ 179.1 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
179.400–25 Stenciling. sponsibility of the tank builder. Mark-
179.401 Individual specification require- ing the tank with the DOT specifica-
ments applicable to inner tanks for cryo- tion shall be understood to certify
genic liquid tank car tanks.
compliance by the builder that the
ments. functions performed by the builder, as
179.500 Specification DOT-107A * * * *, prescribed in this part, have been per-
seamless steel tank car tanks. formed in compliance with this part.
179.500–1 Tanks built under these specifica- (f) The tank builder should inform
tions shall meet the requirements of each person to whom that tank is
§ 179.500. transferred of any specification re-
179.500–3 Type and general requirements.
179.500–4 Thickness of wall. quirements which have not been met at
179.500–5 Material. time of transfer.
179.500–6 Heat treatment.
[Amdt. 179–17, 41 FR 38183, Sept. 9, 1976, as
179.500–7 Physical tests.
amended by Amdt. 179–50, 60 FR 49076, Sept.
179.500–8 Openings in tanks.
21, 1995; 68 FR 48571, Aug. 14, 2003]
179.500–10 Protective housing.
179.500–11 Loading and unloading valves.
179.500–12 Pressure relief devices. § 179.2 Definitions and abbreviations.
179.500–13 Fixtures. (a) The following apply in part 179:
179.500–14 Test of tanks. (1) AAR means Association of Amer-
179.500–15 Handling of tanks failing in tests.
179.500–16 Tests of pressure relief devices. ican Railroads.
179.500–17 Marking. (2) Approved means approval by the
179.500–18 Inspection and reports. AAR Tank Car Committee.
APPENDIX A TO PART 179—PROCEDURES FOR (3) ASTM means American Society
TANK-HEAD PUNCTURE-RESISTANCE TEST for Testing and Materials.
APPENDIX B TO PART 179—PROCEDURES FOR (4) [Reserved]
SIMULATED POOL AND TORCH-FIRE TEST-
(5) Definitions in part 173 of this
ING
chapter also apply.
AUTHORITY: 49 U.S.C. 5101–5128; 49 CFR 1.81 (6) F means degrees Fahrenheit.
and 1.97.
(7) NGT means National Gas Taper
SOURCE: 29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964, unless Threads.
otherwise noted. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, (8) NPT means an American Standard
Apr. 5, 1967. Taper Pipe Thread conforming to the
requirements of NBS Handbook H–28
Subpart A—Introduction, (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter).
Approvals and Reports (9) [Reserved]
(10) Tank car facility means an entity
§ 179.1 General. that manufactures, repairs, inspects,
(a) This part prescribes the specifica- tests, qualifies, or maintains a tank
tions for tanks that are to be mounted car to ensure that the tank car con-
on or form part of a tank car and which forms to this part and subpart F of part
are to be marked with a DOT specifica- 180 of this subchapter, that alters the
tion. certificate of construction of the tank
(b) Except as provided in paragraph car, that ensures the continuing quali-
(c) of this section, tanks to which this fication of a tank car by performing a
part is applicable, must be built to the function prescribed in parts 179 or 180
specifications prescribed in this part. of this subchapter, or that makes any
(c) Tanks built to specifications pre- representation indicating compliance
dating those in this part may continue with one or more of the requirements
in use as provided in § 180.507 of this of parts 179 or 180 of this subchapter.
subchapter. (11) Tanks means tank car tanks.
(d) Any person who performs a func- (b) [Reserved]
tion prescribed in this part, shall per-
form that function in accordance with [29 FR 18995, Dec. 20, 1964. Redesignated at 32
this part. 179–10, 36 FR 21344, Nov. 6, 1971; Amdt. 179–50,
(e) When this part requires a tank to 60 FR 49076, Sept. 21, 1995; Amdt. 179–50, 61
be marked with a DOT specification FR 33255, June 26, 1996; 63 FR 52850, Oct. 1,
(for example, DOT-105A100W), compli- 1998; 66 FR 45186, 45390, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 fR
ance with that requirement is the re- 75759, Dec. 31, 2003]
260
§ 179.3 Procedure for securing ap- partment. The recommendation will be

proval. considered by the Department in deter-
(a) Application for approval of de- mining appropriate action.
signs, materials and construction, con- [29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32
version or alteration of tank car tanks FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967 and amended by Amdt.
under these specifications, complete 179–41, 52 FR 36672, Sept. 30, 1987; 63 FR 52850,
with detailed prints, must be sub- Oct. 1, 1998; 70 FR 73166, Dec. 9, 2005]
mitted in prescribed form to the Exec-
utive Director—Tank Car Safety, AAR, § 179.5 Certificate of construction.
for consideration by its Tank Car Com-
(a) Before a tank car is placed in
mittee and other appropriate commit-
service, the party assembling the com-
tees. Approval or rejections of applica-
tions based on appropriate committee pleted car shall furnish a Certificate of
action will be issued by the executive Construction, Form AAR 4–2 to the
director. owner and the Executive Director—
(b) When, in the opinion of the Com- Tank Car Safety, AAR, certifying that
mittee, such tanks or equipment are in the tank, equipment, and car fully con-
compliance with the requirements of forms to all requirements of the speci-
this subchapter, the application will be fication.
approved. (b) When cars or tanks are covered in
(c) When such tanks or equipment one application and are identical in all
are not in compliance with the require- details are built in series, one certifi-
ments of this subchapter, the Com- cate will suffice for each series when
mittee may recommend service trials submitted to the Executive Director—
to determine the merits of a change in Tank Car Safety, AAR.
specifications. Such service trials may (c) If the owner elects to furnish serv-
be conducted only if the builder or ice equipment, the owner shall furnish
shipper applies for and obtains a spe-
the Executive Director—Tank Car
cial permit.
Safety, AAR, a report in prescribed
[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 form, certifying that the service equip-
FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967 and amended by Amdt. ment complies with all the require-
179–41, 52 FR 36672, Sept. 30, 1987; 63 FR 52850,
ments of the specifications.
Oct. 1, 1998; 68 FR 48571, Aug. 14, 2003; 70 FR
73166, Dec. 9, 2005] (d) When cars or tanks which are cov-
ered on one application and are iden-
§ 179.4 Changes in specifications for tical in all details are built in series,
tank cars. one certificate shall suffice for each se-
(a) Proposed changes in or additions ries when submitted to the Executive
to specifications for tanks must be sub- Director—Tank Car Safety, AAR. One
mitted to the Executive Director— copy of the Certificate of Construction
Tank Car Safety, AAR, for consider- must be furnished to the Executive Di-
ation by its Tank Car Committee. An rector—Tank Car Safety, AAR for each
application for construction of tanks car number of consecutively numbered
to any new specification may be sub- group or groups covered by the original
mitted with proposed specification. application.
Construction should not be started
until the specification has been ap- [Amdt. 179–10, 36 FR 21344, Nov. 6, 1971, as
proved or a special permit has been amended at 63 FR 52850, Oct. 1, 1998; 68 FR
issued. When proposing a new specifica- 48571, Aug. 14, 2003]
tion, the applicant shall furnish infor-
mation to justify a new specification. § 179.6 Repairs and alterations.
This data should include the properties For procedure to be followed in mak-
of the lading and the method of loading ing repairs or alterations, see appendix
and unloading. R of the AAR Specifications for Tank
(b) The Tank Car Committee will re- Cars (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
view the proposed specifications at its chapter).
earliest convenience and report its rec-

ommendations through the Executive [68 FR 75759, Dec. 31, 2003]
Director—Tank Car Safety to the De-
261
§ 179.7 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
§ 179.7 Quality assurance program. the inspection and test technique and
(a) At a minimum, each tank car fa- minimum detectable crack length.
cility shall have a quality assurance (11) Procedures for the periodic cali-
program, approved by AAR, that— bration and measurement of inspection
(1) Ensures the finished product con- and test equipment.
forms to the requirements of the appli- (12) A system for the maintenance of
cable specification and regulations of records, inspections, tests, and the in-
this subchapter; terpretation of inspection and test re-
(2) Has the means to detect any non- sults.
conformity in the manufacturing, re- (c) Each tank car facility shall en-
pair, inspection, testing, and qualifica- sure that only personnel qualified for
tion or maintenance program of the each non-destructive inspection and
tank car; and test perform that particular operation.
(3) Prevents non-conformities from (d) Each tank car facility shall pro-
recurring. vide written procedures to its employ-
(b) At a minimum, the quality assur- ees to ensure that the work on the
ance program must have the following tank car conforms to the specification,
elements AAR approval, and owner’s acceptance
(1) Statement of authority and re- criteria.
sponsibility for those persons in charge (e) Each tank car facility shall train
of the quality assurance program. its employees in accordance with sub-
(2) An organizational chart showing part H of part 172 of this subchapter on
the interrelationship between man- the program and procedures specified
agers, engineers, purchasing, construc- in paragraph (b) of this section to en-
tion, inspection, testing, and quality sure quality.
control personnel. (f) No tank car facility may manufac-
(3) Procedures to ensure that the lat- ture, repair, inspect, test, qualify or
est applicable drawings, design calcula- maintain tank cars subject to require-
tions, specifications, and instructions ments of this subchapter, unless it is
are used in manufacture, inspection, operating in conformance with a qual-
testing, and repair. ity assurance program and written pro-
(4) Procedures to ensure that the fab- cedures required by paragraphs (a) and
rication and construction materials re- (b) of this section.
ceived are properly identified and docu- [Amdt. 179–50, 60 FR 49076, Sept. 21, 1995, as
mented. amended by Amdt. 179–50, 61 FR 33255, June
(5) A description of the manufac- 26, 1996; 68 FR 48571, Aug. 14, 2003; 68 FR 75759,
turing, repair, inspection, testing, and Dec. 31, 2003]
qualification or maintenance program,
including the acceptance criteria, so § 179.8 Limitation on actions by states,
that an inspector can identify the char- local governments, and Indian
tribes.
acteristics of the tank car and the ele-
ments to inspect, examine, and test at Sections 5125 and 20106 of Title 49,
each point. United States Code, limit the author-
(6) Monitoring and control of proc- ity of states, political subdivisions of
esses and product characteristics dur- states, and Indian tribes to impose re-
ing production. quirements on the transportation of
(7) Procedures for correction of hazardous materials in commerce. A
nonconformities. state, local, or Indian tribe require-
(8) Provisions indicating that the re- ment on the transportation of haz-
quirements of the AAR Specifications ardous materials by rail may be pre-
for Tank Cars (IBR, see § 171.7 of this empted under either 49 U.S.C. 5125 or
subchapter), apply. 20106, or both.
(9) Qualification requirements of per- (a) Section 171.1(f) of this subchapter
sonnel performing non-destructive in- describes the circumstances under
spections and tests. which 49 U.S.C. 5125 preempts a re-
(10) Procedures for evaluating the in- quirement of a state, political subdivi-
spection and test technique employed, sion of a state, or Indian tribe.

including the accessibility of the area (b) Under the Federal Railroad Safe-
and the sensitivity and reliability of ty Act (49 U.S.C. 20106), administered
262
by the Federal Railroad Administra- (a) For other than tank cars con-
tion (see 49 CFR parts 200–244), laws, taining poisonous-by-inhalation mate-
regulations and orders related to rail- rial, a tank car may be loaded to a
road safety, including security, shall be gross weight on rail of up to 286,000
nationally uniform to the extent prac- pounds (129,727 kg) upon approval by
ticable. A state may adopt, or continue the Associate Administrator for Safe-
in force, a law, regulation, or order ty, Federal Railroad Administration
covering the same subject matter as a (FRA). Tank cars must conform to the
DOT regulation or order applicable to conditions of the approval and must be
railroad safety and security (including operated only under controlled inter-
the requirements in this subpart) only change conditions agreed to by partici-
when an additional or more stringent pating railroads.
state law, regulation, or order is nec- (b) Tank cars containing poisonous-
essary to eliminate or reduce an essen- by-inhalation material meeting the ap-
tially local safety or security hazard; is plicable authorized tank car specifica-
not incompatible with a law, regulations listed in § 173.244(a)(2) or (3) or
tion, or order of the United States Gov- § 173.314(c) or (d) of this subchapter may
ernment; and does not unreasonably have a gross weight on rail of up to
burden interstate commerce. 286,000 pounds (129,727 kg). Tank cars
[74 FR 1801, Jan. 13, 2009] containing poisonous-by-inhalation
material not meeting the specifica-
Subpart B—General Design tions listed in § 173.244(a)(2) or (3) or
Requirements § 173.314(c) or (d) may be loaded to a
gross weight on rail of up to 286,000
§ 179.10 Tank mounting. pounds (129,727 kg) only upon approval
(a) The manner in which tanks are of the Associate Administrator for
attached to the car structure shall be Safety, Federal Railroad Administra-
approved. The use of rivets to secure tion (FRA). Any increase in weight
anchors to tanks prohibited. above 263,000 pounds may not be used
(b) [Reserved] to increase thequantity of the contents
of the tank car.
§ 179.11 Welding certification.
[74 FR 1802, Jan. 13, 2009, as amended at 75
(a) Welding procedures, welders and FR 27216, May 14, 2010; 77 FR 37985, June 25,
fabricators shall be approved. 2012; 81 FR 35545, June 2, 2016]
(b) [Reserved]
§ 179.14 Coupler vertical restraint sys-
§ 179.12 Interior heater systems. tem.
(a) Interior heater systems shall be of (a) Performance standard. Each tank
approved design and materials. If a car shall be equipped with couplers ca-
tank is divided into compartments, a pable of sustaining, without disengage-
separate system shall be provided for ment or material failure, vertical loads
each compartment. of at least 200,000 pounds (90,718.5 kg)
(b) Each interior heater system shall applied in upward and downward direc-
be hydrostatically tested at not less tions in combination with buff loads of
than 13.79 bar (200 psig) and shall hold 2,000 pounds (907.2 kg), when coupled to
the pressure for 10 minutes without cars which may or may not be equipped
leakage or evidence of distress. with couplers having this vertical re-
[Amdt. 179–52, 61 FR 28678, June 5, 1996, as straint capability.
amended by 66 FR 45390, Aug. 28, 2001] (b) Test verification. Except as pro-
vided in paragraph (d) of this section,
§ 179.13 Tank car capacity and gross compliance with the requirements of
weight limitation. paragraph (a) of this section shall be
Except as provided in this section, achieved by verification testing of the
tank cars, built after November 30, coupler vertical restraint system in ac-
1970, or any existing tank cars that are cordance with paragraph (c) of this sec-
converted, may not exceed 34,500 gal- tion.

lons (130,597 L) capacity or 263,000 (c) Coupler vertical restraint tests. A
pounds (119,295 kg) gross weight on rail. coupler vertical restraint system shall
263
§ 179.15 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
be tested under the following condi- § 179.15 Pressure relief devices.

tions: Except for DOT Class 106, 107, 110, and
(1) The test coupler shall be tested 113 tank cars, tanks must have a pres-
with a mating coupler (or simulated sure relief device, made of material
coupler) having only frictional vertical compatible with the lading, that con-
force resistance at the mating inter- forms to the following requirements:
face; or a mating coupler (or simulated (a) Performance standard. Each tank
coupler) having the capabilities de- must have a pressure relief device,
scribed in paragraph (a) of this section; made of materials compatible with the
(2) The testing apparatus shall simu- lading, having sufficient flow capacity
late the vertical coupler performance to prevent pressure build-up in the
at the mating interface and may not tank to no more than the flow rating
interfere with coupler failure or other- pressure of the pressure relief device in
wise inhibit failure due to force appli- fire conditions as defined in appendix A
cations and reactions; and of the AAR Specifications for Tank
(3) The test shall be conducted as fol- Cars (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
lows: chapter).
(i) A minimum of 200,000 pounds (b) Settings for reclosing pressure relief
devices. (1) Except as provided in para-
(90,718.5 kg) vertical downward load
graph (b)(2) of this section, a reclosing
shall be applied continuously for at
pressure relief valve must have a min-
least 5 minutes to the test coupler head
imum start-to-discharge pressure equal
simultaneously with the application of
to the sum of the static head and gas
a nominal 2,000 pounds (907.2 kg) buff
padding pressure and the lading vapor
load; pressure at the following reference
(ii) The procedures prescribed in temperatures:
paragraph (c)(3)(i) of this section, shall (i) 46 °C (115 °F) for noninsulated
be repeated with a minimum vertical tanks;
upward load of 200,000 pounds (90,718.5 (ii) 43 °C (110 °F) for tanks having a
kg); and thermal protection system incor-
(iii) A minimum of three consecutive porating a metal jacket that provides
successful tests shall be performed for an overall thermal conductance at 15.5
each load combination prescribed in °C (60 °F) of no more than 10.22
paragraphs (c)(3) (i) and (ii) of this sec- kilojoules per hour per square meter
tion. A test is successful when a per degree Celsius (0.5 Btu per hour/per
vertical disengagement or material square foot/per degree F) temperature
failure does not occur during the appli- differential; and
cation of any of the loads prescribed in (iii) 41 °C (105 °F) for insulated tanks.
this paragraph. (2)(i) The start-to-discharge pressure
(d) Authorized couplers. As an alter- of a pressure relief device may not be
native to the test verifications in para- lower than 5.17 Bar (75 psig) or exceed
graph (c) of this section, the following 33 percent of the minimum tank burst
couplers are authorized: pressure.
(1) E double shelf couplers designated (ii) Tanks built prior to October 1,
by the Association of American Rail- 1997 having a minimum tank burst
roads’ Catalog Nos., SE60CHT, SE60CC, pressure of 34.47 Bar (500 psig) or less
SE60CHTE, SE60CE, SE60DC, SE60DE, may be equipped with a reclosing pres-
SE67CC, SE67CE, SE67BHT, SE67BC, sure relief valve having a start-to-dis-
SE67BHTE, SE67BE, SE68BHT, SE68BC, charge pressure of not less than 14.5
SE68BHTE, SE68BE, SE69AHTE, and percent of the minimum tank burst
SE69AE. pressure but no more than 33 percent of
(2) F double shelf couplers designated the minimum tank burst pressure.
by the Association of American Rail- (3) The vapor tight pressure of a re-
roads’ Catalog Nos., SF70CHT, SF70CC, closing pressure relief valve must be at
SF70CHTE, SF70CE, SF73AC, SF73AE, least 80 percent of the start-to-dis-
charge pressure.
SF73AHT, SF73AHTE, SF79CHT,

(4) The flow rating pressure must be
SF79CC, SF79CHTE, and SF79CE.
110 percent of the start-to-discharge
[Amdt. 179–42, 54 FR 38797, Sept. 20, 1989] pressure for tanks having a minimum
264
tank burst pressure greater than 34.47 the discharge setting of the reclosing
Bar (500 psig) and from 110 percent to pressure relief device.
130 percent for tanks having a min- (f) Nonreclosing pressure relief device.
imum tank burst pressure less than or In addition to paragraphs (a), (b)(4), (c),
equal to 34.47 Bar (500 psig). and (d) of this section, a nonreclosing
(5) The tolerance for a reclosing pres- pressure relief device must conform to
sure relief valve is ±3 psi for valves the following requirements:
with a start-to-discharge pressure of (1) A non-reclosing pressure relief de-
6.89 Bar (100 psig) or less and ±3 percent vice must incorporate a rupture disc
for valves with a start-to-discharge designed to burst at a pressure equal to
pressure greater than 6.89 Bar (100 the greater of 100% of the tank test
psig). pressure, or 33% of the tank burst pres-
(c) Flow capacity of pressure relief de- sure.
vices. The total flow capacity of each (2) The approach channel and the dis-
reclosing and nonreclosing pressure re- charge channel may not reduce the re-
lief device must conform to appendix A quired minimum flow capacity of the
of the AAR Specifications for Tank pressure relief device.
Cars.
(3) The non-reclosing pressure relief
(d) Flow capacity tests. The manufac-
device must be designed to prevent
turer of any reclosing or nonreclosing
interchange with other fittings in-
pressure relief device must design and
stalled on the tank car, must have a
test the device in accordance with ap-
structure that encloses and clamps the
pendix A of the AAR Specifications for
rupture disc in position (preventing
Tank Cars.
any distortion or damage to the rup-
(e) Combination pressure relief systems.
ture disc when properly applied), and
A non-reclosing pressure relief device
must have a cover, with suitable means
may be used in series with a reclosing
of preventing misplacement, designed
pressure relief valve. The pressure re-
to direct any discharge of the lading
lief valve must be located outboard of
downward.
the non-reclosing pressure relief de-
(4) The non-reclosing pressure relief
vice.
device must be closed with a rupture
(1) When a breaking pin device is
disc that is compatible with the lading
used in combination with a reclosing
and manufactured in accordance with
pressure relief valve, the breaking pin
Appendix A of the AAR Specifications
must be designed to fail at the start-to-
for Tank Cars. The tolerance for a rup-
discharge pressure specified in para-
ture disc is + 0 to ¥15 percent of the
graph (b) of this section, and the re-
burst pressure marked on the disc.
closing pressure relief valve must be
designed to discharge at not greater (g) Location of relief devices. Each
than 95 percent of the start-to-dis- pressure relief device must commu-
charge pressure. nicate with the vapor space above the
(2) When a rupture disc is used in lading as near as practicable on the
combination with a reclosing pressure longitudinal center line and center of
relief valve, the rupture disc must be the tank.
designed to burst at the pressure speci- (h) Marking of pressure relief devices.
fied in paragraph (b) of this section, Each pressure relief device and rupture
and the reclosing pressure relief valve disc must be permanently marked in
must be designed to discharge at not accordance with the appendix A of the
greater than 95 percent of the pressure. AAR Specifications for Tank Cars.
A device must be installed to detect [Amdt. 179–52, 61 FR 28678, June 5, 1996, as
any accumulation of pressure between amended by Amdt. 179–52, 61 FR 50255, Sept.
the rupture disc and the reclosing pres- 25, 1996; 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997; 64 FR 51919,
sure relief valve. The detection device Sept. 27, 1999; 66 FR 45390, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR
must be a needle valve, trycock, or 75759, Dec. 31, 2003]
tell-tale indicator. The detection de-
vice must be closed during transpor- § 179.16 Tank-head puncture-resist-
tation. ance systems.

(3) The vapor tight pressure and the (a) Performance standard. When the
start-to-discharge tolerance is based on regulations in this subchapter require
265
§ 179.18 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
a tank-head puncture-resistance sys- lease of any lading within the tank car,
tem, the system shall be capable of sus- except release through the pressure re-
taining, without any loss of lading, lease device, when subjected to:
coupler-to-tank-head impacts at rel- (1) A pool fire for 100 minutes; and
ative car speeds of 29 km/hour (18 mph) (2) A torch fire for 30 minutes.
when: (b) Thermal analysis. (1) Compliance
(1) The weight of the impact car is at with the requirements of paragraph (a)
least 119,295 kg (263,000 pounds);
of this section shall be verified by ana-
(2) The impacted tank car is coupled
lyzing the fire effects on the entire sur-
to one or more backup cars that have a
total weight of at least 217,724 kg face of the tank car. The analysis must
(480,000 pounds) and the hand brake is consider the fire effects on and heat
applied on the last ‘‘backup’’ car; and flux through tank discontinuities, pro-
(3) The impacted tank car is pressur- tective housings, underframes, metal
ized to at least 6.9 Bar (100 psig). jackets, insulation, and thermal pro-
(b) Verification by testing. Compliance tection. A complete record of each
with the requirements of paragraph (a) analysis shall be made, retained, and
of this section shall be verified by full- upon request, made available for in-
scale testing according to appendix A spection and copying by an authorized
of this part. representative of the Department. The
(c) Alternative compliance by other procedures outlined in ‘‘Temperatures,
than testing. As an alternative to re- Pressures, and Liquid Levels of Tank
quirements prescribed in paragraph (b) Cars Engulfed in Fires,’’ DOT/FRA/
of this section, compliance with the re- OR&D–84/08.11, (1984), Federal Railroad
quirements of paragraph (a) of this sec- Administration, Washington, DC
tion may be met by installing full-head (available from the National Technical
protection (shields) or full tank-head Information Service, Springfield, VA)
jackets on each end of the tank car shall be deemed acceptable for ana-
conforming to the following: lyzing the fire effects on the entire sur-
(1) The full-head protection (shields)
face of the tank car.
or full tank-head jackets must be at
least 1.27 cm (0.5 inch) thick, shaped to (2) When the analysis shows the ther-
the contour of the tank head and made mal resistance of the tank car does not
from steel having a tensile strength conform to paragraph (a) of this sec-
greater than 379.21 N/mm2 (55,000 psi). tion, the thermal resistance of the
(2) The design and test requirements tank car must be increased by using a
of the full-head protection (shields) or system listed by the Department under
full tank-head jackets must meet the paragraph (c) of this section or by test-
impact test requirements in Section 5.3 ing a new or untried system and
of the AAR Specifications for Tank verifying it according to appendix B of
Cars (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- this part.
chapter). (c) Systems that no longer require test
(3) The workmanship must meet the verification. The Department maintains
requirements in Section C, Part II, a list of thermal protection systems
Chapter 5, of the AAR Specifications that comply with the requirements of
for Design, Fabrication, and Construc- appendix B of this part and that no
tion of Freight Cars (IBR, see § 171.7 of longer require test verification. Infor-
this subchapter). mation necessary to equip tank cars
[Amdt. 179–50, 60 FR 49077, Sept. 21, 1995, as with one of these systems is available
amended by Amdt. 179–50, 61 FR 33255, June in the PHMSA Records Center, Pipe-
26, 1996; 66 FR 45390, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 75759, line and Hazardous Materials Safety
Dec. 31, 2003]
Administration, East Building, 1200
§ 179.18 Thermal protection systems. New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington,
DC 20590–0001.
(a) Performance standard. When the
regulations in this subchapter require [Amdt. 179–50, 60 FR 49077, Sept. 21, 1995, as
thermal protection on a tank car, the amended by Amdt. 179–50, 61 FR 33256, June
tank car must have sufficient thermal 26, 1996; 66 FR 45390, Aug. 28, 2001; 70 FR 56099,
resistance so that there will be no re- Sept. 23, 2005; 72 FR 55696, Oct. 1, 2007]
266
§ 179.20 Service equipment; protection car. One identification plate must be

systems. installed on the right side (AR) of the
If an applicable tank car specifica- tank car, and the other must be in-
tion authorizes location of filling or stalled on the back end left side (BL)
discharge connections in the bottom body bolster webs so that each plate is
shell, the connections must be de- readily accessible for inspection. The
signed, constructed, and protected ac- plates must be at least 3⁄32 inch thick
cording to paragraphs E9.00 and E10.00 and manufactured from corrosion re-
of the AAR Specifications for Tank sistant metal. When the tank jacket
Cars (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- (flashing) covers the body bolster web
chapter). and identification plates, additional
identical plates must be installed on
[68 FR 75759, Dec. 31, 2003] the AR and BL corners of the tank in
a visible location. Tank cars built be-
§ 179.22 Marking.
fore July 25, 2012, may have the plate
In addition to any other marking re- instead of or in addition to the stamp-
quirement in this subchapter, the fol- ing.
lowing marking requirements apply: (2) Each plate must be stamped, em-
(a) Each tank car must be marked ac- bossed, or otherwise marked by an
cording to the requirements in appen- equally durable method in letters 3/16
dix C of the AAR Specifications for inch high with the following informa-
Tank Cars (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- tion (parenthetical abbreviations may
chapter). be used, and the AAR form reference is
(b) Each tank car that requires a to the applicable provisions of the AAR
tank-head puncture-resistance system Specifications for Tank Cars (IBR, see
must have the letter ‘‘S’’ substituted § 171.7 of this subchapter):
for the letter ‘‘A’’ in the specification (i) Tank Manufacturer (Tank MFG):
marking. Full name of the car builder as shown
(c) Each tank car that requires a on the certificate of construction (AAR
tank-head puncture-resistance system, form 4–2).
a thermal protection system, and a (ii) Tank Manufacturer’s Serial Number
metal jacket must have the letter ‘‘J’’ (SERIAL NO): For the specific car.
substituted for the letter ‘‘A’’ or ‘‘S’’ in (iii) AAR Number (AAR NO): The AAR
the specification marking. number from line 3 of AAR Form 4–2.
(d) Each tank car that requires a (iv) Tank Specification (SPECIFICA-
tank-head puncture-resistance system, TION): The specification to which the
a thermal protection system, and no tank was built from line 7 of AAR form
metal jacket must have the letter ‘‘T’’ 4–2.
substituted for the letter ‘‘A’’ or ‘‘S’’ in (v) Tank Shell Material/Head Material
the specification marking. (SHELL MATL/HEAD MATL): ASTM or
(e) Each tank car manufactured after AAR specification of the material used
March 16, 2009 to meet the require- in the construction of the tank shell
ments of § 173.244(a)(2) or (3) or and heads from lines 15 and 16 of AAR
§ 173.314(c) or (d) shall be marked with Form 4–2. For Class DOT–113W, DOT–
the letter ‘‘I’’ following the test pres- 115W, AAR–204W, and AAR–206W, the
sure instead of the letter ‘‘W’’. (Exam- materials used in the construction of
ple: DOT 105J600I). the outer tank shell and heads must be
[Amdt. 179–50, 60 FR 49077, Sept. 21, 1995, as listed. Only list the alloy (e.g., 5154) for
amended by Amdt. 179–50, 61 FR 33256, June aluminum tanks and the type (e.g.,
26, 1996; 68 FR 75759, Dec. 31, 2003; 74 FR 1802, 304L or 316L) for stainless steel tanks.
Jan. 13, 2009] (vi) Insulation Material (INSULATION
MATL): Generic names of the first and
§ 179.24 Stamping. second layer of any thermal protection/
(a)(1) After July 25, 2012, to certify insulation material applied.
compliance with federal requirements, (vii) Insulation Thickness (INSULA-
the tank manufacturer must install TION THICKNESS): In inches.
two identical permanent identification (viii) Underframe/Stub Sill Type (UF/SS

plates, one located on both inboard sur- DESIGN): The design from Line 32 of
faces of the body bolsters of the tank AAR Form 4–2.
267
§ 179.100 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(ix) Date of Manufacture (DATE OF cific approval is granted for a facility’s

MFR): The month and year of tank equipment and controls.
manufacture. If the underframe has a
different built date than the tank, FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt.
show both dates. 179–10, 36 FR 21344, Nov. 6, 1971; 65 FR 58632,
(3) When a modification to the tank Sept. 29, 2000; 74 FR 1802, Jan. 13, 2009]
changes any of the information shown
in paragraph (a)(2) of this section, the § 179.100–4 Insulation.
car owner or the tank car facility mak- (a) If insulation is applied, the tank
ing the modification must install an shell and manway nozzle must be insu-
additional variable identification plate lated with an approved material. The
on the tank in accordance with para- entire insulation must be covered with
graph (a)(1) of this section showing the a metal jacket of a thickness not less
following information: than 11 gauge (0.1196 inch) nominal
(i) AAR Number (AAR NO): The AAR (Manufacturers’ Standard Gauge) and
number from line 3 of AAR Form 4–2 flashed around all openings so as to be
for the alteration or conversion. weather-tight. The exterior surface of a
(ii) All items of paragraph (a)(2) of carbon steel tank, and the inside sur-
this section that were modified, fol- face of a carbon steel jacket must be
lowed by the month and year of modi- given a protective coating.
fication. (b) If insulation is a specification re-
(b) [Reserved]. quirement, it shall be of sufficient
thickness so that the thermal conduct-
FR 35545, June 2, 2016] ance at 60 °F is not more than 0.075 Btu
per hour, per square foot, per degree F
temperature differential. If exterior
Subpart C—Specifications for heaters are attached to tank, the
Pressure Tank Car Tanks thickness of the insulation over each
(Classes DOT-105, 109, 112, heater element may be reduced to one-
114 and 120) half that required for the shell.
§ 179.100 General specifications appli- [29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32
cable to pressure tank car tanks. FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt.
179–10, 36 FR 21344, Nov. 6, 1971; Amdt. 179–50,
60 FR 49077, Sept. 21, 1995]
§ 179.100–1 Tanks built under these
specifications shall comply with the
requirements of §§ 179.100, 179.101 § 179.100–6 Thickness of plates.
and when applicable, §§ 179.102 and (a) The wall thickness after forming
179.103. of the tank shell and heads must not be
less than that specified in § 179.101, nor
§ 179.100–3 Type. that calculated by the following for-
(a) Tanks built under this specifica- mula:
tion shall be fusion-welded with heads
t = Pd / 2SE
designed convex outward. Except as
provided in § 179.103 they shall be cir- Where:
cular in cross section, shall be provided d = Inside diameter in inches;
with a manway nozzle on top of the E = 1.0 welded joint efficiency; except for
tank of sufficient size to permit access heads with seams = 0.9;
to the interior, a manway cover to pro- P = Minimum required bursting pressure in
vide for the mounting of all valves, p.s.i.;
measuring and sampling devices, and a S = Minimum tensile strength of plate mate-
protective housing. Other openings in rial in p.s.i., as prescribed in § 179.100–7;
the tank are prohibited, except as pro- t = Minimum thickness of plate in inches
after forming.
vided in part 173 of this chapter,
§§ 179.100–14, 179.101–1, 179.102 or § 179.103. (b) If plates are clad with material
(b) Head shields and shells of tanks having tensile strength properties at
built under this specification must be least equal to the base plate, the clad-
normalized. Tank car heads must be ding may be considered a part of the
normalized after forming unless spe- base plate when determining thickness.
268
If cladding material does not have ten- Minimum elon-

sile strength at least equal to the base Minimum ten- gation in 2
sile strength inches (per-
plate, the base plate alone shall meet Specifications (p.s.i.) 0 tem- cent) 0 tem-
the thickness requirement. per, welded per, welded
condition 3 4 condition (lon-
(c) When aluminum plate is used, the gitudinal)
minimum width of bottom sheet of
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5454 1 31,000 18
tank shall be 60 inches, measured on ASTM B 209, Alloy 5652 1 25,000 18
the arc, but in all cases the width shall
1 For fabrication, the parent plate material may be 0, H112,
be sufficient to bring the entire width or H32 temper, but design calculations must be based on
of the longitudinal welded joint, in- minimum tensile strength shown.
2 0 temper only.
cluding welds, above the bolster. 3 Weld filler metal 5556 must not be used.
4 Maximum stress to be used in calculations.
FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt. (c) High alloy steel plate. (1) High alloy
179–10, 36 FR 21344, Nov. 6, 1971]
steel plate must conform to the fol-
§ 179.100–7 Materials. lowing specifications:
(a) Steel plate: Steel plate materials Minimum tensile Minimum elon-
used to fabricate tank shell and gation in 2
strength (p.s.i.)
Specifications inches (percent)
manway nozzle must comply with one welded condi- weld metal (lon-
tion1
of the following specifications with the gitudinal)
indicated minimum tensile strength ASTM A 240/A 240M
and elongation in the welded condition. (incorporated by ref-
The maximum allowable carbon con- erence; see § 171.7 of
this subchapter), Type
tent must be 0.31 percent when the in- 304L ........................... 70,000 30
dividual specification allows carbon ASTM A 240/A 240M
greater than this amount. The plates (incorporated by ref-
may be clad with other approved mate- erence; see § 171.7 of
this subchapter), Type
rials. 316L ........................... 70,000 30
Minimum elon- 1 Maximum stresses to be used in calculations.
Minimum tensile gation in 2
strength (p.s.i.) inches (percent) (2)(i) High alloy steels used to fab-
Specifications welded condi- welded condi-
tion1 tion (longitu- ricate tank must be tested in accord-
dinal) ance with the following procedures in
AAR TC 128, Gr. B ....... 81,000 19 ASTM A 262, ‘‘Standard Practices for
ASTM A 302 2, Gr. B ..... 80,000 20 Detecting Susceptibility to Inter-
ASTM A 516 2 ................ 70,000 20 granular Attack in Austenitic Stain-
ASTM A 537 2, Class 1 70,000 23
less Steel’’ (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
1 Maximum stresses to be used in calculations.
2 These specifications are incorporated by reference (IBR, chapter), and must exhibit corrosion
see § 171.7 of this subchapter). rates not exceeding the following: * * *
(b) Aluminum alloy plate: Aluminum Corrosion
Test procedures Material
alloy plate material used to fabricate rate i.p.m.
tank shell and manway nozzle must be Practice B ............... Types 304L and 316L .. 0.0040
suitable for fusion welding and must Practice C ............... Type 304L ..................... 0.0020
comply with one of the following speci-
fications (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- (ii) Type 304L and 316L test speci-
chapter) with its indicated minimum mens must be given a sensitizing treat-
tensile strength and elongation in the ment prior to testing.
welded condition. * * * (d) All attachments welded to tank
Minimum elon- shell must be of approved material
Minimum ten- gation in 2 which is suitable for welding to the
sile strength inches (per-
Specifications (p.s.i.) 0 tem- cent) 0 tem- tank.
per, welded per, welded
condition 3 4 condition (lon- [Amdt. 179–10, 36 FR 21344, Nov. 6, 1971, as
gitudinal) amended by Amdt. 179–32, 48 FR 27707, June
16, 1983; Amdt. 179–47, 58 FR 50237, Sept. 24,
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5052 1 25,000 18
1993; Amdt. 179–52, 61 FR 28679, June 5, 1996;
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5083 2 38,000 16

ASTM B 209, Alloy 5086 1 35,000 14 Amdt. 179–52, 61 FR 50255, Sept. 25, 1996; 66
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5154 1 30,000 18 FR 45186, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51660, Aug. 8,
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5254 1 30,000 18 2002; 68 FR 75759, Dec. 31, 2003]
269
§ 179.100–8 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
§ 179.100–8 Tank heads. sion resistance test as specified in

§ 179.100–7(c)(2).
(a) The tank head shape shall be an
ellipsoid of revolution in which the [Amdt. 179–10, 36 FR 21345, Nov. 6, 1971, as
major axis shall equal the diameter of amended by Amdt. 179–47, 58 FR 50238, Sept.
24, 1993; Amdt. 179–52, 61 FR 28679, June 5,
the shell adjacent to the head and the 1996; 67 FR 51660, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75758,
minor axis shall be one-half the major 75759, Dec. 31, 2003]
axis.
(b) Each tank head made from steel § 179.100–12 Manway nozzle, cover and
which is required to be ‘‘fine grain’’ by protective housing.
the material specification, which is hot (a) Manway nozzles must be of ap-
formed at a temperature exceeding 1700 proved design of forged or rolled steel
°F., must be normalized after forming for steel tanks or of fabricated alu-
by heating to a temperature between minum alloy for aluminum tanks, with
1550° and 1700 °F., by holding at that an access opening of at least 18 inches
temperature for at least 1 hour per inside diameter, or at least 14 inches by
inch of thickness (30-minute min- 18 inches around or oval. Each nozzle
imum), and then by cooling in air. If must be welded to the tank and the
the material specification requires opening reinforced in an approved man-
quenching and tempering, the treat- ner in compliance with the require-
ments of AAR Specifications for Tank
ment specified in that specification
Cars, appendix E, Figure E10 (IBR, see
must be used instead of the one speci-
§ 171.7 of this subchapter).
fied above. (b) Manway cover shall be machined
[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated, 32 to approved dimensions and be of
FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967 and amended by Amdt. forged or rolled carbon or alloy steel,
179–12, 39 FR 15038, Apr. 30, 1974] rolled aluminum alloy or nickel when
required by the lading. Minimum
§ 179.100–9 Welding. thickness is listed in § 179.101. Manway
(a) All joints shall be fusion-welded cover shall be attached to manway noz-
in compliance with the requirements of zle by through or stud bolts not enter-
AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, ap- ing tank, except as provided in
pendix W (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- § 179.103–2(a).
chapter). Welding procedures, welders (c) Except as provided in § 179.103,
protective housing of cast, forged or
and fabricators shall be approved.
fabricated approved materials must be
(b) [Reserved] bolted to manway cover with not less
[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964, as amended at 65 than twenty 3⁄4-inch studs. The shear-
FR 58632, Sept. 29, 2000; 68 FR 75759, Dec. 31, ing value of the bolts attaching protec-
2003] tive housing to manway cover must
not exceed 70 percent of the shearing
§ 179.100–10 Postweld heat treatment. value of bolts attaching manway cover
(a) After welding is complete, steel to manway nozzle. Housing must have
tanks and all attachments welded steel sidewalls not less than three-
thereto must be postweld heat treated fourths inch in thickness and must be
as a unit in compliance with the re- equipped with a metal cover not less
quirements of AAR Specifications for than one-fourth inch in thickness that
can be securely closed. Housing cover
Tank Cars, appendix W (IBR, see § 171.7
must have suitable stop to prevent
cover striking loading and unloading
(b) For aluminum tanks, postweld connections and be hinged on one side
heat treatment is prohibited. only with approved riveted pin or rod
(c) Tank and welded attachments, with nuts and cotters. Openings in wall
fabricated from ASTM A 240/A 240M of housing must be equipped with screw
(IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter), plugs or other closures.
Type 304L or Type 316L materials do
not require postweld heat treatment, FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt.
but these materials do require a corro- 179–10, 36 FR 21345, Nov. 6, 1971; 68 FR 75760,
Dec. 31, 2003]
270
§ 179.100–13 Venting, loading and unin conjunction with the metal of the
loading valves, measuring and sam- tank shell. When the sump or siphon
pling devices. bowl is pressed in the bottom of the
(a) Venting, loading and unloading tank shell, the wall thickness of the
valves must be of approved design, pressed section must not be less than
made of metal not subject to rapid de- that specified for the shell. The section
terioration by the lading, and must of a circular cross section tank to
withstand the tank test pressure with- which a sump or siphon bowl is at-
out leakage. The valves shall be bolted tached need not comply with the out-
to seatings on the manway cover, ex- of-roundness requirement specified in
cept as provided in § 179.103. Valve out- AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, ap-
lets shall be closed with approved pendix W, W14.06 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this
screw plugs or other closures fastened subchapter). Any portion of a sump or
to prevent misplacement. siphon bowl not forming a part of cyl-
(b) The interior pipes of the loading inder of revolution must have walls of
and unloading valves shall be anchored such thickness and be so reinforced
and, except as prescribed in §§ 173.314(j),
that the stresses in the walls caused by
179.102 or 179.103, may be equipped with
a given internal pressure are no greater
excess flow valves of approved design.
than the circumferential stress that
(c) Gauging device, sampling valve
and thermometer well are not speci- would exist under the same internal
fication requirements. When used, they pressure in the wall of a tank of cir-
shall be of approved design, made of cular cross section designed in accord-
metal not subject to rapid deteriora- ance with § 179.100–6(a), but in no case
tion by the lading, and shall withstand shall the wall thickness be less than
the tank test pressure without leakage. that specified in § 179.101–1.
Interior pipes of the gauging device and [29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32
sampling valve, except as prescribed in FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt.
§§ 173.314(j), 179.102 or 179.103, may be 179–10, 36 FR 21345, Nov. 6, 1971; Amdt. 179–40,
equipped with excess flow valves of ap- 52 FR 13046, Apr. 20, 1987; Amdt. 179–42, 54 FR
proved design. Interior pipe of the ther- 38798, Sept. 20, 1989; 65 FR 58632, Sept. 29,
mometer well shall be anchored in an 2000; 68 FR 48571, Aug. 14, 2003; 68 FR 75760,
approved manner to prevent breakage Dec. 31, 2003]
due to vibration. The thermometer
well shall be closed by an approved § 179.100–14 Bottom outlets.
valve attached close to the manway (a) Bottom outlets for discharge of
cover, or other approved location, and lading is prohibited, except as provided
closed by a screw plug. Other approved in § 179.103–3. If indicated in § 179.101,
arrangements that permit testing ther- tank may be equipped with a bottom
mometer well for leaks without com- washout of approved construction. If
plete removal of the closure may be applied, bottom washout shall be in ac-
used. cordance with the following require-
(d) An excess flow valve as referred to ments;
in this specification, is a device which
(1) The extreme projection of the bot-
closes automatically against the out-
tom washout equipment may not be
ward flow of the contents of the tank
more than that allowed by appendix E
in case the external closure valve is
of the AAR Specifications for Tank
broken off or removed during transit.
Excess flow valves may be designed Cars (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
with a by-pass to allow the equali- chapter).
zation of pressures. (2) Bottom washout shall be of cast,
(e) Bottom of tank shell may be forged or fabricated metal and shall be
equipped with a sump or siphon bowl, fusion-welded to the tank. It shall be of
or both, welded or pressed into the good weldable quality in conjunction
shell. Such sumps or siphon bowls, if with metal of tank.
applied, are not limited in size and (3) If the bottom washout nozzle ex-
must be made of cast, forged or fab- tends 6 inches or more from shell of
ricated metal. Each sump or siphon tank, a V-shaped breakage groove shall
bowl must be of good welding quality be cut (not cast) in the upper part of
271
§ 179.100–16 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
the outlet nozzle at a point imme- § 179.100–17 Closures for openings.

diately below the lowest part of the in- (a) Closures shall be of approved de-
side closure seat or plug. In no case sign and made of metal not subject to
may the nozzle wall thickness at the rapid deterioration by the lading.
root of the ‘‘V’’ be more than 1⁄4-inch.
Plugs, if used, shall be solid, with NPT
Where the nozzle is not a single piece,
threads, and shall be of a length which
provision shall be made for the equiva-
will screw at least six threads inside
lent of the breakage groove. The nozzle
the face of fitting or tank.
must be of a thickness to insure that
(b) [Reserved]
accidental breakage will occur at or
below the ‘‘V’’ groove or its equivalent. § 179.100–18 Tests of tanks.
On cars without continuous center
sills, the breakage groove or its equiva- (a) Each tank shall be tested by com-
lent may not be more than 15 inches pletely filling tank and manway nozzle
below the tank shell. On cars with con- with water or other liquid having simi-
tinuous center sills, the breakage lar viscosity, at a temperature which
groove or its equivalent must be above shall not exceed 100 °F during the test;
the bottom of the center sill construc- and applying the pressure prescribed in
tion. § 179.101. The tank shall hold the pre-
(4) The closure plug and seat shall be scribed pressure for at least 10 minutes
readily accessible or removable for re- without leakage or evidence of distress.
pairs. (b) Insulated tanks shall be tested be-
(5) The closure of the washout nozzle fore insulation is applied.
must be equipped with a 3⁄4-inch solid (c) Caulking of welded joints to stop
screw plug. Plug must be attached by leaks developed during the foregoing
at least a 1⁄4-inch chain. test is prohibited. Repairs in welded
(6) Joints between closures and their joints shall be made as prescribed in
seats may be gasketed with suitable AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, ap-
material. pendix W (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
(b) [Reserved] chapter).
(d) Testing of exterior heaters is not
[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 a specification requirement.
179–10, 36 FR 21345, Nov. 6, 1971; Amdt. 179–40, [29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32
52 FR 13046, Apr. 20, 1987; 66 FR 45186, Aug. 28, FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967; 66 FR 45186, Aug. 28,
2001; 68 FR 75760, Dec. 31, 2003] 2001; 68 FR 75760, Dec. 31, 2003]
§ 179.100–16 Attachments. § 179.100–19 Tests of safety relief

valves.
(a) Reinforcing pads must be used be-
tween external brackets and shells if (a) Each valve shall be tested by air
the attachment welds exceed 6 linear or gas for compliance with § 179.15 be-
inches of 1⁄4-inch fillet or equivalent fore being put into service.
weld per bracket or bracket leg. When (b) [Reserved]
reinforcing pads are used, they must [29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32
not be less than one-fourth inch in FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, as amended at 62 FR
thickness, have each corner rounded to 51561, Oct. 1, 1997]
a 1-inch minimum radius, and be at-
tached to the tank by continuous fillet § 179.100–20 Stamping.
welds except for venting provisions. (a) To certify that the tank complies
The ultimate shear strength of the with all specification requirements,
bracket-to-reinforcing pad weld must each tank shall be plainly and perma-
not exceed 85 percent of the ultimate nently stamped in letters and figures
shear strength of the reinforcing pad- at least 3⁄8 inch high into the metal
to-tank weld. near the center of both outside heads
(b) Attachments not otherwise speci- as follows:
fied shall be applied by approved
Example of required
means. stamping
[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 Specification ................................. DOT-105A100W

FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt. Material ......................................... ASTM A 516
179–10, 36 FR 21346, Nov. 6, 1971] Cladding material (if any) ............. ASTM A240–304
272
Example of required tification plates instead of or in addi-

stamping tion to the head stamping.
Tank builder’s initials .................... Clad
Date of original test ...................... ABC
Car assembler (if other than tank- 00–0000 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt.
er builder). DEF 179–10, 36 FR 21346, Nov. 6, 1971; Amdt. 179–52,
61 FR 28679, June 5, 1996; 65 FR 50463, Aug. 18,
(b) After July 25, 2012, newly con- 2000; 77 FR 37985, June 25, 2012]
structed DOT tank cars must have
their DOT specification and other re- § 179.101 Individual specification re-
quired information stamped plainly quirements applicable to pressure
tank car tanks.
and permanently on stainless steel
identification plates in conformance EDITORIAL NOTE: At 66 FR 45186, Aug. 28,
with the applicable requirements pre- 2001, an amendment published amending a
scribed in § 179.24(a). Tank cars built table in § 179.101. No text or table appears in
before July 25, 2012, may have the iden- § 179.101.
§ 179.101–1 Individual specification requirements.

In addition to § 179.100, the individual specification requirements are as follows:
Minimum
Bursting Test Manway
DOT specifica- plate Bottom out- Bottom Reference
Insulation pressure pressure cover
tion thickness let washout (179.***)
(psig) (psig) thickness
(inches)
105A100ALW Yes ............. 500 5/8 100 22 1/2 No ............... No.

105A200ALW Yes ............. 500 5/8 200 22 1/2 No ............... No.
105A300ALW Yes ............. 750 5/8 300 22 5/8 No ............... No.
105A100W ..... Yes ............. 500 3 9/16 100 2 1/4 No ............... No.
105A200W ..... Yes ............. 500 3 9/16 200 2 1/4 No ............... No.
105A300W ..... Yes ............. 750 1 11/16 300 72 1/4 No ............... No.
105A400W ..... Yes ............. 1,000 1 11/16 400 72 1/4 No ............... No.
105A500W ..... Yes ............. 1,250 1 11/16 500 2 1/4 No ............... No ............ 102–1, 102–2
105A600W ..... Yes ............. 1,500 1 11/16 600 2 1/4 No ............... No ............ 102–4, 102–17
109A100ALW Optional ...... 500 5/8 100 22 1/2 No ............... Optional.
109A300W ..... Optional ...... 500 1 11/16 300 2 1/4 No ............... Optional.
112A200W ..... Optional 4 .... 500 3 5 9/16 200 2 1/4 No ............... No.
112A340W ..... Optional 4 .... 850 1 11/16 340 2 1/4 No ............... No.
112A400W ..... Optional 4 .... 1,000 1 11/16 400 2 1/4 No ............... No.
112A500W ..... Optional 4 .... 1,250 1 11/16 500 2 1/4 No ............... No.
114A340W ..... Optional 4 .... 850 1 11/16 340 6 Optional ...... Optional ... 103
114A400W ..... Optional 4 .... 1,000 1 11/16 400 6 Optional ...... Optional ... 103
120A200ALW Yes ............. 500 5/8 200 22 1/2 Optional ...... Optional ... 103
120A100W ..... Yes ............. 500 3 9/16 100 2 1/4 Optional ...... Optional ... 103
120A400W ..... Yes ............. 1,000 1 11/16 400 2 1/4 Optional ...... Optional ... 103
120A500W ..... Yes ............. 1,250 1 11/16 500 2 1/4 Optional ...... Optional ... 103
1 When steel of 65,000 to 81,000 p.s.i. minimum tensile strength is used, the thickness of plates shall be not less than 5⁄8 inch,
and when steel of 81,000 p.s.i. minimum tensile strength is used, the minimum thickness of plate shall be not less than 9⁄16 inch.
2 When approved material other than aluminum alloys are used, the thickness shall be not less than 21⁄4 inches.
3 When steel of 65,000 p.s.i. minimum tensile strength is used, minimum thickness of plates shall be not less than 1⁄2 inch.
4 Tank cars not equipped with a thermal protection or an insulation system used for the transportation of a Class 2 (com-
pressed gas) material must have at least the upper two-thirds of the exterior of the tank, including manway nozzle and all appur-
tenances in contact with this area, finished with a reflective coat of white paint.
5 For inside diameter of 87 inches or less, the thickness of plates shall be not less than 1⁄2 inch.
6 See AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix E, E4.01 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter), and § 179.103–2.
7 When the use of nickel is required by the lading, the thickness shall not be less than two inches.
[Amdt. 179–52, 61 FR 28679, June 5, 1996, as amended at 66 FR 45390, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 75760,
Dec. 31, 2003]
273
§ 179.102 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
§ 179.102 Special commodity require- this subchapter), Grade 70, or AAR

ments for pressure tank car tanks. Specification TC 128, Grade A or B.
(a) In addition to §§ 179.100 and 179.101 (2)–(3) [Reserved]
the following requirements are applica- (b) [Reserved]
ble: [Amdt. 179–7, 36 FR 14697, Aug. 10, 1971; Amdt.
(b) [Reserved] 179–10, 36 FR 21346, Nov. 6, 1971, as amended
by Amdt. 179–25, 44 FR 20433, Apr. 5, 1979;
§ 179.102–1 Carbon dioxide, refrig- Amdt. 179–40, 52 FR 13046, Apr. 20, 1987; Amdt.
erated liquid. 179–45, 55 FR 52728, Dec. 21, 1990; Amdt. 179–52,
61 FR 28680, June 5, 1996; 68 FR 75760, Dec. 31,
(a) Tank cars used to transport car- 2003]
bon dioxide, refrigerated liquid must
comply with the following special re- § 179.102–3 Materials poisonous by in-
quirements: halation.
(1) All plates for tank, manway noz- (a) Each tank car built after March
zle and anchorage of tanks must be 16, 2009 for the transportation of a ma-
made of carbon steel conforming to terial poisonous by inhalation must, in
ASTM A 516/A 516M (IBR, see § 171.7 of addition to the requirements pre-
this subchapter), Grades 55, 60, 65, or 70, scribed in § 179.100–12(c), enclose the
or AAR Specification TC 128–78, Grade service equipment within a protective
B. The ASTM A 516/A 516M plate must housing and cover.
also meet the Charpy V-Notch test re- (1) Tank cars must be equipped with
quirements of ASTM A 20/A 20M (see a top fitting protection system and
table 16) (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- nozzle capable of sustaining, without
chapter) in the longitudinal direction failure, a rollover accident at a speed
of rolling. The TC 128 plate must also of 9 miles per hour, in which the rolling
meet the Charpy V-Notch energy ab- protective housing strikes a stationary
sorption requirements of 15 ft.-lb. min- surface assumed to be flat, level and
imum average for 3 specimens, and 10 rigid and the speed is determined as a
ft.-lb. minimum for one specimen, at linear velocity, measured at the geo-
minus 50 °F in the longitudinal direc- metric center of the loaded tank car as
tion of rolling in accord with ASTM A a transverse vector. Failure is deemed
370 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). to occur when the deformed protective
Production-welded test plates prepared housing contacts any of the service
as required by W4.00 of AAR Specifica- equipment or when the tank retention
tions for Tank Cars, appendix W (IBR, capability is compromised.
see § 171.7 of this subchapter), must in- (2) As an alternative to the tank car
clude impact test specimens of weld top fitting protection system require-
metal and heat-affected zone. As an al- ments in paragraph (a)(1) of this sec-
ternate, anchor legs may be fabricated tion, the tank car may be equipped
of stainless steel, ASTM A 240/A 240M with a system that prevents the release
Types 304, 304L, 316 or 316L, for which of product from any top fitting in the
impact tests are not required. case of an accident where any top fit-
(2)–(6) [Reserved] ting would be sheared off. The tank
(b) [Reserved] nozzle must meet the performance
[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964] standard in paragraph (a)(1) of this sec-
tion and only mechanically operated
EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER ci- excess flow devices are authorized.
tations affecting § 179.102–1, see the List of (b) An application for approval of a
CFR Sections Affected, which appears in the
Finding Aids section of the printed volume
tank car built in accordance with
and at www.govinfo.gov. § 173.244(a)(3) or § 173.314(d) must include
a demonstration, through engineering
§ 179.102–2 Chlorine. analysis, that the tank jacket and sup-
(a) Each tank car used to transport port structure system, including any
chlorine must comply with all of the anchors and support devices, is capable
following: of withstanding a 6 mile per hour cou-
(1) Tanks must be fabricated from pling without jacket shift such that re-
carbon steel complying with ASTM sults in damage to the nozzle.
Specification A 516 (IBR, see § 171.7 of [74 FR 1802, Jan. 13, 2009]
274
§ 179.102–4 Vinyl fluoride, stabilized. (f) A pressure gage may be installed.

Each tank used to transport vinyl (g) Aluminum, copper, silver, zinc, or
fluoride, stabilized, must comply with an alloy containing any of these metals
the following special requirements: may not be used in the tank construc-
(a) All plates for the tank must be tion, or in fittings in contact with the
fabricated of material listed in para- lading.
graph (a)(2) of this section, and appur- (h) The jacket must be stenciled, ad-
tenances must be fabricated of mate- jacent to the water capacity stencil,
rial listed in paragraph (a)(1) or (a)(2) MINIMUM OPERATING TEMPERA-
of this section. TURE l °F.
(1) Stainless steel, ASTM A 240/A (i) The tank car and insulation must
240M (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- be designed to prevent the vapor pres-
chapter), Type 304, 304L, 316 or 316L, in sure of the lading from increasing from
which case impact tests are not re- the pressure at the maximum allowable
quired; or filling density to the start-to-discharge
(2) Steel complying with ASTM Spec-
pressure of the reclosing pressure relief
ification A 516 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this
valve within 30 days, at an ambient
subchapter); Grade 70; ASTM Specifica- temperature of 90 °F.
tion A 537 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
chapter), Class 1; or AAR Specification [Amdt. 179–32, 48 FR 27707, June 16, 1983, as
TC 128, Grade B, in which case impact amended at 49 FR 24317, June 12, 1984; 49 FR
tests must be performed as follows: 42736, Oct. 24, 1984; Amdt. 179–45, 55 FR 52728,
Dec. 21, 1990; Amdt. 179–52, 61 FR 28680, June
(i) ASTM A 516/A 516M and A 537/A 5, 1996; 65 FR 58632, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 33452,
537M material must meet the Charpy June 21, 2001; 66 FR 45186, 45390, Aug. 28, 2001;
V-Notch test requirements, in longitu- 67 FR 51660, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75758, 75760
dinal direction of rolling, of ASTM A Dec. 31, 2003]
20/A 20M (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
chapter). § 179.102–17 Hydrogen chloride, refrig-
(ii) AAR Specification TC 128 mate- erated liquid.
rial must meet the Charpy V-Notch Each tank car used to transport hy-
test requirements, in longitudinal di- drogen chloride, refrigerated liquid
rection of rolling, of 15 ft.-lb. minimum must comply with the following special
average for 3 specimens, with a 10 ft.- requirements:
lb. minimum for any one specimen, at (a) The tank car must comply with
minus 50 °F or colder, in accordance Specification DOT-105J600W and be de-
with ASTM A 370 (IBR, see § 171.7 of signed for loading at minus 50 °F. or
this subchapter). colder.
(iii) Production welded test plates (b) All plates for the tank must be
must— fabricated of material listed in para-
(A) Be prepared in accordance with graph (b)(2) of this section, and appur-
AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, ap- tenances must be fabricated of mate-
pendix W, W4.00 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this rial listed in paragraph (b)(1) or (b)(2)
subchapter); of this section.
(B) Include impact specimens of weld (1) Stainless steel, ASTM A 240/A
metal and heat affected zone prepared 240M (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
and tested in accordance with AAR chapter), Type 304, 304L, 316, or 316L, in
Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix which case impact tests are not re-
W, W9.00; and quired; or
(C) Meet the same impact require- (2) Steel conforming to ASTM A 516/
ments as the plate material. A 516M (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
(b) Insulation must be of approved chapter), Grade 70; ASTM A 537/A 537M,
material. (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter)
(c) Excess flow valves must be in- Class 1; or AAR Specification TC 128,
stalled under all liquid and vapor Grade B in which case impact tests
valves, except safety relief valves. must be performed as follows:
(d) A thermometer well may be in- (i) ASTM A 516/A 516M and A 537/A
stalled. 537M material must meet the Charpy

(e) Only an approved gaging device V-notch test requirements, in longitu-
may be installed. dinal direction of rolling, of ASTM A
275
§ 179.103 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
20/A 20M (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- MINIMUM OPERATING TEMPERATURE l
chapter). °F.
(ii) AAR Specification TC 128 mate- (l) The tank car and insulation must
rial must meet the Charpy V-notch be designed to prevent the pressure of
test requirements, in longitudinal di- the lading from increasing from the
rection of rolling of 15 ft.-lb. minimum pressure at the maximum allowable
average for 3 specimens, with a 10 ft.- filling density to the start-to-discharge
lb. minimum for any one specimen, at pressure of the pressure relief valve
minus 50 °F or colder, in accordance within 30 days, at an ambient tempera-
with ASTM A 370 (IBR, see § 171.7 of ture of 90° F.
this subchapter). (m) Except as provided in § 173.314(d),
(iii) Production welded test plates tank cars built on or after March 16,
must— 2009 used for the transportation of hy-
(A) Be prepared in accordance with drogen chloride, refrigerated liquid,
AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, ap- must meet the applicable authorized
pendix W, W4.00 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this tank car specification listed in
subchapter); § 173.314(c).
(B) include impact test specimens of
weld metal and heat affected zone pre- [Amdt. 179–32, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as
pared and tested in accordance with amended at 48 FR 50441, Nov. 1, 1983; 49 FR
AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, ap- 24317, June 12, 1984; 49 FR 42736, Oct. 24, 1984;
Amdt. 179–45, 55 FR 52728, Dec. 21, 1990; 66 FR
pendix W, W9.00; and 45390, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51660, Aug. 8, 2002;
(C) meet the same impact require- 68 FR 75758, 75760, Dec. 31, 2003; 74 FR 1802,
ments as the plate material. Jan. 13, 2009]
(c) Insulation must be of approved
material. § 179.103 Special requirements for
(d) Pressure relief valves must be class 114A * * * tank car tanks.
trimmed with monel or other approved (a) In addition to the applicable re-
material and equipped with a rupture quirements of §§ 179.100 and 179.101 the
disc of silver, polytetrafluoroethylene following requirements shall be com-
coated monel, or tantalum. Each pres- plied with:
sure relief device shall have the space (b) [Reserved]
between the rupture disc and the valve
vented with a suitable auxiliary valve. § 179.103–1 Type.
The discharge from each pressure relief
(a) Tanks built under this section
valve must be directed outside the pro-
may be of any approved cross section.
tective housing.
(e) Loading and unloading valves (b) Any portion of the tank shell not
must be trimmed with Hastelloy B or circular in cross section shall have
C, monel, or other approved material, walls of such thickness and be so rein-
and identified as ‘‘Vapor’’ or ‘‘Liquid’’. forced that the stresses in the walls
Excess flow valves must be installed caused by a given internal pressure are
under all liquid and vapor valves, ex- no greater than the circumferential
cept safety relief valves. stresses which would exist under the
(f) A thermometer well may be in- same internal pressure in the wall of a
stalled. tank of circular cross section designed
(g) Only an approved gaging device in accordance with paragraphs § 179.100–
may be installed. 6 (a) and (b), but in no case shall the
(h) A sump must be installed in the wall thickness be less than that speci-
bottom of the tank under the liquid fied in § 179.101.
pipes. (c) [Reserved]
(i) All gaskets must be made of, or (d) Valves and fittings need not be
coated with, polytetrafluoroethylene mounted on the manway cover.
or other approved material. (e) One opening may be provided in
(j) The tank car tank may be each head for use in purging the tank
equipped with exterior cooling coils on interior.
top of the tank car shell. [29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32
(k) The jacket must be stenciled, ad- FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt.
jacent to the water capacity stencil, 179–50, 60 FR 49077, Sept. 21, 1995]
276
§ 179.103–2 Manway cover. § 179.103–4 Safety relief devices and

pressure regulators.
(a) The manway cover must be an ap-
proved design. (a) Safety relief devices and pressure
(b) If no valves or measuring and regulators must be located on top of
sampling devices are mounted on the tank near the center of the car on
manway cover, no protective housing is a nozzle, mounting plate or recess in
required. the shell. Through or stud bolts, if
used, must not enter the tank.
[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 (b) Metal guard of approved design
FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt. must be provided to protect safety re-
179–50, 60 FR 49077, Sept. 21, 1995]
lief devices and pressure regulators
from damage.
§ 179.103–3 Venting, loading and un-
loading valves, measuring and sam- [Amdt. 179–10, 36 FR 21348, Nov. 6, 1971]
pling devices.
(a) Venting, loading and unloading § 179.103–5 Bottom outlets.
valves, measuring and sampling de- (a) In addition to or in place of the
vices, when used, shall be attached to a venting, loading and unloading valves,
nozzle or nozzles on the tank shell or measuring and sampling devices as pre-
heads. scribed in § 179.103–3, tanks may be
(b) These valves and appurtenances equipped with approved bottom outlet
must be grouped in one location and, valves. If applied, bottom outlet valves
except as provided in § 179.103–5, must must meet the following requirements:
be equipped with a protective housing (1) On cars with center sills, a ball
with cover, or may be recessed into valve may be welded to the outside bot-
tank shell with cover. An additional tom of the tank or mounted on a pad or
set grouped in another location may be nozzle with a tongue and groove or
provided. Protective housing with male and female flange attachment,
cover, when used, must have steel side- but in no case shall the breakage
walls not less than three-fourths inch groove or equivalent extend below the
in thickness and a metal cover not less bottom flange of the center sill. On
than one-fourth inch in thickness that cars without continuous center sills, a
ball valve may be welded to the outside
can be securely closed. Underframe
bottom of the tank or mounted with a
sills are an acceptable alternate to the
tongue and groove or male and female
protective housing cover, provided the
flange attachment on a pad attached to
arrangement is of approved design. For the outside bottom of the tank. The
fittings recessed into tank shell, pro- mounting pad must have a maximum
tective cover must be metal and not thickness of 21⁄2 inches measured on the
less than one-fourth inch in thickness. longitudinal centerline of the tank.
(c) When tank car is used to trans- The valve operating mechanism must
port liquefied flammable gases, the in- be provided with a suitable locking ar-
terior pipes of the loading, unloading, rangement to insure positive closure
and sampling valves must be equipped during transit.
with excess flow valves of approved de- (2) When internal bottom outlet
sign except when quick closing internal valve is used in liquefied flammable
valves of approved design are used. gas service, the outlet of the valve
When the interior pipe of the gaging must be equipped with an excess flow
device provides a means for the passage valve of approved design, except when a
of lading from the interior to the exte- quick-closing internal valve of ap-
rior of the tank, it must be equipped proved design is used. Protective hous-
with an excess flow valve of approved ing is not required.
design or with an orifice not exceeding (3) Bottom outlet must be equipped
0.060 inch. with a liquid tight closure at its lower
end.
[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 (b) Bottom outlet equipment must be
of approved design and must meet the
179–10, 36 FR 21348, Nov. 6, 1971]
following requirements:
277
§ 179.200 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(1) The extreme projection of the bot- clude an in-line auxiliary valve, either
tom outlet equipment may not be more integral with the quick-coupling device
than allowed by appendix E of the AAR or located between the primary bottom
Specifications for Tank Cars (IBR, see outlet valve and the quick-coupling de-
§ 171.7 of this subchapter). All bottom vice. The quick-coupling device closure
outlet reducers and closures and their dust cap or outlet nozzle shall be fitted
attachments shall be secured to the car with a minimum 1-inch NPT closure
by at least 3⁄8 inch chain, or its equiva- (see Fig. E17.8 and E17.9).
lent, except that bottom outlet closure (3) The valve operating mechanism
plugs may be attached by 1⁄4 inch chain. must be provided with a suitable lock-
When the bottom outlet closure is of ing arrangement to insure positive clo-
the combination cap and valve type, sure during transit.
the pipe connection to the valve shall (4) If the outlet nozzle extends 6
be closed by a plug, cap, or approved inches or more from shell of tank, a V-
quick coupling device. The bottom out- shaped breakage groove shall be cut
let equipment should include only the (not cast) in the upper part to the out-
valve, reducers and closures that are let nozzle at a point immediately below
necessary for the attachment of un- the lowest part of value closest to the
loading fixtures. The permanent at- tank. In no case may the nozzle wall
tachment of supplementary exterior thickness at the roof of the ‘‘V’’ be
fittings must be approved by the AAR more than 1⁄4-inch. On cars without
Committee on Tank Cars. continuous center sills, the breakage
(2) To provide for the attachment of groove or its equivalent may not be
unloading connections, the discharge more than 15 inches below the tank
end of the bottom outlet nozzle or re- shell. On cars with continuous center
ducer, the valve body of the exterior sills, the breakage groove or its equiva-
valve, or some fixed attachment there- lent must be above the bottom of the
to, shall be provided with one of the center sill construction.
following arrangements or an approved (5) The valve body must be of a thick-
modification thereof. (See appendix E. ness which will insure that accidental
Fig. E17 of the AAR Specifications for breakage of the outlet nozzle will occur
Tank Cars for illustrations of some of at or below the ‘‘V’’ groove, or its
the possible arrangements.) equivalent, and will not cause distor-
(i) A bolted flange closure arrange- tion of the valve seat or valve.
ment including a minimum 1-inch NPT [Amdt. 179–10, 36 FR 21348, Nov. 6, 1971, as
pipe plug (see Fig. E17.1) or including amended by Amdt. 179–40, 52 FR 13046, Apr.
an auxiliary valve with a threaded clo- 20, 1987; Amdt. 179–41, 52 FR 36672, Sept. 30,
sure. 1987; Amdt. 179–50, 60 FR 49077, Sept. 21, 1995;
Amdt. 179–52, 61 FR 28680, June 5, 1996; Amdt.
(ii) A threaded cap closure arrange-
179–53, 61 FR 51342, Oct. 1, 1996; 66 FR 45186,
ment including a minimum 1-inch NPT Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 75761, Dec. 31, 2003]
pipe plug (see Fig. E17.2) or including
an auxiliary valve with a threaded clo-
sure.
Subpart D—Specifications for Non-
(iii) A quick-coupling device using a Pressure Tank Car Tanks
threaded plug closure of at least 1-inch (Classes DOT-111AW, 115AW,
NPT or having a threaded cap closure and 117AW)
with a minimum 1-inch NPT pipe plug
(see Fig. E17.3 through E17.5). A min- § 179.200 General specifications appli-
cable to non-pressure tank car
imum 1-inch auxiliary test valve with a tanks (Class DOT–111, DOT–117).
threaded closure may be substituted
for the 1-inch pipe plug (see Fig E17.6). § 179.200–1 Tank built under these
If the threaded cap closure does not specifications must meet the appli-
have a pipe plug or integral auxiliary cable requirements in this part.
test valve, a minimum 1-inch NPT pipe
plug shall be installed in the outlet § 179.200–3 Type.
nozzle above the closure (see Fig. Tank built under these specifications
E17.7). must be circular in cross section, with

(iv) A two-piece quick-coupling deformed heads designed convex outward.
vice using a clamped dust cap must in- When specified in § 179.201–1, the tank
278
must have at least one manway or one (b) The wall thickness after forming
expansion dome with manway, and of 3:1 ellipsoidal heads must be not less
such other external projections as are than specified in § 179.201–1, nor that
prescribed herein. When the tank is di- calculated by the following formula:
vided into compartments, each com-
partment must be treated as a separate
tank.
[Amdt. 179–10, 36 FR 21348, Nov. 6, 1971]
Where:
§ 179.200–4 Insulation. d = Inside diameter in inches;
E = 0.9 Welded joint efficiency; except E = 1.0
(a) If insulation is applied, the tank for seamless heads;
shell and expansion dome when used P = Minimum required bursting pressure in
must be insulated with an approved psig;
material. The entire insulation must S = Minimum tensile strength of plate mate-
be covered with a metal jacket of a rial in p.s.i. as prescribed in § 179.200–7;
thickness not less than 11 gauge (0.1196 t = Minimum thickness of plate in inches
inch) nominal (Manufacturer’s Stand- after forming.
ard Gauge) and flashed around all open- (c) The wall thickness after forming
ings so as to be weather tight. The ex- of a flanged and dished head must be
terior surface of a carbon steel tank not less than specified in § 179.201–1, nor
and the inside surface of a carbon steel that calculated by the following for-
jacket must be given a protection coat- mula:
ing.
(b) If insulation is a specification re-
quirement, it shall be of sufficient
thickness so that the thermal conduct-
ance at 60 °F is not more than 0.225 Btu Where:
per hour, per square foot, per degree F E = 0.9 Welded joint efficiency; except E = 1.0
temperature differential, unless other- for seamless heads;
wise provided in § 179.201–1. If exterior L = Main inside radius to which head is
heaters are attached to tank, the dished, measured on concave side in
inches;
thickness of the insulation over each
P = Minimum required bursting pressure in
heater element may be reduced to one- psig;
half that required for the shell. S = Minimum tensile strength of plate mate-
[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 rial in p.s.i. as prescribed in § 179.200–7;
FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt. t = Minimum thickness of plate in inches
179–10, 36 FR 21349, Nov. 6, 1971; Amdt. 179–50, after forming.
60 FR 49078, Sept. 21, 1995] (d) If plates are clad with material
having tensile strength properties at
§ 179.200–6 Thickness of plates.
least equal to the base plate, the clad-
(a) The wall thickness after forming ding may be considered a part of the
of the tank shell, dome shell, and of 2:1 base plate when determining thickness.
ellipsoidal heads must be not less than If cladding material does not have ten-
specified in § 179.201–1, nor that cal- sile strength at least equal to the base
culated by the following formula: plate, the base plate alone must meet
the thickness requirements.
(e) For a tank constructed of longitu-
dinal sections, the minimum width of
bottom sheet of the tank must be 60
Where: inches measured on the arc, but in all
EC13NO91.034</MATH>
d = Inside diameter in inches; cases the width must be sufficient to

E = 0.9 Welded joint efficiency; except E = 1.0 bring the entire width of the longitu-
for seamless heads; dinal welded joint, including welds,
P = Minimum required bursting pressure in
above the bolster.
psig;
S = Minimum tensile strength of plate mate- (f) For a tank built of one piece cy-
EC13NO91.033</MATH>
rial in p.s.i. as prescribed in § 179.200–7; lindrical sections, the thickness speci-

t = Minimum thickness of plate in inches fied for bottom sheet must apply to the
after forming. entire cylindrical section.
279
EC13NO91.032</MATH>
§ 179.200–7 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(g) See § 179.200–9 for thickness re- Minimum

Minimum ten- elongation in
quirements for a compartmented tank. sile strength 2 inches
Specifications (p.s.i.) weld- (percent)
[Amdt. 179–10, 36 FR 21349, Nov. 6, 1971, as ed condition 1 weld metal
amended at 66 FR 45390, Aug. 28, 2001] (longitudinal)
ASTM A 240/A 240M (incor-

§ 179.200–7 Materials. porated by reference; see
§ 171.7 of this subchapter),
(a) Plate material used to fabricate Type 304 ............................ 75,000 30
the tank and, when used, expansion ASTM A 240/A 240M (incor-
dome or manway nozzle material, must porated by reference; see
meet one of the following specifica- Type 304L .......................... 70,000 30
tions with the indicated minimum ten- ASTM A 240/A 240M (incor-
sile strength and elongation in the porated by reference; see
welded condition. Type 316 ............................ 75,000 30
(b) Carbon steel plate: The maximum ASTM A 240/A 240M (incor-
allowable carbon content must be 0.31 porated by reference; see
percent when the individual specifica- Type 316L .......................... 70,000 30
tion allows carbon content greater 1 Maximum stresses to be used in calculations.
than this amount. The plates may be 2 High alloy steel materials used to fabricate tank and ex-
clad with other approved materials: pansion dome, when used, must be tested in accordance with
Practice A of ASTM Specification A 262 titled, ‘‘Standard
Practices for Detecting Susceptibility to Intergranular Attack in
Minimum elon- Austenitic Stainless Steels’’ (IBR; see § 171.7 of this sub-
Minimum ten- gation in 2 chapter). If the specimen does not pass Practice A, Practice B
sile strength inches (per- or C must be used and the corrosion rates may not exceed
Specifications (p.s.i.) welded cent) weld the following:
condition 1 metal (longitu-
dinal)
Corrosion
Test procedure Material rate i.p.m.
AAR TC 128, Gr. B ........... 81,000 19
ASTM A 516 2 .................... 70,000 20 Practice B ................... Types 304, 304L, 316, 0.0040
1 Minimum
and 316L.
stresses to be used in calculations.
2 This specification is incorporated by reference (IBR, see Practice C ................... Type 304L .................. .0020
§ 171.7 of this subchapter). Type 304L and Type 316L test specimens must be given a
sensitizing treatment prior to testing. (A typical sensitizing
(c) Aluminum alloy plate: Aluminum treatment is 1 hour at 1250 F.)
alloy plate must be suitable for weld- (e) Nickel plate: Nickel plate must
ing and comply with one of the fol- comply with the following specifica-
lowing specifications (IBR, see § 171.7 of tion (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
this subchapter): chapter):
Minimum Minimum
Minimum ten- elongation in Minimum elongation
sile strength 2 inches tensile in 2 inches
Specifications (p.s.i.) weld- (percent) 0 strength
Specifications (percent)
ed condi- temper weld (psi) weld- weld metal
tion 3 4 metal (longi- ed condi- (longitu-
tudinal) tion 1 dinal)
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5052 1 ..... 25,000 18 ASTM B 162 2 ................................ 40,000 20
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5083 2 ..... 38,000 16
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5086 1 ..... 35,000 14
(f) Manganese-molybdenum steel plate:
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5154 1 ..... 30,000 18
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5254 1 ..... 30,000 18
Manganese-molybdenum steel plate
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5454 1 ..... 31,000 18 must be suitable for fusion welding and
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5652 1 ..... 25,000 18 comply with the following specifica-
1 For fabrication, the parent plate material may be 0, H112,
tion (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
or H32 temper, but design calculations must be based on chapter):
minimum tensile strength shown.
2 0 temper only.
Minimum
Minimum
3 Weld filler metal 5556 must not be used. elongation
tensile
4 Maximum stresses to be used in calculations. in 2 inches
strength
(p.s.i.) weld metal
(d) High alloy steel plate: High alloy welded (longitu-
condition 1
steel plate must comply with one of dinal)
the following specifications: ASTM A 302, Gr. B ....................... 80,000 20

280
(g) All parts and items of construc- inch and not more than 11⁄2-inch solid
tion in contact with the lading must be pipe plugs having NPT threads.
made of material compatible with (b) When the tank is divided into
plate material and not subject to rapid compartments by constructing each
deterioration by the lading, or be coat- compartment as a separate tank, these
ed or lined with suitable corrosion re- tanks shall be joined together by a cyl-
sistant material. inder made of plate, having a thickness
(h) All external projections that may not less than that required for the tank
be in contact with the lading and all shell and applied to the outside surface
castings, forgings, or fabrications used of tank head flanges. The cylinder shall
for fittings or attachments to tank and fit the straight flange portion of the
expansion dome, when used, in contact compartment tank head tightly. The
with lading must be made of material cylinder shall contact the head flange
to an approved specification. See AAR for a distance of at least two times the
Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix plate thickness, or a minimum of 1
M, M4.05 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- inch, whichever is greater. The cyl-
chapter) for approved material speci- inder shall be joined to the head flange
fications for castings for fittings.
by a full fillet weld. Distance from
[Amdt. 179–10, 36 FR 21349, Nov. 9, 1971; 36 FR head seam to cylinder shall not be less
21893, Nov. 17, 1971, as amended by Amdt.179– than 11⁄2 inches or three times the plate
28, 46 FR 49906, Oct. 8, 1981; Amdt. 179–40, 52 thickness, whichever is greater. Voids
FR 13046, Apr. 20, 1987; Amdt. 179–52, 61 FR
28680, June 5, 1996; 66 FR 45186, Aug. 28, 2001;
created by the space between heads of
67 FR 51660, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75761, Dec. 31, tanks joined together to form a com-
2003; 70 FR 34076, June 13, 2005] partment tank shall be provided with a
tapped drain hole at their lowest point
§ 179.200–8 Tank heads. and a tapped hole at top of tank. The
(a) All external tank heads must be top hole shall be closed and the bottom
an ellipsoid of revolution in which the hole may be closed with solid pipe
major axis must equal the diameter of plugs not less than 3⁄4 inch nor more
the shell and the minor axis must be than 11⁄2 inches having NPT threads.
one-half the major axis. [29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32
(b) Internal compartment tank heads FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt.
may be 2:1 ellipsoidal, 3:1 ellipsoidal, or 179–10, 36 FR 21350, Nov. 6, 1971; 66 FR 45186,
flanged and dished to thicknesses as Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 75761, Dec. 31, 2003]
specified in § 179.200–6. Flanged and
dished heads must have main inside ra- § 179.200–10 Welding.
dius not exceeding 10 feet, and inside (a) All joints shall be fusion-welded
knuckle radius must not be less than in compliance with the requirements of
33⁄4 inches for steel, alloy steel, or nick- AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, ap-
el tanks, and not less than 5 inches for pendix W (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
aluminum alloy tanks. chapter). Welding procedures, welders
[Amdt. 179–10, 36 FR 21350, Nov. 6, 1971] and fabricators shall be approved.
(b) Welding is not permitted on or to
§ 179.200–9 Compartment tanks. ductile iron or malleable iron fittings.
(a) When a tank is divided into com-
partments, by inserting interior heads, FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt.
interior heads must be inserted in ac- 179–10, 36 FR 21350, Nov. 6, 1971; 68 FR 75761,
cordance with AAR Specifications for Dec. 31, 2003]
Tank Cars, appendix E, E7.00 (IBR, see
§ 171.7 of this subchapter), and must § 179.200–11 Postweld heat treatment.
comply with the requirements specified
When specified in § 179.201–1, after
in § 179.201–1. Voids between compart-
welding is complete, postweld heat
ment heads must be provided with at
treatment must be in compliance with
least one tapped drain hole at their
the requirements of AAR Specifica-
lowest point, and a tapped hole at the
tions for Tank Cars, appendix W (IBR,

top of the tank. The top hole must be
closed, and the bottom hole may be
closed, with not less than three-fourths [68 FR 75761, Dec. 31, 2003]
281
§ 179.200–13 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
§ 179.200–13 Manway ring or flange, Figure E 10C of the AAR Specifications

pressure relief device flange, bot- for Tank Cars or by the use of rein-
tom outlet nozzle flange, bottom forcing as outlined in Appendix E, E3.04
washout nozzle flange and other at- and Figures E10K and E10L. When the
tachments and openings.
opening in the tank shell is less than
(a) These attachments shall be fusion the inside diameter of the dome, and
welded to the tank and reinforced in an the dome pocket is not closed off in an
approved manner in compliance with approved manner, dome pocket drain
the requirements of appendix E, figure holes shall be provided in the tank
10, of the AAR Specifications for Tank shell with nipples projecting inside the
Cars (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
tank at least 1 inch.
chapter).
(b) The opening in the manway ring (d) The dome head shall be of ap-
must be at least 16 inches in diameter proved contour and shall be designed
except that acid resistant lined for pressure on concave side.
manways must be at least 18 inches in (e) Aluminum alloy domes: (1) The
diameter before lining. dome shell thickness shall be cal-
(c) The manway ring or flange, shall culated by the formula in § 179.200–6(a).
be made of cast, forged or fabricated (2) The dome head may be an ellip-
metal. The metal of the dome, tank, or soid of revolution in which the major
nozzle must be compatible with the axis shall be equal to the diameter of
manway ring or flange, so that they the dome shell and the minor axis shall
may be welded together. be one-half the major axis. The thick-
(d) The openings for the manway or ness in this case shall be determined by
other fittings shall be reinforced in an using formula in § 179.200–6(a).
approved manner. (3) The dome head, if dished, must be
[Amdt. 179–40, 52 FR 13047, Apr. 20, 1987, as dished to a radius not exceeding 96
amended at 68 FR 75761, Dec. 31, 2003] inches. Thickness of dished dome head
must be calculated by the formula in
§ 179.200–14 Expansion capacity. § 179.200–6(c).
(a) Tanks shall have expansion capac- (4) Tank shell shall be reinforced by
ity as prescribed in this subchapter. the addition of a plate equal to or
This capacity shall be provided in the greater than shell in thickness and the
tank for Class DOT-111A cars, or in a cross sectional area shall exceed metal
dome for Class DOT-103 and 104 type removed for dome opening, or tank
cars. shell shall be reinforced by a seamless
(b) For tank cars having an expan- saddle plate equal to or greater than
sion dome, the expansion capacity is shell in thickness and butt welded to
the total capacity of the tank and tank shell. The reinforcing saddle plate
dome combined. The capacity of the shall be provided with a fluid opening
dome shall be measured from the inside having a vertical flange of the diame-
top of shell of tank to the inside top of
ter of the dome for butt welding shell
dome or bottom of any vent pipe pro-
of dome to the flange. The reinforcing
jecting inside of dome, except that
saddle plate shall extend about the
when a pressure relief device is applied
dome a distance measured along shell
to side of dome, the effective capacity
of tank at least equal to the extension
of the dome shall be measured from top
at top of tank. Other approved designs
of the pressure relief device opening in-
side of dome to inside top of shell of may be used.
tank. [29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32
(c) The opening in the tank shell FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt.
within the dome shall be at least 29 179–10, 36 FR 21350, Nov. 6, 1971; Amdt. 179–28,
inches in diameter. When the opening 46 FR 49906, Oct. 8, 1981; Amdt. 179–52, 61 FR
in the tank shell exceeds 30 inches in 28680, June 5, 1996; 66 FR 45186, 45390, Aug. 28,
diameter, the opening shall be rein- 2001; 68 FR 48571, Aug. 14, 2003]
forced in an approved manner. This ad-
§ 179.200–15 Closures for manways.

ditional reinforcement may be accom-
plished by the use of a dome opening of (a) Manway covers must be of ap-
the flued-type as shown in appendix E, proved type.
282
(b) Manway covers shall be designed and enclosed within a housing. Other
to provide a secure closure of the approved devices may be used in lieu of
manway. outage scale or telltale pipe.
(c) Manway covers must be of ap- (e) Bottom of tank shell may be
proved cast, forged, or fabricated met- equipped with a sump or siphon bowl,
als. Malleable iron, if used, must com- or both, welded or pressed into the
ply with ASTM A 47 (IBR, see § 171.7 of shell. Such sumps or siphon bowls, if
this subchapter), Grade 35018. Cast iron applied are not limited in size and
manway covers must not be used. must be made of cast, forged, or fab-
(d) All joints between manway covers ricated metal. Each sump or siphon
and their seats shall be made tight bowl must be of good welding quality
against leakage of vapor and liquid by in conjunction with the metal of the
use of gaskets of suitable material. tank shell. When sump or siphon bowl
(e) For other manway cover require- is pressed in the bottom of the tank
ments see § 179.201–1. shell, the wall thickness of the pressed
section must not be less than that
specified for the shell. The section of a
179–10, 36 FR 21350, Nov. 6, 1971; Amdt. 179–37, circular cross section tank to which a
50 FR 11066, Mar. 19, 1985; 68 FR 75762, Dec. 31, sump or siphon bowl is attached need
2003] not comply with the out-of-roundness
requirement specified in appendix W,
§ 179.200–16 Gauging devices, top load- W14.06, of the AAR Specifications for
ing and unloading devices, venting Tank Cars. Any portion of a sump or si-
and air inlet devices. phon bowl not forming a part of a cyl-
(a) When installed, these devices inder of revolution must have walls of
shall be of an approved design which such thickness and be so reinforced
will prevent interchange with any that the stresses in the walls caused by
other fixture, and be tightly closed. a given internal pressure are not great-
Unloading pipes shall be securely an- er than the circumferential stress
chored within the tank. Each tank or which would exist under the same in-
compartment may be equipped with ternal pressure in the wall of a tank of
one separate air connection. circular cross section designed in ac-
(b) When the characteristics of the cordance with § 179.200–6 (a) and (d). In
commodity for which the car is author- no case shall the wall thickness be less
ized are such that these devices must than that specified in § 179.201–1.
be equipped with valves or fittings to (f) When top loading and discharge
permit the loading and unloading of devices, or venting and air inlet de-
the contents, these devices, including vices are installed with exposed piping
valves, shall be of an approved design, to a removed location, shutoff valves
and be provided with a protective hous- must be applied directly to reinforcing
ing except when plug or ball type pads or nozzles at their communication
valves with operating handles removed through the tank shell, and must be
are used. Provision shall be made for enclosed in a protective housing with
closing pipe connections of valves. provision for a seal. The piping must
(c) A tank may be equipped with a include breakage grooves, and suitable
vacuum relief valve of an approved de- bracing. Relief valves must be applied
sign. Protective housing is not re- to liquid lines for protection in case
quired. lading is trapped. Provision must be
(d) When using a visual gauging de- made to insure closure of the valves
vice on a car with a hinged manway while the car is in transit.
cover, an outage scale visible through (g) Protective housing, when re-
the manway opening shall be provided. quired, must be fabricated of approved
If loading devices are applied to permit material and have cover and sidewalls
tank loading with cover closed, a tell- not less than 0.119 inch in thickness.
tale pipe may be provided. Telltale pipe
shall be capable of determining that re- FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt.
quired outage is provided. Pipe shall be 179–10, 36 FR 21350, Nov. 6, 1971; Amdt. 179–52,
equipped with 1⁄4 inch minimum NPT 61 FR 28680, June 5, 1996; 69 FR 54047, Sept. 7,
control valve mounted outside tank 2004]
283
§ 179.200–17 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
§ 179.200–17 Bottom outlets. valves, must be of cast, fabricated, or

(a) If indicated in § 179.201–1, tank forged metal. If welded to tank, they
may be equipped with bottom outlet. must be of good weldable quality in
Bottom outlet, if applied, must comply conjunction with metal of tank.
with the following requirements: (6) To provide for the attachment of
(1) The extreme projection of the bot- unloading connections, the discharge
tom outlet equipment may not be more end of the bottom outlet nozzle or re-
than that allowed by appendix E of the ducer, the valve body of the exterior
AAR Specifications for Tank Cars valve, or some fixed attachment there-
(IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). All to, shall be provided with one of the
bottom outlet reducers and closures following arrangements or an approved
and their attachments shall be secured modification thereof. (See appendix E.
to the car by at least 3⁄8-inch chain, or Fig. E17 of the AAR Specifications for
its equivalent, except that the bottom Tank Cars for illustrations of some of
outlet closure plugs may be attached the possible arrangements.)
by 1⁄4-inch chain. When the bottom out- (i) A bolted flange closure arrange-
let closure is of the combination cap ment including a minimum 1-inch NPT
and valve type, the pipe connection to pipe plug (see Fig. E17.1) or including
the valve shall be closed by a plug, cap, an auxiliary valve with a threaded clo-
or approved quick coupling device. The sure.
bottom outlet equipment should in- (ii) A threaded cap closure arrange-
clude only the valve, reducers and clo- ment including a minimum 1-inch NPT
sures that are necessary for the attach- pipe plug (see Fig. E17.2) or including
ment of unloading fixtures. The perma- an auxiliary valve with a threaded clo-
nent attachment of supplementary ex- sure.
terior fittings shall be approved by the (iii) A quick-coupling device using a
AAR Committee on Tank Cars. threaded plug closure of at least 1-inch
(2) Bottom outlet must be of ap- NPT or having a threaded cap closure
proved construction, and be provided with a minimum 1-inch NPT pipe plug
with a liquid-tight closure at its lower (see Fig. E17.3 through E17.5). A min-
end. imum 1-inch auxiliary test valve with a
(3) On cars with center sills, a ball threaded closure may be substituted
valve may be welded to the outside bot- for the 1-inch pipe plug (see Fig. E17.6).
tom of the tank or mounted on a pad or If the threaded cap closure does not
nozzle with a tongue and groove or have a pipe plug or integral auxiliary
male and female flange attachment. In test valve, a minimum 1-inch NPT pipe
no case shall the breakage groove or plug shall be installed in the outlet
equivalent extend below the bottom nozzle above the closure (see Fig.
flange of the center sill. On cars with- E17.7).
out continuous center sills, a ball valve (iv) A two-piece quick-coupling de-
may be welded to the outside bottom of vice using a clamped dust cap must in-
the tank or mounted with a tongue and clude an in-line auxiliary valve, either
groove or male and female flange at- integral with the quick-coupling device
tachment on a pad attached to the out- or located between the primary bottom
side bottom of the tank. The mounting outlet valve and the quick-coupling de-
pad must have a maximum thickness of vice. The quick-coupling device closure
21⁄2 inches measured on the longitu- dust cap or outlet nozzle shall be fitted
dinal centerline of the tank. The valve with a minimum 1-inch NPT closure
operating mechanism must be provided (see Fig. E17.8 and E17.9).
with a suitable locking arrangement to (7) If the outlet nozzle extends 6
insure positive closure during transit. inches or more from the shell of the
(4) The valve operating mechanism tank, a V-shaped breakage groove shall
for valves applied to the interior of the be cut (not cast) in the upper part of
tank, and outlet nozzle construction, the outlet nozzle at a point imme-
must insure against the unseating of diately below the lowest part of valve
the valve due to stresses or shocks in- closest to the tank. In no case may the
cident to transportation. nozzle wall thickness at the root of the

(5) Bottom outlet nozzle of interior ‘‘V’’ be more than 1⁄4 inch. The outlet
valves and the valve body of exterior nozzle on interior valves or the valve
284
body on exterior valves may be steam tank, a V-shaped breakage groove shall
jacketed, in which case the breakage be cut (not cast) in the upper part of
groove or its equivalent must be below the nozzle at a point immediately
the steam chamber but above the bot- below the lowest part of the inside clo-
tom of center sill construction. If the sure seat or plug. In no case may the
outlet nozzle is not a single piece, or if nozzle wall thickness at the root of the
exterior valves are applied, provisions ‘‘V’’ be more than 1⁄4 inch. Where the
shall be made for the equivalent of the nozzle is not a single piece, provisions
breakage groove. On cars without con- shall be made for the equivalent of the
tinuous center sills, the breakage breakage groove. The nozzle must be of
groove or its equivalent must be no a thickness to insure that accidental
more than 15 inches below the tank breakage will occur at or below the
shell. On cars with continuous center ‘‘V’’ groove or its equivalent. On cars
sills, the breakage groove or its equiva- without continuous center sills, the
lent must be above the bottom of the
breakage groove or its equivalent may
center sill construction.
not be more than 15 inches below the
(8) The flange on the outlet nozzle or
outer shell. On cars with continuous
the valve body of exterior valves must
be of a thickness which will prevent center sills, the breakage groove or its
distortion of the valve seat or valve by equivalent must be above the bottom
any change in contour of the shell re- of the center sill construction.
sulting from expansion of lading, or (4) The closure plug and seat must be
other causes, and which will insure readily accessible or removable for re-
that accidental breakage of the outlet pairs, including grinding.
nozzle will occur at or below the ‘‘V’’ (5) The closure of the washout nozzle
groove, or its equivalent. must be equipped with a 3⁄4-inch solid
(9) The valve must have no wings or screw plug. Plug must be attached by
stem projecting below the ‘‘V’’ groove at least a 1⁄4-inch chain.
or its equivalent. The valve and seat (6) Joints between closures and their
must be readily accessible or remov- seats may be gasketed with suitable
able for repairs, including grinding. material.
(10) The valve operating mechanism
on interior valves must have means for [29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32
compensating for variation in the
179–10, 36 FR 21351, Nov. 6, 1971; Amdt. 179–40,
vertical diameter of the tank produced 52 FR 13047, Apr. 20, 1987; 68 FR 75762, Dec. 31,
by expansion, weight of the liquid con- 2003]
tents, or other causes, and may operate
from the interior of the tank, but in § 179.200–19 Reinforcements, when
the event the rod is carried through used, and appurtenances not other-
the dome, or tank shell, leakage must wise specified.
be prevented by packing in stuffing box
(a) All attachments to tank and
or other suitable seals and a cap.
dome shall be applied by approved
(b) If indicated in § 179.201–1, tank
means. Rivets if used shall be caulked
may be equipped with bottom washout
of approved construction. If applied, inside and outside.
bottom washout shall be in accordance (b) Reinforcing pads must be used be-
with the following requirements: tween external brackets and shells if
(1) The extreme projection of the bot- the attachment welds exceed 6 lineal
tom washout equipment may not be inches of 1⁄4-inch fillet or equivalent
more than that allowed by appendix E weld per bracket or bracket leg. When
of the AAR Specifications for Tank reinforcing pads are used, they must
Cars. not be less than one-fourth inch in
(2) Bottom washout shall be of cast, thickness, have each corner rounded to
forged or fabricated metal. If welded to a 1 inch minimum radius, and be at-
tank, they shall be of good weldable tached to the tank by continuous fillet
quality in conjunction with metal of welds except for venting provisions.
tank. The ultimate shear strength of the

(3) If the washout nozzle extends 6 bracket to reinforcing pad weld must
inches or more from the shell of the not exceed 85 percent of the ultimate
285
§ 179.200–21 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
shear strength of the reinforcing pad to (b) [Reserved]

tank weld.
[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, as amended at 62 FR
FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt. 51561, Oct. 1, 1997]
179–10, 36 FR 21351, Nov. 6, 1971]
§ 179.200–24 Stamping.
§ 179.200–21 Closures for openings.
(a) To certify that the tank complies
(a) All plugs shall be solid, with NPT
with all specification requirements,
threads, and shall be of a length which
will screw at least 6 threads inside the each tank shall be plainly and perma-
face of fitting or tank. Plugs, when in- nently stamped in letters and figures
serted from the outside of tank heads, at least 3⁄8 inch high into the metal
shall have the letter ‘‘S’’ at least 3⁄8 near the center of both outside heads
inch in size stamped with steel stamp as follows:
or cast on the outside surface to indi-
Example of required
cate the plug is solid. stamping
(b) [Reserved]
Specification ................................. DOT-111A
§ 179.200–22 Test of tanks. Material ......................................... ASTM A 516–GR 70
Cladding material (if any) ............. ASTM A240–304 Clad
(a) Each tank shall be tested by com- Tank builder’s initials .................... ABC
pletely filling the tank and dome or Date of original test ...................... 00–0000
nozzles with water, or other liquid hav- Car assembler (if other than tank DEF
ing similar viscosity, of a temperature builder).
which shall not exceed 100 °F. during
the test; and applying the pressure pre- (b) On Class DOT-111 tank cars, the
scribed in § 179.201–1. Tank shall hold last numeral of the specification num-
the prescribed pressure for at least 10 ber may be omitted from the stamping;
minutes without leakage or evidence of for example, DOT-111A100W.
distress. All rivets and closures, except (c) After July 25, 2012, newly con-
safety relief valves or safety vents, structed DOT tank cars must have
shall be in place when test is made. their DOT specification and other re-
(b) Insulated tanks shall be tested be- quired information stamped plainly
fore insulation is applied. and permanently on stainless steel
(c) Rubber-lined tanks shall be tested identification plates in conformance
before rubber lining is applied.
with the applicable requirements pre-
(d) Caulking of welded joints to stop
scribed in § 179.24(a). Tank cars built
leaks developed during the foregoing
tests is prohibited. Repairs in welded before July 25, 2012, may have the iden-
joints shall be made as prescribed in tification plates instead of or in addi-
AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, ap- tion to the head stamping.
pendix W (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- [29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32
chapter). FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt.
[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964, as amended at 68 179–10, 36 FR 21351, Nov. 6, 1971; Amdt. 179–52,
FR 75762, Dec. 31, 2003] 61 FR 28680, June 5, 1996; 68 FR 48571, Aug. 14,
2003; 77 FR 37985, June 25, 2012]
§ 179.200–23 Tests of pressure relief
valves. § 179.201 Individual specification re-
quirements applicable to non-pres-
(a) Each valve shall be tested by air
sure tank car tanks.
or gas for compliance with § 179.15 be-
fore being put into service.

286
Minimum
Bursting Test
DOT Specifica- plate Bottom Bottom References
Insulation pressure pressure
tion 1 thickness outlet washout (179.201 - ***)
(psig) (psig)
(inches)
111A60ALW1 ... Optional .......... 240 12 ⁄ 60 Optional .......... Optional .......... 6(a).
111A60ALW2 ... Optional .......... 240 12 ⁄ 60 No ................... Optional.
111A60W1 ....... Optional .......... 240 ⁄
7 16 60 Optional .......... Optional .......... 6(a).
111A60W2 ....... Optional .......... 240 ⁄
7 16 60 No ................... Optional.
111A60W5 ....... Optional .......... 240 ⁄
7 16 60 No ................... No ................... 3, 6(b).
111A60W6 ....... Optional .......... 240 7⁄16 60 Optional .......... Optional .......... 4, 5, 6(a), 6(c).
111A60W7 ....... Optional .......... 240 7⁄16 60 No ................... No ................... 4, 5, 6(a).
111A100ALW1 Optional .......... 500 5⁄8 100 Optional .......... Optional .......... 6(a).
111A100ALW2 Optional .......... 500 5⁄8 100 No ................... Optional.
111A100W1 ..... Optional .......... 500 7⁄16 100 Optional .......... Optional .......... 6(a).
111A100W2 ..... Optional .......... 500 7⁄16 100 No ................... Optional.
111A100W3 ..... Yes ................. 500 7⁄16 100 Optional .......... Optional .......... 6(a).
111A100W4 ..... Yes (see 500 7⁄16 100 No ................... No ................... 6(a), 8, 10.
179.201–11).
111A100W5 ..... Optional .......... 500 ⁄
7 16 100 No ................... No ................... 3.
111A100W6 ..... Optional .......... 500 ⁄
7 16 100 Optional .......... Optional .......... 4, 5, 6(a) and 6(c).
111A100W7 ..... Optional .......... 500 ⁄
7 16 100 No ................... No ................... 4, 5, 6(c).
1 Tanks marked ‘‘ALW’’ are constructed from aluminum alloy plate; ‘‘AN’’ nickel plate; ‘‘CW,’’ ‘‘DW,’’ ‘‘EW,’’ ‘‘W6,’’ and ‘‘W7’’
high alloy steel or manganese-molybdenum steel plate; and those marked ‘‘BW’’ or ‘‘W5’’ must have an interior lining that con-
forms to § 179.201–3.
[Amdt. 179–52, 61 FR 28680, June 5, 1996, as amended by 66 FR 45390, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 48571,
Aug. 14, 2003]
§ 179.201–2 [Reserved] oxidation, moisture, and all foreign

matter during the lining operation.
§ 179.201–3 Lined tanks. (3) Other approved lining materials
(a) Rubber-lined tanks. (1) Each tank may be used provided the material is
or each compartment thereof must be resistant to the corrosive or solvent ac-
lined with acid-resistant rubber or tion of the lading in the liquid or gas
other approved rubber compound vul- phase and is suitable for the service
canized or bonded directly to the metal temperatures.
tank, to provide a nonporous laminated (b) Before a tank car tank is lined
lining, at least 5⁄32-inch thick, except with rubber, or other rubber compound,
overall rivets and seams formed by riv- a report certifying that the tank and
eted attachments in the lining must be its equipment have been brought into
double thickness. The rubber lining compliance with spec. DOT-111A60W5
must overlap at least 11⁄2 inches at all or 111A100W5 must be furnished by car
edges which must be straight and be owner to the party who is to apply the
beveled to an angle of approximately lining. A copy of this report in ap-
45°, or butted edges of lining must be
proved form, certifying that tank has
sealed with a 3-inch minimum strip of
been lined in compliance with all re-
lining having 45° beveled edges.
quirements of one of the above speci-
(2) As an alternate method, the lining
may be joined with a skived butt seam fications, must be furnished by party
then capped with a separate strip of lining tank to car owner. Reports of
lining 3 inches wide having 45° beveled the latest lining application must be
edges. An additional rubber reinforcing retained by the car owner until the
pad at least 41⁄2 feet square and at least next relining has been accomplished
1⁄2-inch thick must be applied by vul- and recorded.
canizing to the lining on bottom of (c) All rivet heads on inside of tank
tank directly under the manway open- must be buttonhead, or similar shape,
ing. The edges of the rubber pad must and of uniform size. The under surface
be beveled to an angle of approxi- of heads must be driven tight against
mately 45°. An opening in this pad for the plate. All plates, castings and rivet
sump is permitted. No lining must be heads on the inside of the tank must be
under tension when applied except due calked. All projecting edges of plates,
to conformation over rivet heads. Inte- castings and rivet heads on the inside
rior of tank must be free from scale, of the tank must be rounded and free
287
§ 179.201–4 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
from fins and other irregular projec- 7(d), Footnote 2. Tanks and attach-
tions. Castings must be free from po- ments welded directly thereto, fab-
rosity. ricated from ASTM A 240/A 240M Type
(d) All surfaces of attachments or fit- 304L or Type 316L materials are not re-
tings and their closures exposed to the quired to be postweld heat treated.
lading must be covered with at least 1⁄8- (b) Tanks and attachments welded di-
inch acid resistant material. Attach- rectly thereto, fabricated from ASTM
ments made of metal not affected by A 240/A 240M Type 304L and Type 316
the lading need not be covered with materials must be tested to dem-
rubber or other acid resistant material. onstrate that they possess the corro-
(e) Hard rubber or polyvinyl chloride sion resistance specified in § 179.200–
may be used for pressure retaining 7(d), Footnote 2.
parts of safety vents provided the ma- [68 FR 75762, Dec. 31, 2003]
terial is resistant to the corrosive or
solvent action of the lading in the liq- § 179.201–6 Manways and manway clo-
uid or gas phase and is suitable for the sures.
service temperatures. (a) The manway cover for spec. DOT
(f) Polyvinyl chloride lined tanks. 104W, 111A60–ALW1, 111A60W1,
Tank car tanks or each compartment 111A100ALW1, 111A–100W1, 111A100W3,
thereof may be lined with elastomeric or 111A100W6 must be designed to make
polyvinyl chloride having a minimum it impossible to remove the cover while
lining thickness of three thirty-seconds the interior of the tank is subjected to
inch. pressure.
(g) Polyurethane lined tanks. Tank (b) The manway cover for spec. DOT
car tanks or each compartment thereof 11A60W5, or 111A100W5 must be made of
may be lined with elastomeric poly- a suitable metal. The top, bottom and
urethane having a minimum lining edge of manway cover must be acid re-
thickness of one-sixteenth inch. sistant material covered as prescribed
in § 179.201–3. Through-bolt holes must
[Amdt. 179–10, 36 FR 21352, Nov. 6, 1971, as
amended at 66 FR 45186, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR be lined with acid resistant material at
48571, Aug. 14, 2003] least one-eighth inch in thickness.
Cover made of metal not affected by
§ 179.201–4 Material. the lading need not be acid resistant
material covered.
All fittings, tubes, and castings and
(c) The manway ring and cover for
all projections and their closures, ex-
specifications DOT-103CW, 103DW,
cept for protective housing, must also
103EW, 111360W7, or 11A100W6 must be
meet the requirements specified in
made of the metal and have the same
ASTM A 262 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
inspection procedures specified in AAR
chapter), except that when preparing
Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix
the specimen for testing the carburized
M, M3.03 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
surface may be finished by grinding or
chapter).
machining.
[Amdt. 179–10, 36 FR 21353, Nov. 6, 1971; 66 FR
[68 FR 75762, Dec. 31, 2003] 45186, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 48571, Aug. 14, 2003;
68 FR 75762, Dec. 31, 2003]
§ 179.201–5 Postweld heat treatment
and corrosion resistance. § 179.201–8 Sampling device and ther-
(a) Tanks and attachments welded di- mometer well.
rectly thereto must be postweld heat (a) Sampling valve and thermometer
treated as a unit at the proper tem- well are not specification require-
perature except as indicated below. ments. When used, they must be of ap-
Tanks and attachments welded directly proved design, made of metal not sub-
thereto fabricated from ASTM A 240/A ject to rapid deterioration by lading,
240M (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- and must withstand a pressure of 100
chapter) Type 430A, Type 304 and Type psig without leakage. Interior pipes of
316 materials must be postweld heat the sampling valve must be equipped
treated as a unit and must be tested to with excess flow valves of an approved
demonstrate that they possess the cor- design. Interior pipe of thermometer
rosion resistance specified in § 179.200– well must be closed by an approved
288
valve attached close to fitting where it ing requirements prescribed in

passes through the tank and closed by § 179.24(a) instead of into the metal of
a screw plug. Other approved arrange- the tank or immediately below the
ments that permit testing thermom- stamped marks specified in § 179.200–
eter well for leaks without complete 24(a).
removal of the closure may be used.
(b) [Reserved]
FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967. Amended at 77 FR 37985,
[Amdt. 179–10, 36 FR 21348, Nov. 6, 1971, as June 25, 2012]
amended at 66 FR 45390, Aug. 28, 2001]
§ 179.201–11 Insulation.
§ 179.201–9 Gauging device.
(a) Insulation shall be of sufficient
A gauging device of an approved de- thickness so that the thermal conduct-
sign must be applied to permit deter- ance at 60 °F. is not more than 0.075
mining the liquid level of the lading. Btu per hour, per square foot, per de-
The gauging device must be made of gree F. temperature differential.
materials not subject to rapid deterio- (b) [Reserved]
ration by the lading. When the interior
pipe of the gauging device provides a § 179.202 Individual specification re-
means for passage of the lading from quirements applicable to DOT–117
the interior to the exterior of the tank, tank car tanks.
it must be equipped with an excess flow
valve of an approved design. If the § 179.202–1 Applicability.
opening for passage of lading through Each tank built under these speci-
the gauging device is not more than fications must conform to the general
0.060 inch diameter an excess flow valve requirements of § 179.200 and the pre-
is not required. The gauging device scriptive standards in §§ 179.202–1
must be provided with a protective through 179.202–11, or the performance
housing. standard requirements of § 179.202–12.
[Amdt. 179–10, 36 FR 21353, Nov. 6, 1971]
[80 FR 26749, May 8, 2015]
§ 179.201–10 Water capacity marking.
§ 179.202–2 [Reserved]
(a) Water capacity of the tank in
pounds stamped plainly and perma- § 179.202–3 Approval to operate at
nently in letters and figures at least 3⁄8 286,000 gross rail load (GRL).
inch high into the metal of the tank
A tank car may be loaded to a gross
immediately below the stamped marks
weight on rail of up to 286,000 pounds
specified in § 179.200–24(a). This mark
(129,727 kg) upon approval by the Asso-
shall also be stenciled on the jacket
ciate Administrator for Safety, Federal
immediately below the dome platform
Railroad Administration (FRA). See
and directly behind or within 3 feet of
§ 179.13.
the right or left side of the ladder, or
ladders, if there is a ladder on each side [80 FR 26749, May 8, 2015]
of the tank, in letters and figures at
least 11⁄2 inches high as follows: § 179.202–4 Thickness of plates.
WATER CAPACITY
The wall thickness after the forming
of the tank shell and heads must be, at
000000 Pounds a minimum, 9/16 of an inch AAR TC–128
Grade B, normalized steel, in accord-
(b) After July 25, 2012, authorized ance with § 179.200–7(b).
DOT non-pressure tank cars that com-
ply with this section and are equipped [80 FR 26749, May 8, 2015]
with stainless steel identification
plates may have the water capacity of § 179.202–5 Tank head puncture resist-
the tank in pounds prescribed in the ance system.
first sentence of paragraph (a) of this The DOT–117 specification tank car
section stamped plainly and perma- must have a tank head puncture resist-
nently on their identification plate in ance system in conformance with
conformance with the applicable mark- § 179.16(c). The full height head shields
289
§ 179.202–6 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
must have a minimum thickness of 1⁄2 of a carbon steel tank and the inside
inch. surface of a carbon steel jacket.
[80 FR 26749, May 8, 2015] [80 FR 26749, May 8, 2015]
§ 179.202–6 Thermal protection system. § 179.202–8 Bottom outlets.

The DOT Specification 117 tank car If the tank car is equipped with a
must have a thermal protection sys- bottom outlet, the handle must be re-
tem. The thermal protection system moved prior to train movement or be
must: designed with protection safety sys-
(a) Conform to § 179.18 of this part; tem(s) to prevent unintended actuation
(b) Be equipped with a thermal pro- during train accident scenarios.
tection blanket with at least 1⁄2-inch-
thick material that meets § 179.18(c) of [80 FR 26749, May 8, 2015]
this part; and
(c) Include a reclosing pressure relief § 179.202–9 Top fittings protection.
device in accordance with § 173.31 of The tank car tank must be equipped
this subchapter. with top fittings protection conforming
to AAR Specifications for Tank Cars,
[81 FR 53957, Aug. 15, 2016]
appendix E paragraph 10.2.1 (IBR, see
§ 179.202–7 Jackets. § 171.7 of this subchapter).
The entire thermal protection sys- [80 FR 26749, May 8, 2015]
tem must be covered with a metal
jacket of a thickness not less than 11 § 179.202–11 Individual specification
gauge A1011 steel or equivalent; and requirements.
flashed around all openings so as to be In addition to § 179.200, the individual
weather tight. A protective coating specification requirements are as fol-
must be applied to the exterior surface lows:
Bursting Minimum plate Test pressure
DOT specification Insulation pressure thickness Bottom outlet
(psig)
(psig) (Inches)
117A100W ........................... Optional ............................... 500 9/16 100 Optional.
[80 FR 26749, May 8, 2015] 12-inch indenter with a weight of

286,000 pounds.
§ 179.202–12 Performance standard re- (2) Minimum head impact speed: 18
quirements (DOT–117P).
mph when impacted at the center of
(a) Approval. Design, testing, and the head by a rigid 12-inch by 12-inch
modeling results must be reviewed and indenter with a weight of 286,000
approved by the Associate Adminis- pounds.
trator for Railroad Safety/Chief Safety (d) Thermal protection systems. The
Officer, Federal Railroad Administra- tank car must be equipped with a ther-
tion (FRA), 1200 New Jersey Ave. SE., mal protection system. The thermal
Washington, DC 20590. protection system must be equivalent
(b) Approval to operate at 286,000 gross to the performance standard prescribed
rail load (GRL). In addition to the rein § 179.18 and include a reclosing pres-
quirements of paragraph (a) of this sec- sure relief device in accordance with
tion, a tank car may be loaded to a
§ 173.31 of this subchapter.
gross weight on rail of up to 286,000
(e) Bottom outlet. If the tank car is
pounds (129,727 kg) upon approval by
the Associate Administrator for Safe- equipped with a bottom outlet, the
ty, Federal Railroad Administration handle must be removed prior to train
(FRA). See § 179.13. movement or be designed with protec-
(c) Puncture resistance. (1) Minimum tion safety system(s) to prevent unin-
side impact speed: 12 mph when im- tended actuation during train accident
pacted at the longitudinal and vertical scenarios.
center of the shell by a rigid 12-inch by
290
(f) Top fittings protection. The tank side surface of a carbon steel jacket
car tank must be equipped with top fit- must be given a protective coating.
tings protection conforming to AAR (g) Bottom outlets. If the tank car is
Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix equipped with a bottom outlet, the
E paragraph 10.2.1 (IBR, see § 171.7 of handle must be removed prior to train
this subchapter). movement or be designed with protec-
[80 FR 26749, May 8, 2015, as amended at 81 tion safety system(s) to prevent unin-
FR 53957, Aug. 15, 2016; 83 FR 48401, Sept. 25, tended actuation during train accident
2018] scenarios.
(h) Top fittings protection—(1) Protec-
§ 179.202–13 Retrofit standard require- tive housing. Except as provided in
ments (DOT–117R). §§ 179.202–13(h)(2) and (3) of this para-
(a) Applicability. Each tank retrofit graph, top fittings on DOT Specifica-
under these specifications must con- tion 117R tank cars must be located in-
form to the general requirements of side a protective housing not less than
§ 179.200 and the prescriptive standards 12-inch in thickness and constructed of
in § 179.202–13, or the performance a material having a tensile strength
standard requirements of § 179.202–12. not less than 65 kpsi and must conform
(b) Approval to operate at 286,000 gross to all of the following conditions:
rail load (GRL). A tank car may be (i) The protective housing must have
loaded to a gross weight on rail of up a height exceeding the tallest valve or
to 286,000 pounds (129,727 kg) upon ap- fitting which requires protection and
proval by the Associate Administrator the height of a valve or fitting within
for Safety, Federal Railroad Adminis- the protective housing must be kept to
tration (FRA). See § 179.13. the minimum size compatible to allow
(c) Thickness of plates. The wall thick- for proper operation.
ness after forming of the tank shell and (ii) The protective housing or cover
heads must be, at a minimum, 7/16 of may not reduce the flow capacity of a
an inch, and constructed with steel au- pressure relief device below the min-
thorized by the HMR at the time of imum required.
construction. (iii) The protective housing must pro-
(d) Tank head puncture resistance sys- vide a means of drainage with a min-
tem. The DOT–117R specification tank imum flow area equivalent to six (6) 1-
car must have a tank head puncture re- inch diameter weep holes.
sistance system in conformance with (iv) When connected to the nozzle or
§ 179.16(c). The full height head shields fitting cover plate, and subject to a
must have a minimum thickness of 1⁄2 horizontal force applied perpendicular
inch. to and uniformly over the projected
(e) Thermal protection system. (1) The plane of the protective housing, the
DOT Specification 117R tank car must tensile connection strength of the pro-
have a thermal protection system. The tective housing must be designed to
thermal protection system must con- be—
form to § 179.18 of this part and include (A) no greater than 70 percent of the
a reclosing pressure relief device in ac- nozzle to tank tensile connection
cordance with § 173.31 of this sub- strength;
chapter. (B) no greater than 70 percent of the
(2) A non-jacketed tank car modified cover plate to nozzle connection
to the DOT Specification 117R must be strength; and
equipped with a thermal protection (C) no less than either 40 percent of
blanket with at least 1⁄2-inch-thick ma- the nozzle to tank tensile connection
terial that meets § 179.18(c) of this part. strength or the shear strength of twen-
(f) Jackets. The entire thermal protec- ty (20) 12-inch bolts.
tion system must be covered with a (2) Pressure relief devices. (i) The pres-
metal jacket of a thickness not less sure relief device(s) must be located in-
than 11 gauge A1011 steel or equivalent; side the protective housing, unless
and flashed around all openings so as space does not allow for placement
to be weather tight. The exterior sur- within a housing. If multiple pressure
face of a carbon steel tank and the in- relief devices are installed, no more
291
§§ 179.203—179.202–22 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
than one (1) may be located outside of § 179.220–4 Insulation.

a protective housing.
The annular space between the inner
(ii) The height of a pressure relief de- container and the outer shell must con-
vice located outside of a protective tain an approved insulation material.
housing in accordance with paragraph
(h)(2)(i) of this section may not exceed [Amdt. 179–9, 36 FR 21340, Nov. 6, 1971]
the tank car jacket by more than 12
inches. § 179.220–6 Thickness of plates.
(iii) The highest point of a closure of (a) The wall thickness, after forming
any unused pressure relief device noz- of the inner container shell and 2:1 el-
zle may not exceed the tank car jacket lipsoidal heads must be not less than
by more than six (6) inches. specified in § 179.221–1, or not less than
(3) Alternative. As an alternative to that calculated by the following for-
the protective housing requirements in mula:
paragraph (h)(1) of this section, the
tank car may be equipped with a sys-
tem that prevents the release of con-
tents from any top fitting under acci-
dent conditions where any top fitting Where:
may be sheared off. d = Inside diameter in inches;
E = 0.9 welded joint efficiency; except E = 1.0
[80 FR 26749, May 8, 2015, as amended at 81 for seamless heads;
FR 53957, Aug. 15, 2016; 83 FR 48401, Sept. 25, P = Minimum required bursting pressure in
2018] psig;
S = Minimum tensile strength of plate mate-
§§ 179.203—179.202–22 [Reserved] rial in p.s.i. as prescribed in AAR Speci-
fications for Tank Cars, appendix M,
§ 179.220 General specifications appli- Table M1;
cable to nonpressure tank car tanks t = Minimum thickness of plate in inches
consisting of an inner container after forming.
supported within an outer shell
(class DOT-115). (b) The wall thickness after forming
of the inner container heads, if flanged
§ 179.220–1 Tanks built under these and dished, must be not less than speci-
specifications must meet the re- fied in § 179.221–1, or not less than that
quirements of §§ 179.220 and
calculated by the following formula:
179.221.
§ 179.220–3 Type.
(a) Tanks built under these specifica-
tions must consist of an inner con- Where:
tainer, a support system for the inner E = 0.9 welded joint efficiency; except E = 1.0
container, and an outer shell. for seamless heads;
(b) The inner container must be a fu- L = Main inside radius to which head is
sion welded tank of circular cross sec- dished, measured on concave side in
tion with formed heads designed con- inches;
vex outward and must have a manway P = Minimum required bursting pressure in
psig;
on top of the tank as prescribed herein.
S = Minimum tensile strength of plate mate-
When the inner container is divided
rial in psi as prescribed in AAR Speci-
into compartments, each compartment fications for Tank Cars, appendix M,
must be considered a separate con- Table M1 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
tainer. chapter);
(c) The outer shell must be a fusion t = Minimum thickness of plate in inches
welded tank with formed heads de- after forming.
signed convex outward. (c) The wall thickness after forming
EC13NO91.036</MATH>
[Amdt. 179–9, 36 FR 21340, Nov. 6, 1971] of the cylindrical section and heads of
the outer shell must be not less than
seven-sixteenths of an inch.
292
EC13NO91.035</MATH>
(d) See § 179.220–9 for plate thickness Minimum Minimum

requirements for inner container when elongation
tensile in 2 inches
divided into compartments. strength
(p.s.i.) weld metal
welded
[Amdt. 179–9, 36 FR 21340, Nov. 6, 1971, as (longitu-
condition1 dinal)
75762, Dec. 31, 2003] ASTM A 240/A 240M (incor-
porated by reference; see
§ 179.220–7 Materials. § 171.7 of this subchapter),
Type 304 .................................... 75,000 30
(a) The plate material used to fab- ASTM A 240/A 240M (incor-
ricate the inner container and nozzles porated by reference; see
must meet one of the following speci- § 171.7 of this subchapter),
Type 304L .................................. 70,000 30
fications and with the indicated min- ASTM A 240/A 240M (incor-
imum tensile strength and elongation porated by reference; see
in the welded condition. § 171.7 of this subchapter),
Type 316 .................................... 74,000 30
(b) Carbon steel plate: The maximum
ASTM A 240/A 240M (incor-
allowable carbon content must be 0.31 porated by reference; see
percent when the individual specifica- § 171.7 of this subchapter),
tion allows carbon content greater Type 316L .................................. 70,000 30
than this amount. The plates may be 1 Maximum stresses to be used in calculations.
clad with other approved materials.
(e) Manganese-molybdenum steel
Minimum Minimum plate: Manganese-molybdenum steel
elongation
tensile in 2 inches plate must be suitable for fusion weld-
strength
Specifications (p.s.i.) (percent) ing and must comply with the fol-
weld metal
welded lowing specification (IBR, see § 171.7 of
(longitu-
condition 1 dinal) this subchapter):
AAR TC 128, Gr. B ....................... 81,000 19 Minimum
ASTM A 516 2, Gr. 70 ................... 70,000 20 Minimum elongation
tensile in 2 inches
1 Maximum stresses to be used in calculations. strength
2 This specification is incorporated by reference (IBR, see (p.s.i.) weld metal
§ 171.7 of this subchapter). welded (longitu-
condition 1 dinal)
(c) Aluminum alloy plate: Aluminum
alloy plate must be suitable for weld- ASTM A 302, Gr. B ....................... 80,000 20
ing and comply with one of the fol- 1 Maximum stresses to be used in calculations.
lowing specifications (IBR, see § 171.7 of
this subchapter): * * * (f) Plate materials used to fabricate
the outer shell and heads must be those
Minimum Minimum listed in paragraphs (b), (c), (d), or (e)
elongation
tensile in 2 inches of this section. The maximum allow-
strength
Specifications (p.s.i.) (percent) able carbon content must be 0.31 per-
weld metal
welded cent when the individual specification
(longitu-
condition3 4 dinal) allows carbon content greater than
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5052 1 ............. 25,000 18 this amount. The plates may be clad
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5083 2 ............. 38,000 16 with other approved materials.
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5086 1 ............. 35,000 14 (g) All appurtenances on the inner
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5154 1 ............. 30,000 18 container in contact with the lading
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5254 1 ............. 30,000 18
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5454 1 ............. 31,000 18
must be made of approved material
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5652 1 ............. 25,000 18 compatible with the plate material of
1 For fabrication, the parent plate material may be 0 H112,
the inner container. These appur-
or H32 temper, but design calculations must be based on the tenances must not be subject to rapid
minimum tensile strength shown. deterioration by the lading, or must be
2 0 temper only.
3 Weld filler metal 5556 must not be used. coated or lined with suitable corrosion
resistant material. See AAR Specifica-
(d) High alloy steel plate: High alloy tions for Tank Cars, appendix M, M4.05
steel plate must comply with one of

the following specifications (IBR, see
§ 171.7 of this subchapter):
293
§ 179.220–8 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
for approved material specifications for must be not less than 11⁄2 inches or
castings for fittings. three times the plate thickness, which-
[Amdt. 179–9, 36 FR 21340, Nov. 6, 1971, as
ever is greater.
amended by Amdt. 179–28, 46 FR 49906, Oct. 8, [Amdt. 179–9, 36 FR 21341, Nov. 6, 1971]
1981; Amdt. 179–40, 52 FR 13048, Apr. 20, 1987;
Amdt. 179–52, 61 FR 28681, June 5, 1996; 66 FR § 179.220–10 Welding.
45186, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51660, Aug. 8, 2002;
68 FR 75762, Dec. 31, 2003] (a) All joints must be fusion welded
in compliance with AAR Specifications
§ 179.220–8 Tank heads. for Tank Cars, appendix W (IBR, see
(a) Tank heads of the inner con- § 171.7 of this subchapter). Welding pro-
tainer, inner container compartments cedures, welders, and fabricators shall
and outer shell must be of approved be approved.
contour, and may be flanged and dished (b) Radioscopy of the outer shell is
or ellipsoidal for pressure on concave not a specification requirement.
side. (c) Welding is not permitted on or to
(b) Flanged and dished heads must ductile iron or malleable iron fittings.
have main inside radius not exceeding [Amdt. 179–9, 36 FR 21341, Nov. 6, 1971, as
10 feet and inside knuckle radius must amended at 68 FR 75762, Dec. 31, 2003]
be not less than 33⁄4 inches for steel and
alloy steel tanks nor less than 5 inches § 179.220–11 Postweld heat treatment.
for aluminum alloy tanks. (a) Postweld heat treatment of the
(c) Ellipsoidal heads must be an ellip- inner container is not a specification
soid of revolution in which the major requirement.
axis must equal the diameter of the (b) Postweld heat treatment of the
shell and the minor axis must be one- cylindrical portions of the outer shell
half the major axis. to which the anchorage or draft sills
[Amdt. 179–9, 36 FR 21341, Nov. 6, 1971] are attached must comply with AAR
Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix
§ 179.220–9 Compartment tanks. W (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter).
(a) The inner container may be di- (c) When cold formed heads are used
vided into compartments by inserting on the outer shell they must be heat
interior heads, or by fabricating each treated before welding to shell if
compartment as a separate container postweld heat treatment is not prac-
and joining with a cylinder, or by fabri- ticable due to assembly procedures.
cating each compartment as a separate [Amdt. 179–9, 36 FR 21341, Nov. 6, 1971, as
tank without a joining cylinder. Each amended at 68 FR 75762, Dec. 31, 2003]
compartment must be capable of with-
standing, without evidence of yielding § 179.220–13 Inner container manway
or leakage, the required test pressure nozzle and cover.
applied in each compartment sepa- (a) Inner container manway nozzle
rately, or in any combination of com- must be of approved design with access
partments. opening at least 18 inches inside diame-
(b) When the inner container is di- ter, or at least 14 inches by 18 inches
vided into compartments by fabri- obround or oval.
cating each compartment as a separate (b) Manway covers must be of ap-
container and joining with a cylinder, proved type. Design must provide a se-
the cylinder must have a plate thick- cure closure of the manway and must
ness not less than that required for the make it impossible to remove the cover
inner container shell and must be ap- while the tank interior is under pres-
plied to the outside surface of the sure.
straight flange portion of the container (c) All joints between manway covers
head. The cylinder must fit the and their seats must be made tight
straight flange tightly for a distance of against leakage of vapor and liquid by
at least two times the plate thickness, use of suitable gaskets.
or 1 inch, whichever is greater and (d) Manway covers must be cast,
must be joined to the straight flange forged, or fabricated metal complying

by a full fillet weld. Distance from fil- with subsection § 179.220–7(g) of this
let weld seam to container head seam section.
294
(e) A seal must be provided between § 179.220–16 Expansion capacity.

the inner container manway nozzle and Expansion capacity must be provided
the opening in the outer shell. in the shell of the inner container as
[Amdt. 179–9, 36 FR 21341, Nov. 6, 1971] prescribed in § 179.221–1.
[Amdt. 179–9, 36 FR 21341, Nov. 6, 1971]
§ 179.220–14 Openings in the tanks.
Openings in the inner container and § 179.220–17 Gauging devices, top load-
the outer shell must be reinforced in ing and unloading devices, venting
compliance with AAR Specifications and air inlet devices.
for Tank Cars, appendix E (IBR, see (a) When installed, each device must
§ 171.7 of this subchapter). In deter- be of approved design which will pre-
mining the required reinforcement vent interchange with any other fix-
area for openings in the outer shell, t ture and must be tightly closed. Each
shall be one-fourth inch. unloading pipe must be securely an-
chored within the inner container.
[68 FR 75763, Dec. 31, 2003] Each inner container or compartment
thereof may be equipped with one sepa-
§ 179.220–15 Support system for inner rate air connection.
container.
(b) When the characteristics of the
(a) The inner container must be sup- commodity for which the car is author-
ported within the outer shell by a sup- ized require these devices to be
port system of adequate strength and equipped with valves or fittings to per-
ductility at its operating temperature mit the loading and unloading of the
to support the inner container when contents, these devices including
filled with liquid lading to any level. valves, shall be provided with a protec-
The support system must be designed tive housing except when plug or ball-
to support, without yielding, impact type valves with operating handles re-
loads producing accelerations of the moved are used. Provision must be
following magnitudes and directions made for closing pipe connections of
when the inner container is loaded so valves.
that the car is at its rail load limit, (c) Inner container may be equipped
and the car is equipped with a conven- with a vacuum relief valve of approved
tional AAR Specification M–901 draft design. Protective housing is not re-
gear. quired.
Longitudinal...............................................7G (d) When a gauging device is required
Transverse ..................................................3G in § 179.221–1, an outage scale visible
Vertical ......................................................3G through the manway opening must be
(b) The longitudinal acceleration provided. If loading devices are applied
may be reduced to 3G where a cush- to permit tank loading with cover
ioning device of approved design, which closed, a telltale pipe may be provided.
has been tested to demonstrate its abil- The telltail pipe must be capable of de-
ity to limit body forces to 400,000 termining that required outage is pro-
pounds maximum at a 10 miles per vided. The pipe must be equipped with
1⁄4-inch maximum, NPT control valve
hour impact, is used between the cou-
mounted outside tank and enclosed
pler and the tank structure. The sup-
within a protective housing. Other ap-
port system must be of approved design
proved devices may be used in place of
and the inner container must be ther-
an outage scale or a telltale pipe.
mally isolated from the outer shell to
(e) The bottom of the tank shell may
the best practical extent. The inner
be equipped with a sump or siphon
container and outer shell must be per-
bowl, or both, welded or pressed into
manently bonded to each other elec- the shell. These sumps or siphon bowls,
trically either by the support system if applied, are not limited in size and
used, piping, or by a separate electrical must be made of cast, forged, or fab-
connection of approved design. ricated metal. Each sump or siphon
[Amdt. 179–9, 36 FR 21341, Nov. 6, 1971, as bowl must be of good welding quality
amended by Amdt. 179–28, 46 FR 49906, Oct. 8, in conjunction with the metal of the
1981] tank shell. When the sump or siphon
295
§ 179.220–18 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
bowl is pressed in the bottom of the (2) Each bottom outlet must be pro-
tank shell, the wall thickness of the vided with a liquid tight closure at its
pressed section must not be less than lower end.
that specified for the shell. The section (3) The valve and its operating mech-
of a circular cross section tank to anism must be applied to the outside
which a sump or siphon bowl is at- bottom of the inner container. The
tached need not comply with the out- valve operating mechanism must be
of-roundness requirement specified in provided with a suitable locking ar-
appendix W, W14.06 of the AAR Speci- rangement to insure positive closure
fications for Tank Cars. Any portion of during transportation.
a sump or siphon bowl not forming a (4) Valve outlet nozzle and valve body
part of a cylinder of revolution must must be of cast, fabricated or forged
have walls of such thickness and must metal. If welded to inner container,
be so reinforced that the stresses in the they must be of good weldable quality
walls caused by a given internal pres- in conjunction with metal of tank.
sure are not greater than the circum- (5) To provide for the attachment of
ferential stress which would exist unloading connections, the bottom of
under the same internal pressure in the the main portion of the outlet nozzle or
wall of a tank of circular cross section valve body, or some fixed attachment
designed in accordance with §§ 179.220– thereto, must be provided with thread-
6(a) and 179.220–9. In no case shall the ed cap closure arrangement or bolted
wall thickness be less than that speci- flange closure arrangement having
fied in § 179.221–1. minimum 1-inch threaded pipe plug.
(f) Protective housing, when re- (6) If outlet nozzle and its closure ex-
quired, must be of approved material tends below the bottom of the outer
and must have cover and sidewalls not shell, a V-shaped breakage groove shall
less than 0.119 inch in thickness. be cut (not cast) in the upper part of
[Amdt. 179–9, 36 FR 21341, Nov. 6, 1971, as the outlet nozzle at a point imme-
amended at 69 FR 54047, Sept. 7, 2004] diately below the lowest part of the
valve closest to the tank. In no case
§ 179.220–18 Bottom outlets. may the nozzle wall thickness at the
(a) The inner container may be root of the ‘‘V’’ be more than 1⁄4-inch.
equipped with a bottom outlet of ap- The outlet nozzle or the valve body
proved design and an opening provided may be steam jacketed, in which case
in the outer shell of its access. If ap- the breakage groove or its equivalent
plied, the bottom outlet must comply must be below the steam chamber but
with the following requirements: above the bottom of the center sill con-
(1) The extreme projection of the bot- struction. If the outlet nozzle is not a
tom outlet equipment may not be more single piece or its exterior valves are
than that allowed by appendix E of the applied, provision shall be made for the
AAR Specifications for Tank Cars equivalent of the breakage groove. On
(IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). All cars without continuous center sills,
bottom outlet reducers and closures the breakage groove or its equivalent
and their attachments shall be secured may not be more than 15 inches below
to car by at at least 3⁄8-inch chain, or the outer shell. On cars with contin-
its equivalent, except that bottom out- uous center sills, the breakage groove
let closure plugs may be attached by or its equivalent must be above the
1⁄4-inch chain. When the bottom outlet bottom of the center sill construction.
closure is of the combination cap and (7) The valve body must be of a thick-
valve type, the pipe connection to the ness which will prevent distortion of
valve shall be closed by a plug, or cap. the valve seat or valve by any change
The bottom outlet equipment should in contour of the shell resulting from
include only the valve, reducers and expansion of lading, or other causes,
closures that are necessary for the at- and which will insure that accidental
tachment of unloading fixtures. The breakage of the outlet nozzle will occur
permanent attachment of supple- at or below the ‘‘V’’ groove, or its
mentary exterior fittings shall be ap- equivalent.

proved by the AAR Committee on Tank (8) The valve must have no wings or
Cars. stem projection below the ‘‘V’’ groove
296
or its equivalent. The valve and seat § 179.220–20 Reinforcements, when

must be readily accessible or remov- used, and appurtenances not other-
able for repairs, including grinding. wise specified.
(b) Inner container may be equipped All attachments to inner container
with bottom washout of approved de- and outer shell must be applied by ap-
sign. If applied, bottom washout must proved means.
comply with the following require-
[Amdt. 179–9, 36 FR 21342, Nov. 6, 1971]
ments:
(1) The extreme projection of the bot- § 179.220–22 Closure for openings.
tom washout equipment may not be
more than that allowed by appendix E (a) All plugs must be solid, with NPT
of the AAR Specifications for Tank threads, and must be of a length which
Cars. will screw at least six threads inside
(2) Bottom washout must be of cast, the face of fitting or tank. Plugs, when
forged or fabricated metals. If it is inserted from the outside of the outer
shell tank heads, must have the letter
welded to the inner container, it must
‘‘S’’ at least three-eighths inch in size
be of good weldable quality in conjunc-
stamped with steel stamp or cast on
tion with metal of tank.
the outside surface to indicate the plug
(3) If washout nozzle extends below is solid.
the bottom of the outer shell, a V-
(b) Openings in the outer shell used
shaped breakage groove shall be cut
during construction for installation
(not cast) in the upper part of the noz- must be closed in an approved manner.
zle at a point immediately below the
lowest part of the inside closure seat or [Amdt. 179–9, 36 FR 21343, Nov. 6, 1971]
plug. In no case may the nozzle wall
thickness at the root of the ‘‘V’’ be § 179.220–23 Test of tanks.
more than 1⁄4-inch. Where the nozzle is (a) Each inner container or compart-
not a single piece, provisions shall be ment must be tested hydrostatically to
made for the equivalent of the break- the pressure specified in § 179.221–1. The
age groove. The nozzle must be of a temperature of the pressurizing me-
thickness to insure that accidental dium must not exceed 100 °F. during
breakage will occur at or below the the test. The container must hold the
‘‘V’’ groove or its equivalent. On cars prescribed pressure for at least 10 min-
without a continuous center sill, the utes without leakage or evidence of
breakage groove or its equivalent may distress. Safety relief devices must not
not be more than 15 inches below the be in place when the test is made.
outer shell. On cars with continuous (b) The inner container must be pres-
center sills, the breakage groove or its sure tested before installation within
equivalent must be above the bottom the outer shell. Items which, because of
of the center sill construction. assembly sequence, must be welded to
(4) The closure plug and seat must be inner container after its installation
readily accessible or removable for re- within outer shell must have their at-
pairs. tachment welds thoroughly inspected
by a nondestructive dye penetrant
(5) The closure of the washout nozzle
method or its equivalent.
must be equipped with a 3⁄4-inch solid
(c) Pressure testing of outer shell is
screw plug. Plug must be attached by
not a specification requirement.
at least a 1⁄4-inch chain.
(6) Joints between closures and their [Amdt. 179–9, 36 FR 21343, Nov. 6, 1971]
seats may be gasketed with suitable
material. § 179.220–24 Tests of pressure relief
valves.
[Amdt. 179–9, 36 FR 21342, Nov. 6, 1971, as
amended by Amdt. 179–40, 52 FR 13048, Apr.
Each safety relief valve must be test-
20, 1987; 68 FR 75763, Dec. 31, 2003] ed by air or gas for compliance with
§ 179.15 before being put into service.

[Amdt. 179–9, 36 FR 21343, Nov. 6, 1971, as
amended at 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997]
297
§ 179.220–25 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
§ 179.220–25 Stamping. scribed in § 179.24(a). Tank cars built

(a) To certify that the tank complies before July 25, 2012, may have the iden-
with all specification requirements, tification plates instead of or in addi-
each outer shell must be plainly and tion to the head stamping.
permanently stamped in letters and [Amdt. 179–9, 36 FR 21343, Nov. 6, 1971, as
figures at least 3⁄8-inch high into the amended at 77 FR 37986, June 25, 2012]
metal near the center of both outside
heads as follows: § 179.220–26 Stenciling.
Examples of required (a) The outer shell, or the jacket if
stamping the outer shell is insulated, must be
Specifications ................................ DOT-115A60W6. stenciled in compliance with AAR
Inner container: Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix
Material .................................. ASTM A240–316L.
Shell thickness ...................... Shell 0.167 in.
C (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter).
Head thickness ...................... Head 0.150 in. (b) Stenciling must be applied on
Tank builders initials .............. ABC. both sides of the outer shell or jacket
Date of original test ............... 00–0000.
Outer shell: near the center in letters and figures at
Material .................................. ASTM A285–C. least 11⁄2 inches high to indicate the
Tank builders initials .............. WYZ. safe upper temperature limit, if appli-
Car assembler (if other than inner DEF.
container or outer shell build- cable, for the inner tank, insulation,
ers). and the support system.
[Amdt. 179–9, 36 FR 21343, Nov. 6, 1971, as
(b) After July 25, 2012, newly con-
amended at 68 FR 75763, Dec. 31, 2003]
structed DOT tank cars must have
their DOT specification and other re- § 179.221 Individual specification re-
quired information stamped plainly quirements applicable to tank car
and permanently on stainless steel tanks consisting of an inner con-
identification plates in conformance tainer supported within an outer
with the applicable requirements pre- shell.

Minimum
Bursting Test
plate Bottom Bottom Reference
DOT specification Insulation pressure pressure
thickness outlet washout (179.221–***)
(psig) (psig)
(inches)
115A60ALW ............ Yes ................. 240 3 16⁄ 60 Optional. Optional.

115A60W1 .............. Yes ................. 240 18 ⁄ 60 Optional .......... Optional .......... 1
115A60W6 .............. Yes ................. 240 18 ⁄ 60 Optional .......... Optional .......... 1
[Amdt. 170–52, 61 FR 28681, June 5, 1996, as amended at 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997; 66 FR 45390,
Aug. 28, 2001]
298
Subpart E—Specifications for that specified in § 179.301 and shall be

Multi-Unit Tank Car Tanks such that at the tank test pressure the
maximum fiber stress in the wall of the
(Classes DOT-106A and tank will not exceed 15,750 p.s.i. as cal-
110AW) culated by the following formula:
§ 179.300 General specifications appli- s=[p(1.3D2 + 0.4d2] / (D2¥d2)
cable to multi-unit tank car tanks
designed to be removed from car where:
structure for filling and emptying d = inside diameter in inches;
(Classes DOT-106A and 110AW). D = outside diameter in inches;
p = tank test pressure in psig;
§ 179.300–1 Tanks built under these s = wall stress in psig
specifications shall meet the re-
quirements of §§ 179.300 and (c) If plates are clad with material
179.301. having tensile strength at least equal
to the base plate, the cladding may be
§ 179.300–3 Type and general require- considered a part of the base plate
ments. when determining the thickness. If
(a) Tanks built under this specifica- cladding material does not have tensile
tion shall be cylindrical, circular in strength at least equal to the base
cross section, and shall have heads of plate, the base plate alone shall meet
approved design. All openings shall be the thickness requirements.
located in the heads.
[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964, as amended by
(b) Each tank shall have a water ca-
Order 71, 31 FR 9083, July 1, 1966. Redesig-
pacity of at least 1500 pounds and not nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967; 66 FR 45186,
more than 2600 pounds. 45390, Aug. 28, 2001]
(c) For tanks made in foreign coun-
tries, a chemical analysis of materials § 179.300–7 Materials.
and all tests as specified shall be car- (a) Steel plate material used to fab-
ried out within the limits of the United ricate tanks must conform with the
States under the supervision of a com- following specifications with the indi-
petent and impartial inspector. cated minimum tensile strength and
§ 179.300–4 Insulation. elongation in the welded condition.
However, the maximum allowable car-
(a) Tanks shall not be insulated. bon content for carbon steel must not
(b) [Reserved] exceed 0.31 percent, although the indi-
§ 179.300–6 Thickness of plates. vidual ASTM specification may allow
for a greater amount of carbon. The
(a) For class DOT-110A tanks, the plates may be clad with other approved
wall thickness after forming of the cy- materials:
lindrical portion of the tank must not
be less than that specified in § 179.301 Elongation
Tensile in 2 inches
nor that calculated by the following strength (percent)
formula: Specifications 2 (psi) welded welded con-
condition 1 dition 1 (lon-
(minimum) gitudinal)
(minimum)
ASTM A 240/A 240M type 304 75,000 25

ASTM A 240/A 240M type 304L 70,000 25
Where: ASTM A 240/A 240M type 316 75,000 25
d = inside diameter in inches; ASTM A 240/A 240M type 316L 70,000 25
E = 1.0 welded joint efficiency; ASTM A 240/A 240M type 321 75,000 25
P = minimum required bursting pressure in ASTM A 285 Gr. A .................... 45,000 29
ASTM A 285 Gr. B .................... 50,000 20
psig;
ASTM A 285 Gr. C .................... 55,000 20
S = minimum tensile strength of plate mate- ASTM A 515/A 515M Gr. 65 ..... 65,000 20
rial in p.s.i. as prescribed in § 179.300–7; ASTM A 515/A 515M Gr. 70 ..... 70,000 20
t = minimum thickness of plate material in ASTM A 516/A 516M Gr. 70 ..... 70,000 20
inches after forming.
2 These specifications are incorporated by reference (IBR,

(b) For class DOT-106A tanks, the
see § 171.7 of this subchapter.)
wall thickness of the cylindrical por-
tion of the tank shall not be less than (b) [Reserved]
299
EC13NO91.037</MATH>
§ 179.300–8 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(c) All plates must have their heat pendix W, except that circumferential
number and the name or brand of the welds in tanks less than 36 inches in-
manufacturer legibly stamped on them side diameter need not be radiotaped.
at the rolling mill. (c) Forge-welded joints shall be thor-
oughly hammered or rolled to insure
[Amdt. 179–10, 36 FR 21355, Nov. 6, 1971, as
amended by Amdt. 179–42, 54 FR 38798, Sept. sound welds. The flanges of the heads
20, 1989; Amdt. 179–43, 55 FR 27642, July 5, shall be forge lapwelded to the shell
1990; Amdt. 179–52, 61 FR 28682, June 5, 1996; and then crimped inwardly toward the
Amdt. 179–52, 61 FR 50255, Sept. 25, 1996; center line at least one inch on the ra-
Amdt. 179–53, 61 FR 51342, Oct. 1, 1996; 68 FR dius. Welding and crimping must be ac-
75763, Dec. 31, 2003] complished in one heat.
§ 179.300–8 Tank heads. [29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32
FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, as amended by Amdt.
(a) Class DOT-110A tanks shall have 179–10, 36 FR 21355, Nov. 6, 1971; 68 FR 75763,
fusion-welded heads formed concave to Dec. 31, 2003]
pressure. Heads for fusion welding shall
be an ellipsoid of revolution 2:1 ratio of § 179.300–10 Postweld heat treatment.
major to minor axis. They shall be one After welding is complete, steel
piece, hot formed in one heat so as to tanks and all attachments welded
provide a straight flange at least 11⁄2 thereto, must be postweld heat treated
inches long. The thickness shall not be as a unit in compliance with the re-
less than that calculated by the fol- quirements of AAR Specifications for
lowing formula: Tank Cars, appendix W (IBR, see § 171.7
[68 FR 75763, Dec. 31, 2003]
where symbols are as defined in § 179.300–6(a). § 179.300–12 Protection of fittings.

(b) Class DOT-106A tanks must have (a) Tanks shall be of such design as
forged-welded heads, formed convex to will afford maximum protection to any
pressure. Heads for forge welding must fittings or attachment to the head in-
be torispherical with an inside radius cluding the housing referred to in
not greater than the inside diameter of § 179.300–12(b). Tank ends shall slope or
the shell. They must be one piece, hot curve inward toward the axis so that
formed in one heat so as to provide a the diameter at each end is at least 2
straight flange at least 4 inches long. inches less than the maximum diame-
They must have snug drive fit into the ter.
shell for forge welding. The wall thick- (b) Loading and unloading valves
ness after forming must be sufficient to shall be protected by a detachable pro-
meet the test requirements of § 179.300– tective housing of approved design
16 and to provide for adequate thread- which shall not project beyond the end
ing of openings. of the tank and shall be securely fas-
tened to the tank head. Pressure relief
FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt. devices shall not be covered by the
179–10, 36 FR 21355, Nov. 6, 1971] housing.
[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964, as amended at 68
§ 179.300–9 Welding. FR 57634, Oct. 6, 2003]
(a) Longitudinal joints must be fu-
sion welded. Head-to-shell joints must § 179.300–13 Venting, loading and un-
be forge welded on class DOT-106A loading valves.
tanks and fusion welded on class DOT- (a) Valves shall be of approved type,
110A tanks. Welding procedures, weld- made of metal not subject to rapid de-
ers and fabricators must be approved in terioration by lading, and shall with-
accordance with AAR Specifications stand tank test pressure without leak-
for Tank Cars, appendix W (IBR, see age. The valves shall be screwed di-
§ 171.7 of this subchapter). rectly into or attached by other ap-
(b) Fusion-welded joints must be in proved methods to one tank head. Pro-
compliance with the requirements of vision shall be made for closing outlet
AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, ap- connections of the valves.
300
EC13NO91.038</MATH>
(b) Threads for openings must be Na- shall burst at a pressure not exceeding
tional Gas Taper Threads (NGT) tapped that specified in § 179.301.
to gauge, clean cut, even and without (d) Fusible plugs shall function at a
checks. Taper threads must comply temperature not exceeding 175 °F. and
with § 178.61(h)(3)(i) and (h)(3)(ii). shall be vapor-tight at a temperature
Threads for the clean-out/inspection of not less than 130 °F.
ports of DOT Specification 110A multi- [29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964, as amended at 64
unit tank car tanks may be straight FR 51920, Sept. 27, 1999; 66 FR 45390, Aug. 28,
threads instead of taper threads. The 2001; 68 FR 75763, Dec. 31, 2003]
straight threads must meet the re-
quirements of § 178.61(h)(3)(i) and § 179.300–16 Tests of tanks.
(h)(3)(iii). Hex plugs may be secured to (a) After postweld heat treatment,
threaded boss ports using stainless tanks shall be subjected to hydrostatic
steel safety wire that must not fail expansion test in a water jacket, or by
during its intended use. other approved methods. No tank shall
have been subjected previously to in-
ternal pressure within 100 pounds of
FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967. Amended at 77 FR 37986,
June 25, 2012] the test pressure. Each tank shall be
tested to the pressure prescribed in
§ 179.300–14 Attachments not other- § 179.301. Pressure shall be maintained
wise specified. for 30 seconds and sufficiently longer to
insure complete expansion of tank.
Siphon pipes and their couplings on Pressure gage shall permit reading to
the inside of the tank head and lugs on accuracy of one percent. Expansion
the outside of the tank head for attach- gage shall permit reading of total ex-
ing the valve protective housing must pansion to accuracy of one percent. Ex-
be fusion-welded in place prior to pansion shall be recorded in cubic cm.
postweld heat treatment. All other fix- (1) No leaks shall appear and perma-
tures and appurtenances, except as spe- nent volumetric expansion shall not
cifically provided for, are prohibited. exceed 10 percent of total volumetric
[Amdt. 179–10, 36 FR 21355, Nov. 6, 1971] expansion at test pressure.
(2) [Reserved]
§ 179.300–15 Pressure relief devices. (b) After all fittings have been in-
stalled, each tank shall be subjected to
(a) Unless prohibited in part 173 of interior air pressure test of at least 100
this subchapter, tanks shall be psig under conditions favorable to de-
equipped with one or more relief detection of any leakage. No leaks shall
vices of approved type, made of metal appear.
not subject to rapid deterioration by (c) Repairs of leaks detected in man-
the lading and screwed directly into ufacture or in foregoing tests shall be
tank heads or attached to tank heads made by the same process as employed
by other approved methods. The total in manufacture of tank. Caulking, sol-
discharge capacity shall be sufficient dering, or similar repairing is prohib-
to prevent building up pressure in tank ited.
in excess of 82.5 percent of the tank
test pressure. When relief devices of [29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32
the fusible plug type are used, the re-
179–10, 36 FR 21355, Nov. 6, 1971; 66 FR 45390,
quired discharge capacity shall be Aug. 28, 2001]
available in each head. See AAR Speci-
fications for Tank Cars, appendix A § 179.300–17 Tests of pressure relief de-
(IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter), for vices.
the formula for calculating discharge (a) Each valve shall be tested by air
capacity. or gas before being put into service.
(b) Threads for openings shall be Na- The valve shall open and be vapor-tight
tional Gas Taper Threads (NGT) tapped at the pressure prescribed in § 179.301.
to gage, clean cut, even and without (b) Rupture disks of non-reclosing
checks. pressure relief devices must be tested

(c) Pressure relief devices shall be set and qualified as prescribed in appendix
for start-to-discharge and rupture discs A, Paragraph 5, of the AAR Manual of
301
§ 179.300–18 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
Standards and Recommended Prac- § 179.300–19 Inspection.

tices, Section C—Part III, AAR Speci-
(a) Tank shall be inspected within
fications for Tank Cars (IBR, see § 171.7
of this subchapter). the United States and Canada by a
(c) For pressure relief devices of the competent and impartial inspector as
fusible plug type, a sample of the plug approved by the Associate Adminis-
used shall function at the temperatures trator of Safety, FRA. For tanks made
prescribed in § 179.300–15. outside the United States or Canada,
(d) The start-to-discharge and vapor- the specified inspection shall be made
tight pressures shall not be affected by within the United States.
any auxiliary closure or other com- (b) The inspector shall carefully in-
bination. spect all plates from which tanks are
[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 to be made and secure records certi-
FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt. fying that plates comply with the spec-
179–10, 36 FR 21355, Nov. 6, 1971; 66 FR 45390, ification. Plates which do not comply
Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 48572, Aug. 14, 2003; 68 FR with § 179.300–7 shall be rejected.
75763, Dec. 31, 2003]
(c) The inspector shall make such in-
§ 179.300–18 Stamping. spection as may be necessary to see
that all the requirements of this speci-
(a) To certify that the tank complies
fication, including markings, are fully
with all specification requirements,
each tank shall be plainly and perma- complied with; shall see that the fin-
nently stamped in letters and figures 3⁄8 ished tanks are properly stress relieved
inch high into the metal of valve end and tested.
chime as follows: (d) The inspector shall stamp his offi-
(1) DOT Specification number. cial mark on each accepted tank as re-
(2) Material and cladding material if quired in § 179.300–18, and render the re-
any (immediately below the specifica- port required in § 179.300–20.
tion number).
[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964, as amended at 72
(3) Owner’s or builder’s identifying
FR 55696, Oct. 1, 2007]
symbol and serial number (imme-
diately below the material identifica- § 179.300–20 Reports.
tion). The symbol shall be registered
with the Bureau of Explosives, duplica- (a) Before a tank is placed in service,
tions are not authorized. the inspector shall furnish to the build-
(4) Inspector’s official mark (imme- er, tank owner, Bureau of Explosives
diately below the owner’s or builder’s and the Secretary, Mechanical Divi-
symbol). sion, Association of American Rail-
(5) Date of original tank test (month roads, a report in approved form certi-
and year, such as 1–64 for January fying that the tank and its equipment
1964). This should be so placed that comply with all the requirements of
dates of subsequent tests may easily be this specification.
added thereto. (b) For builder’s Certificate of Con-
(6) Water capacity—0000 pounds.
struction, see § 179.5 (b), (c), and (d).
(b) A copy of the above stamping in
letters and figures of the prescribed [29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32
size stamped on a brass plate secured FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt.
to one of the tank heads is authorized. 179–10, 36 FR 21355, Nov. 5, 1971]
§ 179.301 Individual specification requirements for multi-unit tank car tanks.

(a) In addition to § 179.300 the individual specification requirements are as fol-
lows:
DOT specification 106A500–X 106A800–X 110A500–W 110A600–W 110A800–W 110A1000–W
Minimum required bursting pressure,

psig ................................................ (1) (1) 1250 1500 2000 2500

Minimum thickness shell, inches ...... ⁄
13 32 ⁄
11 16 11⁄32 3⁄8 15⁄32 19⁄32
Test pressure, psig (see § 179.300–

16) ................................................. 500 800 500 600 800 1000
302
DOT specification 106A500–X 106A800–X 110A500–W 110A600–W 110A800–W 110A1000–W
Safety relief devices, psig (see

§ 179.300–15) ................................ .................... .................... .................... .................... .................... ........................
Start-to-discharge, or burst max-
imum, p.s.i. .................................... 375 600 375 450 600 700
Vapor-tight, minimum psig ................ 300 480 300 360 480 650
1 None specified.
(b) [Reserved]
[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt.
179–10, 36 FR 21355, Nov. 6, 1971; Amdt. 179–40, 52 FR 13049, Apr. 20, 1987; 65 FR 58632, Sept. 29,
2000; 66 FR 45390, Aug. 28, 2001]
§ 179.302 [Reserved] relief devices, controls, gages and

valves, as prescribed herein.
Subpart F—Specification for Cryo- [Amdt. 179–32, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as
genic Liquid Tank Car Tanks amended at 68 FR 75763, Dec. 31, 2003]
and Seamless Steel Tanks § 179.400–4 Insulation system and per-
(Classes DOT-113 and 107A) formance standard.
(a) For the purposes of this specifica-
SOURCE: Amdt. 179–32, 48 FR 27708, June 16, tion—
1983, unless otherwise noted. (1) Standard Heat Transfer Rate
(SHTR), expressed in Btu/day/lb of
§ 179.400 General specification appli- water capacity, means the rate of heat
cable to cryogenic liquid tank car transfer used for determining the satis-
tanks.
factory performance of the insulation
§ 179.400–1 General. system of a cryogenic tank car tank in
cryogenic liquid service (see § 179.401–1
A tank built to this specification table).
must comply with §§ 179.400 and 179.401. (2) Test cryogenic liquid means the
cryogenic liquid, which may be dif-
§ 179.400–3 Type. ferent from the lading intended to be
(a) A tank built to this specification shipped in the tank, being used during
must— the performance tests of the insulation
(1) Consist of an inner tank of cir- system.
cular cross section supported essen- (3) Normal evaporation rate (NER), ex-
tially concentric within an outer jack- pressed in lbs. (of the cryogenic liquid)/
et of circular cross section, with the day, means the rate of evaporation, de-
termined by test of a test cryogenic
out of roundness of both the inner tank
liquid in a tank maintained at a pres-
and outer jacket limited in accordance
sure of approximately one atmosphere,
with Paragraph UG–80 in Section VIII
absolute. This determination of the
of the ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of NER is the NER test.
this subchapter); (4) Stabilization period means the
(2) Have the annular space evacuated elapsed time after a tank car tank is
after filling the annular space with an filled with the test cryogenic liquid
approved insulating material; until the NER has stabilized, or 24
(3) Have the inner tank heads de- hours has passed, whichever is greater.
signed concave to pressure; and (5) Calculated heat transfer rate. The
(4) Have the outer jacket heads de- calculated heat transfer rate (CHTR) is
signed convex to pressure. determined by the use of test data ob-
(b) The tank must be equipped with tained during the NER test in the for-
piping systems for vapor venting and mula:
transfer of lading, and with pressure q = [N(D h)(90-tl)] / [V(8.32828)(ts-tf)]
303
§ 179.400–5 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
Where: (f) The outer jacket must be provided
q = CHTR, in Btu/day/lb., of water capacity; with fittings to permit effective evacu-
N = NER, determined by NER test, in lbs./ ation of the annular space between the
day; outer jacket and the inner tank.
Dh = latent heat of vaporization of the test
cryogenic liquid at the NER test pressure
(g) A device to measure the absolute
of approximately one atmosphere, abso- pressure in the annular space must be
lute, in Btu/lb.; provided. The device must be portable
90 = ambient temperature at 90 °F.; with an easily accessible connection or
V = gross water volume at 60 °F. of the inner permanently positioned where it is
tank, in gallons; readily visible to the operator.
tl = equilibrium temperature of intended lad-
ing at maximum shipping pressure, in [Amdt. 179–32, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as
°F.; amended at 49 FR 24318, June 12, 1984; 66 FR
8.32828 = constant for converting gallons of 45186, Aug. 28, 2001]
water at 60 °F. to lbs. of water at 60 °F.,
in lbs./gallon; § 179.400–5 Materials.
ts = average temperature of outer jacket, de-
termined by averaging jacket tempera- (a) Stainless steel of ASTM A 240/A
tures at various locations on the jacket 240M (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
at regular intervals during the NER test, chapter), Type 304 or 304L must be used
in °F.; for the inner tank and its appur-
tf = equilibrium temperature of the test tenances, as specified in AAR Speci-
cryogenic liquid at the NER test pressure
of approximately, one atmosphere, abso-
fications for Tank Cars, appendix M
lute, in °F. (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter), and
must be—
(b) DOT-113A60W tank cars must— (1) In the annealed condition prior to
(1) Be filled with hydrogen, cryogenic
fabrication, forming and fusion weld-
liquid to the maximum permitted fill
ing;
density specified in § 173.319(d)(2) table
of this subchapter prior to performing (2) Suitable for use at the tempera-
the NER test; and ture of the lading; and
(2) Have a CHTR equal to or less than (3) Compatible with the lading.
the SHTR specified in § 179.401–1 table (b) Any steel casting, steel forging,
for a DOT-113A60W tank car. steel structural shape or carbon steel
(c) DOT-113C120W tank cars must— plate used to fabricate the outer jacket
(1) Be filled with ethylene, cryogenic or heads must be as specified in AAR
liquid to the maximum permitted fill Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix
density specified in § 173.319(d)(2) table M.
of this subchapter prior to performing (c) Impact tests must be—
the NER test, or be filled with nitro- (1) Conducted in accordance with
gen, cryogenic liquid to 90 percent of AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, ap-
the volumetric capacity of the inner pendix W, W9.01;
tank prior to performing the NER test; (2) Performed on longitudinal speci-
and mens of the material;
(2) Have a CHTR equal to or less than (3) Conducted at the tank design
75 percent of the SHTR specified in service temperature or colder; and
§ 179.401–1 table for a DOT-113C120W (4) Performed on test plate welds and
tank car. materials used for inner tanks and ap-
(d) Insulating materials must be appurtenances and which will be sub-
proved.
jected to cryogenic temperatures.
(e) If the insulation consists of a pow-
(d) Impact test values must be equal
der having a tendency to settle, the en-
tire top of the cylindrical portion of to or greater than those specified in
the inner tank must be insulated with AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, ap-
a layer of glass fiber insulation at least pendix W. The report of impact tests
one-inch nominal thickness, or equiva- must include the test values and lat-
lent, suitably held in position and cov- eral expansion data.
ering an area extending 25 degrees to [Amdt. 179–32, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as
each side of the top center line of the amended at 67 FR 51660, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR
inner tank. 75763, Dec. 31, 2003]
304
§ 179.400–6 Bursting and buckling specified in § 179.401–1, or that cal-

pressure. culated by the following formula,
(a) [Reserved] whichever is greater:
(b) The outer jacket of the required t = 1.83 Pd / 2SE
evacuated insulation system must be
designed in accordance with § 179.400– Where:
8(d) and in addition must comply with t = minimum thickness of plate, after form-
the design loads specified in Section 6.2 ing, in inches;
of the AAR Specifications for Tank P = minimum required bursting pressure in
Cars (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- psig;
d = inside diameter, in inches;
chapter). The designs and calculations
S = minimum tensile strength of the plate
must provide for the loadings trans- material, as prescribed in AAR Specifica-
ferred to the outer jacket through the tions for Tank Cars, Appendix M, Table
support system. M1, in psi;
[Amdt. 179–32, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as E = 0.9, a factor representing the efficiency
amended by Amdt. 179–51, 61 FR 18934, Apr. of welded joints, except that for seamless
29, 1996; 65 FR 58632, Sept. 29, 2000; 68 FR heads, E = 1.0.
75763, Dec. 31, 2003] (c) The minimum wall thickness,
§ 179.400–7 Tank heads. after forming, of a flanged and dished
head for the inner tank must be that
(a) Tank heads of the inner tank and specified in § 179.401–1, or that cal-
outer jacket must be flanged and culated by the following formula,
dished, or ellipsoidal. whichever is greater:
(b) Flanged and dished heads must
have— t = [PL(3 + √(L/r))] / (8SE)
(1) A main inside dish radius not Where:
greater than the outside diameter of
t = minimum thickness of plate, after form-
the straight flange; ing, in inches;
(2) An inside knuckle radius of not P = minimum required bursting pressure in
less than 6 percent of the outside di- psig;
ameter of the straight flange; and L = main inside radius of dished head, in
(3) An inside knuckle radius of at inches;
least three times the head thickness. r = inside knuckle radius, in inches;
S = minimum tensile strength of plate mate-
§ 179.400–8 Thickness of plates. rial, as prescribed in AAR Specifications
(a) The minimum wall thickness, for Tank Cars, appendix M, table M1, in
after forming, of the inner shell and psi;
E = 0.9, a factor representing the efficiency
any 2:1 ellipsoidal head for the inner
of welded joints, except that for seamless
tank must be that specified in § 179.401– heads, E = 1.0.
1, or that calculated by the following
formula, whichever is greater: (d) The minimum wall thickness,
after forming, of the outer jacket shell
t = Pd / 2SE may not be less than 7⁄16 inch. The min-
Where: imum wall thickness, after forming, of
t = minimum thickness of plate, after form- the outer jacket heads may not be less
ing, in inches; than 1⁄2 inch and they must be made
P = minimum required bursting pressure in from steel specified in § 179.16(c). The
psig; annular space is to be evacuated, and
d = inside diameter, in inches;
S = minimum tensile strength of the plate
the cylindrical portion of the outer
material, as prescribed in AAR Specifica- jacket between heads, or between stiff-
tions for Tank Cars, appendix M, Table ening rings if used, must be designed to
M1 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter), in withstand an external pressure of 37.5
psi; psig (critical collapsing pressure), as
E = 0.9, a factor representing the efficiency determined by the following formula:
of welded joints, except that for seamless
heads, E = 1.0. Pc = [2.6E(t/D)2.5] / [(L/D) ¥ 0.45(t/D)0.5]
(b) The minimum wall thickness, Where:

after forming, of any 3:1 ellipsoidal Pc = Critical collapsing pressure (37.5 psig
head for the inner tank must be that minimum) in psig;
305
§ 179.400–9 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
E = modulus of elasticity of jacket material, plate which may be considered effec-
in psi; tive is 4W.) The closed section between
t = minimum thickness of jacket material, an external ring and the outer jacket
after forming, in inches;
must be provided with a drain opening.
D = outside diameter of jacket, in inches;
L = distance between stiffening ring centers
(d) The stiffening ring must have a
in inches. (The heads may be considered moment of inertia large enough to sup-
as stiffening rings located 1⁄3 of the head port the critical collapsing pressure, as
depth from the head tangent line.) determined by either of the following
[Amdt. 179–32, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983; 49
formulas:
FR 42736, Oct. 24, 1984; 64 FR 51920, Sept. 27, I = [0.035D3 LPc] / E,
1999, as amended at 66 FR 45390, Aug. 28, 2001;
68 FR 75763, Dec. 31, 2003] or
§ 179.400–9 Stiffening rings. I′ = [0.046D3 LPc] / E

(a) If stiffening rings are used in de- Where:
signing the cylindrical portion of the I = required moment of inertia of stiffening
outer jacket for external pressure, they ring about the centroidal axis parallel to
the vessel axis, in inches to the fourth
must be attached to the jacket by power;
means of fillet welds. Outside stiff- I′ = required moment of inertia of combined
ening ring attachment welds must be section of stiffening ring and effective
continuous on each side of the ring. In- width of jacket plate about the cen-
side stiffening ring attachment welds troidal axis parallel to the vessel axis, in
may be intermittent welds on each side inches to the fourth power;
of the ring with the total length of D = outside diameter of the outer jacket, in
inches;
weld on each side not less than one- L = one-half of the distance from the center-
third of the circumference of the tank. line of the stiffening ring to the next line
The maximum space between welds of support on one side, plus one-half of
may not exceed eight times the outer the distance from the centerline to the
jacket wall thickness. next line of support on the other side of
(b) A portion of the outer jacket may stiffening ring. Both distances are meas-
be included when calculating the mo- ured parallel to the axis of the vessel, in
inches. (A line of support is:
ment of inertia of the ring. The effec-
tive width of jacket plate on each side (1) A stiffening ring which meets the re-
quirements of this paragraph, or
of the attachment of the stiffening ring (2) A circumferential line of a head at
is given by the following formula: one-third the depth of the head from
W = 0.78(Rt)0.5 the tangent line);
Pc = critical collapsing pressure (37.5 psig
Where: minimum) in psig;
W = width of jacket effective on each side of E = modulus of elasticity of stiffening ring
the stiffening ring, in inches; material, in psi.
R = outside radius of the outer jacket, in
inches; (e) Where loads are applied to the
t = plate thickness of the outer jacket, after outer jacket or to stiffening rings from
forming, in inches. the system used to support the inner
tank within the outer jacket, addi-
(c) Where a stiffening ring is used tional stiffening rings, or an increased
that consists of a closed section having moment of inertia of the stiffening
two webs attached to the outer jacket, rings designed for the external pres-
the jacket plate between the webs may sure, must be provided to carry the
be included up to the limit of twice the support loads.
value of ‘‘W’’, as defined in paragraph
(b) of this section. The outer flange of [Amdt. 179–32, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as
the closed section, if not a steel struc- amended at 66 FR 45391, Aug. 28, 2001]
tural shape, is subject to the same lim-
§ 179.400–10 Sump or siphon bowl.
itations with ‘‘W’’ based on the ‘‘R’’
and ‘‘t’’ values of the flange. Where two A sump or siphon bowl may be in the
separate members such as two angles, bottom of the inner tank shell if—
are located less than ‘‘2W’’ apart they (a) It is formed directly into the
may be treated as a single stiffening inner tank shell, or is formed and weld-
ring member. (The maximum length of ed to the inner tank shell and is of
306
weldable quality metal that is compat- shell if postweld heat treatment is not
ible with the inner tank shell; practical due to assembly procedures.
(b) The stress in any orientation
[Amdt. 179–32, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as
under any condition does not exceed
amended at 68 FR 75763, Dec. 31, 2003]
the circumferential stress in the inner
tank shell; and § 179.400–13 Support system for inner
(c) The wall thickness is not less tank.
than that specified in § 179.401–1.
(a) The inner tank must be supported
§ 179.400–11 Welding. within the outer jacket by a support
system of approved design. The system
(a) Except for closure of openings and
a maximum of two circumferential and its areas of attachment to the
closing joints in the cylindrical portion outer jacket must have adequate
of the outer jacket, each joint of an strength and ductility at operating
inner tank and the outer jacket must temperatures to support the inner tank
be a fusion double welded butt joint. when filled with the lading to any level
(b) The closure for openings and the incident to transportation.
circumferential closing joints in the (b) The support system must be de-
cylindrical portion of the outer jacket, signed to support, without yielding,
including head to shell joints, may be a impact loads producing accelerations
single welded butt joint using a back- of the following magnitudes and direc-
ing strip on the inside of the joint. tions when the inner tank is fully load-
(c) Each joint must be welded in ac- ed and the car is equipped with a con-
cordance with the requirements of ventional draft gear:
AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, ap- Longitudinal ...........................................7‘‘g’’
pendix W (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- Transverse ...............................................3‘‘g’’
chapter). Vertical ...................................................3‘‘g’’
(d) Each welding procedure, welder, The longitudinal acceleration may be
and fabricator must be approved. reduced to 3‘‘g’’ where a cushioning de-
[Amdt. 179–32, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as vice of approved design, which has been
amended at 68 FR 75763, Dec. 31, 2003] tested to demonstrate its ability to
limit body forces to 400,000 pounds
§ 179.400–12 Postweld heat treatment. maximum at 10 miles per hour, is used
(a) Postweld heat treatment of the between the coupler and the tank
inner tank is not required. structure.
(b) The cylindrical portion of the (c) The inner tank and outer jacket
outer jacket, with the exception of the must be permanently bonded to each
circumferential closing seams, must be other electrically, by either the sup-
postweld heat treated as prescribed in port system, piping, or a separate elec-
AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, ap- trical connection of approved design.
pendix W (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
chapter). Any item to be welded to this § 179.400–14 Cleaning of inner tank.
portion of the outer jacket must be at-
The interior of the inner tank and all
tached before postweld heat treatment.
connecting lines must be thoroughly
Welds securing the following need not
cleaned and dried prior to use. Proper
be postweld heat treated when it is not
practical due to final assembly proce- precautions must be taken to avoid
dures: contamination of the system after
(1) the inner tank support system to cleaning.
the outer jacket,
§ 179.400–15 Radioscopy.
(2) connections at piping penetra-
tions, Each longitudinal and circumferen-
(3) closures for access openings, and tial joint of the inner tank, and each
(4) circumferential closing joints of longitudinal and circumferential dou-
head to shell joints. ble welded butt joint of the outer jack-
(c) When cold formed heads are used et, must be examined along its entire
on the outer jacket they must be heat length in accordance with the require-
treated before welding to the jacket ments of AAR Specifications for Tank
307
§ 179.400–16 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
Cars, appendix W (IBR, see § 171.7 of tank. The vapor phase line must have a
this subchapter). manually operated shut-off valve lo-
[68 FR 75763, Dec. 31, 2003] cated as close as practicable to the
outer jacket, plus a secondary closure
§ 179.400–16 Access to inner tank. that is liquid and gas tight. This sec-
(a) The inner tank must be provided ondary closure must permit any
with a means of access having a min- trapped pressure to bleed off before the
imum inside diameter of 16 inches. Re- closure can be removed completely.
inforcement of the access opening must (3) Vapor phase blowdown line. A blow-
be made of the same material used in down line must be provided. It must be
the inner tank. The access closure attached to the vapor phase line speci-
must be of an approved material and fied in paragraph (a)(2) of this section,
design. upstream of the shut-off valve in that
(b) If a welded closure is used, it line. A by-pass line with a manually
must be designed to allow it to be re- operated shut-off valve must be pro-
opened by grinding or chipping and to vided to permit reduction of the inner
be closed again by rewelding, pref- tank pressure when the vapor phase
erably without a need for new parts. A line is connected to a closed system.
cutting torch may not be used. The discharge from this line must be
outside the housing and must be di-
§ 179.400–17 Inner tank piping. rected upward and away from oper-
(a) Product lines. The piping system ating personnel.
for vapor and liquid phase transfer and (b) Any pressure building system pro-
venting must be made for material vided for the purpose of pressurizing
compatible with the product and hav- the vapor space of the inner tank to fa-
ing satisfactory properties at the lad- cilitate unloading the liquid lading
ing temperature. The outlets of all must be approved.
vapor phase and liquid phase lines
must be located so that accidental dis- [Amdt. 179–32, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as
charge from these lines will not im- amended at 66 FR 45391, Aug. 28, 2001]
pinge on any metal of the outer jacket,
car structures, trucks or safety appli- § 179.400–18 Test of inner tank.
ances. Suitable provison must be made (a) After all items to be welded to the
to allow for thermal expansion and inner tank have been welded in place,
contraction. the inner tank must be pressure tested
(1) Loading and unloading line. A liq- at the test pressure prescribed in
uid phase transfer line must be pro- § 179.401–1. The temperature of the pres-
vided and it must have a manually op- surizing medium may not exceed 38 °C
erated shut-off valve located as close (100 °F) during the test. The inner tank
as practicable to the outer jacket, plus must hold the prescribed pressure for a
a secondary closure that is liquid and period of not less than ten minutes
gas tight. This secondary closure must without leakage or distortion. In a
permit any trapped pressure to bleed pneumatic test, due regard for the pro-
off before the closure can be removed tection of all personnel should be taken
completely. A vapor trap must be in- because of the potential hazard in-
corporated in the line and located as volved. After a hydrostatic test the
close as practicable to the inner tank. container and piping must be emptied
On a DOT-113A60W tank car, any load- of all water and purged of all water
ing and unloading line must be vacuum vapor.
jacketed between the outer jacket and
(b) Caulking of welded joints to stop
the shut-off valve and the shut-off
valve must also be vacuum jacketed. leaks developed during the test is pro-
(2) Vapor phase line. A vapor phase hibited. Repairs to welded joints must
line must connect to the inner tank be made as prescribed in AAR Speci-
and must be of sufficient size to permit fications for Tank Cars, appendix W
the pressure relief devices specified in (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter).
§ 179.400–20 and connected to this line to [Amdt. 179–32, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as
operate at their design capacity with- amended at 68 FR 75763, Dec. 31, 2003; 73 FR
out excessive pressure build-up in the 57008, Oct. 1, 2008]
308
§ 179.400–19 Valves and gages. tion of the tank assembly and piping
(a) Valves. Manually operated shut- system. The discharge from these de-
off valves and control valves must be vices must be directed away from oper-
provided wherever needed for control of ating personnel, principal load bearing
vapor phase pressure, vapor phase vent- members of the outer jacket, car struc-
ing, liquid transfer and liquid flow ture, trucks and safety appliances.
rates. All valves must be made from Vent or weep holes in pressure relief
approved materials compatible with devices are prohibited. All main pres-
the lading and having satisfactory sure relief devices must discharge to
properties at the lading temperature. the outside of the protective housings
(1) Liquid control valves must be of in which they are located, except that
extended stem design. this requirement does not apply to
(2) Packing, if used, must be satisfac- pressure relief valves installed to pro-
tory for use in contact with the lading tect isolated sections of lines between
and of approved materials that will ef- the final valve and end closure.
fectively seal the valve stem without (b) Materials. Materials used in pres-
causing difficulty of operation. sure relief devices must be suitable for
(3) Each control valve and shut-off use at the temperature of the lading
valve must be readily operable. These and otherwise compatible with the lad-
valves must be mounted so that their ing in both the liquid and vapor phases.
operation will not transmit excessive (c) Inner tank. Pressure relief devices
forces to the piping system. for the inner tank must be attached to
(b) Gages. Gages, except portable vapor phase piping and mounted so as
units, must be securely mounted with- to remain at ambient temperature
in suitable protective housings. A liq- prior to operation. The inner tank
uid level gage and a vapor phase pres- must be equipped with one or more
sure gage must be provided as follows: pressure relief valves and one or more
(1) Liquid level gage. (i) A gage of ap- safety vents (except as noted in para-
proved design to indicate the quantity graph (c)(3)(iv) of this section), and in-
of liquefied lading within the inner stalled without an intervening shut-off
tank, mounted where it will be readily valve (except as noted in paragraph
visible to an operator during transfer (c)(3)(iii) of this section). Additional re-
operations or storage, or a portable quirements are as follows:
gage with a readily accessible connec- (1) Safety vent. The safety vent shall
tion, or function at the pressure specified in
(ii) A fixed length dip tube, with a § 179.401–1. The safety vent must be flow
manually operated shut-off valve lo- rated in accordance with the applicable
cated as close as practicable to the provisions of AAR Specifications for
outer jacket. The dip tube must indi- Tank Cars, appendix A (IBR, see § 171.7
cate the maximum liquid level for the of this subchapter), and provide suffi-
allowable filling density. The inner end cient capacity to meet the require-
of the dip tube must be located on the ments of AAR Specifications for Tank
longitudinal centerline of the inner Cars, appendix A, A8.07(a).
tank and within four feet of the trans- (2) Pressure relief valve. The pressure
verse centerline of the inner tank. relief valve must:
(2) Vapor phase pressure gage. A vapor (i) be set to start-to-discharge at the
phase pressure gage of approved design, pressure specified in § 179.401–1, and
with a manually operated shut-off (ii) meet the requirements of AAR
valve located as close as practicable to Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix
the outer jacket. The gage must indi- A, A8.07(b).
cate the vapor pressure within the (3) Installation of safety vent and pres-
inner tank and must be mounted where sure relief valve—(i) Inlet piping. (A) The
it will be readily visible to an operator. opening through all piping and fittings
An additional fitting for use of a test between the inner tank and its pres-
gage must be provided. sure relief devices must have a cross-
sectional area at least equal to that of
§ 179.400–20 Pressure relief devices. the pressure relief device inlet, and the
(a) The tank must be provided with flow characteristics of this upstream
pressure relief devices for the protec- system must be such that the pressure
309
§ 179.400–20 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
drop will not adversely affect the re- (4) Evaporation control. The routine
lieving capacity or the proper oper- release of vaporized lading may be con-
ation of the pressure relief device. trolled with a pressure controlling and
(B) When the required relief capacity mixing device, except that a pressure
is met by the use of multiple pressure controlling and mixing device is re-
relief device placed on one connection, quired on each DOT-113A60W car. Any
the inlet internal cross-sectional area pressure controlling and mixing device
of this connection must be sufficient to must—
provide the required flow capacity for (i) Be set to start-to-discharge at a
the proper operation of the pressure re- pressure not greater than that speci-
lief device system. fied in § 179.401–1;
(ii) Outlet piping. (A) The opening (ii) Have sufficient capacity to limit
through the discharge lines must have the pressure within the inner tank to
a cross-sectional area at least equal to that pressure specified in § 179.401–1,
that of the pressure relief device outlet when the discharge is equal to twice
and may not reduce the relieving ca- the normal venting rate during trans-
pacity below that required to properly
portation, with normal vacuum and the
protect the inner tank.
outer shell at 130 °F; and
(B) When the required relieving ca-
(iii) Prevent the discharge of a gas
pacity is met by use of multiple pres-
mixture exceeding 50% of the lower
sure relief devices placed on a common
discharge manifold, the manifold out- flammability limit to the atmosphere
let internal cross-sectional area must under normal conditions of storage or
be at least equal to the combined out- transportation.
let areas of the pressure relief devices. (5) Safety interlock. If a safety inter-
(iii) Duplicate pressure relief devices lock is provided for the purpose of al-
may be used when an approved 3-way lowing transfer of lading at a pressure
selector valve is installed to provide higher than the pressure control valve
for relief through either duplicate pres- setting but less than the pressure relief
sure relief device. The 3-way valve valve setting, the design must be such
must be included in the mounting pre- that the safety interlock will not affect
scribed by AAR Specifications for Tank the discharge path of the pressure re-
Cars, appendix A, A6.02(g), when con- lief value or safety vent at any time.
ducting the flow capacity test on the The safety interlock must automati-
safety vent prescribed by AAR Speci- cally provide an unrestricted discharge
fications for Tank Cars, appendix A, path for the pressure control device at
A6.01. Flow capacity tests must be per- all times when the tank car is in trans-
formed with the 3-way valve at both of port service.
the extreme positions as well as at the (d) Outer jacket. The outer jacket
mid-position and the flow capacity must be provided with a suitable sys-
must be in accordance with AAR Speci- tem to prevent buildup of annular
fications for Tank Cars, appendix A, space pressure in excess of 16 psig or
A8.07(a). the external pressure for which the
(iv) An alternate pressure relief inner tank was designed, whichever is
valve, set as required in § 179.401–1, may less. The total relief area provided by
be used in lieu of the safety vent, pro- the system must be a minimum of 25
vided it meets the flow capacity pre-
square inches, and means must be pro-
scribed in AAR Specifications for Tank
vided to prevent clogging of any sys-
Cars, appendix A at a flow rating pres-
sure of 110 percent of its start-to-dis- tem opening, as well as to ensure ade-
charge pressure. Installation must— quate communication to all areas of
(A) Prevent moisture accumulation the insulation space. If a safety vent is
at the seat by providing drainage away a part of the system, it must be de-
from that area, signed to prevent distortion of the rup-
(B) Permit periodic drainage of the ture disc when the annular space is
vent piping, and evacuated.

(C) Prevent accumulation of foreign (e) Piping system. Where a piping cir-
material in the vent system. cuit can be isolated by closing a valve,
310
means for pressure relief must be pro- § 179.400–24 Stamping.

vided. (a) A tank that complies with all
[Amdt. 179–32, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as specification requirements must have
amended at 66 FR 45391, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR the following information plainly and
75763, Dec. 31, 2003] permanently stamped into the metal
near the center of the head of the outer
§ 179.400–21 Test of pressure relief jacket at the ‘‘B’’ end of the car, in let-
valves. ters and figures at least 3⁄8-inch high, in
Each valve must be tested with air or the following order:
gas for compliance with § 179.401–1 be- Example of re-
fore being put into service. quired stamping
Specification ............................................ DOT-113A60W.

§ 179.400–22 Protective housings. Design service temperature .................... Minus 423 °F.
Inner tank ................................................. Inner Tank.
Each valve, gage, closure and pres- Material ............................................. ASTM A240–304.
sure relief device, with the exception of Shell thickness ................................. Shell 3⁄16 inch.
secondary relief valves for the protec- Head thickness ................................. Head 3⁄16 inch.
Inside diameter ................................. ID 107 inch.
tion of isolated piping, must be en- Inner tank builder’s initials ................ ABC.
closed within a protective housing. The Date of original test (month and 00–0000GHK.
protective housing must be adequate to year) and initials of person con-
ducting original test.
protect the enclosed components from Water capacity .................................. 00000 lbs.
direct solar radiation, mud, sand, ad- Outer jacket ............................................. Outer jacket.
verse environmental exposure and me- Material ............................................. ASTM A515–70.
Outer jacket builder’s initials ............ DEF.
chanical damage incident to normal Car assembler’s initials (if other than XYZ.
operation of the tank car. It must be inner tank or outer jacket builder).
designed to provide reasonable access
to the enclosed components for oper- (b) Any stamping on the shell or
ation, inspection and maintenance and heads of the inner tank is prohibited.
so that vapor concentrations cannot (c) In lieu of the stamping required
build up to a dangerous level inside the by paragraph (a) of this section, the
housing in the event of valve leakage specified markings may be incor-
or pressure relief valve operation. All porated on a data plate of corrosion-re-
equipment within the protective hous- sistant metal, fillet welded in place on
ing must be operable by personnel the head of the outer jacket at the ‘‘B’’
wearing heavy gloves and must incor- end of the car.
porate provisions for locks or seals. A § 179.400–25 Stenciling.
protective housing and its cover must
be constructed of metal not less than Each tank car must be stenciled in
0.119 inch thick. compliance with the provisions of the
AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, ap-
§ 179.400–23 Operating instructions. pendix C (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
chapter). The stenciling must also in-
All valves and gages must be clearly clude the following:
identified with corrosion-resistant (a) The date on which the rupture
nameplates. A plate of corrosion-resist- disc was last replaced and the initials
ant material bearing precautionary in- of the person making the replacement,
structions for the safe operation of the on the outer jacket in letters and fig-
equipment during storage and transfer ures at least 11⁄2 inches high.
operations must be securely mounted (b) The design service temperature
so as to be readily visible to an oper- and maximum lading weight, in letters
ator. The instruction plate must be and figures at least 11⁄2 inches high ad-
mounted in each housing containing jacent to the hazardous material sten-
operating equipment and controls for cil.
product handling. These instructions (c) The water capacity, in pounds net
must include a diagram of the tank and at 60 °F., with the tank at its coldest
its piping system with the various operating temperature, after deduction
gages, control valves and pressure re- for the volume above the inlet to the
lief devices clearly identified and lo- pressure relief device or pressure con-
cated. trol valve, structural members, baffles,
311
§ 179.401 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
piping, and other appurtenances inside DOT specification 113A60W 113C120W

the tank, in letters and figures at least
Alternate pressure re- ........................... 72.
11⁄2 inches high. lief valve vapor tight
(d) Both sides of the tank car, in let- pressure, min. psig.
ters at least 11⁄2 inches high, with the Alternate pressure re- ........................... 100.
lief valve flow rating
statement ‘‘Do Not Hump or Cut Off pressure, max. psig.
While in Motion.’’ Pressure control valve 17 ...................... Not required.
(e) The outer jacket, below the tank Start-to-vent, max.
classification stencil, in letters at least psig (see § 179.400–
20(c)(4)).
11⁄2 inches high, with the statement, Relief device dis- § 179.400–20 ..... 179.400–20.
‘‘vacuum jacketed.’’ charge restrictions.
Transfer line insulation § 179.400–17 ..... Not required.
[Amdt. 179–32, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as
75763, Dec. 31, 2003] [Amdt. 179–32, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as
amended at 49 FR 24318, June 12, 1984; 65 FR
§ 179.401 Individual specification re- 58632, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45390, Aug. 28, 2001]
quirements applicable to inner
tanks for cryogenic liquid tank car § 179.500 Specification DOT-107A * * *
tanks. * seamless steel tank car tanks.
§ 179.401–1 Individual specification re- § 179.500–1 Tanks built under these
quirements. specifications shall meet the re-
In addition to § 179.400, the individual quirements of § 179.500.
specification requirements for the
§ 179.500–3 Type and general require-
inner tank and its appurtenances are ments.
as follows:
(a) Tanks built under this specifica-
DOT specification 113A60W 113C120W tion shall be hollow forged or drawn in
Design service tem- ¥423 ................. ¥260. one piece. Forged tanks shall be ma-
perature, °F. chined inside and outside before ends
Material ....................... § 179.400–5 ....... § 179.400–5. are necked-down and, after necking-
Impact test (weld and § 179.400–5(c) .. § 179.400–5(c). down, the ends shall be machined to
plate material).
Impact test values ...... § 179.400–5(d) .. § 179.400–5(d). size on the ends and outside diameter.
Standard heat transfer Machining not necessary on inside or
rate. outside of seamless steel tubing, but
(Btu per day per lb. 0.097 ................. 0.4121. required on ends after necking-down.
of water capacity,
max.) (see (b) For tanks made in foreign coun-
§ 179.400–4). tries, chemical analysis of material
Bursting pressure, 240 .................... 300. and all tests as specified must be car-
min. psig.
Minimum plate thick- ⁄
3 16 ..................... ⁄ .
3 16 ried out within the limits of the United
ness shell, inches States under supervision of a com-
(see § 179.400–7(a)). petent and disinterested inspector; in
Minimum head thick- ⁄
3 16 ..................... ⁄ .
3 16
addition to which, provisions in
ness, inches (see
§ 179.400–8 (a), (b), § 179.500–18 (b) and (c) shall be carried
and (c)). out at the point of manufacture by a
Test pressure, psig 60 ...................... 120. recognized inspection bureau with prin-
(see § 179.400–16).
Safety vent bursting 60 ...................... 120.
cipal office in the United States.
pressure, max. psig. (c) The term ‘‘marked end’’ and
Pressure relief valve 30 ...................... 75. ‘‘marked test pressure’’ used through-
start-to-discharge out this specification are defined as
pressure, psig (±3
psi). follows:
Pressure relief valve 24 ...................... 60. (1) ‘‘Marked end’’ is that end of the
vapor tight pressure, tank on which marks prescribed in
min. psig.
Pressure relief valve 40 ...................... 85.
§ 179.500–17 are stamped.
flow rating pressure, (2) ‘‘Marked test pressure’’ is that
max. psig. pressure in psig which is indicated by
Alternate pressure re- ........................... 90. the figures substituted for the **** in
lief valve start to-dis-
charge pressure, the marking DOT-107A **** stamped on
psig (±3 psi). the marked end of tank.
312
(d) The gas pressure at 130 °F in the tions prescribed in paragraph (b) of this
tank shall not exceed 7⁄10 of the marked section.
test pressure of the tank. [29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32
[Amdt. 179–32, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt.
amended at 66 FR 45186, 45391, Aug. 28, 2001] 179–31, 47 FR 43067, Sept. 30, 1982; 66 FR 45391,
Aug. 28, 2001]
§ 179.500–4 Thickness of wall. § 179.500–5 Material.
(a) Minimum thickness of wall of (a) Tanks shall be made from open-
each finished tank shall be such that at hearth or electric steel of uniform
a pressure equal to 7⁄10 of the marked quality. Material shall be free from
test pressure of the tank, the cal- seams, cracks, laminations, or other
culated fiber stress in psi at inner wall defects injurious to finished tank. If
of tank multiplied by 3.0 will not ex- not free from such defects, the surface
ceed the tensile strength of any speci- may be machined or ground to elimi-
men taken from the tank and tested as nate these defects. Forgings and seam-
prescribed in § 179.500–7(b). Minimum less tubing for bodies of tanks shall be
wall thickness shall be 1⁄4 inch. stamped with heat numbers.
(b) Calculations to determine the (b) Steel (see Note 1) must conform
maximum marked test pressure per- to the following requirements as to
mitted to be marked on the tank shall chemical composition:
be made by the formula: Class I Class II Class III
Designation (percent) (percent) (percent)
P = [10S(D2 ¥ d2)] / [7(D2 + d2)]
Carbon, maximum ......... 0.50 0.50 0.53
Where: Manganese, maximum .. 1.65 1.65 1.85
Phosphorus, maximum .. .05 .05 .05
P = Maximum marked test pressure per- Sulphur, maximum ........ .06 .05 .05
mitted; Silicon, maximum .......... .35 .30 .37
Molybdenum, maximum ................ .25 .30
S = U / 3.0 Chromium, maximum .... ................ .30 .30
Sum of manganese and
Where: carbon not over .......... 2.10 2.10 ................
U = Tensile strength of that specimen which Note 1:Alternate steel containing other alloying elements
shows the lower tensile strength of the may be used if approved.
two specimens taken from the tank and
(1) For instructions as to the obtain-
tested as prescribed in § 179.500–7(b).
ing and checking of chemical analysis,
3 = Factor of safety.
see § 179.500–18(b)(3).
(D2 ¥ d2/(D2 + d2) = The smaller value ob- (2) [Reserved]
tained for this factor by the operations
specified in § 179.500–4(c). § 179.500–6 Heat treatment.
(c) Measure at one end, in a plane (a) Each necked-down tank shall be
perpendicular to the longitudinal axis uniformly heat treated. Heat treat-
of the tank and at least 18 inches from ment shall consist of annealing or nor-
that end before necking-down: malizing and tempering for Class I,
Class II and Class III steel or oil
d = Maximum inside diameter (inches) for quenching and tempering for Class III
the location under consideration; to be steel. Tempering temperatures shall
determined by direct measurement to an not be less than 1000 °F. Heat treat-
accuracy of 0.05 inch. ment of alternate steels shall be ap-
t = Minimum thickness of wall for the loca- proved. All scale shall be removed from
tion under consideration; to be deter-
outside of tank to an extent sufficient
mined by direct measurement to an accu-
racy of 0.001 inch. to allow proper inspection.
Take D = d + 2t. (b) To check uniformity of heat
Calculate the value of (D2¥d2)/(D2 + d2) treatment, Brinnel hardness tests shall
be made at 18 inch intervals on the en-
(1) Make similar measurements and tire longitudinal axis. The hardness
calculation for a corresponding loca- shall not vary more than 35 points in
tion at the other end of the tank. the length of the tank. No hardness
(2) Use the smaller result obtained, tests need be taken within 12 inches
from the foregoing, in making calcula- from point of head to shell tangency.
313
§ 179.500–7 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(c) A magnetic particle inspection stress (psi) /30,000,000 (psi) + 0.005 (inches per
shall be performed after heat treat- inch)
ment on all tanks subjected to a
shall be recorded as the elastic limit.
quench and temper treatment to detect
the presence of quenching cracks. (1) Elongation shall be at least 18 per-
Cracks shall be removed to sound cent and reduction of area at least 35
metal by grinding and the surface ex- percent.
posed shall be blended smoothly into NOTE 1: Upon approval, the ratio of elastic
the surrounding area. A wall thickness limit to ultimate strength may be raised to
check shall then be made of the af- permit use of special alloy steels of definite
fected area by ultrasonic equipment or composition that will give equal or better
other suitable means acceptable to the physical properties than steels herein speci-
inspector and if the remaining wall fied.
thickness is less than the minimum re- (2) [Reserved]
corded thickness as determined by
§ 179.500–4(b) it shall be used for making [Amdt. 179–8, 36 FR 18470, Sept. 15, 1971, as
the calculation prescribed in paragraph amended at 66 FR 45391, Aug. 28, 2001]
(b) of this section.
§ 179.500–8 Openings in tanks.
§ 179.500–7 Physical tests. (a) Each end shall be closed by a
(a) Physical tests shall be made on cover made of forged steel. Covers shall
two test specimens 0.505 inch in diame- be secured to ends of tank by through
ter within 2-inch gauge length, taken bolts or studs not entering interior of
180 degrees apart, one from each ring tank. Covers shall be of a thickness
section cut from each end of each sufficient to meet test requirements of
forged or drawn tube before necking- § 179.500–12 and to compensate for the
down, or one from each prolongation at openings closed by attachments pre-
each end of each necked-down tank. scribed herein.
These test specimen ring sections or (1) It is also provided that each end
prolongations shall be heat treated, may be closed by internal threading to
with the necked-down tank which they accommodate an approved fitting. The
represent. The width of the test speci- internal threads as well as the threads
men ring section must be at least its on fittings for these openings shall be
wall thickness. Only when diameters clean cut, even, without checks, and
and wall thickness will not permit re- tapped to gauge. Taper threads are re-
moval of 0.505 by 2-inch tensile test quired and shall be of a length not less
bar, laid in the transverse direction, than as specified for American Stand-
may test bar cut in the longitudinal di- ard taper pipe threads. External
rection be substituted. When the thick- threading of an approved type shall be
ness will not permit obtaining a 0.505 permissible on the internal threaded
specimen, then the largest diameter ends.
specimen obtainable in the longitu-
(b) Joints between covers and ends
dinal direction shall be used. Speci-
and between cover and attachments
mens shall have bright surface and a
reduced section. When 0.505 specimen is shall be of approved form and made
not used the gauge length shall be a tight against vapor or liquid leakage
ratio of 4 to 1 length to diameter. by means of a confined gasket of suit-
(b) Elastic limit as determined by ex- able material.
tensometer, shall not exceed 70 percent
§ 179.500–10 Protective housing.
of tensile strength for class I steel or 85
percent of tensile strength for class II (a) Safety devices, and loading and
and class III steel. Determination shall unloading valves on tanks shall be pro-
be made at cross head speed of not tected from accidental damage by ap-
more than 0.125 inch per minute with proved metal housing, arranged so it
an extensometer reading to 0.0002 inch. may be readily opened to permit in-
The extensometer shall be read at inspection and adjustment of safety re-
crements of stress not exceeding 5,000 lief devices and valves, and securely
psi. The stress at which the strain first locked in closed position. Housing shall
exceeds be provided with opening having an
314
opening equal to twice the total dis- § 179.500–14 Test of tanks.

charge area of pressure relief device en-
(a) After heat-treatment, tanks shall
closed.
be subjected to hydrostatic tests in a
(b) [Reserved]
water jacket, or by other accurate
[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 method, operated so as to obtain reli-
FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended at 66 FR able data. No tank shall have been sub-
45390, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 61016, Sept. 27, 2002] jected previously to internal pressure
§ 179.500–11 Loading and unloading greater than 90 percent of the marked
valves. test pressure. Each tank shall be tested
to a pressure at least equal to the
(a) Loading and unloading valve or marked test pressure of the tank. Pres-
valves shall be mounted on the cover or sure shall be maintained for 30 seconds,
threaded into the marked end of tank. and sufficiently longer to insure com-
These valves shall be of approved type, plete expansion of tank. Pressure
made of metal not subject to rapid de- gauge shall permit reading to accuracy
terioration by lading or in service, and of one percent. Expansion gauge shall
shall withstand without leakage a pres-
permit reading of total expansion to
sure equal to the marked test pressure
accuracy of one percent. Expansion
of tank. Provision shall be made for
shall be recorded in cubic cm.
closing service outlet of valves.
(b) No leaks shall appear and perma-
(b) [Reserved]
nent volumetric expansion shall not
§ 179.500–12 Pressure relief devices. exceed 10 percent of the total volu-
metric expansion at test pressure.
(a) Tank shall be equipped with one
or more pressure relief devices of ap- § 179.500–15 Handling of tanks failing
proved type and discharge area, mount- in tests.
ed on the cover or threaded into the
(a) Tanks rejected for failure in any
non-marked end of the tank. If fittings
of the tests prescribed may be reheat-
are mounted on a cover, they shall be
treated, and will be acceptable if subse-
of the flanged type, made of metal not
quent to reheat-treatment they are
subject to rapid deterioration by lading
or in service. Total flow capacity shall subjected to and pass all of the tests.
be such that, with tank filled with air (b) [Reserved]
at pressure equal to 70 percent of the § 179.500–16 Tests of pressure relief de-
marked test pressure of tank, flow ca- vices.
pacity will be sufficient to reduce air
pressure to 30 percent of the marked (a) Pressure relief valves shall be
test pressure within 3 minutes after tested by air or gas before being put
pressure relief device opens. into service. Valve shall open at pres-
(b) Pressure relief devices shall open sure not exceeding the marked test
at a pressure not exceeding the marked pressure of tank and shall be vapor-
test pressure of tank and not less than tight at 80 percent of the marked test
7⁄10 of marked test pressure. (For toler- pressure. These limiting pressures shall
ance for pressure relief valves, see not be affected by any auxiliary clo-
§ 179.500–16(a).) sure or other combination.
(c) Cars used for the transportation (b) For pressure relief devices that
of flammable gases shall have the safe- incorporate a rupture disc, samples of
ty devices equipped with an approved the discs used shall burst at a pressure
ignition device. not exceeding the marked test pressure
of tank and not less than 7⁄10 of marked
[Amdt. 179–32, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as test pressure.
57634, Oct. 6, 2003] [Amdt. 179–32, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as
amended at 66 FR 45391, Aug. 28, 2001]
§ 179.500–13 Fixtures.
(a) Attachments, other than those § 179.500–17 Marking.
mounted on tank covers or serving as (a) Each tank shall be plainly and
threaded closures for the ends of the permanently marked, thus certifying
tank, are prohibited. that tank complies with all require-
(b) [Reserved] ments of this specification. These
315
§ 179.500–18 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
marks shall be stamped into the metal tanks, and shall verify proper applica-
of necked-down section of tank at tion of heat number to such material
marked end, in letters and figures at by occasional inspections at steel man-
least 1⁄4 inch high, as follows: ufacturer’s plant.
(1) Spec. DOT-107A * * * *, the * * * * (3) Inspector shall obtain certified
to be replaced by figures indicating chemical analysis of each heat of mate-
marked test pressure of the tank. This rial.
pressure shall not exceed the cal- (4) Inspector shall make inspection of
culated maximum marked test pres- inside surface of tanks before necking-
sure permitted, as determined by the down, to insure that no seams, cracks,
formula in § 179.500–4(b). laminations, or other defects exist.
(2) Serial number immediately below (5) Inspector shall fully verify com-
the stamped mark specified in para- pliance with specification, verify heat
graph (a)(1) of this section. treatment of tank as proper; obtain
(3) Inspector’s official mark imme- samples for all tests and check chem-
diately below the stamped mark speci- ical analyses; witness all tests; and re-
fied in paragraph (a)(1) of this section. port minimum thickness of tank wall,
(4) Name, mark (other than trade- maximum inside diameter, and cal-
mark), or initials of company or person culated value of D, for each end of each
for whose use tank is being made, tank as prescribed in § 179.500–4(c).
which shall be recorded with the Bu- (6) Inspector shall stamp his official
reau of Explosives. mark on each accepted tank imme-
(5) Date (such as 1–01, for January diately below serial number, and make
2001) of tank test, so placed that dates certified report (see paragraph (c) of
of subsequent tests may easily be this section) to builder, to company or
added. person for whose use tanks are being
(6) Date (such as 1–01, for January made, to builder of car structure on
2001) of latest test of pressure relief de- which tanks are to be mounted, to the
vice or of the rupture disc, required Bureau of Explosives, and to the Sec-
only when tank is used for transpor- retary, Mechanical Division, Associa-
tation of flammable gases. tion of American Railroads.
(b) [Reserved] (c) Inspector’s report required herein
[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964, as amended by shall be in the following form:
Amdt. 179–52, 61 FR 28682, June 5, 1996; 66 FR (Place) lllllllllllllll
45391, Aug. 28, 2001] (Date) llllllllllllllll
§ 179.500–18 Inspection and reports. STEEL TANKS

(a) Before a tank car is placed in It is hereby certified that drawings were
service, the party assembling the com- submitted for these tanks under AAR Appli-
pleted car shall furnish to car owner, cation for Approval llllll and approved
Bureau of Explosives, and the Sec- by the AAR Committee on Tank Cars under
date of llllll.
retary, Mechanical Division, Associa- Built for llllllllllll Company
tion of American Railroads, a report in Location at lllllllllllllllll
proper form certifying that tanks and Built by llllllllllll Company
their equipment comply with all the Location at lllllllllllllllll
requirements of this specification and Consigned to lllllllll Company
including information as to serial num- Location at lllllllllllllllll
bers, dates of tests, and ownership Quantity llllllllllllllllll
Length (inches) lllllllllllllll
marks on tanks mounted on car struc- Outside diameter (inches) llllllllll
ture. Marks stamped into tank as required in
(b) Purchaser of tanks shall provide § 179.500–17 are:
for inspection by a competent inspec-
tor as follows: DOT-107A* * * *
(1) Inspector shall carefully inspect NOTE 1: The marked test pressure sub-
all material and reject that not com- stituted for the * * * * on each tank is shown
plying with § 179.500–5. on Record of General Data on Tanks at-
(2) Inspector shall stamp his official tached hereto.

mark on each forging or seamless tube Serial numbers ll to ll inclusive
accepted by him for use in making Inspector’s mark llllllllllllll
316
Owner’s mark llllllllllllllll Transportation Specification No.
Test date llllllllllllllllll 107A* * * *.
Water capacity (see Record of Hydrostatic (Signed) lllllllllllllll
Tests). (Inspector)
Tare weights (yes or no) (see Record of Hy- (Place) lllllllllllllll
drostatic Tests). (Date) llllllllllllllll
These tanks were made by process of llll
Steel used was identified as indicated by RECORD OF CHEMICAL ANALYSIS OF STEEL FOR
the attached list showing the serial number TANKS
of each tank, followed by the heat number. Numbered llll to llll inclusive
Steel used was verified as to chemical Size l inches outside diameter by l inches
analysis and record thereof is attached here- long
to. Heat numbers were stamped into metal. Built by llllllllllll Company
All material was inspected and each tank For lllllllllllllll Company
was inspected both before and after closing
in ends; all material accepted was found free Tanks rep- Chemical analysis
from seams, cracks, laminations, and other resented
Heat No. (serial
defects which might prove injurious to Nos.) C Mn P S Si Ni Cr Mo
strength of tank. Processes of manufacture
and heat-treatment of tanks were witnessed
and found to be efficient and satisfactory.
Before necking-down ends, each tank was
measured at each location prescribed in These analyses were made by
§ 179.500–4(c) and minimum wall thickness in (Signed) lllllllllllll
inches at each location was recorded; max- (Place) lllllllllllll
imum inside diameter in inches at each loca- (Date) llllllllllllll
tion was recorded; value of D in inches at
each location was calculated and recorded; RECORD OF CHEMICAL ANALYSIS OF STEEL IN
maximum fiber stress in wall at location TANKS
showing larger value for Numbered llll to llll inclusive
(D2 + d2)/(D2¥d2) Size ll inches outside by ll inches long
was calculated for 7⁄10 the marked test pres- Built by llllllllllll Company
sure and recorded. Calculations were made For lllllllllllllll Company
by the formula: Tanks
S=[0.7P(D2¥d2)/(D2 + d2)] rep- Elon- Reduc-
resent- Elastic Tensile gation tion of
Hydrostatic tests, tensile test of material, Heat ed by limit strength (percent area
No.
and other tests as prescribed in this speci- test (se- (psi) (psi) in 2 (per-
rial inches) cent)
fication, were made in the presence of the in- Nos.)
spector, and all material and tanks accepted
were found to be in compliance with the re-
quirements of this specification. Records
thereof are attached hereto.
I hereby certify that all of these tanks (Signed) lllllllllllll
proved satisfactory in every way and comply (Place) lllllllllllll
with the requirements of Department of (Date) llllllllllllll
RECORD OF HYDROSTATIC TESTS ON TANKS

Numbered ........................................................... to ......................................................................... inclusive
Size ..................................................................... inches outside by ................................................ ................ inches long
Built by ...................................................................................................................................................................... Company
For ............................................................................................................................................................................ Company
Percent ratio of
Permanent ex- Capacity in
Serial Nos. of Actual test pres- Total expansion permanent ex- Tare weight
pansion (cubic (pounds) 2 pounds of water
tanks sure (psig) (cubic cm) pansion to total at 60 °F
cm) expansion 1
1 If tests are made by method involving measurement of amount of liquid forced into tank by test pressure, then the basic data
on which calculations are made, such as pump factors, temperature of liquid, coefficient of compressibility of liquid, etc., must
also be given.
2 Do not include protective housing, but state whether with or without valves.
317
Pt. 179, App. A 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(Signed) llllllllllllllllll (Date) lllllllllllllllllll
(Place) llllllllllllllllll
RECORD OF GENERAL DATA ON TANKS

Numbered ........................................................... to ......................................................................... inclusive
Built by ...................................................................................................................................................................... Company
For ............................................................................................................................................................................ Company
Data obtained as prescribed in § 179.500–4(c)

(S) Cal-
Marked end of tank Other end of tank Larger culated Marked Minimum
value of fiber test pres- tensile
(D) Cal- (t) Min- (d) Max- (D) cal- the fac- stress in sure in strength
(t) Min. (d) Max.
Serial thick- inside culated imum imum in- culated tor D2 + psi at 7⁄10 psig of mate-
value of D thick- side di- value of D d2/ marked stamped rial in psi
No. of ness of diameter in ness of ameter in D2¥d2 test pres- in tank recorded
tank wall in in inches=d + wall in in inches=d + sure
inches inches 2t inches inches 2t
(Signed) llllllllllllllllll
[Amdt. 179–32, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as amended by 66 FR 45391, Aug. 28, 2001]
terline of the ram car. One test must be con-

ducted with the coupler at a height of 53.3
APPENDIX A TO PART 179—PROCEDURES cm (21 inches), plus-or-minus 2.5 cm (1 inch),
FOR TANK-HEAD PUNCTURE-RESIST-
above the top of the sill; the other test must
be conducted with the coupler height at 79
ANCE TEST
cm (31 inches), plus-or-minus 2.5 cm (1 inch),
1. This test procedure is designed to verify above the top of the sill. If the combined
the integrity of new or untried tank-head thickness of the tank head and any addi-
puncture-resistance systems and to test for tional shielding material is less than the
system survivability after coupler-to-tank- combined thickness on the vertical center-
head impacts at relative speeds of 29 km/ line of the car, a third test must be con-
hour (18 mph). Tank-head puncture-resist- ducted with the coupler positioned so as to
ance is a function of one or more of the fol- strike the thinnest point of the tank head.
lowing: Head thickness, jacket thickness, in- 3. One of the following test conditions
sulation thickness, and material of construc- must be applied:
tion.
2. Tank-head puncture-resistance test. A Minimum weight of Minimum ve-
tank-head puncture-resistance system must locity of impact
attached ram cars in Restrictions
in km/hour
be tested under the following conditions: kg (pounds) (mph)
a. The ram car used must weigh at least
119,295 kg (263,000 pounds), be equipped with a 119,295 (263,000) ... 29 (18) ........... One ram car only.
coupler, and duplicate the condition of a con- 155,582 (343,000) ... 25.5 (16) ........ One ram car or one
ventional draft sill including the draft yoke car plus one rigidly
and draft gear. The coupler must protrude attached car.
from the end of the ram car so that it is the 311,164 (686,000) ... 22.5 (14) ........ One ram car plus
one or more rigidly
leading location of perpendicular contact
attached cars.
with the impacted test car.
b. The impacted test car must be loaded
4. A test is successful if there is no visible
with water at six percent outage with inter-
nal pressure of at least 6.9 Bar (100 psig) and leak from the standing tank car for at least
coupled to one or more ‘‘backup’’ cars which one hour after impact.
have a total weight of 217,724 kg (480,000 [Amdt. 179–50, 60 FR 49078, Sept. 21, 1995, as
pounds) with hand brakes applied on the last

‘‘backup’’ car. 26, 1996; 66 FR 45390, Aug. 28, 2001]
c. At least two separate tests must be con-
ducted with the coupler on the vertical cen-
318
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT Pt. 179, App. B
APPENDIX B TO PART 179—PROCEDURES (4) The entire surface of the thermal pro-
FOR SIMULATED POOL AND TORCH- tection system must be exposed to the simu-
FIRE TESTING lated pool fire.
(5) A pool-fire simulation test must run for
1. This test procedure is designed to meas- a minimum of 100 minutes. The thermal pro-
ure the thermal effects of new or untried tection system must retard the heat flow to
thermal protection systems and to test for the plate so that none of the thermocouples
system survivability when exposed to a 100- on the non-protected side of the plate indi-
minute pool fire and a 30-minute torch fire. cate a plate temperature in excess of 427 °C
2. Simulated pool fire test. (800 °F).
a. A pool-fire environment must be simu- (6) A minimum of three consecutive suc-
lated in the following manner: cessful simulation fire tests must be per-
(1) The source of the simulated pool fire formed for each thermal protection system.
must be hydrocarbon fuel with a flame tem- 3. Simulated torch fire test.
perature of 871 °C plus or minus 55.6 °C (1600 a. A torch-fire environment must be simu-
°F plus-or-minus 100 °F) throughout the du- lated in the following manner:
ration of the test. (1) The source of the simulated torch must
(2) A square bare plate with thermal prop- be a hydrocarbon fuel with a flame tempera-
erties equivalent to the material of construc- ture of 1,204 °C plus-or-minus 55.6 °C (2,200 °F
tion of the tank car must be used. The plate plus or minus 100 °F), throughout the dura-
dimensions must be not less than one foot by tion of the test. Furthermore, torch veloci-
one foot by nominal 1.6 cm (0.625 inch) thick. ties must be 64.4 km/h ±16 km/h (40 mph ±10
The bare plate must be instrumented with mph) throughout the duration of the test.
not less than nine thermocouples to record (2) A square bare plate with thermal prop-
the thermal response of the bare plate. The erties equivalent to the material of construc-
thermocouples must be attached to the sur- tion of the tank car must be used. The plate
face not exposed to the simulated pool fire dimensions must be at least four feet by four
and must be divided into nine equal squares feet by nominal 1.6 cm (0.625 inch) thick. The
with a thermocouple placed in the center of bare plate must be instrumented with not
each square. less than nine thermocouples to record the
(3) The pool-fire simulator must be con- thermal response of the plate. The
structed in a manner that results in total thermocouples must be attached to the sur-
flame engulfment of the front surface of the face not exposed to the simulated torch and
bare plate. The apex of the flame must be di- must be divided into nine equal squares with
rected at the center of the plate. a thermocouple placed in the center of each
(4) The bare plate holder must be con- square.
structed in such a manner that the only heat
(3) The bare plate holder must be con-
transfer to the back side of the bare plate is
structed in such a manner that the only heat
by heat conduction through the plate and
transfer to the back side of the plate is by
not by other heat paths.
heat conduction through the plate and not
(5) Before the bare plate is exposed to the
by other heat paths. The apex of the flame
simulated pool fire, none of the temperature
must be directed at the center of the plate.
recording devices may indicate a plate tem-
perature in excess of 37.8 °C (100 °F) nor less (4) Before exposure to the simulated torch,
than 0 °C (32 °F). none of the temperature recording devices
may indicate a plate temperature in excess
(6) A minimum of two thermocouple de-
of 37.8 °C (100 °F) or less than 0 °C (32 °F).
vices must indicate 427 °C (800 °F) after 13
minutes, plus-or-minus one minute, of simu- (5) A minimum of two thermocouples must
lated pool-fire exposure. indicate 427 °C (800 °F) in four minutes, plus-
b. A thermal protection system must be or-minus 30 seconds, of torch simulation ex-
tested in the simulated pool-fire environ- posure.
ment described in paragraph 2a of this ap- b. A thermal protection system must be
pendix in the following manner: tested in the simulated torch-fire environ-
(1) The thermal protection system must ment described in paragraph 3a of this ap-
cover one side of a bare plate as described in pendix in the following manner:
paragraph 2a(2) of this appendix. (1) The thermal protection system must
(2) The non-protected side of the bare plate cover one side of the bare plate identical to
must be instrumented with not less than that used to simulate a torch fire under
nine thermocouples placed as described in paragraph 3a(2) of this appendix.
paragraph 2a(2) of this appendix to record (2) The back of the bare plate must be in-
the thermal response of the plate. strumented with not less than nine
(3) Before exposure to the pool-fire simula- thermocouples placed as described in para-
tion, none of the thermocouples on the ther- graph 3a(2) of this appendix to record the
mal protection system configuration may in- thermal response of the material.
dicate a plate temperature in excess of 37.8 (3) Before exposure to the simulated torch,
°C (100 °F) nor less than 0 °C (32 °F). none of the thermocouples on the back side
319
of the thermal protection system configura- Subpart E—Qualification and Maintenance
tion may indicate a plate temperature in ex- of Cargo Tanks
cess of 37.8 °C (100 °F) nor less than 0 °C (32
°F). 180.401 Applicability.
(4) The entire outside surface of the ther- 180.403 Definitions.
mal protection system must be exposed to 180.405 Qualification of cargo tanks.
the simulated torch-fire environment. 180.407 Requirements for test and inspection
(5) A torch-simulation test must be run for of specification cargo tanks.
a minimum of 30 minutes. The thermal pro- 180.409 Minimum qualifications for inspec-
tection system must retard the heat flow to tors and testers.
the plate so that none of the thermocouples 180.411 Acceptable results of tests and in-
on the backside of the bare plate indicate a spections.
plate temperature in excess of 427 °C (800 °F). 180.413 Repair, modification, stretching, re-
(6) A minimum of two consecutive success- barrelling, or mounting of specification
ful torch-simulation tests must be performed cargo tanks.
for each thermal protection system. 180.415 Test and inspection markings.
180.416 Discharge system inspection and
[Amdt. 179–50, 60 FR 49078, Sept. 21, 1995, as maintenance program for cargo tanks
amended at 75 FR 53597, Sept. 1, 2010; 77 FR transporting liquefied compressed gases.
60945, Oct. 5, 2012] 180.417 Reporting and record retention re-
quirements.
PART 180—CONTINUING QUALI- Subpart F—Qualification and Maintenance
FICATION AND MAINTENANCE of Tank Cars
OF PACKAGINGS
180.501 Applicability.
180.503 Definitions.
Subpart A—General 180.505 Quality assurance program.
Sec. 180.507 Qualification of tank cars.
180.509 Requirements for inspection and test
of specification tank cars.
180.2 Applicability.
180.511 Acceptable results of inspections and
180.3 General requirements. tests.
180.513 Repairs, alterations, conversions,
Subpart B [Reserved] and modifications.
180.515 Markings.
Subpart C—Qualification, Maintenance 180.517 Reporting and record retention re-
and Use of Cylinders quirements.
180.519 Periodic retest and inspection of
180.201 Applicability. tank cars other than single-unit tank car
180.203 Definitions. tanks.
180.205 General requirements for requali-
fication of specification cylinders. Subpart G—Qualification and
180.207 Requirements for requalification of Maintenance of Portable Tanks
UN pressure receptacles.
180.209 Requirements for requalification of 180.601 Applicability.
specification cylinders. 180.603 Qualification of portable tanks.
180.211 Repair, rebuilding and reheat treat- 180.605 Requirements for periodic testing,
ment of DOT-4 series specification cyl- inspection and repair of portable tanks.
inders. APPENDIX A TO PART 180—INTERNAL SELF-
180.212 Repair of seamless DOT 3-series CLOSING STOP VALVE EMERGENCY CLO-
specification cylinders and seamless UN SURE TEST FOR LIQUEFIED COMPRESSED
pressure receptacles. GASES
180.213 Requalification markings. APPENDIX B TO PART 180—ACCEPTABLE INTER-
180.215 Reporting and record retention re- NAL SELF-CLOSING STOP VALVE LEAKAGE
quirements. TESTS FOR CARGO TANKS TRANSPORTING
180.217 Requalification requirements for LIQUEFIED COMPRESSED GASES
MEGCs. APPENDIX C TO PART 180—EDDY CURRENT EX-
AMINATION WITH VISUAL INSPECTION FOR
Subpart D—Qualification and Maintenance DOT 3AL CYLINDERS MANUFACTURED OF
ALUMINUM ALLOY 6351–T6
of IBCs APPENDIX D TO PART 180—HAZARDOUS MATE-
180.350 Applicability and definitions. RIALS CORROSIVE TO TANKS OR SERVICE
180.351 Qualification of IBCs. EQUIPMENT

180.352 Requirements for retest and inspec- AUTHORITY: 49 U.S.C. 5101–5128; 49 CFR 1.81
tion of IBCs. and 1.97.
320
SOURCE: Amdt. 180–2, 54 FR 25032, June 12, (3) Test dates displayed in associa-
1989, unless otherwise noted. tion with specification, registration,
approval, or exemption markings indi-
Subpart A—General cating conformance to a test or retest
requirement of this subchapter, an ap-
§ 180.1 Purpose and scope.
proval issued thereunder, or a special
This part prescribes requirements permit issued under subchapter A of
pertaining to the maintenance, recon- this chapter;
ditioning, repair, inspection and test- (4) Documents indicating conform-
ing of packagings, and any other func- ance to the testing, inspection, mainte-
tion having an effect on the continuing
nance or other continuing qualification
qualification and use of a packaging
under the requirements of this sub- requirements of this part; and
chapter. (5) Sales literature, including adver-
tising, indicating that the packaging
§ 180.2 Applicability. or container represented therein con-
(a) Any person who performs a func- forms to requirements contained in
tion prescribed in this part shall per- subchapter A or C of this chapter.
form that function in accordance with [Amdt. 180–2, 54 FR 25032, June 12, 1989, as
this part. amended by Amdt. 180–3, 58 FR 33306, June
(b) Any person who performs a func- 16, 1993; 70 FR 73166, Dec. 9, 2005]
tion prescribed in this part is consid-
ered subject to the regulations of this
subchapter when that person— Subpart B [Reserved]
(1) Makes any representation indi-
cating compliance with one or more of Subpart C—Qualification, Mainte-
the requirements of this part; or nance and Use of Cylinders
(2) Reintroduces into commerce a
packaging that bears markings indi- SOURCE: 67 FR 51660, Aug. 8, 2002, unless
cating compliance with this part. otherwise noted.
[Amdt. 180–2, 54 FR 25032, June 12, 1989, as
amended by Amdt. 180–2, 56 FR 27877, June § 180.201 Applicability.
17, 1991]
This subpart prescribes require-
§ 180.3 General requirements. ments, in addition to those contained
in parts 107, 171, 172, 173, and 178 of this
(a) No person may represent, mark,
certify, sell, or offer a packaging or chapter, for the continuing qualifica-
container as meeting the requirements tion, maintenance, or periodic requali-
of this part, or a special permit per- fication of DOT specification and ex-
taining to this part issued under sub- emption cylinders and UN pressure re-
chapter A of this chapter, whether or ceptacles.
not the packaging or container is in- [71 FR 33894, June 12, 2006]
tended to be used for the transpor-
tation of a hazardous material, unless § 180.203 Definitions.
it is marked, maintained, recondi-
tioned, repaired, or retested, as appro- As used in this section, the word
priate, in accordance with this part, an ‘‘cylinder’’ includes UN pressure recep-
approval issued thereunder, or a special tacles. In addition to the definitions
permit issued under subchapter A of contained in § 171.8 of this subchapter,
this chapter. the following definitions apply to this
(b) The representations, markings, subpart:
and certifications subject to the prohi- Commercially free of corrosive compo-
bitions of paragraph (a) of this section nents means a hazardous material hav-
include: ing a dew point at or below minus 46.7
(1) Identifications that include the °C (minus 52 °F) at 101kPa (1 atmos-
letters ‘‘DOT’’, ‘‘MC’’, ‘‘ICC’’, or ‘‘UN’’; phere) and free of components that will
(2) Special permit, approval, and reg- adversely react with the cylinder (e.g.
istration numbers that include the let- chemical stress corrosion).
ters ‘‘DOT’’;
321
§ 180.205 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
Condemn means a determination that Test pressure means the pressure used
a cylinder is unserviceable for the con- for the requalification of a cylinder.
tinued transportation of hazardous ma- Total expansion means the total in-
terials in commerce and that the cyl- crease in a cylinder’s volume due to ap-
inder may not be restored by repair, re- plication of the test pressure.
building, requalification, or any other Visual inspection means an internal or
procedure. external visual examination, or both,
Defect means an imperfection requir- performed as part of the cylinder re-
ing removal of a cylinder from service. qualification process.
Elastic expansion means a temporary Volumetric expansion test means a
increase in a cylinder’s volume, due to pressure test to determine the total
application of pressure, that is lost and permanent expansion of a cylinder
when pressure is released (elastic ex- at a given pressure. The volumetric ex-
pansion = total expansion minus per- pansion test is conducted using the
manent expansion). water jacket or direct expansion meth-
Filled or charged means an introduc- ods:
tion or presence of a hazardous mate- (1) Water jacket method means a volu-
rial in a cylinder. metric expansion test to determine a
Non-corrosive service means a haz- cylinder’s total and permanent expan-
ardous material that, in the presence sion by measuring the difference be-
of moisture, is not corrosive to the ma- tween the volume of water the cylinder
terials of construction of a cylinder externally displaces at test pressure
(including valve, pressure relief device, and the volume of water the cylinder
etc.). externally displaces at ambient pres-
Over-heated means a condition in sure.
which the temperature of any portion (2) Direct expansion method means a
of an aluminum cylinder has reached volumetric expansion test to calculate
176 °C (350 °F) or higher, or in which the a cylinder’s total and permanent ex-
temperature of any portion of a steel pansion by measuring the amount of
or nickel cylinder has reached 343 °C water forced into a cylinder at test
(650 °F) or higher. pressure, adjusted for the compress-
Permanent expansion means a perma- ibility of water, as a means of deter-
nent increase in a cylinder’s volume mining the expansion.
after the test pressure is released. [67 FR 51660, Aug. 8, 2002, as amended at 71
Proof pressure test means a pressure FR 33894, June 12, 2006]
test by interior pressurization without
the determination of a cylinder’s ex- § 180.205 General requirements for re-
pansion. qualification of specification cyl-
Rebuild means the replacement of a inders.
pressure part (e.g. a wall, head, or pres- (a) General. Each cylinder used for
sure fitting) by welding. the transportation of hazardous mate-
Rejected cylinder means a cylinder rials must be an authorized packaging.
that cannot be used for the transpor- To qualify as an authorized packaging,
tation of a hazardous material in com- each cylinder must conform to this
merce without repair, rebuilding, and subpart, the applicable requirements
requalification. specified in part 173 of this subchapter,
Repair means a procedure for correc- and the applicable requirements of sub-
tion of a rejected cylinder that may in- part C of part 178 of this subchapter.
volve welding. (b) Persons performing requalification
Requalification means the completion functions. No person may represent
of a visual inspection and/or the test(s) that a repair or requalification of a
required to be performed on a cylinder cylinder has been performed in accord-
to determine its suitability for contin- ance with the requirements in this sub-
ued service. chapter unless that person holds a cur-
Requalification identification number or rent approval issued under the proce-
RIN means a code assigned by DOT to dural requirements prescribed in sub-

uniquely identify a cylinder requali- part I of part 107 of this chapter. No
fication, repair, or rebuilding facility. person may mark a cylinder with a
322
RIN and a requalification date or oth- (1) Each cylinder that is requalified
erwise represent that a DOT specifica- in accordance with the requirements
tion or special permit cylinder has specified in this section must be
been requalified unless all applicable marked in accordance with § 180.213 or
requirements of this subpart have been the requirements of the Transport Can-
met. A person who requalifies cylinders ada TDG Regulations, or in the case of
must maintain the records prescribed a TC cylinder requalified in the United
in § 180.215 at each location at which it States by a DOT RIN holder, in accord-
inspects, tests, or marks cylinders. ance with the requirements of the
(c) Periodic requalification of cylinders. Transport Canada TDG Regulations ex-
Each cylinder bearing a DOT, CRC, cept that registration with Transport
BTC, or CTC specification marking Canada is not required and cylinders
must be requalified and marked as must be marked with the requalifiers
specified in the Requalification Table DOT issued requalifier identification
in this subpart or requalified and number.
marked by a facility registered by (2) Each cylinder that fails requali-
Transport Canada in accordance with fication must be:
the Transport Canada TDG Regula- (i) Rejected and may be repaired or
tions (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- rebuilt in accordance with § 180.211 or
chapter). Each cylinder bearing both a § 180.212, as appropriate; or
TC specification marking and also (ii) Condemned in accordance with
marked with a corresponding DOT paragraph (i) of this section.
specification marking must be requali- (3) For DOT specification cylinders,
fied and marked as specified in the Re- the marked service pressure may be
qualification Table in this subpart or changed upon approval of the Associate
requalified and marked by a facility Administrator and in accordance with
registered by Transport Canada in ac- written procedures specified in the ap-
cordance with the Transport Canada proval.
TDG Regulations (IBR, see § 171.7 of (4) For a specification 3, 3A, 3AA,
this subchapter). Each cylinder bearing 3AL, 3AX, 3AAX, 3B, 3BN, or 3T cyl-
a DOT special permit number must be inder filled with gases in other than Di-
requalified and marked in conformance vision 2.2, from the first requalification
with this section and the terms of the due on or after December 31, 2003, the
applicable special permit. Each cyl- burst pressure of a CG–1, CG–4, or CG–
inder bearing only a TC mark must be 5 pressure relief device must be at test
requalified and marked as specified in pressure with a tolerance of plus zero
the Transport Canada TDG Regula- to minus 10%. An additional 5% toler-
tions (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- ance is allowed when a combined rup-
chapter), except that registration with ture disc is placed inside a holder. This
Transport Canada is not required and requirement does not apply if a CG–2,
cylinders must be marked with the re- CG–3 or CG–9 thermally activated relief
qualifiers DOT issued requalifier iden- device or a CG–7 reclosing pressure
tification number. No cylinder may be valve is used on the cylinder.
filled with a hazardous material and of- (d) Conditions requiring test and inspec-
fered for transportation in commerce tion of cylinders. Without regard to any
unless that cylinder has been success- other periodic requalification require-
fully requalified and marked in accord- ments, a cylinder must be tested and
ance with this subpart. A cylinder may inspected in accordance with this sec-
be requalified at any time during or be- tion prior to further use if—
fore the month and year that the re- (1) The cylinder shows evidence of
qualification is due. However, a cyl- dents, corrosion, cracked or abraded
inder filled before the requalification areas, leakage, thermal damage, or any
becomes due may remain in service other condition that might render it
until it is emptied. A cylinder with a unsafe for use in transportation;
specified service life may not be re- (2) The cylinder has been in an acci-
filled and offered for transportation dent and has been damaged to an ex-
after its authorized service life has extent that may adversely affect its lad-
pired. ing retention capability;
323
§ 180.205 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(3) The cylinder shows evidence of or apparatus (SCUBA), self-contained

is known to have been over-heated; or breathing apparatus (SCBA), or oxygen
(4) The Associate Administrator de- service must be inspected for sustained
termines that the cylinder may be in load cracking in accordance with Ap-
an unsafe condition. pendix C of this part at the first sched-
(e) Cylinders containing Class 8 (corro- uled 5-year requalification period after
sive) liquids. A cylinder previously con- January 1, 2007, and every five years
taining a Class 8 (corrosive) liquid may thereafter.
not be used to transport a Class 2 ma- (g) Pressure test. (1) Unless otherwise
terial in commerce unless the cylinder provided, each cylinder required to be
is— retested under this subpart must be re-
(1) Visually inspected, internally and tested by means suitable for measuring
externally, in accordance with para- the expansion of the cylinder under
graph (f) of this section and the inspec- pressure. Bands and other removable
tion is recorded as prescribed in attachments must be loosened or re-
§ 180.215; moved before testing so that the cyl-
(2) Requalified in accordance with inder is free to expand in all directions.
this section, regardless of the date of (2) The pressure indicating device of
the previous requalification; the testing apparatus must permit
(3) Marked in accordance with reading of pressures to within 1% of
§ 180.213; and the minimum prescribed test pressure
(4) Decontaminated to remove all sig- of each cylinder tested, except that for
nificant residue or impregnation of the an analog device, interpolation to 1⁄2 of
Class 8 material. the marked gauge divisions is accept-
(f) Visual inspection. Except as other- able. The expansion-indicating device
wise provided in this subpart, each of the testing apparatus must also per-
time a cylinder is pressure tested, it mit incremental reading of the cyl-
must be given an internal and external inder expansion to 1% of the total ex-
visual inspection. pansion of each cylinder tested or 0.1
(1) The visual inspection must be per- cc, whichever is larger. Midpoint visual
formed in accordance with the fol- interpolation is permitted.
lowing CGA Pamphlets: C–6 for steel (3) Each day before retesting, the re-
and nickel cylinders (IBR, see § 171.7 of tester shall confirm, by using a cali-
this subchapter); C–6.1 for seamless brated cylinder or other method au-
aluminum cylinders (IBR, see § 171.7 of thorized in writing by the Associate
this subchapter); C–6.2 for fiber rein- Administrator, that:
forced composite special permit cyl- (i) The pressure-indicating device, as
inders (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subpart of the retest apparatus, is accu-
chapter); C–6.3 for low pressure alu- rate within ±1.0% of the prescribed test
minum cylinders (IBR, see § 171.7 of pressure of any cylinder tested that
this subchapter); C–8 for DOT 3HT cyl- day. The pressure indicating device,
inders (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- itself, must be certified as having an
chapter); and C–13 for DOT 8 series cyl- accuracy of ±0.5%, or better, of its full
inders (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- range, and must permit readings of
chapter). pressure from 90%-110% of the min-
(2) For each cylinder with a coating imum prescribed test pressure of the
or attachments that would inhibit in- cylinder to be tested. The accuracy of
spection of the cylinder, the coating or the pressure indicating device within
attachments must be removed before the test system can be demonstrated at
performing the visual inspection. any point within 500 psig of the actual
(3) Each cylinder subject to visual in- test pressure for test pressures at or
spection must be approved, rejected, or above 3000 psig, or 10% of the actual
condemned according to the criteria in test pressure for test pressures below
the applicable CGA pamphlet. 3000 psig.
(4) In addition to other requirements (ii) The expansion-indicating device,
prescribed in this paragraph (f), each as part of the retest apparatus, gives a
specification cylinder manufactured of stable reading of expansion and is accu-

aluminum alloy 6351–T6 and used in rate to ±1.0% of the total expansion of
self-contained underwater breathing any cylinder tested or 0.1 cc, whichever
324
is larger. The expansion-indicating de- (2) The requalifier must notify the
vice itself must have an accuracy of cylinder owner, in writing, that the
±0.5%, or better, of its full scale. cylinder has been rejected.
(4) The test equipment must be (3) Unless the cylinder is requalified
verified to be accurate within ±1.0% of in conformance with requirements in
the calibrated cylinder’s pressure and § 180.211, it may not be filled with a
corresponding expansion values. This hazardous material and offered for
may be accomplished by bringing the transportation in commerce where use
pressure to a value shown on the cali- of a specification packaging is re-
bration certificate for the calibrated quired.
cylinder used and verifying that the re- (4) A rejected cylinder with a service
sulting total expansion is within ±1.0% pressure of less than 900 psig may be
requalified and marked if the cylinder
of the total expansion shown on the
is repaired or rebuilt and subsequently
calibration certificate. Alternatively,
inspected and tested in conformance
calibration may be demonstrated by
with—
bringing the total expansion to a
(i) The visual inspection require-
known value on the calibration certifi- ments of paragraph (f) of this section;
cate for the calibrated cylinder used (ii) Part 178 of this subchapter and
and verifying that the resulting pres- this part;
sure is within ±1.0% of the pressure (iii) Any special permit covering the
shown on the calibration certificate. manufacture, requalification, and/or
The calibrated cylinder must show no use of that cylinder; and
permanent expansion. The retester (iv) Any approval required under
must demonstrate calibration in con- § 180.211.
formance with this paragraph (g) to an (i) Cylinder condemnation. (1) A cyl-
authorized inspector on any day that it inder must be condemned when—
retests cylinders. A retester must (i) The cylinder meets a condition for
maintain calibrated cylinder certifi- condemnation under the visual inspec-
cates in conformance with tion requirements of paragraph (f) of
§ 180.215(b)(4). this section.
(5) Minimum test pressure must be (ii) The cylinder leaks through its
maintained for at least 30 seconds, and wall.
as long as necessary for complete ex- (iii) Evidence of cracking exists to
pansion of the cylinder. A system the extent that the cylinder is likely to
check may be performed at or below be weakened appreciably.
90% of test pressure prior to the retest. (iv) For a DOT specification cylinder,
In the case of a malfunction of the test other than a DOT 4E aluminum cyl-
equipment, the test may be repeated at inder or a special permit cylinder, per-
a pressure increased by 10% or 100 psig, manent expansion exceeds 10 percent of
whichever is less. This paragraph (g) total expansion.
(v) For a DOT 3HT cylinder—
does not authorize retest of a cylinder
(A) The pressure test yields an elas-
otherwise required to be condemned
tic expansion exceeding the marked re-
under paragraph (i) of this section.
jection elastic expansion (REE) value.
(6) Training materials may be used (B) The cylinder shows evidence of
for training persons who requalify cyl- denting or bulging.
inders using the volumetric expansion (C) The cylinder bears a manufacture
test method. or an original test date older than
(h) Cylinder rejection. A cylinder must twenty-four years or after 4380 pressur-
be rejected when, after a visual inspec- izations, whichever occurs first. If a
tion, it meets a condition for rejection cylinder is refilled, on average, more
under the visual inspection require- than once every other day, an accurate
ments of paragraph (f) of this section. record of the number of rechargings
(1) Except as provided in paragraphs must be maintained by the cylinder
(h)(3) and (h)(4) of this section, a cyl- owner or the owner’s agent.
inder that is rejected may not be (vi) For a DOT 4E aluminum cyl-
marked as meeting the requirements of inder, permanent expansion exceeds 12
this section. percent of total expansion.
325
§ 180.207 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(vii) For a DOT special permit cyl- hazardous materials must conform to
inder, permanent expansion exceeds the requirements prescribed in para-
the limit in the applicable special per- graphs (a), (b) and (d) in § 180.205.
mit, or the cylinder meets another cri- (2) No pressure receptacle due for re-
terion for condemnation in the applica- qualification may be filled with a haz-
ble special permit. ardous material and offered for trans-
(viii) For an aluminum or an alu- portation in commerce unless that
minum-lined composite special permit pressure receptacle has been success-
cylinder, the cylinder is known to have
fully requalified and marked in accord-
been or shows evidence of having been
over-heated. ance with this subpart. A pressure re-
(2) When a cylinder must be con- ceptacle may be requalified at any
demned, the requalifier must— time during or before the month and
(i) Stamp a series of X’s over the year that the requalification is due.
DOT specification number and the However, a pressure receptacle filled
marked pressure or stamp ‘‘CON- before the requalification becomes due
DEMNED’’ on the shoulder, top head, may remain in service until it is
or neck using a steel stamp; emptied.
(ii) For composite cylinders, securely (3) No person may requalify a UN
affix to the cylinder a label with the composite pressure receptacle for con-
word ‘‘CONDEMNED’’ overcoated with tinued use beyond its 15-years author-
epoxy near, but not obscuring, the ized service life. A pressure receptacle
original cylinder manufacturer’s label; with a specified service life may not be
or refilled and offered for transportation
(iii) As an alternative to the stamp- after its authorized service life has ex-
ing or labeling as described in this
pired unless approval has been obtained
paragraph (i)(2), at the direction of the
in writing from the Associate Adminis-
owner, the requalifier may render the
cylinder incapable of holding pressure. trator.
(3) No person may remove or oblit- (b) Periodic requalification of UN pres-
erate the ‘‘CONDEMNED’’ marking. In sure receptacles. (1) Each pressure recep-
addition, the requalifier must notify tacle that is successfully requalified in
the cylinder owner, in writing, that the accordance with the requirements spec-
cylinder is condemned and may not be ified in this section must be marked in
filled with hazardous material and of- accordance with § 180.213. The requali-
fered for transportation in commerce fication results must be recorded in ac-
where use of a specification packaging cordance § 180.215.
is required. (2) Each pressure receptacle that fails
[67 FR 51660, Aug. 8, 2002, as amended at 68 requalification must be rejected or
FR 24662, May 8, 2003; 68 FR 75764, Dec. 31, condemned in accordance with the ap-
2003; 70 FR 34077, June 13, 2005; 70 FR 73166, plicable ISO requalification standard.
Dec. 9, 2005; 71 FR 51128, Aug. 29, 2006; 73 FR (c) Requalification interval. Each UN
4720, Jan. 28, 2008; 75 FR 53597, Sept. 1, 2010;
82 FR 15896, Mar. 30, 2017] pressure receptacle that becomes due
for periodic requalification must be re-
§ 180.207 Requirements for requalifica- qualified at the interval specified in
tion of UN pressure receptacles. the following table:
(a) General. (1) Each UN pressure re-
ceptacle used for the transportation of
TABLE 1—REQUALIFICATION INTERVALS OF UN PRESSURE RECEPTACLES
Interval (years) UN pressure receptacles/hazardous materials
10 ................... Pressure receptacles for all hazardous materials except as noted below (also for dissolved acetylene, see
paragraph (d)(3) of this section):
5 ..................... Composite pressure receptacles.
5 ..................... Metal hydride storage systems
5 ..................... Pressure receptacles used for:

All Division 2.3 materials.
UN1013, Carbon dioxide.
326
TABLE 1—REQUALIFICATION INTERVALS OF UN PRESSURE RECEPTACLES—Continued

Interval (years) UN pressure receptacles/hazardous materials
UN1043, Fertilizer ammoniating solution with free ammonia.

UN1051, Hydrogen cyanide, stabilized containing less than 3% water.
UN1052, Hydrogen fluoride, anhydrous.
UN1745, Bromine pentafluoride.
UN1746, Bromine trifluoride.
UN2073, Ammonia solution.
UN2495, Iodine pentafluoride.
UN2983, Ethylene Oxide and Propylene oxide mixture, not more than 30% ethylene oxide.
5 ..................... Pressure receptacles used for adsorbed gases.
(d) Requalification procedures. Each be requalified in accordance with ISO

UN pressure receptacle that becomes 10462:2013(E) (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
due for requalification must be requali- chapter). Until December 31, 2018 re-
fied at the interval prescribed in para- qualification may be done in accord-
graph (c) of this section and in accordance with ISO 10462(E) (IBR, see § 171.7
ance with the procedures contained in of this subchapter). The porous mass
the following standard, as applicable. and the shell must be requalified no
When a pressure test is performed on a sooner than 3 years, 6 months, from the
UN pressure receptacle, the test must date of manufacture. Thereafter, subse-
be a water jacket volumetric expansion quent requalifications of the porous
test suitable for the determination of mass and shell must be performed at
the cylinder expansion or a hydraulic least once every ten years.
proof pressure test. The test equipment (4) Composite UN cylinders: Each
must conform to the accuracy require- composite cylinder must be inspected
ments in § 180.205(g). Alternative meth- and tested in accordance with ISO 11623
ods (e.g., acoustic emission) or requali- (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter).
fication procedures may be performed (5) UN cylinders for adsorbed gases:
if prior approval has been obtained in Each UN cylinder for adsorbed gases
writing from the Associate Adminis- must be inspected and tested in accord-
trator. ance with § 173.302c and ISO 11513:2011
(1) Seamless steel: Each seamless (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter).
steel UN pressure receptacle, including [71 FR 33894, June 12, 2006, as amended at 71
MEGC’s pressure receptacles, must be FR 54397, Sept. 14, 2006; 76 FR 3389, Jan. 19,
requalified in accordance with ISO 6406 2011; 80 FR 1168, Jan. 8, 2015; 82 FR 15897, Mar.
(IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). 30, 2017]
However, UN cylinders with a tensile
strength greater than or equal to 950 § 180.209 Requirements for requalifica-
MPa must be requalified by ultrasonic tion of specification cylinders.
examination in accordance with ISO (a) Periodic qualification of cylinders.
6406. Each specification cylinder that be-
(2) Seamless UN aluminum: Each comes due for periodic requalification,
seamless aluminum UN pressure recep- as specified in the following table,
tacle must be requalified in accordance must be requalified and marked in con-
with ISO 10461 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this formance with the requirements of this
subchapter). subpart. Requalification records must
(3) Dissolved acetylene UN cylinders: be maintained in accordance with
Each dissolved acetylene cylinder must § 180.215. Table 1 follows:
TABLE 1—REQUALIFICATION OF CYLINDERS 1
Specification under which Minimum test pressure Requalification period
cylinder was made (psig) 2 (years)
DOT 3 ....................................................... 3000 psig ................................................. 5.

DOT 3A, 3AA ........................................... 5/3 times service pressure, except non- 5, 10, or 12 (see § 180.209(b), (e), (f),
corrosive service (see § 180.209(g)). (h), and (j).

DOT 3AL .................................................. 5/3 times service pressure ....................... 5, 10 or 12 (see § 180.209(e), (j) and
§ 180.209(m) 3).
DOT 3AX, 3AAX ...................................... 5/3 times service pressure ....................... 5, 10 (see § 180.209(e).
327
§ 180.209 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
TABLE 1—REQUALIFICATION OF CYLINDERS 1—Continued

Specification under which Minimum test pressure Requalification period
cylinder was made (psig) 2 (years)
3B, 3BN .................................................... 2 times service pressure (see 5 or 10 (see § 180.209(e), (f)).
§ 180.209(g)).
3E ............................................................. Test not required.
3HT ........................................................... 5/3 times service pressure ....................... 3 (see §§ 180.209(k) and 180.213(c)).
3T ............................................................. 5/3 times service pressure ....................... 5.
4AA480 ..................................................... 2 times service pressure (see 5 or 10 (see § 180.209(e) or (h)).
§ 180.209(g)).
4B, 4BA, 4BW, 4B–240ET ....................... 2 times service pressure, except non- 5, 10, or 12 (see § 180.209(e), (f), and
corrosive service (see § 180.209(g)). (j)).
4D, 4DA, 4DS .......................................... 2 times service ......................................... 5.
DOT 4E .................................................... 2 times service pressure, except non- 5 or 10 (see § 180.209(e)).
corrosive (see § 180.209(g)).
4L ............................................................. Test not required.
8, 8AL ....................................................... .................................................................. 10 or 20 (see § 180.209(i)).
Exemption or special permit cylinder ....... See current exemption or special permit See current exemption or special permit.
Foreign cylinder (see § 173.301(j) of this As marked on cylinder, but not less than 5 (see §§ 180.209(l) and 180.213(d)(2)).
subchapter for restrictions on use). 5/3 of any service or working pressure
marking.
1 Any cylinder not exceeding 2 inches outside diameter and less than 2 feet in length is excepted from volumetric expansion
test.
2 For cylinders not marked with a service pressure, see § 173.301a(b) of this subchapter.
3 This provision does not apply to cylinders used for carbon dioxide, fire extinguisher or other industrial gas service.
(b) DOT 3A or 3AA cylinders. (1) A cyl- (v) The cylinder is not used for un-
inder conforming to specification DOT derwater breathing.
3A or 3AA with a water capacity of 56.7 (vi) Each cylinder is stamped with a
kg (125 lb) or less that is removed from five-pointed star at least one-fourth of
any cluster, bank, group, rack, or vehi- an inch high immediately following the
cle each time it is filled, may be retest date.
qualified every ten years instead of (2) If, since the last required requali-
every five years, provided the cylinder fication, a cylinder has not been used
conforms to all of the following condi- exclusively for the gases specifically
tions: identified in paragraph (b)(1)(ii) of this
(i) The cylinder was manufactured section, but currently conforms with
after December 31, 1945. all other provisions of paragraph (b)(1)
of this section, it may be requalified
(ii) The cylinder is used exclusively
every 10 years instead of every five
for air; argon; cyclopropane; ethylene;
years, provided it is first requalified
helium; hydrogen; krypton; neon; ni-
and examined as prescribed by
trogen; nitrous oxide; oxygen; sulfur
§ 173.302a(b) (2), (3) and (4) of this sub-
hexafluoride; xenon; chlorinated hydro-
chapter.
carbons, fluorinated hydrocarbons, liq- (3) Except as specified in paragraph
uefied hydrocarbons, and mixtures (b)(2) of this section, if a cylinder,
thereof that are commercially free marked with a star, is filled with a
from corroding components; permitted compressed gas other than as specified
mixtures of these gases (see § 173.301(d) in paragraph (b)(1)(ii) of this section,
of this subchapter); and permitted mix- the star following the most recent test
tures of these gases with up to 30 per- date must be obliterated. The cylinder
cent by volume of carbon dioxide, pro- must be requalified five years from the
vided the gas has a dew point at or marked test date, or prior to the first
below minus (52 °F) at 1 atmosphere. filling with a compressed gas, if the re-
(iii) Before each refill, the cylinder is quired five-year requalification period
removed from any cluster, bank, group, has passed.
rack or vehicle and passes the hammer (c) DOT 4-series cylinders. A DOT 4-se-
test specified in CGA Pamphlet C–6 ries cylinder, except a 4L cylinder, that
(IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). at any time shows evidence of a leak or
(iv) The cylinder is dried imme- of internal or external corrosion, dent-

diately after hydrostatic testing to re- ing, bulging or rough usage to the ex-
move all traces of water. tent that it is likely to be weakened
328
appreciably, or that has lost five per- nents, and protected externally by a
cent or more of its official tare weight suitable corrosion resistant coating
must be requalified before being re- (such as galvanizing or painting) and
filled and offered for transportation. internally by a suitable corrosion re-
(Refer to CGA Pamphlet C–6 or C–6.3, sistant lining (such as galvanizing)
as applicable, regarding cylinder weak- may be tested every 10 years instead of
ening.) After testing, the actual tare every five years, provided a visual in-
weight must be recorded as the new ternal and external examination of the
tare weight. cylinder is conducted every five years
(d) Cylinders 5.44 kg (12 lb) or less with in accordance with CGA Pamphlet C–6.
service pressures of 300 psig or less. A cyl- The cylinder must be examined at each
inder of 5.44 (12 lb) or less water capac- filling, and rejected if a dent, corroded
ity authorized for service pressure of area, leak or other condition indicates
300 psig or less must be given a com- possible weakness.
plete external visual inspection at the (g) Visual inspections. A cylinder con-
time periodic requalification becomes forming to a specification listed in the
due. External visual inspection must be table in this paragraph and used exclu-
in accordance with CGA Pamphlet C–6
sively in the service indicated may, in-
or C–6.1 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
stead of a periodic hydrostatic test, be
chapter). The cylinder may be proof
given a complete external visual in-
pressure tested. The test is successful
spection at the time periodic requali-
if the cylinder, when examined under
test pressure, does not display a defect fication becomes due. External visual
described in § 180.205(i)(1) (ii) or (iii). inspection must be in accordance with
Upon successful completion of the test CGA Pamphlet C–6 or C–6.3, as applica-
and inspection, the cylinder must be ble (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter).
marked in accordance with § 180.213. When this inspection is used instead of
(e) Proof pressure test. A cylinder hydrostatic pressure testing, subse-
made in conformance with DOT Speci- quent inspections are required at five-
fications 4B, 4BA, 4BW, or 4E protected year intervals after the first inspec-
externally by a suitable corrosion-re- tion. After May 31, 2004, inspections
sistant coating and used exclusively for must be made only by persons holding
non-corrosive gas that is commercially a current RIN and the results recorded
free from corroding components may and maintained in accordance with
be requalified by volumetric expansion § 180.215. Records must include: date of
testing or proof pressure testing every inspection (month and year); DOT spec-
10 years instead of every 5 years. When ification number; cylinder identifica-
subjected to a proof pressure test, the tion (registered symbol and serial num-
cylinder must be carefully examined ber, date of manufacture, and owner);
under test pressure and removed from type of cylinder protective coating (in-
service if a leak or defect is found. cluding statement as to need of refin-
(f) Poisonous materials. A cylinder ishing or recoating); conditions
conforming to specification DOT 3A, checked (e.g., leakage, corrosion, goug-
3AA, 3B, 4BA, or 4BW having a service es, dents or digs in shell or heads, bro-
pressure of 300 psig or less and used ex- ken or damaged footring or protective
clusively for methyl bromide, liquid; ring or fire damage); disposition of cyl-
mixtures of methyl bromide and ethyl- inder (returned to service, returned to
ene dibromide, liquid; mixtures of cylinder manufacturer for repairs or
methyl bromide and chlorpicrin, liquid; condemned). A cylinder passing re-
mixtures of methyl bromide and petro- qualification by the external visual in-
leum solvents, liquid; or methyl bro- spection must be marked in accordance
mide and nonflammable, nonliquefied with § 180.213. Specification cylinders
compressed gas mixtures, liquid; com- must be in exclusive service as shown
mercially free of corroding compo- in the following table:
Cylinders conforming to— Used exclusively for—
DOT 3A, DOT 3AA, DOT 3A480X, DOT 4AA480 ...................... Anhydrous ammonia of at least 99.95% purity.
DOT 3A, DOT 3AA, DOT 3A480X, DOT 3B, DOT 4B, DOT Butadiene, inhibited, that is commercially free from corroding
4BA, DOT 4BW. components.
329
§ 180.209 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
Cylinders conforming to— Used exclusively for—
DOT 3A, DOT 3A480X, DOT 3AA, DOT 3B, DOT 4AA480, Cyclopropane that is commercially free from corroding compo-
DOT 4B, DOT 4BA, DOT 4BW. nents.
DOT 3A, DOT 3AA, DOT 3A480X, DOT 4B, DOT 4BA, DOT Chlorinated hydrocarbons and mixtures thereof that are com-
4BW, DOT 4E. mercially free from corroding components.
DOT 3A, DOT 3AA, DOT 3A480X, DOT 4B, DOT 4BA, DOT Fluorinated hydrocarbons and mixtures thereof that are com-
4BW, DOT 4E. mercially free from corroding components.
DOT 3A, DOT 3AA, DOT 3A480X, DOT 3B, DOT 4B, DOT Liquefied hydrocarbon gas that is commercially free from cor-
4BA, DOT 4BW, DOT 4E. roding components.
DOT 3A, DOT 3AA, DOT 3A480X, DOT 3B, DOT 4B, DOT Liquefied petroleum gas that meets the detail requirements lim-
4BA, DOT 4BW, DOT 4E. its in Table 1 of ASTM 1835, Standard Specification for Liq-
uefied Petroleum (LP) Gases (incorporated by reference;
see § 171.7 of this subchapter) or an equivalent standard
containing the same limits.
DOT 3A, DOT 3AA, DOT 3B, DOT 4B, DOT 4BA, DOT 4BW, Methylacetylene-propadiene, stabilized, that is commercially
DOT 4E. free from corroding components.
DOT 3A, DOT 3AA, DOT 3B, DOT 4B, DOT 4BA, DOT 4BW .. Anhydrous mono, di,trimethylamines that are commercially free
from corroding components.
DOT 4B240, DOT 4BW240 ......................................................... Ethyleneimine, stabilized.
DOT 4BW .................................................................................... Alkali metal alloys, liquid, n.o.s., Alkali metal dispersions or Al-
kaline earth metal dispersions, Potassium, Potassium So-
dium alloys and Sodium that are commercially free of cor-
roding components.
(h) Cylinders containing anhydrous am- (i) Requalification of DOT-8 series cyl-
monia. A cylinder conforming to speci- inders. (1) Each owner of a DOT-8 series
fication DOT 3A, 3A480X, or 4AA480 cylinder used to transport acetylene
used exclusively for anhydrous ammo- must have the cylinder shell and the
nia, commercially free from corroding porous filler requalified in accordance
components, and protected externally with CGA Pamphlet C–13 (IBR, see
by a suitable corrosion-resistant coat- § 171.7 of this subchapter). Requalifica-
ing (such as paint) may be requalified tion must be performed in accordance
every 10 years instead of every five with the following schedule:
years.
Shell (visual inspection) requalification Porous filler requalification
Date of cylinder manu-
facture Initial Subsequent Intial Subsequent
Before January 1, 1991 Before January 1, 2001 10 years ....................... Before January 1, 2011 Not required.
On or after January 1, 10 years 1 ..................... 10 years ....................... 5 to 20 years 2 ............. Not required.
1991.
1 Years from the date of cylinder manufacture.
2 No sooner than 5 years, and no later than 20 years from the date of manufacture.
(2) Unless requalified and marked in as a fire extinguisher and meeting the
accordance with CGA Pamphlet C–13 requirements of § 173.309(a) of this sub-
before October 1, 1994, an acetylene cyl- chapter may be requalified in accord-
inder must be requalified by a person ance with this paragraph (j).
who holds a current RIN. (1) A DOT 4B, 4BA, 4B240ET or 4BW
(3) If a cylinder valve is replaced, a cylinder may be tested as follows:
cylinder valve of the same weight must (i) For a cylinder with a water capac-
be used or the tare weight of the cyl- ity of 5.44 kg (12 lb) or less, by volu-
inder must be adjusted to compensate metric expansion test using the water
for valve weight differential. jacket method or by proof pressure
(4) The person performing a visual in- test. A requalification must be per-
spection or requalification must record formed by the end of 12 years after the
the results as specified in § 180.215. original test date and at 12-year inter-
(5) The person performing a visual in- vals thereafter.
spection or requalification must mark (ii) For a cylinder having a water ca-
the cylinder as specified in § 180.213. pacity over 5.44 kg (12 lb)—

(j) Cylinder used as a fire extinguisher. (A) By proof pressure test. A requali-
Only a DOT specification cylinder used fication must be performed by the end
330
of 12 years after the original test date (1) It has been inspected, tested and
and at 7-year intervals; or marked (with only the month and year
(B) By volumetric expansion test using of test) in conformance with the proce-
the water jacket method. A requalifica- dures and requirements of this subpart
tion must be performed 12 years after or the Associate Administrator has au-
the original test date and at 12-year in- thorized the filling company to fill for-
tervals thereafter. eign cylinders under an alternative
(2) A DOT 3A, 3AA, or 3AL cylinder method of qualification; and
must be requalified by volumetric ex- (2) It is offered for transportation in
pansion test using the water jacket conformance with the requirements of
method. A requalification must be per- § 171.12(a)(4) or § 171.23(a)(4) of this sub-
formed 12 years after the original test chapter.
date and at 12-year intervals there- (m) DOT–3AL cylinders manufactured
after. of 6351–T6 aluminum alloy. In addition
(k) 3HT cylinders. In addition to the to the periodic requalification and
other requirements of this section, a marking described in § 180.205, each cyl-
cylinder marked DOT-3HT must be re- inder manufactured of aluminum alloy
qualified in accordance with CGA C–8 6351–T6 used in self-contained under-
(IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). water breathing apparatus (SCUBA),
(l) Requalification of foreign cylinders self-contained breathing apparatus
filled for export. A cylinder manufac- (SCBA), or oxygen service must be re-
tured outside the United States, other qualified and inspected for sustained
than as provided in §§ 171.12(a) and load cracking in accordance with the
171.23(a) of this subchapter, that has non-destructive examination method
not been manufactured, inspected, test- described in the following table. Each
ed and marked in accordance with part cylinder with sustained load cracking
178 of this subchapter may be filled that has expanded into the neck
with compressed gas in the United threads must be condemned in accord-
States, and shipped solely for export if ance with § 180.205(i). This provision
it meets the following requirements, in does not apply to cylinders used for
addition to other requirements of this carbon dioxide, fire extinguisher or
subchapter: other industrial gas service.
REQUALIFICATION AND INSPECTION OF DOT–3AL CYLINDERS MADE OF ALUMINUM ALLOY 6351–T6
Requalifica-
Sustained Load Cracking Con-
Requalification requirement Examination procedure 1 tion period
demnation Criteria 2 (years)
Eddy current examination combined Eddy current—In accordance with Any crack in the neck or shoulder 5
with visual inspection. Appendix C of this part. of 2 thread lengths or more.
Visual inspection—In accordance
with CGA Pamphlet C–6.1 (IBR;
1 The requalifier performing eddy current must be familiar with the eddy current equipment and must standardize (calibrate) the
system in accordance with the requirements provided in Appendix C to this part.
2 The eddy current must be applied from the inside of the cylinder’s neck to detect any sustained load cracking that has ex-
panded into the neck threads.
[67 FR 51660, Aug. 8, 2002, as amended at 68 § 180.211 Repair, rebuilding and re-
FR 24662, May 8, 2003; 68 FR 55544, Sept. 26, heat treatment of DOT-4 series
2003; 68 FR 48572, Aug. 14, 2003; 68 FR 75764, specification cylinders.
Dec. 31, 2003; 70 FR 73166, Dec. 9, 2005; 71 FR
51128, Aug. 29, 2005; 72 FR 55696, Oct. 1, 2007; (a) General requirements for repair and
74 FR 53189, Oct. 16, 2009; 81 FR 3685, Jan. 21, rebuilding. Any repair or rebuilding of a
2016; 81 FR 35545, June 2, 2016] DOT–4 series cylinder must be per-
EDITORIAL NOTE: At 71 FR 54397, Sept. 14, formed by a person holding an approval
2006, § 180.209 was amended in (a)(1) table 1; as specified in § 107.805 of this chapter
however, because of the inaccurate amend- or by a registered facility in Canada in
atory language, the amendment could not be accordance with the Transport Canada
incorporated. TDG Regulations (IBR, see § 171.7 of
this subchapter). A person performing
331
§ 180.211 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
a rebuild function is considered a man- (c) Additional repair requirements for

ufacturer subject to the requirements 4L cylinders. (1) Repairs to a DOT 4L
of § 178.2(a)(2) and subpart C of part 178 cylinder must be performed in accord-
of this subchapter. The person per- ance with paragraphs (a) and (b) of this
forming a repair, rebuild, or reheat section and are limited to the fol-
treatment must record the test results lowing:
as specified in § 180.215. Each cylinder (i) The removal of either end of the
that is successfully repaired or rebuilt insulation jacket to permit access to
must be marked in accordance with the cylinder, piping system, or neck
§ 180.213. tube.
(b) General repair requirements. Each (ii) The replacement of the neck
repair of a DOT 4-series cylinder must tube. At least a 13 mm (0.51 inch) piece
be made in accordance with the fol- of the original neck tube must be pro-
lowing conditions: truding above the cylinder’s top end.
(1) The repair and the inspection of The original weld attaching the neck
the work performed must be made in tube to the cylinder must be sound and
accordance with the requirements of the replacement neck tube must be
the cylinder specification. welded to this remaining piece of the
(2) The person performing the repair original neck tube.
must use the procedure, equipment, (iii) The replacement of material
and filler metal or brazing material as such as, but not limited to, the insu-
authorized by the approval issued lating material and the piping system
under § 107.805 of this chapter. within the insulation space is author-
(3) Welding and brazing must be per- ized. The replacement material must
formed on an area free from contami- be equivalent to that used at the time
nants. of original manufacture.
(4) A weld defect, such as porosity in (iv) Other welding procedures that
a pressure retaining seam, must be are permitted by CGA Pamphlet C–3
completely removed before re-welding. (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter), and
Puddling may be used to remove a weld not excluded by the definition of ‘‘re-
defect only by the tungsten inert gas build,’’ are authorized.
shielded arc process. (2) After repair, the cylinder must
(5) After removal of a non-pressure be—
attachment and before its replacement, (i) Pressure tested in accordance with
the cylinder must be given a visual in- the specifications under which the cyl-
spection in accordance with § 180.205(f). inder was originally manufactured;
(6) Reheat treatment of DOT 4B, 4BA (ii) Leak tested before and after as-
or 4BW specification cylinders after re- sembly of the insulation jacket using a
placement of non-pressure attachments mass spectrometer detection system;
is not required when the total weld ma- and
terial does not exceed 20.3 cm (8 (iii) Tested for heat conductivity re-
inches). Individual welds must be at quirements.
least 7.6 cm (3 inches) apart. (d) General rebuilding requirements. (1)
(7) After repair of a DOT 4B, 4BA or The rebuilding of a DOT 4-series cyl-
4BW cylinder, the weld area must be inder must be made in accordance with
leak tested at the service pressure of the following requirements:
the cylinder. (i) The person rebuilding the cylinder
(8) Repair of weld defects must be must use the procedures and equipment
free of cracks. as authorized by the approval issued
(9) When a non-pressure attachment under § 107.805 of this chapter.
with the original cylinder specification (ii) After removal of a non-pressure
markings is replaced, all markings component and before replacement of
must be transferred to the attachment any non-pressure component, the cyl-
on the repaired cylinder. inder must be visually inspected in ac-
(10) Walls, heads or bottoms of cyl- cordance with CGA Pamphlet C–6 (IBR,
inders with defects or leaks in base see § 171.7 of this subchapter).
metal may not be repaired, but may be (iii) The rebuilder may rebuild a DOT
replaced as provided for in paragraph 4B, 4BA or 4BW cylinder having a
(d) of this section. water capacity of 9.07 kg (20 lb) or
332
greater by replacing a head of the cyl- formed in accordance with paragraph

inder using a circumferential joint. (d) of this section. Rebuilding of a DOT
When this weld joint is located at other 4L cylinder is:
than an original welded joint, a nota- (i) Substituting or adding material in
tion of this modification must be the insulation space not identical to
shown on the Manufacturer’s Report of that used in the original manufacture
Rebuilding in § 180.215(c)(2). The weld of that cylinder;
joint must be on the cylindrical section (ii) Making a weld repair not to ex-
of the cylinder. ceed 150 mm (5.9 inches) in length on
(iv) Any welding and the inspection
the longitudinal seam of the cylinder
of the rebuilt cylinder must be in ac-
or 300 mm (11.8 inches) in length on a
cordance with the requirements of the
applicable cylinder specification and circumferential weld joint of the cyl-
the following requirements: inder; or
(A) Rebuilding of any cylinder in- (iii) Replacing the outer jacket.
volving a joint subject to internal pres- (2) Reheat treatment of cylinders is
sure may only be performed by fusion prohibited.
welding; (3) After rebuilding, each inner con-
(B) Welding must be performed on an tainment vessel must be proof pressure
area free from contaminants; and tested at 2 times its service pressure.
(C) A weld defect, such as porosity in Each completed assembly must be
a pressure retaining seam, must be leak-tested using a mass spectrometer
completely removed before re-welding. detection system.
Puddling may be used to remove a weld (f) Reheat treatment. (1) Prior to re-
defect only by using the tungsten inert heat treatment, each cylinder must be
gas shielded arc process. given a visual inspection, internally
(2) Any rebuilt cylinder must be— and externally, in accordance with
(i) Heat treated in accordance with § 180.205(f).
paragraph (f) of this section;
(2) Cylinders must be segregated in
(ii) Subjected to a volumetric expan-
sion test on each cylinder. The results lots for reheat treatment. The reheat
of the tests must conform to the appli- treatment and visual inspection must
cable cylinder specification; be performed in accordance with the
(iii) Inspected and have test data re- specification for the cylinders except
viewed to determine conformance with as provided in paragraph (f)(4) of this
the applicable cylinder specification; section.
and (3) After reheat treatment, each cyl-
(iv) Made of material conforming to inder in the lot must be subjected to a
the specification. Determination of volumetric expansion test and meet
conformance shall include chemical the acceptance criteria in the applica-
analysis, verification, inspection and ble specification or be scrapped.
tensile testing of the replaced part. (4) After all welding and heat treat-
Tensile tests must be performed on the ment, a test of the new weld must be
replaced part after heat treatment by performed as required by the original
lots defined in the applicable specifica- specification. The test results must be
tion. recorded in accordance with § 180.215.
(3) For each rebuilt cylinder, an in- (g) Repair, rebuilding and reheat treat-
spector’s report must be prepared to in- ment in Canada. Repair, rebuilding, or
clude the information listed in
reheat treatment of a DOT–4 series
§ 180.215(c).
specification cylinder performed by a
(4) Rebuilding a cylinder with brazed
seams is prohibited. registered facility in Canada in accord-
(5) When an end with the original cyl- ance with the Transport Canada TDG
inder specification markings is re- Regulations (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
placed, all markings must be trans- chapter) is authorized.
ferred to the rebuilt cylinder. [67 FR 51660, Aug. 8, 2002, as amended at 68
(e) Additional rebuilding requirements FR 24664, May 8, 2003; 68 FR 75764, Dec. 31,
for DOT 4L cylinders. (1) The rebuilding 2003; 71 FR 54398, Sept. 14, 2006; 82 FR 15897,
of a DOT 4L cylinder must be per- Mar. 30, 2017]
333
§ 180.212 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
§ 180.212 Repair of seamless DOT 3-se- spection agency. Upon completion of

ries specification cylinders and the re-threading, the threads must be
seamless UN pressure receptacles. gauged in accordance with Federal
(a) General requirements for repair of Standard H–28 or an equivalent stand-
DOT 3-series cylinders and UN pressure ard containing the same specification
receptacles. (1) No person may repair a limits. The re-threaded cylinder must
DOT 3-series cylinder or a seamless UN be stamped clearly and legibly with the
pressure receptacle unless— words ‘‘RETHREAD’’ on the shoulder,
(i) The repair facility holds an ap- top head, or neck. No DOT specifica-
proval issued under the provisions in tion cylinder or UN cylinder may be re-
§ 107.805 of this chapter; and threaded more than one time without
(ii) Except as provided in paragraph approval of the Associate Adminis-
(b) of this section, the repair and the trator.
inspection is performed under the pro-
visions of an approval issued under sub- [71 FR 33895, June 12, 2006, as amended at 71
part H of part 107 of this chapter or by FR 54398, Sept. 14, 2006; 72 FR 55697, Oct. 1,
2007; 82 FR 15897, Mar. 30, 2017]
a facility registered by Transport Can-
ada in accordance with the Transport § 180.213 Requalification markings.
Canada TDG Regulations (IBR; see
§ 171.7 of this subchapter) and conform (a) General. Each cylinder or UN pres-
to the applicable cylinder specification sure receptacle requalified in accord-
or ISO standard contained in part 178 ance with this subpart with acceptable
of this subchapter. results must be marked as specified in
(2) The person performing the repair this section. Required specification
must prepare a report containing, at a markings may not be altered or re-
minimum, the results prescribed in moved.
§ 180.215. (b) Placement of markings. Each cyl-
(b) Repairs not requiring prior ap- inder must be plainly and permanently
proval. Approval is not required for the marked on the metal of the cylinder as
following specific repairs: permitted by the applicable specifica-
(1) The removal and replacement of a tion. Unless authorized by the cylinder
neck ring or foot ring on a DOT 3A, specification, marking on the cylinder
3AA or 3B cylinder or a UN pressure re- sidewall is prohibited.
ceptacle that does not affect a pressure (1) Requalification and required spec-
part of the cylinder when the repair is ification markings must be legible so
performed by a repair facility or a cyl- as to be readily visible at all times. Il-
inder manufacturer of these types of legible specification markings may be
cylinders. The repair may be made by remarked on the cylinder as provided
welding or brazing in conformance with by the original specification. Requali-
the original specification. After re-
fication markings may be placed on
moval and before replacement, the cyl-
any portion of the upper end of the cyl-
inder must be visually inspected and
inder excluding the sidewall, as pro-
any defective cylinder must be re-
vided in this section. Requalification
jected. The heat treatment, testing and
and required specification markings
inspection of the repair must be per-
formed under the supervision of an in- that are illegible may be reproduced on
spector and must be performed in ac- a metal plate and attached as provided
cordance with the original specifica- by the original specification.
tion. (2) Previous requalification markings
(2) External re-threading of DOT may not be obliterated, except that,
3AX, 3AAX or 3T specification cyl- when the space originally provided for
inders or a UN pressure receptacle requalification dates becomes filled,
mounted in a MEGC; or the internal re- additional dates may be added as fol-
threading of a DOT–3 series cylinder or lows:
a seamless UN pressure receptacle (i) All preceding requalification dates
when performed by a cylinder manufac- may be removed by peening provided
turer of these types of cylinders. The that—

repair work must be performed under (A) Permission is obtained from the
the supervision of an independent in- cylinder owner;
334
(B) The minimum wall thickness is A1

maintained in accordance with manu-
facturing specifications for the cyl- 9 06 X
inder; and 32
(C) The original manufacturing test
Where:
date is not removed.
(ii) When the cylinder is fitted with a ‘‘9’’ is the month of requalification
‘‘A123’’ is the RIN
footring, additional dates may be ‘‘06’’ is the year of requalification, and
marked on the external surface of the ‘‘X’’ represents the symbols described in
footring. paragraphs (f)(2) through (f)(8) of this
(c) Requalification marking method. section.
The depth of requalification markings
(1) Upon written request, variation
may not be greater than specified in
from the marking requirement may be
the applicable specification. The mark- approved by the Associate Adminis-
ings must be made by stamping, en- trator.
graving, scribing, or applying a label (2) Exception. A cylinder subject to
embedded in epoxy that will remain the requirements of § 171.23(a)(4) of this
legible and durable throughout the life subchapter may not be marked with a
of the cylinder, or by other methods RIN.
that produce a legible, durable mark. (e) Size of markings. The size of the
(1) A cylinder used as a fire extin- markings must be at least 6.35 mm (1⁄4
guisher (§ 180.209(j)) may be marked by in.) high, except RIN characters must
using a pressure sensitive label. be at least 3.18 mm (1⁄8 in.) high.
(2) For a DOT 3HT cylinder, the test (f) Marking illustrations. Examples of
date and RIN must be applied by low- required requalification markings for
stress steel stamps to a depth no great- DOT specification and special permit
er than that prescribed at the time of cylinders are illustrated as follows:
manufacture. Stamping on the sidewall (1) For designation of the 5-year volu-
is not authorized. metric expansion test, 10-year volu-
(3) For a composite cylinder, the re- metric expansion test for UN cylinders
qualification markings must be applied and cylinders conforming to § 180.209(f)
on a pressure sensitive label, securely and (h), or 12-year volumetric expan-
affixed in a manner prescribed by the sion test for fire extinguishers con-
cylinder manufacturer, near the origi- forming to § 173.309(a) of this sub-
nal manufacturer’s label. Stamping of chapter and cylinders conforming to
the composite surface is not author- § 180.209(e) and (g), the marking is as il-
ized. lustrated in paragraph (d) of this sec-
(d) Requalification markings. Each cyl- tion.
inder successfully passing requalifica- (2) For designation of the 10-year vol-
tion must be marked with the RIN set umetric expansion test for cylinders
in a square pattern, between the month conforming to § 180.209(b), the marking
and year of the requalification date. is as illustrated in paragraph (d) of this
The first character of the RIN must ap- section, except that the ‘‘X’’ is re-
pear in the upper left corner of the placed with a five-point star.
square pattern; the second in the upper (3) For designation of special filling
right; the third in the lower right; and limits up to 10% in excess of the
the fourth in the lower left. Example: marked service pressure for cylinders
A cylinder requalified in September conforming to § 173.302a(b) of this sub-
2006, and approved by a person who has chapter, the marking is as illustrated
been issued RIN ‘‘A123’’, would be in paragraph (d) of this section, except
marked plainly and permanently into that the ‘‘X’’ is replaced with a plus
the metal of the cylinder in accordance sign ‘‘ + ’’.
with location requirements of the cyl- (4) For designation of the proof pres-
inder specification or on a metal plate sure test, the marking is as illustrated
permanently secured to the cylinder in in paragraph (d) of this section, except
accordance with paragraph (b) of this that the ‘‘X’’ is replaced with the letter
section. An example of the markings ‘‘S’’.

prescribed in this paragraph (d) is as (5) For designation of the 5-year ex-
follows: ternal visual inspection for cylinders
335
§ 180.215 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
conforming to § 180.209(g), the marking corporated by reference in § 171.7 of this

is as illustrated in paragraph (d) of this subchapter applicable to the requali-
section, except that the ‘‘X’’ is re- fier’s activities. This information must
placed with the letter ‘‘E’’. be the same as contained in the edition
(6) For designation of DOT 8 series incorporated by reference in § 171.7 of
cylinder shell requalification only, the this subchapter.
marking is as illustrated in paragraph (b) Requalification records. Daily
(d) of this section, except that the ‘‘X’’ records of visual inspection, pressure
is replaced with the letter ‘‘S’’. test, and ultrasonic examination if per-
(7) For designation of DOT 8 series mitted under a special permit, as appli-
and UN cylinder shell and porous filler cable, must be maintained by the per-
requalification, the marking is as illus- son who performs the requalification
trated in paragraph (d) of this section, until either the expiration of the re-
except that the ‘‘X’’ is replaced with qualification period or until the cyl-
the letters ‘‘FS.’’ inder is again requalified, whichever
(8) For designation of a non- occurs first. A single date may be used
destructive examination combined for each test sheet, provided each test
with a visual inspection, the marking on the sheet was conducted on that
is as illustrated in paragraph (d) of this date. Ditto marks or a solid vertical
section, except that the ‘‘X’’ is re- line may be used to indicate repetition
placed with the type of test performed, of the preceding entry for the following
for example the letters ‘‘AE’’ for acous- entries only: date; actual dimensions;
tic emission or ‘‘UE’’ for ultrasonic ex- manufacturer’s name or symbol, if
amination. present; owner’s name or symbol, if
(9) For designation of the eddy cur- present; and test operator. Blank
rent examination combined with a vis- spaces may not be used to indicate rep-
ual inspection, the marking is as illus- etition of a prior entry. The records
trated in paragraph (d) of this section, must include the following informa-
except the ‘‘X’’ is replaced with the let- tion:
ters ‘‘VE.’’ (1) Calibration test records. For each
test to demonstrate calibration, the
[67 FR 51660, Aug. 8, 2002, as amended at 70
FR 73166, Dec. 9, 2005; 71 FR 33896, June 12, date; serial number of the calibrated
2006; 71 FR 51128, Aug. 29, 2006; 71 FR 78635, cylinder; calibration test pressure;
Dec. 29, 2006; 75 FR 53597, Sept. 1, 2010; 80 FR total, elastic and permanent expan-
72929, Nov. 23, 2015; 81 FR 3686, Jan. 21, 2016] sions; and legible identification of test
operator. The test operator must be
§ 180.215 Reporting and record reten- able to demonstrate that the results of
tion requirements. the daily calibration verification cor-
(a) Facility records. A person who re- respond to the hydrostatic tests per-
qualifies, repairs or rebuilds cylinders formed on that day. The daily
must maintain the following records verification of calibration(s) may be re-
where the requalification is performed: corded on the same sheets as, and with,
(1) Current RIN issuance letter; test records for that date.
(2) If the RIN has expired and renewal (2) Pressure test and visual inspection
is pending, a copy of the renewal re- records. The date of requalification; se-
quest; rial number; DOT specification or spe-
(3) Copies of notifications to Asso- cial permit number; marked pressure;
ciate Administrator required under actual dimensions; manufacturer’s
§ 107.805 of this chapter; name or symbol; owner’s name or sym-
(4) Current copies of those portions of bol, if present; result of visual inspec-
this subchapter applicable to its cyl- tion; actual test pressure; total, elastic
inder requalification and marking ac- and permanent expansions; percent
tivities at that location; permanent expansion; disposition, with
(5) Current copies of all special per- reason for any repeated test, rejection
mits governing exemption cylinders re- or condemnation; and legible identi-
qualified or marked by the requalifier fication of test operator. For each cyl-
at that location; and inder marked pursuant to

(6) The information contained in each § 173.302a(b)(5) of this subchapter, the
applicable CGA or ASTM standard in- test sheet must indicate the method by
336
which any average or maximum wall pressure, total expansion, permanent

stress was computed. Records must be expansion, elastic expansion, percent
kept for all completed, as well as un- permanent expansion (permanent ex-
successful tests. The entry for a second pansion may not exceed ten percent
test after a failure to hold test pressure (10%) of total expansion), and volu-
must indicate the date of the earlier metric capacity (volumetric capacity
test. of a rebuilt cylinder must be within
(3) Wall stress. Calculations of aver- ±3% of the calculated capacity);
age and maximum wall stress pursuant (viii) Each report must include the
to § 173.302a(b)(3) of this subchapter, if following certification statement: ‘‘I
performed. certify that this rebuilt cylinder is ac-
(4) Calibration certificates. The most curately represented by the data above
recent certificate of calibration must and conforms to all of the require-
be maintained for each calibrated cyl- ments in Subchapter C of Chapter I of
inder. Title 49 of the Code of Federal Regula-
(c) Repair, rebuilding or reheat treat- tions.’’. The certification must be
ment records. (1) Records covering weld- signed by the rebuild technician and
ing or brazing repairs, rebuilding or re- principal, officer, or partner of the re-
heat treating shall be retained for a build facility.
minimum of fifteen years by the ap- [67 FR 51660, Aug. 8, 2002, as amended at 68
proved facility. FR 24664, May 8, 2003; 70 FR 73166, Dec. 9,
(2) A record of rebuilding, in accord- 2005; 71 FR 54398, Sept. 14, 2006; 72 FR 55697,
ance with § 180.211(d), must be com- Oct. 1, 2007]
pleted for each cylinder rebuilt. The
record must be clear, legible, and con- § 180.217 Requalification requirements
tain the following information: for MEGCs.
(i) Name and address of test facility, (a) Periodic inspections. Each MEGC
date of test report, and name of origi- must be given an initial visual inspec-
nal manufacturer; tion and test in accordance with
(ii) Marks stamped on cylinder to in- § 178.75(i) of this subchapter before
clude specification number, service being put into service for the first
pressure, serial number, symbol of time. After the initial inspection, a
manufacturer, inspector’s mark, and MEGC must be inspected at least once
other marks, if any; every five years.
(iii) Cylinder outside diameter and (1) The 5-year periodic inspection
length in inches; must include an external examination
(iv) Rebuild process (welded, brazed, of the structure, the pressure recep-
type seams, etc.); tacles and the service equipment, as
(v) Description of assembly and any follows:
attachments replaced (e.g., neckrings, (i) The pressure receptacles are in-
footrings); spected externally for pitting, corro-
(vi) Chemical analysis of material for sion, abrasions, dents, distortions, de-
the cylinder, including seat and Code fects in welds or any other conditions,
No., type of analysis (ladle, check), including leakage, that might render
chemical components (Carbon (C), the MEGC unsafe for transport.
Phosphorous (P), Sulfur (S), Silicon (ii) The piping, valves, and gaskets
(Si), Manganese (Mn), Nickel (Ni), are inspected for corroded areas, de-
Chromium (Cr), Molybdenum (Mo), fects, and other conditions, including
Copper (Cu), Aluminum (Al), Zinc leakage, that might render the MEGC
(Zn)), material manufacturer, name of unsafe for filling, discharge or trans-
person performing the analysis, results port.
of physical tests of material for cyl- (iii) Missing or loose bolts or nuts on
inder (yield strength (psi), tensile any flanged connection or blank flange
strength (psi), elongation percentage are replaced or tightened.
(inches), reduction in area percentage, (iv) All emergency devices and valves
weld bend, tensile bend, name of in- are free from corrosion, distortion and
spector); any damage or defect that could pre-

(vii) Results of proof pressure test on vent their normal operation. Remote
cylinder, including test method, test closure devices and self-closing stop
337
§ 180.350 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
valves must be operated to dem- marked in English, with the year and
onstrate proper operation. month, and the type of the most recent
(v) Required markings on the MEGC periodic requalification performed
are legible in accordance with the ap- (e.g., 2004–05 AE/UE, where ‘‘AE’’ rep-
plicable requirements. resents acoustic emission and ‘‘UE’’
(vi) The framework, the supports and represents ultrasonic examination) fol-
the arrangements for lifting the MEGC lowed by the stamp of the approval
are in satisfactory condition. agency who performed or witnessed the
(2) The MEGC’s pressure receptacles most recent test.
and piping must be periodically re- (f) Records. The owner of each MEGC
qualified as prescribed in § 180.207(c), at or the owner’s authorized agent must
the interval specified in Table 1 in retain a written record of the date and
§ 180.207. results of all repairs and required in-
(b) Exceptional inspection and test. If a spections and tests. The report must
MEGC shows evidence of damaged or contain the name and address of the
corroded areas, leakage, or other condi- person performing the inspection or
tions that indicate a deficiency that test. The periodic test and inspection
could affect the integrity of the MEGC, records must be retained until the next
an exceptional inspection and test inspection or test is completed. Repair
must be performed, regardless of the records and the initial exceptional in-
last periodic inspection and test. The spection and test records must be re-
extent of the exceptional inspection tained during the period the MEGC is
and test will depend on the amount of in service and for one year thereafter.
damage or deterioration of the MEGC. These records must be made available
As a minimum, an exceptional inspec- for inspection by a representative of
tion of a MEGC must include inspec- the Department on request.
tion as specified in paragraph (a)(1) of
[71 FR 33896, June 12, 2006]
this section.
(c) Correction of unsafe condition.
When evidence of any unsafe condition Subpart D—Qualification and
is discovered, the MEGC may not be re- Maintenance of IBCs
turned to service until the unsafe con-
dition has been corrected and the § 180.350 Applicability and definitions.
MEGC has been requalified in accord- This subpart prescribes require-
ance with the applicable tests and in- ments, in addition to those contained
spection. in parts 107, 171, 172, 173 and 178 of this
(d) Repairs and modifications to subchapter, applicable to any person
MEGCs. No person may perform a responsible for the continuing quali-
modification to an approved MEGC fication, maintenance, or periodic re-
that may affect conformance to the ap- testing of an IBC. The following defini-
plicable ISO standard or safe use, and tions apply:
that involve a change to the design (a) Remanufactured IBCs are metal,
type or affect its ability to retain the rigid plastic or composite IBCs pro-
hazardous material in transportation. duced as a UN type from a non-UN
Before making any modification type, or are converted from one UN de-
changes to an approved MEGC, the sign type to another UN design type.
owner must obtain approval from the Remanufactured IBCs are subject to
Associate Administrator as prescribed the same requirements of this sub-
in § 178.74 of this subchapter. The repair chapter that apply to new IBCs of the
of a MEGC’s structural equipment is same type (also see § 178.801(c)(1) of this
authorized provided such repairs are subchapter for design type definition).
made in accordance with the require- (b) Repaired IBCs are metal, rigid
ments prescribed for its approved de- plastic or composite IBCs that, as a re-
sign and construction. Any repair to sult of impact or for any other cause
the pressure receptacles of a MEGC (such as corrosion, embrittlement or
must meet the requirements of other evidence of reduced strength as
§ 180.212. compared to the design type), are re-

(e) Requalification markings. Each stored so as to conform to the design
MEGC must be durably and legibly type and to be able to withstand the
338
design type tests. For the purposes of § 180.352 Requirements for retest and
this subchapter, the replacement of the inspection of IBCs.
rigid inner receptacle of a composite (a) General. Each IBC constructed in
IBC with one from the original manu- accordance with a UN standard for
facturer is considered a repair. Routine which a test or inspection specified in
maintenance of IBCs (see definition in paragraphs (b)(1), (b)(2) and (b)(3) of
paragraph (c) of this section) is not this section is required may not be
considered repair. The bodies of rigid filled and offered for transportation or
plastic IBCs and the inner receptacles transported until the test or inspection
of composite IBCs are not repairable. has been successfully completed. This
(c) Routine maintenance of IBCs is paragraph does not apply to any IBC
the routine performance on: filled prior to the test or inspection
(1) Metal, rigid plastic or composite due date. The requirements in this sec-
IBCs of operations such as: tion do not apply to DOT 56 and 57
(i) Cleaning; portable tanks.
(ii) Removal and reinstallation or re- (b) Test and inspections for metal, rigid
placement of body closures (including plastic, and composite IBCs. Each IBC is
associated gaskets), or of service equip- subject to the following test and in-
ment conforming to the original manu- spections:
facturer’s specifications provided that (1) Each IBC intended to contain sol-
the leaktightness of the IBC is verified; ids that are loaded or discharged under
or pressure or intended to contain liquids
(iii) Restoration of structural equip- must be tested in accordance with the
ment not directly performing a haz- leakproofness test prescribed in
ardous material containment or dis- § 178.813 of this subchapter prior to its
charge pressure retention function so first use in transportation and every
as to conform to the design type (for 2.5 years thereafter, starting from the
example, the straightening of legs or date of manufacture or the date of a re-
lifting attachments), provided the con-
pair conforming to paragraph (d)(1) of
tainment function of the IBC is not af-
this section. For this test, the IBC is
fected.
not required to have its closures fitted.
(2) Plastics or textile flexible IBCs of
(2) An external visual inspection
operations, such as:
must be conducted initially after pro-
(i) Cleaning; or
duction and every 2.5 years starting
(ii) Replacement of non-integral com-
from the date of manufacture or the
ponents, such as non-integral liners
and closure ties, with components con- date of a repair conforming to para-
forming to the original manufacturer’s graph (d)(1) of this section to ensure
specification; provided that these oper- that:
ations do not adversely affect the con- (i) The IBC is marked in accordance
tainment function of the flexible IBC with requirements in § 178.703 of this
or alter the design type. subchapter. Missing or damaged mark-
ings, or markings difficult to read
[68 FR 45042, July 31, 2003, as amended at 69 must be restored or returned to origi-
FR 76186, Dec. 20, 2004; 76 FR 3389, Jan. 19, nal condition.
2011] (ii) Service equipment is fully func-
§ 180.351 Qualification of IBCs. tional and free from damage which
may cause failure. Missing, broken, or
(a) General. Each IBC used for the damaged parts must be repaired or re-
transportation of hazardous materials placed.
must be an authorized packaging. (iii) The IBC is capable of with-
(b) IBC specifications. To qualify as an standing the applicable design quali-
authorized packaging, each IBC must fication tests. The IBC must be exter-
conform to this subpart, the applicable nally inspected for cracks, warpage,
requirements specified in part 173 of corrosion or any other damage which
this subchapter, and the applicable re- might render the IBC unsafe for trans-
quirements of subparts N and O of part portation. An IBC found with such de-
178 of this subchapter. fects must be removed from service or

[Amdt. 180–5, 59 FR 38079, July 26, 1994, as repaired in accordance with paragraph
amended at 66 FR 45391, Aug. 28, 2001] (d) of this section. The inner receptacle
339
§ 180.352 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
of a composite IBC must be removed (B) Seams are free from defects in
from the outer IBC body for inspection stitching, heat sealing or gluing which
unless the inner receptacle is bonded to would render the IBC unsafe for trans-
the outer body or unless the outer body portation of hazardous materials. All
is constructed in such a way (e.g., a stitched seam-ends must be secure.
welded or riveted cage) that removal of (C) Fabric used to construct the IBC
the inner receptacle is not possible is free from cuts, tears and punctures.
without impairing the integrity of the Additionally, fabric must be free from
outer body. Defective inner receptacles scoring which may render the IBC un-
must be replaced in accordance with safe for transport.
paragraph (d) of this section or the en- (ii) Each fiberboard IBC must be in-
tire IBC must be removed from service. spected to ensure that:
For metal IBCs, thermal insulation (A) Fluting or corrugated fiberboard
must be removed to the extent nec- is firmly glued to facings.
essary for proper examination of the (B) Seams are creased and free from
IBC body. scoring, cuts, and scratches.
(3) Each metal, rigid plastic and com- (C) Joints are appropriately over-
posite IBC must be internally inspected lapped and glued, stitched, taped or
at least every five years to ensure that stapled as prescribed by the design.
the IBC is free from damage and to en- Where staples are used, the joints must
sure that the IBC is capable of with- be inspected for protruding staple-ends
standing the applicable design quali- which could puncture or abrade the
fication tests. inner liner. All such ends must be pro-
(i) The IBC must be internally in- tected before the IBC is authorized for
spected for cracks, warpage, and corro- hazardous materials service.
sion or any other defect that might (iii) Each wooden IBC must be in-
render the IBC unsafe for transpor- spected to ensure that:
tation. An IBC found with such defects (A) End joints are secured in the
must be removed from hazardous mate- manner prescribed by the design.
rials service until restored to the origi- (B) IBC walls are free from defects in
nal design type of the IBC. wood. Inner protrusions which could
(ii) Metal IBCs must be inspected to puncture or abrade the liner must be
ensure the minimum wall thickness recovered.
quirements in § 178.705(c)(1)(iv) of this (d) Requirements applicable to repair of
subchapter are met. Metal IBCs not IBCs. (1) Except for flexible and fiber-
conforming to minimum wall thickness board IBCs and the bodies of rigid plas-
requirements must be removed from tic and composite IBCs, damaged IBCs
hazardous materials service. may be repaired and the inner recep-
(c) Visual inspection for flexible, fiber- tacles of composite packagings may be
board, or wooden IBCs. Each IBC must replaced and returned to service pro-
be visually inspected prior to first use vided:
and permitted reuse, by the person who (i) The repaired IBC conforms to the
places hazardous materials in the IBC, original design type, is capable of with-
to ensure that: standing the applicable design quali-
(1) The IBC is marked in accordance fication tests, and is retested and in-
with requirements in § 178.703 of this spected in accordance with the applica-
subchapter. Additional marking al- ble requirements of this section;
lowed for each design type may be (ii) An IBC intended to contain liq-
present. Required markings that are uids or solids that are loaded or dis-
missing, damaged or difficult to read charged under pressure is subjected to
must be restored or returned to origi- a leakproofness test as specified in
nal condition. § 178.813 of this subchapter and is
(2) Proper construction and design marked with the date of the test; and
specifications have been met. (iii) The IBC is subjected to the inter-
(i) Each flexible IBC must be in- nal and external inspection require-
spected to ensure that: ments as specified in paragraph (b) of
(A) Lifting straps if used, are se- this section.

curely fastened to the IBC in accord- (iv) The person performing the tests
ance with the design type. and inspections after the repair must
340
durably mark the IBC near the (f) Retest date. The date of the most
manfacturer’s UN design type marking recent periodic retest must be marked
to show the following: as provided in § 178.703(b) of this sub-
(A) The country in which the tests chapter.
and inspections were performed; (g) Record retention. (1) The owner or
(B) The name or authorized symbol of lessee of the IBC must keep records of
the person performing the tests and in- periodic retests, initial and periodic in-
spections; and spections, and tests performed on the
(C) The date (month, year) of the IBC if it has been repaired or remanu-
tests and inspections. factured.
(v) Retests and inspections performed (2) Records must include design types
in accordance with paragraphs (d)(1)(i) and packaging specifications, test and
and (ii) of this section may be used to inspection dates, name and address of
satisfy the requirements for the 2.5 and test and inspection facilities, names or
five year periodic tests and inspections name of any persons conducting test or
required by paragraph (b) of this sec- inspections, and test or inspection spe-
tion, as applicable. cifics and results.
(2) Except for flexible and fiberboard (3) Records must be kept for each
IBCs, the structural equipment of an packaging at each location where peri-
IBC may be repaired and returned to odic tests are conducted, until such
service provided: tests are successfully performed again
(i) The repaired IBC conforms to the or for at least 2.5 years from the date
original design type and is capable of of the last test. These records must be
withstanding the applicable design made available for inspection by a rep-
qualification tests; and resentative of the Department on re-
quest.
(ii) The IBC is subjected to the inter-
nal and external inspection require- [Amdt. 180–5, 59 FR 38079, July 26, 1994, as
ments as specified in paragraph (b) of amended at 64 FR 10782, Mar. 5, 1999; 65 FR
this section. 58632, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45186, 45391, Aug.
28, 2001; 68 FR 45042, July 31, 2003; 69 FR 76186,
(3) Service equipment may be re-
Dec. 20, 2004; 70 FR 34399, June 14, 2005; 70 FR
placed provided: 56099, Sept. 23, 2005; 71 FR 78635, Dec. 29, 2006]
(i) The repaired IBC conforms to the
original design type and is capable of
withstanding the applicable design Subpart E—Qualification and
qualification tests; Maintenance of Cargo Tanks
(ii) The IBC is subjected to the exter- § 180.401 Applicability.
nal visual inspection requirements as
specified in paragraph (b) of this sec- This subpart prescribes require-
tion; and ments, in addition to those contained
(iii) The proper functioning and leak in parts 107, 171, 172, 173 and 178 of this
tightness of the service equipment, if subchapter, applicable to any person
applicable, is verified. responsible for the continuing quali-
(e) Requirements applicable to routine fication, maintenance or periodic test-
maintenance of IBCs. Except for routine ing of a cargo tank.
maintenance of metal, rigid plastics [Amdt. 180–2, 54 FR 25032, June 12, 1989, as
and composite IBCs performed by the amended at 55 FR 37065, Sept. 7, 1990]
owner of the IBC, whose State and
name or authorized symbol is durably § 180.403 Definitions.
marked on the IBC, the party per- In addition to the definitions con-
forming the routine maintenance shall tained in §§ 171.8, 178.320(a) and 178.345–
durably mark the IBC near the manu- 1 of this subchapter, the following defi-
facturer’s UN design type marking to nitions apply to this subpart:
show the following: Corroded or abraded means any visible
(1) The country in which the routine reduction in the material thickness of
maintenance was carried out; and the cargo tank wall or valve due to pit-
(2) The name or authorized symbol of ting, flaking, gouging, or chemical re-
the party performing the routine main- action to the material surface that ef-
tenance. fects the safety or serviceability of the
341
§ 180.405 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
cargo tank. The term does not include (1) A change to motor vehicle equip-
cosmetic or minor surface degradation ment such as lights, truck or tractor
that does not effect the safety or serv- power train components, steering and
iceability of the cargo tank brake systems, and suspension parts,
Corrosive to the tank or valve means and changes to appurtenances, such as
that the lading has been shown through fender attachments, lighting brackets,
experience or test data to reduce the ladder brackets; and
thickness of the material of construc- (2) Replacement of components such
tion of the tank wall or valve. as valves, vents, and fittings with a
Delivery hose assembly means a liquid component of a similar design and of
delivery hose and its attached cou- the same size.
plings. (3) Replacement of an appurtenance
Modification means any change to the by welding to a mounting pad.
original design and construction of a Replacement of a barrel means to re-
cargo tank or a cargo tank motor vehi- place the existing tank on a motor ve-
cle that affects its structural integrity hicle chassis with an unused (new)
or lading retention capability includ- tank. For the definition of tank, see
ing changes to equipment certified as § 178.320, § 178.345, or § 178.338–1 of this
part of an emergency discharge control subchapter, as applicable.
system required by § 173.315(n)(2) of this Stretching means any change in
subchapter. Any modification that in- length, width or diameter of the cargo
volves welding on the cargo tank wall tank, or any change to a cargo tank
must also meet all requirements for motor vehicle’s undercarriage that
‘‘Repair’’ as defined in this section. Ex- may affect the cargo tank’s structural
cluded from this category are the fol- integrity.
lowing: [Amdt. 180–2, 54 FR 25032, June 12, 1989, as
(1) A change to motor vehicle equip- amended at 55 FR 37065, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt.
ment such as lights, truck or tractor 180–3, 57 FR 45466, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 180–7, 59
power train components, steering and FR 55177, Nov. 3, 1994; 60 FR 17402, Apr. 5,
1995; Amdt. 180–10, 61 FR 51342, Oct. 1, 1996; 63
brake systems, and suspension parts,
FR 52850, Oct. 1, 1998; 64 FR 28050, May 24,
and changes to appurtenances, such as 1999; 68 FR 19286, Apr. 18, 2003; 69 FR 54047,
fender attachments, lighting brackets, Sept. 7, 2004]
ladder brackets; and
(2) Replacement of components such § 180.405 Qualification of cargo tanks.
as valves, vents, and fittings with a (a) General. Unless otherwise pro-
component of a similar design and of vided in this subpart, each cargo tank
the same size. used for the transportation of haz-
Owner means the person who owns a ardous material must be an authorized
cargo tank motor vehicle used for the packaging.
transportation of hazardous materials, (b) Cargo tank specifications. (1) To
or that person’s authorized agent. qualify as an authorized packaging,
Piping system means any component each cargo tank must conform to this
of a cargo tank delivery system, other subpart, the applicable requirements
than a delivery hose assembly, that specified in part 173 of this subchapter
contains product during loading or un- for the specific lading, and where a
loading. DOT specification cargo tank is re-
Rebarrelling means replacing more quired, an applicable specification in
than 50 percent of the combined shell effect on the date initial construction
and head material of a cargo tank. began: MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303,
Repair means any welding on a cargo MC 304, MC 305, MC 306, MC 307, MC 310,
tank wall done to return a cargo tank MC 311, MC 312, MC 330, MC 331, MC 338,
or a cargo tank motor vehicle to its DOT 406, DOT 407, or DOT 412 (§§ 178.337,
original design and construction speci- 178.338, 178.345, 178.346, 178.347, 178.348 of
fication, or to a condition prescribed this subchapter). However, except as
for a later equivalent specification in provided in paragraphs (b)(2), (d), (e),
effect at the time of the repair. Ex- (f)(5), and (f)(6) of this section, no cargo
cluded from this category are the fol- tank may be marked or certified after
lowing: August 31, 1995, to the applicable MC
342
306, MC 307, MC 312, MC 331, or MC 338 (ii) The cargo tank was marked or
specification in effect on December 30, certified before the date listed in table
1990. 2, column 2, as follows:
(2) Exception. A cargo tank originally
manufactured to the MC 306, MC 307, or TABLE 2
MC 312 specification may be recertified
Column 1 Column 2
to the original specification provided:
(i) Records are available verifying MC 306, MC 307, MC 312 ............................ Sept. 1, 1995
the cargo tank was originally manufac-
tured to the specification; (2) A cargo tank of a specification
(ii) If the cargo tank was stretched, listed in paragraph (c)(1) of this section
rebarrelled, or modified, records are may have its pressure relief devices
available verifying that the stretching, and outlets modified as follows:
rebarrelling, or modification was per- (i) A Specification MC 300, MC 301,
formed in accordance with the Na- MC 302, MC 303, or MC 305 cargo tank,
tional Board Inspection Code and this to conform with a Specification MC 306
part; or DOT 406 cargo tank (See §§ 178.346–3
(iii) A Design Certifying Engineer or and 178.346–4 of this subchapter).
Registered Inspector verifies the cargo (ii) A Specification MC 306 cargo
tank conforms to all applicable re- tank to conform to a Specification
quirements of the original specifica- DOT 406 cargo tank (See §§ 178.346–3 and
tion and furnishes to the owner written 178.346–4 of this subchapter).
documentation that verifies the tank (iii) A Specification MC 304 cargo
conforms to the original structural de- tank, to conform with a Specification
sign requirements in effect at the time MC 307 or DOT 407 cargo tank (See
the tank was originally constructed; §§ 178.347–4 and 178.345–11 of this sub-
(iv) The cargo tank meets all applica- chapter).
ble tests and inspections required by (iv) A Specification MC 307 cargo
§ 180.407(c); and tank, to conform with a Specification
(v) The cargo tank is recertified to DOT 407 cargo tank (See §§ 178.347–4 and
the original specification in accordance 178.345–11 of this subchapter).
with the reporting and record retention (v) A Specification MC 310 or MC 311
provisions of § 180.417. The certification cargo tank, to conform with a Speci-
documents required by § 180.417(a)(3) fication MC 312 or DOT 412 cargo tank
must include both the date the cargo (See §§ 178.348–4 and 178.345–11 of this
tank was originally certified to the subchapter).
specification and the date it was recer- (vi) A Specification MC 312 cargo
tified. The specification plate on the tank, to conform with a Specification
cargo tank or the cargo tank motor ve- DOT 412 cargo tank (See §§ 178.348–4 and
hicle must display the date the cargo 178.345–11 of this subchapter).
tank was originally certified to the (vii) A Specification MC 330 cargo
specification. tank, to conform with a Specification
(c) Cargo tank specifications no longer MC 331 cargo tank, except as specifi-
authorized for construction. (1) A cargo cally required by § 173.315 of this sub-
tank made to a specification listed in chapter (see §§ 178.337–8 and 178.337–9 of
column 1 of table 1 or table 2 of this this subchapter).
paragraph (c)(1) may be used when au- (d) MC 338 cargo tank. The owner of a
thorized in this part, provided— cargo tank that conforms to and was
(i) The cargo tank initial construc- used under the terms of an exemption
tion began on or before the date listed issued before October 1, 1984, that au-
in table 1, column 2, as follows: thorizes the transportation of a cryo-
genic liquid shall remove the exemp-
TABLE 1
tion number stenciled on the cargo
Column 1 Column 2 tank and stamp the specification plate
(or a plate placed adjacent to the speci-
MC 300 .......................................................... Sept. 2, 1967
MC 301 .......................................................... June 12, 1961 fication plate) ‘‘DOT MC 338’’ followed
MC 302, MC 303, MC 304, MC 305, MC Sept. 2, 1967 by the exemption number, for example,
310, MC 311. ‘‘DOT MC 338–E * * * *’’. (Asterisks to
MC 330 .......................................................... May 15, 1967
be replaced by the exemption number).
343
§ 180.405 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
The cargo tank must be remarked prior the cargo tank motor vehicle and its
to the expiration date of the exemp- design to determine if it meets the re-
tion. During the period the cargo tank quirements of the applicable MC 306,
is in service, the owner of a cargo tank MC 307 or MC 312 specification in effect
that is remarked in this manner must at the time of manufacture, except as
retain at its principal place of business specified herein.
a copy of the last exemption in effect. (1) A cargo tank motor vehicle con-
No new construction of cargo tanks structed after August 1, 1981, or the
pursuant to such exemption is author- date specified in the applicable exemp-
ized. tion, in conformance with the fol-
(1) The holding time must be deter- lowing conditions that apply, may be
mined, as required in § 178.338–9 of this remarked and certified in accordance
subchapter, on each cargo tank or on with paragraphs (f) (5) and (6) of this
at least one cargo tank of each design. section:
Any subsequent cargo tank manufac- (i) A vacuum-loaded cargo tank must
tured to the same design type (see have an ASME Code stamped specifica-
§ 178.320), if not individually tested, tion plate marked with a minimum in-
must have the optional test regimen ternal design pressure of 25 psig, and be
performed during the first shipment designed for a minimum external de-
(see § 178.338–9 (b) and (c) of this sub- sign pressure of 15 psig.
chapter). (ii) An outlet equipped with a self-
(2) The holding time determined by closing system which includes an ex-
test for one authorized cryogenic liquid ternal stop-valve must have the stop
may be used as the basis for estab- valve and associated piping protected
lishing the holding time for other au- within the vehicle’s rear-end tank pro-
thorized cryogenic liquids. tection device, vehicle frame or an
(e) MC 331 cargo tanks. The owner of equally adequate accident damage pro-
a MC 331 (§ 178.337 of this subchapter) tection device (See § 178.345–8 of this
cargo tank that conforms to and was subchapter.) The self-closing system
used under an exemption issued before (See § 178.345–11 of this subchapter)
October 1, 1984, that authorizes the must be equipped with a remotely ac-
transportation of ethane, refrigerated tuated means of closure as follows:
liquid; ethane-propane mixture, refrig- (A) For a cargo tank used in other
erated liquid; or hydrogen chloride, re- than corrosive service, the remote
frigerated liquid shall remove the ex- means of closure must be activated for
emption number stenciled on the cargo closure by manual or mechanical
tank and stamp the exemption number means and, in case of fire, by an auto-
on the specification plate (or a plate matic heat activated means.
placed adjacent to the specification (B) For a cargo tank used in corro-
plate), immediately after the DOT sive service, the remote means of clo-
Specification, for example, ‘‘DOT MC sure may be actuated by manual or me-
331–E * * * *’’. (Asterisks to be replaced chanical means only.
by the exemption number.) The cargo (iii) A cargo tank having an
tank must be remarked prior to the ex- unreinforced portion of the shell ex-
piration date of the exemption. During ceeding 60 inches must have the cir-
the period the cargo tank is in service, cumferential reinforcement located so
the owner of a cargo tank that is re- that the thickness and tensile strength
marked in this manner must retain at of shell material in combination with
the owner’s principal place of business the frame and circumferential rein-
a copy of the last exemption in effect. forcement produces a structural integ-
(f) MC 306, MC 307, MC 312 cargo tanks. rity at least equal to that prescribed in
Either a Registered Inspector or a De- § 178.345–3 of this subchapter or the
sign Certifying Engineer and the owner specification in effect at time of manu-
of a MC 306, MC 307 or MC 312 cargo facture.
tank motor vehicle constructed in ac- (iv) A cargo tank having a projection
cordance with and used under an ex- from the tank shell or head that may
emption issued before December 31, contain lading in any tank position is
1990, that authorizes a condition speci- authorized, provided such projection is
fied in this paragraph shall examine as strong as the tank shell or head and
344
is located within the motor vehicle’s turer’s serial number for the cargo
rear-end tank protection or other ap- tank;
propriate accident damage protection (iii) A statement setting forth any
device. modifications made to bring the cargo
(v) A cargo tank may be constructed tank into conformance with § 180.405(f)
of nickel, titanium, or other ASME (1), (2), (3), or (4), or the applicable
sheet or plate materials in accordance specification;
with an exemption. (iv) A statement identifying the per-
(2) A vacuum-loaded cargo tank con- son certifying the cargo tank and the
structed after August 1, 1981, or the date of certification.
date specified in the applicable exemp- (6) The owner of a certified cargo
tion, in conformance with paragraph tank shall remove the exemption num-
(f)(1) of this section, except that an ber stenciled on the cargo tank and
outlet equipped with an external valve shall durably mark the specification
which is not part of a self-closing sys- plate (or a plate placed adjacent to the
tem: specification plate) ‘‘MC + + + –E
(i) Must be equipped with a self-clos- ****####’’ (where ‘‘ + + + ’’ is to be re-
ing system prior to September 1, 1993. placed by the applicable specification
(ii) May be remarked and certified in number, ‘‘* * * *’’ by the exemption
accordance with paragraphs (f)(5) and number and ‘‘# # # #’’ by the alloy.)
(6) of this section after the cargo tank
(7) A cargo tank remarked and cer-
motor vehicle has been equipped with
tified in conformance with this para-
the self-closing system.
graph (f) is excepted from the provi-
(3) A vacuum-loaded cargo tank con-
structed prior to August 1, 1981, in con- sions of § 180.405(c).
formance with paragraph (f)(1) of this (8) During the period the cargo tank
section, except for paragraph (f)(1)(i), is in service, and for one year there-
may be remarked and certified in ac- after, the owner of a cargo tank that is
cordance with paragraphs (f) (5) and (6) certified and remarked in this manner
of this section. must retain on file at its principal
(4) A vacuum-loaded cargo tank con- place of business a copy of the certifi-
structed prior to August 1, 1981, in con- cate and the last exemption in effect.
formance with paragraph (f)(1) of this (g) Cargo tank manhole assemblies. (1)
section, except for paragraph (f)(1)(i) of MC 306, MC 307, and MC 312 cargo tanks
this section, and except that an outlet marked or certified after December 30,
is equipped with an external valve 1990, and DOT 406, DOT 407, and DOT
which is not part of a self-closing sys- 412 cargo tank motor vehicles must be
tem: equipped with manhole assemblies con-
(i) Must be equipped with a self-clos- forming with § 178.345–5 of this sub-
ing system prior to September 1, 1993. chapter.
(ii) May be remarked and certified in (2) On or before August 31, 1995, each
accordance with paragraphs (f)(5) and owner of a cargo tank marked or cer-
(6) of this section after the cargo tank tified before December 31, 1990, author-
motor vehicle has been equipped with ized for the transportation of a haz-
the self-closing system. ardous material, must have the cargo
(5) The owner of a cargo tank for tank equipped with manhole assem-
which a determination has been made blies conforming with § 178.345–5, except
that the cargo tank is in conformance for the dimensional requirements in
with paragraph (f) (1), (2), (3), or (4) of § 178.345–5(a), the hydrostatic testing
this section shall complete a written requirements in § 178.345–5(b), and the
certification, in English, signed by the marking requirements in § 178.345–5(e)
owner and containing at least the fol- of this subchapter. A manhole assem-
lowing information: bly meeting one of the following provi-
(i) A statement certifying that each sions is considered to be in compliance
cargo tank conforms to § 180.405 (f) (1), with this paragraph:
(2), (3), or (4); (i) Manhole assemblies on MC 300, MC
(ii) The applicable DOT exemption 301, MC 302, MC 303, MC 305, MC 306, MC
number, the applicable specification 310, MC 311, and MC 312 cargo tanks
number and the owner’s and manufac- that are marked or certified in writing
345
§ 180.405 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
as conforming to § 178.345–5 of this sub- (j) Withdrawal of certification. A speci-

chapter or TTMA RP No. 61–98 (incor- fication cargo tank that for any reason
porated by reference; see § 171.7 of this no longer meets the applicable speci-
subchapter), or are tested and certified fication may not be used to transport
in accordance with TTMA TB No. 107 hazardous materials unless the cargo
(incorporated by reference; see § 171.7 of tank is repaired and retested in accord-
this subchapter). ance with §§ 180.413 and 180.407 prior to
(ii) Manhole assemblies on MC 304 being returned to hazardous materials
and MC 307 cargo tanks. service. If the cargo tank is not in con-
(iii) Manhole assemblies on MC 310, formance with the applicable specifica-
MC 311, and MC 312 cargo tanks with a tion requirements, the specification
test pressure of 36 psig or greater. plate on the cargo tank must be re-
(3) [Reserved] moved, obliterated or securely covered.
(h) Pressure relief system. Properly The details of the conditions necessi-
functioning reclosing pressure relief tating withdrawal of the certification
valves and frangible or fusible vents must be recorded and signed on the
need not be replaced. However, replace- written certificate for that cargo tank.
ment of reclosing pressure relief valves The vehicle owner shall retain the cer-
on MC-specification cargo tanks is au- tificate for at least 1 year after with-
thorized subject to the following re- drawal of the certification.
quirements: (k) DOT-specification cargo tank with
(1) Until August 31, 1998, the owner of no marked design pressure or a marked
a cargo tank may replace a reclosing design pressure of less than 3 psig. The
pressure relief device with a device owner of an MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC
which is in compliance with the re- 303, MC 305, MC 306, or MC 312 cargo
quirements for pressure relief devices tank with a pressure relief system set
in effect at the time the cargo tank at 3 psig, must mark or remark the
specification became superseded. If the cargo tank with an MAWP or design
pressure relief device is installed as an pressure of not less than 3 psig.
integral part of a manhole cover as- (l) MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303,
sembly, the manhole cover must com- MC 305, MC 306 cargo tank—Rear acci-
ply with the requirements of paragraph dent damage protection. (1) Notwith-
(g) of this section. standing the requirements in
(2) After August 31, 1998, replacement § 180.405(b), the applicable specification
for any reclosing pressure relief valve requirement for a rear bumper or rear-
must be capable of reseating to a leak- end tank protection device on MC 300,
tight condition after a pressure surge, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, MC 305, and MC
and the volume of lading released may 306 cargo tanks does not apply to a
not exceed 1 L. Specific performance cargo tank truck (power unit) until
requirements for these pressure relief July 1, 1992, if the cargo tank truck—
valves are set forth in § 178.345–10(b)(3) (i) Was manufactured before July 1,
of this subchapter. 1989;
(3) As provided in paragraph (c)(2) of (ii) Is used to transport gasoline or
this section, the owner of a cargo tank any other petroleum distillate product;
may elect to modify reclosing pressure and
relief devices to more recent cargo (iii) Is operated in combination with
tank specifications. However, replace- a cargo tank full trailer. However, an
ment devices constructed to the re- empty cargo tank truck, without a
quirements of § 178.345–10 of this sub- cargo tank full trailer attached, may
chapter must provide the minimum be operated without the required rear
venting capacity required by the origi- bumper or rear-end tank protection de-
nal specification to which the cargo vice on a one-time basis while being
tank was designed and constructed. transported to a repair facility for in-
(i) Flammable cryogenic liquids. Each stallation of a rear bumper or rear-end
cargo tank used to transport a flam- protection device.
mable cryogenic liquid must be exam- (2) Each cargo tank shall be provided
ined after each shipment to determine with a rear accident damage protection
its actual holding time (See device to protect the tank and piping
§ 173.318(g)(3) of this subchapter.) in the event of a rear-end collision and
346
reduce the likelihood of damage which chapter for a daily test at 45.72 meters
could result in the loss of lading. The (150 feet).
rear-end protection device must be in (3) Each specification MC 330 and MC
the form of a rear-end tank protection 331 cargo tank in metered delivery
device meeting the requirements of service of greater than 13,247.5 L (3,500
§ 178.345–8(d) or a rear bumper meeting gallons) water capacity transporting a
the following: Division 2.1 material, a Division 2.2
(i) The bumper shall be located at material with a subsidiary hazard, or
least 6 inches to the rear of any vehicle anhydrous ammonia, marked and cer-
component used for loading or unload- tified before July 1, 1999, must have an
ing or that may contain lading while emergency discharge control capability
the vehicle is in transit. as specified in §§ 173.315(n) and 177.840 of
(ii) The dimensions of the bumper this subchapter no later than the date
shall conform to § 393.86 of this title. of its first scheduled pressure test after
(iii) The structure of the bumper July 1, 2001, or July 1, 2003, whichever
must be designed in accordance with is earlier.
§ 178.345–8(d)(3) of this subchapter. (n) Thermal activation. No later than
(m) Specification MC 330, MC 331 cargo the date of its first scheduled leakage
tank motor vehicles, and nonspecification test after July 1, 1999, each specifica-
cargo tank motor vehicles conforming to tion MC 330 or MC 331 cargo tank
§ 173.315(k) of this subchapter, intended motor vehicle and each nonspecifica-
for use in the transportation of liquefied tion cargo tank motor vehicle con-
compressed gases. (1) No later than the forming to § 173.315(k) of this sub-
date of its first scheduled pressure test chapter, marked and certified before
after July 1, 2001, each specification July 1, 1999, that is used to transport a
MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tank motor liquefied compressed gas, other than
vehicle, and each nonspecification carbon dioxide and chlorine, that has a
cargo tank motor vehicle conforming water capacity of 13,247.5 L (3,500 gal-
to § 173.315(k) of this subchapter, lons) or less must be equipped with a
marked and certified before July 1,
means of thermal activation for the in-
2001, that is used to transport a Divi-
ternal self-closing stop valve as speci-
sion 2.1 material, a Division 2.2 mate-
fied in § 178.337–8(a)(4) of this sub-
rial with a subsidiary hazard, a Divi-
chapter.
sion 2.3 material, or anhydrous ammo-
nia must have an emergency discharge (o) On-truck remote control of self-clos-
control capability as specified in ing stop valves—MC 330, MC 331, and MC
§ 173.315(n) of this subchapter. Each 338. On or before October 2, 2006—
passive shut-off system installed prior (1) Each owner of an MC 330 or MC 331
to July 1, 2001, must be certified by a cargo tank motor vehicle marked or
Design Certifying Engineer that it certified before January 1, 1995, must
meets the requirements of § 173.315(n)(2) equip the cargo tank with an on-vehi-
of this subchapter. cle remote means of closure of the in-
(2) The requirement in paragraph ternal self-closing stop valve in con-
(m)(1) of this section does not apply to formance with § 178.337–8(a)(4) of this
a cargo tank equal to or less than subchapter. This requirement does not
13,247.5 L (3,500 gallons) water capacity apply to cargo tanks used only for car-
transporting in metered delivery serv- bon dioxide and marked ‘‘For carbon
ice a Division 2.1 material, a Division dioxide only’’ or intended for use in
2.2 material with a subsidiary hazard, chlorine service only.
or anhydrous ammonia equipped with (2) Each owner of an MC 338 cargo
an off-truck remote shut-off device tank motor vehicle marked or certified
that was installed prior to July 1, 2000. before January 1, 1995, must equip each
The device must be capable of stopping remotely controlled shutoff valve with
the transfer of lading by operation of a an on-vehicle remote means of auto-
transmitter carried by a qualified per- matic closure in conformance with
son attending unloading of the cargo § 178.338–11(c) of this subchapter. This

tank. The device is subject to the re- requirement does not apply to cargo
quirement in § 177.840(o) of this sub- tanks used for the transportation of
347
§ 180.407 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
argon, carbon dioxide, helium, kryp- (1) The cargo tank shows evidence of
ton, neon, nitrogen, or xenon, or mix- dents, cuts, gouges, corroded or ab-
tures thereof. raded areas, leakage, or any other con-
[Amdt. 180–2, 54 FR 25032, June 12, 1989] dition that might render it unsafe for
hazardous materials service. At a min-
EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER ci- imum, any area of a cargo tank show-
tations affecting § 180.405, see the List of CFR
Sections Affected, which appears in the
ing evidence of dents, cuts, digs, goug-
Finding Aids section of the printed volume es, or corroded or abraded areas must
and at www.govinfo.gov. be thickness tested in accordance with
the procedures set forth in paragraphs
§ 180.407 Requirements for test and in- (i)(2), (i)(3), (i)(5), and (i)(6) of this sec-
spection of specification cargo tion and evaluated in accordance with
tanks. the criteria prescribed in § 180.411. Any
(a) General. (1) A cargo tank con- signs of leakage must be repaired in ac-
structed in accordance with a DOT cordance with § 180.413. The suitability
specification for which a test or inspec- of any repair affecting the structural
tion specified in this section has be- integrity of the cargo tank must be de-
come due, may not be filled and offered termined either by the testing required
for transportation or transported until in the applicable manufacturing speci-
the test or inspection has been success- fication or in paragraph (g)(1)(iv) of
fully completed. This paragraph does this section.
not apply to any cargo tank filled prior (2) The cargo tank has sustained
to the test or inspection due date. damage to an extent that may ad-
(2) Except during a pressure test, a versely affect its lading retention capa-
cargo tank may not be subjected to a bility. A damaged cargo tank must be
pressure greater than its design pres- pressure tested in accordance with the
sure or MAWP. procedures set forth in paragraph (g) of
(3) A person witnessing or performing this section.
a test or inspection specified in this
(3) The cargo tank has been out of
section must meet the minimum quali-
hazardous materials transportation
fications prescribed in § 180.409.
service for a period of one year or
(4) Each cargo tank must be evalu-
more. Each cargo tank that has been
ated in accordance with the acceptable
out of hazardous materials transpor-
results of tests and inspections pre-
scribed in § 180.411. tation service for a period of one year
(5) Each cargo tank which has suc- or more must be pressure tested in ac-
cessfully passed a test or inspection cordance with § 180.407(g) prior to fur-
specified in this section must be ther use.
marked in accordance with § 180.415. (4) [Reserved]
(6) A cargo tank which fails a pre- (5) The Department so requires based
scribed test or inspection must: on the existence of probable cause that
(i) Be repaired and retested in accord- the cargo tank is in an unsafe oper-
ance with § 180.413; or ating condition.
(ii) Be removed from hazardous mate- (c) Periodic test and inspection. Each
rials service and the specification plate specification cargo tank must be tested
removed, obliterated or covered in a se- and inspected as specified in the fol-
cure manner. lowing table by an inspector meeting
(b) Conditions requiring test and inspec- the qualifications in § 180.409. The
tion of cargo tanks. Without regard to retest date shall be determined from
any other test or inspection require- the specified interval identified in the
ments, a specification cargo tank must following table from the most recent
be tested and inspected in accordance inspection or the CTMV certification
with this section prior to further use if: date.
COMPLIANCE DATES—INSPECTIONS AND TEST UNDER § 180.407(c)
Date by which first test Interval
Test or inspection
must be completed period

(cargo tank specification, configuration, and service) (see Note 1) after first test
External Visual Inspection:
348
COMPLIANCE DATES—INSPECTIONS AND TEST UNDER § 180.407(c)—Continued

Date by which first test Interval
Test or inspection must be completed period
(cargo tank specification, configuration, and service) (see Note 1) after first test
All cargo tanks designed to be loaded by vacuum with full open- September 1, 1991 ........................... 6 months.
ing rear heads.
All other cargo tanks ...................................................................... September 1, 1991 ........................... 1 year.
Internal Visual Inspection:
All insulated cargo tanks, except MC 330, MC 331, MC 338 (see September 1, 1991 ........................... 1 year.
Note 4).
All cargo tanks transporting lading corrosive to the tank .............. September 1, 1991 ........................... 1 year.
MC 331 cargo tanks less than 3,500 gallons water capacity in ........................................................... 10 years.
dedicated propane service constructed of nonquenched and
tempered NQT SA–612 steel (see Note 5).
All other cargo tanks, except MC 338 ........................................... September 1, 1995 ........................... 5 years.
Lining Inspection:
All lined cargo tanks transporting lading corrosive to the tank ..... September 1, 1991 ........................... 1 year.
Leakage Test:
MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks in chlorine service ................... September 1, 1991 ........................... 2 years.
All other cargo tanks except MC 338 ............................................ September 1, 1991 ........................... 1 year.
Pressure Test:
(Hydrostatic or pneumatic) (See Notes 2 and 3) ..........................
All cargo tanks which are insulated with no manhole or insulated September 1, 1991 ........................... 1 year.
and lined, except MC 338.
All cargo tanks designed to be loaded by vacuum with full open- September 1, 1992 ........................... 2 years.
ing rear heads.
MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks in chlorine service ................... September 1, 1992 ........................... 2 years.
MC 331 cargo tanks less than 3,500 gallons water capacity in 10 years.
dedicated propane service constructed of nonquenched and
tempered NQT SA–612 steel (See Note 5).
All other cargo tanks ...................................................................... September 1, 1995 ........................... 5 years.
Thickness Test:
All unlined cargo tanks transporting material corrosive to the September 1, 1992 ........................... 2 years.
tank, except MC 338.
Note 1: If a cargo tank is subject to an applicable inspection or test requirement under the regulations in effect on December
30, 1990, and the due date (as specified by a requirement in effect on December 30, 1990) for completing the required inspec-
tion or test occurs before the compliance date listed in table I, the earlier date applies.
Note 2: Pressure testing is not required for MC 330 or MC 331 cargo tanks in dedicated sodium metal service.
Note 3: Pressure testing is not required for uninsulated lined cargo tanks, with a design pressure MAWP 15 psig or less,
which receive an external visual inspection and lining inspection at least once each year.
Note 4: Insulated cargo tanks equipped with manholes or inspection openings may perform either an internal visual inspection
in conjunction with the external visual inspection or a hydrostatic or pneumatic pressure-test of the cargo tank.
Note 5: A 10-year inspection interval period also applies to cargo tanks constructed of NQT SA–202 or NQT SA–455 steel
provided the materials have full-size equivalent (FSE) Charpy vee notch (CVN) energy test data that demonstrated 75% shear-
area ductility at 32 °F with an average of 3 or more samples >15 ft-lb FSE with no sample <10 ft-lb FSE.
(d) External visual inspection and test- hydrostatically or pneumatically test-

ing. The following applies to the exter- ed in accordance with paragraph
nal visual inspection and testing of (g)(1)(iv) of this section. Those items
cargo tanks: able to be externally inspected must be
(1) Where insulation precludes a com- externally inspected and noted in the
plete external visual inspection as re- inspection report.
quired by paragraphs (d)(2) through (2) The external visual inspection and
(d)(6) of this section, the cargo tank testing must include as a minimum the
also must be given an internal visual following:
inspection in accordance with para- (i) The tank shell and heads must be
graph (e) of this section. If external inspected for corroded or abraded
visual inspection is precluded because areas, dents, distortions, defects in
any part of the cargo tank wall is ex- welds and any other conditions, includ-
ternally lined, coated, or designed to ing leakage, that might render the
prevent an external visual inspection, tank unsafe for transportation service;
those areas of the cargo tank must be (ii) The piping, valves, and gaskets
internally inspected. If internal visual must be carefully inspected for cor-
inspection is precluded because the roded areas, defects in welds, and other
cargo tank is lined, coated, or designed conditions, including leakage, that

so as to prevent access for internal in- might render the tank unsafe for trans-
spection, the tank must be portation service;
349
§ 180.407 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(iii) All devices for tightening man- low-alloy steel, that create air cavities
hole covers must be operative and adjacent to the tank shell that do not
there must be no evidence of leakage at allow for external visual inspection
manhole covers or gaskets; must be thickness tested in accordance
(iv) All emergency devices and valves with paragraphs (i)(2) and (i)(3) of this
including self-closing stop valves, ex- section, at least once every 2 years. At
cess flow valves and remote closure de- least four symmetrically distributed
vices must be free from corrosion, dis- readings must be taken to establish an
tortion, erosion and any external dam- average thickness for the ring stiffener
age that will prevent safe operation. or appurtenance. If any thickness read-
Remote closure devices and self-closing ing is less than the average thickness
stop valves must be functioned to dem- by more than 10%, thickness testing in
onstrate proper operation; accordance with paragraphs (i)(2) and
(v) Missing bolts, nuts and fusible (i)(3) of this section must be conducted
links or elements must be replaced, from the inside of the cargo tank on
and loose bolts and nuts must be tight- the area of the tank wall covered by
ened; the appurtenance or ring stiffener.
(vi) All markings on the cargo tank (5) Corroded or abraded areas of the
required by parts 172, 178 and 180 of this cargo tank wall must be thickness
subchapter must be legible; tested in accordance with the proce-
(vii) [Reserved] dures set forth in paragraphs (i)(2),
(viii) All major appurtenances and (i)(3), (i)(5) and (i)(6) of this section.
structural attachments on the cargo (6) The gaskets on any full opening
tank including, but not limited to, sus- rear head must be:
pension system attachments, con- (i) Visually inspected for cracks or
necting structures, and those elements splits caused by weather or wear; and
of the upper coupler (fifth wheel) as- (ii) Replaced if cuts or cracks which
sembly that can be inspected without are likely to cause leakage, or are of a
dismantling the upper coupler (fifth depth one-half inch or more, are found.
wheel) assembly must be inspected for
(7) The inspector must record the re-
any corrosion or damage which might
sults of the external visual examina-
prevent safe operation;
tion as specified in § 180.417(b).
(ix) For cargo tanks transporting lad-
ing corrosive to the tank, areas cov- (e) Internal visual inspection. (1) When
ered by the upper coupler (fifth wheel) the cargo tank is not equipped with a
assembly must be inspected at least manhole or inspection opening, or the
once in each two year period for cor- cargo tank design precludes an internal
inspection, the tank shall be
roded and abraded areas, dents, distor-
hydrostatically or pneumatically test-
tions, defects in welds, and any other
ed in accordance with 180.407(c) and (g).
condition that might render the tank
unsafe for transportation service. The (2) The internal visual inspection
upper coupler (fifth wheel) assembly must include as a minimum the fol-
must be removed from the cargo tank lowing:
for this inspection. (i) The tank shell and heads must be
(3) All reclosing pressure relief valves inspected for corroded and abraded
must be externally inspected for any areas, dents, distortions, defects in
corrosion or damage which might pre- welds, and any other condition that
vent safe operation. All reclosing pres- might render the tank unsafe for trans-
sure relief valves on cargo tanks car- portation service.
rying lading corrosive to the valve (ii) Tank liners must be inspected as
must be removed from the cargo tank specified in § 180.407(f).
for inspection and testing. Each re- (3) Corroded or abraded areas of the
closing pressure relief valve required to cargo tank wall must be thickness
be removed and tested must be tested tested in accordance with paragraphs
according to the requirements set forth (i)(2), (i)(3), (i)(5) and (i)(6) of this sec-
in paragraph (j) of this section. tion.
(4) Ring stiffeners or other appur- (4) The inspector must record the re-
tenances, installed on cargo tanks con- sults of the internal visual inspection
structed of mild steel or high-strength, as specified in § 180.417(b).
350
(f) Lining inspection. The integrity of in accordance with paragraphs (i)(2),

the lining on all lined cargo tanks, (i)(3), (i)(5) and (i)(6) of this section.
when lining is required by this sub- (4) The inspector must record the re-
chapter, must be verified at least once sults of the lining inspection as speci-
each year as follows: fied in § 180.417(b).
(1) Rubber (elastomeric) lining must (g) Pressure test. All components of
be tested for holes as follows: the cargo tank wall, as defined in
(i) Equipment must consist of: § 178.320(a) of this subchapter, must be
(A) A high frequency spark tester ca- pressure tested as prescribed by this
pable of producing sufficient voltage to paragraph.
ensure proper calibration; (1) Test Procedure—(i) As part of the
(B) A probe with an ‘‘L’’ shaped 2.4 pressure test, the inspector must per-
mm (0.09 inch) diameter wire with up form an external and internal visual
to a 30.5 cm (12-inch) bottom leg (end inspection, except that on an MC 338
bent to a 12.7 mm (0.5 inch) radius), or cargo tank, or a cargo tank not
equally sensitive probe; and equipped with a manhole or inspection
(C) A steel calibration coupon 30.5 cm opening, an internal inspection is not
× 30.5 cm (12 inches × 12 inches) covered required.
with the same material and thickness (ii) All self-closing pressure relief
as that to be tested. The material on
valves, including emergency relief
the coupon shall have a test hole to the
vents and normal vents, must be re-
metal substrate made by puncturing
moved from the cargo tank for inspec-
the material with a 22 gauge hypo-
dermic needle or comparable piercing tion and testing according to the re-
tool. quirements in paragraph (j) of this sec-
tion.
(ii) The probe must be passed over
the surface of the calibration coupon in (iii) Except for cargo tanks carrying
a constant uninterrupted manner until lading corrosive to the tank, areas cov-
the hole is found. The hole is detected ered by the upper coupler (fifth wheel)
by the white or light blue spark assembly must be inspected for cor-
formed. (A sound lining causes a dark roded and abraded areas, dents, distor-
blue or purple spark.) The voltage must tions, defects in welds, and any other
be adjusted to the lowest setting that condition that might render the tank
will produce a minimum 12.7 mm (0.5 unsafe for transportation service. The
inch) spark measured from the top of upper coupler (fifth wheel) assembly
the lining to the probe. To assure that must be removed from the cargo tank
the setting on the probe has not for this inspection.
changed, the spark tester must be cali- (iv) Each cargo tank must be tested
brated periodically using the test cali- hydrostatically or pneumatically to
bration coupon, and the same power the internal pressure specified in the
source, probe, and cable length. following table. At no time during the
(iii) After calibration, the probe must pressure test may a cargo tank be sub-
be passed over the lining in an uninter- ject to pressures that exceed those
rupted stroke. identified in Table 1 to paragraph
(iv) Holes that are found must be re- (g)(1)(iv):
paired using equipment and procedures
prescribed by the lining manufacturer TABLE 1 TO PARAGRAPH (g)(1)(iv)
or lining installer.
Specification Test pressure
(2) Linings made of other than rubber
(elastomeric material) must be tested MC 300, 301, 302, The test pressure on the name plate or
using equipment and procedures pre- 303, 305, 306. specification plate, or 1.5 times the
MAWP, whichever is greater.
scribed by the lining manufacturer or
MC 304, 307 ........ The test pressure on the name plate or
lining installer. specification plate, 275.8 kPa (40
(3) Degraded or defective areas of the psig) or 1.5 times the design pressure,
cargo tank liner must be removed and whichever is greater.
MC 310, 311, 312 The test pressure on the name plate or

the cargo tank wall below the defect specification plate, 20.7 kPa (3 psig)
must be inspected. Corroded areas of or 1.5 times the design pressure,
the tank wall must be thickness tested whichever is greater.
351
§ 180.407 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
TABLE 1 TO PARAGRAPH (g)(1)(iv)—Continued gradually increasing the pressure to

one-half of the test pressure. There-
Specification Test pressure
after, the pressure must be increased in
MC 330, 331 ........ The test pressure on the name plate or steps of approximately one-tenth of the
specification plate, 1.5 times either the test pressure until the required test
MAWP or the re-rated pressure,
whichever is applicable. pressure has been reached. The test
MC 338 ................ The test pressure on the name plate or pressure must be held for at least 5
specification plate, 1.25 times either minutes. The pressure must then be re-
the MAWP or the re-rated pressure,
whichever is applicable. duced to the MAWP, which must be
DOT 406 .............. The test pressure on the name plate or maintained during the time the entire
specification plate, 34.5 kPa (5 psig) cargo tank surface is inspected. During
or 1.5 times the MAWP, whichever is
greater.
the inspection, a suitable method must
DOT 407 .............. The test pressure on the name plate or be used for detecting the existence of
specification plate, 275.8 kPa (40 leaks. This method must consist either
psig) or 1.5 times the MAWP, which-
ever is greater.
of coating the entire surface of all
DOT 412 .............. The test pressure on the name plate or joints under pressure with a solution of
specification plate, or 1.5 times the soap and water, or using other equally
MAWP whichever is greater. sensitive methods.
(2) When testing an insulated cargo
(v) [Reserved]
tank, the insulation and jacketing need
(vi) Each cargo tank of a multi-tank
not be removed unless it is otherwise
cargo tank motor vehicle must be test-
impossible to reach test pressure and
ed with the adjacent cargo tanks
empty and at atmospheric pressure. maintain a condition of pressure equi-
(vii) All closures except pressure re- librium after test pressure is reached,
lief devices must be in place during the or the vacuum integrity cannot be
test. All prescribed loading and unload- maintained in the insulation space. If
ing venting devices rated at less than an MC 338 cargo tank used for the
test pressure may be removed during transportation of a flammable gas or
the test. If retained, the devices must oxygen, refrigerated liquid is opened
be rendered inoperative by clamps, for any reason, the cleanliness must be
plugs, or other equally effective re- verified prior to closure using the pro-
straining devices. Restraining devices cedures contained in § 178.338–15 of this
may not prevent detection of leaks or subchapter.
damage the venting devices and must (3) Each MC 330 and MC 331 cargo
be removed immediately after the test tank constructed of quenched and tem-
is completed. pered steel in accordance with Part
(viii) Hydrostatic test method. Each UHT in Section VIII of the ASME Code
cargo tank, including its domes, must (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter), or
be filled with water or other liquid hav- constructed of other than quenched
ing similar viscosity, at a temperature and tempered steel but without
not exceeding 100 °F. The cargo tank postweld heat treatment, used for the
must then be pressurized to not less transportation of anhydrous ammonia
than the pressure specified in para- or any other hazardous materials that
graph (g)(1)(iv) of this section. The may cause corrosion stress cracking,
cargo tank, including its closures, must be internally inspected by the
must hold the prescribed test pressure wet fluorescent magnetic particle
for at least 10 minutes during which method immediately prior to and in
time it shall be inspected for leakage, conjunction with the performance of
bulging or any other defect. the pressure test prescribed in this sec-
(ix) Pneumatic test method. Pneumatic tion. Each MC 330 and MC 331 cargo
testing may involve higher risk than tank constructed of quenched and tem-
hydrostatic testing. Therefore, suitable pered steel in accordance with Part
safeguards must be provided to protect UHT in Section VIII of the ASME Code
personnel and facilities should failure and used for the transportation of liq-
occur during the test. The cargo tank uefied petroleum gas must be inter-
must be pressurized with air or an nally inspected by the wet fluorescent

inert gas. The pneumatic test pressure magnetic particle method immediately
in the cargo tank must be reached by prior to and in conjunction with the
352
performance of the pressure test pre- (1) Each cargo tank must be tested
scribed in this section. The wet fluores- for leaks in accordance with paragraph
cent magnetic particle inspection must (c) of this section. The leakage test
be in accordance with Section V of the must include testing product piping
ASME Code and CGA Technical Bul- with all valves and accessories in place
letin TB–2 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- and operative, except that any venting
chapter). This paragraph does not devices set to discharge at less than
apply to cargo tanks that do not have the leakage test pressure must be re-
manholes. (See § 180.417(c) for reporting moved or rendered inoperative during
requirements.) the test. All internal or external self-
(4) All pressure bearing portions of a closing stop valves must be tested for
cargo tank heating system employing a leak tightness. Each cargo tank of a
medium such as, but not limited to, multi-cargo tank motor vehicle must
steam or hot water for heating the lad- be tested with adjacent cargo tanks
ing must be hydrostatically pressure empty and at atmospheric pressure.
tested at least once every 5 years. The Test pressure must be maintained for
test pressure must be at least the max- at least 5 minutes. Cargo tanks in liq-
imum system design operating pressure uefied compressed gas service must be
and must be maintained for five min- externally inspected for leaks during
utes. A heating system employing flues the leakage test. Suitable safeguards
for heating the lading must be tested must be provided to protect personnel
to ensure against lading leakage into should a failure occur. Cargo tanks
the flues or into the atmosphere. may be leakage tested with hazardous
(5) Exceptions. (i) Pressure testing is materials contained in the cargo tank
not required for MC 330 and MC 331 during the test. Leakage test pressure
cargo tanks in dedicated sodium metal must be no less than 80% of MAWP
service. marked on the specification plate ex-
(ii) Pressure testing is not required cept as follows:
for uninsulated lined cargo tanks, with (i) A cargo tank with an MAWP of 690
a design pressure or MAWP of 15 psig kPa (100 psig) or more may be leakage
or less, which receive an external vis- tested at its maximum normal oper-
ual inspection and a lining inspection ating pressure provided it is in dedi-
at least once each year. cated service or services; or
(6) Acceptance criteria. A cargo tank (ii) An MC 330 or MC 331 cargo tank
that leaks, fails to retain test pressure in dedicated liquified petroleum gas
or pneumatic inspection pressure, service may be leakage tested at not
shows distortion, excessive permanent less than 414 kPa (60 psig).
expansion, or other evidence of weak- (iii) An operator of a specification
ness that might render the cargo tank MC 330 or MC 331 cargo tank, and a
unsafe for transportation service, may nonspecification cargo tank authorized
not be returned to service, except as under § 173.315(k) of this subchapter,
follows: A cargo tank with a heating equipped with a meter may check leak
system which does not hold pressure tightness of the internal self-closing
may remain in service as an unheated stop valve by conducting a meter creep
cargo tank if: test. (See appendix B to this part.)
(i) The heating system remains in (iv) An MC 330 or MC 331 cargo tank
place and is structurally sound and no in dedicated service for anhydrous am-
lading may leak into the heating sys- monia may be leakage tested at not
tem, and less than 414 kPa (60 psig).
(ii) The specification plate heating (v) A non-specification cargo tank re-
system information is changed to indi- quired by § 173.8(d) of this subchapter to
cate that the cargo tank has no work- be leakage tested, must be leakage
ing heating system. tested at not less than 16.6 kPa (2.4
(7) The inspector must record the re- psig), or as specified in paragraph (h)(2)
sults of the pressure test as specified in of this section.
§ 180.417(b). (2) Cargo tanks used to transport pe-
(h) Leakage test. The following re- troleum distillate fuels that are
quirements apply to cargo tanks re- equipped with vapor collection equip-
quiring a leakage test: ment may be leak tested in accordance
353
§ 180.407 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
with the Environmental Protection measuring thickness to within ±0.002 of

Agency’s ‘‘Method 27—Determination an inch.
of Vapor Tightness of Gasoline Deliv- (3) Any person performing thickness
ery Tank Using Pressure-Vacuum testing must be trained in the proper
Test,’’ as set forth in Appendix A to 40 use of the thickness testing device used
CFR part 60. Test methods and proce- in accordance with the manufacturer’s
dures and maximum allowable pressure instruction.
and vacuum changes are in 40 CFR (4) Thickness testing must be per-
63.425(e). The hydrostatic test alter- formed in the following areas of the
native, using liquid in Environmental cargo tank wall, as a minimum:
Protection Agency’s ‘‘Method 27—De- (i) Areas of the tank shell and heads
termination of Vapor Tightness of Gas- and shell and head area around any
oline Delivery Tank Using Pressure- piping that retains lading;
Vacuum Test,’’ may not be used to sat- (ii) Areas of high shell stress such as
isfy the leak testing requirements of the bottom center of the tank;
this paragraph. The test must be con-
(iii) Areas near openings;
ducted using air.
(iv) Areas around weld joints;
(3) A cargo tank that fails to retain
leakage test pressure may not be re- (v) Areas around shell reinforce-
turned to service as a specification ments;
cargo tank, except under conditions (vi) Areas around appurtenance at-
specified in § 180.411(d). tachments;
(4) After July 1, 2000, Registered In- (vii) Areas near upper coupler (fifth
spectors of specification MC 330 and MC wheel) assembly attachments;
331 cargo tanks, and nonspecification (viii) Areas near suspension system
cargo tanks authorized under attachments and connecting struc-
§ 173.315(k) of this subchapter must vis- tures;
ually inspect the delivery hose assem- (ix) Known thin areas in the tank
bly and piping system while the assem- shell and nominal liquid level lines;
bly is under leakage test pressure uti- and
lizing the rejection criteria listed in (x) Connecting structures joining
§ 180.416(g). Delivery hose assemblies multiple cargo tanks of carbon steel in
not permanently attached to the cargo a self-supporting cargo tank motor ve-
tank motor vehicle may be inspected hicle.
separately from the cargo tank motor (5) Minimum thicknesses for MC 300,
vehicle. In addition to a written record MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, MC 304, MC 305,
of the inspection prepared in accord- MC 306, MC 307, MC 310, MC 311, and MC
ance with § 180.417(b), the Registered 312 cargo tanks are determined based
Inspector conducting the test must on the definition of minimum thick-
note the hose identification number, ness found in § 178.320(a) of this sub-
the date of the test, and the condition chapter. The following Tables I and II
of the hose assembly and piping system identify the ‘‘In-Service Minimum
tested. Thickness’’ values to be used to deter-
(5) The inspector must record the re- mine the minimum thickness for the
sults of the leakage test as specified in referenced cargo tanks. The column
§ 180.417(b). headed ‘‘Minimum Manufactured
(i) Thickness testing. (1) The shell and Thickness’’ indicates the minimum
head thickness of all unlined cargo values required for new construction of
tanks used for the transportation of DOT 400 series cargo tanks, found in
materials corrosive to the tank must Tables I and II of §§ 178.346–2, 178.347–2,
be measured at least once every 2 and 178.348–2 of this subchapter. In-
years, except that cargo tanks meas- Service Minimum Thicknesses for MC
uring less than the sum of the min- 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, MC 304, MC
imum prescribed thickness, plus one- 305, MC 306, MC 307, MC 310, MC 311, and
fifth of the original corrosion allow- MC 312 cargo tanks are based on 90 per-
ance, must be tested annually. cent of the manufactured thickness

(2) Measurements must be made specified in the DOT specification,
using a device capable of accurately rounded to three places.
354
TABLE I—IN-SERVICE MINIMUM THICKNESS FOR the reduced loading conditions by

MC 300, MC 303, MC 304, MC 306, MC issuance of a revised manufacturer’s
307, MC 310, MC 311, AND MC 312 SPECI- certificate, and
FICATION CARGO TANKS CONSTRUCTED OF (ii) The cargo tank motor vehicle’s
STEEL AND STEEL ALLOYS nameplate must reflect the revised
Nominal In-service
service limits.
Minimum manufactured thickness decimal minimum (7) An owner of a cargo tank that no
equiva- thickness
(US gauge or inches) lent for reference longer conforms with the minimum
(inches) (inches) thickness prescribed for the specifica-
19 ....................................................... 0.0418 0.038
tion may not return the cargo tank to
18 ....................................................... 0.0478 0.043 hazardous materials service. The
17 ....................................................... 0.0538 0.048 tank’s specification plate must be re-
16 ....................................................... 0.0598 0.054 moved, obliterated or covered in a se-
15 ....................................................... 0.0673 0.061
14 ....................................................... 0.0747 0.067 cure manner.
13 ....................................................... 0.0897 0.081 (8) The inspector must record the re-
12 ....................................................... 0.1046 0.094 sults of the thickness test as specified
11 ....................................................... 0.1196 0.108
10 ....................................................... 0.1345 0.121 in § 180.417(b).
9 ......................................................... 0.1495 0.135 (9) For MC 331 cargo tanks con-
8 ......................................................... 0.1644 0.148 structed before October 1, 2003, min-
7 ......................................................... 0.1793 0.161
3/16 .................................................... 0.1875 0.169 imum thickness shall be determined by
1/4 ...................................................... 0.2500 0.225 the thickness indicated on the U1A
5/16 .................................................... 0.3125 0.281 form minus any corrosion allowance.
3/8 ...................................................... 0.3750 0.338
For MC 331 cargo tanks constructed
after October 1, 2003, the minimum
TABLE II—IN-SERVICE MINIMUM THICKNESS FOR thickness will be the value indicated
MC 301, MC 302, MC 304, MC 305, MC on the specification plate. If no corro-
306, MC 307, MC 311, AND MC 312 SPECI- sion allowance is indicated on the U1A
FICATION CARGO TANKS CONSTRUCTED OF form then the thickness of the tank
ALUMINUM AND ALUMINUM ALLOYS shall be the thickness of the material
In-service
of construction indicated on the UIA
Minimum manufactured thickness minimum form with no corrosion allowance.
thickness
(inches) (10) For 400-series cargo tanks, min-
imum thickness is calculated accord-
0.078 ...................................................................... 0.070 ing to tables in each applicable section
0.087 ...................................................................... 0.078
0.096 ...................................................................... 0.086
of this subchapter for that specifica-
0.109 ...................................................................... 0.098 tion: § 178.346–2 for DOT 406 cargo
0.130 ...................................................................... 0.117 tanks, § 178.347–2 for DOT 407 cargo
0.141 ...................................................................... 0.127 tanks, and § 178.348–2 for DOT 412 cargo
0.151 ...................................................................... 0.136
0.172 ...................................................................... 0.155 tanks.
0.173 ...................................................................... 0.156 (j) Pressure vent bench test. When re-
0.194 ...................................................................... 0.175 quired by this section, pressure relief
0.216 ...................................................................... 0.194
0.237 ...................................................................... 0.213 valves must be tested for proper func-
0.270 ...................................................................... 0.243 tion as follows:
0.360 ...................................................................... 0.324 (1) Each self-closing pressure relief
0.450 ...................................................................... 0.405
0.540 ...................................................................... 0.486 valve must open and reseat to a
leaktight condition at the pressures
(6) An owner of a cargo tank that no prescribed for the applicable cargo
longer conforms to the minimum tank specification or at the following
thickness prescribed for the design as pressures:
manufactured may use the cargo tank (i) For MC 306 cargo tanks:
to transport authorized materials at (A) With MC 306 reclosing pressure
reduced maximum weight of lading or relief valves, it must open at not less
reduced maximum working pressure, or than 3 psi and not more than 4.4 psi and
combinations thereof, provided the fol- must reseat to a leak tight-condition
lowing conditions are met: at no less than 2.7 psi.
(i) A Design Certifying Engineer (B) With reclosing pressure relief

must certify that the cargo tank de- valves modified as provided in
sign and thickness are appropriate for § 180.405(c) to conform with DOT 406
355
§ 180.409 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
specifications, according to the pres- graph (j)(1) of this section must be re-
sures set forth for a DOT 406 cargo paired or replaced.
tank in § 178.346–3 of this subchapter. [Amdt. 180–2, 54 FR 25032, June 12, 1989]
(ii) For MC 307 cargo tanks:
(A) With MC 307 reclosing pressure tations affecting § 180.407, see the List of CFR
relief valves, it must open at not less Sections Affected, which appears in the
than the cargo tank MAWP and not Finding Aids section of the printed volume
more than 110% of the cargo tank and at www.govinfo.gov.
MAWP and must reseat to a leak tight-
condition at no less than 90% of the § 180.409 Minimum qualifications for
cargo tank MAWP. inspectors and testers.
(B) With reclosing pressure relief (a) Except as otherwise provided in
valves modified as provided in this section, any person performing or
§ 180.405(c) to conform with DOT 407 witnessing the inspections and tests
specifications, according to the pres- specified in § 180.407(c) must—
sures set forth for a DOT 407 cargo (1) Be registered with the Federal
tank in § 178.347–4 of this subchapter. Motor Carrier Safety Administration
(iii) For MC 312 cargo tanks: in accordance with part 107, subpart F
(A) With MC 312 reclosing pressure of this chapter,
relief valves, it must open at not less (2) Be familiar with DOT-specifica-
than the cargo tank MAWP and not tion cargo tanks and trained and expe-
more than 110% of the cargo tank rienced in use of the inspection and
MAWP and must reseat to a leak tight- testing equipment needed, and
condition at no less than 90% of the (3) Have the training and experience
cargo tank MAWP. required to meet the definition of
‘‘Registered Inspector’’ in § 171.8 of this
(B) With reclosing pressure relief
chapter.
valves modified as provided in
(b) A person who only performs an-
§ 180.405(c) to conform with DOT 412
nual external visual inspections and
specifications, according to the pres-
leakage tests on a cargo tank motor
sures set forth for a DOT 412 cargo
vehicle, owned or operated by that per-
tank in § 178.348–4 of this subchapter.
son, with a capacity of less than 13,250
(iv) For MC 330 or MC 331 cargo L (3,500 gallons) used exclusively for
tanks, it must open at not less than flammable liquid petroleum fuels, is
the required set pressure and not more not required to meet the educational
than 110% of the required set pressure and years of experience requirements
and must reseat to a leak-tight condi- set forth in the definition of ‘‘Reg-
tion at no less than 90% of the required istered Inspector’’ in § 171.8 of this sub-
set pressure. chapter. Although not required to meet
(v) For DOT 400-series cargo tanks, the educational and years of experience
according to the pressures set forth for requirements, a person who performs
the applicable cargo tank specification visual inspections or leakage tests or
in §§ 178.346–3, 178.347–4, and 178.348–4, signs the inspection reports must have
respectively, of this subchapter. the knowledge and ability to perform
(vi) For cargo tanks not specified in such inspections and tests and must
this paragraph, it must open at not less perform them as required by this sub-
than the required set pressure and not chapter, and must register with the De-
more than 110% of the required set partment as required by subpart F of
pressure and must reseat to a leak- part 107 of this chapter.
tight condition at no less than 90% of (c) A person who performs only an-
the required set pressure or the pres- nual external visual inspections and
sure prescribed for the applicable cargo leakage tests on a permanently mount-
tank specification. ed non-bulk tank, owned or operated
(2) Normal vents (1 psig vents) must by that person, for petroleum products
be tested according to the testing cri- as authorized by § 173.8(c) of this sub-
teria established by the valve manufac- chapter, is not required to be reg-
turer. istered in accordance with subpart F of

(3) Self-closing pressure relief devices part 107 of this chapter. In addition the
not tested or failing the tests in para- person who signs the inspection report
356
required by § 180.417(b) of this subpart the maximum allowable depth is 1⁄10 of

for such non-bulk tanks is not required the greatest dimension of the dent, but
to be registered. Although not required in no case may the depth exceed one
to register, a person who performs vis- inch.
ual inspections or leakage tests or (2) The minimum thickness remain-
signs the inspection reports must have ing beneath a cut, dig, or gouge may
the knowledge and ability to perform not be less than that prescribed in the
such inspections and tests and must applicable specification.
perform them as required by this sub- (c) Weld or structural defects. Any
chapter. cargo tank with a weld defect such as
(d) A motor carrier or cargo tank a crack, pinhole, or incomplete fusion,
owner who meets the requirements of or a structural defect must be taken
paragraph (a) of this section may use out of hazardous materials service
an employee who is not a Registered until repaired.
Inspector to perform a portion of the (d) Leakage. All sources of leakage
pressure retest required by § 180.407(g). must be properly repaired prior to re-
External and internal visual inspec- turning a tank to hazardous materials
tions must be accomplished by a Reg- service.
istered Inspector, but the hydrostatic (e) Relief valves. Any pressure relief
or pneumatic pressure test, as set forth valve that fails to open and reclose at
in § 180.407(g)(1)(viii) and (ix), respec- the prescribed pressure must be re-
tively, may be done by an employee paired or replaced.
who is not a Registered Inspector pro- (f) Liner integrity. Any defect shown
vided that— by the test must be properly repaired.
(1) The employee is familiar with the (g) Pressure test. Any tank that fails
cargo tank and is trained and experi- to meet the acceptance criteria found
enced in the use of the inspection and in the individual specification that ap-
testing equipment used; plies must be properly repaired.
(2) The employer submits certifi- [Amdt. 180–2, 54 FR 25032, June 12, 1989, as
cation that such employee meets the amended at 68 FR 75764, Dec. 31, 2003]
qualification requirements to the Asso-
ciate Administrator, Attn: (PHH–32), § 180.413 Repair, modification, stretch-
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safe- ing, rebarrelling, or mounting of
ty Administration, Department of specification cargo tanks.
Transportation, East Building, 1200 (a) General. Any repair, modification,
New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, stretching, rebarrelling, or mounting
DC 20590; and of a cargo tank must be performed in
(3) The employer retains a copy of conformance with the requirements of
the tester’s qualifications with the doc- this section.
uments required by § 180.417(b). (1) Except as otherwise provided in
this section, each repair, modification,
[Amdt. 180–2, 55 FR 37069, Sept. 7, 1990, as
amended by Amdt. 180–3, 56 FR 66287, Dec. 20, stretching, or rebarrelling of a speci-
1991; 57 FR 45466, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 180–11, 62 fication cargo tank must be performed
FR 1217, Jan. 8, 1997; 66 FR 45391, Aug. 28, by a repair facility holding a valid Na-
2001; 68 FR 19288, Apr. 18, 2003; 70 FR 56100, tional Board Certificate of Authoriza-
Sept. 23, 2005; 72 FR 55697, Oct. 1, 2007] tion for use of the National Board ‘‘R’’
stamp and must be made in accordance
§ 180.411 Acceptable results of tests with the edition of the National Board
and inspections. Inspection Code in effect at the time
(a) Corroded or abraded areas. The the work is performed.
minimum thickness may not be less (i) Repairs, modifications,
than that prescribed in the applicable stretchings, and rebarrellings per-
specification. formed on non-ASME stamped speci-
(b) Dents, cuts, digs and gouges. For fication cargo tanks may be performed
evaluation procedures, see CGA C–6 by:
(IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). (A) A cargo tank manufacturer hold-
(1) For dents at welds or that include ing a valid ASME Certificate of Au-
a weld, the maximum allowable depth thorization for the use of the ASME
is 1⁄2 inch. For dents away from welds, ‘‘U’’ stamp using the quality control
357
§ 180.413 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
procedures used to obtain the Certifi- this section, each repair of a cargo
cate of Authorization; or tank involving welding on the shell or
(B) A repair facility holding a valid head must be certified by a Registered
National Board Certificate of Author- Inspector. The following provisions
ization for use of the National Board apply to specific cargo tank repairs:
‘‘R’’ stamp using the quality control (1) DOT 406, DOT 407, and DOT 412
procedures used to obtain the Certifi- cargo tanks must be repaired in ac-
cate of Authorization. cordance with the specification re-
(ii) A repair, modification, stretch- quirements in effect at the time of re-
ing, or rebarrelling of a non-ASME pair;
stamped cargo tank may be done with- (2) MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303,
out certification by an Authorized In- MC 305, and MC 306 cargo tanks must
spector, completion of the R–1 form, or be repaired in accordance with either
being stamped with the ‘‘R’’ stamp. the most recent revision of the original
(iii) A repair, as defined in § 180.403, of specification or with the DOT 406 speci-
a DOT specification cargo tank used fication in effect at the time of repair;
for the transportation of hazardous (3) MC 304 and MC 307 cargo tanks
materials in the United States may be must be repaired in accordance with ei-
performed by a facility in Canada in ther the most recent revision of the
accordance with the Transport Canada original specification or with the DOT
TDG Regulations (IBR, see § 171.7 of 407 specification in effect at the time of
this subchapter) provided: repair;
(A) The facility holds a valid Certifi- (4) MC 310, MC 311, and MC 312 cargo
cate of Authorization from a provincial tanks must be repaired in accordance
pressure vessel jurisdiction for repair; with either the most recent revision of
(B) The facility is registered in ac- the original specification or with the
cordance with the Transport Canada DOT 412 specification in effect at the
TDG Regulations to repair the cor- time of repair;
responding TC specification; and (5) MC 338 cargo tanks must be re-
(C) All repairs are performed using paired in accordance with the speci-
the quality control procedures used to fication requirements in effect at the
obtain the Certificate of Authorization. time of repair; and
(2) Prior to each repair, modification, (6) MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks
stretching, rebarrelling, or mounting, must be repaired in accordance with
the cargo tank motor vehicle must be the repair procedures described in CGA
emptied of any hazardous material lad- Technical Bulletin TB–2 (IBR, see
ing. In addition, cargo tank motor ve- § 171.7 of this subchapter) and the Na-
hicles used to transport flammable or tional Board Inspection Code (IBR, see
toxic lading must be sufficiently § 171.7 of this subchapter). Each cargo
cleaned of residue and purged of vapors tank having cracks or other defects re-
so any potential hazard is removed, in- quiring welded repairs must meet all
cluding void spaces between double inspection, test, and heat treatment re-
bulkheads, piping and vapor recovery quirements in § 178.337–16 of this sub-
systems. chapter in effect at the time of the re-
(3) Each person performing a repair, pair, except that postweld heat treat-
modification, stretching, rebarrelling ment after minor weld repairs is not
or mounting of a DOT specification required. When a repair is made of de-
cargo tank must be registered in ac- fects revealed by the wet fluorescent
cordance with subpart F of part 107 of magnetic particle inspection, including
this chapter. those repaired by grinding, the affected
(b) Repair. The suitability of each re- area of the cargo tank must again be
pair affecting the structural integrity examined by the wet fluorescent mag-
or lading retention capability of the netic particle method after hydrostatic
cargo tank must be determined by the testing to assure that all defects have
testing required either in the applica- been removed.
ble manufacturing specification or in (c) Maintenance or replacement of pip-
§ 180.407(g)(1)(iv). Except for a repair ing, valves, hoses, or fittings. After each
performed by a facility in Canada in repair, maintenance or replacement of
accordance with paragraph (a)(1)(iii) of a pipe, valve, hose, or fitting on a cargo
358
tank, that component must be in- August 31, 1995 and, thereafter to speci-
stalled in accordance with the provi- fication DOT 406 only;
sions of the applicable specification be- (ii) For specification MC 304 and MC
fore the cargo tank is returned to serv- 307 cargo tanks, the provisions of ei-
ice. ther specification MC 307 or DOT 407
(1) After maintenance or replacement until August 31, 1995 and, thereafter to
that does not involve welding on the specification DOT 407 only;
cargo tank wall, the repaired or re- (iii) For specification MC 310, MC 311,
placed piping, valve, hose, or fitting and MC 312 cargo tanks, the provisions
must be tested for leaks. This require- of either specification MC 312 or DOT
ment is met when the piping, valve, 412 until August 31, 1995 and, thereafter
hose, or fitting is tested after installa- to specification DOT 412 only;
tion in accordance with § 180.407(h)(1). (iv) For specification MC 330 cargo
A hose may be tested before or after in- tanks, the provisions of specification
stallation on the cargo tank. MC 331; and
(2) After repair or replacement of pip- (v) For specification MC 338 cargo
ing, valves, or fittings that involves tanks, the provisions of specification
welding on the cargo tank wall, the MC 338. However, structural modifica-
cargo tank must be pressure tested in tions to MC 338 cargo tanks authorized
accordance with the applicable manu- under § 180.405(d) may conform to appli-
facturing specification or cable provisions of the ASME Code in-
§ 180.407(g)(1)(iv). In addition, the af- stead of specification MC 338, provided
fected piping, valve, or fitting must be the structural integrity of the modified
tested in accordance with paragraph cargo tank is at least equivalent to
(c)(1) of this section. that of the original cargo tank.
(3) Hoses on cargo tanks in dedicated (3) The person performing the modi-
liquefied compressed gas, except car- fication, stretching, or rebarrelling
bon dioxide, service are excepted from must:
these testing requirements, but must (i) Have knowledge of the original de-
be tested in accordance with § 180.416(f). sign concept, particularly with respect
(d) Modification, stretching, or rebarrel- to structural design analysis, material
ling. Modification, stretching or re- and welding procedures.
barrelling of a cargo tank motor vehi- (ii) Assure compliance of the rebuilt
cle must conform to the following pro- cargo tank’s structural integrity, vent-
visions: ing, and accident damage protection
(1) The design of the modified, with the applicable specification re-
stretched, or rebarrelled cargo tank quirements.
motor vehicle must be certified in (iii) Assure compliance with all ap-
writing by a Design Certifying Engi- plicable Federal Motor Carrier Safety
neer as meeting the structural integ- Regulations for all newly installed
rity and accident damage protection safety equipment.
requirements of the applicable speci- (iv) Assure the suitability of each
fication. modification, stretching and rebarrel-
(2) Except as provided in paragraph ling that affects the lading retention
(d)(2)(v) of this section, all new mate- capability of the cargo tank by per-
rial and equipment affected by modi- forming the tests required in the appli-
fication, stretching, or rebarrelling cable specification or § 180.407(g)(1)(iv).
must meet the requirements of the (v) Any modification that changes in-
specification in effect at the time such formation displayed on the specifica-
work is performed, and all applicable tion plate requires the installation of a
structural integrity requirements supplemental specification plate,
(§ 178.337–3, § 178.338–3, or § 178.345–3 of nameplate, or both containing the in-
this subchapter). The work must conformation that reflects the cargo tank
form to the requirements of the appli- as modified, stretched or rebarrelled.
cable specification as follows: The plate must include the name of the
(i) For specification MC 300, MC 301, person or facility doing the work, DOT
MC 302, MC 303, MC 305 and MC 306 registration number, date work is com-
cargo tanks, the provisions of either pleted, retest information, and any
specification MC 306 or DOT 406 until other information that differs from the
359
§ 180.415 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
original plate. The supplemental plates the period the cargo tank motor vehi-
must be installed immediately adja- cle is in the carrier’s service.
cent to the existing plate or plates. [68 FR 19288, Apr. 18, 2003; 68 FR 52372, Sept.
(vi) On a variable specification cargo 3, 2003, as amended at 68 FR 75764, Dec. 31,
tank, install a supplemental or new 2003; 82 FR 15897, Mar. 30, 2017]
variable specification plate, and re-
place the specification listed on the § 180.415 Test and inspection mark-
ings.
original specification plate with the
words ‘‘see variable specification (a) Each cargo tank successfully
plate.’’ completing the test and inspection re-
(4) A Registered Inspector must cer- quirements contained in § 180.407 must
tify that the modified, stretched, or be marked as specified in this section.
rebarrelled cargo tank conforms to the (b) Each cargo tank must be durably
requirements of this section and the and legibly marked, in English, with
the date (month and year) and the type
applicable specification by issuing a
of test or inspection performed, subject
supplemental certificate of compliance.
to the following provisions:
The registration number of the Reg-
(1) The date must be readily identifi-
istered Inspector must be entered on able with the applicable test or inspec-
the certificate. tion.
(e) Mounting of cargo tanks. Mounting (2) The markings must be in letters
a cargo tank on a cargo tank motor ve- and numbers at least 32 mm (1.25
hicle must be: inches) high, near the specification
(1) Performed as required by para- plate or anywhere on the front head.
graph (d)(2) of this section and certified (3) The type of test or inspection may
by a Design Certifying Engineer if the be abbreviated as follows:
mounting of a cargo tank on a motor (i) V for external visual inspection
vehicle chassis involves welding on the and test;
cargo tank head or shell or any change (ii) I for internal visual inspection;
or modification of the methods of at- (iii) P for pressure test;
tachment; or (iv) L for lining inspection;
(2) In accordance with the original (v) T for thickness test; and
specification for attachment to the (vi) K for leakage test for a cargo
chassis or the specification for attach- tank tested under § 180.407, except
ment to the chassis in effect at the § 180.407(h)(2); and
time of the mounting, and performed (vii) K-EPA27 for a cargo tank tested
under § 180.407(h)(2) after October 1,
under the supervision of a Registered
2004.
Inspector if the mounting of a cargo
tank on a motor vehicle chassis does Examples to paragraph (b). The markings
not involve welding on the cargo tank ‘‘10–99 P, V, L’’ represent that in October 1999
a cargo tank passed the prescribed pressure
head or shell or a change or modifica-
test, external visual inspection and test, and
tion of the methods of attachment. the lining inspection. The markings ‘‘2–00 K-
(f) Records. Each owner of a cargo EPA27’’ represent that in February 2000 a
tank motor vehicle must retain at the cargo tank passed the leakage test under
owner’s principal place of business all § 180.407(h)(2). The markings ‘‘2–00 K, K-
records of repair, modification, EPA27’’ represent that in February 2000 a
cargo tank passed the leakage test under
stretching, or rebarrelling, including both § 180.407(h)(1) and under EPA Method 27
notation of any tests conducted to in § 180.407(h)(2).
verify the suitability of the repair,
modification, stretching, or rebarrel- (c) For a cargo tank motor vehicle
ling made to each cargo tank during composed of multiple cargo tanks con-
structed to the same specification,
the time the cargo tank motor vehicle
which are tested and inspected at the
is in service and for one year there-
same time, one set of test and inspec-
after. Copies of these records must be tion markings may be used to satisfy
retained by a motor carrier, if not the the requirements of this section. For a
owner of the cargo tank motor vehicle, cargo tank motor vehicle composed of
at its principal place of business during multiple cargo tanks constructed to
360
different specifications, which are test- acceptable procedures that may be

ed and inspected at different intervals, used for this test.
the test and inspection markings must (4) The operator of a cargo tank must
appear in the order of the cargo tank’s check the internal self-closing stop
corresponding location, from front to valve in the liquid discharge opening
rear. for leakage through the valve at least
once each calendar month the cargo
[Amdt. 180–2, 56 FR 27879, June 17, 1991, as
amended by Amdt. 180–3, 56 FR 66287, Dec. 20, tank is in service. On cargo tanks
1991; 57 FR 45466, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 180–6, 59 equipped with a meter, the meter creep
FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 180–10, 61 FR test as outlined in appendix B to this
51343, Oct. 1, 1996; 68 FR 19290, Apr. 18, 2003; 68 part or a test providing equivalent ac-
FR 52372, Sept. 3, 2003] curacy is acceptable. For cargo tanks
that are not equipped with a meter, ap-
§ 180.416 Discharge system inspection pendix B to this part outlines one ac-
and maintenance program for cargo ceptable method that may be used to
tanks transporting liquefied com-
pressed gases. check internal self-closing stop valves
for closure.
(a) Applicability. This section is appli- (5) The operator must note each in-
cable to an operator using specification spection in a record. That record must
MC 330, MC 331, and nonspecification include the inspection date, the name
cargo tanks authorized under of the person performing the inspec-
§ 173.315(k) of this subchapter for trans- tion, the hose assembly identification
portation of liquefied compressed gases number, the manufacturer of the hose
other than carbon dioxide. Paragraphs assembly, the date the hose was assem-
(b), (c), (d)(1), (d)(5), (e), (f), and (g)(1) of bled and tested, and an indication that
this section, applicable to delivery the delivery hose assembly and piping
hose assemblies, apply only to hose as- system passed or failed the tests and
semblies installed or carried on the inspections. The operator must retain
cargo tank. a copy of each test and inspection
(b) Hose identification. By July 1, 2000, record at its principal place of business
the operator must assure that each de- or where the vehicle is housed or main-
livery hose assembly is permanently tained until the next test of the same
marked with a unique identification type is successfully completed.
number and maximum working pres- (e) Annual hose leakage test. The
sure. owner of a delivery hose assembly that
(c) Post-delivery hose check. After each is not permanently attached to a cargo
unloading, the operator must visually tank motor vehicle must ensure that
check that portion of the delivery hose the hose assembly is annually tested in
assembly deployed during the unload- accordance with § 180.407(h)(4).
ing. (f) New or repaired delivery hose assem-
(d) Monthly inspections and tests. (1) blies. Each operator of a cargo tank
The operator must visually inspect must ensure each new and repaired de-
each delivery hose assembly at least livery hose assembly is tested at a min-
once each calendar month the delivery imum of 120 percent of the hose max-
hose assembly is in service. imum working pressure.
(2) The operator must visually in- (1) The operator must visually exam-
spect the piping system at least once ine the delivery hose assembly while it
each calendar month the cargo tank is is under pressure.
in service. The inspection must include (2) Upon successful completion of the
fusible elements and all components of pressure test and inspection, the oper-
the piping system, including bolts, con- ator must assure that the delivery hose
nections, and seals. assembly is permanently marked with
(3) At least once each calendar month the month and year of the test.
a cargo tank is in service, the operator (3) After July 1, 2000, the operator
must actuate all emergency discharge must complete a record documenting
control devices designed to close the the test and inspection, including the
internal self-closing stop valve to as- date, the signature of the inspector,
sure that all linkages operate as de- the hose owner, the hose identification
signed. appendix A to this part outlines number, the date of original delivery
361
§ 180.417 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
hose assembly and test, notes of any § 180.417 Reporting and record reten-
defects observed and repairs made, and tion requirements.
an indication that the delivery hose as- (a) Vehicle certification. (1) Each
sembly passed or failed the tests and owner of a specification cargo tank
inspections. A copy of each test and in- must retain the manufacturer’s certifi-
spection record must be retained by cate, the manufacturer’s ASME U1A
the operator at its principal place of data report, where applicable, and re-
business or where the vehicle is housed lated papers certifying that the speci-
or maintained until the next test of the fication cargo tank identified in the
same type is successfully completed. documents was manufactured and test-
(g) Rejection criteria. (1) No operator ed in accordance with the applicable
may use a delivery hose assembly de- specification. This would include any
termined to have any condition identi- certification of emergency discharge
fied below for unloading liquefied com- control systems required by § 173.315(n)
pressed gases. An operator may remove of this subchapter or § 180.405(m). The
and replace damaged sections or cor- owner must retain the documents
rect defects discovered. Repaired hose throughout his ownership of the speci-
assemblies may be placed back in serv- fication cargo tank and for one year
ice if retested successfully in accord- thereafter. In the event of a change in
ance with paragraph (f) of this section. ownership, the prior owner must retain
(i) Damage to the hose cover that ex- non-fading photo copies of these docu-
poses the reinforcement. ments for one year.
(ii) Wire braid reinforcement that (2) Each motor carrier who uses a
has been kinked or flattened so as to specification cargo tank motor vehicle
permanently deform the wire braid. must obtain a copy of the manufactur-
(iii) Soft spots when not under preser’s certificate and related papers or
sure, bulging under pressure, or loose the alternative report authorized by
outer covering. paragraph (a)(3)(i) or (ii) of this section
(iv) Damaged, slipping, or excessively and retain the documents as specified
worn hose couplings. in this paragraph (a)(2). A motor car-
(v) Loose or missing bolts or fas- rier who is not the owner of a cargo
tenings on bolted hose coupling assem- tank motor vehicle must also retain a
blies. copy of the vehicle certification report
(2) No operator may use a cargo tank for as long as the cargo tank motor ve-
with a piping system found to have any hicle is used by that carrier and for one
condition identified in this paragraph year thereafter. The information re-
(g)(2) for unloading liquefied com- quired by this section must be main-
pressed gases. tained at the company’s principal place
(i) Any external leak identifiable of business or at the location where the
without the use of instruments. vehicle is housed or maintained. The
(ii) Bolts that are loose, missing, or provisions of this section do not apply
severely corroded. to a motor carrier who leases a cargo
(iii) Manual stop valves that will not tank for less than 30 days.
actuate. (3) DOT Specification cargo tanks man-
(iv) Rubber hose flexible connectors ufactured before September 1, 1995—(i)
with any condition outlined in para- Non-ASME Code stamped cargo tanks—If
graph (g)(1) of this section. an owner does not have a manufactur-
(v) Stainless steel flexible connectors er’s certificate for a cargo tank and he
with damaged reinforcement braid. wishes to certify it as a specification
cargo tank, the owner must perform
(vi) Internal self-closing stop valves
appropriate tests and inspections,
that fail to close or that permit leak-
under the direct supervision of a Reg-
age through the valve detectable with-
istered Inspector, to determine if the
out the use of instruments.
cargo tank conforms with the applica-
(vii) Pipes or joints that are severely ble specification. Both the owner and
corroded. the Registered Inspector must certify

[64 FR 28051, May 24, 1999, as amended at 78 that the cargo tank fully conforms to
FR 15330, Mar. 11, 2013] the applicable specification. The owner
362
must retain the certificate, as specified set to discharge pressure, pressure at

in this section. which device opened, pressure at which
(ii) ASME Code Stamped cargo tanks. If device re-seated, and a statement of
the owner does not have the manufac- disposition of the device (e.g., re-
turer’s certificate required by the spec- installed, repaired, or replaced)); infor-
ification and the manufacturer’s data mation regarding the inspection of
report required by the ASME, the upper coupler assemblies, when appli-
owner may contact the National Board cable (visually examined in place, or
for a copy of the manufacturer’s data removed for examination); and, infor-
report, if the cargo tank was registered mation regarding leakage and pressure
with the National Board, or copy the testing, when applicable (pneumatic or
information contained on the cargo hydrostatic testing method, identifica-
tank’s identification and ASME Code tion of the fluid used for the test, test
plates. Additionally, both the owner pressure, and holding time of test);
and the Registered Inspector must cer- (iv) Location of defects found and
tify that the cargo tank fully conforms method of repair;
to the specification. The owner must (v) ASME or National Board Certifi-
retain such documents, as specified in cate of Authorization number of facil-
this section. ity performing repairs, if applicable;
(b) Test or inspection reporting. Each (vi) Name and address of person per-
person performing a test or inspection forming test;
as specified in § 180.407 must prepare a (vii) Registration number of the fa-
written report, in English, in accord- cility or person performing the test;
ance with this paragraph.
(viii) Continued qualification state-
(1) Each test or inspection report
ment, such as ‘‘cargo tank meets the
must include the following informa-
requirements of the DOT specification
tion:
identified on this report’’ or ‘‘cargo
(i) Owner’s and manufacturer’s
tank fails to meet the requirements of
unique serial number for the cargo
the DOT specification identified on
tank;
this report’’;
(ii) Name of cargo tank manufac-
turer; (ix) DOT registration number of the
(iii) Cargo tank DOT or MC specifica- registered inspector; and
tion number; (x) Dated signature of the registered
(iv) MAWP of the cargo tank; inspector and the cargo tank owner.
(v) Minimum thickness of the cargo (3) The owner and the motor carrier,
tank shell and heads when the cargo if not the owner, must each retain a
tank is thickness tested in accordance copy of the test and inspection reports
with § 180.407(d)(5), § 180.407(e)(3), until the next test or inspection of the
§ 180.407(f)(3), or § 180.407(i); same type is successfully completed.
(vi) Indication of whether the cargo This requirement does not apply to a
tank is lined, insulated, or both; and motor carrier leasing a cargo tank for
(vii) Indication of special service of fewer than 30 days.
the cargo tank (e.g., transports mate- (c) Additional requirements for Speci-
rial corrosive to the tank, dedicated fication MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks.
service, etc.) (1) After completion of the pressure
(2) Each test or inspection report test specified in § 180.407(g)(3), each
must include the following specific in- motor carrier operating a Specification
formation as appropriate for each indi- MC 330 or MC 331 cargo tank in anhy-
vidual type of test or inspection: drous ammonia, liquefied petroleum
(i) Type of test or inspection per- gas, or any other service that may
formed; cause stress corrosion cracking, must
(ii) Date of test or inspection (month make a written report containing the
and year); following information:
(iii) Listing of all items tested or in- (i) Carrier’s name, address of prin-
spected, including information about cipal place of business, and telephone
pressure relief devices that are re- number;

moved, inspected and tested or re- (ii) Complete identification plate
placed, when applicable (type of device, data required by Specification MC 330
363
§ 180.501 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
or MC 331, including data required by (d) Supplying certificates and reports.

ASME Code; Each person offering a DOT-specifica-
(iii) Carrier’s equipment number; tion cargo tank for sale or lease must
(iv) A statement indicating whether provide the purchaser or lessee a copy
or not the tank was stress relieved of the cargo tank certificate of compli-
after fabrication; ance, records of repair, modification,
(v) Name and address of the person stretching, or rebarrelling; and the
performing the test and the date of the most recent inspection and test reports
test; made under this section. Copies of such
(vi) A statement of the nature and se- reports must be provided to the lessee
verity of any defects found. In par- if the cargo tank is leased for more
ticular, information must be furnished than 30 days.
to indicate the location of defects de- [Amdt. 180–2, 54 FR 25032, June 12, 1989, as
tected, such as in weld, heat-affected amended at 55 FR 21038, May 22, 1990; 55 FR
zone, the liquid phase, the vapor phase, 37069, Sept. 7, 1990; 56 FR 27879, June 17, 1991;
or the head-to-shell seam. If no defect 58 FR 12905, Mar. 8, 1993; Amdt. 180–2, 59 FR
1786, Jan. 12, 1994; Amdt. 180–10, 61 FR 51343,
or damage was discovered, that fact Oct. 1, 1996; 63 FR 52850, Oct. 1, 1998; 64 FR
must be reported; 28052, May 24, 1999; 65 FR 50463, Aug. 18, 2000;
(vii) A statement indicating the 67 FR 61016, Sept. 27, 2002; 68 FR 19290, Apr.
methods employed to make repairs, 18, 2003; 68 FR 52372, Sept. 3, 2003; 69 FR 54047,
who made the repairs, and the date Sept. 7, 2004; 70 FR 34077, June 13, 2005; 76 FR
they were completed. Also, a statement 43532, July 20, 2011]
of whether or not the tank was stress
relieved after repairs and, if so, wheth- Subpart F—Qualification and
er full or local stress relieving was per- Maintenance of Tank Cars
formed;
(viii) A statement of the disposition SOURCE: Amdt. 180–8, 60 FR 49079, Sept. 21,
of the cargo tank, such as ‘‘cargo tank 1995, unless otherwise noted.
scrapped’’ or ‘‘cargo tank returned to
service’’; and § 180.501 Applicability.
(ix) A statement of whether or not (a) This subpart prescribes require-
the cargo tank is used in anhydrous ments, in addition to those contained
ammonia, liquefied petroleum gas, or in parts 107, 171, 172, 173, 174, and 179 of
any other service that may cause this subchapter, applicable to any per-
stress corrosion cracking. Also, if the son who manufactures, fabricates,
cargo tank has been used in anhydrous marks, maintains, repairs, inspects, or
ammonia service since the last report, services tank cars to ensure continuing
a statement indicating whether each qualification.
shipment of ammonia was certified by (b) This subpart also establishes the
its shipper as containing 0.2 percent minimum acceptable framework for an
water by weight. owner’s qualification program for tank
(2) A copy of the report must be re- cars and components. Owners should
tained by the carrier at its principal follow this subpart in developing their
place of business during the period the written procedures (work instructions),
cargo tank is in the carrier’s service as required under § 179.7(d), for use by
and for one year thereafter. Upon a tank car facility employees. The own-
written request to, and with the ap- er’s qualification program for each
proval of, the Field Administrator, Re- tank car, or a fleet of tank cars, must
gional Service Center, Federal Motor identify where to inspect, how to in-
Carrier Safety Administration for the spect, and the acceptance criteria. Al-
region in which a motor carrier has its ternative inspection and test proce-
principal place of business, the carrier dures or intervals based on a damage-
may maintain the reports at a regional tolerance analysis or service reliability
or terminal office. assessment must be approved by the
(3) The requirement in paragraph Associate Administrator for Railroad
(c)(1) of this section does not apply to Safety in accordance with 180.509(l).
a motor carrier leasing a cargo tank Tank car facilities must incorporate
for less than 30 days. the owner’s qualification program in
364
their quality assurance program, as re- Maintenance means upkeep, or preser-

quired under § 179.7(a)(2), (b)(3), (b)(5), vation, including repairs necessary and
and (d). proper to ensure an in-operation tank
(c) Any person who performs a func- car’s specification until its next quali-
tion prescribed in this part shall per- fication.
form that function in accordance with Modification means any change to a
this part. tank car that affects the certificate of
(d) Where, in this subpart, a person is construction prescribed in § 179.5, in-
required to make documents available cluding an alteration prescribed in
to FRA upon request, such request § 179.6, or conversion.
means that credentialed FRA per- Objectively reasonable and articulable
sonnel or an authorized representative belief means a belief based on particu-
of the Department may view the docu- larized and identifiable facts that pro-
ments and make copies of them. The vide an objective basis to believe or
document owner’s may seek confiden- suspect that a tank car or a class or de-
tial treatment of the documents pre- sign of tank cars may be in an unsafe
sented. See § 105.30. operating condition.
[Amdt. 180–8, 60 FR 49079, Sept. 21, 1995, as Qualification, as relevant to a tank
amended by Amdt. 179–50, 61 FR 33256, June car, means the car and its components
26, 1996; 77 FR 37986, June 25, 2012] conforms to the specification to which
it was designed, manufactured, or
§ 180.503 Definitions. modified to the requirements of this
The following definitions and those subpart, to the applicable requirements
contained in §§ 171.8 and 179.2 of this of the AAR Specifications for Tank
subchapter apply: Cars (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub-
Coating/lining owner means the person chapter), and to the owner’s acceptance
with the financial responsibility for criteria. Qualification is accomplished
purchasing and maintaining the integ- by careful and critical examination
rity of the interior coating or lining. that verifies conformance using inspec-
Corrosive to the tank or service equip- tions and tests based on a written pro-
ment means a material identified in Ap- gram approved by the tank car owner
pendix D of this part or a material followed by a written representation of
when in contact with the inner shell of that conformance. A tank car that
the tank or service equipment has a passes the appropriate tests for its
corrosion rate on steel greater than 2.5 specification, has a signed test report,
milli-inch per year (mpy) (0.0025 inch is marked to denote this passage, and
per year). is considered qualified for hazardous
Defects mean abrasions; corrosion; materials transportation under this
cracks; dents; flaws in welds; distor- subchapter.
tions; erosion; missing, damaged, leak-
Tests and inspec-
ing or loose components and fasteners; Qualification of § 180.509 (*)
tions
and other conditions or imperfections
that may make a tank car unsafe for Tank .......................... Visual Inspection ...... d
Structural Integrity In- e
transportation and/or require it to be spection.
removed from service. Thickness Test: Note f
Design level of reliability and safety 1.
means the level of reliability and safe- Safety System In- h
spection.
ty built into the tank car and, there- Service Equipment ... Service Equipment ... k
fore, inherent in its specification, de- Coating/lining ............ Internal Coatings and i
sign, and manufacture. Linings.
Inspection and test means a careful
and critical examination of a tank car NOTE 1: Subparagraph (f)(2) may require
thickness tests at an interval different from
and its appurtenances performed by
the other items for qualification of the tank.
qualified personnel following the own-
er’s qualified procedures. Railworthy, Railworthiness for a tank
Interior heater system means a piping car means that the tank, service equip-
system located within the tank shell ment, safety systems, and all other
that uses a fluid medium to heat the components covered by this subchapter
lading for the purposes of unloading. conform to the HMR, and are otherwise
365
§ 180.505 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
suitable for continued service and ca- ed thereto that are either in contact
pable of performing their intended with the lading or contain the lading.
function until their next qualification. Train consist means a written record
Reactive to the tank or service equip- of the contents and location of each
ment means a material that, in contact rail car in a train.
with the inner shell of the tank, or [77 FR 37986, June 25, 2012, as amended at 81
with the service equipment, may react FR 35546, June 2, 2016]
to produce heat, gases, and/or pressure
which could substantially reduce the § 180.505 Quality assurance program.
effectiveness of the packaging or the The quality assurance program re-
safety of its use. quirements of § 179.7 of this subchapter
Reinforced tank shell butt weld means apply.
the portion of a butt weld covered by a
reinforcing pad. § 180.507 Qualification of tank cars.
Reinforcing pad means an attachment (a) Each tank car marked as meeting
welded directly to the tank supporting a ‘‘DOT’’ specification or any other
major structural components for the tank car used for the transportation of
purpose of preventing damage to the a hazardous material must meet the re-
tank through fatigue, overstressing, quirements of this subchapter or the
denting, puncturing, or tearing. applicable specification to which the
Reliability means the quantified abil- tank was constructed.
ity of an item or structure to operate (b) Tank car specifications no longer
without failure for the specified period authorized for construction. (1) Tank
of its design life or until its next quali- cars prescribed in the following table
fication. are authorized for service provided
Representation means attesting they conform to all applicable safety
through documenting, in writing or by requirements of this subchapter:
marking on the tank (or jacket), that a
Specification pre-
tank car is qualified and railworthy. Other specifications per-
scribed in the current Notes
mitted
See also §§ 180.511 and 180.517(b). regulations
Safety system means one or more of 105A200W .................. 105A100W .......................... 1
the following: Thermal protection sys- 105A200ALW .............. 105A100ALW ...................... 1
tems, insulation systems, tank head 105A300W .................. ICC–105, 105A300.
105A400W .................. 105A400.
puncture resistance systems, coupler 105A500W .................. 105A500.
vertical restraint systems, and systems 105A600W .................. 105A600.
used to protect discontinuities (e.g., 106A500X ................... ICC–27, BE–27, 106A500.
106A800X ................... 106A800.
skid protection and protective 107A * * * * ............... ............................................. 2
housings) as required under this sub- Note 1: Tanks built as Specification DOT 105A100W or DOT
chapter. 105A100ALW may be altered and converted to DOT
Service equipment means equipment 105A200W and DOT 105A200ALW, respectively.
Note 2: The test pressures of tanks built in the United States
used for loading and unloading (includ- between January 1, 1941 and December 31, 1955, may be in-
ing an interior heating system), sam- creased to conform to Specification 107A. Original and re-
vised test pressure markings must be indicated and may be
pling, venting, vacuum relief, pressure shown on the tank or on a plate attached to the bulkhead of
relief, and measuring the amount of the car. Tanks built before 1941 are not authorized.
lading or the lading temperature. (2) [Reserved]
Service equipment owner means the (3) Specification DOT-113A175W,
party responsible for bearing the cost DOT-113C60W, DOT-113D60W, and DOT-
of the maintenance of the service 113D120W tank cars may continue in
equipment. use, but new construction is not au-
Tank car owner means the person to thorized.
whom a rail car’s reporting marks are (4) Class DOT 105A and 105S tank cars
assigned, as listed in the Universal Ma- used to transport hydrogen chloride,
chine Language Equipment Register refrigerated liquid under the terms of
(UMLER). DOT-E 3992 may continue in service,
Tank car tank means the shell, heads, but new construction is not authorized.
tank shell and head weld joints, at- (5) Specification DOT-103A-ALW,
tachment welds, sumps, nozzles, 103AW, 103ALW, 103ANW, 103BW,
flanges, and all other components weld- 103CW, 103DW, 103EW, and 104W tank
366
cars may continue in use, but new con- (1) The tank car shows evidence of
struction is not authorized. abrasion, corrosion, cracks, dents, dis-
tortions, defects in welds, or any other
[Amdt. 180–8, 60 FR 49079, Sept. 21, 1995, as
condition that may make the tank car
37987, June 25, 2012] unsafe for transportation,
(2) The tank car was in an accident
§ 180.509 Requirements for inspection and shows evidence of damage to an ex-
and test of specification tank cars. tent that may adversely affect its ca-
pability to retain its contents or to
(a) General. Each tank car owner
otherwise remain railworthy.
must ensure that a tank car facility:
(3) The tank bears evidence of dam-
(1) Inspects and tests each item ac- age caused by fire. (4) The Associate
cording to the requirements specified Administrator for Railroad Safety,
in this section; FRA, requires it based on the existence
(2) Evaluates each item according to of an objectively reasonable and
the acceptable results of inspections articulable belief that a tank car or a
and tests specified in § 180.511; class or design of tank cars may be in
(3) Marks each tank car as specified an unsafe operating condition.
in § 180.515 that is qualified to transport (c) Frequency of inspection and tests.
hazardous materials; Each tank car shall have an inspection
(4) Prepares the documentation as re- and test according to the requirements
quired by § 180.517 for each item quali- of this paragraph.
fied under this section. A copy of the (1) For Class 107 tank cars and tank
documentation required by § 180.517 cars of riveted construction, the tank
must be sent to the owner as appro- car must have a hydrostatic pressure
priate and according to the owner’s in- test and visual inspection conforming
structions. to the requirements in effect prior to
(b) Conditions requiring qualification of July 1, 1996, for the tank specification.
tank cars. Without regard to the quali- (2) For Class DOT 113 tank cars, see
fication compliance date requirements § 173.319(e) of this subchapter.
of any paragraph of this section, an (3) Fusion welded tank cars must be
owner of a tank car or an internal inspected and tested to be qualified and
coating or lining must ensure an appro- maintained in accordance with the fol-
priate inspection and test according to lowing table. All qualification require-
the type of defect and the type of main- ments need not be done at the same
tenance or repair performed if: time or at the same facility.
FREQUENCY OF QUALIFICATION INSPECTION AND TESTS
Section 180.509 (*) Description Maximum interval
D ............................. Visual inspection ................................................................................................ 10 years.

E .............................. Structural integrity inspection ............................................................................. 10 years.
F .............................. Thickness test .................................................................................................... See § 180.509(f).
H ............................. Safety Systems .................................................................................................. 10 years.
I ............................... Internal coating or lining (for materials corrosive or reactive to the tank) (See See § 180.509(i).
definitions at § 180.503).
J .............................. Leakage pressure test ....................................................................................... After reassembly.
K .............................. Service equipment (including pressure relief device) ........................................ See § 180.509(k).
(d) Visual inspection. At a minimum, where insulation or a thermal protec-

each tank car facility must visually in- tion system precludes it, an external
spect the tank externally and inter- inspection of the tank shell and heads
nally as follows: for abrasion, corrosion, cracks, dents,
(1) An internal inspection of the tank distortions, defects in welds, or any
shell and heads for abrasion, corrosion, other condition that makes the tank
cracks, dents, distortions, defects in car unsafe for transportation, and for
welds, or any other condition that DOT 115 class tank cars, an internal in-
makes the tank car unsafe for trans- spection of the inner container and ex-
portation, and except in the areas ternal inspection of the outer shell and
367
§ 180.509 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
heads for defects in welds, or any other the next required inspection. The
condition that may make the tank car owner must maintain all documenta-
unsafe for transportation; tion used to make such determination
(2) When an internal coating or lin- at its principal place of business and
ing, head protection, insulation, or make the data available to FRA or an
thermal protection is removed in part authorized representative of the De-
or in whole, the internal and external partment upon request.
exposed surface of the tank must be (2) For DOT 115 class tanks, para-
visually inspected for defects in welds graphs (e)(1)(i) through (iii) of this sec-
or any other condition that may make tion apply only to the outer shell fillet
the tank car unsafe for transportation, welds and to the non-reinforced ex-
and this inspection must precede any posed outer shell butt welds.
application or reapplication of a coat- (3) The inspection requirements of
ing or lining; paragraph (e)(1)(iii) of this section do
(3) An inspection of the service equip- not apply to reinforced tank shell butt
ment, including gaskets, for indica- welds until the time of lining removal
tions of corrosion and other conditions or application for tank cars with an in-
that may make the tank car unsafe for ternal lead, glass, or rubber lining.
transportation; (4) Each tank car facility must in-
(4) An inspection for missing or loose spect and test the elements identified
bolts, nuts, or elements that may make in paragraph (e)(1) of this section by
the tank car unsafe for transportation; one or more of the following methods:
(5) An inspection of all closures on (i) Dye penetrant testing (PT);
the tank car for conditions that may (ii) Radiographic examination (RT);
make the tank car unsafe for transpor- (iii) Magnetic particle testing (MT);
tation, including an inspection of the
(iv) Ultrasonic testing (UT); and
protective housings for proper condi-
(v) Direct, remote, or enhanced vis-
tion;
ual inspection, using, for example,
(6) An inspection of excess flow
magnifiers, fiberscopes, borescopes,
valves with threaded seats for tight-
and/or machine vision technology (VT).
ness; and
(7) An inspection of the required (f) Thickness tests. (1) The tank car
markings on the tank car for legibility. owner must ensure that each tank car
(e) Structural integrity inspections and facility measures the thickness of the
tests. (1) Each tank car owner must en- tank car shell, heads, sumps, protec-
sure the structural elements on the tive housing (i.e., domes), and nozzles
tank car qualify with the applicable re- on each tank car by using a device ca-
quirements of this subchapter. At a pable of accurately measuring the
minimum, the structural integrity in- thickness to within ±0.05 mm (±0.002
spection and test must include: inch).
(i) All transverse fillet welds greater (2) The tank car owner must ensure
than 0.64 cm (0.25 inch) within 121.92 cm that each tank car has a thickness test
(4 feet) of the bottom longitudinal cen- measurement:
terline except body bolster pad attach- (i) At the time of an internal coating
ment welds; or lining application or replacement,
(ii) The termination of longitudinal or
fillet welds greater than 0.64 cm (0.25 (ii) At least once every ten (10) years
inch) within 121.92 cm (4 feet) of the for a tank that does not have an inter-
bottom longitudinal centerline; and nal coating or lining, or
(iii) The tank shell butt welds within (iii) At least once every five (5) years
60.96 cm (2 feet) of the bottom longitu- for a tank that does not have an inter-
dinal centerline, unless the tank car nal coating or lining when:
owner can determine by analysis (e.g., (A) The tank is used to transport a
finite element analysis, damage-toler- material that is corrosive or reactive
ance analysis, or service reliability as- to the tank (see Appendix D of this
sessment) that the structure will not part) or service equipment as defined
develop defects that reduce the design § 180.503, and

level of safety and reliability or fail (B) The remaining shell and head
within its operational life or prior to thickness is tested and determined to
368
be at or below line C in Figure A of this

paragraph.
Where: ment as defined § 180.503 has contacted

A. As-built tank shell or head thickness with the tank, a qualified individual must
additional thickness. verify the coating or lining’s conform-
B. Required minimum tank shell or head ance with paragraph (g) of this section
thickness after forming per part 179.
by measuring the shell or head in the
C. Inspection frequency adjustment point
(design minimum shell or head thick-
area of the repair. The thickness test
ness, minus 1⁄2 of the table value in para- applies only to the non-lined or coated
graph (g) of this section). repaired area, and is not a qualification
D. Condemning limit for general corrosion event. Modification of the tank stencil
(required minimum shell or head thick- is not required.
ness, minus the value in paragraph (g) of (4) Operation of a tank car below the
this section).
E. Condemning limit for localized corrosion
condemning limit for general corrosion
(required minimum shell or head thick- or the condemning limit for localized
ness, minus the table value in paragraph corrosion (as shown in Figure A of this
(g) of this section, minus 1.58 mm (1⁄16 section) is prohibited.
inch)). See Note 1 in paragraph (g) of this (5) For sumps, protective housing
section for diameter limitations and
(i.e., domes), nozzles, and nozzle rein-
minimum separation distances.
F. Allowable shell or head thickness reduc- forcing pads, the tank car owner must
tion (table value in paragraph (g) of this determine if any reduction in wall
section). thickness affects the design levels of
G. Additional thickness reduction for local- reliability and safety built into sump,
ized areas in paragraph (g) of this sec- protective housing, nozzle, or nozzle re-
tion. inforcement. Each tank car owner
(3) For a localized repair of an inter- must maintain at its principal place of
nal coating or lining where a material business documentation describing the
corrosive to the tank or service equip- allowable thickness reductions for
369
ER25JN12.000</GPH>
§ 180.509 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
sumps, protective housings, and noz- owner of an internal coating or lining

zles, and nozzle reinforcements. This applied to protect a tank used to trans-
documentation must be made available port a material that is corrosive or re-
to FRA or an authorized representative active to the tank must ensure an in-
of the Department upon request. spection adequate enough to detect de-
(6) After repairs, alterations, conver- fects or other conditions that could re-
sions, modifications, or blasting of duce the design level of reliability and
tank car that results in a reduction of safety of the tank is performed. In ad-
the tank’s thickness, and anytime a dition, the owner of a coating or lining
tank car coating or lining is removed, of tank cars used to transport haz-
a qualified individual must measure ardous materials must ensure the lin-
the thickness of the tank in the area of ing complies with § 173.24(b)(2) and
reduced thickness to ensure that the (b)(3) of this subchapter.
thickness of the tank conforms to (2) The owner of the internal coating
paragraph (g) of this section. or lining must establish and maintain
(g) Service life thickness allowance. (1) a record of the service life of the coat-
A tank car found with a thickness ing or lining and commodity combina-
below the required minimum thickness tion, that is, the specific hazardous
after forming for its specification, as materials that were loaded into a tank
stated in part 179 of this subchapter, and the coating or lining in place at
may continue in service if any reduc- the time of loading. The owner of the
tion in the required minimum thick- internal coating or lining must use its
ness is not more than that provided in knowledge of the service life of each
the following table: coating or lining and commodity com-
bination to establish an appropriate in-
ALLOWABLE SHELL THICKNESS REDUCTIONS spection interval for that coating or
Marked tank test Top shell and tank
lining and commodity combination.
Bottom shell This interval must not exceed eight (8)
pressure head
years, unless the coating or lining
60 psig <200 psig 3.17 mm ............... 1.58 mm.
⁄ inch ..................
18 1⁄16 inch. owner can establish, document, and
≥200 psig .............. 0.79 mm ............... 0.79 mm. show that the service history or sci-
1⁄32 inch ................ 1⁄32 inch.
entific analysis of the coating or lining
and commodity pairing supports a
NOTE 1. A tank car owner may add an extra longer inspection interval. The owner
1.58 mm (1⁄16 inch) to the values in the table
for local reductions. Local reductions are
must maintain at its principal place of
those that do not exceed 20.32 linear centi- business a written procedure for col-
meters (8 linear inches) measured at the lecting and documenting the perform-
longest diameter, and are separated from the ance of the coating or lining applied
other local reductions by at least 40.64 cm (16 within the tank car for its service life.
inches). The internal coating or lining owner
NOTE 2. Any reduction in the tank car shell must provide this documentation, in-
thickness may not affect the structural cluding inspection and test, repair, re-
strength of the tank car to the extent that
the tank car no longer conforms to the appli-
moval, and application procedures, to
cable provisions of Section 6.2 of the AAR the FRA or car owner upon request.
Specifications for Tank Cars (IBR, see § 171.7 Further, the offeror must provide com-
of this subchapter). modity information to the car owner
NOTE 3. For DOT 115 class tank cars, shell and the owner of the internal coating
thickness reductions apply only to the outer or lining upon request.
shell of the tank car. There is no shell or (3) The owner of the internal coating
head thickness reduction authorized for the or lining must provide the test method
inner tank.
and acceptance criteria to the tank car
(2) [Reserved] owner and to the person responsible for
(h) Safety system inspections. Each qualifying the coating or lining. The
tank car owner must ensure qualifica- tank car facility inspecting and testing
tion of the tank car safety systems. the internal coating or lining must fol-
However, inspections of foam or cork low the inspection and test procedure,
insulation systems are not required. including the acceptance requirements,

(i) Internal coating and lining inspec- established by the internal coating or
tion and test. (1) At a minimum, the lining owner.
370
(j) Leakage pressure test. Unless the on a service reliability assessment

design of the service equipment ar- (that must be supported by analysis of
rangement precludes it (e.g., there is systematically collected data) in lieu
no fitting to pressurize the tank), each of the other requirements of this sec-
owner of a tank car must ensure that tion.
the tank, service equipment, and clo- (m) Inspection and test compliance date
sures installed, replaced, or reinstalled for tank cars. (1) After July 1, 2000, each
on the tank car are leak tested. The tank car with a metal jacket or with a
test may be conducted with the lading thermal protection system shall have
in the tank. When the test pressure ex- an inspection and test conforming to
ceeds the start-to-discharge or burst this section no later than the date the
pressure of a pressure relief device, the tank car requires a periodic hydro-
device must be rendered inoperative. static pressure test (i.e., the marked
The written procedures and test meth- due date on the tank car for the hydro-
od for leak testing must ensure the static test).
sensitivity and reliability of the test (2) After July 1, 1998, each tank car
method to prevent premature failure. without a metal jacket shall have an
This section does not apply to facilities inspection and test conforming to this
that remove closures for the sole pur- section no later than the date the tank
pose of loading or unloading the lading car requires a periodic hydrostatic
(e.g., blind flanges, pipe plugs, etc.). pressure test (i.e., the marked due date
(k) Service equipment inspection and on the tank car for the hydrostatic
test. (1) Each tank car owner must en- test).
sure the qualification of tank car serv- (3) For tank cars on a 20-year peri-
ice equipment at least once every ten odic hydrostatic pressure test interval
(10) years. The tank car owner must (i.e., Class DOT 103W, 104W, 111A60W1,
analyze the service equipment inspec- 111A100W1, and 111A100W3 tank cars),
tion and test results for any given lad- the next inspection and test date is the
ing and, based on the analysis, adjust midpoint between the compliance date
the inspection and test frequency to in paragraph (l)(1) or (2) of this section
ensure that the design level of reli- and the remaining years until the tank
ability and safety of the equipment is would have had a hydrostatic pressure
met. The owner must maintain at its test.
principal place of business all sup-
[Amdt. 180–8, 60 FR 49079, Sept. 21, 1995, as
porting documentation used to make amended by Amdt. 179–50, 61 FR 33256, June
such analyses and inspection and test 26, 1996; 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997; 63 FR 52851,
frequency adjustments. The supporting Oct. 1, 1998; 66 FR 45391, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR
documentation must be made available 75765, Dec. 31, 2003; 71 FR 54398, Sept. 14, 2006;
to FRA or an authorized representative 77 FR 37987, June 25, 2012]
of the Department upon request.
(2) Each tank car facility must qual- § 180.511 Acceptable results of inspec-
ify service equipment, including re- tions and tests.
closing pressure relief devices and inte- Provided it conforms to other appli-
rior heater systems in accordance with cable requirements of this subchapter,
the applicable provisions of Appendix D a tank car is qualified for use if it suc-
of the AAR Specifications for Tank cessfully passes the inspections and
Cars (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- tests set forth below conducted in ac-
chapter). cordance with this subpart. A represen-
(l) Alternative inspection and test pro- tation of that qualification must con-
cedures. When approved by the Asso- sist of marking the tank in accordance
ciate Administrator for Railroad Safe- with § 180.515.
ty, FRA, a tank car owner, or a coating (a) Visual inspection. A tank car suc-
or lining owner may use an alternative cessfully passes the visual inspection
inspection and test procedure or inter- when the inspection shows no struc-
val based on a damage-tolerance anal- tural defect that may cause leakage
ysis (that must include a determina- from or failure of the tank before the
tion of the probable locations and next inspection and test interval.
modes of damage due to fatigue, corro- (b) Structural integrity inspection and
sion, and accidental damage), or based test. A tank car successfully passes the
371
§ 180.513 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
structural integrity inspection and test § 180.513 Repairs, alterations, conver-

when it shows no structural defect that sions, and modifications.
may initiate cracks or propagate (a) To work on tank cars, a tank car
cracks and cause failure of the tank be-
facility must comply with the applica-
fore the next inspection and test inter-
ble requirements of this subpart, the
val.
AAR Specifications for Tank Cars
(c) Service life shell thickness. A tank
(IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter), and
car successfully passes the service life
the owner’s requirements.
shell thickness inspection when the
tank shell and heads show no thickness (b) Responsibilities of Tank Car Facil-
reduction below that allowed in ity. A tank car facility must obtain the
§ 180.509(g). permission of the equipment owner be-
(d) Safety system inspection. A tank fore performing work affecting alter-
car successfully passes the safety sys- ation, conversion, repair, or qualifica-
tem inspection when each thermal pro- tion of the owner’s equipment. For the
tection system, tank head puncture re- purposes of qualification and mainte-
sistance system, coupler vertical re- nance, the tank car facility must use
straint system, and system used to pro- the written instructions furnished by
tect discontinuities (e.g., breakage the owner or have written confirma-
grooves on bottom outlets and protection from the owner allowing the use of
tive housings) on the tank car conform written instructions furnished by the
to this subchapter and show no indica- owner or have written confirmation
tion of a defect that may reduce reli- from the owner allowing the use of
ability before the next inspection and written instructions furnished by an-
test interval. other. A tank car facility must not use,
(e) Lining and coating inspection. A copy distribute, forward or provide to
tank car successfully passes the lining another person the owner’s confiden-
and coating inspection and test when tial and proprietary written instruc-
the lining or coating conforms to the tions, procedures, manuals, and records
owner’s acceptance criteria. without the owner’s permission. A
(f) Leakage pressure test. A tank car tank car facility must report all work
successfully passes the leakage pres- performed to the owner. The tank car
sure test when all product piping, fit- facility must also report observed dam-
tings and closures show no indication age, deterioration, failed components,
of leakage. or non-compliant parts to the owner. A
(g) Hydrostatic test. A Class 107 tank tank car facility must incorporate the
car, the inner tank of a Class 115 tank owner’s Quality Assurance Program
car, or a riveted tank car successfully into their own Quality Assurance Pro-
passes the hydrostatic test when it gram.
shows no leakage, distortion, excessive (c) Unless the exterior tank car shell
permanent expansion, or other evi- or interior tank car jacket has a pro-
dence of weakness that might render tective coating, after a repair that re-
the tank car unsafe for transportation quires the complete removal of the
service. tank car jacket, the exterior tank car
(h) Service equipment. A tank car suc- shell and the interior tank car jacket
cessfully passes the service equipment must have a protective coating applied
inspection and test when this equip- to prevent the deterioration of the
ment conforms to this subchapter and tank shell and tank jacket. Previously
applicable provisions of Appendix D of applied coatings that still provide ef-
the AAR Specifications for Tank Cars fective protection need not be covered
(IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter), and
over.
shows no indication of a defect that
(d) After repair, replacement, or
may reduce reliability during the qual-
ification interval. qualification of tank car service equip-
ment, the tank service equipment must
[Amdt. 180–8, 60 FR 49079, Sept. 21, 1995, as successfully pass the leak test pre-
amended by Amdt. 179–50, 61 FR 33256, June scribed in § 180.509(j).

26, 1996; 66 FR 45187, Aug. 28, 2001; 77 FR 37990,
June 25, 2012] [77 FR 37990, June 25, 2012]
372
§ 180.515 Markings. struction and the marking of the tank

(a) When a tank car passes the re- car with the tank specification is the
quired inspection and test with accept- representation that all of the appro-
able results, the tank car facility must priate inspections and tests were suc-
mark the date of the inspection and cessfully performed to qualify the tank
test and due date of the next inspection for use. The owner must retain the doc-
and test qualified on the tank car in uments throughout the period of own-
accordance with the applicable provi- ership of the specification tank car and
sions of Appendix C of the AAR Speci- for one year thereafter. Upon a change
fications for Tank Cars (IBR, see § 171.7 of ownership, the applicable provisions
of this subchapter). When a tank car prescribed in Section 1.3.15 of the AAR
facility performs multiple inspections Specifications for Tank Cars (IBR, see
and tests at the same time, one date § 171.7 of this subchapter) apply. The
may be used to satisfy the require- builder of the car or a facility per-
ments of this section. One date also forming work on the car may retain
may be shown when multiple inspec- copies of relevant records.
tions and tests have the same due date. (b) Inspection and test reporting. Each
Dates displayed on the ‘‘consolidated tank car that is inspected and tested as
stencil’’ (see the applicable provisions specified in § 180.509 must have a writ-
of Appendix C of the AAR Specifica- ten report, in English, prepared accord-
tions for Tank Cars) take precedence ing to this paragraph. Marking the
over dates modified, and not stenciled, tank car with the specification (or re-
pursuant to interval adjustments for taining the specification marking on
service equipment, linings, and granted the tank) is the representation that all
alternative inspection intervals. of the appropriate inspections and tests
(b) Converted DOT 105, 109, 112, 114, or were performed and the results meet
120 class tank cars must have the new the tank car owner’s acceptance cri-
specification and conversion date per- teria to qualify the car for continued
manently marked in letters and figures use. The report may be created and re-
at least 0.95 cm (0.375 inch) high on the tained electronically, but, upon request
outside of the manway nozzle or the by FRA for a copy of the report, it
edge of the manway nozzle flange on must be made available in common
the left side of the car. The marking readable form. The owner must retain
may have the last numeral of the speci- a copy of the inspection and test re-
fication number omitted (e.g., ‘‘DOT ports until successfully completing the
111A100W’’ instead of ‘‘DOT next inspection and test of the same
111A100W1’’). type. The inspection and test report
(c) When qualified within six months must include the following:
of installation and protected from de- (1) Type of inspection and test per-
terioration, the test date marking of a formed (a checklist is acceptable);
reclosing pressure relief device is the (2) The results of each inspection and
installation date on the tank car. test performed;
[Amdt. 180–8, 60 FR 49079, Sept. 21, 1995, as (3) Tank car reporting mark and
amended by Amdt. 179–50, 61 FR 33256, June number;
26, 1996; 63 FR 52851, Oct. 1, 1998; 66 FR 45391, (4) Tank car specification;
Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 75765, Dec. 31, 2003; 77 FR (5) Inspection and test date (month
37991, June 25, 2012]
and year);
§ 180.517 Reporting and record reten- (6) Location and description of de-
tion requirements. fects found and method used to repair
each defect;
(a) Certification and representation.
Each owner of a specification tank car (7) The name and address of the tank
must retain the certificate of construc- car facility and the name and signature
tion (AAR Form 4–2) and related papers of inspector; and
certifying that the manufacture of the (8) The unique code (station stencil)
specification tank car identified in the identifying the facility.
documents is in accordance with the [Amdt. 180–2, 54 FR 25032, June 12, 1989, as
applicable specification. The builder’s amended at 68 FR 75765, Dec. 31, 2003; 77 FR
signature on the certificate of con- 37991, June 25, 2012]
373
§ 180.519 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
§ 180.519 Periodic retest and inspec- recorded in cubic cm. Permanent volu-
tion of tank cars other than single- metric expansion may not exceed 10
unit tank car tanks. percent of total volumetric expansion
(a) General. Unless otherwise pro- at test pressure and the tank must not
vided in this subpart, tanks designed to leak or show evidence of distress.
be removed from cars for filling and (2) Each tank, except tanks built to
emptying and tanks built to a Class specification DOT 107A, must also be
DOT 107A specification and their safety subjected to interior air pressure test
relief devices must be retested periodi- of at least 100 psig under conditions fa-
cally as specified in Retest Table 1 of vorable to detection of any leakage. No
paragraph (b)(5) of this section. Retests leaks may appear.
may be made at any time during the (3) Safety relief valves must be re-
calendar year the retest falls due. tested by air or gas, must start-to-dis-
(b) Pressure test. (1) Each tank must
charge at or below the prescribed pres-
be subjected to the specified hydro-
sure and must be vapor tight at or
static pressure and its permanent ex-
pansion determined. Pressure must be above the prescribed pressure.
maintained for 30 seconds and for as (4) Rupture discs and fusible plugs
long as necessary to secure complete must be removed from the tank and
expansion of the tank. Before testing, visually inspected.
the pressure gauge must be shown to be (5) Tanks must be retested as speci-
accurate within 1 percent at test meas- fied in Retest Table 1 of this paragraph
ure. The expansion gauge must be (b)(5), and before returning to service
shown to be accurate, at test pressure, after repairs involving welding or heat
to within 1 percent. Expansion must be treatment:
RETEST TABLE 1
Retest interval—years Minimum Retest Pressure relief valve
pressure—psig pressure—psig
Specification Pressure re- Tank hydro-
Tank Start-to-
lief devices d static Tank air test Vapor tight
discharge
expansion c
DOT 27 ................................................. 5 2 500 100 375 300

106A500 ................................................ 5 2 500 100 375 300
106A500X ............................................. 5 2 500 100 375 300
106A800 ................................................ 5 2 800 100 600 480
106A800X ............................................. 5 2 800 100 600 480
106A800NCI .......................................... 5 2 800 100 600 480
107A * * * * ........................................... d5 a2 (b) None None None
110A500–W .......................................... 5 2 500 100 375 300
110A600–W .......................................... 5 2 600 100 500 360
110A800–W .......................................... 5 2 800 100 600 480
110A1000–W ........................................ 5 2 1,000 100 750 600
BE–27 ................................................... 5 2 500 100 375 300
NOTES:
a If DOT 107A * * * * tanks are used for transportation of flammable gases, one rupture disc from each car must be burst at
the interval prescribed. The sample disc must burst at a pressure not exceeding the marked test pressure of the tank and not
less than 70 percent of the marked test pressure. If the sample disc does not burst within the prescribed limits, all discs on the
car must be replaced.
b The hydrostatic expansion test pressure must at least equal the marked test pressure.
c See § 180.519(b)(1).
d Safety relief valves of the spring-loaded type on tanks used exclusively for fluorinated hydrocarbons and mixtures thereof
which are free from corroding components may be retested every 5 years.
(6) The month and year of test, fol- marked end, except that if all tanks
lowed by a ‘‘V’’ if visually inspected as mounted on a car have been tested, the
described in paragraph (c) of this sec- date may be stamped into the metal of
tion, must be plainly and permanently a plate permanently applied to the
stamped into the metal of one head or bulkhead on the ‘‘A’’ end of the car.
chime of each tank with successful test Dates of previous tests and all pre-
results; for example, 01–90 for January scribed markings must be kept legible.
1990. On DOT 107A**** tanks, the date
must be stamped into the metal of the
374
(c) Visual inspection. Tanks of Class fication, maintenance or periodic re-

DOT 106A and DOT 110A-W specifica- testing of a portable tank.
tions (§§ 179.300 and 179.301 of this sub-
chapter) used exclusively for trans- § 180.603 Qualification of portable
porting fluorinated hydrocarbons and tanks.
mixtures thereof, and that are free (a) Each portable tank used for the
from corroding components, may be transportation of hazardous materials
given a periodic complete internal and must be an authorized packaging.
external visual inspection in place of
(b) To qualify as an authorized pack-
the periodic hydrostatic retest. Visual
inspections shall be made only by com- aging, each portable tank must con-
petent persons. The tank must be ac- form to the requirements of this sub-
cepted or rejected in accordance with chapter and the applicable design spec-
the criteria in CGA C–6 (IBR, see § 171.7 ification to which the portable tank
of this subchapter). was constructed.
(d) Written records. The results of the (c) The following portable tanks are
pressure test and visual inspection authorized for use provided they con-
must be recorded on a suitable data form to all applicable safety require-
sheet. Completed copies of these re- ments of this subchapter: 51, 56, 57, 60,
ports must be retained by the owner IM 101, IM 102 and UN portable tanks.
and by the person performing the pres- (d) A portable tank that also meets
sure test and visual inspection as long the definition of ‘‘container’’ in 49 CFR
as the tank is in service. The informa- 450.3(a)(3) must conform to the require-
tion to be recorded and checked on ments in parts 450 through 453 of this
these data sheets are: Date of test and
title for compliance with Annex II of
inspection; DOT specification number;
the Convention for Safe Containers
tank identification (registered symbol
and serial number, date of manufacture (CSC).
and ownership symbol); type of protec- (e) Exemption portable tanks based on
tive coating (painted, etc., and state- DOT 51 portable tanks. The owner of a
ment as to need for refinishing or reportable tank constructed in accord-
coating); conditions checked (leakage, ance with and used under an exemption
corrosion, gouges, dents or digs, broken issued prior to August 31, 1996, which
or damaged chime or protective ring, was in conformance with the require-
fire, fire damage, internal condition); ments for Specification DOT 51 port-
test pressure; results of tests; and dis- able tanks with the exception of the lo-
position of tank (returned to service, cation of fill and discharge outlets,
returned to manufacturer for repair, or shall examine the portable tank and its
scrapped); and identification of the per- design to determine if it meets the out-
son conducting the retest or inspec- let requirements in effect on October 1,
tion. 1996. If the owner determines that the
[Amdt. 180–8, 60 FR 49079, Sept. 21, 1995, as portable tank is in compliance with all
amended by Amdt. 179–50, 61 FR 33257, June requirements of the DOT 51 specifica-
26, 1996; 65 FR 58633, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR tion, the exemption number stenciled
45187, 45392, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 75765, Dec. 31,
on the portable tank shall be removed
2003]
and the specification plate (or a plate
placed adjacent to the specification
Subpart G—Qualification and plate) shall be durably marked ‘‘DOT
Maintenance of Portable Tanks 51–E*****’’ (where ***** is to be re-
placed by the exemption number). Dur-
SOURCE: 66 FR 33453, June 21, 2001, unless ing the period the portable tank is in
otherwise noted.
service, and for one year thereafter,
§ 180.601 Applicability. the owner of the portable tank must
retain on file, at its principal place of
This subpart prescribes require-
business, a copy of the last exemption
ments, in addition to those contained
in parts 107, 171, 172, 173, and 178 of this in effect.

subchapter, applicable to any person
responsible for the continuing quali-
375
§ 180.605 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
§ 180.605 Requirements for periodic (4) Each Specification 60 portable

testing, inspection and repair of tank must be given a periodic inspec-
portable tanks. tion and test at the end of the first 4-
(a) A portable tank constructed in year period after the original test; at
accordance with a DOT specification least once every 2 years thereafter up
for which a test or inspection specified to a total of 12 years of service; and at
in this subpart has become due, must least once annually thereafter. Re-
be tested or inspected prior to being retesting is not required on a rubber-
turned for transportation. lined tank except before each relining.
(b) Conditions requiring test and inspec- (d) Intermediate periodic inspection and
tion of portable tanks. Without regard to test. For IM and UN portable tanks the
any other test or inspection require- intermediate 2.5 year periodic inspec-
ments, a Specification or UN portable tion and test must include at least an
tank must be tested and inspected in internal and external examination of
accordance with this section prior to the portable tank and its fittings tak-
further use if any of the following con- ing into account the hazardous mate-
ditions exist: rials intended to be transported; a
(1) The portable tank shows evidence leakage test; and a test of the satisfac-
of dents, corroded or abraded areas, tory operation of all service equip-
leakage, or any other condition that ment. Sheathing, thermal insulation,
might render it unsafe for transpor- etc. need only be removed to the extent
tation service. required for reliable appraisal of the
(2) The portable tank has been in an condition of the portable tank. For
accident and has been damaged to an portable tanks intended for the trans-
extent that may adversely affect its portation of a single hazardous mate-
ability to retain the hazardous material, the internal examination may be
rial. waived if it is leakage tested in accord-
(3) The portable tank has been out of ance with the procedures in paragraph
hazardous materials transportation (h) of this section prior to each filling,
service for a period of one year or or if approved by the Associate Admin-
more. istrator. Portable tanks used for dedi-
(4) The portable tank has been modi- cated transportation of refrigerated
fied from its original design specifica- liquefied gases that are not fitted with
tion. inspection openings are excepted from
(5) The portable tank is in an unsafe the internal inspection requirement.
operating condition based on the exist- (e) Periodic inspection and test. The 5
ence of probable cause. year periodic inspection and test must
(c) Schedule for periodic inspections include an internal and external exam-
and tests. Each Specification portable ination and, unless excepted, a pressure
tank must be tested and inspected in test as specified in this section.
accordance with the following sched- Sheathing, thermal insulation, etc.
ule: need only to be removed to the extent
(1) Each IM or UN portable tank required for reliable appraisal of the
must be given an initial inspection and condition of the portable tank. Except
test before being placed into service, a for DOT Specification 56 and 57 port-
periodic inspection and test at least able tanks, reclosing pressure relief de-
once every 5 years, and an inter- vices must be removed from the tank
mediate periodic inspection and test at and tested separately unless they can
least every 2.5 years following the ini- be tested while installed on the port-
tial inspection and the last 5 year peri- able tank. For portable tanks where
odic inspection and test. the shell and equipment have been
(2) Each Specification 51 portable pressure-tested separately, after as-
tank must be given a periodic inspec- sembly they must be subjected to-
tion and test at least once every five gether to a leakage test and effectively
years. tested and inspected for corrosion.
(3) Each Specification 56 or 57 port- Portable tanks used for the transpor-
able tank must be given a periodic in- tation of refrigerated, liquefied gases
spection and test at least once every are excepted from the requirement for
2.5 years. internal inspection and the hydraulic
376
pressure test during the 5-year periodic (6) Required markings on the port-
inspection and test, if the portable able tank are legible and in accordance
tanks were pressure tested to a min- with the applicable requirements; and
imum test pressure of 1.3 times the de- (7) The framework, the supports and
sign pressure using an inert gas as pre- the arrangements for lifting the port-
scribed in § 178.338–16(a) and (b) of this able tank are in satisfactory condition.
subchapter before putting the portable (h) Pressure test procedures for speci-
tank into service initially and after fication 51, 56, 57, 60, IM or UN portable
any exceptional inspections and tests tanks. (1) Each Specification 57 port-
specified in paragraph (f) of this sec- able tank must be leak tested by a
tion. minimum sustained air pressure of at
(f) Exceptional inspection and test. The least 3 psig applied to the entire tank.
exceptional inspection and test is nec- Each Specification 51 or 56 portable
essary when a portable tank shows evi- tank must be tested by a minimum
dence of damaged or corroded areas, or pressure (air or hydrostatic) of at least
leakage, or other conditions that indi- 2 psig or at least one and one-half
cate a deficiency that could affect the times the design pressure (maximum
integrity of the portable tank. The ex- allowable working pressure, or re-rated
tent of the exceptional inspection and pressure) of the tank, whichever is
test must depend on the amount of greater. The leakage test for portable
damage or deterioration of the portable tanks used for refrigerated liquefied
tank. It must include at least the in- gas must be performed at 90% of
spection and a pressure test according MAWP. Leakage tests for all other
to paragraph (e) of this section. Pres- portable tanks must be at a pressure of
sure relief devices need not be tested or at least 25% of MAWP. During each air
replaced unless there is reason to be- pressure test, the entire surface of all
lieve the relief devices have been af- joints under pressure must be coated
fected by the damage or deterioration. with or immersed in a solution of soap
(g) Internal and external examination. and water, heavy oil, or other material
The internal and external examina- suitable for the purpose of detecting
tions must ensure that: leaks. The pressure must be held for a
(1) The shell is inspected for pitting, period of time sufficiently long to as-
corrosion, or abrasions, dents, distor- sure detection of leaks, but in no case
tions, defects in welds or any other less than five minutes. During the air
conditions, including leakage, that or hydrostatic test, relief devices may
might render the portable tank unsafe be removed, but all the closure fittings
for transportation. The wall thickness must be in place and the relief device
must be verified by appropriate meas- openings plugged. Lagging need not be
urement if this inspection indicates a removed from a lagged tank if it is pos-
reduction of wall thickness; sible to maintain the required test
(2) The piping, valves, and gaskets pressure at constant temperature with
are inspected for corroded areas, de- the tank disconnected from the source
fects, and other conditions, including of pressure.
leakage, that might render the port- (2) Each Specification 60 portable
able tank unsafe for filling, discharge tank must be retested by completely
or transportation; filling the tank with water or other liq-
(3) Devices for tightening manhole uid having a similar viscosity, the tem-
covers are operative and there is no perature of the liquid must not exceed
leakage at manhole covers or gaskets; 37.7 °C (100 °F) during the test, and ap-
(4) Missing or loose bolts or nuts on plying a pressure of 60 psig. The port-
any flanged connection or blank flange able tank must be capable of holding
are replaced or tightened; the prescribed pressure for at least 10
(5) All emergency devices and valves minutes without leakage, evidence of
are free from corrosion, distortion and impending failure, or failure. All clo-
any damage or defect that could pre- sures shall be in place while the test is
vent their normal operation. Remote made and the pressure shall be gauged
closure devices and self-closing stop- at the top of the tank. Safety devices
valves must be operated to dem- and/or vents shall be plugged during
onstrate proper operation; this test.
377
§ 180.605 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(3) Each Specification IM or UN port- the portable tank unsafe for transpor-
able tank, except for UN portable tation. Any portable tank that fails
tanks used for non-refrigerated and re- must be rejected and may not be used
frigerated liquefied gases, and all pip- again for the transportation of a haz-
ing, valves and accessories, except ardous material unless the tank is ade-
pressure relief devices, must be quately repaired, and, thereafter, a
hydrostatically tested with water, or successful test is conducted in accord-
other liquid of similar density and vis- ance with the requirements of this
cosity, to a pressure not less than 150% paragraph. An approval agency shall
of its maximum allowable working witness the hydrostatic or pneumatic
pressure. UN portable tanks used for test. Any damage or deficiency that
the transportation of non-refrigerated might render the portable tank unsafe
liquefied gases must be hydrostatically for service shall be repaired to the sat-
tested with water, or other liquid of isfaction of the witnessing approval
similar density and viscosity, to a pres- agency. The repaired tank must be re-
sure not less than 130% of its maximum tested to the original pressure test re-
allowable working pressure. UN port- quirements. Upon successful comple-
able tanks used for the transportation tion of the hydrostatic or pneumatic
of refrigerated liquefied gases may be test, as applicable, the witnessing ap-
tested hydrostatically or pneumati- proval agency shall apply its name,
cally using an inert gas to a pressure identifying mark or identifying num-
not less than 1.3 times the design pres- ber in accordance with paragraph (k) of
sure. For pneumatic testing, due re- this section.
gard for protection of all personnel (i) Rejection criteria. When evidence of
must be taken because of the potential any unsafe condition is discovered, the
hazard involved in such a test. The portable tank may not be returned to
pneumatic test pressure in the portable service until it has been repaired and
tank must be reached by gradually in- the pressure test is repeated and
creasing the pressure to one-half of the passed.
test pressure. Thereafter, the test pres- (j) Repair. The repair of a portable
sure must be increased in steps of ap- tank is authorized, provided such re-
proximately one-tenth of the test pres- pairs are made in accordance with the
sure until the required test pressure requirements prescribed in the speci-
has been reached. The pressure must fication for the tank’s original design
then be reduced to a value equal to and construction. In addition to any
four-fifths of the test pressure and held other provisions of the specification,
for a sufficient time to permit inspec- no portable tank may be repaired so as
tion of the portable tank for leaks. The to cause leakage or cracks or so as to
minimum test pressure for a portable increase the likelihood of leakage or
tank is determined on the basis of the cracks near areas of stress concentra-
hazardous materials that are intended tion due to cooling metal shrinkage in
to be transported in the portable welding operations, sharp fillets, rever-
tanks. For liquid, solid and non-refrig- sal of stresses, or otherwise. No field
erated liquefied gases, the minimum welding may be done except to non-
test pressure for specific hazardous ma- pressure parts. Any cutting, burning or
terials are specified in the applicable T welding operations on the shell of an
Codes assigned to a particular haz- IM or UN portable tank must be done
ardous material in the § 172.101 Table of with the approval of the approval agen-
this subchapter. While under pressure cy and be done in accordance with the
the tank shall be inspected for leakage, requirements of this subchapter, tak-
distortion, or any other condition ing into account the pressure vessel
which might render the tank unsafe for code used for the construction of the
service. A portable tank fails to meet shell. A pressure test to the original
the requirements of the pressure test test pressure must be performed after
if, during the test, there is permanent the work is completed.
distortion of the tank exceeding that (k) Inspection and test markings. (1)
permitted by the applicable specifica- Each IM or UN portable tank must be

tion; if there is any leakage; or if there durably and legibly marked, in
are any deficiencies that would render English, with the date (month and
378
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT Pt. 180, App. B
year) of the last pressure test, the iden- Board for a copy of the manufacturer’s
tification markings of the approval data report, if the portable tank was
agency witnessing the test, when re- registered with the National Board, or
quired, and the date of the last visual copy the information contained on the
inspection. The marking must be portable tanks specification plate and
placed on or near the metal identifica- ASME Code data plates.
tion plate, in letters and numerals of
[Amdt. 180–2, 54 FR 25032, June 12, 1989, as
not less than 3 mm (0.118 inches) high amended at 67 FR 15744, Apr. 3, 2002; 68 FR
when on the metal identification plate, 45042, July 31, 2003; 74 FR 53189, Oct. 16, 2009;
and 12 mm (0.47 inches) high when on 82 FR 15897, Mar. 30, 2017; 83 FR 55811, Nov. 7,
the portable tank. 2018]
(2) Each Specification DOT 51, 56, 57
or 60 portable tank must be durably
and legibly marked, in English, with
the date (month and year) of the most APPENDIX A TO PART 180—INTERNAL
recent periodic retest. The marking SELF-CLOSING STOP VALVE EMER-
must be placed on or near the metal GENCY CLOSURE TEST FOR LIQUEFIED
certification plate and must be in ac- COMPRESSED GASES
cordance with § 178.3 of this subchapter.
The letters and numerals must not be 1. In performing this test, all internal self-
closing stop valves must be opened. Each
less than 3 mm (0.118 inches) high when
emergency discharge control remote actu-
on the metal certification plate, and 12 ator (on-truck and off-truck) must be oper-
mm (0.47 inches) high when on the ated to ensure that each internal self-closing
portable tank, except that a portable stop valve’s lever, piston, or other valve indi-
tank manufactured under a previously cator has moved to the closed position.
authorized specification may continue 2. On pump-actuated pressure differential
to be marked with smaller markings if internal valves, the three-way toggle valve
originally authorized under that speci- handle or its cable attachment must be acti-
fication (for example, DOT Specifica- vated to verify that the toggle handle moves
to the closed position.
tion 57 portable tanks).
(l) Record retention. (1) The owner of [64 FR 28052, May 24, 1999, as amended at 67
each portable tank or his authorized FR 15744, Apr. 3, 2002]
agent shall retain a written record of
the date and results of all required in- APPENDIX B TO PART 180—ACCEPTABLE
spections and tests, including an ASME INTERNAL SELF-CLOSING STOP
manufacturer’s date report, if applica- VALVE LEAKAGE TESTS FOR CARGO
ble, and the name and address of the TANKS TRANSPORTING LIQUEFIED
person performing the inspection or COMPRESSED GASES
test, in accordance with the applicable For internal self-closing stop valve leakage
specification. The manufacturer’s data testing, leakage is defined as any leakage
report, including a certificate(s) signed through the internal self-closing valve or to
by the manufacturer, and the author- the atmosphere that is detectable when the
ized design approval agency, as appli- valve is in the closed position. On some
valves this will require the closure of the
cable, indicating compliance with the
pressure by-pass port.
applicable specification of the portable
tank, and related papers certifying (a) Meter Creep Test.
that the portable tank was manufac-
1. An operator of a cargo tank equipped
tured and tested in accordance with with a calibrated meter may check the inter-
the applicable specification must be re- nal self-closing stop valve for leakage
tained in the files of the owner, or his through the valve seat using the meter as a
authorized agent, during the time that flow measurement indicator. The test is ini-
such portable tank is used for such tiated by starting the delivery process or re-
service, except for Specifications 56 turning product to the cargo tank through
and 57 portable tanks. the delivery system. This may be performed
at an idle. After the flow is established, the
(2) If the owner does not have the
operator closes the internal self-closing stop
manufacturer’s certificate required by valve and monitors the meter flow. The
the specification and the manufactur- meter flow must stop within 30 seconds with
er’s data report required by the ASME, no meter creep within 5 seconds after the
the owner may contact the National meter stops.
379
Pt. 180, App. C 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
2. On pump-actuated pressure differential tion combined with visual examination re-
internal self-closing stop valves, the valve veals any crack in the neck or shoulder of 2
must be closed with the remote actuator to thread lengths or more.
assure that it is functioning. On other types 6. Examination equipment records. Records of
of internal self-closing stop valves, the eddy current inspection equipment shall con-
valve(s) may be closed using either the nor- tain the following information:
mal valve control or the discharge control (i) Equipment manufacturer, model num-
system (e.g., remote). ber and serial number.
3. Rejection criteria: Any detectable meter (ii) Probe description and unique identi-
creep within the first five seconds after ini- fication (e.g., serial number, part number,
tial meter stoppage. etc.).
7. Eddy current examination reporting and
(b) Internal Self-Closing Stop Valve Test. record retention requirements. Daily records of
An operator of a cargo tank that is not eddy current examinations must be main-
equipped with a meter may check the inter- tained by the person who performs the re-
nal self-closing stop valve(s) for leakage as qualification until either the expiration of
follows: the requalification period or until the cyl-
1. The internal self-closing stop valve must inder is again requalified, whichever occurs
be in the closed position. first. These records shall be made available
2. All of the material in the downstream for inspection by a representative of the De-
piping must be evacuated, and the piping partment on request. Eddy current examina-
must be returned to atmospheric tempera- tion records shall contain the following in-
ture and pressure. formation:
3. The outlet must be monitored for 30 sec- (i) Specification of each standard reference
onds for detectable leakage. ring used to perform the eddy current exam-
4. Rejection criteria. Any detectable leak- ination.
age is considered unacceptable. (ii) DOT specification or exemption num-
[64 FR 28052, May 24, 1999] ber of the cylinder; manufacturer’s name or
symbol; owner’s name or symbol, if present;
APPENDIX C TO PART 180—EDDY CUR- serial number; and, date of manufacture.
(iii) Name of test operator performing the
RENT EXAMINATION WITH VISUAL IN-
eddy current examination.
SPECTION FOR DOT 3AL CYLINDERS (iv) Date of eddy current examination.
MANUFACTURED OF ALUMINUM (vi) Acceptance/condemnation results (e.g.,
ALLOY 6351–T6 pass or fail).
(vii) Retester identification number.
1. Examination Procedure. Each facility per- 8. Personnel Qualification Requirements.
forming eddy current examination with vis- Each person who performs eddy current and
ual inspection must develop, update, and visual examinations, and evaluates and cer-
maintain a written examination procedure tifies retest results must be certified by the
applicable to the test equipment it uses to employer that he/she has been properly
perform eddy current examinations. trained and tested in the eddy current and
2. Visual examinations. Visual examinations visual examination procedures.
of the neck and shoulder area of the cylinder 9. Training Records. A record of current
must be conducted in accordance with CGA training must be maintained for each em-
pamphlet C–6.1 (IBR; see § 171.7 of this sub- ployee who performs eddy current and visual
chapter). examinations in accordance with § 172.704(d).
3. Eddy Current Equipment. A reference ring
and probe for each DOT–3AL cylinder manu- [71 FR 51129, Aug. 29, 2006]
factured of aluminum alloy 6351–T6 to be in-
spected must be available at the examina- APPENDIX D TO PART 180—HAZARDOUS
tion facility. Eddy current equipment must MATERIALS CORROSIVE TO TANKS OR
be capable of accurately detecting the SERVICE EQUIPMENT
notches on the standard reference ring.
4. Eddy Current Reference Ring. The ref- This list contains materials identified ei-
erence ring must be produced to represent ther by proper shipping name in 49 CFR
each cylinder to be tested. The reference ring 172.101 or shipped under an ‘‘n.o.s.’’ shipping
must include artificial notches to simulate a description that, under certain conditions,
neck crack. The size of the artificial notch can corrode carbon steel tanks or service
(depth and length) must have a depth less equipment at a rate that may reduce the de-
than or equal to 1⁄3 of the wall thickness of sign level of reliability and safety of the
the neck and a length greater than or equal tank or equipment to an unsafe level before
to two threads. The standard reference must the next qualification. Materials identified
have a drawing that includes the diameter of on this list are considered corrosive to the
the ring, and depth and length of each notch. tank or service equipment.
5. Condemnation Criteria. A cylinder must While every effort was made to identify
be condemned if the eddy current examina- materials deemed corrosive to the tank or
380
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT Pt. 180, App. D
service equipment, owners and operators are Nitric acid
cautioned that this list may not be inclusive. Phenyl phosphorus dichloride
Tank car owners and operators are reminded Phenyl phosphorus thiodichloride
of their duty to ensure that no in-service Phosphoric acid solution
tank will deteriorate below the specified Phosphoric acid, solid
minimum thickness requirements in this Phosphorus trichloride (Phosphorus chloride)
subchapter. See § 180.509(f)(3). In addition, Sodium chlorate
FRA states a tank car owner must designate Sodium chlorate, aqueous solution
an internal coating or lining appropriately Sodium hydrosulfide
based on its knowledge of the chemical and Sulfur, molten
not rely simply on this list. Regarding future Sulfuric acid
thickness tests, this list may also be modi- Sulfuric acid, fuming
fied based on an analysis of the test results Sulfuric acid, spent
by the car owner, the Department of Trans- Zinc chloride, anhydrous
portation, or the Association of American Zinc chloride, solution
Railroads’ Tank Car Committee.
Materials Transported Under an ‘‘N.O.S.’’
Hazardous Materials Table Proper Shipping Description
Names (See § 172.101)
Benzoic acid (Environmentally hazardous
Acetic acid, glacial or Acetic acid solution substance, liquid, n.o.s., (RQ 5,000 pounds)
Aluminum chloride, solution Bisulphites, aqueous solution, n.o.s. (Ammo-
Arsenic acid, liquid nium bisulfide)
Arsenic acid, solid Black liquor (Corrosive liquids, n.o.s. (con-
Butyric acid tains sulfuric acid))
Ferric chloride, solution Calcium lignosulfonate (not regulated under
Fertilizer ammoniating solution (Nitrogen this subchapter)
fertilizer solution) Hexanoic acid (Corrosive liquids, n.o.s. (con-
Fluoroboric acid tains hexanoic acid))
Fluorosilicic acid Lignin liquor (not regulated under this sub-
Formaldehyde, solutions, flammable chapter)
Formaldehyde, solutions Lithium chloride (not regulated under this
Hydrobromic acid subchapter)
Hydrochloric acid Sodium polyacrylate (not regulated under
Hydrochloric acid solution this subchapter)
Hydrofluoric acid and Sulfuric acid mixtures Titanium sulfate solution (Corrosive liquids,
Hydrofluoric acid n.o.s. (contains sulfuric acid))
Hydrogen peroxide and peroxyacetic acid White liquor (not regulated under this sub-
mixtures, stabilized chapter)
Hydrogen, peroxide, aqueous solutions
[77 FR 37991, June 25, 2012]
Hydrogen peroxide, stabilized or Hydrogen
peroxide aqueous solutions, stabilized
Hypochlorite solutions PARTS 181–185 [RESERVED]
381
SUBCHAPTER D—PIPELINE SAFETY
PARTS 186–189 [RESERVED] Subpart D—Procedures for Adoption of

Rules
PART 190—PIPELINE SAFETY EN- 190.301 Scope.
FORCEMENT AND REGULATORY 190.303 Delegations.
PROCEDURES 190.305 Regulatory dockets.
190.307 Records.
190.309 Where to file petitions.
Subpart A—General 190.311 General.
Sec. 190.313 Initiation of rulemaking.
190.1 Purpose and scope. 190.315 Contents of notices of proposed rule-
making.
190.3 Definitions.
190.317 Participation by interested persons.
190.5 Service.
190.319 Petitions for extension of time to
190.7 Subpoenas; witness fees.
comment.
190.9 Petitions for finding or approval. 190.321 Contents of written comments.
190.11 Availability of informal guidance and 190.323 Consideration of comments received.
interpretive assistance. 190.325 Additional rulemaking proceedings.
190.327 Hearings.
Subpart B—Enforcement 190.329 Adoption of final rules.
190.201 Purpose and scope. 190.331 Petitions for rulemaking.
190.333 Processing of petition.
190.203 Inspections and investigations.
190.335 Petitions for reconsideration.
190.205 Warnings.
190.337 Proceedings on petitions for recon-
190.206 Amendment of plans or procedures.
sideration.
190.207 Notice of probable violation.
190.338 Appeals.
190.208 Response options.
190.339 Direct final rulemaking.
190.209 Case file. 190.341 Special permits.
190.210 Separation of functions. 190.343 Information made available to the
190.211 Hearing. public and request for protection of con-
190.212 Presiding official, powers, and du- fidential commercial information.
ties.
190.213 Final order. Subpart E—Cost Recovery for Design
190.215 Reserved. Reviews
COMPLIANCE ORDERS 190.401 Scope.
190.217 Compliance orders generally. 190.403 Applicability.
190.219 Consent order. 190.405 Notification.
190.407 Master Agreement.
CIVIL PENALTIES 190.409 Fee structure.
190.411 Procedures for billing and payment
190.221 Civil penalties generally.
of fee.
190.223 Maximum penalties.
190.225 Assessment considerations. AUTHORITY: 33 U.S.C. 1321(b); 49 U.S.C. 60101
190.227 Payment of penalty. et seq.
CRIMINAL PENALTIES SOURCE: 45 FR 20413, Mar. 27, 1980, unless

otherwise noted.
190.229–190.231 [Reserved]
EDITORIAL NOTE: Nomenclature changes to
SPECIFIC RELIEF part 190 appear at 78 FR 58908, Sept. 25, 2013.
190.233 Corrective action orders.
190.235 Injunctive action. Subpart A—General
190.236 Emergency orders.
190.237 Petitions for review. § 190.1 Purpose and scope.
190.239 Safety orders. (a) This part prescribes procedures
190.241 Finality. used by the Pipeline and Hazardous
190.243 Petitions for reconsideration. Materials Safety Administration in
carrying out duties regarding pipeline
Subpart C—Criminal Enforcement

safety under 49 U.S.C. 60101 et seq. (the
190.291 Criminal penalties generally. pipeline safety laws) and 33 U.S.C. 1321
190.293 Referral for prosecution. (the water pollution control laws).
383
§ 190.3 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(b) This subpart defines certain terms and Hazardous Materials Safety Ad-
and prescribes procedures that are ap- ministration, U.S. Department of
plicable to each proceeding described Transportation.
in this part. Operator means any owner or oper-
ator.
[45 FR 20413, Mar. 27, 1980, as amended by
Amdt. 190–6, 61 FR 18512, Apr. 26, 1996; 70 FR Person means any individual, firm,
11137, Mar. 8, 2005; Amdt. 190–16, 78 FR 58908, joint venture, partnership, corporation,
Sept. 25, 2013] association, State, municipality, coop-
erative association, or joint stock asso-
§ 190.3 Definitions. ciation, and includes any trustee, re-
As used in this part: ceiver, assignee, or personal represent-
Administrator means the Adminis- ative thereof.
trator, Pipeline and Hazardous Mate- Presiding Official means the person
rials Safety Administration or his or who conducts any hearing relating to
her delegate. civil penalty assessments, compliance
Associate Administrator means the As- orders, orders directing amendment,
sociate Administrator for Pipeline safety orders, or corrective action or-
Safety, or his or her delegate. ders and who has the duties and powers
Chief Counsel means the Chief Coun- set forth in § 190.212.
sel of PHMSA. Regional Director means the head of
Day means a 24-hour period ending at any one of the Regional Offices of the
11:59 p.m. Unless otherwise specified, a Office of Pipeline Safety, or a designee
day refers to a calendar day. appointed by the Regional Director.
Emergency order means a written Regional Offices are located in Tren-
order imposing restrictions, prohibi- ton, NJ (Eastern Region); Atlanta,
tions, or safety measures on affected Georgia (Southern Region); Kansas
entities. City, Missouri (Central Region); Hous-
Hearing means an informal con- ton, Texas (Southwest Region); and
ference or a proceeding for oral presen- Lakewood, Colorado (Western Region).
tation. Unless otherwise specifically Respondent means a person upon
prescribed in this part, the use of whom OPS has served an enforcement
‘‘hearing’’ is not intended to require a action described in this part.
hearing on the record in accordance PHMSA means the Pipeline and Haz-
with section 554 of title 5, U.S.C. ardous Materials Safety Administra-
Imminent hazard means the existence tion of the United States Department
of a condition relating to a gas or haz- of Transportation.
ardous liquid pipeline facility that pre- State means a State of the United
sents a substantial likelihood that States, the District of Columbia and
death, serious illness, severe personal the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico.
injury, or a substantial endangerment [Amdt. 190–6, 61 FR 18513, Apr. 26, 1996, as
to health, property, or the environ- amended at 68 FR 11749, Mar. 12, 2003; 70 FR
ment may occur before the reasonably 11137, Mar. 8, 2005; Amdt. 190–15, 74 FR 62505,
foreseeable completion date of a formal Nov. 30, 2009; Amdt. 190–16, 78 FR 58908, Sept.
administrative proceeding begun to 25, 2013; Amdt. 190–18, 81 FR 70985, Oct. 14,
lessen the risk of such death, illness, 2016; Amdt. 190–19, 82 FR 7995, Jan. 23, 2017]
injury or endangerment. EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 84 FR 52026, Oct.
New and novel technologies means any 1, 2019, § 190.3 was amended by revising the
products, designs, materials, testing, definitions of ‘‘Emergency order’’ and ‘‘Im-
construction, inspection, or oper- minent hazard’’ and adding the definition of
‘‘Formal hearing’’, effective Dec. 2, 2019. For
ational procedures that are not ad- the convenience of the user, the added and
dressed in 49 CFR parts 192, 193, or 195, revised text is set forth as follows:
due to technology or design advances
and innovation for new construction. § 190.3 Definitions.
Technologies that are addressed in con-
sensus standards that are incorporated * * * * *
by reference into parts 192, 193, and 195 Emergency order means a written order
are not ‘‘new or novel technologies.’’ issued in response to an imminent hazard

OPS means the Office of Pipeline imposing restrictions, prohibitions, or safety
Safety, which is part of the Pipeline measures on owners and operators of gas or
384
hazardous liquid pipeline facilities, without cludes reliable acknowledgement of actual
prior notice or an opportunity for a hearing. receipt.
Formal hearing means a formal review in
accordance with 5 U.S.C. 554, conducted by * * * * *
an administrative law judge.
§ 190.7 Subpoenas; witness fees.
* * * * * (a) The Administrator, Chief Counsel,
Imminent hazard means the existence of a or the official designated by the Ad-
condition relating to a gas or hazardous liq- ministrator to preside over a hearing
uid pipeline facility that presents a substan- convened in accordance with this part,
tial likelihood that death, serious illness, se- may sign and issue subpoenas individ-
vere personal injury, or a substantial ually on his or her own initiative at
endangerment to health, property, or the en- any time, including pursuant to an in-
vironment may occur before the reasonably spection or investigation, or upon re-
foreseeable completion date of a formal pro-
quest and adequate showing by a par-
ceeding begun to lessen the risk of such
death, illness, injury or endangerment. ticipant to an enforcement proceeding
that the information sought will mate-
rially advance the proceeding.
* * * * * (b) A subpoena may require the at-
tendance of a witness, or the produc-
§ 190.5 Service.
tion of documentary or other tangible
(a) Each order, notice, or other docu- evidence in the possession or under the
ment required to be served under this control of person served, or both.
part, with the exception of emergency (c) A subpoena may be served person-
orders under § 190.236, will be served ally by any person who is not an inter-
personally, by certified mail, overnight ested person and is not less than 18
courier, or electronic transmission by years of age, or by certified mail.
facsimile or other electronic means (d) Service of a subpoena upon the
that includes reliable acknowledge- person named in the subpoena is
ment of actual receipt. achieved by delivering a copy of the
(b) Service upon a person’s duly au- subpoena to the person and by paying
thorized representative or agent con- the fees for one day’s attendance and
stitutes service upon that person. mileage, as specified by paragraph (g)
(c) Service by certified mail or over- of this section. When a subpoena is
night courier is complete upon mail- issued at the instance of any officer or
ing. Service by electronic transmission agency of the United States, fees and
is complete upon transmission and ac- mileage need not be tendered at the
knowledgement of receipt. An official time of service. Delivery of a copy of a
receipt for the mailing from the U.S. subpoena and tender of the fees to a
Postal Service or overnight courier, or natural person may be made by hand-
a facsimile or other electronic trans- ing them to the person, leaving them
mission confirmation, constitutes at the person’s office with a person in
prima facie evidence of service. charge, leaving them at the person’s
residence with a person of suitable age
[45 FR 20413, Mar. 27, 1980, as amended at 73 and discretion residing there, by mail-
FR 16567, Mar. 28, 2008; Amdt. 190–16, 78 FR ing them by certified mail to the per-
58909, Sept. 25, 2013; Amdt. 190–18, 81 FR 70985, son at the last known address, or by
Oct. 14, 2016]
any method whereby actual notice is
EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 84 FR 52026, Oct. given to the person and the fees are
1, 2019, § 190.5 was amended by revising para- made available prior to the return
graph (a), effective Dec. 2, 2019. For the con- date.
venience of the user, the revised text is set (e) When the person to be served is
forth as follows:
not a natural person, delivery of a copy
§ 190.5 Service. of the subpoena and tender of the fees
may be achieved by handing them to a
(a) Each order, notice, or other document
required to be served under this part, will be designated agent or representative for
served personally, by certified mail, over- service, or to any officer, director, or

night courier, or electronic transmission by agent in charge of any office of the per-
facsimile or other electronic means that in- son, or by mailing them by certified
385
§ 190.9 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
mail to that agent or representative to appear and produce the subpoenaed

and the fees are made available prior to documents before the PHMSA, or both.
the return date. [45 FR 20413, Mar. 27, 1980, as amended by
(f) The original subpoena bearing a Amdt. 190–6, 61 FR 18513, Apr. 26, 1996; Amdt.
certificate of service shall be filed with 190–7, 63 FR 7722, Feb. 17, 1998; 70 FR 11137,
the official having responsibility for Mar. 8, 2005; Amdt. 190–16, 78 FR 58909, Sept.
the proceeding in connection with 25, 2013]
which the subpoena was issued.
(g) A subpoenaed witness shall be § 190.9 Petitions for finding or ap-
paid the same fees and mileage as proval.
would be paid to a witness in a pro- (a) In circumstances where a rule
ceeding in the district courts of the contained in parts 192, 193 and 195 of
United States. The witness fees and this chapter authorizes the Adminis-
mileage shall be paid by the person at trator to make a finding or approval,
whose instance the subpoena was an operator may petition the Adminis-
issued. trator for such a finding or approval.
(h) Notwithstanding the provisions of (b) Each petition must refer to the
paragraph (g) of this section, and upon rule authorizing the action sought and
request, the witness fees and mileage contain information or arguments that
may be paid by the PHMSA if the offi- justify the action. Unless otherwise
cial who issued the subpoena deter- specified, no public proceeding is held
mines on the basis of good cause on a petition before it is granted or de-
shown, that: nied. After a petition is received, the
(1) The presence of the subpoenaed Administrator or participating state
witness will materially advance the agency notifies the petitioner of the
proceeding; and disposition of the petition or, if the re-
(2) The person at whose instance the quest requires more extensive consider-
subpoena was issued would suffer a se- ation or additional information or
rious hardship if required to pay the comments are requested and delay is
witness fees and mileage. expected, of the date by which action
(i) Any person to whom a subpoena is will be taken.
directed may, prior to the time speci- (1) For operators seeking a finding or
fied therein for compliance, but in no approval involving intrastate pipeline
event more than 10 days after the date transportation, petitions must be sent
of service of such subpoena, apply to to:
the official who issued the subpoena, or (i) The State agency certified to par-
if the person is unavailable, to the Ad- ticipate under 49 U.S.C. 60105.
ministrator to quash or modify the (ii) Where there is no state agency
subpoena. The application shall con- certified to participate, the Adminis-
tain a brief statement of the reasons trator, Pipeline and Hazardous Mate-
relied upon in support of the action rials Safety Administration, 1200 New
sought therein. The Administrator, or Jersey Avenue, SE, Washington, DC
this issuing official, as the case may 20590.
be, may: (2) For operators seeking a finding or
(1) Deny the application; approval involving interstate pipeline
(2) Quash or modify the subpoena; or transportation, petitions must be sent
(3) Condition a grant or denial of the to the Administrator, Pipeline and
application to quash or modify the sub- Hazardous Materials Safety Adminis-
poena upon the satisfaction of certain tration, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE,
just and reasonable requirements. The Washington, DC 20590.
denial may be summary. (c) All petitions must be received at
(j) Upon refusal to obey a subpoena least 90 days prior to the date by which
served upon any person under the pro- the operator requests the finding or ap-
visions of this section, the PHMSA proval to be made.
may request the Attorney General to (d) The Administrator will make all
seek the aid of the U. S. District Court findings or approvals of petitions initi-
for any District in which the person is ated under this section. A participating
found to compel that person, after no- state agency receiving petitions initi-
tice, to appear and give testimony, or ated under this section shall provide
386
the Administrator a written rec- for achieving and maintaining pipeline

ommendation as to the disposition of safety and compliance under 49 U.S.C.
any petition received by them. Where 60101 et seq., 33 U.S.C. 1321(j), and any
the Administrator does not reverse or regulation or order issued thereunder.
modify a recommendation made by a It also prescribes the procedures gov-
state agency within 10 business days of erning the exercise of that authority
its receipt, the recommended disposi- and the imposition of those sanctions.
tion shall constitute the Administra- (b) A person who is the subject of ac-
tor’s decision on the petition. tion pursuant to this subpart may be
represented by legal counsel at all
[Amdt. 190–5, 59 FR 17280, Apr. 12, 1994, as
amended by Amdt. 190–6, 61 FR 18513, Apr. 26, stages of the proceeding.
1996; 70 FR 11137, Mar. 8, 2005; 73 FR 16566, [45 FR 20413, Mar. 27, 1980, as amended by
Mar. 28, 2008] Amdt. 190–6, 61 FR 18513, Apr. 26, 1996; Amdt.
190–16, 78 FR 58909, Sept. 25, 2013]
§ 190.11 Availability of informal guid-
ance and interpretive assistance. § 190.203 Inspections and investiga-
(a) Availability of telephonic and Inter- tions.
net assistance. PHMSA has established (a) Officers, employees, or agents au-
a Web site and a telephone line to OPS thorized by the Associate Adminis-
headquarters where information on and trator for Pipeline Safety, PHMSA,
advice about compliance with the pipe- upon presenting appropriate creden-
line safety regulations specified in 49 tials, are authorized to enter upon, in-
CFR parts 190–199 is available. The Web spect, and examine, at reasonable
site and telephone line are staffed by times and in a reasonable manner, the
personnel from PHMSA’s OPS from 9:00 records and properties of persons to the
a.m. through 5:00 p.m., Eastern Time, extent such records and properties are
Monday through Friday, with the ex- relevant to determining the compli-
ception of Federal holidays. When the ance of such persons with the require-
lines are not staffed, individuals may ments of 49 U.S.C. 60101 et seq., or regu-
leave a recorded voicemail message or lations or orders issued thereunder.
post a message on the OPS Web site. (b) Inspections are ordinarily con-
The telephone number for the OPS in- ducted pursuant to one of the fol-
formation line is (202) 366–4595 and the lowing:
OPS Web site can be accessed via the (1) Routine scheduling by the Re-
Internet at http://phmsa.dot.gov/pipeline. gional Director of the Region in which
(b) Availability of written interpreta- the facility is located;
tions. A written regulatory interpreta- (2) A complaint received from a mem-
tion, response to a question, or an ber of the public;
opinion concerning a pipeline safety (3) Information obtained from a pre-
issue may be obtained by submitting a vious inspection;
written request to the Office of Pipe- (4) Report from a State Agency par-
line Safety (PHP–30), PHMSA, U.S. De- ticipating in the Federal Program
partment of Transportation, 1200 New under 49 U.S.C. 60105;
Jersey Avenue SE., Washington, DC (5) Pipeline accident or incident; or
20590–0001. The requestor must include (6) Whenever deemed appropriate by
his or her return address and should the Associate Administrator.
also include a daytime telephone num- (c) If the Associate Administrator or
ber. Written requests should be sub- Regional Director believes that further
mitted at least 120 days before the time information is needed to determine ap-
the requestor needs a response. propriate action, the Associate Admin-
istrator or Regional Director may no-
[Amdt. 190–16, 78 FR 58909, Sept. 25, 2013] tify the pipeline operator in writing
that the operator is required to provide
Subpart B—Enforcement specific information within 30 days
from the time the notification is re-
§ 190.201 Purpose and scope. ceived by the operator, unless other-
(a) This subpart describes the en- wise specified in the notification. The
forcement authority and sanctions ex- notification must provide a reasonable
ercised by the Associate Administrator description of the specific information
387
§ 190.205 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
required. An operator may request an U.S.C. 1321(j), or any regulation or

extension of time to respond by pro- order issued thereunder has occurred,
viding a written justification as to why the Associate Administrator or a Re-
such an extension is necessary and pro- gional Director may issue a written
posing an alternative submission date. warning notifying the operator of the
A request for an extension may ask for probable violation and advising the op-
the deadline to be stayed while the ex- erator to correct it or be subject to po-
tension is considered. General state- tential enforcement action in the fu-
ments of hardship are not acceptable ture. The operator may submit a re-
bases for requesting an extension. sponse to a warning, but is not required
(d) To the extent necessary to carry to. An adjudication under this subpart
out the responsibilities under 49 U.S.C. to determine whether a violation oc-
60101 et seq., the Administrator, or the curred is not conducted for warnings.
Associate Administrator, may require
testing of portions of pipeline facilities [Amdt. 190–16, 78 FR 58909, Sept. 25, 2013]
that have been involved in, or affected
by, an accident. However, before exer- § 190.206 Amendment of plans or pro-
cising this authority, the Adminis- cedures.
trator, or the Associate Administrator, (a) A Regional Director begins a pro-
shall make every effort to negotiate a ceeding to determine whether an opera-
mutually acceptable plan with the tor’s plans or procedures required
owner of those facilities and, where ap- under parts 192, 193, 195, and 199 of this
propriate, the National Transportation subchapter are inadequate to assure
Safety Board for performing the test- safe operation of a pipeline facility by
ing. issuing a notice of amendment. The no-
(e) If a representative of the U.S. De- tice will specify the alleged inadequa-
partment of Transportation inspects or cies and the proposed revisions of the
investigates an accident or incident in- plans or procedures and provide an op-
volving a pipeline facility, the operator portunity to respond. The notice will
must make available to the representa- allow the operator 30 days following re-
tive all records and information that ceipt of the notice to submit written
pertain to the event in any way, in- comments, revised procedures, or a re-
cluding integrity management plans quest for a hearing under § 190.211.
and test results. The operator must (b) After considering all material
provide all reasonable assistance in the presented in writing or at the hearing,
investigation. Any person who ob- if applicable, the Associate Adminis-
structs an inspection or investigation trator determines whether the plans or
by taking actions that were known or procedures are inadequate as alleged.
reasonably should have been known to The Associate Administrator issues an
prevent, hinder, or impede an inves- order directing amendment of the plans
tigation without good cause will be or procedures if they are inadequate, or
subject to administrative civil pen- withdraws the notice if they are not. In
alties under this subpart. determining the adequacy of an opera-
(f) When OPS determines that the in-
tor’s plans or procedures, the Associate
formation obtained from an inspection
Administrator may consider:
or from other appropriate sources war-
(1) Relevant pipeline safety data;
rants further action, OPS may initiate
one or more of the enforcement pro- (2) Whether the plans or procedures
ceedings prescribed in this subpart. are appropriate for the particular type
of pipeline transportation or facility,
[45 FR 20413, Mar. 27, 1980, as amended by and for the location of the facility;
Amdt. 190–3, 56 FR 31090, July 9, 1991; Amdt.
(3) The reasonableness of the plans or
190–6, 61 FR 18513, Apr. 26, 1996; Amdt. 190–7,
61 FR 27792, June 3, 1996; Amdt. 190–7, 63 FR procedures; and
7722, Feb. 17, 1998; 70 FR 11137, Mar. 8, 2005; (4) The extent to which the plans or
Amdt. 190–16, 78 FR 58909, Sept. 25, 2013] procedures contribute to public safety.
(c) An order directing amendment of
§ 190.205 Warnings. an operator’s plans or procedures pre-

Upon determining that a probable scribed in this section may be in addi-
violation of 49 U.S.C. 60101 et seq., 33 tion to, or in conjunction with, other
388
appropriate enforcement actions pre- authorizes the Associate Administrator

scribed in this subpart. to make a finding of violation and to
issue a final order under § 190.213;
[Amdt. 190–16, 78 FR 58910, Sept. 25, 2013]
(2) If the respondent is not contesting
§ 190.207 Notice of probable violation. an allegation of probable violation but
wishes to submit a written expla-
(a) Except as otherwise provided by nation, information, or other materials
this subpart, a Regional Director be- the respondent believes may warrant
gins an enforcement proceeding by mitigation or elimination of the pro-
serving a notice of probable violation posed civil penalty, the respondent
on a person charging that person with may submit such materials. This au-
a probable violation of 49 U.S.C. 60101 et thorizes the Associate Administrator
seq., 33 U.S.C. 1321(j), or any regulation to make a finding of violation and to
or order issued thereunder. issue a final order under § 190.213;
(b) A notice of probable violation (3) If the respondent is contesting one
issued under this section shall include: or more allegations of probable viola-
(1) Statement of the provisions of the tion but is not requesting a hearing
laws, regulations or orders which the under § 190.211, the respondent may sub-
respondent is alleged to have violated mit a written response in answer to the
and a statement of the evidence upon allegations; or
which the allegations are based; (4) The respondent may request a
(2) Notice of response options avail- hearing under § 190.211.
able to the respondent under § 190.208; (b) When the notice contains a pro-
(3) If a civil penalty is proposed under posed compliance order—
§ 190.221, the amount of the proposed (1) If the respondent is not contesting
civil penalty and the maximum civil an allegation of probable violation,
penalty for which respondent is liable agree to the proposed compliance
under law; and order. This authorizes the Associate
(4) If a compliance order is proposed Administrator to make a finding of
under § 190.217, a statement of the re- violation and to issue a final order
medial action being sought in the form under § 190.213;
of a proposed compliance order. (2) Request the execution of a con-
(c) The Regional Director may amend sent order under § 190.219;
a notice of probable violation at any (3) If the respondent is contesting one
time prior to issuance of a final order or more of the allegations of probable
under § 190.213. If an amendment in- violation or compliance terms, but is
cludes any new material allegations of not requesting a hearing under § 190.211,
fact, proposes an increased civil pen- the respondent may object to the pro-
alty amount, or proposes new or addi- posed compliance order and submit
tional remedial action under § 190.217, written explanations, information, or
the respondent will have the oppor- other materials in answer to the alle-
tunity to respond under § 190.208. gations in the notice of probable viola-
[45 FR 20413, Mar. 27, 1980, as amended by tion; or
Amdt. 190–6, 61 FR 18513, Apr. 26, 1996; Amdt. (4) The respondent may request a
190–16, 78 FR 58910, Sept. 25, 2013] hearing under § 190.211.
(c) Before or after responding in ac-
§ 190.208 Response options. cordance with paragraph (a) of this sec-
Within 30 days of receipt of a notice tion or, when applicable paragraph (b)
of probable violation, the respondent of this section, the respondent may re-
must answer the Regional Director quest a copy of the violation report
who issued the notice in the following from the Regional Director as set forth
manner: in § 190.209. The Regional Director will
(a) When the notice contains a pro- provide the violation report to the re-
posed civil penalty— spondent within five business days of
(1) If the respondent is not contesting receiving a request.
an allegation of probable violation, pay (d) Failure to respond in accordance
the proposed civil penalty as provided with paragraph (a) of this section or,
in § 190.227 and advise the Regional Di- when applicable paragraph (b) of this
rector of the payment. The payment section, constitutes a waiver of the
389
§ 190.209 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
right to contest the allegations in the § 190.210 Separation of functions.

notice of probable violation and au- (a) General. An agency employee who
thorizes the Associate Administrator, assists in the investigation or prosecu-
without further notice to the respond- tion of an enforcement case may not
ent, to find the facts as alleged in the participate in the decision of that case
notice of probable violation and to or a factually related one, but may par-
issue a final order under § 190.213. ticipate as a witness or counsel at a
(e) All materials submitted by opera- hearing as set forth in this subpart.
tors in response to enforcement actions Likewise, an agency employee who pre-
may be placed on publicly accessible pares a decision in an enforcement case
Web sites. A respondent seeking con- may not have served in an investiga-
fidential treatment under 5 U.S.C. tive or prosecutorial capacity in that
552(b) for any portion of its responsive case or a factually related one.
materials must provide a second copy (b) Prohibition on ex parte communica-
of such materials along with the com- tions. A party to an enforcement pro-
plete original document. A respondent ceeding, including the respondent, its
may redact the portions it believes representative, or an agency employee
qualify for confidential treatment in having served in an investigative or
the second copy but must provide a prosecutorial capacity in the pro-
ceeding, may not communicate pri-
written explanation for each redaction.
vately with the Associate Adminis-
[Amdt. 190–16, 78 FR 58910, Sept. 25, 2013] trator, Presiding Official, or attorney
drafting the recommended decision
§ 190.209 Case file. concerning information that is rel-
(a) The case file, as defined in this evant to the questions to be decided in
section, is available to the respondent the proceeding. A party may commu-
in all enforcement proceedings con- nicate with the Presiding Official re-
ducted under this subpart. garding administrative or procedural
issues, such as for scheduling a hear-
(b) The case file of an enforcement
ing.
proceeding consists of the following:
(1) In cases commenced under [Amdt. 190–16, 78 FR 58911, Sept. 25, 2013]
§ 190.206, the notice of amendment and
§ 190.211 Hearing.
the relevant procedures;
(2) In cases commenced under (a) General. This section applies to
§ 190.207, the notice of probable viola- hearings conducted under this part re-
tion and the violation report; lating to civil penalty assessments,
(3) In cases commenced under compliance orders, orders directing
amendment, safety orders, and correc-
§ 190.233, the corrective action order or
tive action orders. The Presiding Offi-
notice of proposed corrective action
cial will convene hearings conducted
order and the data report, if one is pre- under this section.
pared; (b) Hearing request and statement of
(4) In cases commenced under issues. A request for a hearing must be
§ 190.239, the notice of proposed safety accompanied by a statement of the
order; issues that the respondent intends to
(5) Any documents and other mate- raise at the hearing. The issues may re-
rial submitted by the respondent in relate to the allegations in the notice,
sponse to the enforcement action; the proposed corrective action, or the
(6) In cases involving a hearing, any proposed civil penalty amount. A re-
material submitted during and after spondent’s failure to specify an issue
the hearing as set forth in § 190.211; and may result in waiver of the respond-
(7) The Regional Director’s written ent’s right to raise that issue at the
evaluation of response material sub- hearing. The respondent’s request must
mitted by the respondent and rec- also indicate whether or not the re-
ommendation for final action, if one is spondent will be represented by counsel
prepared. at the hearing. The respondent may

withdraw a request for a hearing in
[Amdt. 190–16, 78 FR 58910, Sept. 25, 2013] writing and provide a written response.
390
(c) Telephonic and in-person hearings. (h) Preparation of decision. After con-
A telephone hearing will be held if the sideration of the case file, the Pre-
amount of the proposed civil penalty or siding Official prepares a recommended
the cost of the proposed corrective ac- decision in the case, which is then for-
tion is less than $25,000, unless the re- warded to the Associate Administrator
spondent or OPS submits a written re- for issuance of a final order.
quest for an in-person hearing. In-per-
son hearings will normally be held at [Amdt. 190–16, 78 FR 58911, Sept. 25, 2013]
the office of the appropriate OPS Re-
gion. Hearings may be held by video § 190.212 Presiding official, powers,
and duties.
teleconference if the necessary equip-
ment is available to all parties. (a) General. The Presiding Official for
(d) Pre-hearing submissions. If OPS or a hearing conducted under § 190.211 is
the respondent intends to introduce an attorney on the staff of the Deputy
material, including records, docu- Chief Counsel who is not engaged in
ments, and other exhibits not already any investigative or prosecutorial
in the case file, the material must be functions, such as the issuance of no-
submitted to the Presiding Official and tices under this subpart. If the des-
the other party at least 10 days prior to ignated Presiding Official is unavail-
the date of the hearing, unless the Pre- able, the Deputy Chief Counsel may
siding Official sets a different deadline delegate the powers and duties speci-
or waives the deadline for good cause. fied in this section to another attorney
(e) Conduct of the hearing. The hear- in the Office of Chief Counsel who is
ing is conducted informally without
not engaged in any investigative or
strict adherence to rules of evidence.
prosecutorial functions under this sub-
The Presiding Official regulates the
part.
course of the hearing and gives each
party an opportunity to offer facts, (b) Time and place of the hearing. The
statements, explanations, documents, Presiding Official will set the date,
testimony or other evidence that is rel- time and location of the hearing. To
evant and material to the issues under the extent practicable, the Presiding
consideration. The parties may call Official will accommodate the parties’
witnesses on their own behalf and ex- schedules when setting the hearing.
amine the evidence and witnesses pre- Reasonable notice of the hearing will
sented by the other party. After the be provided to all parties.
evidence in the case has been pre- (c) Powers and duties of Presiding Offi-
sented, the Presiding Official will per- cial. The Presiding Official will conduct
mit reasonable discussion of the issues a fair and impartial hearing and take
under consideration. all action necessary to avoid delay in
(f) Written transcripts. If a respondent the disposition of the proceeding and
elects to transcribe a hearing, the re- maintain order. The Presiding Official
spondent must make arrangements has all powers necessary to achieve
with a court reporter at cost to the re- those ends, including, but not limited
spondent and submit a complete copy to the power to:
of the transcript for the case file. The (1) Regulate the course of the hearing
respondent must notify the Presiding and conduct of the parties and their
Official in advance if it intends to tran- counsel;
scribe a hearing.
(2) Receive evidence and inquire into
(g) Post-hearing submission. The re-
the relevant and material facts;
spondent and OPS may request an op-
portunity to submit further written (3) Require the submission of docu-
material after the hearing for inclusion ments and other information;
in the record. The Presiding Official (4) Direct that documents or briefs
will allow a reasonable time for the relate to issues raised during the
submission of the material and will course of the hearing;
specify the submission date. If the ma- (5) Set the date for filing documents,
terial is not submitted within the time briefs, and other items;
prescribed, the case will proceed to (6) Prepare a recommended decision;
final action without the material. and
391
§ 190.213 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(7) Exercise the authority necessary and for the issuance of an order direct-
to carry out the responsibilities of the ing compliance.
Presiding Official under this subpart. [Amdt. 190–16, 78 FR 58912, Sept. 25, 2013]
[Amdt. 190–16, 78 FR 58911, Sept. 25, 2013]
§ 190.219 Consent order.
§ 190.213 Final order. (a) At any time prior to the issuance
(a) In an enforcement proceeding of a compliance order under § 190.217, a
commenced under § 190.207, an attorney corrective action order under § 190.233,
from the Office of Chief Counsel pre- or a safety order under § 190.239, the Re-
pares a recommended decision after ex- gional Director and the respondent
piration of the 30-day response period may agree to resolve the case by execu-
prescribed in § 190.208. If a hearing is tion of a consent agreement and order,
held, the Presiding Official prepares which may be jointly executed by the
the recommended decision as set forth parties and issued by the Associate Ad-
in § 190.211. The recommended decision ministrator. Upon execution, the con-
is forwarded to the Associate Adminis- sent order is considered a final order
trator who considers the case file and under § 190.213.
(b) A consent order executed under
issues a final order. The final order in-
paragraph (a) of this section shall in-
cludes—
clude:
(1) A statement of findings and deter- (1) An admission by the respondent of
minations on all material issues, in- all jurisdictional facts;
cluding a determination as to whether (2) An express waiver of further pro-
each alleged violation has been proved; cedural steps and of all right to seek
(2) If a civil penalty is assessed, the judicial review or otherwise challenge
amount of the penalty and the proce- or contest the validity of that order;
dures for payment of the penalty, pro- (3) An acknowledgement that the no-
vided that the assessed civil penalty tice of probable violation may be used
may not exceed the penalty proposed in to construe the terms of the consent
the notice of probable violation; and order; and
(3) If a compliance order is issued, a (4) A statement of the actions re-
statement of the actions required to be quired of the respondent and the time
taken by the respondent and the time by which such actions shall be accom-
by which such actions must be accomplished.
plished. (c) Prior to the execution of a con-
(b) In cases where a substantial delay sent agreement and order arising out of
is expected in the issuance of a final a corrective action order under
order, notice of that fact and the date § 190.233, the Associate Administrator
by which it is expected that action will will notify any appropriate State offi-
be taken is provided to the respondent cial in accordance with 49 U.S.C.
upon request and whenever practicable. 60112(c).
[Amdt. 190–16, 78 FR 58911, Sept. 25, 2013] [45 FR 20413, Mar. 27, 1980, as amended by
Amdt. 190–6, 61 FR 18514, Apr. 26, 1996; Amdt.
§ 190.215 [Reserved] 190–16, 78 FR 58912, Sept. 25, 2013]
COMPLIANCE ORDERS CIVIL PENALTIES
§ 190.217 Compliance orders generally. § 190.221 Civil penalties generally.

When a Regional Director has reason
When a Regional Director has reason
to believe that a person has committed
to believe that a person is engaging in
an act violating 49 U.S.C. 60101 et seq.,
conduct that violates 49 U.S.C. 60101 et
33 U.S.C. 1321(j), or any regulation or
seq., 33 U.S.C. 1321(j), or any regulation
order issued thereunder, the Regional
or order issued thereunder, and if the
Director may initiate proceedings
nature of the violation and the public
under §§ 190.207 through 190.213 to deter-
interest so warrant, the Regional Di-
mine the nature and extent of the vio-

rector may initiate proceedings under
lations and appropriate civil penalty.
§§ 190.207 through 190.213 to determine
the nature and extent of the violations [Amdt. 190–16, 78 FR 58912, Sept. 25, 2013]
392
§ 190.223 Maximum penalties. (5) The effect on the respondent’s

(a) Any person found to have violated ability to continue in business; and
(b) The Associate Administrator may
a provision of 49 U.S.C. 60101, et seq., or
consider:
any regulation or order issued there-
(1) The economic benefit gained from
under, is subject to an administrative
violation, if readily ascertainable,
civil penalty not to exceed $218,647 for
without any reduction because of sub-
each violation for each day the viola-
sequent damages; and
tion continues, with a maximum ad-
(2) Such other matters as justice may
ministrative civil penalty not to ex-
require.
ceed $2,186,465 for any related series of
violations. [Amdt. 190–16, 78 FR 58912, Sept. 25, 2013]
(b) Any person found to have violated
a provision of 33 U.S.C. 1321(j), or any § 190.227 Payment of penalty.
regulation or order issued thereunder, (a) Except for payments exceeding
is subject to an administrative civil $10,000, payment of a civil penalty pro-
penalty under 33 U.S.C. 1321(b)(6), as posed or assessed under this subpart
adjusted by 40 CFR 19.4. may be made by certified check or
(c) Any person found to have violated money order (containing the CPF Num-
any standard or order under 49 U.S.C. ber for the case), payable to ‘‘U.S. De-
60103 is subject to an administrative partment of Transportation,’’ to the
civil penalty not to exceed $79,875, Federal Aviation Administration, Mike
which may be in addition to other pen- Monroney Aeronautical Center, Finan-
alties to which such person may be cial Operations Division (AMZ–341),
subject under paragraph (a) of this sec- P.O. Box 25770, Oklahoma City, OK
tion. 73125, or by wire transfer through the
(d) Any person who is determined to Federal Reserve Communications Sys-
have violated any standard or order tem (Fedwire) to the account of the
under 49 U.S.C. 60129 is subject to an U.S. Treasury, or via https://
administrative civil penalty not to ex- www.pay.gov. Payments exceeding
ceed $1,270, which may be in addition to $10,000 must be made by wire transfer.
other penalties to which such person (b) Payment of a civil penalty as-
may be subject under paragraph (a) of sessed in a final order issued under
this section. § 190.213 or affirmed in a decision on a
(e) Separate penalties for violating a petition for reconsideration must be
regulation prescribed under this sub- made within 20 days after receipt of the
chapter and for violating an order final order or decision. Failure to do so
issued under §§ 190.206, 190.213, 190.233, will result in the initiation of collec-
or 190.239 may not be imposed under tion action, including the accrual of in-
this section if both violations are based terest and penalties, in accordance
on the same act. with 31 U.S.C. 3717 and 49 CFR part 89.
[Amdt. 190–16, 78 FR 58912, Sept. 25, 2013, as [Amdt. 190–7, 61 FR 27792, June 3, 1996, as
amended at 81 FR 42566, June 30, 2016; Amdt. amended at 70 FR 11138, Mar. 8, 2005; 73 FR
190–17, 82 FR 19328, Apr. 27, 2017; 84 FR 37071, 16567, Mar. 28, 2008; Amdt. 190–16, 78 FR 58912,
July 31, 2019] Sept. 25, 2013]
§ 190.225 Assessment considerations. §§ 190.229–190.231 [Reserved]
In determining the amount of a civil
penalty under this part, SPECIFIC RELIEF
(a) The Associate Administrator will
consider: § 190.233 Corrective action orders.
(1) The nature, circumstances and (a) Generally. Except as provided by
gravity of the violation, including ad- paragraph (b) of this section, if the As-
verse impact on the environment; sociate Administrator finds, after rea-
(2) The degree of the respondent’s sonable notice and opportunity for
culpability; hearing in accord with paragraph (c) of
(3) The respondent’s history of prior this section, a particular pipeline facil-
offenses; ity is or would be hazardous to life,

(4) Any good faith by the respondent property, or the environment, the As-
in attempting to achieve compliance; sociate Administrator may issue an
393
§ 190.233 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
order pursuant to this section requir- respondent may request a copy of the
ing the operator of the facility to take case file as set forth in § 190.209.
corrective action. Corrective action (4) A hearing under this section is
may include suspended or restricted conducted pursuant to § 190.211. The
use of the facility, physical inspection, hearing should be held within 15 days
testing, repair, replacement, or other of receipt of the respondent’s request
appropriate action. for a hearing.
(b) Waiver of notice and expedited re- (5) After conclusion of a hearing
view. The Associate Administrator may under this section, the Presiding Offi-
waive the requirement for notice and cial submits a recommended decision
opportunity for hearing under para- to the Associate Administrator as to
graph (a) of this section before issuing whether or not the facility is or would
an order whenever the Associate Ad- be hazardous to life, property, or the
ministrator determines that the failure environment, and if necessary, requir-
to do so would result in the likelihood ing expeditious corrective action. If a
of serious harm to life, property, or the notice or order is contested in writing
environment. When an order is issued without a hearing, an attorney from
under this paragraph, a respondent the Office of Chief Counsel prepares the
that contests the order may obtain ex- recommended decision. The rec-
pedited review of the order either by ommended decision should be sub-
answering in writing to the order with- mitted to the Associate Administrator
in 10 days of receipt or requesting a within five business days after conclu-
hearing under § 190.211 to be held as sion of the hearing or after receipt of
soon as practicable in accordance with the respondent’s written objection if no
paragraph (c)(2) of this section. For hearing is held. Upon receipt of the rec-
purposes of this section, the term ‘‘ex- ommendation, the Associate Adminis-
pedited review’’ is defined as the proc- trator will proceed in accordance with
ess for making a prompt determination paragraphs (d) through (h) of this sec-
of whether the order should remain in tion. If the Associate Administrator
effect or be amended or terminated. finds the facility is or would be haz-
The expedited review of an order issued ardous to life, property, or the environ-
under this paragraph will be complete ment, the Associate Administrator
upon issuance of such determination. issues a corrective action order in ac-
(c) Notice and hearing: cordance with this section, or confirms
(1) Written notice that OPS intends (or amends) the corrective action order
to issue an order under this section issued under paragraph (b) of this sec-
will be served upon the owner or oper- tion. If the Associate Administrator
ator of an alleged hazardous facility in does not find the facility is or would be
accordance with § 190.5. The notice hazardous to life, property, or the envi-
must allege the existence of a haz- ronment, the Associate Administrator
ardous facility and state the facts and withdraws the notice or terminates the
circumstances supporting the issuance order issued under paragraph (b) of this
of a corrective action order. The notice section, and promptly notifies the op-
must provide the owner or operator erator in writing by service as pre-
with an opportunity to respond within scribed in § 190.5.
10 days of receipt. (d) The Associate Administrator may
(2) An owner or operator that elects find a pipeline facility to be hazardous
to exercise its opportunity for a hear- under paragraph (a) of this section:
ing under this section must notify the (1) If under the facts and cir-
Associate Administrator of that elec- cumstances the Associate Adminis-
tion in writing within 10 days of re- trator determines the particular facil-
ceipt of the notice provided under para- ity is hazardous to life, property, or
graph (c)(1) of this section, or the order the environment; or
under paragraph (b) of this section (2) If the pipeline facility or a compo-
when applicable. The absence of such nent thereof has been constructed or
written notification waives an owner operated with any equipment, mate-
or operator’s opportunity for a hearing. rial, or technique which the Associate

(3) At any time after issuance of a Administrator determines is hazardous
notice or order under this section, the to life, property, or the environment,
394
unless the operator involved dem- able at a particular time and location
onstrates to the satisfaction of the As- after issuance of the order.
sociate Administrator that, under the (g) The Associate Administrator will
particular facts and circumstances in- terminate a corrective action order
volved, such equipment, material, or whenever the Associate Administrator
technique is not hazardous. determines that the facility is no
(e) In making a determination under longer hazardous to life, property, or
paragraph (d) of this section, the Asso- the environment. If appropriate, how-
ciate Administrator shall consider, if ever, a notice of probable violation
relevant: may be issued under § 190.207.
(1) The characteristics of the pipe (h) At any time after a corrective ac-
and other equipment used in the pipe- tion order issued under this section has
line facility involved, including its age, become effective, the Associate Admin-
manufacturer, physical properties (in- istrator may request the Attorney
cluding its resistance to corrosion and General to bring an action for appro-
deterioration), and the method of its priate relief in accordance with
manufacture, construction or assem- § 190.235.
bly; (i) Upon petition by the Attorney
(2) The nature of the materials trans- General, the District Courts of the
ported by such facility (including their United States shall have jurisdiction to
corrosive and deteriorative qualities), enforce orders issued under this section
the sequence in which such materials by appropriate means.
are transported, and the pressure re- [70 FR 11138, Mar. 8, 2005, as amended by
quired for such transportation; Amdt. 190–16, 78 FR 58912, Sept. 25, 2013]
(3) The characteristics of the geo-
graphical areas in which the pipeline § 190.235 Civil actions generally.
facility is located, in particular the cli- Whenever it appears to the Associate
matic and geologic conditions (includ- Administrator that a person has en-
ing soil characteristics) associated gaged, is engaged, or is about to engage
with such areas, and the population in any act or practice constituting a
density and population and growth pat- violation of any provision of 49 U.S.C.
terns of such areas; 60101 et seq., or any regulations issued
(4) Any recommendation of the Na- thereunder, the Administrator, or the
tional Transportation Safety Board person to whom the authority has been
issued in connection with any inves- delegated, may request the Attorney
tigation conducted by the Board; and General to bring an action in the ap-
(5) Such other factors as the Asso- propriate U.S. District Court for such
ciate Administrator may consider ap- relief as is necessary or appropriate, in-
propriate. cluding mandatory or prohibitive in-
(f) A corrective action order shall junctive relief, interim equitable relief,
contain the following information: civil penalties, and punitive damages
(1) A finding that the pipeline facility as provided under 49 U.S.C. 60120 and 49
is or would be hazardous to life, prop- U.S.C. 5123.
erty, or the environment. [70 FR 11139, Mar. 8, 2005]
(2) The relevant facts which form the
basis of that finding. § 190.236 Emergency orders.
(3) The legal basis for the order. (a) Determination of imminent hazard.
(4) The nature and description of any When the Administrator determines
particular corrective action required of that a violation of a provision of the
the respondent. Federal pipeline safety laws, or a regu-
(5) The date by which the required lation or order prescribed under those
corrective action must be taken or laws, an unsafe condition or practice,
completed and, where appropriate, the or a combination of unsafe conditions
duration of the order. and practices, constitutes or is causing
(6) If the opportunity for a hearing an imminent hazard, as defined in
was waived pursuant to paragraph (b) § 190.3, the Administrator may issue or
of this section, a statement that an op- impose an emergency order, without
portunity for a hearing will be avail- advance notice or an opportunity for a
395
sect;thnsp;190.236, Nt. 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
hearing. The basis for any action taken § 190.236 Emergency orders: Procedures for
under this section will be set forth in issuance and rescision.
writing that describes: (a) Determination of imminent hazard. When
the Administrator determines that an unsafe
(1) The violation, condition, or prac-
condition or practice, or a combination of
tice that constitutes or is causing the unsafe conditions and practices, constitutes
imminent hazard; or is causing an imminent hazard, as defined
(2) Those subject to the order; in § 190.3, the Administrator may issue or im-
(3) The restrictions, prohibitions, or pose an emergency order, without advance
safety measures imposed; notice or an opportunity for a hearing, but
only to the extent necessary to abate the im-
(4) The standards and procedures for
minent hazard. The order will contain a
obtaining relief from the order; written description of:
(5) How the order is tailored to abate (1) The violation, condition, or practice
the imminent hazard and the reasons that constitutes or is causing the imminent
the authorities under 49 U.S.C. 60112 hazard;
and 60117(l) are insufficient to do so; (2) Those entities subject to the order;
(6) How the considerations listed in (3) The restrictions, prohibitions, or safety
measures imposed;
paragraph (c) of this section were (4) The standards and procedures for ob-
taken into account. taining relief from the order;
(b) Consultation requirement. In evalu- (5) How the order is tailored to abate the
ating the considerations under para- imminent hazard and the reasons the au-
graph (c), the Administrator shall con- thorities under 49 U.S.C. 60112 and 60117(l) are
sult as the Administrator determines insufficient to do so; and
(6) How the considerations listed in para-
appropriate, with appropriate Federal
graph (c) of this section were taken into
agencies, State agencies, and other en- account.
tities knowledgeable in pipeline safety (b) Consultation. In considering the factors
or operations. under paragraph (c) of this section, the Ad-
(c) Considerations. Prior to issuing an ministrator shall consult, as the Adminis-
emergency order, the Administrator trator determines appropriate, with appro-
must consider the following: priate Federal agencies, State agencies, and
other entities knowledgeable in pipeline
(1) The impact of the emergency safety or operations.
order on public health and safety; (c) Considerations. Prior to issuing an emer-
(2) The impact, if any, of the emergency order, the Administrator shall con-
gency order on the national or regional sider the following, as appropriate:
economy or national security; (1) The impact of the emergency order on
(3) The impact of the emergency public health and safety;
(2) The impact, if any, of the emergency
order on the ability of owners and oper- order on the national or regional economy or
ators of pipeline facilities to maintain national security;
reliability and continuity of service to (3) The impact of the emergency order on
customers; and the ability of owners and operators of pipe-
(4) The result of consultations with line facilities to maintain reliability and
appropriate Federal agencies, State continuity of service to customers; and
agencies, and other entities knowledge- (4) The results of any consultations with
appropriate Federal agencies, State agen-
able in pipeline safety or operations.
cies, and other entities knowledgeable in
(d) Service. The Administrator will pipeline safety or operations.
publish emergency orders in the FED- (d) Service. The Administrator will provide
ERAL REGISTER, as soon as practicable service of emergency orders in accordance
upon issuance. In addition, OPS will with § 190.5 to all operators of gas and haz-
post emergency orders on its Web site. ardous liquid pipeline facilities that the Ad-
The emergency order will contain fil- ministrator reasonably expects to be af-
ing and service requirements, including fected by the emergency order. In addition,
the Administrator will publish emergency
the address of DOT Docket Operations orders in the FEDERAL REGISTER and post
and of all persons to be served with pe- them on the PHMSA website as soon as prac-
titions for review. ticable upon issuance. Publication in the
FEDERAL REGISTER will serve as general no-
[Amdt. 190–18, 81 FR 70985, Oct. 14, 2016]
tice of an emergency order. Each emergency
EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 84 FR 52027, Oct. order must contain information specifying
1, 2019, § 190.236 was revised, effective Dec. 2, how pipeline operators and owners may re-
2019. For the convenience of the user, the respond to the emergency order, filing proce-
vised text is set forth as follows: dures, and service requirements, including
396
the address of DOT Docket Operations and tion, a petition for review including a
the names and addresses of all persons to be formal hearing request will be deemed
served if a petition for review is filed. assigned to the Office of Hearings three
(e) Rescission. If an emergency order has
been in effect for more than 365 days, the Ad-
days after the Associate Administrator
ministrator will make an assessment regard- for Pipeline Safety receives it.
ing whether the unsafe condition or practice, (2) No hearing requested. For a peti-
or combination of unsafe conditions and tion for review of an emergency order
practices, constituting or causing an immi- that does not include a formal hearing
nent hazard, as defined in § 190.3, continues request or fails to state material facts
to exist. If the imminent hazard does not in dispute, the Associate Adminis-
continue to exist, the Administrator will re-
scind the emergency order and follow the
trator for Pipeline Safety must issue
service procedures set forth in § 190.236(d). If an administrative decision on the mer-
the imminent hazard underlying the emer- its within 30 days of receipt of the peti-
gency order continues to exist, PHMSA will tion. The Associate Administrator for
initiate a rulemaking action as soon as prac- Pipeline Safety’s decision constitutes
ticable. the agency’s final decision.
(3) Consolidation. If the Associate Ad-
§ 190.237 Petitions for review.
ministrator for Pipeline Safety re-
(a) Requirements. An entity that is ceives more than one petition for re-
subject to and aggrieved by an emer- view of an emergency order, and those
gency order may petition the Adminis- petitions share common issues of law
trator for review to determine whether or fact, the Associate Administrator
the order will remain in place, be modi- for Pipeline Safety may consolidate
fied, or terminated. A petition for re- those petitions for the purposes of com-
view must: plying with this section.
(1) Be in writing; (4) Agency authority to request a formal
(2) State with particularity each part hearing. In the event that a petitioner
of the emergency order that is sought does not request a formal hearing, the
to be amended or rescinded and include Associate Administrator for Pipeline
all information, evidence and argu- Safety may still reassign the petition
ments in support thereof; to the Office of Hearings, DOT, when a
(3) State whether a formal hearing in reasonable basis exists for the reassign-
accordance with 5 U.S.C. 554 is re- ment.
quested, and, if so, the material facts (d) Hearings. Formal hearings must
in dispute giving rise to the request for be conducted by an Administrative
a hearing; and, Law Judge assigned by the Chief Ad-
(4) Be filed and served in accordance ministrative Law Judge of the Office of
with paragraph (f) of this section. Hearings. The Administrative Law
(b) Response to the petition for review. Judge may:
An attorney designated by the Office of
(1) Administer oaths and affirma-
Chief Counsel may file and serve, in ac-
tions;
cordance with paragraph (f) of this sec-
(2) Issue subpoenas as provided by the
tion, a response, including appropriate
appropriate agency regulations (49 CFR
pleadings, within five days of receipt of
190.7 and 49 U.S.C. 60117);
the petition by the Chief Counsel.
(c) Associate Administrator for Pipeline (3) Adopt the relevant Federal Rules
Safety Responsibilities—(1) Hearing re- of Civil Procedure for the United
quested. Upon receipt of a petition for States District Courts for the proce-
review of an emergency order that in- dures governing the hearings when ap-
cludes a formal hearing request and propriate;
states material facts in dispute, the (4) Adopt the relevant Federal Rules
Associate Administrator for Pipeline of Evidence for United States Courts
Safety will immediately assign the pe- and Magistrates for the submission of
tition to the Office of Hearings, DOT. evidence when appropriate;
Unless the Associate Administrator for (5) Take or cause depositions to be
Pipeline Safety issues an order stating taken;
that the petition fails to set forth ma- (6) Examine witnesses at the hearing;
terial facts in dispute and will be de- (7) Rule on offers of proof and receive
cided under paragraph (c)(2) of this sec- relevant evidence;
397
§ 190.237 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(8) Convene, recess, adjourn or other- cept as otherwise provided herein. The
wise regulate the course of the hearing; emergency order must state all rel-
(9) Hold conferences for settlement, evant service requirements and list the
simplification of the issues, or any persons to be served and may be up-
other proper purpose; and, dated as necessary.
(10) Take any other action authorized (3) Certificate of service. Each order,
by or consistent with the provisions of pleading, motion, notice, or other doc-
this part and permitted by law that ument must be accompanied by a cer-
may expedite the hearing or aid in the tificate of service specifying the man-
disposition of an issue raised. ner in which and the date on which
(e) Parties. The petitioner may appear service was made.
and be heard in person or by an author- (4) If applicable, service upon a per-
ized representative. PHMSA will be son’s duly authorized representative,
represented by an attorney designated agent for service, or an organization’s
by the Office of Chief Counsel. president constitutes service upon that
(f) Filing and service. (1) Each peti- person.
tion, pleading, motion, notice, order, or (g) Report and recommendation. The
other document submitted in connec- Administrative Law Judge must issue
tion with an order issued under this a report and recommendation at the
subpart must be filed (commercially close of the record. The report and rec-
delivered or submitted electronically) ommendation must:
with: U.S. Department of Transpor- (1) Contain findings of fact and con-
tation, Docket Operations, M–30, West clusions of law and the grounds for the
Building Ground Floor, Room W12–140, decision based on the material issues of
1200 New Jersey Avenue SE., Wash- fact or law presented on the record;
ington, DC 20590. All documents filed (2) Be served on the parties to the
will be published on the Department’s proceeding; and
docket management Web site, http:// (3) Be issued no later than 25 days
www.regulations.gov. The emergency after receipt of the petition for review
order must state the above filing re- by the Associate Administrator of
quirements and the address of DOT Pipeline Safety.
Docket Operations. (h) Petition for reconsideration. (1) A
(2) Service. Each document filed in ac- party aggrieved by the Administrative
cordance with paragraph (f)(1) of this Law Judge’s report and recommenda-
section must be concurrently served tion, may file a petition for reconsider-
upon the following persons: ation with the Associate Administrator
(i) Associate Administrator for Pipe- of Pipeline Safety within one day of
line Safety, OPS, Pipeline and Haz- service of the report and recommenda-
ardous Materials Safety Administra- tion. The opposing party may file a re-
tion, U.S. Department of Transpor- sponse to the petition for reconsider-
tation, 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE., ation within one day of service of a pe-
East Building, Washington, DC 20590. tition for reconsideration.
(ii) Chief Counsel, PHC, Pipeline and (2) The Associate Administrator of
Hazardous Materials Safety Adminis- Pipeline Safety must issue a final
tration, U.S. Department of Transpor- agency decision within three days of
tation, 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE., service of the final pleading outlined in
East Building, Washington, DC 20590 paragraph (h)(1) of this section, but no
(facsimile: 202–366–7041). later than 30 days after receipt of the
(iii) If the petition for review re- original petition for review.
quests a formal hearing, the Chief Ad- (3) The Associate Administrator of
ministrative Law Judge, U.S. Depart- Pipeline Safety’s decision on the mer-
ment of Transportation, Office of Hear- its of a petition for reconsideration
ings, M–20, Room E12–320, 1200 New Jer- constitutes the agency’s final decision.
sey Avenue SE., Washington, DC 20590 (i) Judicial review. After the issuance
(facsimile: 202–366–7536). of a final agency decision pursuant to
(iv) Service must be made personally, paragraph (c)(2) or (h)(3) of this sec-
by commercial delivery service, or by tion, or the issuance of a written deter-

electronic means if consented to in mination by the Administrator pursu-
writing by the party to be served, ex- ant to paragraph (j) of this section, a
398
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 190.237, Nt.
person subject to, and aggrieved by, an (4) Be filed and served in accordance with
emergency order issued under section paragraph (h) of this section.
190.236 may seek judicial review of the (b) Modification of petitions. A petitioner
order in the appropriate District Court may modify its petition for review to provide
new information that materially affects the
of the United States. The filing of an
review proceeding and that is timely sub-
action seeking judicial review does not mitted. Where the petitioner has not re-
stay or modify the force and effect of quested a formal hearing, the Associate Ad-
the agency’s final decision under para- ministrator will make the determination
graph (c)(2) or (h)(3) of this section, or whether to accept the new information.
the written determination under para- Where a case has been assigned for a formal
graph (j) of this section, unless stayed hearing, the presiding administrative law
or modified by the Administrator. judge will determine whether to accept the
(j) Expiration of order. If the Associate new information.
Administrator of Pipeline Safety, or (c) Response to the petition for review. An at-
torney designated by the Office of Chief
the Administrative Law Judge, where
Counsel may file and serve, in accordance
appropriate, has not disposed of the pe- with paragraph (h) of this section, a response
tition for review within 30 days of re- to the petition, including appropriate plead-
ceipt, the emergency order will cease ings, within five calendar days of receipt of
to be effective unless the Adminis- the petition by the Chief Counsel.
trator issuing the emergency order de- (d) Associate Administrator’s responsibil-
termines, in writing, that the immi- ities.—(1) Formal hearing requested. Upon re-
nent hazard providing a basis for the ceipt of a petition for review that includes a
emergency order continues to exist. formal hearing request under this section,
(k) Time. In computing any period of the Associate Administrator will, within
three days after receipt of the petition, as-
time prescribed by this part or by an
sign the petition to the Office of Hearings,
order issued by the Administrative DOT, for a formal hearing.
Law Judge, the day of filing of the pe- (2) No formal hearing requested. Upon receipt
tition for review or of any other act, of a petition for review that does not include
event, or default from which the des- a formal hearing request, the Associate Ad-
ignated period of time begins to run ministrator will issue an administrative de-
will not be included. The last day of cision on the merits within 30 days of receipt
the period so computed will be in- of the petition for review. The Associate Ad-
cluded, unless it is a Saturday, Sunday, ministrator’s decision constitutes the agen-
or Federal holiday, in which event the cy’s final decision.
period runs until the end of the next (3) Consolidation. If the Associate Adminis-
trator receives more than one petition for re-
day which is not one of the aforemen- view and they share common issues of law or
tioned days. fact, the Associate Administrator may con-
[Amdt. 190–18, 81 FR 70986, Oct. 14, 2016] solidate the petitions for the purpose of com-
plying with this section, provided such con-
EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 84 FR 52027, Oct. solidation occurs prior to the commence-
1, 2019, § 190.237 was revised, effective effec- ment of a formal hearing. The Associate Ad-
tive Dec. 2, 2019. For the convenience of the ministrator may reassign a petition that
user, the revised text is set forth as follows: does not request a formal hearing to the Of-
§ 190.237 Emergency orders: Petitions for fice of Hearings, DOT, provided the petition
review. otherwise meets the requirements for con-
(a) Requirements. A pipeline owner or oper- solidation. If the Associate Administrator
ator that is subject to and aggrieved by an has consolidated multiple petitions that do
emergency order may petition the Adminis- not request a formal hearing, he may de-con-
trator for review to determine whether the solidate such petitions if there has been a
order will remain in place, be modified, or be change in circumstances that, in his discre-
terminated. A petition for review must: tion, warrant separation for the purpose of
(1) Be in writing; rendering a final decision.
(2) State with particularity each part of (e) Formal Hearings. Formal hearings must
the emergency order that is sought to be be conducted by an administrative law judge
modified or terminated and include all infor- assigned by the chief administrative law
mation, evidence and arguments in support judge of the Office of Hearings, DOT. The ad-
thereof; ministrative law judge may:
(3) State whether the petitioner requests a (1) Administer oaths and affirmations;
formal hearing in accordance with 5 U.S.C. (2) Issue subpoenas as provided by the ap-
554, and, if so, any material facts in dispute; propriate statutes and agency regulations
and, (e.g., 49 U.S.C. 60117 and 49 CFR 190.7);
399
§ 190.237, Nt. 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(3) Adopt the relevant Federal Rules of (iii) If the petition for review requests a
Civil Procedure for the United States Dis- formal hearing, the Chief Administrative
trict Courts for the procedures governing the Law Judge, U.S. Department of Transpor-
hearings, when appropriate; tation, Office of Hearings, 1200 New Jersey
(4) Adopt the relevant Federal Rules of Ave SE, c/o Mail Center (E11–310), Wash-
Evidence for United States Courts and Mag- ington, DC 20590 (facsimile: 202–366–7536).
istrates for the submission of evidence, when (3) Service must be made in accordance
appropriate; with § 190.5 of this part. The emergency order
(5) Take or cause depositions to be taken; must state all relevant service requirements
(6) Examine witnesses at the hearing; and list the persons to be served and may be
(7) Rule on offers of proof and receive rel- updated as necessary.
evant evidence; (4) Certificate of service. Each order, plead-
(8) Convene, recess, adjourn or otherwise ing, motion, notice, or other document must
regulate the course of the hearing; be accompanied by a certificate of service
(9) Hold conferences for settlement, sim- specifying the manner in which and the date
plification of the issues, or any other proper on which service was made.
purpose; and (5) If applicable, service upon a person’s
duly authorized representative, agent for
(10) Take any other action authorized by or
service, or an organization’s president or
consistent with the provisions of this part
chief executive officer constitutes service
and permitted by law that may expedite the
upon that person.
hearing or aid in the disposition of an issue
(i) Report and recommendation. The adminis-
raised.
trative law judge must issue a report and
(f) Parties. The petitioner may appear and recommendation to the Associate Adminis-
be heard in person or by an authorized rep- trator at the close of the record. The report
resentative. PHMSA will be represented by and recommendation must:
an attorney designated by the Office of Chief (1) Contain findings of fact and conclusions
Counsel. of law and the grounds for the decision,
(g) Burden of proof. Except in the case of an based on the material issues of fact or law
affirmative defense, PHMSA shall bear the presented on the record;
burden of proving, by a preponderance of the (2) Be served on the parties to the pro-
evidence, the validity of an emergency order ceeding; and
in a proceeding under this section by a pre- (3) Be issued no later than 25 days after re-
ponderance of the evidence. A party assert- ceipt of the petition for review by the Asso-
ing an affirmative defense shall bear the bur- ciate Administrator.
den of proving, by a preponderance of the (j) Petition for reconsideration. (1) A peti-
evidence, the affirmative defense in a pro- tioner aggrieved by the administrative law
ceeding under this section. judge’s report and recommendation may file
(h) Filing and service. (1) Each petition, a petition for reconsideration with the Asso-
pleading, motion, notice, order, or other doc- ciate Administrator. The petition for recon-
ument submitted in connection with an sideration must be filed:
emergency order issued under this section (i) Not more than five days after the ad-
must be filed (commercially delivered or sub- ministrative law judge has issued a report
mitted electronically) with: U.S. Depart- and recommendation under paragraph (i) of
ment of Transportation, Docket Operations, this section, provided such report and rec-
M–30, West Building Ground Floor, Room ommendation is issued 20 days or less after
W12–140, 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE, Wash- the petition for review was filed with
ington, DC 20590. All documents filed will be PHMSA; or
published on the Department’s docket man- (ii) Not more than two days after the ad-
agement website, http://www.regulations.gov. ministrative law judge has issued his or her
The emergency order must state the above report and recommendation under paragraph
filing requirements and the address of DOT (h) of this section, where such report and
Docket Operations. recommendation are issued more than 20
(2) Each document filed in accordance with days after the petition for review was filed
paragraph (h)(1) of this section must be con- with PHMSA.
currently served upon the following persons: (2) The Associate Administrator must issue
(i) Associate Administrator for Pipeline a decision on a petition for reconsideration
Safety, OPS, Pipeline and Hazardous Mate- no later than 30 days after receipt of the pe-
rials Safety Administration, U.S. Depart- tition for review. Such decision constitutes
ment of Transportation, 1200 New Jersey Av- final agency action on a petition for review.
enue SE, East Building, Washington, DC (k) Judicial review. (1) After the issuance of
20590; a final agency decision pursuant to para-
(ii) Chief Counsel, PHC, Pipeline and Haz- graphs (d)(2) or (j)(2) of this section, or the
ardous Materials Safety Administration, issuance of a written determination by the
U.S. Department of Transportation, 1200 New Administrator pursuant to paragraph (l) of

Jersey Avenue SE, East Building, Wash- this section, a pipeline owner or operator
ington, DC 20590 (facsimile: 202–366–7041); and subject to and aggrieved by an emergency
400
order issued under § 190.236 may seek judicial pair or other appropriate action to
review of the order in the appropriate dis- remedy the identified risk condition.
trict court of the United States. The filing of
an action seeking judicial review does not
(b) How is an operator notified of the
stay or modify the force and effect of the proposed issuance of a safety order and
agency’s final decision under paragraphs what are its responses options? (1) Notice
(d)(2) or (j)(3) of this section, or the written of proposed safety order. PHMSA will
determination under paragraph (l) of this serve written notice of a proposed safe-
section, unless stayed or modified by the Ad- ty order under § 190.5 to an operator of
ministrator.
(l) Expiration of order. (1) No petition for re-
the pipeline facility. The notice will al-
view filed: If no petition for review is filed lege the existence of a condition that
challenging the emergency order, then the poses a pipeline integrity risk to public
emergency order shall remain in effect until safety, property, or the environment,
PHMSA determines, in writing, that the im- and state the facts and circumstances
minent hazard no longer exists or the order that support issuing a safety order for
is terminated by a court of competent juris-
diction.
the specified pipeline or portion there-
(2) Petition for review filed and decision ren- of. The notice will also specify pro-
dered within 30 days. If the Associate Admin- posed testing, evaluations, integrity
istrator renders a final decision upon a peti- assessment, or other actions to be
tion for review within 30 days of its receipt taken by the operator and may propose
by PHMSA, any elements of the emergency that the operator submit a work plan
order upheld or modified by the decision
shall remain in effect until PHMSA deter-
and schedule to address the conditions
mines, in writing, that the imminent hazard identified in the notice. The notice will
no longer exists or the order is terminated also provide the operator with its re-
by a court of competent jurisdiction. sponse options, including procedures
(3) Petition for review filed but no decision for requesting informal consultation
rendered within 30 days. If the Associate Ad- and a hearing. An operator receiving a
ministrator has not reached a decision on notice will have 30 days to respond to
the petition for review within 30 days of re-
ceipt of the petition for review, the emer- the PHMSA official who issued the no-
gency order will cease to be effective unless tice.
the Administrator determines, in writing, (2) Informal consultation. Upon timely
that the imminent hazard providing a basis request by the operator, PHMSA will
for the emergency order continues to exist. provide an opportunity for informal
(m) Time. In computing any period of time
consultation concerning the proposed
prescribed by this section or an order or re-
port and recommendation issued by an ad- safety order. Such informal consulta-
ministrative law judge under this section, tion shall commence within 30 days,
the day of filing of a petition for review or of provided that PHMSA may extend this
any other act, event or default from which time by request or otherwise for good
the designated period of time begins to run cause. Informal consultation provides
will not be included. The last day of the pe- an opportunity for the respondent to
riod so computed will be included, unless it
explain the circumstances associated
is a Saturday, Sunday, or Federal holiday, in
which event the period runs until end of the with the risk condition(s) identified in
next day which is not one of the aforemen- the notice and, where appropriate, to
tioned days. present a proposal for corrective ac-
tion, without prejudice to the opera-
§ 190.239 Safety orders. tor’s position in any subsequent hear-
(a) When may PHMSA issue a safety ing. If the respondent and Regional Di-
order? If the Associate Administrator rector agree within 30 days of the infor-
finds, after notice and an opportunity mal consultation on a plan for the op-
for hearing under paragraph (b) of this erator to address each risk condition,
section, that a particular pipeline fa- they may enter into a written consent
cility has a condition or conditions agreement and the Associate Adminis-
that pose a pipeline integrity risk to trator may issue a consent order incor-
public safety, property, or the environ- porating the terms of the agreement. If
ment, the Associate Administrator a consent agreement is reached, no fur-
may issue an order requiring the oper- ther hearing will be provided in the
ator of the facility to take necessary matter and any pending hearing re-
corrective action. Such action may in- quest will be considered withdrawn. If
clude physical inspection, testing, re- a consent agreement is not reached
401
§ 190.239 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
within 30 days of the informal con- ommendation, the Associate Adminis-

sultation (or if informal consultation is trator may proceed under paragraphs
not requested), the Associate Adminis- (c) through (g) of this section. If the
trator may proceed under paragraphs Associate Administrator finds the fa-
(b)(3) through (5) of this section. If cility to have a condition that poses a
PHMSA subsequently determines that pipeline integrity risk to public safety,
an operator has failed to comply with property, or the environment, the As-
the terms of a consent order, PHMSA sociate Administrator will issue a safe-
may obtain any administrative or judi- ty order under this section. If the Asso-
cial remedies available under 49 U.S.C. ciate Administrator does not find that
60101 et seq. and this part. If a consent the facility has such a condition, or
agreement is not reached, any admis- concludes that a safety order is other-
sions made by the operator during the wise not warranted, the Associate Ad-
informal consultation shall be excluded ministrator will withdraw the notice
from the record in any subsequent and promptly notify the operator in
hearing. Nothing in this paragraph (b) writing by service as prescribed in
precludes PHMSA from terminating § 190.5. Nothing in this subsection pre-
the informal consultation process if it cludes PHMSA and the operator from
has reason to believe that the operator entering into a consent agreement at
is not engaging in good faith discus- any time before a safety order is
sions or otherwise concludes that fur- issued.
ther consultation would not be produc- (6) Termination of safety order. Once
tive or in the public interest. all remedial actions set forth in the
(3) Hearing. An operator receiving a safety order and associated work plans
notice of proposed safety order may are completed, as determined by
contest the notice, or any portion PHMSA, the Associate Administrator
thereof, by filing a written request for will notify the operator that the safety
a hearing within 30 days following re- order has been lifted. The Associate
ceipt of the notice or within 10 days Administrator shall suspend or termi-
following the conclusion of informal
nate a safety order whenever the Asso-
consultation that did not result in a
ciate Administrator determines that
consent agreement, as applicable. In
the pipeline facility no longer has a
the absence of a timely request for a
condition or conditions that pose a
hearing, the Associate Administrator
pipeline integrity risk to public safety,
may issue a safety order in the form of
property, or the environment.
the proposed order in accordance with
paragraphs (c) through (g) of this sec- (c) How is the determination made that
tion. a pipeline facility has a condition that
(4) Conduct of hearing. An attorney poses an integrity risk? The Associate
from the Office of Chief Counsel, will Administrator may find a pipeline fa-
serve as the Presiding Official in a cility to have a condition that poses a
hearing under this section. The hearing pipeline integrity risk to public safety,
will be conducted informally, without property, or the environment under
strict adherence to formal rules of evi- paragraph (a) of this section:
dence in accordance with § 190.211. The (1) If under the facts and cir-
respondent may submit any relevant cumstances the Associate Adminis-
information or materials, call wit- trator determines the particular facil-
nesses, and present arguments on the ity has such a condition; or
issue of whether a safety order should (2) If the pipeline facility or a compo-
be issued to address the alleged pres- nent thereof has been constructed or
ence of a condition that poses a pipe- operated with any equipment, mate-
line integrity risk to public safety, rial, or technique with a history of
property, or the environment. being susceptible to failure when used
(5) Post-hearing action. Following a in pipeline service, unless the operator
hearing under this section, the Pre- involved demonstrates that such equip-
siding Official will submit a rec- ment, material, or technique is not
ommendation to the Associate Admin- susceptible to failure given the manner

istrator concerning issuance of a final it is being used for a particular facil-
safety order. Upon receipt of the rec- ity.
402
(d) What factors must PHMSA consider completed and, where appropriate, the
in making a determination that a risk duration of the order.
condition is present? In making a deter- (f) Can PHMSA take other enforcement
mination under paragraph (c) of this actions on the affected facilities? Nothing
section, the Associate Administrator in this section precludes PHMSA from
shall consider, if relevant: issuing a Notice of Probable Violation
(1) The characteristics of the pipe under § 190.207 or taking other enforce-
and other equipment used in the pipe- ment action if noncompliance is identi-
line facility involved, including its age, fied at the facilities that are the sub-
manufacturer, physical properties (in- ject of a safety order proceeding.
cluding its resistance to corrosion and (g) May I petition for reconsideration of
deterioration), and the method of its a safety order? Yes, a petition for recon-
manufacture, construction or assem- sideration may be submitted in accord-
bly; ance with § 190.243.
(2) The nature of the materials trans-
ported by such facility (including their [73 FR 16567, Mar. 28, 2008, as amended at 74
corrosive and deteriorative qualities), FR 2893, Jan. 16, 2009; Amdt. 190–16, 78 FR
the sequence in which such materials 58913, Sept. 25, 2013]
are transported, and the pressure re-
§ 190.241 Finality.
quired for such transportation;
(3) The characteristics of the geo- Except as otherwise provided by
graphical areas where the pipeline fa- § 190.243, an order directing amendment
cility is located, in particular the cli- issued under § 190.206, a final order
matic and geologic conditions (includ- issued under § 190.213, a corrective ac-
ing soil characteristics) associated tion order issued under § 190.233, or a
with such areas; safety order issued under § 190.239 is
(4) For hazardous liquid pipelines, the considered final administrative action
proximity of the pipeline to an unusu- on that enforcement proceeding.
ally sensitive area;
[Amdt. 190–16, 78 FR 58913, Sept. 25, 2013]
(5) The population density and
growth patterns of the area in which § 190.243 Petitions for reconsideration.
the pipeline facility is located;
(6) Any relevant recommendation of (a) A respondent may petition the
the National Transportation Safety Associate Administrator for reconsid-
Board issued in connection with any eration of an order directing amend-
investigation conducted by the Board; ment of plans or procedures issued
(7) The likelihood that the condition under § 190.206, a final order issued
will impair the serviceability of the under § 190.213, or a safety order issued
pipeline; under § 190.239. The written petition
(8) The likelihood that the condition must be received no later than 20 days
will worsen over time; and after receipt of the order by the re-
(9) The likelihood that the condition spondent. A copy of the petition must
is present or could develop on other be provided to the Chief Counsel of the
areas of the pipeline. Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safe-
(e) What information will be included in ty Administration, East Building, 2nd
a safety order? A safety order shall con- Floor, Mail Stop E26–105, 1200 New Jer-
tain the following: sey Ave. SE., Washington, DC 20590 or
(1) A finding that the pipeline facility by email to phmsachiefcounsel@dot.gov.
has a condition that poses a pipeline Petitions received after that time will
integrity risk to public safety, prop- not be considered. The petition must
erty, or the environment; contain a brief statement of the com-
(2) The relevant facts which form the plaint and an explanation as to why
basis of that finding; the order should be reconsidered.
(3) The legal basis for the order; (b) If the respondent requests the
(4) The nature and description of any consideration of additional facts or ar-
particular corrective actions to be re- guments, the respondent must submit
quired of the operator; and the reasons why they were not pre-
(5) The date(s) by which the required sented prior to issuance of the final
corrective actions must be taken or order.
403
§ 190.291 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(c) The filing of a petition under this tempts to injure or destroy, any inter-
section stays the payment of any civil state transmission facility, any inter-
penalty assessed. However, unless the state pipeline facility, or any intra-
Associate Administrator otherwise pro- state pipeline facility used in inter-
vides, the order, including any required state or foreign commerce or in any ac-
corrective action, is not stayed. tivity affecting interstate or foreign
(d) The Associate Administrator may commerce (as those terms are defined
grant or deny, in whole or in part, any in 49 U.S.C. 60101 et seq.) will, upon con-
petition for reconsideration without viction, be subject to a fine under title
further proceedings. If the Associate 18, United States Code, imprisonment
Administrator reconsiders an order for a term not to exceed 20 years, or
under this section, a final decision on
both, for each offense.
reconsideration may be issued without
further proceedings, or, in the alter- (c) Any person who willfully and
native, additional information, data, knowingly defaces, damages, removes,
and comment may be requested by the or destroys any pipeline sign, right-of-
Associate Administrator, as deemed way marker, or marine buoy required
appropriate. by 49 U.S.C. 60101 et seq. or any regula-
(e) It is the policy of the Associate tion or order issued thereunder will,
Administrator to expeditiously issue upon conviction, be subject to a fine
notice of the action taken on a petition under title 18, United States Code, im-
for reconsideration. In cases where a prisonment for a term not to exceed 1
substantial delay is expected, notice of year, or both, for each offense.
that fact and the date by which it is (d) Any person who willfully and
expected that action will be taken is knowingly engages in excavation activ-
provided to the respondent upon re- ity without first using an available
quest and whenever practicable. one-call notification system to estab-
(f) If the Associate Administrator re- lish the location of underground facili-
considers an order under this section, ties in the excavation area; or without
the decision on reconsideration is the considering location information or
final administrative action on that en- markings established by a pipeline fa-
forcement proceeding. cility operator; and
(g) Any application for judicial re-
(1) Subsequently damages a pipeline
view must be filed no later than 89 days
facility resulting in death, serious bod-
after the issuance of the decision in ac-
ily harm, or property damage exceed-
cordance with 49 U.S.C. 60119(a).
(h) Judicial review of agency action ing $50,000;
under 49 U.S.C. 60119(a) will apply the (2) Subsequently damages a pipeline
standards of review established in 5 facility and knows or has reason to
U.S.C. 706. know of the damage but fails to
promptly report the damage to the op-
[Amdt. 190–16, 78 FR 58913, Sept. 25, 2013]
erator and to the appropriate authori-
ties; or
Subpart C—Criminal Enforcement (3) Subsequently damages a haz-
ardous liquid pipeline facility that re-
SOURCE: Amdt. 190–16, 78 FR 58914, Sept. 25, sults in the release of more than 50 bar-
2013, unless otherwise noted. rels of product; will, upon conviction,
§ 190.291 Criminal penalties generally. be subject to a fine under title 18,
United States Code, imprisonment for
(a) Any person who willfully and a term not to exceed 5 years, or both,
knowingly violates a provision of 49 for each offense.
U.S.C. 60101 et seq. or any regulation or (e) No person shall be subject to
order issued thereunder will upon con-
criminal penalties under paragraph (a)
viction be subject to a fine under title
of this section for violation of any reg-
18, United States Code, and imprison-
ment for not more than five years, or ulation and the violation of any order
both, for each offense. issued under §§ 190.217, 190.219 or 190.291

(b) Any person who willfully and if both violations are based on the
knowingly injures or destroys, or at- same act.
404
§ 190.293 Referral for prosecution. accessed at http://www.regulations.gov.

Public comments also may be sub-
If a PHMSA employee becomes aware
mitted at http://www.regulations.gov.
of any actual or possible activity sub-
Comment submissions must identify
ject to criminal penalties under
the docket number. You may also ex-
§ 190.291, the employee reports it to the
amine public docket material at the of-
Office of Chief Counsel, Pipeline and
fices of the Docket Operations Facility
Hazardous Materials Safety Adminis-
(M–30), U.S. Department of Transpor-
tration, and to his or her supervisor.
tation, West Building, First Floor,
The Chief Counsel may refer the report
Room W12–140, 1200 New Jersey Avenue,
to OPS for investigation. If appro-
SE., Washington, DC 20590. You may
priate, the Chief Counsel refers the re-
obtain a copy during normal business
port to the Department of Justice for
hours, excluding Federal holidays, for a
criminal prosecution of the offender.
fee, with the exception of material
which the Administrator of PHMSA de-
Subpart D—Procedures for termines should be withheld from pub-
Adoption of Rules lic disclosure under 5 U.S.C. 552(b) or
any other applicable statutory provi-
SOURCE: Amdt. 190–8, 61 FR 50909, Sept. 27, sion.
1996, unless otherwise noted.
[Amdt. 190–8, 61 FR 50909, Sept. 27, 1996, as
§ 190.301 Scope. amended at 70 FR 11137, 11139, Mar. 8, 2005; 73
FR 16566, Mar. 28, 2008; 73 FR 16568, Mar. 28,
This subpart prescribes general rule- 2008]
making procedures for the issue,
amendment, and repeal of Pipeline § 190.307 Records.
Safety Program regulations of the Records of the Pipeline and Haz-
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safe- ardous Materials Safety Administra-
ty Administration of the Department tion relating to rulemaking pro-
of Transportation. ceedings are available for inspection as
[Amdt. 190–8, 61 FR 50909, Sept. 27, 1996, as provided in section 552(b) of title 5,
amended at 70 FR 11137, Mar. 8, 2005] United States Code, and part 7 of the
Regulations of the Office of the Sec-
§ 190.303 Delegations. retary of Transportation (part 7 of this
For the purposes of this subpart, Ad- title).
ministrator means the Administrator, [Amdt. 190–8, 61 FR 50909, Sept. 27, 1996, as
Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safe- amended at 70 FR 11137, Mar. 8, 2005]
ty Administration, or his or her dele-
gate. § 190.309 Where to file petitions.
[Amdt. 190–8, 61 FR 50909, Sept. 27, 1996, as Petitions for extension of time to
amended at 70 FR 11137, Mar. 8, 2005] comment submitted under § 190.319, pe-
titions for hearings submitted under
§ 190.305 Regulatory dockets. § 190.327, petitions for rulemaking sub-
(a) Information and data considered mitted under § 190.331, and petitions for
relevant by the Administrator relating reconsideration submitted under
to rulemaking actions, including no- § 190.335 must be submitted to: Admin-
tices of proposed rulemaking; com- istrator, Pipeline and Hazardous Mate-
ments received in response to notices; rials Safety Administration, U.S. De-
petitions for rulemaking and reconsid- partment of Transportation, 1200 New
eration; denials of petitions for rule- Jersey Avenue, SE, Washington, D.C.
making and reconsideration; records of 20590–0001.
additional rulemaking proceedings [Amdt. 190–8, 61 FR 50909, Sept. 27, 1996, as
under § 190.325; and final regulations amended at 70 FR 11137, Mar. 8, 2005; 73 FR
are maintained by the Pipeline and 16566, Mar. 28, 2008]
Hazardous Materials Safety Adminis-
tration at 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, § 190.311 General.
Washington, D.C. 20590–0001. Unless the Administrator, for good

(b) Once a public docket is estab- cause, finds that notice is impracti-
lished, docketed material may be cable, unnecessary, or contrary to the
405
§ 190.313 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
public interest, and incorporates that eral or State government agency or

finding and a brief statement of the any political subdivision of a State.
reasons for it in the rule, a notice of
proposed rulemaking is issued and in- § 190.319 Petitions for extension of
terested persons are invited to partici- time to comment.
pate in the rulemaking proceedings A petition for extension of the time
with respect to each substantive rule. to submit comments must be sub-
mitted to PHMSA in accordance with
§ 190.313 Initiation of rulemaking.
§ 190.309 and received by PHMSA not
The Administrator initiates rule- later than 10 days before expiration of
making on his or her own motion; how- the time stated in the notice. The fil-
ever, in so doing, the Administrator ing of the petition does not automati-
may use discretion to consider the rec- cally extend the time for petitioner’s
ommendations of other agencies of the comments. A petition is granted only if
United States or of other interested the petitioner shows good cause for the
persons including those of any tech- extension, and if the extension is con-
nical advisory body established by sistent with the public interest. If an
statute for that purpose. extension is granted, it is granted to
all persons, and it is published in the
§ 190.315 Contents of notices of pro-
posed rulemaking. FEDERAL REGISTER.
(a) Each notice of proposed rule- [Amdt. 190–16, 78 FR 58914, Sept. 25, 2013]
making is published in the FEDERAL
REGISTER, unless all persons subject to § 190.321 Contents of written com-
it are named and are personally served ments.
with a copy of it. All written comments must be in
(b) Each notice, whether published in English. Any interested person should
the FEDERAL REGISTER or personally submit as part of written comments all
served, includes: material considered relevant to any
(1) A statement of the time, place, statement of fact. Incorporation of ma-
and nature of the proposed rulemaking terial by reference should be avoided;
proceeding; however, where necessary, such incor-
(2) A reference to the authority under porated material must be identified by
which it is issued; document title and page.
(3) A description of the subjects and
issues involved or the substance and [Amdt. 190–16, 78 FR 58914, Sept. 25, 2013]
terms of the proposed regulation;
§ 190.323 Consideration of comments
(4) A statement of the time within received.
which written comments must be sub-
mitted; and All timely comments and the rec-
(5) A statement of how and to what ommendations of any technical advi-
extent interested persons may partici- sory body established by statute for
pate in the proceeding. the purpose of reviewing the proposed
rule concerned are considered before
§ 190.317 Participation by interested final action is taken on a rulemaking
persons. proposal. Late filed comments are con-
(a) Any interested person may par- sidered so far as practicable.
ticipate in rulemaking proceedings by
submitting comments in writing con- § 190.325 Additional rulemaking pro-
taining information, views or argu- ceedings.
ments in accordance with instructions The Administrator may initiate any
for participation in the rulemaking further rulemaking proceedings that
document. the Administrator finds necessary or
(b) The Administrator may invite desirable. For example, interested per-
any interested person to participate in sons may be invited to make oral argu-
the rulemaking proceedings described ments, to participate in conferences
in § 190.325. between the Administrator or the Ad-

(c) For the purposes of this subpart, ministrator’s representative and inter-
an interested person includes any Fed- ested persons, at which minutes of the
406
conference are kept, to appear at infor- § 190.331 Petitions for rulemaking.

mal hearings presided over by officials
(a) Any interested person may peti-
designated by the Administrator at
tion the Associate Administrator for
which a transcript of minutes are kept, Pipeline Safety to establish, amend, or
or participate in any other proceeding repeal a substantive regulation, or may
to assure informed administrative ac- petition the Chief Counsel to establish,
tion and to protect the public interest. amend, or repeal a procedural regula-
tion.
§ 190.327 Hearings.
(b) Each petition filed under this sec-
(a) If a notice of proposed rulemaking tion must—
does not provide for a hearing, any in- (1) Summarize the proposed action
terested person may petition the Ad- and explain its purpose;
ministrator for an informal hearing. (2) State the text of the proposed rule
The petition must be received by the or amendment, or specify the rule pro-
Administrator not later than 20 days posed to be repealed;
before expiration of the time stated in (3) Explain the petitioner’s interest
the notice. The filing of the petition in the proposed action and the interest
does not automatically result in the of any party the petitioner represents;
scheduling of a hearing. A petition is and
granted only if the petitioner shows (4) Provide information and argu-
good cause for a hearing. If a petition ments that support the proposed ac-
for a hearing is granted, notice of the tion, including relevant technical, sci-
hearing is published in the FEDERAL entific or other data as available to the
REGISTER. petitioner, and any specific known
(b) Sections 556 and 557 of title 5, cases that illustrate the need for the
United States Code, do not apply to proposed action.
hearings held under this subpart. Un- (c) If the potential impact of the pro-
less otherwise specified, hearings held posed action is substantial, and infor-
under this subpart are informal, non- mation and data related to that impact
adversarial fact-finding proceedings, at are available to the petitioner, the As-
which there are no formal pleadings or sociate Administrator or the Chief
adverse parties. Any regulation issued Counsel may request the petitioner to
in a case in which an informal hearing provide—
is held is not necessarily based exclu- (1) The costs and benefits to society
sively on the record of the hearing. and identifiable groups within society,
(c) The Administrator designates a quantifiable and otherwise;
representative to conduct any hearing (2) The direct effects (including pre-
held under this subpart. The Chief emption effects) of the proposed action
Counsel designates a member of his or on States, on the relationship between
her staff to serve as legal officer at the the Federal Government and the
hearing. States, and on the distribution of
power and responsibilities among the
[Amdt. 190–8, 61 FR 50909, Sept. 27, 1996. Re- various levels of government;
designated and amended by Amdt. 190–16, 78 (3) The regulatory burden on small
FR 58914, Sept. 25, 2013] businesses, small organizations and
small governmental jurisdictions;
§ 190.329 Adoption of final rules.
(4) The recordkeeping and reporting
Final rules are prepared by rep- requirements and to whom they would
resentatives of the Office of Pipeline apply; and
Safety and the Office of the Chief (5) Impacts on the quality of the nat-
Counsel. The regulation is then sub- ural and social environments.
mitted to the Administrator for consid- (d) The Associate Administrator or
eration. If the Administrator adopts Chief Counsel may return a petition
the regulation, it is published in the that does not comply with the require-
FEDERAL REGISTER, unless all persons ments of this section, accompanied by

subject to it are named and are person- a written statement indicating the de-
ally served with a copy of it. ficiencies in the petition.
407
§ 190.333 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
§ 190.333 Processing of petition. § 190.337 Proceedings on petitions for

reconsideration.
(a) General. Unless the Associate Ad-
ministrator or the Chief Counsel other- (a) The Associate Administrator or
wise specifies, no public hearing, argu- the Chief Counsel may grant or deny,
ment, or other proceeding is held di- in whole or in part, any petition for re-
rectly on a petition before its disposi- consideration without further pro-
tion under this section. ceedings, except where a grant of the
(b) Grants. If the Associate Adminis- petition would result in issuance of a
trator or the Chief Counsel determines new final rule. In the event that the
that the petition contains adequate Associate Administrator or the Chief
justification, he or she initiates rule- Counsel determines to reconsider any
making action under this subpart. regulation, a final decision on recon-
(c) Denials. If the Associate Adminis- sideration may be issued without fur-
trator or the Chief Counsel determines ther proceedings, or an opportunity to
that the petition does not justify rule- submit comment or information and
making, the petition is denied. data as deemed appropriate, may be
(d) Notification. The Associate Admin- provided. Whenever the Associate Ad-
istrator or the Chief Counsel will no- ministrator or the Chief Counsel deter-
tify a petitioner, in writing, of the de- mines that a petition should be granted
cision to grant or deny a petition for or denied, the Office of the Chief Coun-
rulemaking. sel prepares a notice of the grant or de-
nial of a petition for reconsideration,
§ 190.335 Petitions for reconsideration. for issuance to the petitioner, and the
Associate Administrator or the Chief
(a) Except as provided in § 190.339(d), Counsel issues it to the petitioner. The
any interested person may petition the Associate Administrator or the Chief
Associate Administrator for reconsid- Counsel may consolidate petitions re-
eration of any regulation issued under lating to the same rules.
this subpart, or may petition the Chief (b) It is the policy of the Associate
Counsel for reconsideration of any pro- Administrator or the Chief Counsel to
cedural regulation issued under this issue notice of the action taken on a
subpart and contained in this subpart. petition for reconsideration within 90
The petition must be received not later days after the date on which the regu-
than 30 days after publication of the lation in question is published in the
rule in the FEDERAL REGISTER. Peti- FEDERAL REGISTER, unless it is found
tions filed after that time will be con- impracticable to take action within
sidered as petitions filed under § 190.331. that time. In cases where it is so found
The petition must contain a brief and the delay beyond that period is ex-
statement of the complaint and an expected to be substantial, notice of that
planation as to why compliance with fact and the date by which it is ex-
the rule is not practicable, is unreason- pected that action will be taken is
able, or is not in the public interest. issued to the petitioner and published
(b) If the petitioner requests the con- in the FEDERAL REGISTER.
sideration of additional facts, the peti-
tioner must state the reason they were § 190.338 Appeals.
not presented to the Associate Admin- (a) Any interested person may appeal
istrator or the Chief Counsel within a denial of the Associate Administrator
the prescribed time. or the Chief Counsel, issued under
(c) The Associate Administrator or § 190.333 or § 190.337, to the Adminis-
the Chief Counsel does not consider trator.
repetitious petitions. (b) An appeal must be received within
(d) Unless the Associate Adminis- 20 days of service of written notice to
trator or the Chief Counsel otherwise petitioner of the Associate Administra-
provides, the filing of a petition under tor’s or the Chief Counsel’s decision, or
this section does not stay the effective- within 20 days from the date of publica-
ness of the rule. tion of the decision in the FEDERAL
[Amdt. 190–8, 61 FR 50909, Sept. 27, 1996. Re- REGISTER, and should set forth the con-
designated and amended by Amdt. 190–16, 78 tested aspects of the decision as well as
FR 58914, Sept. 25, 2013] any new arguments or information.
408
(c) Unless the Administrator other- section may petition under § 190.335 for
wise provides, the filing of an appeal reconsideration of that direct final
under this section does not stay the ef- rule.
fectiveness of any rule. (e) If an adverse comment or notice
[Amdt. 190–8, 61 FR 50909, Sept. 27, 1996. Re-
of intent to file an adverse comment is
designated and amended by Amdt. 190–16, 78 received, a timely document will be
FR 58914, Sept. 25, 2013] published in the FEDERAL REGISTER ad-
vising the public and withdrawing the
§ 190.339 Direct final rulemaking. direct final rule in whole or in part.
(a) Where practicable, the Adminis- The Administrator may then incor-
trator will use direct final rulemaking porate the adverse comment into a sub-
to issue the following types of rules: sequent direct final rule or may pub-
(1) Minor, substantive changes to reg- lish a notice of proposed rulemaking. A
ulations; notice of proposed rulemaking will pro-
(2) Incorporation by reference of the vide an opportunity for public com-
latest edition of technical or industry ment, generally a minimum of 60 days,
standards; and will be processed in accordance
(3) Extensions of compliance dates; with §§ 190.311–190.329.
and
(4) Other noncontroversial rules § 190.341 Special permits.
where the Administrator determines (a) What is a special permit? A special
that use of direct final rulemaking is permit is an order by which PHMSA
in the public interest, and that a regu- waives compliance with one or more of
lation is unlikely to result in adverse the Federal pipeline safety regulations
comment. under the standards set forth in 49
(b) The direct final rule will state an U.S.C. 60118(c) and subject to condi-
effective date. The direct final rule will tions set forth in the order. A special
also state that unless an adverse com- permit is issued to a pipeline operator
ment or notice of intent to file an ad- (or prospective operator) for specified
verse comment is received within the facilities that are or, absent waiver,
specified comment period, generally 60 would be subject to the regulation.
days after publication of the direct (b) How do I apply for a special permit?
final rule in the FEDERAL REGISTER, Applications for special permits must
the Administrator will issue a con- be submitted at least 120 days before
firmation document, generally within the requested effective date using any
15 days after the close of the comment of the following methods:
period, advising the public that the di- (1) Direct fax to PHMSA at: 202–366–
rect final rule will either become effec- 4566; or
tive on the date stated in the direct (2) Mail, express mail, or overnight
final rule or at least 30 days after the courier to the Associate Administrator
publication date of the confirmation for Pipeline Safety, Pipeline and Haz-
document, whichever is later. ardous Materials Safety Administra-
(c) For purposes of this section, an tion, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., East
adverse comment is one which explains Building, Washington, DC 20590.
why the rule would be inappropriate, (c) What information must be contained
including a challenge to the rule’s unin the application? Applications must
derlying premise or approach, or would contain the following information:
be ineffective or unacceptable without (1) The name, mailing address, and
a change. Comments that are frivolous telephone number of the applicant and
or insubstantial will not be considered whether the applicant is an operator;
adverse under this procedure. A com- (2) A detailed description of the pipe-
ment recommending a rule change in line facilities for which the special per-
addition to the rule will not be consid- mit is sought, including:
ered an adverse comment, unless the (i) The beginning and ending points
commenter states why the rule would of the pipeline mileage to be covered
be ineffective without the additional and the Counties and States in which it
change. is located;
(d) Only parties who filed comments (ii) Whether the pipeline is interstate
to a direct final rule issued under this or intrastate and a general description
409
§ 190.341 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
of the right-of-way including proximity or standard is not inconsistent with

of the affected segments to populated pipeline safety, the Associate Adminis-
areas and unusually sensitive areas; trator may grant the application, in
(iii) Relevant pipeline design and whole or in part, for a period of time
construction information including the from the date granted. Conditions may
year of installation, the material, be imposed on the grant if the Asso-
grade, diameter, wall thickness, and ciate Administrator concludes they are
coating type; and necessary to assure safety, environ-
(iv) Relevant operating information mental protection, or are otherwise in
including operating pressure, leak his- the public interest. If the Associate Ad-
tory, and most recent testing or assess- ministrator determines that the appli-
ment results; cation does not comply with the re-
(3) A list of the specific regulation(s) quirements of this section or that a
from which the applicant seeks relief; waiver is not justified, the application
(4) An explanation of the unique cir- will be denied. Whenever the Associate
cumstances that the applicant believes Administrator grants or denies an ap-
make the applicability of that regula- plication, notice of the decision will be
tion or standard (or portion thereof) provided to the applicant. PHMSA will
unnecessary or inappropriate for its fa- post all special permits on its Web site
cility; at http://www.phmsa.dot.gov/.
(5) A description of any measures or (e) How does PHMSA handle special
activities the applicant proposes to un- permit renewals? (1) The grantee of the
dertake as an alternative to compli- special permit must apply for a re-
ance with the relevant regulation, in- newal of the permit 180 days prior to
cluding an explanation of how such the permit expiration.
measures will mitigate any safety or (2) If, at least 180 days before an ex-
environmental risks; isting special permit expires the holder
(6) A description of any positive or
files an application for renewal that is
negative impacts on affected stake-
complete and conforms to the require-
holders and a statement indicating how
ments of this section, the special per-
operating the pipeline pursuant to a
mit will not expire until final adminis-
special permit would be in the public
trative action on the application for re-
interest;
newal has been taken:
(7) A certification that operation of
the applicant’s pipeline under the re- (i) Direct fax to PHMSA at: 202–366–
quested special permit would not be in- 4566; or
consistent with pipeline safety; (ii) Express mail, or overnight cou-
(8) Any other information PHMSA rier to the Associate Administrator for
may need to process the application in- Pipeline Safety, Pipeline and Haz-
cluding environmental analysis where ardous Materials Safety Administra-
necessary. tion, 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE.,
(d) How does PHMSA handle special Washington, DC 20590.
permit applications?—(1) Public notice. (f) What information must be included
Upon receipt of an application or rein the renewal application? (1) The re-
newal of a special permit, PHMSA will newal application must include a copy
provide notice to the public of its in- of the original special permit, the
tent to consider the application and in- docket number on the special permit,
vite comment. In addition, PHMSA and the following information as appli-
may consult with other Federal agen- cable:
cies before granting or denying an ap- (i) A summary report in accordance
plication or renewal on matters that with the requirements of the original
PHMSA believes may have significance special permit including verification
for proceedings under their areas of re- that the grantee’s operations and
sponsibility. maintenance plan (O&M Plan) is con-
(2) Grants, renewals, and denials. If the sistent with the conditions of the spe-
Associate Administrator determines cial permit;
that the application complies with the (ii) Name, mailing address and tele-
requirements of this section and that phone number of the special permit
the waiver of the relevant regulation grantee;
410
(iii) Location of special permit— (I) Aerial Photography: Special per-

areas on the pipeline where the special mit segment and special permit inspec-
permit is applicable including: Diame- tion area, if applicable.
ter, mile posts, county, and state; (2) PHMSA may request additional
(iv) Applicable usage of the special operational, integrity or environ-
permit—original and future; and mental assessment information prior
(v) Data for the special permit seg- to granting any request for special per-
ment and area identified in the special mit renewal.
permit as needing additional inspec- (3) The existing special permit will
tions to include, as applicable: remain in effect until PHMSA acts on
(A) Pipe attributes: Pipe diameter, the application for renewal by granting
wall thickness, grade, seam type; and or denying the request.
pipe coating including girth weld coat- (g) Can a special permit be requested on
ing; an emergency basis? Yes. PHMSA may
grant an application for an emergency
(B) Operating Pressure: Maximum al-
special permit without notice and com-
lowable operating pressure (MAOP);
ment or hearing if the Associate Ad-
class location (including boundaries on
ministrator determines that such ac-
aerial photography);
tion is in the public interest, is not in-
(C) High Consequence Areas (HCAs): consistent with pipeline safety, and is
HCA boundaries on aerial photography; necessary to address an actual or im-
(D) Material Properties: Pipeline ma- pending emergency involving pipeline
terial documentation for all pipe, fit- transportation. For purposes of this
tings, flanges, and any other facilities section, an emergency event may be
included in the special permit. Mate- local, regional, or national in scope and
rial documentation must include: Yield includes significant fuel supply disrup-
strength, tensile strength, chemical tions and natural or manmade disas-
composition, wall thickness, and seam ters such as hurricanes, floods, earth-
type; quakes, terrorist acts, biological out-
(E) Test Pressure: Hydrostatic test breaks, releases of dangerous radio-
pressure and date including pressure logical, chemical, or biological mate-
and temperature charts and logs and rials, war-related activities, or other
any known test failures or leaks; similar events. PHMSA will determine
(F) In-line inspection (ILI): Summary on a case-by-case basis what duration
of ILI survey results from all ILI tools is necessary to address the emergency.
used on the special permit segments However, as required by statute, no
during the previous five years or latest emergency special permit may be
ILI survey result; issued for a period of more than 60
(G) Integrity Data and Integration: days. Each emergency special permit
The following information, as applica- will automatically expire on the date
ble, for the past five (5) years: Hydro- specified in the permit. Emergency spe-
static test pressure including any cial permits may be renewed upon ap-
known test failures or leaks; cas- plication to PHMSA only after notice
ings(any shorts); any in-service rup- and opportunity for a hearing on the
tures or leaks; close interval survey renewal.
(CIS) surveys; depth of cover surveys; (h) How do I apply for an emergency
rectifier readings; test point survey special permit? Applications for emer-
readings; alternating current/direct gency special permits may be sub-
current (AC/DC) interference surveys; mitted to PHMSA using any of the fol-
pipe coating surveys; pipe coating and lowing methods:
anomaly evaluations from pipe exca- (1) Direct fax to the Crisis Manage-
vations; stress corrosion cracking ment Center at: 202–366–3768;
(SCC), selective seam weld corrosion (2) Direct e-mail to PHMSA at:
(SSWC) and hard spot excavations and phmsa.pipeline-
findings; and pipe exposures from en- emergencyspecpermit@dot.gov; or
croachments; (3) Express mail/overnight courier to
(H) In-service: Any in-service rup- the Associate Administrator for Pipe-
tures or leaks including repair type line Safety, Pipeline and Hazardous
and failure investigation findings; and Materials Safety Administration, 1200
411
§ 190.341 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
New Jersey Avenue, SE., East Build- (v) The holder has failed to comply
ing, Washington, DC 20590. with any material term or condition of
(i) What must be contained in an appli- the special permit.
cation for an emergency special permit? In (2) Except as provided in paragraph
addition to the information required (h)(3) of this section, before a special
under paragraph (c) of this section, ap- permit is modified, suspended or re-
plications for emergency special per- voked, PHMSA will notify the holder
mits must include: in writing of the proposed action and
(1) An explanation of the actual or the reasons for it, and provide an op-
impending emergency and how the ap- portunity to show cause why the pro-
plicant is affected; posed action should not be taken.
(2) A citation of the regulations that (i) The holder may file a written re-
are implicated and the specific reasons sponse that shows cause why the pro-
the permit is necessary to address the posed action should not be taken with-
emergency (e.g., lack of accessibility, in 30 days of receipt of notice of the
damaged equipment, insufficient man- proposed action.
power); (ii) After considering the holder’s
(3) A statement indicating how oper- written response, or after 30 days have
ating the pipeline pursuant to an emer- passed without response since receipt
gency special permit is in the public of the notice, PHMSA will notify the
interest (e.g., continuity of service, holder in writing of the final decision
service restoration); with a brief statement of reasons.
(4) A description of any proposed al- (3) If necessary to avoid a risk of sig-
ternatives to compliance with the reg- nificant harm to persons, property, or
ulation (e.g., additional inspections the environment, PHMSA may in the
and tests, shortened reassessment in- notification declare the proposed ac-
tervals); and tion immediately effective.
(5) A description of any measures to (4) Unless otherwise specified, the
be taken after the emergency situation terms and conditions of a corrective
or permit expires—whichever comes action order, compliance order, or
first—to confirm long-term operational other order applicable to a pipeline fa-
reliability of the pipeline facility. cility covered by a special permit will
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (g): If PHMSA deter- take precedence over the terms of the
mines that handling of the application on an special permit.
emergency basis is not warranted, PHMSA (5) A special permit holder may seek
will notify the applicant and process the ap- reconsideration of a decision under
plication under normal special permit proce- paragraph (h) of this section as pro-
dures of this section. vided in paragraph (i) of this section.
(j) In what circumstances will PHMSA (k) Can a denial of a request for a spe-
revoke, suspend, or modify a special per- cial permit or a revocation of an existing
mit? (1) PHMSA may revoke, suspend, special permit be appealed? Reconsider-
or modify a special permit on a finding ation of the denial of an application for
that: a special permit or a revocation of an
(i) Intervening changes in Federal existing special permit may be sought
law mandate revocation, suspension, or by petition to the Associate Adminis-
modification of the special permit; trator. Petitions for reconsideration
(ii) Based on a material change in must be received by PHMSA within 20
conditions or circumstances, continued calendar days of the notice of the grant
adherence to the terms of the special or denial and must contain a brief
permit would be inconsistent with safe- statement of the issue and an expla-
ty; nation of why the petitioner believes
(iii) The application contained inac- that the decision being appealed is not
curate or incomplete information, and in the public interest. The Associate
the special permit would not have been Administrator may grant or deny, in
granted had the application been accu- whole or in part, any petition for re-
rate and complete; consideration without further pro-
(iv) The application contained delib- ceedings. The Associate Administra-

erately inaccurate or incomplete infor- tor’s decision is the final administra-
mation; or tive action.
412
(l) Are documents related to an applica- your request to protect confidential

tion for a special permit available for pub- commercial information under the cri-
lic inspection? Documents related to an teria set forth in the Freedom of Infor-
application, including the application mation Act (FOIA), 5 U.S.C. 552, includ-
itself, are available for public inspec- ing following the consultation proce-
tion on regulations.gov or the Docket dures set out in the Departmental
Operations Facility to the extent such FOIA regulations, 49 CFR 7.29. If
documents do not include information PHMSA decides to disclose the infor-
exempt from public disclosure under 5 mation over your objections, we will
U.S.C. 552(b). Applicants may request notify you in writing at least five busi-
confidential treatment under part 7 of ness days before the intended disclo-
this title. sure date.
(m) Am I subject to enforcement action [Amdt. 190–19, 82 FR 7995, Jan. 23, 2017]
for non-compliance with the terms and
conditions of a special permit? Yes.
PHMSA inspects for compliance with Subpart E—Cost Recovery for
the terms and conditions of special per- Design Reviews
mits and if a probable violation is iden-
tified, PHMSA will initiate one or SOURCE: Amdt. 190–19, 82 FR 7996, Jan. 23,
more of the enforcement actions under 2017, unless otherwise noted.
subpart B of this part.
§ 190.401 Scope.
[73 FR 16568, Mar. 28, 2008, as amended at 74
FR 2893, Jan. 16, 2009; Amdt. 190–16, 78 FR
If PHMSA conducts a facility design
58914, Sept. 25, 2013; Amdt. 190–19, 82 FR 7995, and/or construction safety review or in-
Jan. 23, 2017] spection in connection with a proposal
to construct, expand, or operate a gas,
§ 190.343 Information made available hazardous liquid or carbon dioxide
to the public and request for pro- pipeline facility, or a liquefied natural
tection of confidential commercial gas facility that meets the applica-
information. bility requirements in § 190.403, PHMSA
When you submit information to may require the applicant proposing
PHMSA during a rulemaking pro- the project to pay the costs incurred by
ceeding, as part of your application for PHMSA relating to such review, in-
special permit or renewal, or for any cluding the cost of design and con-
other reason, we may make that infor- struction safety reviews or inspections.
mation publicly available unless you
ask that we keep the information con- § 190.403 Applicability.
fidential. The following paragraph specifies
(a) Asking for protection of confidential which projects will be subject to the
commercial information. You may ask us cost recovery requirements of this sec-
to give confidential treatment to infor- tion.
mation you give to the agency by tak- (a) This section applies to any
ing the following steps: project that—
(1) Mark ‘‘confidential’’ on each page (1) Has design and construction costs
of the original document you would totaling at least $2,500,000,000, as peri-
like to keep confidential. odically adjusted by PHMSA, to take
(2) Send us, along with the original into account increases in the Consumer
document, a second copy of the origi- Price Index for all urban consumers
nal document with the confidential published by the Department of Labor,
commercial information deleted. based on—
(3) Explain why the information you (i) The cost estimate provided to the
are submitting is confidential commer- Federal Energy Regulatory Commis-
cial information. sion in an application for a certificate
(b) PHMSA decision. PHMSA will of public convenience and necessity for
treat as confidential the information a gas pipeline facility or an application
that you submitted in accordance with for authorization for a liquefied nat-
this section, unless we notify you oth- ural gas pipeline facility; or
erwise. If PHMSA decides to disclose (ii) A good faith estimate developed
the information, PHMSA will review by the applicant proposing a hazardous
413
§ 190.405 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
liquid or carbon dioxide pipeline facil- § 190.407 Master Agreement.

ity and submitted to the Associate Ad- PHMSA and the applicant will enter
ministrator. The good faith estimate into an agreement within 60 days after
for design and construction costs must PHMSA received notification from the
include all of the applicable cost items applicant provided in § 190.405, out-
contained in the Federal Energy Regu- lining PHMSA’s recovery of the costs
latory Commission application ref- associated with the facility design
erenced in § 190.403(a)(1)(i) for a gas or safety review.
LNG facility. In addition, an applicant (a) A Master Agreement, at a min-
must take into account all survey, de- imum, includes:
sign, material, permitting, right-of (1) Itemized list of direct costs to be
way acquisition, construction, testing, recovered by PHMSA;
commissioning, start-up, construction (2) Scope of work for conducting the
financing, environmental protection, facility design safety review and an es-
inspection, material transportation, timated total cost;
sales tax, project contingency, and all (3) Description of the method of peri-
other applicable costs, including all odic billing, payment, and auditing of
segments, facilities, and multi-year cost recovery fees;
phases of the project; (4) Minimum account balance which
(2) Uses new or novel technologies or the applicant must maintain with
design, as defined in § 190.3. PHMSA at all times;
(b) The Associate Administrator may (5) Provisions for reconciling dif-
not collect design safety review fees ferences between total amount billed
under this section and 49 U.S.C. 60301 and the final cost of the design review,
for the same design safety review. including provisions for returning any
(c) The Associate Administrator, excess payments to the applicant at
after receipt of the design specifica- the conclusion of the project;
tions, construction plans and proce- (6) A principal point of contact for
dures, and related materials, deter- both PHMSA and the applicant; and
mines if cost recovery is necessary. (7) Provisions for terminating the
The Associate Administrator’s deter- agreement.
mination is based on the amount of (8) A project reimbursement cost
PHMSA resources needed to ensure schedule based upon the project timing
safety and environmental protection. and scope.
(b) [Reserved]
§ 190.405 Notification.
For any new pipeline facility con- § 190.409 Fee structure.
struction project in which PHMSA will The fee charged is based on the direct
conduct a design review, the applicant costs that PHMSA incurs in con-
proposing the project must notify ducting the facility design safety re-
PHMSA and provide the design speci- view (including construction review
fications, construction plans and proce- and inspections), and will be based only
dures, project schedule and related ma- on costs necessary for conducting the
terials at least 120 days prior to the facility design safety review. ‘‘Nec-
commencement of any of the following essary for’’ means that but for the fa-
activities: Route surveys for construc- cility design safety review, the costs
tion, material manufacturing, offsite would not have been incurred and that
facility fabrications, construction the costs cover only those activities
equipment move-in activities, onsite or and items without which the facility
offsite fabrications, personnel support design safety review cannot be com-
facility construction, and any offsite or pleted.
onsite facility construction. To the (a) Costs qualifying for cost recovery
maximum extent practicable, but not include, but are not limited to—
later than 90 days after receiving such (1) Personnel costs based upon total
design specifications, construction cost to PHMSA;
plans and procedures, and related ma- (2) Travel, lodging and subsistence;
terials, PHMSA will provide written (3) Vehicle mileage;

comments, feedback, and guidance on (4) Other direct services, materials
the project. and supplies;
414
(5) Other direct costs as may be spec- 191.13 Distribution systems reporting trans-
ified in the Master Agreement. mission pipelines; transmission or gath-
(b) [Reserved] ering systems reporting distribution
pipelines.
§ 190.411 Procedures for billing and 191.15 Transmission systems; gathering sys-
payment of fee. tems; liquefied natural gas facilities; and
underground natural gas storage facili-
All PHMSA cost calculations for bill- ties: Incident report.
ing purposes are determined from the 191.17 Transmission systems; gathering sys-
best available PHMSA records. tems; liquefied natural gas facilities; and
(a) PHMSA bills an applicant for cost underground natural gas storage facili-
recovery fees as specified in the Master ties: Annual report.
191.21 OMB control number assigned to in-
Agreement, but the applicant will not
formation collection.
be billed more frequently than quar- 191.22 National Registry of Pipeline and
terly. LNG operators.
(1) PHMSA will itemize cost recovery 191.23 Reporting safety-related conditions.
bills in sufficient detail to allow inde- 191.25 Filing safety-related condition re-
pendent verification of calculations. ports.
(2) [Reserved] 191.29 National Pipeline Mapping System.
(b) PHMSA will monitor the appli- AUTHORITY: 49 U.S.C. 5121, 60102, 60103,
cant’s account balance. Should the ac- 60104, 60108, 60117, 60118, 60124, 60132, and 60141;
count balance fall below the required and 49 CFR 1.97.
minimum balance specified in the Mas- EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 84 FR 52242, Oct.
ter Agreement, PHMSA may request at 1, 2019, the authority citation for part 191
any time the applicant submit pay- was revised, effective July 1, 2020. For the
ment within 30 days to maintain the convenience of the user, the revised text is
minimum balance. set forth as follows:
(c) PHMSA will provide an updated AUTHORITY: 30 U.S.C. 185(w)(3), 49 U.S.C.
estimate of costs to the applicant on or 5121, 60101 et. seq., and 49 CFR 1.97.
near October 1st of each calendar year.
§ 191.1 Scope.
(d) Payment of cost recovery fees is
due within 30 days of issuance of a bill (a) This part prescribes requirements
for the fees. If payment is not made for the reporting of incidents, safety-
within 30 days, PHMSA may charge an related conditions, annual pipeline
annual rate of interest (as set by the summary data, National Operator Reg-
Department of Treasury’s Statutory istry information, and other miscella-
Debt Collection Authorities) on any neous conditions by operators of under-
outstanding debt, as specified in the ground natural gas storage facilities
Master Agreement. and natural gas pipeline facilities lo-
(e) Payment of the cost recovery fee cated in the United States or Puerto
by the applicant does not obligate or Rico, including underground natural
prevent PHMSA from taking any par- gas storage facilities and pipelines
ticular action during safety inspections within the limits of the Outer Conti-
on the project. nental Shelf as that term is defined in
the Outer Continental Shelf Lands Act
PART 191—TRANSPORTATION OF (43 U.S.C. 1331).
(b) This part does not apply to—
NATURAL AND OTHER GAS BY (1) Offshore gathering of gas in State
PIPELINE; ANNUAL REPORTS, IN- waters upstream from the outlet flange
CIDENT REPORTS, AND SAFETY- of each facility where hydrocarbons are
RELATED CONDITION REPORTS produced or where produced hydro-
carbons are first separated, dehy-
Sec. drated, or otherwise processed, which-
191.1 Scope. ever facility is farther downstream;
191.3 Definitions.
(2) Pipelines on the Outer Conti-
191.5 Immediate notice of certain incidents.
191.7 Report submission requirements.
nental Shelf (OCS) that are producer-
191.9 Distribution system: Incident report. operated and cross into State waters
191.11 Distribution system: Annual report. without first connecting to a trans-

191.12 Distribution Systems: Mechanical porting operator’s facility on the OCS,
Fitting Failure reports upstream (generally seaward) of the
415
§ 191.3 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
last valve on the last production facil- (i) A death, or personal injury neces-
ity on the OCS. Safety equipment pro- sitating in-patient hospitalization;
tecting PHMSA-regulated pipeline seg- (ii) Estimated property damage of
ments is not excluded. Producing oper- $50,000 or more, including loss to the
ators for those pipeline segments up- operator and others, or both, but ex-
stream of the last valve of the last pro- cluding cost of gas lost; or
duction facility on the OCS may peti- (iii) Unintentional estimated gas loss
tion the Administrator, or designee, for of three million cubic feet or more.
approval to operate under PHMSA reg- (2) An event that results in an emer-
ulations governing pipeline design, gency shutdown of an LNG facility or
construction, operation, and mainte- an underground natural gas storage fa-
nance under 49 CFR 190.9.
cility. Activation of an emergency
(3) Pipelines on the Outer Conti-
shutdown system for reasons other
nental Shelf upstream of the point at
than an actual emergency does not
which operating responsibility trans-
constitute an incident.
fers from a producing operator to a
transporting operator; or (3) An event that is significant in the
(4) Onshore gathering of gas— judgment of the operator, even though
(i) Through a pipeline that operates it did not meet the criteria of para-
at less than 0 psig (0 kPa); graph (1) or (2) of this definition.
(ii) Through a pipeline that is not a LNG facility means a liquefied natural
regulated onshore gathering line (as gas facility as defined in § 193.2007 of
determined in § 192.8 of this subpart 193 of this chapter;
chapter); and Master Meter System means a pipeline
(iii) Within inlets of the Gulf of Mex- system for distributing gas within, but
ico, except for the requirements in not limited to, a definable area, such as
§ 192.612. a mobile home park, housing project,
or apartment complex, where the oper-
[Amdt. 191–5, 49 FR 18960, May 3, 1984, as
amended by Amdt. 191–6, 53 FR 24949, July 1, ator purchases metered gas from an
1988; Amdt. 191–11, 61 FR 27793, June 3, 1996; outside source for resale through a gas
Amdt. 191–12, 62 FR 61695, Nov. 19, 1997; distribution pipeline system. The gas
Amdt. 191–15, 68 FR 46111, Aug. 5, 2003; 70 FR distribution pipeline system supplies
11139, Mar. 8, 2005; 75 FR 72904, Nov. 26, 2010; the ultimate consumer who either pur-
Amdt. 191–24, 81 FR 91871, Dec. 19, 2016] chases the gas directly through a
meter or by other means, such as by
§ 191.3 Definitions.
rents;
As used in this part and the PHMSA Municipality means a city, county, or
Forms referenced in this part— any other political subdivision of a
Administrator means the Adminis- State;
trator, Pipeline and Hazardous Mate- Offshore means beyond the line of or-
rials Safety Administration or his or dinary low water along that portion of
her delegate
the coast of the United States that is
Confirmed Discovery means when it
in direct contact with the open seas
can be reasonably determined, based on
and beyond the line marking the sea-
information available to the operator
ward limit of inland waters;
at the time a reportable event has oc-
curred, even if only based on a prelimi- Operator means a person who engages
nary evaluation. in the transportation of gas;
Gas means natural gas, flammable Outer Continental Shelf means all sub-
gas, or gas which is toxic or corrosive; merged lands lying seaward and out-
Incident means any of the following side the area of lands beneath navi-
events: gable waters as defined in Section 2 of
(1) An event that involves a release of the Submerged Lands Act (43 U.S.C.
gas from a pipeline, gas from an under- 1301) and of which the subsoil and sea-
ground natural gas storage facility, liq- bed appertain to the United States and
uefied natural gas, liquefied petroleum are subject to its jurisdiction and con-
gas, refrigerant gas, or gas from an trol.

LNG facility, and that results in one or Person means any individual, firm,
more of the following consequences: joint venture, partnership, corporation,
416
association, State, municipality, coop- evant to the cause of the incident or

erative association, or joint stock asso- extent of the damages.
ciation, and includes any trustee, re- (c) Within 48 hours after the con-
ceiver, assignee, or personal represent- firmed discovery of an incident, to the
ative thereof; extent practicable, an operator must
Pipeline or Pipeline System means all revise or confirm its initial telephonic
parts of those physical facilities notice required in paragraph (b) of this
through which gas moves in transpor- section with an estimate of the amount
tation, including, but not limited to, of product released, an estimate of the
pipe, valves, and other appurtenance number of fatalities and injuries, and
attached to pipe, compressor units, me- all other significant facts that are
tering stations, regulator stations, de- known by the operator that are rel-
livery stations, holders, and fabricated evant to the cause of the incident or
assemblies. extent of the damages. If there are no
State includes each of the several changes or revisions to the initial re-
States, the District of Columbia, and port, the operator must confirm the es-
the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico;
timates in its initial report.
Transportation of gas means the gath-
ering, transmission, or distribution of [Amdt. 191–4, 47 FR 32720, July 29, 1982, as
gas by pipeline, or the storage of gas in amended by Amdt. 191–5, 49 FR 18960, May 3,
or affecting interstate or foreign com- 1984; Amdt. 191–8, 54 FR 40878, Oct. 4, 1989; 75
merce. FR 72905, Nov. 26, 2010; Amdt. 191–25, 82 FR
Underground natural gas storage facil- 7997, Jan. 23, 2017]
ity means an underground natural gas
storage facility as defined in § 192.3 of § 191.7 Report submission require-
ments.
this chapter.
(a) General. Except as provided in
[35 FR 320, Jan. 8, 1970, as amended by Amdt.
191–5, 49 FR 18960, May 3, 1984; Amdt. 191–10,
paragraphs (b) and (e) of this section,
61 FR 18516, Apr. 26, 1996; Amdt. 191–12, 62 FR an operator must submit each report
61695, Nov. 19, 1997; 68 FR 11749, Mar. 12, 2003; required by this part electronically to
70 FR 11139, Mar. 8, 2005; 75 FR 72905, Nov. 26, the Pipeline and Hazardous Materials
2010; Amdt. 191–24, 81 FR 91871, Dec. 19, 2016; Safety Administration at http://por-
Amdt. 191–25, 82 FR 7997, Jan. 23, 2017] tal.phmsa.dot.gov/pipeline unless an al-
ternative reporting method is author-
§ 191.5 Immediate notice of certain in-
cidents. ized in accordance with paragraph (d)
of this section.
(a) At the earliest practicable mo-
(b) Exceptions: An operator is not re-
ment following discovery, but no later
quired to submit a safety-related con-
than one hour after confirmed dis-
dition report (§ 191.25) electronically.
covery, each operator must give notice
in accordance with paragraph (b) of (c) Safety-related conditions. An oper-
this section of each incident as defined ator must submit concurrently to the
in § 191.3. applicable State agency a safety-re-
(b) Each notice required by para- lated condition report required by
graph (a) of this section must be made § 191.23 for intrastate pipeline transpor-
to the National Response Center either tation or when the State agency acts
by telephone to 800–424–8802 (in Wash- as an agent of the Secretary with re-
ington, DC, 202 267–2675) or electroni- spect to interstate transmission facili-
cally at http://www.nrc.uscg.mil and ties.
must include the following informa- (d) Alternative Reporting Method. If
tion: electronic reporting imposes an undue
(1) Names of operator and person burden and hardship, an operator may
making report and their telephone submit a written request for an alter-
numbers. native reporting method to the Infor-
(2) The location of the incident. mation Resources Manager, Office of
(3) The time of the incident. Pipeline Safety, Pipeline and Haz-
(4) The number of fatalities and per- ardous Materials Safety Administra-
sonal injuries, if any. tion, PHP–20, 1200 New Jersey Avenue,

(5) All other significant facts that are SE, Washington DC 20590. The request
known by the operator that are rel- must describe the undue burden and
417
§ 191.9 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
hardship. PHMSA will review the re- (b) Not required. The annual report re-
quest and may authorize, in writing, an quirement in this section does not
alternative reporting method. An au- apply to a master meter system or to a
thorization will state the period for petroleum gas system that serves fewer
which it is valid, which may be indefi- than 100 customers from a single
nite. An operator must contact source.
PHMSA at 202–366–8075, or electroni-
[75 FR 72905, Nov. 26, 2010]
cally to
informationresourcesmanager@dot.gov or § 191.12 Distribution Systems: Mechan-
make arrangements for submitting a ical Fitting Failure Reports
report that is due after a request for al-
Each mechanical fitting failure, as
ternative reporting is submitted but
required by § 192.1009, must be sub-
before an authorization or denial is re-
mitted on a Mechanical Fitting Failure
ceived.
Report Form PHMSA F–7100.1–2. An op-
(e) National Pipeline Mapping System
erator must submit a mechanical fit-
(NPMS). An operator must provide the
ting failure report for each mechanical
NPMS data to the address identified in
fitting failure that occurs within a cal-
the NPMS Operator Standards manual
endar year not later than March 15 of
available at www.npms.phmsa.dot.gov or
the following year (for example, all me-
by contacting the PHMSA Geographic
chanical failure reports for calendar
Information Systems Manager at (202)
year 2011 must be submitted no later
366–4595.
than March 15, 2012). Alternatively, an
[75 FR 72905, Nov. 26, 2010, as amended at by operator may elect to submit its re-
Amdt. 191–23, 80 FR 12777, Mar. 11, 2015] ports throughout the year. In addition,
an operator must also report this infor-
§ 191.9 Distribution system: Incident mation to the State pipeline safety au-
report. thority if a State has obtained regu-
(a) Except as provided in paragraph latory authority over the operator’s
(c) of this section, each operator of a pipeline.
distribution pipeline system shall sub-
[76 FR 5499, Feb. 1, 2011]
mit Department of Transportation
Form RSPA F 7100.1 as soon as prac- § 191.13 Distribution systems reporting
ticable but not more than 30 days after transmission pipelines; trans-
detection of an incident required to be mission or gathering systems re-
reported under § 191.5. porting distribution pipelines.
(b) When additional relevant infor- Each operator, primarily engaged in
mation is obtained after the report is gas distribution, who also operates gas
submitted under paragraph (a) of this transmission or gathering pipelines
section, the operator shall make sup- shall submit separate reports for these
plementary reports as deemed nec- pipelines as required by §§ 191.15 and
essary with a clear reference by date 191.17. Each operator, primarily en-
and subject to the original report. gaged in gas transmission or gathering,
(c) Master meter operators are not who also operates gas distribution
required to submit an incident report pipelines shall submit separate reports
as required by this section. for these pipelines as required by
[Amdt. 191–5, 49 FR 18960, May 3, 1984, as §§ 191.9 and 191.11.
amended at 75 FR 72905, Nov. 26, 2010] [Amdt. 191–5, 49 FR 18961, May 3, 1984]
§ 191.11 Distribution system: Annual § 191.15 Transmission systems; gath-
report. ering systems; liquefied natural gas
(a) General. Except as provided in facilities; and underground natural
paragraph (b) of this section, each op- gas storage facilities: Incident re-
erator of a distribution pipeline system port.
must submit an annual report for that (a) Transmission or Gathering. Each
system on DOT Form PHMSA F 7100.1– operator of a transmission or a gath-
1. This report must be submitted each ering pipeline system must submit
year, not later than March 15, for the DOT Form PHMSA F 7100.2 as soon as
preceding calendar year. practicable but not more than 30 days
418
after detection of an incident required must be submitted each year, not later
to be reported under § 191.5 of this part. than March 15, for the preceding cal-
(b) LNG. Each operator of a liquefied endar year, except that for the 2010 re-
natural gas plant or facility must sub- porting year the report must be sub-
mit DOT Form PHMSA F 7100.3 as soon mitted by June 15, 2011.
as practicable but not more than 30 (b) LNG. Each operator of a liquefied
days after detection of an incident re- natural gas facility must submit an an-
quired to be reported under § 191.5 of nual report for that system on DOT
this part. Form PHMSA 7100.3–1 This report must
(c) Underground natural gas storage fa- be submitted each year, not later than
cility. Each operator of an underground March 15, for the preceding calendar
natural gas storage facility must sub- year, except that for the 2010 reporting
mit DOT Form PHMSA F7100.2 as soon year the report must be submitted by
as practicable but not more than 30 June 15, 2011.
days after detection of an incident re- (c) Underground natural gas storage fa-
quired to be reported under § 191.5. cility. Each operator of an underground
(d) Supplemental report. Where addi- natural gas storage facility must sub-
tional related information is obtained mit an annual report on DOT PHMSA
after a report is submitted under para- Form 7100.4–1 by March 15, for the pre-
graph (a), (b) or (c) of this section, the ceding calendar year except that the
operator must make a supplemental re- first report must be submitted by July
port as soon as practicable with a clear 18, 2017.
reference by date to the original re-
port. [75 FR 72905, Nov. 26, 2010, as amended by
Amdt. 191–24, 81 FR 91871, Dec. 19, 2016]
[75 FR 72905, Nov. 26, 2010; as amended by
Amdt. 191–24, 81 FR 91871, Dec. 19, 2016] § 191.21 OMB control number assigned
to information collection.
§ 191.17 Transmission systems; gath-
ering systems; liquefied natural gas This section displays the control
facilities; and underground natural number assigned by the Office of Man-
gas storage facilities: Annual re- agement and Budget (OMB) to the in-
port. formation collection requirements in
(a) Transmission or Gathering. Each this part. The Paperwork Reduction
operator of a transmission or a gath- Act requires agencies to display a cur-
ering pipeline system must submit an rent control number assigned by the
annual report for that system on DOT Director of OMB for each agency infor-
Form PHMSA 7100.2.1. This report mation collection requirement.
OMB CONTROL NUMBER 2137–0522
Section of 49 CFR part 191 where identi- Form No.
fied
191.5 ........................................................... Telephonic.

191.9 ........................................................... PHMSA 7100.1, PHMSA 7100.3.
191.11 ......................................................... PHMSA 7100.1–1, PHMSA 7100.3–1.
191.12 ......................................................... PHMSA 7100.1–2.
191.15 ......................................................... PHMSA 7100.2, PHMSA 7100.3.
191.17 ......................................................... PHMSA 7100.2–1, PHMSA 7100.3–1.PHMSA 7100.4–1.
191.22 ......................................................... PHMSA 1000.1, PHMSA 1000.2.
[75 FR 72905, Nov. 26, 2010, as amended by an Operator Identification Number

Amdt. 191–24, 81 FR 91871, Dec. 19, 2016] (OPID). An OPID is assigned to an op-
erator for the pipeline or pipeline sys-
§ 191.22 National Registry of Pipeline
and LNG operators. tem for which the operator has pri-
mary responsibility. To obtain an
(a) OPID request. Effective January 1, OPID, an operator must complete an
2012, each operator of a gas pipeline, OPID Assignment Request DOT Form
gas pipeline facility, underground nat- PHMSA F 1000.1 through the National
ural gas storage facility, LNG plant or
LNG facility must obtain from PHMSA
419
§ 191.23 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
Registry of Pipeline, Underground Nat- (i) A change in the primary entity re-
ural Gas Storage Facility, and LNG sponsible (i.e., with an assigned OPID)
Operators in accordance with § 191.7. for managing or administering a safety
(b) OPID validation. An operator who program required by this part covering
has already been assigned one or more pipeline facilities operated under mul-
OPID by January 1, 2011, must validate tiple OPIDs.
the information associated with each (ii) A change in the name of the oper-
OPID through the National Registry of ator;
Pipeline, Underground Natural Gas (iii) A change in the entity (e.g.,
Storage Facility, and LNG Operators company, municipality) responsible for
at http://opsweb.phmsa.dot.gov, and cor- an existing pipeline, pipeline segment,
rect that information as necessary, no pipeline facility, underground natural
later than June 30, 2012. gas storage facility, or LNG facility;
(c) Changes. Each operator of a gas (iv) The acquisition or divestiture of
pipeline, gas pipeline facility, under- 50 or more miles of a pipeline or pipe-
ground natural gas storage facility, line system subject to Part 192 of this
LNG plant, or LNG facility must notify subchapter;
PHMSA electronically through the Na- (v) The acquisition or divestiture of
tional Registry of Pipeline, Under- an existing LNG plant or LNG facility
ground Natural Gas Storage Facility, subject to Part 193 of this subchapter;
and LNG Operators at http:// or
opsweb.phmsa.dot.gov of certain events. (vi) The acquisition or divestiture of
(1) An operator must notify PHMSA an existing underground natural gas
of any of the following events not later storage facility subject to part 192 of
than 60 days before the event occurs: this subchapter.
(i) Construction or any planned reha- (d) Reporting. An operator must use
bilitation, replacement, modification, the OPID issued by PHMSA for all re-
upgrade, uprate, or update of a facility, porting requirements covered under
other than a section of line pipe, that this subchapter and for submissions to
costs $10 million or more. If 60 day no- the National Pipeline Mapping System.
tice is not feasible because of an emer- [Amdt. 191–21, 75 FR 72906, Nov. 26, 2010, as
gency, an operator must notify PHMSA amended by Amdt. 191–24, 81 FR 91871, Dec.
as soon as practicable; 19, 2016; Amdt. 191–25, 82 FR 7997, Jan. 23,
(ii) Construction of 10 or more miles 2017]
of a new or replacement pipeline;
(iii) Construction of a new LNG plant § 191.23 Reporting safety-related con-
or LNG facility; or ditions.
(iv) Construction of a new under- (a) Except as provided in paragraph
ground natural gas storage facility or (b) of this section, each operator shall
the abandonment, drilling or well report in accordance with § 191.25 the
workover (including replacement of existence of any of the following safe-
wellhead, tubing, or a new casing) of an ty-related conditions involving facili-
injection, withdrawal, monitoring, or ties in service:
observation well for an underground (1) In the case of a pipeline (other
natural gas storage facility. than an LNG facility) that operates at
(v) Reversal of product flow direction a hoop stress of 20 percent or more of
when the reversal is expected to last its specified minimum yield strength,
more than 30 days. This notification is general corrosion that has reduced the
not required for pipeline systems al- wall thickness to less than that re-
ready designed for bi-directional flow; quired for the maximum allowable op-
or erating pressure, and localized corro-
(vi) A pipeline converted for service sion pitting to a degree where leakage
under § 192.14 of this chapter, or a might result.
change in commodity as reported on (2) In the case of an underground nat-
the annual report as required by ural gas storage facility, including in-
§ 191.17. jection, withdrawal, monitoring, or ob-
(2) An operator must notify PHMSA servation well, general corrosion that
of any of the following events not later has reduced the wall thickness to less
than 60 days after the event occurs: than that required for the maximum
420
well operating pressure, and localized pipeline or an underground natural gas

corrosion pitting to a degree where storage facility, including injection,
leakage might result. withdrawal, monitoring, or observation
(3) Unintended movement or abnor- well for an underground natural gas
mal loading by environmental causes, storage facility, or an LNG facility
such as an earthquake, landslide, or that contains or processes gas or LNG.
flood, that impairs the serviceability of (b) A report is not required for any
a pipeline or the structural integrity or safety-related condition that—
reliability of an underground natural (1) Exists on a master meter system
gas storage facility, including injec- or a customer-owned service line;
tion, withdrawal, monitoring, or obser- (2) Is an incident or results in an in-
vation well for an underground natural cident before the deadline for filing the
gas storage facility, or LNG facility safety-related condition report;
that contains, controls, or processes (3) Exists on a pipeline (other than an
gas or LNG. LNG facility or Underground Natural
(4) Any crack or other material de- Gas Storage facility) that is more than
fect that impairs the structural integ- 220 yards (200 meters) from any build-
rity or reliability of an underground ing intended for human occupancy or
natural gas storage facility or LNG fa- outdoor place of assembly, except that
cility that contains, controls, or proc- reports are required for conditions
esses gas or LNG. within the right-of-way of an active
(5) Any material defect or physical railroad, paved road, street, or high-
damage that impairs the serviceability way; or
of a pipeline that operates at a hoop (4) Is corrected by repair or replace-
stress of 20% or more of its specified ment in accordance with applicable
minimum yield strength or under- safety standards before the deadline for
ground natural gas storage facility, in- filing the safety-related condition re-
cluding injection, withdrawal, moni- port, except that reports are required
toring, or observations well for an un- for conditions under paragraph (a)(1) of
derground natural gas storage facility. this section other than localized corro-
(6) Any malfunction or operating sion pitting on an effectively coated
error that causes the pressure of a and cathodically protected pipeline.
pipeline or underground natural gas [Amdt. 191–6, 53 FR 24949, July 1, 1988, as
storage facility or LNG facility that amended by Amdt. 191–14, 63 FR 37501, July
contains or processes gas or LNG to 13, 1998; Amdt. 191–24, 81 FR 91872, Dec. 19,
rise above its maximum well operating 2016]
pressure (or working pressure for LNG EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 84 FR 52242, Oct.
facilities) plus the margin (build-up) 1, 2019, § 191.23 was amended by revising para-
allowed for operation of pressure lim- graphs (a)(6) and (b)(4) and adding paragraph
(a)(10), effective July 1, 2020. For the conven-
iting or control devices.
ience of the user, the added and revised text
(7) A leak in a pipeline or an under- is set forth as follows:
ground natural gas storage facility, in-
cluding injection, withdrawal, moni- § 191.23 Reporting safety-related conditions.
toring, or observation well for an un- (a) * * *
derground natural gas storage facility, (6) Any malfunction or operating error
or LNG facility that contains or proc- that causes the pressure—plus the margin
(build-up) allowed for operation of pressure
esses gas or LNG that constitutes an
limiting or control devices—to exceed either
emergency. the maximum allowable operating pressure
(8) Inner tank leakage, ineffective in- of a distribution or gathering line, the max-
sulation, or frost heave that impairs imum well allowable operating pressure of
the structural integrity of an LNG an underground natural gas storage facility,
storage tank. or the maximum allowable working pressure
(9) Any safety-related condition that of an LNG facility that contains or processes
could lead to an imminent hazard and gas or LNG.
causes (either directly or indirectly by
remedial action of the operator), for * * * * *
purposes other than abandonment, a (10) For transmission pipelines only, each
20% or more reduction in operating exceedance of the maximum allowable oper-
pressure or shutdown of operation of a ating pressure that exceeds the margin
421
§ 191.25 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(build-up) allowed for operation of pressure- platform, survey station number, mile-
limiting or control devices as specified in the post, landmark, or name of pipeline.
applicable requirements of §§ 192.201, (7) Description of the condition, in-
192.620(e), and 192.739. The reporting require-
cluding circumstances leading to its
ment of this paragraph (a)(10) is not applica-
ble to gathering lines, distribution lines,
discovery, any significant effects of the
LNG facilities, or underground natural gas condition on safety, and the name of
storage facilities (See paragraph (a)(6) of this the commodity transported or stored.
section). (8) The corrective action taken (in-
(b) * * * cluding reduction of pressure or shut-
(4) Is corrected by repair or replacement in down) before the report is submitted
accordance with applicable safety standards and the planned follow-up or future
before the deadline for filing the safety-re- corrective action, including the antici-
lated condition report. Notwithstanding this pated schedule for starting and con-
exception, a report must be filed for:
(i) Conditions under paragraph (a)(1) of this
cluding such action.
section, unless the condition is localized cor- [Amdt. 191–6, 53 FR 24949, July 1, 1988; 53 FR
rosion pitting on an effectively coated and 29800, Aug. 8, 1988, as amended by Amdt. 191–
cathodically protected pipeline; and 7, 54 FR 32344, Aug. 7, 1989; Amdt. 191–8, 54 FR
(ii) Any condition under paragraph (a)(10) 40878, Oct. 4, 1989; Amdt. 191–10, 61 FR 18516,
of this section. Apr. 26, 1996; Amdt. 191–23, 80 FR 12777, Mar.
11, 2015]
* * * * * EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 84 FR 52242, Oct.
1. 2019, § 191.25 was revised, effective July 1,
§ 191.25 Filing safety-related condition 2020. For the convenience of the user, the re-
reports. vised text is set forth as follows:
(a) Each report of a safety-related § 191.25 Filing safety-related condition re-
condition under § 191.23(a) must be filed ports.
(received by OPS within five working (a) Each report of a safety-related condi-
days, not including Saturday, Sunday, tion under § 191.23(a)(1) through (9) must be
or Federal Holidays) after the day a filed (received by the Associate Adminis-
representative of the operator first de- trator) in writing within 5 working days (not
termines that the condition exists, but including Saturday, Sunday, or Federal holi-
days) after the day a representative of an op-
not later than 10 working days after
erator first determines that the condition
the day a representative of the oper- exists, but not later than 10 working days
ator discovers the condition. Separate after the day a representative of an operator
conditions may be described in a single discovers the condition. Separate conditions
report if they are closely related. Re- may be described in a single report if they
ports may be transmitted by electronic are closely related. Reporting methods and
mail to report requirements are described in para-
InformationResourcesManager@dot.gov graph (c) of this section.
(b) Each report of a maximum allowable
or by facsimile at (202) 366–7128. operating pressure exceedance meeting the
(b) The report must be headed ‘‘Safe- requirements of criteria in § 191.23(a)(10) for a
ty-Related Condition Report’’ and pro- gas transmission pipeline must be filed (re-
vide the following information: ceived by the Associate Administrator) in
(1) Name and principal address of op- writing within 5 calendar days of the exceed-
erator. ance using the reporting methods and report
(2) Date of report. requirements described in paragraph (c) of
(3) Name, job title, and business tele- this section.
(c) Reports must be filed by email to
phone number of person submitting the InformationResourcesManager@dot.gov or by
report. facsimile to (202) 366–7128. For a report made
(4) Name, job title, and business tele- pursuant to § 191.23(a)(1) through (9), the re-
phone number of person who deter- port must be headed ‘‘Safety-Related Condi-
mined that the condition exists. tion Report.’’ For a report made pursuant to
(5) Date condition was discovered and § 191.23(a)(10), the report must be headed
date condition was first determined to ‘‘Maximum Allowable Operating Pressure
Exceedances.’’ All reports must provide the
exist.
following information:
(6) Location of condition, with ref- (1) Name, principal address, and operator
erence to the State (and town, city, or identification number (OPID) of the oper-
county) or offshore site, and as appro- ator.
priate, nearest street address, offshore (2) Date of report.
422
(3) Name, job title, and business telephone mation Systems Manager at (202) 366–
number of person submitting the report. 4595.
(4) Name, job title, and business telephone
number of person who determined that the [Amdt. 191–23, 80 FR 12777, Mar. 11, 2015]
condition exists.
(5) Date condition was discovered and date PART 192—TRANSPORTATION OF
condition was first determined to exist.
(6) Location of condition, with reference to NATURAL AND OTHER GAS BY
the State (and town, city, or county) or off- PIPELINE: MINIMUM FEDERAL
shore site, and as appropriate, nearest street SAFETY STANDARDS
address, offshore platform, survey station
number, milepost, landmark, or name of
pipeline.
Subpart A—General
(7) Description of the condition, including Sec.
circumstances leading to its discovery, any 192.1 What is the scope of this part?
significant effects of the condition on safety, 192.3 Definitions.
and the name of the commodity transported 192.5 Class locations.
or stored. 192.7 What documents are incorporated by
(8) The corrective action taken (including reference partly or wholly in this part?
reduction of pressure or shutdown) before 192.8 How are onshore gathering lines and
the report is submitted and the planned fol- regulated onshore gathering lines deter-
low-up or future corrective action, including mined?
the anticipated schedule for starting and 192.9 What requirements apply to gathering
concluding such action. lines?
192.10 Outer continental shelf pipelines.
§ 191.29 National Pipeline Mapping 192.11 Petroleum gas systems.
System. 192.12 Underground natural gas storage fa-
(a) Each operator of a gas trans- cilities.
mission pipeline or liquefied natural 192.13 What general requirements apply to
pipelines regulated under this part?
gas facility must provide the following 192.14 Conversion to service subject to this
geospatial data to PHMSA for that part.
pipeline or facility: 192.15 Rules of regulatory construction.
(1) Geospatial data, attributes, 192.16 Customer notification.
metadata and transmittal letter appro- 192.18 How to notify PHMSA.(eff. 7-1-20)
priate for use in the National Pipeline
Mapping System. Acceptable formats Subpart B—Materials
and additional information are speci- 192.51 Scope.
fied in the NPMS Operator Standards 192.53 General.
Manual available at 192.55 Steel pipe.
www.npms.phmsa.dot.gov or by con- 192.57 [Reserved]
tacting the PHMSA Geographic Infor- 192.59 Plastic pipe.
mation Systems Manager at (202) 366– 192.61 [Reserved]
192.63 Marking of materials.
4595.
192.65 Transportation of pipe.
(2) The name of and address for the 192.67 Storage and handling of plastic pipe
operator. and associated components.
(3) The name and contact informa-
tion of a pipeline company employee, Subpart C—Pipe Design
to be displayed on a public Web site,
who will serve as a contact for ques- 192.101 Scope.
192.103 General.
tions from the general public about the 192.105 Design formula for steel pipe.
operator’s NPMS data. 192.107 Yield strength (S) for steel pipe.
(b) The information required in para- 192.109 Nominal wall thickness (t) for steel
graph (a) of this section must be sub- pipe.
mitted each year, on or before March 192.111 Design factor (F) for steel pipe.
15, representing assets as of December 192.112 Additional design requirements for
31 of the previous year. If no changes steel pipe using alternative maximum al-
have occurred since the previous year’s lowable operating pressure.
192.113 Longitudinal joint factor (E) for
submission, the operator must comply
steel pipe.
with the guidance provided in the 192.115 Temperature derating factor (T) for
NPMS Operator Standards manual steel pipe.

available at www.npms.phmsa.dot.gov or 192.117–192.119 [Reserved]
contact the PHMSA Geographic Infor- 192.121 Design of plastic pipe.
423
192.123 Design limitations for plastic pipe. 192.229 Limitations on welders.
192.125 Design of copper pipe. 192.231 Protection from weather.
192.127 Records: Pipe design. (eff. 7-1-20) 192.233 Miter joints.
192.235 Preparation for welding.
Subpart D—Design of Pipeline Components 192.241 Inspection and test of welds.
192.243 Nondestructive testing.
192.141 Scope. 192.245 Repair or removal of defects.
192.143 General requirements.
192.144 Qualifying metallic components. Subpart F—Joining of Materials Other Than
192.145 Valves.
by Welding
192.147 Flanges and flange accessories.
192.149 Standard fittings. 192.271 Scope.
192.150 Passage of internal inspection de- 192.273 General.
vices. 192.275 Cast iron pipe.
192.151 Tapping. 192.277 Ductile iron pipe.
192.153 Components fabricated by welding. 192.279 Copper pipe.
192.155 Welded branch connections. 192.281 Plastic pipe.
192.157 Extruded outlets. 192.283 Plastic pipe: Qualifying joining pro-
192.159 Flexibility. cedures.
192.161 Supports and anchors. 192.285 Plastic pipe: Qualifying persons to
192.163 Compressor stations: Design and make joints.
construction. 192.287 Plastic pipe: Inspection of joints.
192.165 Compressor stations: Liquid re-
moval. Subpart G—General Construction Require-
192.167 Compressor stations: Emergency
shutdown.
ments for Transmission Lines and Mains
192.169 Compressor stations: Pressure lim- 192.301 Scope.
iting devices. 192.303 Compliance with specifications or
192.171 Compressor stations: Additional standards.
safety equipment. 192.305 Inspection: General.
192.173 Compressor stations: Ventilation. 192.307 Inspection of materials.
192.175 Pipe-type and bottle-type holders. 192.309 Repair of steel pipe.
192.177 Additional provisions for bottle-type 192.311 Repair of plastic pipe.
holders. 192.313 Bends and elbows.
192.179 Transmission line valves. 192.315 Wrinkle bends in steel pipe.
192.181 Distribution line valves. 192.317 Protection from hazards.
192.183 Vaults: Structural design require-
192.319 Installation of pipe in a ditch.
ments.
192.321 Installation of plastic pipe.
192.185 Vaults: Accessibility.
192.323 Casing.
192.187 Vaults: Sealing, venting, and ven-
192.325 Underground clearance.
tilation.
192.327 Cover.
192.189 Vaults: Drainage and waterproofing.
192.328 Additional construction require-
192.191 [Reserved]
192.193 Valve installation in plastic pipe. ments for steel pipe using alternative
192.195 Protection against accidental over- maximum allowable operating pressure.
pressuring. 192.329 Installation of plastic pipelines by
192.197 Control of the pressure of gas deliv- trenchless excavation.
ered from high-pressure distribution sys-
tems. Subpart H—Customer Meters, Service
192.199 Requirements for design of pressure Regulators, and Service Lines
relief and limiting devices.
192.351 Scope.
192.201 Required capacity of pressure reliev-
192.353 Customer meters and regulators: Lo-
ing and limiting stations.
192.203 Instrument, control, and sampling cation.
pipe and components. 192.355 Customer meters and regulators:
192.204 Risers installed after January 22, Protection from damage.
2019. 192.357 Customer meters and regulators: In-
192.205 Records: Pipeline components.(eff. 7- stallation.
1-20) 192.359 Customer meter installations: Oper-
ating pressure.
Subpart E—Welding of Steel in Pipelines 192.361 Service lines: Installation.
192.363 Service lines: Valve requirements.
192.221 Scope. 192.365 Service lines: Location of valves.
192.225 Welding procedures. 192.367 Service lines: General requirements
192.227 Qualification of welders and welding for connections to main piping.
operators. 192.369 Service lines: Connections to cast

192.229 Limitations on welders and welding iron or ductile iron mains.
operators. 192.371 Service lines: Steel.
424
192.373 Service lines: Cast iron and ductile Subpart J—Test Requirements
iron.
192.375 Service lines: Plastic. 192.501 Scope.
192.376 Installation of plastic service lines 192.503 General requirements.
by trenchless excavation. 192.505 Strength test requirements for steel
192.377 Service lines: Copper. pipeline to operate at a hoop stress of 30
percent or more of SMYS.
192.379 New service lines not in use.
192.506 Transmission lines:Spike hydro-
192.381 Service lines: Excess flow valve per-
static pressure test. (eff. 7-1-20)
formance standards.
192.507 Test requirements for pipelines to
192.383 Excess flow valve installation. operate at a hoop stress less than 30 per-
192.385 Manual service line shut-off valve cent of SMYS and at or above 100 p.s.i.
installation. (689 kPa) gage.
192.509 Test requirements for pipelines to
Subpart I—Requirements for Corrosion operate below 100 p.s.i. (689 kPa) gage.
Control 192.511 Test requirements for service lines.
192.513 Test requirements for plastic pipe-
192.451 Scope. lines.
192.452 How does this subpart apply to con- 192.515 Environmental protection and safety
verted pipelines and regulated onshore requirements.
gathering lines? 192.517 Records.
192.453 General.
192.455 External corrosion control: Buried Subpart K—Uprating
or submerged pipelines installed after
July 31, 1971. 192.551 Scope.
192.457 External corrosion control: Buried 192.553 General requirements.
or submerged pipelines installed before 192.555 Uprating to a pressure that will
August 1, 1971. produce a hoop stress of 30 percent or
192.459 External corrosion control: Exam- more of SMYS in steel pipelines.
ination of buried pipeline when exposed. 192.557 Uprating: Steel pipelines to a pres-
192.461 External corrosion control: Protec- sure that will produce a hoop stress less
tive coating. than 30 percent of SMYS; plastic, cast
iron, and ductile iron pipelines.
192.463 External corrosion control: Cathodic
protection.
Subpart L—Operations
192.465 External corrosion control: Moni-
toring. 192.601 Scope.
192.467 External corrosion control: Elec- 192.603 General provisions.
trical isolation. 192.605 Procedural manual for operations,
192.469 External corrosion control: Test sta- maintenance, and emergencies.
tions. 192.607 Verification of Pipeline Material
192.471 External corrosion control: Test Properties and Attributes: Onshore steel
leads. transmission pipelines.(eff. 7-1-20)
192.473 External corrosion control: Inter- 192.609 Change in class location: Required
ference currents. study.
192.475 Internal corrosion control: General. 192.611 Change in class location: Confirma-
192.476 Internal corrosion control: Design tion or revision of maximum allowable
and construction of transmission line. operating pressure.
192.477 Internal corrosion control: Moni- 192.612 Underwater inspection and reburial
toring. of pipelines in the Gulf of Mexico and its
192.479 Atmospheric corrosion control: Gen- inlets.
eral. 192.613 Continuing surveillance.
192.614 Damage prevention program.
192.481 Atmospheric corrosion control: Mon-
192.615 Emergency plans.
itoring.
192.616 Public awareness.
192.483 Remedial measures: General.
192.617 Investigation of failures.
192.485 Remedial measures: Transmission 192.619 What is the maximum allowable op-
lines. erating pressure for steel or plastic pipe-
192.487 Remedial measures: Distribution lines?
lines other than cast iron or ductile iron 192.620 Alternative maximum allowable op-
lines. erating pressure for certain steel pipe-
192.489 Remedial measures: Cast iron and lines.
ductile iron pipelines. 192.621 Maximum allowable operating pres-
192.490 Direct assessment. sure: High-pressure distribution systems.
192.491 Corrosion control records. 192.623 Maximum and minimum allowable

192.493 In-line inspection of pipelines. (eff. operating pressure; Low-pressure dis-
7-1-20) tribution systems.
425
192.624 Maximum allowable operating pres- 192.750 Launcher and receiver safety. (eff. 7-
sure reconfirmation: Onshore steel trans- 1-20)
mission pipelines.(eff. 7-1-20) 192.751 Prevention of accidental ignition.
192.625 Odorization of gas. 192.753 Caulked bell and spigot joints.
192.627 Tapping pipelines under pressure. 192.755 Protecting cast-iron pipelines.
192.629 Purging of pipelines. 192.756 Joining plastic pipe by heat fusion;
192.631 Control room management. equipment maintenance and calibration.
192.632 Engineering Critical Assessment for
Maximum Allowable Operating Pressure Subpart N—Qualification of Pipeline
Reconfirmztion: Onshore steel trans- Personnel
mission pipelines. (eff. 7-1-20)
192.801 Scope.
Subpart M—Maintenance 192.803 Definitions.
192.805 Qualification Program.
192.701 Scope. 192.807 Recordkeeping.
192.703 General. 192.809 General.
192.705 Transmission lines: Patrolling.
192.706 Transmission lines: Leakage sur- Subpart O—Gas Transmission Pipeline
veys. Integrity Management
192.707 Line markers for mains and trans-
mission lines. 192.901 What do the regulations in this sub-
192.709 Transmission lines: Record keeping. part cover?
192.710 Transmission lines: Assessments 192.903 What definitions apply to this sub-
outside of high consequence areas. (eff. 7- part?
1-20) 192.905 How does an operator identify a high
192.711 Transmission lines: General require- consequence area?
ments for repair procedures. 192.907 What must an operator do to imple-
192.712 Analysis of predicted failure pres- ment this subpart?
sure. (eff. 7-1-20) 192.909 How can an operator change its in-
192.713 Transmission lines: Permanent field tegrity management program?
repair of imperfections and damages. 192.911 What are the elements of an integ-
192.715 Transmission lines: Permanent field rity management program?
repair of welds. 192.913 When may an operator deviate its
192.717 Transmission lines: Permanent field program from certain requirements of
repair of leaks. this subpart?
192.719 Transmission lines: Testing of re- 192.915 What knowledge and training must
pairs. personnel have to carry out an integrity
192.720 Distribution systems: Leak repair. management program?
192.721 Distribution systems: Patrolling. 192.917 How does an operator identify poten-
192.723 Distribution systems: Leakage sur- tial threats to pipeline integrity and use
veys. the threat identification in its integrity
192.725 Test requirements for reinstating program?
service lines. 192.919 What must be in the baseline assess-
192.727 Abandonment or deactivation of fa- ment plan?
cilities. 192.921 How is the baseline assessment to be
192.731 Compressor stations: Inspection and conducted?
testing of relief devices. 192.923 How is direct assessment used and
192.735 Compressor stations: Storage of for what threats?
combustible materials. 192.925 What are the requirements for using
192.736 Compressor stations: Gas detection. External Corrosion Direct Assessment
192.739 Pressure limiting and regulating (ECDA)?
stations: Inspection and testing. 192.927 What are the requirements for using
192.740 Pressure regulating, limiting, and Internal Corrosion Direct Assessment
overpressure protection—Individual serv- (ICDA)?
ice lines directly connected to produc- 192.929 What are the requirements for using
tion, gathering, or transmission pipe- Direct Assessment for Stress Corrosion
lines. Cracking (SCCDA)?
192.741 Pressure limiting and regulating 192.931 How may Confirmatory Direct As-
stations: Telemetering or recording sessment (CDA) be used?
gauges. 192.933 What actions must be taken to ad-
192.743 Pressure limiting and regulating dress integrity issues?
stations: Capacity of relief devices. 192.935 What additional preventive and
192.745 Valve maintenance: Transmission mitigative measures must an operator
lines. take?
192.747 Valve maintenance: Distribution 192.937 What is a continual process of eval-

systems. uation and assessment to maintain a
192.749 Vault maintenance. pipeline’s integrity?
426
192.939 What are the required reassessment EDITORIAL NOTE: Nomenclature changes to
intervals? part 192 appear at 71 FR 33406, June 9, 2006.
192.941 What is a low stress reassessment?
192.943 When can an operator deviate from
these reassessment intervals?
Subpart A—General
192.945 What methods must an operator use
to measure program effectiveness? § 192.1 What is the scope of this part?
192.947 What records must an operator (a) This part prescribes minimum
keep? safety requirements for pipeline facili-
192.949 How does an operator notify ties and the transportation of gas, in-
PHMSA?
192.951 Where does an operator file a report?
cluding pipeline facilities and the
transportation of gas within the limits
Subpart P—Gas Distribution Pipeline of the outer continental shelf as that
Integrity Management (IM) term is defined in the Outer Conti-
nental Shelf Lands Act (43 U.S.C. 1331).
192.1001 What definitions apply to this sub- (b) This part does not apply to—
part?
192.1003 What do the regulations in this sub- (1) Offshore gathering of gas in State
part cover? waters upstream from the outlet flange
192.1005 What must a gas distribution oper- of each facility where hydrocarbons are
ator (other than a master meter or small produced or where produced hydro-
LPG operator) do to implement this sub- carbons are first separated, dehy-
part? drated, or otherwise processed, which-
192.1007 What are the required elements of
ever facility is farther downstream;
an integrity management plan?
192.1009 What must an operator report when (2) Pipelines on the Outer Conti-
a mechanical fitting fails? nental Shelf (OCS) that are producer-
192.1011 What records must an operator operated and cross into State waters
keep? without first connecting to a trans-
192.1013 When may an operator deviate from porting operator’s facility on the OCS,
required periodic inspections of this upstream (generally seaward) of the
part?
last valve on the last production facil-
192.1015 What must a master meter or small
liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) operator ity on the OCS. Safety equipment pro-
do to implement this subpart? tecting PHMSA-regulated pipeline seg-
APPENDIX A TO PART 192 [RESERVED] ments is not excluded. Producing oper-
APPENDIX B TO PART 192—QUALIFICATION OF ators for those pipeline segments up-
PIPE AND COMPONENTS stream of the last valve of the last pro-
APPENDIX C TO PART 192—QUALIFICATION OF duction facility on the OCS may peti-
WELDERS FOR LOW STRESS LEVEL PIPE tion the Administrator, or designee, for
APPENDIX D TO PART 192—CRITERIA FOR CA- approval to operate under PHMSA reg-
THODIC PROTECTION AND DETERMINATION
ulations governing pipeline design,
OF MEASUREMENTS
APPENDIX E TO PART 192—GUIDANCE ON DE- construction, operation, and mainte-
TERMINING HIGH CONSEQUENCE AREAS AND nance under 49 CFR 190.9;
ON CARRYING OUT REQUIREMENTS IN THE (3) Pipelines on the Outer Conti-
INTEGRITY MANAGEMENT RULE nental Shelf upstream of the point at
APPENDIX F TO PART 192—CRITERIA FOR CON- which operating responsibility trans-
DUCTING INTEGRITY ASSESSMENTS USING
fers from a producing operator to a
GUIDED WAVE ULTRASONIC TESTING
(GWUT)(EFF. 7-1-20)
transporting operator;
(4) Onshore gathering of gas—
AUTHORITY: 49 U.S.C. 5103, 60102, 60104, (i) Through a pipeline that operates
60108, 60109, 60110, 60113, 60116, 60118, 60137, and
60141; and 49 CFR 1.97. at less than 0 psig (0 kPa);
(ii) Through a pipeline that is not a
EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 84 FR 52243, Oct. regulated onshore gathering line (as
1, 2019, the authority citation for part 192
was revised, effective July 1, 2020. For the
determined in § 192.8); and
convenience of the user, the revised text is (iii) Within inlets of the Gulf of Mex-
set forth as follows: ico, except for the requirements in
AUTHORITY: 30 U.S.C. 185(w)(3), 49 U.S.C. § 192.612; or
5103, 60101 et. seq., and 49 CFR 1.97. (5) Any pipeline system that trans-
SOURCE: 35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, unless ports only petroleum gas or petroleum
otherwise noted. gas/air mixtures to—
427
§ 192.3 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(i) Fewer than 10 customers, if no the pipe protrudes above the under-
portion of the system is located in a water natural bottom (as determined
public place; or by recognized and generally accepted
(ii) A single customer, if the system practices) in waters less than 15 feet
is located entirely on the customer’s (4.6 meters) deep, as measured from
premises (no matter if a portion of the mean low water.
system is located in a public place). Gas means natural gas, flammable
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by gas, or gas which is toxic or corrosive.
Amdt. 192–27, 41 FR 34605, Aug. 16, 1976; Gathering line means a pipeline that
Amdt. 192–67, 56 FR 63771, Dec. 5, 1991; Amdt. transports gas from a current produc-
192–78, 61 FR 28782, June 6, 1996; Amdt. 192–81, tion facility to a transmission line or
62 FR 61695, Nov. 19, 1997; Amdt. 192–92, 68 FR main.
46112, Aug. 5, 2003; 70 FR 11139, Mar. 8, 2005; Gulf of Mexico and its inlets means the
Amdt. 192–102, 71 FR 13301, Mar. 15, 2006; waters from the mean high water mark
Amdt. 192–103, 72 FR 4656, Feb. 1, 2007]
of the coast of the Gulf of Mexico and
§ 192.3 Definitions. its inlets open to the sea (excluding
rivers, tidal marshes, lakes, and ca-
As used in this part: nals) seaward to include the territorial
Abandoned means permanently re-
sea and Outer Continental Shelf to a
moved from service.
depth of 15 feet (4.6 meters), as meas-
Active corrosion means continuing
ured from the mean low water.
corrosion that, unless controlled, could
Hazard to navigation means, for the
result in a condition that is detri-
purposes of this part, a pipeline where
mental to public safety.
the top of the pipe is less than 12
Administrator means the Adminis-
trator, Pipeline and Hazardous Mate- inches (305 millimeters) below the un-
rials Safety Administration or his or derwater natural bottom (as deter-
her delegate. mined by recognized and generally ac-
Alarm means an audible or visible cepted practices) in waters less than 15
means of indicating to the controller feet (4.6 meters) deep, as measured
that equipment or processes are out- from the mean low water.
side operator-defined, safety-related High-pressure distribution system
parameters. means a distribution system in which
Control room means an operations the gas pressure in the main is higher
center staffed by personnel charged than the pressure provided to the cus-
with the responsibility for remotely tomer.
monitoring and controlling a pipeline Line section means a continuous run
facility. of transmission line between adjacent
Controller means a qualified indi- compressor stations, between a com-
vidual who remotely monitors and con- pressor station and storage facilities,
trols the safety-related operations of a between a compressor station and a
pipeline facility via a SCADA system block valve, or between adjacent block
from a control room, and who has oper- valves.
ational authority and accountability Listed specification means a specifica-
for the remote operational functions of tion listed in section I of appendix B of
the pipeline facility. this part.
Customer meter means the meter that Low-pressure distribution system means
measures the transfer of gas from an a distribution system in which the gas
operator to a consumer. pressure in the main is substantially
Distribution line means a pipeline the same as the pressure provided to
other than a gathering or transmission the customer.
line. Main means a distribution line that
Electrical survey means a series of serves as a common source of supply
closely spaced pipe-to-soil readings for more than one service line.
over pipelines which are subsequently Maximum actual operating pressure
analyzed to identify locations where a means the maximum pressure that oc-
corrosive current is leaving the pipe- curs during normal operations over a
line. period of 1 year.

Exposed underwater pipeline means an Maximum allowable operating pressure
underwater pipeline where the top of (MAOP) means the maximum pressure
428
at which a pipeline or segment of a treatment of gas during the course of

pipeline may be operated under this transportation.
part. Service line means a distribution line
Municipality means a city, county, or that transports gas from a common
any other political subdivision of a source of supply to an individual cus-
State. tomer, to two adjacent or adjoining
Offshore means beyond the line of or- residential or small commercial cus-
dinary low water along that portion of tomers, or to multiple residential or
the coast of the United States that is small commercial customers served
in direct contact with the open seas through a meter header or manifold. A
and beyond the line marking the sea- service line ends at the outlet of the
ward limit of inland waters. customer meter or at the connection to
Operator means a person who engages a customer’s piping, whichever is fur-
in the transportation of gas. ther downstream, or at the connection
Outer Continental Shelf means all sub- to customer piping if there is no meter.
merged lands lying seaward and out- Service regulator means the device on
side the area of lands beneath navi- a service line that controls the pres-
gable waters as defined in Section 2 of sure of gas delivered from a higher
the Submerged Lands Act (43 U.S.C. pressure to the pressure provided to
1301) and of which the subsoil and sea- the customer. A service regulator may
bed appertain to the United States and serve one customer or multiple cus-
are subject to its jurisdiction and con- tomers through a meter header or
trol. manifold.
Person means any individual, firm, SMYS means specified minimum
joint venture, partnership, corporation, yield strength is:
association, State, municipality, coop- (1) For steel pipe manufactured in ac-
erative association, or joint stock asso- cordance with a listed specification,
ciation, and including any trustee, re- the yield strength specified as a min-
ceiver, assignee, or personal represent- imum in that specification; or
ative thereof. (2) For steel pipe manufactured in ac-
Petroleum gas means propane, pro- cordance with an unknown or unlisted
pylene, butane, (normal butane or specification, the yield strength deter-
isobutanes), and butylene (including mined in accordance with § 192.107(b).
isomers), or mixtures composed pre- State means each of the several
dominantly of these gases, having a States, the District of Columbia, and
vapor pressure not exceeding 208 psi the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico.
(1434 kPa) gage at 100 °F (38 °C). Supervisory Control and Data Acquisi-
Pipe means any pipe or tubing used in tion (SCADA) system means a computer-
the transportation of gas, including based system or systems used by a con-
pipe-type holders. troller in a control room that collects
Pipeline means all parts of those and displays information about a pipe-
physical facilities through which gas line facility and may have the ability
moves in transportation, including to send commands back to the pipeline
pipe, valves, and other appurtenance facility.
attached to pipe, compressor units, me- Transmission line means a pipeline,
tering stations, regulator stations, de- other than a gathering line, that: (1)
livery stations, holders, and fabricated Transports gas from a gathering line or
assemblies. storage facility to a distribution cen-
Pipeline environment includes soil re- ter, storage facility, or large volume
sistivity (high or low), soil moisture customer that is not down-stream from
(wet or dry), soil contaminants that a distribution center; (2) operates at a
may promote corrosive activity, and hoop stress of 20 percent or more of
other known conditions that could af- SMYS; or (3) transports gas within a
fect the probability of active corrosion. storage field.
Pipeline facility means new and exist- NOTE: A large volume customer may re-
ing pipelines, rights-of-way, and any ceive similar volumes of gas as a distribu-
equipment, facility, or building used in tion center, and includes factories, power
the transportation of gas or in the plants, and institutional users of gas.
429
§ 192.3, Nt. 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
Transportation of gas means the gath- fections based upon the pipeline segment
ering, transmission, or distribution of maximum allowable operating pressure.
gas by pipeline or the storage of gas, in
or affecting interstate or foreign com- * * * * *
merce. Moderate consequence area means:
Underground natural gas storage facil- (1) An onshore area that is within a poten-
ity means a facility that stores natural tial impact circle, as defined in § 192.903, con-
gas in an underground facility incident taining either:
to natural gas transportation, includ- (i) Five or more buildings intended for
ing— human occupancy; or
(1) A depleted hydrocarbon reservoir; (ii) Any portion of the paved surface, in-
cluding shoulders, of a designated interstate,
(2) An aquifer reservoir; or other freeway, or expressway, as well as any
(3) A solution-mined salt cavern res- other principal arterial roadway with 4 or
ervoir, including associated material more lanes, as defined in the Federal High-
and equipment used for injection, with- way Administration’s Highway Functional
drawal, monitoring, or observation Classification Concepts, Criteria and Proce-
wells, and wellhead equipment, piping, dures, Section 3.1 (see: https://
www.fhwa.dot.gov/planning/processes/statewide/
rights-of-way, property, buildings,
related/highwaylfunctionallclassifications/
compressor units, separators, metering fcauab.pdf), and that does not meet the defi-
equipment, and regulator equipment. nition of high consequence area, as defined
Weak link means a device or method in § 192.903.
used when pulling polyethylene pipe, (2) The length of the moderate consequence
typically through methods such as hor- area extends axially along the length of the
izontal directional drilling, to ensure pipeline from the outermost edge of the first
that damage will not occur to the pipe- potential impact circle containing either 5
or more buildings intended for human occu-
line by exceeding the maximum tensile
pancy; or any portion of the paved surface,
stresses allowed. including shoulders, of any designated inter-
Welder means a person who performs state, freeway, or expressway, as well as any
manual or semi-automatic welding. other principal arterial roadway with 4 or
Welding operator means a person who more lanes, to the outermost edge of the last
operates machine or automatic welding contiguous potential impact circle that con-
equipment. tains either 5 or more buildings intended for
human occupancy, or any portion of the
[Amdt. 192–13, 38 FR 9084, Apr. 10, 1973] paved surface, including shoulders, of any
designated interstate, freeway, or express-
EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER ci- way, as well as any other principal arterial
tations affecting § 192.3, see the List of CFR roadway with 4 or more lanes.
Sections Affected, which appears in the
and at www.govinfo.gov. * * * * *
EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 84 FR 52243, Oct. § 192.5 Class locations.
1, 2019, § 192.3 was amended by adding defini-
tions for ‘‘Engineering critical assessment (a) This section classifies pipeline lo-
(ECA)’’ and ‘‘Moderate consequence area’’, cations for purposes of this part. The
effective July 1, 2020. For the convenience of following criteria apply to classifica-
the user, the added text is set forth as fol- tions under this section.
lows: (1) A ‘‘class location unit’’ is an on-
§ 192.3 Definitions. shore area that extends 220 yards (200
meters) on either side of the centerline
of any continuous 1- mile (1.6 kilo-
* * * * * meters) length of pipeline.
Engineering critical assessment (ECA) means (2) Each separate dwelling unit in a
a documented analytical procedure based on multiple dwelling unit building is
fracture mechanics principles, relevant ma- counted as a separate building intended
terial properties (mechanical and fracture for human occupancy.
resistance properties), operating history,
(b) Except as provided in paragraph
operational environment, in-service degrada-
tion, possible failure mechanisms, initial and (c) of this section, pipeline locations
final defect sizes, and usage of future oper- are classified as follows:
ating and maintenance procedures to deter- (1) A Class 1 location is:
mine the maximum tolerable sizes for imper- (i) An offshore area; or
430
(ii) Any class location unit that has in 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51.
10 or fewer buildings intended for The materials listed in this section
human occupancy. have the full force of law. To enforce
(2) A Class 2 location is any class lo- any edition other than that specified in
cation unit that has more than 10 but this section, PHMSA must publish a
fewer than 46 buildings intended for notice of change in the FEDERAL REG-
human occupancy. ISTER.
(3) A Class 3 location is:
(1) Availability of standards incor-
(i) Any class location unit that has 46
porated by reference. All of the mate-
or more buildings intended for human
occupancy; or rials incorporated by reference are
(ii) An area where the pipeline lies available for inspection from several
within 100 yards (91 meters) of either a sources, including the following:
building or a small, well-defined out- (i) The Office of Pipeline Safety,
side area (such as a playground, recre- Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safe-
ation area, outdoor theater, or other ty Administration, 1200 New Jersey Av-
place of public assembly) that is occu- enue SE., Washington, DC 20590. For
pied by 20 or more persons on at least more information contact 202–366–4046
5 days a week for 10 weeks in any 12- or go to the PHMSA Web site at: http://
month period. (The days and weeks www.phmsa.dot.gov/pipeline/regs.
need not be consecutive.) (ii) The National Archives and
(4) A Class 4 location is any class lo- Records Administration (NARA). For
cation unit where buildings with four information on the availability of this
or more stories above ground are prev- material at NARA, call 202–741–6030 or
alent.
go to the NARA Web site at: http://
(c) The length of Class locations 2, 3,
www.archives.gov/federallregister/
and 4 may be adjusted as follows:
(1) A Class 4 location ends 220 yards codeloflfederallregulations/
(200 meters) from the nearest building ibrllocations.html.
with four or more stories above ground. (iii) Copies of standards incorporated
(2) When a cluster of buildings in- by reference in this part can also be
tended for human occupancy requires a purchased or are otherwise made avail-
Class 2 or 3 location, the class location able from the respective standards-de-
ends 220 yards (200 meters) from the veloping organization at the addresses
nearest building in the cluster. provided in the centralized IBR section
[Amdt. 192–78, 61 FR 28783, June 6, 1996; 61 FR below.
35139, July 5, 1996, as amended by Amdt. 192– (2) [Reserved]
85, 63 FR 37502, July 13, 1998] (b) American Petroleum Institute
EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 84 FR 52243, Oct. (API), 1220 L Street NW., Washington,
1, 2019, § 192.5 was amended by adding para- DC 20005, phone: 202–682–8000, http://
graph (d), effective July 1, 2020. For the con- api.org/.
venience of the user, the added text is set (1) API Recommended Practice 5L1,
forth as follows:
‘‘Recommended Practice for Railroad
§ 192.5 Class locations. Transportation of Line Pipe,’’ 7th edi-
tion, September 2009, (API RP 5L1),
* * * * * IBR approved for § 192.65(a).
(d) An operator must have records that (2) API Recommended Practice 5LT,
document the current class location of each ‘‘Recommended Practice for Truck
pipeline segment and that demonstrate how Transportation of Line Pipe,’’ First
the operator determined each current class edition, March 2012, (API RP 5LT), IBR
location in accordance with this section. approved for § 192.65(c).
§ 192.7 What documents are incor- (3) API Recommended Practice 5LW,
porated by reference partly or ‘‘Recommended Practice for Transpor-
wholly in this part? tation of Line Pipe on Barges and Ma-
(a) This part prescribes standards, or rine Vessels,’’ 3rd edition, September
portions thereof, incorporated by ref- 2009, (API RP 5LW), IBR approved for
erence into this part with the approval § 192.65(b).
of the Director of the Federal Register
431
§ 192.7 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(4) API Recommended Practice 80, (2) ASME/ANSI B16.5–2003, ‘‘Pipe

‘‘Guidelines for the Definition of On- Flanges and Flanged Fittings, ‘‘Octo-
shore Gas Gathering Lines,’’ 1st edi- ber 2004, (ASME/ANSI B16.5), IBR ap-
tion, April 2000, (API RP 80), IBR approved for §§ 192.147(a) and 192.279.
proved for § 192.8(a). (3) ASME B16.40–2008, ‘‘Manually Op-
(5) API Recommended Practice 1162, erated Thermoplastic Gas Shutoffs and
‘‘Public Awareness Programs for Pipe- Valves in Gas Distribution Systems,’’
line Operators,’’ 1st edition, December March 18, 2008, approved by ANSI,
2003, (API RP 1162), IBR approved for (ASME B16.40–2008), IBR approved for
§ 192.616(a), (b), and (c). Item I, Appendix B to Part 192.
(6) API Recommended Practice 1165, (4) ASME/ANSI B31G–1991 (Re-
‘‘Recommended Practice for Pipeline affirmed 2004), ‘‘Manual for Deter-
SCADA Displays,’’ First edition, Janu- mining the Remaining Strength of Cor-
ary 2007, (API RP 1165), IBR approved roded Pipelines,’’ 2004, (ASME/ANSI
for § 192.631(c). B31G), IBR approved for §§ 192.485(c) and
(7) API Specification 5L, ‘‘Specifica- 192.933(a).
tion for Line Pipe,’’ 45th edition, effec- (5) ASME/ANSI B31.8–2007, ‘‘Gas
tive July 1, 2013, (API Spec 5L), IBR ap- Transmission and Distribution Piping
proved for §§ 192.55(e); 192.112(a), (b), (d), Systems,’’ November 30, 2007, (ASME/
(e); 192.113; and Item I, Appendix B to ANSI B31.8), IBR approved for
Part 192. §§ 192.112(b) and 192.619(a).
(8) ANSI/API Specification 6D, (6) ASME/ANSI B31.8S–2004, ‘‘Supple-
‘‘Specification for Pipeline ment to B31.8 on Managing System In-
Valves,’’23rd edition, effective October tegrity of Gas Pipelines,’’ 2004, (ASME/
1, 2008, including Errata 1 (June 2008), ANSI B31.8S–2004), IBR approved for
Errata2 (/November 2008), Errata 3 §§ 192.903 note to Potential impact radius;
(February 2009), Errata 4 (April 2010), 192.907 introductory text, (b); 192.911 in-
Errata 5 (November 2010), Errata 6 (Au- troductory text, (i), (k), (l), (m);
gust 2011) Addendum 1 (October 2009), 192.913(a), (b), (c); 192.917 (a), (b), (c),
Addendum 2 (August 2011), and Adden- (d), (e); 192.921(a); 192.923(b); 192.925(b);
dum 3 (October 2012), (ANSI/API Spec 192.927(b), (c); 192.929(b); 192.933(c), (d);
6D), IBR approved for § 192.145(a). 192.935 (a), (b); 192.937(c); 192.939(a); and
(9) API Standard 1104, ‘‘Welding of 192.945(a).
Pipelines and Related Facilities,’’ 20th (7) ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel
edition, October 2005, including errata/ Code, Section I, ‘‘Rules for Construc-
addendum (July 2007) and errata 2 tion of Power Boilers 2007,’’ 2007 edi-
(2008), (API Std 1104), IBR approved for tion, July 1, 2007, (ASME BPVC, Sec-
§§ 192.225(a); 192.227(a); 192.229(c); tion I), IBR approved for § 192.153(b).
192.241(c); and Item II, Appendix B. (8) ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel
(10) API Recommended Practice 1170, Code, Section VIII, Division 1 ‘‘Rules
‘‘Design and Operation of Solution- for Construction of Pressure Vessels,’’
mined Salt Caverns Used for Natural 2007 edition, July 1, 2007, (ASME BPVC,
Gas Storage,’’ First edition, July 2015 Section VIII, Division 1), IBR approved
(API RP 1170), IBR approved for § 192.12. for §§ 192.153(a), (b), (d); and 192.165(b).
(11) API Recommended Practice 1171, (9) ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel
‘‘Functional Integrity of Natural Gas Code, Section VIII, Division 2 ‘‘Alter-
Storage in Depleted Hydrocarbon Res- nate Rules, Rules for Construction of
ervoirs and Aquifer Reservoirs,’’ First Pressure Vessels,’’ 2007 edition, July 1,
edition, September 2015, (API RP 1171), 2007, (ASME BPVC, Section VIII, Divi-
IBR approved for § 192.12. sion 2), IBR approved for §§ 192.153(b),
(c) ASME International (ASME), (d); and 192.165(b).
Three Park Avenue, New York, NY (10) ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel
10016, 800–843–2763 (U.S./Canada), http:// Code, Section IX: ‘‘Qualification
www.asme.org/. Standard for Welding and Brazing Pro-
(1) ASME/ANSI B16.1–2005, ‘‘Gray cedures, Welders, Brazers, and Welding
Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fit- and Brazing Operators,’’ 2007 edition,
tings: (Classes 25, 125, and 250),’’ August July 1, 2007, ASME BPVC, Section IX,
31, 2006, (ASME/ANSI B16.1), IBR ap- IBR approved for §§ 192.225(a); 192.227(a);
proved for § 192.147(c). and Item II, Appendix B to Part 192.
432
(d) American Society for Testing and Steel Pipe, Electric-Fusion-Welded for
Materials (ASTM), 100 Barr Harbor High-Pressure Service at High Tem-
Drive, PO Box C700, West peratures,’’ approved October 1, 2009,
Conshohocken, PA 19428, phone: (610) (ASTM A691/A691M), IBR approved for
832–9585, Web site: http://www.astm.org/. § 192.113 and Item I, Appendix B to Part
(1) ASTM A53/A53M–10, ‘‘Standard 192.
Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and (10) ASTM D638–03, ‘‘Standard Test
Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Method for Tensile Properties of Plas-
Seamless,’’ approved October 1, 2010, tics,’’ 2003, (ASTM D638), IBR approved
(ASTM A53/A53M), IBR approved for for § 192.283(a) and (b).
§ 192.113; and Item II, Appendix B to (11) ASTM D2513–12ae1, ‘‘Standard
Part 192. Specification for Polyethylene (PE)
(2) ASTM A106/A106M–10, ‘‘Standard Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing, and Fit-
Specification for Seamless Carbon tings,’’ April 1, 2012, (ASTM D2513–
Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Serv- 12ae1), IBR approved for Item I, Appen-
ice,’’ approved October 1, 2010, (ASTM dix B to Part 192.
A106/A106M), IBR approved for § 192.113; (12) ASTM D2517–00, ‘‘Standard Speci-
and Item I, Appendix B to Part 192. fication for Reinforced Epoxy Resin
(3) ASTM A333/A333M–11, ‘‘Standard Gas Pressure Pipe and Fittings,’’
Specification for Seamless and Welded (ASTM D 2517), IBR approved for
Steel Pipe for Low-Temperature Serv-
§§ 192.191(a); 192.281(d); 192.283(a); and
ice,’’ approved April 1, 2011, (ASTM
Item I, Appendix B to Part 192.
A333/A333M), IBR approved for § 192.113;
(13) ASTM D2564–12, ‘‘Standard Speci-
and Item I, Appendix B to Part 192.
(4) ASTM A372/A372M–10, ‘‘Standard fication for Solvent Cements for Poly
Specification for Carbon and Alloy (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping
Steel Forgings for Thin-Walled Pres- Systems,’’ Aug. 1, 2012, (ASTM D2564–
sure Vessels,’’ approved October 1, 2010, 12), IBR approved for § 192.281(b)(2).
(ASTM A372/A372M), IBR approved for (14) ASTM F1055–98 (Reapproved
§ 192.177(b). 2006), ‘‘Standard Specification for
(5) ASTM A381–96 (reapproved 2005), Electrofusion Type Polyethylene Fit-
‘‘Standard Specification for Metal-Arc tings for Outside Diameter Controlled
Welded Steel Pipe for Use with High- Polyethylene Pipe and Tubing,’’ March
Pressure Transmission Systems,’’ ap- 1, 2006, (ASTM F1055–98 (2006)), IBR ap-
proved October 1, 2005, (ASTM A381), proved for § 192.283(a), Item I, Appendix
IBR approved for § 192.113; and Item I, B to Part 192.
Appendix B to Part 192. (15) ASTM F1924–12, ‘‘Standard Speci-
(6) ASTM A578/A578M–96 (reapproved fication for Plastic Mechanical Fit-
2001), ‘‘Standard Specification for tings for Use on Outside Diameter Con-
Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examina- trolled Polyethylene Gas Distribution
tion of Plain and Clad Steel Plates for Pipe and Tubing,’’ April 1, 2012, (ASTM
Special Applications,’’ (ASTM A578/ F1924–12), IBR approved for Item I, Ap-
A578M), IBR approved for § 192.112(c). pendix B to Part 192.
(7) ASTM A671/A671M–10, ‘‘Standard (16) ASTM F1948–12, ‘‘Standard Speci-
Specification for Electric-Fusion-Weld- fication for Metallic Mechanical Fit-
ed Steel Pipe for Atmospheric and tings for Use on Outside Diameter Con-
Lower Temperatures,’’ approved April trolled Thermoplastic Gas Distribution
1, 2010, (ASTM A671/A671M), IBR ap- Pipe and Tubing,’’ April 1, 2012, (ASTM
proved for § 192.113; and Item I, Appen- F1948–12), IBR approved for Item I, Ap-
dix B to Part 192. pendix B to Part 192.
(8) ASTM A672/A672M–09, ‘‘Standard (17) ASTM F1973–13, ‘‘Standard Speci-
Specification for Electric-Fusion-Weld- fication for Factory Assembled
ed Steel Pipe for High-Pressure Service Anodeless Risers and Transition Fit-
at Moderate Temperatures,’’ approved tings in Polyethylene (PE) and Poly-
October 1, 2009, (ASTM A672/672M), IBR amide 11 (PA11) and Polyamide 12
approved for § 192.113 and Item I, Ap- (PA12) Fuel Gas Distribution Sys-
pendix B to Part 192. tems,’’ May 1, 2013, (ASTM F1973–13),

(9) ASTM A691/A691M–09, ‘‘Standard IBR approved for § 192.204(b); and Item
Specification for Carbon and Alloy I, Appendix B to Part 192.
433
§ 192.7 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(18) ASTM F2145–13, ‘‘Standard Speci- (1) MSS SP–44–2010, Standard Prac-
fication for Polyamide 11 (PA 11) and tice, ‘‘Steel Pipeline Flanges,’’ 2010 edi-
Polyamide 12 (PA12) Mechanical Fit- tion, (including Errata (May 20, 2011)),
tings for Use on Outside Diameter Con- (MSS SP–44), IBR approved for
trolled Polyamide 11 and Polyamide 12 § 192.147(a).
Pipe and Tubing,’’ May 1, 2013, (ASTM (2) [Reserved]
F2145–13), IBR approved for Item I, Ap- (g) NACE International (NACE), 1440
pendix B to Part 192. South Creek Drive, Houston, TX 77084:
(19) ASTM F 2600–09, ‘‘Standard Spec- phone: 281–228–6223 or 800–797–6223, Web
ification for Electrofusion Type Poly- site: http://www.nace.org/Publications/.
amide-11 Fittings for Outside Diameter (1) ANSI/NACE SP0502–2010, Standard
Controlled Polyamide–11 Pipe and Tub- Practice, ‘‘Pipeline External Corrosion
ing,’’ April 1, 2009, (ASTM F 2600–09), Direct Assessment Methodology,’’ re-
IBR approved for Item I, Appendix B to vised June 24, 2010, (NACE SP0502), IBR
Part 192. approved for §§ 192.923(b); 192.925(b);
(20) ASTM F2620–12, ‘‘Standard Prac- 192.931(d); 192.935(b) and 192.939(a).
tice for Heat Fusion Joining of Poly- (2) [Reserved]
ethylene Pipe and Fittings,’’ Aug. 1, (h) National Fire Protection Associa-
2012, (ASTM F2620–12), IBR approved tion (NFPA), 1 Batterymarch Park,
for §§ 192.281(c) and 192.285(b)(2)(i). Quincy, Massachusetts 02169, phone: 1
(21) ASTM F2767–12, ‘‘Specification 617 984–7275, Web site: http://
for Electrofusion Type Polyamide-12 www.nfpa.org/.
Fittings for Outside Diameter Con- (1) NFPA–30 (2012), ‘‘Flammable and
trolled Polyamide–12 Pipe and Tubing Combustible Liquids Code,’’ 2012 edi-
for Gas Distribution,’’ Oct. 15, 2012, tion, June 20, 2011, including Errata 30–
(ASTM F2767–12), IBR approved for 12–1 (September 27, 2011) and Errata 30–
Item I, Appendix B to Part 192. 12–2 (November 14, 2011), (NFPA–30),
(22) ASTM F2785–12, ‘‘Standard Speci- IBR approved for § 192.735(b).
fication for Polyamide 12 Gas Pressure (2) NFPA–58 (2004), ‘‘Liquefied Petro-
Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings,’’ Aug. 1, leum Gas Code (LP-Gas Code),’’
2012, (ASTM F2785–12), IBR approved (NFPA–58), IBR approved for § 192.11(a),
for Item I, Appendix B to Part 192. (b), and (c).
(23) ASTM F2817–10, ‘‘Standard Speci- (3) NFPA–59 (2004), ‘‘Utility LP-Gas
fication for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) Plant Code,’’ (NFPA–59), IBR approved
(PVC) Gas Pressure Pipe and Fittings for § 192.11(a), (b); and (c).
for Maintenance or Repair,’’ Feb. 1, (4) NFPA–70 (2011), ‘‘National Elec-
2010, (ASTM F2817–10), IBR approved trical Code,’’ 2011 edition, issued Au-
for Item I, Appendix B to Part 192. gust 5, 2010, (NFPA–70), IBR approved
(24) ASTM F2945–12a ‘‘Standard Spec- for §§ 192.163(e); and 192.189(c).
ification for Polyamide 11 Gas Pressure (i) Pipeline Research Council Inter-
Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings,’’ Nov. 27, national, Inc. (PRCI), c/o Technical
2012, (ASTM F2945–12a), IBR approved Toolboxes, 3801 Kirby Drive, Suite 520,
for Item I, Appendix B to Part 192. P.O. Box 980550, Houston, TX 77098,
(e) Gas Technology Institute (GTI), phone: 713–630–0505, toll free: 866–866–
formerly the Gas Research Institute 6766, Web site: http://www.ttoolboxes.com/
(GRI)), 1700 S. Mount Prospect Road, . (Contract number PR–3–805.)
Des Plaines, IL 60018, phone: 847–768– (1) AGA, Pipeline Research Com-
0500, Web site: www.gastechnology.org. mittee Project, PR–3–805, ‘‘A Modified
(1) GRI 02/0057 (2002) ‘‘Internal Corro- Criterion for Evaluating the Remain-
sion Direct Assessment of Gas Trans- ing Strength of Corroded Pipe,’’ (De-
mission Pipelines Methodology,’’ (GRI cember 22, 1989), (PRCI PR–3–805 (R–
02/0057), IBR approved for § 192.927(c). STRENG)), IBR approved for
(2) [Reserved] §§ 192.485(c); 192.933(a) and (d).
(f) Manufacturers Standardization (2) [Reserved]
Society of the Valve and Fittings In- (j) Plastics Pipe Institute, Inc. (PPI),
dustry, Inc. (MSS), 127 Park St. NE., 105 Decker Court, Suite 825 Irving TX
Vienna, VA 22180, phone: 703–281–6613, 75062, phone: 469–499–1044, http://
Web site: http://www.mss-hq.org/. www.plasticpipe.org/.
434
(1) PPI TR–3/2012, HDB/HDS/PDB/ (4) ASME/ANSI B31G–1991 (Reaffirmed

SDB/MRS/CRS, Policies, ‘‘Policies and 2004), ‘‘Manual for Determining the Remain-
Procedures for Developing Hydrostatic ing Strength of Corroded Pipelines,’’ 2004,
(ASME/ANSI B31G), IBR approved for
Design Basis (HDB), Hydrostatic De-
§§ 192.485(c), 192.632(a), 192.712(b), and
sign Stresses (HDS), Pressure Design 192.933(a).
Basis (PDB), Strength Design Basis
(SDB), Minimum Required Strength
(MRS) Ratings, and Categorized Re- * * * * *
quired Strength (CRS) for Thermo- (d) American Society for Nondestructive
plastic Piping Materials or Pipe,’’ up- Testing (ASNT), P.O. Box 28518, 1711
dated November 2012, (PPI TR–3/2012), Arlingate Lane, Columbus, OH 43228, phone:
IBR approved for § 192.121. 800–222–2768, website: https://www.asnt.org/.
(2) PPI TR–4, HDB/HDS/SDB/MRS, (1) ANSI/ASNT ILI–PQ–2005(2010), ‘‘In-line
Inspection Personnel Qualification and Cer-
Listed Materials, ‘‘PPI Listing of Hy- tification,’’ Reapproved October 11, 2010,
drostatic Design Basis (HDB), Hydro- (ANSI/ASNT ILI–PQ), IBR approved for
static Design Stress (HDS), Strength § 192.493.
Design Basis (SDB), Pressure Design (2) [Reserved]
Basis (PDB) and Minimum Required
Strength (MRS) Rating For Thermo-
* * * * *
plastic Piping Materials or Pipe,’’ up-
dated March, 2011, (PPI TR–4/2012), IBR (h) * * *
approved for § 192.121. (2) NACE Standard Practice 0102–2010, ‘‘In-
Line Inspection of Pipelines,’’ Revised 2010–
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970] 03–13, (NACE SP0102), IBR approved for
EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER ci- §§ 192.150(a) and 192.493.
tations affecting § 192.7, see the List of CFR
Sections Affected, which appears in the * * * * *
and at www.govinfo.gov. (j) * * *
(1) AGA, Pipeline Research Committee
EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 84 FR 52243, Oct. Project, PR–3–805, ‘‘A Modified Criterion for
1, 2019, § 192.7 was amended by revising para- Evaluating the Remaining Strength of Cor-
graph (a)(1)(ii), adding paragraph (b)(12), re- roded Pipe,’’ (December 22, 1989), (PRCI PR–
vising paragraphs (c)(2) and (4), re-desig- 3–805 (R–STRENG)), IBR approved for
nating paragraphs (d) through (j) as para- §§ 192.485(c); 192.632(a); 192.712(b); 192.933(a)
graphs (e) through (k), adding new para- and (d).
graphs (d) and (h)(2), and revising newly re-
designated paragraph (j)(1), effective July 1,
2020. For the convenience of the user, the * * * * *
added and revised text is set forth as follows:
§ 192.8 How are onshore gathering
§ 192.7 What documents are incorporated by lines and regulated onshore gath-
reference partly or wholly in this part? ering lines determined?
(a) * * *
(1) * * *
(a) An operator must use API RP 80
(ii) The National Archives and Records Ad- (incorporated by reference, see § 192.7),
ministration (NARA). For information on to determine if an onshore pipeline (or
the availability of this material at NARA, part of a connected series of pipelines)
email fedreg.legal@nara.gov or go to is an onshore gathering line. The deter-
www.archives.gov/federal-register/cfr/ibr-loca- mination is subject to the limitations
tions.html. listed below. After making this deter-
(b) * * * mination, an operator must determine
(12) API STANDARD 1163, ‘‘In-Line Inspec- if the onshore gathering line is a regu-
tion Systems Qualification,’’ Second edition,
April 2013, Reaffirmed August 2018, (API STD
lated onshore gathering line under
1163), IBR approved for § 192.493. paragraph (b) of this section.
(c) * * * (1) The beginning of gathering, under
(2) ASME/ANSI B16.5–2003, ‘‘Pipe Flanges section 2.2(a)(1) of API RP 80, may not
and Flanged Fittings,’’ October 2004, (ASME/ extend beyond the furthermost down-
ANSI B16.5), IBR approved for §§ 192.147(a), stream point in a production operation
192.279, and 192.607(f). as defined in section 2.3 of API RP 80.

This furthermost downstream point
* * * * * does not include equipment that can be
435
§ 192.9 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
used in either production or transpor- from each other, unless the Adminis-
tation, such as separators or trator finds a longer separation dis-
dehydrators, unless that equipment is tance is justified in a particular case
involved in the processes of ‘‘produc- (see 49 CFR § 190.9).
tion and preparation for transportation (4) The endpoint of gathering, under
or delivery of hydrocarbon gas’’ within section 2.2(a)(1)(D) of API RP 80, may
the meaning of ‘‘production oper- not extend beyond the furthermost
ation.’’ downstream compressor used to in-
(2) The endpoint of gathering, under crease gathering line pressure for de-
section 2.2(a)(1)(A) of API RP 80, may
livery to another pipeline.
not extend beyond the first down-
stream natural gas processing plant, (b) For purposes of § 192.9, ‘‘regulated
unless the operator can demonstrate, onshore gathering line’’ means:
using sound engineering principles, (1) Each onshore gathering line (or
that gathering extends to a further segment of onshore gathering line)
downstream plant. with a feature described in the second
(3) If the endpoint of gathering, under column that lies in an area described in
section 2.2(a)(1)(C) of API RP 80, is de- the third column; and
termined by the commingling of gas (2) As applicable, additional lengths
from separate production fields, the of line described in the fourth column
fields may not be more than 50 miles to provide a safety buffer:
Type Feature Area Safety buffer
A ......... —Metallic and the MAOP produces a Class 2, 3, or 4 location (see § 192.5) None.
hoop stress of 20 percent or more
of SMYS. If the stress level is un-
known, an operator must determine
the stress level according to the
applicable provisions in subpart C
of this part.
—Non-metallic and the MAOP is
more than 125 psig (862 kPa).
B ......... —Metallic and the MAOP produces a Area 1. Class 3 or 4 location ............. If the gathering line is in Area 2(b) or
hoop stress of less than 20 percent Area 2. An area within a Class 2 lo- 2(c), the additional lengths of line
of SMYS. If the stress level is un- cation the operator determines by extend upstream and downstream
known, an operator must determine using any of the following three from the area to a point where the
the stress level according to the methods: line is at least 150 feet (45.7 m)
applicable provisions in subpart C (a) A Class 2 location. ........................ from the nearest dwelling in the
of this part. (b) An area extending 150 feet (45.7 area. However, if a cluster of dwell-
—Non-metallic and the MAOP is 125 m) on each side of the centerline of ings in Area 2 (b) or 2(c) qualifies a
psig (862 kPa) or less. any continuous 1 mile (1.6 km) of line as Type B, the Type B classi-
pipeline and including more than 10 fication ends 150 feet (45.7 m)
but fewer than 46 dwellings. from the nearest dwelling in the
(c) An area extending 150 feet (45.7 cluster.
m) on each side of the centerline of
any continous 1000 feet (305 m) of
pipeline and including 5 or more
dwellings.
[Amdt. 192–102, 71 FR 13302, Mar. 15, 2006] (c) Type A lines. An operator of a
Type A regulated onshore gathering
§ 192.9 What requirements apply to line must comply with the require-
gathering lines?
ments of this part applicable to trans-
(a) Requirements. An operator of a mission lines, except the requirements
gathering line must follow the safety in § 192.150 and in subpart O of this
requirements of this part as prescribed part. However, an operator of a Type A
by this section. regulated onshore gathering line in a
(b) Offshore lines. An operator of an Class 2 location may demonstrate com-
offshore gathering line must comply pliance with subpart N by describing
with requirements of this part applica- the processes it uses to determine the
ble to transmission lines, except the requalification of persons performing op-
quirements in § 192.150 and in subpart O erations and maintenance tasks.
of this part.
436
(d) Type B lines. An operator of a Requirement Compliance deadline

Type B regulated onshore gathering
Carry out a damage preven- October 15, 2007.
line must comply with the following tion program under
requirements: § 192.614.
(1) If a line is new, replaced, relo- Establish MAOP under October 15, 2007.
§ 192.619.
cated, or otherwise changed, the de- Install and maintain line mark- April 15, 2008.
sign, installation, construction, initial ers under § 192.707.
inspection, and initial testing must be Establish a public education April 15, 2008.
in accordance with requirements of program under § 192.616.
Other provisions of this part April 15, 2009.
this part applicable to transmission as required by paragraph
lines; (c) of this section for Type
(2) If the pipeline is metallic, control A lines.
corrosion according to requirements of
subpart I of this part applicable to (3) If, after April 14, 2006, a change in
transmission lines; class location or increase in dwelling
(3) If the pipeline contains plastic density causes an onshore gathering
pipe or components, the operator must line to be a regulated onshore gath-
comply with all applicable require- ering line, the operator has 1 year for
ments of this part for plastic pipe com- Type B lines and 2 years for Type A
ponents; lines after the line becomes a regulated
(4) Carry out a damage prevention onshore gathering line to comply with
program under § 192.614; this section.
(5) Establish a public education pro- [Amdt. 192–102, 71 FR 13301, Mar. 15, 2006, as
gram under § 192.616; amended by Amdt. 192–120, 80 FR 12777, Mar.
(6) Establish the MAOP of the line 11, 2015; Amdt. 192–124, 83 FR 58716, Nov. 20,
under § 192.619; 2018]
(7) Install and maintain line markers EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 84 FR 52244, Oct.
according to the requirements for 1, 2019, § 192.9 was amended by revising para-
transmission lines in § 192.707; and graphs (b), (c), and (d)(1), (2), and (6), effec-
(8) Conduct leakage surveys in active July 1, 2020. For the convenience of the
user, the revised text is set forth as follows:
cordance with the requirements for
transmission lines in § 192.706, using § 192.9 What requirements apply to gath-
leak-detection equipment, and prompt- ering lines?
ly repair hazardous leaks in accordance
with § 192.703(c). * * * * *
(e) Compliance deadlines. An operator
(b) Offshore lines. An operator of an off-
of a regulated onshore gathering line shore gathering line must comply with re-
must comply with the following dead- quirements of this part applicable to trans-
lines, as applicable. mission lines, except the requirements in
(1) An operator of a new, replaced, re- §§ 192.150, 192.285(e), 192.493, 192.506, 192.607,
located, or otherwise changed line 192.619(e), 192.624, 192.710, 192.712, and in sub-
must be in compliance with the appli- part O of this part.
cable requirements of this section by (c) Type A lines. An operator of a Type A
regulated onshore gathering line must com-
the date the line goes into service, un-
ply with the requirements of this part appli-
less an exception in § 192.13 applies. cable to transmission lines, except the re-
(2) If a regulated onshore gathering quirements in §§ 192.150, 192.285(e), 192.493,
line existing on April 14, 2006 was not 192.506, 192.607, 192.619(e), 192.624, 192.710,
previously subject to this part, an op- 192.712, and in subpart O of this part. How-
erator has until the date stated in the ever, operators of Type A regulated onshore
second column to comply with the ap- gathering lines in a Class 2 location may
plicable requirement for the line listed demonstrate compliance with subpart N by
describing the processes it uses to determine
in the first column, unless the Admin- the qualification of persons performing oper-
istrator finds a later deadline is justi- ations and maintenance tasks.
fied in a particular case: (d) * * *
(1) If a line is new, replaced, relocated, or
Requirement Compliance deadline
otherwise changed, the design, installation,
Control corrosion according to April 15, 2009. construction, initial inspection, and initial
Subpart I requirements for testing must be in accordance with require-
transmission lines. ments of this part applicable to transmission
437
§ 192.10 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
lines except the requirements in §§ 192.67, (c) In the event of a conflict between
192.127, 192.205, 192.227(c), 192.285(e), and this part and NFPA 58 and NFPA 59
192.506; (incorporated by reference, see § 192.7),
(2) If the pipeline is metallic, control cor-
rosion according to requirements of subpart NFPA 58 and NFPA 59 prevail.
I of this part applicable to transmission lines [Amdt. 192–78, 61 FR 28783, June 6, 1996, as
except the requirements in § 192.493; amended by Amdt. 192–119, 80 FR 180, Jan. 5,
2015; 80 FR 46847, Aug. 6, 2015]
* * * * *
(6) Establish the MAOP of the line under
§ 192.12 Underground natural gas stor-
§ 192.619(a), (b), and (c);
age facilities.
Underground natural gas storage fa-
* * * * * cilities must meet the following re-
quirements:
§ 192.10 Outer continental shelf pipe- (a) Each underground natural gas
lines. storage facility that uses a solution-
Operators of transportation pipelines mined salt cavern reservoir for gas
on the Outer Continental Shelf (as de- storage constructed after July 18, 2017
fined in the Outer Continental Shelf must meet all requirements and rec-
Lands Act; 43 U.S.C. 1331) must identify ommendations of API RP 1170 (incor-
on all their respective pipelines the porated by reference, see § 192.7).
specific points at which operating re- (b) Each underground natural gas
sponsibility transfers to a producing storage facility that uses a solution-
operator. For those instances in which mined salt cavern reservoir for storage
the transfer points are not identifiable including those constructed not later
by a durable marking, each operator than July 18, 2017 must meet the oper-
will have until September 15, 1998 to ations, maintenance, integrity dem-
identify the transfer points. If it is not onstration and verification, moni-
practicable to durably mark a transfer toring, threat and hazard identifica-
point and the transfer point is located tion, assessment, remediation, site se-
above water, the operator must depict curity, emergency response and pre-
the transfer point on a schematic lo- paredness, and recordkeeping require-
cated near the transfer point. If a ments and recommendations of API RP
transfer point is located subsea, then 1170, sections 9, 10, and 11 (incorporated
the operator must identify the transfer by reference, see § 192.7) by January 18,
point on a schematic which must be 2018.
maintained at the nearest upstream fa- (c) Each underground natural gas
cility and provided to PHMSA upon re- storage facility that uses a depleted
quest. For those cases in which adjoin- hydrocarbon reservoir or an aquifer
ing operators have not agreed on a reservoir for storage constructed after
transfer point by September 15, 1998 July 18, 2017 must meet all require-
the Regional Director and the MMS ments and recommendations of API RP
Regional Supervisor will make a joint 1171 (incorporated by reference, see
determination of the transfer point. § 192.7).
[Amdt. 192–81, 62 FR 61695, Nov. 19, 1997, as (d) Each underground natural gas
amended at 70 FR 11139, Mar. 8, 2005] storage facility that uses a depleted
hydrocarbon reservoir or an aquifer
§ 192.11 Petroleum gas systems. reservoir for gas storage, including
(a) Each plant that supplies petro- those constructed not later than July
leum gas by pipeline to a natural gas 18, 2017 must meet the operations,
distribution system must meet the re- maintenance, integrity demonstration
quirements of this part and NFPA 58 and verification, monitoring, threat
and NFPA 59 (incorporated by ref- and hazard identification, assessment,
erence, see § 192.7). remediation, site security, emergency
(b) Each pipeline system subject to response and preparedness, and record-
this part that transports only petro- keeping requirements and rec-
leum gas or petroleum gas/air mixtures ommendations of API RP 1171, sections

must meet the requirements of this 8, 9, 10, and 11 (incorporated by ref-
part and of ANSI/NFPA 58 and 59. erence, see § 192.7) by January 18, 2018.
438
(e) Operators of underground gas (1) The pipeline has been designed, in-
storage facilities must establish and stalled, constructed, initially in-
follow written procedures for oper- spected, and initially tested in accord-
ations, maintenance, and emergencies ance with this part; or
implementing the requirements of API (2) The pipeline qualifies for use
RP 1170 and API RP 1171, as required under this part according to the re-
under this section, including the effec- quirements in § 192.14.
tive dates as applicable, and incor-
Pipeline Date
porate such procedures into their writ-
ten procedures for operations, mainte- Offshore gathering line .......... July 31, 1977.
nance, and emergencies established Regulated onshore gathering March 15 2007.
pursuant to § 192.605. line to which this part did
not apply until April 14,
(f) With respect to the incorporation 2006.
by reference of API RP 1170 and API All other pipelines .................. March 12, 1971.
RP 1171 in this section, the non-manda-
tory provisions (i.e., provisions con- (b) No person may operate a segment
taining the word ‘‘should’’ or other of pipeline listed in the first column
non-mandatory language) are adopted that is replaced, relocated, or other-
as mandatory provisions under the au- wise changed after the date in the sec-
thority of the pipeline safety laws ex- ond column, unless the replacement,
cept when the operator includes or ref- relocation or change has been made ac-
erences written technical justifications cording to the requirements in this
in its program or procedural manual, part.
described in paragraph (a)(5) of this
Pipeline Date
section, as to why compliance with a
provision of the recommended practice Offshore gathering line .......... July 31, 1977.
is not practicable and not necessary for Regulated onshore gathering March 15, 2007.
safety with respect to specified under- line to which this part did
not apply until April 14,
ground storage facilities or equipment. 2006.
The justifications for any deviation All other pipelines .................. November 12, 1970.
from any provision of API RP 1170 and
API RP 1171 must be technically re- (c) Each operator shall maintain,
viewed and documented by a subject modify as appropriate, and follow the
matter expert to ensure there will be plans, procedures, and programs that it
no adverse impact on design, construc- is required to establish under this part.
tion, operations, maintenance, integ-
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
rity, emergency preparedness and re-
Amdt. 192–27, 41 FR 34605, Aug. 16, 1976;
sponse, and overall safety and must be Amdt. 192–30, 42 FR 60148, Nov. 25, 1977;
dated and approved by a senior execu- Amdt. 192–102, 71 FR 13303, Mar. 15, 2006]
tive officer, vice president, or higher
office with responsibility of the under- § 192.14 Conversion to service subject
ground natural gas storage facility. An to this part.
operator must discontinue use of any (a) A steel pipeline previously used in
variance where PHMSA determines and service not subject to this part quali-
provides notice that the variance ad- fies for use under this part if the oper-
versely impacts design, construction, ator prepares and follows a written
operations, maintenance, integrity, procedure to carry out the following
emergency preparedness and response, requirements:
or overall safety.
(1) The design, construction, oper-
[Amdt. 192–122, 81 FR 91873, Dec. 19, 2016] ation, and maintenance history of the
pipeline must be reviewed and, where
§ 192.13 What general requirements sufficient historical records are not
apply to pipelines regulated under available, appropriate tests must be
this part? performed to determine if the pipeline
(a) No person may operate a segment is in a satisfactory condition for safe
of pipeline listed in the first column operation.

that is readied for service after the (2) The pipeline right-of-way, all
date in the second column, unless: aboveground segments of the pipeline,
439
§ 192.15 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
and appropriately selected under- piping’’ does not include branch lines
ground segments must be visually in- that serve yard lanterns, pool heaters,
spected for physical defects and oper- or other types of secondary equipment.
ating conditions which reasonably Also, ‘‘maintain’’ means monitor for
could be expected to impair the corrosion according to § 192.465 if the
strength or tightness of the pipeline. customer’s buried piping is metallic,
(3) All known unsafe defects and con- survey for leaks according to § 192.723,
ditions must be corrected in accord- and if an unsafe condition is found,
ance with this part. shut off the flow of gas, advise the cus-
(4) The pipeline must be tested in ac- tomer of the need to repair the unsafe
cordance with subpart J of this part to condition, or repair the unsafe condi-
substantiate the maximum allowable tion.
operating pressure permitted by sub- (b) Each operator shall notify each
part L of this part. customer once in writing of the fol-
(b) Each operator must keep for the lowing information:
life of the pipeline a record of the in- (1) The operator does not maintain
vestigations, tests, repairs, replace- the customer’s buried piping.
ments, and alterations made under the (2) If the customer’s buried piping is
requirements of paragraph (a) of this not maintained, it may be subject to
section. the potential hazards of corrosion and
(c) An operator converting a pipeline leakage.
from service not previously covered by (3) Buried gas piping should be—
this part must notify PHMSA 60 days (i) Periodically inspected for leaks;
before the conversion occurs as re-
(ii) Periodically inspected for corro-
quired by § 191.22 of this chapter.
sion if the piping is metallic; and
[Amdt. 192–30, 42 FR 60148, Nov. 25, 1977, as (iii) Repaired if any unsafe condition
amended by Amdt. 192–123, 82 FR 7997, Jan. is discovered.
23, 2017]
(4) When excavating near buried gas
§ 192.15 Rules of regulatory construc- piping, the piping should be located in
tion. advance, and the excavation done by
hand.
(a) As used in this part:
(5) The operator (if applicable),
Includes means including but not lim-
ited to. plumbing contractors, and heating con-
May means ‘‘is permitted to’’ or ‘‘is tractors can assist in locating, inspect-
authorized to’’. ing, and repairing the customer’s bur-
May not means ‘‘is not permitted to’’ ied piping.
or ‘‘is not authorized to’’. (c) Each operator shall notify each
Shall is used in the mandatory and customer not later than August 14,
imperative sense. 1996, or 90 days after the customer first
(b) In this part: receives gas at a particular location,
(1) Words importing the singular in- whichever is later. However, operators
clude the plural; of master meter systems may continu-
(2) Words importing the plural in- ously post a general notice in a promi-
clude the singular; and nent location frequented by customers.
(3) Words importing the masculine (d) Each operator must make the fol-
gender include the feminine. lowing records available for inspection
by the Administrator or a State agency
§ 192.16 Customer notification. participating under 49 U.S.C. 60105 or
(a) This section applies to each oper- 60106:
ator of a service line who does not (1) A copy of the notice currently in
maintain the customer’s buried piping use; and
up to entry of the first building down- (2) Evidence that notices have been
stream, or, if the customer’s buried sent to customers within the previous 3
piping does not enter a building, up to years.
the principal gas utilization equipment [Amdt. 192–74, 60 FR 41828, Aug. 14, 1995, as
or the first fence (or wall) that sur- amended by Amdt. 192–74A, 60 FR 63451, Dec.
rounds that equipment. For the pur- 11, 1995; Amdt. 192–83, 63 FR 7723, Feb. 17,
pose of this section, ‘‘customer’s buried 1998]
440
§ 192.18 How to notify PHMSA. § 192.53 General.

(a) An operator must provide any no- Materials for pipe and components
tification required by this part by— must be:
(1) Sending the notification by elec- (a) Able to maintain the structural
tronic mail to integrity of the pipeline under tem-
InformationResourcesManager@dot.gov; perature and other environmental con-
ditions that may be anticipated;
or
(b) Chemically compatible with any
(2) Sending the notification by mail gas that they transport and with any
to ATTN: Information Resources Man- other material in the pipeline with
ager, DOT/PHMSA/OPS, East Building, which they are in contact; and
2nd Floor, E22–321, 1200 New Jersey (c) Qualified in accordance with the
Ave. SE, Washington, DC 20590. applicable requirements of this sub-
(b) An operator must also notify the part.
appropriate State or local pipeline
safety authority when an applicable § 192.55 Steel pipe.
pipeline segment is located in a State (a) New steel pipe is qualified for use
where OPS has an interstate agent under this part if:
agreement, or an intrastate applicable (1) It was manufactured in accord-
pipeline segment is regulated by that ance with a listed specification;
State. (2) It meets the requirements of—
(c) Unless otherwise specified, if the (i) Section II of appendix B to this
notification is made pursuant to part; or
(ii) If it was manufactured before No-
§ 192.506(b), § 192.607(e)(4), § 192.607(e)(5),
vember 12, 1970, either section II or III
§ 192.624(c)(2)(iii), § 192.624(c)(6),
of appendix B to this part; or
§ 192.632(b)(3), § 192.710(c)(7), (3) It is used in accordance with para-
§ 192.712(d)(3)(iv), § 192.712(e)(2)(i)(E), graph (c) or (d) of this section.
§ 192.921(a)(7), or § 192.937(c)(7) to use a (b) Used steel pipe is qualified for use
different integrity assessment method, under this part if:
analytical method, sampling approach, (1) It was manufactured in accord-
or technique (i.e., ‘‘other technology’’) ance with a listed specification and it
that differs from that prescribed in meets the requirements of paragraph
those sections, the operator must no- II-C of appendix B to this part;
tify PHMSA at least 90 days in advance (2) It meets the requirements of:
of using the other technology. An oper- (i) Section II of appendix B to this
ator may proceed to use the other tech- part; or
nology 91 days after submittal of the (ii) If it was manufactured before No-
notification unless it receives a letter vember 12, 1970, either section II or III
from the Associate Administrator for of appendix B to this part;
Pipeline Safety informing the operator (3) It has been used in an existing
that PHMSA objects to the proposed line of the same or higher pressure and
use of other technology or that meets the requirements of paragraph
PHMSA requires additional time to II-C of appendix B to this part; or
(4) It is used in accordance with para-
conduct its review.
graph (c) of this section.
[84 FR 52244, Oct. 1, 2019] (c) New or used steel pipe may be
used at a pressure resulting in a hoop
EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 84 FR 52244, Oct.
1, 2019, § 192.18 was added, effective July 1, stress of less than 6,000 p.s.i. (41 MPa)
2020. where no close coiling or close bending
is to be done, if visual examination in-
dicates that the pipe is in good condi-
Subpart B—Materials tion and that it is free of split seams
and other defects that would cause
§ 192.51 Scope.
leakage. If it is to be welded, steel pipe
This subpart prescribes minimum re- that has not been manufactured to a
quirements for the selection and quali- listed specification must also pass the
fication of pipe and components for use weldability tests prescribed in para-
in pipelines. graph II-B of appendix B to this part.
441
§ 192.57 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(d) Steel pipe that has not been pre- after March 6, 2015 used under this
viously used may be used as replace- part.
ment pipe in a segment of pipeline if it
has been manufactured prior to Novem- Amdt. 192–19, 40 FR 10472, Mar. 6, 1975; Amdt.
ber 12, 1970, in accordance with the 192–58, 53 FR 1635, Jan. 21, 1988; Amdt. 192–119,
same specification as the pipe used in 80 FR 180, Jan. 5, 2015; Amdt. 192–124, 83 FR
constructing that segment of pipeline. 58716, Nov. 20, 2018]
(e) New steel pipe that has been cold
expanded must comply with the man- § 192.61 [Reserved]
datory provisions of API Spec 5L (in-
corporated by reference, see § 192.7). § 192.63 Marking of materials.
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by (a) Except as provided in paragraph
Amdt. 191–1, 35 FR 17660, Nov. 17, 1970; Amdt. (d) and (e) of this section, each valve,
192–12, 38 FR 4761, Feb. 22, 1973; Amdt. 192–51, fitting, length of pipe, and other com-
51 FR 15335, Apr. 23, 1986; 58 FR 14521, Mar. 18, ponent must be marked as prescribed
1993; Amdt. 192–85, 63 FR 37502, July 13, 1998; in the specification or standard to
Amdt. 192–119, 80 FR 180, Jan. 5, 2015; 80 FR which it was manufactured.
46847, Aug. 6, 2015]
(b) Surfaces of pipe and components
§ 192.57 [Reserved] that are subject to stress from internal
pressure may not be field die stamped.
§ 192.59 Plastic pipe. (c) If any item is marked by die
(a) New plastic pipe is qualified for stamping, the die must have blunt or
use under this part if: rounded edges that will minimize
stress concentrations.
(1) It is manufactured in accordance
with a listed specification; (d) Paragraph (a) of this section does
(2) It is resistant to chemicals with not apply to items manufactured be-
which contact may be anticipated; and fore November 12, 1970, that meet all of
the following:
(3) It is free of visible defects.
(1) The item is identifiable as to type,
(b) Used plastic pipe is qualified for
use under this part if: manufacturer, and model.
(1) It was manufactured in accord- (2) Specifications or standards giving
ance with a listed specification; pressure, temperature, and other ap-
propriate criteria for the use of items
(2) It is resistant to chemicals with
which contact may be anticipated; are readily available.
(3) It has been used only in gas serv- (e) All plastic pipe and components
ice; must also meet the following require-
ments:
(4) Its dimensions are still within the
tolerances of the specification to which (1) All markings on plastic pipe pre-
it was manufactured; and scribed in the listed specification and
(5) It is free of visible defects. the requirements of paragraph (e)(2) of
this section must be repeated at inter-
(c) For the purpose of paragraphs
(a)(1) and (b)(1) of this section, where vals not exceeding two feet.
pipe of a diameter included in a listed (2) Plastic pipe and components man-
specification is impractical to use, pipe ufactured after December 31, 2019 must
of a diameter between the sizes in- be marked in accordance with the list-
cluded in a listed specification may be ed specification.
used if it: (3) All physical markings on plastic
(1) Meets the strength and design cri- pipelines prescribed in the listed speci-
teria required of pipe included in that fication and paragraph (e)(2) of this
listed specification; and
(2) Is manufactured from plastic com-
pounds which meet the criteria for ma-
terial required of pipe included in that
listed specification.
(d) Rework and/or regrind material is
not allowed in plastic pipe produced
442
section must be legible until the time § 192.67 Records: Material properties.
of installation. (a) For steel transmission pipelines in-
stalled after [July 1, 2020, an operator must
[Amdt. 192–1, 35 FR 17660, Nov. 17, 1970, as collect or make, and retain for the life of the
amended by Amdt. 192–31, 43 FR 883, Apr. 3, pipeline, records that document the physical
1978; Amdt. 192–61, 53 FR 36793, Sept. 22, 1988; characteristics of the pipeline, including di-
Amdt. 192–62, 54 FR 5627, Feb. 6, 1989; Amdt. ameter, yield strength, ultimate tensile
192–61A, 54 FR 32642, Aug. 9, 1989; 58 FR 14521, strength, wall thickness, seam type, and
Mar. 18, 1993; Amdt. 192–76, 61 FR 26122, May chemical composition of materials for pipe
24, 1996; 61 FR 36826, July 15, 1996; Amdt. 192– in accordance with §§ 192.53 and 192.55.
114, 75 FR 48603, Aug. 11, 2010; Amdt. 192–119, Records must include tests, inspections, and
80 FR 180, Jan. 5, 2015; Amdt. 192–124, 83 FR attributes required by the manufacturing
58716, Nov. 20, 2018] specifications applicable at the time the pipe
was manufactured or installed.
§ 192.65 Transportation of pipe. (b) For steel transmission pipelines in-
(a) Railroad. In a pipeline to be oper- stalled on or before July 1, 2020], if operators
ated at a hoop stress of 20 percent or have records that document tests, inspec-
more of SMYS, an operator may not in- tions, and attributes required by the manu-
facturing specifications applicable at the
stall pipe having an outer diameter to
time the pipe was manufactured or installed,
wall thickness of 70 to 1, or more, that including diameter, yield strength, ultimate
is transported by railroad unless the tensile strength, wall thickness, seam type,
transportation is performed by API RP and chemical composition in accordance
5L1 (incorporated by reference, see with §§ 192.53 and 192.55, operators must re-
§ 192.7). tain such records for the life of the pipeline.
(b) Ship or barge. In a pipeline to be (c) For steel transmission pipeline seg-
operated at a hoop stress of 20 percent ments installed on or before July 1, 2020], if
an operator does not have records necessary
or more of SMYS, an operator may not
to establish the MAOP of a pipeline segment,
use pipe having an outer diameter to the operator may be subject to the require-
wall thickness ratio of 70 to 1, or more, ments of § 192.624 according to the terms of
that is transported by ship or barge on that section.
both inland and marine waterways un-
less the transportation is performed in Subpart C—Pipe Design
accordance with API RP 5LW (incor-
porated by reference, see § 192.7). § 192.101 Scope.
(c) Truck. In a pipeline to be operated This subpart prescribes the minimum
at a hoop stress of 20 percent or more requirements for the design of pipe.
of SMYS, an operator may not use pipe
having an outer diameter to wall § 192.103 General.
thickness ratio of 70 to 1, or more, that
Pipe must be designed with sufficient
is transported by truck unless the
wall thickness, or must be installed
transportation is performed in accord-
with adequate protection, to withstand
ance with API RP 5LT (incorporated by
anticipated external pressures and
reference, see § 192.7).
loads that will be imposed on the pipe
[Amdt. 192–114, 75 FR 48603, Aug. 11, 2010, as after installation.
amended by Amdt. 192–119, 80 FR 180, Jan. 5,
2015; Amdt. 192–120, 80 FR 12777, Mar. 11, 2015] § 192.105 Design formula for steel pipe.
§ 192.67 Storage and handling of plas- (a) The design pressure for steel pipe
tic pipe and associated components. is determined in accordance with the
following formula:
Each operator must have and follow
written procedures for the storage and P = (2 St/D) × F × E × T
handling of plastic pipe and associated P = Design pressure in pounds per square
components that meet the applicable inch (kPa) gauge.
listed specifications. S = Yield strength in pounds per square inch
(kPa) determined in accordance with
[83 FR 58716, Nov. 20, 2018]
§ 192.107.
EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 84 FR 52244, Oct. D = Nominal outside diameter of the pipe in
1, 2019, § 192.67 was redesignated as § 192.69 inches (millimeters).
and a new § 192.67 was added, effective July 1, t = Nominal wall thickness of the pipe in
2020. For the convenience of the user, the inches (millimeters). If this is unknown,
added text is set forth as follows: it is determined in accordance with
443
§ 192.107 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
§ 192.109. Additional wall thickness re- § 192.109 Nominal wall thickness (t)
quired for concurrent external loads in for steel pipe.
accordance with § 192.103 may not be in-
cluded in computing design pressure. (a) If the nominal wall thickness for
F = Design factor determined in accordance steel pipe is not known, it is deter-
with § 192.111. mined by measuring the thickness of
E = Longitudinal joint factor determined in each piece of pipe at quarter points on
accordance with § 192.113. one end.
T = Temperature derating factor determined (b) However, if the pipe is of uniform
in accordance with § 192.115. grade, size, and thickness and there are
more than 10 lengths, only 10 percent
(b) If steel pipe that has been sub-
of the individual lengths, but not less
jected to cold expansion to meet the
than 10 lengths, need be measured. The
SMYS is subsequently heated, other thickness of the lengths that are not
than by welding or stress relieving as a measured must be verified by applying
part of welding, the design pressure is a gauge set to the minimum thickness
limited to 75 percent of the pressure de- found by the measurement. The nomi-
termined under paragraph (a) of this nal wall thickness to be used in the de-
section if the temperature of the pipe sign formula in § 192.105 is the next wall
exceeds 900 °F (482 °C) at any time or is thickness found in commercial speci-
held above 600 °F (316 °C) for more than fications that is below the average of
1 hour. all the measurements taken. However,
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by the nominal wall thickness used may
Amdt. 192–47, 49 FR 7569, Mar. 1, 1984; Amdt. not be more than 1.14 times the small-
192–85, 63 FR 37502, July 13, 1998] est measurement taken on pipe less
than 20 inches (508 millimeters) in out-
§ 192.107 Yield strength (S) for steel side diameter, nor more than 1.11 times
pipe. the smallest measurement taken on
(a) For pipe that is manufactured in pipe 20 inches (508 millimeters) or more
accordance with a specification listed in outside diameter.
in section I of appendix B of this part, [35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
the yield strength to be used in the de- Amdt. 192–85, 63 FR 37502, July 13, 1998]
sign formula in § 192.105 is the SMYS
stated in the listed specification, if § 192.111 Design factor (F) for steel
pipe.
that value is known.
(b) For pipe that is manufactured in (a) Except as otherwise provided in
accordance with a specification not paragraphs (b), (c), and (d) of this sec-
listed in section I of appendix B to this tion, the design factor to be used in the
part or whose specification or tensile design formula in § 192.105 is deter-
properties are unknown, the yield mined in accordance with the following
strength to be used in the design for- table:
mula in § 192.105 is one of the following: Design
Class location
(1) If the pipe is tensile tested in ac- factor (F)
cordance with section II-D of appendix 1 ........................................................................... 0.72
B to this part, the lower of the fol- 2 ........................................................................... 0.60
lowing: 3 ........................................................................... 0.50
4 ........................................................................... 0.40
(i) 80 percent of the average yield
strength determined by the tensile
(b) A design factor of 0.60 or less
tests. must be used in the design formula in
(ii) The lowest yield strength deter- § 192.105 for steel pipe in Class 1 loca-
mined by the tensile tests. tions that:
(2) If the pipe is not tensile tested as (1) Crosses the right-of-way of an un-
provided in paragraph (b)(1) of this sec- improved public road, without a casing;
tion, 24,000 p.s.i. (165 MPa). (2) Crosses without a casing, or
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by makes a parallel encroachment on, the
Amdt. 192–78, 61 FR 28783, June 6, 1996; Amdt. right-of-way of either a hard surfaced
192–83, 63 FR 7723, Feb. 17, 1998; Amdt. 192–85, road, a highway, a public street, or a
63 FR 37502, July 13, 1998] railroad;
444
(3) Is supported by a vehicular, pedes- (1) Steel pipe in a compressor station,

trian, railroad, or pipeline bridge; or regulating station, or measuring sta-
(4) Is used in a fabricated assembly, tion; and
(including separators, mainline valve (2) Steel pipe, including a pipe riser,
assemblies, cross-connections, and on a platform located offshore or in in-
river crossing headers) or is used with- land navigable waters.
in five pipe diameters in any direction [35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
from the last fitting of a fabricated as- Amdt. 192–27, 41 FR 34605, Aug. 16, 1976]
sembly, other than a transition piece
or an elbow used in place of a pipe bend § 192.112 Additional design require-
ments for steel pipe using alter-
which is not associated with a fab- native maximum allowable oper-
ricated assembly. ating pressure.
(c) For Class 2 locations, a design fac-
For a new or existing pipeline seg-
tor of 0.50, or less, must be used in the ment to be eligible for operation at the
design formula in § 192.105 for uncased alternative maximum allowable oper-
steel pipe that crosses the right-of-way ating pressure (MAOP) calculated
of a hard surfaced road, a highway, a under § 192.620, a segment must meet
public street, or a railroad. the following additional design require-
(d) For Class 1 and Class 2 locations, ments. Records for alternative MAOP
a design factor of 0.50, or less, must be must be maintained, for the useful life
used in the design formula in § 192.105 of the pipeline, demonstrating compli-
for— ance with these requirements:
To address this design issue: The pipeline segment must meet these additional requirements:
(a) General standards for the (1) The plate, skelp, or coil used for the pipe must be micro-alloyed, fine grain, fully killed, con-
steel pipe. tinuously cast steel with calcium treatment.
(2) The carbon equivalents of the steel used for pipe must not exceed 0.25 percent by weight,
as calculated by the Ito-Bessyo formula (Pcm formula) or 0.43 percent by weight, as cal-
culated by the International Institute of Welding (IIW) formula.
(3) The ratio of the specified outside diameter of the pipe to the specified wall thickness must
be less than 100. The wall thickness or other mitigative measures must prevent denting and
ovality anomalies during construction, strength testing and anticipated operational stresses.
(4) The pipe must be manufactured using API Spec 5L, product specification level 2 (incor-
porated by reference, see § 192.7) for maximum operating pressures and minimum and
maximum operating temperatures and other requirements under this section.
(b) Fracture control ................... (1) The toughness properties for pipe must address the potential for initiation, propagation and
arrest of fractures in accordance with:
(i) API Spec 5L (incorporated by reference, see § 192.7); or
(ii) American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) B31.8 (incorporated by reference, see
§ 192.7); and
(iii) Any correction factors needed to address pipe grades, pressures, temperatures, or gas
compositions not expressly addressed in API Spec 5L , product specification level 2 or
ASME B31.8 (incorporated by reference, see § 192.7).
(2) Fracture control must:
(i) Ensure resistance to fracture initiation while addressing the full range of operating tempera-
tures, pressures, gas compositions, pipe grade and operating stress levels, including max-
imum pressures and minimum temperatures for shut-in conditions, that the pipeline is ex-
pected to experience. If these parameters change during operation of the pipeline such that
they are outside the bounds of what was considered in the design evaluation, the evaluation
must be reviewed and updated to assure continued resistance to fracture initiation over the
operating life of the pipeline;
(ii) Address adjustments to toughness of pipe for each grade used and the decompression be-
havior of the gas at operating parameters;
(iii) Ensure at least 99 percent probability of fracture arrest within eight pipe lengths with a
probability of not less than 90 percent within five pipe lengths; and
(iv) Include fracture toughness testing that is equivalent to that described in supplementary re-
quirements SR5A, SR5B, and SR6 of API Specification 5L (incorporated by reference, see
§ 192.7) and ensures ductile fracture and arrest with the following exceptions:
(A) The results of the Charpy impact test prescribed in SR5A must indicate at least 80 percent
minimum shear area for any single test on each heat of steel; and
(B) The results of the drop weight test prescribed in SR6 must indicate 80 percent average
shear area with a minimum single test result of 60 percent shear area for any steel test
samples. The test results must ensure a ductile fracture and arrest.
(3) If it is not physically possible to achieve the pipeline toughness properties of paragraphs
(b)(1) and (2) of this section, additional design features, such as mechanical or composite
crack arrestors and/or heavier walled pipe of proper design and spacing, must be used to
ensure fracture arrest as described in paragraph (b)(2)(iii) of this section.
445
§ 192.112 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(c) Plate/coil quality control ...... (1) There must be an internal quality management program at all mills involved in producing
steel, plate, coil, skelp, and/or rolling pipe to be operated at alternative MAOP. These pro-
grams must be structured to eliminate or detect defects and inclusions affecting pipe quality.
(2) A mill inspection program or internal quality management program must include (i) and ei-
ther (ii) or (iii):
(i) An ultrasonic test of the ends and at least 35 percent of the surface of the plate/coil or pipe
to identify imperfections that impair serviceability such as laminations, cracks, and inclu-
sions. At least 95 percent of the lengths of pipe manufactured must be tested. For all pipe-
lines designed after December 22, 2008, the test must be done in accordance with ASTM
A578/A578M Level B, or API Spec 5L Paragraph 7.8.10 (incorporated by reference, see
§ 192.7) or equivalent method, and either
(ii) A macro etch test or other equivalent method to identify inclusions that may form centerline
segregation during the continuous casting process. Use of sulfur prints is not an equivalent
method. The test must be carried out on the first or second slab of each sequence graded
with an acceptance criteria of one or two on the Mannesmann scale or equivalent; or
(iii) A quality assurance monitoring program implemented by the operator that includes audits
of: (a) all steelmaking and casting facilities, (b) quality control plans and manufacturing pro-
cedure specifications, (c) equipment maintenance and records of conformance, (d) applica-
ble casting superheat and speeds, and (e) centerline segregation monitoring records to en-
sure mitigation of centerline segregation during the continuous casting process.
(d) Seam quality control ........... (1) There must be a quality assurance program for pipe seam welds to assure tensile strength
provided in API Spec 5L (incorporated by reference, see § 192.7) for appropriate grades.
(2) There must be a hardness test, using Vickers (Hv10) hardness test method or equivalent
test method, to assure a maximum hardness of 280 Vickers of the following:
(i) A cross section of the weld seam of one pipe from each heat plus one pipe from each
welding line per day; and
(ii) For each sample cross section, a minimum of 13 readings (three for each heat affected
zone, three in the weld metal, and two in each section of pipe base metal).
(3) All of the seams must be ultrasonically tested after cold expansion and mill hydrostatic
testing.
(e) Mill hydrostatic test ............. (1) All pipe to be used in a new pipeline segment installed after October 1, 2015, must be
hydrostatically tested at the mill at a test pressure corresponding to a hoop stress of 95 per-
cent SMYS for 10 seconds.
(2) Pipe in operation prior to December 22, 2008, must have been hydrostatically tested at the
mill at a test pressure corresponding to a hoop stress of 90 percent SMYS for 10 seconds.
(3) Pipe in operation on or after December 22, 2008, but before October 1, 2015, must have
been hydrostatically tested at the mill at a test pressure corresponding to a hoop stress of
95 percent SMYS for 10 seconds. The test pressure may include a combination of internal
test pressure and the allowance for end loading stresses imposed by the pipe mill hydro-
static testing equipment as allowed by ‘‘ANSI/API Spec 5L’’ (incorporated by reference, see
§ 192.7).
(f) Coating ................................. (1) The pipe must be protected against external corrosion by a non-shielding coating.
(2) Coating on pipe used for trenchless installation must be non-shielding and resist abrasions
and other damage possible during installation.
(3) A quality assurance inspection and testing program for the coating must cover the surface
quality of the bare pipe, surface cleanliness and chlorides, blast cleaning, application tem-
perature control, adhesion, cathodic disbondment, moisture permeation, bending, coating
thickness, holiday detection, and repair.
(g) Fittings and flanges ............. (1) There must be certification records of flanges, factory induction bends and factory weld
ells. Certification must address material properties such as chemistry, minimum yield
strength and minimum wall thickness to meet design conditions.
(2) If the carbon equivalents of flanges, bends and ells are greater than 0.42 percent by
weight, the qualified welding procedures must include a pre-heat procedure.
(3) Valves, flanges and fittings must be rated based upon the required specification rating
class for the alternative MAOP.
(h) Compressor stations ........... (1) A compressor station must be designed to limit the temperature of the nearest downstream
segment operating at alternative MAOP to a maximum of 120 degrees Fahrenheit (49 de-
grees Celsius) or the higher temperature allowed in paragraph (h)(2) of this section unless a
long-term coating integrity monitoring program is implemented in accordance with paragraph
(h)(3) of this section.
(2) If research, testing and field monitoring tests demonstrate that the coating type being used
will withstand a higher temperature in long-term operations, the compressor station may be
designed to limit downstream piping to that higher temperature. Test results and acceptance
criteria addressing coating adhesion, cathodic disbondment, and coating condition must be
provided to each PHMSA pipeline safety regional office where the pipeline is in service at
least 60 days prior to operating above 120 degrees Fahrenheit (49 degrees Celsius). An op-
erator must also notify a State pipeline safety authority when the pipeline is located in a
State where PHMSA has an interstate agent agreement, or an intrastate pipeline is regu-
lated by that State.
446
(3) Pipeline segments operating at alternative MAOP may operate at temperatures above 120
degrees Fahrenheit (49 degrees Celsius) if the operator implements a long-term coating in-
tegrity monitoring program. The monitoring program must include examinations using direct
current voltage gradient (DCVG), alternating current voltage gradient (ACVG), or an equiva-
lent method of monitoring coating integrity. An operator must specify the periodicity at which
these examinations occur and criteria for repairing identified indications. An operator must
submit its long-term coating integrity monitoring program to each PHMSA pipeline safety re-
gional office in which the pipeline is located for review before the pipeline segments may be
operated at temperatures in excess of 120 degrees Fahrenheit (49 degrees Celsius). An op-
erator must also notify a State pipeline safety authority when the pipeline is located in a
State where PHMSA has an interstate agent agreement, or an intrastate pipeline is regu-
lated by that State.
[73 FR 62175, Oct. 17, 2008, as amended by Amdt. 192–111, 74 FR 62505, Nov. 30, 2009; Amdt. 192–
119, 80 FR 180, Jan. 5, 2015; Amdt. 192–120, 80 FR 12777, Mar. 11, 2015]
§ 192.113 Longitudinal joint factor (E) for steel pipe.
The longitudinal joint factor to be determined in accordance with the fol-

used in the design formula in § 192.105 is lowing table:
Longitudinal joint
Specification Pipe class factor (E)
ASTM A 53/A53M ................... Seamless ....................................................................................................... 1.00

Electric resistance welded ............................................................................. 1.00
Furnace butt welded ...................................................................................... .60
ASTM A 106 ............................ Seamless ....................................................................................................... 1.00
ASTM A 333/A 333M .............. Seamless ....................................................................................................... 1.00
ASTM A 381 ............................ Double submerged arc welded ..................................................................... 1.00
ASTM A 671 ............................ Electric-fusion-welded .................................................................................... 1.00
API Spec 5L ............................ Seamless ....................................................................................................... 1.00
Electric flash welded ...................................................................................... 1.00
Submerged arc welded ................................................................................. 1.00
Furnace butt welded ...................................................................................... .60
Other ....................................... Pipe over 4 inches (102 millimeters) ............................................................. .80
Other ....................................... Pipe 4 inches (102 millimeters) or less ......................................................... .60
If the type of longitudinal joint cannot Gas temperature in degrees Temperature

be determined, the joint factor to be Fahrenheit (Celsius) derating factor (T)
used must not exceed that designated 300 °F (149 °C) ....................................... 0.967
for ‘‘Other.’’ 350 °F (177 °C) ....................................... 0.933
400 °F (204 °C) ....................................... 0.900
[Amdt. 192–37, 46 FR 10159, Feb. 2, 1981, as 450 °F (232 °C) ....................................... 0.867
amended by Amdt. 192–51, 51 FR 15335, Apr.
23, 1986; Amdt. 192–62, 54 FR 5627, Feb. 6, 1989;
58 FR 14521, Mar. 18, 1993; Amdt. 192–85, 63 FR For intermediate gas temperatures, the
37502, July 13, 1998; Amdt. 192–94, 69 FR 32894, derating factor is determined by inter-
June 14, 2004; Amdt. 192–119, 80 FR 180, Jan. polation.
5, 2015]
§ 192.115 Temperature derating factor Amdt. 192–85, 63 FR 37502, July 13, 1998]
(T) for steel pipe.
§§ 192.117–192.119 [Reserved]
The temperature derating factor to
be used in the design formula in § 192.121 Design of plastic pipe.
§ 192.105 is determined as follows:
(a) Design formula. Design formulas
Gas temperature in degrees Temperature for plastic pipe are determined in ac-
Fahrenheit (Celsius) derating factor (T)
cordance with either of the following
250 °F (121 °C) or less ........................... 1.000 formulas:
447
§ 192.121 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
P = Design pressure, gage, psi (kPa). (3) Unless specified for a particular
S = For thermoplastic pipe, the hydrostatic material in this section, the wall
design basis (HDB) is determined in ac- thickness of plastic pipe may not be
cordance with the listed specification at
less than 0.062 inches (1.57 millimeters).
a temperature equal to 73 °F (23 °C), 100
°F (38 °C), 120 °F (49 °C), or 140 °F (60 °C). (4) All plastic pipe must have a listed
In the absence of an HDB established at HDB in accordance with PPI TR–4/2012
the specified temperature, the HDB of a (incorporated by reference, see § 192.7).
higher temperature may be used in deter- (c) Polyethylene (PE) pipe require-
mining a design pressure rating at the ments. (1) For PE pipe produced after
specified temperature by arithmetic in- July 14, 2004, but before January 22,
terpolation using the procedure in Part 2019, a design pressure of up to 125 psig
D.2 of PPI TR–3/2012, (incorporated by may be used, provided:
reference, see § 192.7). For reinforced ther-
mosetting plastic pipe, 11,000 psig (75,842
(i) The material designation code is
kPa). PE2406 or PE3408.
t = Specified wall thickness, inches (mm). (ii) The pipe has a nominal size (Iron
D = Specified outside diameter, inches (mm). Pipe Size (IPS) or Copper Tubing Size
SDR = Standard dimension ratio, the ratio of (CTS)) of 12 inches or less (above nomi-
the average specified outside diameter to nal pipe size of 12 inches, the design
the minimum specified wall thickness, pressure is limited to 100 psig); and
corresponding to a value from a common (iii) The wall thickness is not less
numbering system that was derived from than 0.062 inches (1.57 millimeters).
the American National Standards Insti-
tute (ANSI) preferred number series 10.
(2) For PE pipe produced after Janu-
DF = Design Factor, a maximum of 0.32 un- ary 22, 2019, a DF of 0.40 may be used in
less otherwise specified for a particular the design formula, provided:
material in this section (i) The design pressure does not ex-
ceed 125 psig;
(b) General requirements for plastic pipe (ii) The material designation code is
and components. (1) Except as provided PE2708 or PE4710;
in paragraphs (c) through (f) of this (iii) The pipe has a nominal size (IPS
section, the design pressure for plastic or CTS) of 12 inches or less; and
pipe may not exceed a gauge pressure (iv) The wall thickness for a given
of 100 psig (689 kPa) for pipe used in: outside diameter is not less than that
(i) Distribution systems; or listed in the following table:
(ii) Transmission lines in Class 3 and
4 locations. PE PIPE—MINIMUM WALL THICKNESS AND SDR
(2) Plastic pipe may not be used VALUES
where operating temperatures of the
Minimum
pipe will be: Pipe size wall Corresponding
(i) Below ¥20 °F (¥29 °C), or below (inches) thickness SDR
(values)
¥40 °F (¥40 °C) if all pipe and pipeline (inches)
components whose operating tempera- ⁄ ″ CTS .................................

12 0.090 7
ture will be below ¥20 °F (¥29 °C) have ⁄ ″ CTS .................................
34 0.090 9.7
⁄ ″ IPS ..................................
12 0.090 9.3
a temperature rating by the manufac- 3⁄4″ IPS .................................. 0.095 11
turer consistent with that operating 1″ CTS ................................... 0.119 11
temperature; or 1″ IPS .................................... 0.119 11
(ii) Above the temperature at which 11⁄4″ IPS ................................ 0.151 11

11⁄2″ IPS ................................ 0.173 11
the HDB used in the design formula 2″ ........................................... 0.216 11
under this section is determined. 3″ ........................................... 0.259 13.5
448
ER20NO18.000</GPH>
PE PIPE—MINIMUM WALL THICKNESS AND SDR (1) The design pressure does not ex-
VALUES—Continued ceed 250 psig;
Minimum
(2) The material designation code is
Corresponding PA42316;
Pipe size wall SDR
(inches) thickness
(inches) (values) (3) The pipe has a nominal size (IPS
or CTS) of 6 inches or less; and
4″ ........................................... 0.265 17
6″ ........................................... 0.315 21
(4) The minimum wall thickness for a
8″ ........................................... 0.411 21 given outside diameter is not less than
10″ ......................................... 0.512 21 that listed in the following table.
12″ ......................................... 0.607 21
PA–12 PIPE—MINIMUM WALL THICKNESS AND
(d) Polyamide (PA–11) pipe require- SDR VALUES
ments. (1) For PA–11 pipe produced after
January 23, 2009, but before January 22, Minimum Corresponding
2019, a DF of 0.40 may be used in the de- Pipe size wall SDR
(inches) thickness
sign formula, provided: (values)
(inches)
(i) The design pressure does not ex-
⁄ ″ CTS .................................
12 0.090 7
ceed 200 psig;
⁄ ″ CTS .................................
34 0.090 9.7
(ii) The material designation code is ⁄ ″ IPS ..................................
12 0.090 9.3
PA32312 or PA32316; 3⁄4″ IPS .................................. 0.095 11
(iii) The pipe has a nominal size (IPS 1″ CTS ................................... 0.119 11
or CTS) of 4 inches or less; and 1″ IPS .................................... 0.119 11
(iv) The pipe has a standard dimen- 11⁄4″ IPS ................................ 0.151 11
sion ratio of SDR–11 or less (i.e., thick- 11⁄2″ IPS ................................ 0.173 11
2″ IPS .................................... 0.216 11
er wall pipe).
3″ IPS .................................... 0.259 13.5
(2) For PA–11 pipe produced on or 4″ IPS .................................... 0.333 13.5
after January 22, 2019, a DF of 0.40 may 6″ IPS .................................... 0.491 13.5
be used in the design formula, pro-
vided: (f) Reinforced thermosetting plastic pipe
(i) The design pressure does not ex- requirements. (1) Reinforced thermo-
ceed 250 psig; setting plastic pipe may not be used at
(ii) The material designation code is operating temperatures above 150 °F (66
PA32316; °C).
(iii) The pipe has a nominal size (IPS
(2) The wall thickness for reinforced
or CTS) of 6 inches or less; and
thermosetting plastic pipe may not be
(iv) The minimum wall thickness for
less than that listed in the following
a given outside diameter is not less
than that listed in the following table: table:
Minimum wall
PA–11 PIPE—MINIMUM WALL THICKNESS AND Nominal size in inches thickness in
SDR VALUES (millimeters) inches
(millimeters)
Minimum Corresponding 2 (51) ........................................................... 0.060 (1.52)
Pipe size wall SDR
(inches) thickness 3 (76) ........................................................... 0.060 (1.52)
(values)
(inches) 4 (102) ......................................................... 0.070 (1.78)
6 (152) ......................................................... 0.100 (2.54)
⁄ ″ CTS .................................
12 0.090 7.0
⁄ ″ CTS .................................
34 0.090 9.7
⁄ ″ IPS ..................................
12 0.090 9.3
3⁄4″ IPS .................................. 0.095 11 [Amdt. 192–124, 83 FR 58716, Nov. 20, 2018]
1″ CTS ................................... 0.119 11
1″ IPS .................................... 0.119 11 § 192.123 [Reserved]
11⁄4 IPS .................................. 0.151 11
11⁄2″ IPS ................................ 0.173 11
2″ IPS .................................... 0.216 11
§ 192.125 Design of copper pipe.
3″ IPS .................................... 0.259 13.5 (a) Copper pipe used in mains must
4″ IPS .................................... 0.333 13.5
6″ IPS .................................... 0.491 13.5 have a minimum wall thickness of 0.065
inches (1.65 millimeters) and must be
(e) Polyamide (PA–12) pipe require- hard drawn.
ments. For PA–12 pipe produced after (b) Copper pipe used in service lines
January 22, 2019, a DF of 0.40 may be must have wall thickness not less than
used in the design formula, provided: that indicated in the following table:
449
§ 192.127 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
Standard Nominal Wall thickness inch (milli-

meter)
Subpart D—Design of Pipeline
size inch O.D. inch
(millimeter) (millimeter) Components
Nominal Tolerance
⁄
12 (13) .625 (16) .040 (1.06) .0035 (.0889)
§ 192.141 Scope.
⁄
58 (16) .750 (19) .042 (1.07) .0035 (.0889) This subpart prescribes minimum re-
3⁄4 (19) .875 (22) .045 (1.14) .004 (.102)
quirements for the design and installa-
1 (25) 1.125 (29) .050 (1.27) .004 (.102)
11⁄4 (32) 1.375 (35) .055 (1.40) .0045 (.1143) tion of pipeline components and facili-
11⁄2 (38) 1.625 (41) .060 (1.52) .0045 (.1143) ties. In addition, it prescribes require-
ments relating to protection against
(c) Copper pipe used in mains and accidental overpressuring.
service lines may not be used at pres-
sures in excess of 100 p.s.i. (689 kPa) § 192.143 General requirements.
gage. (a) Each component of a pipeline
(d) Copper pipe that does not have an must be able to withstand operating
internal corrosion resistant lining may pressures and other anticipated load-
not be used to carry gas that has an av- ings without impairment of its service-
erage hydrogen sulfide content of more ability with unit stresses equivalent to
than 0.3 grains/100 ft3 (6.9/m3) under those allowed for comparable material
standard conditions. Standard condi- in pipe in the same location and kind
tions refers to 60 °F and 14.7 psia (15.6 of service. However, if design based
°C and one atmosphere) of gas. upon unit stresses is impractical for a
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by particular component, design may be
Amdt. 192–62, 54 FR 5628, Feb. 6, 1989; Amdt. based upon a pressure rating estab-
192–85, 63 FR 37502, July 13, 1998] lished by the manufacturer by pressure
testing that component or a prototype
§ 192.127 Records: Pipe design. of the component.
(a) For steel transmission pipelines (b) The design and installation of
installed after July 1, 2020], an operator pipeline components and facilities
must collect or make, and retain for must meet applicable requirements for
the life of the pipeline, records docu- corrosion control found in subpart I of
menting that the pipe is designed to this part.
withstand anticipated external pres- (c) Except for excess flow valves,
sures and loads in accordance with each plastic pipeline component in-
§ 192.103 and documenting that the de- stalled after January 22, 2019 must be
termination of design pressure for the able to withstand operating pressures
pipe is made in accordance with and other anticipated loads in accord-
§ 192.105. ance with a listed specification.
(b) For steel transmission pipelines
[Amdt. 48, 49 FR 19824, May 10, 1984, as
installed on or before July 1, 2020, if op-
amended at 72 FR 20059, Apr. 23, 2007; Amdt.
erators have records documenting pipe 192–124, 83 FR 58717, Nov. 20, 2018]
design and the determination of design
pressure in accordance with §§ 192.103 § 192.144 Qualifying metallic compo-
and 192.105, operators must retain such nents.
records for the life of the pipeline.
Notwithstanding any requirement of
(c) For steel transmission pipeline
this subpart which incorporates by ref-
segments installed on or before July 1,
erence an edition of a document listed
2020, if an operator does not have
in § 192.7 or Appendix B of this part, a
records necessary to establish the
MAOP of a pipeline segment, the oper- metallic component manufactured in
ator may be subject to the require- accordance with any other edition of
ments of § 192.624 according to the that document is qualified for use
terms of that section. under this part if—
(a) It can be shown through visual in-
[84 FR 52244, Oct. 1, 2019] spection of the cleaned component that
EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 84 FR 52244, Oct. no defect exists which might impair
1, 2019, § 192.127 was added, effective July 1, the strength or tightness of the compo-
2020. nent; and
450
(b) The edition of the document nents made of ductile iron may be used
under which the component was manu- at pressures up to 80 percent of the
factured has equal or more stringent pressure ratings for comparable steel
requirements for the following as an valves at their listed temperature, if:
edition of that document currently or (1) The temperature-adjusted service
previously listed in § 192.7 or appendix pressure does not exceed 1,000 p.s.i. (7
B of this part: Mpa) gage; and
(1) Pressure testing;
(2) Welding is not used on any ductile
(2) Materials; and
iron component in the fabrication of
(3) Pressure and temperature ratings.
the valve shells or their assembly.
[Amdt. 192–45, 48 FR 30639, July 5, 1983, as (e) No valve having shell (body, bon-
net, cover, and/or end flange) compo-
14, 2004]
nents made of cast iron, malleable
§ 192.145 Valves. iron, or ductile iron may be used in the
(a) Except for cast iron and plastic gas pipe components of compressor sta-
valves, each valve must meet the min- tions.
imum requirements of ANSI/API Spec (f) Except for excess flow valves,
6D (incorporated by reference, see plastic valves installed after January
§ 192.7), or to a national or inter- 22, 2019, must meet the minimum re-
national standard that provides an quirements of a listed specification. A
equivalent performance level. A valve valve may not be used under operating
may not be used under operating condi- conditions that exceed the applicable
tions that exceed the applicable pres- pressure and temperature ratings con-
sure-temperature ratings contained in tained in the listed specification.
those requirements.
(b) Each cast iron and plastic valve
Amdt. 192–62, 54 FR 5628, Feb. 6, 1989; Amdt.
must comply with the following: 192–85, 63 FR 37502, July 13, 1998; Amdt. 192–
(1) The valve must have a maximum 94, 69 FR 32894, June 14, 2004; Amdt. 192–114,
service pressure rating for tempera- 75 FR 48603, Aug. 11, 2010; Amdt. 192–119, 80
tures that equal or exceed the max- FR 181, Jan. 5, 2015; Amdt. 192–124, 83 FR
imum service temperature. 58717, Nov. 20, 2018]
(2) The valve must be tested as part
of the manufacturing, as follows: § 192.147 Flanges and flange acces-
(i) With the valve in the fully open sories.
position, the shell must be tested with
(a) Each flange or flange accessory
no leakage to a pressure at least 1.5
(other than cast iron) must meet the
times the maximum service rating.
(ii) After the shell test, the seat must minimum requirements of ASME/ANSI
be tested to a pressure not less than 1.5 B 16.5 and MSS SP–44 (incorporated by
times the maximum service pressure reference, see § 192.7), or the equivalent.
rating. Except for swing check valves, (b) Each flange assembly must be
test pressure during the seat test must able to withstand the maximum pres-
be applied successively on each side of sure at which the pipeline is to be oper-
the closed valve with the opposite side ated and to maintain its physical and
open. No visible leakage is permitted. chemical properties at any tempera-
(iii) After the last pressure test is ture to which it is anticipated that it
completed, the valve must be operated might be subjected in service.
through its full travel to demonstrate (c) Each flange on a flanged joint in
freedom from interference. cast iron pipe must conform in dimen-
(c) Each valve must be able to meet sions, drilling, face and gasket design
the anticipated operating conditions. to ASME/ANSI B16.1 (incorporated by
(d) No valve having shell (body, bon- reference, see § 192.7)and be cast inte-
net, cover, and/or end flange) compo- grally with the pipe, valve, or fitting.
nents made of ductile iron may be used
at pressures exceeding 80 percent of the [35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
pressure ratings for comparable steel Amdt. 192–62, 54 FR 5628, Feb. 6, 1989; 58 FR
valves at their listed temperature. 14521, Mar. 18, 1993; Amdt. 192–119, 80 FR 181,
However, a valve having shell compo- Jan. 5, 2015]
451
§ 192.149 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
§ 192.149 Standard fittings. (i) Platform space or configuration is

incompatible with launching or re-
(a) The minimum metal thickness of
trieving instrumented internal inspec-
threaded fittings may not be less than
tion devices; or
specified for the pressures and tem-
peratures in the applicable standards (ii) If the design includes taps for lat-
referenced in this part, or their equiva- eral connections, the operator can
lent. demonstrate, based on investigation or
experience, that there is no reasonably
(b) Each steel butt-welding fitting
practical alternative under the design
must have pressure and temperature
circumstances to the use of a tap that
ratings based on stresses for pipe of the
will obstruct the passage of instru-
same or equivalent material. The ac-
mented internal inspection devices;
tual bursting strength of the fitting
and
must at least equal the computed
bursting strength of pipe of the des- (8) Other piping that, under § 190.9 of
ignated material and wall thickness, as this chapter, the Administrator finds
determined by a prototype that was in a particular case would be impracti-
tested to at least the pressure required cable to design and construct to ac-
for the pipeline to which it is being commodate the passage of instru-
added. mented internal inspection devices.
(c) Plastic fittings installed after (c) An operator encountering emer-
January 22, 2019, must meet a listed gencies, construction time constraints
specification. or other unforeseen construction prob-
lems need not construct a new or re-
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by placement segment of a transmission
Amdt. 192–124, 83 FR 58718, Nov. 20, 2018] line to meet paragraph (a) of this sec-
tion, if the operator determines and
§ 192.150 Passage of internal inspec- documents why an impracticability
tion devices.
prohibits compliance with paragraph
(a) Except as provided in paragraphs (a) of this section. Within 30 days after
(b) and (c) of this section, each new discovering the emergency or construc-
transmission line and each replace- tion problem the operator must peti-
ment of line pipe, valve, fitting, or tion, under § 190.9 of this chapter, for
other line component in a transmission approval that design and construction
line must be designed and constructed to accommodate passage of instru-
to accommodate the passage of instrumented internal inspection devices
mented internal inspection devices. would be impracticable. If the petition
(b) This section does not apply to: (1) is denied, within 1 year after the date
Manifolds; of the notice of the denial, the operator
(2) Station piping such as at com- must modify that segment to allow
pressor stations, meter stations, or passage of instrumented internal in-
regulator stations; spection devices.
(3) Piping associated with storage fa-
cilities, other than a continuous run of [Amdt. 192–72, 59 FR 17281, Apr. 12, 1994, as
amended by Amdt. 192–85, 63 FR 37502, July
transmission line between a com- 13, 1998; Amdt. 192–97, 69 FR 36029, June 28,
pressor station and storage facilities; 2004]
(4) Cross-overs;
(5) Sizes of pipe for which an instru- EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 84 FR 52244, Oct.
1, 2019, § 192.150 was amended by revising
mented internal inspection device is paragraph (a), effective July 1, 2020. For the
not commercially available; convenience of the user, the revised text is
(6) Transmission lines, operated in set forth as follows:
conjunction with a distribution system
which are installed in Class 4 locations; § 192.150 Passage of internal inspection de-
vices.
(7) Offshore transmission lines, ex-
cept transmission lines 103⁄4 inches (273 (a) Except as provided in paragraphs (b)
and (c) of this section, each new trans-
millimeters) or more in outside diame-
mission line and each replacement of line
ter on which construction begins after pipe, valve, fitting, or other line component
December 28, 2005, that run from plat- in a transmission line, must be designed and
form to platform or platform to shore constructed to accommodate the passage of
unless— instrumented internal inspection devices in
452
accordance with NACE SP0102, section 7 (in- (1) Regularly manufactured butt-
corporated by reference, see § 192.7). welding fittings.
(2) Pipe that has been produced and
* * * * * tested under a specification listed in
appendix B to this part.
§ 192.151 Tapping.
(3) Partial assemblies such as split
(a) Each mechanical fitting used to rings or collars.
make a hot tap must be designed for at (4) Prefabricated units that the man-
least the operating pressure of the ufacturer certifies have been tested to
pipeline. at least twice the maximum pressure
(b) Where a ductile iron pipe is to which they will be subjected under
tapped, the extent of full-thread en- the anticipated operating conditions.
gagement and the need for the use of (c) Orange-peel bull plugs and or-
outside-sealing service connections, ange-peel swages may not be used on
tapping saddles, or other fixtures must pipelines that are to operate at a hoop
be determined by service conditions.
stress of 20 percent or more of the
(c) Where a threaded tap is made in
SMYS of the pipe.
cast iron or ductile iron pipe, the di-
ameter of the tapped hole may not be (d) Except for flat closures designed
more than 25 percent of the nominal di- in accordance with the ASME BPVC
ameter of the pipe unless the pipe is re- (Section VIII, Division 1 or 2), flat clo-
inforced, except that sures and fish tails may not be used on
(1) Existing taps may be used for re- pipe that either operates at 100 p.s.i.
placement service, if they are free of (689 kPa) gage or more, or is more than
cracks and have good threads; and 3 inches in (76 millimeters) nominal di-
(2) A 11⁄4-inch (32 millimeters) tap ameter.
may be made in a 4-inch (102 millime- (e) A component having a design
ters) cast iron or ductile iron pipe, pressure established in accordance with
without reinforcement. paragraph (a) or paragraph (b) of this
However, in areas where climate, soil, section and subject to the strength
and service conditions may create un- testing requirements of § 192.505(b)
usual external stresses on cast iron must be tested to at least 1.5 times the
pipe, unreinforced taps may be used MAOP.
only on 6-inch (152 millimeters) or larg- [35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
er pipe. Amdt. 192–1, 35 FR 17660, Nov. 17, 1970; 58 FR
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by 14521, Mar. 18, 1993; Amdt. 192–68, 58 FR 45268,
Amdt. 192–85, 63 FR 37502, July 13, 1998] Aug. 27, 1993; Amdt. 192–85, 63 FR 37502, July
13, 1998; Amdt. 192–119, 80 FR 181, Jan. 5, 2015;
§ 192.153 Components fabricated by Amdt. 192–120, 80 FR 12778, Mar. 11, 2015;
welding. Amdt. 192–119, 80 FR 46847, Aug. 6, 2015]
(a) Except for branch connections § 192.155 Welded branch connections.

and assemblies of standard pipe and fit-
tings joined by circumferential welds, Each welded branch connection made
the design pressure of each component to pipe in the form of a single connec-
fabricated by welding, whose strength tion, or in a header or manifold as a se-
cannot be determined, must be estab- ries of connections, must be designed
lished in accordance with paragraph to ensure that the strength of the pipe-
UG–101 of the ASME Boiler and Pres- line system is not reduced, taking into
sure Vessel Code (BPVC) (Section VIII, account the stresses in the remaining
Division 1) (incorporated by reference, pipe wall due to the opening in the pipe
see § 192.7). or header, the shear stresses produced
(b) Each prefabricated unit that uses by the pressure acting on the area of
plate and longitudinal seams must be the branch opening, and any external
designed, constructed, and tested in ac- loadings due to thermal movement,
cordance with section 1 of the ASME weight, and vibration.
BPVC (Section VIII, Division 1 or Sec-
tion VIII, Division 2) (incorporated by § 192.157 Extruded outlets.

reference, see § 192.7), except for the fol- Each extruded outlet must be suit-
lowing: able for anticipated service conditions
453
§ 192.159 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
and must be at least equal to the de- (e) Each underground pipeline that is
sign strength of the pipe and other fit- connected to a relatively unyielding
tings in the pipeline to which it is at- line or other fixed object must have
tached. enough flexibility to provide for pos-
sible movement, or it must have an an-
§ 192.159 Flexibility. chor that will limit the movement of
Each pipeline must be designed with the pipeline.
enough flexibility to prevent thermal (f) Except for offshore pipelines, each
expansion or contraction from causing underground pipeline that is being con-
excessive stresses in the pipe or compo- nected to new branches must have a
nents, excessive bending or unusual firm foundation for both the header
loads at joints, or undesirable forces or and the branch to prevent detrimental
moments at points of connection to lateral and vertical movement.
equipment, or at anchorage or guide [35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
points. Amdt. 192–58, 53 FR 1635, Jan. 21, 1988]
§ 192.161 Supports and anchors. § 192.163 Compressor stations: Design

and construction.
(a) Each pipeline and its associated
equipment must have enough anchors (a) Location of compressor building. Ex-
or supports to: cept for a compressor building on a
(1) Prevent undue strain on con- platform located offshore or in inland
nected equipment; navigable waters, each main com-
pressor building of a compressor sta-
(2) Resist longitudinal forces caused
tion must be located on property under
by a bend or offset in the pipe; and
the control of the operator. It must be
(3) Prevent or damp out excessive vi-
far enough away from adjacent prop-
bration.
erty, not under control of the operator,
(b) Each exposed pipeline must have
to minimize the possibility of fire
enough supports or anchors to protect
being communicated to the compressor
the exposed pipe joints from the max-
building from structures on adjacent
imum end force caused by internal
property. There must be enough open
pressure and any additional forces
space around the main compressor
caused by temperature expansion or
building to allow the free movement of
contraction or by the weight of the
fire-fighting equipment.
pipe and its contents. (b) Building construction. Each build-
(c) Each support or anchor on an ex- ing on a compressor station site must
posed pipeline must be made of dura- be made of noncombustible materials if
ble, noncombustible material and must it contains either—
be designed and installed as follows: (1) Pipe more than 2 inches (51 milli-
(1) Free expansion and contraction of meters) in diameter that is carrying
the pipeline between supports or an- gas under pressure; or
chors may not be restricted. (2) Gas handling equipment other
(2) Provision must be made for the than gas utilization equipment used for
service conditions involved. domestic purposes.
(3) Movement of the pipeline may not (c) Exits. Each operating floor of a
cause disengagement of the support main compressor building must have at
equipment. least two separated and unobstructed
(d) Each support on an exposed pipe- exits located so as to provide a conven-
line operated at a stress level of 50 per- ient possibility of escape and an unob-
cent or more of SMYS must comply structed passage to a place of safety.
with the following: Each door latch on an exit must be of
(1) A structural support may not be a type which can be readily opened
welded directly to the pipe. from the inside without a key. Each
(2) The support must be provided by a swinging door located in an exterior
member that completely encircles the wall must be mounted to swing out-
pipe. ward.
(3) If an encircling member is welded (d) Fenced areas. Each fence around a
to a pipe, the weld must be continuous compressor station must have at least
and cover the entire circumference. two gates located so as to provide a
454
convenient opportunity for escape to a (1) It must be able to block gas out of
place of safety, or have other facilities the station and blow down the station
affording a similarly convenient exit piping.
from the area. Each gate located with- (2) It must discharge gas from the
in 200 feet (61 meters) of any com- blowdown piping at a location where
pressor plant building must open out- the gas will not create a hazard.
ward and, when occupied, must be (3) It must provide means for the
openable from the inside without a shutdown of gas compressing equip-
key. ment, gas fires, and electrical facilities
(e) Electrical facilities. Electrical in the vicinity of gas headers and in
equipment and wiring installed in com- the compressor building, except that:
pressor stations must conform to the (i) Electrical circuits that supply
NFPA–70, so far as that code is applica- emergency lighting required to assist
ble. station personnel in evacuating the
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by compressor building and the area in
Amdt. 192–27, 41 FR 34605, Aug. 16, 1976; the vicinity of the gas headers must re-
Amdt. 192–37, 46 FR 10159, Feb. 2, 1981; 58 FR main energized; and
14521, Mar. 18, 1993; Amdt. 192–85, 63 FR 37502, (ii) Electrical circuits needed to pro-
37503, July 13, 1998; Amdt. 192–119, 80 FR 181, tect equipment from damage may re-
Jan. 5, 2015]
main energized.
§ 192.165 Compressor stations: Liquid (4) It must be operable from at least
removal. two locations, each of which is:
(a) Where entrained vapors in gas (i) Outside the gas area of the sta-
may liquefy under the anticipated pres- tion;
sure and temperature conditions, the (ii) Near the exit gates, if the station
compressor must be protected against is fenced, or near emergency exits, if
the introduction of those liquids in not fenced; and
quantities that could cause damage. (iii) Not more than 500 feet (153 me-
(b) Each liquid separator used to re- ters) from the limits of the station.
move entrained liquids at a compressor (b) If a compressor station supplies
station must: gas directly to a distribution system
(1) Have a manually operable means with no other adequate source of gas
of removing these liquids. available, the emergency shutdown
(2) Where slugs of liquid could be car- system must be designed so that it will
ried into the compressors, have either not function at the wrong time and
automatic liquid removal facilities, an cause an unintended outage on the dis-
automatic compressor shutdown de- tribution system.
vice, or a high liquid level alarm; and (c) On a platform located offshore or
(3) Be manufactured in accordance in inland navigable waters, the emer-
with section VIII ASME Boiler and gency shutdown system must be de-
Pressure Vessel Code (BPVC) (incor- signed and installed to actuate auto-
porated by reference, see § 192.7) and the matically by each of the following
additional requirements of § 192.153(e) events:
except that liquid separators con- (1) In the case of an unattended com-
structed of pipe and fittings without pressor station:
internal welding must be fabricated (i) When the gas pressure equals the
with a design factor of 0.4, or less. maximum allowable operating pressure
plus 15 percent; or
Amdt. 192–119, 80 FR 181, Jan. 5, 2015; Amdt. (ii) When an uncontrolled fire occurs
192–120, 80 FR 12778, Mar. 11, 2015] on the platform; and
(2) In the case of a compressor sta-
§ 192.167 Compressor stations: Emer- tion in a building:
gency shutdown. (i) When an uncontrolled fire occurs
(a) Except for unattended field com- in the building; or
pressor stations of 1,000 horsepower (746 (ii) When the concentration of gas in
kilowatts) or less, each compressor sta- air reaches 50 percent or more of the
tion must have an emergency shut- lower explosive limit in a building
down system that meets the following: which has a source of ignition.
455
§ 192.169 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
For the purpose of paragraph (c)(2)(ii) § 192.173 Compressor stations: Ventila-

of this section, an electrical facility tion.
which conforms to Class 1, Group D, of Each compressor station building
the National Electrical Code is not a must be ventilated to ensure that em-
source of ignition. ployees are not endangered by the ac-
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by cumulation of gas in rooms, sumps, at-
Amdt. 192–27, 41 FR 34605, Aug. 16, 1976; tics, pits, or other enclosed places.
Amdt. 192–85, 63 FR 37503, July 13, 1998]
§ 192.175 Pipe-type and bottle-type
§ 192.169 Compressor stations: Pres- holders.
sure limiting devices. (a) Each pipe-type and bottle-type
(a) Each compressor station must holder must be designed so as to pre-
have pressure relief or other suitable vent the accumulation of liquids in the
protective devices of sufficient capac- holder, in connecting pipe, or in auxil-
iary equipment, that might cause cor-
ity and sensitivity to ensure that the
rosion or interfere with the safe oper-
maximum allowable operating pressure
ation of the holder.
of the station piping and equipment is
(b) Each pipe-type or bottle-type
not exceeded by more than 10 percent. holder must have minimum clearance
(b) Each vent line that exhausts gas from other holders in accordance with
from the pressure relief valves of a the following formula:
compressor station must extend to a
location where the gas may be dis- C = (3D*P*F)/1000) in inches; (C =
charged without hazard. (3D*P*F*)/6,895) in millimeters
in which:
§ 192.171 Compressor stations: Addi- C = Minimum clearance between pipe con-
tional safety equipment. tainers or bottles in inches (millimeters).
(a) Each compressor station must D = Outside diameter of pipe containers or
bottles in inches (millimeters).
have adequate fire protection facilities.
P = Maximum allowable operating pressure,
If fire pumps are a part of these facili- psi (kPa) gauge.
ties, their operation may not be af- F = Design factor as set forth in § 192.111 of
fected by the emergency shutdown sys- this part.
tem. [35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
(b) Each compressor station prime Amdt. 192–85, 63 FR 37503, July 13, 1998;
mover, other than an electrical induc- Amdt. 192–123, 82 FR 7997, Jan. 23, 2017]
tion or synchronous motor, must have
an automatic device to shut down the § 192.177 Additional provisions for bot-
tle-type holders.
unit before the speed of either the
prime mover or the driven unit exceeds (a) Each bottle-type holder must be—
a maximum safe speed. (1) Located on a site entirely sur-
(c) Each compressor unit in a com- rounded by fencing that prevents ac-
pressor station must have a shutdown cess by unauthorized persons and with
or alarm device that operates in the minimum clearance from the fence as
event of inadequate cooling or lubrica- follows:
tion of the unit. Minimum clear-
(d) Each compressor station gas en- Maximum allowable operating pressure ance feet (me-
ters)
gine that operates with pressure gas in-
jection must be equipped so that stop- Less than 1,000 p.s.i. (7 MPa) gage ........... 25 (7.6)
1,000 p.s.i. (7 MPa) gage or more .............. 100 (31)
page of the engine automatically shuts
off the fuel and vents the engine dis- (2) Designed using the design factors
tribution manifold. set forth in § 192.111; and
(e) Each muffler for a gas engine in a (3) Buried with a minimum cover in
compressor station must have vent accordance with § 192.327.
slots or holes in the baffles of each (b) Each bottle-type holder manufac-
compartment to prevent gas from tured from steel that is not weldable
being trapped in the muffler. under field conditions must comply
with the following:
456
(1) A bottle-type holder made from ment of the pipe to which it is at-
alloy steel must meet the chemical and tached.
tensile requirements for the various (c) Each section of a transmission
grades of steel in ASTM A372/372M (in- line, other than offshore segments, be-
corporated by reference, see § 192.7). tween main line valves must have a
(2) The actual yield-tensile ratio of blowdown valve with enough capacity
the steel may not exceed 0.85. to allow the transmission line to be
(3) Welding may not be performed on blown down as rapidly as practicable.
the holder after it has been heat treat- Each blowdown discharge must be lo-
ed or stress relieved, except that cop- cated so the gas can be blown to the at-
per wires may be attached to the small mosphere without hazard and, if the
diameter portion of the bottle end clo- transmission line is adjacent to an
sure for cathodic protection if a local- overhead electric line, so that the gas
ized thermit welding process is used. is directed away from the electrical
(4) The holder must be given a mill conductors.
hydrostatic test at a pressure that pro- (d) Offshore segments of transmission
duces a hoop stress at least equal to 85 lines must be equipped with valves or
percent of the SMYS. other components to shut off the flow
(5) The holder, connection pipe, and of gas to an offshore platform in an
components must be leak tested after emergency.
installation as required by subpart J of [35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
this part. Amdt. 192–27, 41 FR 34606, Aug. 16, 1976;
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by Amdt. 192–78, 61 FR 28784, June 6, 1996; Amdt.
Amdt. 192–58, 53 FR 1635, Jan. 21, 1988; Amdt. 192–85, 63 FR 37503, July 13, 1998]
192–62, 54 FR 5628, Feb. 6, 1989; 58 FR 14521,
Mar. 18, 1993; Amdt. 192–85, 63 FR 37503, July § 192.181 Distribution line valves.
13, 1998; Amdt. 192–119, 80 FR 181, Jan. 5, 2015] (a) Each high-pressure distribution
system must have valves spaced so as
§ 192.179 Transmission line valves. to reduce the time to shut down a sec-
(a) Each transmission line, other tion of main in an emergency. The
than offshore segments, must have sec- valve spacing is determined by the op-
tionalizing block valves spaced as fol- erating pressure, the size of the mains,
lows, unless in a particular case the and the local physical conditions.
Administrator finds that alternative (b) Each regulator station control-
spacing would provide an equivalent ling the flow or pressure of gas in a dis-
level of safety: tribution system must have a valve in-
(1) Each point on the pipeline in a stalled on the inlet piping at a distance
Class 4 location must be within 21⁄2 from the regulator station sufficient to
miles (4 kilometers)of a valve. permit the operation of the valve dur-
(2) Each point on the pipeline in a ing an emergency that might preclude
Class 3 location must be within 4 miles access to the station.
(6.4 kilometers) of a valve. (c) Each valve on a main installed for
(3) Each point on the pipeline in a operating or emergency purposes must
Class 2 location must be within 71⁄2 comply with the following:
miles (12 kilometers) of a valve. (1) The valve must be placed in a
(4) Each point on the pipeline in a readily accessible location so as to fa-
Class 1 location must be within 10 cilitate its operation in an emergency.
miles (16 kilometers) of a valve. (2) The operating stem or mechanism
(b) Each sectionalizing block valve must be readily accessible.
on a transmission line, other than off- (3) If the valve is installed in a buried
shore segments, must comply with the box or enclosure, the box or enclosure
following: must be installed so as to avoid trans-
(1) The valve and the operating de- mitting external loads to the main.
vice to open or close the valve must be
readily accessible and protected from § 192.183 Vaults: Structural design re-
tampering and damage. quirements.

(2) The valve must be supported to (a) Each underground vault or pit for
prevent settling of the valve or move- valves, pressure relieving, pressure
457
§ 192.185 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
limiting, or pressure regulating sta- (1) If the vault or pit is sealed, each
tions, must be able to meet the loads opening must have a tight fitting cover
which may be imposed upon it, and to without open holes through which an
protect installed equipment. explosive mixture might be ignited,
(b) There must be enough working and there must be a means for testing
space so that all of the equipment re- the internal atmosphere before remov-
quired in the vault or pit can be prop- ing the cover;
erly installed, operated, and main- (2) If the vault or pit is vented, there
tained. must be a means of preventing external
(c) Each pipe entering, or within, a sources of ignition from reaching the
regulator vault or pit must be steel for vault atmosphere; or
sizes 10 inch (254 millimeters), and less, (3) If the vault or pit is ventilated,
except that control and gage piping paragraph (a) or (c) of this section ap-
may be copper. Where pipe extends plies.
through the vault or pit structure, pro- (c) If a vault or pit covered by para-
vision must be made to prevent the graph (b) of this section is ventilated
passage of gases or liquids through the by openings in the covers or gratings
opening and to avert strains in the and the ratio of the internal volume, in
pipe. cubic feet, to the effective ventilating
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by area of the cover or grating, in square
Amdt. 192–85, 63 FR 37503, July 13, 1998] feet, is less than 20 to 1, no additional
ventilation is required.
§ 192.185 Vaults: Accessibility. [35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
Each vault must be located in an ac- Amdt. 192–85, 63 FR 37503, July 13, 1998]
cessible location and, so far as prac-
tical, away from: § 192.189 Vaults: Drainage and water-
(a) Street intersections or points proofing.
where traffic is heavy or dense; (a) Each vault must be designed so as
(b) Points of minimum elevation, to minimize the entrance of water.
catch basins, or places where the ac- (b) A vault containing gas piping
cess cover will be in the course of sur- may not be connected by means of a
face waters; and drain connection to any other under-
(c) Water, electric, steam, or other ground structure.
facilities. (c) Electrical equipment in vaults
must conform to the applicable re-
§ 192.187 Vaults: Sealing, venting, and quirements of Class 1, Group D, of the
ventilation. National Electrical Code, NFPA–70 (in-
Each underground vault or closed top corporated by reference, see § 192.7).
pit containing either a pressure regu- [35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
lating or reducing station, or a pres- Amdt. 192–76, 61 FR 26122, May 24, 1996; Amdt.
sure limiting or relieving station, must 192–119, 80 FR 181, Jan. 5, 2015]
be sealed, vented or ventilated as fol-
lows: § 192.191 [Reserved]
(a) When the internal volume exceeds
200 cubic feet (5.7 cubic meters): § 192.193 Valve installation in plastic
(1) The vault or pit must be venti- pipe.
lated with two ducts, each having at Each valve installed in plastic pipe
least the ventilating effect of a pipe 4 must be designed so as to protect the
inches (102 millimeters) in diameter; plastic material against excessive tor-
(2) The ventilation must be enough to sional or shearing loads when the valve
minimize the formation of combustible or shutoff is operated, and from any
atmosphere in the vault or pit; and other secondary stresses that might be
(3) The ducts must be high enough exerted through the valve or its enclo-
above grade to disperse any gas-air sure.
mixtures that might be discharged.
(b) When the internal volume is more § 192.195 Protection against accidental
than 75 cubic feet (2.1 cubic meters) but overpressuring.

less than 200 cubic feet (5.7 cubic me- (a) General requirements. Except as
ters): provided in § 192.197, each pipeline that
458
is connected to a gas source so that the (b) If the maximum actual operating
maximum allowable operating pressure pressure of the distribution system is
could be exceeded as the result of pres- 60 p.s.i. (414 kPa) gage, or less, and a
sure control failure or of some other service regulator that does not have all
type of failure, must have pressure re- of the characteristics listed in para-
lieving or pressure limiting devices graph (a) of this section is used, or if
that meet the requirements of §§ 192.199 the gas contains materials that seri-
and 192.201. ously interfere with the operation of
(b) Additional requirements for distribu- service regulators, there must be suit-
tion systems. Each distribution system able protective devices to prevent un-
that is supplied from a source of gas safe overpressuring of the customer’s
that is at a higher pressure than the appliances if the service regulator
maximum allowable operating pressure fails.
for the system must— (c) If the maximum actual operating
(1) Have pressure regulation devices pressure of the distribution system ex-
capable of meeting the pressure, load, ceeds 60 p.s.i. (414 kPa) gage, one of the
and other service conditions that will following methods must be used to reg-
be experienced in normal operation of ulate and limit, to the maximum safe
the system, and that could be activated value, the pressure of gas delivered to
in the event of failure of some portion the customer:
of the system; and (1) A service regulator having the
(2) Be designed so as to prevent acci- characteristics listed in paragraph (a)
dental overpressuring. of this section, and another regulator
§ 192.197 Control of the pressure of gas located upstream from the service reg-
delivered from high-pressure dis- ulator. The upstream regulator may
tribution systems. not be set to maintain a pressure high-
er than 60 p.s.i. (414 kPa) gage. A device
(a) If the maximum actual operating
pressure of the distribution system is must be installed between the up-
60 p.s.i. (414 kPa) gage, or less and a stream regulator and the service regu-
service regulator having the following lator to limit the pressure on the inlet
characteristics is used, no other pres- of the service regulator to 60 p.s.i. (414
sure limiting device is required: kPa) gage or less in case the upstream
(1) A regulator capable of reducing regulator fails to function properly.
distribution line pressure to pressures This device may be either a relief valve
recommended for household appliances. or an automatic shutoff that shuts, if
(2) A single port valve with proper the pressure on the inlet of the service
orifice for the maximum gas pressure regulator exceeds the set pressure (60
at the regulator inlet. p.s.i. (414 kPa) gage or less), and re-
(3) A valve seat made of resilient ma- mains closed until manually reset.
terial designed to withstand abrasion (2) A service regulator and a moni-
of the gas, impurities in gas, cutting by toring regulator set to limit, to a max-
the valve, and to resist permanent de- imum safe value, the pressure of the
formation when it is pressed against gas delivered to the customer.
the valve port. (3) A service regulator with a relief
(4) Pipe connections to the regulator valve vented to the outside atmos-
not exceeding 2 inches (51 millimeters) phere, with the relief valve set to open
in diameter. so that the pressure of gas going to the
(5) A regulator that, under normal customer does not exceed a maximum
operating conditions, is able to regu- safe value. The relief valve may either
late the downstream pressure within be built into the service regulator or it
the necessary limits of accuracy and to may be a separate unit installed down-
limit the build-up of pressure under no- stream from the service regulator. This
flow conditions to prevent a pressure combination may be used alone only in
that would cause the unsafe operation those cases where the inlet pressure on
of any connected and properly adjusted the service regulator does not exceed
gas utilization equipment. the manufacturer’s safe working pres-

(6) A self-contained service regulator sure rating of the service regulator,
with no external static or control lines. and may not be used where the inlet
459
§ 192.199 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
pressure on the service regulator ex- prevent unauthorized operation of any

ceeds 125 p.s.i. (862 kPa) gage. For high- stop valve that will make the pressure
er inlet pressures, the methods in para- relief valve or pressure limiting device
graph (c) (1) or (2) of this section must inoperative.
be used.
(4) A service regulator and an auto- Amdt. 192–1, 35 FR 17660, Nov. 17, 1970]
matic shutoff device that closes upon a
rise in pressure downstream from the § 192.201 Required capacity of pres-
regulator and remains closed until sure relieving and limiting stations.
manually reset.
(a) Each pressure relief station or
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by pressure limiting station or group of
Amdt. 192–1, 35 FR 17660, Nov. 7, 1970; Amdt. those stations installed to protect a
192–85, 63 FR 37503, July 13, 1998; Amdt. 192– pipeline must have enough capacity,
93, 68 FR 53900, Sept. 15, 2003]
and must be set to operate, to insure
§ 192.199 Requirements for design of the following:
pressure relief and limiting devices. (1) In a low pressure distribution sys-
tem, the pressure may not cause the
Except for rupture discs, each pres-
unsafe operation of any connected and
sure relief or pressure limiting device
properly adjusted gas utilization equip-
must:
ment.
(a) Be constructed of materials such
that the operation of the device will (2) In pipelines other than a low pres-
not be impaired by corrosion; sure distribution system:
(b) Have valves and valve seats that (i) If the maximum allowable oper-
are designed not to stick in a position ating pressure is 60 p.s.i. (414 kPa) gage
that will make the device inoperative; or more, the pressure may not exceed
(c) Be designed and installed so that the maximum allowable operating
it can be readily operated to determine pressure plus 10 percent, or the pres-
if the valve is free, can be tested to de- sure that produces a hoop stress of 75
termine the pressure at which it will percent of SMYS, whichever is lower;
operate, and can be tested for leakage (ii) If the maximum allowable oper-
when in the closed position; ating pressure is 12 p.s.i. (83 kPa) gage
(d) Have support made of noncombus- or more, but less than 60 p.s.i. (414 kPa)
tible material; gage, the pressure may not exceed the
(e) Have discharge stacks, vents, or maximum allowable operating pressure
outlet ports designed to prevent accu- plus 6 p.s.i. (41 kPa) gage; or
mulation of water, ice, or snow, located (iii) If the maximum allowable oper-
where gas can be discharged into the ating pressure is less than 12 p.s.i. (83
atmosphere without undue hazard; kPa) gage, the pressure may not exceed
(f) Be designed and installed so that the maximum allowable operating
the size of the openings, pipe, and fit- pressure plus 50 percent.
tings located between the system to be (b) When more than one pressure reg-
protected and the pressure relieving de- ulating or compressor station feeds
vice, and the size of the vent line, are into a pipeline, relief valves or other
adequate to prevent hammering of the protective devices must be installed at
valve and to prevent impairment of re- each station to ensure that the com-
lief capacity; plete failure of the largest capacity
(g) Where installed at a district regu- regulator or compressor, or any single
lator station to protect a pipeline sys- run of lesser capacity regulators or
tem from overpressuring, be designed compressors in that station, will not
and installed to prevent any single in- impose pressures on any part of the
cident such as an explosion in a vault pipeline or distribution system in ex-
or damage by a vehicle from affecting cess of those for which it was designed,
the operation of both the overpressure or against which it was protected,
protective device and the district regu- whichever is lower.
lator; and (c) Relief valves or other pressure
(h) Except for a valve that will iso- limiting devices must be installed at or
late the system under protection from near each regulator station in a low-
its source of pressure, be designed to pressure distribution system, with a
460
capacity to limit the maximum pres- expansion joints may not be used. Ex-
sure in the main to a pressure that will pansion must be allowed for by pro-
not exceed the safe operating pressure viding flexibility within the system
for any connected and properly ad- itself.
justed gas utilization equipment. (9) Each control line must be pro-
tected from anticipated causes of dam-
Amdt. 192–9, 37 FR 20827, Oct. 4, 1972; Amdt.
age and must be designed and installed
192–85, 63 FR 37503, July 13, 1998] to prevent damage to any one control
line from making both the regulator
§ 192.203 Instrument, control, and sam- and the over-pressure protective device
pling pipe and components. inoperative.
(a) Applicability. This section applies [35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
to the design of instrument, control, Amdt. 192–78, 61 FR 28784, June 6, 1996; Amdt.
and sampling pipe and components. It 192–85, 63 FR 37503, July 13, 1998]
does not apply to permanently closed
systems, such as fluid-filled tempera- § 192.204 Risers installed after Janu-
ary 22, 2019.
ture-responsive devices.
(b) Materials and design. All materials (a) Riser designs must be tested to
employed for pipe and components ensure safe performance under antici-
must be designed to meet the par- pated external and internal loads act-
ticular conditions of service and the ing on the assembly.
following: (b) Factory assembled anodeless ris-
(1) Each takeoff connection and at- ers must be designed and tested in ac-
taching boss, fitting, or adapter must cordance with ASTM F1973–13 (incor-
be made of suitable material, be able to porated by reference, see § 192.7).
withstand the maximum service pres- (c) All risers used to connect regu-
sure and temperature of the pipe or lator stations to plastic mains must be
equipment to which it is attached, and rigid and designed to provide adequate
be designed to satisfactorily withstand support and resist lateral movement.
all stresses without failure by fatigue. Anodeless risers used in accordance
(2) Except for takeoff lines that can with this paragraph must have a rigid
be isolated from sources of pressure by riser casing.
other valving, a shutoff valve must be [Amdt. 192–124, 83 FR 58718, Nov. 20, 2018]
installed in each takeoff line as near as
practicable to the point of takeoff. § 192.205 Records: Pipeline compo-
Blowdown valves must be installed nents.
where necessary. (a) For steel transmission pipelines
(3) Brass or copper material may not installed after July 1, 2020, an operator
be used for metal temperatures greater must collect or make, and retain for
than 400 °F (204 °C). the life of the pipeline, records docu-
(4) Pipe or components that may con- menting the manufacturing standard
tain liquids must be protected by heat- and pressure rating to which each
ing or other means from damage due to valve was manufactured and tested in
freezing. accordance with this subpart. Flanges,
(5) Pipe or components in which liq- fittings, branch connections, extruded
uids may accumulate must have drains outlets, anchor forgings, and other
or drips. components with material yield
(6) Pipe or components subject to strength grades of 42,000 psi (X42) or
clogging from solids or deposits must greater and with nominal diameters of
have suitable connections for cleaning. greater than 2 inches must have
(7) The arrangement of pipe, compo- records documenting the manufac-
nents, and supports must provide safe- turing specification in effect at the
ty under anticipated operating time of manufacture, including yield
stresses. strength, ultimate tensile strength,
(8) Each joint between sections of and chemical composition of materials.
pipe, and between pipe and valves or (b) For steel transmission pipelines
fittings, must be made in a manner installed on or before July 1, 2020, if op-

suitable for the anticipated pressure erators have records documenting the
and temperature condition. Slip type manufacturing standard and pressure
461
§ 192.221 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
rating for valves, flanges, fittings, must be retained and followed when-
branch connections, extruded outlets, ever the procedure is used.
anchor forgings, and other components
[Amdt. 192–52, 51 FR 20297, June 4, 1986;
with material yield strength grades of Amdt. 192–94, 69 FR 32894, June 14, 2004;
42,000 psi (X42) or greater and with Amdt. 192–119, 80 FR 181, Jan. 5, 2015; Amdt.
nominal diameters of greater than 2 192–120, 80 FR 12778, Mar. 11, 2015; Amdt. 192–
inches, operators must retain such 123, 82 FR 7997, Jan. 23, 2017]
records for the life of the pipeline.
(c) For steel transmission pipeline § 192.227 Qualification of welders and
segments installed on or before July 1, welding operators.
2020, if an operator does not have (a) Except as provided in paragraph
records necessary to establish the (b) of this section, each welder or weld-
MAOP of a pipeline segment, the oper- ing operator must be qualified in ac-
ator may be subject to the require- cordance with section 6, section 12, Ap-
ments of § 192.624 according to the pendix A or Appendix B of API Std 1104
terms of that section. (incorporated by reference, see § 192.7),
[84 FR 52245, Oct. 1, 2019]
or section IX of the ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code (ASME BPVC)
EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 84 FR 52245, Oct. (incorporated by reference, see § 192.7).
1, 2019, § 192.205 was added, effective July 1, However, a welder or welding operator
2020.
qualified under an earlier edition than
the listed in § 192.7 of this part may
Subpart E—Welding of Steel in weld but may not requalify under that
Pipelines earlier edition.
(b) A welder may qualify to perform
§ 192.221 Scope. welding on pipe to be operated at a
(a) This subpart prescribes minimum pressure that produces a hoop stress of
requirements for welding steel mate- less than 20 percent of SMYS by per-
rials in pipelines. forming an acceptable test weld, for
(b) This subpart does not apply to the process to be used, under the test
welding that occurs during the manu- set forth in section I of Appendix C of
facture of steel pipe or steel pipeline this part. Each welder who is to make
components. a welded service line connection to a
main must first perform an acceptable
§ 192.225 Welding procedures. test weld under section II of Appendix
(a) Welding must be performed by a C of this part as a requirement of the
qualified welder or welding operator in qualifying test.
accordance with welding procedures [Amdt. 192–120, 80 FR 12778, Mar. 11, 2015, as
qualified under section 5, section 12, amended by Amdt. 192–123, 82 FR 7997, Jan.
Appendix A or Appendix B of API Std 23, 2017]
1104 (incorporated by reference, see
§ 192.7), or section IX of the ASME Boil- 1, 2019, § 192.227 was amended by adding para-
er and Pressure Vessel Code (ASME graph (c), effective July 1, 2020. For the con-
BPVC) (incorporated by reference, see venience of the user, the added text is set
§ 192.7) to produce welds meeting the re- forth as follows:
quirements of this subpart. The quality
§ 192.227 Qualification of welders.
of the test welds used to qualify weld-
ing procedures must be determined by
destructive testing in accordance with * * * * *
the applicable welding standard(s). (c) For steel transmission pipe installed
(b) Each welding procedure must be after July 1, 2021, records demonstrating
recorded in detail, including the results each individual welder qualification at the
of the qualifying tests. This record time of construction in accordance with this
section must be retained for a minimum of 5

years following construction.
462
§ 192.229 Limitations on welders and (ii) For a welder who works only on
welding operators. service lines 2 inches (51 millimeters)
(a) No welder or welding operator or smaller in diameter, the welder has
whose qualification is based on non- had two sample welds tested and found
destructive testing may weld com- acceptable in accordance with the test
pressor station pipe and components. in section III of Appendix C of this
part.
(b) A welder or welding operator may
not weld with a particular welding [Amdt. 192–120, 80 FR 12778, Mar. 11, 2015]
process unless, within the preceding 6
calendar months, the welder or welding § 192.231 Protection from weather.
operator was engaged in welding with The welding operation must be pro-
that process. tected from weather conditions that
(c) A welder or welding operator would impair the quality of the com-
qualified under § 192.227(a)— pleted weld.
(1) May not weld on pipe to be oper-
ated at a pressure that produces a hoop § 192.233 Miter joints.
stress of 20 percent or more of SMYS
(a) A miter joint on steel pipe to be
unless within the preceding 6 calendar
operated at a pressure that produces a
months the welder or welding operator
hoop stress of 30 percent or more of
has had one weld tested and found ac-
SMYS may not deflect the pipe more
ceptable under either section 6, section
than 3°.
9, section 12 or Appendix A of API Std
(b) A miter joint on steel pipe to be
1104 (incorporated by reference, see
§ 192.7). Alternatively, welders or weld-
hoop stress of less than 30 percent, but
ing operators may maintain an ongoing
more than 10 percent, of SMYS may
qualification status by performing
not deflect the pipe more than 121⁄2° and
welds tested and found acceptable
must be a distance equal to one pipe di-
under the above acceptance criteria at
ameter or more away from any other
least twice each calendar year, but at
miter joint, as measured from the
intervals not exceeding 71⁄2 months. A
crotch of each joint.
welder or welding operator qualified
under an earlier edition of a standard (c) A miter joint on steel pipe to be
listed in § 192.7 of this part may weld, operated at a pressure that produces a
but may not re-qualify under that ear- hoop stress of 10 percent or less of
lier edition; and, SMYS may not deflect the pipe more
(2) May not weld on pipe to be oper- than 90°.
ated at a pressure that produces a hoop § 192.235 Preparation for welding.
stress of less than 20 percent of SMYS
unless the welder or welding operator Before beginning any welding, the
is tested in accordance with paragraph welding surfaces must be clean and free
(c)(1) of this section or re-qualifies of any material that may be detri-
under paragraph (d)(1) or (d)(2) of this mental to the weld, and the pipe or
section. component must be aligned to provide
(d) A welder or welding operator the most favorable condition for depos-
qualified under § 192.227(b) may not iting the root bead. This alignment
weld unless— must be preserved while the root bead
(1) Within the preceding 15 calendar is being deposited.
months, but at least once each cal-
endar year, the welder or welding oper- § 192.241 Inspection and test of welds.
ator has re-qualified under § 192.227(b); (a) Visual inspection of welding must
or be conducted by an individual qualified
(2) Within the preceding 71⁄2 calendar by appropriate training and experience
months, but at least twice each cal- to ensure that:
endar year, the welder or welding oper- (1) The welding is performed in ac-
ator has had— cordance with the welding procedure;
(i) A production weld cut out, tested, and

and found acceptable in accordance (2) The weld is acceptable under para-
with the qualifying test; or graph (c) of this section.
463
§ 192.243 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(b) The welds on a pipeline to be op- (1) In Class 1 locations, except off-
erated at a pressure that produces a shore, at least 10 percent.
hoop stress of 20 percent or more of (2) In Class 2 locations, at least 15
SMYS must be nondestructively tested percent.
in accordance with § 192.243, except that (3) In Class 3 and Class 4 locations, at
welds that are visually inspected and crossings of major or navigable rivers,
approved by a qualified welding inspec- offshore, and within railroad or public
tor need not be nondestructively tested highway rights-of-way, including tun-
if: nels, bridges, and overhead road cross-
(1) The pipe has a nominal diameter ings, 100 percent unless impracticable,
of less than 6 inches (152 millimeters); in which case at least 90 percent. Non-
or destructive testing must be impracti-
(2) The pipeline is to be operated at a cable for each girth weld not tested.
pressure that produces a hoop stress of (4) At pipeline tie-ins, including tie-
less than 40 percent of SMYS and the ins of replacement sections, 100 per-
welds are so limited in number that cent.
nondestructive testing is impractical. (e) Except for a welder or welding op-
erator whose work is isolated from the
(c) The acceptability of a weld that is
principal welding activity, a sample of
nondestructively tested or visually in-
each welder or welding operator’s work
spected is determined according to the
for each day must be nondestructively
standards in section 9 or Appendix A of
tested, when nondestructive testing is
API Std 1104 (incorporated by ref-
required under § 192.241(b).
erence, see § 192.7). Appendix A of API
(f) When nondestructive testing is re-
Std 1104 may not be used to accept
quired under § 192.241(b), each operator
cracks.
must retain, for the life of the pipeline,
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by a record showing by milepost, engi-
Amdt. 192–37, 46 FR 10160, Feb. 2, 1981; Amdt. neering station, or by geographic fea-
192–78, 61 FR 28784, June 6, 1996; Amdt. 192–85, ture, the number of girth welds made,
63 FR 37503, July 13, 1998; Amdt. 192–94, 69 FR the number nondestructively tested,
32894, June 14, 2004; Amdt. 192–119, 80 FR 181,
Jan. 5, 2015; Amdt. 192–120, 80 FR 12778, Mar.
the number rejected, and the disposi-
11, 2015] tion of the rejects.
§ 192.243 Nondestructive testing. Amdt. 192–27, 41 FR 34606, Aug. 16, 1976;
Amdt. 192–50, 50 FR 37192, Sept. 12, 1985;
(a) Nondestructive testing of welds
Amdt. 192–78, 61 FR 28784, June 6, 1996; Amdt.
must be performed by any process, 192–120, 80 FR 12779, Mar. 11, 2015]
other than trepanning, that will clear-
ly indicate defects that may affect the § 192.245 Repair or removal of defects.
integrity of the weld.
(a) Each weld that is unacceptable
(b) Nondestructive testing of welds under § 192.241(c) must be removed or
must be performed: repaired. Except for welds on an off-
(1) In accordance with written proce- shore pipeline being installed from a
dures; and pipeline vessel, a weld must be re-
(2) By persons who have been trained moved if it has a crack that is more
and qualified in the established proce- than 8 percent of the weld length.
dures and with the equipment em- (b) Each weld that is repaired must
ployed in testing. have the defect removed down to sound
(c) Procedures must be established metal and the segment to be repaired
for the proper interpretation of each must be preheated if conditions exist
nondestructive test of a weld to ensure which would adversely affect the qual-
the acceptability of the weld under ity of the weld repair. After repair, the
§ 192.241(c). segment of the weld that was repaired
(d) When nondestructive testing is re- must be inspected to ensure its accept-
quired under § 192.241(b), the following ability.
percentages of each day’s field butt (c) Repair of a crack, or of any defect
welds, selected at random by the oper- in a previously repaired area must be

ator, must be nondestructively tested in accordance with written weld repair
over their entire circumference: procedures that have been qualified
464
under § 192.225. Repair procedures must (b) Ductile iron pipe may not be
provide that the minimum mechanical joined by brazing.
properties specified for the welding [35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
procedure used to make the original Amdt. 192–62, 54 FR 5628, Feb. 6, 1989]
weld are met upon completion of the
final weld repair. § 192.279 Copper pipe.
[Amdt. 192–46, 48 FR 48674, Oct. 20, 1983] Copper pipe may not be threaded ex-
cept that copper pipe used for joining
screw fittings or valves may be thread-
Subpart F—Joining of Materials ed if the wall thickness is equivalent to
Other Than by Welding the comparable size of Schedule 40 or
heavier wall pipe listed in Table C1 of
§ 192.271 Scope. ASME/ANSI B16.5.
(a) This subpart prescribes minimum [Amdt. 192–62, 54 FR 5628, Feb. 6, 1989, as
requirements for joining materials in amended at 58 FR 14521, Mar. 18, 1993]
pipelines, other than by welding.
(b) This subpart does not apply to § 192.281 Plastic pipe.
joining during the manufacture of pipe (a) General. A plastic pipe joint that
or pipeline components. is joined by solvent cement, adhesive,
or heat fusion may not be disturbed
§ 192.273 General. until it has properly set. Plastic pipe
(a) The pipeline must be designed and may not be joined by a threaded joint
installed so that each joint will sustain or miter joint.
the longitudinal pullout or thrust (b) Solvent cement joints. Each solvent
forces caused by contraction or expan- cement joint on plastic pipe must com-
sion of the piping or by anticipated ex- ply with the following:
ternal or internal loading. (1) The mating surfaces of the joint
(b) Each joint must be made in ac- must be clean, dry, and free of material
which might be detrimental to the
cordance with written procedures that
joint.
have been proven by test or experience
(2) The solvent cement must conform
to produce strong gastight joints.
to ASTM D2564–12 for PVC (incor-
(c) Each joint must be inspected to porated by reference, see § 192.7).
insure compliance with this subpart. (3) The joint may not be heated or
cooled to accelerate the setting of the
§ 192.275 Cast iron pipe.
cement.
(a) Each caulked bell and spigot joint (c) Heat-fusion joints. Each heat fu-
in cast iron pipe must be sealed with sion joint on a PE pipe or component,
mechanical leak clamps. except for electrofusion joints, must
(b) Each mechanical joint in cast comply with ASTM F2620–12 (incor-
iron pipe must have a gasket made of a porated by reference in § 192.7) and the
resilient material as the sealing me- following:
dium. Each gasket must be suitably (1) A butt heat-fusion joint must be
confined and retained under compres- joined by a device that holds the heater
sion by a separate gland or follower element square to the ends of the pipe
ring. or component, compresses the heated
ends together, and holds the pipe in
(c) Cast iron pipe may not be joined
proper alignment in accordance with
by threaded joints.
the appropriate procedure qualified
(d) Cast iron pipe may not be joined under § 192.283.
by brazing. (2) A socket heat-fusion joint must be
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by joined by a device that heats the mat-
Amdt. 192–62, 54 FR 5628, Feb. 6, 1989] ing surfaces of the pipe or component,
uniformly and simultaneously, to es-
§ 192.277 Ductile iron pipe. tablish the same temperature. The de-
(a) Ductile iron pipe may not be vice used must be the same device
joined by threaded joints. specified in the operator’s joining pro-
cedure for socket fusion.
465
§ 192.283 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(3) An electrofusion joint must be qualified by subjecting specimen joints

made using the equipment and tech- that are made according to the proce-
niques prescribed by the fitting manu- dure to the following tests, as applica-
facturer, or using equipment and tech- ble:
niques shown, by testing joints to the (1) The test requirements of—
requirements of § 192.283(a)(1)(iii), to be (i) In the case of thermoplastic pipe,
equivalent to or better than the re- based on the pipe material, the Sus-
quirements of the fitting manufac-
tained Pressure Test or the Minimum
turer.
Hydrostatic Burst Test per the listed
(4) Heat may not be applied with a
torch or other open flame. specification requirements. Addition-
(d) Adhesive joints. Each adhesive ally, for electrofusion joints, based on
joint on plastic pipe must comply with the pipe material, the Tensile Strength
the following: Test or the Joint Integrity Test per the
(1) The adhesive must conform to listed specification.
ASTM D 2517 (incorporated by ref- (ii) In the case of thermosetting plas-
erence, see § 192.7). tic pipe, paragraph 8.5 (Minimum Hy-
(2) The materials and adhesive must drostatic Burst Pressure) or paragraph
be compatible with each other. 8.9 (Sustained Static Pressure Test) of
(e) Mechanical joints. Each compres- ASTM D2517- 00 (incorporated by ref-
sion type mechanical joint on plastic erence, see § 192.7).
pipe must comply with the following: (iii) In the case of electrofusion fit-
(1) The gasket material in the cou- tings for polyethylene (PE) pipe and
pling must be compatible with the
tubing, paragraph 9.1 (Minimum Hy-
plastic.
draulic Burst Pressure Test), para-
(2) A rigid internal tubular stiffener,
other than a split tubular stiffener, graph 9.2 (Sustained Pressure Test),
must be used in conjunction with the paragraph 9.3 (Tensile Strength Test),
coupling. or paragraph 9.4 (Joint Integrity Tests)
(3) All mechanical fittings must meet of ASTM F1055–98(2006) (incorporated
a listed specification based upon the by reference, see § 192.7).
applicable material. (2) For procedures intended for lat-
(4) All mechanical joints or fittings eral pipe connections, subject a speci-
installed after January 22, 2019, must men joint made from pipe sections
be Category 1 as defined by a listed joined at right angles according to the
specification for the applicable mate- procedure to a force on the lateral pipe
rial, providing a seal plus resistance to until failure occurs in the specimen. If
a force on the pipe joint equal to or failure initiates outside the joint area,
greater than that which will cause no the procedure qualifies for use.
less than 25% elongation of pipe, or the (3) For procedures intended for non-
pipe fails outside the joint area if test- lateral pipe connections, perform test-
ed in accordance with the applicable ing in accordance with a listed speci-
standard.
fication. If the test specimen elongates
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by no more than 25% or failure initiates
Amdt. 192–34, 44 FR 42973, July 23, 1979; outside the joint area, the procedure
Amdt. 192–58, 53 FR 1635, Jan. 21, 1988; Amdt. qualifies for use.
192–61, 53 FR 36793, Sept. 22, 1988; 58 FR 14521,
Mar. 18, 1993; Amdt. 192–78, 61 FR 28784, June (b) Mechanical joints. Before any writ-
6, 1996; Amdt. 192–114, 75 FR 48603, Aug. 11, ten procedure established under
2010; Amdt. 192–119, 80 FR 181, Jan. 5, 2015; § 192.273(b) is used for making mechan-
Amdt. 192–124, 83 FR 58718, Nov. 20, 2018] ical plastic pipe joints, the procedure
must be qualified in accordance with a
§ 192.283 Plastic pipe: Qualifying join- listed specification based upon the pipe
ing procedures.
material.
(a) Heat fusion, solvent cement, and ad- (c) A copy of each written procedure
hesive joints. Before any written proce- being used for joining plastic pipe must
dure established under § 192.273(b) is be available to the persons making and
used for making plastic pipe joints by a

inspecting joints.
heat fusion, solvent cement, or adhe-
sive method, the procedure must be [Amdt. 192–124, 83 FR 58718, Nov. 20, 2018]
466
§ 192.285 Plastic pipe: Qualifying per- venience of the user, the added text is set
sons to make joints. forth as follows:
(a) No person may make a plastic § 192.285 Plastic pipe: Qualifying persons to
pipe joint unless that person has been make joints.
qualified under the applicable joining
procedure by: * * * * *
(1) Appropriate training or experi-
(e) For transmission pipe installed after
ence in the use of the procedure; and
July 1, 2021, records demonstrating each per-
(2) Making a specimen joint from son’s plastic pipe joining qualifications at
pipe sections joined according to the the time of construction in accordance with
procedure that passes the inspection this section must be retained for a minimum
and test set forth in paragraph (b) of of 5 years following construction.
this section.
(b) The specimen joint must be: § 192.287 Plastic pipe: Inspection of
(1) Visually examined during and joints.
after assembly or joining and found to No person may carry out the inspec-
have the same appearance as a joint or tion of joints in plastic pipes required
photographs of a joint that is accept- by §§ 192.273(c) and 192.285(b) unless that
able under the procedure; and person has been qualified by appro-
(2) In the case of a heat fusion, sol- priate training or experience in evalu-
vent cement, or adhesive joint: ating the acceptability of plastic pipe
(i) Tested under any one of the test joints made under the applicable join-
methods listed under § 192.283(a), or for ing procedure.
PE heat fusion joints (except for
electrofusion joints) visually inspected [Amdt. 192–34, 44 FR 42974, July 23, 1979]
and tested in accordance with ASTM
F2620–12 (incorporated by reference, see Subpart G—General Construction
§ 192.7) applicable to the type of joint Requirements for Transmission
and material being tested; Lines and Mains
(ii) Examined by ultrasonic inspec-
tion and found not to contain flaws § 192.301 Scope.
that would cause failure; or This subpart prescribes minimum re-
(iii) Cut into at least 3 longitudinal quirements for constructing trans-
straps, each of which is: mission lines and mains.
(A) Visually examined and found not
to contain voids or discontinuities on § 192.303 Compliance with specifica-
the cut surfaces of the joint area; and tions or standards.
(B) Deformed by bending, torque, or
Each transmission line or main must
impact, and if failure occurs, it must
be constructed in accordance with com-
not initiate in the joint area.
prehensive written specifications or
(c) A person must be re-qualified
standards that are consistent with this
under an applicable procedure once
part.
each calendar year at intervals not ex-
ceeding 15 months, or after any produc- § 192.305 Inspection: General.
tion joint is found unacceptable by
testing under § 192.513. Each transmission line or main must
(d) Each operator shall establish a be inspected to ensure that it is con-
method to determine that each person structed in accordance with this part.
making joints in plastic pipelines in EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 80 FR 12779, Mar.
the operator’s system is qualified in ac- 11, 2015, § 192.305 was revised, effective Oct. 1,
cordance with this section. 2015. At 80 FR 58633, Sept. 30, 2015, this
amendment was delayed indefinitely. For
[Amdt. 192–34A, 45 FR 9935, Feb. 14, 1980, as the convenience of the user, the revised text
amended by Amdt. 192–34B, 46 FR 39, Jan. 2, is set forth as follows:
1981; Amdt. 192–93, 68 FR 53900, Sept. 15, 2003;
Amdt. 192–120, 80 FR 12779, Mar. 11, 2015; § 192.305 Inspection: General.
Amdt. 192–124, 83 FR 58718, Nov. 20, 2018]
Each transmission line and main must be
EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 84 FR 52245, Oct. inspected to ensure that it is constructed in

1, 2019, § 192.285 was amended by adding para- accordance with this subpart. An operator
graph (e), effective July 1, 2020. For the con- must not use operator personnel to perform
467
§ 192.307 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
a required inspection if the operator per- longation of the original contour of the
sonnel performed the construction task re- pipe.
quiring inspection. Nothing in this section (c) Each arc burn on steel pipe to be
prohibits the operator from inspecting con-
struction tasks with operator personnel who
are involved in other construction tasks. hoop stress of 40 percent, or more, of
SMYS must be repaired or removed. If
§ 192.307 Inspection of materials. a repair is made by grinding, the arc
burn must be completely removed and
Each length of pipe and each other
the remaining wall thickness must be
component must be visually inspected
at least equal to either:
at the site of installation to ensure
(1) The minimum wall thickness re-
that it has not sustained any visually
quired by the tolerances in the speci-
determinable damage that could im-
fication to which the pipe was manu-
pair its serviceability.
factured; or
§ 192.309 Repair of steel pipe. (2) The nominal wall thickness re-
quired for the design pressure of the
(a) Each imperfection or damage that pipeline.
impairs the serviceability of a length (d) A gouge, groove, arc burn, or dent
of steel pipe must be repaired or re- may not be repaired by insert patching
moved. If a repair is made by grinding, or by pounding out.
the remaining wall thickness must at (e) Each gouge, groove, arc burn, or
least be equal to either: dent that is removed from a length of
(1) The minimum thickness required pipe must be removed by cutting out
by the tolerances in the specification the damaged portion as a cylinder.
to which the pipe was manufactured; or
(2) The nominal wall thickness re- [35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
quired for the design pressure of the Amdt. 192–1, 35 FR 17660, Nov. 17, 1970; Amdt.
pipeline. 192–85, 63 FR 37503, July 13, 1998; Amdt. 192–
88, 64 FR 69664, Dec. 14, 1999]
(b) Each of the following dents must
be removed from steel pipe to be oper- § 192.311 Repair of plastic pipe.
ated at a pressure that produces a hoop
stress of 20 percent, or more, of SMYS, Each imperfection or damage that
unless the dent is repaired by a method would impair the serviceability of plas-
that reliable engineering tests and tic pipe must be repaired or removed.
analyses show can permanently restore [Amdt. 192–93, 68 FR 53900, Sept. 15, 2003]
the serviceability of the pipe:
(1) A dent that contains a stress con- § 192.313 Bends and elbows.
centrator such as a scratch, gouge, (a) Each field bend in steel pipe,
groove, or arc burn. other than a wrinkle bend made in ac-
(2) A dent that affects the longitu- cordance with § 192.315, must comply
dinal weld or a circumferential weld. with the following:
(3) In pipe to be operated at a pres- (1) A bend must not impair the serv-
sure that produces a hoop stress of 40 iceability of the pipe.
percent or more of SMYS, a dent that (2) Each bend must have a smooth
has a depth of: contour and be free from buckling,
(i) More than 1⁄4 inch (6.4 millimeters) cracks, or any other mechanical dam-
in pipe 123⁄4 inches (324 millimeters) or age.
less in outer diameter; or (3) On pipe containing a longitudinal
(ii) More than 2 percent of the nomi- weld, the longitudinal weld must be as
nal pipe diameter in pipe over 123⁄4 near as practicable to the neutral axis
inches (324 millimeters) in outer di- of the bend unless:
ameter. (i) The bend is made with an internal
For the purpose of this section a bending mandrel; or
‘‘dent’’ is a depression that produces a (ii) The pipe is 12 inches (305 millime-
gross disturbance in the curvature of ters) or less in outside diameter or has
the pipe wall without reducing the a diameter to wall thickness ratio less
pipe-wall thickness. The depth of a than 70.

dent is measured as the gap between (b) Each circumferential weld of steel
the lowest point of the dent and a pro- pipe which is located where the stress
468
during bending causes a permanent de- (b) Each aboveground transmission

formation in the pipe must be non- line or main, not located offshore or in
destructively tested either before or inland navigable water areas, must be
after the bending process. protected from accidental damage by
(c) Wrought-steel welding elbows and vehicular traffic or other similar
transverse segments of these elbows causes, either by being placed at a safe
may not be used for changes in direc- distance from the traffic or by install-
tion on steel pipe that is 2 inches (51 ing barricades.
millimeters) or more in diameter un-
(c) Pipelines, including pipe risers, on
less the arc length, as measured along
the crotch, is at least 1 inch (25 milli- each platform located offshore or in in-
meters). land navigable waters must be pro-
(d) An operator may not install plas- tected from accidental damage by ves-
tic pipe with a bend radius that is less sels.
than the minimum bend radius speci- [Amdt. 192–27, 41 FR 34606, Aug. 16, 1976, as
fied by the manufacturer for the di- amended by Amdt. 192–78, 61 FR 28784, June
ameter of the pipe being installed. 6, 1996]
[Amdt. 192–26, 41 FR 26018, June 24, 1976, as
amended by Amdt. 192–29, 42 FR 42866, Aug. § 192.319 Installation of pipe in a
25, 1977; Amdt. 192–29, 42 FR 60148, Nov. 25, ditch.
1977; Amdt. 192–49, 50 FR 13225, Apr. 3, 1985; (a) When installed in a ditch, each
Amdt. 192–85, 63 FR 37503, July 13, 1998;
Amdt. 192–124, 83 FR 58718, Nov. 20, 2018]
transmission line that is to be operated
at a pressure producing a hoop stress of
§ 192.315 Wrinkle bends in steel pipe. 20 percent or more of SMYS must be
(a) A wrinkle bend may not be made installed so that the pipe fits the ditch
on steel pipe to be operated at a pres- so as to minimize stresses and protect
sure that produces a hoop stress of 30 the pipe coating from damage.
percent, or more, of SMYS. (b) When a ditch for a transmission
(b) Each wrinkle bend on steel pipe line or main is backfilled, it must be
must comply with the following: backfilled in a manner that:
(1) The bend must not have any sharp (1) Provides firm support under the
kinks. pipe; and
(2) When measured along the crotch (2) Prevents damage to the pipe and
of the bend, the wrinkles must be a dis- pipe coating from equipment or from
tance of at least one pipe diameter. the backfill material.
(3) On pipe 16 inches (406 millimeters) (c) All offshore pipe in water at least
or larger in diameter, the bend may
12 feet (3.7 meters) deep but not more
not have a deflection of more than 11⁄2°
than 200 feet (61 meters) deep, as meas-
for each wrinkle.
(4) On pipe containing a longitudinal ured from the mean low tide, except
weld the longitudinal seam must be as pipe in the Gulf of Mexico and its inlets
near as practicable to the neutral axis under 15 feet (4.6 meters) of water,
of the bend. must be installed so that the top of the
pipe is below the natural bottom unless
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by the pipe is supported by stanchions,
Amdt. 192–85, 63 FR 37503, July 13, 1998]
held in place by anchors or heavy con-
§ 192.317 Protection from hazards. crete coating, or protected by an equiv-
alent means. Pipe in the Gulf of Mexico
(a) The operator must take all prac-
and its inlets under 15 feet (4.6 meters)
ticable steps to protect each trans-
mission line or main from washouts, of water must be installed so that the
floods, unstable soil, landslides, or top of the pipe is 36 inches (914 milli-
other hazards that may cause the pipe- meters) below the seabed for normal
line to move or to sustain abnormal excavation or 18 inches (457 millime-
loads. In addition, the operator must ters) for rock excavation.
take all practicable steps to protect [35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
offshore pipelines from damage by mud Amdt. 192–27, 41 FR 34606, Aug. 16, 1976;
slides, water currents, hurricanes, ship Amdt. 192–78, 61 FR 28784, June 6, 1996; Amdt.
anchors, and fishing operations. 192–85, 63 FR 37503, July 13, 1998]
469
§ 192.321 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
§ 192.321 Installation of plastic pipe. (2) Protected from ultraviolet radi-

ation; and
(a) Plastic pipe must be installed
below ground level except as provided (3) Not allowed to exceed the pipe
in paragraphs (g), (h), and (i) of this temperature limits specified in
section. § 192.121.
(b) Plastic pipe that is installed in a (i) Plastic mains may terminate
vault or any other below grade enclo- above ground level provided they com-
sure must be completely encased in ply with the following:
gas-tight metal pipe and fittings that (1) The above-ground level part of the
are adequately protected from corro- plastic main is protected against dete-
sion. rioration and external damage.
(c) Plastic pipe must be installed so (2) The plastic main is not used to
as to minimize shear or tensile support external loads.
stresses. (3) Installations of risers at regulator
(d) Plastic pipe must have a min- stations must meet the design require-
imum wall thickness in accordance ments of § 192.204.
with § 192.121. [35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
(e) Plastic pipe that is not encased Amdt. 192–78, 61 FR 28784, June 6, 1996; Amdt.
must have an electrically conducting 192–85, 63 FR 37503, July 13, 1998; Amdt. 192–
wire or other means of locating the 93, 68 FR 53900, Sept. 15, 2003; Amdt. 192–94, 69
pipe while it is underground. Tracer FR 32895, June 14, 2004; Amdt. 192–124, 83 FR
58718, Nov. 20, 2018]
wire may not be wrapped around the
pipe and contact with the pipe must be § 192.323 Casing.
minimized but is not prohibited. Tracer
wire or other metallic elements in- Each casing used on a transmission
stalled for pipe locating purposes must line or main under a railroad or high-
be resistant to corrosion damage, ei- way must comply with the following:
ther by use of coated copper wire or by (a) The casing must be designed to
other means. withstand the superimposed loads.
(f) Plastic pipe that is being encased (b) If there is a possibility of water
must be inserted into the casing pipe in entering the casing, the ends must be
a manner that will protect the plastic. sealed.
Plastic pipe that is being encased must (c) If the ends of an unvented casing
be protected from damage at all en- are sealed and the sealing is strong
trance and all exit points of the casing. enough to retain the maximum allow-
The leading end of the plastic must be able operating pressure of the pipe, the
closed before insertion. casing must be designed to hold this
(g) Uncased plastic pipe may be tem- pressure at a stress level of not more
porarily installed above ground level than 72 percent of SMYS.
under the following conditions: (d) If vents are installed on a casing,
(1) The operator must be able to dem- the vents must be protected from the
onstrate that the cumulative above- weather to prevent water from enter-
ground exposure of the pipe does not ing the casing.
exceed the manufacturer’s rec-
ommended maximum period of expo- § 192.325 Underground clearance.
sure or 2 years, whichever is less. (a) Each transmission line must be
(2) The pipe either is located where installed with at least 12 inches (305
damage by external forces is unlikely millimeters) of clearance from any
or is otherwise protected against such other underground structure not asso-
damage. ciated with the transmission line. If
(3) The pipe adequately resists expo- this clearance cannot be attained, the
sure to ultraviolet light and high and transmission line must be protected
low temperatures. from damage that might result from
(h) Plastic pipe may be installed on the proximity of the other structure.
bridges provided that it is: (b) Each main must be installed with
(1) Installed with protection from enough clearance from any other un-
mechanical damage, such as installa- derground structure to allow proper
tion in a metallic casing; maintenance and to protect against
470
damage that might result from prox- (e) Except as provided in paragraph
imity to other structures. (c) of this section, all pipe installed in
(c) In addition to meeting the re- a navigable river, stream, or harbor
quirements of paragraph (a) or (b) of must be installed with a minimum
this section, each plastic transmission cover of 48 inches (1,219 millimeters) in
line or main must be installed with suf- soil or 24 inches (610 millimeters) in
ficient clearance, or must be insulated, consolidated rock between the top of
from any source of heat so as to pre- the pipe and the underwater natural
vent the heat from impairing the serv- bottom (as determined by recognized
iceability of the pipe. and generally accepted practices).
(d) Each pipe-type or bottle-type (f) All pipe installed offshore, except
holder must be installed with a min- in the Gulf of Mexico and its inlets,
imum clearance from any other holder under water not more than 200 feet (60
as prescribed in § 192.175(b). meters) deep, as measured from the
mean low tide, must be installed as fol-
lows:
Amdt. 192–85, 63 FR 37503, July 13, 1998]
(1) Except as provided in paragraph
§ 192.327 Cover. (c) of this section, pipe under water
less than 12 feet (3.66 meters) deep,
(a) Except as provided in paragraphs must be installed with a minimum
(c), (e), (f), and (g) of this section, each cover of 36 inches (914 millimeters) in
buried transmission line must be in- soil or 18 inches (457 millimeters) in
stalled with a minimum cover as fol- consolidated rock between the top of
lows: the pipe and the natural bottom.
Consoli- (2) Pipe under water at least 12 feet
Location Normal soil dated rock (3.66 meters) deep must be installed so
Inches (Millimeters).
that the top of the pipe is below the
Class 1 locations ........................... 30 (762) 18 (457) natural bottom, unless the pipe is sup-
Class 2, 3, and 4 locations ........... 36 (914) 24 (610) ported by stanchions, held in place by
Drainage ditches of public roads anchors or heavy concrete coating, or
and railroad crossings ............... 36 (914) 24 (610)
protected by an equivalent means.
(g) All pipelines installed under
(b) Except as provided in paragraphs water in the Gulf of Mexico and its in-
(c) and (d) of this section, each buried lets, as defined in § 192.3, must be in-
main must be installed with at least 24 stalled in accordance with
inches (610 millimeters) of cover. § 192.612(b)(3).
(c) Where an underground structure
prevents the installation of a trans- [35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
mission line or main with the min- Amdt. 192–27, 41 FR 34606, Aug. 16, 1976;
imum cover, the transmission line or Amdt. 192–78, 61 FR 28785, June 6, 1996; Amdt.
192–85, 63 FR 37503, July 13, 1998; Amdt. 192–
main may be installed with less cover 98, 69 FR 48406, Aug. 10, 2004]
if it is provided with additional protec-
tion to withstand anticipated external § 192.328 Additional construction re-
loads. quirements for steel pipe using al-
(d) A main may be installed with less ternative maximum allowable oper-
than 24 inches (610 millimeters) of ating pressure.
cover if the law of the State or munici- For a new or existing pipeline seg-
pality: ment to be eligible for operation at the
(1) Establishes a minimum cover of alternative maximum allowable oper-
less than 24 inches (610 millimeters); ating pressure calculated under
(2) Requires that mains be installed § 192.620, a segment must meet the fol-
in a common trench with other utility lowing additional construction require-
lines; and ments. Records must be maintained,
(3) Provides adequately for preven- for the useful life of the pipeline, dem-
tion of damage to the pipe by external onstrating compliance with these re-
forces. quirements:
471
§ 192.329 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
To address this construction The pipeline segment must meet this additional construction requirement:
issue:
(a) Quality assurance ............... (1) The construction of the pipeline segment must be done under a quality assurance plan ad-
dressing pipe inspection, hauling and stringing, field bending, welding, non-destructive ex-
amination of girth welds, applying and testing field applied coating, lowering of the pipeline
into the ditch, padding and backfilling, and hydrostatic testing.
(2) The quality assurance plan for applying and testing field applied coating to girth welds
must be:
(i) Equivalent to that required under § 192.112(f)(3) for pipe; and
(ii) Performed by an individual with the knowledge, skills, and ability to assure effective coating
application.
(b) Girth welds .......................... (1) All girth welds on a new pipeline segment must be non-destructively examined in accord-
ance with § 192.243(b) and (c).
(c) Depth of cover ..................... (1) Notwithstanding any lesser depth of cover otherwise allowed in § 192.327, there must be at
least 36 inches (914 millimeters) of cover or equivalent means to protect the pipeline from
outside force damage.
(2) In areas where deep tilling or other activities could threaten the pipeline, the top of the
pipeline must be installed at least one foot below the deepest expected penetration of the
soil.
(d) Initial strength testing .......... (1) The pipeline segment must not have experienced failures indicative of systemic material
defects during strength testing, including initial hydrostatic testing. A root cause analysis, in-
cluding metallurgical examination of the failed pipe, must be performed for any failure expe-
rienced to verify that it is not indicative of a systemic concern. The results of this root cause
analysis must be reported to each PHMSA pipeline safety regional office where the pipe is
in service at least 60 days prior to operating at the alternative MAOP. An operator must also
notify a State pipeline safety authority when the pipeline is located in a State where PHMSA
has an interstate agent agreement, or an intrastate pipeline is regulated by that State.
(e) Interference currents ........... (1) For a new pipeline segment, the construction must address the impacts of induced alter-
nating current from parallel electric transmission lines and other known sources of potential
interference with corrosion control.
[72 FR 62176, Oct. 17, 2008] service line valves, and service line
connections to mains.
§ 192.329 Installation of plastic pipe-
lines by trenchless excavation. § 192.353 Customer meters and regu-
Plastic pipelines installed by lators: Location.
trenchless excavation must comply (a) Each meter and service regulator,
with the following: whether inside or outside a building,
(a) Each operator must take prac- must be installed in a readily acces-
ticable steps to provide sufficient sible location and be protected from
clearance for installation and mainte- corrosion and other damage, including,
nance activities from other under- if installed outside a building, vehic-
ground utilities and/or structures at ular damage that may be anticipated.
the time of installation. However, the upstream regulator in a
series may be buried.
(b) For each pipeline section, plastic
(b) Each service regulator installed
pipe and components that are pulled
within a building must be located as
through the ground must use a weak near as practical to the point of service
link, as defined by § 192.3, to ensure the line entrance.
pipeline will not be damaged by any ex- (c) Each meter installed within a
cessive forces during the pulling proc- building must be located in a venti-
ess. lated place and not less than 3 feet (914
[Amdt. 192–124, 83 FR 58719, Nov. 20, 2018] millimeters) from any source of igni-
tion or any source of heat which might
damage the meter.
Subpart H—Customer Meters, (d) Where feasible, the upstream reg-
Service Regulators, and Serv- ulator in a series must be located out-
ice Lines side the building, unless it is located in
a separate metering or regulating
§ 192.351 Scope. building.
This subpart prescribes minimum re- [35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
quirements for installing customer me- Amdt. 192–85, 63 FR 37503, July 13, 1998;
ters, service regulators, service lines, Amdt. 192–93, 68 FR 53900, Sept. 15, 2003]
472
§ 192.355 Customer meters and regu- pressure used to test the meter after
lators: Protection from damage. rebuilding or repairing.
(a) Protection from vacuum or back [35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
pressure. If the customer’s equipment Amdt. 192–1, 35 FR 17660, Nov. 17, 1970; Amdt.
might create either a vacuum or a back 192–85, 63 FR 37503, July 13, 1998]
pressure, a device must be installed to
protect the system. § 192.361 Service lines: Installation.
(b) Service regulator vents and relief (a) Depth. Each buried service line
vents. Service regulator vents and re- must be installed with at least 12
lief vents must terminate outdoors, inches (305 millimeters) of cover in pri-
and the outdoor terminal must— vate property and at least 18 inches
(1) Be rain and insect resistant; (457 millimeters) of cover in streets and
(2) Be located at a place where gas roads. However, where an underground
from the vent can escape freely into structure prevents installation at
the atmosphere and away from any those depths, the service line must be
opening into the building; and able to withstand any anticipated ex-
(3) Be protected from damage caused ternal load.
by submergence in areas where flood- (b) Support and backfill. Each service
ing may occur. line must be properly supported on un-
(c) Pits and vaults. Each pit or vault disturbed or well-compacted soil, and
that houses a customer meter or regu- material used for backfill must be free
lator at a place where vehicular traffic of materials that could damage the
is anticipated, must be able to support pipe or its coating.
that traffic. (c) Grading for drainage. Where con-
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by densate in the gas might cause inter-
Amdt. 192–58, 53 FR 1635, Jan. 21, 1988] ruption in the gas supply to the cus-
tomer, the service line must be graded
§ 192.357 Customer meters and regu- so as to drain into the main or into
lators: Installation. drips at the low points in the service
(a) Each meter and each regulator line.
must be installed so as to minimize an- (d) Protection against piping strain and
ticipated stresses upon the connecting external loading. Each service line must
piping and the meter. be installed so as to minimize antici-
(b) When close all-thread nipples are pated piping strain and external load-
used, the wall thickness remaining ing.
after the threads are cut must meet (e) Installation of service lines into
the minimum wall thickness require- buildings. Each underground service
ments of this part. line installed below grade through the
(c) Connections made of lead or other outer foundation wall of a building
easily damaged material may not be must:
used in the installation of meters or (1) In the case of a metal service line,
regulators. be protected against corrosion;
(d) Each regulator that might release (2) In the case of a plastic service
gas in its operation must be vented to line, be protected from shearing action
the outside atmosphere. and backfill settlement; and
(3) Be sealed at the foundation wall
§ 192.359 Customer meter installations: to prevent leakage into the building.
Operating pressure. (f) Installation of service lines under
(a) A meter may not be used at a buildings. Where an underground serv-
pressure that is more than 67 percent ice line is installed under a building:
of the manufacturer’s shell test pres- (1) It must be encased in a gas tight
sure. conduit;
(b) Each newly installed meter manu- (2) The conduit and the service line
factured after November 12, 1970, must must, if the service line supplies the
have been tested to a minimum of 10 building it underlies, extend into a nor-
p.s.i. (69 kPa) gage. mally usable and accessible part of the
(c) A rebuilt or repaired tinned steel building; and

case meter may not be used at a pres- (3) The space between the conduit
sure that is more than 50 percent of the and the service line must be sealed to
473
§ 192.363 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
prevent gas leakage into the building § 192.367 Service lines: General re-
and, if the conduit is sealed at both quirements for connections to main
ends, a vent line from the annular piping.
space must extend to a point where gas (a) Location. Each service line con-
would not be a hazard, and extend nection to a main must be located at
above grade, terminating in a rain and the top of the main or, if that is not
insect resistant fitting. practical, at the side of the main, un-
(g) Locating underground service lines. less a suitable protective device is in-
Each underground nonmetallic service stalled to minimize the possibility of
line that is not encased must have a dust and moisture being carried from
means of locating the pipe that com- the main into the service line.
plies with § 192.321(e). (b) Compression-type connection to
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by main. Each compression-type service
Amdt. 192–75, 61 FR 18517, Apr. 26, 1996; Amdt. line to main connection must:
192–85, 63 FR 37503, July 13, 1998; Amdt. 192– (1) Be designed and installed to effec-
93, 68 FR 53900, Sept. 15, 2003] tively sustain the longitudinal pull-out
or thrust forces caused by contraction
§ 192.363 Service lines: Valve require- or expansion of the piping, or by antici-
ments.
pated external or internal loading;
(a) Each service line must have a (2) If gaskets are used in connecting
service-line valve that meets the appli- the service line to the main connection
cable requirements of subparts B and D fitting, have gaskets that are compat-
of this part. A valve incorporated in a ible with the kind of gas in the system;
meter bar, that allows the meter to be and
bypassed, may not be used as a service- (3) If used on pipelines comprised of
line valve. plastic, be a Category 1 connection as
(b) A soft seat service line valve may defined by a listed specification for the
not be used if its ability to control the applicable material, providing a seal
flow of gas could be adversely affected plus resistance to a force on the pipe
by exposure to anticipated heat. joint equal to or greater than that
(c) Each service-line valve on a high- which will cause no less than 25% elon-
pressure service line, installed above gation of pipe, or the pipe fails outside
ground or in an area where the blowing the joint area if tested in accordance
of gas would be hazardous, must be de- with the applicable standard.
signed and constructed to minimize the
possibility of the removal of the core of
Amdt. 192–75, 61 FR 18517, Apr. 26, 1996; Amdt.
the valve with other than specialized 192–124, 83 FR 58719, Nov. 20, 2018]
tools.
§ 192.369 Service lines: Connections to
§ 192.365 Service lines: Location of cast iron or ductile iron mains.
valves.
(a) Each service line connected to a
(a) Relation to regulator or meter. Each cast iron or ductile iron main must be
service-line valve must be installed up- connected by a mechanical clamp, by
stream of the regulator or, if there is drilling and tapping the main, or by
no regulator, upstream of the meter. another method meeting the require-
(b) Outside valves. Each service line ments of § 192.273.
must have a shut-off valve in a readily (b) If a threaded tap is being inserted,
accessible location that, if feasible, is the requirements of § 192.151 (b) and (c)
outside of the building. must also be met.
(c) Underground valves. Each under-
ground service-line valve must be lo- § 192.371 Service lines: Steel.
cated in a covered durable curb box or
Each steel service line to be operated
standpipe that allows ready operation
at less than 100 p.s.i. (689 kPa) gage
of the valve and is supported independ-

must be constructed of pipe designed
ently of the service lines.
474
for a minimum of 100 p.s.i. (689 kPa) through the ground must use a weak
gage. link, as defined by § 192.3, to ensure the
pipeline will not be damaged by any ex-
[Amdt. 192–1, 35 FR 17660, Nov. 17, 1970, as
amended by Amdt. 192–85, 63 FR 37503, July cessive forces during the pulling proc-
13, 1998] ess.
[Amdt. 192–124, 83 FR 58719, Nov. 20, 2018]
§ 192.373 Service lines: Cast iron and
ductile iron. § 192.377 Service lines: Copper.
(a) Cast or ductile iron pipe less than Each copper service line installed
6 inches (152 millimeters) in diameter within a building must be protected
may not be installed for service lines. against external damage.
(b) If cast iron pipe or ductile iron
pipe is installed for use as a service § 192.379 New service lines not in use.
line, the part of the service line which Each service line that is not placed
extends through the building wall must in service upon completion of installa-
be of steel pipe. tion must comply with one of the fol-
(c) A cast iron or ductile iron service lowing until the customer is supplied
line may not be installed in unstable with gas:
soil or under a building. (a) The valve that is closed to pre-
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by vent the flow of gas to the customer
Amdt. 192–85, 63 FR 37503, July 13, 1998] must be provided with a locking device
or other means designed to prevent the
§ 192.375 Service lines: Plastic. opening of the valve by persons other
(a) Each plastic service line outside a than those authorized by the operator.
building must be installed below (b) A mechanical device or fitting
ground level, except that— that will prevent the flow of gas must
(1) It may be installed in accordance be installed in the service line or in the
with § 192.321(g); and meter assembly.
(2) It may terminate above ground (c) The customer’s piping must be
level and outside the building, if— physically disconnected from the gas
(i) The above ground level part of the supply and the open pipe ends sealed.
plastic service line is protected against [Amdt. 192–8, 37 FR 20694, Oct. 3, 1972]
deterioration and external damage;
(ii) The plastic service line is not § 192.381 Service lines: Excess flow
used to support external loads; and valve performance standards.
(iii) The riser portion of the service (a) Excess flow valves (EFVs) to be
line meets the design requirements of used on service lines that operate con-
§ 192.204. tinuously throughout the year at a
(b) Each plastic service line inside a pressure not less than 10 p.s.i. (69 kPa)
building must be protected against ex- gage must be manufactured and tested
ternal damage. by the manufacturer according to an
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by industry specification, or the manufac-
Amdt. 192–78, 61 FR 28785, June 6, 1996; Amdt. turer’s written specification, to ensure
192–124, 83 FR 58719, Nov. 20, 2018] that each valve will:
(1) Function properly up to the max-
§ 192.376 Installation of plastic service imum operating pressure at which the
lines by trenchless excavation. valve is rated;
Plastic service lines installed by (2) Function properly at all tempera-
trenchless excavation must comply tures reasonably expected in the oper-
with the following: ating environment of the service line;
(a) Each operator shall take prac- (3) At 10 p.s.i. (69 kPa) gage:
ticable steps to provide sufficient (i) Close at, or not more than 50 per-
clearance for installation and mainte- cent above, the rated closure flow rate
nance activities from other under- specified by the manufacturer; and
ground utilities and structures at the (ii) Upon closure, reduce gas flow—
time of installation. (A) For an excess flow valve designed

(b) For each pipeline section, plastic to allow pressure to equalize across the
pipe and components that are pulled valve, to no more than 5 percent of the
475
§ 192.383 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
manufacturer’s specified closure flow (b) Installation required. An EFV in-

rate, up to a maximum of 20 cubic feet stallation must comply with the per-
per hour (0.57 cubic meters per hour); formance standards in § 192.381. After
or April 14, 2017, each operator must in-
(B) For an excess flow valve designed stall an EFV on any new or replaced
to prevent equalization of pressure service line serving the following types
across the valve, to no more than 0.4 of services before the line is activated:
cubic feet per hour (.01 cubic meters (1) A single service line to one SFR;
per hour); and (2) A branched service line to a SFR
(4) Not close when the pressure is less installed concurrently with the pri-
than the manufacturer’s minimum mary SFR service line (i.e., a single
specified operating pressure and the EFV may be installed to protect both
flow rate is below the manufacturer’s service lines);
minimum specified closure flow rate. (3) A branched service line to a SFR
(b) An excess flow valve must meet installed off a previously installed SFR
the applicable requirements of Sub- service line that does not contain an
parts B and D of this part. EFV;
(c) An operator must mark or other- (4) Multifamily residences with
wise identify the presence of an excess known customer loads not exceeding
flow valve in the service line. 1,000 SCFH per service, at time of serv-
(d) An operator shall locate an excess ice installation based on installed
flow valve as near as practical to the meter capacity, and
fitting connecting the service line to
(5) A single, small commercial cus-
its source of gas supply.
tomer served by a single service line
(e) An operator should not install an
with a known customer load not ex-
excess flow valve on a service line
ceeding 1,000 SCFH, at the time of
where the operator has prior experi-
meter installation, based on installed
ence with contaminants in the gas
meter capacity.
stream, where these contaminants
could be expected to cause the excess (c) Exceptions to excess flow valve in-
flow valve to malfunction or where the stallation requirement. An operator need
excess flow valve would interfere with not install an excess flow valve if one
necessary operation and maintenance or more of the following conditions are
activities on the service, such as blow- present:
ing liquids from the line. (1) The service line does not operate
at a pressure of 10 psig or greater
[Amdt. 192–79, 61 FR 31459, June 20, 1996, as throughout the year;
amended by Amdt. 192–80, 62 FR 2619, Jan. 17,
1997; Amdt. 192–85, 63 FR 37504, July 13, 1998;
(2) The operator has prior experience
Amdt. 192–121, 81 FR 71001, Oct. 14, 2016] with contaminants in the gas stream
that could interfere with the EFV’s op-
§ 192.383 Excess flow valve installa- eration or cause loss of service to a
tion. customer;
(a) Definitions. As used in this sec- (3) An EFV could interfere with nec-
tion: essary operation or maintenance ac-
Branched service line means a gas tivities, such as blowing liquids from
service line that begins at the existing the line; or
service line or is installed concurrently (4) An EFV meeting the performance
with the primary service line but standards in § 192.381 is not commer-
serves a separate residence. cially available to the operator.
Replaced service line means a gas serv- (d) Customer’s right to request an EFV.
ice line where the fitting that connects Existing service line customers who de-
the service line to the main is replaced sire an EFV on service lines not ex-
or the piping connected to this fitting ceeding 1,000 SCFH and who do not
is replaced. qualify for one of the exceptions in
Service line serving single-family resi- paragraph (c) of this section may re-
dence means a gas service line that be- quest an EFV to be installed on their
gins at the fitting that connects the service lines. If an eligible service line
service line to the main and serves customer requests an EFV installation,
only one single-family residence (SFR). an operator must install the EFV at a
476
mutually agreeable date. The opera- measures detailed in the annual report
tor’s rate-setter determines how and to required by § 191.11.
whom the costs of the requested EFVs
[Amdt. 192–121, 81 FR 71001, Oct. 14, 2016; 81
are distributed. FR 72739, Oct. 21, 2016]
(e) Operator notification of customers
concerning EFV installation. Operators § 192.385 Manual service line shut-off
must notify customers of their right to valve installation.
request an EFV in the following man- (a) Definitions. As used in this sec-
ner:
tion:
(1) Except as specified in paragraphs
Manual service line shut-off valve
(c) and (e)(5) of this section, each oper-
means a curb valve or other manually
ator must provide written or electronic
operated valve located near the service
notification to customers of their right
line that is safely accessible to oper-
to request the installation of an EFV.
ator personnel or other personnel au-
Electronic notification can include
thorized by the operator to manually
emails, Web site postings, and e-billing
shut off gas flow to the service line, if
notices.
needed.
(2) The notification must include an
(b) Installation requirement. The oper-
explanation for the service line cus-
ator must install either a manual serv-
tomer of the potential safety benefits
ice line shut-off valve or, if possible,
that may be derived from installing an
based on sound engineering analysis
EFV. The explanation must include in-
and availability, an EFV for any new
formation that an EFV is designed to
or replaced service line with installed
shut off the flow of natural gas auto-
matically if the service line breaks. meter capacity exceeding 1,000 SCFH.
(3) The notification must include a (c) Accessibility and maintenance. Man-
description of EFV installation and re- ual service line shut-off valves for any
placement costs. The notice must alert new or replaced service line must be in-
the customer that the costs for main- stalled in such a way as to allow acces-
taining and replacing an EFV may sibility during emergencies. Manual
later be incurred, and what those costs service shut-off valves installed under
will be to the extent known. this section are subject to regular
(4) The notification must indicate scheduled maintenance, as documented
that if a service line customer requests by the operator and consistent with
installation of an EFV and the load the valve manufacturer’s specification.
does not exceed 1,000 SCFH and the [Amdt. 192–121, 81 FR 71002, Oct. 14, 2016]
conditions of paragraph (c) are not
present, the operator must install an
EFV at a mutually agreeable date.
Subpart I—Requirements for
(5) Operators of master-meter sys-
Corrosion Control
tems and liquefied petroleum gas
(LPG) operators with fewer than 100 SOURCE: Amdt. 192–4, 36 FR 12302, June 30,
customers may continuously post a 1971, unless otherwise noted.
general notification in a prominent lo-
§ 192.451 Scope.
cation frequented by customers.
(f) Operator evidence of customer notifi- (a) This subpart prescribes minimum
cation. An operator must make a copy requirements for the protection of me-
of the notice or notices currently in tallic pipelines from external, internal,
use available during PHMSA inspec- and atmospheric corrosion.
tions or State inspections conducted (b) [Reserved]
under a pipeline safety program cer-
[Amdt. 192–4, 36 FR 12302, June 30, 1971, as
tified or approved by PHMSA under 49 amended by Amdt. 192–27, 41 FR 34606, Aug.
U.S.C. 60105 or 60106. 16, 1976; Amdt. 192–33, 43 FR 39389, Sept. 5,
(g) Reporting. Except for operators of 1978]
master-meter systems and LPG opera-

tors with fewer than 100 customers,
each operator must report the EFV
477
§ 192.452 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
§ 192.452 How does this subpart apply § 192.455 External corrosion control:
to converted pipelines and regu- Buried or submerged pipelines in-
lated onshore gathering lines? stalled after July 31, 1971.
(a) Converted pipelines. Notwith- (a) Except as provided in paragraphs
standing the date the pipeline was in- (b), (c), (f), and (g) of this section, each
stalled or any earlier deadlines for buried or submerged pipeline installed
compliance, each pipeline which quali- after July 31, 1971, must be protected
fies for use under this part in accord- against external corrosion, including
ance with § 192.14 must meet the re- the following:
quirements of this subpart specifically (1) It must have an external protec-
applicable to pipelines installed before tive coating meeting the requirements
August 1, 1971, and all other applicable of § 192.461.
requirements within 1 year after the (2) It must have a cathodic protec-
pipeline is readied for service. How- tion system designed to protect the
ever, the requirements of this subpart pipeline in accordance with this sub-
specifically applicable to pipelines in- part, installed and placed in operation
stalled after July 31, 1971, apply if the within 1 year after completion of con-
pipeline substantially meets those re- struction.
quirements before it is readied for serv- (b) An operator need not comply with
ice or it is a segment which is replaced, paragraph (a) of this section, if the op-
relocated, or substantially altered. erator can demonstrate by tests, inves-
(b) Regulated onshore gathering lines. tigation, or experience in the area of
For any regulated onshore gathering application, including, as a minimum,
line under § 192.9 existing on April 14, soil resistivity measurements and tests
2006, that was not previously subject to for corrosion accelerating bacteria,
this part, and for any onshore gath- that a corrosive environment does not
ering line that becomes a regulated on- exist. However, within 6 months after
shore gathering line under § 192.9 after an installation made pursuant to the
April 14, 2006, because of a change in preceding sentence, the operator shall
class location or increase in dwelling conduct tests, including pipe-to-soil
density: potential measurements with respect
(1) The requirements of this subpart to either a continuous reference elec-
specifically applicable to pipelines in- trode or an electrode using close spac-
stalled before August 1, 1971, apply to ing, not to exceed 20 feet (6 meters),
the gathering line regardless of the and soil resistivity measurements at
date the pipeline was actually in- potential profile peak locations, to
stalled; and adequately evaluate the potential pro-
(2) The requirements of this subpart file along the entire pipeline. If the
specifically applicable to pipelines in- tests made indicate that a corrosive
stalled after July 31, 1971, apply only if condition exists, the pipeline must be
the pipeline substantially meets those cathodically protected in accordance
requirements. with paragraph (a)(2) of this section.
(c) An operator need not comply with
[Amdt. 192–30, 42 FR 60148, Nov. 25, 1977, as paragraph (a) of this section, if the op-
amended by Amdt. 192–102, 71 FR 13303, Mar.
erator can demonstrate by tests, inves-
15, 2006]
tigation, or experience that—
§ 192.453 General. (1) For a copper pipeline, a corrosive
environment does not exist; or
The corrosion control procedures re- (2) For a temporary pipeline with an
quired by § 192.605(b)(2), including those operating period of service not to ex-
for the design, installation, operation, ceed 5 years beyond installation, corro-
and maintenance of cathodic protec- sion during the 5-year period of service
tion systems, must be carried out by, of the pipeline will not be detrimental
or under the direction of, a person to public safety.
qualified in pipeline corrosion control
(d) Notwithstanding the provisions of

methods.
paragraph (b) or (c) of this section, if a
[Amdt. 192–71, 59 FR 6584, Feb. 11, 1994] pipeline is externally coated, it must
478
be cathodically protected in accord- protected in accordance with this sub-

ance with paragraph (a)(2) of this sec- part in areas in which active corrosion
tion. is found:
(e) Aluminum may not be installed in (1) Bare or ineffectively coated trans-
a buried or submerged pipeline if that mission lines.
aluminum is exposed to an environ- (2) Bare or coated pipes at com-
ment with a natural pH in excess of 8, pressor, regulator, and measuring sta-
unless tests or experience indicate its tions.
suitability in the particular environ- (3) Bare or coated distribution lines.
ment involved.
(f) This section does not apply to [Amdt. 192–4, 36 FR 12302, June 30, 1971, as
electrically isolated, metal alloy fit- amended by Amdt. 192–33, 43 FR 39390, Sept.
tings in plastic pipelines, if: 5, 1978; Amdt. 192–93, 68 FR 53900, Sept. 15,
(1) For the size fitting to be used, an 2003]
operator can show by test, investiga-
§ 192.459 External corrosion control:
tion, or experience in the area of appli- Examination of buried pipeline
cation that adequate corrosion control when exposed.
is provided by the alloy composition;
and Whenever an operator has knowledge
(2) The fitting is designed to prevent that any portion of a buried pipeline is
leakage caused by localized corrosion exposed, the exposed portion must be
pitting. examined for evidence of external cor-
(g) Electrically isolated metal alloy rosion if the pipe is bare, or if the coat-
fittings installed after January 22, 2019, ing is deteriorated. If external corro-
that do not meet the requirements of sion requiring remedial action under
paragraph (f) must be cathodically pro- §§ 192.483 through 192.489 is found, the
tected, and must be maintained in ac- operator shall investigate circumferen-
cordance with the operator’s integrity tially and longitudinally beyond the
management plan. exposed portion (by visual examina-
[Amdt. 192–4, 36 FR 12302, June 30, 1971, as tion, indirect method, or both) to de-
amended at Amdt. 192–28, 42 FR 35654, July termine whether additional corrosion
11, 1977; Amdt. 192–39, 47 FR 9844, Mar. 8, 1982; requiring remedial action exists in the
Amdt. 192–78, 61 FR 28785, June 6, 1996; Amdt. vicinity of the exposed portion.
192–85, 63 FR 37504, July 13, 1998; Amdt. 192–
124, 83 FR 58719, Nov. 20, 2018] [Amdt. 192–87, 64 FR 56981, Oct. 22, 1999]
§ 192.457 External corrosion control: § 192.461 External corrosion control:

Buried or submerged pipelines in- Protective coating.
stalled before August 1, 1971.
(a) Each external protective coating,
(a) Except for buried piping at com- whether conductive or insulating, ap-
pressor, regulator, and measuring sta- plied for the purpose of external corro-
tions, each buried or submerged trans- sion control must—
mission line installed before August 1, (1) Be applied on a properly prepared
1971, that has an effective external surface;
coating must be cathodically protected (2) Have sufficient adhesion to the
along the entire area that is effectively metal surface to effectively resist
coated, in accordance with this sub-
underfilm migration of moisture;
part. For the purposes of this subpart,
a pipeline does not have an effective (3) Be sufficiently ductile to resist
external coating if its cathodic protec- cracking;
tion current requirements are substan- (4) Have sufficient strength to resist
tially the same as if it were bare. The damage due to handling and soil stress;
operator shall make tests to determine and
the cathodic protection current re- (5) Have properties compatible with
quirements. any supplemental cathodic protection.
(b) Except for cast iron or ductile (b) Each external protective coating
iron, each of the following buried or which is an electrically insulating type

submerged pipelines installed before must also have low moisture absorp-
August 1, 1971, must be cathodically tion and high electrical resistance.
479
§ 192.463 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
(c) Each external protective coating feet (30 meters), or separately pro-
must be inspected just prior to low- tected service lines, these pipelines
ering the pipe into the ditch and back- may be surveyed on a sampling basis.
filling, and any damage detrimental to At least 10 percent of these protected
effective corrosion control must be re- structures, distributed over the entire
paired. system must be surveyed each calendar
(d) Each external protective coating year, with a different 10 percent
must be protected from damage result- checked each subsequent year, so that
ing from adverse ditch conditions or the entire system is tested in each 10–
damage from supporting blocks. year period.
(e) If coated pipe is installed by bor-
(b) Each cathodic protection rectifier
ing, driving, or other similar method,
or other impressed current power
precautions must be taken to minimize
damage to the coating during installa- source must be inspected six times
tion. each calendar year, but with intervals
not exceeding 21⁄2 months, to insure
§ 192.463 External corrosion control: that it is operating.
Cathodic protection. (c) Each reverse current switch, each
(a) Each cathodic protection system diode, and each interference bond
required by this subpart must provide a whose failure would jeopardize struc-
level of cathodic protection that com- ture protection must be electrically
plies with one or more of the applicable checked for proper performance six
criteria contained in appendix D of this times each calendar year, but with in-
part. If none of these criteria is appli- tervals not exceeding 21⁄2 months. Each
cable, the cathodic protection system other interference bond must be
must provide a level of cathodic pro- checked at least once each calendar
tection at least equal to that provided year, but with intervals not exceeding
by compliance with one or more of 15 months.
these criteria. (d) Each operator shall take prompt
(b) If amphoteric metals are included remedial action to correct any defi-
in a buried or submerged pipeline con- ciencies indicated by the monitoring.
taining a metal of different anodic po-
(e) After the initial evaluation re-
tential—
quired by §§ 192.455(b) and (c) and
(1) The amphoteric metals must be
electrically isolated from the remain- 192.457(b), each operator must, not less
der of the pipeline and cathodically than every 3 years at intervals not ex-
protected; or ceeding 39 months, reevaluate its un-
(2) The entire buried or submerged protected pipelines and cathodically
pipeline must be cathodically pro- protect them in accordance with this
tected at a cathodic potential that subpart in areas in which active corro-
meets the requirements of appendix D sion is found. The operator must deter-
of this part for amphoteric metals. mine the areas of active corrosion by
(c) The amount of cathodic protec- electrical survey. However, on distribu-
tion must be controlled so as not to tion lines and where an electrical sur-
damage the protective coating or the vey is impractical on transmission
pipe. lines, areas of active corrosion may be
determined by other means that in-
§ 192.465 External corrosion control: clude review and analysis of leak re-
Monitoring.
pair and inspection records, corrosion
(a) Each pipeline that is under ca- monitoring records, exposed pipe in-
thodic protection must be tested at spection records, and the pipeline envi-
least once each calendar year, but with ronment.
intervals not exceeding 15 months, to
determine whether the cathodic protec- [Amdt. 192–4, 36 FR 12302, June 30, 1971, as
tion meets the requirements of amended by Amdt. 192–33, 43 FR 39390, Sept.
§ 192.463. However, if tests at those in- 5, 1978; Amdt. 192–35A, 45 FR 23441, Apr. 7,
tervals are impractical for separately 1980; Amdt. 192–85, 63 FR 37504, July 13, 1998;
protected short sections of mains or Amdt. 192–93, 68 FR 53900, Sept. 15, 2003;
Amdt. 192–114, 75 FR 48603, Aug. 11, 2010]
transmission lines, not in excess of 100
480
§ 192.467 External corrosion control: § 192.471 External corrosion control:

Electrical isolation. Test leads.
(a) Each buried or submerged pipe- (a) Each test lead wire must be con-
line must be electrically isolated from nected to the pipeline so as to remain
other underground metallic structures, mechanically secure and electrically
unless the pipeline and the other struc- conductive.
tures are electrically interconnected (b) Each test lead wire must be at-
and cathodically protected as a single tached to the pipeline so as to mini-
unit. mize stress concentration on the pipe.
(b) One or more insulating devices (c) Each bared test lead wire and
must be installed where electrical iso- bared metallic area at point of connec-
tion to the pipeline must be coated
lation of a portion of a pipeline is nec-
with an electrical insulating material
essary to facilitate the application of
compatible with the pipe coating and
corrosion control. the insulation on the wire.
(c) Except for unprotected copper in-
serted in ferrous pipe, each pipeline § 192.473 External corrosion control:
must be electrically isolated from me- Interference currents.
tallic casings that are a part of the un- (a) Each operator whose pipeline sys-
derground system. However, if isola- tem is subjected to stray currents shall
tion is not achieved because it is im- have in effect a continuing program to
practical, other measures must be minimize the detrimental effects of
taken to minimize corrosion of the such currents.
pipeline inside the casing. (b) Each impressed current type ca-
(d) Inspection and electrical tests thodic protection system or galvanic
must be made to assure that electrical anode system must be designed and in-
isolation is adequate. stalled so as to minimize any adverse
(e) An insulating device may not be effects on existing adjacent under-
installed in an area where a combus- ground metallic structures.
tible atmosphere is anticipated unless [Amdt. 192–4, 36 FR 12302, June 30, 1971, as
precautions are taken to prevent arc- amended by Amdt. 192–33, 43 FR 39390, Sept.
ing. 5, 1978]
(f) Where a pipeline is located in
close proximity to electrical trans- § 192.475 Internal corrosion control:
General.
mission tower footings, ground cables
or counterpoise, or in other areas (a) Corrosive gas may not be trans-
where fault currents or unusual risk of ported by pipeline, unless the corrosive
lightning may be anticipated, it must effect of the gas on the pipeline has
be provided with protection against been investigated and steps have been
damage due to fault currents or light- taken to minimize internal corrosion.
ning, and protective measures must (b) Whenever any pipe is removed
from a pipeline for any reason, the in-
also be taken at insulating devices.
ternal surface must be inspected for
[Amdt. 192–4, 36 FR 12302, June 30, 1971, as evidence of corrosion. If internal corro-
amended by Amdt. 192–33, 43 FR 39390, Sept. sion is found—
5, 1978] (1) The adjacent pipe must be inves-
tigated to determine the extent of in-
§ 192.469 External corrosion control: ternal corrosion;
Test stations. (2) Replacement must be made to the
Each pipeline under cathodic protec- extent required by the applicable para-
tion required by this subpart must graphs of §§ 192.485, 192.487, or 192.489;
have sufficient test stations or other and
contact points for electrical measure- (3) Steps must be taken to minimize
ment to determine the adequacy of ca- the internal corrosion.
thodic protection. (c) Gas containing more than 0.25
grain of hydrogen sulfide per 100 cubic

[Amdt. 192–27, 41 FR 34606, Aug. 16, 1976] feet (5.8 milligrams/m.3) at standard
conditions (4 parts per million) may
481
§ 192.476 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
not be stored in pipe-type or bottle- built drawings or other construction

type holders. records.
[Amdt. 192–4, 36 FR 12302, June 30, 1971, as [72 FR 20059, Apr. 23, 2007]
amended by Amdt. 192–33, 43 FR 39390, Sept.
5, 1978; Amdt. 192–78, 61 FR 28785, June 6, 1996; § 192.477 Internal corrosion control:
Amdt. 192–85, 63 FR 37504, July 13, 1998] Monitoring.
§ 192.476 Internal corrosion control: If corrosive gas is being transported,
Design and construction of trans- coupons or other suitable means must
mission line. be used to determine the effectiveness
(a) Design and construction. Except as of the steps taken to minimize internal
provided in paragraph (b) of this sec- corrosion. Each coupon or other means
tion, each new transmission line and of monitoring internal corrosion must
each replacement of line pipe, valve, be checked two times each calendar
fitting, or other line component in a year, but with intervals not exceeding
transmission line must have features 71⁄2 months.
incorporated into its design and con- [Amdt. 192–33, 43 FR 39390, Sept. 5, 1978]
struction to reduce the risk of internal
corrosion. At a minimum, unless it is § 192.479 Atmospheric corrosion con-
impracticable or unnecessary to do so, trol: General.
each new transmission line or replace-
(a) Each operator must clean and
ment of line pipe, valve, fitting, or
coat each pipeline or portion of pipe-
other line component in a transmission
line that is exposed to the atmosphere,
line must:
except pipelines under paragraph (c) of
(1) Be configured to reduce the risk
this section.
that liquids will collect in the line;
(2) Have effective liquid removal fea- (b) Coating material must be suitable
tures whenever the configuration for the prevention of atmospheric cor-
would allow liquids to collect; and rosion.
(3) Allow use of devices for moni- (c) Except portions of pipelines in off-
toring internal corrosion at locations shore splash zones or soil-to-air inter-
with significant potential for internal faces, the operator need not protect
corrosion. from atmospheric corrosion any pipe-
(b) Exceptions to applicability. The de- line for which the operator dem-
sign and construction requirements of onstrates by test, investigation, or ex-
paragraph (a) of this section do not perience appropriate to the environ-
apply to the following: ment of the pipeline that corrosion
(1) Offshore pipeline; and will—
(2) Pipeline installed or line pipe, (1) Only be a light surface oxide; or
valve, fitting or other line component (2) Not affect the safe operation of
replaced before May 23, 2007. the pipeline before the next scheduled
(c) Change to existing transmission line. inspection.
When an operator changes the configu- [Amdt. 192–93, 68 FR 53901, Sept. 15, 2003]
ration of a transmission line, the oper-
ator must evaluate the impact of the § 192.481 Atmospheric corrosion con-
change on internal corrosion risk to trol: Monitoring.
the downstream portion of an existing
onshore transmission line and provide (a) Each operator must inspect each
for removal of liquids and monitoring pipeline or portion of pipeline that is
of internal corrosion as appropriate. exposed to the atmosphere for evidence
(d) Records. An operator must main- of atmospheric corrosion, as follows:
tain records demonstrating compliance If the pipeline is lo- Then the frequency of inspection is:
with this section. Provided the records cated:
show why incorporating design fea-
Onshore ................. At least once every 3 calendar years,
tures addressing paragraph (a)(1), but with intervals not exceeding 39
(a)(2), or (a)(3) of this section is im- months
practicable or unnecessary, an operator Offshore ................. At least once each calendar year, but
may fulfill this requirement through with intervals not exceeding 15
months
written procedures supported by as-
482
(b) During inspections the operator pressure must be reduced commensu-

must give particular attention to pipe rate with the strength of the pipe,
at soil-to-air interfaces, under thermal based on the actual remaining wall
insulation, under disbonded coatings, thickness in the pits.
at pipe supports, in splash zones, at (c) Under paragraphs (a) and (b) of
deck penetrations, and in spans over this section, the strength of pipe based
water. on actual remaining wall thickness
(c) If atmospheric corrosion is found may be determined by the procedure in
during an inspection, the operator ASME/ANSI B31G (incorporated by ref-
must provide protection against the erence, see § 192.7) or the procedure in
corrosion as required by § 192.479. PRCI PR 3–805 (R–STRENG) (incor-
[Amdt. 192–93, 68 FR 53901, Sept. 15, 2003] porated by reference, see § 192.7). Both
procedures apply to corroded regions
§ 192.483 Remedial measures: General. that do not penetrate the pipe wall,
(a) Each segment of metallic pipe subject to the limitations prescribed in
that replaces pipe removed from a bur- the procedures.
ied or submerged pipeline because of [Amdt. 192–4, 36 FR 12302, June 30, 1971, as
external corrosion must have a prop- amended by Amdt. 192–33, 43 FR 39390, Sept.
erly prepared surface and must be pro- 5, 1978; Amdt. 192–78, 61 FR 28785, June 6, 1996;
vided with an external protective coat- Amdt. 192–88, 64 FR 69664, Dec. 14, 1999; Amdt.
ing that meets the requirements of 192–119, 80 FR 181, Jan. 5, 2015]
§ 192.461.
(b) Each segment of metallic pipe § 192.487 Remedial measures: Distribu-
that replaces pipe removed from a bur- tion lines other than cast iron or
ied or submerged pipeline because of ductile iron lines.
external corrosion must be cathodi- (a) General corrosion. Except for cast
cally protected in accordance with this iron or ductile iron pipe, each segment
subpart. of generally corroded distribution line
(c) Except for cast iron or ductile pipe with a remaining wall thickness
iron pipe, each segment of buried or less than that required for the MAOP
submerged pipe that is required to be of the pipeline, or a remaining wall
repaired because of external corrosion thickness less than 30 percent of the
must be cathodically protected in ac- nominal wall thickness, must be re-
cordance with this subpart. placed. However, corroded pipe may be
repaired by a method that reliable en-
§ 192.485 Remedial measures: Trans-
mission lines. gineering tests and analyses show can
permanently restore the serviceability
(a) General corrosion. Each segment of of the pipe. Corrosion pitting so closely
transmission line with general corro- grouped as to affect the overall
sion and with a remaining wall thick- strength of the pipe is considered gen-
ness less than that required for the eral corrosion for the purpose of this
MAOP of the pipeline must be replaced paragraph.
or the operating pressure reduced com-
(b) Localized corrosion pitting. Except
mensurate with the strength of the
for cast iron or ductile iron pipe, each
pipe based on actual remaining wall
segment of distribution line pipe with
thickness. However, corroded pipe may
localized corrosion pitting to a degree
be repaired by a method that reliable
where leakage might result must be re-
engineering tests and analyses show
placed or repaired.
can permanently restore the service-
ability of the pipe. Corrosion pitting so [Amdt. 192–4, 36 FR 12302, June 30, 1971, as
closely grouped as to affect the overall amended by Amdt. 192–88, 64 FR 69665, Dec.
strength of the pipe is considered gen- 14, 1999]
eral corrosion for the purpose of this
paragraph. § 192.489 Remedial measures: Cast
(b) Localized corrosion pitting. Each iron and ductile iron pipelines.
segment of transmission line pipe with (a) General graphitization. Each seg-
localized corrosion pitting to a degree ment of cast iron or ductile iron pipe
where leakage might result must be re- on which general graphitization is
placed or repaired, or the operating found to a degree where a fracture or
483
§ 192.490 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
any leakage might result, must be re- that a corrosive condition does not
placed. exist. These records must be retained
(b) Localized graphitization. Each seg- for at least 5 years, except that records
ment of cast iron or ductile iron pipe related to §§ 192.465 (a) and (e) and
on which localized graphitization is 192.475(b) must be retained for as long
found to a degree where any leakage as the pipeline remains in service.
might result, must be replaced or re-
paired, or sealed by internal sealing [Amdt. 192–78, 61 FR 28785, June 6, 1996]
methods adequate to prevent or arrest
§ 192.493 In-line inspection of pipe-
any leakage. lines.
§ 192.490 Direct assessment. When conducting in-line inspections
Each operator that uses direct as- of pipelines required by this part, an
sessment as defined in § 192.903 on an operator must comply with API STD
onshore transmission line made pri- 1163, ANSI/ASNT ILI–PQ, and NACE
marily of steel or iron to evaluate the SP0102, (incorporated by reference, see
effects of a threat in the first column § 192.7). Assessments may be conducted
must carry out the direct assessment using tethered or remotely controlled
according to the standard listed in the tools, not explicitly discussed in NACE
second column. These standards do not SP0102, provided they comply with
apply to methods associated with di- those sections of NACE SP0102 that are
rect assessment, such as close interval applicable.
surveys, voltage gradient surveys, or [84 FR 52245, Oct. 1, 2019]
examination of exposed pipelines, when
used separately from the direct assess- EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 84 FR 52245, Oct.
ment process. 1, 2019, § 192.493 was added, effective July 20,
2020.
Threat Standard 1
External corrosion ..................................... § 192.925 2 Subpart J—Test Requirements

Internal corrosion in pipelines that trans- § 192.927
port dry gas. § 192.501 Scope.
Stress corrosion cracking ......................... § 192.929
1 For lines not subject to subpart O of this part, the terms This subpart prescribes minimum
‘‘covered segment’’ and ‘‘covered pipeline segment’’ in leak-test and strength-test require-
§§ 192.925, 192.927, and 192.929 refer to the pipeline seg-
ment on which direct assessment is performed. ments for pipelines.
2 In § 192.925(b), the provision regarding detection of coat-
ing damage applies only to pipelines subject to subpart O of
this part. § 192.503 General requirements.
(a) No person may operate a new seg-
[Amdt. 192–101, 70 FR 61575, Oct. 25, 2005] ment of pipeline, or return to service a
§ 192.491 Corrosion control records. segment of pipeline that has been relo-
cated or replaced, until—
(a) Each operator shall maintain (1) It has been tested in accordance
records or maps to show the location of with this subpart and § 192.619 to sub-
cathodically protected piping, cathodic stantiate the maximum allowable oper-
protection facilities, galvanic anodes, ating pressure; and
and neighboring structures bonded to
(2) Each potentially hazardous leak
the cathodic protection system.
has been located and eliminated.
Records or maps showing a stated num-
ber of anodes, installed in a stated (b) The test medium must be liquid,
manner or spacing, need not show spe- air, natural gas, or inert gas that is—
cific distances to each buried anode. (1) Compatible with the material of
(b) Each record or map required by which the pipeline is constructed;
paragraph (a) of this section must be (2) Relatively free of sedimentary
retained for as long as the pipeline re- materials; and
mains in service. (3) Except for natural gas, nonflam-
(c) Each operator shall maintain a mable.
record of each test, survey, or inspec- (c) Except as provided in § 192.505(a),
tion required by this subpart in suffi- if air, natural gas, or inert gas is used
cient detail to demonstrate the ade- as the test medium, the following max-
quacy of corrosion control measures or imum hoop stress limitations apply:
484
Maximum hoop stress allowed as per- pressure on that segment of the pipe-
centage of SMYS line within 300 feet (91 meters) of such
Class location
Natural gas Air or inert gas a building, but in no event may the
test section be less than 600 feet (183
1 ......................... 80 80
2 ......................... 30 75 meters) unless the length of the newly
3 ......................... 30 50 installed or relocated pipe is less than
4 ......................... 30 40 600 feet (183 meters). However, if the
buildings are evacuated while the hoop
(d) Each joint used to tie in a test stress exceeds 50 percent of SMYS, air
segment of pipeline is excepted from or inert gas may be used as the test
the specific test requirements of this medium.
subpart, but each non-welded joint (b) In a Class 1 or Class 2 location,
must be leak tested at not less than its each compressor station regulator sta-
operating pressure. tion, and measuring station, must be
(e) If a component other than pipe is tested to at least Class 3 location test
the only item being replaced or added
requirements.
to a pipeline, a strength test after in-
(c) Except as provided in paragraph
stallation is not required, if the manu-
(e) of this section, the strength test
facturer of the component certifies
must be conducted by maintaining the
that:
pressure at or above the test pressure
(1) The component was tested to at
for at least 8 hours.
least the pressure required for the pipe-
(d) For fabricated units and short
line to which it is being added;
(2) The component was manufactured sections of pipe, for which a post in-
under a quality control system that en- stallation test is impractical, a pre-
sures that each item manufactured is installation strength test must be con-
at least equal in strength to a proto- ducted by maintaining the pressure at
type and that the prototype was tested or above the test pressure for at least
to at least the pressure required for the 4 hours.
pipeline to which it is being added; or [35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
(3) The component carries a pressure Amdt. 192–85, 63 FR 37504, July 13, 1998;
rating established through applicable Amdt. 192–94, 69 FR 32895, June 14, 2004;
ASME/ANSI, Manufacturers Standard- Amdt. 195–94, 69 FR 54592, Sept. 9, 2004; Amdt.
ization Society of the Valve and Fit- 192–120, 80 FR 12779, Mar. 11, 2015]
tings Industry, Inc. (MSS) specifica-
§ 192.506 Transmission lines: Spike hy-
tions, or by unit strength calculations drostatic pressure test.
as described in § 192.143.
(a) Spike test requirements. Whenever a
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by segment of steel transmission pipeline
Amdt. 192–58, 53 FR 1635, Jan. 21, 1988; Amdt.
that is operated at a hoop stress level
192–60, 53 FR 36029, Sept. 16, 1988; Amdt. 192–
60A, 54 FR 5485, Feb. 3, 1989; Amdt. 192–120, 80 of 30 percent or more of SMYS is spike
FR 12779, Mar. 11, 2015] tested under this part, the spike hydro-
static pressure test must be conducted
§ 192.505 Strength test requirements in accordance with this section.
for steel pipeline to operate at a (1) The test must use water as the
hoop stress of 30 percent or more of test medium.
SMYS. (2) The baseline test pressure must be
(a) Except for service lines, each seg- as specified in the applicable para-
ment of a steel pipeline that is to oper- graphs of § 192.619(a)(2) or § 192.620(a)(2),
ate at a hoop stress of 30 percent or whichever applies.
more of SMYS must be strength tested (3) The test must be conducted by
in accordance with this section to sub- maintaining a pressure at or above the
stantiate the proposed maximum al- baseline test pressure for at least 8
lowable operating pressure. In addi- hours as specified in § 192.505.
tion, in a Class 1 or Class 2 location, if (4) After the test pressure stabilizes
there is a building intended for human at the baseline pressure and within the
occupancy within 300 feet (91 meters) of first 2 hours of the 8-hour test interval,
a pipeline, a hydrostatic test must be the hydrostatic pressure must be raised

conducted to a test pressure of at least (spiked) to a minimum of the lesser of
125 percent of maximum operating 1.5 times MAOP or 100% SMYS. This
485
§ 192.507 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
spike hydrostatic pressure test must be covery of all potentially hazardous

held for at least 15 minutes after the leaks in the segment being tested.
spike test pressure stabilizes. (b) If, during the test, the segment is
(b) Other technology or other technical to be stressed to 20 percent or more of
evaluation process. Operators may use SMYS and natural gas, inert gas, or air
other technology or another process is the test medium—
supported by a documented engineering (1) A leak test must be made at a
analysis for establishing a spike hydro- pressure between 100 p.s.i. (689 kPa)
static pressure test or equivalent. Op- gage and the pressure required to
erators must notify PHMSA 90 days in produce a hoop stress of 20 percent of
advance of the assessment or reassess- SMYS; or
ment requirements of this subchapter. (2) The line must be walked to check
The notification must be made in ac- for leaks while the hoop stress is held
cordance with § 192.18 and must include at approximately 20 percent of SMYS.
the following information: (c) The pressure must be maintained
(1) Descriptions of the technology or at or above the test pressure for at
technologies to be used for all tests, ex- least 1 hour.
aminations, and assessments; [35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
(2) Procedures and processes to con- Amdt. 192–58, 53 FR 1635, Jan. 21, 1988; Amdt.
duct tests, examinations, assessments, 192–85, 63 FR 37504, July 13, 1998]
perform evaluations, analyze defects,
and remediate defects discovered; § 192.509 Test requirements for pipe-
(3) Data requirements, including lines to operate below 100 p.s.i. (689
original design, maintenance and oper- kPa) gage.
ating history, anomaly or flaw charac- Except for service lines and plastic
terization; pipelines, each segment of a pipeline
(4) Assessment techniques and ac- that is to be operated below 100 p.s.i.
ceptance criteria; (689 kPa) gage must be leak tested in
(5) Remediation methods for assess- accordance with the following:
ment findings; (a) The test procedure used must en-
(6) Spike hydrostatic pressure test sure discovery of all potentially haz-
monitoring and acceptance procedures, ardous leaks in the segment being test-
if used; ed.
(7) Procedures for remaining crack (b) Each main that is to be operated
growth analysis and pipeline segment at less than 1 p.s.i. (6.9 kPa) gage must
life analysis for the time interval for be tested to at least 10 p.s.i. (69 kPa)
additional assessments, as required; gage and each main to be operated at
and or above 1 p.s.i. (6.9 kPa) gage must be
(8) Evidence of a review of all proce- tested to at least 90 p.s.i. (621 kPa)
dures and assessments by a qualified gage.
technical subject matter expert.
[84 FR 52245, Oct. 1, 2019] Amdt. 192–58, 53 FR 1635, Jan. 21, 1988; Amdt.
192–85, 63 FR 37504, July 13, 1998]
1, 2019, § 192.506 was added, effective July 1,
§ 192.511 Test requirements for service
2020.
lines.
§ 192.507 Test requirements for pipe- (a) Each segment of a service line
lines to operate at a hoop stress less (other than plastic) must be leak test-
than 30 percent of SMYS and at or ed in accordance with this section be-
above 100 p.s.i. (689 kPa) gage. fore being placed in service. If feasible,
Except for service lines and plastic the service line connection to the main
pipelines, each segment of a pipeline must be included in the test; if not fea-
that is to be operated at a hoop stress sible, it must be given a leakage test at
less than 30 percent of SMYS and at or the operating pressure when placed in
above 100 p.s.i. (689 kPa) gage must be service.
tested in accordance with the fol- (b) Each segment of a service line
lowing: (other than plastic) intended to be op-

(a) The pipeline operator must use a erated at a pressure of at least 1 p.s.i.
test procedure that will ensure dis- (6.9 kPa) gage but not more than 40
486
p.s.i. (276 kPa) gage must be given a below the proposed maximum allow-
leak test at a pressure of not less than able operating pressure.
50 p.s.i. (345 kPa) gage. (b) The operator shall insure that the
(c) Each segment of a service line test medium is disposed of in a manner
(other than plastic) intended to be op- that will minimize damage to the envi-
erated at pressures of more than 40 ronment.
p.s.i. (276 kPa) gage must be tested to
at least 90 p.s.i. (621 kPa) gage, except § 192.517 Records.
that each segment of a steel service (a) Each operator shall make, and re-
line stressed to 20 percent or more of tain for the useful life of the pipeline,
SMYS must be tested in accordance a record of each test performed under
with § 192.507 of this subpart. §§ 192.505 and 192.507. The record must
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by contain at least the following informa-
Amdt. 192–74, 61 FR 18517, Apr. 26, 1996; Amdt. tion:
192–85, 63 FR 37504, July 13, 1998] (1) The operator’s name, the name of
the operator’s employee responsible for
§ 192.513 Test requirements for plastic making the test, and the name of any
pipelines. test company used.
(a) Each segment of a plastic pipeline (2) Test medium used.
must be tested in accordance with this (3) Test pressure.
section. (4) Test duration.
(b) The test procedure must insure (5) Pressure recording charts, or
discovery of all potentially hazardous other record of pressure readings.
leaks in the segment being tested. (6) Elevation variations, whenever
(c) The test pressure must be at least significant for the particular test.
150% of the maximum operating pres- (7) Leaks and failures noted and their
sure or 50 psi (345 kPa) gauge, which- disposition.
ever is greater. However, the maximum (b) Each operator must maintain a
test pressure may not be more than 2.5 record of each test required by
times the pressure determined under §§ 192.509, 192.511, and 192.513 for at least
§ 192.121 at a temperature not less than 5 years.
the pipe temperature during the test. [35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by
(d) During the test, the temperature Amdt. 192–93, 68 FR 53901, Sept. 15, 2003]
of thermoplastic material may not be
more than 100 °F (38 °C), or the tem-
1, 2019, § 192.517 was amended by revising
perature at which the material’s long- paragraph (a) introductory text, effective
term hydrostatic strength has been de- July 1, 2020. For the convenience of the user,
termined under the listed specification, the revised text is set forth as follows:
whichever is greater.
§ 192.517 Records: Tests.
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by (a) An operator must make, and retain for
Amdt. 192–77, 61 FR 27793, June 3, 1996; 61 FR the useful life of the pipeline, a record of
45905, Aug. 30, 1996; Amdt. 192–85, 63 FR 37504, each test performed under §§ 192.505, 192.506,
July 13, 1998; Amdt. 192–124, 83 FR 58719, Nov. and 192.507. The record must contain at least
20, 2018] the following information:
§ 192.515 Environmental protection
and safety requirements. * * * * *
(a) In conducting tests under this
subpart, each operator shall insure Subpart K—Uprating
that every reasonable precaution is
taken to protect its employees and the § 192.551 Scope.
general public during the testing. This subpart prescribes minimum re-
Whenever the hoop stress of the seg- quirements for increasing maximum
ment of the pipeline being tested will allowable operating pressures
exceed 50 percent of SMYS, the oper- (uprating) for pipelines.
ator shall take all practicable steps to
keep persons not working on the test- § 192.553 General requirements.

ing operation outside of the testing (a) Pressure increases. Whenever the
area until the pressure is reduced to or requirements of this subpart require
487
§ 192.555 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
that an increase in operating pressure tablished maximum allowable oper-

be made in increments, the pressure ating pressure.
must be increased gradually, at a rate (b) Before increasing operating pres-
that can be controlled, and in accord- sure above the previously established
ance with the following: maximum allowable operating pressure
(1) At the end of each incremental in- the operator shall:
crease, the pressure must be held con- (1) Review the design, operating, and
stant while the entire segment of pipe- maintenance history and previous test-
line that is affected is checked for ing of the segment of pipeline and de-
leaks. termine whether the proposed increase
(2) Each leak detected must be re- is safe and consistent with the require-
paired before a further pressure in- ments of this part; and
crease is made, except that a leak de- (2) Make any repairs, replacements,
termined not to be potentially haz- or alterations in the segment of pipe-
ardous need not be repaired, if it is line that are necessary for safe oper-
monitored during the pressure increase ation at the increased pressure.
and it does not become potentially haz- (c) After complying with paragraph
ardous. (b) of this section, an operator may in-
(b) Records. Each operator who crease the maximum allowable oper-
uprates a segment of pipeline shall re- ating pressure of a segment of pipeline
tain for the life of the segment a record constructed before September 12, 1970,
of each investigation required by this to the highest pressure that is per-
subpart, of all work performed, and of mitted under § 192.619, using as test
each pressure test conducted, in con- pressure the highest pressure to which
nection with the uprating. the segment of pipeline was previously
(c) Written plan. Each operator who subjected (either in a strength test or
uprates a segment of pipeline shall es- in actual operation).
tablish a written procedure that will (d) After complying with paragraph
ensure that each applicable require- (b) of this section, an operator that
ment of this subpart is complied with. does not qualify under paragraph (c) of
(d) Limitation on increase in maximum this section may increase the pre-
allowable operating pressure. Except as viously established maximum allow-
provided in § 192.555(c), a new maximum able operating pressure if at least one
allowable operating pressure estab- of the following requirements is met:
lished under this subpart may not ex- (1) The segment of pipeline is suc-
ceed the maximum that would be al- cessfully tested in accordance with the
lowed under §§ 192.619 and 192.621 for a requirements of this part for a new line
new segment of pipeline constructed of of the same material in the same loca-
the same materials in the same location.
tion. However, when uprating a steel (2) An increased maximum allowable
pipeline, if any variable necessary to operating pressure may be established
determine the design pressure under for a segment of pipeline in a Class 1
the design formula (§ 192.105) is un- location if the line has not previously
known, the MAOP may be increased as been tested, and if:
provided in § 192.619(a)(1). (i) It is impractical to test it in ac-
cordance with the requirements of this
Amdt. 192–78, 61 FR 28785, June 6, 1996; Amdt. part;
192–93, 68 FR 53901, Sept. 15, 2003] (ii) The new maximum operating
pressure does not exceed 80 percent of
§ 192.555 Uprating to a pressure that that allowed for a new line of the same
will produce a hoop stress of 30 per- design in the same location; and
cent or more of SMYS in steel pipe- (iii) The operator determines that
lines. the new maximum allowable operating
(a) Unless the requirements of this pressure is consistent with the condi-
section have been met, no person may tion of the segment of pipeline and the
subject any segment of a steel pipeline design requirements of this part.
to an operating pressure that will (e) Where a segment of pipeline is

produce a hoop stress of 30 percent or uprated in accordance with paragraph
more of SMYS and that is above the es- (c) or (d)(2) of this section, the increase
488
in pressure must be made in incre- (6) If the pressure in mains or service

ments that are equal to: lines, or both, is to be higher than the
(1) 10 percent of the pressure before pressure delivered to the customer, in-
the uprating; or stall a service regulator on each serv-
(2) 25 percent of the total pressure in- ice line and test each regulator to de-
crease, termine that it is functioning. Pressure
whichever produces the fewer number may be increased as necessary to test
of increments. each regulator, after a regulator has
been installed on each pipeline subject
§ 192.557 Uprating: Steel pipelines to a to the increased pressure.
pressure that will produce a hoop
stress less than 30 percent of SMYS: (c) After complying with paragraph
plastic, cast iron, and ductile iron (b) of this section, the increase in max-
pipelines. imum allowable operating pressure
(a) Unless the requirements of this must be made in increments that are
section have been met, no person may equal to 10 p.s.i. (69 kPa) gage or 25 per-
subject: cent of the total pressure increase,
(1) A segment of steel pipeline to an whichever produces the fewer number
operating pressure that will produce a of increments. Whenever the require-
hoop stress less than 30 percent of ments of paragraph (b)(6) of this sec-
SMYS and that is above the previously tion apply, there must be at least two
established maximum allowable oper- approximately equal incremental in-
ating pressure; or creases.
(2) A plastic, cast iron, or ductile (d) If records for cast iron or ductile
iron pipeline segment to an operating iron pipeline facilities are not com-
pressure that is above the previously plete enough to determine stresses pro-
established maximum allowable oper- duced by internal pressure, trench
ating pressure. loading, rolling loads, beam stresses,
(b) Before increasing operating pres- and other bending loads, in evaluating
sure above the previously established the level of safety of the pipeline when
maximum allowable operating pres- operating at the proposed increased
sure, the operator shall: pressure, the following procedures
(1) Review the design, operating, and must be followed:
maintenance history of the segment of (1) In estimating the stresses, if the
pipeline; original laying conditions cannot be
(2) Make a leakage survey (if it has ascertained, the operator shall assume
been more than 1 year since the last that cast iron pipe was supported on
survey) and repair any leaks that are blocks with tamped backfill and that
found, except that a leak determined ductile iron pipe was laid without
not to be potentially hazardous need
blocks with tamped backfill.
not be repaired, if it is monitored dur-
ing the pressure increase and it does (2) Unless the actual maximum cover
not become potentially hazardous; depth is known, the operator shall
(3) Make any repairs, replacements, measure the actual cover in at least
or alterations in the segment of pipe- three places where the cover is most
line that are necessary for safe oper- likely to be greatest and shall use the
ation at the increased pressure; greatest cover measured.
(4) Reinforce or anchor offsets, bends (3) Unless the actual nominal wall
and dead ends in pipe joined by com- thickness is known, the operator shall
pression couplings or bell and spigot determine the wall thickness by cut-
joints to prevent failure of the pipe ting and measuring coupons from at
joint, if the offset, bend, or dead end is least three separate pipe lengths. The
exposed in an excavation; coupons must be cut from pipe lengths
(5) Isolate the segment of pipeline in in areas where the cover depth is most
which the pressure is to be increased likely to be the greatest. The average
from any adjacent segment that will of all measurements taken must be in-
continue to be operated at a lower creased by the allowance indicated in
pressure; and the following table:
489
§ 192.601 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
Allowance inches (millimeters)
Cast iron pipe

Pipe size inches (millimeters)
Ductile iron pipe
Centrifugally cast
Pit cast pipe pipe
3 to 8 (76 to 203) ............................................................................ 0.075 (1.91) 0.065 (1.65) 0.065 (1.65)

10 to 12 (254 to 305) ...................................................................... 0.08 (2.03) 0.07 (1.78) 0.07 (1.78)
14 to 24 (356 to 610) ...................................................................... 0.08 (2.03) 0.08 (2.03) 0.075 (1.91)
30 to 42 (762 to 1067) .................................................................... 0.09 (2.29) 0.09 (2.29) 0.075 (1.91)
48 (1219) ......................................................................................... 0.09 (2.29) 0.09 (2.29) 0.08 (2.03)
54 to 60 (1372 to 1524) .................................................................. 0.09 (2.29) .............................. ..............................
(4) For cast iron pipe, unless the pipe § 192.605 Procedural manual for oper-
manufacturing process is known, the ations, maintenance, and emer-
operator shall assume that the pipe is gencies.
pit cast pipe with a bursting tensile (a) General. Each operator shall pre-
strength of 11,000 p.s.i. (76 MPa) gage pare and follow for each pipeline, a
and a modulus of rupture of 31,000 p.s.i. manual of written procedures for con-
(214 MPa) gage. ducting operations and maintenance
activities and for emergency response.
Amdt. 192–37, 46 FR 10160, Feb. 2, 1981; Amdt. For transmission lines, the manual
192–62, 54 FR 5628, Feb. 6, 1989; Amdt. 195–85, must also include procedures for han-
63 FR 37504, July 13, 1998] dling abnormal operations. This man-
ual must be reviewed and updated by
the operator at intervals not exceeding
Subpart L—Operations 15 months, but at least once each cal-
§ 192.601 Scope. endar year. This manual must be pre-
pared before operations of a pipeline
This subpart prescribes minimum re- system commence. Appropriate parts
quirements for the operation of pipe- of the manual must be kept at loca-
line facilities. tions where operations and mainte-
nance activities are conducted.
§ 192.603 General provisions. (b) Maintenance and normal oper-
(a) No person may operate a segment ations. The manual required by para-
of pipeline unless it is operated in ac- graph (a) of this section must include
cordance with this subpart. procedures for the following, if applica-
(b) Each operator shall keep records ble, to provide safety during mainte-
necessary to administer the procedures nance and operations.
established under § 192.605. (1) Operating, maintaining, and re-
(c) The Associate Administrator or pairing the pipeline in accordance with
each of the requirements of this sub-
the State Agency that has submitted a
part and subpart M of this part.
current certification under the pipeline
(2) Controlling corrosion in accord-
safety laws, (49 U.S.C. 60101 et seq.) with
ance with the operations and mainte-
respect to the pipeline facility gov-
nance requirements of subpart I of this
erned by an operator’s plans and proce-
part.
dures may, after notice and oppor-
(3) Making construction records,
tunity for hearing as provided in 49
maps, and operating history available
CFR 190.206 or the relevant State pro- to appropriate operating personnel.
cedures, require the operator to amend
(4) Gathering of data needed for re-
its plans and procedures as necessary porting incidents under Part 191 of this
to provide a reasonable level of safety. chapter in a timely and effective man-
[35 FR 13257, Aug. 19, 1970, as amended by ner.
Amdt. 192–66, 56 FR 31090, July 9, 1991; Amdt. (5) Starting up and shutting down
192–71, 59 FR 6584, Feb. 11, 1994; Amdt. 192–75, any part of the pipeline in a manner
61 FR 18517, Apr. 26, 1996; Amdt. 192–118, 78 designed to assure operation within the
FR 58915, Sept. 25, 2013] MAOP limits prescribed by this part,
plus the build-up allowed for operation
490
of pressure-limiting and control de- (ii) Increase or decrease in pressure

vices. or flow rate outside normal operating
(6) Maintaining compressor stations, limits;
including provisions for isolating units (iii) Loss of communications;
or sections of pipe and for purging be- (iv) Operation of any safety device;
fore returning to service. and
(7) Starting, operating and shutting (v) Any other foreseeable malfunc-
down gas compressor units. tion of a component, deviation from
(8) Periodically reviewing the work normal operation, or personnel error,
done by operator personnel to deter- which may result in a hazard to per-
mine the effectiveness, and adequacy of sons or property.
the procedures used in normal oper- (2) Checking variations from normal
ation and maintenance and modifying operation after abnormal operation has
the procedures when deficiencies are ended at sufficient critical locations in
found. the system to determine continued in-
(9) Taking adequate precautions in tegrity and safe operation.
excavated trenches to protect per- (3) Notifying responsible operator
sonnel from the hazards of unsafe accu- personnel when notice of an abnormal
mulations of vapor or gas, and making operation is received.
available when needed at the exca- (4) Periodically reviewing the re-
vation, emergency rescue equipment, sponse of operator personnel to deter-
including a breathing apparatus and, a mine the effectiveness of the proce-
rescue harness and line. dures controlling abnormal operation
(10) Systematic and routine testing and taking corrective action where de-
and inspection of pipe-type or bottle- ficiencies are found.
type holders including— (5) The requirements of this para-
(i) Provision for detecting external graph (c) do not apply to natural gas
corrosion before the strength of the distribution operators that are oper-
container has been impaired; ating transmission lines in connection
(ii) Periodic sampling and testing of with their distribution system.
gas in storage to determine the dew (d) Safety-related condition reports.
point of vapors contained in the stored The manual required by paragraph (a)
gas which, if condensed, might cause of this section must include instruc-
internal corrosion or interfere with the tions enabling personnel who perform
safe operation of the storage plant; and operation and maintenance activities
(iii) Periodic inspection and testing to recognize conditions that poten-
of pressure limiting equipment to de- tially may be safety-related conditions
termine that it is in safe operating that are subject to the reporting re-
condition and has adequate capacity. quirements of § 191.23 of this sub-
(11) Responding promptly to a report chapter.
of a gas odor inside or near a building, (e) Surveillance, emergency response,
unless the operator’s emergency proce- and accident investigation. The proce-
dures under § 192.615(a)(3) specifically dures required by §§ 192.613(a), 192.615,
apply to these reports. and 192.617 must be included in the
(12) Implementing the applicable con- manual required by paragraph (a) of
trol room management procedures re- this section.
quired by § 192.631.
[Amdt. 192–71, 59 FR 6584, Feb. 11, 1994, as
(c) Abnormal operation. For trans- amended by Amdt. 192–71A, 60 FR 14381, Mar.
mission lines, the manual required by 17, 1995; Amdt. 192–93, 68 FR 53901, Sept. 15,
paragraph (a) of this section must in- 2003; Amdt. 192–112, 74 FR 63327, Dec. 3, 2009]
clude procedures for the following to
provide safety when operating design § 192.607 Verification of Pipeline Mate-
limits have been exceeded: rial Properties and Attributes: On-
(1) Responding to, investigating, and shore steel transmission pipelines.
correcting the cause of: (a) Applicability. Wherever required

(i) Unintended closure of valves or by this part, operators of onshore steel
shutdowns; transmission pipelines must document
491
§ 192.607 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
and verify material properties and at- (4) If toughness properties are not
tributes in accordance with this sec- documented, the procedures must in-
tion. clude accepted industry methods for
(b) Documentation of material prop- verifying pipe material toughness.
erties and attributes. Records estab- (5) Verification of material prop-
lished under this section documenting erties and attributes for non-line pipe
physical pipeline characteristics and components must comply with para-
attributes, including diameter, wall graph (f) of this section.
thickness, seam type, and grade (e.g., (d) Special requirements for non-
yield strength, ultimate tensile destructive Methods. Procedures devel-
strength, or pressure rating for valves oped in accordance with paragraph (c)
and flanges, etc.), must be maintained of this section for verification of mate-
for the life of the pipeline and be trace- rial properties and attributes using
able, verifiable, and complete. Charpy nondestructive methods must:
v-notch toughness values established (1) Use methods, tools, procedures,
under this section needed to meet the and techniques that have been vali-
requirements of the ECA method at dated by a subject matter expert based
§ 192.624(c)(3) or the fracture mechanics on comparison with destructive test re-
requirements at § 192.712 must be main- sults on material of comparable grade
tained for the life of the pipeline. and vintage;
(c) Verification of material properties (2) Conservatively account for meas-
and attributes. If an operator does not urement inaccuracy and uncertainty
have traceable, verifiable, and com- using reliable engineering tests and
plete records required by paragraph (b) analyses; and
of this section, the operator must de- (3) Use test equipment that has been
velop and implement procedures for properly calibrated for comparable test
conducting nondestructive or destruc- materials prior to usage.
tive tests, examinations, and assess- (e) Sampling multiple segments of pipe.
ments in order to verify the material To verify material properties and at-
properties of aboveground line pipe and tributes for a population of multiple,
components, and of buried line pipe and comparable segments of pipe without
components when excavations occur at traceable, verifiable, and complete
the following opportunities: Anomaly records, an operator may use a sam-
direct examinations, in situ evalua- pling program in accordance with the
tions, repairs, remediations, mainte- following requirements:
nance, and excavations that are associ- (1) The operator must define separate
ated with replacements or relocations populations of similar segments of pipe
of pipeline segments that are removed for each combination of the following
from service. The procedures must also material properties and attributes:
provide for the following: Nominal wall thicknesses, grade, man-
(1) For nondestructive tests, at each ufacturing process, pipe manufacturing
test location, material properties for dates, and construction dates. If the
minimum yield strength and ultimate dates between the manufacture or con-
tensile strength must be determined at struction of the pipeline segments ex-
a minimum of 5 places in at least 2 cir- ceeds 2 years, those segments cannot
cumferential quadrants of the pipe for be considered as the same vintage for
a minimum total of 10 test readings at the purpose of defining a population
each pipe cylinder location. under this section. The total popu-
(2) For destructive tests, at each test lation mileage is the cumulative mile-
location, a set of material properties age of pipeline segments in the popu-
tests for minimum yield strength and lation. The pipeline segments need not
ultimate tensile strength must be con- be continuous.
ducted on each test pipe cylinder re- (2) For each population defined ac-
moved from each location, in accord- cording to paragraph (e)(1) of this sec-
ance with API Specification 5L. tion, the operator must determine ma-
(3) Tests, examinations, and assess- terial properties at all excavations
ments must be appropriate for that expose the pipe associated with
verifying the necessary material prop- anomaly direct examinations, in situ
erties and attributes. evaluations, repairs, remediations, or
492
maintenance, except for pipeline seg- (f) Components. For mainline pipeline
ments exposed during excavation ac- components other than line pipe, an
tivities pursuant to § 192.614, until com- operator must develop and implement
pletion of the lesser of the following: procedures in accordance with para-
(i) One excavation per mile rounded graph (c) of this section for estab-
up to the nearest whole number; or lishing and documenting the ANSI rat-
(ii) 150 excavations if the population ing or pressure rating (in accordance
is more than 150 miles. with ASME/ANSI B16.5 (incorporated
(3) Prior tests conducted for a single by reference, see § 192.7)),
excavation according to the require- (1) Operators are not required to test
ments of paragraph (c) of this section for the chemical and mechanical prop-
may be counted as one sample under erties of components in compressor
the sampling requirements of this stations, meter stations, regulator sta-
paragraph (e). tions, separators, river crossing head-
(4) If the test results identify line ers, mainline valve assemblies, valve
pipe with properties that are not con- operator piping, or cross-connections
sistent with available information or with isolation valves from the main-
existing expectations or assumed prop- line pipeline.
erties used for operations and mainte- (2) Verification of material prop-
nance in the past, the operator must erties is required for non-line pipe com-
establish an expanded sampling pro- ponents, including valves, flanges, fit-
gram. The expanded sampling program tings, fabricated assemblies, and other
must use valid statistical bases de- pressure retaining components and ap-
signed to achieve at least a 95% con- purtenances that are:
fidence level that material properties (i) Larger than 2 inches in nominal
used in the operation and maintenance outside diameter,
of the pipeline are valid. The approach (ii) Material grades of 42,000 psi
must address how the sampling plan (Grade X–42) or greater, or
will be expanded to address findings (iii) Appurtenances of any size that
that reveal material properties that are directly installed on the pipeline
are not consistent with all available in- and cannot be isolated from mainline
formation or existing expectations or pipeline pressures.
assumed material properties used for (3) Procedures for establishing mate-
pipeline operations and maintenance in rial properties of non-line pipe compo-
the past. Operators must notify nents must be based on the docu-
PHMSA in advance of using an ex- mented manufacturing specification
panded sampling approach in accord- for the components. If specifications
ance with § 192.18. are not known, usage of manufactur-
(5) An operator may use an alter- er’s stamped, marked, or tagged mate-
native statistical sampling approach rial pressure ratings and material type
that differs from the requirements may be used to establish pressure rat-
specified in paragraph (e)(2) of this sec- ing. Operators must document the
tion. The alternative sampling pro- method used to determine the pressure
gram must use valid statistical bases rating and the findings of that deter-
designed to achieve at least a 95% con- mination.
fidence level that material properties (g) Uprating. The material properties
used in the operation and maintenance determined from the destructive or
of the pipeline are valid. The approach nondestructive tests required by this
must address how the sampling plan section cannot be used to raise the
will be expanded to address findings grade or specification of the material,
that reveal material properties that unless the original grade or specifica-
are not consistent with all available in- tion is unknown and MAOP is based on
formation or existing expectations or an assumed yield strength of 24,000 psi
assumed material properties used for in accordance with § 192.107(b)(2).
pipeline operations and maintenance in
the past. Operators must notify [84 FR 52245, Oct. 1, 2019]
PHMSA in advance of using an alter- EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 84 FR 52245, Oct.

native sampling approach in accord- 1, 2019, § 192.607 was added, effective July 1,
ance with § 192.18. 2020.
493
§ 192.609 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
§ 192.609 Change in class location: Re- tions. The corresponding hoop stress
quired study. may not exceed 72 percent of the SMYS
Whenever an increase in population of the pipe in Class 2 locations, 60 per-
density indicates a change in class lo- cent of SMYS in Class 3 locations, or 50
cation for a segment of an existing percent of SMYS in Class 4 locations.
steel pipeline operating at hoop stress (ii) The alternative maximum allow-
that is more than 40 percent of SMYS, able operating pressure is 0.8 times the
or indicates that the hoop stress cor- test pressure in Class 2 locations and
responding to the established max- 0.667 times the test pressure in Class 3
imum allowable operating pressure for locations. For pipelines operating at
a segment of existing pipeline is not alternative maximum allowable pres-
commensurate with the present class sure per § 192.620, the corresponding
location, the operator shall imme- hoop stress may not exceed 80 percent
diately make a study to determine: of the SMYS of the pipe in Class 2 loca-
(a) The present class location for the tions and 67 percent of SMYS in Class
segment involved. 3 locations.
(b) The design, construction, and (2) The maximum allowable oper-
testing procedures followed in the ating pressure of the segment involved
original construction, and a compari-
must be reduced so that the cor-
son of these procedures with those re-
responding hoop stress is not more
quired for the present class location by
than that allowed by this part for new
the applicable provisions of this part.
(c) The physical condition of the seg- segments of pipelines in the existing
ment to the extent it can be class location.
ascertained from available records; (3) The segment involved must be
(d) The operating and maintenance tested in accordance with the applica-
history of the segment; ble requirements of subpart J of this
(e) The maximum actual operating part, and its maximum allowable oper-
pressure and the corresponding operating pressure must then be estab-
ating hoop stress, taking pressure gra- lished according to the following cri-
dient into account, for the segment of teria:
pipeline involved; and (i) The maximum allowable operating
(f) The actual area affected by the pressure after the requalification test
population density increase, and phys- is 0.8 times the test pressure for Class
ical barriers or other factors which 2 locations, 0.667 times the test pres-
may limit further expansion of the sure for Class 3 locations, and 0.555
more densely populated area. times the test pressure for Class 4 loca-
tions.
§ 192.611 Change in class location:
Confirmation or revision of max- (ii) The corresponding hoop stress
imum allowable operating pressure. may not exceed 72 percent of the SMYS
of the pipe in Class 2 locations, 60 per-
(a) If the hoop stress corresponding
cent of SMYS in Class 3 locations, or 50
to the established maximum allowable
percent of SMYS in Class 4 locations.
operating pressure of a segment of
pipeline is not commensurate with the (iii) For pipeline operating at an al-
present class location, and the segment ternative maximum allowable oper-
is in satisfactory physical condition, ating pressure per § 192.620, the alter-
the maximum allowable operating native maximum allowable operating
pressure of that segment of pipeline pressure after the requalification test
must be confirmed or revised according is 0.8 times the test pressure for Class
to one of the following requirements: 2 locations and 0.667 times the test
(1) If the segment involved has been pressure for Class 3 locations. The cor-
previously tested in place for a period responding hoop stress may not exceed
of not less than 8 hours: 80 percent of the SMYS of the pipe in
(i) The maximum allowable operating Class 2 locations and 67 percent of
pressure is 0.8 times the test pressure SMYS in Class 3 locations.
in Class 2 locations, 0.667 times the test (b) The maximum allowable oper-
pressure in Class 3 locations, or 0.555 ating pressure confirmed or revised in
times the test pressure in Class 4 loca- accordance with this section, may not
494
exceed the maximum allowable oper- 500 yards (457 meters) long, except that
ating pressure established before the a pipeline segment less than 200 yards
confirmation or revision. (183 meters) long need only be marked
(c) Confirmation or revision of the at the center; and
maximum allowable operating pressure (3) Within 6 months after discovery,
of a segment of pipeline in accordance or not later than November 1 of the fol-
with this section does not preclude the lowing year if the 6 month period is
application of §§ 192.553 and 192.555. later than November 1 of the year of
(d) Confirmation or revision of the discovery, bury the pipeline so that the
maximum allowable operating pressure top of the pipe is 36 inches (914 milli-
that is required as a result of a study meters) below the underwater natural
under § 192.609 must be completed with- bottom (as determined by recognized
in 24 months of the change in class lo- and generally accepted practices) for
cation. Pressure reduction under para- normal excavation or 18 inches (457
graph (a) (1) or (2) of this section with- millimeters) for rock excavation.
in the 24-month period does not pre- (i) An operator may employ engi-
clude establishing a maximum allow- neered alternatives to burial that meet
able operating pressure under para- or exceed the level of protection pro-
graph (a)(3) of this section at a later vided by burial.
date. (ii) If an operator cannot obtain re-
[Amdt. 192–63A, 54 FR 24174, June 6, 1989, as quired state or Federal permits in time
amended by Amdt. 192–78, 61 FR 28785, June to comply with this section, it must
6, 1996; Amdt. 192–94, 69 FR 32895, June 14, notify OPS; specify whether the re-
2004; 73 FR 62177, Oct. 17, 2008] quired permit is State or Federal; and,
justify the delay.
§ 192.612 Underwater inspection and
reburial of pipelines in the Gulf of [Amdt. 192–98, 69 FR 48406, Aug. 10, 2004]
Mexico and its inlets.
§ 192.613 Continuing surveillance.
(a) Each operator shall prepare and
follow a procedure to identify its pipe- (a) Each operator shall have a proce-
lines in the Gulf of Mexico and its in- dure for continuing surveillance of its
lets in waters less than 15 feet (4.6 me- facilities to determine and take appro-
ters) deep as measured from mean low priate action concerning changes in
water that are at risk of being an ex- class location, failures, leakage his-
posed underwater pipeline or a hazard tory, corrosion, substantial changes in
to navigation. The procedures must be cathodic protection requirements, and
in effect August 10, 2005. other unusual operating and mainte-
(b) Each operator shall conduct ap- nance conditions.
propriate periodic underwater inspec- (b) If a segment of pipeline is deter-
tions of its pipelines in the Gulf of mined to be in unsatisfactory condition
Mexico and its inlets in waters less but no immediate hazard exists, the op-
than 15 feet (4.6 meters) deep as meas- erator shall initiate a program to re-
ured from mean low water based on the condition or phase out the segment in-
identified risk. volved, or, if the segment cannot be re-
(c) If an operator discovers that its conditioned or phased out, reduce the
pipeline is an exposed underwater pipe- maximum allowable operating pressure
line or poses a hazard to navigation, in accordance with § 192.619 (a) and (b).
the operator shall—
(1) Promptly, but not later than 24 § 192.614 Damage prevention program.
hours after discovery, notify the Na- (a) Except as provided in paragraphs
tional Response Center, telephone: 1– (d) and (e) of this section, each oper-
800–424–8802, of the location and, if ator of a buried pipeline must carry
available, the geographic coordinates out, in accordance with this section, a
of that pipeline. written program to prevent damage to
(2) Promptly, but not later than 7 that pipeline from excavation activi-
days after discovery, mark the location ties. For the purposes of this section,
of the pipeline in accordance with 33 the term ‘‘excavation activities’’ in-

CFR part 64 at the ends of the pipeline cludes excavation, blasting, boring,
segment and at intervals of not over tunneling, backfilling, the removal of
495
§ 192.615 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–19 Edition)
aboveground structures by either ex- (i) The program’s existence and pur-
plosive or mechanical means, and other pose; and
earthmoving operations. (ii) How to learn the location of un-
(b) An operator may comply with any derground pipelines before excavation
of the requirements of paragraph (c) of activities are begun.
this section through participation in a (3) Provide a means of receiving and
public service program, such as a one- recording notification of planned exca-
call system, but such participation vation activities.
does not relieve the operator of respon- (4) If the operator has buried pipe-
sibility for compliance with this sec- lines in the area of excavation activity,
tion. However, an operat

CFR 2019 Title49 Vol3

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CFR 2019 Title49 Vol3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Title 49

Revised as of October 1, 2019

Containing a codification of documents

Published by the Office of the Federal Register

Legal Status and Use of Seals and Logos

Use of ISBN Prefix

U.S. GOVERNMENT PUBLISHING OFFICE

U.S. Superintendent of Documents • Washington, DC 20402–0001

SUBTITLE B—OTHER REGULATIONS RELATING TO TRANSPORTATION

Chapter I—Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administra-

Table of CFR Titles and Chapters ....................................................... 703

Alphabetical List of Agencies Appearing in the CFR ......................... 723

List of CFR Sections Affected ............................................................. 733

To cite the regulations in

Title 49—TRANSPORTATION is composed of nine volumes. The parts in these vol-

EDITORIAL NOTE: Other regulations issued by the Department of Transportation appear in

SUBTITLE B—OTHER REGULATIONS RELATING TO TRANSPORTATION

CHAPTER I—Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Ad-

SUBCHAPTER C—HAZARDOUS MATERIALS REGULATIONS (CONTINUED)

PART 178—SPECIFICATIONS FOR 178.36 Specification 3A and 3AX seamless

Subpart C—Specifications for Cylinders

178.337–14 Gauging devices. 178.348–1 General requirements.

Standards tion code.

(ii) Retain copies of each written no- or a UN standard must be marked on a

§ 178.3 Marking of packagings. Nations symbol and other specification

each container must be marked to tured by thermoplastic processes that

other than production residues or containers constituting a lot shall be

(2) Each such 25,000 containers or shall be pressure tested to destruction

furnish the completed test reports re- 1234

ings prescribed in this paragraph (f)(1)

P = hydrostatic test pressure-psig. calculation must be made by using the

(ii) In using the ‘‘extension under Except as provided in paragraph (n) of

test pressure; the sum of two times the d = inside diameter-inches;

TABLE 2—CHECK ANALYSIS TOLERANCES

Carbon ...................................................... To 0.15 incl .................................................................... 0.02 0.03

Sulphur ..................................................... All ranges ....................................................................... .................... .01

TABLE 2—CHECK ANALYSIS TOLERANCES—Continued

Chromium ................................................. To 0.90 incl .................................................................... .03 .03

(c) Identification of material. Material (f) Wall thickness. The thickness of

with proper welding procedure.

static test as follows: ment as the finished cylinder.

responding strain. is not authorized. Spun cylinders re-

each end of the reduced section. (2) An elongation of at least 20 per-

umetric expansion at test pressure. permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the

must be subjected to a flattening test is not authorized. Spun cylinders re-

TABLE 2—CHECK ANALYSIS TOLERANCES— grinding to produce proper surface fin-

required by American Standard Com- steel, manufactured by the same proc-

subjected to a burst test. must be the stress corresponding to a

based on an elastic modulus of obtained in each retest may not exceed

TABLE 2—MECHANICAL PROPERTY LIMITS

6061–T6 .................................................................................. 38,000 35,000 214

must permit reading to an accuracy of wall thickness is authorized to qualify

performed or verified as having been hemispheres) or circumferentially

304 (percent) 321 (percent) 347 (percent)

Carbon (max) ....................................................... 0.08 0.08 0.08

TABLE 2—CHECK ANALYSIS TOLERANCES

Carbon ..................................................... To 0.15 incl ...................................................................... 0.01 0.01

(i) Process treatment. Each container must be performed as follows:

on a press with welded seam at right (c) Identification of material. Material

comply with the following: performed on one cylinder taken at

(i) The yield strength must be deter- cylinder:

method except that plates and billets welding or brazing of neckrings,

bottoms of cylinders is authorized. zone must extend a distance of 6 times